Power Product Catalogue Complete May 2021

2019 – Canadian Edition
MAY 2021
Power Product Catalogue

Power Product
Catalogue
Siemens Canada Limited All product designations may be trademarks or
Low Voltage & Products product names of Siemens AG or supplier com-
1577 North Service Road East panies whose use by third parties for their own
Oakville, ON L6H 0H6 purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Customer Interaction Centre
Subject to change without prior notice.
(888) 303-3353
cic.ca@siemens.com
Low voltage electrical distribution
Printed in Canada.
©2019 Siemens Canada Limited products
Order No.: SI-LP-1643
2019
Canadian
siemens.ca/powercat Edition siemens.ca/powercat
Reliable Products From
The Technology Leader
Technology Enabling Reliability.
When it comes to ready availability, easy 1 Loadcentres
installation, and fewer callbacks, you need
2 Meter Centres
a manufacturer you can trust. Our products
and systems are engineered to take on 3 Safety Switches
the most demanding conditions, always
available day after day. 4 Disconnect Switches
5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

RESIDENTIAL
6 WL Power Circuit Breakers
7 Dry Type Transformers
8 Power Monitoring
9 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs)
10 Panelboards
11 Switchboards
COMMERCIAL
12 Switchgear
13 Busway Systems
14 Motor Control Centres
15 Low Voltage Motor Starters
16 Electric Vehicle Charging

Products
INDUSTRIAL 17 Electrostrip
18 Technical
Detailed Table of Contents

located at beginning of each section
Your single point of contact for general inquiries, customer service, sales office information, and product inquiries:
Siemens Customer Interaction Centre: (888) 303-3353 | email: cic.ca@siemens.com | siemens.ca/powercat
REVISED
03/2021
POWER PRODUCT Loadcentres
Contents
1
Application and Description 1-2
LOADCENTRES
Product Offering and Specification Guide 1-3
Product Features and Customer Benefits 1-4
Catalogue Numbering System 1-5
EQL, SNC, & SEQ Single phase Loadcentres
EQL Loadcentres with main lug only 1-6
SNC Loadcentres with main lug only 1-6
SEQ Service Entrance Loadcentres 1-6
EQL Loadcentres Type 3R 1-7
SEQ Service Entrance Loadcentres Type 3R 1-7
SEQ Dual Listed/cULus Loadcentres 1-8
EQ3 Single phase & EQ4 Three phase Loadcentres 1-9
SPA panel, Mini panels and Enclosed Breaker 1-10
EQG Generator Panels
EQG 3 Pole 1-11
EQG 2 Pole 1-11
Plug in Branch Breakers Type Q
Full Module (1" per pole) 1-12
Half Module (1/2" per pole): Twin and Quad Type 1-12
Replacement Main Breakers 1-13
Arc Fault Interrupters 1-14
Ground Fault Interrupters 1-14
Bolt-On Branch Breakers Type BQ
Full Module (1" per pole) 1-15
Blue Line Breakers 1-15
Accessories and Replacement Parts 1-16 – 1-18
Surge Protection
Circuit Breaker and Surge Protective Device (SPD) 1-19
Power Service Entrance Surge Protection 1-20
Telephone Service Entrance Surge Protection 1-21
Coaxial Service Entrance Surge Protection 1-21
Knockout Data for Loadcentres 1-22 - 1-23
Line Diagrams/Dimension Drawings for Breakers 1-24
Lug Data 1-24
Notes 1-25
Loadcentres
Applications and Descriptions Description
No. Applications Products
1
1 M
iscellaneous Applications
LOADCENTRES
anel
Standard Main Lugs Only P EQL & SNC Loadcentre-Indoor & Outdoor Type
2 S
ingle Family SEQ Loadcentre – Indoor & Outdoor Type
3 uplex Units, Small Apartment Building,

D a) SEQ Service Entrance Equipment – Indoor & Outdoor Type
Small Professional and Commercial Building b) EQL Main Lugs Loadcentre – Indoor & Outdoor Type
(Two to Six Units Maximum) c) SNC Main Lugs Loadcentre - Indoor type
4 Office Building/Condo/Apartment Building a) Switchboards

(3Ø Application) b) Busways
c) Modular Metering
d) EQ4 Loadcentres Main Lug only or Main Breaker
5 mall Industrial/Commercial Building

S a) Switchboards
(3Ø Application) b) Busways
c) 3Ø Modular Metering
d) E
Q4 Loadcentres Main Lug
Only or Main Circuit Breaker
A loadcentre is a metal enclosed distribution

panel containing circuit breakers which distribute,
protect and control lighting and power circuits
in residential and light commercial applications,
including single-family homes, townhouses,
apartment buildings, and small office buildings.
All Siemens loadcentres can be classified into

two types: main lug or main circuit breaker.
Each Siemens loadcentre consists of three basic
components: the enclosure, the interior, and
the trim. The enclosure is used to contain the
circuit breakers which mount on the interior. The
trim seals the enclosure, offering protection to
Speeds Your Installation
personnel from the environment.
A complete line of breakers and accessories which

With Every Turn!
give Siemens loadcentres flexibility. For example, Included into all Loadcentres and Q Breakers
Ground Fault Interrupters protect personnel, an
important consideration with the stress placed
on personnel protection by the CEC. Handle ties,
handle blocking devices, padlocking devices and
filler plates are also available. Neutral lug kits in a
variety of wire range sizes.
1-2 Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue

Loadcentres
Product Offering and Specification Guide Description
Application Circuit breaker
Plug- in The combination flush/surface trim is flat
1
Main lug loadcentre Interrupting rating of 10kA and plumb in appearance. The Siemens
b 1 Phase 3 W 120/240V, 60 to 200A, b Full module Type 3R loadcentre features industry
LOADCENTRES
2/4 - 40/80 circuits 1 Pole 15-70 Amp exclusive gasketed door for improved
b 3 Phase 4W 120/208V, 100 to 225A, 2 Pole 15-200 Amp weatherproof protection. The enclosures
12 - 42 circuits 3 Pole 15-100 Amp and interiors provide 41/4” (108 mm) side
b Outdoor Type 3R, 1 Phase 3 W, b Half module wiring gutters for branch circuits. Main
120/240V, 100 to 200A, 8/16 - Twin: two single-pole, 15-15 to bus bars are formed of cold rolled, one
40/80 circuits 40-15 Amp piece tin plated (acid bath tin, zincate
Main breaker loadcentre Quad: two single-pole and one 2-pole process) aluminum. Copper bus is also
b 1 Phase 3 W 120/240V, 60 to 200A, inner breaker, 15-15 to 15-40 Amp available. Main lugs, neutral assemblies,
12/24 - 60/120 circuits Bolt- on and ground bars are suitable for copper
b 3 Phase 4W 120/208V, 100 to 200A, Interrupting rating of 10kA & 22kA or aluminum conductors and comply with
24 - 42 circuits b Full module the requirements of CSA. The extended
b Outdoor Type 3R, 1 Phase 3 W 1 Pole 15-70 Amp capacity fully distributed neutrals give
120/240V, 100 to 200A, 2 Pole 15-125 Amp a neutral termination at every breaker
16/32 - 40/80 circuits 3 Pole 15-100 Amp position, and is mounted, along with bus
b Dual certified loadcentre 1 Phase 3 W Ground fault circuit interrupter bars, on a base part made of engineered
120/240V, 100 to 200A, 38 circuits b 1 and 2 Pole, 15- 60A, 5 and resin. CSA listed for 60/75ϒC wiring
Generator panel 30mA sensitivity applications; ratings are as follows:
b Generator panel 3 Pole 1 Phase 3 W Arc fault circuit interrupter loadcentre main terminals 60/75ϒC cu/al
120/240V, 30 to 100A, Interrupting rating of 10kA & 22kA wire; branch breaker terminals–60/75ϒC
6/12- 34/68 circuits b 1 Pole, 15 and 20 Amp cu/al wire. All loadcentres are CSA listed
b Generator panel 2 Pole 1 Phase 3 W Surge arrester breakers under file #13069.
120/240V, 30 to 100A, b Two single pole breakers and one
8/16 - 36/72 circuits surge arrester, 15 and 20 Amp Individual circuit breakers are thermal
SPA panel Surge protection device (SPD) magnetic, quick-make quick-break, trip
b Type 3R, 1Phase 3 W 120/240V, 125A, b Power service entrance surge protection free, plug-in construction. All two and
4/8 circuits b Telephone service entrance three pole breakers are common trip. All
Mini panel/ Enclosed breaker, surge protection circuit breakers are CSA listed under file
b Indoor, 1Phase 3 W 120/240V, 60 & b Coaxial service entrance #14374.
125A, 2 circuits surge protection
b Outdoor Type 3R, 1 Phase 3 W
120/240V, 60 & 125A, 3 & Specification Guide - *Series rating labels on all loadcentres.
2/4 - 4/8 circuits Loadcentres
Loadcentre enclosures and trims are
formed of cold rolled, code gauge steel.
All devices are finished with ANSI 61
grey paint (electro deposition painting
process).
Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 1-3

Loadcentres
Product Features and Customer Benefits
1
LOADCENTRES
Made in Canada, for Canada: Indoor loadcentres (type 1) can

Faster delivery and better service. be mounted for either top or bot-
Buying Canadian supports tom feed: Meeting job site require-
Canadian manufacturing ments and reducing cable waste
Straight in wiring design:

Helps reduce the need to bend Suitable for up to 22 kA short
cables and wires circuit current rating: Provides
increased high fault current
protection
Combination slot/Robertson™
neutral and ground screws: Combination flush/surface trim
Allowing for installation flexibility, in three colours: Meets any
enabling simple, one-tool installa - application need
tion and speed wiring
Both aluminum and copper bus Patented INSTA-WIRE™ neutrals

bars: Meets any specification and and ground bars: Allows for
job site requirement faster installation as screws
are backed out, ready for wire
insertion
Extended capacity fully

distributed neutrals: Easily Factory installed ground bars:
accessible, reduces installation Reduces installation time and
time and simplifies wiring cost, no need to order additional
ground bar kits
A flexible extruded plastic base

Gasketed hinge pan: Makes breaker installation
door with outdoor and removal quick and easy
loadcentre: Provides
easy installation and
improved weatherproof
protection
Concentric knockouts:
Makes wiring easy
Features and Benefits

Siemens provides the broadest product portfolio related to single and multifamily
applications. Flexibility, innovation and quality are the hallmarks of Siemens products for
single and multi-family applications providing the customer with unmatched value. One
example is our quick-make quick-break circuit breakers which give homeowners peace of
mind and fast acting circuit protection. Our whole house surge protection solutions, arc fault
and ground fault circuit interrupters provide additional protection against the risks of
electrocution, fire hazard and property damage. With the comprehensive selection of
options and accessories, Siemens loadcentres and breakers are the smart choice for the
conscientious customer.

Loadcentres
Catalogue Numbering System
Catalogue Numbering Systema
1
SEQ 24 100 SM D - - W
LOADCENTRES
       
Panel Type
EQL = 1-Phase main lug
SEQ = 1-Phase main breaker
SNC = Main Lugs Loadcentre - Indoor type
EQ4 = 3-Phase, main lug and main breaker
EQG = Generator panel
*Note: For EQG 2 Pole Generator panel, the NSN (none switched neutral)
is added to the part number. Ex: EQG860NSND
Number of Circuits
Maximum number of circuits
Main Ampere Rating
Ex: 100 = 100 Amp
*Note: It comes with the type of main breaker for EQ4 3-Phase
Ex: BQ100 = 100 Amp
Main breaker mounting position for SEQ loadcentres only

Blank = Standard top mounted
SM = Side mounted
Door
Blank = Without door
D = With door
* For SEQ loadcentres only. The doors for EQL,EQ4, EQG and SEQ Type 3R loadcentres are factory installed.
Type of Bus Bar

Blank = Aluminum
C = Copper
Enclosure Type
Blank= Type 1
R= Type 3R
Colour
Blank = Grey
W = White
*Only available for EQL and SEQ loadcentres.

EQL white and SEQ white are only available with door.
EQ442225 EQG860NSND SNC2448L1125W SEQ24100SMDW SEQ40200DW
a The Catalogue numbering system applies only to EQL,

EQL Type 3R, SEQ, SEQ Type 3R, EQ4 and EQG loadcentres.

Loadcentres
EQL & SEQ Single Phase Main Lug & Main Breaker Loadcentres Selection
Selection and Ordering Data
1
EQL Loadcentres with main lugs only 1 phase 3 wire 240 V AC max.
Number Dimensions - Inches (mm) Door Kit
LOADCENTRES
Skid Main Lug Mounting Factory

of Catalogue Number Catalogue
Qty. Amps H W D Data Trim Mod.
Circuits Number
7 5 23/4
2/4 EQL260S 330 60 3 surface N/A N/A
(178) (127) (70)
125/8 65/8 31/2
4/8 EQL4100 90 100 1 comb. N/A N/A
(322) (168) (90)
147/8 12 33/4
8/16 EQL8100D* 72 100 4-2/0 comb. DK8-A N/A
(378) (305) (95)
167/8 12 33/4
12/24 EQL12125Dc 45 125 4-2/0 comb. DK12-A a
(429) (305) (95)
187/8 12 33/4
16/32 EQL16125Dc 45 125 4-2/0 comb. DK16-A 1
(479) (305) (95)
EQL24125D 241/8 131/32 33/4
24/48 EQL24125Dc 36 125 4-2/0 comb. DK24-A a
(613) (331) (95)
33 141/4 4 6-250
32/64 EQL32200Dc 27 200 comb. DKL32-2A a
(838) (362) (102) MCM
33 141/4 4 6-250
40/80 EQL40200Dc 27 200 comb. DKL40-2A a
(838) (362) (102) MCM
Note: EQL8100D through EQL40200Dc are stocked complete with doors *Neutral bar only on one side of panel.
12/24 SNC1224L1125c 28 125 18 141/4 37/8 2/0 comb. RPCT1224L1125 N/A

300
30/48 SNC3048L1200c 21 200 30 141/4 37/8 comb. RPCT3048L1200 N/A
kcmil
300
40/60 SNC4060L1200c 21 200 36 141/4 37/8 comb. RPCT4060L1200 N/A
kcmil
Service Entrance Loadcentres with Factory installed main breaker 1 phase 3 wire 240 V AC max.
175/8 131/8 33/4
12/24 SEQ12060SM 54 60 6-2/0 comb. DK1216SM-1 a
(448) (333) (95)
195/8 131/8 33/4
16/32 SEQ16060SMb 36 60 6-2/0 comb. DK1216SM-1 a
(498) (333) (95)
241/8 131/8 33/4
24/48 SEQ24060SMb 36 60 6-2/0 comb. DK24SM-1 a
(613) (333) (95)
12/24 SEQ12100SM 54 171/2 131/8
100 33/4 (95) 4-2/0 comb. DK1216SM-1 a
16/32 SEQ16100SM 36 (444) (333)
24/48 SEQ24100SM b 100
241/8 131/8
24/48 SEQ24100SMKn 36 33/4 (95) 4-2/0 comb. DK24SM-1 a
(613) (333)
24/48 SEQ24125SMb 125
SEQ40200 SEQ24150b 150 27 141/4 4 6-250

24/48 27 comb. DKS24-2A a
SEQ24200 200 (686) (362) (102) MCM
SEQ32100SM 100 271/8 131/8
32/64 27 33/4 (95) 4-2/0 comb. DK32SM-1 a
SEQ32125SM 125 (689) (333)
SEQ32150 150 33 141/4 4 6-250
32/64 27 comb. DKS32-2A a
SEQ32200 200 (838) (362) (102) MCM
SEQ40100 100 36 141/4 4 6-250
40/80 27 comb. DKS40-1A a
SEQ40125 125 (914) (362) (102) MCM
SEQ40150 150 36 141/4 4 6-250
40/80 27 comb. DKS40-2A a
SEQ40200b 200 (914) (362) (102) MCM
46 141/4 4 6-250
60/120 SEQ60200 18 200 comb. N/A N/A
(1168) (362) (102) MCM
n
Standard SEQ24100SMK with additional knockouts to bottom plate
Note: Comb= Combination Flush/Surface mounted Typical circuit rating (ie. 24/48) indicates the circuit
Certified for use with any combination of full capacity of the loadcentre is 24 full module (1”)
or half module plug-in circuit breakers. breaker of 48 half-module (1/2”) breakers.
Certiied for mounting vertical, horizontal or
inverted and for use with CU/AL conductors a Factory modification, see next page. c EQL and SNC available in White paint colour. Add "W"
including compact stranded. All neutral bar b For copper bus add suffix C to existing to end of part number.
connectors are No. 14 - No.4. part number. 4 weeks delivery required.

Loadcentres
EQL, SNC, & SEQ Single Phase Main Lug & Main Breaker Loadcentres Selection
1
Factory Modificationsa
Description Delivery
LOADCENTRES
Type Catalogue Number Example
EQL White door and trim add suffix...W EQL24125DW
SNC White door and trim add suffix...W SNC1224L1112SW
Grey door installed add suffix...D SEQ24125SMD 2 weeks

SEQ
White door and trim add suffix...DW SEQ24125SMDW
Door Kit White Door kit add suffix...W DK24SM-1W
Note: All door kits are available in Grey and White colours.
EQL Copper Bus add suffix...CR EQL24125DCR 4 weeks

SEQ24125SM
Weatherproof Loadcentre Main Lug Only, 1 phase 3 wire 120/240V AC max.
Hubs
Number Dimensions - Inches (mm)
Catalogue Skid Main Lug Mounting Factory (sold seperately)
of
Number Qty. Amps Data Trim Mod. Conduit Catalogue
Circuits H W D
size (') Number
197/8 133/4 surface 3/4 ECHS075
12/24 EQL12125DCR 35 125 5 (127) 6-2/0 N/A
(505) (349) only 1 ECHS100
247/8 133/4 surface 1 1/4 ECHS125
24/48 EQL24125DCR 28 125 5 (127) 6-2/0 N/A
(632) (349) only 1 1/2 ECHS150
335/8 15 6-250 surface 2 ECHS200
40/80 EQL40200DCR 21 200 5 (127) N/A 2 1/2 ECHS250
(853) (381) MCM only
EQL24125DCR
* Neutral bar only on one side of panel.
SEQ Type 3R Weatherproof Loadcentre with Factory installed main breaker 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC max.
Hubs
Number Dimensions - Inches (mm)
Catalogue Skid Main Lug Mounting Factory (sold seperately)
of
Number Qty. Amps Data Trim Mod. Conduit Catalogue
Circuits H W D
size (') Number
215/8 139/16 surface

16/32 SEQ16100SMCR 35 100 5 (127) 6-2/0 N/A
(549) (345) only
3/4 ECHS075
245/8 139/16 surface 1 ECHS100
24/48 SEQ24100SMCR 28 100 5 (127) 6-2/0 N/A
(625) (345) only 1 1/4 ECHS125
271/2 15 6-250 surface 1 1/2 ECHS150
24/48 SEQ24200CR 21 200 5 (127) N/A 2 ECHS200
(699) (381) MCM only
2 1/2 ECHS250
361/2 15 6-250 surface
40/80 SEQ40200CR 21 200 5 (127) N/A
(927) (381) MCM only
Note: Both SEQ and EQL weatherproof panels are stocked complete with gasketed hinged door for improved weatherproof
protection. All SEQ and EQL Type 3R panels come standard with copper bus.
SEQ24100SMCR

Loadcentres
EQL, SNC, & SEQ Single Phase Main Lug & Main Breaker Loadcentres (continued) Selection
1
Dual Listed/cULus Loadcentres 120/240V 1 phase 3 Wire

LOADCENTRES
Dimensions - Inches (mm) Door Kit

Number of Skid Main Mounting
Catalogue Number Lug Data Catalogue
Circuits Qty. Amps H W D Trim
Number
SEQ38100U 27 100
DKS38-1A
SEQ38125U 27 125 36 141/4 4
38 6-250MCM comb.
SEQ38150U 27 150 (362) (362) (102)
DKS38-2A
SEQ38200U 27 200
Branch breakers: Only 1” full module breakers that are both UL & CSA certified are allowed to be installed in this loadcentre; 1/2” twin
and quad branch breakers must not be used as per NEC 384-14(a) and NEC-384-15. Consult Siemens Sales Rep. for
details.

Application benefit: Allows modular home builders who have businesses in both US & Canada to carry only one line of inventory.
SEQ38200U

Loadcentres
EQ3 Single Phase & EQ4 Three Phase Loadcentres Selection
1
EQ3 Single Phase Loadcentres
With Main Lugs only 1 phase 3 Wire 120/240 V AC max. 10KA
LOADCENTRES
Dimensions - Inches (mm) Door
Number of Main Mounting Factory
Catalogue Number Lug Data Catalogue
Circuits Amps H W D Trim Mod.
Number
34
24 EQ324225 225 DKEQ2430
(864) 143/8 43/8
6-300 MCM comb. a
40 (365) (111)
40 EQ340225 225 DKEQ42
(1016)
EQ3 Service Entrance Loadcentre
With factory Installed Main Breaker 1 phase 3 Wire 120/240 V AC max. 10KA
34
24 EQ324BQ125 125 DKEQ24BQ
(864) 143/8 43/8
#6 - 2/0 comb. a
40 (365) (111)
32 EQ332BQ125 125 DKEQ42
(1016)
EQ Three Phase Loadcentresa
With main lugs only 3 phase 4 wire 240V AC max. 10 KA
28
12 EQ412100 100 DKEQ1218
(711)
14-2/0
28
18 EQ418100 100 DKEQ1218
(711)
34 143/8 43/8
24 EQ424225 225 comb. DKEQ2430 a
(864) (365) (111)
34
30 EQ430225 225 6-300 MCM DKEQ2430
(864)
40
42 EQ442225 225 DKEQ42
(1016)
EQ424BQ100 Service Entrance Loadcentres
With factory installed main breaker 3 phase 4 wire 240 V AC max. 10 KA.
34
24 EQ424BQ100 100(BQ) 4-2/0 DKEQ24BQ
(864)
46
42 EQ442QR100 100(QR)
(1168)
46 143/8 43/8
42 EQ442QR125 125(QR) comb. a
(1168) (365) (111)
6-300 MCM DKEQ42QR
46
42 EQ442QR150 150(QR)
(1168)
46
42 EQ442QR200 200(QR)
(1168)
Factory Modificationsa
Type Description Catalogue Number Example Delivery
EQ4 Copper Bus add suffix...C EQ430225C 4 Weeks
Lug Kits For EQ Loadcentres
Catalogue Num-
Loadcentre Amps Rating Description
ber
Sub-feed Kit
SFK100 100
SFK225 14-2/0 (Per Phase)
Sub-feed Kit
SFK225 225
1/0-250 MCM (Per Phase)
Through-feed Kit
TFK100 100
14-2/0 (Per Phase)
Through-feed Kit
TFK225 225
TFK100 6-300 MCM (Per Phase)
Note : Certified for use with either plug-in (Type Q) or bolt-on (Type BQ) branch breakers. Number of circuits can be doubled by use of plug-in (Type QT)
twin breakers. Certified for mounting vertical, horizontal or inverted and for use with CU/AL conductor including compact stranded.
All neutral bar connectors are No. 14 - No. 4.
aAll Three Phase EQ loadcentres are stocked complete with doors. Interior only is not available.Must be ordered as a complete unit.
Note: For copper bus add suffix C to existing part number. 4 weeks delivery required

Loadcentres
SPA panel and Mini Panel/Enclosed Breaker Selection
1
SPA panel package, 3R enclosure 120/240V 1 Phase 3 Wire

LOADCENTRES
Enclosure Dimensions - Inches (mm) Hubs (sold seperately)

Number of Package Main GFCI
Circuits Catalogue Number Amps. Included Conduit Catalogue
H W D
Size (") Number
W0408ML1125-20 QF220A
Cover ECHS000
W0408ML1125-30 QF230A 3/4 ECHS075
W0408ML1125
1 ECHS100
121/4 6 41/4
4/8 W0408ML1125-40 125 QF240A 11/4 ECHS125
(312) (153) (108)
11/2 ECHS150
W0408ML1125-50 QF250A 2 ECHS200
21/2 ECHS250
W0408ML1125-60 QF260A
Each package also includes a 4-point ground bar and French instructions.
2-POLE GFCI
Circuit Breaker Enclosures for Service Entrance and Commercial Use
EEMAC 1 Enclosure (Indoor) 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.
Breaker Catalogue Main Number Dimensions - Inches (mm)

Lug Data
Range Number Amps. of Poles H W D
73/4 5 14-4
15-60A EQS260*a 60 1,2 23/4
(197) (127) (70)
13 65/8 14-2/0
15-125A EQS2125*a 125 1,2 33/8
(330) (168) (86)
EQS260 *Does not accept quad type breaker.
EEMAC 3R Weatherproof Enclosure, 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.
Full Module Main Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight Hubb

Catalogue Number
Circuits Amps. lbs. Type
H W D
101/4 91/2 55/8

3 WEQ60-4ac 60 (260) (241) (143) 8 HR
8 5 41/4
2/4 W0204ML1060ac 60 (204) (127) (108) 4 HA
121/4 6 41/4
4/8 W0408ML1125c 125 (312) (153) (108) 7 HS
WEQ60-4
143/4 121/8 41/4
8/16 W0816ML1125CUc 125 (375) (308) (108) 7 HS
Note: Package does not include a 4-point ground bar, please order: GBK4
Key Features:
Outdoor EEMAC 3R enclosure Hubs
• Accepts plug-in Q type breakers
Catalogue Conduit Catalogue Conduit
• One piece bus bar construction
Number size (') Number size (')
• Combination trim flush/surface
W0816ML1125CU ECHA075 3/4 ECHS075 3/4
Remark:
ECHA100 1 ECHS100 1
a The panels will not accommodate a 2 pole ground fault
breaker (GFCI) or breaker with shunt trip. ECHA125 1 1/4 ECHS125 1 1/4
b Hubs sold seperately
ECHR075 3/4 ECHS150 1 1/2
c Not to be used as service entrance.
ECHR100 1 ECHS200 2
ECHR125 1 1/4 ECHS250 2.5
ECHR150 1 1/2

Loadcentres
Generator panel Selection
1
Generator Panel, 3 Pole 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.
Suitable for use with a generator having a bonded neutral conductor.
LOADCENTRES
Dimensions - Inches (mm)
Number of Catalogue Skid Mounting
Main Amps Lug Data
Circuits Number Qty. H W D Trim
EQG630D 30 14-6
EQG660D 60 167/8 12 33/4 6-2/0
6/12 63 Comb.
EQG680D 80 (429) (305) (95) 6-2/0
EQG6100D 100 6-2/0
EQG1030D 30 14-6
EQG1060D 60 187/8 12 33/4 6-2/0
10/20 45 Comb.
EQG1080D 80 (479) (305) (95) 6-2/0
EQG10100D 100 6-2/0
EQG1830D 30 14-6
EQG1860D 60 241/8 131/32 33/4 6-2/0
18/36 36 Comb.
EQG1880D 80 (613) (331) (95) 6-2/0
EQG18100D 100 6-2/0
EQG2630D 30 14-6
EQG2660D 60 33 141/4 4 6-2/0
26/52 27 Comb.
EQG2680D 80 (838) (362) (102) 6-2/0
EQG26100D 100 6-2/0
EQG3430D 30 14-6
EQG3460D 60 33 141/4 4 6-2/0
34/68 27 Comb.
EQG3480D 80 (838) (362) (102) 6-2/0
EQG630D
EQG34100D 100 8-2/0
Generator Panel, 2 Pole 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.

Suitable for use with a generator having an unbonded neutral conductor.
EQG830NSND 30 14-8
EQG860NSND 60 167/8 12 33/4 6-2/0
8/16 63 Comb.
EQG880NSND 80 (429) (305) (95) 6-2/0
EQG8100NSND 100 6-2/0
EQG1230NSND 30 14-8
EQG1260NSND 60 187/8 12 33/4 6-2/0
12/24 45 Comb.
EQG1280NSND 80 (479) (305) (95) 6-2/0
EQG12100NSND 100 6-2/0
EQG2030NSND 30 14-8
EQG2060NSND 60 241/8 131/32 33/4 6-2/0
20/40 36 Comb.
EQG2080NSND 80 (613) (331) (95) 6-2/0
EQG20100NSND 100 6-2/0
EQG2830NSND 30 14-8
EQG860NSND EQG2860NSND 60 33 141/4 4 6-2/0
28/56 27 Comb.
EQG2880NSND 80 (838) (362) (102) 6-2/0
EQG28100NSND 100 6-2/0
EQG3630NSND 30 14-8
EQG3660NSND 60 33 141/4 4 6-2/0
36/72 27 Comb.
EQG3680NSND 80 (838) (362) (102) 6-2/0
EQG36100NSND 100 6-2/0
Note: The EQG panels are stocked complete with doors
Key Features:
• Ensures reliable and continuous operation, allows customers to permanently connect critical loads to back up
generators in cases of main power failures
• Factory ready for use in both switched and non-switched neutral applications
• Additional number of generator circuits for more flexibility

Circuit Breakers
Type Q Plug-In Breakers Selection
1
Full Module (1” per pole) 10,000 A.I.C

Ampere Rating Catalogue Number Standard Package
LOADCENTRES
Single Pole
15 Q115c
20 Q120c
25 Q125
30 Q130
48
40 Q140
50 Q150
60 Q160
70 Q170
Two Pole Common Trip
Q115 15 Q215
20 Q220
25 Q225
30 Q230
24
35 Q235
40 Q240
50 Q250
60 Q260
70 Q270
80 Q280
90 Q290
5
100 Q2100
110 Q2110
125 Q2125
Q215
150 QN2150Rde
1
200 QN2200Rde
Three Pole Common Trip
15 Q315
20 Q320
25 Q325
30 Q330
3
40 Q340
50 Q350
60 Q360
70 Q370
80 Q380
Q315
90 Q390 2
100 Q3100
Half Module (1/2” per pole) 10,000 A.I.C.
Poles Amps Catalogue Numbera Standard Package
15-15 Q1515NC
15-20 Q1520NC
15-30 Q1530NC
15-40 Q1540NC
QT
20-15 Q2015NC
Dual 48
20-20 Q2020NC
(Twin)
Q1515NC 30-15 Q3015NC
30-20 Q2030NC
30-30 Q3030NC
40-15 Q4015NC
Quad Type (1/2” per pole) 10,000 A.I.C. Common Trip - centre poles only.
Poles Ampere Rating Catalogue Numberb Standard Package
15-15 Q21515CTNC
15-20 Q21520CTNC
QT
15-25 Q21525CTNC 24
Quad
15-30 Q21530CTNC
Q21515CTNC 15-40 Q21540CTNC
a Typicalcatalogue number (ie. Q1515NC) represents two
single-pole 15A circuit breakers - total width 1”.
c ypical CSA Listed for frequent switching applications
T
(SWD). 120V AC Fluorescent Lighting.
 Typical catalogue number (ie. Q21520CTNC) represents
two single-pole, outer poles (two 15A 1-pole circuit
d equires 4 panel circuits, 2 adjacent and 2 opposite.
R
Two twist outs should be only removed.
breakers) and one 2-pole inner breaker with common
trip (one 20A 2-pole circuit breaker) - total width 2”. e ill not fit in EQ3 or EQ4 loadcenters
W

Circuit Breakers
Surge Arrester and Replacement Main Breakers Selection
1
Replacement Main Breakers for SEQ Loadcentres 22,000 A.I.C.
LOADCENTRES
Poles Ampere Rating Catalogue Number Standard Package
60 Q260H 6
N/A
100 EQ9675
125 EQ9677
EQ9675 1
150 EQ9683
200 EQ9685

Loadcentres
Arc-Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters Selection

1
Interrupting Rating
LOADCENTRES
Ampere
Poles 10Ka 22kA 65Ka
Rating
Catalogue Number
Combination Arc Fault Circuit Interupters (AFCI), Full Module (1" per pole)
Detects all three possible types of arc faults: line-to-ground, line-to-neutral, and series.
15 QA115AFCCSA QA115AFCH QA115AFCHH

1
1-Pole Combination 2-Pole 20 QA120AFCCSA QA120AFCH QA120AFCHH
Type AFCI Combination
15 Q215AFCCSA Q215AFCH N/A
2
20 Q220AFCCSA Q220AFCH N/A
Dual Function AFCI/GFCI, Full Module (1" per pole)

The Dual Function Circuit Breaker combines Combination Type AFCI and GFCI, protecting against
both Arc Faults and (5mA) Ground Faults. Includes Self Test as an added safety feature.
15 Q115DF Q115DFH Q115DFHH

1
20 Q120DF Q120DFH Q120DFHH
1-Pole Dual Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (QFA), Full Module (1" per pole) Class A (5mA) Sensitivity
Function AFCI/GFCI Provides Class A (5mA) ground fault protection. Intended for personnel protection.
Includes Self Test as an added safety feature.
15 QF115A QF115AH QF115AHH

1 20 QF120A QF120AH QF120AHH
30 QF130A QF130AH QF130AHH
15 QF215A QF215AH
20 QF220A QF220AH
30 QF230A QF230AH
2
40 QF240A QF240AH N/A
50 QF250A QF250AH
60 QF260A QF260AH
Ground Fault Equipment Protection (QE), Full Module (1" per pole) 30mA Sensitivity
1-Pole GFCI 2-Pole GFCI Provides protection of equipment from damaging line-to-ground faults currents.

15 QE115 N/A N/A

1
20 QE120 N/A N/A
30 QE130 QE130H N/A

15 QE215 QE215H N/A
20 QE220 QE220H N/A
2 30 QE230 QE230H N/A
40 QE240 QE240H N/A
50 QE250 QE250H N/A
1-Pole GFCI 2-Pole GFCI 60 QE260 QE260H N/A

Loadcentres
Type BQ Bolt-ona and Blue line Circuit Breakers Selection
1
Full Module BQ Breakers (1" per pole) 10,000 A.I.C & 22,000 A.I.C.
LOADCENTRES
Ampere 10,000 A.I.C. 22,000 A.I.C.
Std. Pkg.
Rating Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Single Pole
15 BQ1B015 BQ1B015H
20 BQ1B020 BQ1B020H
25 BQ1B025 BQ1B025H
30 BQ1B030 BQ1B030H
12
40 BQ1B040 BQ1B040H
50 BQ1B050 BQ1B050H
60 BQ1B060 BQ1B060H
70 BQ1B070 BQ1B070H
BQ1B015 Two Pole Common Trip
15 BQ2B015 BQ2B015H
20 BQ2B020 BQ2B020H
25 BQ2B025 BQ2B025H
30 BQ2B030 BQ2B030H
40 BQ2B040 BQ2B040H
50 BQ2B050 BQ2B050H
6
60 BQ2B060 BQ2B060H
70 BQ2B070 BQ2B070H
80 BQ2B080 BQ2B080H
90 BQ2B090 BQ2B090H
100 BQ2B100 BQ2B100H
125 BQ2B125 –
Three Pole Common Trip
BQ2B015
15 BQ3B015 BQ3B015H
20 BQ3B020 BQ3B020H
30 BQ3B030 BQ3B030H
40 BQ3B040 BQ3B040H
50 BQ3B050 BQ3B050H 4
60 BQ3B060 BQ3B060H
70 BQ3B070 BQ3B070H
90 BQ3B090 BQ3B090H
100 BQ3B100 BQ3B100H
BQ3B015
BQ Screws are sold separatelya

Type Blue line circuit breakers
Ampere Rating Catalogue Number Standard Package
15 BL1-015
20 BL1-020
30 BL1-030 20
40 BL1-040
50 BL1-050
15 BL2-015
20 BL2-020
10
30 BL2-030
40 BL2-040
Description Catalogue Number Standard Package
Tie Handle BLTH1

20
BL1-015 6 - 1 Pole Fillers BLF6
Note: These breakers are used as replacement in old ITE Loadcentres
a Order
line side screw kits separately: 8217-6 (6 pcs.)
8217-12 (12 pcs.) 8217-100 (100 pcs.) 8217-200 (200 pcs.)

Loadcentres
Accessories and Replacement Parts Selection
1
Catalogue Std.
Description
LOADCENTRES
Number Pkg.
Tie Handle
ECQTH2 QT Dual Tie Handle-Floating 25

ECQTH3 Q 2-Pole Tie Handle 50
QTH4 QT Dual Tie Handle - Bar Type 5
Blocking Device
ECQL1 Handle Blocking Device (1,2 or 3 Pole)

ECQLD3 Padlocking Device (1,2 or 3 Pole) for full 10
ECQTH2 ECQTH3 QTH4 module breakers
ECPLD1 Padlocking Device (1 Pole) for Twin type breakers

3
ECPLD2 Padlocking Device (2 Pole) for Quad type breakers
Lock
ECQFL2 Add-A-Lock (all EQ Loadcentres) 1
Neutral Lug Kits
LK2 No. 4-2/0 CU/AL

LK3 No. 1-300 MCM CU/AL 1
LK4 No. 1-400 MCM CU/AL
Lug Kita
ECQL1 ECQLD3 ECLK2225 No. 2-300 MCM CU/AL 1
Miscellaneous
QF3 Three 1-Pole Fillers

SL3 Sliding Black Latch
SL3W Sliding White Latch 1
IG21 Insulated Ground Bar Kit
Truck-Kit Contractor Truck Kit
ECQFL2 TRIMSCK1 Screws for trims "Zink"

CIRNOLA32 Circuit labels up to 32 circuits for SEQ 125A
CIRNOLA40 Circuit labels up to 40 circuits
CIRNOLA60 Circuit labels up to 60 circuits
DIRLBLK-EQLSEQ Directory labels EQL, SEQ
DIRLBLK-SM Directory labels SEQ side mounted NMMB
DIRLBLKSEQ60 Directory Card "Package of 25"
TUP-RA236QF White Powder Coat Spray Paint
TUP-PL126Q Grey Powder Coat Spray Paint
LK2 LK3
SL3 Truck Kit IG21
a Theselug kits simply plug on to the bus of any SEQ

or EQL Loadcentre as sub-feed or through-feed lugs to
take advantage of CEC Rule 14-100 (c).

Loadcentres
1
SEQ Loadcentres
Door Kit Door & Trim
# of Catalogue
LOADCENTRES
Circuits Number Grey White Grey White
12/24 SEQ12060SM DK12SM DK12SMW
DK1216SM-1 DK1216SM-1W
24/48 SEQ24060SM DK24SM-1 DK24SM-1W DK24SM DK24SMW
DK1216SM-1 DK1216SM-1W
SEQ24100SM
Door Kit 24/28 SEQ24125SMK DK24SM-1 DK24SM-1W DK24SM DK24SMW
SEQ24125SM
SEQ24150
24/48 N/A N/A DKS24-2A DKS24-2AW
SEQ24200
SEQ32100SM
32/64 DK32SM-1 DK32SM-1W DK32SM DK32SMW
SEQ32125SM
SEQ32150
SEQ32200
SEQ40100
SEQ40125
SEQ40150
SEQ40200
Door & Trim
60/120 SEQ60200 N/A N/A DKS60-2A DKS60-2AW
SEQ Loadcentres
Main Breaker Cover Branch Breaker Cover
# of Catalogue
Circuits Number Grey White Grey White
12/24 SEQ12060SM SEQ12060SM-T SEQ12060SM-TW
DKMCSM DKMCSMW
SEQ24100SM-T SEQ24100SM-TW
SEQ24100SM
24/28 SEQ24125SMK SEQ24125SM-T SEQ24125SM-TW
Main Breaker Cover
SEQ24125SM
SEQ24125SM-T SEQ24125SM-TW
SEQ24150
24/48 N/Aa N/Aa SEQ24-TA SEQ24-TAW
SEQ24200
SEQ32100SM SEQ32100SM-T SEQ32100SM-TW

32/64 DKMCSM DKMCSMW
SEQ32125SM SEQ32125SM-T SEQ32125SM-TW
SEQ32150
32/64 SEQ32-T SEQ32-TW
SEQ32200
SEQ40100
40/80 SEQ40100-T SEQ40100-TW
SEQ40125 N/Aa N/Aa
SEQ40150
40/80 SEQ40-T SEQ40-TW
Branch Breaker Cover SEQ40200
60/120 SEQ60200 SEQ60-T SEQ60-TW
a Branch Breaker Cover part covers the main breaker

area and branch circuits.

Loadcentres
1
EQL & SNC Loadcentres

LOADCENTRES
Door Kit
# of Circuits Catalogue Number Grey White
2/4 EQL260S
N/A N/A
4/8 EQL4100
8/16 EQL8100D DK8-A DK8-AW

12/24 SNC1224L1125 RPCT1224L1125 N/A
16/32 SNC1632L1125 RPCT1632L1125 N/A
24/48 SNC2448L1125 RPCT2448L1125 N/A
30/48 SNC3048L1200 RPCT3048L1200 N/A
40/60 SNC4060L1200 RPCT4060L1200 N/A
EQ3 & EQ4 Loadcentres

Catalogue Number Door Kit
# of Circuits EQ3 EQ4 Grey White
12 N/A EQ412100
DKEQ1218 N/A
18 N/A EQ418100
24 EQ324225 EQ424225
DKEQ2430 N/A
30 N/A EQ430225
40 EQ340225 N/A
DKEQ42 N/A
42 N/A EQ442225
EQ3 & EQ4 Service Entrance Rated

Catalogue Number Door Kit
# of Circuits EQ3 EQ4 Grey White
24 EQ324BQ125 EQ424BQ100 DKEQ24BQ N/A
32 EQ332BQ125 N/A DKEQ42 N/A
EQ442QR100 DKEQ42QR N/A
42 N/A
EQ442QR125
EQ442QR125C
DKEQ42QR N/A
EQ442QR150
EQ442QR200

Loadcentres Surge Protection
Circuit Breaker and Surge Protective Device (SPD) Selection
Features
1
Circuit Breaker and
n 2 inch wide plug-on design Surge Protective Device (SPD)
LOADCENTRES
— Includes (2) 1 Pole circuits breakers
— No loss of loadcentre spaces
n Easy to install and perfect for retrofit
n LEDs provide protection status
Benefits
By installing a Siemens Circuit Breaker and Surge Protective Device (SPD) in the
loadcentre of the residence, surge protection is provided for all branch circuits.
Two green LED indicator lights are provided to show that surge protection is pro-
vided for all circuits connected to the loadcentre. These breakers should be used
for circuit protection of frequently used household or facility circuits because the
lights and devices connected to these circuits provide an effective indication that
surge protection is being provided.
The circuit breaker and SPD utilize Siemens-built 150V AC, 40mm, metal oxide
varistors (MOVs). The maximum impulse rating for the SPD module is 40kA. The
standard interrupting rating for the circuit breakers is 10k AIC. All Type QP circuit
breakers and SPD are plug-on style, with load terminals provided. The devices
are rated for 120/240V AC and are calibrated for 40 degrees C maximum ambient
applications.
Breaker Type Ampere Rating Catalogue Number Surge Type

QP
(2) 15 QSA1515SPD SPD
1- Pole
120/240V AC
(2) 20 QSA2020SPD SPD
10K AIC
Catalogue Number QSA1515SPD

QSA2020SPD
Amperage 15 or 20 Amp
Number of Poles (2) 1-Pole Circuit Breakers
Initial Clamping Level 240 Volts
Transient Energy Rating 360 Joules line-to-neutral
720 Joules line-to-line
Transient Suppression 500 volts peak, line-to-neutral
Voltage Rating 1000 volts peak, line-to-line
Peak Current Rating (impulse) 40,000 amperes
Discharge Voltage Characteristic @ 1,500A, 600 volts
@ 5,000A, 800 volts
(both line-to-neutral)
Discharge Current Withstand Rating 10,000 amperes
line-to-neutral
Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating 10,000A, 120/240V AC
Listings/Certifications UL, CSA
Meets UL 1449 4th Edition
 For warranty information please refer to the surge

website www.usa.siemens.com/surge

Power Service Entrance Surge Protection Selection
FirstSurge™
1
Total Home Protection

Siemens believes today’s residential surge protectors come
LOADCENTRES
up short when protecting today’s modern home filled with

smart appliances and electronics.
This is why we developed our FirstSurge™ commercial class

total home surge protectors. These electrical system surge
protectors are sized for where you live. They will let you know
when there is something wrong or when they are worn out.
Based upon thunderstorm frequency, geographic location, and Features & Benefits
home size, we developed a surge exposure map correlating
b UL 1449 4th Ed Listed, CSA 22.2 No.269.2-13, Type 2 Surge
with FirstSurge™ current capacities known to provide years of
Protective Device (SPD)
protective service for each shaded area.
b Rated for 120/240 split phase panels up to 400A
Sized For Where You Live b Surge Current Capacities:
Model Surge Capacity - 60,000 A
FirstSurge™ Power (FS060) 60,000 A - 100,000 A
FirstSurge™ Plus (FS100) 100,000 A - 140,000 A
FirstSurge™ Pro (FS140) 140,000 A b 3 Stage Commercial Grade Notification
b Ground Reference Monitoring (GRM)
b Installs onto any brand loadcenter
b Type 4 rated outdoor enclosure
b 10 year product and connected equipment warranty*
Technical Specifications
Surge Spike Capacity FirstSurge™ Power (FS060) 60,000 A
FirstSurge™ Plus (FS100) 100,000 A
FirstSurge™ Pro (FS140) 140,000 A
Line Voltage 120/240 Split Phase, 50/60 Hz
UL 1449 4th Ed VPR L-N: 600 V
L-G: 600 V
N-G: 600 V
Know You’re Protected: L-L: 900 V
3 Stage Commerical Grade Notification Rated Voltage (MCOV) 150V – L-N, L-G, and N-G; 300V – L-L
When there is a problem, Siemens FirstSurge™ takes the Response Time <1 nanosecond
guesswork out of knowing when it is time to be replaced. Enclosure NEMA 4X Indoor and Outdoor Rated
Selection Information
What will you see and hear when this occurs?
FirstSurge™ Power FS060
FirstSurge™ Plus FS100
Audible Alarm: Beeps
Green LED(s): Extinguish FirstSurge™ Pro FS140
Red Service Light: Flashes FirstSurge™ Flush Mount Kit XMFMKIT
Ground Reference Monitoring (GRM)

FirstSurge™ is GRM-equipped notifying you a rare safety haz-
ard exists due to a compromised electrical system neutral
to ground bond. What will you see and hear when this occurs?

Green LED(s): Remains Lit
Red Service Light: Flashes
*See warranty for details

Telephone Service Entrance Surge Protection Selection
Siemens FSPHONE is a 2 pair, hardwired surge protector for
telephone, DSL or modem connected electronics in residen-
1
tial and light commercial applications. The FSPHONE protects
against electrical power surges that can enter through the
LOADCENTRES
main telephone connection and is equipped with a failshort
device to permanently ground the telephone line in the event
of a power cross.
The FSPHONE is designed for indoor applications or can be

mounted inside another weatherproof enclosure for outdoor
mounting applications.
The FSPHONE4X consists of the FSPHONE plus a weather- Catastrophic Surge Circuit Yes
proof enclosure to facilitate indoor or outdoor applications. The Spike Capacity 200 Amps
enclosure is molded of temperature and humidity resistant Let Through Voltage <270 V
thermoplastic to resist cracking and discoloration. The cover Overcurrent Protection Yes
can be secured with a tie wrap or similar locking device. Response Time <1 nanosecond
Enclosure Yes
Agency Approvals & Warranty
For total home protection please use FirstSurgeTM to protect
UL/cUL Listings 497C
your incoming AC Power lines and FSPHONE to protect your Meets Telcordia (formally Bellcore) GR-974-CORE Yes
incoming telephone line. Requirements for Telecommunications Line
Protectors
Features & Benefits Product Warranty FS140
b UL listed Catalogue Number
FSPHONE 2 pair protection module
b Hardwired Modem/Fax/DSL protection
FSPHONE4X 2 pair protection module & 1 Weatherproof Enclosure
b Easy to install UL Model No. - SATH2
b Exceptionally fast response time
b Low insertion loss
b Available with or without enclosure
b 5-Year product warranty*
Coaxial Service Entrance Surge Protection

Siemens FSCATV shields coaxial connected electronics in
residential and light commercial applications against electrical
transient damage, including lightning, from entering through
the main cable connection.
FSCATV includes a section of coaxial cable with female to

female splice for line side application. The Siemens warranty
covers product defects for 5 years. To have complete protec-
tion for your equipment, home, or business, it is important
to protect AC power lines and all data lines the equipment is
connected through.
Features & Benefits

b UL Listed Technical Specifications
b Rated for CATV, DSS, TV, VCR, and Cable Modem Frequency Range DC thru 1.5 GHz
b Easy to install Catastrophic Surge Circuit Yes
b Standard Female to Female F connector Spike Capacity 5000 Amps, 8/20 μSec
b Low insertion loss Impedance 75 Ohms
Overcurrent Protection Yes
b Automatic recovery
Return Loss 30dB @ 1 GHz
b 5 Year product warranty* Insertion Loss <0.1dB
Meets IEEE C62.41.1 Requirements Yes
Product Warranty FS140
Catalogue Number
FSCATV F-Type Inline Coax Protector
UL Model No. - SurgeassureTM SAVFFF

Loadcentres
Knockout Data Selection
1
LOADCENTRES

Loadcentres
Knockout Data Selection
Service Entrance Loadcentres with Plug-in Breakers
1
LOADCENTRES
Service Entrace Loadcentres (Type 3R) Bottom Only
SEQ 16- 24- 32 SM SEQ 24- 32- 40
EQ Loadcentres with Plug-in or Bolt-on Breakers

Loadcentres
Line Diagrams/Dimension Drawings for Circuit Breakers/Lug Data Selection
1
LOADCENTRES
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
3"
2.38"
2.90"
Type Q Full Module Breaker Type QT Half Module Breaker Type QF, QE, QAF, QAFH
Lug Data
Circuit Breaker Cables Connector
Circuit Breaker Type Ampere Rating Per Connector Wire Range
LOAD SIDE
Q 15–30
1 #14–#8 AWG Cu
1 #12–#8 AWG Al
1 #8–#6 AWG Cu
40–50
1 #8–#4 AWG Al
1 #6–#2/0 AWG Cu
60–70
1 #6–#2/0 AWG Al
1 #8-#2/0 AWG Cu
80-125
1 #8-#2/0 AWG Al
QNR 150–200 1 #1–300kcmil Cu-Al
QT 15–30
1 #14–#8 AWG Cu
1 #12–#8 AWG Al
40 1 #8 AWG CU-Al
QF, QE 15–30
1 #14–#10 AWG Cu
Type QNR
1 #12–#8 AWG Al
1 #8–#6 AWG Cu
40–60
1 #8–#4 AWG Al
QAF, QAFH 15–20
1 #14–#12 AWG Cu
1 #12–#10 AWG Al

POWER PRODUCT Meter Centres
Contents
General Specifications 2-2
240V Meter Centre
2
Overview - Features & Benefits 2-3
Selection Procedure 2-5
CENTRES
METER
Switches and Tap Boxes 2-6
Meter Stacks 2-7
Socket Module and Main Bus Connector Kit 2-8
Sub-service Circuit Breakers and Corner Elbow Modules 2-9
Accessories 2-10
Configuration Layouts 2-11
Dimensions 2-13
Knock Out Data 2-15
240V Meter Centre Layout Example 2-16
600Y/347V Meter Centre

Overview - Features & Benefits 2-17
Meter Stacks 2-18
Sub service Circuit Breakers and Tap Boxes 2-19
Close Coupled option with SMP 2-20
Main Bus Connector Kits, Corner Elbow Modules and Accessories
2-21
Dimensions 2-22
600Y/347V Meter Centre Layout Example 2-26
Meter Centres
Introduction and General Specifications General
Siemens multi-family metering includes an assortment of Numbering System
module types that can be configured to meet a wide range
of residential, commercial or industrial group metering Meter Stacks
M M C 1 4 - 6 1 2 5
applications. This feature-rich product line is designed with
the contractor in mind. Quality and service are keystones of Item Description
Siemens meter centres. Siemens meter centres are designed Qty Phase
and manufactured in Canada, to meet Canadian requirements.
Qty Jaws
2
Qty Meter Sockets

General Specifications
Socket rating
METER
CENTRES
Standards System Voltage (6 = 600V; Blank = 240V)

CSA: C22.2 No. 229-M1988. Certified under file #153416
Meter Stack Design

Siemens meter stacks are of uniform design with flexibility Meter Sockets
M M S 7 - 1 0 0
in mind. All meter stacks are designed for “cold metering” in
which individual subservice breakers are connected on the line Item Description
side of the meter sockets thereby protecting the meter and all
Qty Jaws
electrical equipment installed subsequent to it.
Socket rating
Meter Stack Enclosure System Voltage (6 = 600V; Blank = 240V)
Type 1 enclosure. Meter stack enclosure, barriers and end

plates are manufactured of galvanized steel. Front covers are
fabricated of phosphatized steel finished with ASA 61 light
Tap Boxes
grey paint. M L T B 1 - 6 0 0 F T
Bus Bar Item Description

The main horizontal bus consists of tin plated high conductivity Qty Phases
aluminum for maximum performance and economy. The main Amperage
cross bus is installed at the bottom of metering stacks
Feed-Thru Option
and is rated at at 600A or 1200A while the vertical bussing is
System Voltage (6 = 600V; Blank = 240V)
rated at 800A per section.

Meter Centres
240V Modular Meter Centres Selection
The Siemens metering line offers an
economical approach to virtually any Entry Plates
metering requirement, whether it be Main cable tap boxes can be
for residential, commercial or industrial provided with punched or unpunched
applications at 240V. aluminum or fiber entry plates.
Meeting All Your Service Needs Branch Circuit Breakers
2
Offering the maximum versatility to Compact, high performance type plug-
meet all your needs, Siemens 240V in or bolt-on circuit breakers can be
meter centres are designed for single selected to address site requirements.
CENTRES
METER
phase three wire 120/240V AC or Interrupting ratings up to 100kA combine
three phase four wire 120/208V AC thermal and magnetic trip elements
applications with sub-service modules and feature: isolated pole construction
of 100A, 125A and 200A. Siemens 240V with common trip bar for multiple pole
meter centres are designed to meet devices; silver alloy contacts and high
CSA requirements C22.2 No.229 and pressure straight-in load connectors.
are CSA certified under file #13069.
All individual metering stacks are Series rating are also available for
manufactured to tight specifications approved combinations up to 100kA.
and can be selected in pre-assembled Meter Stack Enclosure
units, to minimize on-site labour or Type 1 meter stack enclosure. Meter Socket Jaws
as a separate plug-in module for a Enclosure, barriers and end plates are Meter socket jaws consist of tin
customized installation when required. manufactured of galvanized steel.. Front plated copper with steel spring
The modular construction offers real post covers are fabricated of phosphatized reinforced clips for reliable contact
installation flexibility permitting on-site steel finished with ASA 61 light grey pressure. Positive alignment of jaws and
changes to be made with minimum paint. Meter socket front covers are stabs is assured by bus straps which are
down time. embossed and fitted with a label to allow bolted in place.
suite identification on the enclosure
Direct Tap Feature adjacent to its respective service breaker.
When using Siemens' direct tap Main
Lug Feed Kit for services at 600A, no Bus Bar
tap box is required, therefore saving The main horizontal bus consists of tin
considerable installation room. plated high conductivity aluminum for
maximum performance and economy.
This custom designed Main Lug Feed The main cross bus is installed at the
Kit allows connection of main incoming bottom of the metering stacks and is
cables directly to the Meter Stack main rated at 600 or 1200A while the vertical
bus and eliminates the need for a sub bussing is rated at 800A per section.
service tap box. If more working space
is required to facilitate the connection, a Flexibility
Transition Box can be used. Siemens service entrance equipment
can be top or bottom fed, depending on
Meter Stack Design site requirements, for single connection
All Siemens meter stacks are of or feed through applications.
uniform design with flexibility in mind.
A combination of slide-in metering Each meter stack has a convenient side
modules from 100 to 200A fit in any wireway for branch wiring which can
meter stack. exit at the top or at the bottom. A user-
friendly combination of knockouts is
Mounting Rails factory installed at the top to minimize
Easy to use, the mounting rails simplify installation time.
installation of the modular meter centre.
They enable the metering stacks to Slide-in Modular Design
be rapidly pre-installed on the wall, Each individual slide-in module design
automatically aligning the sections for allows for fast installation and provide
permanent mechanical installation and flexibility for future needs. If the branch
electrical joining of the main bus. requirement changes, the module can
be interchanged without changing the
complete stack. By simply removing
two screws from the front cover, the
slide-in module can be removed for easy
replacement.

Meter Centres
Overview - Features & Benefits
Single stack, with 800A rated bus,
accepts up to four 200A or six 125A Standard one size meter stack
Embossed hook slide-in modules with 4 and 5 jaws. For
for mounting rail more flexibility, a combination of both
system can be installed within the same stack
2 METER
CENTRES
Accepts plug-in
Easy to mount or bolt-on sub
standard safety service circuit
switch breakers
Sealing screw
factory installed
Slide-in meter
socket modules
Blank Filler Plates
Lay in ground
Transition Box can lug factory
be used for 600A to installed at the
allow more working bottom of each
space stack. No kit
required for
multi stack
grounding
Direct tap connection for Main Bus Connection Kit

600A with Main Lug Feed 600A or 1200A allowing the
Kit allowing the connection connection of meter stacks.
directly from the switch

Meter Centres
Selection Procedure
1. Select service entrance equipment (ex. switch), reference p.2-6.
2. Select required Tap Box or Main Lug Feed Kit with or without a Transition Box.
3. Select type and quantity of slide-in Meter Socket Modules.
4. Select Main Bus Connector Kits to join each stack.
5. Select quantity of Blank Filler Plates as per left over empty space.
2
CENTRES
METER
Examples - Typical 600A Main Service 120/240V 1Ø 3W c/w 16 x 100A and 1 x 200 sub-service breakers
Option 1 Option 2
c/w Tap Box & Bolt-on Breakers c/w Transition Box & Plug-in Breakers
QTY Catalogue Number Description QTY Catalogue Number Description
1 ID226 or HFC226N Safety switch 600A 2p 240V 1 ID226 or HFC226N Safety switch 600A 2p 240V
1 MLTB1-600 Standard Tap Box 600A 1 MTB-600 Transition Box 600A
4 MMS4-125 Meter socket module 125A 4 jaws 1 MLFK1 Main lug kit
2 MMC14-6125 Complete stack 4 MMS4-125 Meter socket module 125A 4 jaws
1 MMC1 Basic stack 1 MMS4-200 Meter socket module 200A 4 jaws
2 MBSS1-600 Main bus connector kit 2 MMC14-6125 Complete stack
1 MBHP-2 Blank filler plates 1 MMC1 Basic stack
16 BQ2B100 100A Bolt-on breaker 2 MBSS1-600 Main bus connector kit
1 MTRK-64 Wall mounting rail 1 MBHP-2 Blank filler plates
16 Q2100 100A Plug-in breaker
1 EQ9685 200A Plug-in breaker
1 MTRK-64 Wall mounting rail
Reference Chart: Number of Blank Filler Plate Kits Required

Refer to this chart to calculate how many Blank Filler Plate Kits are needed in a meter stack after the quantity of Meter Socket Module is determined.
Height in modules Qty of kits #MBHP-2
Catalogue Number Description
(1 module = 87/8'' = 125 mm) (2 plates/kit)
MMC1 & MMC3 Basic meter stack 6 modules 6
MMS4-125 Meter socket module 125A 4 jaws 1 module 1
MMS5-125 Meter socket module 125A 5 jaws 1 module 1
MMS4-200 Meter socket module 200A 4 jaws 1.5 modules 2

Meter Centres
a
Fusible Switches
Ampere Catalogue Cable lug size per phase - Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight -
System
Rating Number suitable for Al. and Cu. H W D lbs.(kg)
(1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or
400 ID225 40 (1016) 181/2 (470) 121/16 (306) 78 (35.4)
(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
120/240 (2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or
600 ID226 48 (1219) 211/2 (546) 121/16 (306) 92 (41.7)
1Ø 3W (4) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
2
800 HFC227N (1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil 673/16 (1706) 3915/16 (1015) 91/4 (235) 365 (65.6)
1200 HFC228N (2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil 673/16 (1706) 3915/16 (1015) 91/4 (235) 385 (174.6)
METER
CENTRES
(1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

400 ID425 40 (1016) 181/2 (470) 121/16 (306) 92 (41.7)
(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
120/208 (2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or
600 ID426 48 (1219) 211/2 (546) 121/16 (306) 108 (49)
3Ø 4W (4) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
800 HFC367N (1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil 673/16 (1706) 3915/16 (1015) 91/4 (235) 375 (170.1)
1200 HFC368N (2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil 673/16 (1706) 3915/16 (1015) 91/4 (235) 395 (179.1)
Standard Tap Boxesb - Connectors included

Ampere Catalogue Cable lug size per phase - Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight -
System
Rating Number suitable for Al. and Cu cablesg H W D lbs.(kg)d
120/240 400/600 MLTB1-600 (3) #2 AWG - 600 Kcmil 253/4 (655) 201/2 (521) 71/4 (184) 40 (18.2)
1Ø 3W 800/1200 MLTB1-1200c (4) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil 253/4 (655) 201/2 (521) 71/4 (184) 45 (20.5)
120/208 400/600 MLTB3-600 (3) #2 AWG - 600 Kcmil 253/4 (655) 201/2 (521) 71/4 (184) 40 (18.2)
3Ø 4W 800/1200 MLTB3-1200 c
(4) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil 253/4 (655) 201/2 (521) 71/4 (184) 45 (20.5)
Feed Through Tap Boxesbe - Connectors included, use with even number of meter stacks only
LUG (4) 250-750MCM or
120/240 400/600 MLTB1-600FT 253/4 (655) 201/2 (521) 71/4 (184) 45 (20.5)
(8) 3/0-250MCM PER PHASE
1Ø 3W
800/1200 MLTB1-1200FTf LUG (8) 1/0-750MCM PER PHASE 461/4 (1175) 24 (610) 71/4 (184) 60 (27.3)
LUG (4) 250-750MCM or
120/208 400/600 MLTB3-600FT 253/4 (655) 201/2 (521) 71/4 (184) 45 (20.5)
(8) 3/0-250MCM PER PHASE
3Ø 4W
800/1200 MLTB3-1200FT f
LUG (8) 1/0-750MCM PER PHASE 461/4 (1175) 24 (610) 71/4 (184) 60 (27.3)
Main Lug Feed Kit - For direct tap (no tap box) from safety switch to meter stack
Use with
Ampere Catalogue Cable lug size per phase - Weight -
System Meter
Rating Number suitable for Al. and Cu cables lbs.(kg)
Module Type
120/240 (1) 250 Kcmil - 750 Kcmil Cu/Al or MMC1 or
400/600 MLFK1 21/2 (1.1)
1Ø 3W (2) 3/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil Cu/AL MMC14-6125
120/208 (1) 250 Kcmil - 750 Kcmil Cu/Al or MMC3 or
400/600 MLFK3 3 (1.3)
3Ø 4W (2) 3/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil Cu/AL MM35-6125 MLFK1
Transition Box - Allows more working space to connect on Main Lug Feed Kit
Ampere Catalogue Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight -
System
Rating Number H W D lbs.(kg)
120/240
1Ø 3W
253/4 201/2 71/4 30
400/600 MTB-600
120/208 (655) (521) (184) (13.7)
3Ø 4W MTB-600
a Fusibleswitch can be mounted directly next to c Can

be used with even and odd number of metering f Module comes factory assembled for left hand side
metering stack with a Standard Tap Box or with a Main stacks. In addition, for odd number of stack connections, entry. For right hand side entry, bus bars and insulated
Lug Feed Kit (with or without Transition Box). adaptor kit #MTBK12 must be used. supports must be moved at the other hole set, marked
b Tap Box mounts directly next to the Meter Stack and is d Weight is based on 3Ø 4W system (Heaviest pcs). with an "R", before wall installation.
required to accommodate incoming main service cable, e Feed
through tap boxes are required when the main f For optional lugs, please contact your Siemens sales
unless Main Lug Feed Kit is used. Suitable for left and incoming cables enter and exit at the same end of line up. representative.
right side entry.

Meter Centres
b 240V modular meter centre is built for cold metering
b Load cables can exit from the top or the bottom of the stack
b Meter stack comes standard with knock-outs on the top tub end (see p. 2-15)c
Basic Meter Stack - Meter socket modules and front blank plates must be ordered seperately
Max. number of sub-ser-
2
Main Service Sub-service vice meter per stacka Height - Weight -
Catalogue Number
Voltage Voltage MOD lbs.(kg)
125A 200A H W D
CENTRES
METER
120/240 120/240
MMC1 6 4 67 (30.4)
1Ø3W 1Ø3W
120/208 120/208
MMC3 6 4 78 14 71/4
3Ø4W 3Ø4W 6
(1981) (356) (184)
MMC3 67 (31.8)
120/208 120/208
(with QJ/QR sub- 4 2
3Ø4W 3Ø4W
service breaker)
Complete Meter Stackab - Meter socket modules included

Main Service Sub-service Sub-service Meter Dimensions - Inches (mm) Height - Weight -
Catalogue Number
Voltage Voltage Socket included H W D MOD lbs.(kg)
120/240 120/240
MMC14-6125 6 x MMS4-125 109 (49.6)
1Ø3W 1Ø3W 78 14 71/4
6
120/208 120/208 (1981) (356) (184)
MMC35-6125 6 x MMS5-125 112 (50.9)
3Ø4W 3Ø4W
MMC3 MMC3-6125
a Provision only, breakers not included

b Complete meter stacks are factory balanced for
ease of installation
c Blank top end is also available on demand. Contact your
Siemens sales representative.

Meter Centres
Meter Socket Modulea
Sub- Meter Height
Catalogue Weight -
service Socket Number of Jaws Breaker Provision type Phase Connection
Number in. (mm) MOD lbs.(kg)
Voltage Rating
BQ, BQH, HBQ, 87/8

125A MMS4-125 4 AB 1 7 (3.2)
Q, QP, QPH, HQP (225)
120/240
2
MMS4-200 4 EQ96XX
1Ø3W 135/16
200A AB 1.5 11 (5)
QR2, QRH2, (338)
METER
CENTRES
d
MMS4-200QR 4
HQR2
b BQ, BQH, HBQ, c 87/8

125A MMS5-125 5 AB 1 7 (3.2)
Q, QP, QPH, HQP (225)
b
MMS5-200 5 EQ96XX
c 135/16
200A AB 1.5 11 (5)
120/208 d b QR2, QRH2, (338)
MMS5-200QR 5
3Ø4W HQR2
b BQ, BQH, HBQ, 135/16

100A MMS7-100 7 1.5 10 (4.6)
Q, QP, QPH, HQP c
(338)
AB
d b QR2, QRH2, 265/8
200A MMS7-200QR 7 3 16 (7.3)
HQR2 (3 phases) (676)
Main Bus Connector Kit - Allows the connection of two meter stacks
Sub- Max.
Catalogue Weight -
service Ampere Use with Meter Module Type
Number lbs.(kg)
Voltage Rating
120/240 600A MBSS1-600 MMC1 or 3 (1.3)

1Ø3W 1200A MBSS1-1200 MMC14-6125 7 (3.18)
120/208 600A MBSS3-600 MMC3 or 4 (1.82)

3Ø4W 1200A MBSS3-1200 MM35-6125 10 (4.55) MBSS1-600
Meter Socket Cable lug size per phase -

Modules suitable for Al and Cu cables
MMS4-125 Load: (1) #14 AWG - 2/0 AWG
MMS4-200
Load: (1) #6 AWG - 250 Kcmil
MMS4-200QR
MMS5-125 Load: (1) #14 AWG - 2/0 AWG
MMS5-200
Load: (1) #6 AWG - 250 Kcmil
MMS5-200QR
MMS7-100 Load: (1) #14 AWG - 2/0 AWG
MMS7-200QR Load: (1) #6 AWG - 250 Kcmil
a Provision only, breakers not included d Meter modules for QJ type breakers (MMS4-200QJ,
b Meter socket modules with 5 and 7 jaws can be MMS5-200QJ, MMS7-200) have been replaced by
assembled in the same meter stack as long as the meter modules for QR type breakers.
system is balanced.
c MMS5-125 and MMS5-200 have AB phase
connections by default. Phasing connections can be
changed on the field to AC or BC to balance the load
on the system.

Meter Centres
Sub-service Circuit Breakers - Maximum interruption rating for 240V AC
b Mounting hardware for BQ breakers must be ordered separately (#8217-6, #8217-12, #8217-100, #8217-200)
Catalogue Number
Ampere
Poles KAIC = 10kA KAIC = 22kA KAIC = 65kA
Rating
Plug-in Bolt-on Plug-in Bolt-on Plug-in Bolt-on
2 Q260 BQ2B060 Q260H BQ2B060H Q260HH HB2B060
2
a
60A
CENTRES
METER
70A

80A

90A
2 Q2100 BQ2B100 Q2100H or EQ9675 BQ2B100H Q2100HH HB2B100

100A
2 Q2110 BQ2B110 Q2110H BQ2B110H Q2110HH N/A

110A
3 Q3110 N/A Q3110H N/A Q3110HH N/A
2 Q2125 BQ2B125 Q2125H or EQ9677 BQ2B125H Q2125HH HQR23B125

125A
3 N/A QR23B125 N/A QRH23B125 N/A HQR23B125
2 EQ9683 QR22B150 EQ9683 QRH22B150 HQR22B150

150A N/A
3 N/A QR23B150 N/A QRH23B150 HQR23B150
2 QR22B175 EQ9684 QRH22B175 HQR22B175

175A N/A N/A
3 QR23B175 N/A QRH23B175 HQR23B175
2 EQ9685 QR22B200 EQ9685 QRH22B200 HQR22B200

200A N/A
3 N/A QR23B200 N/A QRH23B200 HQR23B200
Note: Low amperage circuit breakers (15-60A) available with installation of connector kit #MSMK-50
Corner Elbow Modules - Permit continuation from stack to stack around corners Inside
System Ampere Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight -
Catalogue Number
Voltage Rating H W D lbs.(kg)
Inside Elbow Modules

120/240 600 MEL1-IN-6
45 (20)
1Ø3W 1200 MEL1-IN-12
16 (406) 12 (304) 71/4 (184)
120/208 600 MEL3-IN-6
50 (23)
3Ø4W 1200 MEL3-IN-12
Outside Elbow Modules

Outside
120/240 600 MEL1-OUT-6
45 (20)
1Ø3W 1200 MEL1-OUT-12
16 (406) 12 (304) 71/4 (184)
120/208 600 MEL3-OUT-6
50 (23)
3Ø4W 1200 MEL3-OUT-12
Note: To connect a Tap Box to an Elbow, order MTBELK6 or MTBELK12. Connection from feed-through tap box 1200A to an
elbow is not possible.
a Connector kit #MSMK-50 is required for 60A breaker installation.

Meter Centres
Accessories
Catalogue Number Description Content
Blank meter socket filler plate required to cover empty space,

MBHP-2 2 half plates (1 MOD = 1 x MBHP-2)
each steel plate has a dimension of 4.3 x 14.1 in.
MLTB-L2750 Alternative lug kit for 600A standard tap boxes 4 lugs 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil Al/Cu
2
Connection adaptor kit for tap box MLTB1-1200 or MLTB3-1200

MTBK12 4 connector spacers and hardware
when used for output with an odd number of meter stacks
METER
CENTRES
Wall mounting rail of 64 in., meter stack is supplied with

MTRK-64 1 wall mounting track 64"
embossed hooks for this mounting rail system
Bus bar kit to connect a 600A standard or feed-through tap box

MTBELK6 4 Bus Bars and hardware
via a 600A corner elbow
Bus bar kit to connect a 1200A standard tap box via a 1200A
MTBELK12 8 Bus bars and hardware
corner elbow
MSSR Meter sealing ring 1 meter ring
Jumper bar 200A max, 5 jaws, to jump a metering position when

MUJP-5 2 jumper bars
the meter has temporarily been removed MBHP-2
Jumper bar 200A max, 7 jaws, to jump a metering position when
MUJP-7 3 jumper bars
the meter has temporarily been removed
SEALSC1 Sealing screw kit 25 sealing screws
SFLK-200 Subfeed lug kit 200A max. 4 lugs 6 AWG - 300 Kcmil Al/Cu
8217-6 BQ breaker mounting hardware 6 screws
Replacement cover for Meter Socket Modules

MC4-125 125A 4 & 5-jaw front cover plate QP & BQ breakers
MC4-200 200A 4 & 5-jaw front cover plate QP & BQ breakers

1 cover plate
MC4-200QR 200A 4 & 5-jaw front cover plate QR breaker 1 sealing ring
1 sealing screw
MC7-100 100A 7-jaw front cover plate QP & BQ breakers
MC7-200QR 200A 7-jaw front cover plate QR breaker MC4-125
Tap Box Modification Kits

MLTB-AP Al. plate punched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT
MLTB-AU Al. plate unpunched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT
MLTB-AUFT Al. plate unpunched for Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A
MLTB-FP Fiber plate punched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT 1 tap box tub end
MLTB-FPFT Fiber plate punched for Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A
MLTB-FU Fiber plate unpunched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT
MLTB-FUFT Fiber plate unpunched for Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A
Note: Multi-stack grounding is accomplished by running a bare wire through the factory installed lay-in lugs in the bottom of each stack. No grounding kit is required
except when an elbow module is used.

Meter Centres
Configurations with switch
With Switch With Transition Box and Switch
2
CENTRES
METER
MLTB1-600 MLTB1-600
MLTB3-600 MLTB3-600
MLTB1-1200 MLTB1-1200
MLTB3-1200 MLTB3-1200
MTB-600 MTB-600
Configurations with Standard Tap Box or Transition Box
Standard Tap Box connections
MLTB1-600 MLTB3-600
Tap Box / Boite de raccordement MLTB1-1200 Tap Box / Boite de raccordement

MLTB3-1200
Cat. no MLTB1-1200 240V max. - 1 ph - 3 Bus Bar / barre omnibus 1200A max.
Cat. no MLTB3-1200 240V max. - 3 ph - 4 Bus Bar / barre omnibus 1200A max.
L H Mou n tin g RH Mo u ntin g
LH Mou ntin g RH Mou ntin g
MLTB1-600 C C
MLTB3-600 B B B B
MLTB1-1200 A
N
A
N
A A
N N
MLTB3-1200
MTB-600 Tap Box Meter Center Meter Center Tap Box Tap Box Meter Center Meter Center Tap Box
Spacer Spacer Spacer Sp acer / Cale
3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4”
Tightening Torque / Couple de serrage Wire

Tightening Torque / Couple de serrage Wire / Fils
C onnectors #6 @ #4 50-70 in/lb Connectors #6 @ #4 50-70 in/lb-po/livres
Mounting Screw #10 25-30 in/lb C onnecteurs #2 @ #1 80-100 in/lb
in/l Mounting Screw #10 25-30 in/lb-po/livres Connecteurs #2 @ #1 80-100 in/lb-po/livres
Vis de montage 1/4 80-95 in/lb 1/0 @ 2/0 130-150 in/lb
in/l Vis de montage 1/4 80-95 in/lb-po/livres 1/0 @ 2/0 130-150 in/lb-po/livres
5/16 120-140 in/lb 3/0 @ 4/0 180-200 in/lb 5/16 120-140 in/lb-po/livres 3/0 @ 4/0 180-200 in/lb-po/livres
3/8 220-250 in/lb 250 @ 300MCM 200-250 in/lb 3/8 220-250 in/lb-po/livres 250 @ 300MCM 200-250 in/lb-po/livres
MMC1 400 @ 500MCM 300-350 in/lb MLTB3-1200 To Connect Meter Center / Pour connecter le centre de compteurs MMC3 400 @ 500MCM 300-350 in/lb-po/livres
MLTB1-1200 To Connect Meter Center 600 @ 750MCM 350-400 in/lb
in/l If this tap box is used for output and install with odd number of MMC3, use 600 @ 750MCM 350-400 in/lb-po/livres
If this tap box is used for output and install with odd number of MMC1, use connection adaptor kit MTBK12
connection adaptor kit MTBK12 Ground Wire Connectors Si cette boite de raccordement est utilisé comme boite de sortie avec un nombre Ground Wire Connectors
#6 @ 250MCM CU /AL #6 @ 250MCM CU/AL
impair de MMC3, utilisez le nécessaire de branchement MTBK12 Connecteurs de mise à la masse
Made in Canada Made in Canada

Fabrication Canadienne LL13069 Fabrication Canadienne LL13069
Part No 296-0079-003 Rev.:03 Part No 296-0079-004 Rev.:03

Data.08
Meter Centres
Configurations with feed through Tap Box 600A
MLTB1-600FT
2 METER
CENTRES
MLTB3-600FT
46 1/4
(1175)
253/4 MLTB1-600FT
(655) MLTB3-600FT
201/2 24.0
(521) (610)
Configurations with feed through Tap Box 1200A MLTB1-1200FT
MLTB3-1200FT
46 1/4 MLTB1-1200FT
(1175) MLTB3-1200FT
24.0
(610)
Note: For Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A, standard assembly is for left hand mounting. For right hand mounting, bus bar and insulated
support must be moved at the other hole set (marked with an "R") before wall installation.

Meter Centres
Meter Stack Mounting Dimensions - Inches (mm)
MMC1
MMC3
2
CENTRES
METER
Side View Back View

Meter Centres
Meter Modules Dimensions - Inches (mm)
Meter Socket Module: Meter Socket Modules:

MMS7-100 MMS4-125
MMS5-125
2 METER
CENTRES
Stack: MMC3
Meter Socket Modules: Meter Socket Module:

MMS4-200 MMS7-200QR
MMS5-200
MMS4-200QR
MMS5-200QR

Meter Centres
Knock Out Data for tap boxes tub end - Inches (mm)
B 11/4 - 11/2 - 2
A 3 - 3 1/2
Ref. K.O. Trade Size
2
CENTRES
METER
Knock Out Data for top meter stack tub end - Inches (mm)
11/4 - 2 - 21/2 - 3 D
1 - 11/4 - 2 - 21/2 C
1 - 11/4 - 11/2 - 2 B
3/4 - 1 A
K.O. Trade Size Ref.

Meter Centres
240V Modular Meter Centres Reference
Layout example - Reference only
System: 120/240V 1Ph 3W, 10kA
Dimension of each stack:

Height: 78" (1981mm)
2
Width: 14" (356mm)

er Center Layout
METER
CENTRES
Depth: 7 1/4" (184mm)

5 1/8"
Vented Cover Vented Cover Vented Cover Vented Cover 130mm
Height of the modules: ( 24 Modules)
r Construction Purpose Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A
125A Module: 8 7/8" (225.5mm)
1
120/240V 1Ph 3W, 10 KA Overall Width: 76 1/2" (1945mm)
Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A
on of each stack :
78" (1981mm)
4" (356mm)
1/4" (184mm) Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A Module 125A 100A
the modules :
dule: 8 7/8" (225.5mm) ( 24 Modules) 53 1/4"

Module 125A Module 125A Module 125A Module 125A 1353mm
100A 100A 100A 100A
Width : 76 1/2" (1945mm)

78"
1981mm
25 3/4" Direct Tap Main Cross Bus Main Cross Bus Main Cross Bus Main Cross Bus
compartment compartment compartment compartment 14 1/2"
655mm with Transition Box 368mm
5 1/8"
Vented Cover Vented Cover Vented Cover Vented Cover 130mm
20 1/2" 14" 14" 14" 14"

521mm 356mm 356mm 356mm 356mm

Meter Centres
600Y/347V Meter Centre General
General Specifications Service Breaker Provisions
Siemens 600Y/347V metering line 3-phase 4-wire 600Y/347Vac Each 600V meter stack has provision for
offers an ideal solution for restricted four 3-pole 200A max bolt-on type FXD6/
Enclosure
space projects. This metering solution HFXD6 circuit breaker. Non-interchange-
Type 1 enclosure. Meter stack comes
for 600Y/347V applications has been able trip unit breakers must be used for
standard with dripshield and blank end
designed in Canada based on contract- this application. Generous gutter space
walls (no knockout). Meter stack enclos-
ors’ feedback. Each meter stack houses allows for wiring for top or bottom of the
ure, barriers and end plates are manufac-
2
features designed with the contractor in meter module. All sub-service breaker
tured of galvanized steel. Front covers are
mind, to maximize productivity and mini- mounting hardware is provided with each
CENTRES
METER
fabricated of phosphatized steel finished
mize labour costs meter stack.
with ASA 61 light grey paint.
Voltage Neutral & Ground Provisions
Meter Socket Jaws
600Y/347V AC Each stack includes neutral & ground
Meter socket jaws consist of tin plated
provisions.
Amperage copper with steel spring reinforced clips
Horizontal bus bars rated for 1200A max. for reliable contact pressure. Positive align-
Vertical bus bars rated for 800A max. ment of jaws and stabs is assured by bus Connectors Wire size
Meter socket rated for 200A max. straps factory installed.
Neutral #6 @ 350MCM
#14 @ 2
Short Circuit rating Sub-Service Breaker
42,000A RMS symmetrical @ 600V max. High performance bolt-on circuit breakers Ground #6 @ 250MCM
when protected by 1200A maximum HRC can be selected to address site require-
class L type fuse ments from 70 to 200A. Interrupting
ratings up to 25kA combine thermal and
Standard
magnetic trip elements. Series rating is
CSA: C22.2 No. 229-M1988.
also available for approved combination
Certified under file #153416
up to 42kA when protected by 1200A
maximum HRC class L type fuse.
Features
b Robust and compact enclosure standard
with dripshield
b Sturdy bussing connections providing
durable support for each sub-service
breaker
b Breaker and bus bar protection allowing
screws recuperation
b Provision to padlock sub-service breaker
in the “off” position
b Large wireway separated from meter
area for easier connections.
b Trouble-free access to horizontal bars
and easy access to cabling area
b Reliable and simple busbar to busbar
connections

Meter Centres
600Y/347V Meter Centre Selection
600Y/347V Meter Stackab – 2 versions available
b Cold metering b Uses Siemens breakers 200A max, type FXD6 and HFXD6 only
b Includes 4 meter sockets 7-jaw rated for 200A max b Includes provisions for 4 sub-service breakers, 200A max.
b Load cables can exit enclosure at top and/or bottom b Type 1 enclosure, standard with dripshield and blank end walls
b Removable bottom plate to faciliate drilling holes for cable entry b Mounting hardware for 4 breaker is included in each stack
b Horizontal main bus bar rated for 1200A max b "HQ" version has hinges for wireway covers
2
Meter socket Vertical

Main rating and Number Circuit Bus Bar Overall dimensions in inches (mm)
METER
CENTRES
service Sub-service Catalogue number of of sub- breaker rating Weight -

H W D
voltage voltage number jaws service Type (Amp) lbs (kg)
• Revised •
Meter Centres
600Y/347V 600Y/347V MMC37-42006
200A 7-Jaw 4
FXD6,
800
761/4 205/8 1315/16
220 (100)
09/01/2015
3Ø4W 3Ø4W MMC37-42006HQ HFXD6 (1937) (524) (354)
600V Meter Centre Diagrams

Siemens Meter Centre Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
Cat. no MMC37-42006
600Y/347V AC - 3ph - 4 wire Cabling area
Type 1 enclosure
Power: Horizontal Main Bus bar 1200A max

800A max. per Vertical Bus Bar
Meter Socket Rating: 200A max. 7th Jaw
2
For use with Siemens main switches, main tap boxes or

METER
CENTRES
Sentron® SMP Switchboard

ON
Short Circuit Rating

Caution: When protected by 1200A maximum HRC class L
OFF
fuse, this switching and metering centre is suitable for use 7th Jaw
on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 42KA RMS
symmetrical, 600V maximum
Caution: The short-circuit rating shall be limited to that of the
device installed in it having the lowest short-circuit withstand or
current-interrupting rating except if the installation is conform
to the table below:
7th Jaw
Serie Combination
Meter When the main Meter Centre The maximum RMS
Module protection is: Siemens Breaker short circuit rating
Cabling area
Rating (A) (A) 3 phases,
347/600V AC
70A - 200A Fuses / Fusibles HFXD6 42 000
HRC Class L
7th Jaw
7th Jaw
Use Siemens breakers 200A max: Type FXD6, HFXD6, HHFXD6
Handle
Continuous load must not exceed 80% of the nominal rating. position
'ON'
ON toward
Wiring terminals are suitable for 60/75°C AI-CU conductors TOP
including compact stranded.
OFF
Phase Connectors: #6 @ 350MCM 7th Jaw
Neutral Connectors: #6 @ 350MCM

MMC37-42006 MMC37-42006HQ
#14 @ 2
Ground Wire Connector: #6 @ 250MCM ** Breaker FXD type Mounting Instruction
a Sub-service breakers are not to exceed meter socketCabling
ratingarea
b Breaker provision only, breaker must be ordered
separately. Breaker mounting hardware included with Torque
Tightening
Screw + lock
600Y/347V meter stack. washer + washer
Mounting Screws Connectors with Hex. Socket Screw
7th Jaw
2-18#10 Siemens
25-30 lb inCanada Limited Power
WireProduct
size: Catalogue
1/4 80-95 lb in #6Jaw@ #4
7th 50-70 lb in
5/16 120-140 lb in #2 @ #1 80-100 lb in
3/8 220-250 lb in 1/0 @ 2/0 130-150 lb in Handle
3/0 @ 4/0 180-200 lb in position
Breaker connector screws 250 @ 300MCM 200-250 lb in 'ON'
ON toward
400 @ 500MCM 200-250 lb in
TOP
Meter Centres
600Y/347V Meter Centre Accessories
Sub-service Circuit Breakersa
b Assembled circuit breaker without lugs (lugs not required for this application)
b Non-interchangeable trip only
b Breaker mounting hardware provided with meter stack
b Additional information on breaker available in section 5 page 5-24
Max. interrupting rating for 600Y/347V
2
22 kA 25 kA
Amperage Rating Number of Poles Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
CENTRES
METER
70A 3 FXD63B070 HFXD63B070
80A 3 FXD63B080 HFXD63B080
90A 3 FXD63B090 HFXD63B090
100A 3 FXD63B100 HFXD63B100
110A 3 FXD63B110 HFXD63B110
125A 3 FXD63B125 HFXD63B125
150A 3 FXD63B150 HFXD63B150

Circuit Breaker FXD6 Frame
175A 3 FXD63B175 HFXD63B175
200A 3 FXD63B200 HFXD63B200
Standard Tap Boxes

b “IN” lugs included
b Suitable for left and right hand side entry (standard configuration is left hand side)
Main Amperage Catalogue Cable lug size per phase - Overall Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight -
service Rating (Amp) Number suitable for Al and Cu cables H W D lbs (kg)
600Y/347V 600 MLTB3-6006 (1) 1/0 @ 750MCM Cu/Al 251/8 (638) 271/4 (692) 1315/16 (354) 68 (30.8)
3Ø4W 1200 MLTB3-12006 (1) 1/0 @ 750MCM Cu/Al 251/8 (638) 271/4 (692) 1315/16 (354) 70 (31.8)
Feed Through Tap Boxes

b “IN” and “OUT” lugs included
b Feed Through tap boxes are suitable for left and right hand side entry
Main Amperage Catalogue Cable lug size per phase - Overall Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight -
service Rating (Amp) Number suitable for Al. And Cu cables H W D lbs (kg)
(4) 250 @ 750 MCM Cu/Al or

600Y/347V 600 MLTB3-600FT6 251/8 (638) 271/4 (692) 1315/16 (354) 74 (33.6)
(8) 3/0 @ 250 MCM Cu/AL
3Ø4W
1200 MLTB3-1200FT6 (8) 1/0 @ 750 MCM Cu/Al 505/8 (1285) 271/4 (692) 1315/16 (354) 145 (65.8)
MLTB3-6006 MLTB3-600FT6
a reaker mounting hardware kit included with 600V

B
meter stack.

Meter Centres
Close coupled option with Siemens SMP switchboard
b SMP must have main breaker at top of the section
b Sill channel optional
b Close coupled option available for 1200A only
b Main bus connector kit required to connect stack with SMP. Main bus kit needs 15’’ high of
space at the bottom of the SMP distribution section. In SMP with Hydro compartment, only
7.5" available for distribution breakers, just below the Hydro compartment.
2
b Suitable for left and right hand side entry based on main bus connector kit selection
(standard configuration is left hand side entry as displayed below)
METER
CENTRES
Main Bus Connector Kit

b Kit includes optional meter centre sill channel
Main service Amperage Weight
Voltage Rating (Amp) Catalogue Number Description in lbs (kg)
SMP Connector
1200 MBSMP3-12006 12 (5.4)
600Y/347V kit 1200A Max
3Ø4W SMP Connector kit
1200 MBSMP3-12006G 12 (5.4)
1200A Max (left)
Meter centre MMC37-42006 with bus bar joining kit MBSMP3-12006 (where Meter Centre is on the right of the SMP) and with
MBSMP3-12006G (where Meter Centre is on the left of the SMP) – Inches (mm)

Meter Centres
600Y/347V Meter Centre Accessories
Main Bus Link Connector Kits
b Main Bus Link Connector Kits are required for each additional stack when joining two
or more meter stacks.
b The first stack installation does not require bus links when installed with a tap box
(standard or Feed through). The tap box is supplied with main service lugs and bus bar
link connectors.
2
Main Amperage Catalogue Weight -
CENTRES
METER
service Rating Number Description lbs (kg)
600Y/347V 600 MBSS3-6006 Stack to stack connector kit 600A 2 (0.9)

3Ø4W 1200 MBSS3-12006 Stack to stack connector kit 1200A 4 (1.8)
MBSS3-6006
Inside Elbow Modules
b Allow the continuation from stack to stack around wall corners.
b Can be mounted on the left and right hand side of the meter centre. Inside
Main Amperage Catalogue Overall Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight -
service Rating Number lbs (kg)
Wall
H W D
600Y/347V 600 MEL3-IN-6006 171/2 (406) 201/2 (521) 131/2 (343) 65 (29.5)
3Ø4W 1200 MEL3-IN-12006 171/2 (406) 201/2 (521) 131/2 (343) 75 (34.0) D
W
Accessories
Catalogue
Content
Number Description
SFLK-2006 Branch sub-feed lug kit, 600V 4 lugs

D
MSSR Meter sealing ring 1 meter ring
W
MUJP-7 Jumper bars 7 jaws 200A 3 jumper bars
MBP2006 Blank meter plate covering meter socket and breaker provision 1 blank plate Left mounting shown. Can be mounted on
the right side of the meter stack if needed.
Replacement Parts
Catalogue
Content
Number Description
MC7-200WS Repl Front cover wiring section
MC7-200WSHQ Repl Front cover wiring section for HQ version
MC7-200FD6 Repl Front cover breaker section 1 replacement

plate and
MC7-2006TC Repl Top cover plate
Mounting
MC7-2006BC Repl Bottom cover plate hardware
MC7-2006AP Repl Access plate

SFLK-2006
MC7-200600 Repl Front meter socket cover
12 carriage bolt
SCR-6006 Repl screws Stack to stack conn kit 600A
screws, washers
& nuts.
SCR-12006 Repl screws Stack to stack conn kit 1200A 4 regular screws
& washers
6 allen key type

screws &
SCRFXD6 Repl breaker mounting screws washers. MBP2006
2 long screws for
breaker support

Meter Centres
Configuration with standard Tap Box - Inches (mm)
Standard tap box connections
MLTB3-6006 MLTB3-12006
2
LH Mounting LH Mounting
METER
CENTRES
25.1 MLTB3-6006
(638) MLTB3-12006 Note: Standard tap box can be mounted on the right hand side of the meter stack if needed.
27.2
(692)
Configuration with feed-through tap box 600A - Inches (mm)
600A feed-through tap box connections
MLTB3-600FT6
LH Mounting
25.1 MLTB3-600FT6
(638)
Note: 600A Feed-through tap box can be mounted
on the right hand side of the meter stack if needed.
27.2
(692)

Meter Centres
Configuration with feed-through tap box 1200A - Inches (mm)
1200A feed-through tap box connections
MLTB3-1200FT6
2
LH Mounting
CENTRES
METER
50.6 MLTB3-1200FT6
(1285)
27.2 Note: 1200A feed-through tap box can be

(692)
mounted on the right-hand side of the meter
stack if needed.
Bottom plate for 600V Meter stack - Inches (mm)
Section can be easily removed to allow contractor to

drill entry hole outside the equipment.

Meter Centres
600Y/347V Meter stack dimensions
2 METER
CENTRES
JUSQU'AU BOUT
DE LA POIGNÉE
Front View Side View
600Y/347V Meter stack mounting dimensions
Back View

Meter Centres
600Y/347V Meter Centre Diagrams
600Y/347V Meter stack close coupled with SMP dimensions
Meter MMC37-42006 with bus bar joining kit MBSMP3-12006
where Meter Centre is on the right of the SMP - Inches(mm)
2
CENTRES
METER

Meter Centres
600Y/347V Meter Centre Reference
Layout example - Reference only
System: 1200A, 600Y/347V 3Ph 4W, 42kA
Dimension of each stack:

Height: 76 1/4" (1937mm)
2
Width: 20 5/8" (524mm)

er Layout
METER
CENTRES
Depth: 12 7/8" (326mm) 5 7/8"

Vented Cover Vented Cover 150mm
ction Purpose Height of the modules:
Module: 13 1/8" (333mm) 200A 100A
00V 3Ph 4W, 42 KA Overall Width: 1740mm

ck :
mm)
m) 200A 100A
m)
m)
52 5/8"
1337mm
m 100A 100A
76 1/4"
1937mm
100A 70A
25 1/8"
638mm Standard Tap Box Main Cross Bus Main Cross Bus
compartment compartment
17 3/4"
450mm
27 1/4" 20 5/8" 20 5/8"

692mm 524mm 524mm
158

REVISED
03/2021
POWER PRODUCT Safety Switches
Contents - Safety Switches

Air Conditioning Disconnects 3-2 − 3-3
Safety Switch Guide Form Specifications 3-4 − 3-5
Feature Comparison 3-6
Enclosure Types 3-7
Light Duty switches - Selection 3-8
ID Safety Switches
ID switches - Selection 3-9
Accessories - ID Switches 3-10
ID Switches Dimensions 3-11
VBII Catalogue Numbering System
3
VBII Catalogue Numbering System 3-12
General Duty Safety Switches
SAFETY SWITCHES
General Duty Switches—Features 3-13
ID Switch 240V Fusible and Non-Fusible—Selection 3-14
Heavy Duty Safety Switches
Heavy Duty Switches—Features 3-15
240V Fusible—Selection 3-16
600V Fusible—Selection 3-17
600V Non-Fusible—Selection 3-18
Type 4/4X and 12 with Viewing Window—Selection 3-19
Special Applications Safety Switches
4-Pole and 6-Pole—Selection 3-20
Interlocked Receptacle—Selection 3-21
Accessories—Heavy Duty Switches 3-22 − 3-24
VBII Safety Switch Replacement Parts 3-25
Dimensions and Weights
Heavy Duty Switches 3-26 − 3-28
Type 1 and 3R Knockout Diagrams 3-29 − 3-31
4-Pole and 6-Pole Switch Dimensions 3-32
Double-Throw Switches
Heavy Duty Switch Selection 3-33 − 3-35
Dimensions 3-36
Enclosed Rotary Disconnect Switches 3-37 − 3-38
Window Switch
Safety Switches
Non-Fused Air Conditioning Disconnects
Selection
240V Non-Fused Disconnect cUL listed, Type 3R enclosure
Catalogue Ampere Maximum Disconnect Std. Skid

Number Rating Horsepower Type Pkg. Qty.
WN2060 60 10 Non-Fused Pullout 6 480
5.14 3.049
R.156
3
Features Benefits
SAFETY SWITCHES
b Ample Wiring Space b The larger enclosure allows for ample wiring space.
5.14 3.049
b Rugged Design 5.14 b Manufactured with powder coated G90 galvanized
@ 0.312
3.049 R.156 steel for fade, scratch
x3
and corrosion resistanceR.156 2.750
b Numerous Knockouts b All (6) knockouts are easy to remove. The sidewall knockouts provide access from the 7.250
sides of the device. Every knockout has 1/2", 3/4" and 1" provisions.
b Raised Mounting Embosses b (4) Raised mounting embosses keep the unit away from the wall, preventing dirt
build-up. The upper mounting hole is shaped to be used as a hanger.
@ 0.312 2.250
x3
b Copper Conductors b Copper current carrying part allows for 2.750
a cooler, longer lasting operation.
@ 0.312 7.250 1.562
b Pullout Switch x3 b The pullout switch design
2.750
allows you to safely and easily de-energize the load terminals.
1.562
0.750
b Removable Door b The easily removable door makes it possible to wire the device with absolutely no
7.250
interference. 1.375
0.
2.250 2.750
Dimensions - Inches*
2.375
4.750
1.562 1.562
2.250
Non-Fused 5.14
0.750
3.049 6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00
R.156 0.219
1.375 1.562
1.562 0.667
2.750
0.750 2.375
4.750
0.867 0.219
1.375
0.667
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.752.750
x @ 1.00
@ 0.312 1.375
x3 2.375
2.750
2.7504.750
@.240
7.250
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00 0.867

Wiring Diagram
2.250 1.375
2.750
@.240 Pullout Disconnect

1.562 1.562
0.750 0.867
0.219
1.375
1.375 0.667
2.750
2.750 LOAD Bonded LOAD
2.375
4.750 @.240 LINE Neutral LINE
Removable Door
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00
Wire Range Table
Copper Aluminum
Connector
Solid Standard Solid Standard
Line #14-8 #14-3 #12-8 #12-3
0.867
Load #14-8 #14-3 #12-8 #12-3
1.375 Neutral #12-8 #12-2 #12-8 #12-2
2.750
Equip Grnd. #12-8 #12-2 #12-8 #12-2
@.240
* For inches/millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

Safety Switches
Fused Air Conditioning Disconnects
Selection
240V Fused Disconnect cUL listed, Type 3R enclosure
Catalogue Ampere Maximum Fuse Std. Skid

Number Rating Horsepower Class Pkg. Qty.
WF2030 30 3 H 6 480
WF2060 60 10 H 6 480
5.144 3.425
3.50
2x @ 0.875 MAX
3
Features Benefits
SAFETY SWITCHES
b Ample Wiring Space b The larger enclosure allows for ample wiring space.
b Rugged Design b Manufactured 5.144with powder coated G90 galvanized steel 3.425 for fade, scratch
5.14 3.049
2x @ 0.875 MAX and corrosion3.50resistance 3x @ 0.50
R.156
b Numerous Knockouts b All (6) knockouts are easy to remove. The sidewall knockouts provide access from3xthe @ 1.00
9.09
sides of the device. Every knockout has 1/2", 3/4" 2.921

and 1" provisions. 3x @ 0.312
b Raised Mounting Embosses b (4) Raised mounting embosses keep the unit away from the wall, preventing THRU
dirt
build-up. The upper mounting hole is shaped to be used as a hanger.
b Copper Conductors b Copper current carrying part allows 3x @ 0.50 for a2.25
cooler, longer lasting operation.3.00
b Pullout Switch @ 0.312
x3 b The pullout switch design allows you to safely 9.09
and easily de-energize the load terminals.
b Removable Door The easily removable
b2.921 door makes3x @it1.00
2.750
possible to wire the device with absolutely no
interference. 7.2503x @ 0.312
THRU 2.375
4.750 1.00
Dimensions - Inches*
1.375 1.000
6x @ 0.50 @ 0.75 @ 1.00
2.750 KNOCKOUT
2.25 3.00
Fused 2.250
5.144 3.425
3.50
2x @ 0.875 MAX 2.375 0.219
4.750 1.00 1.562
1.562
1.375 1.000
0.750
2.750
0.25
1.00
0.219
1.375
0.667
2.750
2.375 @ 0.250 THRU 1.375
3x @ 0.50
4.750
2.750
9.09
3x @ 1.00
Wiring Diagram
2.921 0.25
1.00
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00 3x @ 0.312
THRU
@ 0.250 THRU 1.375 6x @ 0.50 @ 0.75 @ 1.00
2.750
KNOCKOUT Fuse Block
2.25 3.00
0.867
Bonded
2.375 0.219
Neutral
4.750 1.00
1.375
1.375
1.000
LOAD LOAD
2.750
2.750 LINE LINE
@.240
Removable Door Wire Range Table
Copper Aluminum
Connector
Solid Standard Solid Standard
1.00
0.25 Line #14-8 #14-3 #12-8 #12-3
Load #14-8 #14-3 #12-8 #12-3
Neutral #12-8 #12-2 #12-8 #12-2
@ 0.250 THRU 1.375
Equip Grnd. #12-8 #12-2 #12-8 #12-2
2.750
* For inches/millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

Safety Switches
Guide Form Specifications Product Overview
ID Switches
Application ID Switches are intended for applications where reliable performance and continuity of service are needed, but where duty requirements are not
severe and usual service conditions prevail. Not suitable for Direct Current (DC) system.
Short Circuit Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than:
Withstand Ratings 200kA RMS symetrical at 600V AC maximum for 30-200A.
100kA RMS symetrical at 600V AC maximum for 400-600A.
Fuses Fusible switches will accept the following CSA class fuses:
H.R.C. Form I Class J*, R or H & H.R.C. Form II fuses if the accepted adaptor kits are provided.
3
If switch is used to its maximum Horse Power Rating, Time delay type fuses
may be required for starting purposes.
SAFETY SWITCHES
*Not applicable for switch ID321, use switch ID361.

Cover Interlocks Voidable cover interlocks prevents cover from being opened when switch is in the “ON” position and prevents switch from being turned
“ON” when door is opened.
Specifications CSA Certified under file #13076 as enclosed switches. Fusible switches are suitable for service entrance when neutral is installed.
Meets CSA C22.2 No.4 Enclosed Switches.
Seismic Qualifications No Seismic qualification
Groundable All ID switches (both Fusible and Non-Fusible) are either supplied with factory installed neutrals or accept field addable neutrals.
Neutral
Padlocks Padlock cover latch. Off padlock provision on handle.
HP & Load Break Ratings ID switches are both load break and horsepower rated.

Safety Switches
Guide Form Specifications Product Overview
VBII Heavy Duty Double Throw

Application Heavy Duty Switches are intended for use in applications where: Double throw switches are intended to
1. Rugged construction, reliable performance, continuity of service transfer loads from one power source to another. All double throw
and ease of maintenance are emphasized, or switches are CSA certified. Switches are rated for use on systems
with an available fault current of up to 10,000 AIC when protected
2. Available fault currents higher than 10,000A are likely to be with Class H fuses or 200,000 AIC when protected with Class R, J
encountered, such as in manufacturing plants, mass production or Class T fuses.
industries, and commercial, institutional and other large buildings
served by network systems or transformers of higher capacities.
3. System voltage is 600V AC or DC Max.
4. A Type 12 or 4/4X enclosure is required.
3
SAFETY SWITCHES
Short Circuit Suitable for use on systems capable of delivering not more than 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes of fault current as follows:
Withstand Ratings Sw. Rating & Tpye AIC Rating Protective Devicea
All Heavy Duty & DT 10,000 Circuit Breaker
30-600A HD & DT 10,000 Class H Fuse
30-600A HD 200,000 Class R, J or T Fuse
30-600A DT 200,000 Class R, J or T Fuse
800 & 1200A HD 200,000 Class L or T Fuse
Fuses Fusible switches will accept the following CSA class fuses: Fusible switches will accept the following CSA class fuses:
30-600A “HD” Class H & K, Class R with kit 30-200A “DT” - Class H & K, Class R with kit
30-600A, 600V “HD” Class J-move base 30 & 60A 600V “DT” - Class J-move base
100-600A, 240V “HD” Class J-move base 100-200A “DT” - Class J-move base, Class T with kit
100-200A “HD” Class T with kit 400-600A “DT” - Class J-standard, Class T-move bases
400-600A “HD” Class T-move bases
800-1200A “HD” Class L, Class T with kitb
Cover nterlocks Voidable dual cover interlocks standard on all heavy duty Dual cover interlocks standard on all double throw switches.
switches. Prevents cover from being opened when switch is in the Prevents cover from being opened when switch is in the “ON”
“ON” position and prevents switch from being turned “ON” when position and prevents switch from being turned “ON” when door
door is opened. is opened.
Specifications CSA certified under file #24563 as enclosed switches. Fusible CSA certified under file #24563 as enclosed switches. Meets
switches also suitable as service entrance when neutral bonded CSA C22.2 No.4 Enclosed switches.
to the enclosure is installed. Meets CSA C22.2 No.4 Enclosed
Switches.
Seismic Qualifications All HD switches and “DT” type double throw switches have been tested and comply with the 2010 California Building Code (CBC) and
with the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) - Compliance Level SDS = 1.85 g
Groundable Neutral All switches (both Fusible and Non-Fusible) are either supplied All will accept field addable neutrals.
with factory installed neutrals or accept field addable neutrals.
Padlocks Padlockable cover latch and multiple OFF padlock provisions Padlockable cover latch and multiple OFF padlock provisions
on handle. on handle.
HP & Load Break Ratings All Heavy Duty and Double Throw Switches are both load break and horsepower rated.
a Theprotective device can either be a fuse installed in a b ClassT kit available for 240V max. applications on
fusible switch or an upstream fuse or circuit breaker 1200A switches.
protecting a non-fusible switch. The ampere rating of the
upstream protective device must not exceed the switch
ampere rating.

Feature Comparison
Product Overview
Light Duty VBII
ID Switches Double Throw Features/Ratings
(Plug Fuse) Heavy Duty
— b b b 30 thru 600 Amps
— — b — 800 and 1200 Amps
b b b b 240 Volt AC
— b b b 600 Volt AC
— — b b 250 Volt DC
— — b — 600 Volt DC on
Double-break visible
— — b b
blade design (30-200A)
Quick-make, quick-break
b b b b
switching action
Highly visible ON/OFF
b b b b
3
handle indication
Handle design for hook
— — b —
stick operation
SAFETY SWITCHES
b b b b Padlockable cover latch

b b b b Padlockable handle
Single voidable cover
— b b b
interlock
Dual voidable cover
— b b b
interlock
b b b b Type 1 enclosure in operation
b — b b Type 3R enclosure
— — b — Type 12 enclosure
— — b — Type 4/4X enclosures
Generous wiring
gutters that meet CSA
b b b b
and CEC wire-bending
space requirements
Lugs suitable for
b b b b copper or aluminum at
60˚ or 75˚C
CU/AL wire lugs that
b b b b meet CSA C22.2 No.65-
03 requirements
Suitable for field-con-
— — b b vertible — compression
connectors
All plated copper current off
— b b b carrying parts(except
lugs)
Spring reinforced Fuse
— b b b Clips(except 30A general Double Break Switching Action
duty)b
Clear line terminal Like the time-proven Vacu-Break Design,
— b b b the Siemens VBII double break switching
shield available
— b b b Replacement parts action breaks the arc in two places in
Field addable 200% 30-200A ratings. This reduces heat
— — b — generation and increases switching
neutral
—
Provisions for CSA Class speed by doubling the breaking distance.
b bg bg
T, R and H Fuses The result is enhanced performance and
— ba b ba
Provisions for CSA Class increased longevity. We also provide the
J and L Fuses
most visible blade design available today.
— — b b Metal nameplate Unlike conventional knife blade switches,
— b b b Aux. switch kits the blades are self-aligning to ensure
— — bd —
Type 4X with stainless positive contact. In addition, they have
steel interior parts no wear and friction point since the
Rolled flange enclosure
— — b —
design
“electrical hinge” has been eliminated.
The result is a very fast, positive and
reliable switching action for even the
most severe applications.
a Only 800 & 1200A HD switches will accept Class L d 30-200A Type VBII in stainless steel enclosures. f 200A general duty switches have aluminum neutral
fuses. e 60-200A. assemblies.
b 30A general duty switches have fuse clips constructed g 100-200A GD, 100-200A DT and 100-1200A HD switches
of spring type copper. will accept Class T fuses.
c Not supplied on 30A outdoor & plug fuse switches.

Safety Switches
Heavy Duty Product Overview
Enclosure Types
A Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to
h
provide protection against contact with the enclosed equipment
in locations where unusual service conditions do not exist.
B Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily
h
to provide a degree of protection against falling rain and sleet
and must remain undamaged by the formation of ice on the
enclosure. They are not intended to provide protection against
conditions such as dust, internal condensation, or internal icing.
C Type 4, 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor
h
use primarily to provide a degree of protection against
windblown dust, rain, splashing water and hose-directed water.
3
They are not intended to provide protection against conditions
such as internal condensation or internal icing. Also meets h
A h
B
SAFETY SWITCHES
4X definition by providing a high degree of protection
against corrosion. Siemens 30-200A stainless steel 4X switches
are supplied stainless interior parts and hardware as standard.
D Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use
h
primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown
dust, rain, splashing water and hose-directed water. They are
not intended to provide protection against conditions such as
internal condensation or internal icing.
E Type 12a enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to
h
provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and
dripping water. They are not intended to provide protection
against conditions such as internal condensation.
h
C h
D h
E
Load Break Ratings Horsepower Ratings

All Siemens safety switches are load break rated. The load ID and VBII safety switches, where appropriate, are horsepower
break rating is assigned by UL/CSA after the switching unit rated. Ratings are approved by CSA after the switching unit
has successfully performed the following tests: has undergone testing to determine its acceptability which
includes repeated interruption of the locked rotor current of
Number of the motor for which it is to be rated as follows:
Switch ON/OFF Number of Operations
Ampere Operations With Without Max HP Number of ON/OFF Number of Cycles
Rating per Minute Current Current Total Rating Operations per minute of Operation
30–100 6 6000 4000 10000 100 6 50
200 5 6000 2000 8000 500 1 10
400 4 1000 5000 6000
600 3 1000 4000 5000
800 2 500 3000 3500
1200 1 500 2000 2500
a VBIIType 12 switches are also rated 3R & 3S for outdoor use. Type 3R is defined in B above. 3S rated
enclosures provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and allow operation when the
enclosure is ice laden.

Light Duty Enclosed Switches
Plug Fuse and 60A Special Application Type Selection
Features
b CSA Certified under file #24563
b Compact size
b Horsepower rated
b Indoor and outdoor enclosures
b Quick make-quick break mechanism
b Visible “ON”-“OFF” indications
b Padlock-off handle feature
b Door padlock provision
b All fusible switches suitable for use as service
entrance equipement
3
b Bondable neutral (where indicated)

SAFETY SWITCHES
b Lugs suitable for copper or aluminum wire

b Switches accept plug fuses only - fuses
not included
b Hubsc — see page 3-26
b Ground Bar Kit: GSGK60c
b Knockout diagrams — see page 3-31 and 3-32
Dimensions - in. (mm)

Enclosure Type Height Width Depth
1 8 ⁄4 (210)
1
5 ⁄2 (140)
1
3 (76)
3R 81⁄4 (210) 53⁄8 (137) 31⁄8 (79)
Wire Range Table

Switch Type Wire Range
120/240 Volt Fusible

#14 AWG - #8 AWG Al/Cud
30 Amp
120/240 Volt Non-Fusible

#14 AWG - #3 AWG Al/Cu
60 Amp
Horsepower Ratings a
Indoor — Type 1 Outdoor — Type 3R
Ampere 1-Phase, 2-Wire
Rating
Ship. Wt. (lbs.)
Catalogue Number Ship. Wt. (lbs.) Catalogue Number Standard Maximum
Pkg. of 10
120/240 Volt Fusible

1-Pole and Solid Neutral b 120 Volt — 1-Phase, 2-Wire
30 LFC111N 3.6 — — 1/2 2
2-Pole and Solid Neutral b 120/240 Volt — 2-Phase, 3-Wire

30 LFC211N 3.5 LFC211NR 35 1/2 2
240 Volt Non-Fused

2-Pole Special Application Switch 240 Volt — 1-Phase, 2-Wire
60 — — LNFC222R c 35 3 10
a Dual horsepower ratings: b Has service entrance label. CSA certified as d Line lugs are CSA approved for #14 to #6 Cu/Al cable.
Std. — applies when non-time delay plug fuses "Enclosed Switches" (suitable for use as service
are installed. equipment where indicated).
Max — applies when time-delay plug fuses are installed. c Bottom cable entry and exit only. No hub provision
supplied. GSGK60 is included and factory installed.

Type ID Switches Catalogue Numbering System Product Overview
ID 3 6 4 NF
Enclosure Type
Omit = Type 1, Indoor
3
Switch Type
SAFETY SWITCHES
ID = ID switch
Fused or Non-Fused
Omit = Fusible
NF = Non-Fused
Number of Poles
2 = 2
3 = 3
4 = 3 + neutral
Voltage
2 = 240V
6 = 600V
Amperes
1 = 30A 5 = 400A
2 = 60A 6 = 600A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A

ID Switches
Selection
Features
b CSA Certified under file #13076
b General Duty switch designed for the canadian contruction market
b Compact size with integrated handle
b Horsepower rated
b Type 1 enclosure for indoor applications
b Quick make-quick break mechanism
b Visible “ON”-“OFF” indications
b Padlock-off handle feature
b Door padlock provision
b ID switches will accept the following CSA class fuses: Class H,
Class K, Class R (Adapter kits are required) and Class T (Adapter
3
kits are required)

b Fuse Puller included for 30-200A
SAFETY SWITCHES
b Manufactured in Canada for quick delivery and easy access to

replacement parts
b Dimensions and knockout diagram — see page 3-14
b NEW! 240V, 2P & 3P, 30A-200A Service Entrance ID Switches
Horsepower Ratings
Indoor — Type 1
Ampere 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC Skid
System Rating Catalogue Number Unit Weight - lbs (kg) 1-Phase 3-Phase 1-Phase 3-Phase 1-Phase 3-Phase 250 Volt DC Qty.
240V Fusible
2-Pole, 2-Fuse and Solid Neutrala 240 Volt AC.
30 ID221 13 (5.90) — — — — — — — 55
60 ID222 13 (5.90) — — — — — — — 55
100 ID223 18 (8.17) — — — — — — — 30
200 ID224 32 (14.52) — — — — — — — 20
400 ID225 76 (34.47) — 125 — — — — — 6
600 ID226 88 (39.92) — 200 — — — — — 6
3-Pole, 3-Fuse 240 Volt AC.

30 ID321 12.61 (5.72) 3 7.5 — — — — — 55
60 ID322 12.61 (5.72) 10 15 — — — — — 55
100 ID323 17.22 (7.81) 15 30 — — — — — 30
200 ID324 31.52 (14.3) 15 60 — — — — — 20
a
3-Pole, 3-Fuse and Solid Neutral 240 Volt AC.
30 ID421 13 (5.90) — — — — — — — 55
60 ID422 13 (5.90) — — — — — — — 55
100 ID423 18 (8.17) — — — — — — — 30
200 ID424 32 (14.52) — — — — — — — 20
400 ID425 89 (40.36) — 125 — — — — — 6
600 ID426 102 (46.27) — 200 — — — — — 6
600V Fusible
3-Pole, 3-Fuse 240 Volt AC / 480 Volt AC / 600 Volt AC.
30 ID361 12.61 (5.72) 3 7.5 — 15 10 20 — 55
60 ID362 12.61 (5.72) 10 15 — 30 25 50 — 55
100 ID363 17.22 (7.81) 15 30 — 60 40 75 — 30
200 ID364 31.52 (14.3) 15 60 — 125 50 150 — 20
400 ID365 88 (39.62) — 125 — 250 — 350 — 6
600 ID366 101 (45.81) — 200 — 400 — 600 — 6
600V Non-Fusible
3-Pole, 3-Fuse 240 Volt AC / 480 Volt AC / 600 Volt AC.
30 ID361NF 12.18 (5.52) 3 7.5 — 15 10 20 — 55
60 ID362NF 12.18 (5.52) 10 15 — 30 25 50 — 55
100 ID363NF 16.58 (7.52) 15 30 — 60 40 75 — 30
200 ID364NF 29.64 (13.44) 15 60 — 125 50 150 — 20
400 ID365NF 87 (39.46) — 125 — 250 — 350 — 6
600 ID366NF 97 (44) — 200 — 400 — 600 — 6
a Suitable for use as service equipment when neutral is bonded to the enclosure.

ID Switches
Accessories Selection
Neutral Kits Class R Fuse Adaptor Kits Class T Fuse Adaptor Kits
Standard Neutral Kits 30-600A ID switches accept Class R 100-600A ID switches accept Class
Switch Neutral Kit fuses using the appropriate adaptor T fuses using the appropriate adap-
Ampere Rating Catalogue Number kit (One kit per pole required) tor kit (One kit per pole required)
30 N60
R Fuse Adaptor Kit T Fuse Adaptor Kit
60 N60 Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Switch Switch
100 N100 Ampere Rating 240V 600V Ampere Rating 240V 600V
200 N200 30 RFAK21 RFAK61 100 TFAK23 TFAK63
400 N400ID 60 RFAK22 RFAK62 200 TFAK24 TFAK64
600 N600ID 100 RFAK3 400 TFAK52 TFAK55
200 RFAK4 600 TFAK62 TFAK65
Fuse Puller Kits 400 RFAK6
Fuse Puller are field replaceable in ID switches 600
3
RFAK6
30-200A (one kit required per 3-pole switch)
SAFETY SWITCHES
Switch
Ampere Rating
Fuse Puller Kit
Catalogue Number
Wire Ranges (Line, Load and Standard Neutral)
30 FP2 Switch Number of Line, Load Lug Neutral Lug
Ampere Rating lugs per pole Wire Range Wire Range
60 FP2
30 1 #14 - 2 AWG (Al/Cu) #14 - 4 AWG (Al/Cu)
100 FP3
60 1 #14 - 2 AWG (Al/Cu) #14 - 4 AWG (Al/Cu)
200 FP4
Line: # 6 - 120 AWG (Al/Cu)
100 1 #14 - 2/0 AWG (Al/Cu)
Load: #14 - 1/0 AWG (Al/Cu)
Auxiliary Contacts 200 1 #6 - 250 MCM (Al/Cu) #6 - 300 MCM (Al/Cu)
Switch Aux. Contact 400 1 (2) 250-1/0 or (1) 750-1/0 (2) 250-1/0 or (1) 750-1/0
Ampere Rating Catalogue Number
600 2 (2) 250-1/0 or (1) 750-1/0 (2) 250-1/0 or (1) 750-1/0
With 1 NO & 1 NC
30-100 MSSAK116 Contact Ratings (Continuous duty 10 Amps)
200 MSSAK126 Volts (AC) Inrush Amps Break Amps Volts (DC) Inrush Amps Break Amps
With 2 NO & 2 NC 24-120 60 6 24-150 11 11
30-100 MSSAK216 240 30 3 250 55 55
200 MSSAK226 480 15 15 300 20 20
600 12 12 600 20 20
Replacement Line Shield

Line shield can be field replaced/added for ID.
Switch Ampere Rating Line shield kit Replacement Parts
30 LSK1 (3 per kit) Catalogue Number Description
60 LSK1 (3 per kit) CCSS1 Cover catch (20 per kit)
100 LSK3 (3 per kit)
200 LSK3 (3 per kit)
Replacement cover catch

can be ordered using
#CCSS1, which includes
20 cover catch per kit.
(one kit required per
3-pole switch)

ID Switches
Dimensions
Dimensions - inches (mm) Knock-out Shipping
Catalogue Number Height Width Including Handle Depth Including Handle Diagram weight - lbs (kg)
ID221 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.78 (5.81)
ID222 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.78 (5.81)
ID223 20 3/8 (518) 10 11/16 (271) 7 1/4 (184) S2 17.45 (7.93)
ID224 30 7/8 (784) 13 3/16 (335) 8 1/4 (210) S3 31.95 (14.52)
ID225 40 (1016) 18 1/2 (470) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 76 (34.47)
ID226 48 (1219) 18 1/2 (470) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 88 (39.92)
ID321 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.61 (5.72)
ID322 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.61 (5.72)
ID323 20 3/8 (518) 10 11/16 (271) 7 1/4 (184) S2 17.22 (7.81)
ID324 30 7/8 (784) 13 3/16 (335) 8 1/4 (210) S3 31.52 (14.3)
ID361 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.61 (5.72)
ID361NF 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.18 (5.52)
3
ID362 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.61 (5.72)

ID362NF 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.18 (5.52)
SAFETY SWITCHES
ID363 20 3/8 (518) 10 11/16 (271) 7 1/4 (184) S2 17.22 (7.81)

ID363NF 20 3/8 (518) 10 11/16 (271) 7 1/4 (184) S2 16.58 (7.52)
ID364 30 7/8 (784) 13 3/16 (335) 8 1/4 (210) S3 31.52 (14.3)
ID364NF 30 7/8 (784) 13 3/16 (335) 8 1/4 (210) S3 29.64 (13.44)
ID365 40 (1016) 21 1/2 (546) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 88 (39.62)
ID365NF 40 (1016) 21 1/2 (546) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 87 (38.46)
ID366 48 (1219) 21 1/2 (546) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 101 (45.81)
ID366NF 48 (1219) 21 1/2 (546) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 97 (44)
ID421 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.78 (5.81)
ID422 15 3/8 (391) 9 3/16 (233) 7 1/4 (184) S1 12.78 (5.81)
ID423 20 3/8 (518) 10 11/16 (271) 7 1/4 (184) S2 17.45 (7.93)
ID424 30 7/8 (784) 13 3/16 (335) 8 1/4 (210) S3 31.95 (14.52)
ID425 40 (1016) 21 1/2 (546) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 89 (40.36)
ID426 48 (1219) 21 1/2 (546) 12 1/16 (306) No KO 102 (46.27)
K.O. Data For EEMAC 1 Enclosure
100 Amp Enclosure 200 Amp Enclosure 30-60 Amp Enclosure

Type ID Type ID Type ID

Type VBII Safety Switch Catalogue Numbering System Product Overview
H F C 3 6 4 N J W A
Switch Type
L = General Duty
10k AIC Max.
(Plug Fused & Series Type
60A Max
Non-Fused) A = 400A, 600A
G = Gen. Duty Omit = 30A - 200A, 800A - 1200A
H = Heavy Duty
DT = Double Throw
Special Applications With:
CH = Crouse-Hinds Receptacle
3
W = Viewing Window
Fused or Non-Fused
SAFETY SWITCHES
F = Fused
NF = Non-Fused Enclosure Type
Omit = Type 1, Indoor
C = CSA certified only R = Type 3R, Outdoor
S = Type 4/4X, Stainless Steel
Number of Poles J = Type 12, Industrial
1 = 1
2 = 2
3 = 3
4 = 4
6 = 6
With or Without Neutral
Voltage Omit = Less Neutral
N = With Neutral - rated for service
1 = 120V or 120/240V
entrance
2 = 240V
6 = 600V Amperes
1 = 30A 5 = 400A
2 = 60A 6 = 600A
3 = 100A 7 = 800A
4 = 200A 8 = 1200A
Type VBII Accessories Catalogue Numbering System

H R 6 4 A
Switch Type Series Type
A = 400A, 600A
H = Heavy Duty Omit = 30A - 200A, 800A - 1200A
G = General Dutyc
Amperes
Accessory Type
1 = 30A
A1 = Auxiliary Switch 1/NO and 1/NC 2 = 60A
A2 = Auxiliary Switch 2/NO and 2/NC 12 = 30/60A
A3 = Auxiliary Switch Low Current 3 = 100A
CL = Compression Lug Barrier / 23 = 60/100A
Mounting Kit 123 = 30/60/100A
CU = Copper Lugc 1234 = 30/60/100/200A
G = Ground Lug Kit 4 = 200A
G2 = Insulated Ground Lug Kit 5 = 400A
LC = Copper Lug Kitc 6 = 600A
NC = Neutral 56 = 400/600A
NC2 = 200% Neutralc 5678 = 400/600/800/1200A
NCM = Field Replacement Lug Kitb 78 = 800/1200A
P = Fuse Puller Kit
R = Class R - Fuse Clip Kit
T = Class T - Fuse Kit Maximum Voltage
2 = 240V Maxa
a For 400A, 600A use 600V max accessories except for T fuse kit. 6 = 600V Max
b Only offered for 400A, 600A.
c For 30A-200A, 800A-1200A.

Features VBII (30-200A) Product Overview
11 5
10
3
9
SAFETY SWITCHES
1
8
2
12
1. Cover interlock 5. Generous wiring gutters that 10. Handle and cover padlocking
2. Tangential knockouts through meet or exceed CEC provisions
200A for easy conduit lineup wire-bending space requirements 11. Side-hinged door that opens
3. Quick-make, quick-break operating 6. Visible blade, double-break switch 180 degrees for easier wiring
mechanism that ensures positive action 12. A unique enclosure design that
operation 7. Positive 2 or 3 point mounting adds rigidity and strength. Its
4. Provisions for T, R, J, H, and K 8. Highly visible red handle grip rolled edge prevents cuts and
class fuses (T & J 100-200A) scrapes to conductors and to
9. Informative door labeling which
installer’s hands
includes replacement parts list

Selection
3
SAFETY SWITCHES
Horsepower Ratings a
Indoor - Type 1 Outdoor - Type 3R
240V AC 250
Ampere Volt
System
Rating 1-Phase, 2-Wire 2-Phase, 4-Wire 3-Phase, 3-Wire DC
Catalogue Ship. Wt. Catalogue Ship. Wt.
Number (lbs.) Std. Pkg. Number (lbs.) Std. Pkg. Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. Std.
240 Volt Fusible

2-Pole, 2-Fuse, and Solid Neutral bc 240 Volt AC/250 Volt DC
100 GFC223N 23 — — 71/2 15 — — 15 30 20

200 GFC224N 47 — — 15 — — — 25 60 40
3-Pole, 3-Fuse, and Solid Neutral bd 240 Volt AC/250 Volt DC
100 GFC323N 25 — — 71/2 15 — — 15 30 20

200 GFC324N 49 — — 15 — — — 25 60 40
a Dual horsepower ratings: Std.- applies when non-time c Suitable for use on 3-phase motor loads.
delay fuses are installed. Max.- applies when timede- d 5 switches per standard package.
lay fuses are installed. e 10 switches per standard package.
b Service entrance labeled. f Has provision for ECHA type hub.

Features
15
3
2 20
11 17
16
9
3
4
SAFETY SWITCHES
5
18
6 13
19
8
14
12
1. Quick-make, quick-break operating mechanism 12. Unique enclosure design increases rigidity and
that ensures positive operation. prevents cuts and scrapes to conductors and
installer’s hands.
7 2. Visible blade, double-break switching action.
13. Spring reinforced fuse clips that assure reliable
3. Arc chutes dissipate heat and prolong switch life. contact for cool operation.
4. Highly visible red handle grip. 14. Door latch securely holds door closed and
Designed for hook stick operation. allows cover padlocking.
5. Defeatable dual cover interlock. 15. Front removable mechanical lugs that are
suitable for CU/AI 60 or 75° C conductors.
6. Center punch provided for field drilling
to allow ON padlocking. 16. Lugs are field convertible to copper
body and to a wide variety of compression
7. Handle can be padlocked in the OFF position connectors.
10 with up to (3) padlocks with 5/16" hasps.
17. Hinged clear line terminal shield
8. Generous top, bottom and side gutters that with probe holes for inspecting or
meet or exceed CEC wire-bending space testing line side terminals.
requirements.
18. Embossed aluminum nameplate on Heavy
9. Informative door labeling which includes Duty Switches.
replacement parts list.
19. Drawn cover for increased rigidity
10. Tangential knockouts through 600A for easy and resistance to abuse.
conduit lineup.
20. Top key hole and bottom mounting holes
11. Side-hinged door that opens past 180 degrees provide easy 2 or 3 point mounting.
for easier wiring.

Selection
3
Horsepower Ratings b
SAFETY SWITCHES
Ampere 240V AC
System
Rating 1-Phase, 2-Wire 3-Phase, 3-Wire 250 Volt DC
Catalogue Ship. Wt. (lbs.) Catalogue Ship. Wt. (lbs.) Hub
Number Std. Pkg. Number Std. Pkg. Typed Std. Max. Std. Max.
240 Volt Fusiblea

2-Pole, 2-Fuse and Solid Neutral (Also used for 2-Pole, 2-Wire Applications) 240 Volt AC/250 Volt DC
30 HFC221N 12 HFC221NR 13 11/2 3 3 71/2 5
60 HFC222N 18 HFC222NR 19 3 10 71/2 15 10
100 HFC223N 23 HFC223NR 24 ECHS 71/2 15 15 30 20
200 HFC224N 47 HFC224NR 48 15 — 25 60 40
400 HFC225NA 91.1 HFC225NRA 91.1 15 — 50 125 50
600 HFC226NA 95.6 HFC226NRA 95.6 15 — 75 200 50
ECHV
800 HFC227N 365 HFC227NR 365 — — 100 250 50
1200 HFC228N n 385 HFC228NRn 385 — — 100 250 50
3-Pole, 3-Fuse and Solid Neutral (Also used for 3-Pole, 3-Wire Applications) 240 Volt AC/250 Volt DC
30 HFC321N 14 HFC321NR 15 11/2 3 3 71⁄2 5
60 HFC322N 19 HFC322NR 20 3 10 71⁄2 15 10
ECHS
100 HFC323N 25 HFC323NR 26 71/2 15 15 30 20
200 HFC324N 49 HFC324NR 50 15 — 25 60 40
400 HFC325NA 94.6 HFC325NRA 94.6 15 — 50 125 50
600 HFC326NA 99.6 HFC326NRA 99.6 15 — 75 200 50
ECHV
800 HFC327N 375 HFC327NR 375 — — 100 250 50
1200 HFC328N 395 HFC328NR 388 — — 100 250 50
240 Volt Fusible

2-Pole, 2-Fuse 240 Volt AC/250 Volt DC
Type 4/4X Stainless Type 12 Industrial f Hub Typec
30 HFC221S 13 HFC221J 13 11/2 3 3 71/2 5
60 HFC222S 19 HFC222J 19 3 10 71/2 15 10
SSH
100 HFC223S 24 HFC223J 24 71/2 15 15 30 20
200 HFC224S 48 HFC224J 48 15 — 25 60 40
3-Pole, 3-Fuse (Also used for 2-Pole, 2-Wire Applications in 400–800A Ratings) 240 Volt AC/250 Volt DC
30 HFC321S 14 HFC321J 14 11/2 3 3 71/2 5
60 HFC322S 20 HFC322J 20 SSH 3 10 71/2 15 10
100 HFC323S 25 HFC323J 25 71/2 15 15 30 20
200 HFC324S 49 HFC324J 49 15 — 25 60 40
400 HF325SAg 93 HF325JAg 93 15 — 50 125 50
600 HF326SAg 98 HF326JAg 98 * 15 — 75 200 50
800 HFC327Sn 370 HFC327Jn 365 — — 100 250 50
n Built to order.
a Suitable for use as service equipment when neutral is d Hub catalogue numbers available p. 3-26 g For equipment suitable as service entry, order
bonded to the enclosure. e 304 grade stainless steel. HFC325NSA, HFC326NSA, HFC325NJA or HFC326NJA
b Dual horsepower ratings: Std.- applies when non-time f Also rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided based on the amperage and enclosure type required.
delay fuses are installed. Max.- applies when time-delay drain plug must be removed from the bottom of the
fuses are installed. enclosure for type 3S/3R application. * Consult Siemens representative.
c Hub type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and type 12
applications.

Selection
Horsepower Ratings d
480V AC 600V AC
Ampere 250 600
System Ship. Ship. Wt. 1-Phase, 3-Phase, 1-Phase, 3-Phase,
Rating Catalogue Catalogue Volt Volt
Wt. (lbs.) (lbs.) Hub Typef 2-Wire 3-Wire 2-Wire 3-Wire
DC DC
Number Number
Std. Pkg. Std. Pkg. Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max.
3
600 Volt Fusible

SAFETY SWITCHES
2-Pole, 2-Fuse c 480 Volt AC/600 Volt AC/600 Volt DC

30 HFC261 15 HFC261R 15 3 71/2 — — 3 10 — — 5 15
60 HFC262 20 HFC262R 20 ECHS 10 20 — — 10 25 — — 10 30
100 HFC263 26 HFC263R 27 15 30 — — 15 40 — — 20 50
3-Pole, 3-Fuse 480 Volt AC/600 Volt AC/250 Volt DC a

30 HFC361 14 HFC361R 15 3 71/2 5 15 3 10 71/2 20 5 —
60 HFC362 19 HFC362R 20 5 20 15 30 10 25 15 50 10 30b
ECHS
100 HFC363 24 HFC363R 25 5 20 25 60 15 40 30 75 20 50b
200 HFC364 48 HFC364R 49 25 50 50 125 30 50 60 150 40 50
400 HF365Aa 93 HF365RAa 93 — — 100 250 — — 125 350 50 —
600 HF366Aa 98 HF366RAa 98 ECHV — — 150 400 — — 200 500 50 —
800 HFC367 365 HFC367R 365 — — 200 500 — — 250 500 50 —
1200 HFC368 383 HFC368R 385 — — 200 500 — — 250 500 50 —
3-Pole, 3-Fuse and Solid Neutrale 480 Volt AC/600 Volt AC/250 Volt DC a
30 HFC361N 14 HFC361NR 15 3 71/2 5 15 3 10 71/2 20 5 —
60 HFC362N 19 HFC362NR 20 ECHS 5 20 15 30 10 25 15 50 10 30b
100 HFC363N 25 HFC363NR 26 10 30 25 60 15 40 30 75 20 50b
200 HFC364N 49 HFC364NR 50 25 50 50 125 30 50 60 150 40 50
400 HFC365NA 94.6 HFC365NRA 94.6 — — 100 250 — — 125 350 50 —
600 HFC366NA 99.6 HFC366NRA 99.6 — — 150 400 — — 200 500 50 —
ECHV
800 HFC367N 375 HFC367NR 375 — — 250 500 — — 250 500 50 —
1200 HFC368N 395 HFC368NR 388 — — 250 500 — — 250 500 50 —
600 Volt Fusible g (For 2-Pole Applications use outside poles of 3-Pole Switches)
2-Pole, 2-Fuse c 480 Volt AC/600 Volt AC/600 Volt DC
Type 4/4X Stainlessi Type 12 Industrial g Hub Typefj
30 HFC261S 15 HFC261Jn 15 3 71/2 — — 3 10 — — 5 15
60 HFC262S 20 HFC262Jn 20 SSH 5 20 — — 10 25 — — 10 30
100 HFC263Sn 27 HFC263Jn 27 10 30 — — 15 40 — — 20 50
3-Pole, 3-Fuse 480 Volt AC/600 Volt AC/250 Volt DC a

30 HFC361S 13 HFC361J 14 — — 5 15 — — 71/2 20 5 —
60 HFC362S 20 HFC362J 20 SSH — — 15 30 — — 15 50 10 30b
100 HFC363S 25 HFC363J 25 — — 25 60 — — 30 75 20 50b
200 HFC364S 49 HFC364J 49 — — 50 125 — — 60 150 40 50
400 HF365SAak 93 HF365JAk 93 — — 100 250 — — 125 350 50 —
600 HF366SAak 98 HF366JAk 98 — — 150 400 — — 200 500 50 —
800 HFC367S 370 HFC367Jn 365 * — — 200 500 — — 250 500 50 —
1200 HFC368Sn 388 HFC368Jn 388 — — 250 500 — — 250 500 50 —
n Built to order.
a 60-600A 3-Pole switches are also rated 600V DC. f Hub catalogue number available p. 3-26 j Hub type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and type 12
b 600V DC & 600V DC horsepower rating shown requires g When a neutral is required use neutral kit displayed on p. 3-24 applications.
(2) poles to be connected in series. h Also rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided k For equipment suitable as service entry, order
c Use 3-Pole switch for 200A applications. drain plug must be removed from the bottom of the HFC365NSA, HFC366NSA, HFC365NJA or HFC366NJA
d Dual horsepower ratings: Std.- applies when non-time enclosure for type 3S/3R application. based on the amperage and enclosure type required.
delay fuses are installed. Max.- applies when time-delay i 304 grade stainless steel. For switches with enclosures
fuses are installed. constructed from 316 grade stainless steel, consult Siemens * Consult Siemens representative
e Suitable for use as service equipment when neutral is representative.
bonded to the enclosure.

Selection
3
Indoor — Type 1 Outdoor — Type 3R Horsepower Ratings
SAFETY SWITCHES
Ampere
System Catalogue Ship. Catalogue Ship. Hubd 240 Volt 480 Volt 600 Volt 250V 600V
Rating
Number Wt. Number Wt. Type DC DC
(lbs.) (lbs.) 1-Phase 3-Phase 1-Phase 3-Phase 1-Phase 3-Phase
600 Volt Non-Fusible

2-Polec 480 Volt AC / 600 Volt AC / 600 Volt DC
30 HNFC261 12 HNFC261R 13 — — 71/2 — 10 — 5 15
60 HNFC262 19 HNFC262R 20 ECHS — — 20 — 25 — 10 30
100 HNFC263 24 HNFC263R 25 — — 30 — 40 — 20 50
3-Pole 480 Volt AC / 600 Volt AC / 250 Volt DC

30 HNFC361 12 HNFC361R 13 5 10 71/2 20 10 30 5 —
60 HNFC362a 18 HNFC362Ra 19 10 20 20 50 25 60 10 30f
ECHS
100 HNFC363a 23 HNFC363Ra 24 15 40 30 75 40 100 20 50f
200 HNFC364a 46 HNFC364Ra 47 15 60 50 125 50 150 40 50
400 HNF365A 75 HNF365RA 75 15 125 50 250 50 350 50 —
600 HNF366A 77 HNF366RA 77 15 200 50 400 50 500 50 —
800 HNFC367 295 HNFC367R 295 ECHV 15 250 50 500 50 500 50 —
1200 HNFC368 305 HNFC368R 307 15 250 50 500 50 500 50 —
600 Volt Non-Fusibleb

2-Polec 480 Volt AC / 600 Volt AC / 600 Volt DC
Hub
Type 4/4X Stainlessg Type 12 Industrial e
Typedh
30 HNFC261S 13 HNFC261J 13 — — 71/2 — 10 — 5 15
60 HNFC262S 20 HNFC262J 20 SSH — — 20 — 25 — 10 30
100 HNFC263Sn 25 HNFC263Jn 25 — — 30 — 40 — 20 50
3-Pole 480 Volt AC / 600 Volt AC / 250 Volt DC

30 HNFC361S 13 HNFC361J 13 5 10 71/2 20 10 30 5 —
60 HNFC362Sa 19 HNFC362Ja 19 SSH 10 20 20 50 25 60 10 30f
100 HNFC363Sa 24 HNFC363Ja 24 15 40 30 75 40 100 20 50f
200 HNFC364Sa 47 HNFC364Ja 47 15 60 50 125 50 150 40 50
400 HNF365SA 75 HNF365JA 75 15 125 50 250 50 350 50 —
600 HNF366SA 77 HNF366JA 77 15 200 50 400 50 500 50 —
800 HNFC367S 295 HNFC367J n 295 * 15 250 50 500 50 500 50 —
1200 — — HNFC368J n 310 15 250 50 500 50 500 50 —
n Built to order.
a Also rated 600V DC. f 600V DC horsepower rating shown requires (2) poles to be connected
b When neutral is required, use neutral kit displayed on p. 3-24 in series.
c Use 3-Pole switch for 200A application. g 304 grade stainless steel. For switches with enclosures constructed from
d Hub catalogue numbers available p. 3-26 316 grade stainless steel, consult Siemens representative.
e Also rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided drain plug h Hub type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and type 12 applications.
must be removed from the bottom of the enclosure for type 3S/3R *Consult Siemens representative.
application.

Type 4/4X & 12 with Viewing Window Selection
Description
30–600A, 3-pole 600V max. in fusible and b Metal handle with large insulating grip
non-fusible versions in Type 4/4X stainless features a positive stop in both ON and
steel and Type 12 enclosures. OFF position
All allow viewing of visible blade position. b Ground lugs provided as standard
30–200A also allow viewing of indicating b Type 12 enclosures are fabricated from
type fuses. galvanized steel and are also rated for
3R/3S outdoor applications
Features b Type 4X stainless steel switches are 304
grade stainless steel and 30-200A are
b Rugged installer-friendly enclosure provided with stainless steel interior parts
design features a gasket flange with
continuously welded seams b The widest range of accessories
available including 200% neutrals,
3
b Tool-free cover latches gold plated PLC auxiliary contacts

b Two, three and four point mounting and isolated ground kits
SAFETY SWITCHES
Maximum Horsepower Ratingsb

240V AC 480V AC 600V AC 250V 600V
Ampere Hub Ship.
System Rating Catalogue Number Type Wt. (lbs.) 1-Phase, 2-Wire 3-Phase, 3-Wire 3-Phase, 3-Wire 3-Phase, 3-Wire DC DC
3-Pole, 3-Wire Fusible, Type 12 c (For 2-Pole Applications use outside poles of 3-Pole Switches) 600 Volt AC / 250 Volt DCa
30 HFC361JW 17 3 71/2 15 20 5 —
60 HFC362JW 22 10 15 30 50 10 30e
SSH
100 HFC363JW 26 15 30 60 75 20 30e
200 HFC364JW 53 — 60 125 150 40 50
400 HF365JWAd 93 — 125 250 350 50 —
600 HF366JWAd * 98 — 200 400 500 50 —
3-Pole, 3-Wire Non-Fusible, Type 12 c 600 Volt AC / 250 Volt DCa

30 HNFC361JW 14 3 10 20 30 5 —
60 HNFC362JW 21 10 20 50 60 10 30e
100 HNFC363JW SSH 25 15 40 75 100 20 50e
200 HNFC364JW 51 15 60 125 150 40 50
400 HNF365JWA * 75 15 125 250 350 50 —
3-Pole, 3-Wire Fusible, Type 4X Stainlessf (For 2-Pole Applications use outside poles of 3-Pole Switches) 600 Volt AC / 250 Volt DCa
30 HFC361SW 17 3 71⁄2 15 20 5 —
60 HFC362SW 23 10 15 30 50 10 30e
SSH
100 HFC363SW 28 15 30 60 75 20 50e
200 HFC364SW 55 — 60 125 150 40 50
400 HF365SWAd 75 15 125 250 350 50 —
600 HF366SWA * 98 — 200 400 500 50 —
3-Pole, 3-Wire Non-Fusible, Type 4X Stainlessf 600 Volt AC / 250 Volt DCa
30 HNFC361SW 15 3 10 20 30 5 —
60 HNFC362SW SSH 23 10 20 50 60 10 30e
100 HNFC363SW 27 15 40 75 100 20 50e
200 HNFC364SW 54 15 60 125 150 40 50
400 HNF365SWA * 75 15 125 250 350 50 —
a 200A switches are also rated 600V DC. d For equipment suitable as service entry, order f 304
grade stainless steel. For switches with enclosures
b Maximum HP ratings listed apply only when time delay HFC365NJWA, HFC366NJWA or HFC365NSWA based on constructed from 316 grade stainless steel, consult
fuses are used. the amperage and enclosure type required. Siemens representative.
c Also rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided e 600V DC horsepower rating shown requires (2) poles to
drain plug must be removed from the bottom of the be connected in series. * Consult Siemens representative.
enclosure for type 3S/3R application.

Type VBII 4 & 6-Pole Heavy Duty Safety Switches Selection
Application Standards
4 & 6-pole Switches are commonly b cUL & UL listed under file #E4776
used as a disconnecting means for
b Meets UL98 for enclosed switches
two-speed, two-winding motors.
Fused switches provide both over b Meets NEMA Standard KS-1 for
current and short circuit protection. enclosed switches
Non-fusible switches normally provide b Meets CEC wire bending space
a local disconnection means for two- requirements
speed motors which are remote from
their motor controller. 4-pole switches Features
are also used in 3-phase, 4-wire circuits b Visible blade, double break switching
when a switching neutral is required. action
b Highly visible ON/OFF indication
3
Description b Defeatable dual cover interlock
4 & 6-pole switches are available in b Padlock option in OFF position
SAFETY SWITCHES
30-200A ratings and in both fusible and b All copper current carrying parts
a
non-fusible versions. 4-pole switches are

supplied with either Type 1 or Type12/3R b Tangenital knockouts (Type 1,
4-pole switches)
enclosures.
6-pole switches are available with either
Type 12/3R or Type 4X stainless steel
enclosures.
HNF663S
4-Pole Type VBII Switchesa

Indoor Type 1 Type 12/3R Industriald Horsepower Ratingsb
240V, 2Ø, 4W 240V 3Ø 480V, 3Ø 600V, 3Ø 250V

Ampere Catalogue Ship. Catalogue Ship. Hub
System Rating Number Wt. (lbs.) Number Wt. (lbs.) Typee Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. DC
Fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — 4-Pole, 4 Fusec

30 HF461 36 HF461J 36 3 10 3 71⁄2 5 15 71⁄2 20 5
60 HF462 40 HF462J 40 71⁄2 20 71⁄2 15 15 30 15 50 10
SSH
100 HF463 43 HF463J 43 15 30 15 30 25 60 30 75 20
200 HF464n 88 HF464Jn 88 25 50 25 60 50 125 60 150 40
Non-fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — 4-Pole

30 HNF461 32 HNF461J 32 — 10 — 10 — 20 — 30 5
60 HNF462 34 HNF462J 34 — 20 — 20 — 50 — 60 10
SSH
100 HNF463n 36 HNF463Jn 36 — 30 — 40 — 75 — 100 20
200 HNF464n 78 HNF464Jn 78 — 50 — 60 — 125 — 150 4
6-Pole Type VBII Switchesad

Type 12 Industrial Type 4X Stainless Steel Horsepower Ratingsc
240V 3Ø 480V, 3Ø 600V, 3Ø 250V

Ampere Catalogue Ship. Catalogue Ship. Hub
System Rating Number Wt. (lbs.) Number Wt. (lbs.) Typeef Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. DC
Fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — 6-Pole, 6 Fusec

30 HF661J 37 HF661S 37 3 71⁄2 5 15 71⁄2 20 5
60 HF662J 41 HF662S 41 71⁄2 15 15 30 15 50 10
SSH
100 HF663Jn 44 HF663S 44 15 30 25 60 30 75 20
200 HF664Jn 90 HF664Sn 90 25 60 50 125 60 150 40
Non-fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — 6-Pole

30 HNF661J 33 HNF661S 33 — 10 — 20 — 30 5
60 HNF662J 35 HNF662S 35 — 20 — 50 — 60 10
SSH
100 HNF663J 37 HNF663S 37 — 40 — 75 — 100 20
200 HNF664J 80 HNF664Sn 80 — 60 — 125 — 150 40
nBuilt to order.
aLugs are aluminum alloy as standard. Optional cop- c Fusible switches accept Class H Fuses as the stan- d Supplied with factory installed ground lugs.
per body lugs are available. dard. Class R & J fuses can also be installed and e Hub catalogue number available p. 3-26
b Dual horsepower ratings: Std. – applies when increase the rating from 10,000 to 200,000 AIC. For f Hub type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and
non-time-delay fuses are installed. Max. – applies Class J, the load base is moved upward. For Class R type 12 applications.
when time delay fuses are installed. fuses, rejection kits are required.

Special Application Switches / Interlocked Receptacle Switches Selection
Application Description ab
Receptacle Safety Switches Type 12 and 4/4X Receptacle Safety
provide cord connection protection Switches are available with 3-phase,
of heavy-duty portable equipment 4-wire grounded type Crouse-Hinds
(welders, infrared ovens, batch Arkite™, pre-wired and mounted
feeders, portable conveyors, assembly with interlock linkage to the switch
line fixtures and tools, refrigerator mechanism. Insertion or removal of
trucks, etc.) under load or fault the plug is prevented by the interlock
conditions. linkage while the switch is in the “ON”
position. Receptacle prevents operation
Standards of switch if incorrect plug is inserted.
3
All receptacle switches with a viewing

window are CSA certified under
SAFETY SWITCHES
file #24563 and UL listed under file

#E4776.
Crouse-Hinds Interlocked Receptacle Switches

Type 12b Type 4/4Xc
Ampere Shipping Accepts Crouse-Hinds
Ratingc Catalogue Catalogue Hub Wt. (lbs.) Arktite a Plug
Number Number Typed Std. Pkg. Catalogue Number
600V Fusible, 3-Pole, 3-Wire with Viewing Window

30 HF361JCHW HF361SCHW 24 APJ3485 & NPJ3485
60 HF362JCHW HF362SCHW SSH 30 APJ6485 & NPJ6485
100 HF363JCHW HF363SCHW 36 APJ10487 & NPJ10487
600V Non-Fusible, 3-Pole, 3-Wire with Viewing Window

30 HNF361JCHW HNF361SCHW 22 APJ3485 & NPJ3485
60 HNF362JCHW HNF362SCHW SSH 29 APJ6485 & NPJ6485
100 HNF363JCHW HNF363SCHW 35 APJ10487 & NPJ10487
Receptacle switches dimensions

Ampere Dimensions - Inches (mm)
Rating A B C D E F G
Cr-H Type Fusible (240 & 600V)

30 14.27 (363) 7.42 (188) 9.02 (229) 6.22 (158) 1.52 (39) 6.1( 155) 6.0 (152)
60 16.27 (413) 9.17 (233) 11.47 291) 6.34 (161) 1.52 (39) 6.4 (163) 7.4 (188)
100 21.96 (558) 9.65 (245) 12.02 (305) 6.80 (172) 1.52 (39) 6.5 (165) 7.6 (193)
Cr-H Type Non-Fused (600V max.)

30 14.27 (363) 7.42 (188) 9.02 (229) 6.22 (158) 1.52 (39) 6.1 (155) 6.0 (152)
60 16.27 (413) 9.17 (233) 11.47 (291) 6.34 (161) 1.52 (39) 6.4 (163) 7.4 (188)
100 21.96 (558) 9.65 (245) 12.02 (305) 6.80 (172) 1.52 (39) 6.5 (165) 7.6 (193)
a Arktite™ is a registered trademark of the Crouse- c Enclosure is constructed of Type 304 stainless steel.
Hinds Company. Plugs are not sold or supplied by d Hub catalogue available p. 3-26
Siemens.
b Also rated Type 3R/3S.

HR612 HT63 HN264
Class R Fuse Clip Kits Class T Fuse Adapter Kits 200% Neutral Kits
All Heavy Duty Switches are field con- All 100-200Amp and 1200Amp Heavy CSA certified 200% Neutrals are
3
vertible to accept Class R Fuse Clip Kits. Duty Switches are field convertible to available on 100-600A Heavy Duty
The kits prevent the installation of Class accept Class T fuses.800A switches are Switches. They are typically used
SAFETY SWITCHES
H and K fuses field convertible to accept Class T fuses with non-linear transformers or where
(one kit required per 3-pole switch). by moving the load base to a pre-drilled increased neutral ampacity/lug capacity
T fuse position. is required.
Class R Fuse Clip Kits
Catalogue 200% Neutral Kits
Number Description
HR21 30A, 240V Kit (HD only) Class T Fuse Adapter Kitsa Switch
Ampere
Kit
Catalogue Wire Range Line &
HR612 30A, 600V Kit/60A, 240V Kit Catalogue Rating Number Load Lugs (Cu/Al)
HR62 60A, 600V Kit Number Description
100 HNC263 (2) #14-1/0 AWG
HR63 100A Kit HT23 100A, 240V Kit
200 HNC264 (2) #6 AWG-300 Kcmil
HR64 200A Kit HT63 100A, 600V Kit
(2) 1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil
HR65A 400A Kit HT24 200A, 240V Kit 400 HNC656A
(2) #6 AWG-300 Kcmil
HR66A 600A Kit HT64s 200A, 600V Kit (2) 1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil
HT25A 400A, 240V Kit 600 HNC678A
(2) #6 AWG-300 Kcmil
HT65A 400A, 600V Kit
Class J Fusing HT26A 600A, 240V Kit
All 30-600A, 600V and 100-600A,240V HT66A 600A, 600V Kit
TFAK82 1200A, 240V Kit
fusible Heavy Duty Switches are field
convertible to accept Class J fuses by
moving the load base to a pre-drilled J
fuse position. 600A Heavy Duty switches
require Class J fuse clip kit HJ66A to accept
class J fuses. (one kit required per 3-pole
switch).
HNC623 HP61
Class J Fuse Kits Neutral Kits Fuse Puller Kits

Catalogue
Number Description Standard Neutral Kits can be field Fuse Puller Kits are field installable in
HJ66A 600A, 240V/600V Kit installed in Heavy Duty Switches. 30-100A Type VBII Heavy Duty Switches
(one kit required per 3-pole switch).
Internal Shield Kits (for fusible switches)
Kits provide a clear plastic inner door to Neutral Kits Fuse Puller Kits
prevent accidental contact with live parts. Switch Kit Catalogue Switch
Ampere Rating Number Ampere Fuse Puller Kit
Test probe holes are provided and fuses
30 HD HNC612 Rating Catalogue Number
can be replaced without removal of kit. 60, 100 HD HNC623 030 HP61
200 HNC64
NEW Internal Shield Kitsb 400 & 600 HNC656A
060 HP62s
100 HP63s
Switch 800 & 1200 HNC678
Ampere Rating Kit Catalogue Number
30A HD HSK61SSW
60A HD HSK62SSW
100A HD HSK63SSW
200A HD HSK64SSW
s Built to order. Allow 6–8 weeks for delivery. b Not designed for use with Auxiliary Contacts.
a One kit per pole required.

HA261234 HA261234 HLC612 HG261234

3
Auxiliary Contacts NEW Quick Connects

SAFETY SWITCHES
Auxiliary Contacts are available only for Heavy Duty Switches. They provide two point control power take-off capability and
The auxiliary contacts are available in 1 normally open and are normally used on two poles on the line side when it is
1 normally closed or 2 normally open and 2 normally closed required to have control power available when the switch is
configurations. Siemens offers a PLC Auxiliary Switch (30- in the OFF position. They provide a mounting provision for
200A) that has very low resistance for low voltage and current standard ¼” quick connect terminal. Installed in the line or load
typical in PLC circuits. All auxiliary contacts make after and side. 30A VBII switches have lugs CSA certified to accept (2)
break before main switch contacts. wires per pole as standard so a 30A kit is not required.
Auxiliary Contacts Quick Connects
Kit Ampere Horsepower Catalogue Number Description
Rating Rating HCQ62 60A 2 wire quick connect kit
Aux. Switch 125V 250V 28V 125V 250V HCQ63 100A 2 wire quick connect kit
Switch Catalogue AC AC DC AC AC HCQ64 200A 2 wire quick connect kit
Ampere Number Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
With 1 NO & 1 NC Isolated Contacts
30-600 HA161234 10 10 7 1/2 3/4
Isolated Ground Kits
800-1200 HA165678 10 10 — 1/2 3/4
With 2 NO & 2 NC Isolated Contacts Isolated Ground Kits are available on 30-600A Heavy Duty
30-600 HA261234 10 10 7 1/2 3/4 Switches. They are normally used on circuits with a high content
800-1200 HA265678 10 10 7 1/2 3/4 of computer or other electronic loading which require a ground
Low Current PLC Type with 1 NO & which is isolated from the building ground and neutral circuits. The
1 NC Gold Plated Contacts kit includes both isolated and grounded terminals as listed below.
30-600 HA361234 10 10 7 1/2 3/4
800-1200 HA365678 10 10 — 1/2 3/4
Isolated Ground Kits
Switch
Ampere Catalogue Number of Terminals Wire Range
Rating Number Isolated Grounded Per Terminal (Cu/Al)
30–200 HG261234 2 2 #14-4 AWG
Copper Lug Kits 2/0-14 AWG
400–600 HG2656A 4 4
2/0-6 AWG
Heavy duty switches are CSA certified to accept
field installed copper lug kits.
Equipment Ground Kits
Copper Lug Kits Equipment Ground Lug Kits are available for all Heavy Duty
Switch Copper Lug Switches. They are field installable in Type 1 and Type 3R
Ampere Catalogue
Rating Number Description Switches and are factory installed as standard in Type 4 / 4X
30–60 HLC612 (9) Lugs/Kit #14-4 AWG Cu and Type 12 and also in all VBII 4&6-pole Switches.
100 HLC63s (9) Lugs/Kit #14-1/0 AWG Cu
200 HLC64s (9) Lugs/Kit #6 AWG-300 Kcmil Cu
400-600 HCU656An (1) Lugs/Kit #1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil Cu Equipment Ground Kits
800–1200 HLC65678 (1) Lugs/Kit #1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil Cu Switch
Ampere Catalogue Number of Wire Range
Rating Number Terminals Per Terminal (Cu/Al)
30–200 HD HG61234 2 #14-4 AWG
400 & 600 HG656A 4 2/0-6 AWG
800–1200 HG678 8 #6 AWG-250 Kcmil
s Built to order. Allow 6–8 weeks for delivery.
n Purchase field replacement kit along with lugs.

Heavy Duty
Hub and Lug Data Selection
Interchangeable Hubs Field Replacement Kits and
Conduit hubs are available for Type 3R, Neutral Barrier Kits
12 and 4 / 4X applications. 30-200A All Heavy Duty Switches are field
Type 3R Switches are provided with a convertible for (Crimp) type lugs.
conduit hub provision and a removable When compression lugs are required for
hub plate on their top rainshed. 30-100A switches, a neutral barrier kit
is required for 1-Phase, 3W or 3-Phase,
Conduit 4W applications. When compression
Size Catalogue
(inches) Number Used On
lugs are required on 400-1200A switch-
es, lug mounting kits are required. SSH125
Type 3R a
Cover ECHA000 Field Replacement Kits and

3/4 ECHA075
Neutral Barrier Kits
3
30A GD Only
1 ECHA100
1 1/4 ECHA125 Switch
Ampere Catalogue
SAFETY SWITCHES
Cover ECHS000 Rating Number Kit Description
3/4 ECHS075
30 HCL612 Neutral Barrier Kit
1 ECHS100
60–200A GD 60 &
1 1/4 ECHS125 HCL623 Neutral Barrier Kit
30–200A HD 100
1 1/2 ECHS150 400 HCM65A 240V/600V Fusible Kit
2 ECHS200 240/600V Non-
2 1/2 ECHS250 400 HNCM65A
Fusible Kit
2 1/2 ECHV250 600 HCM66A 240V/600V Fusible Kit ECHV300
3 ECHV300 240V/600V Non-
400–1200A 600 HNCM66A
3 1/2 ECHV350 Fusible Kit
4 ECHV400 800 & 1 Pole, Compression
HCL65678n
1200e Lug Mounting Kit
Type 4/4Xb
3/4 SSH075
1 SSH100
1 1/4 SSH125 30–200A
Lugs
1 1/2 SSH150 30 & 60A Switches are suitable for use
2 SSH200 with 60° or 75°C wire. 100–1200A are
2 1/2 SSH250 suitable for use with 75°C rated wire.
3 SSH300
400–600A
3 1/2 SSH350
4 SSH400 ECHS200
Multiple Padlock Accessory
A tamper-proof device to provide for
Note: 30 thru 200A. Type 3R Switches have multiple padlocking to meet OSHA or
removable hub plates on rainshed. 400A and
larger Type 3R Switches have no provisions for plant requirements. Accepts up to 6
mounting hubs. Drill or punch hole in the field to 1/4” padlocks. Catalog number SL0420.
accommodate hub size desired.
Standard Carton-12.
Wire Ranges (Line, Load and Standard Neutral) SL0420

Switch Wire Range with
Ampere Wire Bending Space
Rating Per NEC Requirements Lug Wire Range n Built to order. Allow 3-4 weeks for delivery.
30GD #14-8 AWG (Cu/AI)f #14-6 AWG (Cu/Al) a Hubs suitable for 3R Switches.
30HD #14-6 AWG (Cu/AI) #14-2 AWG (Cu/Al) b Also suitable for Type 12 applications.
c Neutral Barrier kits are required on 30-100A switches
60hj #14-3 AWG (Cu/AI) #14-2 AWG (Cu/Al) only and only with 1-Phase / 3W or 3-Phase / 4W
100k #14-1/0 AWG (Cu/Al) #14-1/0 AWG (Cu/Al) loads. Compression Lugs mounting kits are required
on 400-1200A switches only.
200i #6 AWG-250 Kcmil (Cu/Al) #6 AWG-300 Kcmil (Cu/Al) d Provides mounting for a single line or load lug.
e Provides mounting for (2) compression lugs per phase
(1) 1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil (Cu/Al)
400g (2) 1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil (Cu/Al) on line or load.
(2) 1/0 AWG-500 Kcmil (Cu/Al) f Line base lugs (only) are CSA certified to accept #14-6
(1) 1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil (Cu/Al) CU/Al cable.
600g (2) 1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil (Cu/Al) g Max. wire size for height reduced switches is 500 kcmil
(Cu/Al).
(3) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) Line Load (3) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) Line Load h All but 60A GD & Compact HD NF switches are also
800
(4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) neutral (4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) neutral CSA certified for #2 Cu/Al conductors.
i All 200A Heavy Duty Switches have a wire range
(4) 3/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) Line Load (4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) Line Load
1200 & wire bending space for (1) #6-300 Kcmil (Cu/Al).
(4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) neutral (4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) neutral j Also for 30A oversized heavy duty switches.
k Also for 60A oversized heavy duty switches.

General and Heavy Duty
VBII Safety Switch Replacement Parts Selection
VBII Safety Switch Replacement Parts

Handle / Handle Guard
Ampere Line Base Load Base General Duty Heavy Duty
Rating Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Fusible 2- and 3-Pole 60-400A General Duty & 30-1200A Heavy Dutyeh
30 HD 240V HFB21b HBB21b — HH6123g
60 GD HFB612b HBB612b GH223 —
60 HD 240V HFB22b HBB22b — HH6123g
30 600V HFB612b HBB612b — HH6123g
3
60 600V HFB62b HBB62b — HH6123g

100 HFB63b HBB63b GH223 HH6123g
200 HFB64b HBB64b GH24 HH64g HBB612
SAFETY SWITCHES
400 HFB65cf HBB656cf HH65678 HH65678g

600 HFB66cf HBB656cf HH65678 HH65678g
800 HFB67Abf HBB67Abf — HH65678g
1200 HFB68bf HBB68bf — HH68g
Non-Fusible 3-Pole 60-400A General Duty & 30-1200A Heavy Dutyeh

30 HD HNB612b — — HH6123g
60 GD HNB612b — GH223 —
60 HD HNB623b — — HH6123g
100 HNB623b — GH223 HH6123g
200 HNB64b — GH24 HH64g
400 HNB65cf — HH65678 HH65678g
600 HNB66cf — HH65678 HH65678g
800 HNB67Abf — — HH65678g HNB623
1200 HNB678f — — HH68g
Ampere Mechanism Assembly Line & Load Lugs Internal Shield Kits
Rating Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
These kits provide an inner door on safety
Fusible 2- and 3-Pole 60-400A General Duty & 30-1200A switches to prevent accidental contact with live
Heavy Dutyeh parts. All kits are constructed from clear plastic,
30 HD 240V HM6123g HL612a
provide test probe holes and allow replacement
60 GD HM6123 HL612a of fuses without the removal of the kit.
60 HD 240V HM6123g HL612a
30 600V HM6123g HL612a Catalogue Switch UPC Code
60 600V HM6123g HL612a Number Ampere Rating 040892_ _ _ _ _
100 HM6123g HL63a HFC362 with
HSK62SSW installed
200 HM64g HL64a For use with Fusible Type 1, 3R, 12 and 4X
400 HM65 HL65678d
600 HM66 HL65678d
Stainless Steel Enclosed Safety Switches
800 HM67A HL67Afi HSK61SSW 30 79020
1200 HM678 i
HSK62SSW 60 79021
HSK63SSW 100 79002
Non-Fusible 3-Pole, 30-1200A Heavy Dutyeh HSK64SSW 200 79023
30 HD HM6123g HL612a For use with Fusible Type VBII

60 HD HM6123g HL612a
100 HM6123g HL63a
Disconnect Switches
200 HM64g HL64a HSK61 30 79024
400 HM65 HL65678d HSK623 60 & 100 79025
600 HM66 HL65678d HSK64 200 79026 VBFS361F with
800 HM67A HL67Afi HSK61 Installed
1200 HM678 i
HM6123 HFB656 HFB612 HH6123
a Three lugs included in kit. e One per switch required unless otherwise noted. h For replacement door for heavy duty switches add
b Includes lugs. f One required per pole. “DOOR” to end of switch catalogue number.
c Lugs not included. g For type 4/4X stainless steel switches add “S” to end of i Lugs included with line and load bases.
d One lug per kit. catalogue number.

Dimensions
Safety Switch Dimensions & Shipping Weights
Height - Inches (mm) Width - Inches (mm) Depth - Inches (mm)
With With With With Knockout Shipping
Box Door Rain Shed Box Handle Box Handle Diagrama Weight (lbs.)
Catalogue Number A B C D E F G
HFC221J also HFC261J 14.27 (364) 17.33 (442) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.32 (136) 10.46 (266) — 13
HFC221N also HFC261 14.26 (364) 15.45 (394) — 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S6 12
HFC221NR also HFC261R 14.39 (366) — 15.77 (402) 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S8 13
HFC221S also HFC261S 14.27 (364) 17.33 (442) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.32 (136) 10.46 (266) — 13
HFC222J also HFC262J 16.22 (412) 19.31 (492) — 9.17 (234) 11.47 (292) 5.33 (136) 10.46 (266) — 19
HFC222N also HFC262 16.26 (414) 17.46 (444) — 9.15 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S16 18
HFC222NR also HFC262R 16.26 (414) — 17.77 (452) 9.16 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S17 19
HFC222S also HFC262S 16.22 (412) 19.31 (492) — 9.17 (234) 11.47 (292) 5.33 (136) 10.46 (266) — 19
HFC223J also HFC263J 21.96 (558) 23.16 (590) — 9.65 (246) 12.02 (306) 5.34 (136) 10.46 (266) — 24
3
HFC223N also HFC263 21.95 (558) 23.15 (590) — 9.64 (246) 12.01 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S10 23
HFC223NR also HFC263R 21.95 (558) — 23.46 (596) 9.64 (246) 11.97 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S11 24
SAFETY SWITCHES
HFC223S also HFC263S 21.96 (558) 23.16 (590) — 9.65 (246) 12.02 (306) 5.34 (136) 10.46 (266) — 24
a Knocks not provided on Type 4 / 4X and 12 or on 800 & 1200A switches.

Dimensions
With With With With Knockout Shipping
Catalogue Box Door Rain Shed Box Handle Box Handle Diagrama Weight (lbs.)
Number A B C D E F G
HFC224J 29.96 (762) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 48
HFC224N 29.9 (760) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.98 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S12 47
HFC224NR 29.9 (760) — 31.42 (800) 14.61 (372) 16.99 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S13 48
HFC224S 29.96 (762) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 48
HFC225NRA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 91.1
HFC225NA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 91.1
HFC226NA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 95.6
HFC226NRA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 95.6
HFC227N 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 360
HFC227NR 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 362
3
HFC228N 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 362
HFC228NR 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 364
HFC321J 14.27 (364) 17.33 (442) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.32 (136) 10.46 (266) — 14
SAFETY SWITCHES
HFC321N 14.26 (364) 15.45 (394) — 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S6 14
HFC321NR 14.39 (366) — 15.77 (402) 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S8 15
HFC321S 14.27 (364) 17.33 (442) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.32 (136) 10.46 (266) — 14
HFC322J 16.27 (414) 19.31 (492) — 9.17 (234) 11.47 (292) 5.33 (136) 10.46 (266) — 20
HFC322N 16.26 (414) 17.46 (444) — 9.15 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S16 19
HFC322NR 16.26 (414) — 17.77 (452) 9.16 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S17 20
HFC322S 16.27 (414) 19.31 (492) — 9.17 (234) 11.47 (292) 5.33 (136) 10.46 (266) — 20
HFC323J 21.96 (558) 23.16 (590) — 9.65 (246) 12.02 (306) 5.34 (136) 10.46 (266) — 25
HFC323N 21.95 (558) 23.15 (590) — 9.64 (246) 12.01 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S10 25
HFC323NR 21.95 (558) — 23.46 (596) 9.64 (246) 11.97 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S11 26
HFC323S 21.96 (558) 23.16 (590) — 9.65 (246) 12.02 (306) 5.34 (136) 10.46 (266) — 25
HFC324J 29.96 (762) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 49
HFC324N 29.9 (760) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.98 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S12 49
HFC324NR 29.9 (760) — 31.42 (800) 14.61 (372) 16.99 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S13 50
HFC324S 21.96 (558) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 49
HF325JA also HFC325NJA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 93
HFC325NA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 94.6
HFC325NRA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 94.6
HF325SA also HFC325NSA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 93
HF326JA also HFC326NJA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 98
HFC326NA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 99.6
HFC326NRA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 99.6
HF326SA also HFC326NSA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 98
HFC327J 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 367
HFC327N 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 380
HFC327NR 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 383
HFC327S 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 367
HFC328N 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 382
HFC328NR 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 385
HFC361 14.26 (364) 15.45 (394) — 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S6 14
HFC361J, JW 14.27 (364) 17.33 (442) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.32 (136) 10.46 (266) — 14
HFC361N 14.26 (364) 15.45 (394) — 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S6 14
HFC361NR 14.39 (366) — 15.77 (402) 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S8 15
HFC361R 14.39 (366) — 15.77 (402) 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S8 15
HFC361S, SW 14.27 (364) 17.33 (442) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.32 (136) 10.46 (266) — 15
a Knocks not provided on Type 4/4X and 12 or on 800 & 1200A switches.

Dimensions
Shipping
With With With With Knockout
Weight
Catalogue Box Door Rain Shed Box Handle Box Handle Diagrama
(lbs.)
Number A B C D E F G
HFC362 16.26 (414) 17.46 (444) — 9.15 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S16 19
HFC362J, JW 16.27 (414) 19.31 (492) — 9.17 (234) 11.47 (292) 5.33 (136) 10.46 (266) — 20
HFC362N 16.26 (414) 17.46 (444) — 9.15 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S16 19
HFC362NR 16.26 (414) — 17.77 (452) 9.16 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S17 20
HFC362R 16.26 (414) — 17.77 (452) 9.16 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S17 20
HFC362S, SW 16.27 (414) 19.31 (492) — 9.17 (234) 11.47 (292) 5.33 (136) 10.46 (266) — 20
HFC363 21.95 (558) 23.15 (590) — 9.64 (246) 12.01 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S10 24
HFC363J, JW 21.96 (558) 23.16 (590) — 9.65 (246) 12.02 (306) 5.34 (136) 10.46 (266) — 25
HFC363N 21.95 (558) 23.15 (590) — 9.64 (246) 12.01 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S10 25
HFC363NR 21.95 (558) — 23.46 (596) 9.64 (246) 11.97 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S11 26
HFC363R 21.95 (558) — 23.46 (596) 9.64 (246) 11.97 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S11 25
3
HFC363S, SW 21.96 (558) 23.16 (590) — 9.65 (246) 12.02 (306) 5.34 (136) 10.46 (266) — 25
HFC364 29.9 (760) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.98 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S12 48
SAFETY SWITCHES
HFC364J, JW 29.96 (762) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 49
HFC364N 29.9 (760) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.98 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S12 49
HFC364NR 29.9 (760) — 31.42 (800) 14.61 (372) 16.99 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S13 48
HFC364R 29.9 (760) — 31.42 (800) 14.61 (372) 16.99 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S13 49
HFC364S, SW 29.96 (762) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 49
HF365A 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 93
HF365JA, HF365JWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 93
HFC365NJA, HFC365NJWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 94.6
HFC365NA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 94.6
HFC365NRA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 94.6
HF365RA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 93
HF365SA, HF365SWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 93
HFC365NSA, HFC365NSWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 94.6
HF366A 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 98
HF366JA, HF366JWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 98
HFC366NJA, HFC366NJWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 99.6
HFC366NA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S18 99.6
HFC366NRA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 99.6
HF366RA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 98
HF366SA, HF366SWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 98
HFC366NSA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 38.4 (976) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 99.6
HFC367 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 380
HFC367J 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 380
HFC367N 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 382
HFC367NR 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 386
HFC367R 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 382
HFC367S 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 380
HFC368, J, S 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 383
HFC368N 66.67 (1694) 67.16 (1706) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 385
HFC368NR 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 388
HFC368R 66.67 (1694) — 67.74 (1722) 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 385
HNFC361 also HNFC261 11.11 (284) 12.31 (314) — 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S7 12
HNFC361J, JW also HNFC261J 11.12 (284) 14.14 (360) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.56 (142) 10.46 (266) — 13
HNFC361R also HNFC261R 11.11 (284) — 12.63 (322) 6.64 (170) 9.01 (230) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S9 13
HNFC361S, SW also HNFC261S 11.12 (284) 14.14 (360) — 6.65 (170) 9.02 (230) 5.56 (142) 10.46 (266) — 13
HNFC362 also HNFC262 16.26 (414) 17.46 (444) — 9.15 (234) 11.53 (294) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S16 18
HNFC363 also HNFC263 21.95 (558) 23.15 (590) — 9.64 (246) 12.01 (306) 5.05 (130) 10.17 (260) S10 23
HNFC364 29.9 (760) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.98 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S12 46
HNFC364J, JW 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 47 —
HNFC364R 29.9 (760) — 31.42 (800) 14.61 (372) 16.99 (432) 6.36 (162) 12.33 (314) S13 47
HNFC364S, SW 29.96 (762) 31.07 (790) — 14.62 (372) 16.95 (432) 6.63 (170) 12.58 (320) — 47

Dimensions
Shipping
With With With With Knockout
Weight
Box Door Rain Shed Box Handle Box Handle Diagrama
(lbs.)
Catalogue Number A B C D E F G
HNF365A, JA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 75
HNF365JWA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 75
HNF365RA 33.47 (852) 33.96 (864) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 75
HNF365SA, HNF365SWA 33.47 (852) 33.96 (864) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 75
HNF366A, JA 45.32 (1152) 45.81 (1164) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.97 (178) 10.05 (256) — 77
HNF366RA 33.47 (852) 33.96 (864) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 6.94 (178) 9.93 (254) S19 77
HNF366SA 33.47 (852) 33.96 (864) — 22.4 (570) 23.404 (596) 7.34 (188) 10.347 (264) — 77
HNFC367, J 54.67 (1390) 55.16 (1402) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 302
HNFC367R 54.67 (1390) — 55.7 (1416) 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 304
HNFC367S 54.67 (1390) 55.16 (1402) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 302
3
HNFC368, J, S 54.67 (1390) 55.16 (1402) — 38.4 (976) 39.96 (1016) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 305
HNFC368R 54.67 (1390) 55.16 (1402) — 38.4 (976) 40.25 (1024) 9.24 (236) 14.68 (374) — 307
SAFETY SWITCHES
LFC111N 7.97 (204) 8.13 (208) — 5.5 (140) 5.94 (152) 3 (78) 5.38 (138) S2 35 (10)
LFC111NR 8.07 (206) — 8.16 (208) 5.16 (132) 5.94 (152) 3.13 (80) 5.38 (138) S3 35 (10)
LFC211N 7.97 (204) 8.13 (208) — 5.5 (140) 5.94 (152) 3 (78) 5.38 (138) S1 35 (10)
LFC211NR 8.07 (206) — 8.16 (208) 5.16 (132) 5.94 (152) 3.13 (80) 5.38 (138) S3 35 (10)
LNFC222R 8.07 (206) — 8.16 (208) 5.16 (132) 5.94 (152) 3.13 (80) 5.38 (138) S5 35 (10)
Type 1 Type 1 or 3R Type 4/4X or 12

30A GD 60-200A GD, 30-200A HD Type VBII 30-200A HD Type VBII
E G E G
B
or A
B B
C or or
A A
C C
D F
E G D F D F
Type 1 or 3R Type 4/4X or 12

400-1200A Type VBII HD 400-1200A Type VBII HD
E G E G
B B
or or A
A C
C
D F D F

Knockout Diagrams
Type 1 & 3R Enclosures
Removable
plate covering
HA Type
Hub opening
(Max. 1.25 Conduit)
S1
S2 S3
Embossed .25 in. Embossed .25 in.
mounting holes Embossed .25 in. mounting holes
(4 places) mounting holes (3 places)
(4 places)
4 K.O.'s for
Conduit 0.5-0.75 in. 2 K.O.'s for
Conduit 0.5-0.75 in. 2 K.O.'s for
Conduit 0.5-0.75 in.
7 K.O.'s for Conduit 0.5-0.75-1 in.
3
10 K.O.'s for Conduit 0.5-0.75-1 in. 3 K.O.'s for Conduit 0.5-0.75-1 in.
SAFETY SWITCHES
10 K.O.'s For Conduit
Removable 0.50, 0.75, 1 in.
plate covering
HA Type
Hub opening 4 K.O.'s for Conduit
(Max. 1.25 Conduit) 0.75, 1 in.
S5
Embossed .25 in.
S4 mounting holes S6
Embossed .25 in. (3 places)
mounting holes
(3 places)
2 K.O.'s for
2 K.O.'s for
3 K.O.'s for Conduit 0.5-0.75-1 in.
4 K.O.'s for Conduit 0.5-0.75-1 in. 2 0.25 dia. K.O's
8 K.O.'s for Conduit Removable plate covering Removable plate covering

0.50, 0.75, 1 in. HS Type Hub opening HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit) (Max. 2.5 Conduit)
4 K.O.'s for Conduit
0.75, 1 in.
S7 S8 S9
2 K.O.'s for Conduit 2 K.O.'s for Conduit

0.75, 1 in. 0.75, 1 in.
0.50, 0.75, 1 in. 0.50, 0.75, 1 in.
2 0.25 dia. K.O's 1 0.25 dia. K.O. 1 0.25 dia. K.O.
Removable plate covering

HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)
S12
S10
S11
1 0.25 dia. K.O.

2 0.25 dia. K.O.

0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50 in. 5 K.O.'s for Conduit
1, 1.25, 1.50, 2 in.
10 K.O.'s for Conduit 1 0.88 dia. K.O.
1, 1.25, 1.50, 2 in. 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50 in.
1 0.88 dia. K.O. 1 0.88 dia. K.O. 14 K.O.'s for Conduit
1.25, 1.50, 2.00, 2.50 in.
1 0.25 dia. K.O.
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

Knockout Diagrams
Type 1 & 3R Enclosures
HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)
S14
S15
S13
1, 0.25, dia. K.O 8 K.O.'s for Conduit

2.00, 2.50, 3.00, 3.50 in.
7 K.O.'s for Conduit 4 0.50, 0.75 dia. K.O.'s 2.00, 2.50, 3.00, 3.50 in.
1.25, 1.50, 2.00, 2.50 in.
3
1 0.88 dia K.O. 2 0.50, 0.75 dia. K.O.'s

SAFETY SWITCHES

HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)
S16
S17
2 0.25 dia. K.O.
1 0.25 dia. K.O.

0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25 in. 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25 in.
1 0.88 dia. K.O. 1 0.88 dia. K.O.
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.
Siemens / Speedfax Previous folio: 1-18

Special Application Safety Switches Dimension Drawings
4-Pole & 6-Pole Dimensions
4 & 6-Pole Safety Switch Dimensions

Enclosure - Inches (mm) Mounting - Inches (mm)
Catalogue Number A B C D E F
Figure 1, 4-Pole Fusible and Non-fusible, Type 1
HNF461 24.50 (622) 9.53 (242) 6.09 (155) 19.00 (483) 6.75 (171) 0.268 (7)
HF461 29.12 (740) 9.53 (242) 6.09 (155) 23.50 (597) 6.75 (171) 0.268 (7)
HNF462 24.88 (632) 11.50 (292) 6.09 (155) 19.00 (483) 9.38 (238) 0.268 (7)
HF462 33.53 (852) 11.50 (292) 6.09 (155) 27.50 (699) 9.38 (238) 0.268 (7)
HNF463 27.62 (702) 12.18 (309) 6.09 (155) 19.36 (492) 8.00 (203) 0.268 (7)
HF463 36.44 (926) 12.18 (309) 6.09 (155) 28.11 (714) 8.00 (203) 0.268 (7)
HNF464 36.00 (914) 19.12 (486) 6.42 (163) 30.88 (784) 15.00 (381) 0.44 (11)
HF464 49.48 (1257) 19.12 (486) 6.42 (163) 45.50 (1130) 15.00 (381) 0.44 (11)
Figure 2, 4 & 6-Pole Fusible Type 12/3R and 4X
3
HF461J, HF661J, 29.50 (622) 9.53 (242) 6.48 (165) 31.65 (804) 5.47 (139) 0.27 (7)
SAFETY SWITCHES
HF661S
HF462J, HF662J, 33.53 (852) 11.50 (292) 6.48 (165) 35.69 (907) 8.00 (203) 0.27 (7)
HF662S
HF463J, HF663J, 36.44 (926) 12.18 (309) 6.48 (165) 38.67 (982) 8.47 (215) 0.27 (7)
HF663S
HF464J, HF664J, 49.48 (1257) 19.12 (486) 6.78 (172) 51.64 (1312) 13.44 (341) 0.33 (8)
HF664S
Figure 2, 4 & 6-Pole Non-fusible Type 12/3R and 4X
HNF461J, HNF661J, 24.50 (622) 9.53 (242) 6.48 (165) 26.65 (667) 5.47 (139) 0.27 (7)
HNF661S
HNF462J, HNF662J, 24.88 (632) 11.50 (292) 6.48 (165) 27.03 (687) 8.00 (203) 0.27 (7)
HNF662S
HNF463J, HNF663J, 27.54 (700) 12.18 (309) 6.48 (165) 29.77 (756) 8.47 (215) 0.27 (7)
HNF663S
HNF464J, HNF664J, 36.00 (914) 19.12 (486) 6.78 (172) 38.16 (969) 13.44 (341) 0.33 (8)
HNF664S
Figure 1: Type 1 Figure 2 : Type 12/3R and 4X

Special Application Safety Switches Dimension Drawings
Double Throw Selection
Description
Double throw switches are intended to transfer loads A cover interlock is provided on all ampere ratings. The
from one power source to another. All 2 & 3-pole operating handle may be padlocked in the off position.
double throw switches are CSA certified and both
horsepower and load break rated. Switches are rated Fuse Capabilities of Fusible DT Switches
for use on systems up to 10,000A when protected Amp Fuse Type
with Class H fuses or 200,000A when protected with Rating H R T J
Class R or Class T fusesb. They can also be used to
connect a single source of power to either of two 30 & 60A, 240V Std Yes (kit) No No
loads. In this application it is necessary to field modify 30 & 60A, 600V Std Yes (kit) No Yesc
fusible switches so that the fuses are on the load side
of the switching mechanism. 100 & 200A Std Yes (kit) Yes (kit) Yesc
3
Double Throw Switches

SAFETY SWITCHES
Type 1 — Indoor
Number
System Voltage of Poles Amps Catalogue Number
Heavy Duty Fusible (30-200A) with Class H fuse spacings — Less Neutralb
240
30 DTFC321
Volt AC
60 DTFC322
or
3 100 DTFC323
250
200 DTFC324
Volt DC
600 30 DTFC361
Volt AC, 60 DTFC362
3
250 100 DTFC363
Volt DC 200 DTFC364
Type 1 — Indoor Type 3R — Outdoor a

Number Hub
System Voltage of Poles Amps Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Typea
Heavy Duty Non-Fusible —Less Neutralb

30 DTNFC221 —
60 DTNFC222 —
2 100 DTNFC323 — *
240 200 DTNFC224 —
Volt AC 400 DTNFC225 DTNFC225R
or 30 DTNFC321 —
250 60 DTNFC322 — ECHS
Volt DC 100 DTNFC323 DTNFC323R
3
200 DTNFC324 DTNFC324R
400 DTNFC325 —
600 DTNFC326 — *
600 30 DTNFC361 DTNFC361R

Volt AC, 60 DTNFC362 DTNFC362R ECHS
or 3 100 DTNFC363 DTNFC363R
250
Volt DC 600 DTNFC366 DTNFC366R *
a Hub catalogue number available p. 3-36 c Move load base.

b All Heavy Duty double throw switches with a catalogue * Consult Siemens representative, 400A and larger
number starting with “DT” are rated 200,000 AIC max. Switches do not have hub provisions.
when protected by Class R, J or T fuses. Fuse ampere
rating must not exceed switch ampere rating.

Safety Switches
Double Throw Selection
Accessories, Lug Data and Horsepower Ratings Wire Ranges (Line, Load
and Neutral) per CEC
Accessories – 2 and 3-Pole Switches Type “DT” Onlya Requirements
Catalogue
Description Number 30-200A – 2 & 3-Pole Switches
Switch Wire Range (Cu/Al)
30 HNC612 Ampere DT VBII Design
60 & 100A HNC263 Rating Line, Load and Neutral
Neutral Kits
200A HNC264
400 & 600A HNC678 0 30 (1) #14–6
060 (1) #14–2
30-200A (2) #14-4 AWG HG61234 100 (1) #14–1/0 AWG
Equipment Ground Kit
400 & 600A (4) #14-2/0 HG656 200 (1) #6–250 kcmil
3
30-200A with (1) NO & (1) NC contact HA161234
Auxiliary Contacts (HD Only) 30-200A with (2) NO & (2) NC contact HA261234
400-600A – 2 & 3-Pole Switches
SAFETY SWITCHES
(two required per switch)b 400-600A with (1) NO & (1) NC contact HA165678 Switch Wire Range (Cu/Al)
400-600A with (2) NO & (2) NC contact HA265678 Ampere DT VBII Design
Rating Line, Load and Neutral
30A, 240V Kit HR21
(1) 1/0 AWG–750 kcmil or
30A, 600V Kit and 60A, 240V Kit HR612 400
Class R Fuse Clip Kits (2) 1/0 AWG–250 kcmil
60A, 600V Kit HR62
(two required per switch) 600 (2) 1/0 AWG–500 kcmil
100A Kit HR63
200A Kit HR64
100A, 240V Kit HT23

Class T Fuse Adapter Kits 100A, 600V Kit HT63
(two required per pole) 200A, 240V Kit HT24
200A, 600V Kit HT64
For 3/4” Conduit ECHS075

For 1” Conduit ECHS100
For 1 1/4” Conduit ECHS125
Type 3R Hubs (20-200A)
For 2” Conduit ECHS200
Maximum Horsepower Ratings

Fused Replacement Parts – 2 and 3-Pole Switches Only a
1-Phase AC 3-Phase AC Catalogue
Ampere 250V
Description Number
Rating 240V 240V 480V 600V DC
Type 1, 3R Replacement Handle 30-200A HHD61234
0 30 03 071/2 015 020 05
0 60 10 15 030 050 10 Replacement Handle 400-600A HHD656
100 15 30 060 075 20
200 15 60 125 150 40
Non-Fused
0 30 05 10 020 030 05
0 60 10 20 050 060 10
100 15 40 075 100 20
200 15 60 125 150 40
400-600 — 125 250 350 50
a For “DT” VBII Type switches only. b One aux. required for normal and one required for
emergency switch line base.

Safety Switches
Dimensions
VBII Design Double Throw Dimensions
Enclosure dimensions - Inches (mm)
Catalogue Number A B C D E F
Figure 1 (30-600A Type 1 & 3R)
DTNFC221, DTNFC321, DTNFC361, DTNFC361R 24.50 (622) 9.53 (242) 6.09 (155) 19.00 (483) 6.75 (171) 0.268 (7)
DTFC321, DTFC321R, DTFC361 29.12 (740) 9.53 (242) 6.09 (155) 23.50 (597) 6.75 (171) 0.268 (7)
DTNFC222, DTNFC322, DTNFC362, DTNFC362R 24.88 (632) 11.50 (292) 6.09 (155) 19.00 (483) 9.38 (238) 0.268 (7)
DTFC322, DTFC362 33.45 (852) 11.50 (292) 6.09 (155) 27.50 (699) 9.38 (238) 0.268 (7)
DTNFC223, DTNFC323, DTNFC323R, DTNFC363, DTNFC363R 27.62 (702) 12.18 (309) 6.09 (155) 19.36 (492) 8.00 (203) 0.268 (7)
DTFC323, DTFC363 36.44 (926) 12.18 (309) 6.09 (155) 28.11 (714) 8.00 (203) 0.268 (7)
3
DTNFC224, DTNFC224R, DTNFC324, DTNFC324R, DTNFC364, DTNFC364R 36.00 (914) 19.12 (486) 6.42 (163) 31.00 (787) 15.00 (381) 0.44 (11)
SAFETY SWITCHES
DTFC324, DTFC364 49.44 (1256) 19.12 (486) 6.42 (163) 44.50 (1130) 15.00 (381) 0.44 (11)
DTNFC225, DTNFC225R, DTNFC325, DTNFC365, DTNFC365R 57.71 (1466) 28.22 (717) 9.44 (240) 49.75 (1264) 16.00 (406) 0.56 (14)
DTNFC326, DTNFC366, DTNFC366R 57.71 (1466) 28.22 (717) 9.44 (240) 49.75 (1264) 16.00 (406) 0.56 (14)
E E
D CL A D CL A
(6) “F” dia. mounting holes (30-200A)

C C
Figure 1
B Type 1 & 3Ra B
a Drip hood not shown but provided on Type 3R enclosures.

Enclosed Switches
Rotary Disconnect Switches in Non-Metallic Enclosures e Selection
Description Siemens Enclosed Rotary Disconnect Switches
16–125A non-fusible switches are available b 16–125A, Non-Fusible b Hinged door switches are UL &
in fiberglass reinforced polycarbonate cUL listed for multiple line and load
b 600VAC max. rated
enclosures which are CSA certified as Type conductors per phase in 30–100A
12 & 4X and for either indoor or outdoor b Available in both Type 12 and 4X ratings. They are UL & cUL listed
use. All are horsepower and load break non-metallic enclosures under File No. E191706
rated. All are panel mounted and are either b Both screw and hinged cover b Rotary handles are available in
supplied with factory installed aux. contacts designs available black, red, and yellow and in pistol
or will accept contact kits. All are compact grip designs
b Listed and marked “suitable for use
in size while providing ample wiring space as motor disconnect” per NEC
for copper line & load conductors. b 16–63A screw cover switches have
Section 430-109 factory installed ground bars. All
hinge cover switches accept ground
3
b Screw cover switches are UL listed
under File No. E47705 and are CSA lug kits
SAFETY SWITCHES
certified under File No. 203576
b Screw cover switches are
b IEC 60947-3 rated and CE marked provided with knockouts
(enclosures are IP65 rated)
b Padlockable in OFF position
b HP rated with up to (3) padlocks
Catalog Number Horsepower Ratings

Ampere 3 Pole, 3 Wire with (1) NO Shipping 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC
Rating 3 Pole, 3 Wire & (1) NC Aux. Contacthi Weight a 1 Phase 3 Phase 3 Phase 3 Phase
Non-Fusible, Type 1, 4X & 12Kb with Screw Cover and Black Rotary Handle 600V AC Max.e
16 3LD2064-0TB51-0US2 3LD2064-1GP51-0US2 1 11⁄2 3 71⁄2 10
25 3LD2164-0TB51-0US2 3LD2164-1GP51-0US2 1 3 71⁄2 10 15
30 3LD2264-0TB51-0US2 3LD2264-1GP51-0US2 1 3 71⁄2 15 20
30 — 3LD2264-1TS51-0US2fs 1 3 71⁄2 15 20
30 — 3LD2264-2TW51-0US2gs 1 3 71⁄2 15 20
63 3LD2565-0TB51-0US2 3LD2565-1GP51-0US2s 3 10 15 40 50
100 3LD2766-0TB51-0US2 3LD2766-1GP51-0US2s 6 — 30 60 75
125 3LD2866-0TB51-0US2 3LD2866-1GP51-0US2s 6 — 40 75 100
Non-Fusible, Type 1, 4X & 12Kb with Screw Cover and Red and Yellow Rotary Handle 600V AC Max.e
16 3LD2064-0TB53-0US2 3LD2064-1GP53-0US2 1 11⁄2 3 71⁄2 10
25 3LD2164-0TB53-0US2 3LD2164-1GP53-0US2 1 3 71⁄2 10 15
30 3LD2264-0TB53-0US2 3LD2264-1GP53-0US2 1 3 7 ⁄2
1
15 20
30 — 3LD2264-1TS53-0US2fs 1 3 71⁄2 15 20
30 — 3LD2264-2TW53-0US2gs 1 3 71⁄2 15 20
63 3LD2565-0TB53-0US2 3LD2565-1GP53-0US2s 3 10 15 40 50
100 3LD2766-0TB53-0US2s 3LD2766-1GP53-0US2s 6 — 30 60 75
125 3LD2866-0TB53-0US2s 3LD2866-1GP53-0US2s 6 — 40 75 100
s Built to order. Allow 6–8 weeks for delivery. e Screw cover enclosures are constructed from Makrolon 9425.
a Carton quantity of (1). Shipping weight in pounds (lbs.). Hinged cover enclosures are constructed from fiberglass rein- h Aux. contacts break about 3 Ms before and make about 3 Ms
b Approved for indoor/outdoor use. No cover interlock provided. forced polycarbonate. after main switch contacts.
c 30 and 60A switches are also rated 600V AC. f Switch is supplied with (2) NO and no NC aux. contacts. i 6P, 25A, switch with 1 NO & 1 NC aux. contacts and a black
d Also rated as Type 12 and CSA certified for both indoor and g Switch is supplied with (4) NO and no NC aux. contacts. operating handle is also available. Order catalog number
outdoor use. Defeatable cover interlock provided. Ground bar is not provided or available. 3LD2165-4VD51 (Discount Code: Pilot Devices).

Enclosed Switches
Rotary Disconnect Switches Selection
Enclosed Disconnect Switch Dimensions (Inches)* Wire ranges 60/75°C Cu Only
Catalog Ampere Fig. Dimensions
Number Rating No. A B C D
3LD2 Type Switches c
3LD2064- 16 5.52d 3.94 3.19 4.57 16 Amps (1) #18-10 AWG
3LD2164- 25 5.52d 3.94 3.19 4.57 25–30 Amps (1) #14-10 AWG
3LD2264- 30 5.52d 3.94 3.19 4.57 63 Amps (1) #14-6 AWG
1
3LD2565- 63 6.93e 5.75 4.10 5.87 100–125 Amps (1) #12-1 AWG
3LD2766- 100 11.90 8.35 5.36 7.13
3LD2866- 125 11.90 8.35 5.36 7.13 HNF Type Switches
Note: 3LD2 Type switches only have top and bottom end KOs as follows: (1) #14-#10 AWG Solid
16-30A - 1/2” & 3/4”, 63A - 3/4” & 1”, 100 & 25A - 1” & 1 1/4” (1) #14-#4 AWG Stranded
Up to (4) #12 AWG Solid
30 Amps Up to (3) #12 AWG Stranded
Up to (6) #14 AWG Stranded
Figure 1 Up to (4) #14 AWG Stranded
with (1) #10 AWG Stranded
3
(1) #14-#10 AWG Solid

(1) #14-#1 AWG Stranded
SAFETY SWITCHES
(2) #6 AWG Stranded

60 & 100 Amps
Up to (6) #12 AWG Solid
Figure 2
UL and cUL Short Circuit Withstand Ratings

Short Circuit Withstand Rating and Fuse Class
With Line Side Fusing With Load Side Fusing a
Ampere 5 kA at 10 kA at 18 kA at 5 kA at 18 kA at
Rating 600V Max 600V Max 480V Max 480V Max 480V Max
3LD2 Type Switchesh
RK5
16 (50A Max) — — — —
RK5
25 & 30 (80A Max) — — — —
RK5
IEC Fuse and Withstand Ratings
63 (175A Max) — — — —
Ampere Rating gG Fuse Size Short Circuit Rating
100 & RK5
— — — —
125 (200A Max) 3LD2 Screw Cover Switches
16 20A 5k Arms
HNF Type Switches 25 25A 10k Arms
32 50A 10k Arms
Ferraz
Shawmut 63 63A 15k Arms
A50P or lower
30 H, K & RK5 H, K & RK5 let-through 100 100A 20k Arms
— (100A Max) (30A Max) semiconductor 125 125A 20k Arms
fuses
(60A Max)
J, T & CC HNF Hinged Cover Switches
(100A Max) Ferraz
60 H, K & RK5 Shawmut 30 63A 10k Arms
(150A Max) A50P or lower
H, K & RK5 60 100A 10k Arms
let-through
(60A Max) semiconductor 100 100A 10k Arms
f
100 f fuses
(100A Max)
Accessories
Switch
Ampere Catalog
Rating Number Description
3LD2 Type Switches c
a For use as supplemental protection on the load side of the branch circuit over current 16–30A 3LD9220-2C Neutral Kit
protective device.
b Ground lug kit has two lugs for #14-4 Cu/Al wire. 63A 3LD9250-2CA Neutral Kit
c Factory installed ground lugs supplied as follows: 16-30A #14-10 Cu, 63A #14-8 Cu.
Ground lug not provided and is not available on catalog numbers 3LD2264-2TW51-0US2
100–125A 3LD9280-2C Neutral Kit
and 3LD2264-2TW53-0US2.
d 6.38 inches high including mounting feet.
e 7.85 inches high including mounting feet.
HNF Type Switches
f 60 & 100A HNF switches are rated 10kA at 480V max. with line side Class H, K & RK5 30–100A GSGK60 Ground Lug Kit b
150A max. fuses.
g Wire range (1) #14-2 AWG 60/75 °C Cu only. 30A LBRA1 Auxiliary Contact Kit (1 NO-1 NC)
h 16-63A 3LD switches are also rated 5kA at 600VAC max when protected by a 3RV type
MSP of the same or lesser ampere rating. 60–100A LBRA2 Auxiliary Contact Kit (1 NO-1 NC)
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4. 30–100A HF63CX g Neutral Kit

4POWER PRODUCT Disconnect Switches
REVISED
10/2020
Contents
Compact Non-Fusible Switches
Rotary and Toggle Switch—Selection 4-2 – 4-3
Dimensions and Wire Ranges 4-4
Type VBII (30-600A)
Features and Ordering Information 4-5
Switch and Handle Selection 4-6
Accessories 4-7 – 4-8
Dimensions and Lug Wire Ranges 4-9
Type MCS (30-200A)
Switches, Fuse, and No Fuse Kit—Selection 4-10
Handle Operators and Accessories 4-11
Dimensional Data for Fused Applications 4-12 – 4-13
Fixed Depth Handle Operator Dimensions 4-14
Type CFS Compact Fusible Switches
4
Features and Ordering Information 4-15
Switch and Handle—Selection 4-16
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Accessories & 600-800 Handle Selection 4-17
Dimensions and Technical Characteristics 4-18
Type CNFS Compact Non-Fusible Switches
General information and catalog numbering system 4-19
General Features and ordering information 4-20
Switch, shaft and handle selection 4-21
Additional accessories 4-22
Type HCP Switchboard Units
Selection/Accessories 4-23
Dimensions 4-24
Base Mount VBFS361 Panelboard Unit

Disconnect Switches
Compact Non-Fusible — Rotary and Toggle Selection
Features Door Mounted Complete Assemblies
b 16–250 Ampere, to 100 hp, 480V & 600V Operator, Shaft, & Switch) 600V AC Max.b
b Rotary and Toggle actuation models Shaft Mounted 4 Hole Mounted AC Horsepower Ratings
120V 240V 480V 600V
b 3LD2 Type switches are padlockable Number Ampere
Catalogue Numberc Catalogue Numberc of Poles Rating 1Ø 1Ø 3Ø 3Ø 3Ø
in the OFF position and are UL listed
— 3LD2003-1TP53a 3 16 1⁄2 11/2 3 71/2 10
under File No. E47705 per UL508 and
3LD2154-0TK 3LD2103-0TK 3
are CSA certified under File No. 203576 3LD2154-1TP 3LD2103-1TP 3a
25 2 3 71/2 10 15
b Base, DIN-rail and door mounting 3LD2154-1TL 3LD2103-1TL 3+N
3LD2154-2EP 3LD2103-2EP 3 + Na
b IEC 947-1 rated, CE marked 3LD2254-0TK 3LD2203-0TK 3
32 2 3 10 20 20
3LD2254-1TL 3LD2203-1TL 3+N
b Listed and marked “suitable as motor
3LD2555-0TK 3LD2504-0TK 3 63 — 10 15 40 50
disconnect” per NEC Section 430-109 — 3LD2704-0TK 3 100 — — 30 60 75
— 3LD2804-0TK 3 125 — — 40 75 100
Application
Siemens Load Break Switches are listed 3LD Type Base Mounted Complete Assemblies
as manual motor controllers and are (Operator, Shaft, & Switch) 600V AC Max.e
suitable as motor disconnects. They are Handle Mounting
load break rated and act as enclosure
4
Shaft 4 Hole 4 Hole

disconnects when short circuit protection (center hole) (no defeat) (with defeat) AC Horsepower Ratings
is provided upstream of the switch. If
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
upstream over current protection is not Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Number Ampere 120V 240V 480V 600V
Number Number Number of Poles Rating 1Ø 1Ø 3Ø 3Ø 3Ø
provided, use a Siemens fusible Type
— 3LD2013-0TK5 3LD2017-0TK1 3
VBII, CFS or MCS Disconnect Switch. — — 3LD2017-1TL1 3+N
16 1⁄2 11/2 3 71/2 10
Ordering Information 3LD2144-0TK5

3LD2144-1TL5
3LD2113-0TK5
3LD2113-1TL5
—
—
3
3+N
25 2 3 71/2 10 15
Door Mounted Switches (Rotary Type
3LD2244-0TK5 3LD2213-0TK5 3LD2217-0TK1 3
Only) – Order either complete “3LD2” 3LD2244-1TL53 3LD2213-1TL53 3LD2217-1TL1 3+N
32 2 3 10 20 20
assemblies.
3LD2545-0TK5 3LD2514-0TK5 3LD2517-0TK1 3
63 3 10 15 40 50
Complete Assemblies include switch, — — 3LD2517-1TL1 3+N
handle, and shaft. Certain 25 and 32A — 3LD2714-0TK5 — 3 100 — — 30 60 75
assemblies are also available with facto- — 3LD2814-0TK5 — 3 125 — — 40 75 100
ry installed neutral blocks and/or aux.
— 3LD2318-0TK1 — 3 160 — — 40 75 75
contacts. These accessories can also
be ordered as field installed kits. — 3LD2418-0TK1 — 3 250 — — 50 100 75
3LD2254-0TK51
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings

Switch Rating
& Type Max. Line Side Fuse Rating Base Mount
5kA with Line Side 3LD2217-0TK13
Class H, K, or RK5 Fuses
25 & 32A 3LD2 80A Max. at 600V AC Max.
63A 3LD2 175A Max. at 600V AC Max.
Note: 3LD2 switches are also rated 5kA at 600V

AC Max. when protected by a 3RV motor starter
with a FLA rating equal to or less than the switch
ampere rating.
a Includes auxiliary contacts (1 NO and 1 NC). c Add 51 for a black handle or 53 for a red & yellow e Add suffix 1 for a black or 3 for a red & yellow handle
b Handles are IP65 rated and are also CSA certified for handle to the end of the catalog number. to the catalog number (except 3LD2244-1TL53 &
Type 1, 4X and 12 applications. d 100-250A 3LD2 switches are rated 10kA when 3LD2213-1TL53). Handles are IP65 rated and are also
protected by 200A Max. Class RK5 fuses. CSA certified for Type 1, 4X and 12 applications.

Disconnect Switches
Accessories for Front Mounted 3LD2 Switches
Catalogue Number Description Switches used with
3LD9200-5Bc 1 NO, 1 NC Aux. Contact 25-125A
3LD9200-5BFc 1 NO, 1 NC Aux. with Gold Plated Contacts 25-125A
3LD9220-2B Neutral/Ground Terminal 25 & 32A
3LD9250-2BA Neutral/Ground Terminal 63A
3LD9280-2B Neutral/Ground Terminal 100 & 125A
3LD9220-0B 4th Pole (leading ON, lagging OFF) 25 & 32A
3LD9250-0BA 4th Pole (leading ON, lagging OFF) 63A
3LD9280-0B 4th Pole (leading ON, lagging OFF) 100 & 125A
3LD9224-1Ba Black Handle (4 hole mtg.) 25 & 32A
3LD9284-1Ba Black Handle (4 hole mtg.) 63-125A
3LD9224-3Ba Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg.) 25 & 32A
3LD9284-3Ba Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg.) 63-125A
3LD9224-1Da Black Handle (shaft mtg.)d 25 & 32A
3LD9284-1Da Black Handle (shaft mtg.)d 63-125A
3LD9224-3Da Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.)d 25 & 32A
3LD9284-3Da Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.)d 63-125A
3LD9220-2C
3LD9221-2Aa Terminal Cover 1P (Pack of 4) 25 & 32A
3LD9251-0Aa Terminal Cover 3P (Pack of 4) 63A
4
Accessories for Base Mounted 3LD2 Switches
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
3LD9200-5Cc 1 NO, 1 NC Aux. Contact 25-250A
3LD9200-5CFc 1 NO, 1 NC Aux. with Gold Plated Contacts 25-250A
3LD9220-2C Neutral/Ground Terminal 25 & 32A
3LD9250-2CA Neutral/Ground Terminal 63A
3LD9220-0C 4th Pole (leading ON, lagging OFF) 25 & 32A
3LD9250-0CA 4th Pole (leading ON, lagging OFF) 63A
3LD9224-1Ba Black Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat) 25 & 32A
3LD9284-1Ba Black Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat) 63-125A
3LD9224-3Ba Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat) 25 & 32A
3LD9284-3Ba Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat) 63-125A
3LD9251-0A
3LD9224-1Da Black Handle (shaft mtg.) 25 & 32A
3LD9284-1Da Black Handle (shaft mtg.) 63-125A
3LD9224-3Da Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.) 25 & 32A
Note: 3LD2 shaft lengths allow the following
3LD9284-3Da Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.) 63-125A
maximum enclosure depths from the switch
3LD9221-2Aa Terminal Cover 1P (Pack of 4) 25 & 32A mounting surface to the outside of the cover:
3LD9251-0Aa Terminal Cover 3P (Pack of 4) 63A 16-32A, 15.25"
63-125A, 15.75"
160 & 250A, 23.70"
a Handles and line side terminal covers are supplied as c Aux.contacts break about 30 Ms before and make about 3 d Canbe used as replacement handles on enclosed 3LD2
standard with 3LD2 switches. Ms after main switch contacts. switches.
b Add suffix 1 for a black or 3 for a red & yellow handle to the Ratings 10A at 120V AC
catalog number (except 3LD2244-1TL53 & 3LD2213-1TL53). 6A at 240V AC
Handles are IP65 rated and are also CSA certified for Type 1.4A at 480V AC
1, 4X and 12 applications.

Disconnect Switches
Dimension Drawings and Wire Ranges Dimension J Minimum Deptha
Switch Dimension J
3LD2 25 & 32A Front Shaft Mounted 3.07 (78)
3LD2 63 Front Shaft Mounted 3.35 (85)
3LD2 16-32A Front 4-hole Mounted 2.13 (54)
3LD2 63A Front 4-hole Mounted 2.48 (63)
3LD2 100 & 125A Front 4-hole Mounted 2.56 (65)
3LD2 25 & 32A Base w/shaft Mtg. Handle 6.46 (164)
3LD2 63A Base w/shaft Mtg. Handle 6.77 (172)
3LD2 16-32A Base w/4-hole Mtg. Handle 5.59 (142)
3LD2 63A Base w/4-hole Mtg. Handle 5.99 (152)
3LD2 100-250A Base w/4-hole Mtg. Handle 6.07 (154)
a
J
C
E A
F D
4
a 0.16 in.
(4 mm) G
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Drilling H
Pattern
.125
(3.2) 0.31 in.
(8 mm)
.95 3LD2 16-250A

(24.1)
.877
(22.5)
Shaft Mounted
3LD2 Handle Cutout
(4-hole pattern)
Switch Dimensions - Inches (mm)

Switch Type Catalogue Number A B C D E F G H
Rotary Front Mtg. 3LD20b 1.89 (48) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) — — — — —
Rotary Front Mtg. 3LD21 & 2b 1.81 (46) 2.17 (55) 1.97 (50) — — — — —
Rotary Front Mtg. 3LD25? 2.36 (60) 2.52 (64) 2.32 (59) — — — — —
Rotary Front Mtg. 3LD27 & 8b 2.40 (61) 3.27 (83) 2.40 (61) — — — — —
Rotary Base Mtg. 3LD20b 1.89 (48) 1.97 (50) 2.29 (58) — — — — —
Rotary Base Mtg. 3LD21 & 2b 1.81 (46) 2.17 (55) 2.29 (58) — — — — —
Rotary Base Mtg. 3LD25b 2.36 (60) 2.52 (64) 2.68 (68) — — — — —
Rotary Base Mtg. 3LD27 & 8b 2.80 (71) 3.27 (83) 2.76 (70) — — — — —
Rotary Base Mtg. 3LD23 & 4 4.41 (112) 5.83 (148) 4.10 (104) — — — — —
a Depth from outside of cover to back of switch. b Handle front plate dimensions: 3LD 16-32A—2.64 inches square
3LD 63-125—3.55 inches square

Disconnect Switches
Type VBII (30-600A) with Flange Mounted Operating Handle Features and Ordering Information
Features b Short circuit rating of 10,000 AIC with b Load break and horsepower rated
class H fuse, and of 200,000 AIC with b Defeatable cover interlock standard
b 30-600A, 600VAC and DC ratings class R or J fuses. with all handles
b 240 & 600V AC switches are UL b Flange mounted handles rated as Type
Recognized under file number b Meets NFPA79 requirements
1, 3R & 12 or 4X are padlockable in
E121152, Vol. 3 and CSA certified the off position with up to (3) padlocks b Seismic qualified — complies with the
under file number 154852 2010 California Building Code (CBC)
with 5/16 hasps — and with the International Building
b Visible blade quick make and break b Meets UL98 requirements and suit- Code (IBC) — Compliance Level
switching action able for both main and branch circuit SDS = 1.85 g
b Panel and Flange mounted assemblies applications
facilite installation
b A complete line of aux contacts are
b Panel mounted switches are available
variable depth
4
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
VBFS361, VBLK1 & VBH1 VBFS363F VBNFS365, VBLK4 & VBH2
Ordering Information
1. Determine the ratings required (amps, 3. For panel mounted switches with a
volts, HP, Fusible, NF), the mounting Max-Flex operator, order panel mount-
needed (Panel or Flange), and select ed switch, Max-Flex Handle & Adapter
the appropriate switch. Kit and drive cable.
2. For panel mounted switches with a 4. Select accessories if required.
rigid operating shaft (30-600A), order
panel mounted switch, flange mount-
ed operating handle & rigid linkage kit
based on depth required.

Disconnect Switches
Type VBII (30-600A) with Flange Mounted Operating Handle Selection
Switches—for Standard 600V Max AC or DC Applications
Horsepower Rating, Switches and 3-Phasedd
Switch Max. AC 240 Volts AC 480 Volts AC 600 Volts AC 600
Amperage Voltage Catalogue Volts DC
Rating Rating Number Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. (max)d
Fusible Panel Mounted Variable Depth Switches - 3-Polee

30 240 VBFS321 3 71/2 — — — — —a
60 240 VBFS322 71/2 15 — — — — —b
30 600 VBFS361 — — 5 15 71/2 20 15c
60 600 VBFS362 — — 15 30 15 50 30c
100 600 VBFS363 — — 25 60 30 75 50c
200 600 VBFS364 — — 50 125 60 150 50
400 600 VBFS365 — — 100 250 125 350 —i
600 600 VBFS366 — — 150 400 200 500 —i
Non-fusible Panel Mounted Variable Depth Switches - 3-Polee

30 600 VBNFS361 — 10 — 20 — 30 15c
60 600 VBNFS362 — 20 — 50 — 60 30c
100 600 VBNFS363 — 40 — 75 — 100 50c
200 600 — 60 — 125 — 150 50
4
VBNFS364
400 600 VBNFS365 — 125 — 250 — 300 —i
600 600 VBNFS366 — 200 — 400 — 500 —i
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Fusible Flange Mounted Switches - 3-Polefg

30 240 VBFS321F 3 71/2 — — — — —a
60 240 VBFS322F 71/2 15 — — — — —b
30 600 VBFS361F — — 5 15 71/2 20 15c
60 600 VBFS362F — — 15 30 15 50 30c
100 600 VBFS363F — — 50 60 30 75 50c
200 600 VBFS364F — — 100 125 60 150 50
Non-fusible Flange Mounted Switches – 3-Polefg

30 600 VBNFS361F — 10 — 20 — 30 15c
60 600 VBNFS362F — 20 — 50 — 60 30c
100 600 VBNFS363F — 40 — 75 — 100 50c
200 600 VBNFS364F — 60 — 125 — 150 50
Note: Fusible switches include fuse provisions for Class H Fuses. The load base can be moved to pre-drilled holes for Class J Fuses on all 600V switches. If Class R Fuses are
required, add a Class R Fuse Clip Kit.
Max-FlexTM Handle and Adapter Kit Cable Kit

(Type 1, 12, 3R & 4X) Use with 30-200A panel For use with 30-200A panel
mounted switches and cable kit. mounted switches and Max-Flex
Catalogue Number Operating Handle Description handle and adapter kit.
Plastic Handles
FHOEC036 36" long drive cable
VBHM1 30-200A Type 1, 3R, 12 and 4X
FHOEC048 48" long drive cable
Metal Handles
VBHM2 30-200A Type 1, 3R and 12
VBHM2X 30-200A Type 4X
VBNFS361,
VBHM1 &
FHOEC036
a Rated 5 HP at 250V DC. f Includes line base, load base, operating mechanism and
b Rated 10 HP at 250V DC. line and load lugs. Order operating handle and linkage kits
c 600V DC & 600V DC horsepower rating shown requires from tables on pages 4-7 or 4-8.
(2) poles to be connected in series. g Please add letter "M" to the end of catalog number for
d Std. - applies when non-time delay fuses are used. metal handle.
Max. - applies when time delay fuses are used.

Disconnect Switches
Type VBII (30-600A) with Flange Mounted Operating Handle Selection & Accessories
Flange Mounted Operating Handles Rigid Linkage Kits NEW Quick Connects
For use with Panel Mounted Switches. For use with Panel Mounted Switches. They provide two point control power
Plastic handle is included with Flange Not required for Flange Mounted take-off capability and are normally
Mounted Switches as standard. Switches. used on two poles on the line side
Catalogue Switch Enclosure Deptha when it is required to have control
Number Operating Handle Description Catalogue Ampere power available when the switch is
Number Rating Min Max. in the OFF position. They provide a
Plastic Handles
VBLK1 30-200 6.94b 6.94? mounting provision for standard ¼”
VBH1 30-200A Type 1, 3R & 12 VBLK2 30-200 6.94b 19.0
quick connect terminal. Installed in
VBH14X 30-200A Type 4X VBLK3 400 & 600 9.00 8.75
VBLK4 400 & 600 9.00 19.0 the line or load side. 30A VBII switches
Metal Handles have lugs to accept (2) wires per pole
VBH112 30-200A Type 1, 3R & 12
as standard so a 30A kit is
not required.
VBH14 30-200A Type 4X
VBH2 400A Type 1 & 12 Catalogue
Number Description
VBH2R 400 & 600A Type 1, 3R & 12
HCQ62 60A 2 wire quick connect kit
VBH24X 400 & 600A Type 4X
4
HT63
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Class T Fuse Adapter Kits
100-600A fusible switches are field
convertible to accept Class T fuses.
HR612 400-600A switches are field convertible
to accept Class T fuses by moving the
Class R Fuse Clip Kits load base to a pre-drilled T fuse position.
HN612
These kits prevent the installation of Class T Fuse Adapter Kitsc
Class H and K fuses (one kit required
per switch). Catalogue
Number Description Neutral Kits
Class R Fuse Clip Kits HT23 100A, 240V Kit Standard Neutral Kits can be field
Catalogue HT63 100A, 600V Kit installed in 30-100A switches.
Number Description
HT24 200A, 240V Kit Neutral Kits
HR21 30A, 240V Kit (HD only)
HT64s 200A, 600V Kit
Switch Kit Catalogue
HR612 30A, 600V Kit/60A, 240V Kit
Ampere Rating Number
HR62 60A, 600V Kit Class J Fuse Provisions 30A 600V, 60A 240V HNC612
HR63 100A Kit All 30-600A, 600V fusible switches are 60A, 600V & 100A HNC623
HR64 200A Kit field convertible to accept Class J fuses
by moving the load base to a pre-drilled
HR656 400A/600A Kit 200% Neutral Kits
J fuse position.
CSA listed 200% Neutrals are available
Internal Door Latch Kits
on 60 & 100A switches. They are typi-
For use with enclosures with door Window Kits (Type 1, 12, 3R and 4x)
cally used with non-linear transformers
mounted latching bar. Required when a Allows viewing of visible blades and of or where increased neutral ampacity/lug
flange mounted switch is mounted in a indicating fuses through 200A. capacity is required.
Hoffmann or Rittal enclosure provided
with an AB cutout. Catalogue
Number Description 200% Neutral Kits
Catalogue VBWK1 30A Window Kit Switch Kit
Number Description Ampere Catalogue Wire Range Line &
VBWK2 60 & 100A Window Kit Rating Number Load Lugs (Cu/Al)
2 point (for use with enclo-
DKR2 VBWK3 200-600A Window Kit 60 & 100A HNC263 (2) #14-1/0 AWG
sures less than 40" high)
3 point (for use with enclo-
DKR3
sures 40" or larger in height)
s Built to order. Allow 6–8 weeks for delivery. b 7.12 for 200A switches.
a Dimensions (min. & max.) from enclosure mounting pan c One kit per pole required.
to outside surface of enclosure handle mounting flange.

Disconnect Switches
Type VBII (30-600A) with Flange Mounted Operating Handle Accessories
Auxiliary Contacts
The auxiliary contacts are available in 1 normally open and 1 normally closed
or 2 normally open and 2 normally closed configurations. Siemens offers a
PLC Auxiliary Switch (30-200A) that has very low resistance for low voltage
and current typical in PLC circuits. All auxiliary contacts make after and break
before main switch contacts.
Kit Ampere Rating Kit Horsepower Rating
Switch Aux. Switch 125V AC 250V AC 28V DC 125V AC 250V AC 28V AC
HA161234 Ampere Catalogue
Rating Number Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.

30-200 HA161234 10 10 — 1/2 3/4 —
400-600 HA165678 10 10 — 1/2 3/4 —

30-200 HA261234 10 10 7 1/2 3/4 —
400-600 HA265678 10 10 7 1/2 3/4 —
4
Low Current PLC Type with 1 NO & 1 NC Gold Plated Contacts

30-200 HA361234 10 10 — 1/2 3/4 —
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
HA261234
400-600 HA365678 10 10 — 1/2 3/4 —
Fuse Puller Kits

Fuse Puller Kits are field installable in 30-100A Type VBII Heavy Duty
Switches (one kit required per 3-pole switch).
Switch Ampere Rating Fuse Puller Kit Catalogue Number
030 HP61
060 HP62s
100 HP63s
Copper Lug Kits

HP61 All switches are CSA approved to accept field installed copper lug kits.
Switch Ampere Rating Copper Lug Cat. No. Description
30–60 HLC612 (9) Lugs/Kit #14-4 AWG Cu
100 HLC63s (9) Lugs/Kit #14-1/0 AWG Cu
200 HLC64s (9) Lugs/Kit #6 AWG-300 Kcmil Cu
400–600A HLC65678 (1) Lugs/Kit #1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil Cu
HLC612 Equipment Ground Kits

Equipment Ground Lug Kits are available for all switches.
Switch Catalogue Number of Wire Range Per
Ampere Rating Number Terminals Terminal (Cu/AI)
30–200 HG61234 2 #14-4 AWG
400 & 600 HG656 4 #6 AWG-250 Kcmil
NEW Internal Shield Kits (for fusible switches)

Kits provide a “skirt” that encloses the VBII switch and also a clear plastic
inner door to prevent accidental contact with live parts. Test probe holes
are provided and fuses can be replaced without removal of kit.
Switch Ampere Rating Shield Kit Catalogue Number
30A HSK61
60-100A HSK623
HSK61
200A HSK64

Disconnect Switches
Type VBII (30-600A) with Flange Mounted Operating Handle Selection
Lugs
30 & 60A switches are suitable for use with 60° or 75°C wire. 100–600A
switches are suitable for use with 75°C rated wire. All switches are supplied
with factory installed line and load lugs.
Wire Ranges (Line, Load and Standard Neutral)

Switch
Ampere
Rating Lug Wire Range
30 #14-2 AWG (Cu/Al)
60 #14-2 AWG (Cu/Al)
100 #14-1/0 AWG (Cu/Al)

200 #6 AWG-300 Kcmil (Cu/Al)
(1) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) or
400
(2) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) or
600
4
Approximate Dimensions
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Mounting bracket shown with handle installed is supplied with
Flange Mounted Switches only. All Panel Mounted Switches have
a “L” shaped mounting pan with a line base, load base (if fusible)
and mechanism installed.
Catalogue Dimensions
Number A B Ca D (min) D (max)
Fusible, Panel Mounted
VBFS321 11.88 7.47 6.94 19
VBFS322 13.12 8.5 6.94 19
VBFS361 11.88 7.47 6.94 19
VBFS362 13.12 8.5 6.94 19
N/A A
VBFS363 13.12 8.5 6.94 19
VBFS364 17 12.33 7.12 19
VBFS365 26.25 16.5 8.63 19
VBFS366 26.25 16.5 8.63 19
Non-fusible, Panel Mounted
VBNFS361 9.79 7.47 6.94 19
VBNFS362 9.79 8.5 6.94 19
VBNFS363 9.79 8.5 6.94 19
N/A
VBNFS364 10.77 12.33 7.12 19
VBNFS365 13 16.5 8.63 19
VBNFS366 13 16.5 8.63 19
Fusible, Flange Mounted
VBFS321F 11.88 14.08 7.47 7.27 D
VBFS322F 13.12 15.83 8.85 7.27
VBFS361F 11.88 14.08 7.47 7.27
N/A
VBFS362F 13.12 15.83 8.85 7.27
VBFS363F 13.12 15.83 8.85 7.27
C
VBFS364F 17 18.20 12.68 7.57
Non-fusible, Flange Mounted
VBNFS361F 9.79 11.78 7.47 7.27
VBNFS362F 9.79 11.78 8.85 7.27
N/A
VBNFS363F 9.79 11.78 8.85 7.27
VBNFS364F 10.77 11.97 12.68 7.57
a DimensionC for panel mounted switches indicates the minimum width from the left
hand edge of the switch mounting pan to the right hand inside surface of the enclosure.

Disconnect Switches
Type MCS (30-200A) — Switches, Fuse and No Fuse Kits Selection
Features
b 30, 60, 100 and 200 Ampere Switches b Compact Size b Available with three operator handle
b Visible Blade Contacts options, allowing flexible placement
b UL Recognized (file # E121152 vol. 1 & of switch
2) and CSA Certified under file #84625 b Rugged Construction — with a short
circuit current rating of 10,000 amps b Field Installable Auxiliary Contacts
b Simple Mounting — with an integral with Class H or 200,000 amps at 600V
switch and over center mechanism b Flexible Fuse Class Configurations
maximum AC, when fused with Class b Flange mounted handles meet NFPA79
b Horsepower & load break rated R or Class J fuses requirements
Type MCS Disconnect Switch with Type MCS Disconnect Switch with Type MCS Disconnect Switch
4
Max-Flex™ handle operator fixed-depth, flange-mounted handle with rotary handle
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
1. Select the basic switch size you need 3. Choose either fuse or no fuse kit from 5. Select from the list of handle operators,
(30, 60, 100 or 200 ampere). chart below. Information the type which best suits your
2. Check the switch selected against the 4. Check “Minimum Dimensions” on page application. Handle operators can be
maximum horsepower rating required 5-12 for installation space requirements. selected from the next page.
for our application. “L” or “R” suffix on
switch catalog numbers denotes left or
right-handed mechanism drive.
Basic Switches
Max. Horespower Rating, 3 Phased
240 Volts AC 480 Volts AC 600 Volts AC
Switch Max. Catalogue Catalogue
Ampere Voltage Number Number Standard Time Standard Time Standard Time 250 Volts
Rating Rating Right Hand Left Hand Fuse Delay Fuse Fuse Delay Fuse Fuse Delay Fuse (max)d
30 600 MCS603R MCS603L 3 71/2 5 15 71/2 20 15
1/2
60 600 MCS606R MCS606L 7 15 15 30 15 50 10
100 600 MCS610R MCS610Ls 15 30 25 60 30 75 20
200 600 MCS620R MCS620Ls 25 60 50 125 60 150 40
Fuse And No Fuse Kits (Includes load base plus line and load fuse clips)a
No Fuse Kits For Class H For Class J For Class R
Basic
Switch Switch Standard Cu Onlyb Lug
Ampere Catalogue Kit Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Wire
Rating Number Description Number Number Number a Number a Number a Size
No Fuse TMK606 — — — —
#14 to
MCS603R 30A, 250V — — FCK203s — FCRK203
#4 AWG
130 or 30A, 600V — — FCK206 FCJK603 FCRK206
Cu/AI
MCS603L 60A, 250V — — FCK206 — FCRK206
60A, 600V — — FCK606 FCJK606 FCRK606
No Fuse TMK606 — — — —
#14 to
MCS606R 60A, 250V — — FCK206 — FCRK206
#4 AWG
160 or 60A, 600V — — FCK606 FCJK606 FCRK606
Cu/AI
MCS606L 100A, 250V — — OFCK661s OFCK661s c
100A, 600V — — OFCK661s OFCK661s c
No Fuse TMK610 TMK610C — — —
#14 to
MCS610R 100A, 250V — — FCK610 FCK610 c
#2/0 AWG
100 or 100A, 600V — — FCK610 FCK610 c
Cu/AI
MCS610L 200A, 250V — — OFCK620 OFCK620 c
200A, 600V — — OFCK620 OFCK620 c
MCS620R No Fuse TMK620 TMK620Cs — — — #6 to

200 or 200A, 250V — — FCK620 FCK620 c 300 kcmil
MCS620L 200A, 600V — — FCK620 FCK620 c Cu/AI
s Built to order. Allow 6–8 weeks for delivery. Non-Fusible—order standard switch and copper only no c For Class R fuses order Class H kit from this table and the
a For “copper only” connectors, order as follows: fuse kit. Class R conversion kit from the next page.
Fusible—order standard switch, standard fuse kit and cop- b Includes both line and load lugs. d HP ratings for time delay fuses and for 250V DC also
per only no fuse kit. apply to Non-fusible switches.

Disconnect Switches
Type MCS (30-200A) Accessories
Auxiliary Switch Kits Class R Fuse Conversion Kits
Contact Arrangement Fuse Clip Rating Catalogue Number
Switch 1 NO/1 NC 2 NO/2 NC 100A, 600V SSRK33
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number 200A, 600V SSRK34
MCS603R MCSAKR136 MCSAKR236
MCS603L MCSAKL136 MCSAKL236s
MCS606R MCSAKR136 MCSAKR236
Fuse Ejector Kits
MCS606L MCSAKL136 MCSAKL236s
MCS610R MCSAK116 MCSAK216 Switch Fuse Ejector Kit
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
MCS610L MCSAK116 MCSAK216
MCS620R MCSAK126 MCSAK226 MCS610 FE100s
MCS620L MCSAK126 MCSAK226 MCS620 FE200s
Handle Operators
Fixed Depth, Flange Mounted, Types 1, 3, 3R, 12 af
Switch Complete Handle Mechanism Handle Only Switch Operator Only
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
MCS603R FDFS06R FDH10 FDS06R
MCS603L FDFS06L FDH10 FDS06L
4
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Variable Depth, Flange Mounted Max-Flex™, Types 1, 3, 3R, 12 b

Switch Complete Handle Mechanism Handle Only Switch Operator Only Cable Only c
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
MCS603R FHOS06036R FHOHS FHOS06R FHOEC036
MCS603L FHOS06036L FHOHS FHOS06L FHOEC036
MCS620R FHOS20036R FHOHS FHOS20R FHOJC036
MCS620L FHOS20036L FHOHS FHOS20L FHOJC036
Variable Depth Rotary, Through-The-Door-Mounted, Types 1, 12 de

Variable Depth Shaft Only Variable Depth
MCS603R CRHOS06VD CRHOH RHOS06 RHOSVD
MCS620R CRHOS20VD RHOH RHOS20 RHOSVD
MCS Disconnect Switch Panel Space Requirements

Panel Space Requirements Minimum Dimensions (inches*)
Switch “A” – Dimension is measured from
Catalogue Fuse each cross bail pin.
Number Size "A" "B" "C" Clases
30A/240V 6.13 5.52 8.11 H, K, R “B” – Dimension is measured from line
MCS603 30A/600V 6.13 5.52 10.11 H, K, R side barrier to load side barrier.
30A/600V 6.13 5.52 8.48 J
“C” – Dimension is measured from line
60A/240V 6.13 5.52 7.86 H, K, R side terminal of switch to load
MCS606 60A/600V 6.13 5.52 10.38 H, K, R
60A/600V 6.13 5.52 8.35 J side terminal of fuse load base.
100A/240V 7.38 7.59 11.85 H, K, R
MCS610 100A/600V 7.38 7.59 13.85 H, K, R
100A/600V 7.38 7.59 10.6 J
200A/240V 9.17 9.00 14.7 H, K, R
MCS620 200A/600V 9.17 9.00 17.2 H, K, R
200A/600V 9.17 9.00 13.32 J
s Built to order. Allow 6–8 weeks for delivery. c Standard cable length is 36 inches. Alternate lengths are d For Type 4 and 4X applications, order handle only
a For Type 4 and 4X applications, order handle only available as follows: Catalog Number RHOH4
Catalogue Number Length Amps Cat. No. e For Type 3 and 3R applications, order handle only
100A - FDH104 200A - FDH204 48" 30–100 FHOEC048 Catalog Number RHOH
b For Type 4 and 4X applications, order handle only 60" 30–100 FHOEC060 f Min. enclosure depth from mounting pan to handle mount-
Catalogue Number FHOHS4 48" 200 FHOJC048 ing surfaces: 30-100A 6.44 Inches
60" 200 FHOJC060 200A 10.93 Inches
*For millimeters multiply inches by 25.4.

Disconnect Switches
Motor Control Disconnect Switch Selection
Outline Drawing 30/60A Switch Mechanism
Dimensional Data for Fused Applications - Inches (mm)

Basic Switch
Catalogue Number Size A B Fuse Class
30A/240V 8.11 (206) 3.63 (92) H, K, R
MCS603 30A/600V 10.11 (257) 5.63 (143) H, K, R
30A/600V 8.48 (215) 4.00 (102) J
60A/240V 7.86 (200) 3.38 (86) H, K, R
MCS606 60A/600V 10.36 (263) 5.88 (149) H, K, R
60A/600V 8.36 (212) 3.88 (99) J
a Overall Width Using Auxiliary Switch

Single Pole - 7.18” (182)
Double Pole - 7.63” (194)
b Auxiliary switch mounts on opposite side from mechanism.
4 SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Auxiliary Switch Detail
Outline Drawing 100A Switch Mechanism

Basic Switch Fuse
Catalogue Number Size A B C Class
100A/240V 11.85 (301) 11.41 (290) 6.66 (169) H, K, R
MCS610 100A/600V 13.85 (352) 13.41 (341) 8.66 (220) H, K, R
100A/600V 10.60 (296) 10.16 (258) 5.41 (137) J


Disconnect Switches
Outline Drawing 200A Switch Mechanism
Basic Switch
Catalogue Number Size A B Fuse Class
200A/240V 14.70 (373) 6.00 (152) H, K, R
MCS620 200A/600V 17.20 (437) 8.50 (216) H, K, R
200A/600V 13.32 (338) 4.62 (117) J
4
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Auxiliary Switch Detail
Rotary Handle Operator

Catalogue Number A B C D
CRHOH 1.18 (30) 2.36 (60) 3.00 (76) 0.175 (4)
RHOH 1.59 (40) 3.18 (81) 3.50 (89) 0.281 (7)

Catalogue Number: CRHOS06 CRHOS20 RHOS06 RHOS20
Enclosure Min. 5.42 (138) 6.17 (157) 4.75 (121) 5.50 (140)
Depth (K) Max. 15.73 (400) 16.28 (414) 16.30 (419) 16.85 (428)
Shaft Length (L) K-2.77 (70) K-3.42 (87) K-2.25 (57) K-2.90 (74)

Catalogue Number A B C D
MCS603R, MCS603R, MCS606R, MCS620R
1.89 (48) 1.50 (38) 4.03 (102) 1.10 (28)
MCS606R
MCS610R
MCS610R 3.00 (76) 1.81 (46) 4.37 (111) 1.17 (30)
MCS620R 5.44 (138) 7.85 (199) 2.53 (64) 1.41 (36)

Disconnect Switches
Fixed Depth Handle Operator
Catalogue
Number X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Z1
MCS603,
3.52 (89) 1.50 (38) 0.00 (0) 1.89 (48) 6.44 (164)
MCS606
MCS610 3.91 (99) 1.81 (46) 0.13 (3) 3.00 (76) 6.44 (164)
MCS620 1.51 (38) 7.86 (200) 0.38 (10) 5.44 (138) 10.93 (278)
4 SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Max FlexTM Variable Depth Handle Operator

Catalogue
Number A B C D E F
MCS603,
2.00 (51) 1.69 (43) 5.10 (130) 2.88 (73) 1.50 (38) 1.89 (48)
MCS606
MCS610 2.00 (51) 0.82 (21) 5.10 (130) 3.21 (82) 1.81 (46) 3.00 (76)
MCS620 2.50 (64) -1.00 (-25) 5.50 (140) 1.00 (25) 7.86 (200) 5.44 (138)
Maximum “E” Dimensiona

Switch Cable Enclosure Depth inches (mm)
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number 8 10 12 16 18 20 24
MCS603, MCS606 FHOEC036 16.0 (406) 13.0 (330) 13.5 (343) 8.0 (203) — — —
MCS610 FHOEC048 26.0 (660) 26.0 (660) 26.0 (660) 23.0 (584) 21.0 (533) 18.0 (457) 17.0 (432)
FHOJC036 15.0 (381) 12.0 (305) 12.5 (318) 7.0 (178) — — —
MCS620
FHOJC048 25.0 (635) 25.0 (635) 25.0 (635) 22.0 (559) 20.0 (508) 17.0 (432) 16.0 (406)
Enclosure Depth 36” Cable 48” Cable

in. (mm) Fmin. Fmax. Fmin. Fmax.
8 (203) 7.0 (178) 14.5 (368) 16.1 (409) 23.9(607)
10 (254) 5.5 (140) 13.1 (333) 16.0 (406) 23.6(599)
12 (305) 5.0 (127) 12.0 (305) 15.9 (404) 22.8(579)
16 (406) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (239) 14.7 (373) 22.0(559)
18 (457) — — 14.6 (371) 21.9 (556)
20 (508) — — 13.3 (338) 19.9 (505)
24 (610) — — 12.0 (305) 16.9 (429)
a Maximum “E” Dimension only if F max = 4.6” (117)

Disconnect Switches
Type CFS Compact Fusible Switches Features and Ordering Information
Features
b 30 - 800A ratings b Catalogue number CFS361C5, CFS361J5 and CNFS361 can
be DIN-rail mounted and can be either front or side operated
b UL Listed under file #E121152
& CSA Certified under file #222227 with standard rotary handles.
b Door mounted rotary handles with b All CFS part numbers ending in N can be either front or side
defeatable cover interlock operated with standard rotary handles.
b Meets UL/CSA requirements for both main and b Handles are available in Type 1, 3R, 4/4X & 12 ratings
branch circuit applications b NFPA 79 field installed kits are available
b Compact size b 30-400A, 200kA switches are provided with quick
connect terminal provisions for voltage sensing or for
b 100kA with Class CC fuses or up to 200kA
with Class J fuses 10A max. control circuits
b Load break and horsepower rated b Fusible switches, 3-pole 600V AC Max. 30-100A & 600-800A
switches are also rated 250V DC Max when poles are field
b Quick make and break operation connected in series.
b All handles are padlockable with up to (3) padlocks
with 5/16” hasps in the OFF position
4
Switch Shaft Handle Lugs/Accessories
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
CFS363JN
with (2) CFSAUX1NO CFSS10200HN CFSH10BL12N CFSL200
Ordering information
1. Select the panel mounted switch required based on 5. Auxiliary contact are available if needed as follows.
Ampere, HP and AIC requirements. Switches with a right A. 30A switch CFS361C5 and non-fusible 30A switch
hand mechanism are standard, 30-100A switches with a CNFS361 will accept up to (4) aux contacts
left hand mechanism are available.
B. 30A switch CFS361J5 will accept up to (2) aux
2. Select handle based on environmental rating required. contacts without an aux contact holder. If more than
3. Select operating shaft (200 or 400mm in length). For (2) aux contacts are required order aux contacts PLUS
enclosure depths of 9.0” or less from panel mounting aux contact holder kit CFSAUXH1. All other switches
surface to inside of door use 200mm long shafts. For will accept up to (4) aux contacts.
deeper enclosures use 400mm long shafts. 30A 100kA 6. If non-fusible switch is required order a shorting bar for
switches can be used in 10” deep enclosures (panel to 60-600A switches or catalog number CNFS361 for 30A.
inside of door) with 200mm shaft and CFSH5N handles.
7. 30-100A switches are designed to prevent inadvertent
Note: Be sure to check shaft and handle compatibility with contact with live parts and shields are not required.
the switch selected by using information provided in the 200 & 400A switches are not supplied with terminal
selection tables. shields. They are available as field installed kits for both
4. Line & load lugs are provided as standard on 30-100A line and load terminals. 400-800A switches are supplied
switches. Terminal kits are available for 200-800A as standard with line shields and terminal shroud kits are
switches if needed. available for the load side.

Disconnect Switches
Type CFS Compact Fusible Switches Switch and Handle Selection
Fusible switches, 3-pole 600V AC Max. 30-100A & 600-800A
switches are also rated 250V DC Max when poles are field con-
nected in seriese
Switch Max horsepower ratings AC short
Fuse
ampere Catalogue provisions 240V 480V 600V 250V circuit
rating Number provided 3Ø AC 3Ø AC 3Ø AC DC rating
Standard – with right hand mounted mechanism

30a CFS361C5 Class CC 71/2 15 20 5c 100kA
30a CFS361J5 Class J 71/2 15 20 5c 100kA
30a CFS361JN Class J 71/2 15 20 5c 200kA
30a CNFS361hk None 71/2 15 20 5c 65kA
60a CFS362JN1 Class J 15 30 50 10c 100kA
60a CFS362JN 15 30 50 10c
100a CFS363JN 30 60 75 20c
200b CFS364JNd Class J 60 125 150 – 200kA
400b CFS365JNd 125 250 350 – CFS361J5
600b CFS366Jij 200 400 500 –
800b CFS367Lij Class L 200 400 500 – 200kA
4
Optional – with left hand mounted mechanismd

30a CFS361JLN 7.5 15 20 5c
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
60a CFS362JLN Class J 15 30 50 10c 200kA

100a CFS363JLN 30 60 75 20c
Operating shafts for 30-400A switchese

Catalogue Shaft length
Number in. (mm) Switch & handle compatibility
CFSS5200N 7.9 (200) 5mm x 5mm for use with CFS361C5, CFS361J5 &CNFS361
CFSS5400N 15.7 (400) switches & with “CFSH5” handles only
CFSS5200HN 7.9 (200) 5mm x 5mm for use with all ”CFSH10” handles & with
CFSS5400HN 15.7 (400) CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361 switches only CFSS5400N
CFSS10200HN 7.9 (200) 10mm x 10mm for use with all “CFSH10” handles & with all
CFSS10400HN 15.7 (400) 30-400A switches except CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361
Compact rotary operating handles – door mounted (for use with

CFS361C5, CFS3361J5 & CNFS361 switches only)f
Catalogue
Number Colour Type Operating shaft compatibility
CFSH5B12N Blue & Black CFSS5200N or CFSS5400N
1, 3R & 12
CFSH5R12N Yellow & Red
CFSH5B4N Blue & Black
1, 3R, 12 & 4/4X
CFSH5R4N Yellow & Red
Rotary operating handles - door mounted (for use with

CFSS5200HN, CFSS5400HN, CFSS10200HN & CFSS10400HN)
Catalogue
Number Colour Description
CFSH5B12N
Type 1, 3R & 12g
CFSH10B12N Blue & Black Heavy duty pistol grip (2.75” long for use
CFSH10R12N Yellow & Red with 30A switches & CFS362JN1)
CFSH10BL12N Blue & Black Heavy duty pistol grip e Catalog numbers CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361
CFSH10RL12N Yellow & Red (4.92” long for 30-400A switches) accept 5mm x 5mm operating shafts. All other 30-400A
switches accept 10mm x 10mm operating shafts.
Type 1, 3R, 4/4X & 12g f Compact pistol grip design (2.75” long) with defeatable
cover interlock. Cover can be opened when handle is
CFSH10B4N Blue & Black Heavy duty pistol grip (2.75” long for use padlocked in the OFF position.
CFSH10R4N Yellow & Red with 30A switches & CFS362JN1) g Defeatable cover interlock provided. Cover cannot be
opened when handle is padlocked in the OFF position.
CFSH10BL4N Blue & Black Heavy duty pistol grip h Catalog number CNFS361 is a non-fusible switch.
CFSH10RL4N Yellow & Red (4.92” long for 30-400A switches) i 4 pole 600 & 800A switches, CFS466J & CFS467L are
also available.
c DC HP rating shown requires (3) poles to be connected j CFS366J and CFS367L are rated 250 & 600V DC when
a Line and load lugs included.
in series. (2) poles are connected in series.
b Line and load lugs are not included.
d CFS364JN & CFS365JN can be rotated 180º for left k CNFS361 is rated 65kA when protected by Class J or
Order from table on next page if required.
hand operation as standard. CC 30A max. fuses.

Disconnect Switches
Type CFS Compact Fusible Switches Selection and Accessories
600 & 800A rotary operating handles - door mounted (8.27” long) g
Catalogue
number Colour Type
CFSH12BL12 Blue & Black 1, 3R & 12
CFSH12RL12 Yellow & Red 1, 3R & 12
CFSH12BL4 Blue & Black 1, 3R, 12 & 4/4X
CFSH12RL4 Yellow & Red 1, 3R, 12 & 4/4X
600 & 800A operating shafts (cross section 12 x 12 mm)

Catalogue Shaft length Enclosure depth
Number in. (mm) (switch mounting surface to door OD)
CFSS12200H 12.59 (320) 10.43 – 16.68 in.
CFSS12400H 15.75 (400) 10.43 – 19.84 in.
Type CFS fusible switch accessories

Catalogue
Number Description
CFSL200 & 400
Terminalsa
CFSL200 200A lug kit (6 lugs per kit) (1)#6-3/0
CFSL400N 400A lug kit (6 lugs per kit) (1)#2-600kcmil (for CFS365JN only)
4
CFSL400 600-800A lug kit (6 lugs per kit) (2)#2-600kcmil
Shorting Bars (no fuse kits)
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
CFSSB60 60A shorting bar kit (3 links per kit)
CFSSB680 600 & 800A shorting bar kit (1 link per kit)
Auxiliary Contacts (NEMA ratings AC A600 DC N600)
CFSAUXH1b Aux contact holder (CFS361J5, CFS361C5 & CNFS361)
CFSAUX1NO Aux contact 1 NO (30-800A Sws)
CFSAUX1NC Aux contact 1 NC (30-800A Sws)
CFS11AUX 1NO, 1NC aux contact kit (side mount for 200kA switches)
CFS22AUX 2NO, 2NC aux contact kit (side mount for 200kA switches)
Terminal Shrouds (line or load) CFSAUX1NC
CFSTS200Nh 200A shroud kit (line or load 3-pole kit)
CFSTS400Nh 400A shroud kit (line or load 3-pole kit for CFS365JN only)
CFSTS680f 600/800A 3-pole shroud kit
CFSTS6804f 600/800A 4-pole shroud kit
30A compact switch kits
CFSPLK Shaft padlocking kit for 30A compact switch when door is openc
CFSH5CDM Direct mount handle kit for CFS361C5 & CNFS361
CFSH5JDM Direct mount handle kit for CFS361J5
NFPA 79 kits
(if auxiliary contacts are needed, see table on page 7)
Kits provide an operating shaft suitable for use with all heavy duty handles (not
for use with CFSH5 handles). Kits also provide an internal operating handle and an
internal OFF padlocking provision.
CFSNFPA1d For use with CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361
CFSSB100 - CFSSB400
For use with CFS361JN, CFS361CN, CFS362JN1, CFS362JN,
CFSNFPA2Ne
CFS363JN & CFS364JN
CFSNFPA3Ne For use with CFS365JN only
g Defeatable cover interlock included. Cover cannot be

a Supplied as standard on 30-100A switches c Supplied as standard on all but 30A, 65kA & 100kA
opened when the handle is padlocked in the OFF posi-
b CFS361C5 and CNFS361 will accept (4) aux contacts compact switches.
tion.
without an aux contact holder. CFS361J5 will accept d 12.6 in. (320 mm) long operating shaft included
h Neither line or load terminal shrouds are supplied as
(2) aux contacts without an aux contact holder. e 12.7 in. (323 mm) long operating shaft included
standard with new style 200 & 400A switches.
f Line side terminal shrouds supplied with switch

Disconnect Switches
Type CFS Compact Fusible Switches Dimensions and Technical Characteristics
UL & CSA technical characteristics and panel space requirements
AC short
Catalogue Fuse circuit Electrical Mechanical Panel space requirements - in. (mm)
Number Amps Class rating endurance endurance Height Width Deptha
CFS361C5 30 CC 100kA 6000 10000 4.56 (116) 3.78 (96) 6.00 (152)
CFS361J5 30 J 100kA 6000 10000 4.56 (116) 4.15 (105) 6.00 (152)
CFS361JN 30 J 200kA 6000 10000 5.35 (136) 5.89 (150) 6.00 (152)
CFS361JLN 30 J 200kA 6000 10000 5.35 (136) 5.89 (150) 6.00 (152)
CNFS361 30 None 65kAb 6000 10000 4.56 (116) 3.78 (96) 6.00 (152)
CFS362JN1 60 J 100kA 6000 10000 5.35 (136) 5.89 (150) 6.00 (152)
CFS362JN 60 J 200kA 6000 10000 7.32 (186) 5.89 (150) 6.00 (152)
CFS362JLN 60 J 200kA 6000 10000 7.32 (186) 5.89 (150) 6.00 (152)
CFS363JN 100 J 200kA 6000 10000 7.32 (186) 5.89 (150) 6.00 (152)
CFS363JLN 100 J 200kA 6000 10000 7.32 (186) 5.89 (150) 6.00 (152)
CFS364JN 200 J 200kA 6000 8000 11.46 (291) 7.72 (196) 6.00 (152)
CFS365JN 400 J 200kA 1000 6000 15.35 (390) 10.19 (259) 8.00 (203)
CFS366J 600 J 200kA 1000 5000 11.81 (300) 14.33 (364) 11 (280)
CFS466J 600 J 200kA 1000 5000 11.81 (300) 18.03 (458) 11 (280)
CFS367L 800 L 200kA 500 3500 11.81 (300) 14.33 (364) 11 (280)
CFS467L 800 L 200kA 500 3500 11.81 (300) 18.03 (458) 11 (280)
4
Wire ranges line & load lugs

DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Amperage
Switch Rating Wire size (75º C)
CFS361J5 30 (1)#14-10
CFS361C5 30 (1)#14-10
CNFS361 30 (1)#14-10
CFS361JN 30 (1)#14-6
CFS362JN1 60 (1)#14-6
CFS362JN 60 (1)#12-1
CFS363JN 100 (1)#12-1
CFS364JN 200 (1)#3/0
CFS365JN 400 (1)600MCM
CFS366J 600 (2)350 MCM
CFS367L 800 (2)600 MCM
Auxiliary contact capability when an NFPA79 kit is used

Switch NFPA79 kit Aux contacts that can be installed
CNFS361 CFSNFPA1 (2) Total, CFSAUX1NO
CFS361C5 or CFSAUX1NC
CFS361J5 (1) CFSAUX1NO or (1) CFSAUX1NC
CFS361JN CFSNFPA2N (2) Total, CFSAUX1NO or CFSAUX1NCc
CFS362JN1
CFS362JN
CFS363JN
CFS364JN
CFS365JN CFSNFPA3N (2) Total, CFSAUX1NO or CFSAUX1NCc
a Minimum dimensions from mounting surface

to inside of cover. Dimensions shown can be
decreased if aux contacts are not required.
b CNFS361 is rated 65kA when protected by 30A max.
Class J or CC fuses.
c For additional auxiliary contacts use side mounted
CFS11AUX or CFS22AUX.

Disconnect Switches
Type CNFS Switches, Shafts And Handles General Information
Type CNFS Compact Non-Fusible Switches
Description
Siemens Type CNFS compact non-fusible switches meet
UL/CSA requirements for both main and branch circuit
applications. They are available in 30-800A, 3-pole switches
and are all rated 600VAC maximum.
All are open style, designed to be panel mounted and are

UL listed under file number #E121152 or #E68312 and
CSA certified under file number #222227. A variety of door
mounted rotary operators are available with Type 1, 3R, 12 or
4/4X ratings.
These non-fusible switches are UL listed under file #E201138

and CSA certified under file #112964. They also conform to
IEC standard 60947-3.
4
Catalog Numbering System
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
CNFS Switches CNFS 3 6 1 N
Compact Non-Fusible Switch
• Number of poles 3 = 3
• Max. Voltage Rating 6 = 600V
• Ampere rating
1 = 30A
2 = 60A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
5 = 400A
6 = 600A
7 = 800A
• Design type
N = Compact design

Disconnect Switches
Type CNFS Compact Non-Fusible Switches Features And Ordering Information
Features
• 30 - 800A ratings • Quick make and break operation
• UL Listed under file #E201138 & CSA Certified under file • All external handles and direct handles for 600-800A
#112964 or #703166 switches are padlockable with up to (3) padlocks with 5/16”
• Options to have door mounted pistol handles with hasps in the OFF postition. Direct handles for 30-100A
defeatable cover interlock or direct mounted handles. switches are padlockable with (1) padlock with 3/16” hasps
in the OFF position.
• Meets UL 98 requirements
• All switches are able to be panel mounted. Catalog numbers
• Compact size
CNFS361N, CNFS362N, & CNFS363N can also be DIN-
• All short circuit protection ratings require the use of Class J rail mounted and can either be front or side operated with
fuses in the circuit. standard pistol handles.
• Load break and horsepower rated • Handles are available in Type 1, 3R, 4/4X & 12 ratings
Shaft Handle Lugs/Accessories

4 SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
CFSS10200HN CFSH10BL12N CFSL200
1. Select the panel mounted switch required based on 4. Line & load lugs are provided as standard on 30-100A
Ampere, HP and AIC requirements. Switches with a right switches. Terminal kits are available for 200-800A
hand mechanism are standard. switches if needed.
2. Select handle based on environmental rating required. 5. Auxiliary contacts are available if needed. Each switch
3. For door mounted handles, select operating shaft based will accept up to (2) aux contact modules, containing
on enclosure depth. For enclosure depths of 9.00” or less (2) contacts in each.
from panel mounting surface to inside of door use up to 6. 30-100A Series N switches are designed to prevent
200 mm long shafts. From 9.00” to 13.00” use up to 320 inadvertent contact with live parts and shields are not
mm long shafts. For deeper enclosures use up to 400 mm required but are offered as terminal shrouds. 100-400A
long shafts. For direct mount handles, no shaft is needed. switches are not supplied with terminal shields. They are
Note: Be sure to check shaft and handle compatibility with available as separate field installed kits for both line and
the switch selected by using information provided in the load terminals by amperage rating. Line side terminal
selection tables. screens are provided for 600-800A switches.

Disconnect Switches
Type CNFS Compact Non-Fusible Switches Shaft and Handle Selection
Type CNFS compact non-fusible switches

Max Horsepower Ratings
Switch Short Circuit Rating
Ampere Catalog 240V 480V 600V
Rating Number 3Ø AC 3Ø AC 3Ø AC @ 480VAC @ 600VAC
30 CNFS361Na 10 20 25 100 100
60 CNFS362Na 20 40 50 100 100
100 CNFS363Na 20 50 50 100 25
200 CNFS364Nb 75 150 200 200 200
400 CNFS365Nb 125 250 350 200 200
600 CNFS366Nb 200 400 350 200 200
800 CNFS367Nb 200 500 500 100 100 CNFS363N
Direct mount rotary handles for compact non-fusible switches

Catalog Number Color Use with compact non-fusible switches
CNFSHD1 Blue CNFS361N, CNFS362N, CNFS363N
4
CNFSHD2 Black CNFS364N, CNFS365N
CNFSHD3 Black CNFS366N, CNFS367N
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
Operating shafts for compact non-fusible switches
Catalog Number Shaft length in. (mm) Switch and handle compatibility
CNFSS52001 7.9 (200)
5mm x 5mm for use with
CNFSS53201 12.6 (320) CNFS361N, CNFS362N and CNFS363N switches
and with "CNFSH5" handles only CNFSS154003
CNFSS54001 15.7 (400)
CFSS10200HN 7.9 (200)
CNFSS103202 12.6 (320) "CFSH10" handles and with CNFS364N
and CNFS365N switches only
CFSS10400HN 15.7 (400)
CNFSS152003 7.9 (200)
CNFSS153203 12.6 (320) "CFSH12" handles and with CNFS366N
and CNFS367N switches only
CNFSS154003 15.7 (400)
Compact rotary operating handles for non-fusible switches – door mounted

Use with
Operating shaft non-fusible
Catalog Number Color CSA/UL Type compatibility compact switches
CNFSH5BP121 Black NEMA 1, 3R, 12
CNFSS52001, CNFS361N, CFSH12RL12
CNFSH5RP121 Red/Yellow NEMA 1, 3R, 12
CNFSS53201, CNFS362N,
CNFSH5BP41 Black NEMA 4/4X CNFSS54001 CNFS363N
CNFSH5RP41 Red/Yellow NEMA 4/4X
CFSH10BL12N Black NEMA 1, 3R, 12
CFSH10RL12N Red/Yellow NEMA 1, 3R, 12 CFSS10200HN,
CNFS364N,
CNFSS103202,
CFSH10BL4N Black NEMA 4/4X CNFS365N
CFSS10400HN
CFSH10RL4N Red/Yellow NEMA 4/4X
CFSH12BL12 Black NEMA 1, 3R, 12
CFSH12RL12 Red/Yellow NEMA 1, 3R, 12 CNFSS152003,
CNFS366N,
CNFSS153203,
CFSH12BL4 Black NEMA 4/4X CNFS367N
CNFSS154003
CFSH12RL4 Red/Yellow NEMA 4/4X
a Line and load lugs are included.

c All switches can be rotated 180° for left hand operation e Defeatable cover interlock provided. Cover cannot be
b Line and load lugs are not included. Order from table as standard. opened when handle is in the OFF position.
on following pages if needed.
d Compact pistol grip design (2.75” long) with defeatable f Flange mounting is not available for non-fusible
cover interlock. Cover can be opened when handle is switches.
padlocked in the OFF position.

Disconnect Switches
Type CNFS Compact Non-Fusible Switches Shaft and Handle Selection
Auxiliary contacts for use with non-fusible switches

Use with Non-fusible
Catalog Number Number of Contacts Contact Switches
CNFS1AUX1 1 Normally Open + 1 Normally Closed

CNFS361N, CNFS362N, CNFS363N
CNFS2AUX1 2 Normally Closed
1st Auxiliary Contact:
CNFS1AUX2
1 Normally Open + 1 Normally Closed CNFS364N, CNFS365N, CNFS366N,
2nd Auxiliary Contact: CNFS367N
CNFS2AUX2
1 Normally Open + 1 Normally Closed
Terminal shrouds for use with non-fusible switches

Catalog Number Shroud Location Contact Switches CNFS1AUX1
CNFSTS100 Top and Bottom CNFS361N, CNFS362N, CNFS363N
CNFSTSC200T Top
CNFS364N
CNFSTSC200B Bottom
4
CNFSTSC400T Top
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
CNFS365N
CNFSTSC400B Bottom
CNFSTSC600B Bottom CNFS366N
CNFSTSC800B Bottom CNFS367N
Terminal lug kits for use with non-fusible switches

Catalog Number Wire Sizes Contact Switches
Included #10-2/0 CNFS361N, CNFS362N, CNFS363N CNFSTSC400T
CFSL200 #6-300MCM CNFS364N
CFSL400N #2-600MCM CNFS365N
CNFSL400D #6-350MCM, 2 wires per lug CNFS356N
CFSL400 #6-350MCM, 2 wires per lug CNFS366N, CNFS367Na
CFSL200 & 400
a 2 kits needed for 800A, total 12 lugs to cover line and

load sides.

Disconnect Switches
Type HCP Switchboard Units Selection
Features b Group mounts with other 30A through
CSA certified under file #24563 and UL 600A switches, and 100 through 1200
b amp frame breakers
Listed under file #E6849 Vol 1, Sect. 8
400-1200A ratings b Allows 800A and 1200A switches in
b standard 38" wide distribution sections
b Visible contacts in either main or branch configurations
Field installable shunt trip and auxiliary
b 16 ⁄4" mounting height is the smallest
b 1
switch accessory kits 1200A design in the industry, allowing
b Installs in existing Siemens up to 4 units in one vertical section
switchboards and power panelboards
b Field reversible horizontal mounting
b Suitable for use on systems with up to design for left or right hand cabling
200,000A available fault current,
b Handle can be padlocked in the OFF
RMS symmetrical when equipped with position with up to three padlocks with
Class J or Class L fuses 5/16" hasps. A cover padlocking
provision is also supplied
3-Pole, Horizontal Mount a
Horsepower Rating
Max. Max.
Catalogue Ampere AC Voltage Fuse Dimensions - Inches* 240V 480V 600V 250V
4
Number Rating Ratingb Class H W D Std Max Std Max Std Max DC
HCP367HJ400 1400 600 J 16.25 17.22 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
SWITCHES
DISCONNECT
HCP367HJ600 1600 600 J 16.25 17.22 7.38 175 200 150 400 200 400 40
HCP327HT 800 240 T 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP367H 1800 600 L 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328HT 1200 240 T 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP368H 1200 600 L 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
3-Pole, Vertical Mount

HCP367VJ400 1400 600 J 17 16.25 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
HCP367VJ600s 1600 600 J 17 16.25 7.38 175 200 150 400 200 400 40
HCP327VT 800 240 T 17 16.25 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP367V 1800 600 L 17 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328VT 1200 240 T 17 16.25 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP368V 1200 600 L 17 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP367HJ400 1400 600 J 16.25 17.22 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
HCP367HJ400 1400 600 J 16.25 17.22 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
HCP367HJ400 1400 600 J 16.25 17.22 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
Accessories
Terminal Connectors (one lug per kit) T Fuse Adapter Kits (one per pole)
Catalogue
Ampere Rating Catalogue Number Connector Wire Range Number Description
400–600A TA2K500 (2) #1 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu or AI) TFAK72 1800A, 300V AC
400–600A TC2K500 (2) #1 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu only) TFAK75 1800A, 600V AC
400–800A TC3K350 (3) #1 AWG–350 kcmil (Cu only)
800-1200A TA4H500 (4) #2 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu or AI)
HCP Replacement Handle Kit
800-1200A TA3H750 (3) 500–750 kcmil (Cu or AI)
(For use on all HCP switches)
SW Ampere Rating Catalogue Number
Auxiliary Switch Kits
400–1200A HCPHK
Contact Maximum Voltage Switch Catalog
Ampere Rating AC DC Mounting Contacts Number
15A 480 125 Left Pole 1NO/1NC
Compression Lug Adapter Kit
A01HCPL4s
15A 480 125 Right Pole 1NO/1NC A01HCPR4 The use of this kit provides for the
mounting of up to four lugs per phase.
Shunt Trip Kit Switchboard Connection Strap Kit a Each kit accepts lugs with (2) 3/8" diam-
eter mounting holes on 1" centers. One
Control Voltage Switch
Ampere Rating Catalog Number kit per pole line or load is required. Lugs
AC DC Catalogue Number
400–1200A F6162DSCAN are not provided.
120 — HCPST120
240 — HCPST240s Ampere Rating Catalogue Number
277 — HCPST277 400–1200A HCPCLP
480 — HCPST480s
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by b Both 240 and 600V AC switches are also rated 250V DC
25.4. a For horizontal mounting only in either 38" wide min max.
switchboards or S5/F2 power panelboards.

Disconnect Switches
Type HCP Switchboard Units Dimensions
4 SWITCHES
DISCONNECT

REVISED
06/2020
POWER PRODUCT Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Contents
What’s New in Circuit Breakers 5-3
Introduction 5-4
Catalogue Numbering System 5-5 – 5-7
Reference Guides 5-8 – 5-19
Panelboard Mounted Circuit Breakers
BL 240V Arc Fault and Ground Fault Breakers 5-20
BL 240V Breakers 5-21
BQD 100A Frame 480/277V Breakers 5-22
GB2 125A Frame 600/347V Breakers 5-23
GB 125A Frame 600/347V Breakers 5-24
Internal Accessories for BQD and NGB Breakers 5-25
3VA41 125A Frame 600/347V Breakers 5-26 – 5-27
General Application Circuit Breakers
Dual Function Circuit Breaker BQ 240V Breakers 5-28
BQXD 240V DIN Rail Mounting Breakers 5-29
QR250 Frame 240V Breakers 5-30
CQD 100A Frame 480/277V Breakers 5-31
GG 125A Frame 600/347V Breakers 5-32
Internal Accessories for CQD and NGG Breakers 5-33
3VA Molded Case Circuit Breakers
5
Catalog Numbering System 5-34 –
5-35
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
3VA51 125A Thermal-magnetic Trip Circuit Breakers 5-36 –
5-39
3VA61 150A Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers 5-40 –
5-43
5-47
5-51
5-53
5-57
5-59
NGB Circuit Breakers
5-63
3VA55 800A Thermal-magnetic Trip Circuit Breakers 5-64
3VA65 800A Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers 5-65 – 5-67
3VA66 1000A Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers 5-68 – 5-69
3VA Molded Case Switch and Motor Circuit Protector 5-70 – 5-71
3VA Internal Accessories 5-72
3VA Breaker Operators 5-73 – 5-78
3VA Connection Technology 5-79 – 5-87
3VA Plug-in and Draw-out Technology 5-88 – 5-90
3VA Communication and Testing/Commissioning Devices 5-91 – 5-94
3VA Accessories and Electrical Requirements 5-95 – 5-100
Sentron Thermal Magnetic and Electronic Circuit Breakers
ED 125A Frame 600V Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-101 –5-103
3VA Molded Case Circuit Breakers
FD 250A Frame 600V Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-104 –5-106
JD/SJD 400A Frame Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-107 –5-110
LD/SLD 600A Frame Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-111 –5-114
LMD 800A Frame Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-115 –5-117
MD/SMD 800A Frame Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-118 –5-121
ND/SND 1200A Frame Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-122 –5-125
PD/SPD 1600A Frame Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-126 –5-128
RD 2000A Frame Breakers and Internal Accessories 5-129
Magnetic Trip Only – ETI Motor Circuit Protectors 5-130 – 5-132
Adjustable Instantaneous Magnetic Trip Settings 5-133 – 5-135
Molded Case Switch – Circuit Disconnect 5-136
Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Series Trip Units 5-137 – 5-138
Enclosed Circuit Breakers 5-139 – 5-146
QR Circuit Breakers (continued on next page)
POWER PRODUCT Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Contents

Lug Information 5-147 – 5-149
Breaker Modifications 5-150
Internal Accessories – Feature Combinations 5-151 – 5-153
External Accessories 5-154 – 5-159
Unusual Operating Conditions 5-160 – 5-161
VL Thermal Magnetic and Electronic Circuit Breakers
Technical Overview 5-162 – 5-163
Trip Unit Overview 5-164 – 5-165
DG 150A Frame and Internal Accessories 5-166 – 5-169
FG 250A Frame and Internal Accessories 5-170 – 5-173
JG 400A Frame and Internal Accessories 5-174 – 5-177
LG 600A Frame and Internal Accessories 5-178 – 5-181
MG 800A Frame and Internal Accessories 5-182 – 5-185
NG 1200A Frame and Internal Accessories 5-186 – 5-189
PG 1600A Frame and Internal Accessories 5-190 – 5-192
Molded Case Switch 5-193
Motor Circuit Protector 5-194
External Accessories 5-195 – 5-209
Accessory Locations 5-211
5
Suffix for Factory Mounted Internal Accessories 5-212

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Technical Data 5-213 – 5-214

Unusual Operating Conditions 5-215 – 5-216
General Technical
Series Short Circuit Ratings 5-217 – 5-247
Sentron IEC 947-2 AC Interrupting Ratings 5-248
Typical Specifications 5-249
Superseded Circuit Breakers 5-250 – 5-252

Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction
What’s NEW in molded case circuit breakers:
New Sentron Sensitrip

Sentron Sensitrip IV ETU Circuit Breakers with Integrated DAS / Maintenance Mode
Design enhancements include:

b Upgraded ETU
b Frame ratings from 400A to 1600A
b Identical footprint, kAIC ratings and accessory offering as legacy Sensitrip III ETU breakers
to ease integration / retrofit
b Maintenance mode versions require customer-supplied 24V external power supply, mainte-
nance switch and light
The Siemens GG, and xGB2 circuit breaker is a com-

pact, industrial design thermal magnetic breaker with
valuable features for the global markets. These fea-
tures include a design that meets multi-national stan-
dards, is suitable for DIN rail or base mounting without
the need for adapters, and includes CSA Certified /
5
UL Listed field installable accessories. The GG, and
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
xGB2 also has an over center toggle mechanism that is
trip free and uses repulsion contact arm construction.
Therefore, should a short circuit or tripping condition NGG HGG LGG
occur, the contacts are forced apart and the breaker NGB
cannot be held closed by means of the handle.
The New Siemens QR Circuit Breaker

Implemented in loadcentres, panelboards, switchboards,
meter centres, and modular metering, the new QR break-
The new Siemens
er is the same form-factor/mounting as QJ breaker for
3VA Molded Case
easy retrofit.
Circuit Breakers
Design enhancements include:
b Trip unit ratings from 100A to 250A.
b Field installable internal accessories – shunt trip, aux
switch or shunt/aux combo. b 125A - 800A Thermal-Magnetic
b Two accessory pockets in 3-pole breakers. Circuit Breakers
One accessory pocket in 2-pole breakers. b 150A - 1000A Electronic
b High in-rush current capability (450%). Circuit Breakers
b Push-to-trip button. b Extensive and flexible accessories
b Common internal accessories for
the entire breaker family
BQD and NGB, HGB, LGB b Power metering with the series-8
handle ties are now released LCD electronic trip
for use where single pole b Illuminated rotary handles show
breakers are using shared switch position
neutrals and must be locked b Smaller footprint than Sentron or
out simultaneously. VL breakers
b Enhanced Tools and Resources

Introduction
Ordering Non-Interchangeable Trip Breakers Connecting Breakers for DC
In the FD through RD frames, you may If you place an “X” after the frame size Application
order molded case circuit breakers three designator (e.g. JXD63B400), you will Most Siemens thermal magnetic trip
basic ways: receive a frame and trip unit assembled, MCCBs are applicable on direct current
with the trip unit made non-removable. (dc) systems. Generally, for 250 V dc
1. As separately ordered frames, trip
If you suffix an “L” to this catalog systems a two pole breaker is used,
units and lugs
number (e.g. JXD63B400L), you will with one pole on each leg of the supply
2. As frame, trip unit and lugs ordered as receive the breaker, non-removable trip
one catalog number and shipped circuit. For three pole breakers applied on
unit and lugs assembled. Unless you 500 V undergrounded DC systems, it is
unassembled or assembled anticipate a specific need to change the important to connect the power supply
3. As Frame and Trip Unit shipped breaker’s ampere rating in the future, “zig-zag” through the breaker as shown
assembled and with the trip unit made this is the preferred ordering method, as in the figure below. This assures that the
non-removable, in compliance with UL the products are assembled to Siemens’ Voltage between phases on the breaker
489 / CSA C22.2 No. 5 requirements specifications in our factories. These terminals is uniformly distributed.
that to be reverse fed the circuit break- breakers are suitable for use reverse fed
er must not have an interchangeable according to CSA C22.2 No. 5-13 / UL See below for an alternative connection
trip unit. 489, since the trip unit is not removable. diagram. For a list of Sentron breakers
with the DC ratings, please refer to
These two options are described in the The smaller frames (QJ, ED and below) pages 5-8 - 5-19.
following: do not have removable trip units, and
consequently are shipped only as
assembled products. To add lugs,
Components Ordered Separately
see the ordering instructions on 300 V 300 V
To get the components for a 3-pole, 400 each product’scatalog page. MAX. MAX.
5
Amp standard interrupting circuit breaker,

you would order the frame (JD63F400),
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
the trip unit (JD63T400) and six lugs

(TA2J6500). This option is normally
useful only if you stock and use large Load/Carga/
volumes of product and wish to reduce Charge
your inventory cost. You may stock, for
example, a smaller number of frames
(JD63F400) and a variety of trip units
(JD63T300, JD63T350, etc.) and
assemble breakers as you need them.
Frame, Trip Unit and Lugs

Ordered Together
If you order the catalog number
JD63B400, you will receive a frame, a
trip unit and 6 lugs in separate packages.
By suffixing this number with “L” (e.g.
JD63B400L), you will receive frame, trip 500V DC Wiring Configuration
unit and lugs assembled in one container.
Pursuant to CSA C22.2 No. 5-13 / UL
489, a product ordered thus will have the
markings “LINE” and “LOAD”, and may
not be “reverse fed” (with power flow-
ing from the “OFF” end of the breaker
toward the “ON” end).

Catalogue Numbering System Selection/Application
If used on 250A frame and above means
non-interchangeable trip breaker with
factory assembled frame and trip. Solid
state trip and current limiting (S or C in
first character) are non-interchangeable
X D
only, and the “X” is omitted.
Trip Unit Type

— Omitted – Thermal-Magnetic
S — Sensitrip® Electronic Trip
Sentron Series Type/Interrupting Range
— Omitted – Standard Rating
H — High IC Rating
HH — Extra High IC Rating
C — Highest IC Rating and Current Limiting
Frame Identifier
E — Type ED M — Type MD
F — Type FD N — Type ND
J — Type JD P — Type PD
L — Type LD R — Type RD
LM — Type LMD
Maximum Voltage
2 — 240 Vac
4 — 480 Vac
6 — 600 Vac
Number of Poles
1
2
3
9 used to indicate the max. functions for an electronic trip circuit breaker (always 3 poles)
5
(Specific Application Type)
B — Standard 40°C Breaker
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
M — Calibrated for 50°C Application
F — Frame Only
T — 40°C Trip Unit Only
W — 50°C Trip Unit Only
S — Molded Case Switch
L — Low Instantaneous Range ETI Breaker
A — Standard Range ETI Breaker
H — High Instantaneous Range ETI Breaker
Maximum Continuous Current Rating
ED Frame — 015, 020, 025, 030, 035, 040, 045, 050, 060, 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125
FD Frame — 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
JD Frame — 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
LD Frame — 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
LMD Frame — 500, 600, 700, 800
MD Frame — 500, 600, 700, 800
ND Frame — 900, 100 (1000A), 120 (1200A)
PD Frame — 120 (1200A), 140 (1400A), 160 (1600A)
RD Frame — 160 (1600A), 180 (1800A), 200 (2000A)
Suffix
L — where applicable indicates a breaker shipped with line/loads lugs installed
A — used with a switch to show automatic self protection
Y — 400 Hertz
H — 100% rated
P — Load side lugs only
NAV — Navel Ratings
NOTE: — Position omitted if not used.
Applicable Standards Solderless Lugs for use with copper wire UL1087 — Molded Case Switches
CSA–C22.2 No. 5, C22.2 No. 14 UL486B — Wire Connectors and UL50 — Cabinets and Boxes
UL489 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers Solderless Lugs for use with UL869 — Service Equipment
and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. aluminum wire
NEMA AB-1 — Molded Case Circuit
UL486A — Wire Connectors and UL943 — Ground Fault Interrupters (for Breakers and Molded Case Switches
personnel protectors)
NOTE:
(A) Molded case circuit breakers are designed and tested (B) Molded case circuit breakers are to be connected with a Interrupting ratings are not limited to the values or
in accordance to applicable portions of UL 489 and 60 or 75°C wire for circuit breakers having a rated groups of values listed. However, the values listed are
CSA22.2 No. 5 and meet application requirements of ampacity of 100 amperes or less. Circuit breakers minimum values for the class specified.
the National Electric Code. Unless marked otherwise, having a rated ampacity greater than 100 amperes b Single-unit or duplex construction must be specified.
circuit breakers are 80% duty rated. shall only be cabled with 75°C cable unless otherwise c Use minimum frame size for ampere rating.
indicated on the circuit breaker label. Exceptions to this

rule are outlined in the article 110-14 C(1)(2) of the 2005
National Electric Code and Canadian Electric Code.

Catalogue Numbering System Selection/Application
Interrupting Class
N — Normal
H — High
L — Very High
C — Trip Unit Only
Frame Family
D — Type DG L — Type LG P — Type PG
F — Type FG M — Type MG
J — Type JG N — Type NG
Breaker Type
E — Global DG, FG Frame Only R — Molded Case Switch
600 Y/347 V (DG, FG, LG-frame)
G — Global interchangeable (UL, S — Molded Case Switch
IEC, CE, CSA, NOM, CCC) T — Trip Unit Only
J — 240V rated JG frame, V — Thermal Magnetic, standard 40°C
Non-interchangeable only ambient, 600VAC 25kA, UL/CSA
K — Global, Non-interchangeable (LG frame)
(DG, FG, LG-frame) W — 100% rated, Non-interchangeable
M — Motor Circuit Protector (DG, LG-frame)
P — Motor Circuit Protector X — Global Non-interchangeable
(DG, FG Only) Y — 100% rated, Non-interchangeable
Number of Poles
2, 3
Trip Unit
F — Frame only, without trip unit S — Molded Case Switch
5
B — Thermal Magnetic, standard 40° C ambient A — Electronic w/ LCD, LSI or 3P (neutral protected)
L — Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Low G — Electronic w/ LCD, LSIG, 3P/4W (selectable residual or
instantaneous range return type ground fault protection)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
J — Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Low K — Electronic with LCD, LSI and GF alarm only, 3P/4W
instantaneous range (LG-frame) (selectable residual or return type ground fault alarm)
M — Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Standard R — Electronic LI or 3P (neutral protected)
instantaneous range T — Electronic LSI or 3P (neutral protected)
Y — Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Standard V — Electronic, LSIG or 3P/4W, residual ground fault protection
instantaneous range (LG-frame) W — Electronic, LIG or 3P/4W, residual ground fault protection
H — Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - High
instantaneous range
Continuous Current Rating
For DG use 050, 060, 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125, 150
For FG use 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
For JG use 250, 300, 350, 400
For LG use 400, 500, 600
For MG use 600, 700, 800
For NG use 800, 900, 100 (1000A), 120 (1200A)
For PG use 120 (1200A), 140 (1400A), 160 (1600A)
Terminations
B — Load End Standard (cu/al) Lugs
L — Line & Load Standard (cu/al) Lugs
X — No Lugs (use only if accessory suffixes are to follow)
Accessories
Auxiliary and Alarm Switch Combinations
Suffix Description
A1 — 1 Alarm (includes 1NO & 1NC switch with a 2 Aux./1 Alarm Base, for frames DG to LG) Note: A1 and A3 include 1NO and 1NC switch for
A2 — 2 Aux (1NO & 1NC switch with a 3 Aux. Base, for frames DG to LG) alarm purposes, only one of these switches may
A3 — 2 Aux + 1 Alarm (2NO & 2NC switches with a 2 Aux./1 Alarm Base, for frames DG to LG) be used as there is only one space for an alarm.
A3 — 2 Aux + 2 Alarm (2NO & 2NC switches with a 2 Aux./2 Alarm Base, for frames MG to PG)
A4 — 4 Aux (2NO & 2NC switches with a 4 Aux. Base, for frames MG to PG)
Shunt Trips
RB — 24 VDC RM — 48-60 VAC
RC — 48-60 VDC RN — 110-127 VAC
RD — 110-127 VDC RS — 208-277 VAC LCD = Liquid Crystal Display
RE — 250 VDC RV — 380-600 VAC LI = Long Delay & Instantaneous trip functions
LSI = Long Delay, Short Delay, & Instantaneous trip functions
Under Voltage Releases LSIG = Long Delay, Short Delay, Instantaneous, & Ground Fault trip functions
UA — 12 VDC UN — 110-127 VAC GF = Ground Fault
UB — 24 VDC UP — 208 VAC 3P = 3-pole
UC — 48 VDC UR — 220-250 VAC 4W = 4-wire
UD — 110-127 VDC US — 277 VAC
UE — 220-250 VDC UT — 380-415 VAC
UG — 60 VDC UU — 440-480 VAC
UK — 24 VAC
 Select Frames

VL Circuit Breakers
Catalogue Numbering System Selection
If ordering factory-installed accessories or special modifications, you must order a 15-digit catalog number. See the examples
below for a detailed explanation. The 15 digit number is achieved by placing X’s in positions not being occupied by an
accessory/modification. Contact Siemens for circuit breakers configured with accessories.
Auxiliary Switch Example:
HFG3B200L A2 XXXX
Standard 9-digit Aux. Switch Completes Cat #
Shunt Trip / UVR Example:
HFG3B200L XX UN XX
Standard 9-digit UVR
Completes Cat #
Shunt Trip / Auxiliary Switch Example:
HFG3B200L A2 RN XX
Standard 9-digit Aux. Shunt Completes
Switch Trip Cat #
5
Non-Interchangeable Trip Breakers Example:
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
HFX3B200L
Standard 9-digit

Reference Guide Selection/Application
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breakers
Plug-In Breakers Panelboard Breakers

BQD, NGB,

QT QP QPH HQP HQPPH QPJ BL BLH HBL BQD6 NGB2 HGB2 LGB2
Page Refer to Loadcentres Section 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-22 5-23 - 5-24 5-23 5-23
Poles 1, 2 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3g 2 2, 3 1,2,3 1,2,3 1,2,3 1,2,3 1,2,3 1,2,3 1,2,3
Amperes 15-50 10-125cd 10-125cd 10-125cg 100-225 150-200 10-125 15-125 15-100 15-100 15-125 15-125 15-125
1 Pole 120/240 120/240 120/240 277 347 347 347
120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240
Volts (50/60 Hz) 2 Pole 120/240 120/240 120/240 480/277 600/347 600/347 600/347
3 Pole — 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 480/277 600/347 600/347 600/347
120V 10,000 10,000 22,000 65,000 — — 10000 22000 65000 65000 — — —
240V 10,000 10,000 22,000 65,000 100,000 10,000 10000 22000 65000 65000 100000 100000 100000
277V — — — — — — — — — 14000 — — —
347V — — — — — — — — — 10000 — — —
CSA/UL
AC 480/277V — — — — — — — — — 14000 25000 35000 65000
Ratings 480V — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Interrupt 600/347V — — — — — — — — — 10000 14000 22000 25000
Ratings 600V — — — — — — — — — — — — —
l — — — — — — — — — — — — —
220/240V CU
l CS
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
IEC 947-2 l — — — — — — — — — — — — —
380/415V CU
50/60 Hz l CS
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
l — — — — — — — — — — — — —
500V CU
l CS
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
125/250 V DC Interrupting 2-Pole — — — — — — — — — 14000 14000 14000 14000
DC
Rating 3-Pole — — — — — — — — — — — — —
5
10-50A — 2.87 2.87 — — — 3.56 3.56 3.75 4.50 5.00 5.00 5.00
Height 10-60A 3.12 — — — — — — — — — — — —
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
55-125A — 3.12 3.12 3.12 3.12 3i 3.75 3.75 3.75 4.50 5.00 5.50 5.50
Dimensions
1-Pole 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 — — 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
in Inches i
Width 2-Pole 2.00a 2.00 2.00 2.00 4.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
3-Pole 2.00a 3.00 3.00 3.00 — 3.00i 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00
Depth 2.06 2.37 2.37 2.37 2.37 2.34 2.37 2.37 2.37 2.69 2.71 2.71 2.71
Thermal and Fixed magnetic Trip u u u u u u u u u u u u u
Thermal and Adjustable Magnetic trip — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Overcurrent
Adjustable Magnetic trip only — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Devices
Motor Circuit Protector — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Molded Case Switch — uf — — — — — — — — — — —
Undervoltage Trip — — — — — — — — — u — u u
Shunt Trip — uf uf u uh — u u u u u u u
Accessories & Auxilary Switch — — — — uh — u u u u u u u
Modifications Alarm Switch — — — — — — — — — u u u u
Mechanical Interlock — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) — — — — — — u u u u u u u
Q3100 B120 B220H B320HH NGB1B030B
For inches / millimeters conversion, see Technical section.

For Plug-in Breakers, see Loadcentres section.
a BQD6 CSA certified 10,000A @ 600Y/347V 15–70A only. g Singlepole circuit breakers available in ratings 15-70A only,
c Single pole breakers available in ratings 10–70A only. 125A available as a 2-pole only.
d 125A, 2-pole 120/240V AC only.  10A,1-pole & 2-pole 120/240V AC only.

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breakers
General Purpose Breakers
BQ BQH HBQ QR2 QRH2 HQR2 HQR2H CQD NGG
Page 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-31 5-32
Poles 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3
1-Pole 15–70 15–70 15–50 — — — — 15–100 15–125
Amperes, Continuous 2-Pole 15–125 15–100 15–70 15–100 15–125
100–250 100–250 100–250 100–250
3-Pole 15–100 15–100 15–100 15–100 15-125
1-Pole — — — — 277 347
120/240 120/240 120/240
AC Volts (50/60 Hertz) 2-Pole
240 240 240 240 480/277 600/347
Ratings 3-Pole 240 240 240
120V 10,000 22,000 65,000 — — — — 65,000 65,000
CSA/UL Interrupting Rating — 240V 10,000 22,000 65,000 10,000 25,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 65,000
Symmetrical RMS Amperes 480V — — — — — — — 14,000a 25,000
600/347V — — — — — — — 10,000 14,000
Volts — 2-Pole — — — — — — — 125/250 125/250
DC
Interrupting Rating — DC Amperes — — — — — — — 14,000 14,000
15–50A 3.75 3.75 4.00 — — — — 4.50 5.40
Height 55–125A 4.00 4.00 4.00 — — — — 4.50 5.40
60–225A — — — 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00 — —
Dimensions
1-Pole 1.00 1.00 1.00 — — — — 1.00 1.00
in Inches
Width 2-Pole 2.00 2.00 2.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 2.00 2.00
5
3-Pole 3.00 3.00 3.00 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 3.00 3.00
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Depth 2.37 2.37 2.37 2.53 2.53 2.53 2.53 2.87 2.90
Overcurrent Thermal and Fixed Magnetic Trip u u u u u u u u u

Devices Molded Case Switch u — — u — — uc — —
Undervoltage Trip — — — — — — — — —
Shunt Trip u u u u u u u u u
Accessories & Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u u u u

Modifications Alarm Switch — — — — — — — u u
Mechanical Interlock — — — u u u u — —
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) u u u u u u u u u
Type 1 — Indoor Surface u u u — — — — — —
Individual
Type 1 — Indoor, Flush u u u — — — — — —
Enclosures
Type 3R — Outdoor-Rainproof u u u — — — — — —
BQ1B020 BQ1B020H HB1B020 CQD115 LGG2B020L

 CQD breakers are rated 14,000 KAIC at 480/277V.
 3-poleonly.

3VA CSA / UL Breakers Reference Guide
Type 3VA51 3VA51 3VA52 3VA53 3VA54 3VA55

Page 5-36 5-37 5-44 5-52 5-58 5-64
Number of Poles 1 2, 3, 4 2 in 3-pole, 3, 4 2 in 3-pole, 3, 4 2 in 3-pole, 3, 4 3, 4
3VA5 molded case circuit breakers
Size 125 A 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 800 A
Rated current In A 15 … 125 15 … 125 100 … 250 200 … 400 400 … 600 600 … 800
Frequency Hz 0 … 400 0 … 400 0 … 400 0 … 400 0 … 400 0 … 400
Electrical characteristics according to CSA C22.2 No. 5 / UL 489
Rated operational voltage
V 347 600 600 600 600 600
50/60 Hz AC
Electrical characteristics according to IEC 60947-2
V 415 690 690 690 690 690
Ue 50/60 Hz AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 500 800 800 800 800 800
Rated impulse withstand
kV 8 8 8 8 8 8
voltage Uimp
Short-circuit breaking
5
capacity according to S M H S M H M H C M H C M H C M H C
CSA C22.2 No. 5 / UL 489 SEAS MEAS HEAS SEAS MEAS HEAS MFAS HFAS CFAS MJAS HJAS CJAS MLAS HLAS CLAS MMAS HMAS CMAS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
UL Breaker Type
120 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA 65 85 150 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
240 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA — — — 65 85 100 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200
277 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA 25 35 50 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
347 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA 14 18 18 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
480 Y/277 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA — — — 25 35 65 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100
480 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA — — — 25 35 65 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100
600 Y/347 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA — — — 14 18 25 18 25 35 18 25 35 18 25 35 18 25 50
600 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA — — — — — — 18 25 35 18 25 35 18 25 35 18 25 50
125 V DC kA 14 25 30 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
250 V DC kA — — — 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100
500 V DC kA — — — 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100
600 V DC (3-pole only) kA — — — — — — 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100
750 V DC (4-pole only) kA — — — — — — 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100
1000 V DC (4-pole only) kA — — — — — — 50 85 100 6 6 10 6 6 10 18 25 50
Short-circuit breaking capacity
according to IEC 60947-2
S M H S M H M H C M H C M H C M H C
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics
rms value, according to IEC 60947-2
240 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA 25/25 36/36 55/55 55/55 85/85 150/150 85/85 100/100 200/200 85/85 100/100 200/200 85/85 100/100 200/200 85 100 200
415 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA 5/5 5/5 5/5 36/36 55/55 70/70 55/55 70/70 110/110 55/55 70/70 110/110 55/55 70/70 110/110 55 70 110
690 V AC / 50/60 Hz kA — — — 5/5 7/5 10/5 7/7 10/10 10/10 7/7 10/10 10/10 7/7 10/10 10/10 25 35 35
125 V DC kA 14 25 30 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
250 V DC kA — — — 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100
500 V DC kA — — — 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100
750 V DC (3-pole only) kA — — — — — — 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100
— Not available
Applicable Standards:
n CSA C22.2 No. 5 / UL 489 - n UL486B- Wire connectors and solderless lugs for n EN 60947-1 AMD 2 - Molded case circuit breakers
Molded Case Circuit Breakers use with aluminum wire n EN 60947-2 AMD 2 2013
n UL486A - Wire connectors and solderless lugs for n CSA-22.2 No. 5-13 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers, n EN 50581 2012 - RoHS compliant
use with copper Molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures

3VA CSA / UL Breakers Reference Guide
3VA61 3VA62 3VA63 3VA64 3VA65 3VA66

5-40 5-48 5-54 5-60 5-65 5-68
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
150 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 800A 1000A

15 … 125 15 … 125 100 … 250 200 … 400 600-800 1000
0 … 400 0 … 400 0 … 400 0 … 400 50-60 50-60
600 600 600 600 600 600
690 690 690 690 690 690

800 800 800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8 8
5
M H C L E M H C H E M H C L E M H C L E M H C M H C
MDAE HDAE CDAE LDAE EDAE MFAE HFAE CFAE MFAE EFAE MJAE HJAE CJAE LJAE EJAE MLAE HLAE CLAE LLAE ELAE MMAE HMAE CMAE MMNAE HMNAE CMNAE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
100 100 200 200 — 100 100 200 200 — 100 100 200 200 — 100 100 200 200 — 100 150 200 100 150 200
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 35 65 100
35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 150 200 35 65 100 35 65 100
18 22 35 50 100 18 22 35 50 100 18 22 35 50 100 18 22 35 50 100 25 35 50 25 35 50
18 22 35 50 100 18 22 35 50 100 18 22 35 50 100 18 22 35 50 100 25 35 50 25 35 50
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
M H C L E M H C L E M H C L E M H C L E M H C M H C
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 85 110 200 85 110 200

55/55 85/85 110/110 150/150 200 55/55 85/85 110/110 150/150 200 55/55 85/85 110/110 150/150 200 55/55 85/85 110/110 150/150 200 55 85 110 55 85 110
— — — — 3 — — — — 3 — — — — 3 — — — — 3 25 35 35 25 35 35
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
CSA / UL Type Structure

Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4
KAIC @ 480V Frame Family Trip System / Special Application
E = 125A max
S = 25 = low S = Standard TMTU or MCS (Molded Case Switch)
D = 150A max
M = 35 = med low E = High End ETU
F = 250A max
H = 65 = med B = Panelboard TMTU (Bolt-on)
J = 400A max A = 3VA
C = 100 = med high M = TMTU 50°C/NAVAL (UL 489 SB)
L = 600A max
L = 150 = high P = TMTU MCP (Motor Circuit Protector)
M = 800A max
E = 200 = extra high R = ETU MCP (Motor Circuit Protector)"
MN = 1000A max

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breakers General Purpose Breakers
HGG LGG ED2 ED4 ED6 HED4 CED6
Page 5-32 5-32 5-101 5-101 5-101 5-102 5-102
Poles 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1d, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 2, 3
Amperes, Continuous 15–125 15–125 15–100 15–125 15–125g 15–125 15–125
Volts 50/60HZ 1-Pole 347 347 120 277 347 277 —
2-Pole
600/347 600/347 240 480 600 480 600
3-Pole
120V — — 10,000 — — 100,000 —
240V 85,000 100,000 10,000 65,000 65,000 100,000e 200,000
277V — — — 22,000a — 65,000b —
CSA/UL
AC 347V — — — — 30,000 — —
Ratings 480V 35,000 65,000 — 18,000 25,000 42,000 200,000
Interrupt Rating 600V 14,000 14,000 — — 18,000 — 100,000
Symmetrical RMS
Amperes Icu — — — 65,000 — —
220/240V
Ics — — — — 17,000 — —
IEC 947-2 Icu — — — 35,000 — —
380/415V
50/60HZ Ics — — — — 9,000 — —
Icu — — — — 18,000 — —
500V
Ics — — — — 5,000 — —
2-Pole, 250V DC Interrupting Ratings 35,000 42,000 5,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
DC
3-Pole, 500V DC Interrupting Ratingsc — — — — 18,000 — 50,000
5.40 5.40 6.34 6.34 6.34 6.34 9.26
Height 1-Pole
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 —
Dimensions 2-Pole 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
in inches Width 3-Pole 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00
4-Pole 4.00 4.00 — — — — —
5
Depth 2.90 2.90 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00

Thermal and Fixed Magnetic Trip u u u u u u u
Thermal and Adjustable Magnetic Trip — — — — — — —
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Overcurrent
Devices Adjustable Magnetic Trip only
— — — — u — u
Motor Circuit Protector
Molded Case Switch — — u u u u u
Undervoltage Trip — — u u u u u
Shunt Trip u u u u u u u
Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u u
Alarm Switch u u u u u u u
Accessories &
Mechanical Interlock — — — — — — —
Modifications
Rear Connection Studs — — u u u u u
Electric Motor Operator — — u u u u u
Plug-In Mounting Assembly (3 Pole Only) — — u u u u u
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) u u u u u u u
Type 1 — Indoor Surface u u u u u u u
Individual Type 1 — Indoor, Flush u u u u u u u
Enclosures Type 3R — Outdoor-Rainproof u u u u u u u
Type 12 — Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolants — — u u u u u
a 1-pole only.
b 35-100A: 25,000 AIR at 277V AC/15-30A:
65,000 AIR at 277V AC.
c For DC UPS system application.
d Single pole ED6 (15–30A) 30kA, (35–100A) 18 kA. CSA Only.
e Single pole HED4, 15-30A: 65,000 AIR at 240V AC; single
pole HED4, 35-100A: 25,000 AIR at 240V AC.
f HGG and LGG breakers are rated at 600/347V.
ED62B020 HED41B040
g ED6, 2-pole available 15-125 amps only.

FD6A, HFD6, HHFD6, JD6-A, HJD6-A, HHJD6-A,
CFD6 JXD2-A CJD6-A
FXD6A HFXD6 HHFXD6 JXD6-A HJXD6-A HHJXD6-A
Page 5-104 5-105 5-105 5-105 5-107 5-107 5-108 5-108 5-108
Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3
Amperes, Continuous 70–250 70-250 70-250 70–250 200-400 200-400 200-400 200-400 200-400
2-Pole
Volts 50/60HZ 600 600 600 600 240 600 600 600 600
3-Pole
240V 65,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 200,000
CSA/UL 480V 35,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 — 35,000 65,000 100,000 150,000
AC 600V 22,000 25,000 25,000 100,000 — 25,000 35,000 50,000 100,000
Ratings Interrupt Rating Icu 65,000 100,000 — — — 65,000 100,000 — —
220/240V
Symmetrical RMS Ics 33,000 50,000 — — — 33,000 50,000 — —
Amperes IEC60947-2 Icu 35,000 65,000 — — — 40,000 65,000 — —
380/415V
50/60HZ Ics 18,000 33,000 — — — 20,000 33,000 — —
Icu — — — — — — — — —
500V
Ics — — — — — — — — —
2-Pole 250V DC Interrupting Ratings 30,000 30,000 — 50,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 — —
DC
3-Pole, 500V DC Interrupting Ratingsa 18,000 25,000 — 50,000 — 25,000 35,000 — 50,000
Height 9.50 9.50 14.12 14.12 11.00 11.00 11.00 11.00 17.86
Dimensions 2-Pole 4.50 4.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50
Width 4.50 4.50
in inches 3-Pole
Depth 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
Thermal and Fixed Magnetic Trip — — — — — — — — —
Overcurrent Thermal and Adjustable Magnetic Trip u u u u u u u u u
Devices
Adjustable Magnetic Trip Only
u — — u — — u u —
5
Molded Case Switch u — — u u u — — u
Undervoltage Trip
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
u u u u u u u u u
Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u u u u
Acessories Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u u u u
&
Mechanical Interlock u u u u u u u u u
Modifica-
tions Rear Connection Studs u u u u u u u u u
Electric Motor Operator u u u u u u u u u
Plug-In Mounting Assembly u u u u u u u u u
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) u u u u — u u u u
Type 1 — Indoor Surface u u u u u u u u u
Individual Type 1 — Indoor, Flush — u — u — — — — —
Enclosures Type 3R — Outdoor-Rainproof u u u u u u u u —
Type 12 — Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolants u u u u u u u u u

a For DC UPS application.

LD6, HLD6, HHLD6, LMD6, HLMD6, MD6, HMD6,
LXD6 HLXD6 HHLXD6 CLD6-A LMXD6 HLMXD6 MXD6 HMXD6 CMD6
Page 5-111 5-112 5-112 5-112 5-115 5-103 5-118 5-119 5-119
Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3
Amperes, Continuous 250-600 250-600 250-600 450-600 500-800 500-800 500-800 500-800 400-800
2-Pole
Volts 50/60 HZ 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
3-Pole
240V 65,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 200,000
CSA/UL 480V 35,000 65,000 100,000 150,000 50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 100,000
AC 600V 25,000 35,000 50, 000 100,000 25,000 50,000 25,000 50,000 65,000
Ratings Interrupt Rating Icu 65,000 100,000 — — 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 —
220/240V
Symmetrical RMS Ics 33,000 50,000 — — 33,000 50,000 33,000 50,000 —
Amperes IEC 947-2 Icu 40,000 65,000 — — 40,000 65,000 40,000 65,000 —
380/415V
50/60HZ Ics 20,000 33,000 — — 20,000 33,000 20,000 33,000 —
Icu — — — — — — — — —
500V
Ics — — — — — — — — —
2-Pole 250V DC Interrupting Ratings 30,000 30,000 — — 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
DC
3-Pole, 500V DC Interrupting Ratingsa 35,000 — 50, 000 25,000 50,000 25,000 50,000 50,000
Height 11.00 11.00 11.00 17.86 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
Dimensions
Width 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 9.00 9.00 9.00
in inches
Depth 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.59 4.59 6.19 6.19 6.19
Thermal and Adjustable Magnetic Trip u u u u u u u u u
Overcurrent Adjustable Magnetic Trip Only
u — — u u u u — u
Devices Motor Circuit Protector
Molded Case Switch u — — u u — u — u
Undervoltage Trip u u u u u u u u u
5
Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u u u u
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Alarm Switch u u u u u u u u u
Accessories &
Mechanical Interlock u u u u u u u u u
Modifications
Rear Connection Studs u u u u u u u u u
Electric Motor Operator u u u u u u u u u
Plug-In Mounting Assembly u u u u — — u u u
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) u u u u u u u u u
Type 1 — Indoor Surface u u u u — — u u u
Individual Type 1 — Indoor, Flush — — — — — — — — —
Enclosures Type 3R — Outdoor-Rainproof u u u — — — u u u
Type 12 — Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolants — — — — — — u u u

a For DC UPS application.

HND6, PD6 , HPD6d,

ND6, NXD6 HNXD6 CND6 PXD6d HPXD6d CPD6d
Page 5-122 5-123 5-123 5-126 5-126 5-126
Poles 2, 3 2, 3 3 3 3 3
Amperes, Continuous 800-1200 800-1200 800-1200 1200-1600 1200-1600 1200-1600
Volts 50/60 HZ 3-Pole 600 600 600 600 600 600
240V 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 100,000 200,000
CSA/UL 480V 50,000 65,000 100,000 50,000 65,000 100,000
600V 25,000 50,000 65,000 25,000 50,000 65,000
AC
Interrupt Rating Icu 65,000 100,000 — — — —
Ratings 220/240V
Symmetrical RMS Ics 33,000 50,000 — — — —
Amperes IEC 947-2 Icu 40,000 65,000 — — — —
380/415V
50/60HZ Ics 20,000 33,000 — — — —
Icu — — — — — —
500V
Ics — — — — — —
2-Pole 250V DC Interrupting Ratings 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
DC
3-Pole, 500V DC Interrupting Ratingsa 25,000 50,000 50,000 25,000 50,000 50,000
Height 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.0 16.00 16.00
Dimensions in Circuit breakers require Connect-all mounting block.
Width 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00
inches Dimensions shown are for circuit breaker only.
Depth 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19
Thermal and Adjustable Magnetic Trip u u u u u u
Overcurrent Adjustable Magnetic Trip Only
— — — — — —
Devices Motor Circuit Protector
Molded Case Switch u — u u — —
Undervoltage Trip u u u u u u
5
Shunt Trip u u u u u u
Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Alarm Switch u u u u u u
Accessories & Mechanical Interlock u u u u u u
Modifications Rear Connections Studs u u u — — —
Electric Motor Operator u u u u u u
Plug-in Mounting Assembly u u u — — —
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) u u u u u u
Mounting Block (required) — — — u u u
Type 1 — Indoor Surface u u u — — —
Individual Type 1 — Indoor, Flush — — — — — —
Enclosures Type 3R — Outdoor-Rainproof u u u — — —
Type 12 — Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolants — — — — — —

a For DC UPS application. d Requires
Connect-all mounting assembly. Dimensions
b 2-pole design. shown are for circuit breaker only.
c 3-pole design.

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breakers General Purpose
Breakers
Solid State Trip Circuit Breakers
& Electronic Trip Breakers RD6a, HRD6a,
RXD6a HRXD6a SJD6 SHJD6 SCJD6 SLD6 SHLD6 SCLD6
Page 5-129 5-129 5-109 5-109 5-109 5-113 5-113 5-113
Poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1600- 1600-
Amperes, Continuous 200-400 200-400 200-400 300-600 300-600 300-600
2000 2000
Volts 50/60 HZ 3-Pole 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
240V 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 100,000 200,000
CSA/UL 480V 50,000 65,000 35,000 65,000 150,000 35,000 65,000 150,000
AC 600V 25,000 50,000 25,000 35,000 100,000 25,000 35,000 100,000
Ratings Interrupt Rating Icu — — — — — — — —
220/240V
Symmetrical RMS Ics — — — — — — — —
Amperes IEC60947-2 Icu — — — — — — — —
380/415V
50/60HZ Ics — — — — — — — —
Icu — — — — — — — —
500V
Ics — — — — — — — —
2-Pole 250V DC Interrupting Ratings 30,000 30,000 — — — — — —
DC
3-Pole, 500V DC Interrupting Ratingsa 25,000 50,000 — — — — — —
Height 16.00 16.00 11.00 11.00 17.86 11.0 11.00 17.86
Dimensions
Width 3-Pole 9.00 9.00 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50
in inches
Depth 6.19 6.19 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
Solid State Trip — — u u u u u u
Thermal and Adjustable Magnetic Trip u u — — — — — —
Overcurrent
Devices Adjustable Magnetic Trip Only
— — — — — — — —
5
Molded Case Switch u — — — — — — —

Undervoltage Trip u u u u u u u u
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Shunt Trip u u u u u u u u
Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u u u
Alarm Switch u u u u u u u u
Accessories & Mechanical Interlock u u u u u u u u
Modifications Rear Connections Studs — — u u u u u u
Electric Motor Operator u u u u u u u u
Plug-In Mounting Assembly — — u u u u u u
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) u u u u u u u u
Mounting Block (required) u u — — — — — —
Type 1 — Indoor Surface — — u u u u u u
Individual Type 1 — Indoor, Flush — — — — — — — —
Enclosures Type 3R — Outdoor-Rainproof — — u u — u u —
Type 12 — Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolants — — u u u — — —

a Requires
Connect-all mounting assembly. Dimensions
shown are for circuit breaker only.

Reference Guide Selection
Electronic Trip Breakers Solid State Trip Circuit Breakers
SMD6 SHMD6 SCMD6 SND6 SHND6 SCND6 SPD6a SHPD6a
Page 5-120 5-120 5-120 5-124 5-124 5-124 5-127 5-127
Poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Amperes, Continuous 600-800 600-800 600-800 800-1200 800-1200 800-1200 1200-600 1200-1600
Volts 50/60HZ 3-Pole 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
240V 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 100,000

CSA/UL
Ratings AC
Interrupt Rating 480V 50,000 65,000 100,000 50,000 65,000 100,000 50,000 65,000
Symmetrical RMS
Amperes 600V 25,000 50,000 65,000 25,000 50,000 65,000 25,000 50,000
Icu — — — — — — — —
380/415V
IEC60947-2 Ics — — — — — — — —
50/60HZ Icu — — — — — — — —
690V
Ics — — — — — — — —
Height 10.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
Dimensions
Width 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00
in inches
Depth 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19
Overcurrent
Solid State Trip u u u u u u u u
Devices
Undervoltage Trip u u u u u u u u
Shunt Trip u u u u u u u u
Auxiliary Switch u u u u u u u u
Alarm Switch u u u u u u u u
Accessories &
Mechanical Interlock u u u u u u u u
5
Modifications
Rear Connection Studs u u u u u u — —
Electric Motor Operator u u u u u u u u
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Plug-In Mounting Assembly u u u u u u — —
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-160) u u u u u u u u
Type 1 — Indoor Surface u u u u u u — —
Individual Type 1 — Indoor, Flush — — — — — — — —
Enclosures Type 3R — Outdoor-Rainproof u u u u u u — —
Type 12 — Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolants u u u u u — —

a Requires
connect-all mounting block assembly. Dimensions b Breakerhas rating plugs which can be changed within each
shown are for circuit breaker. frame rating.

Page 5-166 5-170 5-174
Breaker Frame Family DG FG JG
Continuous Amps 30–150A 40–250A 70–400A
Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
Max. Volts AC 600Y/347V 600Y/347V 600V
Breaker Type NDGA HDGA LDGA NFGA HFGA LFGA NJGA HJGA LJGA
Interrupting Class N H L N H L N H L
240Vac 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200
Interrupting CSA/ 480Vac 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100
Rating RMS
UL 600Vac 18 18 18 18 18 18 25 25 25
Symmetrical
220/240Vac 65/65 100/75 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/150
Amperes
Ratings l /l 380/415Vac 40/40 70/70 100/75 40/40 70/70 100/75 45/45 70/70 100/75
AC 50/60Hz CU CS
690Vac 12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 15/8 15/8
DC 250Vdc (2-Pole) 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Interrupting
Ratings (CSA/UL) b 500Vdc (3-Pole) 18 18 18 18 18 30 25 35 35
1-Pole — —
Dimensions 2-Pole 6.9H x 4.1W x 3.4D 11H x 5.5W x 4.2D
in Inches 3-Pole 6.9H x 4.1W x 3.4D 11H x 5.5W x 4.2D
4-Pole — —
Thermal-Magnetic u u u
Electronic u u u
Trip Unit Electronic with LCD u u u
Information Interchangeable Trip Unit — — u
Reverse Feed (w/Non-Interchangeable Trip) u u u
Communications Capability  u u u
Molded Case Switch u u u
Specific
5
Motor Circuit Protector u u u

Application
Breakers 100% Rated u u
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
50°C Calibrated
Auxiliary Switch u u u
Alarm Switch u u u
Shunt Trip u u u
Undervoltage Release u u u
Mechanical Interlocks u u u
Electric Motor or Stored Energy Operator u u u
Accessories &
Rear Connecting Studs u u u
Modifications
Plug-In Mounting Assy. w/Trip Interlock u u u
Draw-Out Assembly u u u
Handle Mechanism Options u u u
Terminal Shields u u u
Distribution Lugs u u u
Ground Sensor (Neutral Transformer) u u u
a 500Vdc nominal, for ungrounded DC UPS systems.

b DC Interrupting Ratings are not applicable to electronic circuit breakers.
 Communications available via a COMPRO or COMMOD modules using Profibus or Modbus protocols.
 Consult Siemens for availability.
 Special version, see page 5-215 – 5-216.
GG are not VL family breakers and do not share common VL accessories.
 304 and 316 Stainless Steel

Page 5-178 5-182 5-186 5-190
Breaker Frame Family LG MG NG PG
Continuous Amps 150–600A 200–800A 300–1200A 400–1600A
Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3
Max. Volts AC 600V 600V 600V 600V
Breaker Type NLGB HLGB LLGB NMG HMG LMG NNG HNG LNG NPG HPG LPG
Interrupting Class N H L N H L N H L N H L
240Vac 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200
Interrupting CSA/
480Vac 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100
Rating RMS UL
600Vac 18 18 18 25 35 65 25 35 65 25 35 65
Symmetrical
Amperes 220/240Vac 65/65 100/75 200/150 65/35 100/50 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/100 65/35 100/50 200/100
Ratings AC 50/60Hz l /l
CU CS 380/415Vac 45/45 70/70 100/75 50/50 70/70 100/75 50/25 70/35 100/50 50/25 70/35 100/50
690Vac 12/6 15/8 15/8 20/10 30/15 35/17 20/10 30/15 35/17 20/10 30/15 35/15
DC 250Vdc (2-Pole) 30 30 30 22 25 42 22 25 42 22 25 42
Interrupting
Ratings (CSA/UL) c 500Vdc (3-Pole) 25 35 35 35 50 65 35 50 65 35 50 65
Dimensions 2-Pole 11H x 5.5W x 4.2D 16H x 7.5W x 4.7D 16H x 9W x 6.2D —
in Inches 3-Pole 11H x 5.5W x 4.2D 16H x 7.5W x 4.7D 16H x 9W x 6.2D
Thermal-Magnetic u u u u
Electronic u u u u
Trip Unit Electronic with LCD u u u u
Information Interchangeable Trip Unit u u u u
Reverse Feed (w/Non-Interchangeable Trip) u u u u
Communications Capability a u u u u
Specific Molded Case Switch u u u u
5
Application Motor Circuit Protector u u u
Breakers 100% Rated u u u u
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Auxiliary Switch u u u u
Alarm Switch u u u u
Shunt Trip u u u u
Undervoltage Release u u u u
Mechanical Interlocks u u u u
Accessories Electric Motor or Stored Energy Operator u u u u
and Rear Connecting Studs u u u u
Modifications Plug-In Mounting Assy. w/Trip Interlock u
Draw-Out Assembly u u
Handle Mechanism Options u u u u
Terminal Shields u u u u
Distribution Lugs
Ground Sensor (Neutral Transformer) u u u u
a Communications available via COMPRO or COMMOD modules using Profibus or Modbus protocol.
b 500Vdc nominal, for ungrounded DC UPS systems.
c DC Interrupting Ratings are not applicable to electronic circuit breakers.
 LG frame maximum 500A.
 Special version, see page 5-215 – 5-216.
 Special 600Vac 25kA version available, see page 5-215 – 5-216.

Panelboard Mounting Circuit Breakers Selection
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI) • CSA / UL Listed • HACR Rated
AFCI’s detect arcing faults (an unintentional arcing condition in a circuit) that
standard circuit breakers are unable to detect. The device is intended to mitigate
the effects of arcing faults by functioning to de-energize the circuit when an arc-
fault is detected.
Combination Type AFCI
Detects all three possible types of arc fault: line-to-ground, line-to-neutral, and series.
Breaker Ampere 10,000 A IR 22,000 A IR 65,000 A IR
Type Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
BAF2/BAFH2/HBAF2 15 BA115AFCa BA115AFCH BA115AFCHH
1-Pole 120V AC 20 BA120AFCa BA120AFCH BA120AFCHH
BAF/BAFH 15 B215AFCa B215AFCH —
2-Pole 120/240V AC 20 B220AFCa B220AFCH — 1-Pole Combination 2-Pole Combination
Type AFCI Type AFCI
Branch-Feeder AFCI
Detects line-to-ground and line-to neutral arcs.
BAF2/BAFH2/HBAF2 15 BA115AFa BA115AFHna BA115AFHHn
1-Pole 120V AC 20 BA120AFa BA120AFHna BA120AFHHn
NEW Dual Function AFCI/GFCI

The Dual Function Circuit Breaker combines Combination Type AFCI and GFCI, protecting
against both Arc Faults and (5mA) Ground Faults. The device includes the Self Test
5
feature, making it the first in class in electrical safety for homeowners.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
BFGA2/BFGAH2/ 15 B115DF B115DFHn B115DFHHn

HBFGA2 20 B120DF B120DFHn B120DFHHn
1-Pole 120V AC
1-Pole Branch 1-Pole Dual

Ground-Fault Circuit Ground Fault Equipment Feeder AFCI Function AFCI/GFC
Interrupters (GFCI) Protection (30mA)
Provides Class A (5mA) ground fault Provides protection of equipment from
protection. Intended for personnel damaging line-to-ground faults cur-
protection. De-energizes the circuit for all rents. De-energizes the circuit for all
ungrounded conductors of the circuit. ungrounded conductors of the circuit.
Breaker Amp 10k A IR 22k A IR 65k A IR Breaker Amp 10k A IR 22k A IR
Type Rating Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Type Rating Cat. No. Cat. No.
BLF/ BLE/
15 BF115Aa BF115AHa BF115AHH
BLHF 20 BF120Aa BF120AHa BF120AHH BLEH 15 BE115 a BE115Hna
1-Pole 1-Pole, 20 BE120 a BE120Hna
25 BF125A BF125AH — 30 BE130 BE130Hn
120V AC 120V AC
30 BF130A BF130AH BF130AHH
Bolt-On Bolt-On
BLF/ 15 BF215A BF215AH — BLE/ 15 BE215 BE215Hn

BLHF 20 BF220A BF220AH — BLEH 20 BE220 BE220Hn
2-Pole 30 BF230A BF230AH — 2-Pole 30 BE230 BE230Hn
120/240V 40 BF240A BF240AH — 120/240V 40 BE240 BE240Hn 1-Pole Equipment 2-Pole Equipment
50 BF250A BF250AH — AC 50 BE250 BE250Hn
AC Protection Protection
Bolt-On 60 BF260A BF260AH — Bolt-On 60 BE260 BE260Hn
Wiring Diagrams
QAF2/QPF/QE Accessories
Description Catalog Number
Padlocking Device 1-Pole ECPLD1
Padlocking Device 2-Pole ECPLD2
Handle Block ECBX231M
n Built to order. Allow 8 -10 weeks for delivery.

a CSA / UL Listed as SWD (Switching Duty) Rated,
suitable for 120V AC Fluorescent Lighting.

Panelboard Mounting with INSTA-WIRE Selection

Panelboard Mounting with INSTA-WIRE Selection
1-Pole Bolt-On (120V AC)e
Type BLa Type BLHa Type HBLa
Continuous 10,000A IR 22,000A IR 65,000A IR
Current Rating
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
15 B115l B115Hd B115HHd
20 B12l B120Hd B120HHd
25 B125 B125H B125HHn
30 B130 B130H B130HH
35 B135 B135Hn B135HHn
40 B140 B140H B140HH 1-Pole
45 B145n B145Hn B145HHn
50 B150 B150H B150HHn
60 B160 B160Hn B160HHn
70 B170 B170Hn B170HHn
2-Pole Bolt-On (Common-Trip 120/240V AC)f

15 B215 B215H B215HH
20 B220 B220H B220HH
25 B225 B225Hn B225HHn
30 B230 B230H B230HH 2-Pole
35 B235 B235Hn B235HHn
40 B240 B240H B240HH
45 B245 B245Hn B245HHn
50 B250 B250H B250HH
60 B260 B260H B260HH
70 B270 B270Hn B270HHn
5
80 B280 B280Hn B280HHn
90 B290 B290Hn B290HHn
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
100 B2100 B2100H B2100HH 3-Pole
110 B2110n B2110Hn B2110HHn
125 B2125 B2125H B2125HHn
2-Pole Bolt-On (Common-Trip 240V AC)cfj

15 B215R — —
20 B220R — —
30 B230R — —
40 B240Rn — —
50 B250R — —
3-Pole Bolt-On (Common-Trip 240V AC)g

15 B315 B315H B315HH
20 B320 B320H B320HH
25 B325 B325H B325HHn
30 B330 B330H B330HH
35 B335 B335Hn B335HHn
40 B340 B340H B340HH
45 B345 B345Hn B345HHn
50 B350 B350H B350HH
60 B360 B360H B360HH
70 B370 B370H B370HH Breaker Dimensions
80 B380 B380Hn B380HH Type Amperes L D1 D2
90 B390 B390Hn B390HH BL, BLH 15–50 39⁄16 23⁄8 3
100 B3100 B3100H B3100HH BL, BLH 55–125 33⁄4 23⁄8 3
HBL 15–125 33⁄4 23⁄8 3
BL/BLH/HBL Internal Accessories

Description Catalogue Number Field/Factory Installed
120VAC Shunt Trip add suffix...00S01n Factory
120V Auxiliary Switch add suffix...01n b Factory For external accessories, please
refer to page 5-154 - 5-159
n Built to order. Allow 2-3 weeks for delivery c CSA Certified / UL Listed for use on 3-phase g Shipped4 per sleeve.
a CSA
grounded “B” systems —10,000
for this application. h CSACertified / UL Listed 5KA IR.
Certified / UL Listed for use with 60/75° wire through d CSA Certified / UL Listed for frequent switching i 10
Amp breaker does not have INSTA-WIRE.
40 amps, CSA Certified / UL Listed for use with 75°
applications (SWD). j For 3 Phase Applications.
wire only for 50 amps and above, HACR rated. 120V AC e Shipped 12 per sleeve.  CSA Certified / UL Listed for reverse feed."
Fluorescent Lighting. f Shipped 6 per sleeve.  CSA Certified for frequent switching applications (SWD)
b 1A and 1B contacts.

BQD 100A Frame Panelboard Mounting Circuit Breakers Selection/Dimensions
BQD d
1-Pole 2-Polec 3-Polec
480Y/277V AC–
Continuous Current 277V AC–125V DC 125/250V DC 480Y/277V AC
Rating @ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 BQD115 a b BQD215 e BQD315e
20 BQD120 a b BQD220 e BQD320e
25 BQD125 b BQD225 e BQD325e
45 BQD145 bn BQD245 e BQD345e
60 BQD160 BQD260 BQD360
70 BQD170n BQD270 BQD370
BQD, BQD6
100 BQD1100n BQD2100 BQD3100
BQD6 CSA Certified

1-Pole 2-Polec 3-Polec
Continuous Current 347V AC 600/347V AC 600/347V AC
Rating @ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 BQD6115 a BQD6215 BQD6315
20 BQD6120 a BQD6220 BQD6320
25 BQD6125n BQD6225n BQD6325n
BQD, BQD6
5
30 BQD6130 BQD6230 BQD6330

35 BQD6135n BQD6235n BQD6335n
Shipping Weights
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
40 BQD6140n BQD6240n BQD6340

45 BQD6145n BQD6245n BQD6345n Number Number Shipping
50 BQD6150n BQD6250n BQD6350 of Poles per Carton Weight (lbs.) (ea.)
60 BQD6160n BQD6260n BQD6360 1 1/12/48 0.6
70 BQD6170n BQD6270n BQD6370 2 1/6/24 1.2
3 1/4/16 2.0
Interrupting Ratings Lugs For 60/75°C Wire

RMS Symmetrical Amperes (KA) BQD – Load End Only
Breaker Number Volts AC Volts DC #14–#6 AWG Cu
15–40
Type of Poles 120 240 277 480/277 347 600/277 125 125/250 #12–#6 AWG Al
1 65 — 14 — — — 14 — #9–#1 AWG Cu
BQD 45–100
2 — 65 — 14 — — — 14 #6–#1/0 AWG Al
(CSA/UL)
3 — 65 — 14 — — — —
1 65 — — — 10 — 14 —
BQD6
2 — 65 — — — 10 — 14
(CSA)
3 — 65 — — — 10 — —
For inches / millimeters conversion, a CSA Certified / UL Rated SWD rated for switching Forrated
e HID external accessories,
at 480Y/277V AC. please refer
see Technical section. fluorescent lighting. to pages 5-154 - 5-159
n Built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks for delivery. b HID rated at 277V AC. For internal accessories, please refer
c Not suitable for 3-phase delta 480V applications. to page 5-151 - 5-153
dHACR rated.

GB2 Frame Selection
Type NGB2 (Panelboard Mount)

Continuous 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Current Rating
@ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
15 NGB1K015Ba b NGB2K015Bb NGB3K015Bb
20 NGB1K020Ba b NGB2K020Bb NGB3K020Bb
25 NGB1K025Bb NGB2K025Bb NGB3K025Bb
60 NGB1K060B NGB2K060B NGB3K060B
NGB2 series
Load lugs are included as standard. HACR rated.
Type HGB2 (Panelboard Mount) Type LGB2 (Panelboard Mount)

Continuous 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Continuous 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Current Rating Current Rating
@ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number @ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
15 HGB1K015Ba b HGB2K015Bb HGB3K015Bb 15 LGB1K015Ba b LGB2K015Bb LGB3K015Bb
20 HGB1K020Ba b HGB2K020Bb HGB3K020Bb 20 LGB1K020Ba b LGB2K020Bb LGB3K020Bb
5
25 HGB1K025Bb HGB2K025Bb HGB3K025Bb 25 LGB1K025Bb LGB2K025Bb LGB3K025Bb
30 HGB1K030B b
HGB2K030B b
HGB3K030B b
30 LGB1K030B b
LGB2K030B b
LGB3K030Bb
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
45 HGB1K045B b
HGB2K045B b
HGB3K045B b
45 LGB1K045B b
LGB2K045B b
LGB3K045Bb
50 HGB1K050B b
HGB2K050B b
HGB3K050B b
50 LGB1K050Bb LGB2K050Bb LGB3K050Bb
60 HGB1K060B HGB2K060B HGB3K060B 60 LGB1K060B LGB2K060B LGB3K060B
Shipping Weights Lugs for 60/75°C Wire

Number of Number per Shipping Ampere Catalog
Poles Carton Weight lbs. (kg) Type Rating Wire Size Number
1 1 .75 (.34) #14-#6 AWG Cu TC1Q1 (qty. 1)
NGB2 15-30A
#12-#6 AWG Al 3TC1Q1 (qty. 3)
2 1 1.3 (.59) HGB2
LGB2 #8-1/0 AWG Cu
3 1 2.0 (.98) 35-125A 3TC1GG20
#8-2/0 AWG Al
Interrupting Ratings (max. RMS symmetrical amperes kA)

CSA 22.2 No. 5 / UL 489
Volts AC Volts DC
Type Poles 120 240 277 480 347 600Y/347 125 125/250
1 100 — 25 — 14 — 14 —
NGB2
2, 3 — 100 — 25 — 14 — 14
1 100 — 35 — 22 — 14 —
HGB2
2, 3 — 100 — 35 — 22 — 14
1 100 — 65 — 25 — 14 —
LGB2
2, 3 — 100 — 65 — 25 — 14
For external accessories, please refer

a SWD rated d 2-pole only or two outer poles of 3-pole breaker to pages 5-154 - 5-159
b HID rated e Suitable for reverse feed applications For internal accessories, please refer
c 2-pole only to page 5-151 - 5-153

GB Frame Selection
Type NGB Frame (Panelboard Mount)


Current Rating
@ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 NGB1B015B a b NGB2B015B b NGB3B015B b
20 NGB1B020B a b NGB2B020B b NGB3B020B b
25 NGB1B025B b NGB2B025B b NGB3B025B b
60 NGB1B060B NGB2B060B NGB3B060B
110 NGB1B110B NGB2B110B NGB3B110B NGB1B030B
Load lugs are included as standard. HACR rated.
Shipping Weights Lugs For 60/75°C Wire

Number Number Shipping NGB
of Poles per Carton Weight (lbs.) (ea.) Ampere Rating Wire Size Catalogue Number
1 1 0.9 (0.4) #14–#6 AWG Cu
15–30A Integral with breaker
2 1 1.9 (0.9) #12–#6 AWG Al
3 1 2.9 (1.2) #8–1/0 AWG Cu
35–125A Integral with breaker
5
#8–2/0 AWG Al
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

CSA 22.2 No. 5 / UL 489
Breaker Number Volts AC Volts DC
Type of Poles 120 240 277 480Y/277 347 600Y/277 125 125/250
1 100 — 25 14 — — 14 —
NGB
2,3 — 100 — — 25 14 — 14

a SWD rated. c 2-pole only.
to pages 5-154 - 5-159
b HID rated.  2-pole only or two outer poles of 3-pole breaker
 Suitable for reverse feed applications
For internal accessories, please refer
to page 5-151 - 5-153

Shunt Trip
BQD, BQD6, CQD, CQD6,
NGG, HGG, LGG, NGB, NGB2,
Control Voltage HGB, HGB2, LGB2
V AC V DC and LGB2
120 — CQDST120
240 — CQDST240
277 — CQDST277
480 — CQDST480
600 — CQDST600
— 012 CQDST12
— 024 CQDST24
— 048 CQDST48
— 125 CQDST125
Auxiliary Switch
BQD, BQD6, CQD,
Maximum Number CQD6,NGG, HGG, LGG,
Voltage CQDST120AAS
of NGB, NGB2, HGB,
AC DC Contacts HGB2, LGB2 and LGB2
240 125 1A–1B CQDA1
240 125 2A–2B CQDA2
Alarm Switch
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
BQD, BQD6, CQD, CQD6,
Maximum Voltage NGG, HGG, LGG, NGB, NGB2,
AC DC HGB, HGB2, LGB and LGB2
240 125 CQDBA
Shunt Trip and Auxiliary Switch

Combinations
Shunt Trip BQD, BQD6, CQD, CQD6,
Voltage NGG, HGG, LGG, NGB, NGB2,
AC DC HGB, HGB2, LGB and LGB2
24 — CQDST24AAS
120 — CQDST120AAS CQD with Accessory Installed
240 — CQDST240AAS
277 — CQDST277AAS
480 — CQDST480AAS
600 — CQDST600AAS
— 12 CQDST12DAS
— 24 CQDST24DAS
— 48 CQDST48DAS
— 125 CQDST125DAS
Alarm and Auxiliary Switch

Combinations
For Breaker Catalog Number
BQD, BQD6, CQD, NGG,
HGG, LGG, NGB, HGB CQDA1BA
and LGB
aAdds 1-pole space for accessory.

3VA41 125A Thermal-magnetic Trip Circuit Breakers Selection
3VA41 125A Frame, 3-Pole Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Cont. S-Interrupting Class M-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class
Ampere (SEAB) (MEAB) (HEAB)
Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
TM210 FTFM
15 3VA4195-4ED34-0AA0 3VA4195-5ED34-0AA0 3VA4195-6ED34-0AA0
3VA41 125A 3-Pole
Trip Settings for 3VA41
100 3VA4110-4ED34-0AA0 3VA4110-5ED34-0AA0 3VA4110-6ED34-0AA0 TM210 - FTFM
110 3VA4111-4ED34-0AA0 3VA4111-5ED34-0AA0 3VA4111-6ED34-0AA0 In (A) Ir (A) Ii (A)
125 3VA4112-4ED34-0AA0 3VA4112-5ED34-0AA0 3VA4112-6ED34-0AA0 15 15 300
20 20 300
25 25 300
Interrupting Ratings for 3VA41 30 30 300
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA) 35 35 350
Inter-
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 40 40 400
5
rupting Breaker
Class Type Poles 120 240 277 347 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 45 45 450
50 50 500
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
1 65 25 14
S SEAB 60 60 600
2, 3 65 25 25 14
70 70 700
1 85 35 18
M MEAB 80 Breakers 80
3VA UL18Molded Case Circuit 800
2, 3 85 35 35
Accessories and Spare Parts
90 90 900
1 150 65 25
H HEAB 100 100 1000
2, 3 150 65 65 Internal25
accessories
110 110 1100
Design 125 125 1250
Dimensions Shipping Weight
Breaker Poles W in. (mm) H in. (mm) D in. (mm) lbs. kg
3VA41 1 1 (25.4) 5.1 (129.4) 3.6 (92.2) 0.62 0.28 Internal accessories configuration 3VA4/3VA5 3VA4
125 A 125 A
3VA41 1 in 2 2 (50.8) 5.1 (129.4) 3.6 (92.2) 0.94 0.43 1 in 2-pole 3-pole
3VA41 2 2 (50.8) 5.1 (129.4) 3.6 (92.2) 1.13 0.51 /2-pole
3VA41 3 3 (76.2) 5.1 (129.4) 3.6 (92.2) 1.64 0.74
Connectors for 75C Wire for 3VA41

125 A 125 A
Slot No.: 23 22 21 23 22 21 11 12 13
Min. Max. Catalog No. Auxiliary switch Type
Type cable size cable size (kit of 3 lugs)
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x x
Steel wrap around (Cu cable only),
AWG 14 3/0 3VA9133-0JA11 AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x x
1 cable lugs Auxiliary switch
x x x
Aluminum body lug small (Cu/Al AUX_HP
AWG 14 AWG 10 3VA9133-0JB10 x x x
cable), 1 cable lug
LCS_HQ x
Aluminum body lug (Cu/Al cable),
AWG 14 3/0 3VA9133-0JB11 Leading
LCS_HQ_el
1 cable lugs changeover switch
x
Aluminum body lug small with control LCS_HP x

AWG 14 AWG 10 3VA9133-0JG10
wire tap (Cu/Al cable), 1 cable lug Alarm switch Type
Aluminum body lug with control wire TAS_HQ x x x x x x
AWG 14 3/0 3VA9133-0JG11
tap (Cu/Al cable), 1 cable lugs Trip alarm switch TAS_HQ_el x x x x x x
Copper body lug small (Cu cable only), TAS_HP x x x
AWG 14 AWG 10 3VA9133-0JD10
1 cable lugs SAS_HQ
Copper body lug (Cu cable only), Short circuit alarm switch
AWG 14 2/0 3VA9133-0JD11 SAS_HQ_el
1 cable lugs
Auxiliary release Type
Copper body lug small with control
AWG 14 AWG 10 3VA9133-0JK10
wire tap (Cu cable only), 1 cable lugs 4 Shunt trip flexible STF x
x
x
x
Copper body lug with control wire tap Shunt trip left STL
AWG 14 2/0 3VA9133-0JK11 STL_el
(Cu cable only), 1 cable lugs
Residual current release RCR
3VA4 Accessories Undervoltage release UVR x

x
x
x
Universal release UNI
Description Catalog Number Other
Padlocking Device for 3VA4 breaker 3VA9038-0LB11 Cylinder lock (type Ronis) x


TM210 FTFM
3VA41 125A 1-Pole
3VA41 125A Frame, 1 in 2-Pole Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

(SEAB) (MEAB) (HEAB)
5
Ampere
TM210 FTFMa
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
3VA41 125A 1 in 2-Pole
3VA41 125A 2-Pole

Cont. S-Interrupting Class M-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class Ordering Information
The catalog numbers listed here are
for complete, non-interchangable trip
TM210 FTFM
circuit breakers breakers with load
20 3VA4120-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4120-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4120-6ED24-0AA0 lugs installed.
25 3VA4125-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4125-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4125-6ED24-0AA0 All 3VA41 thermal-magnetic trip
circuit breakers are UL Listed and
40 3VA4140-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4140-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4140-6ED24-0AA0 CSA Certified for reverse feed
45 3VA4145-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4145-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4145-6ED24-0AA0 applications.
50 3VA4150-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4150-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4150-6ED24-0AA0 For NAVAL-rated 1, 2 or 3-P thermal-
60 3VA4160-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4160-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4160-6ED24-0AA0 magnetic trip circuit breakers, change
the 13th digit of the catalog number
to the number "1". (For example, a
18KA @ 600/347VAC, 40A, 3-pole,
110 3VA4111-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4111-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4111-6ED24-0AA0 NAVAL rated 3VA41 would be catalog
125 3VA4112-4ED24-0AA0 3VA4112-5ED24-0AA0 3VA4112-6ED24-0AA0 number 3VA4140-5ED31-1AA0)

Circuit Breakers
Lug-In/Lug-Out with INSTA-WIRE Selection
All BQ/BQH/HBQ circuit breakers are supplied with load side lugs. If line side lugs are required, add suffix “L” to catalog number. Consult Siemens
for any additional charge. All standard circuit breakers are calibrated for 40°C maximum ambient application.
Type BQ Type BQH Type HBQ

Continuous
Current Rating 10,000A IR 22,000A IR 65,000A IR
1-Pole (120V AC)e
15 BQ1B015dj BQ1B015Hd HB1B015nd
20 BQ1B020dj BQ1B020Hd HB1B020nd
25 BQ1B025 BQ1B025Hn HB1B025n
30 BQ1B030 BQ1B030H HB1B030n
35 BQ1B035n BQ1B035Hn HB1B035n
40 BQ1B040 BQ1B040H HB1B040n
45 BQ1B045n — HB1B045n
50 BQ1B050 BQ1B050H HB1B050n
60 BQ1B060n BQ1B060Hn HB1B060n 1-Pole
70 BQ1B070n BQ1B070Hn HB1B070n
2-Pole (Common-Trip 120/240V AC)f
15 BQ2B015 BQ2B015H HB2B015n
20 BQ2B020 BQ2B020H HB2B020n
30 BQ2B030 BQ2B030H HB2B030n
40 BQ2B040 BQ2B040H HB2B040n
45 BQ2B045 — HB2B045n
50 BQ2B050 BQ2B050H HB2B050n
60 BQ2B060 BQ2B060H HB2B060n
5
80 BQ2B080 BQ2B080Hn HB2B080

100 BQ2B100 BQ2B100H HB2B100
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
110 BQ2B110 — HB2B110n 2-Pole

125 BQ2B125 BQ2B125H HB2B125
2-Pole (Common-Trip 240V AC)cf
15 BQ2H015 — —
20 BQ2H020 — —
30 BQ2H030 — —
40 BQ2H040n — —
50 BQ2H050 — —
60 BQ2H060 — —
70 BQ2H070n — —
80 BQ2H080n — —
90 BQ2H090n — —
100 BQ2H100n — —
3-Pole (Common-Trip 240V AC)g
15 BQ3B015 BQ3B015H HB3B015n
20 BQ3B020 BQ3B020H HB3B020n 3-Pole
25 BQ3B025n BQ3B025Hn HB3B025
30 BQ3B030 BQ3B030H HB3B030
35 BQ3B035n BQ3B035H HB3B035
40 BQ3B040 BQ3B040H HB3B040 Factory Modifications
45 BQ3B045n BQ3B045H HB3B045 Description Catalogue Number
50 BQ3B050 BQ3B050H HB3B050
Line Side Lugs add suffix...L
60 BQ3B060 BQ3B060H HB3B060
70 BQ3B070 BQ3B070H HB3B070n Quick Connect Lug add suffix...QX
80 BQ3B080 BQ3B080Hn HB3B080n 400Hz Calibration add suffix...Y h
90 BQ3B090 BQ3B090Hn HB3B090n Marine 50˚ C Ambient Calibration add suffix...M
100 BQ3B100 BQ3B100H HB3B100
Fungus Proofing add suffix...F
BQ / BQH / HBQ Internal Accessories

Description Catalogue Number Field/Factory Installed
120V Auxiliary Switch add suffix...01n b Factory
to page 5-154 - 5-159
c CSA Certified / UL Listed for use on 3-phase grounded “B” g Shipped 4 per sleeve.
n Built to order. Allow 2-3 weeks for delivery h CSA Certified / UL Listed 5KA IR.
systems —
a CSA Certified / UL Listed for use with 60/75° wire through  Refer to Table A on page 5-86
10,000 for this application.
40 amps, CSA Certified / UL Listed for use with 75° wire d CSA Certified / UL Liisted for frequent switching j CSA Certified for frequent switching applications (SWD)
only for 50 amps applications (SWD). 120V AC Fluorescent Lighting.
and above, HACR rated. e Shipped 12 per sleeve.
b 1A and 1B contacts. f Shipped 6 per sleeve.

DIN Rail Mounted Circuit Breakers Selection/Dimensions
Interrupting Ratings
(KA) (RMS Symmetrical
Breaker Ampere Catalog Line Side Load Side Amperes) Volts AC
Type Rating Number Connector Connector 120 120/240
1-Pole DIN Rail (120V AC)

10 BQ1B010QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
BQLD 25 BQ1B025QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
1-Pole 30 BQ1B030QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
120V 35 BQ1B035QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
DIN Rail 40 BQ1B040QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
45 BQ1B045QLD TA1Q1 TA1Q1 10
10 BQ1B010QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
15 BQ1B015QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10 BQ1B015QLD BQ2B015QLD
BQXD 25 BQ1B025QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
1-Pole 30 BQ1B030QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
120V 35 BQ1B035QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
DIN Rail 40 BQ1B040QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
45 BQ1B045QXD TA1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
2-Pole DIN Rail (120/240V AC)
BQLD 25 BQ2B025QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
2-Pole 30 BQ2B030QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
5
120/240V 35 BQ2B035QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
DIN Rail 40 BQ2B040QLD TC1Q1 TC1Q1 10
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
50 BQ2B050QLD TA1Q1 TA1Q1 10 BQ1B015QXD BQ2B015QXD
BQXD 25 BQ2B025QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
2-Pole 30 BQ2B030QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
120/240V 35 BQ2B035QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
DIN Rail 40 BQ2B040QXD TC1Q1 Quick-Connect 10
Lugs-For Use with BQXD Finger Safe Terminal Shield

Protects against accidental contact with
Circuit Cab. Lug lugs–1 per lug. Fits line and load end.
Breaker Per Wire Range Catalogue
Amp. Rtg. Lug AWG Number Catalogue Number Qty
Line Side BQFS2 2
1 #16–#6 Cu BQFS1K 1000 Breaker Dimensions (inches)
10–40 TC1Q1ab Type Amperes L D1 D2
1 #12–#6 Al
#8–#1 Cu BQ, BQH 15–50 33⁄4 23⁄8 3
45–125 1000 TA1Q1
#6–#1/0 Al BQ, BQH 55–125 4 23⁄8 3
HBQ 15–125 4 23⁄8 3
BQXD 15–60 41⁄2 23⁄8 3
Enclosures page 5-139 – 5-146

Accessories pages 5-151 - 5-159
For inches / millimeters conversion, bConnector has steel construction.

see Technical section. Surface mounted indoor. If flush mounting is required,
c Type BQXD uses TA1Q1 or TC1Q1 lugs on line side of
replace suffix “S” in catalog number with suffix “F”. circuit breaker.
n Built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks for delivery. Neutral included in enclosure.
a CSA Certified / UL Listed for use with 60/75° wire Enclosure will not accept circuit breakers with shunt
through 40 amps, CSA Certified / UL listed for use with trips or auxiliary switches installed.
75° wire only for 50 amps and above, HACR rated.
QR 250A Frame Selection/Dimensions
Continuous 2-Pole 3-Pole Ordering Information

Current Rating 240V AC 240V AC
@ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Load side 3TA1QR300 lugs are mounted and included
when circuit breaker is ordered. For line and load lugs
Type QR2b (3TA1QR300) installed at no additional charge, add
suffix “L” to catalog number.
100 QR22B100 QR23B100
50°C Calibration - See page 5-160.
125 QR22B125 QR23B125
400HZ. - See page 5-160.
150 QR22B150 QR23B150
175 QR22B175 QR23B175
200 QR22B200 QR23B200 Shipping Weights
225 QR22B225 QR23B225 Number Number Shipping
of Poles per Carton Weight (lbs.)
250 QR22B250 QR23B250
2 1 3.2
Type QRH2b 3 1 4.5
100 QRH22B100n QRH23B100
125 QRH22B125 QRH23B125 Lugs For 75°C Wire a
150 QRH22B150 QRH23B150 Catalog Lug Lug
175 QRH22B175n QRH23B175 Number Body Wire Range
200 QRH22B200 QRH23B200 3TA1QR300 Al #3 - 300 Kcmil Al/Cu
225 QRH22B225 QRH23B225 #3 - 300 Kcmil Cu ONLY
3TC1QR250 Cu
250 QRH22B250 QRH23B250
Type HQR2b
100 HQR22B100n HQR23B100
CSA C22.2 No. 5 / UL 489
5
125 HQR22B125 HQR23B125 Interrupting Ratings

150 HQR22B150 HQR23B150 RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

175 HQR22B175n HQR23B175
Type 240
200 HQR22B200 HQR23B200
QR2 10
225 HQR22B225 HQR23B225
QRH2 25
250 HQR22B250 HQR23B250
HQR2 65
Type HQR2Hb HQR2H 100
100 HQR22B100H HQR23B100H
7’’
3’’
2.5 D
3’’
2-pole
4.5’’ 3-pole
n Built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks

for delivery.
a See Note: A page 5-147.
For external accessories, please refer to pages
b HACR rated. 5-154 - 5-159. For internal accessories, please
Note: S
uitable for reverse feed refer to page 5-151 - 5-153.
applications

CQD 100A Frame Selection/Dimensions
Type CQD (Cable In - Cable Out) DIN Rail Mountc Shipping Weights
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Number Number Shipping
Continuous 277V AC 480Y/277V AC of Poles per Carton Weight lbs. (kg)
Current Rating 125V DC 125/250V DC 480Y/277V AC 1 1 0.5 (0)
@ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 1 1.0 (0)
115 CQD115 ab CQD215b CQD315b 3 1 1.5 (1)
120 CQD120 ab CQD220b CQD320b
125 CQD125 b CQD225b CQD325b
130 CQD130 b CQD230b CQD330b
135 CQD135bn CQD235bn CQD335b Lugs For 60/75°C Wire
140 CQD140bn CQD240b CQD340b Amps Wire Size
145 CQD145bn CQD245bn CQD345bn #14–#6 AWG Cu
15–40
150 CQD150bn CQD250b CQD350b #12–#6 AWG Al
160 CQD160n CQD260 CQD360 #8–#1 AWG Cu
45–100
170 CQD170n CQD270 CQD370 #8–#1/0 AWG Al
180 CQD180n CQD280 CQD380
190 CQD190n CQD290n CQD390
100 CQD1100n CQD2100 CQD3100
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (KA)
Breaker Number Volts AC Volts DC
Type of Poles 120 240 277 480/277 600/277 125 125/250
1 65 — 14 — — 14 —
CQD
5
2 — 65 — 14 — — 14
(CSA/UL)
3 — 65 — 14 — — —
CQD
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
CQD
n Built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks for delivery. b HID rated.

c HACR rated. Enclosures page 5-139 – 5-146
a SWD rated. Accessories pages 5-151 - 5-159
Note: S
uitable for reverse feed applications

GG 125A Frame Selection/Dimensions
GG 125A Frame (Cable In - Cable Out)

Current Rating
@ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 NGG1B015La b NGG2B015Lb NGG3B015Lb
20 NGG1B020La b NGG2B020Lb NGG3B020Lb
25 NGG1B025Lb NGG2B025Lb NGG3B025Lb
40 NGG1B040Lb NGG2B040Lb NGG3B040Lb GG
2.9
60 NGG1B060L NGG2B060L NGG3B060L
90 NGG1B090L NGG2B090L NGG3B090L 5.4

Line and load lugs are included as standard. If no lugs are required, remove the “L” suffix.
HACR rated. GG
Suitable for screws or DIN rail mounting.
Type HGG (Cable In - Cable Out) Type LGG (Cable In - Cable Out)
Continuous Continuous
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
5
Current Rating Current Rating

@ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number @ 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
15 HGG1B015Lb HGG2B015Lb HGG3B015Lb 15 LGG1B015Lb LGG2B015Lb LGG3B015Lb
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
20 HGG1B020Lb HGG2B020Lb HGG3B020Lb 20 LGG1B020Lb LGG2B020Lb LGG3B020Lb

25 HGG1B025Lb HGG2B025Lb HGG3B025Lb 25 LGG1B025Lb LGG2B025Lb LGG3B025Lb
60 HGG1B060L HGG2B060L HGG3B060L 60 LGG1B060L LGG2B060L LGG3B060L
Shipping Weights Lugs For 60/75°C Wire

Number Number Shipping NGG
of Poles per Carton Weight lbs. (kg) Ampere Rating Wire Size Catalogue Number
1 1 0.75 (0.34) #14–#6 AWG Cu TC1Q1 (qty. 1)
2 1 1.3 (0.59) 15–30A
#12–#6 AWG Al 3TC1Q1 (qty. 3)
3 1 2.0 (0.98) #8–1/0 AWG Cu
35–125A 3TC1GG20 (qty. 3)
#8–2/0 AWG Al
Nut Keeper plate w/ screw
15–125A TNKG3 (qty. 3)
(for crimp terminals)

CSA 22.2 No. 5 / UL 489 IEC 60947-2 (Ics = 50%Icu)
Breaker Volts AC Volts DC Volts AC Volts DC
Type Poles 120 240 277 347 480 600Y/347 125 125/250 240 415 125/250
1 65 — 25 14 — — 14 — 25 — —
NGG
2,3 — 65 — — 25 14 — 14 65 — 14
1 85 — 35 14 — — 14 — — — —
HGG
2,3 — 85 — — 35 14 — 14 — — —
1 100 — 65 14 — — 14 — — — —
LGG
2,3 — 100 — — 65 14 — 14 — — —
a HID
rated at 15-50A 1-pole @ 277 VAC; 2 & 3-pole @ Enclosures page 5-139 – 5-146
480 VAC Accessories pages 5-151 - 5-159

Shunt Trip
BQD, BQD6, CQD,
NGG, HGG, LGG, NGB,
Control Voltage HGB and LGB
V AC V DC Catalog Number
120 — CQDST120
240 — CQDST240s
277 — CQDST277s
480 — CQDST480s
600 — CQDST600
— 012 CQDST12
— 024 CQDST24
— 048 CQDST48
— 125 CQDST125
Auxiliary Switch
BQD, BQD6, CQD,
Maximum Number NGG, HGG, LGG, NGB,
Voltage of HGB and LGB CQDST120AAS
AC DC Contacts Catalog Number
240 125 1A–1B CQDA1
240 125 2A–2B CQDA2
Alarm Switch
5
BQD, BQD6, CQD,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
NGG, HGG, LGG, NGB,
Maximum Voltage HGB and LGB
AC DC Catalog Number
240 125 CQDBA
Shunt Trip and Auxiliary Switch

Combinations
BQD, BQD6, CQD,
Shunt Trip NGG, HGG, LGG, NGB,
Voltage HGB and LGB
AC DC Catalog Number
24 — CQDST24AASs
120 — CQDST120AASs
CQD with Accessory Installed
— 12 CQDST12DASs
— 24 CQDST24DASs
— 48 CQDST48DASs
— 125 CQDST125DASs
Alarm and Auxiliary Switch

Combinations
For Breaker Catalog Number
BQD, BQD6, CQD, NGG,
HGG, LGG, NGB, HGB CQDA1BAs
and LGB

aAdds 1-pole space for accessory.

3VA CSA / UL Circuit Breakers Catalog Numbering System
Catalogue Numbering Logic

3VA 6 1 40 – 5 HL 3 1 – 0 A A0
Breaker Designation
Breaker Designation
Thermal magnetic panelboard breakers 4
Thermal magnetic (Cable-in Cable-out) breakers 5
Electronic trip breakers 6
Frame Size
125/150A 1
250A 2
400A 3
600A 4
800A 5
1000A 6
Rated Current
3VA41/
3VA52 3VA53 3VA54 3VA55 3VA61 3VA62 3VA63 3VA64 3VA65 3VA66
3VA51
15A 95
20A 200A 200A 20
225A 225A 22
5
25A 250A 250A 250A 250A 25

30
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
30A 300A
35A 350A 35
40A 40A 400A 40A 400A 400A 40
45A 45A 450A 45
50A 50A 500A 50
60A 60A 600A 600A 600A 600A 60
70A 70A 700A 70
80A 80A 800A 800A 80
90A 90A 90
100A 100A 100A 100A 1000A 10
110A 110A 11
125A 125A 12
150A 150A 15
175A 17
Interrupting Capacity @ 600V / 480V

3VA4/3VA5 3VA6
MCP/MCS 100K / 200K 0
MCP/MCS MCP/MCS 1
14K / 25K 4
18K / 35K 18K / 35K 5
25K / 65K 22K / 65K 6
35K / 100K 35K / 100K 7
50K / 150K 8
Trip Unit Protection Functions (see next page for details)
Number of Poles (see next page for details)
Connection Technology (see next page for details)
Regional Specifics (as applicable) (see next page for details)
Auxixliary Releases (see next page for details)
Auxiliary/Alarm Switches (see next page for details)

3VA CSA / UL Circuit Breakers Catalog Numbering System
Catalogue Numbering Logic (cont.) 3VA 6 1 40 – 5 HL 3 1 – 0 A A0
Breaker Designation
(see previous page for details)
Trip Unit Protection Functions

3VA4/3VA5 L I N
TM230 MCCB fix adj EC
TM210 MCCB fix fix ED
TM240 MCCB adj adj EF
TM230 MCCB fix adj 100% GC
TM210 MCCB fix fix 100% GD
TM240 MCCB adj adj 100% GF
TM110M MSP fix MG
TM120M MSP adj MH
TM120M MSP adj MU
MCS110 MSC fix BB
3VA6 L S I G N LCD com. measurement values
ETU320 LI MCCB adj adj 0%/50%/100% HL
ETU330 LIG MCCB adj adj adj 0%/50%/100% HM
ETU350 LSI MCCB adj adj fix 0%/50%/100% HN
ETU550 LSI MCCB adj adj adj 20/40%...100/160% yes yes standard JP
ETU556 LSI(G) MCCB adj adj adj alarm 20/40%...100/160% yes yes standard JT
5
ETU560 LSIG MCCB adj adj adj adj 20/40%...100/160% yes yes standard JQ
ETU820 LI MCCB adj adj 20/40%...100/160% yes yes advanced KL
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ETU830 LIG MCCB adj adj adj 20/40%...100/160% yes yes advanced KM
ETU850LSI MCCB adj adj adj 20/40%...100/160% yes yes advanced KP
ETU856 LSI(G) MCCB adj adj adj alarm 20/40%...100/160% yes yes advanced KT
ETU860 LSIG MCCB adj adj adj adj 20/40%...100/160% yes yes advanced KQ
ETU310M MCP adj MS
MCS110 MCS fix BB
Number of Poles
1 pole 1
2 pole 2
3 pole 3
4 pole 4
1-in-2 pole 5
2-in-3 pole 6
Connection Technology
Blank, punched copper bar without any lugs 1
Nut keeper kit, line and load 2
Nut keeper kit, load end only 3
Aluminum wire connector, load end only 4
Wire connector, line end only 5
Wire connector, line and load 6
Regional Specifics (as applicable)

Standard 0
NAVAL/50C 1
100% Rated (3VA6) 2
Auxiliary Releases Without A
Auxiliary/Alarm Switches Without A0

Ampere (SEAS) (MEAS) (HEAS)
TM210 FTFM
70 3VA5170-4ED11-0AA0 3VA5170-5ED11-0AA0 3VA5170-6ED11-0AA0 3VA51 125A 1-Pole

Ampere (SEAS) (MEAS) (HEAS)
5

TM210 FTFMa
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

60 3VA5160-4ED21-0AA0 3VA5160-5ED21-0AA0 3VA5160-6ED21-0AA0 Ordering Information
80 3VA5180-4ED21-0AA0 3VA5180-5ED21-0AA0 3VA5180-6ED21-0AA0 The catalog numbers listed here are
90 3VA5190-4ED21-0AA0 3VA5190-5ED21-0AA0 3VA5190-6ED21-0AA0 for complete, non-interchangable trip
100 3VA5110-4ED21-0AA0 3VA5110-5ED21-0AA0 3VA5110-6ED21-0AA0 circuit breakers without lugs.
125 3VA5112-4ED21-0AA0 3VA5112-5ED21-0AA0 3VA5112-6ED21-0AA0 Order required lugs or connection
technology separately for field
installation.
Dimensions Shipping Weight All 3VA51 thermal-magnetic trip
circuit breakers are CSA approved
3VA51 1 1 (25.4) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 0.84 0.38
and UL listed for reverse feed
3VA51 2 2 (50.8) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 1.37 0.62
3VA51 3 3 (76.2) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 1.73 0.78 applications.
3VA51 4 4 (101.6) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 2.09 0.95 For NAVAL-rated thermal-magnetic
trip circuit breakers, change the 13th
digit of the catalog number to the
number "1". (For example, a 18kA
@600/347VAC, 40A, 3-pole, NAVAL
rated 3VA51 would be catalog
number 3VA5140-5ED31-1AA0)
a Available with NAVAL/50C ratings.

S-Interrupting Class M-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class
Cont.
(SEAS) (MEAS) (HEAS)
Ampere
TM210 FTFMa
125 3VA5112-4ED31-0AA0 3VA5112-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5112-6ED31-0AA0 The catalog numbers listed here are
TM230 FTAMa for complete, non-interchangable trip
15 3VA5195-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5195-6EC31-0AA0 3VA5195-6EC31-0AA0
circuit breakers without lugs.
25 3VA5125-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5125-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5125-6EC31-0AA0 Order required lugs or connection
30 3VA5130-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5130-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5130-6EC31-0AA0 technology separately for field
5
35 3VA5135-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5135-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5135-6EC31-0AA0 installation.
All 3VA51 thermal-magnetic trip
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
50 3VA5150-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5150-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5150-6EC31-0AA0 circuit breakers are CSA approved
60 3VA5160-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5160-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5160-6EC31-0AA0 and UL listed for reverse feed
70 3VA5170-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5170-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5170-6EC31-0AA0 applications.
For NAVAL-rated thermal-magnetic
125 3VA5112-4EC31-0AA0 3VA5112-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5112-6EC31-0AA0 number "1". (For example, a 18kA
TM240 ATAM @600/347VAC, 40A, 3-pole, NAVAL
15 3VA5195-4EF31-0AA0 3VA5195-5EF31-0AA0 3VA5195-6EF31-0AA0 rated 3VA51 would be catalogue
20 3VA5120-4EF31-0AA0 3VA5120-5EF31-0AA0 3VA5120-6EF31-0AA0 number 3VA5140-5ED31-1AA0)
30 3VA5130-4EF31-0AA0 3VA5130-5EF31-0AA0 3VA5130-6EF31-0AA0

3VA51 1 1 (25.4) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 0.84 0.38
3VA51 2 2 (50.8) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 1.37 0.62
3VA51 3 3 (76.2) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 1.73 0.78
3VA51 4 4 (101.6) 5.5 (140) 3 (76.5) 2.09 0.95

S-Interrupting Class M-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class
Cont.
(SEAS) (MEAS) (HEAS)
Ampere
TM210 FTFM Unprotected Neutral
3VA51 125A 4-Pole
TM210 FTFM 100% Neutral Ordering Information
90 3VA5190-4GD41-0AA0 3VA5190-5GD41-0AA0 3VA5190-6GD41-0AA0
100 3VA5110-4GD41-0AA0 3VA5110-5GD41-0AA0 3VA5110-6GD41-0AA0 The catalog numbers listed here are
110 3VA5111-4GD41-0AA0 3VA5111-5GD41-0AA0 3VA5111-6GD41-0AA0 for complete, non-interchangable trip
125 3VA5112-4GD41-0AA0 3VA5112-5GD41-0AA0 3VA5112-6GD41-0AA0 circuit breakers without lugs.
5
TM230 FTAM Unprotected Neutral

Order required lugs or connection
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

25 3VA5125-4EC41-0AA0 3VA5125-5EC41-0AA0 3VA5125-6EC41-0AA0 installation.
30 3VA5130-4EC41-0AA0 3VA5130-5EC41-0AA0 3VA5130-6EC41-0AA0 All 3VA51 thermal-magnetic trip
applications.
60 3VA5160-4EC41-0AA0 3VA5160-5EC41-0AA0 3VA5160-6EC41-0AA0 For NAVAL-rated thermal-magnetic
70 3VA5170-4EC41-0AA0 3VA5170-5EC41-0AA0 3VA5170-6EC41-0AA0 trip circuit breakers, change the 13th
80 3VA5180-4EC41-0AA0 3VA5180-5EC41-0AA0 3VA5180-6EC41-0AA0 digit of the catalog number to the
90 3VA5190-4EC41-0AA0 3VA5190-5EC41-0AA0 3VA5190-6EC41-0AA0 number "1". (For example, a 18kA
100 3VA5110-4EC41-0AA0 3VA5110-5EC41-0AA0 3VA5110-6EC41-0AA0 @600/347VAC, 40A, 3-pole, NAVAL
rated 3VA51 would be catalogue
TM230 FTFM 100% Neutral
90 3VA5190-4GC41-0AA0 3VA5190-5GC41-0AA0 3VA5190-6GC41-0AA0
TM240 ATAM Unprotected Neutral
TM240 ATAM 100% Neutral
100 3VA5110-4GF41-0AA0 3VA5110-5GF41-0AA0 3VA5110-6GF41-0AA0

3VA51 125A Thermal-magnetic Trip Circuit Breakers Technical information
Interrupting Ratings for 3VA51
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
Interrupting Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
Class Breaker Type 120 240 277 347 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 125 250 500a 600a
1 65 25 14 14
S SEAS
2, 3, 4 65 25 25 14 14 50 50 50
1 85 35 18 25
M MEAS
2, 3, 4 85 35 35 18 25 85 85 85
1 150 50 18 30
H HEAS
2, 3, 4 150 65 65 25 30 100 100 100
a Applies to 3VA51 3-Pole

TM210 - FTFM TM230 - FTAM TM240 - ATAM
In (A) Ir (A) Ii (A) In (A) Ir (A) Ii (A) In (A) Ir (A) Ii (A)
15 15 300 15 15 150 180 210 240 270 300 15 12 150 180 210 240 270 300
20 20 300 20 20 150 180 210 240 270 300 20 16 150 180 210 240 270 300
25 25 300 25 25 150 180 210 240 270 300 30 24 150 180 210 240 270 300
30 30 300 30 30 150 180 210 240 270 300 40 32 200 240 280 320 360 400
35 35 350 35 35 175 210 245 280 315 350 50 40 250 300 350 400 450 500
40 40 400 40 40 200 240 280 320 360 400 60 48 300 360 420 480 540 600
45 45 450 45 45 225 270 315 360 405 450 70 56 350 420 490 560 630 700
50 50 500 50 50 250 300 350 400 450 500 80 64 400 480 560 640 720 800
60 60 600 60 60 300 360 420 480 540 600 100 80 500 600 700 800 900 1000
5
70 70 700 70 70 350 420 490 560 630 700
80 80 800 80 80 400 480 560 640 720 800
90 90 900 90 90 450 540 630 720 810 900
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
100 100 1000 100 100 500 600 700 800 900 1000
110 110 1100 110 110 550 660 770 880 990 1100
125 125 1250 125 125 625 750 875 1000 1125 1250

Min. Max. Internal accessories configuration 3VA4/3VA5
3VA5
cable cable Catalog No. Catalog No. 125 A
125 A
Type size size (kit of 3 lugs) (kit of 4 lugs) 1 in 2-pole
3 & 4-pole
/2-pole
Steel wrap around (Cu AWG
3/0 3VA9133-0JA11 3VA9134-0JA11
cable only), 1 cable lugs 14
Aluminum body lug small AWG AWG
3VA9133-0JB10 3VA9134-0JB10
(Cu/Al cable), 1 cable lug 14 10 Slot No.: 23 22 21 23 22 21 11 12 13
Aluminum body lug (Cu/Al AWG Auxiliary switch Type
3/0 3VA9133-0JB11 3VA9134-0JB11
cable), 1 cable lugs 14
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x x
Aluminum body lug small
AWG AWG AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x x
with control wire tap (Cu/Al 3VA9133-0JG10 3VA9134-0JG10 Auxiliary switch
14 10 x x x
cable), 1 cable lug AUX_HP
Aluminum body lug with x x x
AWG
control wire tap (Cu/Al 3/0 3VA9133-0JG11 3VA9134-0JG11 LCS_HQ x
14 Leading
cable), 1 cable lugs LCS_HQ_el x
changeover switch
Aluminum body lug large (Cu/ LCS_HP x
AWG 300
Al cable), 1 cable lugs with 1 3VA9133-0JJ12 Auxiliary switch Type
4 kcmil
extended terminal cover TAS_HQ x x x x x x
Aluminum body lug large Trip alarm switch TAS_HQ_el x x x x x x
with control wire tap (Cu/Al AWG 300 TAS_HP x x x
3VA9133-0JC12
cable), 1 cable lug and 4 kcmil Short circuit alarm SAS_HQ
1 extended terminal cover switch SAS_HQ_el
Distribution lug, 6 cables (Cu/
AWG AWG Auxiliary switch Type
Al cable), 1 cable lugs with 3VA9133-0JF60 3VA9134-0JF60
14 2 Shunt trip flexible STF x x
1 extended terminal cover
STL x x
Copper body lug small (Cu AWG AWG Shunt trip left
3VA9133-0JD10 3VA9134-0JD10 STL_el
cable only), 1 cable lugs 14 10
Copper body lug (Cu cable AWG
2/0 3VA9133-0JD11 3VA9134-0JD11 Undervoltage release UVR x x
only), 1 cable lugs 14
Universal release UVI x x
Copper body lug small with
AWG AWG Other
control wire tap (Cu cable 3VA9133-0JK10 3VA9134-0JK10
14 10 Cylinder lock (type Ronis) x
only), 1 cable lugs
Copper body lug with
AWG
control wire tap (Cu cable 2/0 3VA9133-0JK11 3VA9134-0JK11
14
only), 1 cable lugs

3VA61 150A Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers Selection
The catalog numbers listed below are for complete, non-interchangable
trip circuit breakers without lugs.
Order required lugs or connection technology separately for field installation.
All 3VA61 electronict trip circuit breakers are CSA approved and UL listed for
reverse feed applications.
All 3VA61 electronic trip circuit breakers are available with 100% ratings.
For 100% rated electronic trip circuit breakers, change the 13th digit of the
catalog number to the number "2". (For example, a 18kA @600VAC, 40A,
3-pole, 100% rated 3VA61 would be catalog number 3VA6140-5HL31-2AA0)
Requires the use of copper lugs — see lug table below.
All 3VA6 circuit breakers are certified to CSA C22.2 No. 5, and UL 489
3VA61 150A 3-Pole
Supplement SB, are marked “Naval”, and are suitable for use at 50C.
3VA61 150A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit

Continuous M-Interrupting Class (MDAE) H-Interrupting Class (HDAE) C-Interrupting Class (CDAE) L-Interrupting Class (LDAE) E-Interrupting Class (EDAE)
Ampere Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
ETU320 LI with dials
40 3VA6140-5HL31-0AA0 3VA6140-6HL31-0AA0 3VA6140-7HL31-0AA0 3VA6140-8HL31-0AA0 3VA6160-0HL31-0AA0a
100 3VA6110-5HL31-0AA0 3VA6110-6HL31-0AA0 3VA6110-7HL31-0AA0 3VA6110-8HL31-0AA0 3VA6110-0HL31-0AA0
5
ETU330 LIG with dials

40 3VA6140-5HM31-0AA0 3VA6140-6HM31-0AA0 3VA6140-7HM31-0AA0 3VA6140-8HM31-0AA0 3VA6160-0HM31-0AA0a
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
100 3VA6110-5HM31-0AA0 3VA6110-6HM31-0AA0 3VA6110-7HM31-0AA0 3VA6110-8HM31-0AA0 3VA6110-0HM31-0AA0

ETU350 LSI with dials
40 3VA6140-5HN31-0AA0 3VA6140-6HN31-0AA0 3VA6140-7HN31-0AA0 3VA6140-8HN31-0AA0 3VA6160-0HN31-0AA0a
100 3VA6110-5HN31-0AA0 3VA6110-6HN31-0AA0 3VA6110-7HN31-0AA0 3VA6110-8HN31-0AA0 3VA6110-0HN31-0AA0
ETU550 LSI with LCD
40 3VA6140-5JP31-0AA0 3VA6140-6JP31-0AA0 3VA6140-7JP31-0AA0 3VA6140-8JP31-0AA0 —
ETU556 LSI(G Alarm) with LCD
40 3VA6140-5JT31-0AA0 3VA6140-6JT31-0AA0 3VA6140-7JT31-0AA0 3VA6140-8JT31-0AA0 —
ETU560 LSIG with LCD
40 3VA6140-5JQ31-0AA0 3VA6140-6JQ31-0AA0 3VA6140-7JQ31-0AA0 3VA6140-8JQ31-0AA0 —
ETU820 LI LCD with Metering
40 3VA6140-5KL31-0AA0 3VA6140-6KL31-0AA0 3VA6140-7KL31-0AA0 3VA6140-8KL31-0AA0 —
ETU830 LIG with LCD and Metering
40 3VA6140-5KM31-0AA0 3VA6140-6KM31-0AA0 3VA6140-7KM31-0AA0 3VA6140-8KM31-0AA0 —
ETU850 LSI with LCD and Metering
40 3VA6140-5KP31-0AA0 3VA6140-6KP31-0AA0 3VA6140-7KP31-0AA0 3VA6140-8KP31-0AA0 —
ETU856 LSI(G Alarm) with LCD and Metering
40 3VA6140-5KT31-0AA0 3VA6140-6KT31-0AA0 3VA6140-7KT31-0AA0 3VA6140-8KT31-0AA0 3VA6160-0KT31-0AA0a
100 3VA6110-5KT31-0AA0 3VA6110-6KT31-0AA0 3VA6110-7KT31-0AA0 3VA6110-8KT31-0AA0 3VA6110-0KT31-0AA0
ETU860 LSIG with LCD and Metering
40 3VA6140-5KQ31-0AA0 3VA6140-6KQ31-0AA0 3VA6140-7KQ31-0AA0 3VA6140-8KQ31-0AA0 3VA6160-0KQ31-0AA0a
100 3VA6110-5KQ31-0AA0 3VA6110-6KQ31-0AA0 3VA6110-7KQ31-0AA0 3VA6110-8KQ31-0AA0 3VA6110-0KQ31-0AA0
a The lowest amperage trip unit available for the EDAE class breakers is 60 amps.

3VA61 150A 4-Pole All 3VA6 circuit breakers are certified to CSA C22.2 No 5, and UL 489 listed
Supplement SB, are marked “Naval”, and are suitable for use at 50C.

Continuous M-Interrupting Class (MDAE) H-Interrupting Class (HDAE) C-Interrupting Class (CDAE) L-Interrupting Class (LDAE) E-Interrupting Class (EDAE)
40 3VA6140-5HL41-0AA0 3VA6140-6HL41-0AA0 3VA6140-7HL41-0AA0 3VA6140-8HL41-0AA0 3VA6160-0HL41-0AA0a
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
40 3VA6140-5HM41-0AA0 3VA6140-6HM41-0AA0 3VA6140-7HM41-0AA0 3VA6140-8HM41-0AA0 3VA6160-0HM41-0AA0a
40 3VA6140-5HN41-0AA0 3VA6140-6HN41-0AA0 3VA6140-7HN41-0AA0 3VA6140-8HN41-0AA0 3VA6160-0HN41-0AA0a
ETU550 LSI with LCD
ETU820 LI LCD with Metering
40 3VA6140-5KT41-0AA0 3VA6140-6KT41-0AA0 3VA6140-7KT41-0AA0 3VA6140-8KT41-0AA0 3VA6160-0KT41-0AA0 a
40 3VA6140-5KQ41-0AA0 3VA6140-6KQ41-0AA0 3VA6140-7KQ41-0AA0 3VA6140-8KQ41-0AA0 3VA6160-0KQ41-0AA0a
a The lowest amperage trip unit available for the EDAE class breakers is 60 amps.

3VA61 150A Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers Technical information
Connectors for 75C wire for 3VA61
Minimum Maximum Part Number Part Number
Type cable size cable size (kit of 3 lugs) (kit of 4 lugs)
Steel Wrap around (Cu cable only) AWG 10 3/0 3VA9143-0JA12 3VA9144-0JA12
single cable lugs AWG 4 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JA12 3VA9244-0JA12
Aluminum Body Lug (Cu/Al cable) AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JB11 3VA9144-0JB11
single cable lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JB12 3VA9244-0JB12
Aluminum body lug with control wire tap AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JG11 3VA9144-0JG11
(Cu/Al cable) single cable lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JG12 3VA9244-0JG12
Aluminum body lug large (Cu/Al cable)
AWG 2 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JJ13 3VA9244-0JJ13
single cable lugs and 1 ext’d terminal cover
Aluminum body lug large with control wire tap
(Cu/Al cable) single cable lugs and AWG 2 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JC13 3VA9244-0JC13
Aluminum body lug, 2 cables (Cu/Al cable)
with 1 extended terminal cover
AWG 4 300 kcmil 3VA9243-0JC22 3VA9244-0JC22
with control wire tap and 1 extended terminal cover
Distribution lug, 6 Cables (Cu/Al cable) with
AWG 14 AWG 2 3VA9243-0JF60 3VA9244-0JF60
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) single cable lugs AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JD11 3VA9144-0JD11
kit of 3 single lugs (meets requirements for
100% rated breakers) AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JD12 3VA9244-0JD12
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) with control AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JK11 3VA9144-0JK11
wire tap single cable lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JK12 3VA9244-0JK12

5

Interrupting Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Class Type 240 480Y/277V 480 600

M MDAE 100 35 35 18
H HDAE 100 65 65 22
C CDAE 200 100 100 35
L LDAE 200 150 150 50
E EDAE — 200 200 100

3VA61 3 4.1 (105) 7.8 (198) 3.4 (86) 5.5 2.5
3VA61 4 5.5 (140) 7.8 (198) 3.4 (86) 7.1 3.2

ETU320-LI, ETU330-LIG, ETU350-LSI
Continuous LI, LIG, LSI
Amperage LI, LIG, LSI LSI LIG 4P only
Isd= xIr (Amp)
In (Amp) Ir(Amp) (L) tld (sec) (L) Ii (Amp) (I)a (S) tsd (sec) (S) Ig (Amp) (G) IN=xIr (Amp)
40 15 - 40 0.5 - 17 60-480 1.5 - 10 0.08 - 0.4 15 - 40 1 / OFF
100 40 - 100 0.5 - 17 150-1200 1.5 - 10 20 - 100 0.5 - 1 / OFF
150 60 - 150 0.5 - 17 225-1500 1.5 - 10 30 - 150 0.5 - 1 / OFF
a Ii for ETU350 is fixed at 12X In
ETU550-LSI, ETU556 LSI(A), ETU560-LSIG, ETU820-LI, ETU830-LIG, ETU850-LSI, ETU856 LSI(A), ETU860-LSIG
Continuous LSI 3P with LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG,
Amperage LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG, LSI(G) LSI, LSIG, LSI(G) LIG, LSIG, LSI(G) External CT LSI(G) 4P only
In (Amp) Ir(Amp) (L) tld (sec) (L) Ii (Amp) (I) Isd (Amp) (S) tsd (sec) (S) Ig (Amp) (G) tg (G) IN=xIr (Amp) IN (Amp)
40 15 - 40 0.5 - 25 60-480 24 - 400 0.05 - 0.5 15 - 40 0.05 - 0.8 15 - 64 / OFF 15 - 64 / OFF
100 40 - 100 0.5 - 25 150-1200 60 - 1000 20 - 100 20 - 160 / OFF 20 - 150 / OFF
150 60 - 150 0.5 - 20 225-1500 90 - 1500 30 - 150 30 - 240 / OFF 30 - 150 / OFF
For specific trip settings refer to the Electronic Trip Unit section of the 3VA Systems Manual,
which can be found in the document download center at https://www.siemens.com/download?BTLV_50412.
Internal accessories
3VA6 3VA6
Optional equipment
150/250 A 150/250 A
3-pole 4-pole
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Slot No.: 24 23 24 21 11 12 13 14 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14
Auxiliary switch Type
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Auxiliary switch
x x x x x x x x
AUX_HP
x x x x
LCS_HQ x x
Leading changeover switch LCS_HQ_el x x
LCS_HP x x
TAS_HQ x x x x x x x x
Trip alarm switch TAS_HQ_el x x x x x x x x
TAS_HP x x x x
EAS_HQ x x
Electrical alarm switch
EAS_HQ_el x x
Shunt trip flexible STF x x x x
Shunt trip left STL x x
Undervoltage release UVR x x
ETU/communication Type
Communication module COM060
x x
Breaker data server
24 V module x x
Other
Cylinder lock (type Ronis) x x
See page 5-72 for internal accessory

part numbers.

3VA52 250 A Frame, 2-(3)Pole Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Cont. M-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class C-Interrupting Class
Ampere (MFAS) (HFAS) (CFAS)
Rating Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
TM210 FTFM
TM230 FTAM
70 3VA5270-5EC61-0AA0 3VA5270-6EC61-0AA0 3VA5270-7EC61-0AA0 The catalog numbers listed here are
80 3VA5280-5EC61-0AA0 3VA5280-6EC61-0AA0 3VA5280-7EC61-0AA0 for complete, non-interchangable trip
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

installation.
175 3VA5217-5EC61-0AA0 3VA5217-6EC61-0AA0 3VA5217-7EC61-0AA0 All 3VA52 thermal-magnetic trip
225 3VA5222-5EC61-0AA0 3VA5222-6EC61-0AA0 3VA5222-7EC61-0AA0 / UL listed for reverse feed
250 3VA5225-5EC61-0AA0 3VA5225-6EC61-0AA0 3VA5225-7EC61-0AA0 applications.
For NAVAL rated thermal-magnetic
Dimensions Shipping Weight trip circuit breakers, change the 13th
Breaker Poles W in. (mm) H in. (mm) D in. (mm) lbs. kg digit of the catalog number to the
3VA52 2(3-) pole 4.1 (105) 7.3 (185) 3.3 (83) 4.1 1.9 number "1". (For example, a 18kA
3VA52 3-pole 4.1 (105) 7.3 (185) 3.3 (83) 4.5 2.1 @600VAC, 150A, 3-pole, NAVAL
rated 3VA52 would be catalog

3VA52 250 A Frame, 3-Pole Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
M-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class C-Interrupting Class
Cont.
(MFAS) (HFAS) (CFAS) Ordering Information
Ampere
Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number The catalog numbers listed here are
TM210 FTFMa for complete, non-interchangable trip
40 3VA5240-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5240-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5240-7ED31-0AA0 circuit breakers without lugs.
50 3VA5250-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5250-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5250-7ED31-0AA0 Order required lugs or connection
60 3VA5260-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5260-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5260-7ED31-0AA0 technology separately for field
70 3VA5270-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5270-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5270-7ED31-0AA0 installation.
80 3VA5280-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5280-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5280-7ED31-0AA0 All 3VA52 thermal-magnetic trip
90 3VA5290-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5290-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5290-7ED31-0AA0 circuit breakers are CSA approved
100 3VA5210-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5210-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5210-7ED31-0AA0 / UL listed for reverse feed
110 3VA5211-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5211-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5211-7ED31-0AA0 applications.
200 3VA5220-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5220-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5220-7ED31-0AA0 digit of the catalog number to the
225 3VA5222-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5222-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5222-7ED31-0AA0 number "1". (For example, a 18kA
250 3VA5225-5ED31-0AA0 3VA5225-6ED31-0AA0 3VA5225-7ED31-0AA0 @600VAC, 150A, 3-pole, NAVAL
TM230 FTAMa rated 3VA52 would be catalog
70 3VA5270-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5270-6EC31-0AA0 3VA5270-7EC31-0AA0 number 3VA5215-5ED31-1AA0)
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
TM240 ATAM

3VA52 2(3-) pole 4.1 (105) 7.3 (185) 3.3 (83) 4.1 1.9
3VA52 3-pole 4.1 (105) 7.3 (185) 3.3 (83) 4.5 2.1

3VA52 250A Frame, 4-pole Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Ampere (MFAS) (HFAS) (CFAS)
TM210 FTFM
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
TM230 FTAM
TM230 FTAM 100% Neutral
TM240 ATAM

3VA52 250A Thermal-magnetic Trip Circuit Breakers Technical information
Interrupting Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
Class Type 240 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 600 250 500 600 (3P)
M MFAS 85 35 35 18 18 50 50 50
H HFAS 100 65 65 25 25 85 85 85
C CFAS 200 100 100 35 35 100 100 100

TM210 - FTFM TM230 - FTAM
In (A) Ir (A) Ii (A) In (A) Ir (A) Ii (A)
100 100 1000 100 100 500 600 700 800 900 1000
110 110 1100 110 110 550 660 770 880 990 1100
125 125 1250 125 125 625 750 875 1000 1125 1125
150 150 1500 150 150 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500
175 175 1750 175 175 875 1050 1225 1400 1575 1750
200 200 2000 200 200 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
225 225 2250 225 225 1125 1350 1575 1800 2025 2250
250 250 2500 250 250 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500

Minimum Maximum Part Number Internal accessories
3VA5
Type cable size cable size (kit of 3 lugs) Optional equipment
250 A
5
Steel wrap around 2(3)-pole & 3-pole
AWG 10 3/0 3VA9233-0JA11
(Cu cable only),
single cable lugs AWG 4 350 kcmil 3VA9233-0JA12
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Aluminum body lug
(Cu/Al cable), AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9233-0JB12 Slot No.: 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14
single cable lugs Auxiliary switch Type
Aluminum body lug AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x
(Cu/Al cable) with control AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9233-0JG12 AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x
wire tap, single cable lugs Auxiliary switch
x x x x
Aluminum body lug large AUX_HP
x x
(Cu/Al cable) single cable
AWG 2 350 kcmil 3VA9233-0JJ13 LCS_HQ x
lugs with 1 extended
terminal cover Leading changeover switch LCS_HQ_el x
LCS_HP x
Aluminum body lug large
with control wire tap Auxiliary switch Type
(Cu/Al cable) single cable AWG 2 350 kcmil 3VA9233-0JC13 TAS_HQ x x x x
lugs and 1 extended Trip alarm switch TAS_HQ_el x x x x
terminal cover TAS_HP x x
Aluminum body lug, Auxiliary switch Type
2 cables (Cu/Al cable) Shunt trip flexible STF x
AWG 4 300 kcmil 3VA9233-0JJ22
with control wire tap and Shunt trip left STL x
1 extended terminal cover Undervoltage release UVR x
Distribution lug, 6 Cables Universal release UVI x
(Cu/Al cable) with 1 AWG 14 AWG 2 3VA9233-0JF60 Other
extended terminal cover Cylinder lock (type Ronis) x
Copper body lug
(Cu cable only) AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9233-0JD12
single cable lugs
Copper body lug with
control wire tap (Cu cable AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9233-0JK12
only) single cable lugs

part numbers.

All 3VA62 electronic trip circuit breakers are CSA approved and UL listed for reverse
feed applications.
3VA62 250A 3-Pole All 3VA6 circuit breakers are certified to CSA C22.2 No 5, and UL 489 Supplement
SB, are marked “Naval”, and are suitable for use at 50C.

M-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class C-Interrupting Class L-Interrupting Class E-Interrupting Class
(MFAE-Y) (HFAE-Y) (CFAE-Y) (LFAE-Y) (EFAE)
Continuous
Ampere Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalog Number
5

100 3VA6210-5HL31-0AA0 3VA6210-6HL31-0AA0 3VA6210-7HL31-0AA0 3VA6210-8HL31-0AA0 —
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

100 3VA6210-5HM31-0AA0 3VA6210-6HM31-0AA0 3VA6210-7HM31-0AA0 3VA6210-8HM31-0AA0 —
100 3VA6210-5HN31-0AA0 3VA6210-6HN31-0AA0 3VA6210-7HN31-0AA0 3VA6210-8HN31-0AA0 —
ETU550 LSI with LCD
ETU820 LI with LCD and Metering
100 3VA6210-5KT31-0AA0 3VA6210-6KT31-0AA0 3VA6210-7KT31-0AA0 3VA6210-8KT31-0AA0 —
100 3VA6210-5KQ31-0AA0 3VA6210-6KQ31-0AA0 3VA6210-7KQ31-0AA0 3VA6210-8KQ31-0AA0 —


(MFAE-Y) (HFAE-Y) (CFAE-Y) (LFAE-Y) (EFAE)
Continuous
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ETU550 LSI with LCD

Steel Wrap around (Cu cable only) AWG 10 3/0 3VA9143-0JA12 3VA9144-0JA12
single cable lugs AWG 4 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JA12 3VA9244-0JA12
Aluminum Body Lug (Cu/Al cable) AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JB11 3VA9144-0JB11
single cable lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JB12 3VA9244-0JB12
Aluminum body lug with control wire tap AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JG11 3VA9144-0JG11
(Cu/Al cable) single cable lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JG12 3VA9244-0JG12
Aluminum body lug large (Cu/Al cable)
single cable lugs and 1 ext’d terminal cover
Aluminum body lug large with control wire tap
(Cu/Al cable) single cable lugs and AWG 2 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JC13 3VA9244-0JC13
with 1 extended terminal cover
Aluminum body lug, 2 cables (Cu/Al cable) with
AWG 4 300 kcmil 3VA9243-0JC22 3VA9244-0JC22
control wire tap and 1 extended terminal cover
AWG 14 AWG 2 3VA9243-0JF60 3VA9244-0JF60
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) single cable lugs AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JD11 3VA9144-0JD11
(meets requirements for 100% rated breakers) AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JD12 3VA9244-0JD12
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) with control AWG 14 1/0 3VA9143-0JK11 3VA9144-0JK11
wire tap single cable lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil 3VA9243-0JK12 3VA9244-0JK12

5

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Interrupting Breaker
Class Type 240 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 600
M MFAE-Y 100 35 35 18 —
H HFAE-Y 100 65 65 22 —
C CFAE-Y 200 100 100 35 —
L LFAE-Y 200 150 150 50 —
E EFAE-Y — 200 200 100 —

3VA62 3 4.1 (105) 7.8 (198) 3.4 (86) 5.5 2.5
3VA62 4 5.5 (140) 7.8 (198) 3.4 (86) 7.1 3.2

Isd= xIr (Amp)
100 40 - 100 0.5 - 17 150-1200 1.5 - 10 20 - 100 0.5 - 1 / OFF
0.08 - 0.4
250 100 - 250 0.5 - 13 375-2500 1.5 - 10 50 - 250 0.5 - 1 / OFF
100 40 - 100 0.5 - 25 150-1200 60 - 1000 20 - 100 20 - 160 / OFF 20 - 160 / OFF
0.05 - 0.5 0.05 - 0.8
250 100 - 250 0.5 - 13 375-2500 150 - 2500 50 - 250 50 - 400 / OFF 50 - 250 / OFF
which can be found in the document download center at https://www.siemens.com/download?BTLV_50412
3VA6 3VA6
Optional equipment
150/250 A 150/250 A
3-pole 4-pole
5
Slot No.: 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Auxiliary switch
x x x x x x x x
AUX_HP
x x x x
LCS_HQ x x
LCS_HP x x
TAS_HP x x x x
EAS_HQ x x
EAS_HQ_el x x
x x
Breaker data server
24 V module x x
Other

part numbers.

3VA53 400A Frame, 2-(3)Pole Frame,
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Ampere (MJAS) (HJAS) (CJAS)
TM230 FTAM
3VA53 400A Frame, 3-Pole Frame,

Ampere (MJAS) (HJAS) (CJAS)
TM230 FTAMa
200 3VA5320-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5320-6EC31-0AA0 3VA5320-7EC31-0AA0 3VA53 400A 3-Pole
350 3VA5335-5EC31-0AA0 3VA5335-6EC31-0AA0 3VA5335-7EC31-0AA0 Ordering Information
5
TM240 ATAM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

250 3VA5325-5EF31-0AA0 3VA5325-6EF31-0AA0 3VA5325-7EF31-0AA0 Order required lugs or connection
300 3VA5330-5EF31-0AA0 3VA5330-6EF31-0AA0 3VA5330-7EF31-0AA0 technology separately for field
installation.
Dimensions Shipping Weight and UL listed for reverse feed
Breaker Poles W in. (mm) H in. (mm) D in. (mm) lbs. kg applications.
3VA53 3 6.4 (162) 10.3 (262) 6.7 (170) 11.5 5.2
3VA53 4 8.2 (208) 10.3 (262) 6.7 (170) 15.0 6.8 For NAVAL rated thermal-magnetic
Interrupting Ratings for 3VA53 number "1". (For example, a 18kA
@600VAC, 400A, 3-pole, rated 3VA53
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC would be catalog number 3VA5340-
5EC31-1AA0)
Interrupting Breaker 480Y/ 600Y/ 250 600 750 750 1000
Class Type 240 277V 480 347V 600 (2P) (3P) (3P) (4P) (4P)
M MJAS 65 35 35 18 18 50 50 6 50 6
H HJAS 100 65 65 25 25 85 85 6 85 6
C CJAS 200 100 100 35 35 100 100 10 100 10

Cont. (MJAS) (HJAS) (CJAS)
Ampere
TM230 FTAM 100% Neutral 3VA53 400A 4-Pole
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
200 3VA5320-5GF41-0AA0 3VA5320-6GF41-0AA0 3VA5320-7GF41-0AA0 Internal accessories
3VA5
Optional equipment
225 3VA5322-5GF41-0AA0 3VA5322-6GF41-0AA0 3VA5322-7GF41-0AA0 400/600 A
250 3VA5325-5GF41-0AA0 3VA5325-6GF41-0AA0 3VA5325-7GF41-0AA0 3 & 4-pole

400 3VA5340-5GF41-0AA0 3VA5340-6GF41-0AA0 3VA5340-7GF41-0AA0 Slot No.: 25 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14 15
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x x x
Dimensions Shipping Weight Auxiliary switch
AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x x x
Breaker Poles W in. (mm) H in. (mm) D in. (mm) lbs. kg x x x x
AUX_HP
3VA53 3 6.4 (162) 10.3 (262) 6.7 (170) 11.5 5.2 x x x x
3VA53 4 8.2 (208) 10.3 (262) 6.7 (170) 15.0 6.8 LCS_HQ x
Leading
LCS_HQ_el x
changeover switch
LCS_HP x
Interrupting Ratings for 3VA53 Trip alarm switch
TAS_HQ
TAS_HQ_el
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA) TAS_HP x x
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Auxiliary switch Type
Shunt trip flexible STF x x
Interrupting Breaker 480Y/ 600Y/ 600
Shunt trip left STL x
Class Type 240 277V 480 347V 600 250 500 (3P)
Undervoltage release UVR x
M MJAS 65 35 35 18 18 50 50 50 Universal release UVI x
H HJAS 100 65 65 25 25 85 85 85 Other
C CJAS 200 100 100 35 35 100 100 100 Cylinder lock (type Ronis) x

3VA63 electronic trip circuit breakers are available with 100% ratings (250A only).

(MJAE) (HJAE) (CJAE) (LJAE) (EJAE)
Continuous
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

ETU550 LSI with LCD


(MJAE) (HJAE) (CJAE) (LJAE) (EJAE)
Continuous
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ETU550 LSI with LCD

Steel wrap around (Cu cable only)
1/0 500 kcmil 3VA9473-0JA13 3VA9474-0JA13
single cable lugs
Aluminum body lug (Cu/Al cable)
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JB13 3VA9374-0JB13
single cable lugs
Aluminum body lug with control wire tap
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JG13 3VA9374-0JG13
(Cu/Al cable) single cable lugs
2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JJ23 3VA9474-0JJ23
2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JC23 3VA9474-0JC23
AWG 14 AWG 2 3VA9373-0JF60 3VA9374-0JF60
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) single cable lugs
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JD13 3VA9374-0JD13
(meets requirements for 100% rated breakers)
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) with
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JK13 3VA9374-0JK13
control wire tap single cable lugs
Copper body lug, 2 cables (Cu cable only) with
1 extended terminal cover (meets requirements for 2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JE23 3VA9474-0JE23
100% rated breakers)
Copper body lug, 2 cables (Cu cable only) with control
2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JL23 3VA9474-0JL23
wire tap and 1 extended terminal cover

5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Class Type 240 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 600

M MJAE 100 35 35 18 18
H HJAE 100 65 65 22 22
C CJAE 200 100 100 35 35
L LJAE 200 150 150 50 50
E EJAE — 200 200 100 100

3VA63 3 5.4 (138) 9.7 (248) 4.3 (110) 9.9 4.5
3VA63 4 7.2 (184) 9.7 (248) 4.3 (110) 15.2 6.9

Isd= xIr (Amp)
250 100 - 250 0.5 - 17 375-3000 1.5 - 10 50 - 250 0.5 - 1 / OFF
0.08 - 0.4
400 150 - 400 0.5 - 17 600-4000 1.5 - 10 80 - 400 0.5 - 1 / OFF
250 100 - 250 0.5 - 25 375-3000 150 - 2500 50 - 250 50 - 400 / OFF 50 - 400 / OFF
0.05 - 0.5 0.05 - 0.8
400 150 - 400 0.5 - 17 600-4000 240 - 4000 80 - 400 80 - 640 / OFF 80 - 400 / OFF
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

3VA54 600A Frame, 2-(3)Pole Frame,
Ampere (MLAS) (HLAS) (CLAS)
TM230 FTAM
450 — 3VA5445-6EC61-0AA0 3VA5445-7EC61-0AA0

TM230 FTAMa
TM240 ATAM 3VA54 600A 3-Pole

5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Cont.
500 3VA5450-5GC41-0AA0 3VA5450-6GC41-0AA0 3VA5450-7GC41-0AA0 3VA54 600A 3-Pole
600 3VA5460-5GF41-0AA0 3VA5460-6GF41-0AA0 3VA5460-7GF41-0AA0 The catalog numbers listed here are
installation.
applications.
number "1". (For example,a 18kA
a Available with NAVAL/50C ratings. @600VAC, 600A, 3-pole, rated 3VA54
would be catalog number 3VA5460-
5EC31-1AA0)

3VA54 3 6.4 (162) 10.3 (262) 6.7 (170) 11.5 5.2
3VA54 4 8.2 (208) 10.3 (262) 6.7 (170) 15.0 6.8

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
Interrupting Breaker 480Y/ 600Y/ 250 600 750 750 1000
M MLAS 65 35 35 20 20 50 50 6 50 6
H HLAS 100 65 65 25 25 85 85 6 85 6
C CLAS 200 100 100 35 35 100 100 10 100 10
3VA5
Optional equipment
400/600 A
3 & 4-pole
Slot No.: 25 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14 15
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x x x
5
AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x x x
Auxiliary switch
x x x x
AUX_HP
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
x x x x
LCS_HQ x
Leading
LCS_HQ_el x
changeover switch
LCS_HP x
TAS_HQ x x x x
Trip alarm switch TAS_HQ_el x x x x
TAS_HP x x
Shunt trip flexible STF x x
Shunt trip left STL x
Universal release UVI x
Other
Cylinder lock (type Ronis) x

All 3VA64 electronict trip circuit breakers are CSA approved and UL listedfor reverse
feed applications.

(MLAE) (HLAE) (CLAE) (LLAE) (ELAE)
Continuous
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

ETU550 LSI with LCD

All 3VA64 electronict trip circuit breakers are CSA approved and UL listed for reverse
feed applications.

(MLAE) (HLAE) (CLAE) (LLAE) (ELAE)
Continuous
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ETU550 LSI with LCD

Steel Wrap around (Cu cable only)
1/0 500 kcmil 3VA9473-0JA13 3VA9474-0JA13
single cable lugs
Aluminum Body Lug (Cu/Al cable)
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JB13 3VA9374-0JB13
single cable lugs
Aluminum body lug with control wire tap
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JG13 3VA9374-0JG13
(Cu/Al cable) single cable lugs
2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JJ23 3VA9474-0JJ23
2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JC23 3VA9474-0JC23
AWG 14 AWG 2 3VA9373-0JF60 3VA9374-0JF60
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) single cable lugs
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JD13 3VA9374-0JD13
(meets requirements for 100% rated breakers)
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) with
AWG 1 600 kcmil 3VA9373-0JK13 3VA9374-0JK13
control wire tap single cable lugs
Copper body lug, 2 cables (Cu cable only) with
1 extended terminal cover (meets requirements for 2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JE23 3VA9474-0JE23
100% rated breakers)
Copper body lug, 2 cables (Cu cable only)
2/0 600 kcmil 3VA9473-0JL23 3VA9474-0JL23
with control wire tap and 1 extended terminal cover

5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Class Type 240 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 600

M MLAE 100 35 35 18 18
H HLAE 100 65 65 22 22
C CLAE 200 100 100 35 35
L LLAE 200 150 150 50 50
E ELAE — 200 200 100 100

3VA64 3 5.4 (138) 9.7 (248) 4.3 (110) 11.7 5.3
3VA64 4 7.2 (184) 9.7 (248) 4.3 (110) 15.2 6.9

Isd= xIr (Amp)
400 150 - 400 0.5 - 17 600-4800 1.5 - 10 80 - 400 0.5 - 1 / OFF
0.08 - 0.4
600 250 - 600 0.5 - 15 900-5400 1.5 - 9 120 - 600 0.5 - 1 / OFF
400 150 - 400 0.5 - 25 600-4800 240 - 4000 80 - 400 80 - 640 / OFF 80 - 600 / OFF
0.05 - 0.5 0.05 - 0.8
600 250 - 600 0.5 - 15 900-5400 360 - 5400 120 - 600 120 - 960 / OFF 120 - 600 / OFF
3VA6 3VA6
Optional equipment
400/600 A 400/600 A
3-pole 4-pole
5
Slot No.: 25 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14 15 35 34 33 32 31 25 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14 15
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Auxiliary switch
x x x x x x x x x x
AUX_HP
x x x x x x x x x x
LCS_HQ x x
LCS_HP x x
TAS_HP x x x x
EAS_HQ x x
EAS_HQ_el x x
x x
Breaker data server
24 V module x x
Other

part numbers.

3VA55 800A, 2-pole in 3-pole Frame, Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Ampere (MMAS) (HMAS) (CMAS)
TM230 FTAM
3VA55 800A, 3-pole Frame, Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

TM230 FTAM
3VA55 800A 3-Pole

3VA55 800A, 4-pole Frame, Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

TM230 FTAM 100% Neutral

3VA55 2(3) 8.3 (210) 12.5 (318) 5.8 (147) 29.3 13.3
3VA55 3 8.3 (210) 12.5 (318) 5.8 (147) 29.4 13.4
3VA55 4 11.1 (280) 12.5 (318) 5.8 (147) 37.4 17.0
3VA55 800A 4-Pole

RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA) Ordering Information
Interrupting Breaker 480Y/ 600Y/ 250 600 750 750 1000 for complete, non-interchangable trip
circuit breakers with nut keepers on
M MMAS 85 35 35 18 18 50 50 50 50 18
H HMAS 100 65 65 25 25 85 85 85 85 25
both line and load ends.
C CMAS 200 100 100 50 50 100 100 100 100 50 Order required lugs or connection
Trip Settings for 3VA55 installation.
TM230 - FTAM All 3VA55 thermal-magnetic trip
In (Amp) Ir(Amp) Ii (Amp) circuit breakers are UL listed for
600 600 3000 3600 4200 4800 5400 6000 reverse feed applications.
700 700 3500 4200 4900 5600 6300 7000
800 800 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000 For NAVAL rated (3-pole only) thermal-
magnetic trip circuit breakers, change
TM240 - ATAM
the 13th digit of the catalog number
In (Amp) Ir(Amp) Ii (Amp)
to the number "1". (For example, a
600 480 3000 3600 4200 4800 5400 6000
700 560 3500 4200 4900 5600 6300 7000 18KA@600V, 600A, 3-pole, rated
800 640 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000 3VA55 would be catalog number
3VA5580-5EC32-1AA0)

trip circuit breakers with nut keepers on both line and load ends.
All 3VA65 electronic trip circuit breakers are UL listed for reverse feed applications.
3VA65 electronic trip circuit breakers are available with 100% ratings.
catalog number to the number "2". (For example, a 25KA@600V, 600A,
All 3VA6 circuit breakers are certified to UL 489 Supplement SB, are marked
3VA65 800A 3-Pole “Naval”, and are suitable for use at 50C.
3VA65 800A, 3-pole Frame, Electronic Trip Unit

Continuous (MMAE) (HMAE) (CMAE)
Ampere Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
600 3VA6560-5HL32-0AA0 3VA6560-6HL32-0AA0 3VA6560-7HL32-0AA0
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
600 3VA6560-5HM32-0AA0 3VA6560-6HM32-0AA0 3VA6560-7HM32-0AA0
600 3VA6560-5HN32-0AA0 3VA6560-6HN32-0AA0 3VA6560-7HN32-0AA0
ETU550 LSI with LCD
600 3VA6560-5JP32-0AA0 3VA6560-6JP32-0AA0 3VA6560-7JP32-0AA0
600 3VA6560-5JT32-0AA0 3VA6560-6JT32-0AA0 3VA6560-7JT32-0AA0
600 3VA6560-5JQ32-0AA0 3VA6560-6JQ32-0AA0 3VA6560-7JQ32-0AA0
600 3VA6560-5KL32-0AA0 3VA6560-6KL32-0AA0 3VA6560-7KL32-0AA0
600 3VA6560-5KT32-0AA0 3VA6560-6KT32-0AA0 3VA6560-7KT32-0AA0
600 3VA6560-5KQ32-0AA0 3VA6560-6KQ32-0AA0 3VA6560-7KQ32-0AA0


Class Type 240 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 600
M MMAE 100 35 35 25 25
H HMAE 150 65 65 35 35
C CMAE 200 100 100 50 50

3VA65 3 8.3 (210) 12.5 (318) 5.8 (147) 29.4 13.4
3VA65 4 11.1 (280) 12.5 (318) 5.8 (147) 37.4 17.0
3VA65 800A 4-Pole

Continuous (MMAE) (HMAE) (CMAE)
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

ETU550 LSI with LCD

3VA55 and 3VA65 800A / 3VA66 1000A Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers Selection
Connections for 75C wire for 3VA55, 3VA65 and 3VA66
Aluminum body lug, 2 cables (Cu/Al cable) 4/0 600 kcmil 3VA9573-0JB23 3VA9574-0JB23
Aluminum body lug, 2 cables (Cu/Al cable) with control wire tap 4/0 600 kcmil 3VA9573-0JG23 3VA9574-0JG23
Aluminum body lug, 2 cables (Cu/Al cable) with1 extended terminal covera 400 kcmil 750 kcmil 3VA9673-0JJ24 3VA9674-0JJ24
Aluminum body lug, 2 cables (Cu/Al cable) with control wire tap and
400 kcmil 750 kcmil 3VA9673-0JC24 3VA9674-0JC24
1 extended terminal covera
Aluminum body lug, 3 cables (Cu/Al cable) 4/0 400 kcmil 3VA9673-0JB32 3VA9674-0JB32
Aluminum body lug, 3 cables (Cu/Al cable) with control wire tap 4/0 400 kcmil 3VA9673-0JG32 3VA9674-0JG32
Aluminum body lug, 3 cables (Cu/Al cable) with 1 extended terminal covera 500 kcmil 750 kcmil 3VA9673-0JJ34 3VA9674-0JJ34
500 kcmil 750 kcmil 3VA9673-0JC34 3VA9674-0JC34
Aluminum body lug, 4 cables (Cu/Al cable) with 1 extended terminal covera 4/0 500 kcmil 3VA9673-0JJ43 3VA9674-0JJ43
4/0 500 kcmil 3VA9673-0JC43 3VA9674-0JC43
Aluminum body lug, 4 cables (Cu/Al cable) with 1 extended terminal covera 4/0 600 kcmil 3VA9673-0JJ44 3VA9674-0JJ44
4/0 600 kcmil 3VA9673-0JC44 3VA9674-0JC44
Copper body lug, 3 cables (Cu/Al cable)a 4/0 400 kcmil 3VA9673-0JD32 3VA9674-0JD32
Copper body lug, 3 cables (Cu/Al cable) with control wire tapa 4/0 400 kcmil 3VA9673-0JK32 3VA9674-0JK32
Copper body lug, 4 cables (Cu/Al cable) with 1 extended terminal cover 4/0 500 kcmil 3VA9673-0JE43 3VA9674-0JE43
Copper body lug, 4 cables (Cu/Al cable) with control wire tap and
4/0 500 kcmil 3VA9673-0JL43 3VA9674-0JL43
a Meetsrequirements for 100% rated breakers up to 800A, requires the use of 90 degree wire. 3VA UL Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Product not yet released. Accessories and Spare Parts
5
Internal accessories 3VA5 & 3VA6
Optional equipment 800A & 1000A
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
3- & 4-pole
1250 A
Slot No.: 24 23 22 21 11 12 13 14 15 16
AUX_HQ x x x x x x x x

AUX_HQ_el x x x x x x x x
Auxiliary switch
x x x x
AUX_HP
x x x
TM230 - FTAM LCS_HQ x

Leading changeover switch LCS_HQ_el x
In (Amp) Ir(Amp) Ii (Amp) LCS_HP x
600 600 3000 3600 4200 4800 5400 6000 Alarm switch Type
700 700 3500 4200 4900 5600 6300 7000 TAS_HQ x x
800 800 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000 Trip alarm switch TAS_HQ_el x x
TAS_HP x
EAS_HQ x
Electrical alarm switch (3VA6)
EAS_HQ_el x
SAS_HQ
Trip Settings for 3VA65 and 3VA66 Auxiliary release

SAS_HQ_el
Type
Shunt trip flexible STF x
Internal Booster
4 Shunt trip left

STL x
Cont. LI, LIG, LSI STL (EI)

Amp LI, LIG, LSI LSI LIG 4P only
tld (sec) Isd= xIr tsd (sec) IN=xIr Universal release UNI x
In (Amp) Ir(Amp) (L) (L) Ii (Amp) (I) (Amp) (S) (S) Ig (Amp) (G) (Amp) ETU/communication
Type
600 240 - 600 0.5 - 17 900 - 7200 1.5 - 12 0 - 0.4 120 - 600 0.2 - 1.0 Communication module 3VA server COM060 x
800 320 - 800 0.5 - 17 1200 - 8000 1.5 - 10 0 - 0.4 160 - 800 0.2 - 1.0 24 V module x
Other
1000 400 - 1000 0.5 - 17 1500 - 10000 1.5 - 10 0 - 0.4 200 - 1000 0.2 - 1.0
Cylinder lock (type Ronis) x
ETU550-LSI, ETU556 LSI(A), ETU560-LSIG, ETU820-LI, ETU856 LSI(A), ETU860-LSIG

LSI 3P with LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG,
Cont. Amp LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG, LSI(G) LSI, LSIG, LSI(G) LIG, LSIG, LSI(G) External CT LSI(G) 4P only
600 240 - 600 0.5 - 25 900 - 7200 360 - 7200 0.05 - 0.5 120 - 600 0.05 - 0.8 120 - 960 120 - 600
800 320 - 800 0.5 - 25 1200 - 8000 480 - 8000 0.05 - 0.5 160 - 800 0.05 - 0.8 160 - 1280 160 - 800
1000 400 - 1000 0.5 - 25 1500 - 10000 600 - 10000 0.05 - 0.5 200 - 1000 0.05 - 0.8 200 - 1600 200 - 1000
Siemens Canada
4/6 Limited Power Product Catalogue
Siemens · 04/2017
5-67

trip circuit breakers with nut keepers on both line and load ends.
All 3VA66 electronic trip circuit breakers are CSA approved / UL listed for reverse
feed applications.
All 3VA6 circuit breakers are certified to UL 489 Supplement SB, are marked
“Naval”, and are suitable for use at 50C.
3VA66 800A 3-Pole

Continuous (MMNAE) (HMNAE) (CMNAE)
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

ETU550 LSI with LCD


Class Type 240 480Y/277V 480 600Y/347V 600
M MMNAE 100 35 35 25 25
H HMNAE 150 65 65 35 35
C CMNAE 200 100 100 50 50

3VA66 3 8.3 (210) 12.5 (318) 5.8 (147) 29.4 13.4
3VA66 4 11.1 (280) 12.5 (318) 5.8 (147) 37.4 17.0
3VA66 800A 4-Pole

Continuous (MMNAE) (HMNAE) (CMNAE)
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ETU550 LSI with LCD

3VA Molded Case Switch and Motor Circuit Protector Selection
Breaking capacity (the SCCR rating) is the maximum permissible
short circuit current at the installation location of the MCS in
combination with an appropriate overload protective device.
Molded Case Switch Magnetic

Short-Circuit Current
Frame Max. 2-Pole 3-Pole Rating Instantaneous
(Breaker Ampere short circuit
Type) Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number 240V 480V 600V protection
3VA51
100 3VA5110-1BB21-0AA0 3VA5110-1BB31-0AA0 100k 65k 14ka 1600 A
(HEAS)
3VA52 150 3VA5215-0BB61-0AA0 3VA5215-0BB31-0AA0 100k 65k 25k 2400 A
(HFAS) 250 3VA5225-0BB61-0AA0 3VA5225-0BB31-0AA0 100k 65k 25k 2500 A
3VA53
400 3VA5340-0BB61-0AA0 3VA5340-0BB31-0AA0 100k 65k 25k 6000 A
(HJAS)
3VA54 Magnetic switch
(HLAS)
3VA55
(HMAS)

3VA52
(CFAS)
3VA53
(CJAS)
3VA54
5
(CLAS)
3VA55
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(CMAS)
MOLDED CASE
Molded Case Switch Electronic

Frame Max. Short-Circuit Current Instantaneous Electronic Trip Unit switch
(Breaker Ampere 2-Pole 3-Pole Rating short circuit
Type) Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number 240V 480V 600V protection
3VA63
400 — 3VA6340-1BB31-0AA0 200k 100k 35k 5600 A
(CJAE)
3VA64
600 — 3VA6460-1BB31-0AA0 200k 100k 35k 5400 A
(CLAE)
a Rated at 600 Y/347 V AC.

3VA Molded Case Switch and Motor Circuit Protector Selection
Motor circuit protector TM120M AMc Motor circuit protector TM120M AMb
Frame Maximum Instantaneous Frame Maximum Instantaneous
(Breaker Ampere 3-Pole short circuit (Breaker Ampere 3-Pole short circuit
Type) Rating Catalog Number protection Type) Rating Catalog Number protection
3VA5181-1MU31-0AA0 3 ... 7 3VA54 400 3VA5440-0MU31-0AA0 750 ... 1500
1 (HLAP 3VA5440-0MH31-0AA0 1200 ... 2400
3VA5181-1MH31-0AA0 5 ... 12
3VA5102-1MU31-0AA0 6 ... 14 500 3VA5450-0MU31-0AA0 1500 ... 3000
2 3VA5450-0MH31-0AA0 3000 ... 6000
3VA5102-1MH31-0AA0 10 ... 24
600 3VA5460-0MU31-0AA0 1800 ... 3600
3VA5103-1MU31-0AA0 9 ... 21
3 3VA5460-0MH31-0AA0 3000 ... 6000
3VA5103-1MH31-0AA0 15 ... 36
3VA55
3VA5105-1MU31-0AA0 15 ... 35 600 3VA5560-0MH31-0AA0 4800 ... 9600
5 (HMAP)
3VA5105-1MH31-0AA0 25 ... 60 3VA52 150 3VA5215-1MU31-0AA0 450 ... 900
3VA5107-1MU31-0AA0 21 ... 49 (CFAP) 3VA5215-1MH31-0AA0 900 ... 1800
7
3VA5107-1MH31-0AA0 35 ... 84 200 3VA5220-1MU31-0AA0 600 ... 1200
3VA5191-1MU31-0AA0 30 ... 70 3VA5220-1MH31-0AA0 1200 ... 2400
10
3VA5191-1MH31-0AA0 50 ... 120 250 3VA5225-1MH31-0AA0 750 ... 900
3VA5195-1MU31-0AA0 45 ... 105 3VA5225-1MU31-0AA0 1250 ... 2500
15
3VA5195-1MH31-0AA0 75 ... 180 3VA53 250 3VA5325-1MU31-0AA0 750 ... 1500
3VA5125-1MU31-0AA0 75 ... 175 (CJAP) 3VA5325-1MH31-0AA0 1500 ... 3000
25
3VA5125-1MH31-0AA0 125 ... 300 3VA54 400 3VA5440-1MU31-0AA0 750 ... 1500
3VA51 3VA5130-1MU31-0AA0 90 ... 210 (CLAP) 3VA5440-1MH31-0AA0 2400 ... 4800
30
(HEAP) 3VA5130-1MH31-0AA0 150 ... 360 500 3VA5450-1MU31-0AA0 1500 ... 3000
3VA5140-1MU31-0AA0 120 ... 280 3VA5450-1MH31-0AA0 3000 ... 6000
40
3VA5140-1MH31-0AA0 200 ... 480 600 3VA5460-1MU31-0AA0 1500 ... 3000
3VA5150-1MU31-0AA0 150 ... 350 3VA5460-1MH31-0AA0 3000 ... 6000
50
3VA5150-1MH31-0AA0 250 ... 600 3VA55
3VA5170-1MU31-0AA0 210 ... 490 600 3VA5560-1MH31-0AA0 4800 ... 9600
70 (CMAP)
5
3VA5170-1MH31-0AA0 350 ... 840
80
3VA5180-1MU31-0AA0 240 ... 560 Motor circuit protector ETU310Mb
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
3VA5180-1MH31-0AA0 400 ... 960 Frame Maximum Instantaneous
3VA5190-1MU31-0AA0 270 ... 630 (Breaker Ampere 3-Pole short circuit
90
3VA5190-1MH31-0AA0 450 ... 1080 Type) Rating Catalog Number protection
3VA5110-1MU31-0AA0 300 ... 700 3VA61 25 3VA6125-1MS31-0AA0 75 ... 375
100 (CDAR)
3VA5110-1MH31-0AA0 500 ... 1200 30 3VA6130-1MS31-0AA0 90 ... 450
3VA5111-1MU31-0AA0 330 ... 770 40 3VA6140-1MS31-0AA0 120 ... 600
110 50 3VA6150-1MS31-0AA0 150 ... 750
3VA5111-1MH31-0AA0 550 ... 1320
3VA5112-1MU31-0AA0 375 ... 875 70 3VA6170-1MS31-0AA0 210 ... 1050
125 80 3VA6180-1MS31-0AA0 240 ... 1200
3VA5112-1MH31-0AA0 625 ... 1500
90 3VA6190-1MS31-0AA0 270 ... 1350
3VA5215-0MU31-0AA0 450 ... 900
150 100 3VA6110-1MS31-0AA0 300 ... 1500
3VA52 3VA5215-0MH31-0AA0 900 ... 1800 3VA62 110 3VA6211-1MS31-0AA0 330 ... 1650
(HFAP) 3VA5220-0MU31-0AA0 600 ... 1200 (CFAR-Y) 125 3VA6212-1MS31-0AA0 375 ... 1875
200
3VA5220-0MH31-0AA0 1200 ... 2400 150 3VA6215-1MS31-0AA0 450 ... 2250
3VA53 3VA5325-0MU31-0AA0 750 ... 1500 200 3VA6220-1MS31-0AA0 600 ... 2400
250
(HJAP) 3VA5325-0MH31-0AA0 1500 ... 3000 3VA63 200 3VA6320-1MS31-0AA0 600 ... 3000
Motor circuit protector TM120M AM b (CJAR)
3VA64
250
400
3VA6325-1MS31-0AA0
3VA6440-1MS31-0AA0
750 ... 3750
1200 ... 5200
3VA5215-1MU31-0AA0 450 ... 900 (CLAR)
150 500 3VA6450-1MS31-0AA0 1500 ... 6000
3VA52 3VA5215-1MH31-0AA0 900 ... 1800 3VA65
(CFAP) 3VA5220-1MU31-0AA0 600 ... 1200 800 3VA6580-1MS31-0AA0 2400 ... 12000
200 (CMAR)
3VA5220-1MH31-0AA0 1200 ... 2400
Breaker 600Y/
Frame Type 240 480 347V 600 125 (1P) 250 (2P) 500d (3P) 600 (3P) Motor Circuit
3VA51 HEAP 150 65 25 — 30 100 100 — Protector
HFAP 100 65 25 25 85 85
3VA52
CFAP 200 100 35 35 100 100
HJAP 100 65 25 25 — — — —
3VA53
CHAP 200 100 35 35 — — — —
HLAP 100 65 25 25 — — — —
3VA54
CLAP 200 100 35 35 — — — —
a Rated at 600 Y/347 V AC.
HMAP 100 65 25 — — — — —
3VA55 b SCCR is 35kA at 600V. SCCR rating is the maximum
CMAP 100 100 50 — — — — — permissible short circuit current of the MCP in combination
3VA61 CDAR 200 100 35 35 — — — — with an appropriate overload protection device.
c SCCR is 25kA at 600V. SCCR rating is the maximum
3VA62 CFAR 200 100 35 35 — — — —
permissible short circuit current of the MCP in combination
3VA63 CJAR 200 100 35 35 — — — — with an appropriate overload protection device.
3VA64 CLAR 200 100 35 35 — — — — d 2 poles required for 500VDC for breaker types HFAP
3VA65 CMAR 200 100 42 — — — — — and CFAP.

3VA Internal Accessories Selection
Internal Accessories Auxiliary switches and

alarm switches HQ
Auxiliary and Alarm Switches

Catalog Number
Switch HP High Power HQ Compact HQ Electronica
Type (2 slots) (1 slot) (1 slot)
Auxiliary Switch
3VA9978-0AA11 3VA9978-0AA12 3VA9978-0AA13
(AUX)
Leading Changeover
3VA9978-0AA21 3VA9978-0AA22 3VA9978-0AA23
Switch (LCS)
Trip Alarm Switch
3VA9978-0AB11 3VA9978-0AB12 3VA9978-0AB13
(TAS)
Electronic Alarm
— 3VA9978-0AB22 3VA9978-0AB23
(EAS)
AUX LCS TAS EAS
Shunt Trips
Catalog Number Auxiliary switches and
Type VAC 50/60 Hz VDC (3 slots)
alarm switches HP
380 ... 600 — 3VA9978-0BL20
— 12 3VA9978-0BL10
Shunt Trip Left 24 24 ... 30 3VA9978-0BL30
(STL) 48 ... 60 — 3VA9978-0BL31
110 ... 127 110 ... 127 3VA9978-0BL32
208 ... 277 220 ... 250 3VA9978-0BL33
5
24 — 3VA9978-0BA20
48 ... 60 — 3VA9978-0BA21
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Shunt Trip Flexible 110 ... 127 — 3VA9978-0BA22

(STF)b 208 ... 277 — 3VA9978-0BA23
380 ... 500 — 3VA9978-0BA24
600 — 3VA9978-0BA25
Undervoltage Release AUX LCS TAS
— 12 3VA9978-0BB10
— 24 3VA9978-0BB11
— 48 3VA9978-0BB12
Shunt trip left Undervoltage
— 125 ... 127 3VA9978-0BB14
Undervoltage Release STL releases UVR
— 250 3VA9978-0BB16
(UVR)
24 — 3VA9978-0BB20
120 ... 127 — 3VA9978-0BB24
208 ... 230 — 3VA9978-0BB25
440 ... 480 — 3VA9978-0BB27
Universal Release (Undervoltage and Shunt trip)
— 12 3VA9978-0BD11
Universal Release
— 24 3VA9978-0BD12
(UNI)
— 48 3VA9978-0BD13
Time-delay Device for Undervoltage Release Universal Time-delay device

release UNI for undervoltage
Type VAC 50/60 Hz VDC Delay Time Catalog Number releases
230 230 Fixed – 100ms minimum 3VA9978-0BF22
Time-delay Device
— 24 Fixed – 100ms minimum 3VA9978-0BF23
a Use only with 3VA6. b Shunttrip flexible can be used in the left pocket of the
3VA5 breakers. They can be used in the left or right
pocket of the 3VA6 breakers.

3VA Manual Operators Selection
Front Mounted Rotary Operator

3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type Color 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Catalog Number
Standard without illumination kit Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0EK11
— u u — — 3VA9277-0EK11
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK11
— — — — u 3VA9677-0EK11
Standard with illumination kit Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0EK13
— u u — — 3VA9277-0EK13
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK13
EMERGENCY-OFF Yellow-Red u — — — — 3VA9137-0EK15
without illumination kit — u u — — 3VA9277-0EK15
Degree of protection NEMA 1
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK15
— — — — u 3VA9677-0EK15
with illumination kit — u u — — 3VA9277-0EK17
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK17
Standard with door interlock Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0EK21
— u u — — 3VA9277-0EK21
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK21
5
— — — — u 3VA9677-0EK21
Standard with door interlock, Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0EK23
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK23
with door interlock — u u — — 3VA9277-0EK25
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK25
— — — — u 3VA9677-0EK25
EMERGENCY-OFF with door interlock, Yellow-Red u — — — — 3VA9137-0EK27
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK27
with door open function — u u — — 3VA9277-0EK31
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK31
— — — — u 3VA9677-0EK31
with door open function, — u u — — 3VA9277-0EK33
with illumination kit
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK33
with door open function — u u — — 3VA9277-0EK35
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK35
— — — — u 3VA9677-0EK35
with door open function, — u u — — 3VA9277-0EK37
with illumination kit
— — — u — 3VA9447-0EK37

Door Mounted Rotary Operator a
3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Standard Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK21
— u u — — 3VA9277-0FK21
— — — u — 3VA9447-0FK21
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK21
Standard with illumination kit Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK23
— u u — — 3VA9277-0FK23
— — — u — 3VA9447-0FK23
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK23
EMERGENCY-OFF Yellow- u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK25
Red — u u — — 3VA9277-0FK25
— — — u — 3VA9447-0FK25
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK25
EMERGENCY-OFF Yellow- u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK27
with illumination kit Red — u u — — 3VA9277-0FK27
— — — u — 3VA9447-0FK27
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK27
Degree of protection Standard with door interlock, Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK31
Type 1, 12, 3R and 4X with open door function — u u — — 3VA9277-0FK31
— — — u — 3VA9447-0FK31
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK31
Standard with door interlock, Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK33
with open door function — u u — — 3VA9277-0FK33
with illumination kit — — — u — 3VA9447-0FK33
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK33
EMERGENCY-OFF with door Yellow- u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK35
5
interlock, with open door function Red — u u — — 3VA9277-0FK35

— — — u — 3VA9447-0FK35
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK35
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
EMERGENCY-OFF with door Yellow- u — — — — 3VA9137-0FK37

interlock, with open door Red — u u — — 3VA9277-0FK37
function, with illumination kit — — — u — 3VA9447-0FK37
— — — — u 3VA9677-0FK37
Standard Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0GC01
— u u — — 3VA9477-0GC01
— — — u — 3VA9477-0GC11
— — — — u 3VA9677-0GC01
NFPA-79
EMERGENCY-OFF Yellow- u — — — — 3VA9137-0GC05
Supplementary
Red — u u — — 3VA9477-0GC05
Handles
— — — u — 3VA9477-0GC15
— — — — u 3VA9677-0GC05
Side Mounted Rotary Operatora

Standard Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK11
— u u — — 3VA9277-0PK11
Standard with Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK13
illumination kit — u u — — 3VA9277-0PK13
EMERGENCY-OFF Yellow-Red u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK15
n Without mounting plate
n Rotary operator with shaft 300 mm — u u — — 3VA9277-0PK15
n Handle with masking plate 75 x 75 mm EMERGENCY-OFF Yellow-Red u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK17
n Degree of protection Type 1, 12, 3R, 4X with illumination kit — u u — — 3VA9277-0PK17
Standard with mounting plate Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK51
— u u — — 3VA9277-0PK51
Standard with mounting plate, Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK53
with illumination kit — u u — — 3VA9277-0PK53
EMERGENCY-OFF with Yellow-Red u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK55
n With mounting plate mounting plate — u u — — 3VA9277-0PK55
n Rotary operator with short shaft
n Handle with masking plate 75 x 75 mm

EMERGENCY-OFF with mounting Yellow-Red u — — — — 3VA9137-0PK57
n Degree of protection Type 1, 12, 3R, 4X
plate, with illumination kit — u u — — 3VA9277-0PK57
Standard for use with the side Gray u — — — — 3VA9177-0VF40
wall mounted rotary operators — u u — — 3VA9277-0VF40
Side n Without mounting plate
Mounted
Rotary
Operator
Door
Interlock
a Lockable with up to three padlock hasps.

Breaker Operator
3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Without handle, with Gray u — — — — 3VA9137-0GK00
shaft stub, — u u — — 3VA9277-0GK00
without door interlock
For retrofit with 3VL — — — u — 3VA9447-0GK00
handle — — — — u 3VA9677-0GK00
3VA9277-0GK00 3VA9677-0GK00
Handles with Masking Plate (Purchase breaker operator, shaft and shaft adapter separately)
Standard Gray Without Without u u u — — 8UD1721-0AB11
With Without u u u — — 8UD1721-0AB21
Without Without — — — u — 8UD1731-0AB11
With Without — — — u — 8UD1731-0AB21
Without With u u u — — 8UD1721-0AC11
With With u u u — — 8UD1721-0AC21
Without With — — — u — 8UD1731-0AC11
With With — — — u — 8UD1731-0AC21
Without With — — — — u 8UD1741-0AB11
5
With With — — — — u 8UD1741-0AB21
EMERGENCY- Yellow- Without Without u u u — — 8UD1721-0AB15
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
n Degree of protection
OFF Red With Without u u u — — 8UD1721-0AB25
Type 1, 12, 3R and 4X
Without Without — — — u — 8UD1731-0AB15
With Without — — — u — 8UD1731-0AB25
Without With u u u — — 8UD1721-0AC15
With With u u u — — 8UD1721-0AC25
Without With — — — u — 8UD1731-0AC15
With With — — — u — 8UD1731-0AC25
Without With — — — — u 8UD1741-0AB15
With With — — — — u 8UD1741-0AB25
Metal Rotary Handles (Purchase breaker operator, shaft and shaft adapter separately)
3VA5 3VA5
Tolerance Door 3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
Compen- Open 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type Color sation Function 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Catalog Number
n Large, degree of protection Metal Black — With u u u u u RHOH

Type 1, 3, 3R, 12
n Large, degree of protection u
Metal Stainless — With u u u u RHOH4
Type 4, 4X
n Compact, degree of protection Compact Black — With u u u u RHOHC

Type 1,3,3R,12 —
n Compact, degree of protection Compact Stainless — With u u u u RHOH4C

—
Type 4, 4X
n Long, degree of protection Emergency Red — With u u u u u RHVPEMH
1,3,3R,12
n Compact, degree of protection
Emergency Red — With u u u u — RHVMEMH
1,3,3R,12
For additional information for selecting handle and breaker operator combinations, please refer to the brochure:
https://digitalcontentcenter.compas.siemens-info.com/SIE_FL_3VA_Handles.pdf

Pistol Grip Handles (Purchase breaker operator, shaft and shaft adapter separately)
3VA5 3VA5
Tolerance Door 3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
Compen- Open 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type Color sation Function 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Catalog Number
n Degree of protection Plastic Gray — With u u u u — 3VA9477-0FH11

Type 1,3R,12
n Degree of protection Emergency Red — With u u u u — 3VA9477-0FH15

Type 1,3R,12
Door Mounted Rotary Operator Accessories

3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Catalog Number
8 mm Shaft 300 mm long (for 8UD plastic handles) u u u u — 8UD1900-2WA00
5
(Fixing bracket optional)

8 mm Shaft 600 mm long (for 8UD plastic handles) u u u u — 8UD1900-2WB00
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
(Fixing bracket required)

12 mm Shaft 325 mm long (for 8UD plastic handles) — — — — u 8UD1900-4WA00
12 mm Shaft 600 mm long (for 8UD plastic handles) — — — — u 8UD1900-4WB00
8 mm Shaft 300 mm long (for metal handles) u u u u — 3VA9477-0GF20
8 mm Shaft 600 mm long (for metal handles) u u u u — 3VA9477-0GF21
12 mm Shaft 300 mm long (for metal handles) — — — — u 3VA9877-0GF22
12 mm Shaft 600 mm long (for metal handles) — — — — u 3VA9877-0GF23
8 mm Shaft 300 mm long (for pistol grip handles) u u u u — 3VA9477-0GF10
8 mm Shaft 600 mm long (for pistol grip handles) u u u u — 3VA9477-0GF11
Adapter for 8 mm Shaft for door mounted operator u u u u — 8UD1900-2DA00
Adapter for 12 mm Shaft for door mounted operator — — — — u 8UD1900-4DA00
Door Coupling 8 mm x 8 mm u u u — — 8UD1900-2HA00

(for 8UD plastic handles)
Door coupling 12 mm x 12 mm — — — u u 8UD1900-4HA00
Fixing bracket for Shaft u — — — — 3VA9137-0GA80
— u u u — 3VA9477-0GA80
Fixing bracket for 12 mm x 12 mm shaft — — — — u 3VA9677-0GA80
Variable depth adapter 8 x 8 mm u u u u — 3VA9487-0GB10
Mounting tolerance compensation 8 x 8 mm u u u u — 8UD1900-2GA00

Mounting tolerance compensation 12 mm x 12 mm — — — — u 8UD1900-4GA00


General Accessories for Manual Operators
Type Details Part Number
Labeling plate for — 3VA9087-0SX10
manual operators
Illumination kit for For Molded Case Circuit Breakers

manual operators 3VA5, 125...250 A Front mounted rotary 8UD1900-0KA10
24 V DC voltage operators
3VA6, 150...600 A 8UD1900-0KA20
3VA5, 3VA6, Door mounted rotary 8UD1900-0KA20
125...600 A operators
3VA5, 3VA6, 8UD1900-0KA30
800..1000A
Cylinder Lock (type Kaba) Key 1 8UD1900-0MB01
n For 8UD plastic door mounted
Key 2 8UD1900-0NB01
rotary operators (in masking plate) Key 3 8UD1900-0PB01
n Standard masking plate
Key 4 8UD1900-0QB01
Cylinder Lock (type Kaba)a Key 1 8UD1900-0MC01
Key 2 8UD1900-0NC01
rotary operators (in masking plate) Key 3 8UD1900-0PC01
n Standard masking plate
Key 4 8UD1900-0QC01
Cylinder Lock (type Kaba) Key 1 8UD1900-0MB05
Key 2 8UD1900-0NB05
rotary operators (in masking plate) Key 3 8UD1900-0PB05
n EMERGENCY-OFF masking plate
Key 4 8UD1900-0QB05
5
Cylinder Lock (type Kaba)a Key 1 8UD1900-0MC05
Key 2 8UD1900-0NC05
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
rotary operators (in masking plate) Key 3 8UD1900-0PC05
n EMERGENCY-OFF masking plate
Key 4 8UD1900-0QC05
Cylinder Lock (type Ronis) Key 1 3VA9980-0VL10

n includes 2 keys
Key 3 3VA9980-0VL30
n for locking or interlocking
Key 4 3VA9980-0VL40
n installation in all rotary
operators w/ shaft stub
Cylinder lock adapter for 8UD rotary operator 3VA9980-0LF20

n to mount in rotary operator
Cylinder lock adaptor for front mounted rotary operator 3VA9670-0LF20

3VA9677-0EK.. and door mounted rotary operator 3VA9677-0FK..
3VA55/3VA65/3VA66
Variable depth flange mounted operator kit

3VA5
3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A
Type 125A 250A 250A 600A Catalog Number
Complete kit comprising: u — — — 3VA9138-0DK72
n Switching mechanism adjustable depth
— u u — 3VA9278-0DK72
200mm to 400mm — — — u 3VA9478-0DK72
n Epoxy coated steel handle, NEMA 1/3R/12,
black = OFF, red = ON

n Switching mechanism adjustable depth
— u u — 3VA9278-0DK82
200mm to 400mm — — — u 3VA9478-0DK82
n Stainless steel handle, chrome-plated NEMA 4/4X,
black=OFF, red=ON
n Swithching mechanism adjustable depth
— u u — 3VA9278-0DK84
200mm to 400mm — — — u 3VA9478-0DK84
n Handle stainless steel, chrome-plated NEMA 4/4X,
black=OFF, black=ON
a With door open function

3VA Manual and Motor Operators Selection
Max Flex Operator
3VA5
3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A
Type 125A 250A 250A 600A Catalog Number
Complete Kit u — — — 3VA9137-0CK12
n Operating mechanism
— u u — 3VA9277-0CK12
n Plastic handle, NEMA 1/12, black=OFF, green=ON
— — — u 3VA9477-0CK12
n Bowden Cable 36 inches (0.9m) long
Complete Kit u — — — 3VA9137-0CK72

n Operating mechanism
— u u — 3VA9277-0CK72
n Steel handle, epoxy coated NEMA 1/3R/12,
— — — u 3VA9477-0CK72
black=OFF, red=ON,
n Bowden Cable 36 inches (0.9m) long
Operating Mechanism (spare) u — — — 3VA9137-0CB10

— u u — 3VA9277-0CB10
Complete kit and spare mechanism — — — u 3VA9477-0CB10
Handle - Plastic, NEMA 1/12, u u u u 3VA9977-0CH12
black = OFF, green = ON
Handle - Steel, Epoxy coated, NEMA 1/3R/12, u u u u 3VA9977-0CH72
Handle - Steel, Epoxy coated, NEMA 1/3R/12, u u u u 3VA9977-0CH74
black = OFF, black = ON
Handle - Steel, chrome-plated, NEMA 4/4X, u u u u 3VA9977-0CH82
Handle - Steel, chrome-plated, NEMA 4/4X, u u u u 3VA9977-0CH84
black = OFF, black = ON
Bowden Cable, 36 inches (0.9m) u u u — 3VA9278-0CC10
Bowden Cable, 48 inches (1.2m) — 3VA9278-0CC20
5
u u u
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

Bowden Cable, 36 inches (0.9m) — — — u 3VA9578-0CC10
MaxFlex Auxiliary switch (leading from On to Off) u u u u 3VA9478-0CX10
n 1 CO
MaxFlex Auxiliary switch (leading from On to Off) u u u u 3VA9478-0CX20

n 2 CO
Motor Operatorsa
3VA5
3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150 A 400A
Type 125 A 250 A 250 A 600A Part Number
Motor Operator without Stored Energy Feature
24 ... 60 V DC u — — — 3VA9137-0HA10
— u u — 3VA9277-0HA10
— — — u 3VA9447-0HA10
110 ... 230 V AC u — — — 3VA9137-0HA20
110 ... 250 V DC — u u — 3VA9277-0HA20
— — — u 3VA9447-0HA20
Motor Operator with Stored Energy Feature
24 V DC — u u — 3VA9277-0HC10
42 ... 60 V AC/DC — u u — 3VA9277-0HC20
110 ... 230 V AC / 110 ... 250 V DC — u u — 3VA9277-0HC30
Motor Operator with Stored Energy Feature with Communication
24 V DC — u u — 3VA9277-0HC15
110 ... 230 V AC / 110 ... 250 V DC — u u — 3VA9277-0HC35
a Lockable with up to three padlock hasps.

3VA Connection Technology Selection
Box Terminals
For molded case circuit breakers/
Minimum Maximum rated current
cable cross- cable cross- 3VA5 3VA5
section section 3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
(standard) (standard) 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type Class B Class B 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number
Steel wrap-around lug AWG 14 3/0 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JA11
(Cu cable only) AWG 10 3/0 — u — — — 3VA9233-0JA11
kit of 3 single lugs AWG 4 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JA12
AWG 10 3/0 — — u — — 3VA9143-0JA12
AWG 4 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JA12
1/0 500 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9473-0JA13
Steel wrap-around lug AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9134-0JA11
(Cu cable only) AWG 10 3/0 — u — — — 3VA9234-0JA11
kit of 4 single lugs AWG 10 3/0 — — u — — 3VA9144-0JA12
AWG 4 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9234-0JA12
AWG 4 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JA12
1/0 500 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9474-0JA13
Steel wrap-around lug AWG 10 3/0 — u — — — 3VA9233-0JH11
with control wire tap AWG 4 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JH12
(Cu cable only) AWG 10 3/0 — — u — — 3VA9143-0JH12
kit of 3 single lugs AWG 4 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JH12
1/0 500 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9473-0JH13
Steel wrap-around lug AWG 10 3/0 — u — — — 3VA9234-0JH11
with control wire tap AWG 4 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9234-0JH12
(Cu cable only) AWG 10 3/0 — — u — — 3VA9144-0JH12
kit of 4 single lugs AWG 4 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JH12
1/0 500 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9474-0JH13
5
Aluminum Wire Connectors
Aluminum body lug AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JB10
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
small (Cu/Al cable)
kit of 3 single lugs
small (Cu/Al cable)
Aluminum body lug AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JG10
small with control wire
tap (Cu/Al cable)
Aluminum body lug AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9134-0JG10
small with control wire
tap (Cu/Al cable)
Aluminum body lug AWG 14 3/0 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JB11
(Cu/Al cable) AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9233-0JB11
kit of 3 single lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JB12b
AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9143-0JB11b
AWG 6 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JB12
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9373-0JB13a
(Cu/Al cable) AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9234-0JB11
kit of 4 single lugs AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9144-0JB11b
AWG 6 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9234-0JB12
AWG 6 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JB12b
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9374-0JB13a
Aluminum body lug AWG 14 3/0 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JG11
with control wire tap AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9233-0JG11
(Cu/Al cable) AWG 6 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JG12
kit of 3 single lugs AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9143-0JG11b
AWG 6 350 kcmill — — u — — 3VA9243-0JG12b
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9373-0JG13a
Aluminum body lug with AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9134-0JG11
control wire tap (Cu/Al AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9234-0JG11
cable) kit of 4 single lugs AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9144-0JG11b
AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9234-0JG12
AWG 6 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JG12b
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9374-0JG13a
Aluminum body lug 4/0 600 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9573-0JB23
two cables (Cu/Al cable)
two cables (Cu/Al cable)
aThis conductor is ampere-rated at 380A with copper wire and 310A with aluminum wire. bMeets requirements of 100% rated breakers up to 150A.

Aluminum Wire Connectors (cont.)
Aluminum body lug 4/0 600 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JG23
two cables with control
wire tap (Cu/Al cable)
two cables with control
three cables (Cu/Al cable)
3 lug kit kit of 3 single lugs
pictured Aluminum body lug 4/0 400 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JB32
three cables (Cu/Al cable)
three cables with control
4 lug kit kit of 3 single lugs
pictured Aluminum body lug 4/0 400 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JG32
three cables with control
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Aluminum Wire Connectors and Terminal Covers

Min. Max. For molded case circuit breakers/
cable cable rated current
cross- cross- 3VA5 3VA5 Terminal Cover
section section 3VA6 3VA6 3VA6 with Probe
(std.) (std.) 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A Holes Part
Type Description Class B Class B 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number Number
Aluminum body lug large Kit of 2 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil u — — — — 3VA9132-0JJ12
(Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
Kit of 3 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil u — — — — 3VA9133-0JJ12
1 extended terminal cover AWG 2 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JJ13
AWG 2 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JJ13a
Kit of 4 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil u — — — — 3VA9134-0JJ12
1 extended terminal cover AWG 2 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9234-0JJ13
AWG 2 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JJ13a
2 lug 3 lug 4 lug
Aluminum body lug large with Kit of 2 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil u — — — — 3VA9132-0JC12
control wire tap (Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
Kit of 3 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil u — — — — 3VA9133-0JC12 3VA9133-0JC18
1 extended terminal cover AWG 2 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JC13 3VA9233-0JC18
AWG 2 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JC13a 3VA9243-0JC18
Kit of 4 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil u — — — — 3VA9134-0JC12

1 extended terminal cover AWG 4 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9234-0JC13
AWG 2 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JC13a
2 lug 3 lug 4 lug
Aluminum body lug, Kit of 3 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JJ22
2 Cables (Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
AWG 4 300 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JJ22a
2/0 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9473-0JJ23
Kit of 4 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9234-0JJ22

AWG 4 300 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9244-0JJ22a
2/0 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9474-0JJ23
3 lug 4 lug
a Meets requirements of 100% rated breakers up to 250A.

Aluminum Wire Connectors and Terminal Covers (cont.)
Min. Max. For molded case circuit breakers/
cable cable rated current
cross- cross- 3VA5 3VA5 Terminal Cover
section section 3VA6 3VA6 3VA6 with Probe
(std.) (std.) 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A Holes Part
Type Description Class B Class B 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number Number
Aluminum body lug, 2 Cables Kit of 3 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil — u — — 3VA9233-0JC22 3VA9233-0JC28
with control wire tap (Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
AWG 4 300 kcmil — — u — 3VA9243-0JC22a 3VA9243-0JC28
2/0 600 kcmil — — — u 3VA9473-0JC23 3VA9473-0JC28
Kit of 4 single lugs and AWG 4 300 kcmil — u — — 3VA9234-0JC22

AWG 4 300 kcmil — — u — 3VA9244-0JC22a
2/0 600 kcmil — — — u 3VA9474-0JC23
3 lug 4 lug
Kit of 3 single lugs and 400 kcmil 750 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JJ24
Aluminum body 1 extended terminal cover
lug two cables
(Cu/Al cable)
3 lug kit pictured
Kit of 3 single lugs and 400 kcmil 750 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JC24

Aluminum body
lug two cables with
control wire tap Kit of 4 single lugs and 400 kcmil 750 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JC24
(Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
5
3 kit lug pictured
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Aluminum body lug Kit of 3 single lugs and 500 kcmil 750 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JJ34
three cables (Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
Aluminum body lug three cables Kit of 3 single lugs and 500 kcmil 750 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JC34
Kit of 4 single lugs and 500 kcmil 750 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JC34
Kit of 3 single lugs and 4/0 500 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JJ43
Aluminum body 1 extended terminal cover
lug four cables
(Cu/Al cable)
4 lug kit pictured 1 extended terminal cover
Kit of 3 single lugs and 4/0 500 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JC43

Aluminum body
lug four cables
with control wire Kit of 4 single lugs and 4/0 500 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JC43
tap (Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
4 lug kit pictured
Aluminum body lug Kit of 3 single lugs and 4/0 600 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JJ44
four cables (Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
Aluminum body lug four cables Kit of 3 single lugs and 4/0 600 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JC44
Kit of 4 single lugs and 4/0 600 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JC44
Distribution lug, Kit of 2 single lugs and AWG 14 AWG 2 u — — — 3VA9132-0JF60
6 Cables (Cu/Al cable) 1 extended terminal cover
Kit of 3 single lugs and AWG 14 AWG 2 u — — — 3VA9133-0JF60 3VA9133-0JF68
1 extended terminal cover AWG 2 — u — — 3VA9233-0JF60 3VA9233-0JF68
AWG 2 — — u — 3VA9243-0JF60b 3VA9243-0JF68
AWG 2 — — — u 3VA9373-0JF60c 3VA9373-0JF68
Kit of 4 single lugs and AWG 14 AWG 2 u — — — 3VA9134-0JF60
1 extended terminal cover AWG 2 — u — — 3VA9234-0JF60
2 lug 3 lug 4 lug AWG 2 — — u — 3VA9244-0JF60b
AWG 2 — — — u 3VA9374-0JF60c
a Meets requirements of 100% rated breakers up to 250A. b Meets requirements of 100% rated breakers up to 100A. c Meets requirements of 100% rated breakers up to 100A.

Copper Wire Connectors
Copper body lug, small (Cu cable AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JD10
only) Kit of 3 single lugs
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) AWG 14 2/0 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JD11

Kit of 3 single lugs AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9233-0JD11
AWG 6 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JD12
AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9143-0JD11
AWG 6 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JD12
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9373-0JD13
Copper body lug, small (Cu cable AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — 3VA9134-0JD10
only) Kit of 4 single lugs
Copper body lug (Cu cable only) AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9134-0JD11

kit of 4 single lugs AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9234-0JD11
AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9144-0JD11
AWG 6 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9234-0JD12
AWG 6 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JD12
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9374-0JD13
Copper body lug, three cables (Cu 4/0 400 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JD32
cable) Kit of 3 single lugs
5
Copper body lug, three cables (Cu 4/0 400 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JD32
cable) Kit of 4 single lugs
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Copper body lug, small with con- AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — 3VA9133-0JK10

trol wire tap (Cu cable only)
Kit of 3 single lugs
Copper body lug with control wire AWG 14 2/0 u — — — — 3VA9133-0JK11

tap (Cu cable only) AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9233-0JK11
Kit of 3 single lugs AWG 6 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9233-0JK12
AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9143-0JK11
AWG 6 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9243-0JK12
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9373-0JK13
Copper body lug, small with AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — 3VA9134-0JK10
control wire tap (Cu cable only)
Copper body lug with control wire AWG 14 AWG 10 u — — — — 3VA9134-0JK11

tap (Cu cable only) AWG 14 1/0 — u — — — 3VA9234-0JK11
Kit of 4 single lugs AWG 14 1/0 — — u — — 3VA9144-0JK11
AWG 6 350 kcmil — u — — — 3VA9234-0JK12
AWG 6 350 kcmil — — u — — 3VA9244-0JK12
AWG 1 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9374-0JK13
Copper body lug, three cables 400 kcmil 600 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JK32
with control wire tap (Cu cable)
Aluminum body lug, three cables 400 kcmil 600 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JK32
with control wire tap (Cu cable)

Copper Wire Connectors (cont.)
Copper body lug, 2 Cables (Cu 2/0 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9473-0JE23
cable only) Kit of 3 single lugs
and 1 extended terminal cover
Copper body lug 2 Cables (Cu 2/0 600 kcmil — — — u — 3VA9474-0JE23

cable only) Kit of 4 single lugs
and 1 extended terminal cover
Copper body lug, four cables 4/0 500 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JE43
(Cu cable) Kit of 3 single lugs and
Copper body lug, four cables 4/0 500 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JE43

Copper body lug, four cables 4/0 500 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9673-0JL43

Copper body lug, four cables 4/0 500 kcmil — — — — u 3VA9674-0JL43
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Nut Keeper Kits
rated current
3VA5 3VA5
Maximum Maximum 3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
terminal terminal 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type width thickness 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number
Nut keeper kit 17 mm / 0.7 inch 6.5 mm /0.25 inch u — — — — 3VA9133-0QA00
kit of 3 single lugs 25 mm / 1 inch 8 mm / 0.3 inch — u — — — 3VA9233-0QA00
25 mm / 1 inch 8 mm / 0.3 inch — — u — — 3VA9243-0QA00
35 mm / 1.4 inch 10 mm / 0.4 inch — — — u — 3VA9473-0QA00
Nut keeper kit 17 mm / 0.7 inch 6.5 mm /0.25 inch u — — — — 3VA9134-0QA00
kit of 4 single lugs 25 mm / 1 inch 8 mm / 0.3 inch — u — — — 3VA9234-0QA00
25 mm / 1 inch 8 mm / 0.3 inch — — u — — 3VA9244-0QA00
35 mm / 1.4 inch 10 mm / 0.4 inch — — — u — 3VA9474-0QA00
Nut keeper kit 50 mm / 2.0 inch 30 mm / 1.18 inch — — — — u 3VA9673-0QA00
kit of 3 single lug
and terminal
covers
Nut keeper kit 50 mm / 2.0 inch 30 mm / 1.18 inch — — — — u 3VA9674-0QA00
kit of 4 single lug
4 lug kit pictured and terminal
covers

Bus Connector Extensions
rated current
3VA5 3VA5
Maximum Maximum 3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
terminal terminal 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type width thickness 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number
Front bus connectors 22 mm / 8 mm / u — — — — 3VA9131-0QB00
extended 1 single connector 0.9 inch 0.3 inch

extended kit of 3 single connectors, 0.9 inch 0.3 inch
2 phase barriers, and 1 insulating
plate

extended kit of 4 single connectors, 0.9 inch 0.3 inch
3 phase barriers, and 1 insulating
plate
Front bus connectors 32 mm / 10 mm / — u u — — 3VA9273-0QB00

extended kit of 3 single connectors 1.3 inch 0.4 inch
and 1 insulating plate
5
40 mm / 12.5 mm / — — — u — 3VA9473-0QB00
1.6 inch 0.5 inch
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
50.8 mm / 30 mm / — — — — u 3VA9673-0QB00
2.0 inch 1.18 inch
Front bus connectors 32 mm / 10 mm / — — u — — 3VA9274-0QB00
extended kit of 4 single connectors 1.3 inch 0.4 inch
and 1 insulating plate
40 mm / 12.5 mm / — — — u — 3VA9474-0QB00
1.6 inch 0.5 inch
50.8 mm / 30 mm / — — — — u 3VA9674-0QB00
2.0 inch 1.18 inch
Front bus connectors 60 mm / 12.5 mm / — — — u — 3VA9473-0QC00
offset kit of 3 single connectors 2.4 inch 0.5 inch
1 insulating plate
Distance between pole centers:
400/600 A = 70 mm / 2.76 inches 80 mm / 30 mm / — — — — u 3VA9673-0QC00
3.15 inch 1.18 inch
Front bus connectors 60 mm / 12.5 mm / — — — u — 3VA9474-0QC00

offset kit of 4 single connectors 2.4 inch 0.5 inch
1 insulating plate
Distance between pole centers:
400/600 A = 70 mm / 2.76 inches 80 mm / 30 mm / — — — — u 3VA9674-0QC00
3.15 inch 1.18 inch

Rear connection studs flat
rated current
3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number
Rear connection studs flat u — — — — 3VA9133-0QE00
kit of 2 short flat studs and — u — — — 3VA9233-0QE00
1 long flat stud
— — u — — 3VA9243-0QE00
— — — u — 3VA9473-0QE00
— — — — u 3VA9673-0QE00
kit of 2 short flat studs and — u — — — 3VA9234-0QE00
2 long flat studs — — u — — 3VA9244-0QE00
— — — u — 3VA9474-0QE00
— — — — u 3VA9674-0QE00
1 short flat stud — u — — — 3VA9231-0QE10
— — u — — 3VA9241-0QE10
— — — u — 3VA9471-0QE10
1 long flat stud — u — — — 3VA9231-0QE20
— — u — — 3VA9241-0QE20
— — — u — 3VA9471-0QE20
5
Rear connection studs round
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Rear connection studs round u — — — — 3VA9133-0QF00
kit of 1 long round stud and — u — — — 3VA9233-0QF00
2 short round studs — — u — — 3VA9243-0QF00
— — — u — 3VA9473-0QF00

kit of 2 long round studs and — u — — — 3VA9234-0QF00
2 short round studs — — u — — 3VA9244-0QF00
— — — u — 3VA9474-0QF00

1 short round studs — u — — — 3VA9231-0QF10
— — u — — 3VA9241-0QF10
— — — u — 3VA9471-0QF10

1 long round stud — u — — — 3VA9231-0QF20
— — u — — 3VA9241-0QF20
— — — u — 3VA9471-0QF20

Phase barriers, terminal covers, and insulating plates
rated current
3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6 Terminal Cover
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A with Probe Holes
Type 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number Part Number
Phase barriers u — — — — 3VA9132-0WA00
kit of 2 phase barriers
— u u — — 3VA9272-0WA00
— — — u — 3VA9472-0WA00
— — — — u 3VA9672-0WA00
Terminal cover for u — — — — 3VA9131-0WD10

1-pole breakers

2-pole breakers
Terminal cover for u — — — — 3VA9131-0WD30 3VA9131-0WD31

3-pole breakers — u u — — 3VA9271-0WD30 3VA9271-0WD31
— — — u — 3VA9471-0WD30 3VA9471-0WD31
— — — — u 3VA9671-0WD30
4-pole breakers — — u — — 3VA9271-0WD40
5
— — — u — 3VA9471-0WD40
— — — — u 3VA9671-0WD40
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Terminal cover intermediate — — — — u 3VA9671-0WE30

for 3-pole breakers
Terminal cover intermediate — — — — u 3VA9671-0WE40
for 4-pole breakers
Terminal cover extended for u — — — — 3VA9131-0WF20
2-pole breakers
Terminal cover extended for u — — — — 3VA9131-0WF30 3VA9131-0WF31

3-pole breakers
— u u — — 3VA9271-0WF30 3VA9271-0WF31
— — — u — 3VA9471-0WF30 3VA9471-0WF31
— — — — u 3VA9671-0WF30
Terminal cover extended for u — — — — 3VA9131-0WF40

4-pole breakers
— u u — — 3VA9271-0WF40
— — — u — 3VA9471-0WF40
— — — — u 3VA9671-0WF40
Terminal cover offset for — — — u — 3VA9471-0WG30

3-pole breakers
Terminal cover offset for — — — u — 3VA9471-0WG40

4-pole breakers

Phase barriers, terminal covers, and insulating plates
For molded case circuit breakers
/ rated current
3VA5
3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A
Type 125A 250A 250A 600A Part Number
Rear insulating plate extended for 2-pole breakers u — — — 3VA9131-0WJ20

— u u — 3VA9271-0WJ30
— — — u 3VA9471-0WJ30

— — u — 3VA9271-0WJ40
— — — u 3VA9471-0WJ40
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Rear insulating plate offset for 3-pole breakers — — — u 3VA9471-0WK30
Rear insulating plate offset for 4-pole breakers — — — u 3VA9471-0WK40
Control wire tap for busbar — u u — 3VA9270-0WC00

(for fixed mounting) — — — u 3VA9470-0WC00

3VA Plug-in and Draw-out Technology Selection
Plug-in socket
For molded case circuit breakers /
rated current
3VA61/62 3VA63 3VA64
Type 150A/250A 400A 600A Part Number
Plug-in unit, 3-pole, complete kit u — — 3VA9143-0KP00
Consists of: Plug-in socket, Plug-in unit, — u — 3VA9343-0KP00
conversion kit, Mounting screw kit — — u 3VA9443-0KP00
Plug-in unit, 4-pole, complete kit u — — 3VA9144-0KP00

Consists of: Plug-in socket, Plug-in unit, — u — 3VA9344-0KP00
conversion kit, Mounting screw kit — — u 3VA9444-0KP00
3 pole 4 pole
Plug-in unit, 3-pole, conversion kit u — — 3VA9143-0KP10
Consists of: Screw-fastened terminal — u u 3VA9343-0KP10
covers for molded case circuit breakers,
Plug-in contacts, Cable cage, Autotrip plunger
Plug-in unit, 4-pole, conversion kit u — — 3VA9144-0KP10

Consists of: Screw-fastened terminal — u u 3VA9344-0KP10
covers for molded case circuit breakers,
Plug-in contacts, Cable cage, Autotrip plunger
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
3 pole 4 pole
Draw-out units
rated current
3VA61/62 3VA63 3VA64
Type 150A/250A 400A 600A Part Number
Draw-out unit, 3-pole, complete kit u — — 3VA9143-0KD00
Consists of: Draw-out socket, Draw-out unit, conversion — u — 3VA9343-0KD00
kit, Mounting screw kit — — u 3VA9443-0KD00
Draw-out unit, 4-pole, complete kit u — — 3VA9144-0KD00

Consists of: Draw-out socket, Draw-out unit, — u — 3VA9344-0KD00
conversion kit, Mounting screw kit — — u 3VA9444-0KD00
Draw-out unit, 3-pole, conversion kit u — — 3VA9143-0KD10

Consists of: Screw-fastened terminal covers, — u u 3VA9343-0KD10
Side wall, Plug-in contacts, Cable cage, Autotrip plunger
Draw-out unit, 4-pole, conversion kit u — — 3VA9144-0KD10

Consists of: Screw-fastened terminal covers, — u u 3VA9344-0KD10
Side wall, Plug-in contacts, Cable cage, Autotrip plunger
3 pole 4 pole
Note: Crank handle for the drawout unit must be ordered seperately.

Accessories
rated current
3VA61/62 3VA63/64
Type 150A/250A 400A/600A Part Number
Cable cage for plug-in/draw-out unit 3-/4- u — 3VA9167-0KB02
pole (spare part) Cable duct for routing of
the required cables from the internal acc.
on the back of the breaker.
— u 3VA9367-0KB02
Door feedthrough u — 3VA9147-0KT00
— u 3VA9347-0KT00
Autotrip plunger u — 3VA9267-0KP81

Plug-in unit
— u 3VA9457-0KP81
Autotrip plunger u — 3VA9267-0KD81

Draw-out unit
— u 3VA9457-0KD81
5
Terminal cover for plug-in/draw-out unit, u — 3VA9143-0KB01
3-pole (spare part) To provide circuit breaker
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
touch protection, for mounting on the
molded case cicuit breaker
— u 3VA9343-0KB01
Terminal cover for plug-in/draw-out unit, u — 3VA9144-0KB01

4-pole (spare part) To provide circuit breaker
touch protection, for mounting on the
molded case cicuit breaker
— u 3VA9344-0KB01
Crank handle for draw-out unit 3VA9987-0KD81

Insulated, including crank holder

Other Accessories
Type Part Number
Communication link for draw-out unit 3VA9977-0KC00
Consists of: Cable kit with 3 special position signaling switches,
connecting cable 3VA9987-0KC10
Position signaling switches 3VA9977-0KB00

For draw-out unit
5
Spare connecting cable 3VA9987-0KC10

To connect the position signaling switches for
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
communication with the COM060
Auxiliary circuit connector 3VA9977-0KD80

n For draw-out units
Auxiliary circuit connector 3VA9977-0KP80

n For plug-in units
Cylinder lock (type Ronis) 3VA9980-0VL10

n Includes a lock with 2 keys
3VA9980-0VL30
n For locking
3VA9980-0VL40
n For installation in all rotary operators with shaft stub
n For mounting in the adapter kit for the accessories component
Cylinder lock adapter for draw-out unit 3VA9970-0LF40

n For fitting a cylinder lock in the right-hand side wall of the draw-out unit
n To prevent unauthorized withdrawl or insertion of the circuit breaker;
n Circuit breaker can be locked in the CONNECT, TEST, or DISCONNECT position

Molded Case
3VA UL Molded CaseCircuit Breakers
Circuit Breakers
Accessories and Spare Parts
3VA Communication and Testing/Commissioning Devices Selection
Communication and testing/commissioning devices
Communications overview
■ Design
powermanager power powerconfig

monitoring software software
PROFIBUS
I201_19498
Ethernet (Modbus TCP)
SIMATIC S7
PROFINET
5
3VA-line
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
T-Connector T-Connector
4 COM800
breaker data server
DSP800
display
3VA6 molded case 3VA6 molded case

circuit breaker circuit breaker
COM060 7KM PAC Switched 7KM PAC 7KM PAC RS485

communication module Ethernet PROFINET PROFIBUS DP MODBUS RTU
expansion module expansion module expansion module

Modules
For molded case circuit
breakers / rated current
3VA63/64/65/66
3VA61/62 400A/600A
Type 150A/250 A 800A/1000A Part Number
24 V Module u — 3VA9177-0TB50
n 24 V DC
— u 3VA9377-0TB50
n For mounting in the right-hand accessories
compartment of the 3VA6

n Optional energy supply for the ETU, also includes
contiunous operation of the ETU display and the

metering function of the ETU 8-series
COM060 communication module u — 3VA9177-0TB10
n For mounting in the right-hand accessories
— u 3VA9377-0TB10
compartment of the 3VA6 molded case circuit breaker
(including ETU power supply)
n Communication with the COM800/COM100 breaker
data server via the 3VA-line

n Including a T-Connector
Spare SLC adapter COM060, u — 3VA9187-0TB60

24 V module accessory for:
n 3VA61/62 100/150/250
Spare SLC adapter COM060, — u 3VA9387-0TB60

24 V module accessory for:
n 3VA63/64 400/600
5
Breaker data server

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Type Part Number

COM800 breaker data server 3VA9977-0TA10
n 2 terminating resistors
n Central communication module for connecting up to eight 3VA6 molded
case circuit breakers via the 3VA-line

n Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s interface
n Module slot for plugging on an optional PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET
or RS485 module
COM100 breaker data server 3VA9977-0TA20

n 2 terminating resistors
n Central communication module for connecting one 3VA6 molded
case circuit breaker

n Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s interface
n Module slot for plugging on an optional PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET
or RS485 module
7KM PAC PROFIBUS DP expansion module 7KM9300-0AB01-0AA0

n The 7KM PAC PROFIBUS DP expansion module is used for connecting
the COM800/COM100 breaker data server, and the 3VA molded case circuit
breakers conneccted to it, to PROFIBUS DPV1
n The 7KM PAC PROFIBUS DP expansion module provides the status and measured
quantities of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker for the PROFIBUS DP master.
It receives information (e.g. commands) from the PROFIBUS DP master, and
forwards this information to the 3VA molded case circuit breaker
7KM PAC Switched Ethernet PROFINET expansion module 7KM9300-0AE01-0AA0
n The 7KM PAC Switched Ethernet PROFINET expansion module is used to connect
the COM800/COM100 breaker data server, and the connected 3VA molded case
circuit breaker, to PROFINET via two Ethernet interfaces
n The 7KM PAC Switched Ethernet PROFINET expansion module provides the status
and measured quantities of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker to PROFINET via
the PROFINET IO, PROFIenergy and Modbus TCP protocols
7KM PAC RS485 Modbus RTU expansion module 7KM9300-0AM00-0AA0

n The 7KM PAC RS485 Modbus expansion module is used to connect the COM800/
COM100 breaker data server, and the 3VA molded case circuit breaker connected
to it, to Modbus RTU
n The 7KM PAC RS485 Modbus expansion module provides the status and measured
quantities of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker for the Modbus RTU master.
It receives information (e.g. commands) from the Modbus RTU master, and forwards
this information to the 3VA molded case circuit breaker

Accessories for Communication
Type Part Number
T-Connector 3VA9987-0TG10
n Spare part
n Provides spur line feeder to COM060 and loops to the nextcircuit breaker
n Includes a connection adapter for mounting on the 3VA6 breaker enclosure
DIN rail adapter 3VA9987-0TG11

For snapping the T-Connector onto a DIN rail
Preassembled T-Connector-to-T-Connector or
T-Connector-to-COM800/ COM100 connecting cable
n 0.4 m long 3VA9987-0TC10
n 1 m long 3VA9987-0TC20
Preassembled connecting cable for extending the

COM060-to-T-Connector spur line connection
n 0.4 m long 3VA9987-0TF20
n 0.8 m long 3VA9987-0TF10
Additional bus terminating resistors 3VA9987-0TE10
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Voltage tap to external N conductor 3VA9987-0UC10
Cable for connecting the neutral point for the metering function of the
8-Series ETU, length 1.5 m
External current transformer as straight-through transformer. Connection of an external current

transformer for the N conductor for 3-pole 3VA6 molded case circuit breakers for 5-series and
8-series ETUs (ETU850, ETU856, ETU860), including connecting cable
n In = 25 ... 150A 3VA9077-0NA10

n In = 160 ... 350 A 3VA9177-0NA10
n In = 400 ... 630 A 3VA9377-0NA10
n In = 600 ... 1000 A 3VA9677-0NA10
DSP800 display 3VA9977-0TD10
n For displaying the status, measured values and parameters of up to 8
3VA6 molded cases circuit breakers

n Connection to the COM800/COM100 via Ethernet for displaying information
of the COM800/COM100 and the connected 3VA6 molded case circuit breaker
EFB300 3VA9977-0UA10
n External function box for connection to the ETU of the 3VA6 molded case circuit breaker
n 4 digital outputs for information output, 1 digital input
n ZSI functionality
n S0 interface
n Including cable 1.5 m in length
Connecting cable for EFB300 and MMB300. Spare part

n 1.5 m long 3VA9987-0UB10
n 3.0 m long 3VA9987-0UB20
n 3.0 m long for 3VA with EFB and RCD820 3VA9987-0UB30

Test devices
Type Part Number
TD300 3VA9977-0MA10
n Connection to the front interface of the ETU
n Test device for activating the ETU and triggering a test trip
TD500 3VA9977-0MB10
n Connection to the front interface of the ETU
n Initiation of various test trips (LSING)
n USB interface for connection of a PC using powerconfig
n ETU parameterization
n Including external power supply unit with adapter for Europe, UL and GB
n Including connecting cable to the 3VA6 molded case circuit breaker

5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Spare part: External power supply for TD500 3VA9987-0MX10

110 ... 240 V AC
Spare part: Cable for connecting to the TD500 to the 3VA6 molded 3VA9977-0MY10
case circuit breaker
Maintenance Mode Box

MMB300 3VA9977-0UF10
n Realization of the NEC 240.87 (Arc Energy Reduction) -> personal protection
during maintenance work

n Switch into maintenance mode by changing the I- and G-protection
to the lowest possible value through an external signal (e.g. door contact)
n Available for all 3VA6 circuit breakers with electronic trip unit
n Daisy chain up to 8 circuit breakers equipped with MMB300
n Additional digital output (D01) for ETU signals available
n Capable of DIN rail mounting
n Includes cable 1.5m in length

3VA Accessories and Spare Parts Selection
Locking, Blocking, & Interlocking
rated current
3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA4 3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Type 125A 125A 250A 250A 600A 1000A Part Number
Blocking device for the handle — u — — — — 3VA9038-0LB10
— — u u u — 3VA9378-0LB10
Padlock device for the handle u — — — — — 3VA9038-0LB11

— — u u — — 3VA9138-0LB11
— — — — u — 3VA9338-0LB11
— — — — — u 3VA9578-0LB10
3VA5/3VA6 3VA4
Adapter kit for mounting the cylinder lock (type — u — — — — 3VA9137-0LF10
Ronis) in the accessories compartment of the
— — u — — — 3VA9237-0LF10
molded case circuit breaker Comprising 2 cylinder
lock casings (one for locking and one for interlock- — — — u — — 3VA9147-0LF10
ing) and the appropriate mounting module — — — — u — 3VA9347-0LF10
n To implement an interlock or a lock: select
5
suitable cylinder lock(s) — — — — — u 3VA9577-0LF10
n For an interlock: select the same cylinder lock
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
number
Cylinder lock (type Ronis)

n Includes a lock with 2 keys
n For locking or interlocking
n For installation in all rotary operators with
shaft stub
n For mounting in the adapter kit for the
accessories compartment
n Key 1 (lock number 1) — u u u u — 3VA9980-0VL10
Sliding bar — u — — — — 3VA9138-0VF30
Complete kit for interlocking 2 circuit breakers — — u — — — 3VA9238-0VF30
n The article number must be ordered 2X to
— — — u — — 3VA9148-0VF30
implement an interlock between 3 breakers
of the same size — — — — u — 3VA9348-0VF30
Module for handle interlock using a bowden cable — u — — — — 3VA9137-0VF10

n A separate handle interlock module is required
— — u — — — 3VA9237-0VF10
for each switching device — — — u — — 3VA9147-0VF10
n A Bowden cable must be ordered separately
— — — — u — 3VA9347-0VF10
— — — — — u 3VA9577-0VF10
Rear interlock with rod — u u u u — 3VA9078-0VM10

Complete Kit
n Mounting frames are not included in scope of
supply
Rear interlock with rod — — — — — u 3VA9578-0VM10

Complete Kit
n Mounting frames are included in scope of
supply
Rear interlock with rod — u u u u — 3VA9078-0VM30

Complete Kit for plug-in/draw-out unit
n Mounting frames are not included in scope of
supply

3VA Accessories for Locking, Blocking and Interlocking Selection
Locking, Blocking, & Interlocking
rated current
3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Bowden cable
n Length 0.6 m u u u u — 3VA9980-0VC10
Mounting frame for rear interlock with rodab

The following are required for the complete
mounting frame kit:
n Profile poles u u u u — 3VA9078-0VK10
n Mounting Plates u — — — — 3VA9138-0VK20
— u — — — 3VA9238-0VK20
— — u — — 3VA9248-0VK20
— — — u — 3VA9448-0VK20
Cover frame for door cut-out

Cover frame for door cut-out for molded u — — — — 3VA9033-0SB10
case circuit breaker — u u — — 3VA9143-0SB10
n 3-pole, door cut-out without trip unit
5
— — — u — 3VA9373-0SB10
— — — — u 3VA9583-0SB10
Cover frame for door cut-out for molded — — — — 3VA9033-0SB20
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
u
case circuit breaker — u — — — 3VA9233-0SB20
n 3-pole, door cut-out with trip unit
— — u — — 3VA9143-0SB20
— — — u — 3VA9343-0SB20
— — — — u 3VA9583-0SB20
case circuit breaker — u u — — 3VA9144-0SB10
n 4-pole, door cut-out without trip unit
— — — u — 3VA9374-0SB10
— — — — u 3VA9584-0SB10
case circuit breaker — u — — — 3VA9234-0SB20
n 4-pole, door cut-out with trip unit — — u — — 3VA9144-0SB20
— — — u — 3VA9344-0SB20
— — — — u 3VA9584-0SB20
Cover frame for door cut-out for MO320 u — — — — 3VA9033-0SB10
motor operators — u u — — 3VA9237-0SB30
— — — u — 3VA9377-0SB30
Cover frame for door cut-out for front u — — — — 3VA9033-0SB10
mounted rotary operators — u u — — 3VA9143-0SB10
— — — u — 3VA9373-0SB10
Cover frame for door cut-out for front — — — u — 3VA9377-0SB30
mounted rotary operator with door interlock — — — — u 3VA9583-0SB50
Cover frame for door cut-out for door — u u — — 3VA9233-0SB20
feedthrough — — — u — 3VA9333-0SB20
Labeling plate for cover frame 3VA9087-0SX10
a 2mounting plates are required. They are screwed onto b Breakers

with plug-in unit can be mounted on the
the profile rail that can be ordered above. Different mounting plates, but the profile rails cannot be used.
breakers can be mutually interlocked.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Auxi
3VA Accessories and Spare Parts Selection

Other accessories
rated current
3VA5 3VA5
3VA6 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 150A 400A 800A
Busbar adapter system with 60 mm u — — — — 8US1211-4SS00a
busbar center-to-center spacing — u u — — 8US1213-4AP03b
3-pole — — — u — 8US1213-4AH04b
Busbar adapter system with 60 mm u — — — — 8US1215-4SS00

busbar center to center spacing,
bottom connection, 3-pole
Busbar adapter designed for 3VA breaker

used as a main
5
Metric mounting screw kit u — — — — 3VA9151-0SS10
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
For fixed mounted breakers 1-pole
Metric mounting screw kit (2 pcs) u — — — — 3VA9116-0SS10
Metric mounting screw kit (4 pcs) u u — — — 3VA9114-0SS10
For fixed mounted breakers 3-,4-pole
Metric mounting screw kit — — u — — 3VA9126-0SS10
Metric mounting screw kit — — — u — 3VA9328-0SS10
For plug-in and draw-out unit
SAE mounting screw kit (2 pcs) u — — — — 3VA9151-0SS00
SAE Mounting screw kit (2 pcs) u — — — — 3VA9156-0SS00
SAE Mounting screw kit (4 pcs) u — — — — 3VA9154-0SS00
For fixed mounting breakers 4-pole
SAE Mounting screw kit (4 pcs) — u u — — 3VA9164-0SS00
For fixed mounted breakers 3-,4-pole and 3VA6
150/250 plug-in and draw-out units
SAE Mounting screw kit (2 pcs) — u u — — 3VA9166-0SS00
SAE Mounting screw kit (4 pcs) — — — u — 3VA9368-0SS00
For fixed mounted breakers 2-,3-,4-pole and 3VA6
400/600 plug-in and draw-out units
Replacement handle extension accessory — — — u — 3VA9487-0SC10
a Busbaradapter designed for 3VA breaker used as b Busbar adapter designed for 3VA breaker used as either
a feeder. a main or feeder.

3VA Accessory Electrical Requirements Technical data
Auxiliary switches electrical requirements
Auxiliary switches and Auxiliary switches and alarm Auxiliary switches and
alarm switches HQ switches HQ_electronic alarm switches HP
AUX LCS TAS EAS AUX LCS TAS EAS AUX LCS TAS
Rated Ue V AC 240 24 600
operational 50 Hz
voltage V DC 250 24 250
Conventional Ith = Ie A 6 0.3 10
free-air thermal
current
IEC AC-12 12 V A 6 0.3 10
Ratings 24 V A 6 0.3 10
Listed 48 V A 6 -- 10
125 V A 6 -- 10
220/240 V A 6 -- 10
5
380/440 V A -- -- 6
600 V A -- -- 2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
AC-15 12 V A 3 0.3 6
2/4 V A 3 0.3 6
48 V A 3 -- 6
125 V A 3 -- 6
220/240 V A 3 -- 6
380/440 V A -- -- 2
600 V A -- -- 0.6
DC-12 12 V A 6 0.1 6
24 V A 4 0.1 6
48 V A 2 -- 2
110 V A 0.5 -- 0.6
250 V A 0.25 -- 0.3
DC-13 12 V A 1 0.07 3
24 V A 0.8 0.07 3
48 V A 0.4 -- 0.8
110 V A 0.2 -- 0.2
250 V A 0.1 -- 0.1
Max. rated Inductive load 24 V A 3 0.3 6
current (UL/CSA) (0.75-0.8 AC) 300 V A 3 -- 6
600 V A -- -- 6
Pilot duty (AC) 24 V A 3 -- 6
127 V A 3 -- 6
240 V A 3 -- 3
480 V A -- -- 1.5
600 V A -- -- 1.2
Resistive load (DC) 24 V A 0.25 0.1 0.3
250 V A 0.25 -- 0.3
Resistive load - pilot 125 V A 0.6 -- 0.9
duty sequence (DC) 250 V A 0.3 -- 0.55
Minimum load At 24 mA 70 0.5 70
V DC
At 5 V DC mA -- 1 --

Shunt trip/undervoltage electrical requirements
Shunt trip left Shunt trip Undervoltage Universal

STL flexible STF releases UVR release UNI
Power consumption Ue 12 V DC W 50 -- -- --
24 50 V AC/60 Hz VA 50 -- -- --
24 ... 30 V DC W 7 ... 50 -- -- --
48 ... 60 50 V AC/60 Hz VA 15 ... 20 -- -- --
48 ... 60 V DC W 20 ... 30 -- -- --
110 ... 127 50 V AC/60 Hz VA 30 ... 40 -- -- --
110 ... 127 V DC W 30 ... 40 -- -- --
208 ... 277 50 V AC/60 Hz VA 16 ... 35 -- -- --
220 ... 250 V DC W 28 ... 35 -- -- --
380 ... 600 50 V AC/60 Hz VA 10 ... 30 -- -- --
5
24 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- 300 -- --
48 ... 60 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- 340 ... 600 -- --
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
110 ... 127 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- 500 ... 650 -- --
208 ... 277 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- 360 ... 650 -- --
380 ... 500 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- 330 ... 600 -- --
600 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- 300 -- --
12 V DC W -- -- < 2.5 --
24 V DC W -- -- < 2.5 --
48 V DC W -- -- < 2.5 --
60 V DC W -- -- < 2.5 --
125 ... 127 V DC W -- -- < 2.5 --
220 ... 230 V DC W -- -- < 2.5 --
250 V DC W -- -- < 2.5 --
24 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- <2 --
48 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- <2 --
60 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- <2 --
110 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- <2 --
120 ... 127 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- <2 --
208 ... 230 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- <2 --
380 ... 400 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- < 2.5 --
440 ... 480 50 V AC/60 Hz VA -- -- < 2.5 --
12 V DC (Cat II; W -- -- -- UVR: < 2.5
PELV/SELV) SHT: 20
24 V DC (Cat II; W -- -- -- UVR: < 2.5
PELV/SELV) SHT: 20
48 V DC (Cat II; W -- -- -- UVR: < 2.5
PELV/SELV) SHT: 20

Shunt trip/undervoltage electrical requirements

Shunt trip left Shunt trip Undervoltage Universal
STL flexible STF releases UVR release UNI
Rated impulse withstand Uimp kV 6 4 0.5

voltage 3VA UL Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Making current Imax at Accessories
V 1.5 A/24 V AC and
18 Spare
A/24 V AC Parts
5 mA/480 V 1.5 A/24 V
Maximum tripping time ms < 10
Service life Electrical trips 8500
Motor operators
Mechanical switching cycles of the circuit breaker 25000
akers
Priority over other control
signals
■ Overview
Given ■ Benefits
Degree of protection Lid of the accessories compartment closed IP40
MO320 front motor operator • Remote ope
Lid of the accessories compartment open IP 20 means of dig
The MO320 motor operator is mounted on the front of the 3VA UL
Minimum signal duration ms 40
molded case circuit 40 --
breaker and opens 40
and closes the molded • Clear switch
quick visual
5
Pick-up (circuit Us/V % 70 ... 110 -- 70 ... 110

Response voltage shunt
Benefits
trip breaker trips)
case circuit breaker by means of digital input commands (e.g.
from pushbuttons or a PLC). It can also be operated manually, • Locking cap
release of thePick-up
• Remote operation molded(circuit
case circuitUs/V
breaker by % -- -- 85 ... 110
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Undervoltage
breaker can be however, and a handle is provided on the unit for this purpose. • Even with a m
meansvoltage
response of digital input commands
e front of the 3VA UL switched on) for isolating
closes the molded • Clear switching position indication including TRIP provides a The motor operator also features a clear MCCB position
Pick-up (circuit Us/V % -- -- 35 ... 70
ut commands (e.g. quick visual overview and prevents
breaker trips)operating errors indicator which indicates ON and OFF and, via LED, whether the
perated manually, • Locking capability
Tripping frequency prevents unauthorized
Trips per hour operations circuit breaker
Unlimited
has tripped
120
(TRIP). It is thus possible to identify
Unlimited ■ Design
nit for this purpose. • Even with a mounted MO320 the 3VA still meets the standards the switching position of the molded case circuit breaker at any
Can be used for electrical
time.
No No Yes • The MO320
CB position for isolating
interlocking characteristics
of molded case defined by IEC / EN 60947-1 a mounting f
ia LED, whether the circuit breakers
Two different reset modes can be selected, i.e. in one mode, the lid of the mo
possible to identify Design operator resets the molded case circuit breaker automatically
rcuit breaker at any and in the other, it waits for confirmation by an OFF signal before
• The MO320 motor operator is simply snapped into position on
a mounting frame that is installed instead of the accessories it resets the breaker.
■ Technical spe
e. in one mode, the lid of the molded case circuit breaker.
aker automatically Motor operator electrical requirements Furthermore, the motor operator can be locked in the MO320 motor op
n OFF signal before Technical specifications
OFF position by means of several padlocks.
3VA5 Degree of protec

ked in the
MO320 motor operator 3VA5 3VA5 3VA6 3VA6 Rated control sup
125 A 250 A 150 A/ 400 A/ (operating range
250 A 600 A supply voltage)
Degree of protection NEMA 1
Rated control supply voltage 24 V ... 60 V DC (0.85 ... 1.26)
Rating
(operating range of control 110 V ... 230 V AC/ Make time, typica
supply voltage) 110 V ... 250 V DC (0.85 ... 1.1) Break time, typic
Rating 250 W, max. 500 W (60 ms)
Make time, typically < 800 ms < 1000 ms < 1700 ms
Break time, typically < 800 ms < 1000 ms < 1400 ms
4 ■ Selection and ordering data

Version For molded case circuit
For molded case circuit DT Article No. Price PE PS*/ PG breakers/
breakers/ per PU (UNIT, P. unit rated current
rated current SET,
M) 3VA5 3VA5 3VA6 3VA6
3VA5 3VA5 3VA6 3VA6
125 A 250 A 150 A,  400 A,
125 A 250 A 150 A, 400 A,
250 A 600 A
250 A 600 A
Motor operators
stored energy feature Motor operators without stored energy feature 
(MO320)
Versions
-- -- -- 3VA9137-0HA10 1 1 unit 1CB • 24 ... 60 V DC ✓ -- -- --
-- -- 3VA9277-0HA10 1 1 unit 1CB
-- ✓ ✓ --
ED 125A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Ordering Instructions
All ED Frame Sentron circuit breakers are supplied with load side lugs. If line side lugs are required, add “L” suffix to catalogue number.
Consult Siemens sales office for any additional charge.
50°C Calibration, 400HZ - see page 5-150. All ED frame circuit breakers may be reverse connected.
Type ED2e Blue Label Shipping Weights

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Number of Number per Shipping
Continuous 125V DC Poles Carton Weight (lbs.)
Current Rating 120V AC 125V DC 240V AC 250V DC 240V AC ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number 1 30 38
15 ED21B015d — ED23B015 2 10 25
20 ED21B020d ED22B020 ED23B020 3 10 38
25 ED21B025 ED22B025 ED23B025 CED6
30 ED21B030 ED22B030 ED23B030 2 5 20
35 ED21B035 ED22B035 ED23B035 3 5 30
40 ED21B040 ED22B040 ED23B040
45
50
ED21B045
ED21B050
ED22B045
ED22B050
ED23B045
ED23B050
Lugs
60 ED21B060 ED22B060 ED23B060 Ampere No. of Catalogue Wire
Rating Poles Number Range
70 ED21B070 ED22B070 ED23B070
80 ED21B080 ED22B080 ED23B080 Aluminum Body Lugs
90 ED21B090 ED22B090 ED23B090
100 ED21B100 ED22B100 ED23B100 #14–#10
Line/Load Cu
All 15–25A 1, 2, 3
SA1E025 #12–#10
Type ED4e Blue Label Al
5
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Line Side #10–1/0
120V AC All 30–100A 1, 2, 3
Continuous LN1E100 Cu/Al
Current Rating 277V AC 125V DC 480V AC 250V DC 480V AC
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ED2, 4,
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Load Side #10–#4
CED6 1
15 ED41B015d — ED43B015 LD1E060 Cu/Al
30–60A
20 ED41B020d ED42B020 ED43B020
25 ED41B025 ED42B025 ED43B025 ED2, 4, #6–#1/0
Load Side
30 ED41B030 ED42B030 ED43B030 CED6 1 Cu/Al
LD1E100
35 ED41B035 ED42B035 ED43B035 70–100A
40 ED41B040 ED42B040 ED43B040
45 ED41B045 ED42B045 ED43B045 ED2, 4, 6, #10–1/0
Load Side
50 ED41B050 ED42B050 ED43B050 HED4 2, 3 Cu/Al
LN1E100
60 ED41B060 ED42B060 ED43B060 30–100A
70 ED41B070 ED42B070 ED43B070 #3–3/0

80 ED41B080 ED42B080 ED43B080 All 110, Line/Load Cu
2, 3
90 ED41B090 ED42B090 ED43B090 125A TA1E6125 #1–2/0
100 ED41B100 ED42B100 ED43B100 Al
Copper Body Lugs
110 — ED42B110 ED43B110
125 — ED42B125 ED43B125 All 30–125A Line/Load #10–1/0
1, 2, 3
only TC1ED6150  Cu
Type ED6e Blue Label Compression Lugs
Continuous 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole All ED, CED CCE125 2/0

Current Rating 347V AC 600V AC 250V DC 600V AC 500V DC
15 ED61B015 — ED63B015
20 ED61B020 ED62B020 ED63B020
25 ED61B025 ED62B025 ED63B025
30 ED61B030 ED62B030 ED63B030
35 ED61B035 ED62B035 ED63B035
40 ED61B040 ED62B040 ED63B040
45 ED61B045 ED62B045 ED63B045
50 ED61B050 ED62B050 ED63B050
60 ED61B060 — ED63B060
70 ED61B070 — ED63B070
80 ED61B080 — ED63B080
90 ED61B090 — ED63B090
100 ED61B100 — ED63B100
110 — — ED63B110
125 — — ED63B125
Note: ED frame circuit breakers qualified to  CSA Certified only (Not UL)  See Note: A, page 5-150. Modifications page 5-147
UL 489 Supplement SB “Naval”— See  ForCED types and all 110–125 ampere ED  SWD rated.
page 5-137 for additional information  HACR
Accessories page 5-151 - 5-159
frames. rated.

ED 125A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type HED4f Black Label FIGURE1 - ED, HED, HHED
�
Continuous D
�
Current Rating 277V AC 125V DC 480V AC 250V DC 480V AC
�
�
15 HED41B015a HED42B015 HED43B015 D1
�
20 HED41B020a HED42B020 HED43B020
H
25 HED41B025 HED42B025 HED43B025
30 HED41B030 HED42B030 HED43B030
35 HED41B035 HED42B035 HED43B035
40 HED41B040 HED42B040 HED43B040
� �
�
45 HED41B045 HED42B045 HED43B045 � �
50 HED41B050 HED42B050 HED43B050
� � W3
60 HED41B060 HED42B060 HED43B060 W1 W2
1-POLE 2-POLE 3-POLE
70 HED41B070 HED42B070 HED43B070
80 HED41B080 HED42B080 HED43B080
90 HED41B090 HED42B090 HED43B090
FIGURE 2 - CED (3-Pole shown)
100 HED41B100 HED42B100 HED43B100
�
D
�
110 — HED42B110 HED43B110
�
125 — HED42B125 HED43B125
�
D1
�
H
Fuseless Current Limiting
Red Label
Type CED6
Continuous 2-Pole 3-Pole
Current 600V AC, 250V DC 600V AC, 500V DC b
5
�
Rating
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number � �
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
015 — CED63B015 W2, W3

020 CED62B020 CED63B020
025 — —
030 CED62B030 CED63B030 Dimensions (in inches)
035 — —
Breaker Type W1 W2 W3 H D D1
040 CED62B040 CED63B040
045 — — Figure 1
050 CED62B050 CED63B050 ED2, ED4, ED6, 1 2 3 6.35 3.92 4.56
060 CED62B060 CED63B060 HED4, ED6 ETI
070 CED62B070 CED63B070 Figure 2
— 2 3 9.58 3.92 4.56
080 CED62B080 CED63B080 CED6, CED6 ETI
090 CED62B090 CED63B090
100 CED62B100 CED63B100
110 — CED63B110
125 CED62B125 CED63B125
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 / UL 489 AIR (File #E10848) IEC 947-2
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (KA) Volts AC (50/60Hz)
Volts AC Volts DC 220/240 380/415 500
Breaker Type 120 240 277 347 480 600 125 250 500b lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
ED2 (1-P) 10 — — — — — 5 — — — — — — — —
ED2 (2, 3-P) — 10 — — — — — 5 (2-P) — — — — — — —
ED4 (1-P) 65 — 22 — — 18 — 30 — — — — — — — —
ED4 (2, 3-P) — 65 — — — — 30 (2-P) — — — — — — —
ED6 (1P) — — — 30e — 25 — — — — — — — — — —
ED6 (2, 3-P) — 65 — — 18 — 30 (2-P) 18 (3-P) 65 17 35 9 18 5
HED4 (1-P) 100 — 65 — — — 30 — — — — — — — —
(15–30A) 100 — 100 25 — — — 30 — — — — — — — —
HED4 (1-P) — — — 42 — 30 (2-P) — — — — — —
(35–100A)
HED4 (2, 3-P)c
CED6 (2, 3-P) — 200 — — 200 100 — 30 (2-P) 50 (3-P) — — — — — —
 SWD rated.  HED4 type circuit breakers meet the CSA / UL criteria for Single Pole 15-30A 30KA @ 347V CSA only.
When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker “current limiting” at 240V AC. 35-100A 18KA @ 347V CSA only.
ED6-ETI, CED6-ETI, see page 5-101 for ordering  HACR rated.
is CSA Certified / UL listed and rated for use on 500V DC
information.
ungrounded UPS systems.

Accessories for: Shunt Trip Combinations
ED 125A Frame 1 Shunt Trip
Control 1 Shunt Trip and 1 Auxiliary Switch 1 Shunt Trip and 1 Shunt Trip and
Voltage 1 Shunt Trip 1 Auxiliary Switch and 1 Alarm Switch 1 Alarm Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches
AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
24 — S17ED60 — — — —
48 — S18ED60 — — — —
120 — S01ED60 S01ED62A S01ED62AB S01ED62B S01ED62AA
208 — — S02ED62A S02ED62AB S02ED62B S02ED62AA
240 — S03ED60 S03ED62A S03ED62AB S03ED62B S03ED62AA
277 — S15ED60 S15ED64A S15ED64AB S15ED64B —
480 — S04ED60 S04ED64A S04ED64AB S04ED64B —
— 12 S16ED60 S16ED62A — — —
— 24 S07ED60 S07ED62A S07ED62AB S07ED62B S07ED62AA
Combinations

Available only when ordered together. — 250 S13ED60 S13ED62A S13ED62AB S13ED62B S13ED62AA
Only one module can be added to a
breaker. Additional accessories, which
always attach to the left pole, cannot be Undervoltage Trip Combinations
added to the combination later. Adds 1 1 Undervoltage Trip
inch pole space. 1 Undervoltage and 1 Auxiliary 1 Undervoltage 1 Undervoltage
Control Trip and Switch and Trip and Trip and 2
Equipment Voltage 1 Undervoltage Trip 1 Auxiliary Switch 1 Alarm Switch 1 Alarm Switch" Auxiliary Switches
Ground Sensing AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

120 — U01ED60 U01ED62A
Catalogue Number
U01ED62AB
Catalogue Number
U01ED62B
Catalogue Number
U01ED62AA
5
A field addable kit containing 30mA or 208 — U02ED60 U02ED62A U02ED62AB U02ED62B U02ED62AA
5 mA ground fault accessory module, 240 — U03ED60 U03ED62A U03ED62AB U03ED62B U03ED62AA
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
current transformer with 24 inch leads, 277 — U16ED60 U16ED64A U16ED64AB U16ED64B —
and current transformer mounting 480 — U06ED60 U06ED64A U06ED64AB U06ED64B —
equipment. Current transformer to 600 — U08ED60 — — — —
mount in gutter of lighting panel or any — 24 U13ED60 U13ED62A U13ED62AB U13ED62B U13ED62AA
control panel. Accessory module — 48 U14ED60 U14ED62A U14ED62AB U14ED62B U14ED62AA
operates from separate 120V control — 125 U10ED60 U10ED62A U10ED62AB U10ED62B U10ED62AA
power source. — 250 U12ED60 U12ED62A — — U12ED62AA
Both 30MA and 5MA devices are
equipment protection devices only. Do
not use for personnel protection. Auxiliary and Alarm Switch Combinations
1 Alarm Switch
Maximum Alarm Switch and 2 Auxiliary and 2 Auxiliary
Voltage 1 Auxiliary Switch* 1 Alarm Switch 1 Auxiliary Switch Switches Switches
AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
240 250 A01ED62 B00ED62 A01ED62B A02ED62 A02ED62B
480 — A01ED64 B00ED64 A01ED64B — —
— 12 A01EDLV* Gold Plated Contacts—for PLC use
Alarm Switch Only

Maximum
Voltage 1 Alarm Switch
240 250 B00ED62
480 B00ED64
Ground Fault Sensing Relay Kit — Equipment Protection Only

For Use With Number Description Catalogue Number
Breaker Frame of Poles 30mA 30mA 5mA
Basic Kit GF01ED60 GF01ED65
Basic Kit with Normally
ED2, ED4, ED6, GF01ED60B0 GF01ED65B0
1, 2, 3 Open Bell Alarm
HED4, CED6
Basic Kit with Normally
GF01ED60BC GF01ED65BC
Closed Bell Alarm

FD 250A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type FXD6-A Blue Label Ordering Information
Complete Breaker Unassembled with
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker – Without Lugs)
Lugs
Continuous 2-Pole b
3-Pole Prices of FD6, HFD6, and HHFD6
Current Rating
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number breakers includes frame, trip
70 FXD62B070 FXD63B070
and both line and load lugs
80 FXD62B080 FXD63B080 (TA1FD350A). When ordered by
90 FXD62B090 FXD63B090 these catalogue numbers, the
100 FXD62B100 FXD63B100 customer will receive the frame, trip,
110 FXD62B110 FXD63B110 and lugs separately packaged. For
125 FXD62B125 FXD63B125
150 FXD62B150 FXD63B150
applications requiring different lugs,
175 FXD62B175 FXD63B175 order individual items as needed.
200 FXD62B200 FXD63B200 Complete Breaker Assembled
225 FXD62B225 FXD63B225 without Lugs
250 FXD62B250 FXD63B250
Prices of FXD6, HFXD6, HHFXD6,
Type FD6-A Blue Label and CFD6 includes frame with non-
interchangeable trip unit installed
Interchangeable Trip only. Order required lugs separately.
For line and load lugs (TA1FD350A)
Continuous Complete Breaker installed, add suffix “L” to catalogue
Current Rating Unassembled with Lugs Frame Only Trip Unit Only
number (add 2 times list price of
b
lugs for each pole).
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC 50°C Applications see page 5-137.
70 FD62B070 FD62T070
400 Hz Applications see page 5-137.
5
80 FD62B080 FD62T080
90 FD62B090 FD62T090
100 FD62B100 FD62T100
Lugs For 75°C Wire d
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
110 FD62B110 FD62T110

125 FD62B125 FD62F250 FD62T125
150 FD62B150 FD62T150 Catalogue Wire
175 FD62B175 FD62T175 Number Range
200 FD62B200 FD62T200 #6—350 kcmil Cu
225 FD62B225 FD62T225 TA1FD350A #4—350 kcmil Al
250 FD62B250 FD62T250 TC1FD350 #6—350 kcmil Cu
Compression Lug
c
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V DC CCF250 350 kcmil Cu/Al
70 FD63B070 FD63T070
80 FD63B080 FD63T080
90 FD63B090 FD63T090
100 FD63B100 FD63T100
110 FD63B110 FD63T110
125 FD63B125 FD63F250 FD63T125
150 FD63B150 FD63T150
175 FD63B175 FD63T175
200 FD63B200 FD63T200
225 FD63B225 FD63T225
250 FD63B250 FD63T250
CSA / UL 489 AIR (File E10848) IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60Hz)
220/240 380/415 500
Breaker Type 240 480 600 250 500c lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
FXD6-A, FD6-A 65 35 22 30 (2-P) 18 (3-P) 65 33 35 9 20 10
HFXD6f, HFD6f 100 65 25 30 (2-P) 25 (3-P) 100 50 65 33 42 21
HHFD6f, HHFXD6f 200 100 25 — — 200 100 100 50 65 33  Type
FXD6-A circuit breakers are CSA / UL Listed for
CFD6 200 200 100 50 (2-P) 50 (3-P) — — — — — — reverse fed applications.
 2-pole units are 3-pole width.
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range  When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is
CSA Certified / UL 489 listed and rated for use on 500V
Breaker Ampere Nominal Instantaneous Values DC ungrounded UPS systems only.
d See Note: A, page 5-147.
Rating Lowg 2 3 4 5 6 7 Highg
e HFD6 and HHFD6 type circuit breakers meet the
70-90 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 UL criteria for “current limiting” at 240 and 480V AC.
100-110 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 f HACR rated.
125-150 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 g +/- 20% Tolerance.
175-200 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000

225-250 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 Modifications page 5-150
Note: FD frame qualified to UL489 supplement SB “NAVAL”.. See page 5-137 for additional information.

FD 250A Frame Sentron Series Selection/Dimensions
Type HFD6e, Type HFXD6cdef Black Label
�
Interchangeable Trip
Continuous Complete Breaker
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width) L
70 HFD62B070 FD62T070
80 HFD62B080 FD62T080
90 HFD62B090 FD62T090
100 HFD62B100 FD62T100
110 HFD62B110 FD62T110
125 HFD62B125 HFD62F250 FD62T125
�
150 HFD62B150 FD62T150
175 HFD62B175 FD62T175 � W �
D
200 HFD62B200 FD62T200
225 HFD62B225 FD62T225
250 HFD62B250 FD62T250 Figure 1 Figure 2
a
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V DC
70 HFD63B070 FD63T070 Dimensions (in inches)
80 HFD63B080 FD63T080 D1
90 HFD63B090 FD63T090 Breaker
W L D (to
100 HFD63B100 FD63T100 Type
handle)
110 HFD63B110 FD63T110
125 HFD63B125 HFD63F250 FD63T125 Figure 1
150 HFD63B150 FD63T150 FXD6-A, FD6-A,
4.50 9.50 4 5.25
175 HFD63B175 FD63T175 HFD6, HFXD6,
HHFD6, FD6-ETIe
5
200 HFD63B200 FD63T200
225 HFD63B225 FD63T225 Figure 2
4.50 14.25 4 5.25
250 HFD63B250 FD63T250 CFD6, CFD6-ETIe
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Type HHFDd, HHFXD6bcdf Shipping Weights
Number Number per Shipping Weight
3-Pole 600V AC, Extra High Interrupting of Poles Carton (lbs.)
70 HHFD63B070 FD63T070 FD6-A, HFD6, HHFD6, FXD6-A
80 HHFD63B080 FD63T080 Assembled Circuit Breaker (less connectors)
90 HHFD63B090 FD63T090 2 1 8.6
100 HHFD63B100 FD63T100 3 1 10
110 HHFD63B110 FD63T110 FD6-A, HFD6, HHFD6 Frame Only
125 HHFD63B125 HHFD63F250 FD63T125 2 1 7.5
150 HHFD63B150 FD63T150 3 1 8.7
175 HHFD63B175 FD63T175 FD6 Trip Unit Only
200 HHFD63B200 FD63T200
2 1 1.1
225 HHFD63B225 FD63T225
3 1 1.3
250 HHFD63B250 FD63T250
CFD6 Assembled Circuit Breaker (less terminals)
2 1 31
Type CFD6cf Red Label 3 1 34
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker Without Lugs)
3-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating 600V AC/500V DC
@ 40° C Catalogue Number
70 CFD63B070
80 CFD63B080
90 CFD63B090
100 CFD63B100
110 CFD63B110
125 CFD63B125
150 CFD63B150
175 CFD63B175
200 CFD63B200
225 CFD63B225
250 CFD63B250
 When
wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker  Type HFXD6, HHFXD6, CFD6 are CSA Certified / UL
is CSA Certified / UL listed and rated for use on 500V DC Listed for reverse feed applications.
 Type HFXD6, HFD6, HHFD6, HHFXD6 meet the CSA
Certified / UL criteria for “Current Limiting” at 240 VAC
 Fornon-interchangeable trip 3-pole HFD6 type circuit and 480V AC.
breaker, change prefix identifier from HFD6 to HFXD6.  FXD6, ETI, CFD6, ETI — See page 5-59 for
Price equals frame and trip prices combined, e.g. price ordering information.
of HFXD63B250 equals price of HFD63F250 plus price of  HACR rated.
FD63T250. Order lugs separately.

Internal Accessories Selection
Accessories: Shunt Trip Combinations
FD 250A Frame Control Voltage 1 Shunt Trip
24 — S17FD60
120 — S01FD60
240 — S03FD60
277 — S15FD60
480 — S04FD60
600 — S06FD60
— 12 S16FD60
— 24 S07FD60
— 48 S09FD60
— 125 S11FD60
— 250 S13FD60
Undervoltage Trip Combinations

1 Undervoltage Trip and
Control Voltage 1 Undervoltage Trip
1 Auxiliary Switch
AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
120 — U01FD60 W01FD64
208 — U02FD60 W02FD64
240 — U03FD60 W03FD64
277 — U16FD60 W16FD64
480 — U06FD60 W06FD64
600 — U08FD60 W08FD64
— 24 U13FD60 W13FD64
— 48 U14FD60 W14FD64
5
— 125 U10FD60 W10FD64

— 250 U12FD60 W12FD64
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Auxiliary Switch Combinations

Voltage 1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches
240 — A01FD62 A02FD62
480 — A01FD64 A02FD64
— 12 A01FDLV Gold Plated Contacts - for PLC use
Alarm Switch Combinations

Maximum 1 Alarm Switch and
Voltage 1 Alarm Switch 1 Auxiliary Switch
480 250 B00FD64 C01FD64
a Auxiliary switch application is for 480V AC maximum.

Note: O
ld F-frame accessories cannot be used in new
Sentron line. Likewise, new FD-frame accessories
cannot be used on old F-frame circuit breakers.

JD 400A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type JXD2-Ae Blue Label Ordering Information
240V AC, 2-pole 250V DC only Complete Breaker Unassembled
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker without Lugs) with Lugs
Prices of JD6, HJD6, and HHJD6
Continuous breakers include frame, trip and
Current Rating 2-Pole (3 Pole Width) 3-Pole both line and load lugs (TA2J6500).
@ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number When ordered by these catalogue
200 JXD22B200 JXD23B200 numbers, the customer will receive
225 JXD22B225 JXD23B225 the frame, trip, and lugs separately
250 JXD22B250 JXD23B250 packaged. For applications
300 JXD22B300 JXD23B300 requiring different lugs, order
350 JXD22B350 JXD23B350 individual items as needed.
400 JXD22B400 JXD23B400
Complete Breaker Assembled
without Lugs
Type JXD6-Aae Blue Label Prices of JXD6, HJXD6, HHJXD6,
and CJD6 include frame with non-
600V AC, 2-pole 250V DC, 3-pole 500V DC interchangeable trip unit installed
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker without Lugs) only. Order required lugs separately.
For line and load lugs (TA2J6500)
Continuous installed, add suffix “L” to catalogue
Current Rating 2-Pole (3 Pole Width) 3-Pole number (add 2 times list price of
@ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number lugs for each pole).
200 JXD62B200 JXD63B2003366.0 100% Rated
225 JXD62B225 JXD63B225 Types JXD6 and HJXD6 breakers
250 JXD62B250 JXD63B250
300 JXD62B300 JXD63B300
are available with 100% ratings. To
350 JXD62B350 JXD63B3503366.0
order add suffix “H” to catalogue
5
400 JXD62B400 JXD63B400 number, and 10% to list price.
100% rated JD breakers require
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
the use of 90°C Cu cable and lugs
Type JD6-Ae Blue Label TC1J6600 or TC2J6500.
50°C Applications see page 5-137.
Interchangeable Trip 400Hz Applications see page 5-137.
Lugs For 75°C Wire c
Catalogue Cables Wire
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width) Number per Lug Range
200 JD62B200 JD62T200 1, 2 #3/0-500 kcmil Cu
225 JD62B225 JD62T225 TA2J6500
2 #4/0-500 kcmil Al
250 JD62B250 JD62T250 1 500-750 kcmil Al
JD62F400 TA1L6750
300 JD62B300 JD62T300 1 500-600 kcmil Cu
350 JD62B350 JD62T350 TC1J6600 1 #3/0-600 kcmil Cu
400 JD62B400 JD62T400
TC2J6500 1, 2 #3/0-500 kcmil Cu
b
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V DC Compression Lug
CCL600 1 500 kcmil Cu/Al
200 JD63B200 JD63T200
225 JD63B225 JD63T225
250 JD63B250 JD63T250
JD63F400
300 JD63B300 JD63T300
350 JD63B350 JD63T350
400 JD63B400 JD63T400
Volts AC (50/60Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60Hz)  Type
JXD2 and JXD6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified /
220/240 380/415 500 UL Listed for reverse feed applications.
Breaker Type 240 480 600 250 500c lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs  When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is
JXD2-2 65 — — 30 (2-P) — — — — — — — CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V DC
JXD6-2, JD6-A 65 35 25 30 (2-P) 25 (3-P) 65 33 40 20 30 15 ungrounded UPS systems only.
HJD6-A, HJXD6-A 100 65 35 30 (2-P) 35 (3-P) 100 50 65 33 42 21  See Note: A, page 5-147.
HHJD6-A, HJXD6 d
200 100 50 — — 200 100 100 50 65 33  HHJD6 type circuit breakers meet the CSA / UL criteria
CJD6 200 150 100 50 (2-P) 50 (3-P) — — — — — — for “current limiting” at 240 and 480V AC.
HACR rated.
f +/- 20% Tolerance.

Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range Note: JD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B
“NAVAL.” See page 5-137 for additional information.
Breaker Ampere Nominal Instantaneous Values
Rating Lowf 2 3 4 5 6 7 Highf
200-300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 Modifications page 5-150
350-400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 Accessories page 5-151 - 5-159

JD 400A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type HJD6-A, HJXD6-Abdf Black Label
Complete Breaker D1
Continuous �
�
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width)
200 HJD62B200 JD62T200
225 HJD62B225 JD62T225
250 HJD62B250 JD62T250
HJD62F400
300 HJD62B300 JD62T300
350 HJD62B350 JD62T350
400 HJD62B400 JD62T400
abe
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V DC � W � D
D
200 HJD63B200 JD63T200
Figure 1 Figure 2
225 HJD63B225 JD63T225
250 HJD63B250 JD63T250
300 HJD63B300
HJD63F400
JD63T300 Dimensions (in inches)
350 HJD63B350 JD63T350 D1
400 HJD63B400 JD63T400 Breaker
W L D (to
Type
handle)
Type HHJD6, HHJXD6-Abdf Figure 1
JXD2-A, JXD6-A,
2-Pole 600V AC (3 Pole Width) JD6-A HJD6-A,
200 HHJD62B200 JD62T200 HJXD6-A, 7.5 11 4 5.44
225 HHJD62B225 JD62T225 HHJD6, HJD6,
5
250 HHJD62B250 JD62T250 HJXD6, HHJXD6,

HHJD62F400 JXD6-ETIe
300 HHJD62B300 JD62T300
Figure 2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
350 HHJD62B350 JD62T350

7.5 17.86 4 5.44
400 HHJD62B400 JD62T400 CJD6, CJD6-ETIe
3-Pole 600V AC Shipping Weights

200 HHJD63B200 JD63T200
Number of Number per Shipping
225 HHJD63B225 JD63T225
Poles Carton Weight (lbs.)
250 HHJD63B250 JD63T250
HHJD63F400 JXD2, JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HHJD6
300 HHJD63B300 JD63T300
Assembled Breaker (less terminals)
350 HHJD63B350 JD63T350
400 HHJD63B400 JD63T400 2 1 "17.5
3 1 19.5"
JD6, HJD6, HHJD6 Frame Only
Type CJD6f Red Label 2
3
1
1
14
15.5
Fuseless Current Limiting JD6 Trip Unit Only
2 1 3.5
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker Without Lugs) 3 1 4
CJD6 Complete Assembled Breaker
2-Pole 3-Pole (less terminals)
Continuous
Current Rating 600V AC/250V DC 600V AC/500V DC 2 1 29.5
@ 40°C Catalogue Number 3 1 31.5
200 CJD63B200
225 CJD63B225
For 2-pole application
250 CJD63B250
use outside poles of
300 CJD63B300
3-pole circuit breaker
350 CJD63B350
400 CJD63B400
For inches / millimeters conversion,  Fornon-interchangeable 3-pole HJD6 or HHJD6 type  JXD6-ETI, CJD6-ETI see page 5-117 for ordering
see Technical section. circuit breaker change the prefix identifier to HJXD6 information.
or HHJXD6. Order lugs separately.  Type HJXD6, HHJXD6 Circuit Breakers are CSA Certified /
2-pole units available in 3-pole construction.

UL Listed for reverse fed applications.
 When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is  CE applies to non-interchangeable type HJXD only.
CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V DC  HACR rated.
ungrounded UPS systems only.

SJD 400A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Series Selection
Current Limiting
Type SJD6-B Type SHJD6-B Type SCJD6-B
Blue Label Black Label Red Label
Max 3-Pole, 600V AC 3-Pole, 600V AC 3-Pole, 600V AC
Current Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Rating (Advanced trip unit)c (Basic trip unit) (Advanced trip unit)c (Basic trip unit) (Advanced trip unit)c (Basic trip unit)
200 SJD6A200LI SJD6B200LI SHJD6A200LI SHJD6B200LI SCJD6A200LI SCJD6B200LI
200 SJD6A200LIG SJD6B200LIG SHJD6A200LIG SHJD6B200LIG SCJD6A200LIG SCJD6B200LIG
200 SJD6A200LSI SJD6B200LSI SHJD6A200LSI SHJD6B200LSI SCJD6A200LSI SCJD6B200LSI
200 SJD6A200LSIG SJD6B200LSIG SHJD6A200LSIG SHJD6B200LSIG SCJD6A200LSIG SCJD6B200LSIG
SJD 400A Frame – 100% Ratedb

Blue Label Black Label
Max 3-Pole, 600V AC 3-Pole, 600V AC Ordering Information
Current Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
5
Rating (Advanced trip unit)c (Basic trip unit) (Advanced trip unit)c (Basic trip unit)
200 SJD6A200LIH SJD6B200LIH SHJD6A200LIH SHJD6B200LIH Pricing information for all Digital
300 SJD6A300LIH SJD6B300LIH SHJD6A300LIH SHJD6B300LIH Sentron Series SJD Frames is
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
400 SJD6A400LIH SJD6B400LIH SHJD6A400LIH SHJD6B400LIH for complete breaker only - price
200 SJD6A200LIGH SJD6B200LIGH SHJD6A200LIGH SHJD6B200LIGH required lugs as separate items -
300 SJD6A300LIGH SJD6B300LIGH SHJD6A300LIGH SHJD6B300LIGH
400 SJD6A400LIGH SJD6B400LIGH SHJD6A400LIGH SHJD6B400LIGH
lugs are suitable for 75°C Wire.
200 SJD6A200LSIH SJD6B200LSIH SHJD6A200LSIH SHJD6B200LSIH
200 SJD6A200LSIGH SJD6B200LSIGH SHJD6A200LSIGH SHJD6B200LSIGH
300 SJD6A300LSIGH SJD6B300LSIGH SHJD6A300LSIGH SHJD6B300LSIGH Shipping Weights
400 SJD6A400LSIGH SJD6B400LSIGH SHJD6A400LSIGH SHJD6B400LSIGH
Breaker Number per Shipping
Type Carton Weight (lbs)
SJD6-B 1 20
Trip Unit Adjustable Functions SHJD6-B 1 20
Short Short SCJD6-B 1 33
Suffix Cont Long Instan- Short Time Time Ground Ground
Letter Trip Current Time taneous Time Fixed lt Fault Fault
2
Code Type Setting Delay Pick Up Pick Up Delay Delay Pick Up Delay
LI LI u u u
Lugs for 75° C Wire a
No. of
LIG LIG u u u u u
cables
LSI LSI u u u u u u Catalogue per con- Wire
LSIG LSIG u u u u u u u u Number nector Range
2 #3/0-500 kcmil Cu
TA2J6500
2 #4/0-500 kcmil Al
Interrupting Ratings Neutral Transformers 1 500-750 kcmil Al
TA1L6750
RMS Symmetrical kA 1 500-600 kcmil Cu
UL 489 (File E10848) Ampere Rating Catalogue Number
Breaker TC1J6600 1 #3/0-600 kcmil Cu
Type 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC 200 N02SJD
300 N03SJD TC2J6500 2 #3/0-500 kcmil Cu
SJD6-B 65 35 25
400 N04SJD TA2J630 2 #4-#3/0 Cu/Al
SHJD6-B 100 65 35
SCJD6-B 200 150 100 Compression Lug
CCL600 1 (pc.) #1/0-500 kcmil Cu/Al
Note: “
G” suffix in catalog number denotes circuit All breakers built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks for delivery.
breaker for 3-phase, 3-wire systems. a Foradditional information, see Note: A, page 5-147.
For 3-phase, 4-wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral) b Refer to the NEC for proper application of 100% Enclosures page 5-139 – 5-146
transformer as separate and additional item.
rated devices.
c Advanced trip unit equipped with DAS /
Maintenance Mode. Requires customer-supplied 24V
external power supply, maintenance switch and light.

1 Shunt Trip and
JD 400A Frame Control Voltage 1 Shunt Trip
1 Auxiliary Switch
LD 600A Frame AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
LMD 800A Frame 24 — S17JLD6 —
48 — S18JLD6 —
SJD 400A Frame 120 — S01JLD6 S01JLD62A
SLD 600A Frame 240 — S03JLD6 S03JLD62A
277 — S15JLD6 S15JLD64A
480 — S04JLD6 —
— 12 S16JLD6 S16JLD62A
— 125 S11JLD6 S11JLD62A
— 250 S13JLD6 S13JLD62A

1 Undervoltage Trip and 1 Undervoltage Trip and
Control Voltage 1 Undervoltage Trip
1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches
AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
120 — U01JLD6 U01JLD62A U01JLD62AA
208 — U02JLD6 U02JLD62A U02JLD62AA1
— 24 U13JLD6 U13JLD62A U13JLD62AA1
— 125 U10JLD6 U10JLD62A U10JLD62AA
5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Maximun
1 Form C 2 Form C
Voltage
480 250 A01JLD64 A02JLD64
— 12 A01JLDLV A02JlDLV

1 Alarm Switch and 1 1 Alarm Switch and
Maximum Voltage 1 Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches
480 250 B01JLD64 A01JLD64B A02JLD64B
ETU Testing Unit

Breaker Type Description Catalogue Number
Power Stick EPSP18V
SJD, SLD, SMD,
SND, SPD Spare cable for Power COMPCA
Stick
The EPSP18V Power Stick is a hand-held, battery-operated power supply
that can be used for trip testing the Sensitrip IV electronic trip units.
Requires two 9V batteries.
Note: Accessory modules can only be added to right

side pole of solid state SJD and SLD frame circuit
breakers. All accessories on this page are useable
on superseded JD2, JJ6, JL6, HJ6, SJL, LJ6, LL6,
HL6 and SLL circuit breakers.
No accessories can be added if mechanical interlock

is used.

LD 600A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type LXD6-Aad Blue Label Ordering Information
Complete Breaker Unassembled
2-Pole (3 Pole Width) 3-Pole Prices of LD6, HLD6, and HHLD6
Continuous breakers include frame, trip, and
Current Rating 600V AC 250V DC 600V AC 500V DC
both line and load lugs (TA2J6500).
@ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
When ordered by these catalogue
450 LXD62B450 LXD63B450 numbers, the customer will receive
500 LXD62B500 LXD63B500 the frame, trip and lugs separately
600 LXD62B600 LXD63B600 packaged. For applications requiring
different lugs, order individual items
as needed.
Type JD6-Ae Blue Label Complete Breaker Assembled
without Lugs
Interchangeable Trip Prices of LXD6, HLXD6, HHLXD6,
Continuous Complete Breaker and CLD6 include frame with non-
Current Rating Unassembled with Lugs Frame Only Trip Unit Only interchangeable trip unit installed
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number only. Order required lugs separately.
For line and load lugs (TA2J6500)
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width) installed, add suffix “L” to catalogue
250 LD62B250 JD62T250 number (add 2 times list price of
300 LD62B300 JD62T300 lugs for each pole).
350 LD62B350 JD62T350
400 LD62B400 LD62F600 JD62T400 100% Rated (3-pole only)
450 LD62B450 LD62T450 Types, LXD6 and HLXD6 breakers
500 LD62B500 LD62T500 are available with 100% ratings. To
600 LD62B600 LD62T600 order add suffix “H” to catalogue
number, and 10% to list price. 100%
5
b
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V DC rated LD breakers require the use of
90°C Cu cable and lugs TC1J6600 or
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
250 LD63B250 JD63T250
300 LD63B300 JD63T300 TC2J6500.
350 LD63B350 JD63T350
400 LD63B400 LD63F600 JD63T400
450 LD63B450 LD63T450 400Hz Applications see page 5-137.
500 LD63B500 LD63T500
600 LD63B600 LD63T600
Shipping Weights
Interrupting Ratings Number of Number per Shipping
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (KA) LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HHLD6
CSA / UL 489 AIR (File E10848) IEC 947-2 Assembled Breaker (less terminals)
Volts AC (50/60Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60Hz) 2 1 17.5
220/240 380/415 500 3 1 19.5
Breaker Type 240 480 600 250 500c (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) LD6, HLD6, HHLD6 Frame Only
LXD6, LD6 65 35 25 30 (2-P) 25 (3-P) 65 33 40 20 30 15 2 1 14
HLD6, HLXD6 100 65 35 30 (2-P) 35 (3-P) 100 50 65 33 42 21 3 1 15.5
HHLD6, HHLXD6 200 100 50 — — 200 100 100 50 65 33 LD6, HHLD6 Trip Unit Only
CLD6 200 150 100 30 (2-P) 50 (3-P) — — — — — — 2 1 3.5
3 1 4
CLD6 Complete Assembled Breaker
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range (less terminals)
Breaker Ampere Nominal Instantaneous Values 2 1 29.5
Rating Lowe 2 3 4 5 6 7 Highe 3 1 31.5
250-300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500
350-450 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 Lugs for 75° C Wire c
500-600 3000 3430 3800 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 No. of
cables
Catalogue per con- Wire
Number nector Range
1, 2 #3/0 500 kcmil Cu
TA2J6500
2 #4/0 500 kcmil Al
TC2J6500 2 #3/0-500 kcmil Cu
1 500-750 kcmil Al
 Type LXD6A circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed TA1L6750
1 500-600 kcmil Cu
for reverse fed applications.
 When
wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is TC1J6600 1 #3/0-600 kcmil Cu
CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V DC Compression Lug
 See Note: A, page 5-147. CCL600 1 500 kcmil Cu/Al
 HACR rated.
e +/- 20% Tolerance
Note: LD frame qualified to UL489 supplement SB “NAVAL”.

See page 5-137 for additional information. Modifications page 5-150

LD 600A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type HLD6-A, HLXD6bef Black Label
Continuous Complete Breaker D1
�
Current Rating Unassembled with Lugs Frame Only Trip Unit Only �
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width) L
250 HLD62B250 JD62T250
300 HLD62B300 JD62T300 L
350 HLD62B350 JD62T350
400 HLD62B400 HLD62F600 JD62T400
450 HLD62B450 LD62T450
500 HLD62B500 LD62T500
600 HLD62B600 LD62T600

ae D D
250 HLD63B250 JD63T250

Figure 1 Figure 2
300 HLD63B300 JD63T300
350 HLD63B350 JD63T350
400 HLD63B400 HLD63F600 JD63T400 Dimensions (in inches)
450 HLD63B450 LD63T450 D1
500 HLD63B500 LD63T500 Breaker
W L D (to
600 HLD63B600 LD63T600 Type
handle)
Figure 1
Type HHLD6, HHLXD6bef LXD6-A, LD6-A
HLD6-A 7.5 11 4 5.44
2-Pole 600V AC (3 Pole Width) HHLD6, HHLXD6,
5
250 HHLD62B250 JD62T250 LXD6–ETIs

300 HHLD62B300 JD62T300 Figure 2
7.5 17.86 4 5.44
350 HHLD62B350 JD62T350 CLD6, CLD6-ETId
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
400 HHLD62B400 HHLD62F600 JD62T400

450 HHLD62B450 HHLD62T450
3-Pole 600V AC
250 HHLD62B250 JD62T250
300 HHLD62B300 JD62T300
350 HHLD62B350 JD62T350
400 HHLD62B400 HHLD62F600 JD62T400
Type CLD6f Red Label

2-Pole 3-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating 600V AC/250V DC 600V AC/500V DC
@ 40°C Catalogue Number
450 For 2-pole application CLD63B450
500 use outside poles of CLD63B500
600 3-pole circuit breaker CLD63B600
For inches / millimeters conversion,  For complete assembled 3 pole HLD6 or HHLD6 type Type HLXD6, HHLXD6 Circuit Breakers are CSA Certified /
see Technical section circuit breaker change the prefix identifier HLD6 or UL Listed for reverse feed applications.
HHLD6 to HLXD6 or HHLXD6. Price is sum of frame and LXD6-ETI, CLD6-ETI see page 5-117 for ordering information.
 When
wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is trip units prices, e.g. price of HLXD63B400 is the price CE Applies to non-interchangable type HLXD only.
CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V DC of HLD63F600 plus the price of LD63T600. Order the HACR rated.
ungrounded UPS systems only. terminal connectors separately.

SLD 600A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Series Selection
Current Limiting
Type SLD6-B Type SHLD6-B Type SCLD6-B
Rating (Advanced trip unit)a (Basic trip unit) (Advanced trip unit)a (Basic trip unit) (Advanced trip unit)a (Basic trip unit)
300 SLD6A300LI SLD6B300LI SHLD6A300LI SHLD6B300LI SCLD6A300LI SCLD6B300LI
300 SLD6A300LIG SLD6B300LIG SHLD6A300LIG SHLD6B300LIG SCLD6A300LIG SCLD6B300LIG
300 SLD6A300LSI SLD6B300LSI SHLD6A300LSI SHLD6B300LSI SCLD6A300LSI SCLD6B300LSI
300 SLD6A300LSIG SLD6B300LSIG SHLD6A300LSIG SHLD6B300LSIG SCLD6A300LSIG SCLD6B300LSIG
5
Trip Unit Adjustable Functions
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Short Short
Suffix Cont Long Instan- Short Time Time Ground Ground Ordering Information
2
Pricing information for all Digital
LI LI u u u
Sentron Series SLD Frames is
LIG LIG u u u u u
for complete breaker only – price
LSI LSI u u u u u u required lugs as separate items –
LSIG LSIG u u u u u u u u lugs are suitable for 75°C Wire.
Interrupting Ratings Neutral Transformers Shipping Weights

RMS Symmetrical kA Breaker Number per Shipping
UL 489 (File E10848) Ampere Rating Catalogue Number Type Carton Weight (lbs)
Breaker
Type 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC 300 N03SJD SLD6-B 1 20
400 N04SJD
SLD6-B 65 35 25 SHLD6-B 1 20
500 N05SLD
SHLD6-B 100 65 35 600 N06SLD SCLD6-B 1 33
SCLD6-B 200 150 100
Note: “G” suffix in catalog number denotes circuit For ordering information to terminal connectors see page a Advanced trip unit equipped with DAS / Maintenance
breaker for 3-phase, 3-wire circuits. 5-147 - 5-149; for enclosures, see page 5-139 – 5-146. Mode. Requires customer-supplied 24V external power
For 3-phase, 4-wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral) supply, maintenance switch and light.
100% Rated – N
ot available in SLD6 Frame.
transformer as separate and additional item.
All breakers built to order. Allow 2-3 weeks for delivery.

1 Shunt Trip and
JD 400A Frame Control Voltage 1 Shunt Trip
1 Auxiliary Switch
LD 600A Frame AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
LMD 800A Frame 24 — S17JLD6 —
SJD 400A Frame 48 — S18JLD6 —
120 — S01JLD6 S01JLD62A
277 — S15JLD6 S15JLD64A
480 — S04JLD6 —
— 125 S11JLD6 S11JLD62A
— 250 S13JLD6 S13JLD62A
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

Maximun
1 Form C 2 Form C
Voltage
480 250 A01JLD64 A02JLD64
— 12 A01JLDLV A02JlDLV

1 Alarm Switch and 1 1 Alarm Switch and
Maximum Voltage 1 Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches
480 250 B01JLD64 A01JLD64B A02JLD64B
ETU Testing Unit

SJD, SLD, SMD, Power Stick EPSP18V
SND, SPD Spare cable for Power Stick COMPCA


is used.

LMD 800A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type LMXD6  Blue Label Ordering Information
Continuous 2-Pole (3 Pole Width) 3-Pole Prices of LMD6 and HLMD6 breakers
Current Rating Catalogue Catalogue include frame, trip, and both line
@ 40°C Number Number and load lugs (TA3K500). These
500 — LMXD63B500 catalogue numbers include the
600 LMXD62B600 LMXD63B600 frame, trip and lugs separately
700 LMXD62B700 LMXD63B700
800 LMXD62B800 LMXD63B800
packaged. For applications requiring
different lugs, order individual items
as needed.
Type LMD6 Blue Label without Lugs
Interchangeable Trip Prices of LMXD6 and HLMXD6
include frame with non-
Continuous Complete Breaker interchangeable trip unit installed
Unassembled with Lugs Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Current Rating only. Order required lugs separately.
For line and load lugs (TA3K500)
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width) installed, add suffix “L” to catalogue
500 LMD62B500 LMD62T500 number (add 2 times list price of
600 LMD62B600
LMD62F800
LMD62T600 lugs for each pole).
700 LMD62B700 LMD62T700
800 LMD62B800 LMD62T800 50°C Applications see page 5-137.
e 400Hz Applications see page 5-137.
5
500 LMD63B500 LMD63T500
600 LMD63B600 LMD63T600
LMD63F800 Shipping Weights
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
700 LMD63B700 LMD63T700
800 LMD63B800 LMD63T800 Number of Number per Shipping
LMD6, HLMD6, LMXD6, HLMXD6
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range Complete Breaker (less terminals)
Breaker Ampere Nominal Instantaneous Values 2 1 53
Rating Lowf 2 3 4 5 6 7 Highf 3 1 61.5
500-600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 LMD6, HLMD6 Frame Only
700-800 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 2 1 42.25
3 1 46
LMD6, HLMD6 Trip Unit Only
2 1 4.5
3 1 6.5
Lugs for 75° C Wire c

No. of
cables
Catalogue per con- Wire
Number nector Range
TA2K500 1, 2 #1-500 kcmil Cu/ Al
TA3K500 1-3 #1/0-500 kcmil Cu/ Al
TA2N750 1, 2 500-750 kcmil Cu/ Al
 LMXD6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed for  When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker
reverse connected applications. is CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500UDC
 Use 6 lugs for 3-pole, use 4 connectors for 2-pole. ungrounded UPS systems only.
 See Note: A, page 5-147.
 HACR rated. Modifications page 5-150
f +/- 20% Tolerance Accessories page 5-151-159

LMD 800A Frame Sentron Series Selection/Dimensions
Type HLMXD6ad Black Label
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker without Lugs)
Continuous 3-Pole 600V AC/
Current Rating 500V DC
@ 40°C 2-Pole 600V AC/ 250V DC Catalogue Number
500 HLMXD63B500
600 For 2-Pole application useoutside poles of 3-Pole HLMXD63B600
700 circuit breaker. HLMXD63B700
800 HLMXD63B800
Type HLMD6d Black Label

D1
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width)
W D
500 HLMD62B500 LMD62T500
600 HLMD62B600 LMD62T600
HLMD62F800
700 HLMD62B700 LMD62T700
800 HLMD62B800 LMD62T800
e
L
500 HLMD63B500 LMD63T500
5
600 HLMD63B600 LMD63T600

HLMD63F800
700 HLMD63B700 LMD63T700
800 HLMD63B800 LMD63T800
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
CSA / UL 489 AIR (File E10848) IEC 947-2 Dimensions (in inches)
Volts AC (50/60Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60Hz) Breaker
W L D D1
220/240 380/415 500 Type
Breaker Type 240 480 600 250 500c (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) LMD6,
LMD6, LMXD6 65 50 25 30 (2-P) 25 (3-P) 65 33 40 20 30 15 LMXD6,
HLMD6, HLMXD6 100 65 50 30 (2-P) 50 (3-P) 100 50 65 33 42 21 HLMD6, 7.5 16 4.5 5.93
HLMXD6
LMXD6-ETIb
For inches / millimeters conversion,

see Technical section.
 When

wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker
 HLMXD6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed is CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500VDC
for reverse connection applications.  HACR
 LMXD6-ETI, see page 5-117 for catalogue information.

rated.

JD 400A Frame 1 Shunt Trip and
Control Voltage 1 Shunt Trip 1 Auxiliary Switch
LD 600A Frame
LMD 800A Frame AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
24 — S17JLD6 —
SJD 400A Frame 48 — S18JLD6 —
240 — S03JLD6 S03JLD62A
277 — S15JLD6 S15JLD64A
480 — S04JLD6 —
— 125 S11JLD6 S11JLD62A
— 250 S13JLD6 S13JLD62A

Control Voltage 1 Undervoltage Trip 1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches
600 — U08JLD6 — —
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

Maximum Voltage 1 Form C* 2 Form C
480 250 A01JLD64 A02JLD64
— 12 A01JLDLV A02JLDLV

1 Alarm Switch and 1 Alarm Switch and
Maximum Voltage 1 Alarm Switch 1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches
480 250 B01JLD64 A01JLD64B A02JLD64B
ETU Testing Unit



is used.

MD 800A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type MXD6  Blue Label Ordering Information
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker Without Lugs) Complete Breaker Unassembled
with Lugs
Continuous Pricing information for MD6 and
2-Pole 3-Pole
Current Rating HMD6 breakers includes frame,
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number trip, and both line and load lugs
600 MXD62B600 MXD63B600 (TA3K500). When ordered by these
700 MXD62B700 MXD63B700 catalogue numbers, the customer
800 MXD62B800 MXD63B800 will receive the frame, trip and
lugs separately packaged. For
Type MD6 Blue Label applications requiring different lugs,
order individual items as needed.
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker Without Lugs) Complete Breaker Assembled
Continuous Complete Breaker without Lugs
Current Rating Unassembled with Lugs Frame Only Trip Unit Only Prices of MXD6, HMXD6 and
@ 40° C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number CMD6 include frame with non-
b interchangeable trip units installed
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC only. Order required lugs separately.
500 MD62B500 MD62T500 For line and load lugs (TA3K500)
600 MD62B600 MD62T600 installed, add suffix “L” to catalogue
MD62F800
700 MD62B700 MD62T700
800 MD62B800 MD62T800
number (add 2 times list price of
d
lugs for each pole).
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V DC 100% Ratedf
500 MD63B500 MD63T500 Types MXD6, HMXD6 and CMD6
600 MD63B600 MD63T600 breakers are available with 100%
MD63F800
5
700 MD63B700 MD63T700

ratings. To order add suffix “H”
800 MD63B800 MD63T800
to catalogue number, and 10% to
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
list price. 100% rated MD breakers

Lugse require the use of 90°C Cu cable and
lugs 2TA4P8500 or 2TA2N8750 for
Lugs
Catalogue Cables Per
2-pole; 3TA4P8500 or 3TA2N8750 for
Number per Lug Kit Wire Range 3-pole.
TA2K500 1-2 1 #1-500 kcmil Cu/ Al 50°C Applications see page 5-137.
TA3K500 1-3 1 1/0-500 kcmil Cu/ Al
TC2K500 1-2 1 #1-500 kcmil Cu 400Hz Applications see page 5-137.
TC3K350 1-3 1 #1-350 kcmil Cu
Kits
2TA2N8750 2
1-2 600-750 kcmil Cu/ Al
3TA2N8750 3
2TA3N8750 2
Shipping Weights
1-3 500-750 kcmil Cu/ Al Number of Number per Shipping
3TA3N8750 3
2TA4N8500 2 Poles Carton Weight (lbs.)
1-4 250-500 kcmil Cu/ Al MD6, HMD6, HMXD6, CMD6
3TA4N8500 3
2TA4P8500 2 Complete Breaker Assembled (less lugs)
1-4 250-500 kcmil Cu/Al 2 1 53
3TA4P8500 3
3 1 61.5
MD6, HMD6 Frame Only
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range 2 1 42.25
3 1 46
Breaker Ampere Nominal Instantaneous Values
MD6, HMD6 Trip Unit Only
Rating Lowh 2 3 4 5 6 7 Highh
2 1 4.5
500–600 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 3 1 6.5
700–800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000
MXD6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed for 80% rated breakers with the CE mark will also be marked
reverse connection applications. in the 100% rated version.
2-pole units available in 3-pole width only.  HACR rated.
Use 6 connectors for 3-pole, use 4 connectors for 2-pole. h +/-
20% Tolerance.
When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker Note: MD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B “NAVAL”.
is CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V DC See page 5-150 for additional information.
Modifications page 5-150
 See Note: A, page 5-147. Accessories page 5-151 - 5-159

MD 800A Frame Sentron Series Selection/Dimensions
Type HMXD6  Black Label
Continuous 3-Pole
Current Rating 2-Pole 600V AC/500V DC
@ 40°C 600V AC/250V DC Catalogue Number
600 HMXD63B600
For 2-pole application use outside
700 HMXD63B700
poles of 3-pole circuit breaker
800 HMXD63B800
Type HMD6 Black Label

b
500 HMD62B500 MD62T500
600 HMD62B600 MD62T600
HMD62F800
700 HMD62B700 MD62T700
800 HMD62B800 MD62T800
d
500 HMD63B500 MD63T500
600 HMD63B600 MD63T600
HMD63F800
5
700 HMD63B700 MD63T700
800 HMD63B800 MD63T800
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Type CMD6 Red Label
Lug
2-Pole 3-Pole
Continuous 600V AC/250V DC 600V AC/500V DC

Current Rating Catalogue When wire lug shield NDTS is used.
@ 40° C Number Note: N
DTS lug shields are required when oversized lugs
500 CMD63B500 are used. The kits include the NDTS shield.
600 For 2-pole application use outside poles of CMD63B600
700 3-pole circuit breaker CMD63B700
800 CMD63B800 Dimensions (in inches)
Interrupting Ratings Breaker
Type
W L D D1
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (KA) MD6, MXD6,
CSA / UL 489 AIR (File E10848) IEC 947-2 HMD6, HMXD6,
9 16 6 8.25
Volts AC (50/60Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60Hz) CMD6, MXD6-ETI,
220/240 380/415 500 CMD6-ETI
Breaker
Type 240 480 600 250 500d (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) with lug shields 9 24 6 8.25
MD6, MXD6 65 50 25 30 (2-P) 25 (3-P) 65 33 40 20 30 15
HMD6, HMXD6 100 65 50 30 (2-P) 50 (3-P) 100 50 65 33 42 21
CMD6 200 100 65 30 (2-P) 50 (3-P) 200 100 100 50 65 33
For inches / millimeters conversion,  When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is CSA Certified / UL Listed and
see Technical section. rated for use on 500V DC ungrounded UPS systems only.
 HACR rated.

HMXD6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed for reverse connection applications.
2-pole units available in 3-pole width only.
 MXD6-ETI, CMD6-ETI see page 5-117 for catalogue information.

SMD 800A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Series Selection
Current Limiting
Type SMD6 Type SHMD6-B Type SCMD6-B
600 SMD6A600LI SMD6B600LI SHMD6A600LI SHMD6B600LI SCMD6A600LI SCMD6B600LI
600 SMD6A600LIG SMD6B600LIG SHMD6A600LIG SHMD6B600LIG SCMD6A600LIG SCMD6B600LIG
600 SMD6A600LSI SMD6B600LSI SHMD6A600LSI SHMD6B600LSI SCMD6A600LSI SCMD6B600LSI
600 SMD6A600LSIG SMD6B600LSIG SHMD6A600LSIG SHMD6B600LSIG SCMD6A600LSIG SCMD6B600LSIG
SMD 800A Frame – 100% Rateda Current Limiting

5
600 SMD6A600LIH SMD6B600LIH SHMD6A600LIH SHMD6B600LIH SCMD6A600LIH SCMD6B600LIH

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

600 SMD6A600LIGH SMD6B600LIGH SHMD6A600LIGH SHMD6B600LIGH SCMD6A600LIGH SCMD6B600LIGH
600 SMD6A600LSIH SMD6B600LSIH SHMD6A600LSIH SHMD6B600LSIH SCMD6A600LSIH SCMD6B600LSIH
600 SMD6A600LSIGH SMD6B600LSIGH SHMD6A600LSIGH SHMD6B600LSIGH SCMD6A600LSIGH SCMD6B600LSIGH
Lugs for 75° C Wire b
Catalogue Cables Wire
Pricing information for all Digital Sentron Series MD frames is for Each kit contains
Number per Lug Range
complete breaker only. Price requires lugs or lug kits as separate items. the following:
Lugs are suitable for 75°C wire or as noted. Connector wire ranges TA2K500 2 #1-500 kcmil Cu/Al
and cavities are established in conjunction with Table 6.1.4.2.1 of UL TA3K500 3 #1-500 kcmil Cu/Al 3TA4P8500 -
489 standards. Choose actual connector for circuit breakers based on 3 connectors plus
TC2K500 2 #1-500 kcmil Cu 1 NDTS end barrier
customer requirements.
TC3K350 3 #1-350 kcmil Cu
Recommended Terminal Connectors 3TA3N8750 -
Kits (3 lugs/kit) 3 connectors plus
Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Connector or Connector Kit 1 NDTS end barrier
3TA4N8500 4 250-500 kcmil Cu/Al
MD 500-600 TA2K500
3TA4P8500 4 250-500 kcmil Cu/Al 3TA2N8750 -
MD 700-800 TA3K500 3 connectors plus
3TA2N8750 2 500-750 kcmil Cu/Al
Types SMD6-B, SHMD6-B and SCMD6-B are acceptable for reverse 1 NDTS end barrier
connection applications 3TA3N8750 3 500-750 kcmil Cu/Al
Trip Unit Adjustable Functions Interrupting Ratings Neutral

Suffix Cont Long Instan- Short Short Ground Ground RMS Symmetrical kA Transformers
Letter Trip Current Time taneous Time Time Fault Fault UL 489 (File E10848)
Code Type Setting Delay Pick Up Pick Up Delay Pick Up Delay Breaker 240V 480V 600V Ampere Catalogue
LI LI u u u Type AC AC AC Rating Number
LIG LIG u u u u u SMD6-B 65 50 25 600 N06SMDA
LSI LSI u u u u u SHMD6-B 100 65 50 700 N07SMDA
LSIG LSIG u u u u u u u SCMD6-B 200 100 65 800 N08SMDA
Note: “
G” suffix in catalog number denotes circuit a Use 2-3TA4P8500 for 3-pole. These kits are rated for c Advancedtrip unit equipped with DAS / Maintenance
breaker for 3-phase, 3-wire circuits. 90°C wire. 90°C Cu only cable must be used, and sized Mode. Requires customer-supplied 24V external power
For 3-phase, 4-wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral) per 75°C ampacity. supply, maintenance switch and light.
transformer as separate and additional item. b For additional information, see Note: A, page 5-147.
All breakers built to order. Allow 2-3 weeks for delivery. Enclosures page 5-139 – 5-146

MD/SMD 800A Frame 1 Shunt Trip and
ND/SND 1200A Frame Control Voltage 1 Shunt Trip 1 Auxiliary Switch
PD/SPD 1600A Frame AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
RD 2000A Frame 120 — S01MN6 S01MN64A
208 — S02MN6 S02MN64A
240 — S03MN6 S03MN64A
277 — S15MN6 S15MN64A
480 — S04MN6 S04MN64A
600 — S06MN6 —
— 12 S16MN6 S16MN64A
— 24 S07MN6 S07MN64A
— 48 S09MN6 —
— 125 S11MN6 S11MN64A
— 250 S13MN6 S13MN64A

120 — U01MN6 U01MN64A U01MN64AA
208 — U02MN6 U02MN64A U02MN64AA
240 — U03MN6 U03MN64A U03MN64AA
277 — U15MN6 U15MN64A U15MN64AA
480 — U04MN6 U04MN64A U04MN64AA
Accessory modules can mount in either 600 — U06MN6 — —
left hand or right hand poles of all circuit — 24 U07MN6 U07MN64A U07MN64AA
5
breakers, including solid state. Exception: — 48 U09MN6 U09MN64A U09MN64AA
— 125 U11MN6 U11MN64A U11MN64AA
when mechanical interlock is used
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
— 250 U13MN6 U13MN64A U13MN64AA
accessories cannot be mounted in left pole.
Maximum Voltage 1 Form C 2 Form C
480 250 A01MN64 A02MN64
— 12 A01MNDLV A02MNDLV

480 250 B00MN64 A01MN64B A02MN64B
ETU Testing Unit


ND 1200A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type NXD6  Blue Label Ordering Information
2-Pole 3-Pole Prices of ND6 and HND6 breakers
Continuous
Current Rating 600V AC/ 250V DC 600V AC/500V DC include frame, trip, and both line
@ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number and load lugs (3TA4N8500). These
900 NXD62B900 NXD63B900
catalogue numbers are the frame,
1000 NXD62B100 NXD63B100 trip and lugs separately packaged.
1200 NXD62B120 NXD63B120 For applications requiring different
lugs, order individual items as
Type ND6 needed.
Blue Label
Interchangeable Trip without Lugs
Complete Breaker
Prices of NXD6, HNXD6, and
Continuous CND6 include frame with non-
interchangeable trip units installed
b
only. Order required terminal
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC connectors separately.
800 ND62B800 MD62T800 For line and load lugs (3TA4N8500)
900 ND62B900
ND62F120
ND62T900 installed, add suffix “L” to catalogue
1000 ND62B100 ND62T100 number (add 2 times list price of
1200 ND62B120 ND62T120 lug kit).
e
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V DC 100% Ratedh
800 ND63B800 MD63T800 Types NXD6, HNXD6 and CND6
900 ND63B900
ND63F120
ND63T900 breakers are available with 100%
ratings. To order, suffix “H” to
5
1000 ND63B100 ND63T100

1200 ND63B120 ND63T120 catalogue number, and add 10% to
list price. 100% rated ND breakers
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Interrupting Ratings require 90°C Cu cable and lug kit

3TA4P8500 or 3TA3N8750.
Volts AC (50/60Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60Hz) 50°C Applications see page 5-137.
Breaker 220/240 380/415 500
Type 240 480 600 250 500c (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) 400Hz Applications see page 5-137.
ND6, NXD6 65 50 25 30 (2-P) 25 (3-P) 65 33 40 20 — —
HND6, HNXD6
CND6
100
200
65
100
50
65
30 (2-P) 50 (3-P) 100
— 50 (3-P) —
50
—
65
—
33
—
—
—
—
—
Lugsg
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range Catalogue Cables

Nominal Instantaneous Values Number per Lug Wire Range
Breaker Ampere
Rating Lowj 2 3 4 5 6 7 Highj TA2K500 2 #1-500 kcmil Cu/ Al
TA3K500 3 #1-500 kcmil Cu/ Al
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 2
TC2K500 #1-500 kcmil Cu
900-1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 3
TC3K350 #1-350 kcmil Cu
Kits (2 Kits required per breaker)
2TA4P8500d
4 250-500 kcmil Cu/ Al
3TA4P8500d
2TA4N8500f
3TA4N8500f
2TA2N8750
3TA2N8750
2TA3N8750
3TA3N8750
 NXD6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed for  Use 2 – 3TA4N8500 for 3-pole or 2 – 2TA4N8500 for
reverse connection applications. 2-pole. Rated for 75°C cable.
2-pole units available in 3-pole width only.  See Note: A, page 5-147.
 When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker  80% rated breakers with the CE mark will also be marked
is CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500VDC in the 100% rated version.
ungrounded UPS systems only.  HACR rated.
 Use 6 connectors for 3-pole, use 4 connectors for 2-pole. j +/- 20% Tolerance.
 Use 2 – 3TA4P8500 kits for 3-pole, or 2 – 2TA4P8500 Note: N D frame qualified to UL489 supplement B “NAVAL”. Modifications page 5-150
kits for 2-pole. Rated for 90°C cable. Use for 100% See page 5-150 for additional information.
rated breakers.

ND 1200A Frame Sentron Series Selection/Dimensions
Type HNXD6 a Black Label
Continuous 3-Pole
Current Rating 600V AC/500V DC
@ 40°C 2-Pole 600V AC/250V DC Catalogue Number
900 HNXD63B900
For 2-pole application use outside
1000 HNXD63B100
poles of 3-pole circuit breaker
1200 HNXD63B120
Type HND6 Black Label

Current Rating Unassembled with Lugs Frame Only Trip Unit Only NXD63B120
b
800
900
For 2-pole application use outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker
1000
1200
e
800 HND63B800 MD63T800
5
900 HND63B900 ND63T900
HND63F120
1000 HND63B100 ND63T100
1200 HND63B120 ND63T120
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Type CND6a Red Label
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker)
Lugs
Continuous 2-Pole 3-Pole
Current Rating Catalogue
@ 40° C Number
When lugs shield NDTS is used.
900 CND63B900
For 2-pole application, use outside poles of Note: NDTS lug shields are required when oversized lugs
1000 CND63B100 (TA4P8500 or TA4N8500) are used. The kits include
3-pole circuit breaker
1200 CND63B120 the NDTS shield.
Shipping Weights Dimensions (in inches)

Number of Number per Shipping
Breaker
Poles Carton Weight (lbs.) W L D D1
Type
ND6, HND6, NXD6, HNXD6, CND6
ND6, NXD6, HND6,
Assembled Breaker (less terminals) 9 16 6 8.25
HNXD6, CND6
2 1 53
with NDTS
3 1 61.5 9 29 6 8.25
lug shield
ND6, HND6 Frame Only
2 1 42.25
3 1 46
ND6, HND6 Trip Unit Only
2 1 4.5
3 1 6.5
For inches / millimeters conversion,  Whenwired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is
see Technical section. CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V DC
 HNXD6 and CND6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL  HACR rated.
Listed for reverse connection applications.

 2-poleunits available in 3-pole width only.

SND 1200A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Seriesb Selection
Current Limiting
Type SND6-B Type SHND6-B Type SCND6-B
800 SND6A800LI SND6B800LI SHND6A800LI SHND6B800LI SCND6A800LI SCND6B800LI
800 SND6A800LIG SND6B800LIG SHND6A800LIG SHND6B800LIG SCND6A800LIG SCND6B800LIG
800 SND6A800LSI SND6B800LSI SHND6A800LSI SHND6B800LSI SCND6A800LSI SCND6B800LSI
800 SND6A800LSIG SND6B800LSIG SHND6A800LSIG SHND6B800LSIG SCND6A800LSIG SCND6B800LSIG
SND 1200A Frame – 100% Rateda Current Limiting

Type SND6-B Type SHND6-B Type SCND6-B
3-Pole, 600V AC 3-Pole, 600V AC 3-Pole, 600V AC
5
Max
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
800 SND6A800LIH SND6B800LIH SHND6A800LIH SHND6B800LIH SCND6A800LIH SCND6B800LIH

800 SND6A800LIGH SND6B800LIGH SHND6A800LIGH SHND6B800LIGH SCND6A800LIGH SCND6B800LIGH
800 SND6A800LSIH SND6B800LSIH SHND6A800LSIH SHND6B800LSIH SCND6A800LSIH SCND6B800LSIH
800 SND6A800LSIGH SND6B800LSIGH SHND6A800LSIGH SHND6B800LSIGH SCND6A800LSIGH SCND6B800LSIGH

Short
Suffix Cont Long Instan- Short Time Short Ground Ground
Letter Trip Current Time taneous Time Fixed Time I2t Fault Fault
Code Type Setting Delay Pick Up Pick Up Pick Up Delay Pick Up Delay
LI LI u u u
LIG LIG u u u u u
LSI LSI u u u u u u
LSIG LSIG u u u u u u u u
Interrupting Ratings Neutral Transformers

Breaker RMS Symmetrical kA UL 489 (File E10848) Ampere Catalogue
Type 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC Rating Number
SND6-B 65 50 25 800 N08SMDA
SHND6-B 100 65 50 1000 N10SNDA
SCND6-B 200 100 65 1200 N12SNDA
For inches / millimeters conversion, see Technical Data section.

For ordering information to terminal connectors see a Use 2-3TA4P8500 for 3-pole. These kits are rated for Mode. Requires customer-supplied 24V external power
page 5-147 - 5-149; for enclosures, see page 5-139 – 5-146. 90°C wire. 90°C Cu only cable must be used, and sized supply, maintenance switch and light.
Note: “G” suffix in catalog number denotes circuit per 75°C ampacity.
breaker for 3-phase, 3-wire circuits. b SND6, SHND6 and SCND6 circuit breakers are UL Listed
For 3-phase, 4-wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral) for reverse connection applications.
transformer as separate and additional item. c Advanced trip unit equipped with DAS / Maintenance
All breakers built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks for delivery.

MD/SMD 800A Frame 1 Shunt Trip and
ND/SND 1200A Frame Control Voltage 1 Shunt Trip 1 Auxiliary Switch
PD/SPD 1600A Frame AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
RD 2000A Frame 120 — S01MN6 S01MN64A
208 — S02MN6 S02MN64A
240 — S03MN6 S03MN64A
277 — S15MN6 S15MN64A
480 — S04MN6 S04MN64A
600 — S06MN6 —
— 12 S16MN6 S16MN64A
— 24 S07MN6 S07MN64A
— 48 S09MN6 —
— 125 S11MN6 S11MN64A
— 250 S13MN6 S13MN64A

120 — U01MN6 U01MN64A U01MN64AA
208 — U02MN6 U02MN64A U02MN64AA
240 — U03MN6 U03MN64A U03MN64AA
277 — U15MN6 U15MN64A U15MN64AA
480 — U04MN6 U04MN64A U04MN64AA
Accessory modules can mount in either 600 — U06MN6 — —
left hand or right hand poles of all circuit — 24 U07MN6 U07MN64A U07MN64AA
5
— 125 U11MN6 U11MN64A U11MN64AA
when mechanical interlock is used
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
— 250 U13MN6 U13MN64A U13MN64AA
accessories cannot be mounted in left pole.
Maximum Voltage 1 Form C 2 Form C
480 250 A01MN64 A02MN64

480 250 B00MN64 A01MN64B A02MN64B
ETU Testing Unit


PD 1600A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type PXD6 b Non-Interchangeable Trip e Ordering Instructions
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
a
Blue Label Complete Breaker Unassembled
Complete Breaker Assembled with Lugs
Continuous (Frame/Trip Unit Only) Mounting Assembly Lugs (6 required) Prices of PD6, HPD6, RD6, and HRD6
Current
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Catalogue type breakers include frame, trip,
Rating @ 40°C Number mounting base (MB9301), and both
1200 PXD63B120 MB9301 line and load lugs (PD Frame –
1400 PXD63B140 -or- TA5P600 TA5P600, RD Frame – TC5R600). When
1600 PXD63B160 MBR9302 ordered by these catalogue numbers,
the customer will receive the frame,
Type PD6 Interchangeable Trip e trip, mounting assembly and lugs
a separately packaged. For applications
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC Blue Label requiring different mounting base or
lugs, order individual items as needed.
Continuous Complete Breaker Mounting
Current Unassembled Frame Only Trip Unit Only Assembly Lugs (6 required) Complete Breaker Assembled
Rating @ Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue without Lugs
40°C Number Number Number Number Number Prices of PXD6, HPXD6, RXD6, HRXD6
1200 PD63B120 PD63T120 MB9301 and CPD6 type breakers include frame
1400 PD63B140 PD63F160 PD63T140 -or- TA5P600 with non-interchangeable trip unit
1600 PD63B160 PD63T160 MBR9302 installed only. Order required
mounting base and lugs separately.
100% Rated (3-Pole only)
Type HPXD6 b Non-Interchangeable Trip e Types PXD6, HPXD6 breakers are
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
a
Blue Label available with 100% ratings. To order
add suffix “H” to catalogue number,
Complete Breaker Assembled (Frame/Trip Unit Only)
5
Continuous Current and 10% to list price. 100% PD

Rating @ 40°C Catalogue Number breakers require 90˚ C cable sized
1200 HPXD63B120 at 75˚ C ampacity and TC5R600 lugs.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
1400 HPXD63B140 RD 2000A Frames not available with

1600 HPXD63B160 100% ratings.
Type HPD6 Interchangeable Trip e 400HZ Applications see page 5-137.
a
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC Black Label
Lugs (6 required per breaker)d
Current Unassembled Frame Only Trip Unit Only Assembly Lugs (6 required) No of
Catalogue Cables per
Rating @ Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Number Connector Wire Range
40°C Number Number Number Number Number
TA5P600 1-5 300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
1200 HPD63B120 PD63T120 MB9301 TC5R600 1-5 300-600 kcmil Cu only
1400 HPD63B140 HPD63F160 PD63T140 -or- TA5P600 TA4P750 1-4 500-750 kcmil Cu/Al
1600 HPD63B160 PD63T160 MBR9302 TA6R600 1-6 300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
Type CPD6 Non-Interchangeable Trip e Interrupting Ratings

Fuseless Current Limiting CSA 22.2 No. 5 / UL 489 A IR
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
a Red Label RMS Symmetrical KA
Complete Breaker Assembled (Frame/Trip Unit Only) Volts AC Volts DC a
Continuous Current Breaker
Rating @ 40°C Catalogue Number Type 240 480 600 250 500
1200 CPD63B120 PD6, PXD6 65 50 25 30 (2P) 25 (3P)
1400 CPD63B140 HPD6, HPXD6 100 65 50 30 (2P) 50 (3P)
1600 CPD63B160 CPD6 200 100 65 30 (2P) 50 (3P)
Mounting Bases for PD & RD 6.19

6.00 2.00
6.19
6.00 2.00 2.00
2.00
16.00
16.00
25.50
18.73
16.00
16.00
25.50
18.73
MBR9302 MB9301
MB9301 MB9301 MB9301 MBR9302
MBR9302 MB9301 MBR9302
 Use
two outside poles of a 3-pole circuit breaker for 250V  PXD6, HPXD6 and CPD6 type circuit breakers are CSA Note: PD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B “NAVAL”.
 When
wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker is Certified / UL Listed for reverse feed applications. See page 5-150 for additional information.
CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V DC  For additional information See Note: A, page 5-147.
ungrounded UPS systems only.  HACR rated.


SPD 1600A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Series Selection/Dimensions
Type SPD6-B Type SHPD6-B

Blue Label Black Label
Max 3-Pole, 600V AC 3-Pole, 600V AC Ordering Information
Current Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Rating (Advanced trip unit)c (Basic trip unit) (Advanced trip unit)c (Basic trip unit)
SPD6A140LI SPD6B140LI SHPD6A140LI SHPD6B140LI
Pricing information for all Digital
1400
SPD6A160LI SPD6B160LI SHPD6A160LI SHPD6B160LI
Sentron Series PD frame unit is
1600
1400 SPD6A140LIG SPD6B140LIG SHPD6A140LIG SHPD6B140LIG
for breaker only. Price required
1600 SPD6A160LIG SPD6B160LIG SHPD6A160LIG SHPD6B160LIG
mounting block assembly and
1400 SPD6A140LSI SPD6B140LSI SHPD6A140LSI SHPD6B140LSI
necessary terminal connectors
1600 SPD6A160LSI SPD6B160LSI SHPD6A160LSI SHPD6B160LSI
as separate items.
1400 SPD6A140LSIG SPD6B140LSIG SHPD6A140LSIG SHPD6B140LSIG
1600 SPD6A160LSIG SPD6B160LSIG SHPD6A160LSIG SHPD6B160LSIG

Short Short
Suffix Cont Long Instan- Short Time Time Ground Ground
2
LI LI u u u
LIG LIG u u u u u
LSI LSI u u u u u u
Neutral Transformers
5
Ampere Rating Catalogue Number
1400 N14SPD
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
1600 N16SPD
Interrupting Mounting Block
Ratings (Required)b
Breaker RMS Symmetrical kA CSA 22.2 No. 5 / UL 489 Catalogue Number
Type 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC MB9301
SPD6-B 65 50 25 MBR9302
SHPD6-B 100 65 50
All PD, RD Frames:
MB9301 (shown)
MBR9302 MBR9302 MB9301 MBR9302 MB9301
For inches / millimeters conversion, see Technical Data section.
Note: “
G” suffix in catalog number denotes circuit All breakers built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks for delivery. c Advanced trip unit equipped with DAS / Maintenance
breaker for 3-phase, 3-wire circuits. a For additional information, see Note: A, page 5-147. Mode. Requires customer-supplied 24V external power
For 3-phase, 4-wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral) b The PD frame circuit breaker requires the use of a supply, maintenance switch and light.
transformer as separate and additional item. connect-all mounting assembly to allow for placing
into service.

Internal Accessories Selection/Dimensions
Accessories for:
MD/SMD 800A Frame Shunt Trip Combinations
ND/SND 1200A Frame 1 Shunt Trip and
PD/SPD 1600A Frame Control Voltage 1 Shunt Trip 1 Auxiliary Switch
RD 2000A Frame AC DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
120 — S01MN6 S01MN64A
208 — S02MN6 S02MN64A
240 — S03MN6 S03MN64A
277 — S15MN6 S15MN64A
480 — S04MN6 S04MN64A
600 — S06MN6 —
— 12 S16MN6 S16MN64A
— 24 S07MN6 S07MN64A
— 48 S09MN6 —
— 125 S11MN6 S11MN64A
— 250 S13MN6 S13MN64A

120 — U01MN6 U01MN64A U01MN64AA
208 — U02MN6 U02MN64A U02MN64AA
240 — U03MN6 U03MN64A U03MN64AA
277 — U15MN6 U15MN64A U15MN64AA
Accessory modules can mount in either 480 — U04MN6 U04MN64A U04MN64AA
left hand or right hand poles of all circuit
5
600 — U06MN6 — —
when mechanical interlock is used — 48 U09MN6 U09MN64A U09MN64AA
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
accessories cannot be mounted in left pole. — 125 U11MN6 U11MN64A U11MN64AA1

— 250 U13MN6 U13MN64A U13MN64AA

Maximum Voltage 1 Form C* 2 Form C
480 250 A01MN64 A02MN64

480 250 B00MN64 A01MN64B A02MN64B
ETU Testing Unit


RD 2000A Frame Sentron Series Selection
Type RXD6 d
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
a
Blue Label
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker Only Without Lugs)
Continuous Complete Breaker Assembled
Current (Frame/Trip Unit Only) Mounting Assembly Lugs (6 required)
Rating @ 40°C Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
1600 RXD63B160 MB9301
1800 RXD63B180 -or- TC5R600
2000 RXD63B200 MBR9302
Type RD6 d
a
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC Blue Label
Interchangeable Trip (Unassembled Circuit Breaker with Lugs)
Current Unassembled Frame Only Trip Unit Only Assembly Lugs (6 required) RXD63B200
Rating @ Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue
1600 RD63B160 RD63T160 MB9301 Mounting Block
1800 RD63B180 RD63F200 RD63T180 -or- TC5R600
2000 RD63B200 RD63T200 MBR9302 Catalogue
Number Connection Points
Type HRXD6 d MB9301
MBR9302
Front
Rear
Complete Breaker Assembled (Frame/
Trip Unit Only)
5
Continuous Current Shipping Weights
Rating @ 40°C Catalogue Number
1600 HRXD63B160 Number of Number per Shipping
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
1800 HRXD63B180 Poles Carton Weight (lbs.)
2000 HRXD63B200 PXD6, HPXD6, RXD6, HRXD6, CPD6
Assembled Breakers
3 1 61.5
Type HRD6 d Black Label PD6, HPD6, RD6, HRD6
Frame Only
Continuous Complete Breaker Mounting 3 1 55.0
Current Unassembled Frame Only Trip Unit Only Assembly Lugs (6 required)
PD6, RD6
Rating @ Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Trip Unit Only
3 1 06.5
1600 HRD63B160 RD63T160 MB9301
Mounting Assembly
1800 HRD63B180 HRD63F200 RD63T180 -or- TC5R600
MB9301 1 53.0
2000 HRD63B200 RD63T200 MBR9302
MBR9302 1 50.9
Interrupting Ratings Lugs (6 required per breaker)e

CSA 22.2 No. 5 / UL 489 A IR No of
RMS Symmetrical KA Catalogue Cables per
Number Connector Wire Range
Breaker Volts AC Volts DC a
TA5P600 1-5 300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
Type 240 480 600 250 500 TC5R600 1-5 300-600 kcmil Cu only
TA6R600 1-6 300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
RD6, RXD6 65 50 25 30 (2P) 25 (3P)
HRD6, HRXD6 100 65 50 30 (2P) 50 (3P)
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range (PD / RD Frames)

Nominal Instantaneous Values
+25% +20%
Breaker Ampere Tolerance Tolerance
Rating Low 2 3 4 5 6 7 High
1200-2000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9790 10,000
a Use two outside poles of a 3-pole circuit breaker for c RXD6 and HRXD6 type circuit breakers are e For additional information See Note: A, page 5-147.
250V DC applications. CSA Certified / UL Listed for reverse feed applications. Note: RD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B “NAVAL”.
b When wired as shown on page 5-4, this circuit breaker d HACR rated. See page 5-150 for additional information.
is CSA Certified / UL Listed and rated for use on 500V  For required mounting base (MB9301 or MBR9302) see
DC ungrounded UPS systems only. page 5-117.

Magnetic Trip Only — ETI Motor Circuit Protector Selection
Instantaneous Trip Range b
Complete Circuit Breaker Without Lugse
Breaker Ampere Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Type Rating Minimumc Maximumc 2-Pole 3-Pole
3 9 33 — HEM3M003L
7 21 77 — HEM3M007L
15 45 165 — HEM3M015L
30 90 330 — HEM3M030L
HEM 50 150 550 — HEM3M050L
70 210 770 — HEM3M070L
100 300 1100 — HEM3M100L
SHIPPING: 3.7 lbs. each
2.6 9 ED63A001
1 7 22 — ED63A002
2 10 35 — ED63A003
3 16 54 — ED63A005
5 30 100 — ED63A010
10 —
ED6-A 25
55
80
180
270 —
ED63A025
ED63A030
600V AC 30 —
250V DC 115 375 ED63A040
40 180 600 — ED63A050
50 315 1000 — ED63A100
100 500 1250 — ED63A125
125 —
SHIPPING: 3.8 lbs. each
1 2.6 9 — CED63A001
2 7 22 — CED63A002
3 10 35 — CED63A003
5 16 54 — CED63A005
10 30 100 — CED63A010
CED6-A 25 55 180 — CED63A025
600V AC 30 80 270 — CED63A030
250V DC 40 115 375 — CED63A040
5
50 180 600 — CED63A050

100 315 1000 — CED63A100
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
125 500 1250 — CED63A125

SHIPPING: 6 lbs. each
150 400 800 — FXD63L150
FXD6d 150
150
800
1100
1500
2500
—
—
FXD63A150
FXD63H150
600V AC
250V DC 250 1100 2500 — FXD63A250
SHIPPING: 9 lbs. each
150 400 800 — CFD63L150
CFD6d 150
150
800
1100
1500
2500
—
—
CFD63A150
CFD63H150
600V AC
250V DC 250 1100 2500 — CFD63A250
SHIPPING: 12 lbs. each 12 lbs. each
JXD6(A)a 400
400
1250
2000
2500
4000
—
JXD62H400
JXD63L400
JXD63H400
600V AC
250V DC SHIPPING: 16 lbs. each 20 lbs. each
CJD6a 400
400
1250
2000
2500
4000
—
—
CJD63L400
CJD63H400
600V AC
250V DC SHIPPING: 29.5 lbs. each 31.5 lbs. each
LXD6(A)a 600
600
2000
3000
4000
6000
LXD62L600
—
LXD63L600
LXD63H600
600V AC
250V DC SHIPPING: 16 lbs. each 20 lbs. each
CLD6a 600
600
2000
3000
4000
6000
—
—
CLD63L600
CLD63H600
600V AC
250V DC SHIPPING: 31.5 lbs. each
LMXD6d 800
800
2800
3200
6000
8000
—
—
LMXD63L800
LMXD63A800
600V AC
250V DC SHIPPING: 35 lbs. each
800 3000 6000 — MXD63L800
MXD6d 800 4000 8000 — MXD63A800
600V AC 800 5000 10000 — MXD63H800
800 3000 6000 — CMD63L800
CMD6d 800 4000 8000 — CMD63A800
600V AC 800 5000 10000 — CMD63H800
Important Information
ETI interrupting ratings are determined through combination tests with properly sized overload relays and contactors.
e Connectors included when ordering by circuit breaker catalog number for HEM, ED and CED6 ETIs. Order ETI
circuit breaker and lugs (2 per pole) separately for the FXD6, CFD6, MXD6, CMD6, JXD6, CJD6, LXD6 and CLD6 ETI’s.
Lug Information pages 5-147 - 5-149
a2
-poleavailable in 3-pole width only. cT
olerance -20%/+30% for lowest setting. All other settings are Enclosures page 5-139 – 5-146
bW
hen applied on DC Circuits — Trip levels will increase -20%/+20% Accessories pages 5-151 - 5-159
approximately +15 to 20%. dF
or 2-pole application use outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

Motor Circuits Application
General continuous-current ratings of at least circuit. The adjustable instantaneous-trip
115% of motor full-load currents. The feature of the Siemens ETI motor circuit
Protection of Motor Circuits trip-setting positions are approximately protector provides for a trip setting
Molded case circuit breakers are used 11 times motor full-load currents. The slightly above the peak motor-inrush
in motor circuits as a disconnecting suggested trip settings may have to current. With this setting, no delay is
means and for short-circuit protection. be adjusted upward to no higher than introduced in opening the circuit when
They should be used in conjunction with 1300% of full-load current for non-design a fault occurs. This circuit breaker has
motor-running, over-current-protection E type motors, and no greater than no time-delay trip element. Therefore it
devices, and should permit the motor 1700% of full load current for design B must be used in conjunction with, and
to start without nuisance tripping from & E energy efficient motors, to allow for immediately ahead of, the motor-running
motor-inrush current. The circuit breaker motor start-up due to inrush currents. overcurrent protective device.
should have a continuous-current rating Breaker Mounted Immediately Ahead Important: The information below does
of not less than 115% of the motor of Motor Starter not apply to all motor applications: it
full-load current. is recommended that the user refer to
Siemens ETI motor circuit protectors are
The recommended motor circuit the National Electrical Code (NEC) for
recommended for use in combination
protectors (Siemens ETI instantaneous specific needs.
motor starters to provide selective short-
only circuit breakers) listed have circuit protection for the motor branch
Table 1 (When Breaker is Mounted Immediately Ahead of Motor Starter)
3 Phase Induction Type Motors (Siemens ETI motor circuit protectors for branch circuit use with alternating-current combination, full voltage motor starters).
Motor ETI Trip Setting Motor ETI Trip Setting Motor ETI Trip Setting
Full Load Catalogue Adjust- Full Load Catalogue Adjust- Full Load Catalogue Adjust-
Amperes Amperes Amperes
Amperes Number ment Ampres Number ment Ampres Number ment
.20 – .33 Low 2.6 38.46 – 55.37 Low 500 231.00 – 264.00 Low 3000
.34 – .45 2 4.5 55.38 – 70.75 2 720 264.00 – 292.00 2 3430
ED63A001 ED63A125
.46 – .56 3 6 70.76 – 84.60 3 920 330.00 – 362.00 LXD63H600 4 4290
5
CED63A001 CED63A125
.57 – .68 4 7.5 84.61 – 96.14 4 1100 395.00 – 428.00 CLD63H600 6 5140
.69 – .81 High 9 96.15 – 113.60 High 1250 428.99 – 462.00 7 5570
30.76 – 35.37 Low 400 462.00 – 490.00 High 6000
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
.53 – .83 Low 7 35.38 – 39.99 2 460 215.00 – 238.00 Low 2800
.84 – 1.14 2 11 44.51 – 49.23 FXD63L150 4 580 238.00 – 261.00 2 3100
ED63A002
1.15 – 1.45 3 15 53.84 – 58.45 CFD63L150 6 700 261.00 – 284.00 3 3400
CED63A002
1.46 – 1.68 4 19 58.46 – 63.06 7 760 308.00 – 369.00 LMXD63L800 5 4000
1.69 – 2.00 High 22 63.07 – 74.50 High 820 369.00 – 423.00 6 4800
.76 – 1.29 Low 10 61.53 – 69.22 Low 800 423.00 – 462.00 7 5500
1.30 – 1.75 2 17 69.23 – 76.91 2 900 462.00 – 490.00 High 6000
ED63A003
1.76 – 2.29 3 23 84.61 – 92.29 FXD63A150 4 1100 246.00 – 269.00 Low 3200
CED63A003
2.30 – 2.68 4 30 100.00– 108.00 CFD63A150 6 1300 269.00 – 284.00 2 3500
2.69 – 3.18 High 35 108.00– 115.00 7 1400 284.00 – 323.00 3 3700
1.23 – 1.99 Low 16 115.00– 136.00 High 1500 362.00 – 492.00 LMXD63A800 5 4700
2.00 – 2.75 2 26 85.00– 100.00 Low 1100 492.00 – 562.00 6 6400
ED63A005
2.76 – 3.52 3 36 100.00– 115.00 2 1300 562.00 – 616.00 7 7300
CED63A005
3.53 – 4.14 4 46 131.00– 146.00 FXD63A250 4 1700 616.00 – 660.00 High 8000
4.15 – 4.90 High 54 162.00– 177.00 CFD63A250 6 2100 231.00 – 264.00 Low 3000
2.30 – 3.83 Low 30 177.00– 192.00 7 2300 264.00 – 292.00 2 3430
3.84 – 5.37 2 50 192.00– 227.00 High 2500 292.00 – 330.00 MXD63L800 3 3800
ED63A010
5.38 – 6.52 3 70 95.00– 110.00 Low 1250 362.00 – 395.00 CMD63L800 5 4710
CED63A010
6.53 – 7.68 4 85 110.00– 124.00 2 1430 428.00 – 462.00 7 5570
7.69 – 9.10 High 100 138.00– 151.00 JXD63L400 4 1790 462.00 – 490.00 High 6000
4.23 – 6.91 Low 55 165.00– 178.00 CJD63L400 6 2140 308.00 – 352.00 Low 4000
6.92 – 9.61 2 90 178.00– 192.00 7 2320 352.00 – 442.00 2 4570
ED63A025 192.00– 227.00 High 2500 442.00 – 447.00 MXD63A800 3 5740
9.62 – 11.91 3 125
CED63A025 483.00 – 527.00 CMD63A800 5 6280
11.92 – 13.83 4 155 154.00– 176.00 Low 2000
13.84 – 16.40 High 180 176.00– 198.00 2 2290 571.00 – 616.00 7 7240
220.00– 242.00 JXD63H400 4 2860 616.00 – 660.00 High 8000
6.15 – 10.37 Low 80
10.38 – 14.22 2 135 264.00– 285.00 CJD63H400 6 3430 385.00 – 440.00 Low 5000
ED63A030 285.00– 308.00 7 3710 495.00 – 550.00 MXD63H800 3 6430
14.23 – 18.06 3 185
CED63A030 308.00– 326.00 High 4000 605.00 – 660.00 CMD63H800 5 7860
18.07 – 20.75 4 235
20.76 – 24.50 High 270 155.00– 176.00 Low 2000 660.00 – 695.00 6 8575
8.84 – 14.22 Low 115 176.00– 198.00 2 2290
14.23 – 19.60 2 185 220.00– 242.00 LXD63L600 4 2860
ED63A040 264.00– 285.00 CLD63L600 6 3430
19.61 – 24.99 3 255
CED63A040 285.00– 308.00 7 3710
25.00 – 28.83 4 325
28.84 – 34.00 High 375 308.00– 326.00 High 4000
13.84 – 23.06 Low 180
23.07 – 31.52 2 300
ED63A050
31.53 – 39.99 3 410
CED63A050
40.00 – 46.14 4 520
46.15 – 54.50 High 600
24.23 – 41.52 Low 315
41.53 – 56.91 2 540
ED63A100
56.92 – 68.45 3 740
CED63A100
68.46 – 76.91 4 890
76.92 – 90.90 High 1000
Note: Lowest instantaneous settings have a -20%/+30% tolerance and all

other settings have a -20%/+20% tolerance.

Motor Circuits Application
Breaker Mounted at a Distance From recommended circuit-breaker ratings the remaining motors in the group.
Motor Starter in Table 2 provide adequate time delay Interrupt Ratings
ET thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for starting the majority of three-phase
induction motors. For normal commercial purposes,
conform to the National Electrical Code available fault current can conveniently
(2002) table 430-52 requirements To determine the ampere ratings of the be obtained in the Interrupting Selector
for motor branch and feeder circuit ET breaker to protect a motor feeder, Tables.
protection when properly applied add the rating of the ET breaker used to
in conjunction with motor-running protect the largest motor branch circuit
overcurrent protective devices. The in the group to the full-load currents of
Table 2 (When Breaker is Mounted at a Distance From Motor Starter)

3 Phase Induction Type Motors (EQ and ET circuit breakers (thermal-magnetic trip) for branch breaker use with alternating-current combination motor starters).
Motor 200 and 208V Motors 230V Motors 460V Motors 575V Motors
Horse - 240V Circuit Breaker Dataa 240V Circuit Breaker Dataa 480V Circuit Breaker Dataa 600V Circuit Breaker Dataa
power Breaker Catalogue Ampere Breaker Catalogue Ampere Breaker Catalogue Ampere Breaker Catalogue Ampere
Rating Type Number Rating Type Number Rating Type Number Rating Type Number Rating
½ BQ3B015 15 BQ3B015 15 ED43B015 15 ED63B015 15
¾ BQ3B015 15 BQ3B015 15 ED43B015 15 ED63B015 15
1 BQ3B015 15 BQ3B015 15 ED43B015 15 ED63B015 15
BQb BQb ED4 ED6
1½ BQ3B015 15 BQ3B015 15 ED43B015 15 ED63B015 15
2 BQ3B020 20 BQ3B015 15 ED43B015 15 ED63B015 15
3 BQ3B030 30 BQ3B020 20 ED43B015 15 ED63B015 15
5 BQ3B040 40 BQ3B030 30 ED4 ED43B015 15 ED6 ED63B015 15
71⁄2 BQ3B060 60 BQ3B050 50 ED43B030 30 ED63B020 20
10 BQ b BQ3B070 70 BQ b BQ3B070 70 ED43B030 30 ED63B030 30
15 BQ3B100 100 BQ3B090 90 ED43B040 40 ED63B035 35
5
20 BQ3B100 100 ED43B050 50 ED63B050 50

25 FXD63B125 125 FXD63B125 FXD63B090 90 FXD63B060 60
125
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
30 FXD63B150 150 FXD63B150 FXD63B100 100 FXD63B070 70

150
40 FXD6 FXD63B175 175 FXD6 FXD63B175 FXD6 FXD63B125 125 FXD6 FXD63B090 90
175
50 FXD63B200 200 FXD63B200 FXD63B150 150 FDX63B100 100
200
FXD63B225 225
60 JXD2 JXD23B300 300 — — — FXD6, FD6 FXD63B150 150 FXD6 FXD63B100 100
75 JXD2 JXD23B400 400 JXD2 JXD23B350 350 FXD6, FD6 FXD63B200 200 FXD6, FD6 FXD63B125 125
FD6c FD63B250 250
100 JXD2 JXD23B400 400 JXD2 JXD23B400 400 FXD6, FD6 FD63B175 175
JD6c JD63B250 250
LD6c or LD63B600 LD6c or LD63B500 or FXD6, FD6 FXD63B200 200
125 600 500 JD6c JD63B300 300
LMD6 LMD63B600 LMD6 LMD63B500 OR JD6c JD63B200 200
LD6cor LD63B600 or LD63B600 or FXD6 or FXD63B225 225
150 600 LMD6 600 JD6c JD63B300 300
LMD6 LMD63B600 LMD63B600 JD6c JD63B225 225
JD6c JD63B300 300
JD6c JD63B350 350
200 LMD6 LMD63B800 800 LMD6 LMD63B800 800 JD6c JD63B400 400
JD6c JD63B400 400
250 — — — — — — JD6c JD63B400
LD6c or LD63B600 or 400
300 — — — — — — 600 LD6c or LD63B500 or
LMD6 LMD63B600
350 — — — — — — LMD6 LMD63B500
LMD6 LMD63B700 700 500
400 — — — — — — LD6c or LD63B600 or
LMD6 LMD63B800 800
500 — — — — — — LMD6 LMD63B600 600
— — —
LMD6 LMD63B800 800
The selection of breakers for this table is in accordance Forpanelboard applications, substitute the BL breaker for the For non-interchangeable trip applications, substitute the FXD6
with Article 430, 2002 National Electric Code. The Canadian BQ, ED2 circuit breakers may also be used. for the FD6, the JXD6 for the JD6, or the LXD6 for
electrical code should also be referred to for rating the LD6.
information. Recommended circuit breakers are for full
voltage starting, special consideration is necessary for
reduced voltage starting.

Adjustable Instantaneous Magnetic Trip Settings Application
Nominal ETI Motor Circuit Protector Thermal Magnetic
Maximum AC Adjustable Trip Range Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Breaker Continuous
Type Amperes Low 2 3 4 5 6 7 High 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
3 9 15 21 27 30 — — 33 HEM3M003L — —
7 21 35 49 63 70 — — 77 HEM3M007L — —
15 45 75 100 135 150 — — 165 HEM3M015L — —
HEM 30 90 150 210 270 300 — — 330 HEM3M030L — —
50 150 250 350 450 500 — — 550 HEM3M050L — —
70 210 350 490 630 700 — — 770 HEM3M070L — —
100 300 500 700 900 1000 — — 1100 HEM3M100L — —
1 2.6 4.5 6 7.5 — — — 9 ED63A001 — —
2 7 11 15 19 — — — 22 ED63A002 — —
3 10 17 23 30 — — — 35 ED63A003 — —
5 16 26 36 46 — — — 54 ED63A005 — —
10 30 50 70 85 — — — 100 ED63A010 — —
ED6 25 55 90 125 155 — — — 180 ED63A025 — —
30 80 135 185 235 — — — 270 ED63A030 — —
40 115 185 255 325 — — — 375 ED63A040 — —
50 180 300 410 520 — — — 600 ED63A050 — —
100 315 540 740 890 — — — 1000 ED63A100 — —
125 500 720 920 1100 — — — 1250 ED63A125 — —
1 2.6 4.5 6 7.5 — — — 9 CED63A001 — —

2 7 11 15 19 — — — 22 CED63A002 — —
3 10 17 23 30 — — — 35 CED63A003 — —
5 16 26 36 46 — — — 54 CED63A005 — —
10 30 50 70 85 — — — 100 CED63A010 — —
CED6 25 55 90 125 155 — — — 180 CED63A025 — —
30 80 135 185 235 — — — 270 CED63A030 — —
40 115 185 255 325 — — — 375 CED63A040 — —
50 180 300 410 520 — — — 600 CED63A050 — —
100 315 540 740 890 — — — 1000 CED63A100 — —
125 500 720 920 1100 — — — 1250 CED63A125 — —
70 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — FXD62B070 FXD63B070
80 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — FXD62B080 FXD63B080
90 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — FXD62B090 FXD63B090
100 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — FXD62B100 FXD63B100
110 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — FXD62B110 FXD63B110
5
125 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — FXD62B125 FXD63B125
FXD6-A 150 400 460 520 580 640 700 760 820 FXD63L150 — —
150 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 FXD63A150 FXD62B150 FXD63B150
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
150 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 FXD63H150 — —
175 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — FXD62B175 FXD63B175
200 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — FXD62B200 FXD63B200
225 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — FXD62B225 FXD63B225
250 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 FXD63A250 FXD62B250 FXD63B250
70 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — FD62B070 FD63B070
80 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — FD62B080 FD63B080
90 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — FD62B090 FD63B090
100 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — FD62B100 FD63B100
110 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — FD62B110 FD63B110
FD6-A 125 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — FD62B125 FD63B125
150 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — FD62B150 FD63B150
175 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — FD62B175 FD63B175
200 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — FD62B200 FD63B200
225 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — FD62B225 FD63B225
250 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — FD62B250 FD63B250
70 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — HFD62B070 HFD63B070
80 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — HFD62B080 HFD63B080
90 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — HFD62B090 HFD63B090
100 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — HFD62B100 HFD63B100
110 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — HFD62B110 HFD63B110
HFD6 125 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — HFD62B125 HFD63B125
150 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — HFD62B150 HFD63B150
175 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — HFD62B175 HFD63B175
200 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — HFD62B200 HFD63B200
225 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — HFD62B225 HFD63B225
250 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — HFD62B250 HFD63B250
70 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — — HHFD63B070
80 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — — HHFD63B080
90 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — — HHFD63B090
100 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — — HHFD63B100
110 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — — HHFD63B110
HHFD6 125 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — — HHFD63B125
150 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — — HHFD63B150
175 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — — HHFD63B175
200 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — — HHFD63B200
225 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — — HHFD63B225
250 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — — HHFD63B250
70 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — CFD62B070 CFD63B070
80 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — CFD62B080 CFD63B080
90 600 640 690 730 770 810 850 900 — CFD62B090 CFD63B090
100 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — CFD62B100 CFD63B100
110 700 770 840 920 990 1060 1140 1200 — CFD62B110 CFD63B110
125 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 — CFD62B125 CFD63B125
CFD6 150 400 460 520 580 640 700 760 820 CFD63L150 — —
150 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 CFD63A150 CFD62B150 CFD63B150
150 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 CFD63H150 — —
175 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — CFD62B175 CFD63B175
200 900 1060 1210 1370 1520 1780 1930 2000 — CFD62B200 CFD63B200
225 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 — CFD62B225 CFD63B225
250 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 CFD63A250 CFD62B250 CFD63B250
Note: T
olerances for instantaneous trip points meet CSA adjustment is made through the breaker cover on all Built to order. Allow 2–3 weeks for delivery.
C22.2 NO.5 / UL 489(7.3). Nominal AC instantaneous trip frame breakers. To change instantaneous trip point on
points are given in the tables. For DC instantaneous trip circuit breaker, depress indicating knob, then rotate to
points, add 15% to nominal values. Instantaneous trip desired position.

Maximum Nominal ETI Motor Circuit Protector Thermal Magnetic
Breaker Continuous AC Adjustable Trip Range Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
200 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD22B200 JXD23B200
225 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD22B225 JXD23B225
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD22B250 JXD23B250
JXD2(A) 300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD22B300 JXD23B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — JXD22B350 JXD23B350
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — JXD22B400 JXD23B400
200 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD62B200 JXD63B200
225 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD62B225 JXD63B225
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD62B250 JXD63B250
JXD6(A) 300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JXD62B300 JXD62B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — JXD62B350 JXD23B350
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — JXD62B400 JXD23B400
200 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JD62B200 JD63B200
225 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JD62B225 JD63B225
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JD62B250 JD63B250
JD6(A) 300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — JD62B300 JD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — JD62B350 JD63B350
400 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 JXD63L400 — —
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 JXD63H400 JD62B400 JD63B400
200 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HJD62B200 HJD63B200
225 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HJD62B225 HJD63B225
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HJD62B250 HJD63H250
HJD6(A) 300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HJD62B300 HJD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HJD62B350 HJD63B350
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HJD62H400 HJD63B400
200 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HHJD62B200 HHJD63B200
225 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HHJD62B225 HHJD63B225
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HHJD62B250 HHJD63B250
HHJD6 300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HHJD62B300 HHJD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HHJD62B350 HHJD63B350
5
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HHJD62B400 HHJD63B400
200 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — — CJD63B200
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
225 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — — CJD63B225
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — — CJD63B250
CJD6 300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — — CJD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — — CJD63B350
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 CJD63H400 — CHD63B400
400 1250 1450 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 CJD63L400 — —
450 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — LXD62B450 LXD63B450
LXD6(A) 500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — LXD62B500 LXD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — LXD62B600 LXD63B600
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — LD62B250 LD63B250
300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — LD62B300 LD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — LD62B350 LD63B350
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — LD62B400 LD63B400
LD6(A) 450 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — LD62B450 LD63B450
500 3000 3430 3800 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — LD62B500 LD63B500
600 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 LXD63L600 — —
600 3000 3430 3800 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 LXD63H600 LD62B600 LD63B600
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HLD62B250 HLD63B250
300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HLD62B300 HLD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HLD62B350 HLD63B350
HLD6(A) 400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HLD62B400 HLD63B400
450 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HLD62B450 HLD63B450
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HLD62B500 HLD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HLD62B600 HLD63B600
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HHLD62B250 HHLD63B250
300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — HHLD62B300 HHLD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HHLD62B350 HHLD63B350
HHLD6 400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HHLD62B400 HHLD63B400
450 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — HHLD62B450 HHLD63B450
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HHLD62B500 HHLD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HHLD62B600 HHLD63B600
250 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — — CLD63B250
300 1250 1430 1610 1790 1960 2140 2320 2500 — — CLD63B300
350 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — — CLD63B359
400 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — — CLD63B400
CLD6 450 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 — — CLD63B450
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — CLD63B500
600 2000 2290 2570 2860 3140 3430 3710 4000 CLD63L600 — —
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 CLD63H600 — CLD63B600
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — LMXD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — LMXD62B600 LMXD63B600
LMXD6 700 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 — LMXD62B700 LMXD63B700
800 2800 3100 3400 3700 4000 4800 5500 6000 LMXD63L800 — —
800 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 LMXD63A800 LMXD62B800 LMXD63B800
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — LMD62B500 LMD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — LMD62B600 LMD63B600
LMD6 700 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 — LMD62B700 LMD63B700
800 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 — LMD62B800 LMD63B800

Nominal ETI Motor Circuit Protector Thermal Magnetic
Maximum AC Adjustable Trip Range Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Breaker Continuous
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — HLMXD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — HLMXD63B600
HLMXD6
700 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 — — HLMXD63B700
800 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 — — HLMXD63B800
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HLMD62B500 HLMD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HLMD62B600 HLMD63B600
HLMD6
700 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 — HLMD62B700 HLMD63B700
800 3200 3500 3700 4200 4700 6400 7300 8000 — HLMD62B800 HLMD63B800
500 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — MD62B500 MD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4290 4710 5140 5570 6000 — MD62B600 MD63B600
700 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — MD62B700 MD63B700
MD6
800 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 MXD63L800 — —
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 MXD63A800 MD62B800 MD63B800
800 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 MXD63H800 — —
500 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — MXD62B500 MXD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — MXD62B600 MXD63B600
700 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — MXD62B700 MXD63B700
MXD6
800 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 MXD63L800 — —
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 MXD63A800 MXD62B800 MXD63B800
800 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 MXD63H800 — —
500 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HMD62B500 HMD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — HMD62B500 HMD63B600
HMD6
700 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — HMD62B700 HMD63B700
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — HMD62B800 HMD63B800
500 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — HMXD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — HMXD63B600
HMXD6
700 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — — HMXD63B700
5
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — — HMXD63B800
400 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — CMD63B400
500 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — —
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
CMD63B500
600 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 — — CMD63B600
CMD6 700 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — — CMD63B700
800 3000 3430 3860 4280 4710 5140 5570 6000 CMD63L800 — —
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 CMD63A800 — CMD63B800
800 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 CMD63H800 — —
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — ND62B800 ND63B800
900 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — ND62B900 ND63B900
ND6
1000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — ND62B100 ND63B100
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — ND62B120 ND63B120
900 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — NXD62B900 NXD63B900
NXD6 1000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — NXD62B100 NXD63B100
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — NXD62B120 NXD63B120
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — HND62B800 HND63B800
900 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — HND62B900 HND63B900
HND6
1000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — HND62B100 HND63B100
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — HND62B120 HND63B120
900 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HNXD63B900
HNXD6 1000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HNXD63B100
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HNXD63B120
800 4000 4570 5140 5710 6280 6850 7420 8000 — — CND63B800
900 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — CND63B900
CND6
1000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — CND63B100
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — CND63B120
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — PD63B120
PD6 1400 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — PD63B140
1600 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — PD63B160
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — PXD63B120
PXD6 1400 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — PXD63B140
1600 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — PXD63B160
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HPD63B120
HPD6 1400 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HPD63B140
1600 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HPD63B160
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HPXD63B120
HPXD6 1400 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HPXD63B140
1600 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HPXD63B160
1200 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — CPD63B120
CPD6 1400 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — CPD63B140
1600 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — CPD63B160
1800 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — RD63B180
RD6
2000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — RD63B200
1800 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — RXD63B180
RXD6
2000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — RXD63B200
1800 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HRD63B180
HRD6
2000 5000 5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9290 10000 — — HRD63B200

Molded Case Switch — Circuit Disconnect Selection
Self-Protective
Maximum Frame 2-Pole 3-Pole Instantaneous
Amp Rating Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Override±20%c Order by catalogue number. Switches
100
BQ2S060 BQ3S060 1000 include frame and self protective trip
BQ2S100 BQ3S100 1000 unit only. Order lugs separately from
ED23S100A 1000 page 5-134 - 5-136.
ED22S100A
ED43S100A 1000
ED42S100A
ED43S125A 1000
ED42S125A
125 ED63S100A 1000
ED62S100A
ED63S125A 1000
—
CED63S100A 1000
CED62S100A CED62S125A
CED63S125A 1000
225 QJ22S225A QJ23S225A 2000
FXD62S250A FXD63S250A 3200
250 HFXD62S250A HFXD63S250A 3200
a CFD63S250A 3200
JXD22S400A JXD23S400A 6000
— JXD63S400A 6000
400
— HJXD63S400A 6000
a CJD63S400A 6000
— LXD63S600A 6000
600 — HLXD63S600A 6000
a CLD63S600A 6000
— LMXD63S800A 8000
800 — MXD63S800A 8000
a CMD63S800A 8000
— NXD63S120A 10000
1200
a CND63S120A 10000
1600 a PXD63S160Ae 10000
5
2000 a RXD63S200Ae 10000

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
 For2-pole application use outside poles of  Molded case switches up to R frame

3-pole circuit breaker. contain a self protecting instantaneous
 For element, which may open circuit above Lugs pages 5-134 - 5-136
additional lugs see page 5-134.
their override set point. Accessories page 5-138 - 5-146
e Requires mounting block MB9301 or
MBR9302.

Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Series Technical
The Sentron Sensitrip IV Functions available in Sentron Sensitrip circuit breakers
circuit breaker is a true RMS Short Short
current sensing device. Digital Catalogue Cont Long Instan- Short Time Time Ground Ground
microprocessor circuitry within the Number Trip Current Time taneous Time Fixed I2t Fault Fault
Suffix Type Setting Delay Pickup Pickup Delay Delay Pickup Delay
electronic trip unit provides more
precise control over the circuit LI LI u u u
breaker functions. This control LIG LIG u u u u u
allows circuit coordination flexibility LSI LSI u u u u u u
not available with thermal magnetic
circuit breakers.
Typical Trip Unit Labeling and Adjustment Positions for the Sentron Sensitrip Circuit Breaker.
LI Trip Unitsa Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
LIG Trip Unitsa Active
5
Push
Overload
To Trip
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Maintenance
Mode
LSI Trip Unitsa Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
LSIG Trip Unitsa

Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
l = Maximum circuit breaker ampere rating

n
I
g
= Ground fault pickup expressed in amperes
l = Continuous current rating expressed in amperes
r
t
sd
= Short time delay - either fixed or I t time delay function
2
I = Instantaneous pickup expressed in amperes

i
t
ld
= Long time delay - I t time delay function
2
I = Short time pickup expressed in multiples of I

sd r
t
g
= Ground fault delay - I t time delay function
2
a Schematic of advanced trip unit shown. Basic trip units

NOTE: Frame rating (In) of 600A shown as an example.
Trip unit settings will vary based on the specific frame are identical but do not include DAS / Maintenance
rating (In) of the device. Mode functionality.

Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip IV Series Technical
A. Adjustable “Continuous Amps” Adjustable
Rating Switch D. Adjustable “Short Time
Continuous Pick-Up” Switch (Optional)
All Sensitrip IV solid state molded Current
(Ir) case circuit breakers have an adjustable (I(I
r)r) Sensitrip IV circuit breakers with
ampere rating switch. Adjustments an adjustable short time pick-up
made to this switch change the switch allow for selection of short
Long Time continuous current rating of the breaker. Long Time
Time time pick-up in a range from 1.5
Delay @ B. A
djustable “Long Time Delay @ to 10 times the setting of the
(t(t
ld)ld)
66 x Ir
x Ir maximum current rating.
Delay” Switch
(tld)
All Sensitrip IV circuit breakers have

(tld) E. Adjustable “Short Time
an adjustable long time delay switch to Delay” Switch (Optional)
allow for selection of long time delays Sensitrip IV circuit breakers with

of fixed time intervals at six times the an adjustable short time pick-up
setting of the adjustable “continuous switch also contain a switch for
amps” rating switch. ShortTime
Time adjustment in time delay. The
Instantaneous Pick-up adjustable short time delay switch
C. A
djustable “Instantaneous
Pick-up Pick-Up” Switch xlr allows for either of two modes of
(I(Ii)i) ((IIsd
sd)) short time delays. One range of
Sensitrip IV circuit breakers with an settings enables the breaker to be
adjustable instantaneous pick up set for fixed time delays and the
switch allow selection of a specific other range of settings enables
instantaneous trip setting. ShortTime
Time the breaker to be set for short time
I2T Delay— delays based on l t curves. 2
Function Seconds
(tsd))
(T sd
ln
= Maximum circuit breaker ampere rating
Adjustable “Ground Fault Pick-Up” Switch
lr
= Continuous current rating expressed in amperes
ensitrip IV circuit breakers containing the
S
Ground
optional equipment ground fault protection I
i
= Instantaneous pickup expressed in amperes
have a ground fault pick-up setting. The
5
Fault ground fault pick-up settings allow for one I

sd
= Short time pickup expressed in multiples of I r
Delay of three time delays based on I2t curves.
I2T I = Ground fault pickup expressed in amperes
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
For 3-phase, 4-wire systems, an external g
Ground @ neutral transformer is required with an

t = Short time delay - either fixed or I t time delay 2
33 xx IIgg ampere rating equal to the trip unit ampere sd

Fault rating. function
Pick-up (tg)
(tg)
(IIgg)
( )
t = Long time delay - I t time delay function
ld
2
t = Ground fault delay - I t time delay function

g
2
Examples of Adjustment Settings

Catalogue Number SLD6A600LI
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3
Frame
Rating (In) Continuous Current Setting (Ir) Long Time Delay Setting (tld) Instantaneous Pickup Setting (Ii)
Setting 600A 200 2.5 750
Description 600A max current rating 200A 2.5 sec to trip @ 6 x Ir [6 x 200A = 1200A] 750A
Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
Catalogue Number SLD6A600LSIG

Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4
Frame Short Ground Fault Ground Fault
Rating Cont. Current Long Time Short Time Instantaneous Time Delay Pickup Setting Delay Setting
(In) Setting (Ir) Delay Setting (tld) Pickup Setting (Isd) Pickup Setting (Ii) Setting (tsd) (Ig) (tg)
Setting 600A 300 10 1.5 5 0.1 36 [.18] 36 [.18]
Description 600A max 300A
10 sec @ 6 x Ir 1.5 x Ir 5 x In
0.1 sec
Ig = 36 x 10 0.18 sec @ 3 x Ig
current rating [6 x 300A = 1800A] [1.5 x 200A = 300A] [5 x 600A = 3,000A] [36 x 10 = 360A] [3 x 360 = 1,080A]
Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode

Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Enclosures General
Type 3R
Type 1
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Types 12
Type 1 — A general indoor, sheet- Types 12 — A special-industry, sheet-

steel enclosure for use in normal steel enclosure for use in atmospheres
atmospheres. containing particles of lint, dust, dirt,
sawdust and other foreign matter.
Type 3R — An outdoor, sheet-steel
enclosure providing protection against
driving rain, sleet or snow. Listed as
service entrance equipment.

Enclosed Breaker Nomenclature General
E 3R ED 6 2 B 060 — NC
I II III IV V VI+
VII VIII +
IX+
E 12 JXD 6 3 B* 200 — NC
Sample Part Numbers:
I II III IV V VI+
VII VIII +
IX+
E 1S SHJD 6 B — 400 LSIG NC
I II III IV V VI+
VII VIII +
IX+
I Base model Start with E
Placeholder Position Options
II May be replaced by 1S, 1F, 12, or 3R
May be replaced by BQ, BQH, HBQ
May be replaced by QR, QRH, or HQR
May be replaced by ED, HED, HHED, CED
May be replaced by FD, FXD HFXD, HFD, HHFD, HHFXD, CFD
III May be replaced by JD, JXD, HJD, HJXD, HHJD, HHJXD. CJD
May be replaced by FD, FXD JD, JXD, SJD, SHJD, SCJD
May be replaced by LD, LXD, HLD, HLXD. HHLD, HHLCD, CLD, SLD, SHLD, SCLD
May be replaced by MD, MXD, HMD, HMXD, CMD, SMD, SHMD, SCMD
May be replaced by ND, NXD, HND, HNXD, CND, SND, SHND, SCND
5
IV May be replaced by 2, 4, 6
V May be replaced by 2, 3, B
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
VI +
May be replaced by B, * If option not present omitted
May be replaced by :
QR 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
ED 015, 020, 025, 030, 040, 045, 050, 060, 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125
FD 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
VII
JD 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
LD 300, 400, 450, 500, 600
MD 600, 700, 800
ND 900, 1000, 1200
VIII+ May be replaced by "LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG, if option+ not present position omitted
IX* NC: Suitable for service entrance,+ If option not present position omitted
The enclosed breakers are factory assembled. Each enclosed breakers assembly
includes the selected type of enclosures, circuit breakers, standard lugs, and Neutral.

Enclosures — Type 1 Selection/Dimensions
Dimensions
Figure 1 Figure 2
Type 1
K.O. Dimensions
Number Maximum Weight Dimensions (inches)
Fig. Cataloguei
Breaker Type of Current Lb./Ship. 6 Plcs. 2 Plcs.
No. Number
Poles Rating Package
A B C D E F G H
5
1 BQ, BQH, HBQ 3 EB3100S a
32 17 1⁄8
7 1/8
4 3/4
14 1/6
15/16
1 5/16
— —
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, 100 E2N1S 

8 16 23⁄32
7 1/2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
51/16 1345/64
HED6 E2N1F 8 171⁄2 81/2 7/8, 11/8, 13/8,
51/4 1
ED4, ED6, HED4, CED6N1S 14 2115⁄32 719/32 13/4,2
125 57/64 181/4
2 HED6, CED6 CED6N1F 14 221⁄4 81/2
FXD6, FD6, FXD6-A,

F6N1S 11/8, 13/8, 13/4,
FD6-A, HFD6, HFXD6, 250 33 3813⁄32 1115/32 51/16 33 8 133/64
F6N1F 2, 21/2, 3
HHFD6, CFD6
JXD2(A), JD6(A),
JXD6(A), HJD6(A),
J6N1
HJXD6(A), HHJD6, 400 120 4013⁄64 36 — —
HHJXD6, SJD6(A), 2–3
SHJD6(A), SXD6H
1045/64
LD6(A), LXD6(A),
HLD6(A), HLXD6(A),
LD6N1
HHLD6, HHLXD6, 600 101 46 42 — —
3 (L6N1) 2227/64 181/4 25/64
SLD6(A), SHLD6(A),
SCJD6, SCLD6, LXD6H
MD6, MXD6, SMD6,

HMD6, HMXD6,
SHMD6, ND6, NXD6,
1200 MND61 132 60 10 557/8 — —
SND6, HND6, HNXD6,
SHND6, CMD6,
SCMD6, CND6, SCND6

 Surface mounted, indoor. If outdoor model is required, use
 Surface mounted, indoor. If flush mounting is required, replace prefix “W” instead of “E”. Not available in flush (“F”) model.
suffix “S” in catalogue number with suffix “F”. Also, if outdoor  Use for 110-125 ampere ED4, ED6, HED4 or HED6
model required, use prefix “W” instead of “E”. circuit breakers.
 Does not include circuit breaker. Order circuit  Will not accept breaker with shunt trip.
breaker separately.  Will not accept 2-pole GFCI or breaker with shunt trip.
 Neutral not included. Order as separate item from table on i Items cannot be ordered separately. See configuration.
next page.
 Neutral included in enclosure. Built to order. Consult sales office
for factory lead time and prices.

Dimensions
Figure 3

Fig. Breaker
of Current Cataloguec Number Lb./Ship.
No. Type
Poles Rating Package A B C D E F G H
BQ,
1 BQH, 3 100 EB3100Sa 32 171⁄8 71/8 43/4 141/6 15/16 15/16 — —
HBQ
5
Neutrals
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Enclosure Neutral Neutral Cable Capacity

Catalogue Number Catalogue Number and Wire Range
E2N1(S)(F) (1 pc.) #14–2 Cu/Al
W53045
CED6N1(S)(F) Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #14–8 Cu/Al
(1 pc.) #6–350 kcmil
F6N1(S)(F) N250 (NFD)
Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #14–2/0 Cu/Al
(1 pc.) #1/0–750 kcmil Cu/Al or
J6N1 W60992 (NJD) (2 pcs.) #1/0–300 kcmil Cu/Al
Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #6–250 kcmil Cu/Al
(2 pcs.) #1/0–600 kcmil
LD6N1 W60993 (NLD)
(8 pcs.) 250 kcmil–500 kcmil Cu/Al
MND61 W63623 (NMND)
 Does
not include circuit breaker. Order circuit
breaker separately.

 Neutral included in enclosure. Built to order. Consult sales office
c Items cannot be ordered separately. See configuration. for factory lead time and prices.

Enclosures — Type 3R Selection/Dimensions
Dimensions
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
Type 3R
Number Maximum Weight
5
Fig. Cataloguee Dimensions (inches)
Breaker Type of Current Lb./Ship.
No. Number
Poles Rating Package A B C D E F G H
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
50
2 BQ, BQH, HBQ 3 WB3100 9 171⁄8 73⁄8 45⁄16 141⁄8 41⁄2 11⁄8 311/16 —
100
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6 100 E2N3R 12 179⁄16 1239⁄64
5 71⁄4 51⁄4 51⁄4 1 3
—
CED6 125 CED6N3R 16 2221⁄64 173⁄8
FXD6, FD6, FXD6-A, FD6-A,
HFD6, HFXD6, 250 F6N3R 45 381⁄8 141⁄16 73⁄4 339⁄32 8 13⁄16 131⁄2 13⁄16
HHFD6, CFD6
JXD2(A), JD6(A), JXD6(A),
HJD6(A),
HJXD6(A), HHJD6, HHJXD6, 400 J6N3R 126 4063⁄64 353⁄4
SJD6(A),
SHJD6(A), SXD6H 2–3 241⁄2 11⁄8
1 LD6(A), LXD6(A), LXD6H,
HLD6(A), HLXD6(A), HHLD6, 263⁄4 1123⁄32 181⁄4 21⁄8
600 LD6N3R 127 4563⁄64 403⁄4
CLD6, SCJD6(A), SLD6(A),
SHLD6(A)
MD6, MXD6, SMD6,
HMD6, HMXD6, SHMD6,
ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6, 1200 MND63 210 619⁄64 5717⁄32 245⁄8 11⁄16
HNXD6, SHND6, CMD6,
SCMD6, CND6, SCND6
For inches / millimeters conversion, see Technical section.  Neutral

included in enclosure.
 Will
not accept breaker with shunt trip.
Does not include circuit breaker. e Items cannot be ordered separately. See configuration.
Order circuit breaker separately.
 Neutralnot included. Order as separate item from table
on next page.

Enclosures — Type 3R Selection/Dimensions
Dimensions
N
L
F
F L
E M
G H
B C
Figure 4 J
Figure 5
5

Fig. Breaker
of Current Lb./Ship.
No. Type
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Poles Rating Package A B C D E F G H J K L M N P

QR2, QR2H,
3 3 225A 40 31.4 9.1 5.6 25.3 6.1 2.4 4.6 2.2 2.1 4.9 32.2 9.6 — —
HQR2, QR2H
QR2, QR2H,
4 2 225A 40 27 7.1 4.2 4.1 2.3 111⁄2 3.6 2 4.6 2 10.7 2.3 71⁄2 2.1
HQR2, QR2H
Neutrals
Enclosure Neutral
Neutral Cable Capacity and Wire
Catalogue Catalogue
Range
Number Number
E2N3R (1 pc.) #14–2 Cu/Al
W53045 
CED6N3R  Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #14–8 Cu/Al
(1 pc.) #6–350 kcmil
F6N3R N250
JD6N3R W60992 (2 pcs.) #1/0–300 kcmil Cu/Al
(2 pcs.) #1/0–600 kcmil
LD6N3R W60993
(8 pcs.) 250 kcmil–500 kcmil Cu/Al
MND63 W63623
Hubs — see page 5-146
 Does not include circuit breaker. Order circuit  Neutral included in enclosure.
Use CED enclosure for all ED-frame 110-125 ampere units.
breaker separately. 
 Neutral not included. Order as separate item from table on next page. e Items cannot be ordered separately. See configuration.

Fig. Cataloguee
Breaker Type of Current Lb./Ship.
No. Number
Poles Rating Package A B C D E F
2 ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6 100 E2N12 

12 18 5⁄8
18 1/2
811/32 71⁄16 61⁄16
5 CED6 125 CED6N12 
16 22 5⁄8
22 5/8
FXD6, FD6, FXD6-A, FD6-A,
250 F6N12
40 38 19⁄32
14 29⁄64
8 1/8
34 13 22/32
HFD6, CFD6
JXD2(A), JD6(A), JXD6(A),

HJD6(A), HJXD6(A),
400 J6N12 40 36 —
HHJD6, HHJXD6, SJD6(A),
SHJD6(A) 2–3 104 2535⁄64 117⁄8 2535⁄64
1 LD6(A), LXD6(A), HLD6(A),
HLXD6(A), HHLD6, HHLXD6, LD6N12
600 45 41 —
SLD6(A), SHLD6(A), CJD6, (L6N12)
CLD6, SCJD6(A), SCLD6(A)
MD6, MXD6, SMD6,
HMD6, HMXD6, SHMD6,
ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6, 1200 MND612 220 60 373⁄8 10
5/8 3 2
HNXD6, SHND6, CMD6,

SCMD6, CND6, SCND6
Dimensions
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Figure 2 Figure 3
.44
Figure 1 Diameter
Neutrals
Enclosure Neutral Neutral Cable Capacity
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number and Wire Range
E2N12c (1 pc.) #14–2 Cu/Al
W53045c
CED6N12d (1 pc.) #14–2 Cu/Al
(1 pc.) #6–350 kcmil
F6N12 N250
J6N12 W60992 (2 pc.) #1/0–300 kcmil Cu/Al
(2 pcs.) #1/0–600 kcmil
L6N12 W60993
(8 pcs.) 250 kcmil–500 kcmil Cu/Al Grd. Lug
MND612 W63623
(1 pc.) #6–300 kcmil Cu/Al
Figure 4

 eutral included in enclosure.
N
 oes not include circuit breaker.
D  Use CED enclosure for all ED-frame 88-90
Order circuit breaker separately. ampere units.
 Neutral not included. Order as separate item. e Items cannot be ordered separately. See configuration.

Selection/Dimensions
Knockouts & Wire Bending Space
Types 1, 12 Type 3R
Number of Knockouts Per Panel (type 12 have no KO’s) Maximum Cable Sizes
Conduit Range
Recommended (Cu/Al)
Breaker Type Per Knockout Outside Maximum for Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X,
Dimensions (inches)
Hub Size 12 & 12K Enclosures 
Top Bottom Side Back Bottom Side Back
(inches)
Type 3R
BQ, BQH, HBQ

3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4 1 1 2 2 8 1 3 2 
70–100A
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 7⁄8, 11⁄8, 13⁄8, 13⁄4, 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 
7⁄8, 11⁄8, 13⁄8, 13⁄4, 2 — — — — 2 — —

CED6 2 (CFD6 only 300 kcmil)
7⁄8, 11⁄8, 13⁄8, 13⁄4, 2, 21⁄2 2 2 2 2 — 1 1
FXD6, FD6, FXD6-A, FD6-A, 1 1 2 2 1 1 —

11⁄8, 13⁄8, 13⁄4, 2, 21⁄2, 3 4 
HFD6, CFD6 1 1 — — 1 — —
JXD2(A), JXD6(A), JD6(A),

HJD6(A), HJXD6(A), HHJD6, 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3, 31⁄2, 4 1 1 2 4
— — — 4
(2) 500 kcmil
HHJXD6, SJD6(A), SHJD6(A)
LXD6(A), LD6(A), HLXD6(A),

HLD6(A), HHLD6, HHLXD6, 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3, 31⁄2, 4 1 1 2 4 — — — 4
(2) 500 kcmil
SLD6(A), SHLD6(A)
MD6, SMD6, HMD6, ND6, (3) 600 kcmil or

— — — — — — — — 4
SND6, HND6 (4) 500 kcmil
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Hubs (Type 3R)

Breaker Conduit Size Catalogue
Type (inches) Number
¾ ECHR075
BQ, BQH, HBQ,
1 ECHR100
ED2, ED4, ED6,
¼ ECHR125
HED4, HED6,
1½ ECHR150
CED6
2 ECHR200
FXD6-A, FD6-A, HFD6, HFXD6, 2½ ECHV250
CFD6, JXD2(A), JD6(A), JXD6(A), 3 ECHV300
HJD6(A), HJXD6(A), LD6(A), 3½ ECHV350
LXD6(A),HLD6(A), HLXD6(A) 4 ECHV400
Note: E
nclosures for 250A max breakers
have a hub provision on the rainshed.
Enclosures for larger breakers (J, L, M
& N frame) have blank top rainsheds.
Drill or punch hole in the field to
accommodate hub size desired.

1/8" high enclosure provides sufficient wire bending
 17  The use of cables larger than those listed below may
space for all available CB lugs. violate NEC & CSA wire bending space requirements.
 Sufficient wire bending space is provided for all  The use of compression type connectors will violate
available mechanical type CB lugs. NEC and CSA wire bending space requirements.

Lug Information
Mechanical Lug Selection
For Use Circuit Breaker
With Type(s) Ampere Rating Cables Per Lug Lug Wire Range Catalog Number
Line Side
1 #14–#6 AWG Cu
15–40 TC1Q1ab
1 #12–#6 AWG Al"
1
45–125 #8–#1 AWG Cu #6–#1/0 AWG Al TA1Q1b
1
BQ, BQH,
BQHF Load Side
BQE, 1 #14–#10 AWG Cu
15–20
BQF, 1 #12–#10 AWG Al
BL, BLH, 1 #14–#6 AWG Cu
HBL, HBQ 25–35
1 #12–#6 AWG Al
Switching
Neutrals 1 #8–#6 AWG Cu
40–50
BG, 1 #8–#4 AWG Al Lugs are integral to Circuit
BLG 55–70 1 #8–#4 AWG Cu Breaker
*exceptions in Table A 1 #8–#2 AWG Al
1
80–100 #4–#1/0 AWG Cu #2–#1/0 AWG Al
1
1
110–125 #2–#1/0 AWG Cu #1/0–#2/0 AWG Al
1
Line Side (CQD) & Load Side
BQD, CQD #14–#6 AWG Cu
15–40 1 Integral
BQD6 #12–#6 AWG Al
#8–#1 AWG Cu
45–100 1 Integral
#6–#1/0 AWG Al
#14–#6 AWG Cu TC1Q1
5
15–30 1
#12–#6 AWG Al
#14–#6 AWG Cu 3TC1Q1 (pkg. of 3)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
NGG, HGG, 15–30 1
#12–#6 AWG Al
LGG
#8–#1/0 AWG Cu
35–125 1 3TC1GG20 (pkg. of 3)
#8–#2/0 AWG Al
15–125 — NUT KEEPER PLATE TNKG3c (pkg. of 3)
Connector wire ranges and cavities are established in conjunction with Table 6.1.4.2.1 of UL 489 standards.
Table A
For Use Circuit Breaker
With Type(s) Ampere Rating Cables Per Lug Lug Wire Range Number of Poles
Load Side
#8–#4 AWG Cu-Al This exception is applicable
BQ, BL, QP 55-60 1
#3 AWG requires 22 or 65 kAIC to 1- and 2-pole only
Note:
(A) Molded case circuit breakers having a rated ampacity a Lug
is steel.
of 125 amperes or less are to be connected with 60 or b Sold
in package of six.
75°C wire. Circuit breakers having a rated ampacity c Onenut keeper plate is required with each lug on the
greater than 125 amperes shall only be cabled with NGG breaker.
75°C cable unless otherwise indicated on the circuit
breaker label. Exceptions to this rule are outlined in
article 110-14 C(1)(2) of the 2005 National Electric Code
and table 6.1.4.2.1 per CSA C22.2 No5.02 standard.
(B) Connector wire ranges and cavities are established in
conjunction with Table 6.1.4.2.1 of UL 489 standards.

Lug Information
Aluminum Body Lugs for Copper or Aluminum Wire Selection
For Use Circuit Breaker Cables Catalogue
With Type(s) Ampere Rating Per Lug Lug Wire Range Number
QJ2, QJH2 #6 AWG–300 kcmil (Cu)
60–225 1 TA1Q300 (pkg of 3)
QJ2H, HQJ2H #4 AWG–300 kcmil (Al)
"#14–#10 AWG (Cu)
All 2, 3 pole 15–25 1 SA1E025
#12–#10 AWG (Al)"
ED2, ED4, ED6,
30–100 1 #10–#1/0 (Cu or Al) LN1E100
ED6 ETI,
HED4, #3-3/0 (Cu)
110–125 1 TA1E6125
#1-2/0 (Al)
LD1E060
CED6 30–60 1 #10–4 (Cu or Al)
(Load Side)
All 1 pole
LD1E100
ED, HED 70–100 1 #4–#1/0 (Cu or Al)
(Load Side)
FXD6-A, FD6-A,
HFD6, #6 AWG–350 kcmil (Cu)
70–250 1 TA1FD350A
CFD6 #4 AWG–350 kcmil (Al)
HHFD6
SJD6(A),
SHJD6(A) 65-200 1–2 #4 AWG–310 kcmil (Cu or Al) TA2J630
SCJD6
JXD2(A), JXD6(A),
JD6(A), SJD6(A),
HJD6(A), 3/0–500 kcmil (Cu)
200–400 1–2 TA2J6500
HHJXD6, HHJD6, 4/0–500 kcmil (Al)
SHJD6(A), CJD6,
SCJD6
LXD6(A), LD6(A),
SLD6(A), HLD6(A),
3/0–500 kcmil (Cu)
HHLXD6, HHLD6, 250–600 1–2 TA2J6500
4/0–500 kcmil (Al)
5
SHLD6(A), CLD6,
SCLD6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
LMD6a, LMXD6a,
HLMD6a, 1–2 #1–500 kcmil (Cu or Al) TA2K500
HLMXD6a, MD6,
MXD6, SMD6, 500–600
HMD6, HMXD6,
SHMD6, CMD6, 1–3 1/0–500 kcmil (Cu or Al) TA3K500
SCMD6
ND6, 2TA4P8500bc
250–500 kcmil (Cu or Al)
NXD6, SND6, 3TA4P8500d
HND6, HNXD6, 800–1200 1–4
2TA4N8500c
SHND6, CND6, 250–500 kcmil (Cu or Al)
3TA4N8500d
SCND6
PD6, HPD6,
CPD6
PXD6,
1200–1600 1–5 300–600 kcmil (Cu or Al) TA5P600
HPXD6,
SPD6,
SHPD6
PD6, PXD6,
HPD6, HPXD6,
SPD6, SHPD6, 1200–2000 1–6 300–600 kcmil (Cu or Al) TA6R600
RD6, RXD6,
HRD6, HRXD6
Use TA2K500 or TA3K500 only.

b Contains 2 connectors plus 1 NDTS end barrier.
c Contains 3 connectors plus 1 NDTS end barrier.

Lug information
Optional Mechanical Lugs Selection
For Use Circuit Breaker Cables Lug Qty per Catalogue
With Type Ampere Rating Per Lug Material Lug Wire Range Cat. # Number
QJ2, QJH2,
60–225 1 Cu #6 AWG–250 kcmil (Cu) 1 TC1Q250
QJ2H, HQJ2H
ED, HED 2&3 pole 2–3 pole 30-125 1 Cu #10–#1/0 (Cu) 1 TC1ED6150
HFD6, HHFD6,
70–250 1 Cu #6 AWG–350 kcmil (Cu) 1 TC1FD350
CFD6, F(X)D6-A
J(X)D2(A), J(X)D6(A), 1 3/0–600 kcmil (Cu) 3/0–500 1 TC1J6600a

HJD6(A), HHJD6, 200–600 Cu
1–2 kcmil (Cu) 1 TC2J6500a
SHJD6(A), L(X)D6(A),
HHLD6, SCD6,
HLD6(A), SHLD6(A), CJD6, 250–600 1 500–750 kcmil (Al)
Al 1 TA1L6750
CLD6, SCJD6, SCLD6 1 500–600 kcmil (Cu)
500–600 1–2 Cu #1 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu) 1 TC2K500

SMD6, M(X)D6, 1–3 Cu #1 AWG–350 kcmil (Cu) 1 TC3K350
HM(X)D6, HMD6,
700–800 500–750 kcmil (Cu) 2 2TA2N8750
CMD6, SCMD6, SND6, 1–2 Al
N(X)D6, HN(X)D6, 500–750 kcmil (Al) 3 3TA2N8750
SHND6, CND6, SCND6 500–750 kcmil (Cu) 2 2TA3N8750
800–1200 1–3 Al
500–750 kcmil (Al) 3 3TA3N8750
R(X)D6, HR(X)D6 1600–2000 1–5 Cu 300–600 kcmil (Cu) 1 TC5R600
P(X)D6, HP(X)D6, CPD6,
1200–1600 1–4 Al 600–750 kcmil (Cu/Al) 1 TA4P750
SPD6, SHPD6
Compression Lugs
Ampere Lugs Lug Wire Catalogue
5
For Circuit Breaker Types Rating Poles Per Kit Size Number
Lugs (contains indicated number of lugs and necessary hardware per kit)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, CED4 15–125 1, 2, 3 1 #2/0 AWG Cu/AL CCE125
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H 125–225 2, 3 1 350 kcmil Cu/AL CCQ225
F(X)D6-A, HF(X)D6, HHF(X)D6, CFD6 125–250 2, 3 1 350 kcmil CCF250
JXD2-A, J(X)D6-A, HJ(X)D6-A, HHJ(X)D6-A, CJD6, SJD6-A, SHJD6-A,
200–600 2, 3 1 500 kcmil CCL600
SCJD6, L(X)D6-A, HL(X)D6-A, CLD6, SLD6-A, SHLD6-A, SCLD6
Kits (contain lugs and hardware for complete line or load end of 2 or 3 pole breaker)
2 6 CCM800K2
M(X)D6, HM(X)D6, CMD6, SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6 500–800
3 9 CCM800K3
500 kcmil
2 8 CCN1200K2
N(X)D6, HN(X)D6, CND6, SND6, SHND6, SCND6 900–1200
3 12 CCN1200K3
Distribution Lugs
Ampere Lugs Wires Catalogue
For Circuit Breaker Types Rating Poles Per kit Per Lug Lug Wire Size Number
#6-#4 AL
NGG, HGG, LGG 15-125 1,2,3 1 6 TA6GG04
#14-#4 Cu
#14-#4 AWG Cu
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6, CED6 15-125 1,2,3 1 6 TA6ED06
#6-#4 AWG Al
#14-#4 AWG Cu
F(X)D6-A, HF(X)D6, HHF(X)D6, CFD6 70-250 2,3 1 6 TA6FD04
#6-#4 AWG Al
XD2-A, J(X)D6-A, HJ(X)D6-A, HHJ(X)D6-A, CJD6-A, 14-2/0 AWG Cu
200-600 2,3 1 6 TA6JD20
JD6, L(X)D6-A, HL(X)D6-A, CLD6-A, LD6-A, SCLD6 #6-2/0 AWG Al
a Used for 100% rated JD/LD frame circuit breakers.  Special purpose wire connectors, not for general use.

Modifications Selection/ General
A variety of internal and external Modifications a
accessories, as well as modifications, 50°C Ambient Calibration — Not CSA approved / UL listed and not available for solid state, 100%
are available to adapt Siemens circuit rated breakers or 400HZ calibrated breakers.
breakers to special installation or BL Type Circuit Breakers
F
requirements.CSA approved / UL listed — Add suffix ‘M’ to catalogue number (Example: B120M)
internal accessories for 100 through For BQ, QJ2, and ED Frame Circuit Breakers
2000A circuit breakers are field-addable. — Replace ‘B’ in catalogue number with ‘M’ (Example: BQ3M060, QJ23M200, ED63M060)
Internal accessories fine tune an For FD, JD, LD, LMD, MD, ND, PD, and RD Frame Circuit Breakers
Non-Interchangeable Trip (3–pole only)
electrical distribution system, — Replace ‘B’ in catalogue number with ‘M’ (Example: FXD63M225, JXD63M400)
allowing control of the circuit breakers to Interchangeable Trip (trip unit only, 3–pole only)
meet special application requirements. — Replace ‘T’ in catalogue number with ‘W’ (Example: FD63W200, JD63W400)
For example, emergency situations may 400 HZ Calibration
dictate tripping critically placed circuit SA approved / UL Listed (5KA IR)
C
breakers quickly. Shunt trips accomplish For BQ, BL, and QJ Type Circuit Breakers (200A max.)
this conveniently and efficiently. — Add suffix ‘Y’ to catalogue number
Or, when voltage drops are a concern, Not CSA approved / UL Listed
undervoltage trips automatically open For all other Circuit Breakers — Add suffix ‘Y’ to catalogue number
the circuit breaker at a predetermined Fungus Proofing — In accordance with MIL-T-152.
voltage level. ll BQD, CQD, NGG, ED, FD, JD, LD, LMD, MD, ND, PD, and RD, Frame Circuit Breakers are
A
inherently fungus resistant and do not require special treatment.
A wide range of external operating and
Fungus proofing in accordance with MIL-T-152
mounting accessories is also available. For BL, and BQ Type Circuit Breakers
For example, face, shallow, and back — Order must be placed directly with the factory by the sales office.
mounting plates are ideal for tailoring BQ or all other Circuit Breaker Types
F
circuit breakers to OEM applications. — Order must be placed directly with the factory by the sales office.
A complete line of operating handles Certificate of Compliance
5
and handle-blocking devices meet Certificate of compliance testing must be performed on the actual device being shipped. The
switchboard, enclosure and safety certificate cannot be provided after initial shipment. Order for devices with COC requirement must
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
be placed directly with the factory by the sales office.

needs. Plug-in mounting assemblies,
which simplify switchboard mounting
of circuit breakers and permit breaker
removal without disconnecting bus or
cable connections, are available.
UL 489 Supplement SB Naval Use Breakers Ordering Informationa

Breakers tested to UL 489 Supplement SB are qualified for use For “NAVAL” label, order must be placed directly with the
on non combat and auxiliary naval vessels.
factory by Siemens Sales Office.
Siemens’ molded case breakers from the ED frame through the
2000 Amp SB frame can be labeled “Naval” in compliance with
Supplement SB.
Supplement SB testing comprises two sets of vibration tests. Types UL File
The first is to find mechanical resonances in the product and ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 E10848, Vol 4, Sec 11
to subject the breaker to extreme testing at each resonant CED6 E10848, Vol 4, Sec 13
frequency. The second is a swept frequency test, in which the FD6, FXD6, HFD6, HFXD6 E10848, Vol 4, Sec 17
frequency of excitation is changed in intervals of 1Hz, and held
at each frequency for five minutes. The excitation frequencies CFD6 E10848, Vol 4, Sec 18
run from 4 to 33Hz, and the test is conducted in each of the JXD2, JD6, JXD6, LXD6, LD6,
E10848, Vol 4, Sec 8
three orthogonal axes of the breaker. HJD6, HJXD6, HLD6, HLXD6
HHJD6, HHJXD6, HHLD6, HHLXD6 E10848, Vol 4, Sec 20
During these tests, the breaker must not trip from the closed
CJD6, CLD6 E10848, Vol 4, Sec 14
position, nor may the contacts touch from the open position.
Calibration and insulation resistance are also verified during the MD6, MXD6, HMD6, HMXD6, CMD6,
E10848, Vol 4, Sec 15
test. ND6, NXD6, HND6, HNXD6, CND6
PD6, PXD6, HPD6, HPXD6, CPD6,
For detailed information, refer to UL 489, Supplement SB. E10848, Vol 4, Sec 19
RD6, RXD6, HRD6, HRXD6
a Consult sales office for pricing.

Internal Accessories Selection/ General
Feature Combinations
The available feature combinations are shown in the chart below. For applications requiring combinations of features not listed in
this chart, consult the sales office for availability.
Avail. On ST/ UVT/ Elect. Ground
Modules/ Breaker ST/ ST/ AUX/ UVT/ UTV/ ST/ AUX/ Bell Ground Fault
Breakers Breaker Poles ST AUX ALSW ALSW UVT AUX ALSW ALSW AUX ALSW ALSW Alarm Fault w/Bell
QP, BQ, BLa 1 1, 2, 3 1 — — — — — — — 1, 2 — — — — —
BQD, CQD, NGG 1 2, 3 1 1/1 — — — — — — 1, 2 1/1 1 — — —
1/1,
QRe 1 2, 3 1, 2 — — — — — — 2 — — — — —
2/2
1/1, 1/1,
All ED, EF 1 1, 2, 3 1 1/1 1/1 1/1/1 1 1/1 1/1/1 1, 2 1 — 1 1
1/2 2/1
All FD, FF 2 2, 3 1 — — — 1 1 — — 1, 2 1/1 1 — — —
1/1,
All JD, LD, LMDb 2 2,3 1 1 — — 1 — — 1, 2 — 1, 2 — — —
1/2
SJD6, SHJD6,
1/1,
SCJD6, SLD6, 1 3 1 1 — — 1 — — 1, 2 — 1, 2 — — —
1/2
SHLD6, SCLD6c
All MD, ND, PD, RD
1/1, 1/1,
Including Electronic 2 2,3 1 1/1 — — 1 — — 1, 2 1, 2 — — —
1/2 2/1
tripd
Shunt Trip (ST) until the voltage returns to 85% of line Alarm Switch (ALSW)
voltage. The undervoltage trip, which is
One or all critical circuit breakers may The alarm switch contact is closed
5
continuously energized, must be energized
be tripped from a distant control point before the circuit breaker can be closed. when the circuit breaker is opened
by use of a shunt trip device. A shunt automatically by an overload, short circuit,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
trip operates through an auxiliary switch Auxiliary Switch (AUX) shunt trip or undervoltage trip. The alarm
contact; when the breaker opens, current For applications requiring remote “on” or switch contact is open when the circuit
is not maintained on the shunt trip coil. “off” indication (or electrical interlocking), breaker is reset.
Undervoltage Trip (UVT) auxiliary switches are available. Each
switch comprises an “A” (open when
When voltage drops to a value below 35% circuit breaker is open) and a “B” (closed
of the nominal coil rating, the undervoltage when circuit breaker is open) contact with
trip device automatically opens the a common connection. (Form C)
breaker. The operation is instantaneous,
and the circuit breaker cannot be reclosed
For ED Frames For FD Frames For JD and LD Frames
 Factoryassembled only  If
mechanical interlock is installed, no accessory e Two accessory pockets in 3-pole breakers. One
 If
mechanical interlock is installed, no accessory module can be installed. accessory pocket in 2-pole breakers
module can be installed in the right pocket.  If
mechanical interlock is installed, no accessory
module can be installed in the left pocket.

Circuit Breaker Accessories Selection/ General
Circuit Breaker Accessories 

Catalog Number For Use With Breaker Type Number of Poles Standard Package
Padlocking Device
For locking breaker in “OFF” position. Note “ON” position does not affect breaker fuctionally
ECPLD1 Type QP, BL, QAF2, QPF2, QE, QT-Duplex, BQ, BQXD 1P 3 Pieces
ECPLD1R Type QP, BL, QAF2, QPF, QE, QT-Duplex, BQ, BQXD 1P 3 Pieces
(Red Color)
ECPLD2 Type QP, BL, QAF2, QPF, QE, BQ, BQXD 2P 3 Pieces
ECPLD2R Type QP, BL, QAF2, QPF, QE, BQ, BQXD (Red Color) 2P 3 Pieces
ECPLD3 Type QP, BL, QAF2, QPF, QE, BQ 3P 1 Piece
US2:ECPLD3R Type QP, BL, QAF2, QPF, QE, BQ (Red Color) 3P 1 Piece
ECQLD3 Type QP, BL, BQ, BQXD 1P 10 Pieces
ECQLN3 150-225 MBKA, QN, QNR n/a 1 Piece
ECQTH4 Type QP, BL, BQH Designed for (3) 1P Breakers 1 Piece
Handle Tie
Provide simultaneous swiching of 2 adjacent handles.
ECQTH3 Type QP, BL 2P 50 Pieces
Mechanical Interlock
ECQML12 Type QP, BL, BQ Interlock Bracket Designed for 1” Breaker 10 Pieces
Handle Blocking Device

For holding breaker in “ON” or “OFF” position. Not a lockout/tagout device
5
ECQL1 Type QP, BL, BQ, BQXD 1P 10 Pieces

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Main Breaker Retainer

ECMBR1 EQ Load Centers 1 Piece
Mounting Accessories
MB120 Type BQ, BQH Mounting Clips 1P 20 Pieces
FP9508 Type BQ, BQH FACE MOUNT PLATE 1P 10 Pieces
SMB6R Type BQ MOUNTING BRACKET 1P, 2P, 3P 6 Pieces
TCH65K Type BQ MOUNTING ADAPTER 500 Pieces
BR2 Type BQ, BQH, BQXD Back Mounting Plates 2P 10 Pieces
I0204ML1125CU Type QP Back Mounting Plates 1P, 2P 10 Pieces
I0303ML3100CU Type QP Back Mounting Plates 3P 10 Pieces
Replacement Lugs
TA1Q1 Type BQ, NGG 100A Al Cu LGS n/a 6 Pieces
TC1Q1 Type BQ, NGG 40A Al Cu LUGS n/a 6 Pieces
Finger Shield
BQFS1K Type BQXD Finger Shield (Bulk Pack) n/a 1000 Pieces
BQFS2 Type BQXD Finger Shield n/a 2 Pieces
Filler Plate
ECQF3 1” Filler Plate n/a 5 Pieces
 For a complete list of standby power mechanical  BL Type includes BLH, HBL  QAF2 Type includes QAFH2, BAF2, BAFH2, QFGA2,
interlock kits, see page 1-25  BQ Type includes BQH, HBQ QFGAH2, BFGA2, BFGAH2
 For use with Ultimate Load Center Main Breakers  QPF Type includes QPHF, BLF, BLHF
 Not suitable for use on 15-50A, 10 AIC Type QP Circuit  QE Type includes QEH, BLE, BLEH
Breakers

Circuit Breaker Accessories General
Padlocking Device
ECPLD1 ECQLD3
ECPLD1R/2R/3R (Single pole

ECPLD2 pictured. 2-/3-pole available) ECQLD4 ECQTH4
Handle Tie Handle Blocking Device
ECQL1
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ECBX231M
ECQTH2 ECQTH3
Main Breaker Retainer Mechanical Interlock
ECMBR1 ECMBR2 ECQML12
Mounting Accessories
FP9508
FP9556
MB120 SMB6R I0204ML1125

FP9555

External Accessories Selection
Handle Ties with Padlock Device

Provide simultaneous switching of 2 or 3 adjacent handles.
Do not provide common trip.
For Use With Catalogue Standard Wt Lb/
Breaker Frame(s) Number Package Std Pkg
BQDHT2 10 ½
BQD, NGB, HGB, LGB
BQDHT3 10 ½
Padlocking Devices
For locking breaker in “OFF” position.
All QR HPLQR 1 ¼
All BQD, CQD, NGB, HGB, LGB BQDPLD 1 ⁄8
1
NGG, HGG, LGG HPLG 1 ¼

EB, 1- thru 3-pole HPLEB 1 ⁄8
1
FD Padlocking
All ED ED2HPL 1 ¼ Device
All FD FD6PL1 1 ¼ FD6PLI
All JD, LD, LMD JD6HPL 1 ¼
All MD, ND, PD, RD MN6PLD 1 ¼
Handle Blocking Devices

For holding breaker in “ON” or “OFF” position.
5
Not a lockout/tagout device.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
All QR HBLQR 1 1
All BQD, CQD, GG, GB BQDHBD 1 ¼
All ED E2HBL 1 ¼
All FD FD6HB1 1 ½
All JD, LD, LMD JD6HBL 1 ½
All MD, ND, PD, RD MN6BL 1 ½
FD Handle
Blocking Device
Handle Extensions FD6HB1
For replacement. One extension shipped with breaker.
All MD, ND, PD, RD EX11 1 2
Terminal Shields
Catalogue Standard
Breaker Type Poles Number Package
NGG 3 TSSG3A 1
1 TSSG61 1
HGG, LGG 2 TSSG62 1
3 TSSG63 1
Handle
Extension
EX11
aS
old only in standard package quantities.

Face Mounting Plates

For Use With Number Catalogue Standard Wt Lb/
Breaker Frame(s) of Poles Number Package Std Pkg
1 CQDFMB1 1 ¼
CQD 2 CQDFMB2 1 ¼
3 CQDFMB3 1 ¼
1 FMPG1 1 ¼
NGG, HGG, LGG 2 FMPG2 1 ¼
3 FMPG3 1 ¼
Back Mounting Plates

ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6 1 E2BMB 1 ¼
Mounting Screw Kit
MSE6
Mounting Screw Kits
CQD CQDSMKa 1 1¼
NGG, HGG, LGG MSKG4 1 ¼
All QR MSQR3 1 ⁄5
1
MSE6a 1 ¼
All ED (CED6 requires 2 kits)
MSE6100b 100f 1
MSF6a 1 ¼
All FD (CFD6 requires 2 kits)
MSF650c 50f 1
All JD, LD MSJ6a 1 ¼
5
All LMD MSLMD 1 ¼
All MD, ND, MSMN 1 ¼
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
All PD, RD MSPR6 1 2
“MI” Mechanical Interlocks Mechanical Interlock

MI5444
Panel
g Plug-in Standard Wt Lb
For Use With Breaker Type(s) Mounted Mounted Package Std Pkg
All QR (Sliding Bar) SBMIQR — 1 1½
All FD MI5444 MI5444 1 —
All JD, LD MI5413d — 1 1
All LMD MI5406d — 1 1
All MD MI5404e — 1 3
All ND MI5404e — 1 3
All PD, RD MI5405e — — —
a Kit
consists of 4 screws and washers. d With mechanical interlock in place, no accessory can be gM
echanical
interlock is not designed for use within
b Consists of 1 screw and washers (order 100). installed into circuit breaker right pole. Siemens panelboards.
c Consists of 1 screw and washers (order 50). e Addition of the mechanical interlock will prevent
accessory installation in the left pole.
f Sold only in standard package quantities. Multiply List
Price Each times package quantity for full price.

Rotary Door Mounted Operating Handles

Types 1, 3, 3R , 12, 4 4X
Breaker
Complete Mechanism Handle Only Operator Shaft Only
For Use
With Catalog Number
Breaker Standard Variable Catalog Catalog Length Catalog
Frames Depth Depth Number Number (inches) Number
ED CRHOESD CRHOEVD RHOEBO 2 RHOSSD
a
FD CRHOFSD CRHOFVD RHOFBO 12 RHOSVD

CRHOH
c
JD, LD CRHOJSD CRHOJVD RHOJBO 16 RHOSXD

LMD CRHOLMSD CRHOLMVD RHOLMBO
RHOH
3 RHONSSD
MD, ND
RHONSD RHONVD RHOH RHONBO 12 RHONSVD
c d
PD, RD
24 RHONSXD
Rotary Door Mounted Operating Handles

Types 1 & 12
For Use With Standard Depth Variable Depth Handle and Shaft Breaker Operator
Breaker Frames Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
CQD, NGG, HGG, LGG — RHOCQVD RHOH62 CQDOP
e
ED D11CEU1 D11CEU2 — —
FD D11CFU1 D11CFU2 — —
CRHOH
JD, LD — D11CJU2 — —
For CQD, NGG, HGG and LGG red emergency handle, order assembly RHOCQVDE (includes handle and operator).
For CQD, NGG, HGG and LGG in a NEMA 3R enclosure, order CQDOP34 operator, RHOH handle and RHOSVD shaft.
5
For CQD, NGG, HGG and LGG in a NEMA 4 or 4X enclosure, order CQDOP34 operator, RHOH4 handle and RHOSVD shaft.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Through Door Mounted Operating Handles b
Types 1 & 12
For Use With Standard Depth Variable Depth
Breaker Frames Catalog Number Catalog Number D11CEU2
CQD, NGG, HGG, LGG FMHOS —
ED E2RH1 E2RHV9
FD F6RH1 F6RHV9
Door Latch Kits

Catalog Number Catalog Number
Type Right Hand Left Hand
2 point latch DKR2 DKL2
3 point latch DKR3 DKL3
Standard Depth F6RH1
Rotary Handle RHOCQVD

Variable DepthF6RHV9
a For
use on 3-pole ED frame only. b Meets the requirements of NFPA 79, section 5.3.3.1 d For
extended shaft support order catalog number
for locking external operator disconnecting devices. RHONSB2.
c For 3 or 3R, order shaft and breaker operator as shown, e Length
of shaft is 300mm (11.8 inches).
and handle RHOH. For 4 & 4X, order handle RHOH4.
Consult sales office for additional EG operator shaft
lengths.

Max-Flex™, Flange Mounted Variable Depth Operators c
Complete Kit Handle Only

NEMA Catalog Catalog Breaker Operator 36" Cable
Frames Type Number Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1, 3 (R),
FHOH
MFKG3R3 MFHG3R
GG 12 MFMG MFCF036
4 (x) MFKG4X3 MFHG4X
1, 3 (R),
FHOE036 a FHOH
ED 12 FHOEBOa FHOEC036
4 (x) — FHOH4
1, 3 (R),
FHOF036 FHOH
FD 12 FHOFBO FHOFC036
4 (x) — FHOH4
1, 3 (R),
JD, LD, FHOJ036 FHOH
12 FHOJBO FHOJC036
SJD, SLD
4 (x) — FHOH4
1, 3 (R),
FHOLM036f FHOH
LMD 12 FHOLMBO FHOJC036
4 (x) — FHOH4
MD, ND, 1, 3 (R), FHOFBO
FHON048 FHOHN
PD, RD, 12
FHONBO FHONC048 b
SMD, SND,
SPD 4 (x) — FHOHN4
Max-Flex™ handles are available with solid black handles instead of the customary “red for on” flange handle. These are
preferred for use in IECmarkets, where red handles have specific meaning. Order components separately, appending the
letter “i” to the catalog number (e.g. FHOHI).
5
Alternate Length Cable Only
ED FD JD/LD/LMD MD/ND/PD/RD
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Inches Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
48 FHOEC048 FHOFC048 FHOJC048 FHONC048
Handle Auxiliary Switch

For use with Max-Flex and Rotary Door operators (FHOH and RHOH). 1 NO and 1 NC contact (Form C).
For Use With Catalogue Number FHOFC036
ED, FD, JD, LD, LMD, ND, PD, RD, SD, Max Flex HAS1
Fixed Depth Flange Mounting

Minimum NEMA Left Hand Mount Right Hand Mount FDFBFR
Frames Enclosure Depth Type Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
1, 3R, 12 FDFBEL FDFBER
EDe 6.44
4, 4X FDFBEL4 FDFBER4
1, 3R, 12 FDFBFL FDFBFR
FD 6.44
4, 4X FDFBFL4 FDFBFR4
Max-Flex™ handles are available with solid black handles instead of the customary “Red for On” flange handle. These are
preferred for use in IECmarkets, where red handles have specific meaning. Order components separately, appending the
letter “i” to the catalog number (e.g. FHOHI).
aFor 1- or 2-pole breaker order FHOED036 complete kit or cMeets requirements of NFPA 79, section 5.3.3.1 for 3-Pole ED only.
FHOEDBO breaker operator only. Use MFHM3R handle. locking external operator disconnecting devices fFHOLM048 is available for a 48 inch handle kit.
b48 inch cable is standard length for M through R frame dConsult sales office for additional cable lengths for EG
Max-Flex operators. Flex Shaft Operators. For 3-Pole only.

Telemand® Motor Operator

AC Hinged to
Breaker Frame Voltage Open Down
120 MOE6120
ED except CED
120 MOE6240
ED motor operator opens downward.
Breaker DC Hinged to AC Hinged to

Frame Voltage Open Right Voltage Open Right
24 MOF6024DC 120 MOF6120
FD 48 MOF6048DC 240 MOF6240
125 MOF6125DC — —
24 MOJ6024DC 120 MOJ6120
JD, LD 48 MOJ6048DC 240 MOJ6240
125 MOJ6125DC — —
24 MOLMD6024DC 120 MOLMD6120
LMD 48 MOLMD6048DC 240 MOLMD6240
125 MOLMD6125DC — —
MD, ND, — — 120 EMOPL120MN
PD, RD — — 240 EMOPL240MN FD, JD, LD, LMD, MD, ND, PD, RD Frames
To order FD through RD motor operators with Left side hinges,
add “L” to catalogue number (e.g. MOF6120L).
Dimensions
Frame A B C D E F
5
ED 7.04 4.31 — 4.31 13.84 8.84

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
FD 9.50 4.55 1.60 6.84 9.70 7.58

JD, LD, LMD 11.00 7.50 0.79 8.34 9.85 7.74
MD, ND, PD, RD 16.00 9.00 — 9.83 13.13 10.13
Operating Currents
On Off
Catalogue In-Rush Running Time In-Rush Running Time Reset
Number (Amps) (Amps) (msec) (Amps) (Amps) (msec) (Amps)
MOE6120 10.25 2.3 550 10.0 2.3 400 2.3
MOE6240 5.2 1.1 500 5.0 1.0 330 1.1
MOF6120/L 10.0 5.5 200 10.0 5.5 175 5.5
Front View
MOF6240/L 4.7 2.5 200 4.7 2.5 185 2.5
MOLMD6120/L 15.2 6.0 210 15.2 6.0 185 6.0
MOJ6120/L 15.2 6.0 210 15.2 6.0 185 6.0
MOJ6240/L 5.0 2.5 217 5.0 2.5 185 2.5
MOMN6120/L 22.7 13.9 240 22.7 13.9 210 13.9
MOMN6240/L 12.6 4.6 260 12.6 4.6 230 12.6
Bottom View

External Accessories Selection/Dimensions
Plug-In Mounting Assemblies, Including Base and Tulip Assemblies
Line Side Load Side Steel Switchboard Base
For Use With
Poles Mounting Platea
Breaker Frames Catalogue Number b
Catalogue Number b
Catalogue Number
All ED 2 PC2637 PC2638 ➝
PL2616
except CED 3 PC2657 PC2658
2 PC2637 PC2638
CED PL2617
3 PC2657 PC2658
All FD 2 PC4753 PC4753
PL4762
except CFD 3 PC4754 PC4754
2 PC4753 PC4753
CFD PL4763
3 PC4754 PC4754
All JD 2 PC5777 PC5777
➝
PL5796
except CJD 3 PC5778 PC5778
Kit CJD, SCJD 3 PCCJD PCCJD PL5797
All LD 2 PC5660 PC5660
PL5696
except CLD 3 PC5661 PC5661
➝
➝
➝
Kit CLD, SCLD 3 PCCLD PCCLD PL5797 Tulip
2 PC5662 PC5662 Switchboard Assemblies
All MD PL9698
3 PC5663 PC5663 Mounting
2 PC5664c PC5664c Plate
All ND PL9699
3 PC5666c PC5666c
Tulip Assemblies Separately

2 Pole 3 Pole ➝
For
Catalogue Catalogue ➝ ➝
5
Frame
Number Number
ED TCE2 TCE3
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
RS4755
FD TCF2 TCF3
JD TCJ2 TCJ3 RS4756
LD TCL2 TCL3
MD TCM2 TCM3
ND TCN2 TCN3
➝
➝ ➝
Rear-Connecting Studs
For Use Extension Line Side Load Side
With Ampere Behind
Description
Breaker Rating Breaker Catalogue Catalogue
Frames (inches) Number Number
100 Line Side (Short) 2.38 RS2643e —
Circuit Breaker
100 Load Side (Short) 2.38 — RS2644e With Rear-Connecting Studs
All ED
100 Line Side (Long) 4.88 RS2641e —
100 Load Side (Long) 4.88 — RS2642e
250 3.12 RS4756e RS4756e
All FD Short Long
250 7.06 RS4755e RS4755e
400 5.85 RS5774 RS5774
All JD Short Long
400 11.20 RS5773 RS5773
600 5.85 RS5784 RS5784
All LD Short Long
600 11.20 RS5783 RS5783
CJD, SCJD
Add required shield kit. — CLRSJL3
CLD, SCLD
LM(X)D6, 5.85 RS5788 RS5788
800 Short Long
HLM(X)D6 11.20 RS5787 RS5787
1200 5.50 RS5786 RS5786
All MD, ND Short Long
1200 8.00 RS5785 RS5785
 Furnished at no extra charge when ordered with plug-  Forvertical bus mounting — for horizontal, substitute  Forproper electrical clearance, studs must alternate
in mounting assembly. PC5665 for PC5664 and PC5667 for PC5666. between short and long stud lengths on circuit breaker
 Each
piece catalogue number consists of (1) mounting  Price
includes one current stud, insulating tube, stud poles (e.g. SLSLSL or LSLSLS).
block assembly and required tulip assemblies (2) for nuts and terminal shields, when required.
2-pole, (3) for 3-pole

Unusual Operating Conditions Reference
Note: The information provided on this and the next page is intended for reference and recommendation only. Because several
variables can act on a circuit breaker’s performance at the same time, the data below is based less on controlled testing, than
on experience and engineering judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on special conditions and treatment.
High Ambient Temperatures Table 1 — Temperature Derating Data for Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Because thermal-magnetic trip breakers Reference Ampere Rating at:
Ampere
are temperature sensitive and calibrated Rating at 25° C 50° C 60° C
Siemens Breaker Frames
for a specific ambient of 40° C (104° F) 40° C (104° F) (77° F) (122° F) (140° F)
(average enclosure temperature), 15 17 13 11
a higher ambient will cause the 20 22 18 16
breaker to trip at lower current than 25 28 23 21
its nameplate rating, in other words, 30 33 28 26
causing the breaker to “derate” (see 35 39 30 25
Table 1). Similarly, the current carrying 40 44 37 34 ED
capacity of a circuit conductor is based 50 55 46 42
upon a certain ambient temperature, a 60 66 56 52
higher ambient will reduce its current 70 77 65 60
carrying capacity, causing it to “derate.” 90 99 84 78
Thus, with a fluctuating temperature, 100 110 94 87
125 137 114 100 QJ
a thermal-magnetic breaker will derate FD
150 165 136 120
nearly parallel with its connected circuit
175 192 159 140
conductors and maintain close circuit
200 220 182 160
protection. If the application temperature
225 247 205 180
exceeds 40° C (104° F) and is known,
250 275 235 220
either a breaker specially calibrated for JD
5
300 330 276 252

the higher ambient or one oversized 350 385 325 301
according to Table 1 may be selected. LD
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
400 440 372 340

In a case such as this, the circuit 500 550 468 435
conductors should be oversized as well. 600 660 564 525
MD
Siemens Sensitrip III and Type SB
®
700 770 658 613
Encased Systems Breakers are 800 880 754 704
insensitive to temperature changes. 900 990 828 749
ND
However, they do include circuitry to 1000 1100 900 825
protect the components from abnormally 1200 1320 1090 1000
high temperatures. 1400 1540 1304 1148 PD
1600 1760 1500 1320
Moisture — Corrosion
1800 1980 1690 1485 RD
For atmospheres having high moisture 2000 2200 1880 1650
content and / or where fungus growth is
prevalent, a special preventive treatment
may be required. 13,000 (4,000)
Current
Where the air is heavily laden with 12,000 (3,675)
Altitude in Feet (Meters)
corrosive elements, breakers made with Voltage

11,000 (3,350)
special corrosion-resistant finishes
may be required. 10,000 (3,000)
Altitude
9,000 (2,750)
Reduced air density at altitudes greater
than 6600 ft. (2000 meters) affects the 8,000 (2,400)
ability of a molded case circuit breaker 7,000 (2,100)
to transfer heat and interrupt faults.
Therefore, circuit breakers applied at 6,000 (1,800)
these altitudes should have interrupting,
insulation and continuous currents 1.0 .95 .90 .85 .80 .75
derated as indicated in Figure 1. Rating Correction Factor
Figure 1 — Altitude Adjustment

400 Hz Systems a
Siemens molded case circuit breakers ambient temperature exceeds 40° C are usually the hottest terminals with a
can be applied for overcurrent protection (104° F). balanced load. A maximum temperature
on 400Hz systems, commonly used to Cable and Bus Sizing of 75° C (35° C over a maximum ambient
power computer installations, aircraft, of 40° C) would verify the particular
military and other specialty equipment. The cable and bus sizes to be utilized application. Temperature profiles taken
Below are basic guidelines. at 400Hz are not based on standard on these breakers can be correlated to
National Electric Codes tables for 60Hz ensure that the hottest points within
Circuit Breaker Derating Required application. Larger cross sections the breaker are within the required
This table lists the maximum continuous are necessary at 400Hz. All bus bars temperature limits.
current carrying capacity for Siemens specified are based upon mounting
breakers at 400Hz. Due to the increased the bars in the vertical plane to allow Factory Configuration
resistance of the copper sections maximum air flow. All bus bars are When required, molded case circuit
resulting from the skin effect produced spaced at a minimum of 0.25 in. breakers may be factory calibrated for
by eddy currents at these frequencies, (6mm) apart. Mounting of bus bars in 400Hz application. These breakers are
circuit breakers in many cases require the horizontal plane will necessitate specially labeled for 400Hz usage and
derating. The thermal derating on additional drafting. Edgewise orientation their nameplate current rating will
these devices is based upon 100%, of the bus may change the maximum include the necessary derating factory.
three-phase application in open air in ratings indicated. If additional information The highest “Maximum Continuous
a maximum of 40° C (104° F) with 48 is required for other connections of cable Amperes” rating at 400Hz, found in the
in. (1219 mm) of the specified cable or or bus, contact Siemens for information. table below approximates the highest
bus at the line and load side. Additional Application Recommendations specially calibrated 400Hz nameplate
derating of not less than 20% will be ampere rating available for a given
required if the circuit breaker is to be It is recommended that temperatures be
measured on the line and load terminals frame size. Contact Siemens for
utilized in an enclosure. Further derating ordering information on other breakers
may be required if the enclosure or T-connectors of the center pole. These
applied in 400Hz systems.
400Hz Breakers
5
Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating 75° C (167° F) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating 75° C (167° F)
At 40° C (104° F)b Copper At 40° C (104° F)b Copper
60HZ 400HZ Cable per Pole 60HZ 400/415HZ Cable per Pole
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Siemens Siemens
Breaker Enclosed No of Wire Breaker Enclosed After No of
Type Open Air Open Airc After Derating Pieces Size Type Open Air Open Airc Derating Pieces Wire Size
15 15 12 1 #14 250 210 168 1 250 kcmil
20 20 16 1 #12 LD6, LXD6, 300 240 192 1 350 kcmil
25 25 20 1 #10 HLD6, HLXD6, 350 260 208 1 500 kcmil
30 30 24 1 #10 HHLD6, 400 300 240 2 #3/0
35 35 28 1 #10 HHLXD6, 450 340 272 2 #4/0
40 40 32 1 #8 CLD6 500 375 300 2 250 kcmil
ED2, ED4, 45 43 34 1 #8 600 420 336 2 350 kcmil
ED6, HED4, 50 48 38 1 #8 250 210 210 1 250 kcmil
CED6 60 57 46 1 #6 300 240 240 1 350 kcmil
70 67 54 1 #4 LD6, LXD6, 350 260 260 1 500 kcmil
80 76 61 1 #4 HLD6, HLXD6, 400 300 300 2 #3/0
90 86 69 1 #3 100% Rated 450 340 340 2 #4/0
100 95 76 1 #3 500 375 375 2 250 kcmil
110 105 84 1 #2 600 420 420 2 350 kcmil
125 119 95 1 #1 500 400 320 2 250 kcmil
MD6, MXD6,
70 63 50 1 #4 600 430 360 2 350 kcmil
HMD6,
80 72 58 1 #4 700 500 400 3 250 kcmil
HMXD6, CMD6
90 80 64 1 #3 800 560 448 3 300 kcmil
100 90 72 1 #3 MD6, MXD6, 500 400 400 2 250 kcmil
FD6, FXD6, 110 95 75 1 #2 HMD6, 600 430 430 2 350 kcmil
HFD6,HFXD6, 125 105 84 1 #1 HMXD6, CMD6 700 500 500 3 250 kcmil
CFD6 150 125 100 1 #1/0 100% Rated 800 560 560 3 300 kcmil
175 140 112 1 #2/0 800 560 448 3 300 kcmil
ND6, NXD6
200 160 128 1 #3/0 900 600 480 3 350 kcmil
HND6, HNXD6,
225 180 144 1 #4/0 1000 650 520 3 400 kcmil
CND6
250 200 160 1 250 kcmil 1200 780 624 4 350 kcmil
200 170 136 1 #3/0 ND6, NXD6 900 600 600 3 350 kcmil
JXD2, JD6, JXD6, 225 190 152 1 #4/0 HND6, HNXD6, 1000 650 650 3 400 kcmil
HJD6, HJXD6, 250 210 168 1 250 kcmil CND6 1200 780 780 4 350 kcmil
HHJD6, HHJXD6, 300 240 192 1 350 kcmil PD6, PXD6, HPD6 1200 780 624 4 400 kcmil
CJD6 350 260 208 1 500 kcmil HPXD6,CPD6, 1400 850 680 4 500 kcmil
400 300 240 2 #3/0 100% Rated 1600 960 768 5 500 kcmil
200 170 170 2 #3/0 PD6, PXD6, 1200 780 780 4 400 kcmil
225 190 190 2 #4/0 HPD6, HPXD6, 1400 850 850 4 500 kcmil
JD6, JXD6, HJD6, CPD6 1600 960 960 5 500 kcmil
250 210 210 1 250 kcmil
HJXD6
300 240 240 1 350 kcmil RD6, RXD6, 1600 960 768 5 500 kcmil
100% Rated
350 260 260 1 500 kcmil HRD6, HRXD6 1800 1080 864 5 500 kcmil
400 300 300 2 #3/0 80% Rated 2000 1200 960 6 500 kcmil
aThe information provided on this page is intended for controlled testing, than on experience and engineering cCalculatedafter derating to compensate for the heating
reference and recommendation only. Because several judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on of the copper conductor, caused by the skin effect
variables can act on a circuit breaker’s performance at special conditions and treatment. generated by eddy currents produced at 400/415HZ.
the same time, the data above is based less on bAdditional derating may be required if the ambient
temperature is greater than 40°C (104°F).

VL Circuit Breakers
Technical Overview Technical
Frame Summary and Ratings Table
Frame Family DG FG JG
Continuous Ampere Range 30 to 150A 40 to 250A 70 to 400A

Number of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
Maximum Voltage Rating 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347
Type of Protection
Thermal-Magnetic u u u
Electronic u u u
Electronic with LCD u u u
Motor Circuit Protector u u u
Molded Case Switch u u u
100% Rated 400/500 Amp ETU only — u
Interchangeable Trip Unit — — u
W In.(mm) 4.1 (105) 5.5 (139)
H 7.3 (175) 11 (279)
D 3.4 (81) 4.2 (102)
D1 4.2 (107) 5.4 (138)
Type N – Normal Interrupting Ratinga, RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
5
CSA / UL 240Vac 65 65 65
480Vac 35 35 35
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
600Vacd 18 18 25
IEC 240Vac 65/65 65/65 65/65
(lCU/lCS) 415Vac 40/40 40/40 45/45
690Vac 12/6 12/6 12/6
DC Voltages – Interrupting Rating (kA)d
250Vdc - 2p 30 30 30
500Vdc - 3pb 18 18 25
Type H – High Interrupting Ratinga, RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
CSA / UL 240Vac 100 100 100
480Vac 65 65 65
600Vacd 18 18 25
IEC 240Vac 100/75 100/75 100/75
(lCU/lCS) 415Vac 70/70 70/70 70/35
690Vac 12/6 12/6 15/8
250Vdc - 2p 30 25 25
500Vdc - 3pb 35 50 50
Type H – Very High Interrupting Ratinga, RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
CSA / UL 240Vac 200 200 200
480Vac 100 100 100
600Vacd 18 18 25
IEC 240Vac 200/150 200/150 200/150
(lCU/lCS) 415Vac 100/75 100/75 100/75
690Vac 12/6 12/6 15/8
250Vdc - 2p 30 30 30
500Vdc - 3pb 35 30 35
a SA / UL does not recognize AIC ratings for Molded

C d C Interruption Ratings do not apply to electronic trip
D
Case Switches or Motor Circuit Protectors. circuit breakers.
b 500Vdc nominal, for ungrounded DC UPS systems.  DG & FG breakers are 600Y/347V.

VL Circuit Breakers
Technical Overview Technical
Frame Summary and Ratings Table — Continued
Frame Family LG MG NG PG
Continuous Ampere Range 150 to 600A 200 to 800A 300 to 1200A 400 to 1600A
Number of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3
Maximum Voltage Rating 600V 600V 600V 600V
Type of Protection
Thermal-Magnetic u u u u
Electronic u u u u
Electronic with LCD u u u u
Motor Circuit Protector u u u —
Molded Case Switch u u u u
100% Rated 400/500 Amp 400/500 Amp u u u
Interchangeable Trip Unit — u u uf
W In.(mm) 5.5 (139) 7.5 (190) 9 (229)
H 11 (279)g 16 (406) 16 (406)
D 4.2 (102) 4.7 (114) 6.2 (157)
D1 5.4 (138 5.9 (151 8.1 (207
Type N – Normal Interrupting Ratinga, RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
5
CSA / UL 240Vac 65 65 65 65
480Vac 35 35 35 35
600Vac 18 25 25 25
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
IEC 240Vac 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65
(lCU/lCS) 415Vac 45/45 50/50 50/25 50/25
690Vac 12/6 20/10 20/10 20/10
250Vdc - 2p 30 22 22 22
500Vdc - 3pc 25 35 35 35
Type H – High Interrupting Ratinga, RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
CSA / UL 240Vac 100 100 100 100
480Vac 65 65 65 65
600Vac 18b 35 35 35
IEC 240Vac 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/50
(lCU/lCS) 415Vac 70/70 70/70 70/35 70/35
690Vac 15/8 30/15 30/15 30/15
250Vdc - 2p 30 25 25 25
500Vdc - 3pc 35 50 50 50
Type H – Very High Interrupting Ratinga, RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
CSA / UL 240Vac 200 200 200 200
480Vac 100 100 100 100
600Vac 18 50 65 65
IEC 240Vac 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150
(lCU/lCS) 415Vac 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75
690Vac 15/8 35/17 35/17 35/17
250Vdc - 2p 30 42 42 42
500Vdc - 3pc 35 65 65 65
a CSA / UL does not recognize AIC ratings for Molded c 00Vdc nominal, for ungrounded DC UPS systems.
5 f 13.6” with extended shields.
Case Switches or Motor Circuit Protectors. d DC Interruption Ratings do not apply to electronic trip
b 25kA available in a special version. Standard breakers circuit breakers.
rated 18kA. See page 5-213. e Thermal-magnetic available non-interchangeable only.

VL Circuit Breakers
Trip Unit Overview Selection
The interchangeability of the VL With precise control over the circuit with the settings on the other frames.
circuit breaker trip units allow for easy beaker functions and access to system Therefore, when VL breakers are used
conversion from any of 3 types of status, diagnostics, and information, together in a system the GF protection is
protection. They are thermal-magnetic, these trip units allow for unsurpassed automatically coordinated.
electronic, or electronic with a built-in flexibility in circuit coordination. The user also has the ability to program
LCD display. The thermal-magnetic trip a custom coordination scheme with
unit features an adjustable magnetic adjustable settings on both the 555 and
trip setting. The electronic trip units An example of coordination is the out
are microprocessor based true RMS of the box Ground Fault function on the 586 trip units.
sensing devices and are available with Model 555 trip units. The pick-up and
a variety of adjustable trip settings, time delay settings are set at the factory
configurations, and information menus. for each frame and do not overlap
VL Trip Units
Model 525 Model 555 Model 586
Trip Unit Functions
Electronic Electronic Electronic
Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic
with LCD with LCD with LCD
magnetic LI LIG LSI LSIG
LSI LSIG LSI + G alarm only
Continuous Current Setting (Ir) Fixed u u u u u u u

Long Time Delay (tr) o u u u u u u u
Instantaneous Function l l l l l (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF)
Instantaneous Pickup (Ii) u u u u u u u u
Short Time Function o o o l l (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF)
Short Time Pick-up (Isd) o o o u u u u u
5
Short Time Delay (tsd) o o o u u u u u

Ground Fault Pick-up (Ig)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
o o u o u o u o
Ground Fault Delay (tg) o o u o u o u o
Ground Fault Alarm Pick-up o o o o o o u u
Ground Fault Alarm Delay o o o o o o u u
Alarm & Status Indicator o l l l l l l l
Built-in Display (LCD) o o o o o l l l
Pre-Trip Alarma o l l l l l l l
Last Trip Informationa o l l l l l l l
Zone Selectivea o l l l l l l l
Communicationsa o l l l l l l l
u Adjustable setting
l This feature is included
o Feature is not included.
a Requires a COMPRO20 or COMMOD21 module in a communication system.
Continuous Amps Rating (Ir) Short Time Pick-Up (lsd) Ground Fault Pick-Up (Ig)
This setting is the continuous current This function controls the level of fault This setting controls the level of
that the breaker will carry without current the breaker will carry for a short ground fault current that will cause the
tripping. It can be set up to 100% of the time without tripping, thus allowing breaker to trip. Model 555 Electronic
trip unit’s nominal rating (In). downstream devices to clear short Trip Units act on the residual current to
circuits ahead of up-stream protection. sense ground current. The Model 586
It may be defeated (turned-off) on Model Electronic Trip Unit is programmable
Long Time Delay (tr) 586 trip units. and allows the user to select either
Sometimes referred to as the “overload” the residual current method or direct
position, this function controls the detection (via a separate current
breaker's “pause-in-tripping” time. Short Time Delay (tsd) transformer) to detect ground current.
It allows low level, temporary inrush This controls the interval of time the
currents such as those encountered breaker will remain closed against a
when starting a motor to pass without fault (at the Short Time Pick-up current Ground Fault Time Delay (tg)
tripping. The time delay begins when the level) without tripping. The time delay This controls the interval of time the
current reaches 6 x Ir. may be set at fixed points or at short breaker will remain closed after a ground
time intervals based on l2t curves. This fault is detected (at the Ground Fault
function is used with the Short Time Pick-up current level) without tripping.
Instantaneous Pick-up (Ii) Pick-up to achieve selectivity and better
This function sets the breaker to trip system coordination.
instantaneously during high fault
conditions. This function may be turned
off on Model 586 trip units.
• Revised •
VL Circuit Breakers 01/31/12
General
General Information
Information Selection
Selection
Thermal-Magnetic trip units, Model 525, combine the inverse time element design for low level overloads, and instantaneous
magnetic action for short circuit protection. The standard unit has preset overload protection and an adjustable instantaneous trip
setting, with 6 set points. Thermal-Magnetic trip units are available throughout the VL family, from 30 to 1600A.
Electronic Trip Units

Electronic trip units are available through microprocessor is in operating and displays, no secondary or auxiliary volt-
the VL family, from 60A (which can be another indicates an overload condition. age is required as long as the breaker is
set as low as 30A) up through 1600A . For ease-of-use and to insure proper energized and a minimal load current is
They are also available in four trip coordination, the set points for the present. These trip units can also indi-
configurations (LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG) and continuous current are shown on the cate the “last trip” status (date, time,
features can include a built-in LCD face of these trip units in amps. amps) when they‘re connected to a PC
display. via one of our communications modules.
Without being connected via a communi-
On the Model 586, the LCD version, the cation module, the last trip status can be
On the Model 555 Electronic Trip Unit a current in each phase is continuously viewed on Model 586 trip units (no time
flashing LED confirms that the shown on the display. Unlike many stamp).
5
Typical Trip Unit Labeling and Adjustment Positions
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Model 555 Electronic Trip Unit
with LSIG trip functions
7
Model 586 Electronic Trip Unit

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
has an LCD display
7-106 Siemens Industry, Inc. SPEEDFAX™ 2011 Product Catalog Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 5-165
Siemens / Speedfax Previous folio: 6-95 Updated by S Spencer 1/17/11

VL Circuit Breakers
DG 150A Frame, VL Series Selection
Complete Assembled Breaker
A complete factory assembled DG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load connectors, all factory installed and shipped as a com-
plete breaker. Assembled breakers are only available with standard
connectors.
For any other configuration, order the frame, trip unit, and terminals as
separate items.
For DC applications, use thermal magnetic trip unit only.
For reverse feed applications, select non-interchangeable trip breakers only. For
non-interchangeable trip breakers, change the third digit of the catalogue num-
ber to “X” for standard breakers.
For special applications, refer to page 5-216.
Mounting hardware is included with each frame or complete breaker.
For 100% rated breakers with a non-interchangeable trip unit, change the 3rd
character of the catalogue number to “Y”. Available in electronic and electronic
with LCD only.
HACR rated.
UL 489 IEC 60947-2
5
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

Breaker 220/240 380/415 690
Number To Handle
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Type 240 480 600 250 500 ICU ICS ICU ICS ICU ICS of Poles W L D D1
NDGA 65 35 18 30 18 65 65 40 40 12 6 2, 3 4.1 (105) 6.9 (175) 3.4 (81) 4.2 (107)
HDGA 100 65 20 30 18 100 75 70 70 12 6
LDGA 200 100 25 30 18 200 150 100 75 12 6
Connectors for 75°C Wire

Ampere No. of cables
Approx. Shipping Weight, lbs. (kg)
Construction Rating Wire Range per connector Catalogue Number Trip Unit Complete
Steel 30-150 #8–1/0 Cu 1 3TW1DG20b Poles Frame Thermal-Mag. Electronic Breaker
Aluminum 30-150 #6–3/0 Al/Cu 1 3TA1DG30ab 3.7 2.2 2.6 5.9
2, 3
Copper 30-150 #6–3/0 Cu 1 3TC1DG30bd (1.7) (1.0) (1.2) (2.7)
Distribution Lugs
30-150 #14–#2 Cu (3pcs. Max) 3 3TA3DG02b
30-150 #14–#4 Cu 6 3TA6DG04b
Compression Lugs
30-150 #14–2/0 kcmil Al/Cu – 2CLD20c
30-150 #14–2/0 kcmil Al/Cu – 3CLD20b
a Standard connector supplied with complete breakers.
b Kit consists of 3 terminal connectors.
c 2 Lugs for 2-pole breakers.
d Required for 100% rated DG breakers. Requires 90°C cable sized at 75°C ampacity
DG Thermal-Magnetic, Instantaneous
Trip Adjustment Range
Instantaneous
Trip Unit Continuous Overcurrent Setting (Ii)
Amp Rating (In) Min. Max.
50 450 700
60 450 700
70 450 700
80 450 800
90 500 1000
100 500 1000
110 550 1100
125 625 1250
150 800 1600
Note: Each breaker has 6 trip settings in this range.
External Accessories page 5-195 - 5-209

VL Circuit Breakers
DG 150A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Selection
Ii Type / Tipo CDT3
AMPS I n =150A
1120 1280 40? C
TM ~
960 1440
800 1600 TRIP UNIT/DISPARADOR 525 Cat. No. - CDT3B150
Model 525 Trip Unit
DG 150A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

N-Interrupting Class H-Interrupting Class L-Interrupting Class
FRAME ONLY
Continuous NDG2F150 HDG2F150 LDG2F150
Ampere Rating COMPLETE FACTORY ASSEMBLED CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP UNIT ONLY
50 NDG2B050L HDG2B050L LDG2B050L CDT2B050
5
DG 150A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
FRAME ONLY

VL Circuit Breakers
DG 150A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units Selection
Model 555 Trip Units
DG 150A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit a

FRAME ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
60 NDG3R060L HDG3R060L LDG3R060L CDT3R060
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
60 NDG3T060L HDG3T060L LDG3T060L CDT3T060
ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP
5
60 NDG3V060L HDG3V060L LDG3V060L CDT3V060

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
60 NDG3W060L HDG3W060L LDG3W060L CDT3W060
Model 586 Trip Unit
DG 150A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit a

FRAME ONLY
LCD ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
60 NDG3A060L HDG3A060L LDG3A060L CDT3A060
LCD ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP
100 NDG3G060L HDG3G060L LDG3G060L CDT3G060
LCD ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP + GF ALARM ONLY
100 NDG3K060L HDG3K060L LDG3K060L CDT3K060
a ue to the location of the magnetic tripping solenoid, the

D
left accessory pocket is not available for accessories.

VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for DG 150A and FG 250A Frames Selection
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Kits
Description Mounting Pocketa Catalogue Number
1 Alarm Switch
1A/Bc Left, Rightb ASKL1
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
1A + 1B Left, Right ASKL2
Bases AMBL1
2 Aux. + 1 Alarm Switches
1A + 1B, 1A/Bc Left, Rightb ASKL3
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
Auxiliary/Alarm Switch Mounting Base Only

Description Mounting Pocket Catalogue Number
Up to 3 Auxiliary Switches Left, Right AMBL1
2 Aux. + 1 Alarm Switch Left Pocket Only AMBL2
2 Aux. + 1 Alarm Switch Right Pocket Only AMBL3
Auxiliary/Alarm Switch Only

Common to DG - PG Frames
Description Catalogue Number
1 Normally Open Contact (1A) ASWPA
1 Normally Closed Contact (1B) ASWPB
5
Shunt Trips
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
24 VDC STRLB24DC
48-60 VDC STRLC60DC
110-127 VDC STRLD125DC
220-250 VDC STRLE250DC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC STRLM60
110-127 VAC STRLN120
208-277 VAC STRLS277
380-600 VAC STRLV600
Undervoltage Release
12 VDC UVRLA12DC
24 VDC UVRLB24DC
48 VDC UVRLC48DC
60 VDC UVRLG60DC
110-127 VDC UVRLD125DC
220-250 VDC UVRLE250DC
24 VAC Right Pocket Only UVRLL24
110-127 VAC UVRLN120
220-240 VAC UVRLR240
208 VAC UVRLP208
277 VAC UVRLS277
380-415 VAC UVRLT415
440-480 VAC UVRLU480
‘A’ refers to a normally open contact (open when the breaker contacts are open).
‘B’ refers to a normally closed contact (closed when the breaker contacts are open).
a Refer to the “Accessory Locations” chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory
combinations.
b These kits include two bases, one for mounting switches in the left pocket and another for mounting in the right.
c Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.

VL Circuit Breakers
FG 250A Frame, VL Series Selection/Dimensions
A complete factory assembled FG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load connectors, all factory installed and shipped as a com-
plete breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard connectors.
separate items.
HACR rated.
Number To Handle
of Poles W L D D1
2, 3 4.1 (105) 6.9 (175) 3.4 (81) 4.2 (107)
CSA C22.2 NO.5 / UL 489 IEC 60947-2 Shipping Weight, lbs. (kg)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Trip Unit Complete
Interrupting Breaker 220/240 380/415 690 Poles Frame Thermal-Mag. Electronic Breaker
4.0 2.2 2.6 6.2
5
Class Type 240 480 600 250 500 ICU I CS I CU ICS I

CU I
CS
2, 3
(1.8) (1.0) (1.2) (2.8)
N NFGA 65 35 18 30 18 65 65 40 40 12 6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
H HFGA 100 65 20 30 25 100 75 70 70 12 6

L LFGA 200 100 25 30 30 200 150 100 75 12 6

Ampere Wire No. of cables
Construction Rating Range per phase Catalogue Number
Steel 50-250 #4–350 kcmil Cu 1 3TW1FG350b
Aluminum 50-250 #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu 1 3TAW1FG350ab
Copper 50-250 #4–350 kcmil Cu 1 3TCW1FG350b
Distribution Lugs
50-250 #14–2/0 Cu 3 3TA3FG20b
50-250 #14–#4 Cu 6 3TA6FG04b
Compression Lugs
50-250 #4-350 Al/Cu 1 3CLF350b
FG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous Trip
Adjustment Range
Instantaneous
100 625 1250
110 800 1600
125 800 1600
150 800 1600
175 1000 2000
200 1000 2000
225 1250 2500
250 1250 2500

VL Circuit Breakers
FG 250A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Selection
Model 525 Trip Unit
FG 250A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
Continuous NFG2F250 HFG2F250 LFG2F250
100 NFG2B100L HFG2B100L LFG2B100L CFT2B100
5
FG 250A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
FRAME ONLY

VL Circuit Breakers
FG 250A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units Selection
FG 250A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unita

FRAME ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
100 NFG3R100L HFG3R100L LFG3R100L CFT3R100
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
100 NFG3T100L HFG3T100L LFG3T100L CFT3T100
5
100 NFG3V100L HFG3V100L LFG3V100L CFT3V100

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
100 NFG3W100L HFG3W100L LFG3W100L CFT3W100
Model 586 Trip Unit
FG 250A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit a

FRAME ONLY
100 NFG3A100L HFG3A100 LFG3A100L CFT3A100
150 NFG3A150L HFG3A150L LFG3A150L CFT3A150
250 NFG3A250L HFG3A250L LFG3A250L CFT3A250
100 NFG3G100L HFG3G100 LFG3G100L CFT3G100
150 NFG3G150L HFG3G150L LFG3G150L CFT3G150
250 NFG3G250L HFG3G250L LFG3G250L CFT3G250
100 NFG3K100L HFG3K100 LFG3K100L CFT3K100
150 NFG3K150L HFG3K150L LFG3K150L CFT3K150
250 NFG3K250L HFG3K250L LFG3K250L CFT3K250
a ue to the location of the magnetic tripping solenoid, the

D
left accessory pocket is not available for accessories.

VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for DG 150A and FG 250A Frames Selection
1 Alarm Switch
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
Bases AMBL1
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3


5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Shunt Trips
24 VDC STRLB24DC
48-60 VDC STRLC60DC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC STRLM60
12 VDC UVRLA12DC
24 VDC UVRLB24DC
48 VDC UVRLC48DC
60 VDC UVRLG60DC
208 VAC UVRLP208
277 VAC UVRLS277
a efer to the “Accessory Locations” chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for acces-
R
sory combinations.
b These kits include two bases, one for mounting switches in the left pocket and another for mounting in the right.
c Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.
‘A’ refers to a normally open contact (open when the breaker contacts are open). External Accessories page 5-195 - 5-209

VL Circuit Breakers
JG 400A Frame, VL Series Selection/Dimensions
A complete factory assembled JG breaker includes the frame, trip unit,
and standard line and load connectors, all factory installed and shipped
as a complete breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with
standard connectors.
separate items.
For reverse feed applications, select non-interchangeable trip breakers only.
For non-interchangeable trip breakers, change the third digit of the catalogue
number to “X” for standard breakers.
For 100% rated breakers with a non-interchangeable trip unit, change the 3 rd
character of the catalogue number to ”Y“.

HACR rated. Dimensions - Inches (mm)
Number To Handle
of Poles W L D D1
Interrupting Ratings 2, 3 5.5 (139) 11 (279) 4.2 (102) 5.4 (138)
UL 489 AIR (File E10848) IEC 60947-2
Shipping Weight, lbs. (kg)
5
Interrupting Breaker 220/240 380/415 690

Class Type 240 480 600 250 500 I I I I I I Trip Unit Complete
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
CU CS CU CS CU CS
N NJGA 65 35 25 30 25 65 65 45 45 12 6 Poles Frame Thermal-Mag. Electronic Breaker

9.3 4.0 4.0 12.6
H HJGA 100 65 25 30 35 100 75 70 70 15 8 2, 3
(7.9) (1.8) (1.8) (5.7)
L LJGA 200 100 25 30 35 200 150 100 75 15 8

Steel 70-400 1/0–600 kcmil Cu 1 3TW1JG600b
Aluminum 70-400 3/0–250 kcmil Al/Cu 2 3TA2JG250ab
Aluminum 70-400 250–750 kcmil Al 1 3TA1JG750b
Aluminum 70-400 3/0–600 kcmil Cu 1 3TA1JG750b
Copper 70-400 3/0–750 kcmil Cu 1 TC1JG750c
Copper 70-400 3/0–250 kcmil Cu 2 TC2JG250c
Distribution Lugs
70-400 #14–4 Cu 12 3TA12JG04b
70-400 #14–2/0 Cu 6 3TA6JG20b
Compression Lugs
70-400 #6–350 kcmil — 3CLJ350b
70-400 250-600 kcmil — 3CLJ600b
70-400 250-750 kcmil — 3CLJ750b
a Standard construction supplied for each breaker.
b Kitconsists of 3 terminal connectors.
c Required for 100% rated JG breakers. Requires 90°C
cable sized at 75°C ampacity.
JG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
250 1250 2500
300 1500 3000
350 1750 3500
400 2000 4000

VL Circuit Breakers
JG 400A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Selection
Model 525 Trip Unit

JG 400A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
FRAME ONLY
Continuous NJG2F400 HJG2F400 LJG2F400
250 NJG2B250L HJG2B250L LJG2B250L CJT2B250
JG 400A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
JJ 400A Frame 240V max., 2-pole with

Thermal-Magnetic Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit
N-Interrupting Class
Continuous Catalogue Number
Ampere Rating COMPLETE BREAKER
250 NJJ2B250
300 NJJ2B300
350 NJJ2B350
400 NJJ2B400
JJ 400A Frame 240V max., 3-pole with

Thermal-Magnetic Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit
N-Interrupting Class
Continuous Catalogue Number
Ampere Rating COMPLETE BREAKER
250 NJJ3B250
300 NJJ3B300
350 NJJ3B350
400 NJJ3B400
 Terminalconnectors must be ordered separately.

Breaker Type NJJA.

VL Circuit Breakers
JG 400A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units Selection
JG 400A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
250 NJG3R250L HJG3R250L LJG3R250L CJT3R250
400 NJG3R400L HJG3R400L LJG3R400L CJT3R400
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
250 NJG3T250L HJG3T250L LJG3T250L CJT3T250
400 NJG3T400L HJG3T400L LJG3T400L CJT3T400
5
250 NJG3V250L HJG3V250L LJG3V250L CJT3V250

400 NJG3V400L HJG3V400L LJG3V400L CJT3V400
ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
250 NJG3W250L HJG3W250L LJG3W250L CJT3W250

400 NJG3W400L HJG3W400L LJG3W400L CJT3W400
Model 586 Trip Unit
JG 400A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
250 NJG3A250L HJG3A250L LJG3A250L CJT3A250
400 NJG3A400L HJG3A400L LJG3A400L CJT3A400
250 NJG3G250L HJG3G250L LJG3G250L CJT3G250
400 NJG3G400L HJG3G400L LJG3G400L CJT3G400
250 NJG3K250L HJG3K250L LJG3K250L CJT3K250
400 NJG3K400L HJG3K400L LJG3K400L CJT3K400

VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for JG 400A and LG 600A Frames Selection
1 Alarm Switch
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
Bases AMBL1
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3


5
Shunt Trips
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
24 VDC STRLB24DC
48-60 VDC STRLC60DC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC STRLM60
12 VDC UVRLA12DC
24 VDC UVRLB24DC
48 VDC UVRLC48DC
60 VDC UVRLG60DC
208 VAC UVRLP208
277 VAC UVRLS277
R
sory combinations.
b Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.
‘B’ refers to a normally closed contact (closed when the breaker contacts are open). External Accessories page 5-195 - 5-209

VL Circuit Breakers
LG 600A Frame, VL Series Selection/Dimensions
A complete factory assembled LG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load lugs, all factory installed and shipped as a complete
breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard connectors.
Breakers are suitable for reverse feed applications.
Mounting hardware is included with each breaker.
For 100% rated breakers, change the 3rd character of the catalogue number to
“W”. Available on 400/500 Amp only.
HACR rated.
Number To Handle
CSA C22.2 NO.5 / UL 489 IEC 60947-2
of Poles W L D D1
Interrupting Breaker
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 2, 3 11 (279)
Class Type 5.5 4.2
Ext. 13.6 5.4 (138)
220/240 380/415 690 (139) (102)
Shield (345.5)
240 480 600 250 500
ICU ICS ICU I CS I CU I
CS
5
N NLGB 65 35 18 30 25 65 65 45 45 12 6
H HLGB 100 65 18 30 35 100 75 70 70 15 8 Shipping Weight, lbs. (kg)

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
L LLGB 200 100 18 30 35 200 150 100 75 15 8

Trip Unit Complete
Poles Frame Thermal-Mag. Electronic Breaker
17.4 3.5 4.2 20.9
Connectors for 75°C Wire 2, 3
(7.9) (1.6) (1.9) (9.5)
Construction Rating Range per phase Catalogue Numberb
Aluminum 150-600 #2/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu 2 (load side) 3TA2LG600LDa
Aluminum 150-600 #2/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu 2 (line side) 3TA2LG600LNa
Copper 150-600 #2/0–600 kcmil Cu 2 (load side) 3TC2LG600LDd
Copper 150-600 #2/0–600 kcmil Cu 2 (line side) 3TC2LG600LNd
Compression Lugs
150-600 #6–350 kcmil Al/Cu — 6CLL350c
150-600 250-750 kcmil Al/Cu — 3CLL750b
150-600 250-600 kcmil Al/Cu — 6CLL600c
a Standard construction supplied for each breaker.
c Kit consists of 6 lugs for Line or Load end.
 Required for 100% rated LG breakers. Requires 90°C cable sized at 75°C ampacity.
LG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
400 2000 4000
500 2500 5000
600 2750 5500
Note: Each breaker has 6 trip settings.

VL Circuit Breakers
LG 600A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Selection
Model 525 Trip Unit
LG 600A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Continuous Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Ampere Rating COMPLETE FACTORY ASSEMBLED CIRCUIT BREAKER
400 NLK2B400L HLK2B400L LLK2B400L
LG 600A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Continuous Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
 For100% rated 400A or 500A versions, change the

third character of the catalogue number to “Z”.
 Please consult Siemens sales office for availability.

VL Circuit Breakers
LG 600A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units Selection
2 4 6
Model 555 Trip Unit
LG 600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit

Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Continuous
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
400 NLK3R400L HLK3R400L LLK3R400L
600 NLK3R600L HLK3R600L LLK3R600L
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
400 NLK3T400L HLK3T400L LLK3T400L
600 NLK3T600L HLK3T600L LLK3T600L
400 NLK3V400L HLK3V400L LLK3V400L
600 NLK3V600L HLK3V600L LLK3V600L
ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
5
400 NLK3W400L HLK3W400L 2 LLK3W400L

4 6
600 NLK3W600L HLK3W600L LLK3W600L
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Model 586 Trip Unit
LG 600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit

Continuous
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
400 NLK3A400L HLK3A400L LLK3A400L
600 NLK3A600L HLK3A600L LLK3A600L
400 NLK3G400L HLK3G400L LLK3G400L
600 NLK3G600L HLK3G600L LLK3G600L
ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP + GFG ALARM ONLY
400 NLK3K400L HLK3K400L LLK3K400L
600 NLK3K600L HLK3K600L LLK3K600L

VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for JG 400A and LG 600A Frames Selection
1 Alarm Switch
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
Bases AMBL1
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3


5
Shunt Trips
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
24 VDC STRLB24DC
48-60 VDC STRLC60DC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC STRLM60
12 VDC UVRLA12DC
24 VDC UVRLB24DC
48 VDC UVRLC48DC
60 VDC UVRLG60DC
208 VAC UVRLP208
277 VAC UVRLS277
R
sory combinations.
b Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.
‘B’ refers to a normally closed contact (closed when the breaker contacts are open). External Accessories page 5-195 - 5-209

VL Circuit Breakers
MG 800A Frame, VL Series Selection/Dimensions
A complete factory assembled MG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load lugs, all factory installed and shipped as a complete
breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard
connectors.
separate items.

Mounting hardware is included with each frame or complete breaker. Dimensions - Inches (mm)
HACR rated. Number To Handle
of Poles W L D D1
2, 3 7.5 (190) 16 (406) 4.7 (119) 5.9 (151)
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (KA) Shipping Weight, lbs. (kg)
CSA C22.2 NO.5 / UL 489 IEC 60947-2
Complete
5
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Poles Frame Trip Unit Breaker
Interrupting Breaker 220/240 380/415 690 2, 3 31.3 (14.2) 4.0 (1.8) 35.3 (16.0)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Class Type 240 480 600 250 500 I I CU I I

CS CU CS I
CU I
CS
N NMG 65 35 25 22 35 65 65 50 50 20 10
H HMG 100 65 35 25 50 100 75 70 70 30 15
L LMG 200 100 50 42 65 200 150 100 75 35 17

Aluminum 200-800A 1/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu 3 3TA3MG500ab
Aluminum 200-800A 500-750 kcmil Al/Cu 2 3TA2MG750b
Copper 200-800A 1/0–500 kcmil Cu 3 TC3MG500ce
Aluminum 200-800A #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu 3 3TA3MG600bd
c Consists of one terminal.
d Includes extended terminal cover.
e Required for 100% rated MG breakers. Requires 90°C cable sized at 75°C ampacity.
MG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
600 3000 6000
700 3250 6500
800 3250 6500

VL Circuit Breakers
MG 800A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Selection
Model 525 Trip Unit
MG 800A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
Continuous NMG2F800 HMG2F800 LMG2F800
600 NMG2B600L HMG2B600L LMG2B600L CMT2B600
MG 800A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

5
FRAME ONLY
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

VL Circuit Breakers
MG 800A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units Selection
MG 800A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
600 NMG3R600L HMG3R600L LMG3R600L CMT3R600
800 NMG3R800L HMG3R800L LMG3R800L CMT3R800
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
600 NMG3T600L HMG3T600L LMG3T600L CMT3T600
800 NMG3T800L HMG3T800L LMG3T800L CMT3T800
600 NMG3V600L HMG3V600L LMG3V600L CMT3V600
800 NMG3V800L HMG3V800L LMG3V800L CMT3V800
5
ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP

600 NMG3W600L HMG3W600L LMG3W600L CMT3W600
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
800 NMG3W800L HMG3W800L LMG3W800L CMT3W800
Model 586 Trip Unit
MG 800A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
600 NMG3A600L HMG3A600L LMG3A600L CMT3A600
800 NMG3A800L HMG3A800L LMG3A800L CMT3A800
600 NMG3G600L HMG3G600L LMG3G600L CMT3G600
800 NMG3G800L HMG3G800L LMG3G800L CMT3G800
LCD ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP + GF ALARM ONLY
600 NMG3K600L HMG3K600L LMG3K600L CMT3K600
800 NMG3K800L HMG3K800L LMG3K800L CMT3K800

VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for MG 800A, NG 1200A and PG 1600A Frames Selection
2A + 2B Left Pocket Only ASKP3
Base AMBP2
4 Aux. Switches
2A + 2B Left, Right ASKP4
Base AMBP1
x4

Up to 4 Auxiliary Switches Left, Right AMBP1
2 Aux. + 2 Alarm Switches Left Pocket Only AMBP2

1 Normally Open Contact (1A) ASWPA x4
Shunt Trips
24 VDC STRPB24DC
48-60 VDC STRPC60DC
5
110-127 VDC STRPD125DC
220-250 VDC STRPE250DC
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC STRPM60
110-127 VAC STRPN120
208-277 VAC STRPS277
380-600 VAC STRPV600
12 VDC UVRPA12DC
24 VDC UVRPB24DC
48 VDC UVRPC48DC
60 VDC UVRPG60DC
110-127 VDC UVRPD125DC
220-250 VDC UVRPE250DC
Right Pocket Only
110-127 VAC UVRPN120
220-240 VAC UVRPR240
208 VAC UVRPP208
277 VAC UVRPS277
380-415 VAC UVRPT415
440-480 VAC UVRPU480
a efer to the “Accessory Locations” chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be
R
used for accessory combinations.

VL Circuit Breakers
NG 1200A Frame, VL Series Selection/Dimensions
Complete Assembled Breaker with Lugs
A complete factory assembled NG breaker includes the frame, trip unit,
and standard line and load lugs, all factory installed and shipped as a complete
breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard connectors.
separate items.

A Toggle Handle Extension is included with each frame or complete breaker. Dimensions - Inches (mm)
HACR rated. Number To Handle
of Poles W L D D1
2, 3 9 (229) 16 (406) 6 (152) 8.1 (207)
5

Complete
Interrupting Breaker 220/240 380/415 690 Poles Frame Trip Unit Breaker
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Class Type 240 480 600 250 500 I I CU I CS I CU ICS CU I CS

2, 3 46.3 (21.0) 8.8 (4.0) 55.1 (25.0)
N NNG 65 35 25 22 35 65 35 50 25 20 10
H HNG 100 65 35 25 50 100 50 70 35 30 15
L LNG 200 100 65 42 65 200 100 100 50 35 17

Aluminum 300-1200A 1/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu 4 3TA4NG500cd
Aluminum 300-1200A 500-750 kcmil Al/Cu 3 3TA3NG750d
Copper 300-1200A 1/0–500 kcmil Cu 4 3TC4NG500cc
Aluminum 300-1200A 1/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu 4 3TA4NG500Hd
Compression Lugs
300-1200A 1/0-500 kcmil Al/Cu — 12CLN500a
a Total of 12 connectors (4 per phase Line or Load).
b For 100% rated NG breakers. Requires 90°C cable sized at 75°C ampacity.
c Standard connector provided with complete breakers.
d Kit consists of 3 terminal connectors.
NG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
800 4000 8000
900 5000 10000
1000 5000 10000
1200 7000 12000

VL Circuit Breakers
NG 1200A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Selection
Ii I n = 1200A Ii Ii
AMPS AMPS AMPS
40 C
9000 10000 9000 10000 9000 10000
8000
TM ~ 8000 8000
11000 11000 11000
7000 12000 7000 12000 7000 12000

Trip Unit/Disparador 525 Amps Amps
Model 525 Trip Unit
NG 1200A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
Continuous NNG2F120 HNG2F120 LNG2F120
800 NNG2B800L HNG2B800L LNG2B800L CNT2B800
NG 1200A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
FRAME ONLY

VL Circuit Breakers
NG 1200A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units Selection
NG 1200A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
800 NNG3R800L HNG3R800L LNG3R800L CNT3R800
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
800 NNG3T800L HNG3T800L LNG3T800L CNT3T800
5
800 NNG3V800L HNG3V800L LNG3V800L CNT3V800

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
800 NNG3W800L HNG3W800L LNG3W800L CNT3W800
Model 586 Trip Unit
NG 1200A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
800 NNG3A800L HNG3A800L LNG3A800L CNT3A800
800 NNG3G800L HNG3G800L LNG3G800L CNT3G800
800 NNG3K800L HNG3K800L LNG3K800L CNT3K800

VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for MG 800A, NG 1200A, and PG 1600A Frames Selection
Base AMBP2
4 Aux. Switches
2A + 2B Left, Right ASKP4
Base AMBP1 x4


Common to DG-PG Frames
Shunt Trips
24 VDC STRPB24DC
48-60 VDC STRPC60DC
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC STRPM60
12 VDC UVRPA12DC
24 VDC UVRPB24DC
48 VDC UVRPC48DC
60 VDC UVRPG60DC
Right Pocket Only
208 VAC UVRPP208
277 VAC UVRPS277
a Refer to the “Accessory Locations” chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory combinations.

VL Circuit Breakers
PG 1600A Frame, VL Series & Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Selection/Dimensions
A complete factory assembled PG breaker includes the frame and trip unit only.
The connectors must be ordered as separate items.
PG thermal-magnetic breakers sold as non-interchangeable only.
For any other configuration, order the frame, trip unit, and connectors as
separate items.
Connectors require a Breaker Lug Mounting Assembly or Breaker Mounting
Base and must be ordered as a seperate item.
For DC applications, use Thermal magnetic trip unit only.
For reverse feed applications select non-interchangeable trip breakers only.
Change the third digit of the catalogue number to “X” for non-interchangeable
trip breakers.

Mounting hardware is included with each frame or complete breaker. Dimensions - Inches (mm)
A Toggle Handle Extension is included with each frame or complete breaker. Number To Handle
of Poles W L D D1
2, 3 9 (229) 16 (406) 6 (152) 8.1 (207)
5

Complete
Interrupting Breaker 220/240 380/415 690 Poles Frame Trip Unit Breaker
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Class Type 240 480 600 250 500 I I CU I I

CS I
CU CS CU ICS
2, 3 60.2 (27.3) 8.8 (4.0) 69.0 (31.3)
N NPG 65 35 25 22 35 65 35 50 25 20 10
H HPG 100 65 35 25 50 100 50 70 35 30 15
L LPG 200 100 65 42 65 200 100 100 50 35 17
PG Thermal-Magnetic,
Connectors for 75°C Wire Instantaneous
Construction Rating Range per phase Catalogue Number Instantaneous
Aluminum 1200-1600A 1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu 6 3TA6PG750ac Trip Unit Continuous Overcurrent Setting (Ii)
Aluminum 1200-1600A 300–600 kcmil 5 TA5P600bd Amp Rating (In) Min. Max.
Aluminum 1200-1600A 600–750 kcmil 4 TA4P750bd 1200 7000 12000
Aluminum 1200-1600A 300–600 kcmil 6 TA6R600bd 1400 7000 12000
Copper 1200-1600A 300–600 kcmil 5 TC5R600bde 1600 7000 12000
a Requires Lug Mounting Assembly LMAP1600.
b Requires Breaker Mounting Base MBPG1600 Kit or MBPG1601.
c Consists of 3 connectors.
d Consists of 1 connector.
e For 100% rated PG breakers. Requires 90°C cable sized at 75°C ampacity.
Ii I n = 1600A Ii Ii
AMPS AMPS AMPS
40º C
9000 10000 9000 10000 9000 10000
Mounting Arrangement
8000
TM ~ 8000 8000
11000 11000 11000
7000 12000 7000 12000 7000 12000

Trip Unit/Disparador 525 Amps Amps

Lug Mounting Assembly LMAP1600
Model 525 Trip Unit
Breaker Mounting Base (Front Connect) MBPG1600
Breaker Mounting Base (Rear Connect) MBPG1601
PG 1600A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Continuous Ampere Rating COMPLETE FACTORY ASSEMBLED CIRCUIT BREAKER
1200 NPX3B120 HPX3B120 LPX3B120
1400 NPX3B140 HPX3B140 LPX3B140
1600 NPX3B160 HPX3B160 LPX3B160

VL Circuit Breakers
PG 1600A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units Selection
Model 555 Trip Unit
PG 1600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
Continuous NPG3F160 HPG3F160 LPG3F160
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
1200 NPG3R120 HPG3R120 LPG3R120 CPT3R120
1600 NPG3R160 HPG3R160 LPG3R160 CPT3R160
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
1200 NPG3T120 HPG3T120 LPG3T120 CPT3T120
1600 NPG3T160 HPG3T160 LPG3T160 CPT3T160
1200 NPG3V120 HPG3V120 LPG3V120 CPT3V120
1600 NPG3V160 HPG3V160 LPG3V160 CPT3V160
ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
1200 NPG3W120 HPG3W120 LPG3W120 CPT3W120
5
1600 NPG3W160 HPG3W160 LPG3W160 CPT3W160
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Model 586 Trip Unit
PG 1600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit

FRAME ONLY
Continuous NPG3F160 HPG3F160 LPG3F160
1200 NPG3A120 HPG3A120 LPG3A120 CPT3A120
1600 NPG3A160 HPG3A160 LPG3A160 CPT3A160
1200 NPG3G120 HPG3G120 LPG3G120 CPT3G120
1600 NPG3G160 HPG3G160 LPG3G160 CPT3G160
1200 NPG3K120 HPG3K120 LPG3K120 CPT3K120
1600 NPG3K160 HPG3K160 LPG3K160 CPT3K160

VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for MG 800A, NG 1200A, and PG 1600A Frames Selection
Base AMBP2
4 Aux. Switches 2A + 2B
Left, Right ASKP4
Base AMBP1
x4


Common to DG-PG Frames
Shunt Trips
24 VDC STRPB24DC
5
48-60 VDC STRPC60DC

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC STRPM60
12 VDC UVRPA12DC
24 VDC UVRPB24DC
48 VDC UVRPC48DC
60 VDC UVRPG60DC
Right Pocket Only
208 VAC UVRPP208
277 VAC UVRPS277
a Refer to the “Accessory Locations” chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory combinations.

Molded Case Switch Selection
General switch has a fixed instantaneous from the molded case switch. Also, the
Typically a molded case switch is used self-protecting trip element which short-circuit current rating of the
when a compact load-break switch is may open the switch under high fault switch is limited to the interrupting
needed for disconnect purposes. The conditions. rating of the upstream protective
VL line of molded case switches from device or the ratings in the table below,
Application Note whichever is less.
Siemens is made of the same materials
and components as the VL circuit Overcurrent protection must be provid-
breakers but do not provide overcur- ed by an appropriate overcurrent
rent protection. Each molded case protective device located upstream
Each type VL molded case switch accepts the same terminals and accessories as the equivalent VL circuit breakers.
All type VL molded case switches are suitable for reverse feed applications.
Mounting hardware and standard line and load terminals are included on ratings through 250A. For 400 – 1600A ratings,
order the lugs separately.
All ratings are UL listed and CSA certified.
Molded Case Switch

Maximum 2-Pole 3-Pole Short-Circuit Current Rating Self Protective
Ampere Instantaneous
Rating / Frame Catalogue Number Catalogue Number 240V 480V 600V Override
5
150A / DG HDS2S150L HDS3S150L 100k 65k 20k 2,500A
250A / FG HFS2S250L HFS3S250L 100k 65k 20k 3,500A
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
400A / JG HJS2S400 HJS3S400 100k 65k 25k 4,400A
600A / LG HLR2S600 HLR3S600 100k 65k 18k 5,500A
800A / MG HMS2S800 HMS3S800 100k 65k 35k 6,500A
1200A / NG HNS2S120 HNS3S120 100k 65k 35k 12,000A
1600A / PG —
HPS3S160 100k 65k 35k 14,000A
Maximum 3-Pole Short-Circuit Current Rating Self Protective

Ampere Instantaneous
Rating / Frame Catalogue Number 240V 480V 600V Override
250A / FG LFS3S250L 200k 100k 25k 3,500A
400A / JG LJS3S400 200k 100k 25k 4,400A
600A / LG LLR3S600 200k 100k 18k 5,500A
800A / MG LMS3S800 200k 100k 65k 6,500A
1200A / NG LNS3S120 200k 100k 65k 12,000A
1600A / PG LPS3S160 200k 100k 65k 14,000A
The Short-Circuit Current Rating is the maximum available

current of the circuit where the switch is used, when pro-
tected by an appropriate overcurrent protective device.

Motor Circuit Protectors Selection
General
Protection of Motor Circuits
Molded case circuit breakers are used in motor circuits as a disconnecting means and for short-circuit protection. They should be
used in conjunction with motor-running, over-current protection devices, and should permit the motor to start without nuisance
tripping from motor-inrush current. The circuit breaker should have a continuous current rating of not less than 115% of the motor
full-load current.
The recommended motor circuit protectors listed have continuous-current ratings of at least 115% of motor full-load currents. The
trip setting positions are approximately 11 times motor full-load current. The suggested trip settings may need to be adjusted
upward to no higher than 1300% of full-load current for non-design E type motors, and no greater than 1700% of full-load current
for design E motors, to allow for motor startup due to in-rush current.
Breaker Mounted Immediately Ahead of Motor Starter

Siemens motor circuit protectors are recommended for use in combination motor starters to provide selective short-circuit
protection for the motor branch circuit. The adjustable instantaneous trip feature of the Siemens motor circuit protector provides
for a trip setting slightly above the peak motor in-rush current. With this setting, no delay is introduced in opening the circuit when
a fault occurs. This circuit breaker has no time-delay trip element. Therefore it must be used in conjunction with, and immediately
ahead of, the motor-running overcurrent protection device.
Important: The information below does not apply to all motor applications: it is recommended that the user refer to the National
Electrical Code (NEC) for specific needs.
Table 1 (When Breaker is Mounted Immediately Ahead of Motor Starter)

5
3-Phase Induction Type Motors (Siemens motor circuit protectors for branch circuit use with alternating-current combination, full voltage motor starters)
Motor Full Load Motor Full Load

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Amperes Trip Setting (A) Catalogue Numbera Amperes Trip Setting (A) Catalogue Numbera
35-50 450 96-139 1250
42-60 540 115-167 1500
48-70 630 135-194 1750
HDM3L150L HJM3L400
55-80 720 154-222 2000
62-90 810 173-250 2250
69-100 900 192-278 2500
58-83 750 154-222 2000
69-100 900 185-267 2400
81-117 1050 215-311 2800
HDM3M150L HJM3M400
92-133 1200 246-356 3200
104-150 1350 277-400 3600
115-150b 1500 308-400b 4000
96-139 1250 154-222 2000
115-150b 1500 185-267 2400
135-150b 1750 215-311 2800
HDM3H150L HLM3J600
135-150b 2000 246-356 3200
135-150b 2250 277-400 3600
135-150b 2500 308-444 4000
46-67 600 212-306 2750
55-80 720 254-367 3300
65-93 840 296-428 3850
HFM3L250L HLM3Y600
74-107 960 338-489 4400
83-120 1080 381-550 4950
92-133 1200 423-600 5500
77-111 1000 250-361 3250
92-133 1200 292-422 3800
108-156 1400 335-483 4350
HFM3M250L HMM3M800
123-178 1600 385-556 5000
138-200 1800 442-638 5740
154-222 2000 500-722 6500
135-194 1750 385-556 5000
162-210 2100 462-667 6000
188-220 2450 538-778 7000
HFM3H250L HNM3M120
215-241 2800 615-889 8000
242-250b 3150 692-1000 9000
242-250b 3500 769-1111 10,000
a otor circuit protectors rated 150A and 250A are supplied with line and load lugs
M b hese settings are provided for starting currents greater than 11X but not to exceed
T
installed. If lugs are required on 400A to 1200A motor circuit breakers, order required 17X. Full Load Amps ( FLA ) not to exceed ampere rating of MCP.
lugs separately.

• Revised •
VL External
External Accessories
Accessories 01/31/12
Operating Mechanisms Selection

Selection

5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
7 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
1 Base for Plug-In or Draw-Out 9 Cover Frame for Door Cutout 17 Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit (525)
2 Interphase Barriers 10 Stored Energy Operator 18 Electronic Trip Unit (555)
3 Rear Terminals – Flat and Round 11 Rotary Handle Operator 19 Elec. Trip Unit with LCD (586)
4 Bus Extensions 12 Variable Depth Rotary Operator 20 Communication Module with ZSI
5 Terminal Connectors 13 Max Flex Operator 21 Electronic Trip Unit Tester and
6 Plug-In Terminal Blades 14 Circuit Breaker LCB Power Supply
7 Extended Terminal Shield 15 Shunt Trip or Undervoltage Releases
8 Standard Terminal Shield 16 Auxiliary/Alarm Switches
Siemens Industry, Inc. SPEEDFAX™ 2011 Product Catalog 7-137

5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

VL External Accessories
Operating Mechanisms
For DG to FG Frame For JG to LG Frame

150 to 250 A 400 A to 600 A

Description Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Through-Door Rotary Handle Operator Kit
Fixed depth and the handle is mounted
directly on the circuit breaker.
Lockable knob (for up to 3 padlocks).
NEMA 1, 12 RHFF RHFL
Red Handle Version
with red knob, yellow indicator plate
NEMA 1, 12 RHFFEM RHFLEM
Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Operator Kit
Variable depth, door mounted handle.
Includes knob with masking frame,
indicator plate, detachable door coupling,
12” shaft, and breaker mounted rotary
operator. Lockable knob (for up to 3
padlocks).
NEMA 1, 12 RHVF12 RHVL12

For Direct or Extended Rotary
Handle Operators (RHF and RHV).
Form C, Early Break type2 Aux. Switch Kit
Includes 1 switch with 5’ wire
For Door-Mounted Operator — RHSLA1
For Through-Door Operator RHSFA1F RHSLA1F
5
Includes 2 switches with 5’ wire
For Door-Mounted Operator — RHSLA2
For Through-Door Operator RHSFA2F RHSLA2F
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Door-Mounted Rotary Operator Mechanism
Breaker mechanism only RHVFBM RHVLBM
Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Only

Standard version NEMA 1, 12 RHVM12H RHVM12H
NEMA 3R RHVM3RH RHVM3RH
NEMA 4X RHVM4XH RHVM4XH
Red Handle version RHVMEMH RHVMEMH
NFPA-79 Handle Kit

Intermediate handle for NFPA-79 compliance
with door-mounted rotary operator RHVF79H RHVM79H
Extension Shaft Only, for Door Mounted Operator

2 inches (50.8mm) RHVMS02 RHVMS02
3 inches (76.2mm) — —
12 inches (304.8 mm) RHVMS12 RHVMS12
16 inches (406.4 mm) RHVMS16 RHVMS16
24 inches (609.6mm) w/ support bracket RHVMS24 RHVMS24
a During manual operation, Early Break auxiliary switch

contacts open before the breaker opens.

For MG Frame For NG to PG Frame
800 A 1200 to 1600 A

Through-Door Rotary Handle Operator Kit
Fixed depth, breaker mounted.
For direct fitting to the circuit breaker.
Lockable with up to 3 padlocks.
NEMA 1, 12 RHFM —
Red Handle Version
with red knob, yellow indicator plate
NEMA 1, 12 — —
Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Operator Kit
Variable depth, door mounted handle.
Includes knob with masking frame,
indicator plate, detachable door coupling,
12” shaft, and breaker mounted rotary
operator. Lockable knob (for up to 3
padlocks).
NEMA 1, 12 RHVM12 —

For Direct or Extended Rotary
Handle Operators (RHF and RHV).
Early Break type2 Aux. Switch Kit
Includes 1 switch with 5’ wire
For Door-Mounted Operator RHSMA1 RHSPA1
For Through-Door Operator — —
5
Includes 2 switches with 5’ wire

For Door-Mounted Operator RHSMA2 RHSPA2
For Through-Door Operator — —
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Door-Mounted Rotary Operator Mechanism

Breaker mechanism only RHVMBM RHVPBM
Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Only

Standard version NEMA 1, 12 RHVM12H RHVP12H
NEMA 3R RHVM3RH RHVP3RH
NEMA 4X RHVM4XH RHVP4XH
Red Handle version RHVMEMH RHVPEMH
NFPA-79 Handle Kit

Intermediate handle for NFPA-79 compliance
with door-mounted rotary operator RHVM79H RHVP79H
Extension Shaft Only, for Door Mounted Operator

2 inches (50.8mm) RHVMS02 —
3 inches (76.2mm) — RHVPS03
12 inches (304.8 mm) RHVMS12 RHVPS12
16 inches (406.4 mm) RHVMS16 —
24 inches (609.6mm) w/ support bracket RHVMS24 RHVPS24

For DG and FG Frame For JG and LG Frame

150 to 250 A 400 to 600 A

Variable Depth Flange Mounted Operator Kit
Adjustable from 8” to 16”
Complete kit, includes handle and
variable depth operator.
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 FHVF3R FHVL3R
NEMA 4X FHVF4X FHVL4X
IEC Black Handle NEMA 1, 3R, 12 FHVF3RB FHVL3RB
NEMA 4X FHVF4XB FHVL4XB
Max-Flex™, Variable Depth Flange

Mounted Operator Kit
Complete kit, includes plastic handle, breaker
operator, and cable. NEMA 1, 3R, 12 MFKF3R MFKL3R
For DG and FG operators, the cable is 36”,
all others are 48”
May be right- or left-hand mounted
Handle Only, for Max-Flex™ Variable Depth

NEMA 1, 3R, 12 Plastic MFHM3R MFHM3R
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 Steel - epoxy coated MFHM3RS MFHM3RS
NEMA 4, 4X Steel - chrome plated MFHM4X MFHM4X
Solid color (all gray) Plastica
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 MFHM3RB MFHM3RB
Solid color (black handle) Steel epoxy coateda
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 MFHM3RSB MFHM3RSB
5
Breaker Operator Mechanism Only, for Max-Flex™ MFMF MFML
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Cable Only, for Max-Flex™ Variable Depth
36” MFCF036 MFCM036

Form C (1NO - 1NC), early breakb
1 Aux. switch MFSFA1 MFSLA1
2 Aux. switch MFSFA2 MFSLA2
a Max-Flex™ handles are available with solid gray or black handles instead of the customary “Red for On” flange handle.
The black handle is preferred for IEC markets, where red handles have a specific meaning.
b During manual operation, Early Break aux. contacts open before the breaker opens.

For MG Frame For NG Frame For PG Frame
800 A 1200 A 1600 A

Description Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Variable Depth Flange Mounted Operator Kit
Adjustable from 8” to 16”
Complete kit, includes handle and
variable depth operator.
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 — —
NEMA 4X — —
IEC Black Handle NEMA 1, 3R, 12 — —
NEMA 4X
Max-Flex™, Variable Depth Flange

Mounted Operator Kit
Complete kit, includes plastic handle, breaker
operator, and cable. NEMA 1, 3R, 12 MFKM3R MFKP3RS MFKP3RS
For DG and FG operators, the cable is 36”,
all others are 48”
May be right- or left-hand mounted
Handle Only, for Max-Flex™ Variable Depth

NEMA 1, 3R, 12 Plastic MFHM3R — —
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 Steel - epoxy coated MFHM3RS MFHP3RS MFHP3RS
NEMA 4, 4X Steel - chrome plated MFHM4X MFHP4X MFHP4X
Solid color (all gray) Plastica
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 MFHM3RB — —
Solid color (black handle) Steel epoxy coateda
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 MFHM3RSB MFHP3RSB MFHP3RSB
5
Breaker Operator Mechanism Only, for Max-Flex™ MFMM MFMP MFMP

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Cable Only, for Max-Flex™ Variable Depth

36” MFCM036 — —
48” MFCM048 MFCP048 MFCP048

Form C (1NO - 1NC), early breakb
1 Aux. switch MFSPA1 MFSPA1 MFSPA1
2 Aux. switch MFSPA2 MFSPA2 MFSPA2
a Max-Flex™ handles are available with solid gray or black handles instead of the customary “Red for On” flange handle.
The black handle is preferred for IEC markets, where red handles have a specific meaning.
b During manual operation, Early Break aux. contacts open before the breaker opens.

For DG to FG Frame
150 to 250 A

Stored Energy and Motor Operators
Lockable with up to 3 padlocks.
AC Voltage DC Voltage Stored Energy Type
— 24 SEAFB
42-48 42-48 SEAFM
60 60 SEAFY
110–127 110–127 SEAFN
220–250 220–250 SEAFR
Cylinder Locks for Field Installation CLKF
For DG Frame For FG Frame

150 A 250 A

Plug-in Mounting Base Assembly
Includes base, terminal blade kit, sec. terminal block assembly, base trip
interlock, and mounting hardware.
Rear Connected
3-pole PCBDRC3 PCBFRC3
Front Connected
5
3-pole PCBDFC3 PCBFFC3
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Draw-out Assembly
Includes base, position indicator switch, socket, base trip
interlock, crank handle, connectors, and necessary shields.
Rear Connected
3-pole DCADRC3 DCAFRC3
Front Connected
3-pole DCADFC3 DCAFFC3
(Draw-out assembly includes side plates and all hardware)
Hex Wrench for racking draw-out assembly and position indicator DCHP DCHP
Position Indicator Switch DCIP DCIP

Form “C” switch to indicate breaker engaged/de-engaged
position.a
Secondary Terminal Block Assy. PCTF83 PCTF83

Accessory connections for plug-in or draw-out breakers. Pre-wired plug
and block with 8 terminal points.b

Plug-In Spare Breaker Kit PCXD3 PCXF3
Set of 6 terminal blades, 2 terminal shield, & 1 trip interlock
Draw-out Spare Breaker Kit DCXD3 DCXF3

Set of 6 terminal blades, & 1 trip interlock
Spare Breaker Trip Interlock PCXFT PCXFT

a Up to 2 position indicator switches may be mounted per plug-in or draw-out base.

b Up to 2 plugs per breaker (16 terminal points) may be mounted on DG, and FG breakers. Up to 3 plugs per breaker (24 terminal points) may be mounted
on JG, LG, MG, NG, and PG breakers.

5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

Connections

150 A 250 A

Description Catalog Number Catalog Number
Front Bus Bar Connections
Includes nut keeper plates and shield.
Standard (straight)
3-Pole Set FBCD3 FBCF3
Bus Bar Connection Strap Kit — —
Includes 6 - Bus Bars, 6 Nut Keepers & Shields — —
Standard 3-Pole Set 100% rated applications
Rear-Connecting Studs
Short length round term. (1piece) RTLDSR RTLFSR
Long length round term. (1piece) RTLDLR RTLFLR
3-Pole round term. kit, 2 short + 1 long SRTDR3 SRTFR3
Short length flat term. (1piece) RTLDSF RTLFSF
Long length flat term. (1piece) RTLDLF RTLFLF
Round Terminal 3-Pole flat term. kit, 2 short + 1 long SRTDF3 SRTFF3
Flat bus bar type (1 piece) — —
3-Pole set of flat bus bar — —
Terminal Shields
Includes 2 terminal shields.
3-Pole Standard Shield TSSF3 TSSF3
Flat Terminal 3-Pole Extended Shield TSLF3 TSLF3
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Interphase Barriers
Set of 2 barriers IPBF IPBF
Also fits plug-in and draw-out bases.
Lug Mounting Assy. — —

Flat Bus Bar
Breaker Mounting Base

Front connected — —
Rear connected — —
Terminal Shields
IPBF

For JG Frame For LG Frame For MG Frame For NG Frame For PG Frame
400 A 600 A 800 A 1200 A 1600 A

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
FBCJ3 FBCL3 FBCM3

— — — SSBP SSBP
SSBPH SSBPH

RTLJSR — — — —
RTLJLR — — — —
SRTJR3 — — — —
RTLJSF — — — —
RTLJLF — — — —
SRTJF3 — — — —
— RTLLSF RTLMSF RTLNSF —
— SRTLF3 SRTMF3 SRTNF3 —
TSSL3 — TSSM3 TSSP3 TSSP3

TSLL3 — TSLM3 TSLP3 TSLP3
5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
IPBM IPBM IPBM IPBP IPBP
— — — — LMAP1600b
— — — — MBPG1600
— — — — MBPG1601
a Not for use with standard Al terminals. Use Standard b Kit includes connection for one side of breaker only.
Shield for rear connection and Extended Shield for bus- Order quantity 2 if connecting line and load side.
bar connection.

Connections
150 A 250 A

Nut Keeper Plates
For ring/tongue terminal or bus bar connections.
(For metric threads on other than the JG or LG frame,
change ”TNK” to ”TMK”)
1 Nut Keeper Plate TNKD TNKF
Kit of 3 TNKD3 TNKF3
Mechanical Lugs
Steel Wrap Around Body (Cu Wire Only)
Cable Size; (cables per phase) #8-1/0; 1-hole #4-350 kcmil; 1-hole
Single Lug TW1DG20 TW1FG350
Kit of 3 3TW1DG20 3TW1FG350
Aluminum Body (Al or Cu Wire)
Single Lug TA1DG30 TAW1FG350
Kit of 2 — —

Kit of 3 3TA1DG30 3TAW1FG350

Cable Size; (cables per phase) — —

Single Lug — —
5
Kit of 2 — —
Kit of 3 — —

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Single Lug — —

Kit of 3 — —
Copper Body (Cu Wire Only)
Single Lug TC1DG30 TCW1FG350
Kit of 2 — —

Kit of 3 3TC1DG30  3TCW1FG350

Single Lug — —
Compression Lugs
Cable Size; (cables per phase) #14-2/0; 1-cable #4-350 kcmil; 1-cable
Kit of 2 2CLD20 —
Kit of 3 3CLD20 3CLF350
Cable Size; (cables per phase) —

Kit of 2 —
Kit of 3 — —

Kit of 3 — —
Distribution Lugs (Cu Wire Only) #14-#1; 2-hole and
Cable Size; (cables per phase) #14-#2; 3-hole #14-2/0; 1-hole
Single Lug TA3DG02 TA3FG20
Kit of 3 3TA3DG02 3TA3FG20
Cable Size; (cables per phase) #14-#4; 6-hole #14-#4; 6-hole
Single Lug TA6DG04 TA6FG04
Kit of 3 3TA6DG04 3TA6FG04
Note: pictures provide graphical

representaions only. Control Wire Terminals
Control Wire Terminal (Single) — —
Control Wire Terminal (Kit of 3) — —
 Required for 100% rated breakers. Requires 90°C cable

sized at 75°C ampacity.

400 A 600 A 800 A 1200 A 1600 A

TMKJ TNKL TNKM TNKP TNKP

TMKJ3 TNKL3 TNKM3 TNKP3 TNKP3
metric only

1/0-600 kcmil; 1-hole — — — —
TW1JG600 — — — —
3TW1JG600 — — — —

3/0-250 kcmil; 2-hole #2-600 kcmil; 2-hole 1/0-500 kcmil, 3-hole 1/0-500 kcmil; 4-hole 1/0-750 kcmil; 6-hole
TA2JG250 — TA3MG500 — —
— — 3TA3MG500 2TA4NG500 —
—
3TA2JG250 3TA2LG600LDa 3TA4NG500 3TA6PG750e
3TA2LG600LNb 3TA4NG500Hc

AL: 250-750 kcmil AL: 250-750 kcmil
CU: 3/0-600 kcmil; 1-hole CU: 3/0-600 kcmil; 1-hole 500 -750 kcmil; 2-hole 500 -750 kcmil; 3-hole 600-750 kcmil; 4-hole
TA1JG750 TA1JG750 (400A max) TA2MG750 — TA4P750f
5
— — — 2TA3NG750
3TA1JG750 3TA1JG750 (400A max) 3TA2MG750 3TA3NG750 —

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
—
#2-600 kcmil; 3-hole —
300-600 kcmil; 5; 6-hole
— — — TA5P600f
TA6R600f
— — 3TA3MG600 d — —

3/0-250 kcmil; 2-hole #2-600 kcmil; 2-hole 1/0-500 kcmil; 3-hole 1/0-500 kcmil; 4-hole —
TC2JG250 — TC3MG500 — —
— — — — —
—
— 3TC2LG600LD — 3TC4NG500 —
3TC2LG600LN
3/0-750 kcmil; 1-hole — — — 300-600 kcmil; 5-hole
TC1JG750 — — — TC5R600f

#6-350 kcmil; 1-cable #6-350 kcmil; 2-cable 1/0-500 kcmil; 4-cable —
— — — — —
3CLJ350 6CLL350 (kit of 6) — 12CLN500 (kit of 12) —
250-600 kcmil; 1-cable 250-750 kcmil; 1-cable — — —

3CLJ600 3CLL750 — — —
— — — — —
250-750 kcmil; 1-cable 250-600 kcmil; 2-cable
3CLJG750 6CLL600 (kit of 6) — — —
— — — — —

#14-#4; 12-hole — — — —
TA12JG04 — — — —
3TA12JG04 — — — —
#14-2/0; 6-hole — — — —
TA6JG20 — — — —
3TA6JG20 — — — —

TA2JG250PT — TA3MG500PT — —
— 3TA2LG600LNPT — 3TA4NG500PT —
All lug kits include the nut keepers. c Required for 100% rated breakers. Requires 90°C cable e Used only with LMAP1600 mounting base.
a Mounted on Load Side Only. sized at 75°C ampacity. f Used only with MBPG1600 or MBPG1601 mounting
b Mounted on Line Side Only. d Requires extended modified shield. base.

General

150 A 250 A

Handle Padlocking Device HPLF HPLF
To padlock breaker toggle in the “OFF” position. Accepts up
to 3 padlocks with 5–8 mm shackles.
Handle Blocking Device HBDF HBDF

For holding the handle in the “ON” position. Not a
lockout/tagout device.
Walking-Beam Interlock Mechanism

Provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent
Handle Padlocking circuit breakers.
Device Fixed mounted breakers WBMFFM WBMFFM
Note: Both breakers must be of the same frame size.
Cable Interlock Mechanism

Provides mechanical interlocking between 2 circuit-breakers -
includes operator mechanism for one circuit breaker only. CBTF CBTF
Combination with the next larger or smaller frame size is possible.
Walking-Beam Interlock Cable
Interlock Mechanism Cable only, to connect 2 circuit breakers.
Cable length 18 in. .46m (recommended up to 250A) CBCF18 CBCF18
Cable length 36 in. .91m (recommended from 400–800A) CBCM36 CBCM36
Cable length 54 in. 1.37m (recommended from 1200–1600A) CBCP54 CBCP54

5
Mounting Screw Kit
Includes the necessary hardware to mount a circuit breaker to the
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
user’s prepared surface
Kit with 2 screws (SAE thread) MSKF2 MSKF2
Kit with 4 screws (SAE thread) MSKF4 MSKF4
Trip Adjustment Sealing Cover
Includes a trip unit cover to prevent tampering or adjustment
Cable Interlock of trip settings. Seal not included.
System Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units TSCFTM TSCFTM

5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

Ground Sensors & Electronic Accessories
150 A 250 A

Neutral Current Transformer (Ground Sensor, N-pole)
Neutral = 35/60A NGSD060 —
Neutral = 100A NGSF100 NGSF100
Neutral = 150A NGSF150 NGSF150
Neutral = 250A — NGSJ250
Neutral = 400A — —
Neutral = 1000/1200A — —
Communications & Electronics

Power Stick - Hand held, battery operated power supply for EPSP18V EPSP18V
LCD trip units. (Requires two -9V batteries)
For programming and trip testing only.
Com20 Profibus Communications Module with ZSI COMPRO2O COMPRO020

for electronic trip units (order cable separately)
Spare Flat
Cable
Com21 Modbus Communications Module with ZSI COMMOD21 COMMOD21
Power Stick for electronic trip units (order cable separately)
5
Cable for COM20/21 and COMKIT13 COMKIT13
power supply……5ft. (1.5m)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
RS232 Cable
Cable for COM20/21, 3.0m (9.8ft). COMKIT6 COMKIT6
Spare flat cable for Test Kits COMPCA COMPCA
Adressing Plug - Assigns a field bus address without a PC 3UF79100AA00 3UF79100AA000

by pluging into Com20/21
Com20 Profibus
& Com21 Modbus
Communications
Module
Door Cutouts & Extensions

Cover Frame for Door Cutout
For fixed or plug-in mounted circuit breakers. (IP30)
2-Pole & 3-Pole BZLF3 BZLF3
For breakers with stored energy operator. (IP40) BZLFRHSE BZLFRHSE
Cover Frame for Circuit-breaker draw-out mounted and toggle handle operated.
Door Cutout Kit includes cover frame (bezel) and escutcheon as needed. (IP40)
(not for use with rotary handle or stored energy operator) BZLFBDC BZLFBDC
Toggle Handle Extension — —

For spare or replacement. (One is included with each
NG - PG frame.)
Toggle Handle
Extension

400 A 600 A 800 A 1200 A 1600 A

— — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — —
NGSJ250 — — — —
NGSL400 NGSL400 — — —
— NGSM600 NGSM600 — —
— — NGSN800 NGSN800 —
— — — NGSP120 NGSP120
— — — — NGSP160
EPSP18V EPSP18V EPSP18V EPSP18V EPSP18V
COMPRO20 COMPRO20 COMPRO20 COMPRO20 COMPRO20
COMMOD21 COMMOD21 COMMOD21 COMMOD21 COMMOD21

5
COMKIT4 COMKIT4 COMKIT5 COMKIT5 COMKIT5

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
COMKIT7 COMKIT7 COMKIT8 COMKIT8 COMKIT8
COMPCA COMPCA COMPCA COMPCA COMPCA

3UF79100AA000 3UF79100AA000 3UF79100AA000 3UF79100AA000 3UF79100AA000
BZLL3 BZLL3 BZLM3 BZLP3 BZLP3
BZLLRHSE BZLLRHSE BZLMRHSE BZLPRHSE BZLPRHSE
BZLLBDC BZLLBDC BZLMBDC BZLPBDC BZLPBDC
THEL THEL THEM THEP THEP

VL Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Accessory Locations Selection
3-pole
circuit
breakers
left right
Locations of Internally Mounted Accessories

Frame Family Left Pocket Right Pocket
Shunt Trip or UVR or up to 3 Auxiliary Switches
or up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 1 Alarm Switch
DG*, FG*, JG, LG 150 to 600A Up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 1 Alarm Switch
Shunt Trip or UVR or up to 3 Auxiliary Switches
or up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 1 Alarm Switch
Up to 4 Auxiliary Switches Shunt Trip or UVR or up to 4 Auxiliary Switches
MG, NG, PG 800 to 1600A
Up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 2 Alarm Switches Shunt Trip or UVR or up to 4 Auxiliary Switches
* Except DG and FG breakers with Electronic Trip Units. Due to the location of the Magnetic Latch, the Left Pocket is not available for accessories.
Accessory Information Accessory Maximums

b Aux. Switch is an Auxiliary Switch, 1A or 1B contact DG, FG, JG, LG Maximum Accessories:
b Alarm Switch has 1A or 1B contact b Maximum of six (6) switches total
b UVR is an Undervoltage Release b DG, FG Maximum of two (2) Alarm Switches, one each in the
5
Left and Right Pockets. JG, LG Max. of 1 Alarm, Left only
b The standard location for factory mounted Auxiliary and
Alarm Switches is the Left Pocket MG, NG, PG Maximum Accessories:
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
b Maximum of eight (8) switches total
b Maximum of two (2) Alarm Switches, Left Pocket only

VL Circuit Breakers
Suffix for factory mounted Switch Combinations Selection
Device
If the frame is: And you need these functions: Then add this suffix: Catalog Number
DG, FG, JG or LG 1 Alarm Switch
1 NO Alarm A1 ASKL1
1 NC Alarm
DG, FG, JG or LG 2 Aux. Switches
A2 ASKL2
1 NO + 1 NC Aux. Contacts
DG, FG, JG or LG 2 Aux. + 1 Alarm Switches
1 NO + 1NC Aux. and 1 NC
A3 ASKL3
Alarm
2 NO Aux. and 1 NC Alarm
MG, NG or PG 2 Aux. + 2 Alarm Switches
1 NO + 1 NC Aux. and 1 NO +
1 NC Alarm A3 ASKP3
2 NO Aux. and 2 NC Alarm
2 NC Aux. and 2 NO Alarm
MG, NG or PG 4 Aux. Switches
A4 ASKP4
2 NO + 2 NC Aux.
Suffix for factory mounted Shunt Trips

Device
24V DC RB STRLB24DC
48-60V DC RC STRLC60DC
110-127V DC RD STRLD125DC
5
"220-250V DC RE STRLE250DC
DG, FG, JG or LG
48-60V AC" RM STRLM60
110-127V AC RN STRLN120
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
208-277V AC RS STRLS277
380-600V AC RV STRLV600
24V DC RB STRPB24DC
48-60V DC RC STRPC60DC
110-127V DC RD STRPD125DC
220-250V DC RE STRPE250DC
MG, NG or PG
48-60V AC RM STRPM60
110-127V AC RN STRPN120
208-277V AC RS STRPS277
380-600V AC RV STRPV600
Suffix for factory mounted Undervoltage Releases

Device
12V DC UA UVRLA12DC
24V DC UB UVRLB24DC
48V DC UC UVRLC48DC
60V DC UG UVRLG60DC
110-127V DC UD UVRLD125DC
220-250V DC UE UVRLE250DC
DG, FG, JG or LG 24V AC UK UVRLL24
110-127V AC UN UVRLN120
220-240V AC UR UVRLR240
208V AC UP UVRLP208
277V AC US UVRLS277
380-415V AC UT UVRLT415
440-480V AC UU UVRLU480
12V DC UA UVRPA12DC
24V DC UB UVRPB24DC
48V DC UC UVRPC48DC
60V DC UG UVRPG60DC
110-127V DC UD UVRPD125DC
220-250V DC UE UVRPE250DC
MG, NG or PG
110-127V AC UN UVRPN120
220-240V AC UR UVRPR240
208V AC UP UVRPP208
277V AC US UVRPS277
380-415V AC UT UVRPT415
440-480V AC UU UVRPU480

VL Technical Data
DG FG JG LG MG NG PG
Max rated continuous current 150 250 400 600 800 1200 1600
NEMA V AC 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
IEC V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Main conducting paths kV 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Auxiliary circuits kV 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Ambient temperature range °C -25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75
High ambient derating (thermal-mag.) 50°C 93% 93% 93% 93% 95% 95% 95%
60°C 86% 86% 86% 86% 86% 86% 80%
70°C 80% 80% 80% 80% 80% 80% 74%
Operating cycles 20,000 20,000 20,000 10,000 5,000 3,000 3,000
Max switching rate (per hour) 120 120 120 60 60 30 30
Power loss (at max. rated current)
Thermal-magnetic W 15 – 48 32 – 80 60 – 175 85 – 230 170 – 250 150 – 220 200 – 260
Electronic trip unit W 40 60 90 160 250 210 260
IEC 
Time constant t = 10 ms
1 current path 2 current paths 3 current paths
in series in series
Up to 250V DC 440V DC 600V DC — — — — — — —
NEMA
Time constant t = 8 ms
5
2 poles switching 1 current path
250V DC max. 30 30 30 30 42 42 42
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
3 poles switching 2 current paths in series
500V DC max. 18 25 35 35 65 65 65
Accessories
Auxiliary/ Alarm switch
Current rating (1 or 2 switches) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Current rating (3 or 4 same switch) A 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Shunt trip
Pick-up voltage V 0.7 – 1.1 0.7 – 1.1 0.7 – 1.1 0.7 – 1.1 0.7 – 1.1 0.7 – 1.1 0.7 – 1.1
Power consumption (short-time) at:
48 –60 V AC VA 158 – 200 158 – 200 158 – 200 158 – 200 380 – 480 380 – 480 380 – 480
110 – 127 V AC VA 136 – 158 136 – 158 136 – 158 136 – 158 302 – 353 302 – 353 302 – 353
208 – 277 V AC VA 274 – 350 274 – 350 274 – 350 274 – 350 330 – 439 330 – 439 330 – 439
380 – 600 V AC VA 158 – 237 158 – 237 158 – 237 158 – 237 243 – 384 243 – 384 243 – 384
24 V DC W 110 110 110 110 360 360 360
48 – 60 V DC W 110 – 172 110 – 172 110 – 172 110 – 172 512 – 820 512 – 820 512 – 820
110 –127 V DC W 220 – 254 220 – 254 220 – 254 220 – 254 302 – 353 302 – 353 302 – 353
220 – 250 V DC W 97 – 110 97 – 110 97 – 110 97 – 110 348 – 397 348 – 397 348 – 397
Max. operating time ms 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
 Consult Siemens for short circuit values.

 Review individual frame and type values.

VL Technical Data
DG FG JG LG MG NG PG
Undervoltage trip
Drop voltage (percentage) V 35% – 70% 35% – 70% 35% – 70% 35% – 70% 35% – 70% 35% – 70% 35% – 70%
Pick-up voltage (percentage) V 70% – 85% 70% – 85% 70% – 85% 70% – 85% 70% – 85% 70% – 85% 70% – 85%
Power consumption (continuous) at:
110 – 127 V AC VA 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.1 1.1 1.1
220 – 250 V AC VA 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.1 2.1 2.1
208 V AC VA 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2
277 V AC VA 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.6 1.6 1.6
380 – 415 V AC VA 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.0
440 – 480 V AC VA 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.3
500 – 525 V AC VA 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.9 2.9 2.9
Max. opening time ms 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Motorized operating mechanism
Motor with stored energy mechanism
(synchronizable) X X X X X — —
Motor Operator — X X
Max. switching rate (per hour) 120 120 120 60 60 30 30
Command duration ms 20 – 50 20 – 50 20 – 50 20 – 50 20 – 50 50 50
Closing time ms <100 <100 <100 <100 <100 <5,000 <5,000
Charging time s <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5
Break time s <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5
Power consumption VA/W
<100 <100 <100 <100 <250 <250 <250
Control voltages 24 V DC
5
42 – 48 V AC / DC
60 V AC / DC
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
110 - 127 V AC/ DC

220 - 250 V AC/ DC
Operating range: 85 – 110% of rated
control voltage

Technical Data
Note: The information provided on Table 1 – Temperature derating date for thermal-magnetic breakers
this and the next page is intended for
Ampere Rating at:
reference and recommendation only. Reference Ampere
Rating at 25° C 50°C 60° C
Because several variables can act on 40° C (104° F) (77° F) (122° F) (140° F) Siemens Breaker Frames
a circuit breaker’s performance at the 50 55 46 42
same time, the data below is based less 60 66 56 52
on controlled testing, than on experience 70 77 65 60
and engineering judgment. Contact 90 99 84 78 DG
Siemens for further information on 100 110 94 87
125 137 114 100
special conditions and treatment.
150 165 136 120
175 192 159 140 FG
High Ambient Temperatures 200 220 182 160
Because thermal-magnetic trip breakers 225 247 205 180
are temperature sensitive and calibrated 250 275 235 220
for a specific ambient of 40° C (104° 300 330 276 252 JG
F) (average enclosure temperature), 350 385 325 301
400 440 372 340
a higher ambient will cause the
500 550 468 435 LG
breaker to trip at lower current than 600 660 564 525
its nameplate rating, in other words, 700 770 658 613 MG
causing the breaker to “derate” (see 800 880 754 704
Table 1). Similarly, the current carrying 900 990 828 749
NG
capacity of a circuit conductor is based 1000 1100 900 825
upon a certain ambient temperature, a 1200 1320 1090 1000
1400 1540 1304 1148 PG
higher ambient will reduce its current
5
carrying capacity, causing it to “derate.” 1600 1760 1500 1320
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
Thus, with a fluctuating temperature,
a thermal-magnetic breaker will derate
nearly parallel with its connected
circuit conductors and maintain close
circuit protection. If the application
temperature exceeds 40° C (104° F)
and is known, either a breaker specially
calibrated for the higher ambient or one
oversized according to Table 1 may be
selected. In a case such as this, the
circuit conductors should be oversized
as well.
Siemens Electronic Trip Unit Breakers

are insensitive to temperature changes.
However, they do include circuitry
to protect the components from
abnormally high temperatures.
Altitude
Reduced air density at altitudes greater
than 6600 ft. (2000 meters) affects the
ability of a molded case circuit breaker
to transfer heat and interrupt faults.
Therefore, circuit breakers applied at
these altitudes should have interrupting,
insulation and continuous currents
derated as indicated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 – Altitude adjustment

Technical Data
Unusual Operating Conditions 400 Hz Systems
Circuit Breaker Derating Required Cable and Bus Sizing Application Recommendations
This table lists the maximum The cable and bus sizes to be utilized It is recommended that temperatures
continuous current carrying capacity at 400Hz are not based on standard be measured on the line and load
for Siemens breakers at 400Hz. Due to National Electric Codes tables for 60Hz terminals or T-connectors of the
the increased resistance of the copper application. Larger cross sections are center pole. These are usually the
sections resulting from the skin effect necessary at 400Hz. All bus bars hottest terminals with a balanced
produced by eddy currents at these specified are based upon mounting load. A maximum temperature of
frequencies, circuit breakers in many the bars in the vertical plane to allow 75°C (35°C over a maximum ambient
cases require derating. The thermal maximum air flow. All bus bars are of 40°C) would verify the particular
derating on these devices is based spaced at a minimum of 0.25 in. (6 application. Temperature profiles taken
upon 100%, three phase application in mm) apart. Mounting of bus bars in on these breakers can be correlated to
open air in a maximum of 40°C (104° F) the horizontal plane will necessitate ensure that the hottest points within
with 48 in. (1219 mm) of the specified additional drafting. Edgewise orientation the breaker are within the required
cable or bus at the line and load side. of the bus may change the maximum temperature limits.
Additional derating of not less than ratings indicated. If additional
20% will be required if the circuit information is required for other Interrupting Rating
breaker is to be utilized in an enclosure. connections of cable or bus, contact Circuit breakers used in 400 Hz
Further derating may be required if Siemens for information. systems are limited to a 5000 A
the enclosure ambient temperature interrupting rating. If higher ratings are
exceeds 40°C(104° F). required, consult Siemens.
5
Maximum continuous ampere rating 75°C (167F) Maximum continuous ampere rating 75°C (167F)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
at 40°C (104°F) Copper at 40°C (104°F) Copper

60HZ 400HZ cable per pole 60HZ 400HZ cable per pole
Breaker Enclosed after No of Breaker Enclosed after No of
type Open air Open air derating pieces Wire size type Open air Open air derating pieces Wire size
50 48 38 1 #8 400 300 240 2 #3/0
60 57 46 1 #6 LG 500 375 300 2 250 kcmil
70 63 50 1 #4 600 420 336 2 350 kcmil
80 72 58 1 #4 600 430 360 2 350 kcmil
DG 90 80 64 1 #3
MG 700 500 400 3 250 kcmil
100 90 72 1 #3
800 560 448 3 300 kcmil
110 95 75 1 #2
125 105 84 1 #1
MG 600 430 430 2 350 kcmil
150 125 100 1 #1/0 100% 700 500 500 3 250 kcmil
100 90 72 1 #3 Rated 800 560 560 3 300 kcmil
110 95 75 1 #2 800 560 448 3 300 kcmil
125 105 84 1 #1 900 600 480 3 350 kcmil
NG
FG
150 125 100 1 #1/0 1000 650 520 3 400 kcmil
175 140 112 1 #2/0 1200 780 624 4 350 kcmil
200 160 128 1 #3/0 900 600 600 3 350 kcmil
225 180 144 1 #4/0 NG
1000 650 650 3 400 kcmil
250 200 160 1 250 kcmil 100%
1200 780 780 4 350 kcmil
250 210 168 1 250 kcmil Rated
1200 780 624 4 400 kcmil
300 240 192 1 350 kcmil
JG
350 260 208 1 500 kcmil
1400 850 680 4 500 kcmil
400 300 240 2 #2/0 PG 1600 960 768 5 500 kcmil
JG 250 210 210 1 250 kcmil 1200 780 780 4 400 kcmil
100% 300 240 240 1 350 kcmil PG 1400 850 850 4 500 kcmil
Rated 350 260 260 1 500 kcmil 100%
400 300 300 2 #3/0 Rated 1600 960 960 5 500 kcmil
400 300 240 2 #3/0
LG 500 375 300 2 250 kcmil
600 420 336 2 350 kcmil
 The information provided on this page is intended for judgment.Contact Siemens for further information on  Calculated after derating to compensate for the heating
reference and recommendation only. Because several special conditions and treatment. of the copper conductor, caused by the skin effect
variables can act on a circuit breaker’s performance at  Additional derating may be required if the ambient generated by eddy currents produced at 400/415HZ.
the same time, the data above is based less on con- temperature is greater than 40°C (104°F).
trolled testing, than on experience and engineering

Series Connected Short Circuit Ratings General
The term “Series Connected Short This is permitted as long as the series No substitutions are permitted. All com-
Circuit Rating” refers to the application of combination has been tested and certi- binations shown have been tested and
series circuit breakers in a combination fied by CSA. are CSA Certified. This information is
that allows downstream breakers to have The tables on these pages list specific provided as a reference tool only.
lower individual interrupting ratings than main and branch breaker combinations
the available fault current. that may be used for the short circuit
interrupting ratings shown.
240V Series Ratings 240V Series Ratings (Continued)
Main Breaker Branch Breaker Main Breaker Branch Breaker
Series Series
Rating Max. Rating Max.
Type Type Poles Amps Volts Type Type Poles Amps Volts
Amps Amps
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
2 15-125 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
QP,BQ,BL QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
2 15-125 240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
3 15-100 240
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 1 15-30 120
70(1P) QE,BE,BLE
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 2 15-60 120/240
125(2P) QPPH (2P)
100(3P) QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
70 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
125
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240
100
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
QPP 2 125-200 120/240
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 EQ948# 2 125-200 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH
5
125(2P) QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240 225 1 15-70 120/240
100(3P) QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125 120/240
QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
2 15-125 240
QPH,BQH,BLH
QT 1 15-50 120/240 QT 1,2 15,20,40 120/240
70(1P)
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
2 15-125 120/240
1 15-30 120
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 QJH2 (2, 3P) QE,BE,BLE
22,000 2 15-60 120/240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
EQ967# QPF,BLF,SPF 2 15-60 120/240 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
125
(2P) 1 15-30 120 QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240
QE,BE,BLE
2 15-60 120/240 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120

22,000 EQ948# 2 125-200 120/240
QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240
QJH2 (3P) QP,BQ,BL 3 60-100 240
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
2 15-125 120/240 2 15-125 240
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
1 15-30 120 QRH2 (2, 3P) QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
EQ968# (2P) QE,BE,BLE 250
QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
2 15-60 120/240
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120
QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
200 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 QRH2 (3P) QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240
QNH,QNRH (2P) 1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL QP,BQ,BL
2 15-125 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 2 15-125 120/240
QJ2H (2, 3P)
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH
1 15-30 120 2 15-125 120/240
QE,BE,BLE 42,000 225
2 15-60 120/240 EQ967# 2 100-125 120/240
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120 QJH2 2 60-225 240
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 QP,BQ,BL 3 60-100 240
QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240 QPH 3 15-100 240
QJ2H (3P)
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 QJH2 3 60-225 240

240V Series Ratings (Continued) 240V Series Ratings (Continued)
Series Series
Amps Amps
QP,BQ,BL 1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
HQP,HBQ,HBL QPH 1 15-70 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
70
70(1P) BQH,BLH 1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH
QT 1 15-50 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
2 15-125 120/240 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
1 15-70 120/240 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
HQP,HBQ,HBL QPH
125 2 15-125 120/240 QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
125(2P)
1 15-70 120/240 QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240 QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
EQ967# 2 100-125 120/240 QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 BLHF 1 15-30 120
2 15-100 120/240 ED4,ED6 (2, 3P) 1 15-30 120
QP,BQ,BL QEH,BLEH
2 15-100 240 2 15-60 120/240
3 15-100 240 125 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
HQP,HBQ,HBL 1 15-70 120/240 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
100
100(3P) QPH 2 15-100 120/240 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
3 15-100 240 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 BAFH 1 15-20 120
BQH,BLH 2 15-100 120/240 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
3 15-100 240 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
5
HQP,HBQ,HBL QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120

125
125(2P) QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240 1 15-100 120
100
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
100(3P) ED2
QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240 2 15-100 240
QEH,BLEH 2 15-60 120/240 QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 QPH 3 15-100 240
ED4,ED6 (3P)
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120 BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120 ED2 3 15-100 240
BLHF 1 15-30 120 NDGA,NDGB 1 15-70 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH
QEH,BLEH 1 15-30 120 (2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240
65,000 65,000 150
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120 NDGA,NDGB
HQP,HBQ,HBL QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
70 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120 (3P)
70(1P)
125
125(2P) QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
100 QP,BQ,BL
100(3P) 2 15-125 120/240
QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
BAFH 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 2 15-125 120/240
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120 QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
QP,BQ,BL 1 15-70 120 1 15-30 120
QE,BE,BLE
QPH 1 15-70 120 2 15-60 120/240
BQH,BLH 1 15-70 120 QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
QT 1 15-50 120 QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 BLHF 1 15-30 120
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120 200 HQN,HQNR (2P) 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120 2 15-60 120/240
BLHF 1 15-30 120 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH 1 15-30 120 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
100 ED4 (1P) QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 BAFH 1 15-20 120
QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
BAFH 1 15-20 120 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 EQ967# 2 100-125 120/240
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 EQ968# 2 150-200 120/240
ED2 1 15-100 120 1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
1 15-70 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
225 HQPP (2P)
125 ED4,ED6 (2, 3P) QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
2 15-125 240 2 15-125 120/240

Series Series
Amps Amps
1 15-70 120/240 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240 QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 1 15-30 120
QPHF,BLHF
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 2 15-60 120/240
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH
QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240 2 15-60 120/240
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
225 HQJ2 (3P)
BLHF 1 15-30 120 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
1 15-30 120 QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240
QEH,BLEH
2 15-60 120/240 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
HQPP (2P) QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120 QAFH,BAFH 2 15-20 120/240
QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120 BAFH 1 15-20 120
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
BAFH 1 15-20 120 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125 120/240
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 2 15-125 240
EQ967# 2 100-125 120/240 1 15-70 120
5
QPP 2 125-200 120/240 QPH,BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240
QPPH 2 125-200 120/240 2 15-125 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
EQ968# 2 150-200 120/240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
2 15-125 120/240
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
1 15-70 120/240
QPH QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
2 15-125 120/240
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240
2 15-125 120/240
65,000 225 65,000 BLHF 1 15-30 120
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 HQR2 (2, 3P)
1 15-30 120
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 QEH,BLEH
2 15-60 120/240
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240
QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240
BLHF 1 15-30 120
QAFH,BAFH 2 15-20 120/240
EQ978# (2P) 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH 250 BAFH 1 15-20 120
2 15-60 120/240
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
BAFH 1 15-20 120
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
HQR2 (3P) QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
NFGA,NFGB 1 15-70 120/240
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 QPH,BQH,BLH
(2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240
EQ967# 2 100-125 120/240
NFGA,NFGB
QPP 2 125-200 120/240 QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
(3P)
QPPH 2 125-200 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
EQ968# 2 150-200 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
3 15-100 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH
1 15-70 120/240 (2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240
HQJ2 (3P)
QPH,BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 QPPH 2 125-225 120/240
3 15-100 240 QJ2 2 60-225 240
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 QJH2 2 60-225 240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 QJ2H 2 60-225 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240 QJH2 2 60-225 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A
1 15-70 120/240 QJ2H 2 60-225 240
QP,BQ,BL (2, 3P)
2 15-125 120/240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
1 15-70 120/240 QPH 3 15-100 240
QPH
2 15-125 120/240 BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A JD6-A,JXD6-A
1 15-70 120/240 QJH2 3 60-225 240
(2, 3P) BQH,BLH (3P)
2 15-125 120/240 QJ2H 3 60-225 240
QPPH 2 125-225 120/240 QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
QJ2 2 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
QJH2 2 60-225 240 2 15-125 120/240
QJ2H 2 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240
JD6,JXD6 (2, BQH,BLH
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240 2 15-125 120/240
250 3P)
QPH 3 15-100 240 QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240
QJ2 3 60-225 240 QJH2 2 60-225 240
QJH2 3 60-225 240 QPH 3 15-100 240
QJ2H 3 60-225 240 BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A JD6,JXD6 (3P)
QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240 QJH2 3 60-225 240
(3P)
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240 QJ2H 3 60-225 240
QPH 3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 QPH 2 15-125 120/240
400
QJ2 3 60-225 240 3 15-100 240
5
QJH2 3 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240

SJD6-A (3P)
QJ2H 3 60-225 240 BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240
3 15-100 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
1 15-70 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240 2 100-250 240
NJGA,NJJA QR2,QRH2
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 3 100-250 240
(2, 3P)
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240 QPH 2 15-125 120/240
NJGA,NJJA QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 3 15-100 240
SJD6 (3P)
(3P) QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240 1 15-70 120/240
65,000 1 15-70 120/240 65,000 BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240
QPH
2 15-125 120/240 3 15-100 240
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH QPH
2 15-125 120/240 HJD6-A (2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240
JXD2-A (2, 3P) QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 HJD6-A (3P) QPH 3 15-100 240
QJH2 2 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240
HJXD6-A (2, 3P) QPH
QJ2H 2 60-225 240 2 15-125 120/240
QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240 QPH 3 15-100 240
QPH 3 15-100 240 HJXD6-A (3P) QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 QPH 3 15-100 240
JXD2-A (3P)
QJH2 3 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH
400 QJ2H 3 60-225 240 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
QPH
2 15-125 120/240 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
BQH,BLH NLGA (2, 3P)
2 15-125 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
JXD2 (2, 3P) QPH,BQH,BLH
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
QJH2 2 60-225 240 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240
QJ2H 2 60-225 240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240 600 QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
NLGA (3P)
QPH 3 15-100 240 QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
JXD2 (3P) BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
QJH2 3 60-225 240 2 15-125 120/240
QJ2H 3 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH
1 15-70 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
QPH
2 15-125 120/240 LD6-A (2, 3P) QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 1 15-70 120/240 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240
BQH,BLH
(2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240 QJH2 2 60-225 240
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 QJ2H 2 60-225 240
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240

Series Series
Rating Max. Rating Max. Type
Type Type Poles Amps Volts Type Poles Amps Volts
Amps Amps
QPH 3 15-100 240 HLD6 (3P) QPH 3 15-100 240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120/240
LD6-A (3P) QPH
QJH2 3 60-225 240 HLXD6-A (2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240
QJ2H 3 60-225 240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH HLXD6 (2, 3P) QPH
2 15-125 120/240 600 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QPH 3 15-100 240
BQH,BLH HLXD6-A (3P)
2 15-125 120/240 QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
LD6 (2, 3P)
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
HLXD6 (2, 3P) QPH
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
QJH2 2 60-225 240 HLXD6 (3P) QPH 3 15-100 240
QJ2H 2 60-225 240 LMD6,LMXD6
QPH,BQH,BLH 1 15-70 120/240
QPH 3 15-100 240 (2, 3P)
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 QPH,BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240
LD6 (3P) LMD6,LMXD6
QJH2 3 60-225 240 QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
(3P)
QJ2H 3 60-225 240
HLMD6,HLMXD6 1 15-70 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QPH,BQH,BLH
QPH (2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240
2 15-125 120/240
HLMD6,HLMXD6
1 15-70 120/240 QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
BQH,BLH (3P)
2 15-125 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
LXD6-A (2, 3P) QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 QPH,BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 NMG,HMG
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
(2, 3P)
5
QJH2 2 60-225 240 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240
QJ2H 2 60-225 240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
QPH 3 15-100 240 NMG,HMG (3P)
QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120/240
QJH2 3 60-225 240 QPH
2 15-125 120/240
QJ2H 3 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240
LXD6-A (3P) QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240 MD6,MXD6 BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240
(2, 3P)
1 15-70 120/240 800 QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
QPH
65,000 600 2 15-125 120/240 65,000 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240 MD6,MXD6 (3P) QPH 3 15-100 240
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
LXD6 (2, 3P)
QJH2 2 60-225 240 1 15-70 120/240
QJ2H 2 60-225 240 QPH 2 15-125 120/240
QPH 3 15-100 240 3 15-100 240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120/240
LXD6 (3P) SMD6 (3P)
QJH2 3 60-225 240 BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240
QJ2H 3 60-225 240 3 15-100 240
1 15-70 120/240 2 100-250 240
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 QR2,QRH2
3 100-250 240
3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120/240
HMD6,HMXD6
1 15-70 120/240 QPH
(2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240
SLD6-A (3P)
BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
3 15-100 240 HMD6,HMXD6
QPH 3 15-100 240
2 100-250 240 (3P)
QR2,QRH2
3 100-250 240 QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
3 15-100 240 NNG,HNG (2, 3P) QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
SLD6 (3P)
1 15-70 120/240 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240
BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240
3 15-100 240 QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
NNG,HNG (3P)
1 15-70 120/240 1200 QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240
QPH
HLD6-A (2, 3P) 2 15-125 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240 2 15-125 120/240
QPH 3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120/240
HLD6-A (3P) ND6,NXD6 (2, 3P) BQH,BLH
QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240
HLD6 (2, 3P) QPH
2 15-125 120/240 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240

Series Series
Rating Max. Type Rating Max. Type
Type Poles Amps Volts Type Poles Amps Volts
Amps Amps
ND6,NXD6 (2, 3P) QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240 100 HED4 (1P) ED4 1 15-100 120
QPH 3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120
QP,BQ,BL
ND6,NXD6 (3P) BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 2 15-125 120/240
QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240 1 15-70 120
QPH
1 15-70 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 1 15-70 120
NGB,HGB,LGB BQH,BLH
3 15-100 240 2 15-125 120/240
(2, 3P)
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120
SND6 (3P) HQP
1200 BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120
HBQ,HBL
2 100-250 240 2 15-125 120/240
QR2,QRH2
3 100-250 240 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240
HND6,HNXD6 QPH
2 15-125 120/240 QPH 3 15-100 240
(2, 3P)
QR2,QRH2 2 100-250 240 NGB,HGB,LGB
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
(3P)
HND6,HNXD6 QPH 3 15-100 240 HQP 3 15-100 240
(3P) QR2,QRH2 3 100-250 240 HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240
1 15-70 120/240 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
QPH,BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
3 15-100 240 BLHF 1 15-30 120
NPG,HPG (3P) QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
5
2 100-250 240 HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 120

QR2,QRH2
3 100-250 240 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 NGB,HGB,LGB
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

(1, 2, 3P)
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 BAFH 1 15-20 120
3 15-100 240 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120
PD6,PXD6 (3P)
3 15-100 240 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
65,000
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 100,000 HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120
1600 125
2 100-250 240 1 15-70 120
QR2,QRH2 QP,BQ,BL
3 100-250 240 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 QPH
2 15-125 120/240
3 15-100 240 1 15-70 120
1 15-70 120/240 BQH,BLH
SPD6 (3P) 2 15-125 120/240
BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 1 15-70 120
3 15-100 240 HQP
2 15-125 120/240
2 100-250 240 1 15-70 120
QR2,QRH2 HBQ,HBL
3 100-250 240 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-50 120
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 QT
1,2 15-50 120/240
HPD6,HPXD6 (3P) 3 15-100 240
2 100-250 240 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
QR2,QRH2 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
3 100-250 240
1 15-70 120/240 HED4,HED6 QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
(2, 3P)
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
3 15-100 240 1 15-30 120
QPHF,BQHF
1 15-70 120/240 2 15-60 120/240
BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 BLHF 1 15-30 120
RD6,RXD6 (3P)
3 15-100 240 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH
QN,QNH 2 150-200 120/240 2 15-60 120/240
2000 QNR,QNRH 2 150-200 120/240 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
2 100-250 240 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
QR2,QRH2
3 100-250 240 HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 120
1 15-70 120/240 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
QPH 2 15-125 120/240 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 240
HRD6,HRXD6 (3P) 3 15-100 240 BAFH 1 15-20 120
2 100-250 240 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QR2,QRH2
3 100-250 240 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 240
100,000 100 HED4 (1P) ED2 1 15-100 120 HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
HQP
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 2 15-125 120/240
HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
HED4,HED6 HBQ,HBL
1 15-100 120 2 15-125 120/240
(2, 3P) ED2
2 15-100 240 QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
ED4 1 15-100 120 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
125
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240 QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
QPH 3 15-100 240 QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 1 15-30 120
QPHF,BQHF
HED4,HED6 (3P) HQP 3 15-100 240 2 15-60 120/240
HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240 BLHF 1 15-30 120
ED2 3 15-100 240 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 2 15-60 120/240
1 15-100 240 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
ED4,ED6
HDGA (2, 3P) 2 15-125 240 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
EQ988# (2P)
150 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 120
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
HDGA (3P)
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 BAFH 1 15-20 120
QP,BQ,BL
2 15-125 120/240 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
QPH
5
2 15-125 120/240 HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
1 15-70 120/240 HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120
HQP
2 15-125 120/240 QPP 2 125-225 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 EQ948# 2 125-225 120/240
HBQ,HBL
2 15-125 120/240 QPPH 2 125-225 120/240
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 EQ968# 2 125-225 120/240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 HQPP 2 125-225 120/240
100,000 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 100,000 225 EQ978# 2 125-225 120/240
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120 1 15-25 120/240
QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240 1 35-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120 2 15-25 120/240
QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240 2 35-125 120/240
BLHF 1 15-30 120 1 15-70 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH
1 15-30 120 2 15-125 120/240
HQPPH (2P) QEH,BLEH
2 15-60 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
HQP,HBQ,HBL
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120 2 15-125 120/240
QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120 1 15-50 120/240
225 QT
HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 120 1 15-50 120/240
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
BAFH 1 15-20 120 QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120 QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120 HQJ2H (2, 3P) QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 BLHF 1 15-30 120
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH
HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120 2 15-60 120/240
QPP 2 125-225 120/240 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
EQ948# 2 125-225 120/240 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120
QPPH 2 125-225 120/240 HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 120
EQ968# 2 125-225 120/240 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
HQPP 2 125-225 120/240 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
EQ978# 2 125-225 120/240 BAFH 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
QP,BQ,BL
2 15-125 120/240 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120
EQ988# (2P) QPH
2 15-125 120/240 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
1 15-70 120/240 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240 HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120

Series Series
Amps Amps
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
225 HQJ2H (3P) QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
HFGB (3P)
HQP,HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
1 15-70 120/240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240
QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
2 15-125 240 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-70 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
QPH,BQH,BLH 2 15-125 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
2 15-125 240 1 15-70 120/240
BQH,BLH
1 15-70 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
HQP,HBQ,HBL 2 15-125 240 1 15-70 120/240
HQP
2 15-125 240 2 15-125 120/240
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
HBQ,HBL
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 2 15-125 120/240
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120 QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240 QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
BLHF 1 15-30 120 QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
HQR2H (2, 3P)
1 15-30 120 QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240
QEH,BLEH
2 15-60 120/240 BLHF 1 15-30 120
5
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120 QEH,BLEH 1 15-30 120

QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120 QEH,BLEH 2 15-60 120/240
HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 120 QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30 120
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30 120

HFD6,HFXD6
QAF,BAF 2 15-20 120/240 HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 120
(2, 3P)
QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
QAFH,BAFH 2 15-20 120/240 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
BAFH 1 15-20 120 BAFH 1 15-20 120
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
100,000 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120 100,000 250 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120 HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120
250
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120 HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 QPP 2 125-225 120/240
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240 QPPH 2 125-225 120/240
QPH,BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 HQPP 2 125-225 120/240
HQR2H (3P)
HQP,HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240 QJ2 2 60-225 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 QJH2 2 60-225 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 QJ2H 2 60-225 240
1 15-100 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240
ED4,ED6
2 15-125 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
HFGA (2, 3P) NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 QPH 3 15-100 240
HFGA (3P)
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 HQP 3 15-100 240
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 QJ2 3 60-225 240
1 15-100 240 HFD6,HFXD6 QJH2 3 60-225 240
ED4,ED6
2 15-125 240 (3P) QJ2H 3 60-225 240
HFGB (2, 3P) NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
HFGB (3P)
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
1 15-100 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
ED4,ED6 HJD6,HJXD6
2 15-125 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
(2, 3P)
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 JXD2 2 200-400 240
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240 JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
HJGA (2, 3P)
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
HJD6,HJXD6
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240
(3P)
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 JXD2 3 200-400 240
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 SJD6 3 200-400 240
HJGA (3P) FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 2 100-250 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 3 100-250 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 2 15-125 240
ED4,ED6
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240 3 15-125 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 2 50-150 240
NDGA,NDGB
ED4 1 15-100 120 3 50-150 240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 2 70-250 240
NFGA,NFGB
5
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 3 70-250 240
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240 2 70-250 240
HJD6-A (2, 3P) SHJD6-A (3P) FD6-A,FXD6-A
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240 3 70-250 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240 2 70-250 240
400 FD6,FXD6
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 3 70-250 240
JXD2-A 2 200-400 240 2 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240 3 200-400 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 2 200-400 240
JXD2-A
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 3 200-400 240
100,000 400 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 100,000 2 200-400 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 3 200-400 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 SJD6-A 3 200-400 240
HJD6-A (3P)
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 2 15-125 240
ED4,ED6
JXD2-A 3 200-400 240 3 15-125 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 2 50-150 240
NDGA,NDGB
SJD6-A 3 200-400 240 3 50-150 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 2 70-250 240
NFGA,NFGB
ED4 1 15-100 120 3 70-250 240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 2 70-250 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 3 70-250 240
SHJD6 (3P)
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240 2 70-250 240
HJXD6-A (2, 3P) FD6,FXD6
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240 3 70-250 240
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240 2 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 3 200-400 240
JXD2-A 2 200-400 240 2 200-400 240
JXD2
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240 3 200-400 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 2 200-400 240
JD6,JXD6
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 3 200-400 240
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 SJD6 3 200-400 240
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 1 15-100 240
HJXD6-A (3P) ED4,ED6
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 2 15-125 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
JXD2-A 3 200-400 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 600 HLGA (2, 3P) FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
SJD6-A 3 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
ED4 1 15-100 120 2 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA
HJD6,HJXD6 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 2 200-400 240
(2, 3P) NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240 JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240
HLGA (2, 3P) LD6,LD6-A 2 200-600 240 SJD6-A 3 200-400 240
LXD6-A,LXD6 2 450-600 240 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240
HLD6-A (3P)
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 LD6-A 3 200-600 240
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 LXD6-A 3 450-600 240
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 SLD6-A 3 300-600 240
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
HLGA (3P) 3 200-400 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA
3 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
HLD6 (2, 3P)
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240 JXD2 2 200-400 240
LD6,LD6-A 3 200-600 240 JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
LXD6-A,LXD6 3 450-600 240 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 LD6 2 200-600 240
ED4,ED6 1 15-100 240 LXD6 2 450-600 240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
5
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240

HLGB (2, 3P)
2 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA
2 200-400 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
HLD6 (3P) JXD2 3 200-400 240

JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240 JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240 SJD6 3 200-400 240
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240
LD6,LD6-A 2 200-600 240 LD6 3 200-600 240
LXD6-A,LXD6 2 450-600 240 LXD6 3 450-600 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240 SLD6 3 300-600 240
100,000 600 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 100,000 600 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
HLGB (3P) 3 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA
3 200-400 240 HLXD6-A (2, 3P) FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240 JXD2-A 2 200-400 240
LD6,LD6-A 3 200-600 240 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240
LXD6-A,LXD6 3 450-600 240 LD6-A 2 200-600 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 LXD6-A 2 450-600 240
ED4 1 15-100 120 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
HLD6-A (2, 3P) FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 HLXD6-A (3P) NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
JXD2 2 200-400 240 JXD2-A 3 200-400 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240 SJD6-A 3 200-400 240
LD6-A 2 200-600 240 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240
LXD6-A 2 450-600 240 LD6-A 3 200-600 240
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 LXD6-A 3 450-600 240
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
HLD6-A (3P) FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
HLXD6 (2, 3P)
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
JXD2-A 3 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 2 400-600 240
NLGA,NLGB
JXD2 2 200-400 240 3 400-600 240
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240 2 200-600 240
HLXD6 (2, 3P) LD6
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240 600 SHLD6 (3P) 3 200-600 240
LD6 2 200-600 240 2 450-600 240
LXD6
LXD6 2 450-600 240 3 450-600 240
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 SLD6 3 300-600 240
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240 1 15-100 240
ED4,ED6
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240 2 15-125 240
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
HLXD6 (3P) JXD2 3 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
SJD6 3 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
HMG (2, 3P)
LD6 3 200-600 240 JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
LXD6 3 450-600 240 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240
SLD6 3 300-600 240 LD6,LD6-A 2 200-600 240
2 100-250 240 LXD6-A,LXD6 2 450-600 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2
3 100-250 240 LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 240
ED4 1 15-100 120 NMG 2 600-800 240
5
2 15-125 240 MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 240
ED4,ED6
3 15-125 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
2 50-150 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
NDGA,NDGB
3 50-150 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
2 70-250 240 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
NFGA,NFGB
3 70-250 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
2 70-250 240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A
3 70-250 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
2 70-250 240 HMG (3P) JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240
100,000 600 FD6,FXD6
3 70-250 240 100,000 JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240
SHLD6-A (3P) NJGA,NJJA
3 200-400 240 LD6,LD6-A 3 200-600 240
2 200-400 240 LXD6-A,LXD6 3 450-600 240
JXD2-A 800
3 200-400 240 LMD6,LMXD6 3 600-800 240
2 200-400 240 NMG 3 600-800 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A
3 200-400 240 MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 240
SJD6-A 3 200-400 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240
2 400-600 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
NLGA,NLGB
3 400-600 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
2 200-600 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
3 200-600 240
LD6-A FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
2 450-600 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
3 450-600 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240 JXD2-A 2 200-400 240
ED4 1 15-100 120 HMD6,HMXD6
JXD2 2 200-400 240
(2, 3P)
2 15-125 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240
ED4,ED6
3 15-125 240 JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
2 50-150 240 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240
NDGA,NDGB
3 50-150 240 LD6-A 2 200-600 240
2 70-250 240 LD6 2 200-600 240
NFGA,NFGB
3 70-250 240 LXD6-A 2 450-600 240
2 70-250 240 LXD6 2 450-600 240
SHLD6 (3P) FD6,FXD6
3 70-250 240 NMG 2 500-800 240
2 200-400 240 MD6,MXD6 2 500-800 240
NJGA,NJJA
3 200-400 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240
2 200-400 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
JXD2
3 200-400 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
HMD6,HMXD6
2 200-400 240 (3P) NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
JD6,JXD6
3 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
SJD6 3 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
JXD2-A 3 200-400 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
JXD2 3 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
SJD6-A 3 200-400 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240
SJD6 3 200-400 240 JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
HNG (2, 3P)
NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240
HMD6,HMXD6
LD6-A 3 200-600 240 LD6,LD6-A 2 200-600 240
(3P)
LD6 3 200-600 240 LXD6-A,LXD6 2 450-600 240
LXD6-A 3 450-600 240 LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 240
LXD6 3 450-600 240 NMG 2 600-800 240
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240 NNG 2 800-1200 240
SLD6 3 300-600 240 ND6,NXD6 2 600-1200 240
NMG 3 500-800 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240
MD6,MXD6 3 500-800 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
SMD6 3 500-800 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
2 100-250 240 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2
3 100-250 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
ED4 1 15-100 120 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240
2 15-125 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
ED4,ED6
3 15-125 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240
HNG (3P)
5
2 50-150 240 JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240

NDGA,NDGB
3 50-150 240 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
2 70-250 240 LD6,LD6-A 3 200-600 240

NFGA,NFGB
3 70-250 240 LXD6-A,LXD6 3 450-600 240
2 70-250 240 LMD6,LMXD6 3 600-800 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A
3 70-250 240 NMG 3 600-800 240
2 70-250 240 NNG 3 800-1200 240
FD6,FXD6
3 70-250 240 1200 ND6,NXD6 3 600-1200 240
800
2 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240
100,000 3 200-400 240 100,000
2 200-400 240 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 240
JXD2-A
3 200-400 240 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 240
2 200-400 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 240
JXD2
3 200-400 240 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 240
2 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A
3 200-400 240 JXD2-A 2 200-400 240
SHMD6 (3P) 2 200-400 240 JXD2 2 200-400 240
JD6,JXD6
3 200-400 240 HND6,HNXD6 JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240
SJD6-A 3 200-400 240 (2, 3P) JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
SJD6 3 200-400 240 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 240
2 400-600 240 LD6-A 2 200-600 240
NLGA,NLGB
3 400-600 240 LD6 2 200-600 240
2 200-600 240 LXD6-A 2 450-600 240
LD6-A
3 200-600 240 LXD6 2 450-600 240
2 200-600 240 NMG 2 500-800 240
LD6
3 200-600 240 MD6,MXD6 2 500-800 240
2 450-600 240 NNG 2 800-1200 240
LXD6-A
3 450-600 240 ND6,NXD6 2 500-1200 240
2 450-600 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250 240
LXD6
3 450-600 240 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 240
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 240
SLD6 3 300-600 240 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 240
HND6,HNXD6
NMG 2 500-800 240 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 240
(3P)
NMG 3 500-800 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
MD6,MXD6 2 500-800 240 JXD2-A 3 200-400 240
MD6,MXD6 3 500-800 240 JXD2 3 200-400 240
SMD6 2 500-800 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240
SMD6 3 500-800 240 JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 240 HND6,HNXD6 SJD6-A 3 200-400 240
1200
1200 HNG (2, 3P) 1 15-100 240 (3P) SJD6 3 200-400 240
ED4,ED6
2 15-125 240 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
LD6-A 3 200-600 240 2 50-150 240
NDGA,NDGB
LD6 3 200-600 240 3 50-150 240
LXD6-A 3 450-600 240 2 70-250 240
NFGA,NFGB
LXD6 3 450-600 240 3 70-250 240
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240 2 70-250 240
FD6-A,FXD6-A
HND6,HNXD6 SLD6 3 300-600 240 3 70-250 240
(3P) NMG 3 500-800 240 2 70-250 240
FD6,FXD6
MD6,MXD6 3 500-800 240 3 70-250 240
SMD6 3 500-800 240 2 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA
NNG 3 800-1200 240 3 200-400 240
ND6,NXD6 3 500-1200 240 2 200-400 240
SND6 3 500-1200 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A
3 200-400 240
2 100-250 240 2 200-400 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 JD6,JXD6
3 100-250 240 3 200-400 240
ED4 1 15-100 240 2 400-600 240
2 15-125 240 NLGA,NLGB
ED4,ED6 3 400-600 240
3 15-125 240 2 200-600 240
2 50-150 240 HPG (3P) LD6,LD6-A
NDGA,NDGB 3 200-600 240
3 50-150 240 2 450-600 240
2 70-250 240 LXD6-A,LXD6
NFGA,NFGB 3 450-600 240
3 70-250 240 2 600-800 240
2 70-250 240 LMD6,LMXD6
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 600-800 240
3 70-250 240
5
2 600-800 240
2 70-250 240 NMG
FD6,FXD6 3 600-800 240
3 70-250 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
2 400-800 240
2 200-400 240 MD6,MXD6
NJGA,NJJA 3 400-800 240
3 200-400 240
2 800-1200 240
2 200-400 240 NNG
JXD2-A 3 800-1200 240
3 200-400 240
2 600-1200 240
1200 2 200-400 240 ND6,NXD6
JXD2 3 600-1200 240
3 200-400 240
2 1200-1600 240
2 200-400 240 NPG
100,000 JD6-A,JXD6-A 100,000 1600 3 1200-1600 240
3 200-400 240
2 1200-1600 240
2 200-400 240 PD6,PXD6
JD6,JXD6 3 1200-1600 240
3 200-400 240
2 100-250 240
SHND6 (3P) SJD6-A 3 200-400 240 QR2,QRH2,HQR2
3 100-250 240
SJD6 3 200-400 240
ED4 1 15-100 120
2 400-600 240
NLGA,NLGB 2 15-125 240
3 400-600 240 ED4,ED6
3 15-125 240
2 200-600 240
LD6-A 2 50-150 240
3 200-600 240 NDGA,NDGB
3 50-150 240
2 200-600 240
LD6 2 70-250 240
3 200-600 240 NFGA,NFGB
3 70-250 240
2 450-600 240
LXD6-A 2 70-250 240
3 450-600 240 FXD6-A,FD6-A
3 70-250 240
2 450-600 240
LXD6 2 70-250 240
3 450-600 240 FXD6,FD6
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240 3 70-250 240
SLD6 3 200-600 240 2 200-400 240

HPD6,HPXD6 NJGA,NJJA
2 500-800 240 3 200-400 240
(3P)
NMG 2 200-400 240
3 500-800 240 JXD2-A
2 500-800 240 3 200-400 240
MD6,MXD6 2 200-400 240
3 500-800 240 JXD2
SMD6 3 500-800 240 3 200-400 240
2 800-1200 240 2 200-400 240
NNG JXD6-A,JD6-A
3 800-1200 240 3 200-400 240
2 500-1200 240 2 200-400 240
ND6,NXD6 JXD6,JD6
3 500-1200 240 3 200-400 240
SND6 3 500-1200 240 SJD6-A 3 200-400 240
2 100-250 240 SJD6 3 200-400 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2
3 100-250 240 2 400-600 240
NLGA,NLGB
1600 HPG (3P) 1 15-100 240 3 400-600 240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 2 200-600 240
LD6-A
3 15-125 240 3 200-600 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
2 200-600 240 SMD6 3 500-800 240
LD6
3 200-600 240 2 800-1200 240
NNG
2 450-600 240 3 800-1200 240
LXD6-A
3 450-600 240 2 500-1200 240
ND6,NXD6
2 450-600 240 3 500-1200 240
LXD6
3 450-600 240 1600 SHPD6 (3P) SND6 3 500-1200 240
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240 2 1200-1600 240
NPG
SLD6 3 300-600 240 3 1200-1600 240
2 600-800 240 2 1200-1600 240
NMG PD6,PXD6
3 600-800 240 3 1200-1600 240
2 500-800 240 SPD6 3 1400-1600 240
HPD6,HPXD6 MD6,MXD6
3 500-800 240 2 100-250 240
(3P) QR2,QRH2,HQR2
SMD6 3 500-800 240 3 100-250 240
2 800-1200 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
NNG 2 15-125 240
3 800-1200 240 ED4,ED6
2 500-1200 240 3 15-125 240
ND6,NXD6 2 50-150 240
3 500-1200 240 NDGA,NDGB
SND6 3 500-1200 240 3 50-150 240
2 1200-1600 240 2 70-250 240
NPG NFGA,NFGB
3 1200-1600 240 3 70-250 240
2 70-250 240
2 1200-1600 240 FXD6-A,FD6-A
PD6,PXD6 3 70-250 240
3 1200-1600 240
2 70-250 240
SPD6 3 1400-1600 240
5
FXD6,FD6
3 70-250 240
2 100-250 240
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 200-400 240
3 100-250 240 NJGA,NJJA
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
3 200-400 240
ED4 1 15-100 120
2 200-400 240
2 15-125 240 JXD2-A
ED4,ED6 3 200-400 240
3 15-125 240
2 200-400 240
2 50-150 240 JXD2
NDGA,NDGB 3 200-400 240
3 50-150 240
2 200-400 240
2 70-250 240 JXD6-A,JD6-A
NFGA,NFGB 3 200-400 240
3 70-250 240
100,000 1600 100,000 2 200-400 240
2 70-250 240 JXD6,JD6
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 200-400 240
3 70-250 240
SJD6-A 3 200-400 240
2 70-250 240
FXD6,FD6 SJD6 3 200-400 240
3 70-250 240
2 400-600 240
2 200-400 240 NLGA,NLGB
NJGA,NJJA HRD6,HRXD6 3 400-600 240
3 200-400 240 2000
(3P) 2 200-600 240
2 200-400 240 LD6-A
JXD2-A 3 200-600 240
3 200-400 240
2 200-600 240
2 200-400 240 LD6
JXD2 3 200-600 240
3 200-400 240
2 450-600 240
2 200-400 240 LXD6-A
JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 450-600 240
SHPD6 (3P) 3 200-400 240
2 450-600 240
2 200-400 240 LXD6
JXD6,JD6 3 450-600 240
3 200-400 240
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240
SJD6-A 3 200-400 240 SLD6 3 300-600 240
SJD6 3 200-400 240 2 600-800 240
2 400-600 240 NMG
NLGA,NLGB 3 600-800 240
3 400-600 240 2 500-800 240
2 200-600 240 MD6,MXD6
LD6-A 3 500-800 240
3 200-600 240 SMD6 3 500-800 240
2 200-600 240 2 800-1200 240
LD6 NNG
3 200-600 240 3 800-1200 240
2 450-600 240 2 500-1200 240
LXD6-A ND6,NXD6
3 450-600 240 3 500-1200 240
2 450-600 240 SND6 3 500-1200 240
LXD6
3 450-600 240 2 1200-1600 240
NPG
SLD6-A 3 300-600 240 3 1200-1600 240
SLD6 3 300-600 240 2 1200-1600 240
PD6,PXD6
2 600-800 240 3 1200-1600 240
NMG
3 600-800 240 SPD6 3 1400-1600 240
2 500-800 240 2 1600-2000 240
MD6,MXD6 RD6,RXD6
3 500-800 240 3 1600-2000 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
1 15-70 120/240 NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240
QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125 120/240 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
2 15-125 240 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
LFGA (3P)
1 15-70 120/240 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
QPH
2 15-125 120/240 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
1 15-70 120/240 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240
BQH,BLH
2 15-125 120/240 1 15-125 120
NGB,HGB,LGB
1 15-70 120/240 2 15-125 240
HQP
2 15-125 120/240 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240
LFGB (2, 3P)
1 15-70 120/240 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240
HBQ,HBL
2 15-125 120/240 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
QT 1 15-50 120/240 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240
QT 1,2 15-50 120/240 NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
LFGB (3P)
QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QP,BQ,BL
CED6 (2, 3P) QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120 2 15-125 120/240
QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240 1 15-70 120/240
QPH
BLHF 1 15-30 120 2 15-125 120/240
1 15-30 120 1 15-70 120/240
125 QEH,BLEH BQH,BLH
2 15-60 120/240 2 15-125 120/240
5
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
HQP
QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120 2 15-125 120/240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
BAFH 1 15-20 120 1 15-70 120/240
HBQ,HBL
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120 2 15-125 120/240
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120 QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240
HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120 QPH 3 15-100 240
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120 BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120 HQP 3 15-100 240
HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120 HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240
200,000 ED4 1 15-100 120 200,000 250 QT 1,2 15-50 120/240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30 120
HED4 1 15-100 120 QPF,BLF 2 15-60 120/240
HED4,HED6 2 15-125 240 QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30 120
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240 QE,BLE 2 15-60 120/240
QPH 3 15-100 240 QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30 120
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60 120/240
CED6 (3P) HQP 3 15-100 240 BLHF 1 15-30 120
HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240 CFD6(-A) (2, 3P) 1 15-30 120
QEH,BLEH
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 2 15-60 120/240
HED4,HED6 3 15-125 240 QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 120
1 15-125 120 QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20 120
NGB,HGB,LGB
2 15-125 240 BAFH 1 15-20 120
LDGA (2, 3P)
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20 120
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20 120
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240 HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20 120
LDGA (3P) NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20 120
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 120
150
1 15-125 120 HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20 120
NGB,HGB,LGB
2 15-125 240 QPP 2 125-225 120/240
LDGB (2, 3P)
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 QPPH 2 125-225 120/240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 QJ2 2 60-225 240
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240 QJH2 2 60-225 240
LDGB (3P) NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 QJ2H 2 60-225 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 ED2 1 15-100 120
1 15-125 120 ED2 2 15-100 240
NGB,HGB,LGB
2 15-125 240 ED4 1 15-100 120
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
250 LFGA (2, 3P) NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 HED4 1 15-100 120
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 HED4,HED6 2 15-125 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240 HFXD6,HFD6 2 70-250 240
HHJXD6(2, 3P)
CFD6(-A) (2, 3P) FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240 HJGA 2 200-400 240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100 240 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
QPH 3 15-100 240 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
BQH,BLH 3 15-100 240 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
HQP 3 15-100 240 HHJXD6 (3P) FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240
HBQ,HBL 3 15-100 240 FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240
QJ2 3 60-225 240 HFXD6,HFD6 3 70-250 240
250 QJH2 3 60-225 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
QJ2H 3 60-225 240 HJGA 3 200-400 240
ED2 3 15-100 240 QPH 2 100-125 120/240
CFD6(-A) (3P)
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 BQH,BLH 2 100-125 120/240
HED4,HED6 3 15-125 240 HQP 2 100-125 120/240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 HBQ,HBL 2 100-125 120/240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 QT 1,2 15-30 120/240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240 NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
5
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240

1 15-125 120 FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240
NGB,HGB,LGB CJD6(-A) (2, 3P)
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
2 15-125 240
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240
HJGA 2 200-400 240
LJGA (2, 3P) NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240
JXD2-A 2 200-400 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
JXD2 2 200-400 240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 400
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
200,000 HJGA 2 200-400 240 200,000
HJD6-A 2 200-400 240
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240
HJXD6-A 2 200-400 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
QPH 3 100 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
LJGA (3P) BQH,BLH 3 100 240
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
HQP 3 100 240
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240
HBQ,HBL 3 100 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240
400 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240
HHJD6 (2, 3P) FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240
CJD6(-A) (3P) FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240
HFXD6,HFD6 2 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240
HJGA 2 200-400 240
JXD2-A 3 200-400 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
JXD2 3 200-400 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
HJD6-A 3 200-400 240
HHJD6 (3P) FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240
HJXD6-A 3 200-400 240
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240
HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400 240
HFXD6,HFD6 3 70-250 240
CJD6(-A),CJD6-A 1 15-125 120
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 NGB,HGB,LGB
(2, 3P) 2 15-125 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240 CJD6(-A),CJD6-A
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 (3P)
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 1 15-125 120
NGB,HGB,LGB
HHJXD6(2, 3P) NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 2 15-125 240
600 LLGA (2, 3P)
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240 FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240
LLGA (2, 3P) NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 HFXD6,HFD6 2 70-250 240
HHLXD6 (2, 3P)
HJGA 2 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240 HJGA 2 200-400 240
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240 NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240 NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
LLGA (3P)
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240 FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 HHLXD6 (3P) FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240 HFXD6,HFD6 3 70-250 240
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240 HJGA 3 200-400 240
1 15-125 120 NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240
NGB,HGB,LGB
2 15-125 240 NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 QPH 2 100-125 120/240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 BQH,BLH 2 100-125 120/240
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 HQP 2 100-125 120/240
5
LLGB (2, 3P) NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240 HBQ,HBL 2 100-125 120/240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 QT 1,2 15-30 120/240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 1 15-125 120
NGB,HGB,LGB
HJGA 2 200-400 240 2 15-125 240
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
200,000 600 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240 200,000 600 FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240 FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240
LLGB (3P)
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240 HJGA 2 200-400 240
CLD6(-A) (2, 3P)
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240 JXD2-A 3 200-400 240
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240 JXD2 3 200-400 240
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 240
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 HJD6-A 2 200-400 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240 HJXD6-A 2 200-400 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240 HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400 240
HHLD6 (2, 3P) FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240 NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240
HFXD6,HFD6 2 70-250 240 NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 LD6-A 2 200-600 240
HJGA 2 200-400 240 LD6 2 200-600 240
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240 LXD6-A 2 450-600 240
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240 LXD6 2 450-600 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 HLD6-A 2 200-600 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 HLD6 2 200-600 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240 HLXD6-A 2 450-600 240
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240 HLXD6 2 450-600 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240 QPH 3 100 240
HHLD6 (3P) FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240 BQH,BLH 3 100 240
HFXD6,HFD6 3 70-250 240 HQP 3 100 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 HBQ,HBL 3 100 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240 NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 240
CLD6(-A) (3P)
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240 ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
HHLXD6 (2, 3P) NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240 HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400 240
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240 NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240 NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 LD6-A 2 200-600 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240 LD6 2 200-600 240
JXD2-A 2 200-400 240 LXD6-A 2 450-600 240
JXD2 2 200-400 240 CMD6 (2, 3P) LXD6 2 450-600 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 HLD6-A 2 200-600 240
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 240 HLD6 2 200-600 240
HJD6-A 3 200-400 240 HLXD6-A 2 450-600 240
HJXD6-A 3 200-400 240 HLXD6 2 450-600 240

600 CLD6(-A) (3P) MD6,MXD6 2 500-800 240
HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400 240
HMD6,HMXD6 2 500-800 240
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240
HED4,HED6 3 15-125 240
LD6-A 3 200-600 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240
LD6 3 200-600 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
LXD6-A 3 450-600 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
LXD6 3 450-600 240
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
HLD6-A 3 200-600 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240
HLD6 3 200-600 240
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240
HLXD6-A 3 450-600 240
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240
HLXD6 3 450-600 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
5
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240

HJGA 3 200-400 240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 JXD2-A 3 200-400 240
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
JXD2 3 200-400 240

NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240 JD6-A 3 200-400 240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 JD6 3 200-400 240
LMG (2, 3P) NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 JXD6-A 3 200-400 240
HJGA 2 200-400 240 CMD6 (3P)
JXD6 3 200-400 240
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240 HJD6-A 3 200-400 240
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240 HJXD6-A 3 200-400 240
200,000 MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 240 200,000 800 HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400 240
HMD6,HMXD6 2 400-800 240 NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 LD6-A 3 200-600 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240 LD6 3 200-600 240
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240 LXD6-A 3 450-600 240
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240 LXD6 3 450-600 240
LMG (3P) NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 HLD6-A 3 200-600 240
HJGA 3 200-400 240 HLD6 3 200-600 240
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240 HLXD6-A 3 450-600 240
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240 HLXD6 3 450-600 240
MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 240 MD6,MXD6 3 500-800 240
800
HMD6,HMXD6 3 400-800 240 HMD6,HMXD6 3 500-800 240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 2 50-150 240

NDGB,HDGB
HED4,HED6 2 15-125 240 3 50-150 240
2 50-150 240
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 NDGA,HDGA
3 50-150 240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240
2 70-250 240
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 NFGA,HFGA
3 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
2 70-250 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240 NFGB,HFGB
3 70-250 240
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240
2 200-400 240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 NJGA,NJJA
3 200-400 240
CMD6 (2, 3P) NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 SCMD6(-A) (3P)
2 200-400 240
HJGA 2 200-400 240 HJGA
3 200-400 240
JXD2-A 2 200-400 240
2 400-600 240
JXD2 2 200-400 240 NLGA,HLGA
3 400-600 240
JD6-A 2 200-400 240
2 400-600 240
JD6 2 200-400 240 NLGB,HLGB
3 400-600 240
JXD6-A 2 200-400 240 2 500-800 240
JXD6 2 200-400 240 MD6,MXD6
3 500-800 240
HJD6-A 2 200-400 240 2 500-800 240
HMD6,HMXD6
HJXD6-A 2 200-400 240 3 500-800 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240 HJD6-A 3 200-400 240
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 240 HJXD6-A 3 200-400 240
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240 HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400 240
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240 LD6-A 3 200-600 240
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 240 LD6 3 200-600 240
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240 LXD6-A 3 450-600 240
LNG (2, 3P) HJGA 2 200-400 240 LXD6 3 450-600 240
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240 CND6 (3P) HLD6-A 3 200-600 240
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240 HLD6 3 200-600 240
MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 240 HLXD6-A 3 450-600 240
HMD6,HMXD6 2 400-800 240 HLXD6 3 450-600 240
ND6,NXD6 2 600-1200 240 MD6,MXD6 3 500-800 240
HND6,HNXD6 2 600-1200 240 HMD6,HMXD6 3 500-800 240
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 240 ND6,NXD6 3 500-1200 240
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240 HND6,HNXD6 3 500-1200 240
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 240
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 240
LNG (3P) HJGA 3 200-400 240 NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 240
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 240
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 240 1200 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 240
5
MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 240 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 240
HMD6,HMXD6 3 400-800 240 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ND6,NXD6 3 600-1200 240 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400 240
HND6,HNXD6 3 600-1200 240 HJGA 2 200-400 240
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 240 HJGA 3 200-400 240
HED4,HED6 2 15-125 240 NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 240 NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 240
SCND6(-A) (3P)
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 240 NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 240
200,000 1200 JXD2-A 2 200-400 240 200,000 MD6,MXD6 2 500-800 240
JXD2 2 200-400 240 MD6,MXD6 3 500-800 240
JD6-A 2 200-400 240 SMD6 3 500-800 240
JD6 2 200-400 240 HMD6,HMXD6 2 500-800 240
JXD6-A 2 200-400 240 HMD6,HMXD6 3 500-800 240
JXD6 2 200-400 240 SHMD6 3 500-800 240
HJD6-A 2 200-400 240 ND6,NXD6 2 500-1200 240
HJXD6-A 2 200-400 240 ND6,NXD6 3 500-1200 240
CND6 (2, 3P)
HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400 240 SND6 3 500-1200 240
LD6-A 2 200-600 240 HND6,HNXD6 2 500-1200 240
LD6 2 200-600 240 HND6,HNXD6 3 500-1200 240
LXD6-A 2 450-600 240 SHND6 3 500-1200 240
LXD6 2 450-600 240 2 50-150 240
NDGB,HDGB
HLD6-A 2 200-600 240 3 50-150 240
HLD6 2 200-600 240 2 50-150 240
NDGA,HDGA
HLXD6-A 2 450-600 240 3 50-150 240
HLXD6 2 450-600 240 2 70-250 240
NFGA,HFGA
MD6,MXD6 2 500-800 240 3 70-250 240
HMD6,HMXD6 2 500-800 240 2 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB
ND6,NXD6 2 500-1200 240 3 70-250 240
HND6,HNXD6 2 500-1200 240 2 70-250 240
HFD6,HFXD6
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 240 3 70-250 240
1600 LPG (3P)
HED4,HED6 3 15-125 240 2 200-400 240
NJGA,NJJA
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 240 3 200-400 240
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 240 2 200-400 240
HJGA
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 240 3 200-400 240
CND6 (3P) JXD2-A 3 200-400 240 2 400-600 240
NLGA,HLGA
JXD2 3 200-400 240 3 400-600 240
JD6-A 3 200-400 240 2 400-600 240
NLGB,HLGB
JD6 3 200-400 240 3 400-600 240
JXD6-A 3 200-400 240 2 400-800 240
MD6,HMXD6
JXD6 3 200-400 240 3 400-800 240

Series Series
Amps Amps
2 400-800 240 200,000 1600 CPD6 (3P) HMD6,HMXD6 2 500-800 240
HMD6,HMXD6
3 400-800 240 HMD6,HMXD6 3 500-800 240
2 600-1200 240 ND6,NXD6 2 500-1200 240
ND6,NXD6
3 600-1200 240 ND6,NXD6 3 500-1200 240
2 600-1200 240 HND6,HNXD6 2 500-1200 240
LPG (3P) HND6,HNXD6
3 600-1200 240 HND6,HNXD6 3 500-1200 240
2 1200-1600 240
PD6,PXD6
3 1200-1600 240
2 1200-1600 240
HPD6,HPXD6
3 1200-1600 240
2 50-150 240
NDGB,HDGB
3 50-150 240
2 50-150 240
NDGA,HDGA
3 50-150 240
2 70-250 240
NFGA,HFGA
3 70-250 240
2 70-250 240
NFGB,HFGB
3 70-250 240
2 70-250 240
FXD6-A,FD6-A
3 70-250 240
2 70-250 240
FXD6,FD6
3 70-250 240
2 70-250 240
5
HFD6,HFXD6
3 70-250 240
2 200-400 240
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
NJGA,NJJA
3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240
HJGA
3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240
JXD2-A
3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240
JXD2
3 200-400 240
200,000 1600
2 200-400 240
JD6-A,JXD6-A
3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240
JD6,JXD6
3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240
CPD6 (3P) HJD6-A
3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240
HJXD6-A
3 200-400 240
2 200-400 240
HJD6,HJXD6
3 200-400 240
2 400-600 240
NLGA,HLGA
3 400-600 240
2 400-600 240
NLGB,HLGB
3 400-600 240
2 200-600 240
LD6-A
3 200-600 240
2 200-600 240
LD6
3 200-600 240
2 450-600 240
LXD6-A
3 450-600 240
2 450-600 240
LXD6
3 450-600 240
2 200-600 240
HLD6-A
3 200-600 240
2 200-600 240
HLD6
3 200-600 240
2 450-600 240
HLXD6-A
3 450-600 240
2 450-600 240
HLXD6
3 450-600 240
2 500-800 240
MD6,MXD6
3 500-800 240

480V Series Ratings 480V Series Ratings (Continued)
Series Series
Amps Amps
1 15-100 277 50,000 800 MD6,MXD6 FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 480

NGB,HGB,LGB
BQD,CQD (3P)
(2,3P) NJGA 3 250-400 480
25,000 2 15-100 277/480
NGB,HGB,LGB JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
125 BQD,CQD 3 15-100 277/480
(3P) JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480
ED4 1 15-100 277 3 400-600
HED6 (2,3P) NLGA,NLGB 480
30,000 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 480
LD6 3 200-600 480
HED6 (3P) ED4,ED6 3 15-125 480
LD6-A 3 200-600 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 1 15-125 277
NGB 3 450-600
(2,3P) 2 15-125 277/480 LXD6 480
250
FD6-A,FXD6-A LXD6-A 3 450-600 480
NGB 3 15-125 277/480
(3P) 3 200-400
SJD6-A 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A 1 15-125 277
NGB SJD6 3 200-400 480
35,000 (2,3P) 2 15-125 277/480
SLD6-A 3 400-600 480
400 JD6-A,JXD6-A
NGB 3 15-125 277/480 3 400-600
(3P) SLD6 480
JD6,JXD6 (2,3P) ED4 1 15-100 277 LMD6,LMXD6 3 600-800 480
LD6 (2,3P) ED4 1 15-100 277 3 600-800
600 NMG 480
LXD6 (2,3P) ED4 1 15-100 277
SMD6 (3P) 2 50-150 480
ED4 1 15-100 277 NDGA,NDGB
HED4 (2,3P) 3 50-150 480
125 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 480
2 70-250 480
HED4 (3P) ED4,ED6 3 15-125 480
NFGA,NFGB
1 15-125 277 3 70-250 480
HJD6-A (2,3P) NGB,HGB
42,000 2 15-125 277/480 2 250-400 480
HJD6-A (3P) NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 NJGA
3 250-400 480
400
5
1 15-125 277 2 200-400
HJXD6-A (2,3P) NGB,HGB 480
2 15-125 277/480 JD6,JXD6
3 200-400 480
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
HJXD6-A (3P) NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480
2 200-400 480
HFD6,HFXD6 1 15-125 277
NGB,HGB JD6-A,JXD6-A
(2,3P) 2 15-125 277/480 3 200-400 480
250
HFD6,HFXD6 2 400-600 480
NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 NLGA,NLGB
(3P) 3 400-600 480
HJD6-A (2,3P) HED4 2 15-50 480
2 200-600 480
HJD6-A (3P) HED4 3 15-50 480 LD6-A
3 200-600 480
HJXD6-A (2,3P) HED4 2 15-50 480
2 200-600 480
400 HJXD6-A (3P) HED4 3 15-50 480
LD6
HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-600 480
HED4 2 15-50 480
(2,3P) 2 450-600 480
HJD6,HJXD6 LXD6-A
HED4 3 15-50 480 3 450-600 480
(3P)
HLD6-A (2,3P) HED4 2 15-50 480 2 450-600 480
LXD6
HLD6-A (3P) HED4 3 15-50 480 3 450-600 480
HLXD6-A (2,3P) HED4 2 15-50 480 SJD6-A 3 200-400 480
600 HLXD6-A (3P) HED4 3 15-50 480 3 200-400
SJD6 480
HLD6,HLXD6 3 400-600
HED4 2 15-50 480 SLD6-A 480
(2,3P)
SLD6 3 400-600 480
HLD6,HLXD6
HED4 3 15-50 480
(3P) 2 600-800 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480 LMD6,LMXD6
3 600-800 480
50,000
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 2 600-800 480
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 480 NMG
3 600-800 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 480
1200 ND6,NXD6 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480
(2,3P)
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480 FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 480
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480 FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 480
MD6,MXD6 LD6 2 200-600 480 2 250-400
NJGA 480
(2,3P) LD6-A 2 200-600 480
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480
800 LXD6 2 450-600 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480
LXD6-A 2 450-600 480
SJD6-A 3 200-400 480 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480
SJD6 3 200-400 480 LD6 2 200-600 480
SLD6-A 3 400-600 480 LD6-A 2 200-600 480
SLD6 3 400-600 480 2 450-600
LXD6 480
LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 480 2 450-600
LXD6-A 480
NMG 2 600-800 480
NMG 2 600-800 480
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480
LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 480
MD6,MXD6 (3P) NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 480 ND6,NXD6 (3P) NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480

Series Series
Amps Amps
50,000 1200 ND6,NXD6 (3P) NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480 SLD6 3 400-600 480
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 480 SLD6-A 3 400-600 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 480 2 600-800 480
NMG
NJGA 3 250-400 480 3 600-800 480
PD6,PXD6 (3P)
JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480 2 800-1200 480
NNG
JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480 3 800-1200 480
NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480 NPG 2 1200-1600 480
LD6 3 200-600 480 NPG 3 1200-1600 480
LD6-A 3 200-600 480 2 200-400 480
JD6,JXD6
LXD6 3 450-600 480 3 200-400 480
LXD6-A 3 450-600 480 2 200-400 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A
SJD6 3 200-400 480 3 200-400 480
1600
SJD6-A 3 200-400 480 2 200-600 480
LD6
SLD6 3 400-600 480 3 200-600 480
SLD6-A 3 400-600 480 2 200-600 480
LD6-A
NMG 3 600-800 480 3 200-600 480
SPD6 (3P)
LMD6,LXMD6 3 600-800 480 2 450-600 480
LXD6
SND6 (3P) 2 50-150 480 3 450-600 480
NDGA,NDGB
3 50-150 480 2 450-600 480
LXD6-A
2 70-250 480 3 450-600 480
NFGA,NFGB SJD6 3 200-400 480
3 70-250 480
2 250-400 480 SJD6-A 3 200-400 480
NJGA SLD6 3 400-600 480
3 250-400 480
2 200-400 480 SLD6-A 3 400-600 480
JD6,JXD6 2 50-150 480
3 200-400 480 NDGA,NDGB
3 50-150 480
5
2 200-400 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 70-250 480
3 200-400 480 NFGA,NFGB
2 400-600 480 3 70-250 480
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
NLGA,NLGB 2 70-250 480

3 400-600 480 50,000 FXD6,FD6
2 200-600 480 3 70-250 480
LD6 2 70-250 480
3 200-600 480 FXD6-A,FD6-A
2 200-600 480 3 70-250 480
LD6-A 2 250-400 480
3 200-600 480 NJGA
2 450-600 480 3 250-400 480
LXD6 2 200-400 480
3 450-600 480 JD6-A,JXD6-A
2 450-600 480 3 200-400 480
LXD6-A 2 200-400 480
3 450-600 480 JD6,JXD6
SJD6 3 200-400 480 3 200-400 480
SJD6-A 3 200-400 480 2 400-600 480
NLGA,NLGB
SLD6 3 400-600 480 3 400-600 480
SLD6-A 3 400-600 480 2 200-600 480
2000 RD6,RXD6 (3P) LD6-A
2 600-800 480 3 200-600 480
NMG 2 200-600 480
3 600-800 480 LD6
3 200-600 480
2 600-800 480
LMD6,LMXD6 2 450-600 480
3 600-800 480 LXD6-A
3 450-600 480
1600 PD6,PXD6 (3P) 2 50-150 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 450-600 480
3 50-150 480 LXD6
3 450-600 480
2 70-250 480
NFGA,NFGB SJD6-A 3 200-400 480
3 70-250 480
SJD6 3 200-400 480
2 70-250 480
FXD6,FD6 SLD6-A 3 400-600 480
3 70-250 480
SLD6 3 400-600 480
2 70-250 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 600-800 480
3 70-250 480 NMG
3 600-800 480
2 250-400 480
NJGA 2 800-1200 480
3 250-400 480 NNG
3 800-1200 480
2 200-400 480
JD6,JXD6 2 1200-1600 480
3 200-400 480 NPG
3 1200-1600 480
2 200-400 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A HDGA,HDGB
3 200-400 480 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
(2,3P)
2 400-600 480 150
NLGA,NLGB HDGA,HDGB
3 400-600 480 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480
(3P)
2 200-600 480 HFGA,HFGB NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
LD6
3 200-600 480 (2,3P) NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480
2 200-600 480 NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480
LD6-A HFGA,HFGB (3P)
3 200-600 480 65,000 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480
2 450-600 480 ED4 1 15-100 277
LXD6 250
3 450-600 480 ED4,ED6 2 15-125 480
2 450-600 480 HFD6,HFXD6 HED4 1 15-100 277
LXD6-A
3 450-600 480 (2,3P) HED4,HED6 2 15-125 480
SJD6 3 200-400 480 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
SJD6-A 3 200-400 480 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480

Series Series
Amps Amps
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 480 HED4 1 15-100 277
HFD6,HFXD6 HED4,HED6 3 15-125 480 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
250
(3P) NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480 NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
1 15-125 277 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
NGB,HGB HLD6-A (2,3P)
2 15-125 277/480 NJGA 2 200-400 480
HJGA (2,3P) NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480 LD6-A 2 200-600 480
NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 LXD6-A 2 450-600 480
HJGA (3P)
NJGA 3 250-400 480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
HJD6-A (2,3P) ED4 1 15-100 277 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
HED4 1 15-100 277 HLD6-A (3P) NJGA 3 200-400 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480 LD6-A 3 200-600 480
HJD6-A (2,3P) LXD6-A 3 450-600 480
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 480 ED4 1 15-100 277
NJGA 2 250-400 480 HED4 1 15-100 277
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480 HLD6 (2,3P) FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480 JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480 LD6 2 200-600 480
LXD6 2 450-600 480
5
HJD6-A (3P) FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
NJGA 3 250-400 480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 480 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 480 HLD6 (3P) JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
LD6 3 200-600 480
ED4 1 15-100 277
LXD6 3 450-600 480
HED4 1 15-100 277
ED4 1 15-100 277
400 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
HED4 1 15-100 277
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
HJXD6-A (2,3P) FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
65,000 JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400 480 65,000 600
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 480 HLXD6-A (2,3P)
JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
LD6-A 2 200-600 480
HJXD6-A (3P) FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
LD6 2 200-600 480
NJGA 3 250-400 480
LXD6-A 2 450-600 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 480
LXD6 2 450-600 480
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 480
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480
ED4 1 15-100 277
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480
HED4 1 15-100 277
HJD6,HJXD6 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
(2,3P) FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
NJGA 3 250-400 480
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480 HLXD6-A (3P)
HJD6,HJXD6 JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
(3P) NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 480
LD6-A 3 200-600 480
1 15-125 277 LD6 3 200-600 480
HHJD6 (2,3P) NGB,HGB
2 15-125 277/480 LXD6-A 3 450-600 480
HHJD6 (3P) NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 LXD6 3 450-600 480
1 15-125 277 ED4 1 15-100 277
HHJXD6 (2,3P) NGB,HGB
2 15-125 277/480 HED4 1 15-100 277
HHJXD6 (3P) NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
HLD6-A (2,3P) ED4 1 15-100 277 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
NGB,HGB 1 15-125 277 HLXD6 (2,3P)
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480
NGB,HGB 2 15-125 277/480 LD6 2 200-600 480
HLGA,HLGB NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480 LXD6 2 450-600 480
(2,3P) NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 NGB,HGB 1 15-125 277
NJGA 2 250-400 480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
600
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 HLXD6 (3P) JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480 LD6 3 200-600 480
HLGA,HLGB
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480 LXD6 3 450-600 480
(3P)
NJGA 3 250-400 480 1 15-125 277
NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480 HHLXD6 (2,3P) NGB,HGB
2 15-125 277/480

Series Series
Amps Amps
HHLXD6 (3P) NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480
600 HHLD6 (2,3P) NGB,HGB 2 15-125 277/480 LD6 2 200-600 480
HHLD6 (3P) NGB,HGB 3 15-125 277/480 LD6-A 2 200-600 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480 LXD6 2 450-600 480
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 HND6,HNXD6 LXD6-A 2 450-600 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480 (2,3P) NMG 2 600-800 480
HMG (2,3P) NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480 LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 480
NMG 2 600-800 480 MD6,MXD6 2 500-800 480
LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 480 NNG 2 800-1200 480
MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 480 ND6,NXD6 2 800-1200 480
NJGA 3 250-400 480 FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 480
HMG (3P) NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480 FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 480
NMG 3 600-800 480 NJGA 3 250-400 480
LMD6,LMXD6 3 600-800 480 JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 480 JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 HND6,HNXD6 LD6 3 200-600 480
1200
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 480 (3P) LD6-A 3 200-600 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 480 LXD6 3 450-600 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480 LXD6-A 3 450-600 480
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480 NMG 3 600-800 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480 LMD6,LXMD6 3 600-800 480
HMD6,HMXD6 MD6,MXD6 3 500-800 480
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480
800 (2,3P) SMD6 3 500-800 480
LD6 2 200-600 480
5
LD6-A 2 200-600 480 NNG 3 800-1200 480

LXD6 2 450-600 480 ND6,NXD6 3 800-1200 480
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
LXD6-A 2 450-600 480 NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480

NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480
LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480
NMG 2 600-800 480
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480
MD6 2 500-800 480
NMG 2 600-800 480
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480 HPG (2,3P)
MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 480
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480
LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 480
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 480
NNG 2 800-1200 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 480
65,000 65,000 ND6,NXD6 2 800-1200 480
NJGA 3 250-400 480
NPG 2 1200-1600 480
JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480
HMD6,HMXD6 NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480
NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480
(3P) NJGA 3 250-400 480
LD6 3 200-600 480
NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480
LD6-A 3 200-600 480
NMG 3 600-800 480
LXD6 3 450-600 480 HPG (3P)
MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 480
LXD6-A 3 450-600 480
LMD6,LMXD6 3 600-800 480
LMD6,LMXD6 3 600-800 480
NNG 3 800-1200 480
NMG 3 600-800 480
ND6,NXD6 3 800-1200 480
MD6 3 500-800 480
NPG 3 1200-1600 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
2 50-150 480
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 NDGA,NDGB
3 50-150 480
NJGA 2 250-400 480
2 70-250 480
NLGA,NLGB 2 400-600 480 NFGA,NFGB
3 70-250 480
HNG (2,3P) NMG 2 600-800 480 1600
2 70-250 480
LMD6,LMXD6 2 600-800 480 FXD6,FD6
3 70-250 480
MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 480 2 70-250 480
NNG 2 800-1200 480 FXD6-A,FD6-A
3 70-250 480
ND6,NXD6 2 800-1200 480 2 250-400 480
HPD6,HPXD6
NDGA,NDGB 3 50-150 480 NJGA
(3P) 3 250-400 480
NFGA,NFGB 3 70-250 480 2 400-600 480
NJGA 3 250-400 480 NLGA,NLGB
3 400-600 480
1200 NLGA,NLGB 3 400-600 480 2 600-800 480
HNG (3P) NMG 3 600-800 480 NMG
3 600-800 480
LMD6,LMXD6 3 600-800 480 2 800-1200 480
MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 480 NNG
3 800-1200 480
NNG 3 800-1200 480 2 1200-1600 480
ND6,NXD6 3 800-1200 480 NPG
3 1200-1600 480
NDGA,NDGB 2 50-150 480
NFGA,NFGB 2 70-250 480 2 50-150 480
NDGA,NDGB
FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 480 3 50-150 480
HND6,HNXD6 HRD6,HRXD6
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 480 2000 2 70-250 480
(2,3P) (3P) NFGA,NFGB
NJGA 2 250-400 480 3 70-250 480
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480 2 70-250 480
FXD6,FD6
JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480 3 70-250 480

Series Series
Amps Amps
2 70-250 480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A
3 70-250 480 HHJXD6 (2,3P) FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
2 250-400 480 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
NJGA 400
3 250-400 480 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
2 200-400 480 HHJXD6 (3P) FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
JD6,JXD6
3 200-400 480 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
2 200-400 480 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480
JD6-A,JXD6-A
3 200-400 480 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 480
2 400-600 480 LLGA,LLGB NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 480
NLGA,NLGB
3 400-600 480 (2,3P) NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480
2 200-600 480 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
LD6
HRD6,HRXD6 3 200-600 480 NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400 480
65,000 2000
(3P) 2 200-600 480 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480
LD6-A
3 200-600 480 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 480
2 450-600 480 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480
LXD6 LLGA,LLGB (3P)
3 450-600 480 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 480
2 450-600 480 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
LXD6-A
3 450-600 480 NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400 480
2 600-800 480 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480
NMG
3 600-800 480 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 480
2 800-1200 480 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 480
NNG NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480
3 800-1200 480
2 1200-1600 480 ED4,ED6 1 15-100 277
NPG HHLD6 (2,3P)
3 1200-1600 480 HED4,HED6 1 15-100 277
LDGA,LDGB 1 15-125 277 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
NGB,HGB,LGB
5
(2,3P) 2 15-125 277/480 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
150
LDGA,LDGB HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 277/480
(3P) NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400 480
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
NGB,HGB,LGB 1 15-125 277 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480
2 15-125 277/480 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 480
600
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480
LFGA,LFGB NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 480
(2,3P) NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 480 HHLD6 (3P)
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 480
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
100,000 NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400 480
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 277/480
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 480
250 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 480
LFGA,LFGB (3P) NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 480
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 480
ED4,ED6 1 15-100 277
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480 HHLXD6 (2,3P)
HED4,HED6 1 15-100 277
1 15-125 277 FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480
HHFD6 (2,3P) NGB,HGB,LGB
2 15-125 277/480 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480
HHFD6 (3P) NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 277/480 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
1 15-125 277 NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400 480
HHFXD6 (2,3P) NGB,HGB,LGB
2 15-125 277/480 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480
100,000 HHFXD6 (3P) NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 277/480 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 480
1 15-125 277 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480
CJD6(-A) (2,3P) NGB,HGB,LGB
2 15-125 277/480 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 480
CJD6(-A) (3P) NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 277/480 HHLXD6 (3P)
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480 FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 480 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
LJGA (2,3P) NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 480 NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400 480
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 480
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 480 NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480
LJGA (3P) NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
400 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 480 LMG (2,3P)
NJGA,HJGA 2 200-200 480
ED4,ED6 1 15-100 277 NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 480
HED4,HED6 1 15-100 277 800 MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 480
HHJD6 (2,3P) FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250 480 HMD6,HMXD6 2 400-800 480
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250 480 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 480 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480
HHJD6 (3P) FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 480 LMG (3P) NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 480
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
ED4,ED6 1 15-100 277 NJGA,HJGA 3 200-200 480
HHJXD6 (2,3P)
HED4,HED6 1 15-100 277 NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 480

Series Series
Amps Amps
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 480 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
LMG (3P) MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 480 NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400 480
HMD6,HMXD6 3 400-800 480 NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 480
2 50-150 480 NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 480
NDGB,HDGB LNG (3P)
3 50-150 480 MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 480
2 50-150 480 HMD6,HMXD6 3 400-800 480
NDGA,HDGA
3 50-150 480 ND6,NXD6 3 600-1200 480
2 70-250 480 HND6,HNXD6 3 600-1200 480
NFGB,HFGB
3 70-250 480 2 50-150 480
NDGB,HDGB
2 70-250 480 3 50-150 480
NFGA,HFGA
3 70-250 480 2 50-150 480
NDGA,HDGA
2 70-250 480 3 50-150 480
FXD6,FD6
3 70-250 480 2 70-250 480
NFGB,HFGB
2 70-250 480 3 70-250 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A
3 70-250 480 2 70-250 480
NFGA,HFGA
2 70-250 480 3 70-250 480
HFD6,HFXD6
3 70-250 480 2 70-250 480
FXD6,FD6
2 200-200 480 3 70-250 480
NJGA,HJGA
3 200-200 480 2 70-250 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A
2 200-400 480 3 70-250 480
JXD6,JD6
3 200-400 480 2 70-250 480
HFD6,HFXD6
2 200-400 480 3 70-250 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A
3 200-400 480 2 200-400 480
NJGA,HJGA
2 200-400 480 3 200-400 480
HJD6,HJXD6
3 200-400 480 2 200-400 480
JXD6,JD6
5
HJD6-A 2 200-400 480 3 200-400 480

HJXD6-A 2 200-400 480 2 200-400 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A
800 HJD6-A 3 200-400 480 3 200-400 480
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
CMD6 (3P)
HJXD6-A 3 200-400 480 2 200-400 480
HJD6,HJXD6
2 400-600 480 3 200-400 480
NLGB,HLGB
3 400-600 480 HJD6-A 2 200-400 480
2 400-600 480 HJXD6-A 2 200-400 480
NLGA,HLGA
3 400-600 480 HJD6-A 3 200-400 480
2 200-600 480 HJXD6-A 3 200-400 480
LD6 1200
3 200-600 480 2 400-600 480
CND6 (3P) NLGB,HLGB
100,000 2 200-600 480 100,000 3 400-600 480
LD6-A
3 200-600 480 2 400-600 480
NLGA,HLGA
2 450-600 480 3 400-600 480
LXD6
3 450-600 480 2 200-600 480
LD6
2 450-600 480 3 200-600 480
LXD6-A
3 450-600 480 2 200-600 480
LD6-A
2 200-600 480 3 200-600 480
HLD6
3 200-600 480 2 450-600 480
LXD6
2 200-600 480 3 450-600 480
HLD6-A
3 200-600 480 2 450-600 480
LXD6-A
2 450-600 480 3 450-600 480
HLXD6
3 450-600 480 2 200-600 480
HLD6
2 450-600 480 3 200-600 480
HLXD6-A
3 450-600 480 2 200-600 480
HLD6-A
2 500-800 480 3 200-600 480
MD6,MXD6
3 500-800 480 2 450-600 480
2 500-800 480 HLXD6
HMD6,HMXD6 3 450-600 480
3 500-800 480 2 450-600 480
2 70-250 480 HLXD6-A
SCMD6 (3P) HFD6,HFXD6 3 450-600 480
3 70-250 480 2 500-800 480
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480 MD6,MXD6
3 500-800 480
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 480 2 500-800 480
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 480 HMD6,HMXD6
3 500-800 480
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480 2 500-1200 480
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480 ND6,NXD6
3 500-1200 480
NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400 480 2 500-1200 480
LNG (2,3P) HND6,HNXD6
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 480 3 500-1200 480
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 480 2 70-250 480
1200 SCND6 (3P) HFD6,HFXD6
MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 480 3 70-250 480
HMD6,HMXD6 2 400-800 480 ND6,NXD6 2 600-1200 480
ND6,NXD6 2 600-1200 480 LPG (2,3P)
HND6,HNXD6 2 600-1200 480
HND6,HNXD6 2 600-1200 480 ND6,NXD6 3 600-1200 480
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480 LPG (3P)
HND6,HNXD6 3 600-1200 480
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 480 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 480
LNG (3P)
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480 1600 LPG (2,3P) NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 480

Series Series
Amps Amps
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 480 JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480 JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480
NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400 480 HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400 480
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 480 HJD6-A 3 200-400 480
LPG (2,3P) NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 480 HJXD6-A 3 200-400 480
MD6,MXD6 2 400-800 480 LD6 3 200-600 480
HMD6,HMXD6 2 400-800 480 150,000 600 CLD6(-A) (3P) LD6-A 3 200-600 480
PD6,PXD6 2 1200-1600 480 LXD6 3 450-600 480
HPD6,HPXD6 2 1200-1600 480 LXD6-A 3 450-600 480
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 480 HLD6 3 200-600 480
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 480 HLD6-A 3 200-600 480
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 480 HLXD6 3 450-600 480
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250 480 HLXD6-A 3 450-600 480
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480 1 15-125 277
NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400 480 NGB,HGB,LGB
LPG (3P) 2 15-125 277/480
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600 480 ED4 1 15-100 277
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600 480 CED6 (2,3P)
ED4,ED6 2 15-125 480
MD6,MXD6 3 400-800 480 125 HED4 1 15-100 277
HMD6,HMXD6 3 400-800 480 HED4,HED6 2 15-125 480
PD6,PXD6 3 1200-1600 480 NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 277/480
100,000 1600 HPD6,HPXD6 3 1200-1600 480 CED6 (3P) ED4,ED6 3 15-125 480
2 50-150 480 HED4,HED6 3 15-125 480
NDGB,HDGB
3 50-150 480 NGB,HGB,LGB 1 15-125 277
2 50-150 480
NDGA,HDGA 2 15-125 277/480
3 50-150 480
5
2 70-250 480 200,000 ED4 1 15-100 277
NFGB,HFGB ED4,ED6 2 15-50 480
3 70-250 480
CFD6 (2,3P) HED4 1 15-100 277
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
2 70-250 480
NFGA,HFGA HED4,HED6 2 15-125 480
3 70-250 480
2 70-250 480 FXD6,FD6 2 70-250 480
FXD6,FD6 250 FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250 480
3 70-250 480
CPD6 (3P) HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
2 70-250 480
FXD6-A,FD6-A NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 277/480
3 70-250 480
2 70-250 480 ED4,ED6 3 15-50 480
HFD6,HFXD6 HED4,HED6 3 15-125 480
3 70-250 480 CFD6 (3P)
2 200-400 480 FXD6,FD6 3 70-250 480
NJGA,HJGA FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250 480
3 200-400 480
2 400-600 480 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
NLGB,HLGB
3 400-600 480
2 400-600 480
NLGA,HLGA
3 400-600 480
ED4 1 15-100 277
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480
CJD6(-A) (2,3P) JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480
HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400 480
HJD6-A 2 200-400 480
400 HJXD6-A 2 200-400 480
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480
JXD6,JD6 3 200-400 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A 3 200-400 480
CJD6(-A) (3P)
HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400 480
HJD6-A 3 200-400 480
HJXD6-A 3 200-400 480
ED4 1 15-100 277
150,000 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 480
JXD6,JD6 2 200-400 480
JXD6-A,JD6-A 2 200-400 480
HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400 480
HJD6-A 2 200-400 480
HJXD6-A 2 200-400 480
CLD6(-A) (2,3P) LD6 2 200-600 480
600
LD6-A 2 200-600 480
LXD6 2 450-600 480
LXD6-A 2 450-600 480
HLD6 2 200-600 480
HLD6-A 2 200-600 480
HLXD6 2 450-600 480
HLXD6-A 2 450-600 480
CLD6(-A) (3P) HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 480

600V Series Ratings
Main Breaker/Fuse Branch Breaker
Series Rating
Max. Amps Type Type Number of Poles Amperes Voltage
1 347
14,000 125 NGB2 (2,&3P) BQD6 15-70
2,3 347/600
1 347
ED6, HED6 (1,2,&3P) BQD6 15-70
2,3 347/600
18,000 125
1 347
ED6 (2,3P) NGB, NGB2 15-125
2,3 347/600
1 347
125 HGB2 (2,&3P) BQD6 15-70
2,3 347/600
22,000
1 347
250 HFD6, HFXD6 (2,&3P) NGB, NGB2 15-125
2,3 347/600
1 347
125 LGB2 (2,3P) BQD6 15-70
2,3 347/600
1 347
BQD6 15-70
25,000 2,3 347/600
250 HFD6, HFXD6 (2,&3P) ED6, HED6 2,3 15-125 600
1 347
NGB, NGB2, HGB2 15-125
2,3 347/600
400 HJD6 (-A) , HJXD6 (-A) (2,&3P) HFD6 2,3 70-250 600
35,000 HLD6 (-A) (2,&3P) HFD6 2,3 70-250 600
600
HLXD6 (-A) (2,&3P) HFD6 2,3 70-250 600
HFD6 2,3 70 600
JD6 (-A), JXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
5
800 HMD6, HMXD6 (2,&3P) HJD6 (-A), HJXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
LD6 (-A), HLD6 (-A) 2,3 200-600 600
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
LXD6 (-A), HLXD6 (-A) 2,3 450-600 600

50,000
HFD6 2,3 70 600
JD6 (-A), JXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
1200 HND6, HNXD6 (2,&3P) HJD6 (-A), HJXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
LD6 (-A), HLD6 (-A) 2,3 200-600 600
LXD6 (-A), HLXD6 (-A) 2,3 450-600 600
BQD6 2,3 15-70 347/600
250 CFD6 (2,&3P)
ED6, HED6 2,3 15-125 600
HFD6 2,3 70 600
JD6 (-A), JXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
800 CMD6 (2,&3P) HJD6 (-A), HJXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
LD6 (-A), HLD6 (-A) 2,3 200-600 600
LXD6 (-A), HLXD6 (-A) 2,3 450-600 600
HFD6 2,3 70 600
JD6 (-A), JXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
1200 CND6 (2,&3P) HJD6 (-A), HJXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
LD6 (-A), HLD6 (-A) 2,3 200-600 600
65,000
LXD6 (-A), HLXD6 (-A) 2,3 450-600 600
HFD6 2,3 70 600
JD6 (-A), JXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
PD6, HPXD6 (2,&3P) HJD6 (-A), HJXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
LD6 (-A), HLD6 (-A) 2,3 200-600 600
LXD6 (-A), HLXD6 (-A) 2,3 450-600 600
1600
HFD6 2,3 70 600
JD6 (-A), JXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
CPD6 (2,&3P) HJD6 (-A), HJXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
LD6 (-A), HLD6 (-A) 2,3 200-600 600
LXD6 (-A), HLXD6 (-A) 2,3 450-600 600
1 347
BQD6 15-70
2,3 347/600
125 CED6 (2,&3P) ED6, HED6 2,3 15-125 600
NGB, NGB2, HGB2, 1 347
15-125
LGB2 2,3 347/600
100,000
BQD6 1 15-70 347
ED6, HED6 2,3 15-125 600
250 CFD6 (3P) HFD6 2,3 70-250 600
NGB, NGB2, HGB2, 1 347
15-125
LGB2 2,3 347/600

240 Volt Fuse Series Ratings 240 Volt Series Ratings (Continued)
Series Main Fuse Branch Breaker Series Main Fuse Branch Breaker
Connected Maximum No. of Connected Maximum No. of
Rating Type Amperes Type Poles Amperes Rating Type Amperes Type Poles Amperes
QPH 1 15-70 FD6,FXD6 2 70-250
J,R (1, 2, 3P) JXD2-A 2 200-400
BQH,BLH 1 15-70
JXD2 2 200-400
QPH 2 15-125
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400
600 BQH,BLH 2 15-125
J,R (2, 3P) J,R (2, 3P) JD6,JXD6 2 200-400
QN,QNH 2 150-200
LD6-A 2 200-600
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200
LD6 2 200-600
QPH 3 15-100
J,R (3P) LXD6-A 2 450-600
BQH,BLH 3 15-100
LXD6 2 450-600
QPH 1 15-70
T (1, 2 3P) QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250
BQH,BLH 1 15-70
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 3 100-250
QPH 2 15-125
ED4,ED6 3 15-125
65,000 BQH,BLH 2 15-125
T (2, 3P) 1200 HED4,HED6 3 15-125
QN,QNH 2 150-200
600 FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250
QPH 3 15-100
T (3P) JXD2-A 3 200-400
BQH,BLH 3 15-100
JXD2 3 200-400
QPH 1 15-70
L (1, 2 3P) JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400
BQH,BLH 1 15-70 J,R (3P)
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400
QPH 2 15-125
SJD6-A 3 200-400
BQH,BLH 2 15-125
L (2, 3P) 6000 SJD6 3 200-400
QN,QNH 2 150-200
LD6-A 3 200-600
QNR,QNRH 2 150-200
LD6 3 200-600
QPH 3 15-100
L (3P) LXD6-A 3 450-600
BQH,BLH 3 15-100
LXD6 3 450-600
5
QP,BQ,BL 1 15-70
SLD6-A 3 300-600
QT 1,2 15-50
SLD6 3 300-600
QPF,BQF,BLF 1 15-30
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ED4 1 15-100
QE,BE,BLE 1 15-30
ED4,ED6 2 15-125
QPHF,BQHF 1 15-30
HED4 1 15-100
BLHF 1 15-30
HED4,HED6 2 15-125
QEH,BLEH 1 15-30
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250
QPF2,BLF2 1 15-30
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250
QPHF2,BLHF2 1 15-30
T(300V) (1, JXD2-A 2 200-400
HQPF2,HBLF2 1 15-30 T (2, 3P)
2 3P) JXD2 2 200-400
QAF,BQAF,BAF 1 15-20 100,000
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400
QAFH,BQAFH 1 15-20
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400
BAFH 1 15-20
LD6-A 2 200-600
QAF2,BAF2 1 15-20
LD6 2 200-600
QAFH2,BAFH2 1 15-20
200 LXD6-A 2 450-600
HQAF2,HBAF2 1 15-20
LXD6 2 450-600
QFGA2,BFGA2 1 15-20
ED4,ED6 3 15-125
QFGAH2,BFGAH2 1 15-20 1200
HED4,HED6 3 15-125
HQFGA2,HBFGA2 1 15-20
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250
QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250
QP,BQ,BL 2 15-125
JXD2-A 3 200-400
QPF,BLF 2 15-60
T(300V) (2, 3P) JXD2 3 200-400
100,000 QE,BLE 2 15-60
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400
QPHF,BLHF 2 15-60
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400
QEH,BLEH 2 15-60 T (3P)
SJD6-A 3 200-400
QP,BQ,BL 3 15-100
SJD6 3 200-400
QPH 3 15-100
LD6-A 3 200-600
T(300V) (3P) BQH,BLH 3 15-100
LD6 3 200-600
HQP 3 15-100
LXD6-A 3 450-600
HBQ,HBL 3 15-100
LXD6 3 450-600
QPH 1 15-70
SLD6-A 3 300-600
T(300V) (1, BQH,BLH 1 15-70
SLD6 3 300-600
2 3P) HQP 1 15-70
T (2, 3P) ED4 1 15-100
HBQ,HBL 1 15-70
ED4,ED6 2 15-125
QPH 2 15-125
HED4 1 15-100
BQH,BLH 2 15-125
T(300V) (2, 3P) HED4,HED6 2 15-125
HQP 2 15-125
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250
600 HBQ,HBL 2 15-125
FD6,FXD6 2 70-250
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250
6000 JXD2-A 2 200-400
QR2,QRH2,HQR2 2 100-250 L (2, 3P)
JXD2 2 200-400
ED4 1 15-100
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400
J,R (2, 3P) ED4,ED6 2 15-125
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400
HED4 1 15-100
LD6-A 2 200-600
HED4,HED6 2 15-125
LD6 2 200-600
FD6-A,FXD6-A 2 70-250
LXD6-A 2 450-600

240 Volt Series Ratings (Continued) 240 Volt Series Ratings (Continued)
Series Main Fuse Branch Breaker Series Main Fuse Branch Breaker
LXD6 2 450-600 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400
L (2, 3P) PD6,PXD6 3 1200-1600 HJGA 3 200-400
T (3P) 1200
RD6,RXD6 3 1600-2000 NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600
ED4,ED6 3 15-125 NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600
HED4,HED6 3 15-125 NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150
FD6-A,FXD6-A 3 70-250 NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150
FD6,FXD6 3 70-250 NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250
JXD2-A 3 200-400 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250
JXD2 3 200-400 HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 L (2, 3P) HJGA 2 200-400
SJD6-A 3 200-400 NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600
100,000 6000
SJD6 3 200-400 NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600
L (3P) LD6-A 3 200-600 MD6,MXD6 2 500-800
LD6 3 200-600 HMD6,HMXD6 2 500-800
200,000
LXD6-A 3 450-600 ND6,NXD6 2 500-1200
LXD6 3 450-600 HND6,HNXD6 2 500-1200
6000
SLD6-A 3 300-600 NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150
SLD6 3 300-600 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150
SMD6 3 500-800 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250
SND6 3 500-1200 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250
PD6,PXD6 3 1200-1600 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250
SPD6 3 1400-1600 NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400
RD6,RXD6 3 1600-2000 L (3P) HJGA 3 200-400
QJ2 2 125-200 NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600
5
R (2, 3P) NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600

QJH2,QJ2H 2 125-200
200 MD6,MXD6 3 500-800
QJ2 3 125-200
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
R (3P) HMD6,HMXD6 3 500-800

QJH2,QJ2H 3 125-200
T,J (2, 3P) QJ2 2 125-225 ND6,NXD6 3 500-1200
400 HND6,HNXD6 3 500-1200
T,J (3P) QJ2 3 125-225
T,J (2, 3P) QJH2,QJ2H 2 125-225
T,J (3P) QJH2,QJ2H 3 125-225 480 Volt Fuse Series Ratings
J,R (1, 2, 3P) NGB,HGB,LGB 1 15-125 Series Main Breaker Branch Breaker
NGB,HGB,LGB 2 15-125 Connected Maximum No. of
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 Rating Type Amperes Type Poles Amperes
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 J (1,2,3P) ED4 1 60-100
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 50,000 J (2,3P) 400 ED4 2 15-100
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 J (3P) ED4 3 15-100
J,R (2, 3P)
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 J (1,2,3P) 400 ED4 1 15-50
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400 FXD6,FD6 2 70-250
HJGA 2 200-400 T,J (2,3P)
FXD6-A,FD6-A 2 70-250
600 NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600
FXD6,FD6 3 70-250
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 T,J (3P)
FXD6-A,FD6-A 3 70-250
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250
200,000 NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 J,R (2,3P)
J,R (3P) NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250
NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400
NJGA,NJJA 3 200-400
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600
HJGA 3 200-400
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150
T (1, 2 3P) NGB,HGB,LGB 1 15-125
100,000 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150
NGB,HGB,LGB 2 15-125 600
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 J,R (3P)
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150
NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250
T (2, 3P) NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400
NJGA,NJJA 2 200-400
1200 HJGA 2 200-400 JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 LD6 2 200-600
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 LD6-A 2 200-600
NGB,HGB,LGB 3 15-125 LXD6 2 450-600
T,J,R (2,3P)
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150 LXD6-A 2 450-600
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150 HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400
T (3P) HJD6-A 2 200-400
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250 HJXD6-A 2 200-400
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 HLD6 2 200-600

480 Volt Fuse Series Ratings (continued) 480 Volt Fuse Series Ratings (continued)
Series Main Breaker Branch Breaker Series Main Breaker Branch Breaker
HLD6-A 2 200-600 NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150
T,J,R (2,3P) HLXD6 2 450-600 NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250
HLXD6-A 2 450-600 NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400 HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400 NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400
LD6 3 200-600 NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600
LD6-A 3 200-600 100,000 L (3P) 600 NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600
LXD6 3 450-600 MD6,MXD6 3 500-800
600
LXD6-A 3 450-600 HMD6,HMXD6 3 500-800
T,J,R (3P) HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400 ND6,NXD6 3 500-1200
HJD6-A 3 200-400 HND6,HNXD6 3 500-1200
HJXD6-A 3 200-400 PD6,HPD6 3 1200-1600
HLD6 3 200-600 HPD6,HPXD6 3 1200-1600
HLD6-A 3 200-600
HLXD6 3 450-600
HLXD6-A 3 450-600
600 Volt Fuse Series Ratings
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250 Series Main Breaker Branch Breaker
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150 Connected Maximum No. of
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150 Rating Type Amperes Type Poles Amperes Volts
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250 JD6 (-A), JXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
T (2,3P) J, R, T
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250 HJD6 (-A), HJXD6 (-A) 2,3 200-400 600
Fuse 600
NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400 LD6 (-A), HLD6 (-A) 2,3 200-600 600
100,000 (2,&3P)
NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600 LXD6 (-A), HLXD6 (-A) 2,3 450-600 600
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600 J Fuse
600 FD6-A, FXD6-A 2,3 70-250 600
HFD6,HFXD6 3 70-250 (2,&3P)
5
NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150
NDGA,HDGA 3 50-150
NFGB,HFGB 3 70-250
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
T (3P)
NFGA,HFGA 3 70-250
NJGA,HJGA 3 200-400
NLGB,HLGB 3 400-600
NLGA,HLGA 3 400-600
JD6,JXD6 2 200-400
JD6-A,JXD6-A 2 200-400
LD6 2 200-600
100,000
LD6-A 2 200-600
1200 LXD6 2 450-600
LXD6-A 2 450-600
T,L (2,3P) HJD6,HJXD6 2 200-400
HJD6-A 2 200-400
HJXD6-A 2 200-400
HLD6 2 200-600
HLD6-A 2 200-600
HLXD6 2 450-600
HLXD6-A 2 450-600
JD6,JXD6 3 200-400
JD6-A,JXD6-A 3 200-400
LD6 3 200-600
LD6-A 3 200-600
LXD6 3 450-600
LXD6-A 3 450-600
T,L (3P)
HJD6,HJXD6 3 200-400
HJXD6-A 3 200-400
HLD6 3 200-600
HLD6-A 3 200-600
HLXD6 3 450-600
HLXD6-A 3 450-600
NDGB,HDGB 2 50-150
NDGA,HDGA 2 50-150
NFGB,HFGB 2 70-250
NFGA,HFGA 2 70-250
HFD6,HFXD6 2 70-250
NJGA,HJGA 2 200-400
L (2,3P)
600 NLGB,HLGB 2 400-600
NLGA,HLGA 2 400-600
MD6,MXD6 2 500-800
HMD6,HMXD6 2 500-800
ND6,NXD6 2 500-1200
HND6,HNXD6 2 500-1200
L (3P) NDGB,HDGB 3 50-150

IEC 947-2® AC Interrupting Ratings, 50/60 HZ KA Reference
Ampere Breaker 220/240 Volts 380/415 Volts 500 Volts
Rating Frame Breaker Type Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
15-125 ED ED6 65 17 35 9 — —
FXD6 65 33 35 18 — —
FD6 65 33 35 18 — —
HFD6 100 50 65 33 — —
70-250 FD
HFXD6 100 50 65 33 — —
HHFD6 200 100 100 50 — —
HHFXD6 200 100 100 50 — —
JXD6(A) 65 33 40 20 — —
JD6(A) 65 33 40 20 — —
HJD6(A) 100 50 65 33 — —
250-400 JD
HJXD6(A) 100 50 65 33 — —
HHJD6 200 100 100 50 — —
HHJXD6 200 100 100 50 — —
LXD6(A) 65 33 40 20 — —
LD6(A) 65 33 40 20 — —
HLD6(A) 100 50 65 33 — —
400-600 LD
HLXD6(A) 100 50 65 33 — —
HHLD6(A) 200 100 100 50 — —
HHLXD6 200 100 100 50 — —
MXD6 65 33 40 20 — —
MD6 65 33 40 20 — —
600-800 MD
HMXD6 100 50 65 33 — —
HMD6 100 50 65 33 — —
NXD6 65 33 40 20 — —
ND6 65 33 40 20 — —
800-1200 ND
5
HNXD6 100 50 65 33 — —
HND6 100 50 65 33 — —
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE

Typical Specifications Reference
General Specifications
Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with inverse
time and instantaneous tripping characteristics and shall be Siemens Sentron,
Sensitrip or approved equal.
All circuit breakers shall be CSA Certified and conform to applicable requirements of
NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1.
Solid State Sensing Specifications
As indicated on the drawings, circuit breaker frames 400
Ampere through 3200-Ampere shall have microprocessor-
based RMS sensing trip units, with the capability to
All circuit breakers shall have a quick-make, quick-break over center toggle type measure through to the 21st harmonic. Automatic
mechanism and the handle mechanism shall be trip free to prevent holding contacts operation of all circuit breaker frames 400A and larger
closed against a short circuit or sustained overload. All circuit breaker handles shall shall be obtained by means of solid state tripping elements
assume a position between “ON” and “OFF” when tripped automatically. Multi- providing inverse time delay and (instantaneous) and/or
pole circuit breakers shall be common-trip such that an overload or short circuit (short-time delay) circuit protection. Continuous current
on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. Arc extinction is to ratings shall be adjustable from 20% to 100% of the trip
be accomplished by magnetic arc chutes. All ratings are to be clearly visible. When unit rating, without the need for a rating plug. Long-time
reverse feed is indicated on the drawings, in accordance with CSA, circuit breakers delay and instantaneous trip shall be adjustable. The
with sealed trip units shall be supplied. optional short-time trip function shall have adjustable
pick-up settings, three fixed times, and I2t ramp. Circuit
breaker frames 400A and larger, and where indicated on the
drawings, shall be 100% equipment rated.
Thermal Magnetic Specifications
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all Circuit breakers 2000 Ampere and below
shall have thermal-magnetic trip units, with inverse time-current characteristics.
Integral Ground
Automatic operation of these circuit breakers shall be obtained by means of thermal- Fault Option
magnetic tripping devices located in each pole providing inverse time delay and Main and feeder circuit breakers, as indicated on the
5
instantaneous circuit protection. Circuit breakers shall be ambient compensating in drawings, shall be provided with integral ground fault
that, as the ambient temperature increases over 40°C, the circuit breaker automatically protection. Ground fault pick-up shall be adjustable from
derates itself so as to better protect its associated conductor. Thermal magnetic 20% to 70% of the circuit breakers maximum continuous
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
breakers from 250 to 2000A frames shall have thermal interchangeable trip units, with current rating. Ground fault time delay shall be adjustable
instantaneous magnetic trip settings that are adjustable and accessible from the front with three 12t ramps.
of all circuit breakers on frame sizes 250 Amperes and above. Where indicated, provide
circuit breakers CSA Certified for application at 100% of their continuous ampere
rating in their intended enclosure. Metering Option
When indicated on the drawings, solid state trip breakers
shall be furnished with a plug-in or panel mounted metering
Motor Circuit Protectors device. This device shall simultaneously display all three
phase currents, as well as average current, ground current,
Where indicated on the drawings and in the combination motor starter/motor control and phase unbalance. In addition it shall display breaker
center schedule, furnish instantaneous magnetic trip only circuit breakers for motor status, a max log, and a trip log. The trip log will retain and
short circuit protection. The magnetic trips shall be adjustable and accessible from the display date, time and type of trip (overload, short circuit or
front of all circuit breakers frames. The continuous current rating shall be between 1 ground fault) for the most recent 5 trip events.
and 800 Amperes as indicated on the drawing.
Current Limiting Specifications

Where indicated on the drawings, Siemens current limiting
circuit breakers are to be furnished. Current limiting
circuit breakers shall limit the let-through I2t to a value
less than the I2t of one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical
The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be as indicated in the specifications, and
prospective current without any fusible elements when
shown on the drawing or single line diagram. The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers
operating within its current range.
shall be at least equal to the available short circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit
breaker and correspond to the CSA Certified integrated short circuit current rating specified.
Series Connected Combination Specifications

Where protective devices are applied in series combination,
such that the prospective available fault current exceeds
Internal Accessories the interrupting rating (AIR) of the downstream protective
Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as shown on the contract devices, such combinations shall be CSA Certified
drawings. Gold plated auxiliary switches shall be supplied for PLC connection. combinations. All electrical equipment using these CSA
Internal accessories for all breakers shall be CSA Certified for field installation and Certified circuit breaker combinations shall be clearly marked.
modification.
Connection Accessories
Unless otherwise noted, Mechanical lugs shall be provided with all Molded Case
Breakers. Where indicated on the drawings, compression lugs shall be provided on
1200 Ampere frame and below circuit breakers. All compression lugs shall be supplied
by the Circuit Breaker Manufacturer. Where indicated on the drawings, CSA Certified
plug-in or rear connectors shall be supplied.

Superseded Breakers Reference
Sentron Series Note Superseded Note Superseded
CED62B015-CED62B125 a CLE62B015-CLE62B100
c CE2B015-CE2B100
CED62S100A a CLE62S100
c CE2S100
CED63A001-CED63A125 a CLE63A001-CLE63A125
CED63B015-CED63B125 a CLE63B015-CLE63B100
c CE3B015-CEB100
CED63S100A a CLE63S100 c CE3S100
HHED63B015-HHED63B125" a HED63B015-HED63B125
CFD62A150, CFD62L150, CFD62A250 a CLF62A150, CLF62A250
CFD62B070-CFD62B250 a CLF62B070-CLF62B240
c CJ2B125-CJ2B250
CFD62S250A a CLF62S250
CFD63A150, CFD63L150, CFD63A250 a CLF63A150, CLF63A250
c CJ3B125-CJ3B250
CFD63B070-CFD63B250 a CLF63B070-CLF63B250
CFD63S250A a CLF63S250
CJD62B200-CJD62B400 a CLJ62B100-CLJ62B400 d CJ2B300-CJ2B400
CJD62H400, CJD62L400 a CLJ62L400, CLJ62H400
CJD62S400A a CLJ62S400 d CJ2S400
CJD63B200-CJD63B400 a CLJ63B200-CLJ63B400 d CJ3B300-CJ3B400
CJD63H400, CJD63L400 a CLJ63L400, CLJ63H400
CJD63S400A a CLJ63S400 d CJ3S400
CPD63B120-CPD63B160 e CP3B120-CP3B160
ED21B015-ED21B100 a E21B015-E21B100 b EE1B015-EE1B100
ED22S100A a E22S100A b EE2S100
ED23S100A a E23S100A b EE3S100
ED41B015-ED41B100 a E41B015-E41B100 b EH1B015-EH1B100
ED42B015-ED42B125 a E42B015-E42B100 b EH2B015-ED2B125
ED42S100A E42S100 EH2S100
5
a b
ED43B015-ED43B125 a E43B015-E43B100 b EH3B015-EH3B100
ED43S100A a E43S100 b EH3S100
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
ED61B015-ED61B100 a E61B015-E61B100
b EF1B015-EF1B020
ED62B015-ED62B125 a E62B015-E62B100
b EF2B015-EF2B100
ED62S100A a E62S100A
b EF2S100
ED63A001-ED63A125 a E63A001-E63A125
b EF3A003, EF3J050, EF3L050-EF3A100, EF3H1
ED63B015-ED63B125 a E63B015-E63B100 b EF3B015-EF3B100
ED63S100A a E63S100A b EF3S100
HHED63B015-HHED63B125 a HED63B015-HED63B125
FD62B070-FD62B250f a F62B070, F62B250
FD63B070-FD63B250f a F63B070-F63B250
FXD62A150, FXD62L150, FXD62A250 a FJ62A150, FJ62L150-FJ62A250
b
FXD62B070-FXD62B250f a FJ62B070-FJ62B250 FJ2B070-FJ2B225
b
FXD62S250A a FJ62S250 FJ2S225
b
FXD63A150, FXD63L150, FXD63A250 a FJ63A150, FJ63L150-FJ63A250 FJ3A225
b
FXD63B070-FXD63B250f a FJ63B070-FJ63B250 b
FJ3B070-FJ3B225 FJ3S225
FXD63S250A a FJ63S250
HED41B015-HED41B100 a HE41B015-HE41B100
b HE2B015-HE2B100
HED63B015-HED63B125 a HE63B015-HE63B100 b HE3B015-HE3B100
HFD62B070-HFD62B250 a HF62B070-HF62B250
HFD63B070-HFD63B250 a HF63B070-HF63B250
HHED63B015-HHED63B125 a HED63B015-HED63B125
HJD63B200-HJD63B400 a HJ63B200-HJ63B400 b HJ3B125-HJ3B400
HLD63B250-HLD63B600 a HL63B450-HL63B600 b HL3B450-HL3B600
HMD63B500-HMD63B800 b HN3B500-HN3B800
HND63B100-HND63B120 b HK3B100-HK3B120
HPD63B120-HPD63B160 b HP3B120-HP3B160
HRD63B160-HRD63B200 b HR3B160-HR3B200
a Mechanically and electrically interchangeable. d Electricallyinterchangeable only if the system interrupting f Effective 1994 — The FD6 and FXD6 types have been
b Electrically interchangeable only, refer to sales office for capacity is less than or equal to: replaced by FD6-A and FXD6-A type thermal / magnetic
further details. 200 kA at 240V AC circuit breakers — mechanically and electrically
c Electrically interchangeable only if the system interrupting 150 kA at 480V AC interchangeable with the exception that FXD6-A and FD6-A
capacity is less than or equal to: 100 kA at 600V AC have 22kA at 600V AC ratings versus 18kA at 600V AC for
200 kA at 240V AC e Refer to local sales office for replacement information. types FXD6 and FD6.
200 kA at 480V AC
100 kA at 600V AC

Superseded Breakers General
JD62B200-JD62B400 a JLB200-JL62B400 b JL2B070-JL2B400
JD63B200-JD63B400 a JL63B200-JL63B400 b JL3B0L0-JL3B400
JXD22B200-JXD22B400 a JD22B200-JD22B400 b JD2B250-JD2B400
JXD22S400A a JD22S400 b JD2S400
JXD23B200-JXD23B400 a JD23B200-JD23B400 b JD3B250-JD3B400
JXD23S400A a JD23S400 b JD3S400
JXD62B200-JXD62B400 a JJ62B200-JJ62B400 b JJ2B250-JJ2B400
JXD62H400, JXD62L400 a JL62L400, JL62H400 b JL2L400-JL2H400
JXD62S400A a JJ62S400A
JXD63B200-JXD63B400 a JJ63B200-JJ63B400 b JJ3B200-JJ3B400
JXD63H400, JXD63L400 a JL63A400, JL63H400, JL63L400 b JL3H400, JL3L400, JL3A225
JXD63S400A a JJ63S400A
LD62B250-LD62B500 a LL63B250-LL62B600 b LL2B450-LL2B600
LD62B250-LD63B600 a LL63B250-LL63B600 b LL3B450-LL3B600
LXD62B450-LXD62B600 a LJ62B450-LJ62B600
LXD62J600, LXD62L600 b LL2H600, LL2U600, LL2X600
LXD62S600A a LJ62S600
LXD63B450-LXD63B600 a LJ63B450-LJ63B600
LXD64H600, LXD63L600 a LL63H600, LL63L600 b LL3A450, LL3H600
LXD63S600A a LJ63S600A b LL3S600
MD62B500-MD62B800 b KM2B500-KM2B800
MD63B500-MD63B800 b KM3B500-KM3B800
MXD62A800, MXD62H800, MXD62L800 b KM2A800, KM2H800, KM2L800
MXD62S800A b KM2S800
MXD63A800, MXD63H800, MXD63L800 b KM3A600, KM3H800, KM3L800
MXD63S800A b KM3S800
5
ND63B100-ND63B900 b KP3B100-KP3B900
NXD63S120A b KP3S120
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
PD63B120-PD63B160 b HP3B120-HP3B160
PXD63S160A b HP3S160
RD63B160-RD63B200 b HR3B160-HR3B200
QR22B100 – QR22B225 QJ22B060-QJ22B225
QR22B100H – QR22B225H QJ22B060H-QJ22B225H
HQR23S250HA QJ22S225
QJ23B100 – QR23B225 QJ23B060-QJ23B225
QR23B100H – QR23B225H QJ23B060H-QJ23B225H
QRH22B100 – QRH22B225 QJH22B060-QJH22B225
QRH23B100 – QRH23B225 QJH23B060-QJH23B225
HQR23S250HA QJH23S225 a
QJH22B060-QJH22B225 a QJ2H125-QJ2B225
QJH23B060-QJH23B225 a QJ3H125-QJ3H225
QJH23S225 a QJ3S225
RD63B160-RD63B200 b HR3B160-HR3B200
RXD63S200A b HR3S200
SCJD6B200LI-SCJD6B400LI a SCJD69200-SCJD69400
SCJD6B200LIG-SCJD6B400LIG a SCJD69200G-SCJD69400G
SCJD6B200LSIG-SCJD6B400LSIG a SCJD69200NGT-SCJD69400NGT
SCJD6B200LSI-SCJD6B400LSI a SCJD69200NT-SCJD69400NT
SCLD6B300LI-SCLD6B600LI a SCLD69300-SCLD69600
SCLD6B300LIG-SCLD6B600LIG a SCLD69300G-SCLD69600G
SCLD6B300LSIG-SCLD6B600LSIG a SCLD69300NGT-SCLD69600NGT
SCLD6B300LSI-SCLD6B600LSI a SCLD69300NT-SCLD69600NT
SCMD6B600LI-SCMD6B800LI a SCMD69600A-SCMD69800A
SCMD6B600LIG-SCMD6B800LIG a SCMD69600AG-SCMD69800AG
SCMD6B600LSIG-SCMD6B800LSIG a SCMD69600ANGT-SCMD69800ANGT
SCMD6B600LSI-SCMD6B800LSI a SCMD69600ANT-SCMD69800ANT
SCND6B800LI-SCND6B120LI a SCND69800A-SCND69120A
SCND6B800LIG-SCND6B120LIG a SCND69800AG-SCND69120AG
SCND6B800LSIG-SCND6B120LSIG a SCND69800ANGT-SCND69120ANGT
SCND6B800LSI-SCND6B120LSI a SCND69800ANT-SCND69120ANT
a Mechanically and electrically interchangeable. c Electrically interchangeable only if the system Electrically
d interchangeable only if the system
b Electrically
interchangeable only, refer to sales office for interrupting capacity is less than or equal to: interrupting capacity is less than or equal to:
further details. 200 kA at 240V AC 200 kA at 240V AC
200 kA at 480V AC 150 kA at 480V AC
100 kA at 600V AC 100 kA at 600V AC
e Refer to local sales office for replacement information.

Superseded Breakers General
SHJD6B200LI-SHJD6B400LI a SHJD69200-SHJD69400 a SHJ63B200-SHJ63B400G
SHJD6B200LIG-SHJD6B400LIG a SHJD69200G-SHJD69400G a SHJ63B200G-SHJ63B400G
SHJD6B200LSIG-SHJD6B400LSIG a SHJD69200NGT-SHJD69400NGT a SHJ63N200G-SHJ63N400G
SHJD6B200LSI-SHJD6B400LSI a SHJD69200NT-SHJD69400NT a SHJ63N200-SHJ63N400
SHLD6B300LI-SHLD6B600LI a SHLD69300-SHLD69600 a SHL63B300-SHL63B600
SHLD6B300LIG-SHLD6B600LIG a SHLD69300G-SHLD69600G a SHL63B300G-SHL63B600G
SHLD6B300LSIG-SHLD6B600LSIG a SHLD69300NGT-SHLD69600NG a SHL63N300G-SHL63N600G
SHLD6B300LSI-SHLD6B600LSI a SHLD69300NT-SHLD69600NT a SHL63N300-SHL63N600
SHND6B100LI-SHND6B120LI a SHND69100A-SHND69120A a SHND69100-SHND69800
SHND6B100LIG-SHND6B120LIG a SHND69100AG-SHND69120AG a SHND69100G-SHND69800G
SHPD6B140LI-SHPD6B160LI a SHPD69140-SHPD69160 b SHPF3B120-SHPF3B160
SHPD6B140LIG-SHPD6B160LIG a SHPD69140G-SHPD69160G b SHPF3B120G-SHPF3B160G
SHND6B100LSIG-SHND6B120LSIG a SHND69100NGT-SHND69800NGT a SHKF3N100G-SHKF3N800G
SHND6B100LSI-SHND6B120LSI a SHND69100NT-SHND69800NT b SHKF3N100-SHKF3N800
SJD6B200LI-SJD6B400LI a SJD69200-SJ369400 a SJL63B200-SJL63B400
SJD6B200LIG-SJD6B400LIG a SJD69200G-SJD69400G a SJL63B200G-SJL63B400G
SJD6B200LSIG-SJD6B400LSIG a SJD69200NGT-SJD69400NGT a SJL63N200G-SJL63N400G
SJD6B200LSI-SJD6B400LSI a SJD69200NT-SJD69400NT a SJL63N200-SJL63N400
SLD6B300LI-SLD6B600LI a SLD69300-SLD69600 a SLL63B300-SLL63B600
SLD6B300LIG-SLD6B600LIG a SLD69300G-SLD69600G a SLL63B300G-SLL63B600G
SLD6B300LSIG-SLD6B600LSIG a SLD69300NGT-SLD69600NGT a SLL63N300G-SLL63N600G
SLD6B300LSI-SLD6B600LSI a SLD69300NT-SLD69600NT a SLL63N300-SLL63N600
SMD6B600LI-SMD6B800LI a SMD69600A-SMD69800A a SMD69600-SMD69800
SMD6B600LIG-SMD6B800LIG a SMD69600AG-SMD69800AG a SMD69600G-SMD69800G
SMD6B600LSIG-SMD6B800LSIG a SMD69600ANGT-SMD69800ANGT a SMD69600NGT-SMD69800NGT
SMD6B600LSI-SMD6B800LSI a SMD69600ANT-SMD69800ANT a SMD69600NT-SMD69800NT
5
SND6B800LI-SND6B120LI a SND69800A-SND69120A a SND69100-SND69800

SND6B800LIG-SND6B120LIG a SND69800AG-SND69120AG a SND69100G-SND69800G
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOLDED CASE
SND6B800LSIG-SND6B120LSIG a SND69800ANGT-SND69120ANGT a SND69100NGT-SND69800NGT

SND6B800LSI-SND6B120LSI a SND69800ANT-SND69120ANT a SND69100NT-SND69800NT
SHPD6B140LI-SHPD6B160LI a SPD69140-SPD69160 b SHPF3B120-SHPF3B160
SHPD6B140LIG-SHPD6B160LIG a SPD69140G-SPD69160G b SHPF3B120G-SHPF3B160G
SHPD6B140LSIG-SHPD6B160LSIG a SPD69140NGT-SPD69160NGT b SHPF3N120-SHPF3N160G
SHPD6B140LSI-SHPD6B160LSI a SPD69140NT-SPD69160NT b SHPF3N120G-SHPF3N160G
— — d BQCC1B015-BQC1B030
— — d CC1B015-CC1B030
— — d CC2B015-CC2B030
— — d CC3B015-CC3B030
— — d EF2A003, EF2H050, EF2L050, EF2A100
— — d EF2H150, EF2L150
— — d EH1B015-EH1B100
— — d EH2B015-EH2B100
— — d EH3B015-EH3B100
— — c HE2A003, HE2H050, HE2L050-HE2A100
— — c HE3A003, HE3H050, HE3L050-HE3A100
— — c HE3B015-HE3B100
a Mechanically and electrically interchangeable. dTheseunits are no longer manufactured, and no

b Electricallyinterchangeable only, refer to sales replacement is available.
office for further details.
cThese units are for replacement purposes only.
Consult sales office for availability.

6POWER PRODUCT WL Power Circuit Breakers
Contents
Features and Benefits 6-3 WL Catalogue Numbering Overview 6-24
Breaker Assembly View 6-4 UL 489 Ratings 6-25
Product Overview 6-5 Ratings for UL 489 6-25
Draw-out Cradle Assembly View 6-6 Ratings for UL 489 (non-automatic) 6-26
Electronic Trip Units (ETUs) 6-7 UL 489 Assembled Breaker Catalogue Number 6-27
ETU Models and features 6-8 Interrupting Rating, Frame Size, Breaker Type
ETU Communication 6-8 and Frame Rating 6-27
ETU Metering function 6-9 Rating Plug 6-28
Alarm Parameters 6-10 Electric Trip Unit 6-28
Extended Relaying 6-10 Bell Alarm, Ready-to-close Contacts 6-29
Function Overview of the ETU 6-11 Shunt Trip 6-29
Factory Installed Options 6-13 Undervoltage Release 6-30
Ground Fault Module 6-13 Charging Motor, Motor Switch, Operations Counter 6-30
Key Lock-out 6-13 Close Coil, Power Metering and Communications 6-31
Operation Counter 6-13 Breaker Locks 6-31
Auxiliary Contacts 6-13 Miscellaneous Options 6-31
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) 6-13 UL 489 Assembled Breaker Catalogue Number
Bell Alarm Contact and Reset Coil 6-14 (non-automatic) 6-32
Racking Handle Key Lock 6-14 Breaking Capacity, Frame Size, Switch Type
Breaker Push-button Locks 6-14 and Frame Rating 6-32
Close Coil 6-14 Ready-to-close Auxiliary Contacts 6-32
Spring Charging Handle Lock 6-15 Shunt Trip 6-33
Rating Plugs 6-15 Undervoltage Release 6-33
Ready-to-close Contact 6-15 Charging Motor Switch and Operation Counter 6-34
Shunt Trip 6-15 Close Coil Communications 6-34
Shunt Trip (continuous duty) 6-15 Switch Locks 6-35
6
Status Contact 6-16 Miscellaneous Options 6-35
Spring Charging Motor 6-16 UL 489 Accessories 6-36
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Undervoltage Release 6-16 External Breaker Accessories 6-36
Secondary Disconnect 6-17 UL 489 Cradle Catalogue Numbers 6-37
Isolation Shutters 6-17 UL 489 Cradle Accessories 6-39
PROFIBUS or MODBUS Communications 6-17 UL 1066 Ratings 6-40
Dual Key Breaker Locking 6-17 Ratings for UL 1066 6-40
Cradle Accessories and Options 6-18 Ratings for UL 1066 (non-automatic) 6-41
Arc Chute Cover 6-18 UL 1066 Assembled Breaker Catalogue Number 6-42
TOC (truck operated contacts) 6-18 Interrupting Rating, Frame size, Breaker type
MOC (mechanism operated contacts) 6-18 and Frame Rating 6-42
Accessories 6-19 Rating Plug 6-43
Communication Power Supplies 6-19 Electronic Trip Units 6-43
Handheld Test Device 6-19 Bell Alarm, Auxiliary Contacts 6-44
Breaker Display Adapter (BDA) 6-19 Shunt Trip 6-44
Mechanical Breaker Interlocks 6-19 Undervoltage Release 6-45
Metering Current Transformer – 3-Phase Window 6-20 Charging Motor 6-45
Metering Current Transformer – Single Phase 6-20 Close Coil Power Metering and Communications 6-46
Neutral Current Sensor – 4-Wire Residual 6-20 Breaker Locks 6-46
Breaker Door Cover 6-21 Miscellaneous Options 6-46
Door Sealing Frame 6-21 UL 1066 Non-automatic Assembled Breaker
Breaker Lifting Device 6-21 Catalogue Numbers 6-47
Remote Breaker Racking Device 6-21 Breaker Capacity, Frame Size, Switch Type and
Breaker Hoist 6-21 Frame Rating 6-47
CubicleBus Modules 6-22 Auxiliary Contacts 6-48
Digital Input Module 6-22 Shunt Trip 6-48
ZSI Module 6-22 Undervoltage Release 6-48
Analog Output Module 6-22 Charging Motor, Motor Switch, Operations Counter 6-49
Pre-assembled CubicleBus Communication Cables 6-22 Close Coil, Communications 6-49
Fixed-Mounted Breaker Bus Connectors 6-23 Switch Locks 6-50
Primary lug connector kits 6-23 Miscellaneous Options 6-50
6POWER PRODUCT WL Power Circuit Breakers
Contents
UL 1066 Breaker External Accessories 6-50 Options and Accessories 6-117
UL 1066 Cradle Catalogue Numbers 6-51 Mushroom Head Emergency Open Button
UL 1066 Accessories 6-52 Door Sealing Frame
Secondary Terminal Assignments 6-53 Plexiglass Breaker Cover
General Wiring Schematic 6-54 Breaker Lifting Device
Ground Fault Setting 6-56 Breaker Manual Charging Handle Replacement
Metering Voltage Details 6-57 Breaker Shaft Extension
UL 489 Fixed Breaker Dimensions 6-58 Breaker Maintenance Grease
UL 489 Draw-out Breaker Dimensions 6-74 Breaker Replacement Feet
UL 489 Door Sealing Frame Dimensions 6-88 WL Circuit Breaker Certified Test Report
Ul 1066 Draw-out Breaker Dimensions 6-89 Wire for N + GF CTs from X8.11 & 12 to Electronic Trip
UL 1066 Draw-out Fuse Carriage Dimensions 6-90
Cubicle-bus Internal Wiring
UL 1066 Door Sealing Frame Dimensions 6-102
Return to Factory Shipping Cartons for Breaker Only
UL 1066 Draw-out Dimensions 6-103
Communication Components 6-118
Spare/Replacement Parts Breaker Communications Module
Breaker Status Sensor
Trip Unit Options 6-104 External I/O CubicleBus Module
Rating Plugs 6-104 Cables for CubicleBus Modules
Trip Unit Test Equipment 6-105 External Communications Devices
24V DC Power Supply 6-105
Technical Support Literature
Draw-out Cradle Assembly 6-106
Typical Certified Test Report
Secondary Disconnects 6-106
Quick Reference Guide
Stationary Primary Bus-bar Disconnect Terminals 6-107
Cradle Arc Chute Cover 6-107 Ratings for 4 Pole UL 1066 (ANSI C37) Circuit Breakers
MOC (mechanism operated aux. contacts) 6-107 Frame size 2 6-122
TOC (truck operated aux. contacts) 6-107 Frame size 3 6-123
Isolation Shutters 6-107 Ratings for UL 1066 Non-automatic switches 6-123
Locking Devices 6-108 UL 1066 Listed Catalogue Number 6-124
6
Mechanical Interlock Devices 6-108 Interrupting rating, frame size, breaker type
Metering CT Units 6-109 and frame rating
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
3-Phase Metering CTs 6-109 Rating Plug and Electronic Trip Units (ETU) 6-125
Single Phase Metering CTs 6-109 Bell alarm, breaker ready-to-close, auxiliary contacts 6-126
Ground Fault and Current Sensors 6-110 UL 1066 Listed Non-automatic Catalog Number
Circuit Breaker Accessories 6-111 Undervoltage Release (with or without time delay)
Shunt Trip Releases 6-111 or 2nd Shunt Trip 6-127
Auxiliary Switches 6-111 Charging Motor, Motor switch, Operations Counter 6-127
Bell Alarm Switches 6-111 Close Coil, Power Metering and Communications 6-128
Ready-to-close switch 6-111 Breaking Capacity, Frame Size, Switch Type and
Operation Counter 6-111 Frame Rating 6-129
Undervoltage Trip Release 6-112 Breaker Ready-to-close Auxiliary Contacts 6-130
Signal Contractor for UV Trip 6-112 Shunt Trip 6-130
Closing Coil 6-112 Undervoltage Release (with or without time delay)
Spring Charging Motor 6-113 or 2nd Shunt Trip 6-130
UL 1066 Internal Contact Replacement Kit 6-113 Charging Motor, Motor Switch, Operations Counter 6-131
Internal Phase Sensor 6-113
Close Coil, Communications 6-131
UL1066 Circuit Breaker Arc Chute Replacement Kit 6-113
Switch Locks 6-132
Circuit Breaker Finger Cluster Replacement Kit 6-114
Miscellaneous Options 6-132
Circuit Breaker Bus Connectors (fixed mounted) 6-114
UL 1066 Fixed Mount Breaker Vertical Connector Kits 6-132
Circuit Breaker Fix Mount Optional Metric Hardware 6-114
Interrupting Rating, Frame Size and Frame Rating 6-133
Options and accessories 6-115
Arc Chute Cover 6-134
Locking devices/sealing caps & padlocking provisions 6-115
Door Locks and Mechanical 6-134
Breaker locking devices 6-116
Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOCs) 6-134
Fuse Kits 6-116
Connector and Heater Options 6-134
WL Fuse Replacement Kits 6-116
Frame Sizes / Dimension Drawings 6-135
WL Circuit Breaker
Introduction Overview
Businesses are becoming increasingly more intelligent about Applications
the way they consume energy. Industrial and Commercial
energy consumers are continuously looking for practical and The WL line of power breakers are protecting electrical
efficient methods of measuring their energy usage while distribution applications like waste water treatment, industrial
simultaneously ensuring any possible downtime is minimized. plants, hospitals, transportation systems and data centers
At Siemens we understand those needs and we have just to name a few. Yes, mission critical applications trust the
developed products and solutions to help energy consumers Siemens WL circuit breakers to operate safe and reliably. The
achieve their goals. compact modular design provides higher power density in a
section or line-up of distribution gear. Components like
One of our solutions begins with our world-class WL Circuit spring-charging motor, shunt trips, and trip units are common
Breakers. The WL line-up of breakers developed by Siemens across the entire line of breakers. That allows users the
combines decades of patented circuit breaker protection ability to stock fewer spare parts or exchange options if
experience with the latest technology in circuit breaker necessary. Common options and accessories also make
performance and communication. learning how to order, maintain and operate the WL much
easier than most breakers on the market today.
A good example of our innovative technology is, Dynamic
Arc-Flash Sentry® (DAS). DAS is a solution that allows users WL circuit breakers are manufactured and performance
the ability to automatically lower the down-stream available tested to comply with UL489 and UL1066 standards for
fault current when facility personnel are nearby the electrical listed products.
equipment. Helping our customers provide a safer work-place
environment is an important part to our overall solutions. UL/CSA 489 Listed type WL low voltage insulated case
circuit breakers are generally intended to provide service
Other valuable aspects that complement our solutions are entrance, feeder, and branch circuit protection in accordance
the WL circuit breaker’s ability to gather energy and with UL/CSA 489 Standard for Safety for Molded-Case Circuit
environmental data and send it to a central or remote Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
monitoring network system. You’ll find these capabilities and Enclosures. This versatile family of insulated case circuit
more when you take a closer look at WL circuit breakers breakers is acceptable for use within low-voltage
features within this guide. switchboards (i.e. UL 891), low-voltage motor control centers
(i.e. UL 845), and other types of industrial control equipment
6
WL Circuit Breaker (i.e. UL 508 series). Certain options and maintenance
capability may be limited in comparison to the UL1066 Listed
Features and Benefits
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
circuit breakers. UL file numbers E231263, E236091 and
E236299 apply.
b 3 frame sizes: Three frame sizes that cover a wide range
of continuous current ratings allow for flexible exchange of
UL 1066 Listed type WL low voltage power circuit breakers
breakers to other compartments and reducing the footprint
are generally intended to provide main and feeder circuit
of the breaker enclosures.
protection in accordance with UL1066 Standard for Safety for
b Ready-to-close indication: Built-in check points of the Low-Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
breakers mechanical operator provide an additional layer
Enclosures. Presently, there is not an equivalent CSA standard
of safety and external controls by inhibiting the breaker
to UL 1066, and therefore these circuit breakers do not carry
from closing until certain conditions are satisfied.
a CSA listing mark. These circuit breakers are constructed in
b 100% rating: All model breakers are designed for compliance with ANSI/IEEE C37.13, and performance tested in
continuous operation at their maximum current ratings
accordance with ANSI C37.50. Throughout this document any
without de-rating the frame.
reference to UL1066 will also mean ANSI C37 Certified. This
b High-efficiency: Low loss of energy flowing through the versatile family of power circuit breakers is acceptable for use
breaker reduces the operating costs.
within low voltage switchgear (i.e. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1, ANSI/
b Bi-directional feed: Top or bottom supply feed without any IEEE C37.20.7, and UL 1558), low voltage switchboards (i.e. UL
hardware configuration changes.
891), low voltage motor control centers (i.e. UL 845), and
b Rogowski coil sensing: Full range sensing without tap other types of industrial control equipment (i.e. UL 508 series).
terminals or exchanging sensors to match load change
Certain options and ratings may be limited may be limited in
requirements.
comparison to the UL/CSA 489 Listed circuit breakers. UL file
b Modular trip unit: Upgrading to a higher or lower current numbers E240124, E240232, E240233 and E236299 apply.
rating, adding ground fault, power monitoring or
UL file numbers E231263, E236091 and E236299 apply.
communication is cost effective and expandable using
separately available modules.
b Common accessories:
Interchangeable accessories for all frame sizes makes
upgrading easy and readily available.

WL Circuit Breaker
Breaker Assembly View Overview
6
5
1
Exterior Breaker Features

1.Secondary contacts 4.Integral racking handle with position indicator
2.Charging handle 5.Trip unit with LCD
3.Centralized operator panel 6.Arc chutes
12 13 1
6
11
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
2
10
3
4
9
8 5
7 6
Interior Breaker Features

1 Remote closing coil 8 Optional ground fault module with alarm
2 Second shunt trip or UV release and trip functions
3 Auxiliary switch 9 Interchangeable current rating plug
4 Automatic charging motor  Breaker status sensor (BSS)
5 Operation counter Bell alarm contact with remote reset
6 Operating mechanism  Shunt trip coil
7 Electronic trip unit (ETU)  Ready-to-close-contact

WL Circuit Breaker
Superior Individual Products for Low-voltage Power Distribution Systems Overview
3 2 6 7
4 5 8
9
1
21 11
25 10
19
22 18
23
12
24
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
17 15 13
20
16 14
1 Guide Frame (for drawout version only)  Auxiliary Switch Block  Remote Reset
2 Vertical to Horizontal BUS Connector  Door Sealing Frame  Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) for
3 Position Signaling Switch  Interlocking Set Base Plate Internet Connection
4 Breaker / Guide Frame Grounding  Protective Cover for OPEN/CLOSE Multi Angle LCD Module
Contact Buttons Ground Fault Protection Module
5 Shutter (locking)  Multiple Key Locking Accessories Rating Plug
6 MODBUS or PROFIBUS Communications  Single Bolt Motor Operator Installation Metering Function (+ wave forms
7 External CubicleBUS I/O Module  Operations Counter and harmonics)
8 Plug-In Open and Closed Solenoids)  Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) Circuit Breaker
9 Multiple Secondary Connections  Complete Trip Unit Family

WL Circuit Breaker
Draw-out Cradle Assembly View Overview
3 2
Standard cradle
1 Stationary secondary disconnect
2 Primary disconnects
3 Cradle frame assembly for draw-out breakers
6
1
7
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
6 2
Cradle accessories
1 Mechanical interlock (not shown) 5 Breaker position switches (TOC)
2 Isolation shutters 6 Communication module location (COM 16 or COM 15)
3 Mechanism operated contact switches (MOC) 7 Optional arc chute cover (not shown)
4 Dual key-lock location

WL Circuit Breaker
Electronic Trip Unit (ETU) General
Power system protection is necessary to treat common Short-time trip
types of abnormal occurrences, such as overloads or faults The short-time pickup adjustment is used to set the level of
that can lead to electrical power system failure. high current the breaker will carry for a short period of time
without tripping. This adjustment is set in multiples of the
The methods for detecting and clearing such abnormalities
value of the rating plug (Ir). Together with the short-time
and restore to normal operation is an engineered technique.
delay, this adjustment allows downstream breakers time to
Adequate protection requires constant measurements of
clear short circuit faults without tripping upstream breakers.
certain system quantities, such as voltages and currents,
Short-time delay is used to set the time interval the breaker
comparing those system quantities, or some combination of
will wait before responding to the current value selected by
the quantities, to a threshold setting computed by a systems
short-time pickup. There are two modes of operation: fixed
engineer and set into an electronic trip unit like those
and I2t. The I2t delay has the characteristic of being
available on the WL breakers. It’s equally important for
inversely proportional to the square of the magnitude of the
power system protection to perform under normal operating
current. This means higher overcurrent conditions have
conditions. If the above thresholds are set too low the
shorter delays. An Alarm LED indicator may flash during the
power may be interrupted unnecessarily causing loss of
delay period and a separate “Trip S” indicator will turn on if
productivity or safety provisions.
the breaker trips on short-time function.
The WL circuit breaker offers a practical means of setting
power system protection through vast selectivity available in its Instantaneous trip
Electronic Trip Unit (ETU). WL ETUs have a wide range of The instantaneous pickup adjustment is used to set the
protective settings for implementing simple or complex current level at which the breaker will trip without an
coordination schemes and configuring reliable system protection. intentional time delay. Non-delayed tripping as a result of
severe over-current minimizes potential damage to the
ETU Enhanced Features electrical system and equipment.
b Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP): Allows the Ground fault

entire range of WL ampacities to be applied at the The ground fault pickup adjustment is used to set the level
withstand rating of the breaker with minus 0% tolerance; of ground current at which circuit interruption will be
that means no instantaneous override whatsoever. EIP initiated.
further enables the circuit breaker to be applied up to the
full interrupting rating of the breaker on systems where
6
Together with ground fault delay, this adjustment allows
the available fault current exceeds the withstand rating, selective tripping between main and feeder or downstream
even with LS-only trip units.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
breakers.
b Dynamic Arc-Flash Sentry (DAS): Allows you the ability to
execute a faster coordinated trip condition should an arc The ground fault delay adjustment is used to set the time
fault event occur while personnel are within the arc flash interval (in seconds) the breaker will wait before responding
boundary. When the presence of personnel is no longer in once the ground fault pickup level has been reached. The
the arc flash boundary, DAS will default back to maintaining available ground fault delay settings available are: inverse
your selective trip coordination through time delay functions. time (I2t) or fixed delay.
This is like toggling between two trip units on one breaker.
DAS can be activated by a simple contact closer, so a wide
range of activation devices can be used to enable DAS.
b Selectable I4t: ETU745 and 776 make it possible to switch
over from an I2t to an I4t inverse-time function for overload
protection. This selectivity increases optimization of
coordinated overload protection when overload fuse
protection is also provided.
ETU Basic Functions

Long-time trip
The long-time delay adjustment is used to set the tripping
delay of the circuit breaker based on the magnitude of the
overcurrent condition (6 times lr). For example if the rating
plug is 2000 amps and the long-time delay is set to 10
seconds, a fault current of 12,000 amps (6 x 2000) will
cause the breaker to trip after 10 seconds. Long-time is an
inverse of I2t ramp function. This means the higher the
current, the shorter the time the circuit breaker will remain
closed. An Alarm LED indicator will flash during the delay
period and a separate “Trip L” indicator may turn on if the
breaker trips on long-time function.

WL Circuit Breaker
Electronic Trip Unit (ETU) Selection
ETU Models and Features

Features and Characteristics ETU745 ETU748 ETU776
Long-time overcurrent protection (L) X X X
Short-time delayed overcurrent protection (S) X X X
Instantaneous overcurrent protection (I) X X
Neutral conductor protection (N) X X X
Ground fault protection (G) O O O
Selectable neutral protection X X X
Defeatable short-time protection X — X
Defeatable instantaneous protection X — X
Selectable thermal memory X — X
Zone selective interlocking X — X
Selectable I2t or fixed short-time delay X X X
Adjustable instantaneous pick-up X X X
Selectable I2t or I4t long-time delay X X X
Adjustable short-time delay and pick-up X X X
Selectable and adjustable neutral protection X X X
Dual protective setting capability — — X
Dynamic arc-flash sentry (DAS) — — X
Extended instantaneous protection (EIP) — — X
Parameterization by rotary switches — —
Parameterization by communication (absolute values) — — X
Parameterization by menu/keypad (absolute values) — — X
6
Remote parameterization of the alarm functions — — X

Remote parameterization of the relay functions — — X
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Alphanumeric display O O X
Graphical display — — X
Power metering function O O O
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP O O O
Communication via the MODBUS O O O
Communication via the Ethernet (BDA) O O O
(X) = Standard Feature, (O) = Optional Feature
ETU Communication
The ETU uses a Siemens proprietary device master file (GSD) can be used The WL HTML or TCP/IP converter
communication network called for integrating WL circuit breakers in a is called ‘BDA.’ The BDA is a
CubicleBus. The CubicleBus network PROFIBUS-DP network. The advantage microcomputer with an embedded Linux
ensures all Siemens devices are able to of this joint communication profile is operating system running a web server
transmit data reliably and efficiently. The that the same software can be used application. The HTML pages and JAVA
ETU can not be connected directly any for automation, monitoring and control codes are stored internal to the BDA
other network so the use of converters systems. and can be accessed with an external
are necessary to allow communication PC web browser. All of the viewable
between the ETU and the outside world. The WL ModBus converter is model web pages are stored in the BDA. The
The WL has three types of converters ‘COM16’. The COM16 device enables BDA communicates to the ETU through
to allow communication between the the WL breaker to be connected to any a front connected ribbon-cable. The PC
ETU and computer type equipment. The Modbus master network. Universal accesses the BDA through an integral
three converts are: Modbus mapping can be used to allow DB-9 serial port or an RJ45 Ethernet port.
b PROFIBUS (COM15) custom monitoring and controls with
b ModBus (COM16) a centralized monitoring system. The All three converters require a 24VDC
b HTML or TCP/IP (BDA) Modbus port is configured for RS485 Class 2 power supply. See External
connectivity and can easily be daisy- Accessories for more information on
The WL PROFIBUS converter is model chained to several WL breakers to create available power supplies.
‘COM15.’ The COM15 device acts as an a serial-network suitable for connecting
interface between the WL breaker and to a LAN or WAN network.
the information environment. A joint

WL Circuit Breaker
Power metering function
In addition to excellent protection capabilities, the WL ETU
has unparalleled power metering functionality. True RMS
current sensing for metering is obtained from the same
current sensors used for overload protection. ETU power
metering can measure the following:
Measured Value Value Range Accuracy
Currents Ia, Ib, Ic, In 30 ... 8000A ± 1%
Ground-fault current Ig (measure with external Gnd transformer) 100 ... 1200A ± 5%
Line-to-line voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca 80 ... 120% Vn ± 1%
Line-to-neutral voltages Van, Vbn, Vcn 80 ... 120% Vn ± 1%
Average value of phase-to-phase voltages V L-L AVG 80 ... 120% Vn ± 1%
Apparent power kVA per phase 13 ... 8000kVA ± 2%
Total apparent power KVA 13 ... 24000kVA ± 2%
Active power kW per phase -8000 ... 8000kW ± 3% (power factor > 0.6)
Total active power kW total -24000 ... 24000kVA ± 3% (power factor > 0.6)
Reactive power kvar -6400 ... 6400kvar ± 4% (power factor > 0.6)
Total reactive power kvar -20000 ... 20000kvar ± 4% (power factor > 0.6)
Power factor per phase -0.6 ... 1 ... 0.6 ± 0.04
Power factor total -0.6 ... 1 ... 0.6 ± 0.04
Demand of currents Ia, Ib, Ic 30 ... 8000A ± 1%
Average demand of 3-phase current 30 ... 8000A ± 1%
Demand kWD per phase 13 ... 8000kW ± 3% (power factor > 0.6)
kW demand 3-phase active power kWD total 13 ... 8000kW ± 3% (power factor > 0.6)
kVA demand kVA total 13 ... 8000kVA ± 2%
kVAR demand kVAR per phase 13 ... 8000kVA ± 2%
kVAR demand total -24000 ... 24000kvar ± 4% (power factor > 0.6)
kWhr imported 1 ... 10000MWh ± 2%
kWhr exported 1 ... 10000MWh ± 2%
6
kVARh imported 1 ... 10000Mvarh ± 4%
kVARh exported 1 ... 10000Mvarh ± 4%
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Frequency 15 ... 440 Hz ± 0.1 Hz
Total harmonic distortions for current and voltage 2 ... 100% ± 3% from the meas. range up to the 29th harmonic
Phase unbalance for current and voltage 2 ... 150% ± 1%
Potential transformers (PTs) are required to step down the Event log
supply voltage to a level that is suitable for local input The event log is very extensive. Information regarding the
connection to the breaker. PTs must be wired to the list of events can be found in the WL operation manual or
secondary connections of the breaker and configured for communication guide. Some of the event log categories are:
three-phase, three-wire or three-phase, four-wire supply b Warnings
system. The measured values can be sent to a central b Trip Logs
database for future power analysis or consumption reports. b Set-points
b Maintenance Detail
Metering is not field installable – it must be configured in b CubicleBus Conditions
the initial breaker purchase. b Waveform Displays

WL Circuit Breaker
Alarm Parameters
The metering function includes the following alarm set-point functions:
Alarm Function Setting Range Possible Delay
Overcurrent 3 ... 10000A 0 ... 255s
Overcurrent – ground fault 3 ... 10000A 0 ... 255s
Overcurrent – N-conductor 3 ... 10000A 0 ... 255s
Phase unbalance – current 5 ... 50% 0 ... 255s
Demand – current 3 ... 10000A 0 ... 255s
Total harmonic distortion – current 0 ... 50% 5 ... 255s
Undervoltage 100...1200V 0 ... 255s
Overvoltage 200...1200V 0 ... 255s
Phase unbalance – voltage 5 ... 50% 0 ... 255s
Total harmonic distortion – voltage 0 ... 50% 5 ... 255s
Crest factor 0.01 ... 25.5% 0 ... 255s
Form factor 0.01 ... 25.5% 0 ... 255s
Active power in normal direction 1 ... 10000kW 0 ... 255s
Active power in reverse direction 1 ... 10000kW 0 ... 255s
Leading power factor -0.999 ... 1 0 ... 255s
Lagging power factor -0.999 ... 1 0 ... 255s
Demand – active power 1 ... 10000kW 0 ... 255s
Apparent power 1 ... 10000kVA 0 ... 255s
Reactive power in normal direction 1 ... 10000kvar 0 ... 255s
Reactive power in reverse direction 1 ... 10000kvar 0 ... 255s
Demand – apparent power 1 ... 10000kVA 0 ... 255s
Demand – reactive power 1 ... 10000kvar 0 ... 255s
Under frequency 40 ... 70Hz 0 ... 255s
Over frequency 40 ... 70Hz 0 ... 255s
Extended Relaying
Protective relays included with the metering function can monitor the following criteria and initiate a trip if the values
6
are exceeded.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Protective Relay Function ANSI Device Number Setting Range Possible Delay
Current unbalance 46 5 ... 50% 1 ... 15s
Total harmonic distortion - current 81 THDC 0 ... 50% 5 ... 15s
Voltage unbalance 47 5 ... 50% 1 ... 15s
Undervoltage 27 100 ... 1100V 1 ... 15s
Overvoltage 59 200 ... 1200V 1 ... 15s
Total harmonic distortion - voltage 81 THDV 0 ... 50% 5 ... 15s
Direction of phase rotation 47N — —
Active power in normal direction 32 1 ... 10000kW 1 ... 15s
Active power in reverse direction 32R 1 ... 10000kW 1 ... 15s
Under frequency 81U 40 ... 70Hz 1 ... 15s
Over frequency 81O 40 ... 70Hz 1 ... 15s

WL Circuit Breaker
ETU Function Overview
Basic Functions ETU745
Long-time overcurrent protection
Function can be disabled —
Setting range IR = In x ... 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1
Switch-selectable overload protection (I2t or I4t dependent function)
L
Setting range of time delay class tR at I2t (seconds)
Setting range of time delay tR at I4t (seconds) 2, 3.5, 5.5, 8, 10, 14, 17, 21, 25, 30
Thermal memory
Phase loss sensitivity Set tsd =20 ms (M)
Neutral protection
N Function can be disabled (via slide switch)
N-conductor setting range IN = In x ... 0.5 ... 1
Short-time overcurrent protection
Function can be disabled (via rotary switch)
Setting range Isd = In x ... 0.02 (M), 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, OFF
S
Setting range of time delay tsd, fixed (constant time in seconds) 0.02 (M), 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, OFF
Setting range of time delay Isd at I2t (seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) function Per CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Function can be disabled
I
Extended Instantaneous Protection Instantaneous is active when disabled
Setting range Ii = In x ... 1.5, 2.2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 0.8 x Icw = Max.
Ground fault protectionb (field installable module)
Trip and alarm function
Detection of the ground fault current by residual summing method
Detection of the ground fault current by direct sensing method
G G Setting range of the Ig for trip A, B, C, D, E (100 ... 1200A)
Setting range of the Ig for alarm A, B, C, D, E (100 ... 1200A)
6
Setting range of the time delay tg (fixed seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
Setting range time delay tg at I2t 0.4, 0., 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
G
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
ZSI ground function Per CubicleBUS module
a Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP) allows the WL breaker to be applied at the withstand rating Available
of the breaker with minus 0% tolerance; that means no instantaneous override whatsoever. EIP further – Not available
enables the circuit breaker to be applied up to the full instantaneous rating of the breaker on systems o Optional
where the available fault current exceeds the withstand rating.
b Ground Fault Module cannot be removed after installation.

WL Circuit Breaker
ETU Function Overview
Basic Functions ETU748 ETU776
Function can be disabled — —
Setting range IR = In x ... 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1 40-100% of In (Adjustable in Ampsa)
Switch-selectable overload protection (I2t
or I4t dependent function)
L Setting range of time delay class tR at I2t
2, 3.5, 5.5, 8, 10, 14, 17, 21, 25, 30 2...30 (step; 0.1s)
(seconds)
Setting range of time delay tR at I4t
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1...5 (step; 0.1s)
(seconds)
Thermal memory (via slide switch) (on/off via keypad or communications)
Phase loss sensitivity at tsd =20 ms (M) (on/off via keypad or communications)
Neutral protection (via slide switch)
N Function can be disabled 0.5 ... 1 OFF (on/off via keypad or communications)
N-conductor setting range IN = In x ... 0.5 ... 2 OFF
Short-time overcurrent protection (via rotary switch)
Function can be switched ON/OFF 1.25, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 (on/off via keypad or communications)
Setting range Isd = In x ... (via rotary switch) 1.25... 0.9 x Icw = max. (step: 10A)
Setting range of time delay tsd, fixed
M, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 M, 0.08... 04, OFF (step: 0.001s)
(seconds)
S
Switch-selectable short-time delay
short-circuit protection (via rotary switch) (via keypad or communications)
(I2t dependent function)
Setting range of time delay Isd at I2t
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1... 0.4 (step 0.001s)
(seconds)
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) function per CubicleBUS module Per CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous overcurrent protectionb
Function can be disabled,
Extended Instantaneous Protection — (via keypad or communications)
I
is enabled when OFF
Setting range Ii = In x ... Ii = Icw = EIP 1.5 ... 0.8 x Ics = Max OFF = Icw = EIP
6
Ground fault protectionc (field installable module) (field installable module)

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Detection of the ground fault current by
residual summing method
G Detection of the ground fault current by
direct sensing method
G Setting range of the Ig for trip A, B, C, D, E A... E (step: 1A)
Setting range of the Ig for alarm A, B, C, D, E A... E (step: 1A)
Setting range of the time delay tg (seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 0.1...0.5 (step: 0.001s)
Switch-selectable ground fault protection
(I2t / fixed)
Setting range time delay tg at I2t 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 0.1...0.5 (step: 0.001s)
ZSI Ground Function Per CubicleBUS module Per CubicleBUS module
a NOTE: ETU776 settings via WLBDA, Modbus, or Profibus: 1A steps d NOTE: M = indicates phase loss sensitivity is enabled. LT pick-up reduced 80%
Via ETU Keypad: Below 1000A: 10A steps when phase unbalance > 50%. ST = 20 ms
1000A-1600A: 50A steps Key pad = Direct input at the trip unit.
1600A-10000A: 100A steps
Above 10000A, 1000A steps Available
b Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP) allows the WL breaker to be applied at the – Not available
withstand rating of the breaker with minus 0% tolerance; that means no instantaneous o Optional
override whatsoever. EIP further enables the circuit breaker to be applied up to the full
instantaneous rating of the breaker on systems where the available fault current
exceeds the withstand rating.
c Ground Fault Module cannot be removed after installation.

WL Circuit Breaker
Factory Installed Optionsa Characteristics
Breaker Mounted Options
Ground Fault Module Auxiliary Contacts
The ground fault module (GFM) is used to detect current flow- Auxiliary contacts can be used to provide interlocking control
ing through the grounding conductors which may present a or remote indication of the breakers main contact position
hazardous condition. The module can be field installed but (open or closed breaker). The Normally Open (NO) contacts
can’t be removed once installed. Residual sensing by phase are open when the breakers main contacts are open. The
vector summation or direct sensing can be selected on the Normally Closed (NC) contacts are closed when the brea-
module or via the setup of the ETU776. Ground fault modules kers main contacts are open. The contacts are wired indivi-
may be ordered as alarm only or as alarm and trip. Alarm will dually to the secondary disconnects for user connectivity.
provide a visual and communication notification. Alarm and trip See breaker wiring diagram for supply terminal locations.
model will trip the breaker in addition to alarm notification.
Available Contact Configurations 2NO and 2NC or 4NO and 4NC

Key Lock-out AC Voltage 240VAC 50/60Hz
To lock the WL breaker in the “Open” position, an optional key- Operation Continuous Current 10A
lock can be installed in the breaker. The key cylinder and lock- Making Current 30A
out assembly are mounted in the breaker and accessible Breaking Current 3A
through a knockout in the breaker front cover. The key is remo- DC Voltage 24, 125, 250V DC
vable only when the breaker is locked open. If a custom, coor- Operation Continuous Current 5A
dinated key/cylinder is required, order the lock provision-only. Making Current 1.1A @ 24 or 125VDC, .55A @250VDC
The lock cylinder and matched key must then be ordered sepa- Breaking Current 1.1A @ 24 or 125VDC, .55A @250VDC
rately from the respective lock manufacturer.
6
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
The compatible Kirk cylinder lock part number is C-900-301. BSS is an integrated circuit device that measures the internal
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
The compatible Superior cylinder lock part number is C-900. breaker temperature, monitors breaker main contact position
(open or closed), bell alarm status, shunt trip status, breaker rea-
dy-to-close and closing spring charged status. All status
conditions and information is transmitted through the
CubicleBus network as real-time data. A COM16 (Modbus),
COM15 (PROFIBUS) or a BDA (breaker display adapter) accesso-
ry can be used to export the BSS CubicleBus data to external
computer or monitoring equipment. See breaker wiring diagram
for supply terminal locations. Included with COM15 and COM16.
Operation Counter
For monitoring the number of breaker operations (open and
close) a numerical operations counter is available. This counter
is only suitable for breakers equipped with the spring-charging
motor option. The counter mounts to the motor assembly and
will register manual and electrical breaker operations. Counter
is non-resettable up to 100,000 operations. Counter ships with
available pre-service operations for field setting to zero.
Operating Voltage 24V

Peak Inrush Current 110mA
Max. Continuous Current 40mA
Ambient Operation Temperature -25 to 70ºC
a See page 106 for field install part numbers.

WL Circuit Breaker
Bell Alarm Contact and Reset Coil Breaker Push-Button Lock-outs
The bell alarm contacts are mechanically activated by the trip A finger or hand tool shroud option can be added to the
unit solenoid. If a breaker trip condition occurs, the bell alarm breaker front cover to isolate the open and close buttons
form-C contacts will change state closing or opening a user from unintentional use. Shrouds may be used in combination
circuit wired to the secondary terminal block. The contacts can or like configuration.
be locally reset to their original position by manually resetting
the breaker trip button or through the use of a reset coil that To isolate the open and close buttons from unintentional use,
resets the contacts remotely. See breaker wiring diagram for transparent padlock covers can be installed in lieu of the
supply terminal locations. Non-automatic (manual) reset trip shroud option. Two padlocks may be used with a latch diame-
units can not be used with the reset coil option. ter of 3/8 inch maximum (padlocks by others).
Available Contact Close Coil

Configurations Coil Ratings To remotely close the WL breaker, a close coil must be used
Remote Voltage 240VAC 50/60Hz with a momentary electrical source. Only one close coil can
Reset Coil Continuous Current 5A be used per breaker. Charging springs must be charged and
AC Making Current 8A breaker open prior to activating the close coil. See breaker wi-
Operation Breaking Current 5A ring diagram for supply terminal location.
Remote Voltage 24, 48,125 or 250VDC
Reset Coil Continuous Current 5A
6
DC 0.4A @ 24, 48,125VDC,

Making Current
Operation 0.2A @250VDC
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
0.4A @ 24, 48,125VDC,

Breaking Current
0.2A @250VDC
Racking Handle Key Lock

A draw-out breaker can be key locked (optional) or padlocked
(standard not shown) in three racking positions; connect,
test or disconnect. Key lock cylinders are available in Kirk or
Superior types and uniquely keyed.
Close 120VAC Range 104 - 127VAC

Coil 240VAC Range 208 - 254
AC Power Consumption 120W for 50ms (5% duty cycle)
Operation Breaker closing time 50ms from point of signal
24V DC 14 - 28V DC
48V DC 28 - 56V DC
Close Coil 125V DC 70 - 140VDC
DC 250V DC 140 - 280VDC
Operation Power Consumption 120W for 50ms (5% duty cycle)
Breaker closing time 50ms from point of signal
a See page 6-106 for field install part numbers.

WL Circuit Breaker
Spring Charging Handle Lock Shunt Trip
An optional padlock provision to prevent manual charging of The shunt trip opens the circuit breaker instantly when ener-
the closing springs can be installed on the breaker front cover. gized by a remote power source. An auxiliary contact is wired
This provision does not prevent electric charging of the closing in series with the shunt trip to remove the current from the
springs and the breaker can be mechanically closed if the clo- coil after the breaker is opened. Two shunt trip coils may be
sing spring is charged prior to padlocking the charging handle. installed in a breaker if dual supply sources or control circuits
One padlock may be used with a latch diameter of 3/8 inch are required. An optional status contact may be selected with
maximum (padlock by others). the second shunt trip to provide a signaling condition that the
shunt trip has been activated. Status contact not available with
communication option. Status condition is sent via communi-
cation instead of contact.
Rating Plugs
The rating plug is required to limit the downstream load cur-
rent. Use of a rating plug that exceeds the breaker frame ra-
ting will result in a trip unit error and will trip the breaker auto-
matically. Rating plugs are field interchangeable. Trip coil 120VAC range 104 - 127VAC
AC 240VAC range 208 - 254VAC
operation
Power consumption 120W for 50ms (5% duty cycle)
Min. closing time 50ms from point of signal
Trip coil 24VDC range 14 - 28VDC
DC 48VDC range 28 - 56VDC
6
operation
125VDC range 70 - 140VDC
250VDC range 140 - 280DVC
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Power consumption 120W for 50ms (5% duty cycle)
Min. closing time 50ms from point of signal
Shunt Trip (continuous duty)

Ready-to-close Contact The continuous duty shunt trip is available for 100% duty cycle
In addition to the standard “ready-to-close” visual indicator on and can hold the WL breaker open during an electrical or ma-
the WL breaker, an optional contact can be added to remotely nual “close breaker” attempt (i.e. lock-out). The continuous
monitor the ready-to-close conditions. Closing is ready if all of duty trip may be used in conjunction with a standard shunt trip
the following conditions are true: solenoid for dual control. Not available for use with UL1066 Li-
b Closing spring-charged sted breakers.
b Breaker main contacts are open
b Mechanical lock-outs disabled
b Racking handle seated in stored position
b Electrical lock-outs disabled
Shunt 120 - 240 VAC range 85 - 110% of nominal

Trip 24 - 250VDC range 70 - 126% or nominal
(interlock
Ready-to- Voltage 125-240VAC, 125 -250VDC Power consumption 15W / 15VA
coil)
close Continuous current 3A Min. shunt trip actuation 60 ms
contact
Making current 0.4A @24-125VDC, 5A @120-240VAC Opening time of breaker 80 ms
Breaking current 0.2A @24-125VDC, 3A @120-240VAC Smallest fuse protection rating 1A

WL Circuit Breaker
Status Contact Undervoltage Release
A status contact is a mechanical switch that is suitable for In the event of loss or low level control circuit voltage, an
monitoring an undervoltage trip or second shunt trip coil undervoltage release may be used to automatically open
position. The contact will be wired to the secondary contacts the circuit breaker. To prevent nuisance breaker openings
of the breaker for customer connections or wired to the Brea- from temporary voltage dips, a separate adjustable time-
ker Status Sensor (BSS) if communications is installed on the delay undervoltage release is also available.
breaker. Contact is 1NO configured.
Signaling Voltage 127 - 240VAC, 24 - 125VDC Under- 85 - 110% breaker can be closed,
contact Continuous current 3A voltage Operating values 35 - 70% breaker will open
Making current 1A @24 - 125DVC, 5A @120 - 240VAC release
120 - 240VAC
UVR
Breaking current 1A @24 - 125DVC, 3A @120 - 240VAC Coil voltage tolerance 85 - 110% of nominal
24 - 250VDC
Spring-charging Motor Coil voltage tolerance 85 - 126% of nominal
The spring charging motor is used to automatically charge the Supply voltage 120, 240VAC or 24, 48, 125, 250VDC
breakers closing spring so the breaker is suitable for closing Power consumption
200VA inrush/ 5VA continuous
on command. Motor charging is typically used for remote (same in Watts for DC)
breaker operation or as an alternative to local manual charging. Opening time of breaker 200 ms
6
The motor assembly can be easily installed in the field and in- UVR w/o time delay
80 ms or 200ms
(dual setting)
cludes an automatic cut-off switch which disconnects the cur-
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
UVR with time delay

rent upon full charge of the closing spring mechanism. (adjustable delay)
0.2 to 3.2 sec.
Spring- 120 - 240VAC range 85 -110% of nominal

charging 24 - 240VDC range 70 - 126% of nominal
motor
Power consumption 110W
Max. charging time 10 seconds
Fuse protection rating 24-60V 6A, 120-240V 3A (slow-blow)

WL Circuit Breaker
The following items are available for WL cradles. Items are PROFIBUS or MODBUS Communication
described to highlight the functional characteristics of these PROFIBUS or MODBUS communication requires a COM15 or
factory installed cradle options. COM16 converter to transmit WL breaker data to external PCs
or PLC monitoring systems. External communication connec-
Secondary disconnects tion to either module is through a DB-9F connector.
Secondary disconnects are used to interconnect external brea-
ker control and signaling circuitry to the WL breakers factory
wired circuitry. Three types of external connection terminals
are available. 1. Screw connection, 2. Tension spring connec-
tion and, 3. Ring lug connection. Tension spring connection
terminals are standard for fixed mounted breakers.
Operating voltage 24VDC

Peak inrush current 280mA
Max. continuous current 125mA
Ambient temperature -25 to 70ºC
Dual Key Breaker Locking

Wire connection type Number of wires and sizes For draw-out breakers, a cradle-mounted breaker lockout de-
Secondary Screw compression 1 x 14AWG or 2 x 16AWG vice can be installed with either one or two independent key
disconnects Tension spring compression 2 x 14AWG cylinders. The key is removable only when the breaker is lo-
Ring lug terminal 2 x 14AWG or 2 x 16AWG cked open. Cradle-mounted key locks are commonly utilized
for interlocking in open transition schemes, where paralleling
Isolation Shutters certain sources is not desirable. Siemens offers the choice of
6
When removing a draw-out breaker from its connected positi- unique, uncoordinated, Kirk and Superior key lock types. If a
on the primary contacts become exposed and more accessi-
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
custom, coordinated key/cylinder is required, order the lock
ble to personnel in the breaker compartment. Isolation shut- provision-only. The lock cylinder and matched key must then
ters reduce that accessibility to the primary terminals by be ordered separately from the respective lock manufacturer.
automatically closing the access ports to the primary terminals
whenever the breaker is disconnected or withdrawn. After re- The compatible Kirk cylinder lock part number is C-900-301.
moval of the breaker from its compartment, the shutters may The compatible Superior cylinder lock part number is C-900.
be padlocked to inhibit manual shutter opening while breaker
is not in the compartment.

WL Circuit Breaker
Cradle Factory Installed Optionsa Characteristics
Arc Chute Cover MOC (Mechanism Operated Contacts)
The arc chute cover is available for isolating enclosure material Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC) are a cradle mounted
or parts located above the circuit breaker where heat and accessory which indicate the state of the breaker’s internal
exhaust gases may exit from the breakers arc chutes. Arc chu- contacts (open or closed). MOCs are typically utilized when
te covers are not available for fixed mounted breakers and limi- additional auxiliary contacts are necessary – above and beyond
ted to select draw-out breaker types. the number configurable in the circuit breaker – although they
may also be used in lieu of the internal auxiliary switches.
Each MOC assembly includes 4 ‘a’ and 4 ‘b’ contacts. Two dif-
ferent MOC assemblies are available. One version operates
when the circuit breaker is in both the “TEST” and “CON-
NECTED” positions, and the other version operates only when
the circuit breaker is in the “CONNECTED” position.
Note per ANSI C37.100:

‘a’ contact: a contact that is open when the main device is in the standard
reference position and that is closed when the device is in the opposite position.
‘b’ contact: a contact that is closed when the main device is in the standard
reference position and that is open when the device is in the opposite position.
TOC (Truck Operated Contacts)

For draw-out breaker applications a TOC device is available to
provide remote indication of the circuit breakers primary and
secondary contact connections (racking positions). When
the breaker is racked into a connected, test or disconnected
position, it activates TOC switches for external user circuits.
MOC Contact
Configurations 4NO and 4NC
6
AC Voltage 240VAC 50/60Hz

Operation Continuous current 10A
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Making current 30A

Breaking current 3A
DC Voltage 24, 125, 250VDC
Operation Making current 1.1A @ 125VDC, 0.55A @ 250VDC
Breaking current 1.1A @ 125V DC, 0.55A @250VDC
TOC Breaker disconnected = Primary and Breaker in test = Primary contacts disconnected Breaker connected = Primary and secondary
Switch secondary contacts are disconnected and secondary contacts are connected contacts are connected
Option 1 1 form C contacts 1 form C contacts 1 form C contacts
Option 2 1 form C contacts 2 form C contacts 3 form C contacts
Option 3
0 form C contacts 0 form C contacts 6 form C contacts
TOC Contact Ratings AC Voltage 120, 240VAC
AC Continuous Current 10A
AC Making/Breaking Current 6A@120V, 3A@240VAC
DC Voltage 24, 48, 125, 250VDC
DC Continuous Current 6A, 1A, 1A
DC Making/Breaking Current 6A, 0.22A, 0.11A

WL Circuit Breaker
Communication Power Supplies Breaker Data Adapter PLUS
For WL devices that require a 24VDC input we offer the Sie- The BDAP can be used to read or modify the breaker ETU and
mens SITOP power supply. The SITOP power supply is a class Cubiclebus parameters using a laptop, pocket PC or remote
2 rated devices suitable for supporting loads of 2.5 or 3.8 desktop PC. Circuit breakers can be parameterized individually
amps. DIN rail mounting provision and compression wire con- using one BDA with similar or different parameters. No soft-
nections included. For loads of 2.5A maximum order part ware is required as the embedded software interface is
number WLSITOP25 or WLSITOP1 for 3.8A maximum loads. through a PC browser. Connectivity to a PC or network can be
serial (RS232) or Ethernet (TCP/IP) address. If the breaker ETU
is energized with 24VDC control power the BDA can be po-
wered through the interconnecting ribbon cable. Order part
number WLBDAP.
Handheld Test Device

To test the WL breakers ETU trip functions we offer a hand-
held tester that checks:
b Sensor continuity
b Long-time function
b Short-time function
b Instantaneous function
b Neutral and ground fault function
6
During a test, the device will electrically trip the circuit breaker Mechanical Breaker Interlocks
performing a full function test of the ETU and the trip actuator. Mechanical interlock options are available for fixed or draw-out
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Cables for 120VAC power supply and ETU connection is inclu- breakers. Interlocking is managed through cable connections
ded with the tester. Order part number WLTS between two or three breakers less than 6 meters apart. Lock
kit includes 2.0 meter interlocking cable and mechanism for
mounting to a single breaker.
For fixed breaker frame size 1, Cat. No.WLNTLKF1

For fixed breaker frame size 2 or 3, Cat. No. WLNTLKF23
For draw-out breaker frame size 1, 2, or 3, Cat. No. WLNTLK
Alternate Cable Lengths

Length Catalogue Number
3.0 meter WLNTLWRE3
4.5 meter WLNTLWRE4
6.0 meter WLNTLWRE5

WL Circuit Breaker
Metering Current Transformer 3-phase Window Metering current transformer – Single Phase
(cradle mounting only) A single piece housing that is compact and designed to fit
For draw-out breaker applications, a three phase metering CT around phase or neutral bussing. Termination screws are inte-
is available. Termination screws are integral to the mold for gral to the mold for point-to-point wiring without the use of
point-to-point wiring without the use of terminal blocks or terminal blocks or wire couplers. Metering ratios range from
wire couplers. Metering ratios range from 800:5 to 5000:5. 800:5 to 5000:5.
CTs include mounting hardware.
For Frame Size 1 and 2 For Frame Size 1, 2 or 3

Rating Catalogue Number Rating Catalogue Number
800:5 WLG8005MCT2 800:5 WLG800NMCT23
1200:5 WLG12005MCT2 1200:5 WLG1200NMCT23
1600:5 WLG16005MCT2 1600:5 WLG1600NMCT23
6
2000:5 WLG20005MCT2 2000:5 WLG2000NMCT23

2500:5 WLG25005MCT2 2500:5 WLG2500NMCT23
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
3200:5 WLG32005MCT2 3000:5 WLG3000NMCT23

3200:5 WLG3200NMCT23
For Frame Size 3 4000:5 WLG4000NMCT23
Rating Catalogue Number 5000:5 WLG5000NMCT23
3200:5 WLG32005MCT3
4000:5 WLG40005MCT3 Neutral Current Sensor – 4-wire Residual Ground Fault
5000:5 WLG50005MCT3 For 4-wire residual ground fault protection we offer neutral
current sensors with or without bus bar coupling. The sensors
4W Modified Differential Ground Fault (MDGF) are comparable to the sensors used within the breaker and con-
For MDGF draw-out breaker applications, a three phase iron- nected to the ETU. This sensor must also be wired to the ETU
core CT is available. The MDGF CTs are physically the same as through designated secondary disconnects on the breaker.
the above metering CTs but the current ratio is 1200:1.
Without copper bus adapters:
For frame size 2, breakers catalogue number: b 3” max bus bar width catalogue number WLNCT2
1200:1 rating WLGMDGFCT2 Phase CT b 3 - 5” bus bar width catalogue number WLNCT3
With copper bus adapters:
For frame size 3, breakers catalogue number:
b 3” max bus bar width catalogue number WLNCT2CB
1200:1 rating WLGMDGFCT3 Phase CT
b 3 - 5” bus bar width catalogue number WLNCT3CB
For frame size 2 and 3, neutral CT catalogue number:
1200:1 rating WLGNMDGCT23 Neutral CT
A typical application for modified differential ground fault is

‘Main-Tie-Main’ where all breakers require 3 Phase CTs and a
neutral CT.

WL Circuit Breaker
Breaker Door Cover Remote Breaker Racking Device
A transparent hinged door cover is available to provide IP55 Provides the ability to safely rack WL breakers into the Con-
protection. Provision for padlocking included. Fits frame size nect, Test and Disconnect positions from 30 feet away from
2 and 3 breakers. Catalogue number: WLPGC the breaker, allowing the operator to be outside the arc flash
boundary which provides additional personnel protection.
Catalogue number: WLRBRD
Door Sealing Frame Door Bracket Kit, Remote Breaker Racking Device
For openings around the door cutout of the breaker, this rub- In order to mount the remote breaker racking device on exi-
ber door trim is available. For frame size 2 and 3 breakers sting gear, this retrofit door bracket kit and the WLRBRDTEMPL
only. Catalogue number: WLDSF must be ordered. Catalogue number: WLRBRDKIT.
Remote Breaker Racking Device Door Bracket Install Template

In order to mount the remote breaker racking device on exi-
sting gear, this mounting template and the WLRBRDKIT must
be ordered. Catalogue number: WLRBRDTEMPL
6
Breaker Hoist
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
This device acts as a hoist for the WL breaker, allowing it to
be carried using a forklift or similar device.
Catalogue number: WLHOIST
Breaker Lifting
The breaker lifting yolk is designed to transport the WL brea-
ker when using a hoist or other lifting equipment. The device
is expandable to conform to all three WL frame sizes and ea-
sily attaches to specified lift points on the breaker.
Catalogue number: WLLFT

WL Circuit Breaker
CubicleBUS Modules ZSI Module
External CubicleBUS modules enable the WL Circuit Breaker a To use the ZSI function with the WL Circuit Breaker, the
way to interface with external switchgear controls or building external CubicleBUS ZSI module must be implemented. The
management systems. They can be used, for example, to acti- zone selective interlocking (ZSI) module provides the com-
vate analog displays or devices, transmit circuit breaker status plete range of selectivity with the short delay time of
and cause of trip, or read external device control signals. One tZSI = 50 ms, irrespective of the number of levels and the
module is suitable for zone-selective interlocking main and location of the short-circuit in a distribution system. Its bene-
branch breakers. fits become even more apparent, the higher the number of
levels in large systems and the longer the resulting delay
Three different CubicleBUS modules can output data from the times. By shortening the time, the ZSI module significantly
CubicleBUS system (two digital output modules and one analog reduces stress and damage in the event of a short-circuit in
output module). A digital input module can transmit data from the switchgear.
the switchgear or system to a PROFIBUS/MODBUS master de-
vice like a power meters or logic controllers. Zone Selective Interlocking Module: Catalogue number WLZSIMD
Digital Output Module with Rotary Switch – The digital output

module can be used to output six events. These events can be
warnings or trips and can be used for external annunciation or
control. The load shedding and load restoring signals can enable
a load to be switched ON or OFF automatically. Voltages of up
250V AC/DC are possible. The relay contacts are isolated.
Relay Digital Output Module: Catalogue number WLRLYCUB
Analog Output Module

The analog output module can be used to output the most
important measured values sent via the CubicleBUS to ana-
log indicators (e.g. analog meters) in the switchgear cubicle
6
door. Each analog output module has four channels for this
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
purpose. The signals are available at two physical interfaces:

a 4 ... 20mA and a 0 ... 10V interface.
Digital Input Module Analog Output Module: Catalogue number WLANLGCUB

The digital input module enables up to six additional binary
signals (24V DC) to be connected. Signals, such as breaker
status, arc-flash current reduction, over-temperature condi-
tions or control circuit status switchgear, can be transmitted
directly to the power monitoring network.
A total of 6 inputs are available in the “BUS Input” Switch

position. Six inputs are also available if the rotary switch is in
the “Parameter Switch” position, although the first input
causes the active parameter set to change. If the connected
ETU does not have two parameter set capability (e.g.
ETU745 or ETU748), this input can also be used without any
restrictions. Pre-assembled CubicleBUS Communication Cables
(RJ45-M connections)
Digital Input Module: Catalogue number: WLDGNCUB Description Catalogue Number
1 meter length WLCBUSCABLE1

WL Circuit Breaker
Fixed-mounted Breaker Front Bus Connectors
Front connector bus kits are available for adapting WL brea-
ker primary mounting stabs to a standard NEMA bussing
and bolt-hole pattern. NEMA bolt connection is accessible
from the front of the breaker for ease of installation or remo-
val of breaker inside an enclosure. Kit includes the required
bus and hardware for mounting one 3-pole set of adapters
to a breaker.

Frame size 1, 1200A frame, 85 kAIC at 480V WLH1F12CONUL
Frame size 2, 1600A frame, 100kAIC at 480V WLL2F16CONUL
Frame size 3, 4000 to 5000A frame, 100kAIC at 480V WLL3F50CONUL
Mechanical lug connector kits are available for connecting

800 to 2000A WL front connector bus kits (sold separately)
to power cables.
Frame size 1, 1200A max, 65 kAIC at 480V WLS2P12CONUL
Frame size 2, 1600 to 2000A max, 65kA 65 kAIC at 480V WLS2P20CONUL
Fixed mounted breaker rear bus connector kits are available

for adapting WL breaker primary mounting stabs to a stan-
dard NEMA bussing and bolt-hole pattern. Adapters also ro-
tate the primary breaker connections by 90° for vertical bus
arrangement. Bolted connections are accessible from the
6
rear of the breaker. Kit includes the required bus and hard-
ware for mounting one 3-pole set of adapters to a breaker.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Frame size 1, 1200A frame, 85 kAIC at 480V WLH1R12CONUL
Frame size 2, 1600A frame, 100 kAIC at 480V WLL2R16CONUL
Frame size 2, 800A to 3000A frame, 150 kAIC at 480V
WLC2R30CONUL
Rated Breaker Only
Frame size 3, 4000A to 5000A frame, 100 kAIC at 480V WLC3R50CONUL

WL Circuit Breaker
WL Catalogue Numbering Overview
Digit Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Interrupting Class
Frame Size
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
Frame Ampere Rating
Rating Plug
Electronic Trip Unit (ETU)
Bell Alarm, Breaker Ready-to-Close, Auxiliary Contacts
Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release (with or without time delay) or 2nd Shunt Trip
Charging Motor, Motor Switch, Operations Counter
Close Coil, Power Metering and Communications
Breaker Locks
Miscellaneous Options
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

WL Insulated Case Circuit Breaker
Ratings for UL489 Listed Breakers Selection
WL frame ratings – frame size 1 800A 1200A 1600A 2000A

Rating Class S H L S H L S H L S H L
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz 240VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100
480VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100
600VAC 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 0.4 sec. 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
Extended instantaneous protection rating (kA RMS) 480VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100
600VAC 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
Applicable rating plug range 200 - 800A 200 - 1200A 200 - 1600A 200 - 2000A
Minimum enclosure dimension (in.) 22Wx15Hx19.5D 22Wx15Hx19.5D 22Wx15Hx19.5D 22Wx15Hx19.5D
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34 34 34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (no maint.) 7500 7500 7500 7500
Electrical duty cycles (no maint) 7500 7500 7500 7500
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at In) 80 180 350 530
Fixed-mount breaker efficiency (Watts loss at In) 60 120 160 270
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fixed Breaker/DO Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 86/137/108 86/137/108 86/137/108 86/137/108
WL frame ratings – frame size 2 800A 1200A 1600A 2000A 2500A 3000A
Rating Class S L C S L C S L C S L C L C L C
Interrupting current frame Ics 240VAC 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 100 150 100 150
(kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz 480VAC 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 100 150 100 150
600VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 85 100 85 100
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 0.4 sec. 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 85 100 85 100
Extended instantaneous protection 480VAC 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 100 150 100 150
rating (kA RMS) 600VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 85 100 85 100
6
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 85 100 85 100
Applicable rating plug range 200 - 800A 200 - 1200A 200 - 1600A 200 - 2000A 200 - 2500A 200 - 3000A
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Minimum enclosure dimension (in.) 22Wx22.5Hx19.5D 22Wx22.5Hx19.5D 22Wx22.5Hx19.5D 22Wx22.5Hx19.5D 22Wx22.5Hx19.5D 22Wx15Hx19.5D
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35 35 35 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34 34 34 34 34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50 50 50 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73 40/73 40/73 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (no maint.) 10,000 (5000 10,000 (5000 10,000 (5000 10,000 (5000 10,000 (5000 10,000 (5000
for Class C) for Class C) for Class C) for Class C) for Class C) for Class C)
Electrical duty cycles (no maint) 7500 (5000 7500 (5000 7500 (5000 4000 4000 4000
for Class C) for Class C) for Class C)
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at In) 85 150 320 500 680 1000
Fixed-mount breaker efficiency
(Watts loss at In) 40 80 120 230 320 480
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fixed Breaker/DO Breaker/Cradle) 124/159/112 124/159/112 124/159/112 130/177/128 130/177/128 130/177/128
lbs. 148/220/163 148/220/163 148/220/163 148/220/163 148/220/163 148/220/163
(Class C) (Class C) (Class C) (Class C) (Class C) (Class C)
NOTE: Frame Size 1 H-Class only for switches

Ratings for UL489 Listed Breakers Characteristics
WL frame ratings – Frame size 3 4000A 5000A

Rating Class L C L C
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz 240VAC 100 150 100 150
480VAC 100 150 100 150
600VAC 85 100 85 100
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 0.4 sec. 85 100 85 100
Extended instantaneous protection rating 480VAC 100 150 100 150
(kA RMS) 600VAC 85 100 85 100
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 85 100 85 100
Applicable rating plug range 800 - 4000A 800 - 5000A
Minimum enclosure dimension (in.) 32Wx22.5Hx19.5D 32Wx22.5Hx19.5D
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (no maint.) 5000 5000
Electrical duty cycles (no maint) 2000 2000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at In) 1100 1100
Fixed-mount breaker efficiency (Watts loss at In) 580 580
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fixed Breaker/DO Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 181/278/306 181/278/306
200/278/306 200/278/306
(Class C) (Class C)
Ratings for UL489 Listed non-automatic switches

WL frame ratings Frame size 1 Frame size 2 Frame size 3
800-1200 A 800 - 3000A 4000/5000A
6

Rating Class H L L
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Breaking capacity with external relay (kA RMS) 240VAC 85 100 100
50/60 Hz, instantaneous trip 480VAC 85 100 100
600VAC 65 85 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 0.4 sec. 65 85 85


UL 489 Listed Catalogue Number Selection
Interrupting
rating, frame size, breaker type and frame rating Breaker catalog number
Note: Cradle must be ordered separately for drawout breaker types (see page 1
36) 11 22 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12
12 13
13 14 15
15
Class Interrupt rating (kA) Frame Frame size Breaker type
240VAC Max ampere Fixed Fixed
480VAC 600VAC rating (A) 1 2 3 mount Drawout
S 65 65 800 X X S 1 F 3 0 8
S 65 65 800 X X S 2 F 3 0 8
S 65 65 800 X X S 1 D 3 0 8
S 65 65 800 X X S 2 D 3 0 8
S 65 65 1200 X X S 1 F 3 1 2
S 65 65 1200 X X S 2 F 3 1 2
S 65 65 1200 X X S 1 D 3 1 2
S 65 65 1200 X X S 2 D 3 1 2
S 65 65 1600 X X S 1 F 3 1 6
S 65 65 1600 X X S 2 F 3 1 6
S 65 65 1600 X X S 1 D 3 1 6
S 65 65 1600 X X S 2 D 3 1 6
S 65 65 2000 X X S 1 F 3 2 0
S 65 65 2000 X X S 2 F 3 2 0
S 65 65 2000 X X S 1 D 3 2 0
S 65 65 2000 X X S 2 D 3 2 0
L 100 65 800 X X L 1 F 3 0 8
L 100 85 800 X X L 2 F 3 0 8
L 100 65 800 X X L 1 D 3 0 8
L 100 85 800 X X L 2 D 3 0 8
L 100 65 1200 X X L 1 F 3 1 2
L 100 85 1200 X X L 2 F 3 1 2
L 100 65 1200 X X L 1 D 3 1 2
L 100 85 1200 X X L 2 D 3 1 2
L 100 65 1600 X X L 1 F 3 1 6
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 F 3 1 6
L 100 65 1600 X X L 1 D 3 1 6
6
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 D 3 1 6
L 100 65 2000 X X L 1 F 3 2 0
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 F 3 2 0
L 100 65 2000 X X L 1 D 3 2 0
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 D 3 2 0
L 100 85 2500 X X L 2 F 3 2 5
L 100 85 2500 X X L 2 D 3 2 5
L 100 85 3000 X X L 2 F 3 3 0
L 100 85 3000 X X L 2 D 3 3 0
L 100 85 4000 X X L 3 F 3 4 0
L 100 85 4000 X X L 3 D 3 4 0
L 100 85 5000 X X L 3 F 3 5 0
L 100 85 5000 X X L 3 D 3 5 0
C 150 100 800 X X C 2 F 3 0 8
C 150 100 800 X X C 2 D 3 0 8
C 150 100 1200 X X C 2 F 3 1 2
C 150 100 1200 X X C 2 D 3 1 2
C 150 100 1600 X X C 2 F 3 1 6
C 150 100 1600 X X C 2 D 3 1 6
C 150 100 2000 X X C 2 F 3 2 0
C 150 100 2000 X X C 2 D 3 2 0
C 150 100 2500 X X C 2 F 3 2 5
C 150 100 2500 X X C 2 D 3 2 5
C 150 100 3000 X X C 2 F 3 3 0
C 150 100 3000 X X C 2 D 3 3 0
C 150 100 4
000 X X C 3 F 3 4 0
C 150 100 4000 X X C 3 D 3 4 0
C 150 100 5000 X X C 3 F 3 5 0
C 150 100 5000 X X C 3 D 3 5 0


Breaker catalog number
Rating Plug 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1
Maximum For use with
continuous frame size
current rating 1 2 3
200 X X A
225 X X B
250 X X C
300 X X D
315 X X E
350 X X F
400 X X G
450 X X H
500 X X J
600 X X K
630 X X L
700 X X M
800 X X
X N
1000 X X X P
1200 X X X Q
1250 X X X R
1600 X X X T
2000 X X X U
2500 X X V
3000 X X W
4000 X Z
5000 X 1

Electronic trip unit (ETU)1)

6
Protective
Trip unit function LCD display Ground fault
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
models L S I Alpha num. Alarm Trip

ETU745 X (X) (X) C
ETU745 X (X) (X) X D
ETU745 X (X) (X) X E
ETU745 X (X) (X) X X F
ETU745 X (X) (X) X X G
ETU745 X (X) (X) X X X H
ETU748 X X J
ETU748 X X X K
ETU748 X X X L
ETU748 X X X X N
ETU748 X X X X P
ETU748 X X X X X Q
ETU776 X (X) (X) V
ETU776 X (X) (X) X W
ETU776 X (X) (X) X X Y

(X) Indicates function can be disabled by user

a Neutral protection “N” is available as standard.

Bell alarm, breaker ready-to-close, auxiliary contacts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bell alarm
Remote reset Breaker Breaker open/close
coil voltage Form C ready-to-close auxiliary switches
AC DC contacts 1b contact 2a + 2b 4a + 4b
None X
X A
X B
X C
X D
X X E
X X F
X X G
X X H
X X I
X X X J
X X X K
24 X L
48 X M
120 125 X N
240 250 X O
24 X X P
48 X X Q
120 125 X X R
240 250 X X S
24 X X T
48 X X U
120 125 X X V
240 250 X X W
24 X X Y
6
48 X X Z
120 125 X X 1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
240 250 X X 2
24 X X X 3
48 X X X 4
120 125 X X X 5
240 250 X X X 6
24 X X X 7
48 X X X 8
120 125 X X X 9
240 250 X X X 0

Shunt trip
Operation voltage Status Continuous duty coil
AC DC contact (electrical interlock)
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X R
240 250 X X S

Undervoltage Release (with or without time delay) or 2nd Shunt Trip
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Operation
voltage UVR UVR UVR status1 2nd
AC DC without delay with delay contact (1NO) shunt trip
None X
24 X A
48 X B
120 125 X C
240 250 X D
48 X E
120 125 X F
240 250 X G
24 X H
48 X J
120 125 X K
240 250 X L
24 X X M
48 X X N
120 125 X X P
240 250 X X Q
48 X X R
120 250 X X S
240 250 X X T

Charging motor, motor switch, operations counter
Charging motor
operation voltage Motor cut-off Operations
AC DC switch counter
None X
24 A
6
48 B
120 125 C
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X Q
240 250 X X R
a Status contact is only available when Communications is not installed on breaker.

Signal is sent via communications in lieu of status contact.

Close coil, power metering and communications

1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Close coil Power metering
operation voltage capable MODBUS 2 PROFIBUS 2
AC DC
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
X G
X H
24 X N
24 X P
48 X S
48 X T
120 125 X W
120 125 X Y
240 250 X 2
240 250 X 3
24 X X Q
48 X X U
120 125 X X Z
240 250 X X 4
24 X X R
48 X X V
120 125 X X 1
240 250 X X 5
X X L
X X M
X F
24 X 6
48 X 7
6
120 125 X 8
240 250 X 9
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Breaker locks
Key lock breaker Key lock breaker Padlock provisions for Padlock provisions
OPEN position (lock OPEN position (lock OPEN and CLOSE for charging
type – KIRK) 1 type – SUPERIOR) 1 push buttons 2 handle 2
None X
X A
X C
X E
X F
X X G
X X J
X X S
X X U
X X V
X X X W
X X X Z
Miscellaneous options
Key lock breaker Manual trip reset ETU
OPEN position (provision only) 2 (Automatic trip reset is standard)
None N
X B
X C
X X D

1 Custom key locks are not available and must be supplied by others. Order key lock provision if custom if keyed alike locks are required.
2 Locks provided by others.

WL Insulated Case Switch
UL 489 Listed Non-automatic Catalogue Number Selection
Switch catalog number
Breaking capacity, frame size, switch type and frame rating
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Class Breaking capacity (kA) Frame Frame size Switch type
240VAC Max ampere Fixed
480VAC 600VAC rating (A) 2 3 mounted drawout
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 Y 3 1 6 S S
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 Z 3 1 6 S S
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 Y 3 2 0 S S
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 Z 3 2 0 S S
L 100 85 2500 X X L 2 Y 3 2 5 S S
L 100 85 2500 X X L 2 Z 3 2 5 S S
L 100 85 3000 X X L 2 Y 3 3 0 S S
L 100 85 3000 X X L 2 Z 3 3 0 S S
L 100 85 4000 X X L 3 Y 3 4 0 S S
L 100 85 4000 X X L 3 Z 3 4 0 S S
L 100 85 5000 X X L 3 Y 3 5 0 S S
L 100 85 5000 X X L 3 Z 3 5 0 S S

Ready-to-close and auxiliary contacts

Ready-to-close Breaker open/close auxiliary switches
1b contact 2a + 2b 4a + 4b
None X
X B
X C
X D
X X H
X X I

6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Shunt trip 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Operation voltage Status Shunt Continuous duty rated
AC DC contact1 trip (electrical interlock)
None X
24 X A
48 X B
120 125 X C
240 250 X D
24 X X E
48 X X F
120 125 X X G
240 250 X X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X R
240 250 X X S

Undervoltage release (with or without time delay) or 2nd shunt trip
Operation
voltage UVR UVR UVR status 1 2nd shunt
AC DC without delay with delay contact (1NO) trip
None X
24 X A
48 X B
120 125 X C
240 250 X D
6
48 X E
120 125 X F
240 250 X G
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
24 X H
48 X J
120 125 X K
240 250 X L
24 X X M
48 X X N
120 125 X X P
240 250 X X Q
48 X X R
120 250 X X S
240 250 X X T

1 Status contact is only available when communication is not installed. Signal is sent via communications in lieu of status contact.

Charging motor, motor switch and operation counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Charging motor
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X Q
240 250 X X R

Close
coil, communications
Close coil
operation voltage
AC DC Modbus 1 PROFIBUS 1
None X
X G
24 A
24 X N
6
48 B
48 X S
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
120 125 C
120 125 X W
240 250 D
240 250 X 2
X H
24 X P
48 X T
120 125 X Y
240 250 X 3
1 Requires 24VDC power supply. Power metering not available on non-automatic switches and BSS is included.

Switch locks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
type – KIRK) 1 type – SUPERIOR) 1 push buttons 2 handle
None X
X A
X C
X E
X F
X X G
X X J
X X S
X X U
X X V
X X X W
X X X Z
Miscellaneous options
Key lock breaker
OPEN position (provision only) 2

None N
X B
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
1 Custom key locks are not available and must be supplied by others. Order Key Lock Provisions if custom keys or keyed alike locks are required.
2 Padlock provided by others.

UL 489 Listed Accessories Selection
External breaker accessories
Description Catalog number
Front mount connectors for fixed breakers
FS1, 85kAIC at 480V max. 800A, 1200A WLHF12CONUL
FS2, 100kAIC at 480V max. 1600A WLL2F16CONUL
FS3, 100kAIC at 480V max. 4000A, 5000A WLL3F50CONUL
Mechanical lug
FS1, 65kAIC at 480V max 800A, 1200A WLS2P12CONUL
FS2, 65kAIC at 480V max 1600A, 2000A WLS2P20CONUL
Rear vertical connectors
FS1, 100kAIC at 480V max 800A, 1200A, 1600A, 2000A WLH1R12CONUL
FS2, 100kAIC at 480V max 800A, 1200A, 1600A WLL2R16CONUL
FS2, 100kAIC at 480V max 2000A WLL2R20CONUL
FS2, 1100kAIC at 480V max 2500A, 3000A WLL2R30CONUL
FS2, 150kAIC at 480V max 800A, 1200A, 1600A, 2000A, 2500A, 3000A WLC2R30CONUL
FS3, 150kAIC at 480V max 4000A, 5000A WLC3R50CONUL
Single phase CTs for metering, 5A secondary
Rating: 800:5 WLG800NMCT23
Modified differential ground fault (MDGF) CTs
Modified differential GF (FS2 1200:1) Phase CT WLGMDGFCT2
Modified differential GF (FS2 and FS3 1200:1) Neutral CT WLGNMDGFCT23
4-wire residual ground fault sensor
Without copper bus adapters (pass-thru mount) - for 3” max bus bar WLNCT2
6
Without copper bus adapters (pass-thru mount) - for 3 - 5” max bus bar WLNCT3
With copper bus adapters for bus bar connection - for 3” max bus bar WLNCT2CB
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
With copper bus adapters for bus bar connection - for 3 - 5” max bus bar WLCNMDGCT23
Mechanical interlocks
Fixed mounted breaker (FS1) WLNTLKF1
Fixed mounted breaker (FS2 and FS3) WLNTLKF23
Miscellaneous external accessories
Crimp lugs for 10# AWG secondary wiring (package of 70) WL10RL
Auxiliary contact on drawout breaker (knife block) WLCNMD
24V DC trip unit and communications power supply, 2.5A SITOP power, Class 2 WLSITOP25
24V DC trip unit and communications power supply 3.8A SITOP power, Class 2 WLSITOP1
Optional metric inserts and bolts for breaker mains (4 each) M8x25 for FS1and FS2 WLMETRC
Optional metric inserts and bolts for breaker mains (4 each) M10x25 for FS3 WLMETRC3
Secondary disconnect coding kit for UL 489 fixed mounted breaker WLCODEKITUL
Pull apart terminal block with 1 meter leads for UL 489 fix mounted breakers WLTERMBLKUL

WL Insulated Case Breaker Cradles
Cradle catalog number
Interrupting
rating, frame size, and frame rating 1 G G 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Class Interrupt rating (kA) Frame Frame size
240VAC Max ampere
480VAC 600VAC rating (A) 1 2 3
S 65 65 800 X S 1 3 0 8
S 65 65 800 X S 2 3 0 8
S 65 65 1200 X S 1 3 1 2
S 65 65 1200 X S 2 3 1 2
S 65 65 1600 X S 1 3 1 6
S 65 65 1600 X S 2 3 1 6
S 65 65 2000 X S 1 3 2 0
S 65 65 2000 X S 2 3 2 0
L 100 65 800 X L 1 3 0 8
L 100 85 800 X L 2 3 0 8
L 100 65 1200 X L 1 3 1 2
L 100 85 1200 X L 2 3 1 2
L 100 65 1600 X L 1 3 1 6
L 100 85 1600 X L 2 3 1 6
L 100 65 2000 X L 1 3 2 0
L 100 85 2000 X L 2 3 2 0
L 100 85 2500 X L 2 3 2 5
L 100 85 3000 X L 2 3 3 0
L 100 85 4000 X L 3 3 4 0
L 100 85 5000 X L 3 3 5 0
C 150 100 800 X C 2 3 0 8
C 150 100 1200 X C 2 3 1 2

C 150 100 1600 X C 2 3 1 6
C 150 100 2000 X C 2 3 2 0

C 150 100 2500 X C 2 3 2 5

C 150 100 3000 X C 2 3 3 0
C 150 100 4000 X C 3 3 4 0
C 150 100 5000 X C 3 3 5 0

6
Type of secondary terminal connection 1
For breakers:
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Screw clamp terminals A
Spring clamp terminals B
Ring terminals C
Screw clamp terminals (low profile, non-partable design) L
For switches (non-automatic):
Screw clamp terminals G
Spring clamp terminals H
Ring terminals J
Screw clamp terminals (low profile non-partable design) N
Truck Operated Contacts (TOC)
Breaker position switches in the following configurations:
None X
(1) Connected, (1) Test, (1) Disconnected - all Form C 1
(6) Connected - all Form C 6
Cradle mounted key locks – FS2 and FS3 only
None X
Lock breaker in OPEN position (Kirk lock) A
Lock breaker in OPEN position (Superior lock) B
Double-key lock breaker in OPEN position (Kirk lock) C
Double-key lock breaker in OPEN position (Superior lock) D
Provision only - Lock breaker in OPEN position E
Provision only - Double-key lock breaker in OPEN position F
Primary conductor isolation shutter
None X
Isolation Shutter F
1 Terminal blocks (X5, X6, X8, X9) are installed as standard.

WL Insulated Case Breaker Cradle
G 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Arc chute covers
None X
Arc chute cover s (FS1 only) C
Arc chute covers (FS2 only) D
Arc chute covers (FS3 only – except Class C) B
Door locks and mechanical interlocks
1. Mechanical interlock with 2.0 meter Bowden cable
2. Locks cubicle door, when breaker is in connect position (FS2 and FS3)
3. Locks cubicle door, when breaker is in connect position (FS1 only)
4. Locks against racking breaker if the cubicle door is open (FS2 and FS3)
1 2 3 4
None X
X M
X A
X B
X C
X X D
X X X E
X X F
X X G
X X H
Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC)
Breaker open/close auxiliary switches (4a & 4b) in the following positions:
None X
Test and Connect position (FS1 and FS2 only) M
Connect position (FS1 and FS2 only) N
Test and Connect position (FS3 only) P
Connect position (FS3 only) Q
Connector and heater options
Standard rear connectors
X
Standard rear connectors and a cradle heater (FS2 and FS3) H
6
Rotatable rear connector (FSI and FS2 2000A and below, S Class) J
Rotatable rear connectors and a cradle heater (FS2 2000A and below, S Class) K
Future use
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Placeholder (required) N

WL Insulated Case Breaker Cradles
UL 489 Listed Accessories Selection
Cradle accessories Catalog number
3-phase metering CTs, cradle mounted (3 windows per CT)
FS1 and FS2 Rating – 800:5 WLG8005MCT2
Rating – 1200:5 WLG12005MCT2
FS2 Rating – 2500:5 WLG25005MCT2
FS3 Rating – 4000:5 WLG40005MCT3
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

WL Power Circuit Breaker
Ratings for UL 1066 Listed (ANSI C37) Breakers Selection
Rating Class N S H L F N S H L F
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIC RMS) 50/60 Hz 254VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200
508VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200
600VAC — — — — 200 — — — — 200
635VAC 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 15,000 15,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) 85 320
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/159/112 227/159/112

Rating Class S H L F S H L
Interrupting current frame Ics 254VAC 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
(kAIC RMS) 50/60 Hz 508VAC 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
600VAC — — — 200 — — —
635VAC 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
6

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 15,000 15,000
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/209/152 227/209/152
1 Maintenance means: replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions).
M-Class main contacts can be replaced by Siemens personnel only.

Ratings for UL 1066 Listed (ANSI C37) Breakers Selection
WL frame ratings – Frame size 3 3200A 4000A 5000A
Rating Class M F H L M F H L M F
Interrupting current frame Ics 254VAC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
(kAIC RMS) 50/60 Hz 508VAC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
600VAC — 200 — — — 200 — — — 200
635VAC 85 — 85 85 85 — 85 85 85 —
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 100 2 1 — 85 100 2 100 2 — 85 100 2 100 2 —
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 100 2 — 85 100 2 100 2 — 85 100 2 100 2 —
Applicable rating plug range 800 - 3200A 800 - 4000A 800 - 5000 A
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34 24
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 10,000 10,000 10,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 10,000 10,000 10,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) 700 1100 1650
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory Consult Factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Carriage/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 225/260/306 225/260/306 225/260/306
Ratings for UL 1066 Listed Non-automatic Switches

WL frame ratings Frame size 2 Frame size 3
800A - 3200A 4 3200 - 5000A 4
Rating Class F 3 L F 3 L
Breaking capacity with external relay (kA RMS) 254VAC 200 100 200 100

50/60 Hz, instantaneous trip 508VAC 200 100 200 100
635VAC 200 85 200 85

Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. N/A 65 N/A 100 2

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

M-Class main contacts can be replaced by Siemens personnel only. Do not apply switch or breaker rated at 635VAC to a system with fault current > 85kA RMS.
2 Short-time withstand current (Icw) at 635 VAC is kAIC RMS.
3 Max. 600 VAC.
4 3200A frame rating is only available in L-Class in Frame Size 2. 3200A frame rating is not available in L-Class in Frame Size 3.

Interrupting rating, frame size, breaker type and frame rating
Note: Cradle must be ordered separately (see page 49)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Class Interrupt rating (kA) Frame Frame size Fuse (A)
254VAC Max ampere
508VAC 635VAC rating (A) 2 3
N 50 50 800 X N 2 A 3 0 8
N 50 50 1600 X N 2 A 3 1 6
S 65 65 800 X S 2 A 3 0 8
S 65 65 1600 X S 2 A 3 1 6
S 65 65 2000 X S 2 A 3 2 0
S 65 65 3200 X S 2 A 3 3 2
H 85 65 800 X H 2 A 3 0 8
H 85 65 1600 X H 2 A 3 1 6
H 85 65 2000 X H 2 A 3 2 0
H 85 65 3200 X H 2 A 3 3 2
H 85 85 4000 X H 3 A 3 4 0
H 85 85 5000 X H 3 A 3 5 0
L 100 85 800 X L 2 A 3 0 8
L 100 85 1600 X L 2 A 3 1 6
L 100 85 2000 X L 2 A 3 2 0
L 100 85 3200 X L 2 A 3 3 2
L 100 85 4000 X L 3 A 3 4 0
L 100 85 5000 X L 3 A 3 5 0
M 150 85 3200 X M 3 A 3 3 2
M 150 85 4000 X M 3 A 3 4 0
M 150 85 5000 X M 3 A 3 5 0
F 200 200 800 X 400 F 2 A 3 0 A
F 200 200 800 X 600 F 2 A 3 0 B
F 200 200 800 X 800 F 2 A 3 0 C
F 200 200 800 X 900 F 2 A 3 0 D
F 200 200 800 X 1000 F 2 A 3 0 E
F 200 200 800 X 1200 F 2 A 3 0 F
F 200 200 800 X 1600 F 2 A 3 0 G
6
F 200 200 800 X 2000 F 2 A 3 0 H

F 200 200 800 X 2500 F 2 A 3 0 J
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
F 200 200 800 X 3000 F 2 A 3 0 K

F 200 200 1600 X 400 F 2 A 3 1 A
F 200 200 1600 X 600 F 2 A 3 1 B
F 200 200 1600 X 800 F 2 A 3 1 C
F 200 200 1600 X 900 F 2 A 3 1 D
F 200 200 1600 X 1000 F 2 A 3 1 E
F 200 200 1600 X 1200 F 2 A 3 1 F
F 200 200 1600 X 1600 F 2 A 3 1 G
F 200 200 1600 X 2000 F 2 A 3 1 H
F 200 200 1600 X 2500 F 2 A 3 1 J
F 200 200 1600 X 3000 F 2 A 3 1 K
F 200 200 2000 X 400 F 2 A 3 2 A
F 200 200 2000 X 600 F 2 A 3 2 B
F 200 200 2000 X 800 F 2 A 3 2 C
F 200 200 2000 X 900 F 2 A 3 2 D
F 200 200 2000 X 1000 F 2 A 3 2 E
F 200 200 2000 X 1200 F 2 A 3 2 F
F 200 200 2000 X 1600 F 2 A 3 2 G
F 200 200 2000 X 2000 F 2 A 3 2 H
F 200 200 2000 X 2500 F 2 A 3 2 J
F 200 200 2000 X 3000 F 2 A 3 2 K
F 200 200 3200 X 6000 F 3 A 3 3 2
F 200 200 4000 X 6000 F 3 A 3 4 0
F 200 200 5000 X 6000 F 3 A 3 5 0


Rating plug 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Maximum continuous
Frame size Frame size
current rating (A)
2 3
200 X A
225 X B
250 X C
300 X D
315 X E
350 X F
400 X G
450 X H
500 X J
600 X K
630 X L
700 X M
800 X X N
1000 X X P
1200 X X Q
1250 X X R
1600 X X T
2000 X X U
2500 X X V
3000 X X W
3200 X X Y
4000 X Z
5000 X 1

Electronic trip units (ETU)
Trip unit Protective function LCD display Ground fault module
type L S I alpha num. Alarm Trip
6
ETU745 X (X) (X) C
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
ETU748 X X J
ETU748 X X X K
ETU748 X X X L
ETU748 X X X X N
ETU748 X X X X P
ETU748 X X X X X Q
ETU776 X (X) (X) V

( ) Function can be disabled by user.

Bell alarm, breaker ready-to-close, auxiliary contacts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bell alarm
Remote reset Breaker Breaker open/close
coil voltage Form C ready-to-close auxiliary switches
AC DC contacts 1b contact 2a + 2b 4a + 4b
None X
X A
X B
X C
X D
X X E
X X F
X X G
X X H
X X I
X X X J
X X X K
24 X L
48 X M
120 125 X N
240 250 X O
24 X X P
48 X X Q
120 125 X X R
240 250 X X S
24 X X T
48 X X U
120 125 X X V
240 250 X X W
24 X X Y
48 X X Z
6
120 125 X X 1
240 250 X X 2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
24 X X X 3
48 X X X 4
120 125 X X X 5
240 250 X X X 6
24 X X X 7
48 X X X 8
120 125 X X X 9
240 250 X X X 0

Shunt trip
Control voltage Status
AC DC contact
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H


Undervoltage release (with or without time delay) or 2nd shunt trip 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Control
voltage UVR UVR UVR 2nd shunt
AC DC without delay with delay status contact 1 trip
None X
24 X A
48 X B
120 125 X C
240 250 X D
48 X E
120 125 X F
240 250 X G
24 X H
48 X J
120 125 X K
240 250 X L
24 X X M
48 X X N
120 125 X X P
240 250 X X Q
48 X X R
125 X X S
120 250 X X T

Charging
motor, motor switch, operations counter
Charging motor
None X
6
24 A
48 B
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X Q
240 250 X X R
1 Status contact is only available when communication is not installed on breaker. Signal is
sent via communication in lieu of status contact.

Close coil, power metering and communications

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Close coil Power metering
operation voltage capable 1 Modbus 2 PROFIBUS 2
AC DC
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
X G
X H
24 X N
24 X P
48 X S
48 X T
120 125 X W
120 125 X Y
240 250 X 2
240 250 X 3
24 X X Q
48 X X U
120 125 X X Z
240 250 X X 4
24 X X R
48 X X V
120 125 X X 1
240 250 X X 5
X X L
X X M
X F
24 X 6
48 X 7
120 125 X 8
6
240 250 X 9
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Breaker locks
type – KIRK) 3 type – SUPERIOR) 3 pushbuttons 4 handle 4
None X
X A
X C
X E
X F
X X G
X X J
X X S
X X U
X X V
X X X W
X X X Z
Miscellaneous options 5
OPEN position (provision only) 4 (Automatic trip reset is standard)
None N
X B
X C
X X D

1 Requires External PTs for voltage input and 24VDC power supply.
2 Includes BSS device and requires 24VDC power supply.
3 Custom key locks are not available and must be supplied by others. Order key lock provision if custom if keyed
alike locks are required.
4 Locks provided by others.
5 If a breaker lock is chosen for Digit 14, a provision need not be ordered in Digit 15.

WL Power Circuit Switch
Breaking capacity, frame size, switch type and frame rating
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Class Breaking capacity (kA) Frame Frame size
240VAC Max ampere Fuse
480VAC 600VAC rating (A) 2 3 (A)
L 100 85 800 X L 2 S 3 0 8 S S
L 100 85 1600 X L 2 S 3 1 6 S S
L 100 85 2000 X L 2 S 3 2 0 S S
L 100 85 3200 X L 2 S 3 2 2 S S
L 100 85 4000 X L 3 S 3 4 0 S S
L 100 85 5000 X L 3 S 3 5 0 S S
F 200 200 800 X 1000 F 2 S 3 0 E S S
F 200 200 800 X 1200 F 2 S 3 0 F S S
F 200 200 800 X 1600 F 2 S 3 0 G S S
F 200 200 800 X 2000 F 2 S 3 0 H S S
F 200 200 800 X 2500 F 2 S 3 0 J S S
F 200 200 800 X 3000 F 2 S 3 0 K S S
F 200 200 1600 X 1000 F 2 S 3 1 E S S
F 200 200 1600 X 1200 F 2 S 3 1 F S S
F 200 200 1600 X 1600 F 2 S 3 1 G S S
F 200 200 1600 X 2000 F 2 S 3 1 H S S
F 200 200 1600 X 2500 F 2 S 3 1 J S S
F 200 200 1600 X 3000 F 2 S 3 1 K S S
F 200 200 2000 X 1000 F 2 S 3 2 E S S
F 200 200 2000 X 1200 F 2 S 3 2 F S S
F 200 200 2000 X 1600 F 2 S 3 2 G S S
F 200 200 2000 X 2000 F 2 S 3 2 H S S
F 200 200 2000 X 2500 F 2 S 3 2 J S S
F 200 200 2000 X 3000 F 2 S 3 2 K S S
F 200 200 3200 X 6000 F 3 S 3 3 2 S S
F 200 200 4000 X 6000 F 3 S 3 4 0 S S
F 200 200 5000 X 6000 F 3 S 3 5 0 S S

6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Breaker ready-to-close auxiliary contacts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Breaker ready-to-close Breaker open/close auxiliary switches
1b contact 2a + 2b 4a + 4b 4NO+4NC
None X
X B
X C
X D
X X H
X X I

Shunt trip
Operation voltage Status
AC DC contact
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H


s
Operation
voltage UVR UVR UVR 2nd shunt
None X
6
24 X A
48 X B
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
120 125 X C
240 250 X D
48 X E
120 125 X F
240 250 X G
24 X H
48 X J
120 125 X K
240 250 X L
24 X X M
48 X X N
120 125 X X P
240 250 X X Q
48 X X R
125 X X S
120 250 X X T

1 Status contact only available when communication is not installed. Signal is sent via communication in lieu of status contact.

Charging motor, motor switch, operations counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Charging motor
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X Q
240 250 X X R

Close coil, communications
Close coil
operation voltage
None X
X G
24 A
24 X N
6
48 B
48 X S
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
120 125 C
120 125 X W
240 250 D
240 250 X 2
X H
24 X P
48 X T
120 125 X Y
240 250 X 3
1 Requires 24VDC power supply. BSS is included.

Switch locks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
type – KIRK) 1 type – SUPERIOR)1 pushbuttons 2 handle
None X
X A
X C
X E
X F
X X G
X X J
X X S
X X U
X X V
X X X W
X X X Z
Key lock breaker

None N
X B
UL 1066 Listed Accessories

External accessories Catalog number
Single phase CTs for metering, 5A secondary
Ratings – 800:5 WLG800NMCT23
6

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Modified differential ground fault
Modified differential GF (FS2, FS3 1200:1) Neutral CT WLNCT3CB
4-wire residual ground fault sensor
Without copper bus adapters (pass-thru mount) - for 3” max bus bar WLNCT2
Without copper bus adapters (pass-thru mount) - for 3 - 5” max bus bar WLNCT3
With copper bus adapters for bus bar connection - for 3” max bus bar WLNCT2CB
With copper bus adapters for bus bar connection - for 3 - 5” max bus bar WLNCT3CB
Internal replacement current sensor kit
Frame Size 2 Breaker WLCT2
Frame Size 3 Breaker WLCT3
Miscellaneous external accessories
Crimp lugs for 10#AWG secondary wiring (package of 70) WL10RL
Auxiliary contact on drawout breaker (knife block) WLCNMD
24V DC trip unit and communications power supply, 2.5A SITOP power, class 2 WLSITOP25
24V DC trip unit and communications power supply, 3.8A SITOP power, class 2 WLSITOP1
1 Custom key locks are not available and must be supplied by others. Order Key Lock Provisions if custom keys or keyed alike breakers are required.
2 Lock provided by others.

UL 1066 Listed Cradle Catalogue Number Selection
Interrupting rating, frame size and frame rating
G 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
240VAC Max ampere
N 50 50 800 X N 2 3 0 8
N 50 50 1600 X N 2 3 1 6
S 65 65 800 X S 2 3 0 8
S 65 65 1600 X S 2 3 1 6
S 65 65 2000 X S 2 3 2 0
S 65 65 3200 X S 2 3 3 2
H 85 65 800 X H 2 3 0 8
H 85 65 1600 X H 2 3 1 6
H 85 65 2000 X H 2 3 2 0
H 85 65 3200 X H 2 3 3 2
H 85 85 4000 X H 3 3 4 0
H 85 85 5000 X H 3 3 5 0
L 100 85 800 X L 2 3 0 8
L 100 85 1600 X L 2 3 1 6
L 100 85 2000 X L 2 3 2 0
L 100 85 3200 X L 2 3 3 2
L 100 85 4000 X L 3 3 4 0
L 100 85 5000 X L 3 3 5 0
M 150 85 3200 X M 3 3 3 2
M 150 85 4000 X M 3 3 4 0
M 150 85 5000 X M 3 3 5 0
F 200 200 800 X F 2 3 0 8
F 200 200 1600 X F 2 3 1 6
F 200 200 2000 X F 2 3 2 0
F 200 200 3200 X F 2 3 3 2

F 200 200 4000 X F 3 3 4 0

F 200 200 5000 X F 3 3 5 0

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
For Breakers:
Screw clamp terminals P
Spring clamp terminals T
Ring terminals R
Screw clamp terminals (low profile, non-partable design) K
For Switch (Non-automatic):
Screw clamp terminals D
Spring clamp terminals E
Ring terminals F
Screw clamp terminals, non-partable design) M
None X
(6) Connected - all Form C 6

Cradle mounted key locks 2
None X
Lock breaker in OPEN position (Kirk key) A
Lock breaker in OPEN position (Superior key) B
Double lock breaker in OPEN position (Kirk key) C
Double lock breaker in OPEN position (Superior key) D
Provision only - Lock breaker in OPEN position E
Provision only - Double lock breaker in OPEN position F
None X
Isolation Shutters F

1 T erminal blocks (X5, X6, X8, X9) are installed as standard.
2 Fused Frame Size 3 circuit breakers include a two cylinder provision as standard, with the second position pre-populated with a key-interlock to prevent racking
(in or out) of the separately-mounted fuse carriage while the associated fused circuit breaker is closed.

WL Power Circuit Breaker Cradles
UL 1066 Listed Cradle Catalog Number Selection
G 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15
Arc chute covers

None X
Arc chute covers (FS2 only – Except Class F) A
Arc chute covers (FS3 only – Except Class F and M) B
Door locks and mechanical interlock
2. Locks cubicle door, when breaker is in connect position (FS2 and FS3)
3. Locks against racking breaker if the cubicle door is open (FS2 and FS3)
1 2 3
None X
X M
X A
X C
X X D
X X X E
X X G
X X H
None X
Test and Connect position (FS2 only) M
Connect position (FS2 only) N
Standard rear connectors X
Standard rear connectors and a cradle heater H
Rotatable rear connectors (FS2, 2000A and below, N, S, & H Class) J
Rotatable rear connectors and a cradle heater (FS2, 2000A and below, N, S, & H Class) K
Future use

6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
UL 1066 Listed accessories

Cradle accessories Catalog Number
3-phase metering CTs, cradle mounted (3 windows per CT)
FS2 Ratings – 800:5 WLG8005MCT2
Ratings – 1600:5 WLG16005MCT2
FS3 Ratings – 3200:5 WLG32005MCT3

WL Breaker
Application Data General
WL Secondary Terminal Assignments
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER


X8 - 9
BONDING MUST BE
UPSTREAM OF SENSOR X8 - 10 SEE DETAIL TO
THE RIGHT
TWISTED PAIR
X8-10
WL Breaker
General Wiring TRIP UNIT
S2+ Schematic
S1-
X8-5, L1
X8-6, L2
X8-7, L3
X8-8, N
WL CIRCUIT
BREAKER X8-9
LINE LOAD WL
(TOP FED) (BOTTOM FED) ETU745, ETU748, GF
L1
3P, 4W: ETU776 INTERNAL WIRING
A B C N
600V AC L2 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER INPUTS
- OR -
3P, 4W: L3 3P, 4W: 480V OR 600V AC
480V AC NS METERING MODULE
N N
P1
P2
BOTTOM FED
SOURCE
SOURCE
TOP FED
X8 - 9
BONDING MUST BE X8-9 P1
UPSTREAM OF SENSOR X8 - 10 SEE DETAIL TO X8-10 P2
THE RIGHT
TWISTED PAIR NEUTRAL
INTERNAL WIRING
CUB- SENSOR
CubicleBus
CUB+
24VDC
TWISTED PAIR
X8-10 0VDC
S2+ WIRING IS CONTINUOUS IF NO

TRIP UNIT BSS MODULE IS INSTALLED
S1-
X8-9
WL
GF
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
3P, 4W: 480V OR 600V AC

X8-5, L1
X8-6, L2
X8-7, L3
X8-8, N
N
BOTTOM FED
SOURCE
SOURCE
TOP FED
LOAD X8-9 P1
(BOTTOM FED) X8-10
ETU745, ETU748, P2
ETU776
TWISTED PAIR INTERNAL WIRING
NEUTRAL A B C N
SENSOR POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER INPUTS
WIRING IS CONTINUOUS IF NO CubicleBus

METERING MODULE
X8-3
X8-4
METERING MODULE IS INSTALLED

X8-1
X8-2
24VDC
0VDC
CUB+
CUB-
SEE DETAIL TO
THE RIGHT
INTERNAL WIRING
INTERNAL WIRING
INTERNAL WIRING
CUB-
CubicleBus
CUB+
24VDC
WISTED PAIR
0VDC
WIRING IS CONTINUOUS IF NO
BSS MODULE IS INSTALLED
S40 S41 S44
S42 S43 S45

BREAKER STATUS SENSOR (BSS) MODULE

WL Breaker
General Wiring Schematic
CubicleBus MODULES INSTALL TERMINATING RESISTOR
(ZSI) ZONE SELECTIVE DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE ANALOG OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT
INTERLOCKING MODULE WITH ROTARY SWITCH CONFIGURABLE MODULE MODULE
MUST BE FIRST MODULE
X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2
RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
X3 X3 X3 X3 X3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0VDC (-) 0VDC (-) 0VDC (-) 0VDC (-)

24VDC (+) 24VDC (+) 24VDC (+) 24VDC (+)
24VDC
WHEN COM MODULE RJ45 CABLE IS CONNECTED
CUB+
0VDC
CUB-
TO FIRST CUBICLEBUS MODULE, X3-2 AND X3-3
CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED, X3-1 AND X3-4
X8-2
X8-3
X8-4
X8-1
CONNECTIONS ONLY REQUIRED WHEN MORE
THAN 2 CUBICLEBUS MODULES ARE INSTALLED.
WITH NO COM MODULE, ALL X3 CONNECTIONS
ARE REQUIRED.
DIRECT CONNECTION TO X6
TERMINAL STRIP FOR 24VDC
TRIP/CLOSE CONTROL VOLTAGE
DP WRITE
CLOSE 24VDC +
OPEN 24VDC +
FREE 24VDC +
CLOSE 0VDC -
OPEN 0VDC -
FREE 0VDC -
+ (L) - (N)
X6-14
X6-13
X6-7
X6-8
COMMON
TRIP/CLOSE
CONTROL VOLTAGE
ENABLE
K1 K2
FREE
INTERPOSING RELAYS FOR TRIP/CLOSE

CONTROL VOLTAGES OTHER THAN 24VDC
K2 K1
WL X7 COM15 OR 16
COMM. MOD
X7-1
X7-9
X7-2
X7-3
X7-5
X7-6
X7-7
X7-8
X7-4
6 9
6
1 5
LEAD WIRE FROM RJ45 PLUG
COMM. MODULE MODBUS OR
PROFIBUS CONN.
X8-1 - + X6-14 + (L)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
CUB-
+ F1 - FIRST SHUNT TRIP 52TC/86 4)
X8-2 CUB+ X6-13 - (N)
X8-3 24VDC TRIP UNIT X6-12
POWER S1/a AUX. SWITCH S1, NO, 52a
X8-4 0VDC X6-11
X8-5 X6-10
S1/b AUX. SWITCH S1, NC, 52b
120VAC SECONDARY EXTERNAL X8-6 X6-9
X8-7 - X6-8 - (N)
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER INPUTS - (N)
Y1 + REMOTE CLOSING COIL 52CC
X8-8 X6-7 + (L)
NEUTRAL SENSOR INPUTS
S1- -
X8-9 X8 X6 X6-6
"READY TO CLOSE" SIGNALING SWITCH 52LC
+ S20
S2+ X8-10 X6-5
-
S1- X8-11 X6-4
GF SENSOR INPUTS + S2/a AUX. SWITCH S2, NO, 52a
S2+ X8-12 X6-3
-
- (N) X8-13 X6-2
REMOTE RESET BELL ALARM + F7 S2/b AUX. SWITCH S2, NC, 52b
X8-14 X6-1
AND TRIPPED INDICATOR 79 + (L)
+ (L) X9-1 -
X5-14 EMERGENCY OPEN VIA UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE
SECOND SHUNT TRIP 52TC F2 F4 ONLY
- (N) X9-2 +
"QUICK OFF" X5-13 (OPENS BREAKER ONLY WHEN UVR IS INSTALLED)
X9-3 - + X5-12 + (L) UNDERVOLTAGE
F3 "UVR",
MAG-LATCH FOR OPEN FUSE LOCKOUT (TO FUSE CARRIAGE) F6 F4 "UVR td" -
X9-4 +
X5-11 - (N) RELEASE (62/27)
X9-5 X5-10
OPEN FUSE LOCKOUT SWITCH S26 S26 S3/a AUX. SWITCH S3, NO, 52a
X9-6 X5-9
X9-7 X5-8
FIRST SHUNT TRIP SIGNALING SWITCH 52CS
X9-8
S22 X9 X5 S3/b
X5-7
AUX. SWITCH S3, NC, 52b
X9-9 + X5-6
S4/a AUX. SWITCH S4, NO, 52a
X9-10 X5-5
SECOND SHUNT TRIP SIGNALING SWITCH S2CS S23
X9-11 X5-4
S4/b AUX. SWITCH S4, NC, 52b
X9-12 X5-3
BELL ALARM/TRIP SIGNALING SWITCH 30, NO
X9-13 S24 X5-2 + (L) ELECTRIC SPRING
BELL ALARM/TRIP SIGNALING SWITCH 30, NC S12
X9-14 M X5-1 - (N) CHARGING MOTOR 52M
OPTIONAL SWITCH BY CUSTOMER

WL BREAKER
(SECONDARY TERMINALS)
NOTES:
1. COMPONENT PLACEMENT PER PANEL, SWITCHGEAR, OR SWITCHBOARD DRAWINGS.

2. ALL DEVICES SHOWN IN OPEN AND/OR DE-ENERGIZED STATE.
3. ALL GROUND FAULT WIRING TO BE SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR
4. SHUNT TRIP CLEARING CONTACT ONLY WITH INTERMITTENT-DUTY SHUNT TRIPS ON FIRST SHUNT TRIP ONLY

WL Breaker
Ground Fault Setting Selection
Ground Fault Protection
When optional ground fault is selected, A current transformer with the
the trip unit detects fault currents that transformer ratio 1200A : 1A is used to
flow to ground and represent a fire ha- measure the ground fault current. The
zard to the system. The adjustable time transformer can be installed
delay allows selective staggering of directly in the grounded star point
consecutively arranged circuit breakers. of a transformer.
When setting the parameters of the trip Setting

unit, a selection can be made between The ground fault module can be set de- Residual sensing of the
alarm and trip if the set current value is pending on the measuring method (see ground fault current
exceeded. The cause of the trip is dis- above):
played on an LED when the query but-
ton is pressed. Measuring method 1: in position sum I
Measuring method 2: in position G.
Modules
The trip unit versions ETU745, ETU748, With trip unit ETU776, this setting is im-
and ETU776 can be retrofitted with a plemented via the display and key pad
ground fault protection module. or communications.
Two versions of the optional ground Ground Fault Protection with I2t Cha-
fault module can be ordered: racteristic Curve
b Trip and Alarm All versions of the ground fault
b Alarm only modules are delivered with an I2t
or fixed delay.
Ground Fault Measuring Methods Direct measurement of the
Residual sensing of the ground Modules are available in either Alarm ground fault current
fault current only or Alarm and Trip functions.
The trip unit calculates the ground fault

6
current by vectorial current summation

of the 3- phase currents and the neutral
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
conductor current. Direct measurement

of the ground fault current.
Ground fault module GFM A 745-748 Ground fault module GFM AT 745-748
Ground fault module GFM A 776 Ground fault module GFM AT 776

WL Breaker
Metering Voltage Details Selection
VT / PT connections for the WL Breaker when equipped The following ratios are suggested or equivalent VTs can
with metering WL power metering (“Meter Function”) can be used: (Must be suppled by others)
accept 3W or 4W (LL/LN) system voltage connections. 240:120 = 2:1 (ITI Part # 460-240 or 468-240)
480:120 = 4:1 (ITI Part # 460-480 or 468-480)
The trip unit settings available are: 600:120 = 5:1 (ITI Part # 460-600 or 468-600)
1) VT Primary Voltage (240V, 480V, 600V)
2) VT Secondary Voltage (100V, 110V, 120V) VT Accuracy:
3) VT Connection (Wye / LN, Delta / LL) Each Metering Module presents a purely resistive (unity
power factor) load to the transformer. Assuming no other
Three VTs must be used at all times. devices connected to the VT, a ITI type 486 VT can safely
feed 10 metering modules and and still maintain 0.6% accu-
All three VTs should be rated for the nominal system L-L racy assuming the wiring from the VT to the individual mete-
voltage (e.g. 480V) and may have either 100V, 110V or 120V ring modules is twisted pair and kept to a minimum length.
secondary voltages.
Phase Rotation
A-C-B
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Phase Rotation
A-C-B

Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
UL489 Fixed-mount Breaker Dimensions
Frame size 1
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame size 1
Horizontal Connectors
Top view
6
Bottom view
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Rear Vertical Connectors
Top view
6
Rear view
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Front Connectors
Top view
6
Front view
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Front Connectors and Lugs
Top view
6
Front view
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Fixed Size 1
Door Cut-outs
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 2
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Interrupting class Dimension B Dimension C Dimension D

S/L 15.85 [402.5] 18.70 [475.0] 22.30 [566.5]
C 17.80 [452.10] 18.70 [475.0] 25.20 [640.0]


Frame Size 2
Optional Vertical Connectors
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Interrupting Class Rated Current Dimension A
S/L max. 1600 A 0.39 [10]
S/L max. 2000 A 0.59 [15]
S/L max. 3000 A 1.18 [30]
C 1600 - 3000 A 1.18 [30]

Frame Size 2
Optional Vertical Connectors
Rated Current Dimension A
Top view max. 1600 A 0.39 [10]

max. 2000 A 0.59 [15]
max. 3000 A 1.18 [30]
C-class always 1.18 [30]
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Rear view

Frame Size 2
Front Connectors
LH side view
Rated Current Dimension A
6
max. 1600 A 0.39 [10]
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
max. 2000 A 0.79 [20]
max. 2500 A 0.79 [20]
Front view

Frame Size 2
3000A Front Connectors
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 3
6
LH side view
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 3
Vertical Connectors and Horizontal Stabs
Top view
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Top view

Frame Size 3
Top view
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Rear view

Frame Size 3
5000A Vertical Connectors
LH side view
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Front view

Frame Size 2 and 3
Door Cut-outs
Door cut-out and mounting holes for Door Sealing Frame Door cut-out (after mounting Door Sealing Frame)
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Door cut-out (Middle escutcheon visible) Minimal door cut-out (Only center eustcheon visible)
1) Breaker mounting surface.

2) Center of breaker front panel.
3) Drill eight holes for mounting door sealing frame.

UL489 Draw-out Breaker Dimensions
Frame Size 1
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Vertical Connectors
Rear view
Top view
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Bottom view
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Charging and Racking
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Plexiglass Cover
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 1
Door Cut-outs
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 2
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 2
2500/3000A
2500/3000A
2000A 2000A
800/1200/1600A 800/1200/1600A
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 2
Vertical Connectors and Optional Horizontal Connectors
Horizontal Main Vertical Main

Bus Connectors Bus Connectors


6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
NOTE:
Rotatable main bus connectors are only available under the following conditions:
(1) Only acceptable for FS II 800A-2000A Frame Sizes
(2) Only acceptable for short circuit ratings of 85KAIC or less

Frame Size 2
Charging, Racking and Draw-out
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 3
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 3
Vertical Connectors
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 3
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
7 – 11
Frame Size 2 and 3
Door Cut-outs
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
4.78
[121.5]
4.78
[121.5]
5.63
[142.9]
5.63
[142.9]
1) Mounting surface of the circuit breaker or cradle.

7 – 11
UL489 Door Sealing Frame Dimensions
Frame Size 2 and 3
Door Cut-outs
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
1) Mounting surface of the circuit-breaker or cradle.


UL 1066 Draw-out Non-fused Breaker Dimensions
Frame Size 2
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 2
3200A 2000A 800/1600A

3000/3200A 2000A 800/1600A
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 2


6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
NOTE:
Rotatable main bus connectors are only available under the following conditions:
(1) Only acceptable for FS2 800A – 2000A Frame Sizes
(2) Only acceptable for short circuit ratings of 85kAIC or less

Frame Size 2
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

UL 1066 Draw-out Fused Breaker Dimensions
Frame Size 2
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 2
13.35 7.89
[339.2] [200.5]
Top ventilation area(must

remain unobstructed)
5.25
[133.4]
CL
5.25
[133.4] 0.25
[6.3]
0.25
[6.4]
CL
1.75
[44.5]
Ø0.53
6
Ø[13.5]
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
4.00
[101.6]
7.37
[187.3]
9.25 0.75
[235.0] [19.1]
1.75
[44.5]
10.38
[263.6]
5.18
[131.6]
2.88
[73.2]
1.75
[44.5] 2.31
5.25 5.25 [58.7]
[133.4] [133.4]
1.75
[44.5]
23.63
[600.1]
6.97
[177.1]

Frame Size 2
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

UL 1066 Draw-out Breaker Dimensions
Frame Size 2
Door Cut-outs
R0.39 (Max. radii, 4 plc's)

[R10.0]
R0.39 (Max. radii, 4 plc's)
[R10.0]
13.38
[339.9]
13.38
[339.9]
2.74
[69.5]
2.74
[69.5]
0.83
Ø1.42 1.40 [21.1]
[Ø36.0] [35.5]
4.45
[113.0] 0.83
Ø1.42 1.40 [21.1]
[Ø36.0] [35.5]
5.71
4.45
[144.9]
[113.0]
11.41
[289.9]
5.71
[144.9]
11.41
[289.9]
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
R0.08
[R2.0] (Max. radii, 4 plcs) R0.08
(Max. radii, 4 plcs)
[R2.0]
R0.08
[R2.0] (Max. radii, 4 plcs) R0.08
[R2.0] (Max. radii, 4 plcs)
10.98 10.98
[278.9] [278.9]
10.98 10.98
[278.9] [278.9]
4.78
[121.5] 4.78
[121.5]
4.78
[121.5] 4.78
5.19 [121.5]
[131.9] 1.93
[49.0]
10.39 5.63
[263.9] [142.9]
5.19
[131.9] 1.93
Door cut-out (Middle escutcheon visible) Minimal door cut-out
[49.0]
(Only center eustcheon visible)
10.39 5.63
[263.9] [142.9]


Frame Size 3
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 3
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Frame Size 3
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

UL 1066 Draw-out Fuse Carriage Dimensions
Frame Size 3
Fuse Carriage
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

UL 1066 Draw-out Fuse Carriage Dimensions
Frame Size 3
Fuse Carriage Racking
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

UL 1066 Door Sealing Frame Dimensions
Frame Size 3
Door Cut-outs
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER


UL 1066 Draw-out Dimensions
Frame Size 2 and 3
Door Cut-outs
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
1) Mounting surface of the circuit-breaker or cradle.


WL Spare/Replacement Parts
Trip Units and Rating Plugs Selection
ETU 745 ETU 748 ETU 776
GFM A 745-748 GFM AT 745-748 GFM A 776 GFM AT 776

ETU catalog Trip unit Protective Replacement Ground Ground fault
number functions settings LCD displays fault alarm alarm and trip
WLETU745 LSI 1 WLTUSC55 WLLCD48 WLGFA48 WLGFM48
WLETU748 LS 1 WLTUSC55 WLLCD48 WLGFA48 WLGFM48
WLETU776 2 LSI 1 WLTUSC76 Not replaceable WLGFA76 WLGFM76
Trip unit with metering function 2
WLETU745MP LSI 1 WLTUSC76 WLLCD48 WLGFA48 WLGFM48
WLETU748MP LS WLTUSC76 1 WLLCD48 WLGFA48 WLGFM48
WLETU776MP 2 LSI 2 WLTUSC76 Not replaceable WLGFA76 WLGFM76
Overload Protection
L – Long Time Pick-up and Delay
S – Short Time Pick-up and Delay
I – Instantaneous Trip
G – Ground Fault Pick-up and Delay (Accessory sold separately)
6
Rating plug
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Rating plug
Catalog Ampere Catalog Ampere Catalog Ampere Catalog Ampere
number rating number rating number rating number rating
WLRP200 200A WLRP400 400A WLRP800 800A WLRP2500 2500A
WLRP350 350A WLRP700 700A WLRP2000 2000A
1 Optional GF module sold separately.

2 Metering function and ETU776 requires 24VDC supply.

Trip Unit Options Selection
Catalog number
Trip unit test equipment
WLTS Hand held tester for Electronic Trip Unit, Fixed LSIG pick-up
WLTSC Replacement cable for WLTS Test Unit
Handheld tester
24Vdc power supply
WLSITOP25 24Vdc ETU and COMM power supply, 2.5A SITOP Power, Class 2
WLSITOP1 24Vdc ETU and COMM power supply, 3.8A SITOP Power, Class 2

24VDC power supply

6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Secondary Disconnects Selection
Compression screw Spring load Ring lug

connector connector connector
WLGAUXPLUGP WLGAUXPLUGT WLGAUXPLUGR
Catalog number
WLGAUXPLUGP Secondary Disconnect - Compression Screw
WLGAUXPLUGL
Trip Units Secondary Disconnect - Low-Profile Compression Screw
WLGAUXPLUGT Secondary
1 Disconnect - Tension Terminal
WLGAUXPLUGR Secondary 1 Disconnect - Ring Terminal
Secondary disconnect breaker1 frame mount Low-profile screw connector
WLCNMD Auxiliary Contact on Drawout Breaker (Knife Block) WLGAUXPLUGL
WLTERMBLKUL Pull Apart Terminal Block w/ 1M leads for UL489 Fixed Mount Breaker
1 WLCNMDA Block1for Extending Height of Secondary Disconnect/WLCNMD
Secondary disconnect coding1 kit (UL489 only)
WLCODEKITUL Secondary
1
disconnect coding kit for fixed mounted breaker
WL crimp lugs
WL10RL Crimp Lugs (70) for WLGAUXPLUGR - #10 AWG Knife Blade Contact Block
6
WLCNMD

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
WLTERMBLKUL
Extends Height of WLCNMD

WLCNMDA
Coding Kit
WLCODEKITUL

Cradle Frame Accessories Selection
Catalog number
Stationary primary bus-bar disconnect terminals
1 consists of 1 bus-bar pole only)
WLGST15123LI Stab tip replacement kit - 800A/1200A, FS1, Line Side
1
WLGST10163LD Stab tip replacement kit - 800A/1200A/1600A, FS2, Load Side
WLGST10163LL Stab tip replacement kit - 800A/1200A/1600A, FS2, Line and Load Side
WLGST15203LL Stab tip replacement kit - 1200A, FS2, Line and Load Side
WLGST15203LD Stab tip replacement kit - 2000A - 800A/1200A, FS2, Load Side
WLGST30323LL Stab tip replacement kit - 2500A/3000A, FS2, Line and Load Side
WLGST30503LL Stab tip replacement kit - 4000A/5000A, FS3, Line and Load Side
Cradle arc chute cover
WLGARC1UL 3P Arc chute cover, UL489 FS1, Class S/H/L
WLGARC2 3P Arc chute cover ANSI FS2, Class N/S/H/L
WLGARC2UL 3P Arc chute cover, UL489 FS2, Class S/L
WLGARCF2 3P Arc chute cover, ANSI FS2, Class F Fused
WLGARC3 3P Arc chute cover, ANSI/UL489 FS3, Class H/L/F
WL4GARC2 4P Arc chute cover FS2
Arc Chute Cover WL4GARC3 4P Arc chute cover, FS3
2 MOC – Mechanism operated contacts
(for draw-out breaker)
WLMOC MOC with 4NO + 4NC, Test and Connect Position, FS1/FS2
WLMOCC MOC with 4NO + 4NC, Connect Position, FS1/FS2
WLMOC3 MOC with 4NO + 4NC, Test and Connect Position, FS3
WLMOCC3 MOC with 4NO + 4NC, Connect Position, FS3
(for fixed mounted circuit breakers)
2 WLMOCUL1 MOC with 4NO + 4NC, FS1 Fixed
3 WLMOCUL MOC with 4NO + 4NC, FS2/FS3 Fixed
3 TOC – Truck operated contacts
WLGSGSW111 Truck Operated Contact (1Conn-1Test-1Disconn)
WLGSGSW321 Truck Operated Contact (3Conn-2Test-1Disconn)
WLGSGSW6 Truck Operated Contact (6Conn)
6
4 Isolation shutters
WLG3SHUT1L FS1 3-Pole Shutter for Class S,H,L
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
WLG3SHUT2L FS2 3-Pole Shutter for Class N,S,H,L
4 WLG3SHUT2F FS2 3-Pole Shutter for Class F
WLG3SHUT2M FS2 3-Pole Shutter for Class C
WLG3SHUT3L FS3 3-Pole Shutter for Class L,F,H
WLG3SHUT3M FS3 3-Pole Shutter for Class C,M
WLG3SHUT3FC FS3 3-Pole Shutter for Fuse Carriage
WLG4SHUT2L FS2 4-Pole Shutter for Class S,H,L
WLG4SHUT3L FS3 4-Pole Shutter for Class H,L


Cradle Frame Selection
Catalog number
WLGHEAT Cradle frame heater
Locking devices mounted on the cradle frame
WLDLKRK Kirk Key – Lock breaker in OPEN position (FS2, FS3 only)
WLDLDKRK Double-Kirk Key – Lock breaker in OPEN position (FS2, FS3 only)
WLDLSUP Superior – Lock breaker in OPEN position (FS2, FS3 only)
WLDLDSUP Double Superior – Lock breaker in OPEN position (FS2, FS3 only)
WLDLPR Provision Only – Lock breaker in the OPEN position (FS1, FS3 only)
WLDLDPR Provision Only – Double lock breaker in the OPEN position
(FS2, FS3 only)
WLDRLC Locking device against opening the cubicle door when breaker is
in connect position, FS1 Only
WLDRLC1 Locking device against opening the cubicle door when breaker is
Key Interlocking in connect position, FS2, FS3
(Drawout) WLDRLC5UL Locking device against moving/racking the breaker when the cubicle
door is in connect position, FS2, FS3
Mechanical interlock devices
(Mechanical interlock cable ships with 2.0m Bowden Cable)
WLNTLK For FS1, FS2, FS3 Draw-out breaker
WLNTLKF1 FS1 Fixed mounted circuit breaker
WLNTLK23 FS2 and FS3 Fixed mounted circuit breaker
WLNTLWIRE2 Interlock Cable (2.0m Bowden Cable)
WLNTLWRE3 Interlock Cable (3.0m Bowden Cable)
Mechanical Interlock
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Cradle Frame Heater

WLGHEAT

Metering CT Units Selection
3 phase metering CT, guide frame mounted Single phase metering CT

Catalog number Frame Ratio Catalog number Ratio
WLG8005MCT1 FS1 800:5 WLG800NMCT23 800:5
WLG32005MCT2 FS2 3200:5
WLG20005MCT3 FS3 2000:5
WLG30005MCT3 FS3 3000:5
WLG32005MCT3 FS3 3200:5
WLG40005MCT3 FS3 4000:5
WLG50005MCT3 FS3 5000:5
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Ground Fault and Current Sensors Selection
Catalog number
Modified differential ground fault for source ground return

WLGMDGFCT2 FS2 1200:1 3 phase cradle mount
WLGMDGFCT3 FS3 1200:1 3 phase cradle mount
WLGNMDGCT23 Iron core neutral sensor 1200:1 1 phase bus mount

Modified differential CT

External neutral CT for 4 wire residual ground fault
WLNCT2 3” Without copper bus adapter (pass-thru mount)
WLNCT3 3 – 5” max. bus-bar size Without copper bus adapter (pass-thru mount)

Neutral Sensor

WLNCT2CB For 3” With copper bus adapter for bus connection
WLNCT3CB For 3” – 5” max. bus-bar size With copper bus adapter for bus connection
Neutral Sensor with

Bus Connector
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Circuit Breaker Accessories Selection
Catalog number
Shunt trip release
WLST24 24Vdc, 3-cycle momentary duty
WLST48 48Vdc, 3-cycle momentary duty
WLST120 120Vdc/120Vac, 3-cycle momentary duty
WLST240 250Vdc/240Vac, 3-cycle momentary duty
WLSTCD24 24Vdc, continuous duty (UL 489 only)
WLSTCD48 48Vdc, continuous duty (UL 489 only)
WLSTCD120 120Vdc/120Vac, continuous duty (UL 489 only)
WLSTDC240 250Vdc/240Vac, continuous duty (UL 489 only)
(signal contactor 1st Shunt Trip)
Shunt Trip Coil
WLSTC “NO” switch 3A-240Vac rating
(signal contactor second Shunt Trip )
WLUVRC “NO” switch 3A-240Vac rating
Auxiliary signaling switch
WLAS2 2 NO and 2 NC contacts
WLAS4 4 NO and 4 NC contacts

Auxiliary Contact
Ready-to-close signal switch

WLRTCS 1 form “A” NO contact 5A - 240Vac

Ready-to-Close Contact
Bell alarm
Remote reset solenoid for Bell-alarm and trip indicator
WLRSET24 24Vdc
WLRSET48 48Vdc
6
WLRSET120 125Vdc/120Vac
WLRSET240 250Vdc/240Vac
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
WLBA Form “C” contact
Bell Alarm Reset Coil
Bell Alarm Contacts

Operation Counter
Available only with spring charging motor option
WLNUMCNT Mechanical counter
Operations Counter

Catalog number
Undervoltage trip release
WLUV24 24Vdc, instantaneous trip
WLUV48 48Vdc, instantaneous trip
WLUV120 125Vdc/120Vac, instantaneous trip
WLUV240 250Vdc/240Vac, instantaneous trip
WLUVD48 48Vdc, time delayed
WLUVD120 125Vdc/120Vac, time delayed
WLUVD240 250Vdc/1240Vac, time delayed
Undervoltage Trip Coil

Signal contactor for UV trip

WLUVRC “NO” switch 3A – 240Vac rating

Closing coil
Signal Contacts
WLRCS24 24Vdc, 3 cycle momentary duty
WLRCS48 48Vdc, 3 cycle momentary duty
WLRCS120 125Vdc/120Vac, 3 cycle momentary duty
WLRCS240 250Vdc/240Vac, 3 cycle momentary duty

Closing Coil
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Catalog number
Spring charging motor
WLELCMTR24 24Vdc, Charging motor
WLELCMTR48 48Vdc, Charging motor
WLELCMTR120 120Vdc/120Vac, Charging motor
WLELCMTR240 250Vdc/240Vac, Charging motor
WLELCMTR24S 24Vdc, Charging motor w/cut-off switch
WLELCMTR48S 48Vdc, Charging motor w/cut-off switch
WLELCMTR120S 125Vdc/120Vac, Charging motor w/cut-off switch
WLELCMTR240S 250Vdc/240Vac, Charging motor w/cut-off switch
WLMCOSW Motor cut-off switch

Charging Motor
ANSI UL 1066 breaker internal contact replacement kit
RCS2N10 FS2 N-Group, 800A, 1600A
RCS2S10 FS2 S-Group, 800A, 1600A
RCS2H10 FS2 H-Group, 800A, 1600A
RCS2L10 FS2 L-Group, 800A, 1600A
RCS2S15 FS2 S-Group, 2000A
RCS2HF15 FS2 H and F-Group, 2000A
RCS2L15 FS2 L-Group, 2000A
RCS2S30 FS2 S-Group, 3200A
RCS2H30 FS2 H-Group, 3200A
RCS2L30 FS2 L-Group, 3200A
RCS3HF30 FS3 H and F-Group, 4000/5000A
RCS3L30 FS2 L-Group, 4000/5000A

Internal phase sensor (Rogowski coil)
WLCT2 FS2 ANSI breaker kit for one breaker
WLCT3 FS3 ANSI breaker kit for one breaker
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Breaker Current Sensor
ANSI 1066 breaker arc chute replacement kit
WLARC2 For FS2 ANSI breaker only
WLARC3 For FS3 ANSI breaker only
WLARCM3 For FS3 ANSI M-Class breaker only
Arc Chutes

Catalog
number Units
Circuit breaker finger cluster replacement kit
1
WLFNGR1UL For FS1 UL489 800A, 1200A 1 piece
WLFNGR10UL For FS2 UL489 800, 1200, 1600A Class S&L 1 piece
WLFNGR15UL For FS2 UL489 2000A, S&L 1 piece
WLFNGR30UL For FS2 UL489 2500/3000A Class S&L 1 piece
WLFNGR30ULC For FS2 UL489 1600/2000/2500/3000A 1 piece
Class C only
1
WLFNGR10 For FS2 ANSI 800A, 1200A 1 piece
WLFNGR15 For FS2 ANSI 2000A 1 piece
WLFNGR30 For FS2 ANSI 3200A 1 piece
WLFCK3 For FS3 ANSI 4000A, 5000A 1 piece
WLFC6X1A For FS1 UL489 800A, 1200A 6 pieces
WLFC6X10 For FS2 ANSI 800, 1600A 6 pieces
WLFC6X15 For FS2 ANSI 1200A 6 pieces
WLFC6X1B For FS2 Fused 6 pieces
WLFC6X30 For FS2 ANSI, 3200A 6 pieces
WLFC6X3C For FS2 C-Class 6 pieces
WLFC6X3A For FS3 ANSI 4000A, 5000A 6 pieces
WLFC6X3B For FS3 Fuse carriage 6 pieces
Circuit breaker bus connectors
UL 489 Fixed Mount
(Front mount Bus Connector)
WLH1F12CONUL FS1, 800-1200AF, 85kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces
WLL2F16CONUL FS2, 1600AF, 100kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces
WLL2F30CONUL FS2, 2500-3000AF, 100kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces
6
WLL3F50CONUL FS3, 4000-5000AF, 100kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces

Fixed Breaker Connectors (Rear Vertical Bus Connector)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
WLH1R12CONUL FS1, 800-2000AF, 100kAIC at 480 V maximum 6 pieces

WLL2R16CONUL FS2, 800-1600AF, 100kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces
WLL2R20CONUL FS2, 2000AF, 100kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces
WLL2R30CONUL FS2, 2500-3000AF, 100kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces
WLC2R30CONUL FS2, 800-3000A, 150kAIC at 480V max 6 pieces
WLC3R50CONUL FS3, 4000-5000AF, 150kAIC at 480V maximum 6 pieces
Circuit breaker fix mount optional metric hardware
WLMETRC FS1 and FS2 M8x25 bolts and 6.3 washers
WLMETRC3 FS3 M10X25 bolts and 6.3 washers


Locking Devices and Sealing Caps
Breaker OPEN
Locking Device in OPEN Position
(WLLKOFFKRK or WLLKOFFSUP)
Mechanical CLOSE
Key Operation
(WLLKT)
Mechanical OPEN
Key Operation
(WLLKT)
Racking Handle
Prevents withdrawal of Breaker OPEN
the Racking Handle Cradle-mounted
(WLLKCLKRK or WLLCLSUP) (WLDLKRK, WLDLPR,
WLDLSUP, WLDLDKRK
or WLDLDSUP)UP)
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Padlocking Provisions
Breaker OPEN
Up to 4 Padlocks
All Breakers Ship with WLLKNP
(WLLKNP)
Mechanical OPEN
Padlockable Sealing
Cover, Up to 3 Padlocks
(WLLKKT) Shutter
(Standard)
Mechanical CLOSE
Padlockable Sealing
Cover, Up to 3 Padlocks
(WLLKKT)
Guide Rails
(Standard)
Manual
Charging
Lever
(Standard)
Racking Handle
Up to 3 Padlocks
(Standard)

Options and Accessories Selection
Catalog number
Breaker Locking Device
WLLKOFFDRUL1 Door lock FS1 (locked when breaker is closed)
WLLKOFFDRUL3 Door lock FS2/FS3 (locked when breaker is closed)
WLLKOFFKRK Kirk key (lock when breaker is open)
WLLKOFFSUP Superior Key (lock when breaker is open)
WLLKNP Provision only padlock (lock when breaker is open)
Breaker Open Lock WLLKOFFPR Provision only key lock (lock when breaker is open)
WLLKOFFKRK WLLKKT Sealing/Locking cover for OPEN/CLOSE button w/cheat-hole
WLLKCLKRK1 Racking handle lock, FS1 - Kirk key
WLLKCKRK Racking handle lock, FS2/FS3 - Kirk key
WLLKCLSUP1 Racking handle lock, FS1 - Superior key
WLLKCLSUP Racking handle lock, FS2/FS3 - Superior key
WLLKCLPR Racking handle lock, FS2/FS3 - Provision only
WLHANDLC Charging handle padlock provision
Pushbutton Lock Outs
WLLKKT

Charge Handle Lock

WLHANDLC
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Fuse Kits
Catalog number
WL fuse replacement kits
WLCLF0400 Breaker fuse kit FS2 400A (3 Fuses)
WLCLF3001 Carriage fuse kit FS3 3000A (3 Fuses)


Options and Accessories Selection
Catalog number
WLEPEN Emergency OPEN button (mushroom head)
WLDSF Door sealing frame, FS2/FS3
WLPGC Door plexiglass cover, FS2/FS3
WLLFT Lifting device (Yolk) 3 pole frames
WLLFT4 Lifting device (Yolk) 4 pole frames
WLHOIST Breaker Lift Truck/Hoist
WLCHANDLE Breaker manual charging handle replacement
Sealing Frame WLCLUTCH WL breaker shaft extension
WLDSF
WLBGREASE WL circuit breaker maintenance grease
WLDMNT1 Breaker Foot Replacement Kit - FS1 Drawout
WLFMNT1 Breaker Foot Replacement Kit - FS1 Fixed
WLBCERTEST WL circuit breaker certified test report
WLINTWIRE1 Ground fault wire harness replacement (ETU-to-X8)
Plexiglass Cover WLINTWIRE2 CubicleBus wire harness replacement (ETU-to-X8)
WLPGC Should it become necessary for the customer to return a WL circuit breaker frame
for any reason, proper packaging is to be used to prevent damage to the product
while in shipment.
WLPFS1B Packaging for FS1 Breaker
WLPFS2FB Packaging for FS2 Fused Breaker
Lift Device
6
WLLFT
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Communication Components Selection
Catalog number
Breaker communication module
WLCM15M PROFIBUS module COM15
WLCM15RET PROFIBUS module COM15 w/ BSS
WLCM16MD MODBUS module COM16
WLCM16RET MODBUS module COM16 w/ BSS
WLCOMBOARD COM16 RS485 adapter board (Modbus only)
Breaker status sensor
COM Device WLBSS Breaker status sensor for Profibus/Modbus
External I/O CubicleBus modules
WLZSIMD CubicleBUS Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) module
WLANLGCUB CubicleBUS analog output module
WLRLYCUB CubicleBUS digital output relay module w/ rotary switch
WLRLYCCUB CubicleBUS digital output relay module (Configurable)
WLDGNCUB CubicleBUS digital input module
Cables for CubicleBus modules
WLCBUSCABLE02 CubicleBUS RJ45-M communication cable - 0.2 meters
BSS WLCBUSCABLE1 CubicleBUS RJ45-M communication cable - 1 meter
WLCBUSCABLE2 CubicleBUS RJ45-M communication cable - 2 meters
External communication devices
WLBDAP BDA plus, electronic trip unit parameterization
WLBDAPWR BDA power supply
WLBDAPMNT BDA perm mount cable to X8
Technical support literature
6
WLULOPMAN1 Operation Manual for UL489 Breakers

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
WLOPMAN1 Operation Manual for UL1066/ANSI Breakers

TYZ:WL_RET_REP Breaker return, repair and RGA
CubicleBus Devices
BDA
WLCOMBOARD

Typical certified test report
WL Low Voltage
Ft. Worth, TX Power Circuit Breaker
Certified Test Report
Catalog #: Production Order:
Sold To:
Breaker Type:
CBID: FS: Frame Rating:
Base Frame ID: Interrupt Cap: Ship To:
Trip Unit ID:
Test Station: Rating Plug:
Test Date: 7/15/2014
ü Identify Test Performed - Incl. Programming, Labeling, Catalog Order Check
ü Mechanical Accessory Tests Performed - Incl. Manual Mechanism Charging, Anti-Pumping, Trip/Close Solenoids, UVR, Motor, Aux. Switch
Bell Alarms etc. (as per installed)
ü Dielectric / Hi-Pot Tests Performed - Incl. @2.65 kV: Open x A,B,C; Closed: AB, BC, AC, AG, BG, CG
@1.80 kV: Accessories to Ground
@1.20kV: Motor connection to Ground
Primary Injection Settings Results Acceptable Range

Test ETU Initial settings / Test Current etc.; See Note 3 A B C * Min Max
6
Long TIme Pickup (A) IR(xIn): PU A: tR(s):
Long Time Delay (S) Test Current:
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Short Time Pickup (A) Isd (xIn): PU A: Tsd(s):
Short Time Delay (S) Tsd(s): Test Current:
Instantaneous Pickup (A) Ii (xIn): PU A:
Ground Fault Pickup (A) Trip: Alarm: Tg(s):
tR(s): IN (xIn): ON / IN = 0.5 x In

Neutral Delay (S)
PU A: Test Current:
UVR Drop-out Voltage: 0
Notes:
1. This WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker was tested in accordance with ANSI C37.50-1989
2. The above tests were carried out according to controlled Siemens-Ft. Worth test inspection plans and standards on calibrated equipment.
This process and documentation is controlled and audited by UL in accordance with ISO9001:2008. Certification available upon request.
3. All delay test settings are the same as for the preceding pickup test unless otherwise noted. PU A = Function pickup setting in Amperes.
4. All WL Circuit Breaker ETUs are set to factory default safety settings prior to shipment.
[Lowest Pickups, Shortest Delays, N-protection off, Memory Off, GF=sumI]
5. The above product identification information [ETU, Catalog Number etc.] is accurate as of the test date. Any changes to this configuration
are not covered by the above test results.
6. For product support, please contact your sales representative or customer service at: mark.vandre@siemens.com
7. DNT indicates ‘Did Not Test’ and represents a test not applicable to this configured breaker.
(signed)
Quality Manager, Siemens - Ft. Worth ModCenter
Source: Ft. Worth ModCenter Product Traceability System Date Printed:

Page: 1 of 1 Ft. Worth

Quick reference guide
Task Accessories
Manual charging circuit breaker to electrically • WLELCMTRXX

operated circuit breaker… • WLMCOSW Motor Cut-off switch (Optional)
• WLELCMTRXX
• WLMCOSW Motor Cut-off switch (Optional)
Remote operation of circuit breaker • Shunt Trip (WLSTXX)
• Close coil (WLRCSXX)
• Control Power
• WLELCMTRXX
• WLMCOSW Motor Cut-off switch (Optional)
• Shunt Trip (WLSTXX)
• Close coil (WLRCSXX)
Remote operation of circuit breaker via communications
• Com15/Com 16 (WLCMXX)
• 24V DC Power Supply
• Power supply for electric motor, shunt trip etc, should be separate
than the one used for trip unit.
• WLDGNCUB (Digital Input Cubicle)

• 24V DC Class 2 Power Supply
Add the following to obtain tangible verification of the parameter switching

Dynamic Arc Sentry (DAS) • WLRLYCCUB (Configurable Relay output)
6
Add the following for use with communications

• WLCM15M for PROFIBUS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
• WLCM16MD for MODBUS
To a circuit breaker:
• WLCM15M + WLBSS
• WLCM15RET includes (WLCM15M+WLBSS). This uses the 24VDC Class 2
power supply used for the ETU.
PROFIBUS Addition
To a switch:
• WLCM15M + WLBSS + External 24VDC Class 2 UL Power Supply
(WLSITOP25)
To a circuit breaker:
• WLCM16MD + WLBSS
• WLCM16RET includes (WLCM16MD + WLBSS). This uses the 24VDC Class 2
power supply used for the ETU.
MODBUS Addition
To a switch:
• WLCM16MD + WLBSS + External 24VDC Class 2 UL Power Supply
(WLSITOP25)
For ETU, COMM and Cubicle bus modules, the power supply should be
UL Listed Class 2 24VDC
• WLSITOP25 (2.5A) : good for 2 breakers (2ETUs, COMM Cubicle bus
Power Supply Requirements
Modules)
• WLSITOP1 (3.8A): good for up to 4 breakers (4ETUs, COMM Cubicle
bus Modules)

Accessory Description
• Charging motor
WLELCMTRXX
• 24VDC/48VDC/125VDC/250VDC/120VAC/240VAC
WLMCOSW • Motor cut-off switch
• Shunt trip
WLSTXX • 3-cycle or continuous duty
• Closing coil
WLRCSXX • 3-cycle
WLBSS • Breaker Status Sensor (BSS Board)
• Power supply for trip unit and communications

WLSITOP25 • 24VDC
• 2.5A SITOP Power, Class 2
• Power supply for trip unit and communications

WLSITOP1 • 24VDC
• 3.8A SITOP Power, Class 2
WLCM15M • COM 15 PROFIBUS Communication Module
6
WLCM15RET • COM 15 PROFIBUS Communication Module with BSS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
WLCM16MD • COM 16 MODBUS Communication Module
WLCM16RET • COM 16 MODBUS Communication Module with BSS

Ratings for 4 Pole UL 1066 (ANSI C37) Listed Breakers Selection
Rating Class S H L S H L
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz
254VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100
508VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100
635VAC 65 65 85 65 65 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 65 65 85 65 65 85
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 65 65 85 65 65 85
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 15000 15000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.) 1 15000 15000
Weights (D.O. Breaker/Cradle/Fixed mount) lbs. 210/161/185 210/161/185

Rating Class S H L S H L
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz 254VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100
508VAC 65 85 100 65 85 100
635VAC 65 65 85 65 65 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 65 65 85 65 65 85
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 65 65 85 65 65 85
6

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.)1 15000 15000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.)1 15000 15000


Ratings for 4 Pole UL 1066 (ANSI C37) Listed Breakers Selection
Rating Class L L
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz 254VAC 100 100
508VAC 100 100
635VAC 85 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 85 85
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 85 85
Electric trip/UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.)1 10000 10000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.)1 10000 10000

Ratings for UL 1066 Listed Non-automatic Switches

WL frame ratings Frame size 2 Frame size 3
800 - 3200A 4000 - 5000A
Rating Class L L
Breaking capacity with external relay (kA RMS) 254VAC 100 100
6
50/60 Hz, instantaneous trip 508VAC 100 100
635VAC 85 85
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 85 100 2

2 Do not apply switch or breaker rated at 635VAC to a system with fault current > 85kA RMS.

Interrupting rating, frame size, breaker type and frame rating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Class Interrupt rating (kA) Frame Frame size Neutral CT
254VAC 635VAC Max. ampere 2 3 Fixed Drawout
508VAC rating (A)
S 65 65 800 X X X S 2 A 4 0 8
S 65 65 800 X X S 2 H 4 0 8
S 65 65 800 X X S 2 G 4 0 8
S 65 65 800 X X X S 2 K 4 0 8
S 65 65 1600 X X X S 2 A 4 1 6
S 65 65 1600 X X S 2 H 4 1 6
S 65 65 1600 X X S 2 G 4 1 6
S 65 65 1600 X X X S 2 K 4 1 6
S 65 65 2000 X X X S 2 A 4 2 0
S 65 65 2000 X X S 2 H 4 2 0
S 65 65 2000 X X S 2 G 4 2 0
S 65 65 2000 X X X S 2 K 4 2 0
S 65 65 3200 X X X S 2 A 4 3 2
S 65 65 3200 X X S 2 H 4 3 2
S 65 65 3200 X X S 2 G 4 3 2
S 65 65 3200 X X X S 2 K 4 3 2
H 85 65 800 X X X H 2 A 4 0 8
H 85 65 800 X X H 2 H 4 0 8
H 85 65 800 X X H 2 G 4 0 8
H 85 65 800 X X X H 2 K 4 0 8
H 85 65 1600 X X X H 2 A 4 1 6
H 85 65 1600 X X H 2 H 4 1 6
H 85 65 1600 X X H 2 G 4 1 6
H 85 65 1600 X X X H 2 K 4 1 6
H 85 65 2000 X X X H 2 A 4 2 0
6
H 85 65 2000 X X H 2 H 4 2 0
H 85 65 2000 X X H 2 G 4 2 0
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
H 85 65 2000 X X X H 2 K 4 2 0
H 85 65 3200 X X X H 2 A 4 3 2
H 85 65 3200 X X H 2 H 4 3 2
H 85 65 3200 X X H 2 G 4 3 2
H 85 65 3200 X X X H 2 K 4 3 2
L 100 85 800 X X X L 2 A 4 0 8
L 100 85 800 X X L 2 H 4 0 8
L 100 85 800 X X L 2 G 4 0 8
L 100 85 800 X X X L 2 K 4 0 8
L 100 85 1600 X X X L 2 A 4 1 6
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 H 4 1 6
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 G 4 1 6
L 100 85 1600 X X X L 2 K 4 1 6
L 100 85 2000 X X X L 2 A 4 2 0
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 H 4 2 0
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 G 4 2 0
L 100 85 2000 X X X L 2 K 4 2 0
L 100 85 3200 X X X L 2 A 4 3 2
L 100 85 3200 1 X X L 2 H 4 3 2
L 100 85 3200 X X L 2 G 4 3 2
L 100 85 3200 1 X X X L 2 K 4 3 2
L 100 85 4000 X X X L 3 A 4 4 0
L 100 85 4000 1 X X L 3 H 4 4 0
L 100 85 4000 X X L 3 G 4 4 0
L 100 85 4000 1 X X X L 3 K 4 4 0
L 100 85 5000 X X X L 3 A 4 5 0
L 100 85 5000 1 X X L 3 H 4 5 0
L 100 85 5000 X X L 3 G 4 5 0
L 100 85 5000 1 X X X L 3 K 4 5 0
1 FS2 3200A, FS3 4000A/5000A fixed mount breakers have vertical rear connectors included as standard.
Rating plug 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Maximum continuous Frame size Frame size
Current rating (A) 2 3
200 X A
225 X B
250 X C
300 X D
315 X E
350 X F
400 X G
450 X H
500 X J
600 X K
630 X L
700 X M
800 X X N
1000 X X P
1200 X X Q
1250 X X R
1600 X X T
2000 X X U
2500 X X V
3000 X X W
3200 X X Y
4000 X Z
5000 X 1
6
Electronic trip units (ETU)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Protective function Ground fault module
Trip unit LCD display
type L S I alpha num. Alarm Trip
ETU745 X (X) (X) C
ETU748 X X J
ETU748 X X X K
ETU748 X X X L
ETU748 X X X X N
ETU748 X X X X P
ETU748 X X X X X Q
ETU776 X (X) (X) V
( ) Function can be disabled by user.

Bell alarm, breaker ready-to-close, auxiliary contacts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bell alarm
Breaker
ready-to- Breaker open/close
Remote reset coil voltage close auxiliary switches
Form C
AC DC Contacts 1b contact 2a + 2b 4a + 4b
None X
X A
X B
X C
X D
X X E
X X F
X X G
X X H
X X I
X X X J
X X X K
24 X L
48 X M
120 250 X N
240 250 X O
24 X X P
48 X X Q
120 125 X X R
240 250 X X S
24 X X T
6
48 X X U
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
120 125 X X V
240 250 X X W
24 X X Y
48 X X Z
120 125 X X 1
240 250 X X 2
24 X X X 3
48 X X X 4
120 125 X X X 5
240 250 X X X 6
24 X X X 7
48 X X X 8
120 125 X X X 9
240 250 X X X 0
Shunt trip
Control voltage
Status
AC DC contact
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H

Undervoltage release (with or without time delay) or 2nd shunt trip 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Control
voltage
UVR UVR UVR status 2nd shunt
AC DC without delay with delay contact 1 trip
None X
24 X A
48 X B
120 125 X C
240 250 X D
48 X E
120 125 X F
240 250 X G
24 X H
48 X J
120 125 X K
240 250 X L
24 X X M
48 X X N
120 125 X X P
240 250 X X Q
48 X X R
125 X X S
120 250 X X T
Charging motor, motor switch, operations counter

Charging motor
operation voltage
Motor cut-off Operations
6
None X
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X Q
240 250 X X R

Close coil, power metering and communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Close coil operation voltage
Power metering
AC DC capable 1 Modbus 2 PROFIBUS 2
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
X G
X H
24 X N
24 X P
48 X S
48 X T
120 125 X W
120 125 X Y
240 250 X 2
240 250 X 3
24 X X Q
48 X X U
120 125 X X Z
240 250 X X 4
24 X X R
48 X X V
120 125 X X 1
240 250 X X 5
X X L
X X M
X F
6
24 X 6
48 X 7
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
120 125 X 8
240 250 X 9
Breaker locks 10 11 12 13 14 15
type – KIRK 3 type – SUPERIOR) 3 pushbuttons 4 handle
None X
X A
X C
X E
X F
X X G
X X J
X X S
X X U
X X V
X X X W
X X X Z
Miscellaneous options 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OPEN position (provisions only) 4 (Automatic trip reset is standard)
None N
X w B
X C
X X D
1 Requires External PTs for voltage input and 24VDC power supply. 4 Locks provided by others.
2 Includes BSS device and requires 24VDC power supply. 5 If a breaker lock is chosen for Digit 14, a provision need not be ordered in Digit 15.
3 Custom key locks are not available and must be supplied by others. Order key lock
provision if custom if keyed alike locks are required.

Breaking capacity, frame size, switch type and frame rating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Class Interrupt rating (kA) Frame Frame size Fixed Drawout
Max.
254VAC ampere
L 100 85 800 X X L 2 J 4 0 8 S S
L 100 85 800 X X L 2 S 4 0 8 S S
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 J 4 1 6 S S
L 100 85 1600 X X L 2 S 4 1 6 S S
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 J 4 2 0 S S
L 100 85 2000 X X L 2 S 4 2 0 S S
L 100 85 3200 X X L 2 J 4 3 2 S S
L 100 85 3200 X X L 2 S 4 3 2 S S
L 100 85 4000 X X L 3 J 4 4 0 S S
L 100 85 4000 X X L 3 S 4 4 0 S S
L 100 85 5000 X X L 3 J 4 5 0 S S
L 100 85 5000 X X L 3 S 4 5 0 S S
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

Breaker ready-to-close auxiliary contacts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Breaker ready-to-close Breaker open/close auxiliary switches
1b contact 2a + 2b 4a + 4b
None X
X B
X C
X D
X X H
X X I
Shunt trip
Operation voltage
Status
AC DC contact
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H

Operation
6
voltage
UVR UVR UVR 2nd shunt
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

None X
24 X A
48 X B
120 125 X C
240 250 x D
48 X E
120 125 X F
240 250 X G
24 X H
48 X J
120 125 X K
240 250 X L
24 X X M
48 X X N
120 125 X X P
240 250 X X Q
48 X X R
125 X X S
120 250 X X T

Charging motor, motor switch, operations counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Charging motor
operation voltage
Motor cutoff
AC DC switch Operations counter
None X
24 A
48 B
120 125 C
240 250 D
24 X E
48 X F
120 125 X G
240 250 X H
24 X J
48 X K
120 125 X L
240 250 X M
24 X X N
48 X X P
120 125 X X Q
240 250 X X R
Close coil, communications

Charging motor
operation voltage
None X
6
X G
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
24 A
24 X N
48 B
48 X S
120 125 C
120 125 X W
240 250 D
240 250 X 2
X H
24 X P
48 X T
120 125 X Y
240 250 X 3
1 Requires 24VDC power supply. BSS is included.

Switch locks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Key lock breaker Key lock breaker Padlock provisions Padlock provi-
OPEN position OPEN position (lock for OPEN and CLOSE sions for
(lock type – KIRK) 1 type – SUPERIOR) 1 pushbuttons 2 charging handle
None X
X A
X C
X E
X F
X X G
X X J
X X S
X X U
X X V
X X X W
X X X Z
Key lock breaker
None N
X B
UL 1066 Fixed Mount breaker vertical connector kits

6
Description Catalog Number

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
FS 2 800A - 1600A Rear Vertical Connectors (8 pieces, includes Neutral Pole) WL4L2R16CONUL
FS 2 2000A Rear Vertical Connectors (8 pieces, includes Neutral Pole) WL4L2R20CONUL
FS 2 3200A Rear Vertical Connectors (8 pieces, includes Neutral Pole) WL4L2R32CONUL 4
FS 3 4000A - 5000A Rear Vertical Connectors (8 pieces, includes Neutral Pole) WL4L3R50CONUL 4

1 Custom key locks are not available and must be supplied by others. Order Key Lock Provisions if custom keys or keyed alike breakers are required.
2 Lock provided by others.
4 FS II 3200A, FS III 4000A, 5000A breakers include vertical connectors as a standard.

Interrupting rating, frame size and frame rating G 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
240VAC Max. ampere
S 65 65 800 X S 2 4 0 8
S 65 65 1600 X S 2 4 1 6
S 65 65 2000 X S 2 4 2 0
S 65 65 3200 X S 2 4 3 2
H 85 65 800 X H 2 4 0 8
H 85 65 1600 X H 2 4 1 6
H 85 65 2000 X H 2 4 2 0
H 85 65 3200 X H 2 4 3 2
L 100 85 800 X L 2 4 0 8
L 100 85 1600 X L 2 4 1 6
L 100 85 2000 X L 2 4 2 0
L 100 85 3200 X L 2 4 3 2
L 100 85 4000 X L 3 4 4 0
L 100 85 5000 X L 3 4 5 0

For breakers:
Screw clamp terminals P
Spring clamp terminals T
Ring terminals R
Spring clamp terminals (low profile, non-partable design) K
6
For switch (non-automatic)
Screw clamp terminals D
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Spring clamp terminals E
Ring terminals F
Screw clamp terminals, non-partable design) M
None X
(1) Connected, (1) Test, (1) Disconnected – all Form C 1
(3) Connected, (2) Test, (1) Disconnected – all Form C 3
(6) Connected – all form C 6
Cradle mounted key locks
None X
Lock breaker in OPEN position (Kirk key) A
Lock breaker in OPEN position (Superior key) B
Double lock breaker in OPEN position (Kirk key) C
Double lock breaker in OPEN position (Superior key) D
Provision only – Lock breaker in OPEN position E
Provision only – Double lock breaker in OPEN position F
None X
Isolation shutters F
1 Terminal blocks (X5, X6, X8, X9) are installed as standard.

UL 1066 Listed Catalog Number Selection
G 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Arc chute cover
None X
Arc chute covers A
Arc chute covers B
Door locks and mechanical
2. Locks cubicle door, when breaker is in connect
position 3. Locks against racking breaker if the cubicle
door is open
1 2 3
None X
X M
X A
X C
X X D
X X X E
X X G
X X H
None X
Test and Connect position (FS2 only) M
Connect position (FS2 only) N
6
Standard read connectors X

Standard rear connectors and a cradle heater H
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Rotatable rear connectors (FS2, 2000A and below & H Class) J

Rotatable rear connectors and a cradle heater (FS2, 2000A and below & H Class) K
Future use
UL 1066 Listed cradle accessories

Cradle accessories Catalog Number
WL FS2 SHUTTER, 4-Pole WL4SHUT2L
WL FS3 SHUTTER, 4-Pole WL4SHUT3L
WL FS2 Cradle Arc Chute Cover 4-Pole WL4GARC2
WL FS3 Cradle Arc Chute Cover 4-Pole WL4GARC3
WL Cradle Lock Single Kirk FS2 4-Pole WL4DLKRK2
WL Cradle Lock Single Superior FS2 4-Pole WL4DLSUP2
WL Cradle Lock Double Kirk FS2 4-Pole WL4DLDKRK2
WL Cradle Lock Double Superior FS2 4-Pole WL4DLDSUP2
WL Cradle Lock Single Provision FS2 4-Pole WL4DLPR2
WL Cradle Lock Single Kirk FS3 4-Pole WL4DLKRK3
WL Cradle Lock Single Superior FS3 4-Pole WL4DLSUP3
WL Cradle Lock Double Kirk FS3 4-Pole WL4DLDKRK3
WL Cradle Lock Double Superior FS3 4-Pole WL4DLDSUP3
WL Cradle Lock Single Provision FS3 4-Pole WL4DLPR3


UL7 1066Frame
Listedsizes
Non-automatic Catalogue Number
/ dimension drawings
Selection
Frame
7.1 Size II, size
Frame Drawout (3-Pole
II Drawout and
(3-Pole 4-Pole)
and 4-Pole)
8.35 [212.0] 7.89 [200.5]
5.2461 [133.3]
Top ventilation area

(must remain unobstructed)
Side ventilation area Arc chute cover 10.63 [270]

(both sides - must remain (optional accessory)
unobstructed) 5.47 [139]
Wiring channel
1.75 [44.5]
0.53 [ 13.5]
4.00 [101.6] 20.34 [516.7]

10.83 [275.0]
12.89 [327.5]
7.37 [187.3]
6
0.75 [19.1]
10.38 [263.6] 10.31 [262]

9.25 [235.0]
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
1.75 [44.5]
4.86 [123.5] 5.18 [131.6]
2.88 [73.1] 2.99 [76.0]
1.75 [44.5]
2.31 [58.7] 3.74 [95]

3-pole cradle 3.27 [83.0] 8.46 [215.0] 1.85 [47.1]
8.86 [225] 2.37 [60.1]
2.24 [57.0]
4-pole cradle Ground Strap 3.94 [100]
6.97 [177.1] 18.62 [473.0] (optional accessory)
9.06 [230]
19.41 [493.0]
7.20 [183]
19.53 [496.0]
Middle escutcheon 12.32 [313]
19.65 [499.0] 18.11 [460]

Center escutcheon 23.23 [590]
Bottom ventilation area

(to remain unobstructed) 5.59 [142.0]
Mounting holes
Ø0.35 [Ø9.0]
18.90 [480.0] 6.89 [175.0]

22.13 [562]
13.78 [350.0]
12.83 [326.0]
5.31 [135.0]
Ø 0.55 [14.0]; Hole provided as

standrad grounding provision.
(Grounding strap is optional
factory provided accessory).
6.69 [170.0] 2.28 [58.0]

8.19 [208.0] 8.66 [220.0]

7–1
Frame Sizes / Drawings Selection
3200 A 2000 A 800/1600 A
5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3]

5.25 [133.3]
0.25 [6.4] 5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3]
5.25 [133.3] 0.25 [6.4] 5.75 [146.1]
0.25 [6.3] 0.25 [6.3]
0.25 [6.3] 0.25 [6.3]

0.25 [6.4]
5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3] 5.75 [146.0]
6
1.75
0.53 [ [44.5]
13.5]
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
4.00
[101.6]
7.37
[187.3]
10.38 0.75
[263.6] [19.0]
9.25
[235.0]
1.75
[44.5]
5.18
[131.6]
3.74
[95.0] 2.88
[73.1] 1.75
[44.5]
5.25 5.25
[133.3] [133.3] 2.31 18.62
[58.7] [473.0]
6.97
[177.1]
7–2

HORIZONTAL MAIN VERTICAL MAIN

BUS CONNECTORS BUS CONNECTORS
1.75
[44.5]
1.75
[44.5]
5.25
[133.3]
1.75
[44.5]
5.25
5.25
[133.3] [133.3] 5.25
[133.3]
1.75
[44.5]
0.50
[12.7]
0.75
[19.0]
HORIZONTAL MAIN VERTICAL MAIN

BUS CONNECTORS BUS CONNECTORS
1.75
Ø0.53 [44.5]
[Ø13.5]
4.00
6
[101.6]
0.50
[12.7]
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
7.5
[190.5]
10.38 0.75
[263.6] [19.0]
9.25
[235.0]
1.75
[44.5]
3.75 0.50
3.75 [12.7]
[95.2] [95.3] 2.88
[73.1] 1.75
[44.5]
6.97
[177.1]
5.25 5.25
[133.3] [133.3] 2.31 18.62
[58.7] [473.0]
6.97
[177.1]
NOTE:
ROTATABLE MAIN BUS CONNECTORS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
(1) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR 3-POLE VERSIONS
(2) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR FS2 800A-2000A
(3) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR SHORT-CIRCUIT RATINGS OF 85kAIC OR LESS
7–3

Lifting Point (Cradle

only) Do not lift by other Lifting Point (Cradle and
points. Breaker) Do not lift by other
points.
0.75
[19.0]
Minimum free space for

19.13 6.43 circuit breaker racking
[486.0] Closed door racking [163.4]
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
15.7 Withdrawn position

[398]
34.80
[884]
7–4
Frame
7.3 size
FrameII,size
fixed-mounted version
II, fixed-mounted version
5.12 [130.0]
Fixed mount versions are only 5.12 [130.0] 5.12 [130.0]
2.56 [65.0]
available with rear vertical connector
0.79 [20.0]
for FS2 3200A and FS3 4000A/5000A
1.57 [40.0]
M8
5.91
[150.0]
required space for aux. connectors

including wire-channel
0.39 [10] up to 1600A
press-in-nut
0.59 [15] up to 2000A
M8 (metric thread)
�0.53
[�13.5]
18.70
[475.0]
4.92 17.78
[125.0] 7.50 1.75 [451.5]
[190.5] [44.4]
6
5.91
[150.0] 3.75
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
[95.3]
0.75 [19.0] 5.91 [150.0] 0.79 breaker front cover

0.39 [10] up to 1600A
1.77 [45.0] [20.0] 22.44 [570.0]
0.59 [15] up to 2000A 0.67 [17.0]
23.23 [590.0]
10.17 [258.4]
4.25 [108.0] large door cut-out [with edge protector)
4.45 [113.0] door cut-out, middle escutcheon visible
4.61 [117.0] minimal door cut-out, only center escutcheon visible
5.00 [127.0]
Rear View
20.83 [529.0] M8
(1) 5.12 [130.0]
0.16 [4.0] 5.12 [130.0]
0.35 [ 9.0]
5.91 [150.0]
9.06 [230.0] 4.33 [110.0]
0.79 [20.0]
0.16 [4.0]
22.44 [570.0]
8.58 [218.0]
(1) = Slots 0.2 [5] for insulation barriers
7–8
7.5
Frame Frame
size III,size III, fixed-mounted
fixed-mounted version
version
Fixed-mounted versions are only available as
4-pole with vertical connections.

press-in nut M 10
(metric thread)
1.20 [30.5]
1.75 [44.4]
0.55 [ 14.0]
20.67 [525.0]
17.77 [451.5]
7.50 [190.5]
1.75 [44.4]
1.75 [44.4]
3.75 [95.2]
breaker front cover

1.75 [44.4] 5.91 [150.0]
35.04 [890.0]
0.79 [20.0]
1.77 [45.0] 35.98 [914.0]
11.28 [286.5]
4.25 [108.0] large door cut-out [with edge protector)
4.45 [113.0] door cut-out, middle escutcheon visible
4.61 [117.0] minimal door cut-out, only center escutcheon visible
5.00 [127.1]
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
Top view vertical connection Rear view
breaker front cover 35.08 [891]

33.47 [850.0]
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0]
0.16 [4.0] (1)
0.79 [20.0]
9.04 [229.5] 4.33 [110.0]

5.91 [150.0]
0.43 [ 11.0]
M10
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0]

0.26 [6.7]
(gap)
0.25 [6.4]
(copper bar) breaker front cover
7 – 10
Frame size III, Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole)
7.6 Frame size III Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole)
8.35 [212.0]
Top ventilation area

(must remain unobstructed) 7.89 [200.5]
10.63 [270.0]
Side ventilation area Arc chute cover
(both sides - must remain (optional accessory) Wiring channel
10.24 [260.0]
unobstructed) 5.47 [139.0] 1.85 [47.0]
Optional ground strap
20.34 [516.7]
7.37 [187.2]
6
10.26 [260.5]
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
5.18 [131.6]
2.31 [58.7]
3-pole cradle
3.39 [86.0] 8.54 [217.0]
8.46 [215.0]
2.24 [57.0] 16.81 [427.0]
4-pole cradle 8.74 [222.0]
6.75 [171.5] 18.62 [473.0] 17.01 [432.0]
19.41 [493.0] 12.01 [305.0]
20.28 [515.0]
19.53 [496.0] 27.72 [704.0]
Middle escutcheon 35.98 [914.0]
19.65 [499.0]
Center escutcheon
11.61 [295.0] 9.84 [250.0] Door panel

Ø 0.35 [Ø 9.0]
Mounting holes
2.28 [58.0]
6.69 [170.0]
8.66 [220.0]
8.19 [208.0]
Ø 0.55 [14.0]; Hole provided as

standrad grounding provision.
(Grounding strap is optional
factory provided accessory).
Bottom ventilation area

(to remain unobstructed
23.23 [590.0]
for 5000A circuit breaker)
31.50 [800.0]

7 – 11
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 3.75 [95.2]
7 – 12

6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER
7 – 13

Notes
6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WL POWER

7POWER PRODUCT Dry Type Transformers
Contents
Dry Type Transformers
Amperage Rating Reference Tables 7-2
Catalogue coding system 7-3
NRCAN Rated General Purpose Transformers
Commercial Dry Type Transformers
Aluminium Winding 7-4
Copper Winding 7-5
Industrial Dry Type Transformers
Aluminium Winding 7-6 – 7-7
Copper Winding 7-8 – 7-9
K Rated Industrial Dry Type Transformers
Aluminium Winding 7-10
Copper Winding 7-11
Wiring Diagrams 7-12 – 7-13
Enclosure Figures 7-14 – 7-16
7
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE
Siemens / Speedfax Previous folio:

Amperage Rating Reference Tables General
Single Phase Transformer Amperage Ratings
Line Voltage (Volts)
kVA 120 240 480 600 2400 4160
3 25.0 12.5 6.25 5.00 1.25 0.72
5 41.7 20.8 10.4 8.33 2.08 1.20
7.5 62.5 31.3 15.6 12.5 31.3 1.80
10 83.3 41.7 20.8 16.7 4.17 2.40
15 125 62.5 31.3 25.0 6.25 3.61
25 208 104 52.1 41.7 10.4 6.01
37.5 313 156 78.1 62.5 15.6 9.01
50 417 208 104 83.3 20.8 12.0
75 625 313 156 125 31.3 18.0
100 833 417 208 167 41.7 24.0
150 1250 625 313 250 62.5 36.1
200 1667 833 417 333 83.3 48.1
250 2083 1042 521 417 104 60.1
333 2775 1388 694 555 139 80.0
Three Phase Transformer Amperage Ratings

Line Voltage (Volts)
kVA 208 240 480 600 2400 4160
6 16.7 14.4 7.22 5.77 1.44 0.83
10 27.8 24.1 12.0 9.62 2.41 1.39
15 41.6 36.1 18.0 14.4 3.61 2.08
30 83.3 72.2 36.1 28.9 7.22 4.16
45 125 108 54.1 43.3 10.8 6.25
50 139 120 60.1 48.1 12.0 6.94
75 208 180 90.2 72.2 18.0 10.4
112.5 312 271 135 108 27.1 15.6
150 416 361 180 144 36.1 20.8
225 625 541 271 217 54.1 31.2
300 833 722 361 289 72.2 41.6
450 1249 1083 541 433 108 62.5
500 1388 1203 601 481 120 69.4
600 1665 1443 722 577 144 83.3
7
750 2082 1804 902 722 180 104

1000 2776 2406 1203 962 241 139
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
1500 4164 3608 1804 1443 361 208

2000 5551 4811 2406 1925 481 278
kVA (1 phase) = volts X amps kVA (3 phases) = 1,732 X volts X amps

1000 1000
Amps = kVA (1 phase) X 1000 Amps = kVA (3 phase) X 1000

volts 1,732 X volts

Catalogue Coding System Selection
CATALOGUE CODE
T = DRY TYPE kVA RATING
E = EPOXY
D = DRIVE TEMPERATURE RISE
A = AUTO 5 = 150° C
1 = 115° C
8 = 80° C
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
A = 240 V.
M = Commercial type NrCan
B = 208 V. ELECTRO SHIELD
N = Industrial type NrCan
C = 380 V. 1 = 1x SHEILD
NJ = Industrial type NrCan
D = 416 V. 2 = 2x SHIELD
E = C802
F = 480 V. 3 = 3x SHIELD
BLANK = Non-C802
G = 600 V. X = NONE
S = special voltage
1 = 1 PHASE C = COPPER K FACTOR

3 = 3 PHASE A = ALUMINUM K =4
L =9
M = 13
SECONDARY VOLTAGE N = 20
1 = 120/240 V. P = 30
2 = 240Y/139 V. Q = 40
3 = 208Y/120 V. R = 50
4 = 380Y/220 V. X = NONE
5 = 416Y/240 V.
6 = 480Y/277 V. V = NEMA 1 C/W DRIP COVER
7 = 600Y/347V. D = NEMA 1 C/W DRIP SHIELD
0 = special voltage S = NEMA 1 C/W SPRINKLER HOODS
R = NEMA 3R
W = NEMA 4
X = NEMA 4X
O = OPEN TYPE (CORE AND COILS ONLY)
7
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE

Commercial Type Aluminum Winding Selection
Features:
Wall mounting brackets up to 75 kVA for three phase
b Available transformer sizes are: b
- Single phase: 15 - 250 kVA b Standard audible sound level (Meets NEMA ST-20 standards)
- Three phase: 15 - 450 kVA b CSA certified (LR3902) and UL listed (E112313)
150ºC temperature rise
b All winding conductors are in aluminum b
Enclosure Type: Heavy duty ventilated Type 3R standard
b Standard impedance at 60 Hz b
Enclosure Finish: ANSI 61 Grey, UL50
b Insulation class 220 b
Impedance: Typically 3% to 6.5%
b Lugs up to 225 kVA b
150°C Rise - Primary 600 V or 480 V

Dimensions
Height Width Depth Weight Wiring
Catalogue Number kVA Mountinga Taps b Figurec in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs kg Diagram
Single Phase, Secondary 120 / 240 V

T1*10015A5RXXM 15. W/F 4 X 2.5 2 24 600 22 561 18 457 160 73 WD1
T1*10025A5RXXM 25. W/F 4 X 2.5 3 26 650 25 632 19 483 225 102 WD1
T1*10037A5RXXM 37.5. F 4 X 2.5 4 31 790 26 668 23 584 310 141 WD1
T1*10050A5RXXM 50. F 4 X 2.5 4 31 790 26 668 23 584 370 168 WD1
T1*10075A5RXXM 75. F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 450 205 WD1
T1*10100A5RXXM 100. F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 560 255 WD1
T1*10150A5RXXM 150 F 4 X 2.5 6 48 1219 38 960 30 762 820 373 WD2
T1*10200A5RXXM 200 F 4 X 2.5 6 48 1219 38 960 30 762 1000 455 WD2
T1*10250A5RXXM 250 F 4 X 2.5 7 56 1425 42 1062 36 914 1300 591 WD2
Three Phase, Secondary 208 Y / 120 V

T3*30015A5RXXM 15. W/F 4 X 2.5 1 18 447 20 511 18 457 165 75 WD3
T3*30030A5RXXM 30. W/F 4 X 2.5 2 24 600 22 561 18 457 285 130 WD3
T3*30045A5RXXM 45. W/F 4 X 2.5 3 26 650 25 635 19 483 345 157 WD3
T3*30075A5RXXM 75. F 4 X 2.5 4 31 993 26 668 23 584 540 245 WD3
T3*30112A5RXXM 112.5. F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 750 341 WD3
T3*30150A5RXXM 150. F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 885 403 WD3
T3*30225A5RXXM 225 F 4 X 2.5 6 49 1229 38 960 30 762 1500 682 WD3
T3*30300A5RXXM 300 F 4 X 2.5 6 49 1229 38 960 30 762 1750 795 WD3
7
T3G30450A5RXXM 450 F 4 X 2.5 7 56 1422 42 1067 36 914 2400 1091 WD4

DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
* Primary Voltage – F = 480V, G = 600V. See page 7-3 for Catalogue Code Detail.
aW = Wall mount F = Floor mount All weights and dimensions are approximate and subject
b Taps:Single phase: 15-250 kVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN to change without notice.
Three phase: 15-450 kVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN
c Please refer to enclosure figures on page 7-23

Commercial Type Copper Winding Selection
Features:
Wall mounting brackets up to 75 kVA for three phase
b Available transformer sizes are: b
- Single phase: 15 - 250 kVA b Standard audible sound level (Meets NEMA ST-20 standards)
- Three phase: 15 - 450 kVA b CSA certified (LR3902) and UL listed (E112313)
150ºC temperature rise
b All winding conductors are aluminum b
Enclosure Type: Heavy duty ventilated Type 3R standard
b Standard impedance at 60 Hz b
Enclosure Finish: ANSI 61 Grey, UL50
b Insulation class 220 b
Impedance: Typically 3% to 6.5%
b Lugs up to 225 kVA b
150°C Rise - Primary 600 V or 480 V

Dimensions
Height Width Depth Weight Wiring
Catalogue Number kVA Mounting a
Taps b
Figure c Diagram
in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs kg
Single Phase, Secondary 120 / 240 V
T1*10015C5RXXM 15. W/F 4 X 2.5 2 24 600 22 561 18 457 165 75 WD1
T1*10025C5RXXM 25. W/F 4 X 2.5 3 26 650 25 632 19 483 240 109 WD1
T1*10037C5RXXM 37.5. W/F 4 X 2.5 4 31 790 26 668 23 584 340 155 WD1
T1*10050C5RXXM 50 F 4 X 2.5 4 31 790 26 668 23 584 390 177 WD1
T1*10075C5RXXM 75 F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 540 245 WD1
T1*10100C5RXXM 100 F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 650 295 WD1
T1*10150C5RXXM 150 F 4 X 2.5 6 48 1219 38 960 30 762 960 436 WD2
T1*10200C5RXXM 200 F 4 X 2.5 6 48 1219 38 960 30 762 1080 491 WD2
T1*10250C5RXXM 250 F 4 X 2.5 7 56 1425 42 1062 36 914 1440 655 WD2
Three Phase, Seconday 208 Y / 120 V

T3*30015C5RXXM 15. W/F 4 X 4.5 1 18 447 20 511 18 457 185 84 WD3
T3*30030C5RXXM 30. W/F 4 X 2.5 2 24 600 22 561 18 457 300 136 WD3
T3*30045C5RXXM 45. W/F 4 X 2.5 3 26 650 25 635 19 483 390 177 WD3
T3*30075C5RXXM 75 W/F 4 X 2.5 4 31 993 26 668 23 584 635 289 WD3
T3*30112C5RXXM 112.5 F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 815 370 WD3
T3*30150C5RXXM 150 F 4 X 2.5 5 39 993 29 737 27 686 980 445 WD3
7
T3*30225C5RXXM 225 F 4 X 2.5 6 48 1229 38 960 30 762 1600 727 WD3
T3*30300C5RXXM 300 F 4 X 2.5 6 48 1229 38 960 30 762 1850 841 WD3
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE
T3*30450C5RXXM 450 F 4 X 2.5 7 56 1422 42 1067 36 914 3000 1364 WD4
aW = Wall mount F = Floor mount
b Taps:Single phase: 15-250 kVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN All weights and dimensions are approximate and subject
Three phase: 15-450 kVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN to change without notice.
c Please refer to enclosure figures on page 7-21 and 7-22

Industrial Type Aluminum Winding Selection
Features: Options and Accessories:
b 15 - 250 kVA single phase b Electrostatic shield
15 - 450 kVA three phase Special paint (other than ASA 61 grey)
b
b Aluminum winding - b 115°C and 80°C temperature rise
(standard 3 coil delta-wye
three phase) b Operating frequencies other than 60 Hertz
b Special voltage (for domestic or
b High quality grain-oriented steel laminations export applications)
b Insulation class 220 Low loss and low noise special designs
b
b Compact and easy-to-install Anti-vibration pads
enclosure b
b Temperature probes
b Quiet operation and adequate
ventilation b Busbar to your specifications
b Epoxy Vacuum Impregnated (EVI)
b Manufactured to ISO standards upon request
150°C Rise
150°C- Primary
Rise - Primary
600 V or
600480
V or
V 480 V
Dimensions
Dimensions
Height Height Width Width Depth Depth Weight WeightNoise Noise
Catalogue
Catalogue
NumberNumber
kVA Mounting
kVA Mounting
a
Tapsab Taps b in. mm
in. mmin. mm
in. mmin. mm
in. lbs
mm kg
lbs level
kg (dB)
level (dB)
SingleSingle
Phase,Phase,
Secondary
Secondary
120 / 240
120V/ 240 V
T1*10015A5RXXN 15.
T1*10015A5RXXN 15.
W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X22.5 30
2 30
762 762
18 18
457 457
14 14
349 349
169 16977 7750 50
T1*10025A5RXXN 25.
T1*10025A5RXXN 25.
W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X32.5 33
3 33
838 838
21 21
533 533
16 16
400 400
227 227
103 10350 50
T1*10037A5RXXN 37.5.
T1*10037A5RXXN 37.5.
W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X42.5 33
4 33
838 838
21 21
533 533
16 16
400 400
277 277
126 12650 50
50.
T1*10050A5RXXN
T1*10050A5RXXN 50.
W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X42.5 4
33 33
838 838
21 21
533 533
16 16
400 400
350 350
159 15950 50
T1*10075A5RXXN 75.
T1*10075A5RXXN 75. F F4 X 2.5 4 X52.5 47
5 1194
47 1194
24 24
616 616
23 23
583 583
486 486
221 22155 55
100.
T1*10100A5RXXN
T1*10100A5RXXN 100.F F4 X 2.5 4 X52.5 5
47 47
1194 1194
24 24
616 616
23 23
583 583
572 572
260 26055 55
T1*10150A5RXXN 150
T1*10150A5RXXN 150F F4 X 2.5 4 X62.5 51
6 1295
51 1295
28 28
718 718
27 27
685 685
814 814
370 37060 60
T1*10200A5RXXN 200
T1*10200A5RXXN 200F F4 X 2.5 4 X62.5 58
6 1473
58 1473
32 32
820 820
30 30
761 761
1109 1109
504 50465 65
250
T1*10250A5RXXN
T1*10250A5RXXN 250F F4 X 2.5 4 X72.5 7
58 58
1473 1473
32 32
820 820
30 30
761 761
1265 1265
575 57565 65
Three Phase,
Three Phase,
Secondary
Secondary
208 Y /208
120YV/ 120 V
7
T3*30015A5RXXN 15.
T3*30015A5RXXN 15.W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X1
2.5 26
1 660
26 660
18 464
18 464
15 375
15 375207 207
94 9445 45
T3*30030A5RXXN 30.
T3*30030A5RXXN 30.W/F 4X
W/F 2.5 4 X1
2.5 31
1 775
31 23
775 578
23 18
578 451
18 451335 152
335 15245 45
T3*30045A5RXXN 45.
T3*30045A5RXXN 45.W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X1
2.5 31
1 775
31 775
23 578
23 578
18 451
18 451381 381
173 17345 45
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
T3*30075A5RXXN 75.
T3*30075A5RXXN 75. F 4F X 2.5 4 X1
2.5 31
1 775
31 23
775 578
23 18
578 451
18 451396 180
396 18050 50
T3*30112A5RXXN 112.5.
T3*30112A5RXXN 112.5.F 4F X 2.5 4 X2
2.5 37
2 940
37 28
940 705
28 22
705 552
22 552596 270
596 27050 50
T3*30150A5RXXN 150.
T3*30150A5RXXN 150. F 4F X 2.5 4 X2
2.5 37
2 940
37 28
940 705
28 22
705 552
22 552734 333
734 33350 50
T3*30225A5RXXN 225
T3*30225A5RXXN 225 F 4F X 2.5 4 X2
2.5 46
2 1168
46 1168
31 787
31 787
24 616
24 616
1092 1092
495 49555 55
T3*30300A5RXXN 300
T3*30300A5RXXN 300 F 4F X 2.5 4 X2
2.5 53
2 1346
53 1346
37 927
37 927
29 724
29 724
1635 1635
742 74255 55
T3*30450A5RXXN 450
T3*30450A5RXXN 450 F 4F X 2.5 4 X2
2.5 53
2 1346
53 1346
37 927
37 927
29 724
29 724
2176 2176
987 98755 55
T3*30500A5RXXN 500
T3*30500A5RXXN 500
T3*30600A5RXXN 600
T3*30600A5RXXN 600
CONSULT
CONSULT
CUSTOMER
CUSTOMER
SERVICESERVICE
T3*30750A5RXXN 750
T3*30750A5RXXN 750
T3*31000A5RXXN 1000
T3*31000A5RXXN 1000

Industrial Type Aluminium Winding Selection
Features:
b Large connection compartment for ease of wiring
and installation
b Many sizes in stock and available for immediate shipment
b Quiet operation for installation flexibility
b Seismic certification for all units
b Space-saving design for easy handling and installation
b Termination lugs provided with transformer through 75 kVA
b Wall brackets available for units up to 75kVA
b Vibration isolation pads provide quiet operation
b Staggered front loop taps for easy connection
b CSA certified (163067) and UL listed (E78376)
150°C Rise - Primary 600V or 480Va

Dimensionsd
A B C D E Weight
Enclosure
Catalogue Number kVA Mounting Figured inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm lbs.
Three Phase, 480V Primary, 208 Y / 120 Secondaryb

T3F30015A5RXXNJ 15 W/F 8 22 559 19 483 21 533 16 401 12 305 235
T3F30030A5RXXNJ 30 W/F 8 25 635 22 559 22 559 18 460 13 330 365
T3F30045A5RXXNJ 45 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 20 495 14.5 368 455
T3F30075A5RXXNJ 75 W/F 8 32 813 27 686 26 660 24 597 16 406 735
T3F30112A5RXXNJ 112.5 F 8 38 965 29 737 29 737 26 648 18 457 885
T3F30150A5RXXNJ 150 F 8 42 1067 33 838 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1140
T3F30225A5RXXNJ 225 F 8 46 1168 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1530
T3F30300A5RXXNJ 300 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1935
Three Phase, 600V Primary, 208 Y / 120 Secondaryc
T3G30015A5RXXNJ 15 W/F 8 22 559 19 483 21 533 15.8 401 12 305 215
T3G30030A5RXXNJ 30 W/F 8 25 635 22 559 22 559 18.1 460 13 330 330
T3G30045A5RXXNJ 45 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 19.5 495 14.5 368 455
T3G30075A5RXXNJ 75 W/F 8 32 813 27 686 26 660 23.5 597 16 406 735
7
T3G30112A5RXXNJ 112.5 F 8 38 965 29 737 29 737 25.5 648 18 457 885
T3G30150A5RXXNJ 150 F 8 42 1067 33 838 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1140
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE
T3G30225A5RXXNJ 225 F 8 46 1168 35 889 37 940 30.8 782 25 635 1530
T3G30300A5RXXNJ 300 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 30.8 782 25 635 1935
a Taps: 480v primary: FCAN 2@2.5%, FCBN 4@2.5% c See wiring diagram WD5 (page 7-20)
600v primary: FCAN 2@2.5%, FCBN 4@2.5% d Please refer to enclosure figure on page 7-23 (Fig. 8)
b See wiring diagram WD6 (page 7-20)

Industrial Type Copper Winding Selection
Features: Options and Accessories:
b 15-250 kVA single phase b Electrostatic shield
15-300 kVA three phase Special paint (other than ASA 61 grey)
b
b Copper winding 115°C and 80°C temperature rise
b
(standard 3 coil delta-wye three phase)
b Operating frequencies other than 60 Hertz
b High quality grain-oriented steel
laminations b Special voltage (for domestic or
export applications)
b Insulation class 220
b Low loss and low noise special designs
b Compact and easy-to-install enclosure
b Anti-vibration pads
b Quiet operation and adequate ventilation
b Temperature probes
b Manufactured to ISO standard
upon request b Busbar to your specifications
b Epoxy Vacuum Impregnated (EVI)
150°C Rise
150°C- Primary
Rise - Primary
600 V or
600480
VV or 480 V
Dimensions
Dimensions
Height Height Width Width Depth Depth Weight Weight Noise Noise
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number Number
kVA Mounting
kVA Mounting
a
Tapsab Taps
Figure
b
Figure
in. mm
in. in.
mm mm
in. mmin. mm
in. lbs
mm kg
lbs level
kg (dB)level (dB)
Single Single
Phase, Phase,
Secondary
Secondary
120 / 240
120V/ 240 V
T1*10015C5RXXN 15.
T1*10015C5RXXN 15.W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X 12.5 30
1 762
30 762
18 457
18 457
14 14
349 349
185 185
84 84 50 50
T1*10025C5RXXN 25.
4X 2.5 4 X 12.5 30
1 762
30 762
18 457
18 457
14 14
349 349
227 227
103 10350 50
T1*10037C5RXXN 37.5.
T1*10037C5RXXN 37.5.F 4F X 2.5 4 X 12.5 33
1 838
33 838
21 533
21 533
16 16
400 400
321 321
146 14650 50
T1*10050C5RXXN 50
T1*10050C5RXXN 50 F 4F X 2.5 4 X 12.5 33
1 838
33 838
21 533
21 533
16 16
400 400
352 352
160 16050 50
T1*10075C5RXXN 75
T1*10075C5RXXN 75 F 4F X 2.5 4 X 22.5 33
2 838
33 838
21 533
21 533
16 16
400 400
453 453
206 20655 55
T1*10100C5RXXN 100
T1*10100C5RXXN 100 F 4F X 2.5 4 X 22.5 47
2 1194
47 1194
25 616
25 616
23 23
583 583
631 631
287 28755 55
T1*10150C5RXXN 150
T1*10150C5RXXN 150 F 4F X 2.5 4 X 22.5 51
2 1295
51 1295
28 718
28 718
27 27
685 685
805 805
366 36660 60
T1*10200C5RXXN 200
T1*10200C5RXXN 200 F 4F X 2.5 4 X 22.5 51
2 1295
51 1295
28 718
28 718
27 27
685 1043
685 1043
474 47465 65
T1*10250C5RXXN 250
T1*10250C5RXXN 250 F 4F X 2.5 4 X 22.5 58
2 1473
58 1473
32 820
32 820
30 30
761 1342
761 1342
610 61065 65
Three Phase,
Three Phase, Seconday
Seconday 208 Y /208
120YV/ 120 V
T3*30015C5RXXN 15.
4X 2.5 4 X 12.5 26
1 660
26 660
18 464
18 464
15 375
15 375
214 214
97 9745 45
T3*30030C5RXXN 30.
4X 2.5 4 X 12.5 31
1 775
31 775
23 578
23 578
18 451
18 451
341 341
155 15545 45
7
T3*30045C5RXXN 45.
4X 2.5 4 X 12.5 31
1 775
31 775
23 578
23 578
18 451
18 451
407 407
185 18545 45
T3*30050C5RXXN 50.
4X 2.5 4 X 12.5 31
1 775
31 775
23 578
23 578
18 451
18 451
441 441
200 20045 45
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
T3*30075C5RXXN 75
T3*30075C5RXXN 75W/F W/F
4X 2.5 4 X 12.5 37
1 940
37 940
28 705
28 705
22 552
22 552
674 674
306 30650 50
T3*30112C5RXXN 112.5
T3*30112C5RXXN 112.5F 4
FX 2.5 4 X 22.5 37
2 940
37 940
28 705
28 705
22 552
22 552
978 978
398 39850 50
T3*30150C5RXXN 150
T3*30150C5RXXN 150 F 4
FX 2.5 4 X 22.5 46
2 1168
46 1168
31 787
31 787
24 616
24 616
1069 1069
485 48550 50
T3*30225C5RXXN 225
T3*30225C5RXXN 225 F 4
FX 2.5 4 X 22.5 53
2 1346
53 1346
37 927
37 927
29 724
29 724
1533 1533
695 69555 55
T3*30300C5RXXN 300
T3*30300C5RXXN 300 F 4
FX 2.5 4 X 22.5 53
2 1346
53 1346
37 927
37 927
29 724
29 724
1843 1843
836 83655 55

Industrial Type Copper Winding Selection
Features:
and installation
b Wall brackets available for units up to 75 kVA
150°C Rise - Primary 600V or 480Va

Dimensionsd
A B C D E Weight
Enclosure
Three Phase, 480V Primary, 208 Y / 120 Secondaryb
T3F30015C5RXXNJ 15 W/F 8 22 559 19 483 21 533 16 401 12 305 235
T3F30030C5RXXNJ 30 W/F 8 25 635 22 559 22 559 18 460 13 330 365
T3F30045C5RXXNJ 45 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 20 495 14.5 368 455
T3F30075C5RXXNJ 75 W/F 8 32 813 27 686 26 660 23.5 597 16 406 735
T3F30112C5RXXNJ 112.5 F 8 38 965 29 737 29 737 26 648 18 457 885
T3F30150C5RXXNJ 150 F 8 42 1067 33 838 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1140
T3F30225C5RXXNJ 225 F 8 46 1168 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1530
T3F30300C5RXXNJ 300 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1935
Three Phase, 600V Primary, 208 Y / 120 Secondaryc
T3G30015C5RXXNJ 15 W/F 8 22 559 19 482.6 21 533 16 401 12 305 235
T3G30030C5RXXNJ 30 W/F 8 25 635 22 558.8 22 559 18 460 13 330 365
T3G30045C5RXXNJ 45 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 20 495 14.5 368 455
T3G30075C5RXXNJ 75 F 8 32 813 27 685.8 26 660 23.5 597 16 406 735
7
T3G30112C5RXXNJ 112.5 F 8 38 965 29 736.6 29 737 26 648 18 457 885
T3G30150C5RXXNJ 150 F 8 42 1067 33 838.2 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1140
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE
T3G30225C5RXXNJ 225 F 8 46 1168 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1530
T3G30300C5RXXNJ 300 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1935
a Taps: 480v primary: FCAN 2@2.5%, FCBN 4@2.5% c See wiring diagram WD5 (page 7-20)

K Rated - Industrial Type Aluminium Winding Selection
Features:
and installation
150°C Rise - Primary 600Va

Dimensionsd
A B C D E Weight
Enclosure
Catalogue Number kVA Mounting Figure inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm lbs.
Three Phase, 208 Y / 120 Secondary, K-4 Ratedb
T3G30015A5R1KNJ 15 W/F 8 22 559 19 483 21 533 16 401 12 305 210
T3G30030A5R1KNJ 30 W/F 8 25 635 22 559 22 559 18 460 13 330 310
T3G30045A5R1KNJ 45 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 20 495 14.5 368 400
T3G30075A5R1KNJ 75 F 8 32 813 27 686 26 660 24 597 16 406 585
T3G30112A5R1KNJ 112.5 F 8 38 965 29 737 29 737 26 648 18 457 775
T3G30150A5R1KNJ 150 F 8 42 1067 33 838 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1000
T3G30225A5R1KNJ 225 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1315
T3G30300A5R1KNJ 300 F 8 60 1524 48 1219 43.5 1105 42 1067 27 686 1660
Three Phase, 208 Y / 120 Secondary, K-13 Ratedc
T3G30015A5R1MNJ 15 W/F 8 25 635 22 559 22 559 18 460 13 330 310
T3G30030A5R1MNJ 30 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 20 495 14.5 368 400
T3G30045A5R1MNJ 45 W/F 8 32 813 27 686 26 660 24 597 16 406 585
7
T3G30075A5R1MNJ 75 F 8 38 965 29 737 29 737 26 648 18 457 775

T3G30112A5R1MNJ 112.5 F 8 42 1067 33 838 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1000
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
T3G30150A5R1MNJ 150 F 8 46 1168 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1530

T3G30225A5R1MNJ 225 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1660
T3G30300A5R1MNJ 300 F 8 60 1524 48 1219 43.5 1105 42 1067 27 686 2460
a Taps: 480v primary: FCAN 2@2.5%, FCBN 2@2.5% c See wiring diagram WD5
b See wiring diagram WD5

K Rated - Industrial Type Copper Winding Selection
Features:
and installation
150°C Rise - Primary 600Va

Dimensionsd
A B C D E Weight
Enclosure
Three Phase, 208 Y / 120 Secondary, K-4 Ratedb
T3G30015C5R1KNJ 15 W/F 8 22 559 19 483 21 533 15.8 401 12 305 235
T3G30030C5R1KNJ 30 W/F 8 25 635 22 559 22 559 18.1 460 13 330 335
T3G30045C5R1KNJ 45 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 19.5 495 14.5 368 400
T3G30075C5R1KNJ 75 F 8 32 813 27 686 26 660 23.5 597 16 406 660
T3G30112C5R1KNJ 112.5 F 8 38 965 29 737 29 737 25.5 648 18 457 885
T3G30150C5R1KNJ 150 F 8 42 1067 33 838 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1140
T3G30225C5R1KNJ 225 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 30.8 782 25 635 1530
T3G30300C5R1KNJ 300 F 8 60 1524 48 1219 43.5 1105 42 1067 27 686 1935
Three Phase, 208 Y / 120 Secondary, K-13 Ratedc
T3G30015C5R1MNJ 15 W/F 8 25 635 22 559 22 559 18 460 13 330 310
T3G30030C5R1MNJ 30 W/F 8 28 711 25 635 23.5 597 20 495 14.5 368 400
T3G30045C5R1MNJ 45 W/F 8 32 813 27 686 26 660 24 597 16 406 585
7
T3G30075C5R1MNJ 75 F 8 38 965 29 737 29 737 26 648 18 457 775
T3G30112C5R1MNJ 112.5 F 8 42 1067 33 838 32.5 826 30 762 21 533 1000
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE
T3G30150C5R1MNJ 150 F 8 46 1168 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1530
T3G30225C5R1MNJ 225 F 8 52 1321 35 889 37 940 31 782 25 635 1660
T3G30300C5R1MNJ 300 F 8 60 1524 48 1219 43.5 1105 42 1067 27 686 2460
a Taps: 600v primary: FCAN 2@2.5%, FCBN 2@2.5% d Please refer to enclosure figure on page 7-23 (Fig. 8)
c See wiring diagram WD5 (page 7-20)

Wiring Diagrams Selection
% Voltage Primary Volts Connect lines to Inter-connect

WD1 wiring diagram 105.0% 504 630 H1, H2 1–2
102.5% 492 615 H1, H2 2–3
HV/HT HV/HT
100.0% 480 600 H1, H2 3–4
H1 H2 H1 H2
97.5% 468 585 H1, H2 4–5
95.0% 456 570 H1, H2 5–6
5 3 1 2 4 6 5 3 1 2 4 6
Secondary Volts Connect lines to Inter-connect
240 X1, X4 X2–X3
120 X1 & X3, X2 & X4 X2–X4, X1–X3
X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 120/240 X1, X2, X4 X2–X3

WD2 wiring diagram 105.0% 504 630 H1, H2 1
102.5% 492 615 H1, H2 2
H2 H2
H1 H1 100.0% 480 600 H1, H2 3
97.5% 468 585 H1, H2 4
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 95.0% 456 570 H1, H2 5

Secondary Volts Connect lines to Inter-connect
240 X1, X4 X2–X3
120 X1 & X3, X2 & X4 X2–X4, X1–X3
X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1
120/240 X1, X2, X4 X2–X3

WD3 wiring diagram 105.0% 504 630 H1, H2, H3 1
7
102.5% 492 615 H1, H2, H3 2

1 X2
100.0% 480 600 H1, H2, H3 3
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
2
3 H2
4
5 97.5% 468 585 H1, H2, H3 4
95.0% 456 570 H1, H2, H3 5
H1 X0
Secondary Volts Connect lines to
X1
208 X1, X2, X3
X3
120 X1,X0 X2,X0 X3, X0
H3

WD4 wiring diagram 105.0% 630 H1, H2, H3 1–2
102.5% 615 H1, H2, H3 2–3
H2 X2 100.0% 600 H1, H2, H3 3–4
6 97.5% 585 H1, H2, H3 4–5
4
2
1 95.0% 570 H1, H2, H3 5–6
5
3 X0 Secondary Volts Connect lines to
X1 208 X1, X2, X3
X3 120 X1,X0 X2,X0 X3, X0
H1 H3

Wiring Diagrams Selection
WD5 wiring diagram Primary Volts Connect lines to

630 H1,H2,H3
615 H1,H2,H4
PRIMARY
600 H1,H2,H5
585 H1,H2,H6
570 H1,H2,H7
208 X1,X2,X3
120 X0 - X1 or X2 or X3
SECONDARY
WD6 wiring diagram Primary Volts Connect lines to

504 H1,H2,H3
492 H1,H2,H4
480 H1,H2,H5
468 H1,H2,H6
456 H1,H2,H7
444 H1,H2,H8
432 H1,H2,H9
7
208 X1,X2,X3
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE
120 X0 - X1 or X2 or X3

Enclosure Figures Selection
Dimensions in Inches
Enclosure
A A1 B B1 C D E F K MA MB WA* WA1* WB* WE* WF*
FIG1 19.9 17.3 17.5 15.5 17.6 7.4 2.0 1.5 1.75 K.O. 18.5 10.5 20.1 18.7 19.5 2.2 10.0
* Dimensions of enclosure when wall-mounting bracket installed (optional accessory component).

7 DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Enclosure
A A1 B B1 C D E F K MA MB WA* WA1* WB* WE* WF*
FIG2 22.1 19.2 18.2 15.5 23.6 9.7 2.0 1.5 1.75 K.O. 20.8 10.5 22.1 20.8 19.9 2.2 10.0
FIG3 24.9 22.0 19.4 16.5 25.6 12.0 2.0 2.0 1.75 K.O. 23.5 10.5 24.9 23.5 21.0 2.2 10.0

Enclosure
A B B1 C D E F G H K MA MB
Fig 4 26.3 23.3 19.3 31.1 17.1 3.0 7.1 2.3 1.0 2.0 x 3.0 K.O. 21.5 21.3
Fig 5 29.0 26.5 22.5 39.1 24.1 3.0 14.1 2.7 1.0 2.0 x 3.0 K.O. 23.5 24.5
Fig 6 37.8 30.0 26.0 48.4 33.4 3.0 23.4 6.8 1.0 2.0 x 3.0 K.O. 24.0 28.0
7
TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE
Enclosure Dimensions in Inches

A B B1 C D E F G H L MA MB
Fig 7 41.8 36.0 32.0 56.1 30.0 8.0 8.0 5.0 5.9 0.8 30.0 34.5

Enclosure
Fig 8 Enclosure ﬁgure 8 applies to all item numbers ending with NJ
7 DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS

8POWER PRODUCT Power Monitoring
Contents
Power Distributions Solutions
Power Distributions Solutions Introduction
Power Monitoring Systems Overview 8-2
Intelligent Metering and Control Devices 8-3
Power Meters
PAC2200 8-4
PAC3120 8-5
PAC3200T 8-6
PAC3220 8-7
PAC4200 8-8
WinPM.Net
9410 8-9
9810 8-10
Enclosed Meters 8-12
Branch Circuit Monitoring /SEM3 Embedded Metering 8-17
Enclosures for External Applications 8-21
MD Meter – BACnet MSTP/IP standalone meter 8-23
Low-voltage Current Transformers 8-24
Thermal Monitoring Solution
SEM3T 8-26
Energy Management Software
Powermanager Software 8-32
WinPM.Net Software 8-33
Powermanager Software Application Engineering
Digitalization for Smart Infrastructure 8-34
Services 8-35
Siemens recognizes that high performance facilities make for high performance business.
Energy is the lifeline of your business, and better efficiency and sustainability can have a
large positive impact on your bottom line.
Energy Management and Control Systems from Siemens are complete enterprise
solutions that help you manage the energy costs and availability of your business. With
our advanced meters and controls, you can be sure to use only the energy you need,
when you need it.
Assembled Meter Enclosure Siemens Power Distribution Solutions contribute toward achieving LEED® certification
8
and provides the needed energy metering data for federal/local government energy
reductions programs.
MONITORING
POWER
Features and Benefits of Siemens Power Distribution Solutions:
b Power Quality Reliability & Analysis Additional Products/Services
b Utilities Cost Allocation & Billing b Branch Circuit Monitoring
b Utilities Usage Aggregation b Sub-Billing and Cost Allocation
b Load Preservation b Application Engineering
Power Meters b Equipment Monitoring b Services Agreements
b Facility Monitoring & Automation b Network/Communication Components
b Sequence of Event Recording b Integration with Existing
b Preventative Maintenance b SCADA/BAS Systems
b Electrical Asset Management b Incorporation of Third Party Devices
Totally Integrated Power
System Overview General
1. Power Meters 7. Engineering Services

Siemens’ ACCESS power monitors combine the best of new PDS Application Engineers can help from design through
technologies and proven practices. Monitor critical loads, commissioning of even the most demanding power quality
power quality, and demand via the web directly from the and monitoring systems.
meters. 8. Motor Control Centres
2. Power Monitoring Software Monitor mains and feeders for critical or power-intensive loads.
WinPM.Net web-enabled software facilitates easy, enterprise- Communicate with breakers (Static Trip III, SBEC), SAMMS,
wide connection to power monitoring equipment, circuit SIMOCODE, I/O and devices from other manufacturers. Use
8
breakers, and other devices from Siemens and third parties. ACCESS power meters to web-enable new as well as existing
Access information via the web with unlimited no-cost clients MCCs.
POWER
MONITORING
using built-in WebReachTM via your web browser. 9. Low & Medium Voltage Switchgear
3. Communications Networks Web-enable switchgear by having ACCESS monitor power
Utilize existing Ethernet or RS-485 communications networks as well as breaker status and upload the information to a
to extract the information you need and get it where it needs corporate Intranet or to the Internet. Use MeterMailTM
to go. directly from meters for alarm conditions or simple reporting.
4. Components 10. Facility Management Systems
Current Transformers (CTs), Voltage/Potential Transformers Tie into building automation systems to provide the required
(PTs), Power Supplies, Ethernet Switches, Protocol Converters. power and energy information. Lots of communications
Siemens can provide everything required for your system. options are available ranging from legacy protocols to XML
5. Intelligent I/O directly from the power monitors.
Our S7 I/O enables plug-n-play communications with Modbus 11. Distributed Control Systems, Automation, and
devices and expands digital and analog input and output SCADA/Human Machine Interface
functionality of ACCESS Systems. ACCESS power monitors and/or software can talk to all major
6. Billing and Load Allocation Software vendors’ systems.
ACCESS Energy Manager is the low-cost, simplified solution
for cost allocation, billing & load/demand analysis using your
web browser.

Intelligent Metering and Control Devices
PAC2200 PAC3120 MD Meter SEM3 PAC3200T PAC3220 PAC4200 9410 9810

Power, Energy and Demand
Voltage/current: per phase, average ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Voltage/current: unbalance ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Power: real(kW), reactive(kVAR), apparent(kVA), ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
power factor, frequency
Energy: bi-directional, import, export ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Energy kWh: total, net ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Demand: block, sliding window ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Demand: thermal predicted ■ ■
Power Quality Analysis
Sag(Dip)/Swell disturbances monitoring ■ ■
Voltage disturbance direction detection ■ ■
High speed transient capture 10MHz
Harmonics (individual, even, odd, total) up to THD only THD only THD only 63rd 63rd 63rd
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 135k 135k 60 135k 135k 204 256 1024
Flicker, harmonics to EN50160, IEC 6100-4-7 / 4-15 ■ ■
Conﬁgurable for IEEE 519-2014, SEMI/ITIC ■
Data and Waveform Logs
Triggered by setpoint, schedule, or external signal ■ ■
Sequence-of-event logs or alarm logs, variable log depth ■ ■ ■ ■
Minimum/maximum logs ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Onboard Historical logging Memory c c 8GB (6 mos.) c c d 320MB 2GB
Email data and event logs ■
Waveform recording ■ ■
Waveform in COMTRADE format with FTP ■ ■
GPS time synchronization NTP/SNTP NTP NTP/SNTP NTP/SNTP SNTP NTP/SNTP NTP/SNTP
Time-stamps, resolution in seconds ±1 sec 1 min ±1 sec ±1 sec ±0.1 sec. ±0.1 msec. ±0.1 msec.
Time synchronization - IEEE1588/IEC615888/PTP ■ ■
Communication Ports, Protocols and I/O
( ) = Optional
USB ports 1 2 (not activated)
RS-485-only ports (1) 1 1 1 (1) (1) 1 2
Ethernet ports (1) (1) 1 1 2 1 2 (UTP) 2 (UTP)
PROFIBUS ports (1) (1)
PROFINET ports (2) (2)
Modbus RTU Slave on serial (■) ■ ■ ■ (■) (■) ■ ■
Modbus RTU Master on serial ports ■ ■
Modbus/TCP on Ethernet ports (■) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Modbus TCP Master over Ethernet ■ ■
BACnet MS/TP ■ ■
BACnet IP on Ethernet ports ■ ■
SNMP ■ ■ ■
DNP 3 ■ ■
IEC 61850 ■ ■
DHCP (■) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (IP v4/IP v6) ■ (IP v4/IP v6)
RSTP ■ ■
Secure protocols (HTTPS, SFTP, SSH, Secure Modbus) HTTPS HTTPS
Ethernet Gateway: 31 other meters accessible via RS-485 (■) ■ ■
Multiple masters over Ethernet 3 2 4 3 3 3 8 8
On-board web server - Realtime, Trending (■) ■ (CSV output) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
On-board web server - Waveform display ■ ■
Analog inputs (1) (1) (16) (16)
Analog outputs
8
(8) (8)
Digital status/counter inputs (standard/optional add-ons) 1 2 2/(44) 1 2 / (8) 2 / (8) 3 / (24) 8 / (24)
Digital relay outputs (control/pulse) 1 2 1 1 1 2 / (4) 2 / (4) 1 / (8) 4 FA/2RO (8RO)
MONITORING
POWER
Integrated display B/W B/W B/W Opt. Color B/W B/W Color Color
Setpoints, Alarming and Control
Setpoints, minimum response time ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ½ cycle ½ cycle
Math, logic, trig, log, linearization formulas and/or, > < Grouping and/or, > < and/or, > < and/or, > < ■ ■
Multi-condition alarms ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Email on alarm ■ ■
Revenue metering
ANSI C12.1 accuracy compliant 1.0 ■ ■
ANSI C12.20 0.5 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.2b 0.2
EN50160 Compliance Reporting ■ ■ (Ed4)
IEC 61000-4-30 Class A/S ■(Class S Meter) ■(Class A Ed3)
IEC 61577-12 accuracy compliant 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5
IEC 62053-22 replaces IEC 60687 0.2S compliant ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (0.1S)
IEC 62053-23, 24 compliant for Reactive Energy accuracy ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (0.25)
IEC 62586-1 (new Power Quality standard) ■
IEC 60687 accuracy class compliant ■ (1.0) ■ (0.5) ■ (0.2) ■ (0.5) ■ (0.5) ■ (0.2) ■ (0.2) ■ (0.2)
ANSI class 10, IEC 1/10 (1A nominal, 10A max) ■ ■
ANSI class 20, IEC 5/20 (5A nominal, 20A max) ■ ■
Time-of-use ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Some Features are optional, Refer to datasheets for allowable port configurations. Products meet or exceed the accuracy requirements of the standards listed; due to form factors, not all
ANSI/IEC compliance tests may apply. Some products certified by third party laboratory.
 FA - Form A contact output, RO - Relay output. c Load profile kWh/day for 63 days. kWh/month for 24 months.
b This meter is 0.2S compliant at 5A nominal CT, and 0.5S compliant at 1A nominal CT. d Load profile kWh/15min values for 40 days.

PAC2200 Power Meter
General
Reliable and Precise Monitoring of Electrical Power Systems
The PAC2200 is a powerful compact din rail mounted The PAC2200 provides open communications using Modbus
power monitoring device that is suitable for use in indus- RTU/TCP, and Mbus protocols for easy integration into any
trial, government and commercial applications where basic local or remote monitoring system. With a built-in web server
metering and energy monitoring is required. The meter may viewing your data has never been easier. Simple configuration
be used as a standalone device monitoring over 50+ param- of the meter can be done from the front display or by using a
eters or as part of an industrial control, building automation PC with SENTRON powerconfig setup free software available
or global power monitoring system. Metering and monitoring for download from SIEMENS website.
applications range from simple analog volt and amp meter
replacements to stand-alone cost allocation installations with
multiple tariffs.
Precision Energy Management Reliability

b ANSI C12.1 Class 1 b Serves three masters via the b Economical Measurement
Energy Measurement TCP connection • Commercial
b
• Voltage +/- 0.5% b Energy Consumption • Industrial
• Current +/- 0.5% b Automation Integration • Residential
• Power Factor +/- .5% b Solution for LEED® credit Degree of Protection
b
• Sampling Rate 135K/per cycle b Monitors Critical Equipment • Front – IP40
b Revenue Accurate b Modbus TCP/RTU • Rear – IP20
• Cost Allocation Mbus
b b 480V Connected Voltage
• MID Certified variant for European
customers b Simple Retrofit Installation
Cost Effective b Integration with Existing Systems
b
97 mm [3.8 in]
71 mm
[2.8 in]
8
108 mm
POWER
MONITORING
[4.2 in]
Condensed LCD Display to indicate: Example of operating menu:

• Display title or designation of the The texts can be displayed in several languages, which can be
displayed measurements selected directly on the device. The condensed graphic LCD
• Phase display facilitates reading even from a distance. For optimum
• Measured value visability even in poor light conditions the PAC2200 comes with
• Unit a gradually adjustable background illumination.
• Labeling of function keys
Order information
Product Catalogue Number
PAC2220 Modbus RTU, L-L: 400 V, L-N: 230 V, 5 Amp, self-powered, screw terminals 7KM22002EA301DA1
PAC2220 Modbus TCP, L-L: 400 V, L-N: 230 V, 5 Amp, strd rail instr, self-powered, screw terminals 7KM22002EA301EA1
PAC2220 Modbus RTU, MID Certified, L-L: 400 V, L-N: 230 V, 5 Amp, self-powered, screw terminals 7KM22002EA301HA1
PAC2220 Modbus TCP, MID Certified ,L-L: 400 V, L-N: 230 V, 5 Amp, self-powered, screw terminals 7KM22002EA301JA1
 Languages included as standard in the meter are English, German, French,

Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Turkish, Russian and Chinese.

PAC3120 Power Meter
Basic Monitoring of Electrical Power Systems
The PAC3120 is a powerful compact power monitoring device The PAC3120 has many features not usually found in this price
that is suitable for use in industrial, government and commer- class of meters. A large graphical display supports multiple
cial applications, where basic metering and energy monitoring languages and easy to use menus that can be used to set up
is required. The meter may be used as a stand alone device the meter. The meter also has built in Modbus RTU communi-
monitoring over 100+ parameters or as part of an industrial cations via a RS485 interface. The meter comes standard with
control, building automation or global power monitoring sys- two digital inputs and two digital outputs. One output is suit-
tem. Metering and monitoring applications range from simple able for pulse output for export/import real and reactive ener-
analog volt and amp meter replacements to stand-alone cost gy. The other output is controllable from an outside source by
allocation installations. way of a Modbus register.

b ANSI C12.20 class 0.5 b Energy Consumption b Economical Measurement
b Energy Measurement b Demand Control • Commercial
• Voltage +/- 0.2% b Automation Integration • Industrial
• Current +/- 0.2% b Solution for LEED® credit • Residential
• Power Factor +/- 0.5% b Monitors Critical Equipment b Degree of Protection
• Sampling Rate 135k/per cycle b Sub Metering • Front – IP65
b Revenue Accurate • Rear – IP20
• Cost Allocation b 480V Connected Voltage
b Cost Effective b Simple Retrofit Installation
b Integration with Existing Systems
96 mm [3.78 in.]
96 mm [3.78 in.]
8
Full Graphic LCD Display to indicate: Example of operating menu
• Display title or designation With an easy-to-read adjustable back lit LCD
MONITORING
POWER
of the displayed measurements display, the PAC3120 can be commissioned in
• Phase only two steps. After selecting the language
• Measured value and setting two parameters (voltage and
• Unit current inputs), the meter is ready for use.
Order information
PAC3120 Compression terminals AC/DC 7KM31200BA011DA0
PAC3120 Compression terminals DC Only 7KM31201BA011EA0
Adapter Plate for 4700/4720 meter cutout 93-47ADAPTER
PAC32/4200 Meter DIN Rail adapter – Meter display will not be seen 7KM9900-0YA00-0AA0
PAC32/4200 Meter DIN Rail 2-adapter – Meter display will not be seen 7KM9900-0XA00-0AA0
 Languages included as standard in the meter are

English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese,
Turkish, Russian and Chinese.

PAC3200T Power Meter
General
The PAC3200T is a powerful compact din rail mounted power moni- The PAC3200T provides open communications using
toring device that is suitable for use in industrial, government and Modbus TCP protocol for easy integration into any
commercial applications where basic metering and energy moni- local or remote monitoring system. With a built-in
toring is required. The meter may be used as a standalone device web server viewing your data has never been eas-
monitoring over 100+ parameters or as part of an industrial control, ier. Simple configuration of the meter can be done
building automation or global power monitoring system. Metering by using a PC with SENTRON powerconfig setup
and monitoring applications range from simple analog volt and amp free software available for download from SIEMENS
meter replacements to stand-alone cost allocation installations with website.
multiple tariffs.

b ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5s b Serves three masters via the b Economical Measurement
TCP connection
b Energy Measurement • Commercial
• Current +/- 0.5% b Automation Integration • Residential
• Power Factor +/- .5% b Solution for LEED® credit b Degree of Protection
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) b Modbus TCP/RTU • Rear – IP20
b Revenue Accurate
b 480V Connected Voltage
• Cost Allocation
b Simple Retrofit Installation
b Cost Effective
97 mm [3.8 in]
71 mm
[2.8 in]
108 mm
[4.2 in]
8
• DIN rail mount Current and Voltage Input Digital Input and Digital Output
POWER
MONITORING
• Modbus TCP/Ethernet Port available on the wiring screw terminals wiring screw terminals
top right slot
• No Integrated display
Order information
PAC3200T DIN Rail Mount Power Meter without DISPLAY, AC/DC, Modbus TCP, L-L: 400 V,
7KM32000CA011AA0
L-N: 230 V, 5 A, wide-range pwr sup. unit AC/DC, screw terminals
 Languages included as standard in the meter are English, German, French,

Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Turkish, Russian and Chinese.

PAC3220 Power Meter
General
The PAC3220 is a powerful compact power monitoring device The PAC3220 provides open communications using
that is suitable for use in industrial, government and commer- Modbus RTU/TCP, PROFIBUS-DP, and PROFINET proto-
cial applications where basic metering and energy monitoring cols for easy integration into any local or remote monitor-
is required. The meter may be used as a stand alone device ing system. With a built-in web server viewing your data
monitoring over 100+ parameters or as part of an industrial con- has never been easier. Simple configuration of the meter
trol, building automation or global power monitoring system. Metering can be done from the front display or by using a PC with
and monitoring applications range from simple analog volt and amp SENTRON powerconfig setup free software available for
meter replacements to stand-alone cost allocation installations with download from SIEMENS website.
multiple tariffs.

b ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5s b Serves three masters via the b Economical Measurement
TCP connection
b Energy Measurement • Commercial
• Current +/- .2% b Automation Integration • Residential
• Power Factor +/- .5% b Solution for LEED® credit b Degree of Protection
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) b Modbus TCP/RTU • Rear – IP20
b Revenue Accurate b Industrial Systems b 600V Connected Voltage
• Cost Allocation • PROFIBUS
b Simple Retrofit Installation
b Cost Effective • PROFINET
96 mm [3.78 in.]
96 mm [3.78 in.]
8
Full Graphic LCD Display to indicate: Example of operating menu:
• Display title or designation of the The texts can be displayed in several languages, which can Example of Optional
MONITORING
POWER
displayed measurements be selected directly on the device. The large graphic LCD Expansion Module install
• Phase display facilitates reading even from a distance. For opti-
• Measured value mum visability even in poor light conditions the PAC3220
• Unit comes with a gradually adjustable background illumination.
Order information
PAC3220 compression terminals (not suitable for use with ring tongue terminals), AC/DC 7KM32200BA011DA0
PAC3220 compression terminals (not suitable for use with ring tongue terminals), DC only 7KM32201BA011EA0
Expansion Module - PAC PROFIBUS DP 7KM93000AB010AA0  Languages included
as standard in the
Expansion Module - PAC PROFINET 7KM93000AE020AA0 meter are English,
Expansion Module - PAC MODBUS RTU 7KM99000XA000AA0 German, French,
Spanish, Italian,
Expansion Module - I(N), I(Diff), Analog for PAC 3220 or 4200 7KM92000AD000AA0 Portuguese, Turkish,
Russian and
PAC3220/4200 Meter DIN Rail adapter – Meter display will not be seen 7KM99000YA000AA0
Chinese.
PAC3220/4200 Meter DIN Rail 2-Tier adapter – Meter display will not be seen 7KM99000XA000AA0
Power Supply. Input: 120-230V AC / 110-300V DC Output: 24 V DC 4 Amps. DIN Rail mounted. US2:PWRSP4A

PAC4200 Power Meter
The PAC4200 is a feature packed power monitoring device that is your power assets, the PAC4200 meter should be an impor-
suitable for use in industrial, government and commercial appli- tant part of your power monitoring system.
cations where basic to advanced metering, logging, and I/O is
required. The meter may be used as a stand alone device moni- The PAC4200 provides open communication using the standard
toring over 200 parameters or as part of an industrial control, built-in Ethernet Modbus TCP and has the capability of com-
building automation or global enterprise wide monitoring system. municating through Optional Modbus RTU, PROFIBUS-DP, and
PROFINET protocol modules simultaneously. This allows for easy
Advanced power quality monitoring and logging applications integration into any local or remote monitoring system. With a
range from single low-voltage breaker / building metering to built-in web server viewing your data has never been easier. The
sub-station main feeder monitoring, cost allocation instal- gateway functionality of this device reduces installation cost by
lations with multiple tariffs. Whether your goal is to reduce replacing other gateway devices and simplifying wiring.
operation cost, reduce your carbon footprint or to maintain

b ANSI C12.20 Class .2s b Serves three masters via the b Monitors Critical Equipment
TCP connection
b Energy Measurement b Economical Measurement
• Voltage +/- .2% b Energy Consumption • Commercial
• Current +/- .2% b Min/Max and Event Logs • Industrial
• Power Factor +/- .5% • Storage Capacity 40 days at 15 min Degree of Protection
b
• Sampling Rate 204/per cycle intervals • Front – IP65
• Individual Harmonics up to 63rd • Event Logging 4000 events • Rear – IP20
b Power Quality b Demand Control b 600V Connected Voltage
b Revenue Accurate b Automation Integration b Customizable Displays
• Cost Allocation
b Modbus Gateway b Simple Retrofit Installation
b Cost Effective
b Modbus TCP/RTU b Integration with Existing Systems
b Industrial Systems b Solution for LEED® credit
• PROFIBUS • PROFINET
SENTRON PAC, PROFIBUS Two Digital Input and two MODBUS TCP
DP, MODBUS RTU and PROFINET Digital Outputs as standard integrated into the
expansion modules for meter as standard
remote data transmission.
•
96
• mm
3.78
Terminal blocks for voltage
and current measuring,
• in.
control power and digital
8
input and output

POWER
MONITORING
Digital input and output 77 mm

module provides 4 additional 3.03 in.
96 mm
digital inputs and 2 digital outputs
3.78 in.
Order information
PAC4200 compression terminals (not suitable for use with ring tongue terminals), AC/DC 7KM42120BA003AA0
PAC4200 compression terminals (not suitable for use with ring tongue terminals), DC only 7KM42111BA003AA0
Expansion Module - PAC PROFIBUS DP 7KM93000AB010AA0
Expansion Module - PAC PROFINET 7KM93000AE020AA0
Expansion Module - PAC MODBUS RTU 7KM99000XA000AA0
Expansion Module - PAC additional I/O 7KM92000AB000AA0
Expansion Module - I(N), I(Diff), Analog for PAC 3220 or 4200 7KM92000AD000AA0
PAC3220/4200 Meter DIN Rail adapter – Meter display will not be seen 7KM99000YA000AA0
PAC3220/4200 Meter DIN Rail 2-Tier adapter – Meter display will not be seen 7KM99000XA000AA0
Power Supply. Input: 120-230V AC / 110-300V DC Output: 24 V DC 4 Amps. DIN Rail mounted. US2:PWRSP4A
 99mm, 3.90 in., with
expansion module

9410 Web-Enabled Power Quality & Analysis Meter

The 9410 series meters are ideally suited to local and remote monitoring of low or
high-voltage electrical installations in industrial facilities, commercial buildings,
utility networks or critical power environments. Facility and operations personnel
will benefit in energy-related costs while avoiding power quality conditions that
can reduce equipment life and productivity.
The 9410 series meter is easy to install and use, offering integrated or remote
high-visibility displays. A range of expansion modules help match features to
the application and support field-upgrading of meters as required. Serial and
Ethernet communication enable the meter to be used within a WinPM.Net power
management system or with third-party management systems.
3.62 in.
92 mm + 0.8-0.0
Precision Energy Reliability A.
b ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2s Management b Economical 3.62 in.

92 mm + 0.8-0.0
• Energy Measurement Measurement

b Energy Consumption
• Voltage +/- .1% • Commercial
b 9410 Waveform • Industrial
• Current +/- .1% Capture
• Power Factor +/- .5% Degree of Protection
• Sampling Rate 256/ b Customizable b 3.78 in.
per cycle Webpages • Front – IP54, 96 mm
UL type 12
• Individual Harmonics b Min/Max and Event • Rear – IP30
up to 63rd Logs 3.78 in.
• Sags / Swells b 600V Connected 96 mm
b Demand Control Voltage 3.562 in.

Detection 90.5 mm
• Programmable Math / b Automation Integration b Customizable Displays B.

Logic Function b Solution for LEED® b Email Alarms through 3.562 in.
b Revenue Accurate credit Ethernet

90.5 mm
• Sub Billing b Monitors Critical b Field Addable Modules

Equipment
Dimensions for I/O
• Cost Allocation modules typical.
b Simple Retrofit Up to four modules

allowed to 0.866 in.
b Modbus Gateway Installation
be connected. 22 mm 77.5 in.
3.051mm
b Modbus TCP/RTU
6.515 Max in.
b Integration with 165.48 Max mm
b Modbus Master Existing Systems

3.562 in.
3.574 in.
90.8 mm
b Industrial Systems
90.5 mm 3.562 in.
C. 90.5 mm
b IEC 61850 Protocol

Order information 3.562 in.
90.5 mm 3.562 in.
8
90.5 mm
9410DC measurement Canada approved and sealed 9410DCANS
MONITORING
POWER
Dimensions for I/O
9410DC measurement Canada approved 9410DCAN modules typical.
Up to four modules
0.866 in.
9410 Panel meter with integrated colour display, 1 DO, 3 DI, 9410DC 66 mm
allowed to
be connected.
dual port Ethernet
3.574 in.
9410 DIN transducer meter packaged with remote display 9410RC 3.562 in.
90.8 mm
(includes 3m cable ) 90.5 mm

D.
9410 Meter without display (DIN rail mount transducer version) 9410TC
with 1 DO, 3 DI, dual port Ethernet
3.78 in.
Accessories Catalog Number 3.562 in. 96 mm
90.5 mm
9410 Remote colour LCD display, 96 mm x 96 mm, with 3 m cable 948DISP96
9410 I/O Module with 2 relay outputs, and 6 digital inputs (wetted) 948M2DO6DI 3.78 in.
96 mm
9410 I/O Module, 2 analog outputs (4 - 20 mA, 0- 10 VDC), and 948M2AO4AI
4 analog inputs (4 - 20 mA, 0 - 30 VDC) Dimensions:
9410 Voltage and Current Sealing Kit (included with base meter) 9410SK A. Meter with integrated display panel mount
into a square cutout
9410 Remote display cable, 10 meters 948DCAB10
B. Meter with integrated display with up to
9410 Remote Display Mounting Adapter kit for 4" round hole - 94PMAK (4) I/O module
requires 9410RC C. Din Rail mounted meter with up to
9410 Replacement hardware kit for 9410 meter 94PMHWK (4) I/O modules
9410 Replacement hardware kit for remote display 94PMRDHWK D. Din Rail Mounted meter with remote display

9810 Power Quality Meter and Analysis Meter
Power Quality Meter with Web Server Technology

The Siemens 9810 series high accuracy and advanced power quality meter combines
accurate; 3-phase energy and power measurement with data logging, power quality
analysis, e-mail, alarming, Modbus mastering, Transient detection, Disturbance Direction
Detection (DDD), Pre-Event/Post-Event Waveform capture and extensive I/O capabili-
ties in a highly flexible and modular format. Analysis results are captured in the event
log, along with a time-stamp and confidence level indicating level of certainty. The 9810
base meter includes 8 digital inputs capable of providing ±1 millisecond time stamping
and 4 digital outputs. The 9810 meters support numerous protocols including Modbus,
ION, DNP3, IEC 61850, HTTP, HTTPS, DLMS, FTP, SNMP, SMTP, DPWS, RSTP, PTP,
NTP/SNTP, GPS, Syslog, and DHCP protocols.
Fast sampling rates and extensive memory make this the perfect choice for critical
power systems making analysis of issues possible for correction and prevention.
As a data accumulator, the 9810 meter can also save money and time by simplifying
wiring and networking. Information from the meter and downstream devices can be
displayed on the large capacitive 7” touch display or smaller 3.5” display, on customiz-
A B B
able web pages in reports and screens. A Energy Management
Applications for the 9810 meter range from critical power applications such as data Energy Consumption
b
centers to industrial, commercial and government power and power quality monitoring
b Waveform Capture
systems. The 9810 meter is offered in a number of forms from single meter enclosures
integrated into Siemens switchgear, switchboard and panelboards. Place this high end b Transient Capture 17 μs @ 60 Hz
power quality meter throughout the power distribution system where critical informa- b Disturbance Direction Detection
tion is desired. Know what is happening in your facility and get maximum efficiency. (DDD)
b Customizable Webpages
Precision Reliability b Extensive data logging, trending
and forecasting
b ANSI C12.20 Class .1s b Economical Measurement Non-volatile on-board logging of min/
b Energy Measurement • Commercial max values, energy and demand,
• Voltage +/- .1% • Industrial maintenance data, alarms, and any
• Current
A +/- .1% b 600VBConnected Voltage measured parameters. Trending and
• Power Factor +/- .5% B short-term forecasting6.30
of energy,
A Cb Email Alarms 6.30 in. C 5.33 in. D5.33 in. in
mm D
6.30 in
• 9810 Sampling Rate 135.3 mm 6.30 in. demand, and measured
135.3 mm
160parameters. 160 mm
1024 samples per cycle Customizable
b 3.562 in. Displays
160 mm 3.562 in. 160 mm
90.5 mm 90.5 mm b Demand Control
• 9810 Individual Harmonics b Password Protected
up to 63rd b Automation Integration
b Hardware Lockable
• Sags / Swells Detection b Monitors Critical Equipment 6.30 in
3.562 in. b Supports Copper Ethernet 160 mm
• Programmable Math / 90.5 mm
3.562 in.
90.5 mm 6.30 in. b Modbus Master / Gateway
Logic Function b Integration with Existing Systems 160 mm
Supports
6.30 in.
Multiple
160 mm Protocols
8
b
b Revenue Accurate
b Supports Multiple Master via
• Cost Allocation Ethernet
POWER
MONITORING
Dimensions for I/O modules typical.

0.866 in. Up to four modules allowed
0.866 in. to
66 mm
Up to four modules allowed to
be connected. 66 mm be connected.
Din rail mounted meter Back-to-back adapter used to Large 7 in. touchscreen 3.5 in. pushbutton
with 4 I/O modules panel mount display and meter capacitive display display
C 6.30 in.
5.33 in. D 6.30 in
160 mm
135.3 mm
C 3.562 in.
6.30 in.90.5 mm
5.33 in. 160 mm D E 6.30 in 7.76 in. E
160 mm197 mm
7.76 in. F 3.78 in. F 3.78 in.
135.3 mm 197 mm 96 mm
3.562 in. 160 mm 96 mm
90.5 mm
6.30 in
3.562 in. 160 mm 3.78 in. 3
90.5 mm 6.30 in 6.89 in. 96 mm 9
6.30 in. 6.89 in.
3.562 in.
160 mm 160 mm 175 mm
90.5 mm 175 mm
6.30 in.
160 mm

0.866 in. Up to four modules allowed to
Dimensions for66I/O
mmmodules typical.
be connected. Dimensions:
0.866 in. Up to four modules allowed to Dimensions:
66 mm be connected. A. Back-to-back adapter cutout dimensions adapter
A. Back-to-back B. cutout
96mm dimensions
mounting adapter cutout
B. 96mm mounting adapter cutout
8-10 E Siemens Canada

7.76Limited
in.
C. Product
Power Din rail mounted meter with
Catalogue 4 I/O modules D. Back-to-back adapter usedD.toBack-to-back
F C. Din rail mounted meter with 4 I/O modules
panel mountadapter
display used
and meter
to panel mount disp
197 mm 3.78 in.
E 7.76 in.
E.FLarge 7in touchscreen capacitive
3.78 in. E. Largedisplay
96 mm
F. 3.5in
7in touchscreen pushbutton
capacitive displaydisplay F. 3.5in pushbutton display
197 mm
96 mm
3.78 in.
6.89 in. 96 mm
3.78 in.
175 mm 96 mm
6.89 in.
9810 Power Quality Meter and Analysis Meter
Order information
Product Catalog Number
Ø 3.7 - 4.0
9810 with 7" display (either din rail or panel mount) 9810RC (.146 - .157)
9810 without display 9810TC

Ø 4.0 - 3.5
(0.14 - 0.16)
Accessories Catalog Number Ø 30.0 - 31.0
(1.18 - 1.22)
(3.24)
Large 7" display 9810R7DISP
82.4
Small 3.5" display + 3M cable 948DISP96
Remote display cable 10 M 948DCAB10
Remote display hardware kit 9810PMRDHWK 30.0
(1.18)
Expansion Modules Catalog Number
82.4
I/O Module-Digital (6IN/2OUT) 948M2DO6DI (3.24)
I/AI Module-Analog (4IN/2OUT) 948M2AO4AI
Miscellaneous Catalog Number
197
9810 Hardware Kit 9810PMHWK mm (7.76)
(in)
9810 Back to Back adapter 9810BBADAPTER
9810 Current Input Green Connectors Hardware Kit. 9810CTHWK
92.8 - 92.0
9610/9510/ADR to 9810 mounting adapter 9810MADAPTER
(3.65 - 3.62)
(3.65 - 3.62)
Electrical Characteristics
92.8 - 92.0
(6.89)
175
Measurement Current and voltage Class 0.1 as per IEC 61557-12
accuracy Active power Class 0.1 as per IEC 61557-12
(2.65 - 2.63)
67.2 - 66.8
Power factor Class 0.5 as per IEC 61557-12
Frequency Class 0.02 as per IEC 61557-12
Active energy Class 0.1S IEC 62053-22 (In=5A)
Class 0.1 IEC 61557-12, Ø 23.0 - 22.0
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.1 48.6 - 48.2 (0.91 - 0.87)
(1.91 - 1.90)
Reactive energy Class 0.5S IEC 62053-24
Data update rate 1/2 cycle or 1 second
Input-voltage Specified accuracy voltage 57 VLN/100 VLL TO 400 VLN/690 VLL
characteristics Impedance 5MΩ per phase
Specified accuracy frequency 42 to 69Hz (50/60Hz nominal)
Limit range of operation -frequency 20 to 450Hz
Input-current Rated nominal current 1A (0.1S), 5A (0.1S), 20A (0.1ANSI)
characteristics Specified accuracy current range Starting Current: 1mA (No Accuracy)
Accurate Range: 10mA-20A
Permissible overload 500A rms for 1s
Impedance 0.0003Ω per phase
Burden 0.01 VA max at 5A
Power supply AC 90-480V AC ±10% (50/60Hz ± 10%), 90-120V AC ±10% (400Hz)
8
DC 110-480V DC ±15%
Ride-through time 100 ms (6 cycles at 60Hz) typical, 120V AC
MONITORING
POWER
400 ms (24 cycles at 60Hz) typical, 240V AC
1200 ms (72 cycles at 60Hz) typical, 480V AC
Burden Meter Only: 16.5W/38 VA max at 480V AC (50/60 Hz)
Fully optioned meter: 40W/80 VA max at 480V AC (50/60 Hz)
Input/outputs Meter Base Only Meter Base Only 8 form A digital inputs (30V AC/60V DC)
4 form A (KY) solid state digital output (30V AC/60V, 75mA)
2 form C relay outputs (8 A at 250 V AC/ 5 A at 24 V DC)
Optional Digital - 6 form A digital inputs (30V AC/60V DC) 8 A at 250V AC or 5A at 24V DC)
Analog - 4 analog inputs (4-20mA, 0-30V DC) +2 analog outputs (4-20mA 0-10V DC)
Mechanical Characteristics
Weight DIN rail mounted Model 1.5 kg Dimensions Panel mount model: Color remote display 160 x 160 x 135.3 mm
IO modules 0.140 kg (2 options): 197 x 175 x 27.5 mm touch-
7” Touchscreen display: 0.861 kg screen 96 x 96 x 27 mm pushbutton
IP degree of 3.5” Display: 0.300 kg DIN model 160 x 160 x 135.3 mm
protection IP 65, UL type 12: Panel mount and IO modules 90.5 x 90.5 x 22 mm
touchscreen display, front. Touchscreen Display(s) 192 mm and 96 mm
IP 30: Panel mount rear, DIN rail mount,
I/O modules.

Enclosed Meters
Convenience and Reliability with Siemens Meter Enclosures
For economical and simple monitoring solutions, turn to Siemens
metering units. Installed in rugged NEMA enclosures, these meter-
ing units are ideal for;
b Property Management Firms

b Malls
b Government Applications
b Food Courts
b Universities
b Building Retrofits
b Corporate Facilities NEMA 1 Enclosure Metering Solution
b High Rise Condos

The Siemens Meter Enclosure solution is shipped with all the required components pre-
installed prior to shipment. The control voltage / voltage taps are wired to a protection
device for safety of the meter and wiring and to provide a disconnect from outside
power to the meter. Since safety is paramount, the meter CT connections are wired
out to shorting blocks and shipped shorted. The enclosure also has a ground lug for
equipment grounding. When the control voltage is greater than 240 volts, a CPT is
provided between the breaker and the meter.
Siemens will be offering its Enclosed Meter solutions with all of its major Power
Meter Options. The following options will be available for selection and application:
Enclosure Types:*
b NEMA 1
b NEMA 3R
b NEMA 12
Power Meter Series:

b PAC Meter Series **
b 9410 Meter Series
b 9810 Meter Series
b SEM3 - Embedded Metering Solution
8 POWER
MONITORING
* NEMA 4X Enclosure option is available on special requests.

** Includes PAC 3100, 3200 and 4200

Enclosed Meters
Standard PAC Meter
Catalogue Number
E N C L X X X X X X X X X X X
Meter
31 PAC3120 Series Meter 
32 PAC3220 Series Meter b
Voltage
240 240 Volts
480 480 Volts
600 600 Volts
Wiring Configuration
A 3 phase 3 wire
B 3 phase 4 wire
Enclosure Type
01 Type 1
04 Type 4
12 Type 12
Communication
TC Standard
RT RTU c
PD Profibus c
PN Profinet c
Options
X 4DI + 2DO d
 PAC3100 standard is Modbus RTU c PAC3200 and 4200 standard is Modbus TCP/IP
b Only available for PAC3200 and 4200 Meter d Only available for PAC4200 Meter
8
MONITORING
POWER
Standard PAC Meter in Enclosure Schematic
5.5in.
10.25 Backpanel WIRE DUCT, 1.0x1.5IN
Part #N1P1212 Part # T1E-1015W-1
Qty (1)
Terminal Blocks
Siemens
Control
Part #8WA10111DF11 Transformer
Area
(if required)
Qty (2) Qty (1)
End Clamps Shorting
Siemens Terminal Block
Part#8WA1808 Part #IKU6C
Enclosed Meters
Standard 9410 Meter
Catalogue Number
Catalogue No. E N C L X X X X X X X X X X
Meter
94DC 9410DC - 9410 meter with integrated display
94RC 9419RC - 9410 meter with remote display
Voltage
240 240 Volts
480 480 Volts
600 600 Volts
A 3 phase 3 wire
B 3 phase 4 wire
Enclosure Type
01 Type 1
04 Type 4
12 Type 12
5.5in.
10.25 Backpanel WIRE DUCT, 1.0x1.5IN
Part #N1P1212 Part # T1E-1015W-1
Qty (1)
Terminal Blocks
Siemens
Control
Part #8WA10111DF11 Transformer
Area
(if required)
Qty (2) Qty (1)
End Clamps Shorting
Siemens Terminal Block
Part#8WA1808 Part #IKU6C
VN
3.5 in. K l K l K l
35MM DIN RAIL V1 V2 V3 1L1 1L2 1L3
Part # DN-R35S1
4.75
3P 2A Breaker
8
GND
Siemens
Part #5SX23027
Ground Terminal
POWER
MONITORING
Siemens
Part #49D11960001
0
10
0.3
10.7900
ÿ
9.5100
9410 Meter
Standard 9410 Meter in Enclosure Schematic
Mounting

Enclosed Meters
Multiple PAC Series Metering Solutions
With safety being paramount, Siemens has designed the SMU with many safety and convenience features in mind. These include a
single circuit breaker for both the control voltage & voltage taps to protect internal wiring and the power meters from damage and
allowing a “single source” disconnect from outside power, separate CT shorting blocks for each meter, a grounding lug and either the
Modbus serial communications or TCP/IP will be terminated to one location for ease of network installation.
If required, a CPT will be provided for control voltages above 240 volts. This complete SMU solution is delivered ready to install with all
the components pre-installed prior to shipment.
The Siemens PAC Series Metering Units (SMU) come completely pre-wired and ready to go with our standard PAC3100 and PAC3200
energy meter. The SMU also has the option of adding the PAC4200 meter as gateway. The SMU’s can also be supplied with the more
advanced Power Meters if required.
Multiple PAC Series Metering Solutions
b Replace multiple meters with one enclosure and save wall space.
b Improve energy efficiency.
b Aggregate Energy Purchases for reduced rates.
b Improve productivity, eliminate manual meter when coupled with Siemens WinPM.Net
or other software through automatic reporting software
TypicalTypical
SMUSMU Network
Network
8
MONITORING
POWER
SMU Design Overview

SMU enclosure dimensions
Enclosed Meters
Multiplier Meter in Enclosure
Catalogue Number
E N C L X X X X X X X X X X X X
Meter
31 PAC3120 Series Meter 
Voltage
240 240 Volts
480 480 Volts
600 600 Volts
A 3 phase 3 wire
B 3 phase 4 wire
Panel Size
02 Two Meter Panel
03 Three Meter Panel
04 Four Meter Panel
Installed Meters
02 Two Meters Installed
03 Three Meters Installed
04 Four Meters Installed
Enclosure Type & Module

X Type 1
B Type 12
C Type 4
D Type 1 Modbus RTU c
F Type 12 Modbus RTU c
G Type 4 Modbus RTU c
H Type 1 Ethernet d
J Type 12 Ethernet d
K Type 4 Ethernet d
Communication
8
TC Standard
RT RTU c
POWER
MONITORING
PD Profibus c
 PAC3100 standard is Modbus RTU

b PAC3200 and 4200 standard is Modbus TCP/IP
c All Meters will come with Modbus RTU communication.
d All meter will come with TCP/IP protocol.
PAC3100 meter will have Ethernet converter installed.
8-16 Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue Qty

Term
Siem
Part
3.5 in.
35MM DIN RA
Branch Circuit Monitoring/ SEM3 Embedded Micro Sub Metering
Space Savings, Convenience, and Reliability with Siemens Branch Circuit Monitoring
In a world where tenant square In addition, contractor labour costs for

footage is a premium in commercial installation of sub-metering systems
building designs, the area for electrical continues to increase. Still, building
metering is being drastically reduced, owners and property management
and critical power is being relied upon companies must face the challenges of
in data center applications, Siemens how to cost effectively provide tenant
Branch Circuit Monitoring provides the sub-metering in the constrained spaces.
solution.
To meet the sub-metering challenges
The Siemens Branch Circuit of designers, contractors and property
Monitoring Solution utilizes the management companies, Siemens
metering and monitoring technology offers a proven cost-effective solution
integrated into the space saving for Branch Circuit Monitoring/Embedded
panelboards from Siemens. When Metering .This solution combines a fully
compared to the typical external integrated metering system factory
wall mounted metering installations, installed into the Siemens “P” series
considerable savings in space, panelboards and switchboards, which
installation costs, and data collection along with the required local or remote
are realized with the Siemens Branch sub-billing software, provides a “Total”
Circuit Monitoring Solution. sub-metering system.
Siemens Branch Circuit Monitoring / Designer and contractor benefits include:

Embedded Metering Solution
b Much smaller footprint versus the traditional socket meter
b Saves you money – A tenant billing system improves cash combo units
flow, allows immediate pass-on of electric rate increases
b Factory pre-wired – less installation time
and helps building owners control costs. Tenants are confi-
dent they are paying their fair share for energy use and are b Drastically less installation wiring
saving money through energy conservation. b No CT installation required in the field
b Fast, low-cost installation – The embedded Siemens solution b All equipment fits into the standard Siemens panel design
provides a faster and lower cost installation compared to b Additional utilities like water, air and gas can be easily inte-
other external systems. grated into the system for a comprehensive monitoring sys-
b Lower space requirements – The embedded panelboard con- tem
struction design requires no additional wall space to provide b Hardwire and wireless communication options
tenant metering. Conventional metering requires an external
metering enclosure and possibly a current transformer tran- b All components factory calibrated to meet revenue metering
requirements
sition cabinet.
b Additional meters can be added in the field
b Reliable and accurate – Many Siemens systems are already
b UL and CSA-us listed
8
in operation in large commercial and residential buildings
around the country. Their accuracy exceeds utility industry
Branch Circuit Monitoring applications include:
MONITORING
POWER
and government standards like EPact 2005 for revenue
grade meters. b Mixed Tenant & Retail
b LEED certification – Provides the energy monitoring and log- b Industrial Manufacturing
ging required to achieve additional LEED points. b Higher Ed
b Automated billing – With automated billing services the b Strip Malls
responsibility to acquire the data, store the data and bill the
tenants is removed from the property management com- b Critical Power
pany, thus saving manpower and time. b Goverment
b Responsive service – With remote monitoring, continuous b LEEDS buildings
24/7 monitoring can be done by the property management b Airports
company or tenants. The service can also relay consumption
changes to the owners for immediate investigation.
Please Contact Your Siemens Sales Engineer for additional information

regarding Branch Circuit Monitoring / Embedded Metering

Branch Circuit Monitoring/ SEM3 Embedded Micro Sub Metering
Powerful embedded metering at the source of consumption!
The new Siemens Embedded Micro Metering Module (SEM3) is a modular metering
solution for energy monitoring, data analysis, and sub billing applications. The flexible
design allows for low, medium, and high density metering requirements to be met
efficiently and economically using only a few standardized components integrated into
Siemens Panelboard and Switchboard products. SEM3 is pre-engineered to integrate
into new Siemens Panelboards and Switchboards but has also been designed to be
implemented in OEM and retrofit applications as well.
The SEM3 provides an innovative and cost effective metering solution that can be
incorporated into existing applications such as power monitoring, building automation,
and sub-billing systems. SEM3 also has the flexibility to be installed as a standalone
solution with real time data available from the controller’s standard built-in web pages.
This metering product has two levels of accuracy to meet the market’s differing
requirements and price points. This versatile system allows you to meter just the
loads you need without the excess hardware and space requirements of traditional
or competing solutions.
Features & Benefits: Order Information

b System designed to meter up to 45 Controller Catalogue Number
metering points Main Controller SEM3CONTROLLER
b Easy retrofit and plug-n-play expan-
sion features
b High metering accuracy up to 0.2%;
standard 1.0% Meter Modules
Meter - Standard Accuracy 1% SEM3PLAMETER
b Installed and configured in with Pulse Output
SIEMENS engineered Panel boards,
Switchboards, and Bus Plugs at Meter - High Accuracy 0.2% SEM3PHAMETER
SIEMENS Plants. SIEMENS ONE with Pulse Output
SOLUTION! Meter Modules
b Built-in HTML web pages for easy Meter Rack 3 Position SEM3RACK3
configuration & real-time data moni- Meter Rack 6 Position SEM3RACK6
toring for Voltage, Current, Power, Meter Rack 9 Position SEM3RACK9
Meter Rack 15 Position SEM3RACK15
Energy, Water, and, Gas
Meter Rack 21 Position SEM3RACK21
b Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, SNMP, Cables
NTP, BACnet IP & MSTP protocols Controller to Rack Cable - 6 Inch SEM3CAB6INCH
Controller to Rack Cable - 12 Inch SEM3CAB12INCH
b Utilizes milliamp CT’s reducing hard- Controller to Rack Cable - 24 Inch SEM3CAB24INCH
ware and increasing safety
Controller to Rack Cable - 36 Inch SEM3CAB36INCH
b Solid core CT’s for high accuracy and Controller to Rack Cable - 5 Foot SEM3CAB5FT
8
split core CT’s for easy retrofit. Controller to Rack Cable - 10 Foot SEM3CAB10FT
Controller to Rack Cable - 20 Foot SEM3CAB20FT
b Emailing, Alarming, Trending,
POWER
MONITORING
Solid Core CT’s

Totalizing, Event Logging & Data
Solid Core CT 50:0.1 SEM3SCCT50
Logging Solid Core CT 125:0.1 SEM3SCCT125
b Offline Configuration for improving Solid Core CT 250:0.1 SEM3SCCT250
Field and Factory engineering time Solid Core CT 400:0.1 SEM3SCCT400
b 4 Language support includes English, Solid Core CT 800:0.1 SEM3SCCT800
German, French, and Spanish Solid Core CT 1200:0.1 SEM3SCCT1200
Split Core CT’s
Split Core CT 50:0.1 7KT1280-5MA00

Embedded Micro Metering Module™
Selection
Meter Rack
(3, 9, 15, 21)
Meter Rack
(3, 9, 15, 21)
Variable Dimensions (inches)
Catalogue Number Description A B C
SEM3RACK3 3 position rack 1.900 3.570 2.282
A C
Controller
Controller Dimensions
Catalogue no.
SEM3CONTROLLER
8
MONITORING
POWER

Selection
Current Transformer – Solid Core
Current Transformer – Solid Core
Dimensions (Inches)
A
Description Catalogue Number A B C D E F G
Solid Core CT 50:0.1 SEM3SCCT50 1.40 0.38 0.20 0.92 2.12 0.74 0.37 B
Solid Core CT 125:0.1 SEM3SCCT125 1.40 0.66 0.20 0.92 2.16 0.74 0.37
E
Solid Core CT 800:0.1 SEM3SCCT800 4.05 2.60 0.24 0.92 5.05 0.98 0.49 C
Solid Core CT 1600:0.1 SEM3SCCT1600 6.00 4.25 0.28 1.07 7.15 1.05 0.50 G
F
G
Current Transformer – Split Core

Description Catalogue Number A B C D E F Current Transformer – Split Core
Split Core CT 50:0.1 7KT1280-5MA00 0.50 0.50 2.40 2.69 0.95 1.10
Meter Module
8 POWER
MONITORING
Meter Module
Description Catalogue No.
Meter - Standard Accuracy US2:SEM3PLAMETER
1% with Pulse Output
Meter - High Accuracy 0.2% with US2:SEM3PHAMETER
Pulse Output

Enclosures for External Applications
Selection
Standard Enclosures for External Applications
Typical SEM3™ with

display example
The SEM3 standalone enclosure is ideal SEM3 meter enclosure is shipped with 480 volts, a CPT is provided between
for retrofit/external wall mount applica- all the required components installed. the disconnect switch and SEM3 control-
tions, as it requires minimal modifica- The control voltage is wired to a fusible ler. The enclosure is pre-drilled to make
tion of existing systems while gaining disconnect switch to protect the sys- mounting quick and easy.
full functionality of the SEM3 branch tem and to provide a disconnect from The standard enclosure comes with the
circuit monitoring solution. Installation outside power to the meter. SEM3 Solid controller, power supply, disconnect,
of the required milliamp current trans- Core CTs are self shorting, not requir- meter racks, communication cables,
formers (CT) is minimized by utilizing ing a shorting block in the enclosure/ and shorting blocks. Meter modules
the Siemens Split Core CTs ranging panel.Shorting blocks are recommended and CTs are added separately. As men-
from 50 to 2000 Amps. See “Split Core for SEM3 Split Core CT’s installed in tioned previously, the display is available
CT” section. an enclosure/panel. The enclosure has as an option.
SEM3 standard enclosures are available a ground lug for equipment grounding.
with NEMA 1, 4 and 12 ratings. The When the control voltage is greater than
No Display Standard Enclosure for External Application – HMI, SEM3 Meter Modules, and CT’s are not included
Description Catalogue Numbers
SEM3 3M ENCL Type 1 16T x 12W X 6D SEM303ENCL1
SEM3 9M ENCL Type 1 16DT x 12W X 6D SEM309ENCL1
SEM3 9M ENCL Type 12W 16DT x 12W X 6D SEM309ENCL12
8
MONITORING
POWER
SEM3 15M ENCL Type 12W 16DT x 12W X 6D SEM315ENCL12
SEM3 18M ENCL Type 1 20T x 12W x 6D SEM318ENCL1 SEM3 Enclosure
without display
SEM3 18M ENCL Type 12W 20T x 12W x 6D SEM318ENCL12
SEM3 18M ENCL Type 4 20T x 12W x 6D SEM318ENCL4
SEM3 21M ENCL Type 12W 20T x 12W x 6D SEM321ENCL12
SEM3 30M ENCL Type 1 20T x 16W x 6.62D SEM330ENCL1
SEM3 30M ENCL Type 12W 20T x 16W x 6.62D SEM330ENCL12
SEM3 45M ENCL Type 4 20T x 16W x 6.62D SEM345ENCL4 SEM3 Enclosure without meter
modules installed

Enclosures for External Applications
Selection
Standard Enclosure with HMI Display & Switch for External Application – SEM3 Meter Modules, and CT’s are not included
SEM3 3M w/display/switch 16 x 16 x 6.5 SEM303ENCL1DS
SEM3 3M w/display 16 x 16 x 6.5 SEM303ENCL1D
SEM3 9M w/display/switch 16 x 16 x 6.5 SEM309ENCL1DS
SEM3 9M w/display 16 x 16 x 6.5 SEM309ENCL1D
SEM3 15M w/display/switch 20 x 16 x 8 SEM315ENCL1DS
SEM3 15M w/display 20 x 16 x 8 SEM315ENCL1D
Remote Touch Display Enclosure Package - No SEM3 parts included
SEM3 ENCL 7” Touch Display 24 VDC/1.3 Amp Power Supply SEM3TP7SEN
SEM3 ENCL 7” Touch Display 24 VDC/1.3 Amp PS UL Listed SEM3TP7SENUL
SEM3 ENCL 7” Touch Display 24 VDC/1.3 Amp PS + 8 Port Switch SEM3TP7AEN
SEM3 ENCL 7” Touch Display 24 VDC/1.3 Amp PS +
SEM3TP7AENUL
8 Port Switch UL Listed
SEM3 ENCL 9” Touch Display 24 VDC/1.3 Amp PS + 8 Port Switch SEM3TP9AEN
SEM3TP9AENUL
SEM3TP12AEN
8 Port Switch
SEM3TP12AENUL
Optional Loose Remote Touch Display and Power Supply

8
SEM3 7” TD 100-240VAC + SITOP PS 24VDC SEM3TOUCHP7

POWER
MONITORING

MD Series Power Meter
MD BM and MD BMD Model Power Meters
Siemens MD BM and MD BMD Model Power
Meters are sub metering devices designed to provide real
time, accurate electricity metering to enable proper control
over energy costs. The meter can capture kWh/kW energy
and demand data, as well as virtually all relevant energy
parameters for diagnostics and monitoring on three-phase
or single- phase circuit installations. The meters’ flexibility,
size, and ease-of-use make them ideal tools for gathering
detailed consumption information in commercial, industrial,
governmental, and retail environments. The meters use
direct connections to each phase of the voltage and various
interchangeable current transformer (CT) options such as
splitcore CTs or flexible Rogowski Coils (for large loads or large
cables and bus bars) to monitor current on each phase. All
of Siemens’ current transformers are internally shunted for
intrinsically safe operation on energized conductors.
The power meters make over 75 total electrical

measurements which are derived from the voltage and
current inputs. Electrical load diagnostic parameters such
as power factor and line frequency are captured in addition
to energy and demand values. The Siemens MD BM and
MD BMD Power Meters require no external power and the
power supplies can accommodate service voltages ranging
from 80 to 600V (phase-to-phase). The simple installation is
accomplished by connecting the colour-coded voltage leads
and clearly labeled CTs. A three-LED indicator display confirms
proper CT-to-phase installation. The meters automatically
adjust for CT orientation—greatly reducing set-up time and all
but eliminating installation errors.
Product Description Catalogue Number

MD Meter BACnet-Modbus MDBM
MD Meter Modbus-BACnet IP MDBMIP
MD Meter BACnet-Modbus w/display MDBMD
MD Meter Modbus-BACnet IP w/display MDBMIPD
Mini SplitCore 0.4 Opening 50A SCTHSC0050U
8
Mini SplitCore 0.4 Opening 100A SCTHMC0100U
Mini SplitCore 0.4 Opening 200A SCTHMC0200U
MONITORING
POWER
Small SplitCore 0.75 Opening 50A SCTSCS0050U
Small SplitCore 0.75 Opening 100A SCTSCS0100U
Medium SplitCore 1.25 Opening 100A SCTSCM0100U
Large SplitCore 2.00 Opening 600A SCTSCL0600U
Large SplitCore 2.00 Opening 1000A SCTSCL1000U
Rogowski Coil Current Transformer, 16” (40 cm); 4.5” (11.5 cm) opening; 4000A SCTR161310U
Rogowski Coil Current Transformer, 24” (60 cm); 7.0” (18 cm) opening; 4000A SCTR241310U
Rogowski Coil Current Transformer, 36” (90 cm); 10.8 (28 cm) opening; 4000A SCTR361310U

Low Voltage Current Transformers
Comprehensive metering grade CT offering spilt-core, flexible and solid core designs
Split core – Rectangular Window
Siemens Instrument Grade Current Transformers

(CT) have a split-core construction and provide
a safe 5A secondary output. These split-core
current transformers allow for easy installation,
retrofit, and service. CT’s come with 4’ leads
(18 gauge). Use on low voltage applications of
600V or less.
Accuracy 0.5%.
Window
Amps (C x B) Catalogue Number
100A 1.25”x1.15” PDS-CTSC-011
200A 1.25”x1.51” PDS-CTSC-021
300A 1.25”x1.51” PDS-CTSC-031
400A 2.45”x2.89” PDC-CTSC-042
600A 2.45”x2.89” PDS-CTSC-062
200A – 300A 400A – 800A 1000A – 1200A
800A 2.45”x2.89” PDS-CTSC-083
A = 3.75” (95mm) A = 4.90” (124mm) A = 4.90” (124mm)
1000A 2.45”x5.50” PDS-CTSC-013
B = 1.51” (38mm) B = 2.89” (73mm) B = 5.50” (140mm)
1200A 2.45”x5.50” PDS-CTSC-123
C = 1.25” (32mm) C = 2.45” (62mm) C = 2.45” (62mm)
1600A 2.45”x5.50” PDS-CTSC-163
D = 1.13” (29mm) D = 1.13” (29mm) D = 1.13” (29mm)
E = 4.20” (107mm) E = 5.57” (141mm) E = 8.13” (207mm) 2000A 2.45”x5.50” PDS-CTSC-200
F = 4.75” (121mm) F = 5.91” (150mm) F = 5.92” (150mm) 3000A 2.75”x6.625” PDS-CTSC-03R
Split-core – Round Window

Split-core round rubber insulated flexible CT’s with
12’ heavy duty leads (18 AWG) and 5A secondary
output for use on low voltage applications of 600V.
Accuracy is 4% for 200/400A, 3% for 400A, and
2% for 600A and above.
Window
8
Amps (A) Catalogue Number

200A 4.00” PDS-CTHC-024
POWER
MONITORING
300A 4.00” PDS-CTHC-034

400A 4.00” PDC-CTHC-044
600A 4.00” PDS-CTHC-064
200A – 1200A 3000A – 4000A 800A 4.00” PDS-CTHC-084
A = 4.00” A = 6.00” 1200A 4.00” PDS-CTSC-123
B = 1.25” B = 1.25” 2000A 6.00” PDS-CTHC-206
C = 1.50” C = 1.50” 3000A 6.00” PDS-CTHC-306
D = 6.50” D = 8.50” 4000A 6.00” PDS-CTHC-406

Low Voltage Current Transformers
Comprehensive metering grade CT offering spilt-core, flexible and solid core designs
Solid-core – Round with Round Window Solid-core – Square with Round Window
The small size Siemens Instrument

solid core Current Grade Current
Transformer (CT) are Transformers (CT) are
designed for tight designed as solid-core
locations and new construction and provide
installations providing a safe 5A secondary
a safe 5 amp second- output. Solid-core CT’s
ary for use on voltage come with terminals for
applications of 600V attaching leads. Use on
or less. low voltage applications
Accuracy is 0.3%. of 600V or less.
Accuracy is 0.3%.
Example: 100 to 300A size

Amps Dimension (A x B x C x D) Catalogue Number
200:5 1.25” x 4.88” x 2.19” x 4.68” PDS-CTRC-021
300:5 1.25” x 4.88” x 2.19” x 4.68” PDS-CTSC-031
Solid core – Round metering grade, 600V 400:5 1.25” x 4.88” x 2.19” x 4.68” PDS-CTRC-041
500:5 1.25” x 5.10” x 3.00” x 5.50” PDC-CTRC-051
Catalogue
600:5 1.25” x 5.10” x 3.00” x 5.50” PDS-CTRC-061
Number Primary Size
800:5 1.25” x 5.10” x 3.00” x 5.50” PDS-CTRC-081
SMU-CT-011 100A 1.75” x 2.47”, 1” Window 1000:5 1.25” x 5.10” x 3.00” x 5.50” PDS-CTRC-101
300:5 2.25” x 6.31” x 3.00” x 5.82” PDS-CTRC-032
SMU-CT-031 300A 1.75” x 2.47”, 1” Window
400:5 2.25” x 6.31” x 3.00” x 5.82” PDS-CTRC-042
SMU-CT-041 400A 1.1” x 3.56”, 1.56” Window 800:5 4.00” x 6.44” x 3.25” x 3.25” PDS-CTRC-084
2000:5 4.00” x 6.44” x 3.25” x 3.25” PDS-CTRC-204
SMU-CT-02R 2000A 1.15” x 5.73”, 3.25” Window 3200:5 6.50” x 9.88” x 7.00” x 7.00” PDS-CTRC-326
4000:5 6.50” x 9.88” x 7.00” x 7.00” PDS-CTRC-426
Shorting Block
All low voltage current transformers should be installed Catalogue Mounting

with a shorting block to allow for easy removal of the me- Number Ckts. L D min. D max.
tering unit and to provide a safe method for disconnecting IKU4SC 4 3.25 2.88 3.00
IKU6SC 6 4.50 4.12 4.25
the CT signal. One shorting block is required per meter.
IKU8SC 8 5.75 5.38 5.50
8
Various size shorting blocks are available; 4, 6, and 8 pole IKU12SC 12 8.25 7.88 8.00
configurations are available with four slotted shorting
MONITORING
POWER
screws and cover. Wire size is 18-10 AWG.
Typical electrical meter CT and shorting
block installation
This example
shows a com-
mon three pha-
se, three wire in-
stallation where
three CT’s and
one shorting
block are used.

SEM3T System
Overview
Avoid downtime with 24/7 continuous monitoring via SIEMENS SEM3T Thermal Monitoring
For many years, scheduled infrared ther- ensuring electrical asset integrity. This
mography (IR) inspections have been becomes apparent when looking at the
the accepted method for reducing risk of technology comparison of SEM3T to IR
fire by identifying faulty or loose connec- windows and thermal imaging.
tions in electrical distribution systems.
SEM3T is a system specifically designed To meet the thermal monitoring chal-
to provide continuous thermal monitoring. lenges of operations owner, design engi-
It offers a safer, more effective way to neers, and contractors, Siemens offers
detect thermal risks before they progress a proven cost-effective solution for
into a major failure. Thermal Monitoring. This solution com-
bines a fully integrated thermal moni-
The method also delivers up to a 10:1
toring system factory installed into the
return on investment due to avoided
SEM3T ™ Thermal Siemens Panelboards, Switchboards,
equipment damage and downtime.
Monitoring System and Switchgears, which along with the
Selection and Application Guide
Continuous Thermal Monitoring is now required local or remote monitoring
enabling safer, more efficient inspec- software, provides a “Total” Power and
tion of energized electrical equipment, Thermal monitoring system.
Siemens Thermal Monitoring/ Designer and Contractor benefits include:

Embedded Monitoring Solution b No need to wait for inspector to scan the system to under-
b Saves you money – SIEMENS SEM3T thermal monitoring stand abnormalities
system specifically designed to provide 24x7 detection of
b Factory pre-wired – less installation time
hotspots at an early stage of development; thus, avoiding
potential downtime resulting from Arc Flash / power outage b Drastically less installation wiring & cost
incidents.
b Thermal sensors are calibrated to meet the accuracy stan-
b Fast, low-cost installation – The embedded Siemens solu- dards and requirements
tion provides a faster and lower cost installation compared
to other external systems. b All equipment fits into the standard Siemens electrical
equipment design
b Safety in mind – SIEMENS thermal monitoring system is
safer, more effective way to detect thermal risks before they b cUL, CE (Pending) approved
progress into a major failure. b Embedded web-server for on-site configuration, real time
data display, data logging, event logging, trending and alarm
b Minimum space requirements – The embedded switchgear,
switchboard and panelboard construction design requires no notifications.
additional wall space to provide thermal monitoring.
b Built-in industry standard Modbus TCP communication
b Reliable and accurate – SIEMENS thermal monitoring b Dual Ethernet ports for daisy chaining over Ethernet and
system is non-invasive reliable and easily installed thermal Wi-Fi as an option
monitoring solution which can monitor numerous locations
8
within low voltage apparatus including bus joints, lug land- b Monitor 1 to 45 thermal points.
ings, bus ducts, transformers, and circuit breakers. Thermal
POWER
MONITORING
sensors can be positioned appropriately to detect ambient b Web pages can also be set by a user to four different lan-
guages (English, German, French, or Spanish) for configura-
temperature, as well as overloaded or poorly conducting
tions and real-time data display
electrical connections.
b Automated alert notifications – With automated alert noti- Thermal Monitoring applications include:
fication services the responsibility to acquire the data, store b Industrial Manufacturing
the data and analyze the data is removed from the facility
management company, thus saving manpower and time. b Critical Power - Data Centers and Hospitals
b Responsive service – With remote monitoring, continuous b Government
24/7 monitoring can be done by the facility management
b LEEDS buildings
company or local users. The service can also relay thermal
hotspot conditions changes to the owners for immediate b Airports
investigation.
b Higher Education
Please Contact Your Siemens Sales Engineer for additional information regarding Thermal Sensing:

SEM3T System
Overview
SEM3T System Overview SEM3T Thermal Module
The Thermal Module reads the address from the racks designat-
ed by its location and thermal signals from its respective thermal
sensor. Each Thermal Module is an independent thermal module
that samples thermal signals, processes these signals using the
embedded algorithms and communicates these parameters to
the controller. When the thermal module is powered and is com-
municating properly with the controller, the power LED will blink.
Inside electrical apparatus equipment
b One thermal module per thermal monitoring location
b No configuration required for the modules
0... 80% up to 31º C b Connects directly to thermal sensors
0... 50% at 40º C
SEM3T Thermal Sensors

IP20
Thermal Sensors are components used for thermal
measurement. SEM3T product is UL listed. Thermal Sensor
lead wires come with standard 10’ can be extended up to
14º...149º F
-10º...65º C 50’, still maintaining the thermal output accuracy.
b Thermal Sensors are designed to work specifically with the
SEM3T product
b Lead wire type: UL rated operating temperature to 200ºC,
600V rated, UL style 1199, 18AWG, 10 x 30 stranded
b Primary rating: 600VAC
b Overvoltage category: CAT IV
b Operating temperature 0ºC to 130ºC
b Very reliable non-powered wired Sensors are designed to
1. Main Controller withstand harsh environments Thermal Sensors come in the
2. Rack to Controller Cables following variants and sizes:
3. Thermal Sensors b 4 types Sensor Screw Ring terminals for monitoring thermal
4. Thermal Module points at joint locations
5. Racks
b Sensor S-Ring sizes: 1/4”, 5/16”, 3/8”, 1/2”
SEM3T Controller b Cylindrical sensor for monitoring ambient temperature
Sensor C-Ring
SEM3T Controller can provide thermal monitoring for up to 45
Thermal points. SEM3T Controller acts as a Data Server and SEM3 Racks
processes the data from the Thermal Modules. The control- The SEM3 Racks are the holders for the thermal modules.
ler can be configured to create several groups with multiple Embedded within a rack is the internal addressing for the
thermal points. This information either viewed in real-time or communication of thermal information from the module to the
communicated to other systems through its communication controller via Ethernet cables. A two-way DIP switch is avail-
8
interfaces. Some applications may require for more than 45 able on the 9, 15, and 21 position racks for thermal monitoring
thermal points in one apparatus electrical equipment. If so, addressing, whereas a rotary switch is available to set the
MONITORING
POWER
then simply add a second controller. Two controllers can moni- addressing on 3 and 6 position racks.
tor up to 90 thermal points. Using the available dual Ethernet b Five types of racks available
ports in each controller, daisy chaining of multiple controllers
b DIP switch or rotary switch for controller to recognize mod-
in a serial fashion is achievable. ule location and rack assignments
b SEM3T Controller has built-in web pages for real-time data, Rack to Controller Cables
historical logging/trending, alarm notifications, KPI dash
boards, and configurations The communications cables connect the SEM3 racks to the
controller and daisy chain additional meter racks together in
b Easy to integrate to Siemens MindSphere cloud platform –
MindSphere ready device series (for 3 and/or 6 meter module racks only). Multiple lengths
are available to suit a wide variety of panelboard and switch-
b 24vdc power supply
board configurations. The data cables are insulated for 600V
b Optional Wi-Fi applications and are not standard Ethernet cables. NOTE: See
b Available standard communication protocol: Modbus TCP ordering information page for cable sizes and catalog numbers.
for integration with monitoring software system, SMTP for
emailing, and NTP for network time synchronization b Seven cable lengths
b Dual Ethernet (RJ45) ports for daisy chain over Ethernet b 600V rated Ethernet cable. Note: Regular Ethernet RJ45
cables are rated only up to 300V and are not allowed to use
b Meets global certifications/ standards for this application

SEM3T System Selection and Application Guide | SEM3T
Selection and Application Guide | SEM3T
Selection
Selection
Selection
and
and
and
Application
Application
Application
Guide
Guide| |SEM3T
Guide SEM3T
| SEM3T
Ordering and Technical Data
SEM3T Controller
Ordering information 2.41in

2.41in
[61.21mm]
Part Catalogue Number
[61.21mm]
2.41in
2.41in
2.41in
2.09in
[61.21mm]
[61.21mm]
[61.21mm] 1.84in
SEM3T Controller with Wi-Fi 7KT1281-0AA10 2.09in
[53.09mm] 1.84in
[46.74mm]
[53.09mm]
2.09in
2.09in
2.09in [46.74mm]
1.84in
1.84in
1.84in
SEM3T Controller without Wi-Fi 7KT1281-0AA00 [53.09mm]
[53.09mm]
[53.09mm] [46.74mm]
[46.74mm]
[46.74mm]
ETHERNET SD ETHERNET
PORT 1 PORT 2
ETHERNET SD ETHERNET
PORT 1 PORT 2
Controller ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNETSDSD SDETHERNET
PORT
PORT
1PORT
1 1
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
PORT
PORT
2PORT
2 2
Description Information SEM3T™ Controll er

(Thermal Monitoring ™ System)
SEM3T Controll
Model No: 7KT1281-0AA10
er
(Thermal Monitoring System)
Altitude / Elevation 3000 Meters/9843 Feet SEM3T
SEM3T
SEM3T ™
Model ™Controll
DEVICE
No: ™ Controll
Controll
7KT1281-0AA1
0 erer er
(Thermal
(Thermal
(Thermal
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
System)
System)
DEVICE System)
ETHERNE T 0 0 0
Maximum relative humidity 80% for Model
Model
No:
Model
No:
7KT1281-0AA1
7KT1281-0AA1
No: 7KT1281-0AA1
ETHERNE
SD CAR D T
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
Humidity temperature up to 31°C decreasing linearly SD CAR D
ETHERNE
ETHERNE
ETHERNE
TT T 4.49in
to 50% relative humidity at 40°C SD
SDCAR
SD
CARD
CAR
D D 4.49in
[114.05mm]
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Operating Norcross,Siemens
GA USA Industry, Inc. [114.05mm]
4.49in
4.49in
4.49in
-10°C to +65°C / 14°F to 149°F www.usa.siemens.com/SEM3T
Norcross, GA USA 4.11in
Temperature Range www.usa.siemens.com/SEM3T
Siemens
Siemens
Siemens
Industry,
Industry,
Industry,
Inc.
Inc. Inc. 4.11in[114.05mm]
[104.39mm] [114.05mm]
[114.05mm]
Power Supply
Norcross,
Norcross,
Norcross,
WIFI MAC: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
LAN MAC: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
GAGA
USA
USA
GA USA
www.usa.siemens.com/SEM3T
www.usa.siemens.com/SEM3T
www.usa.siemens.com/SEM3T [104.39mm]
4.11in
4.11in
4.11in
UL Listed 24V DC Class II power supply. WIFI MAC: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Requirement LAN MAC: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX

Contains T ransmitter Module FCC ID: TFB-TIWI1-01
Contains TWIFI
ransmitter
WIFI
MAC:
WIFI
MAC: Module IC: 5969A-TIWI101
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
MAC:
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
[104.39mm]
[104.39mm]
[104.39mm]
Contains T ransmitter Module FCC ID: TFB-TIWI1-01
LANLAN
MAC:
MAC:
LAN
Contains TXX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
MAC:
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
ransmitter Module IC: 5969A-TIWI101
C Contains
Contains
Contains
Contains
US
Contains
T ransmitter
T ransmitter
Contains
T ransmitter
T ransmitter
Module
T ransmitter
Module
T ransmitter
Module
Module
FCC
Module
FCC
Module
ID:FCC
IC:IC:
ID:
TFB-TIWI1-01
TFB-TIWI1-01
ID: TFB-TIWI1-01
5969A-TIWI101
5969A-TIWI101
IC: 5969A-TIWI101
LISTEDC US
THERMAL MONITORLISTED
E499865
C C C USUS US
E499865
IN-LBS THERMAL MONITOR
LISTED
24Vdc LISTED LISTED
[Nm]IN-LBS
CLASS 2, 300 mA
E499865E499865 WiFi
mm 2 AWG
E499865
mm 2 (-) (+)
THERMAL
THERMAL 24Vdc
MONITOR
THERMAL
MONITORMONITOR RACK(S)
CLASS 2, 300 mA
ANT WiFi
[Nm]
IN-LBS
IN-LBS
IN-LBS mm 2 mm 2 AWG (-) (+)24Vdc
24Vdc
24Vdc ANT
RACK(S)
CLASS
CLASS
2, 300
CLASS
2, 300
mA mA
2, 300 mA
WiFi
WiFiWiFi
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm] mm
mm2 2 2
mm mm AWG
AWG
2 2 2
mm
mm AWG (+)
(-)(-) (+)
(-) (+) ANT
ANTANT
RACK(S)
RACK(S)
RACK(S)
24 V DC
5 [.56] .50 to 2.50 22 to 14
power supply leads
Thermal Hole Dimensions
1.7 [.19] 0.75 18 1.08in .35in
Sensor Leads 2x ØHole
.177 Dimensions
[4.50mm] 1.08in .35in
mm 2 2x
Hole
Hole
Hole [4.50mm] [27.43mm]
ØDimensions
.177
Dimensions
Dimensions [8.89mm]
mm 2
[27.43mm]
1.08in
1.08in
1.08in [8.89mm]
.35in
.35in
.35in
2x
2xØ2x
Ø.177
Ø
.177
.177
[4.50mm]
[4.50mm]
[4.50mm]
mm
mm2 2 2
mm
[27.43mm]
[27.43mm]
[27.43mm] [8.89mm]
[8.89mm]
[8.89mm]
SEM3T Thermal Module

Ordering information Thermal Module
Part Catalogue Number Description Information

SEM3T Sensor Module 7KT1281-1AA00 Altitude / Elevation 3000 Meters/9843 Feet
Pollution Degree 3 (UL 61010)
Overvoltage Category IV (UL 61010)
Operating
-10°C to +65°C / 14°F to 149°F
8
Temperature Range
POWER
MONITORING
PO
WE
PROW
ER
PO
POPO SE
WW
EREW SE M3S
RER NS T
OSR EM
EN
MSOO
3T
SSEE SDER
UL
SE MEM
SE S 3NT3M
MEO
3D
NSNS
OR S T TU L
OR OR E
MO
MO MO
DU
DU DU
L EL E L E
1.7 IN-LBS [0.19 Nm]
1.7 IN-LBS [0.19 Nm]
1.7
1.7
IN-LBS
1.7
IN-LBS
IN-LBS
[0.19
[0.19
[0.19
Nm]
Nm]Nm]
1.59 in
1.59 in
[4.39mm]
[4.39mm]
1.59
1.59
1.59
inin in
[4.39mm]
[4.39mm]
[4.39mm]
.54in 2.18 in .19-.23 IN [5-6mm]

.54in 2.18 in .19-.23 IN [5-6mm]
[13.72mm] [55.37mm]
[13.72mm]
.54in
.54in
.54in [55.37mm]
2.18
2.18
2.18
inin in .19-.23
.19-.23
.19-.23
ININ[5-6mm]
IN
[5-6mm]
[5-6mm]
[13.72mm]
[13.72mm]
[13.72mm] [55.37mm]
[55.37mm]
[55.37mm]

11
11
11
1111
SEM3T System
SEM3T | Selection and Application Guide
SEM3T | Selection and Application Guide
SEM3T Thermal Sensors
Diameter
Screw Ring Terminal
Diameter
.45in .60in
Dimensions inches [mm] Torque (lb-ft) for
[11.43mm]
.45in [15.24mm]
.60in
“A” “A” non-lubricated
[11.43mm] [15.24mm] Description Catalogue Number A B threads*
+ SEM3T sensor 0.257 0.625
.06in
7KT1281-2SA00 6–9
+ 1⁄4” terminal [6.527] [15.875]
.06in
SEM3T sensor 0.323 1.00

[1.52mm]
5⁄16” terminal 7KT1281-2SA01 6–9

[8.204] [25.4]
Diameter
2.29in
[1.52mm]
[58.17mm] SEM3T sensor 0.386 1.125

Diameter
2.29in 3⁄8” terminal 7KT1281-2SA02 20 – 30

[58.17mm]3.29in [9.804] [28.575]
Overall
SEM3T sensor 0.515 1.25

[83.57mm] 7KT1281-2SA03 40 – 50
“B” “B”
3.29in
Overall
1⁄2” terminal [13.081] [31.75]

[83.57mm] * Example: The SEM3T Sensor 1/4” terminal accepts a 1/4” bolt /screw and the
Thickness
tightening torque is 6-9 lb-ft.

Thickness
10ft10ft
[3.66m]
[3.66m]
Cylindrical Ring Terminal
.52in .43in Description Catalogue Number

[13.21mm]
.52in [10.92mm]
.43in SEM3T sensor cylindrical 7KT1281-2CA00
[13.21mm] [10.92mm]
.34in
[8.64mm]
.34in Sensor Information
[8.64mm]
Description Information
.73in
[18.54mm] Altitude / Elevation 3000 Meters/9843 Feet
.73in
Pollution Degree 3 (UL 61010)
[18.54mm]
2.32in Overvoltage Category IV (UL 61010)
[58.93mm] Operating Temperature Range 0°C to 130°C / 32°F to 266°F
2.32in
[58.93mm] Wire Type UL rated operating temperature to 200ºC,
600V rated, UL style 1199, 18 AWG, 10x30
stranded
8
MONITORING
POWER
12
12
SEM3T System Selection and Application Guide | SEM3T
Racks and Cables

Variable Dimensions inches [mm]
Catalogue Number Description A B C D
SEM3RACK3 3 position rack 1.90 [48.26] 3.57 [90.68] 2.28 [57.91] 1.79 [45.46]
6” (152.40 mm) US2:SEM3CAB6INCH

8

POWER
MONITORING
US2:SEM3CAB24INCH
24” (609.60 mm)
600V Rated
Product Connector Electrical Ratings

Description Information
Controller Rack Connector 12VDC, 0.5A max
Sensor 5VDC, 0.14mA max
0 ... 80% up to 31º C 14º...149ºF
Module 12VDC, 12mA max IP20
0 ... 50% at 40º C -10º...65ºC
Rack - Ethernet Connector 12VDC, 0.5A max
Rack - Module Connector 12VDC, 12mA max
13

SEM3T System
Order Information
Controller Catalog Number
SEM3T Controller with Wi-Fi 7KT1281-0AA10
SEM3T Controller wiithout Wi-Fi 7KT1281-0AA00
Thermal Sensor Module
SEM3T Sensor Module 7KT1281-1AA00
Thermal Sensors
SEM3T Sensor Screw Ring Terminal 1⁄4” 7KT1281-2SA00
SEM3T Sensor Cylindrical Ring Terminal 7KT1281-2CA00
Accessories
SEM3T Wi-Fi Antenna and Cable 7KT1281-8AN00
8
Meter Racks
MONITORING
POWER
Module Rack 3 Position SEM3RACK3
Cables
Controller to Rack Cable - 6 inch SEM3CAB6INCH

Powermanager
A power management system that can be customized to your needs. SENTRON Powermanager software, com-
View and control your facilities’ infrastructure condition from anywhere. bined with Siemens power meters and low-
voltage protective devices, provides a com-
plete energy management solution for your
business. It allows you to measure, process,
analyze, store and share energy usage and
status information across your entire enter-
prise. It offers control capabilities, comprehen-
sive energy usage and reliability, and detailed
reporting that will help you reduce energy
related costs.
Cost allocation and Sub-billing Reports Benefits
Cost allocation and sub-billing functionality in the Powermanager b Visibility and control of power flows
software allows the user to track energy related costs by building, b Exact knowledge of the consumption profile
floor, tenant, feeder or location. Match virtually any fixed rate bill- Increase of energy efficiency
b
ing structure and use comprehensive multi-year scheduling and
b Optimization of power supply contracts
time-of-use features to manage the energy costs.
b Compliance with contractual terms or regulations
Load Studies and Asset Management b Allocation of costs to individual cost centers
Trend power usage data to take full advantage of your electrical b Optimization of plant maintenance
distribution system capacity and avoid over-design. Create usage b Identification of critical systems conditions
profiles that will allow you to distribute loads and avoid demand
peak which helps to identify energy leaks such as equipment run- The Powermanager software:
ning during down time. b Is available in a stand-alone or LAN/WAN based configuration
that can also exchange information with other supervisory sys-
Equipment Monitoring and Control tems like building automation software
Powermanager allows you to meter all your utilities including gas, b Can utilize any Ethernet or serial based connections
steam, air and water and set up general condition alarming and b Is expandable from the basic monitoring application to a fully
pre-event alarms for impending or imminent conditions. Interface customized enterprise management system
with other energy management and SCADA systems through b Is fully scalable with regard to the connected devices and to
multiple communication channels and protocols like OPC. the software’s function to meet current and future needs
b Ensures the seamless integration of power monitoring devices
Reports from the Siemens SENTRON PAC Series Meter, SEM3, and
Standard reports provide models of daily electricity usage so you SENTRON WL/VL/3VA circuit breakers as well as other Modbus
can distribute loads and avoid demand peaks. This enables you communicating devices
to allocate energy consumption and/or costs to individual areas
b Is designed to collect, archive, monitor, display and evaluate
and identify expensive processes that need attention. The historic
any kind of energy related device data
trending report compiles data from load circuits over a users
8
predefined period. This enables the user to fully utilize the power b Provides web based reporting and detailed graphics construc-
distribution system and run at near rated tolerances. tion utilities as standard
POWER
MONITORING
Powermanager Software V4.x and greater versions - Device Licenses Catalogue Number
POWERMANAGER BASIC 10 DEVICES 7KN27102CE400YC0
POWERMANAGER 20 ADTNL.DEVICES 7KN27111CE400YC0
Powermanager Software V4.x and greater versions - Add Ons and Upgrades Catalogue Number
POWERMANAGER OPT PACKAGE EXPERT 7KN27120CE400YC0
POWERMANAGER OPT PACKAGE CLIENT (2) 7KN27121CE400YC0
POWERMANAGER OPT PACKAGE CLIENT (5) 7KN27122CE400YC0
POWERMANAGER OPT PACKAGE 1 x DISTR SYS 7KN27124CE400YC0
Contact Siemens for upgrade information

WinPM.Net Enhanced Web-Enabled Energy Management Software
WinPM.Net is a complete energy information management solution for
your business allowing you to process, analyze, store and share energy
usage and power quality data across your entire enterprise. It offers
control capabilities, comprehensive power quality and reliability analysis
and can help you reduce energy-related costs. WinPM.net allows you to
manage intelligent metering and protective devices, analyze data, and
decide on new courses of action to help you save money and keep your
business up and running.
Its cutting-edge flexibility and compatibility means you can add one piece
at a time, at your own pace, while still maintaining your original invest-
ments. Interface to your existing systems through industry-standard proto-
cols and choose newer components as they become available.
The WinPM.Net software:

b Provides detailed analysis of the power quality and overlays waveforms
to correlate phase-to-phase relationships between voltages and cur-
rents and cascading failures
b Pinpoints the sources of transients, harmonics, or sags, whether exter-
nal or internal to your facility, allowing you to decide on the right cor-
rective actions. By monitoring circuits 24 hours a day, you can develop
strategies to avoid interruptions
b Provides a comprehensive graphics utility as standard to build and edit
any graphical screen whether it is a standard screen or a customized
one. These custom screens can display real-time and historical data,
alarms, status indications, meter, relay and third party equipment infor-
mation
b Supports Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, ION, XML, OPC, FTP, and PQDIF
compliant systems, so you can unify your diverse operations into one
system. Interface to other energy management software, or include
transducers, PLCs, and RTUs in a WinPM.net network. OPC can extract
Cost allocation and sub-billing values from other software databases then combine these values with
up-to-date readings from WinPM.net to perform real time calculations
Track energy-related costs by building,
feeder, or tool. Match virtually any bill- b Offers easy, cost effective and fast system expansion. The system
grows as your needs grow. Add one piece at a time, at your own pace,
ing structure and use comprehensive within your own budget
multi-year scheduling and time-of-use
activity profiles. Ordering information
Software Catalogue Number
Load studies and asset management
WinPM.NET V9.0 DVD New (Includes 5 meter device licenses,
3ZS67100CC900BA0
Trend power usage data to take full 1 Eng Client, 2 Web Clients, New! Dashboards & PQDIF)
8
advantage of your electrical distribution WinPM.NET V9.0 DVD Replacement 3ZS67100CC900BC0
system capacity and avoid over-design. Device License
MONITORING
POWER
Create usage profiles so you can distrib- WinPM.Net V9.0 9xxx Meter Device License Limit 6 to 50 3ZS68120CC900BA2
ute loads and avoid demand peak. WinPM.Net V9.0 9xxx Meter Device License Limit 51 to 100 3ZS68130CC900BA2
WinPM.Net V9.0 9xxx Meter Device License Limit 101 to 1000 3ZS68140CC900BA2
Demand and power factor control
WinPM.Net V9.0 3rd Party device/Modbus/SeaBus Dev. Lic. Limit 1 to 50 3ZS68220CC900BA2
Eliminate penalties through automated WinPM.Net V9.0 3rd Party device/Modbus/SeaBus Dev. Lic. Limit 51 to 100 3ZS68230CC900BA2
power factor correction, load shedding, WinPM.Net V9.0 3rd Party device/Modbus/SeaBus Dev. Lic. Limit 101 to 1000 3ZS68240CC900BA2
or peak shaving. Options
WinPM.Net V9.0 Engineering Client License Limit 2 to 50 3ZS67220CC900BA2
Equipment monitoring and control
WinPM.Net V9.0 Engineering Client License Limit 51 to 100 3ZS67230CC900BA2
Meter all your utilities including gas, WinPM.Net V9.0 Web Client License 3ZS67420CC900BA2
steam, air and water. Set up alarms WinPM.Net V9.0 OPC Server License 3ZS67520CC900BA2
for pending problems, pre-alarm on WinPM.NetSQL Server 2017 - 2 CORE License increment (*** Minimum
3ZS67317CC900BA0
impending or imminent conditions. of 4 cores per server is required (2 x 3ZS67317CC900BA0 minimum))
Interface with other energy manage- Software upgrade
ment and SCADA systems through Contact your local SIEMENS D&CES Business Developer for ordering information & upgrade.
Allows remote configuration of base WinPM.Net software. Excel is required for excel base reports using
multiple communication channels and Reporter. Outlook is required for e-mailing reports.
protocols.

Digitalization for Smart Infrastructure
Cloud & IIoT Solution Offerings Provides:

b Edge Connectivity for Cloud Applications
The Siemens Digital Solutions & Services team offers a com- b Plug & Play for Siemens LP Products
plete portfolio of digitally enabled products that provide access Simplified Dashboarding of Connected Assets
b
to data for customers to manage and monitor their assets, as
b Mobile, Tablet, & Desktop Compatible
well as analytical insights into their electrical infrastructure.
b Multiple Data Export Options
b MindSphere Enabled
Edge Data Collection Unit (DCU)

b Collects field-level device data and stores locally at the edge
b Predefined asset model for automatic configuration of
MindSphere assets
b Custom Dashboarding of live data
b Dual Ethernet ports for local and external networks SIMATIC Nanobox SIMATIC Nanobox SIMATIC Touch PC
b Easily connect and monitor standard modbus devices PC IPC127E PC IPC227E IPC277E (7”)
b Standard device drivers for LP equipment::
• PAC Power Meters
• ACCESS Power Meters
• SEM3
8
• 3WL, 3VA, 3VL

b Energy usage and cost breakdown for sub-billing
POWER
MONITORING
b One-time or scheduled data export via FTP, USB, and Email

b On-board storage options with or without local display
Cloud Connectivity and Applications

Data aggregated in the Edge DCU can be pushed to an exter-
nal server or cloud platform for long-term storage. The Edge
DCU also offers greater flexibility in configuring and creating
a hierarchy of your assets. By doing configuration at the local
level and pushing this structure to cloud platforms, such as
MindSphere, it removes the need of programming the tradi- applications built by Siemens experts, or develop new appli-
tional MindConnect devices in the cloud, transferring the con- cations for specific requirements. Using the Siemens cloud
figuration files to USB, before loading directly onto hardware. applications, users have the ability to choose and change
Cloud connectivity empowers customers to realize value from displays to the specific metrics of interest, view and compare
their data by giving them access to their data outside of their time-series data of similar devices, and configure and export
facility. This allows customer to interact with their data using reports.

Services
Advantages to You...
b Technical experts
b Single source supplier
b Available 24/7, 365 days
a year
b Reduced total cost of owner-
ship (TCO)
b Avoid unscheduled down-
time with
preventive maintenance
Service Products
Modular service products enable you Technical account liaison Training
to customize a technical service agree- A technical account liaison provides Operation and maintenance
ment to meet your organization’s main- consulting and guidance on all aspects Siemens training offers a broad range of
tenance needs over the entire life cycle of support through familiarity with the educational services, providing quality
of your installation. Including Service application, your business goals and and excellence to the automation indus-
products in your TSA will provide the processes, and your maintenance and try. Targeted product and system train-
following benefits: engineering staff. ing provides the student with practical,
b Substantial savings versus “on hands-on experience.
demand” purchases In addition to a site visit to assess your
b Optimized scaling of your mainte- installation and support requirements, Customized on-site training
nance organization the technical account liaison will con- On-site training is excellent for large
b Assurance that your installation is duct monthly reviews with your staff groups or when individual, one-on-one
operating at maximum performance to ensure you are receiving maximum instruction is needed. When the trainer
and availability payback on your investment. visits your facility, product training will
be conducted on your specific installa-
Telephone and Internet Field services tion. Classroom lectures, and trouble-
Priority support Block of hours shooting techniques specific to your
When you need help right now, choose Purchase field service hours in 40 hour installation are covered in detail during
the support coverage that fits your busi- increments for preventative, predictive the training session.
8
ness: or emergency services.
24 hours x 7 days a week Software update service
MONITORING
POWER
8 hours x 5 days a week Maintenance programs The software update service enables
Packaged maintenance programs you to take advantage of enhance-
Extended support available for: ments to the most current software
With extended support, you can request b System performance checks versions. A site evaluation is con-
blocks of support hours for specific projects b Run diagnostics ducted to determine necessary upgrade
and tasks. We can customize this support b Analyze power quality requirements prior to the Software
service to meet your individual needs. Update Service.
b Visual inspections of key system
components
Remote service
b Database trim and backup
Remote service provides support and
diagnostics via data line to save you
time and money. Technical support
specialists directly access your system
for real-time troubleshooting to provide
maximum uptime.

Notes
8 POWER
MONITORING

REVISED
01/2021
POWER PRODUCT Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
Contents
Siemens TPS3 family of hardwired Surge Protective Devices
(formally known as Surge/Lightning Arrestors and/or Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors –TVSS)
SPD Families 9-2
SOLID Protection 9-3
BoltShield™ Surge Protective Devices 9-4 – 9-5
First Surge 9-6
Telephone & CATV (Coax) SPD’s 9-7
TPS3 01 and TPS3 L1 (10 Mode) 9-8
TPS3 03 9-10
TPS3 03 DC 9-11
TPS3 09 9-14
TPS3 11 9-15
TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 (10 mode) 9-16
TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 (10 mode) 9-17
Frequently Asked Questions 9-18
Integrally Mounted SPDs External or Wall Mounted SPDs Residential SPDs
Features Features Features

9
b Per Phase Surge Current Capacity b Per Phase Surge Current Capacity b Per Phase Surge Current Capacity
ranging from 100 kA to 1000 kA ranging from 50 kA to 1000 kA of 60kA, 100kA or 140kA
SPD
b Industry best VPRs b Industry best VPRs b Complete Service Protection for
b In = 20 kA (most models) b In = 20 kA (most models) - Power
b Standard ‘Type 2’ or optional ‘Type 1’ b Standard ‘Type 2’ or optional ‘Type 1’ - Telephone
construction construction - CATV (Coax)
b Ground Reference Monitoring b Ground Reference Monitoring (GRM) b Ground Reference Monitoring
(GRM) diagnostics diagnostics (excluding TPS3 03 & TPS3 09) (GRM) diagnostics
Residential Commercial Industrial

Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
Siemens Surge Protection Innovations
Introduction
In today’s electronic world, home and circuitry, coordinated fusing and thermal The BoltShield line of SPDs helps
business electrical systems just aren’t cutouts, dielectric isolation, mechanical address the changing NEC codes that
complete unless they incorporate surge re-enforcing taping, etc… resulting in a require surge protection in all dwellings.
protection. Stopping Surges Before design that ensures the highest possible The Siemens BoltShield family of
They Get Into these systems is best electrical system surge protection and residential and commercial products
accomplished through the installation reliability. allows this to be done easily and at a
of appropriately sized hard-wired surge reasonable cost.
protective devices (SPDs) beginning Our next generation UL 1449 4th Edition
at the incoming service followed by and CSA 22.2 No. 269 TPS3 SPDs Electrical disturbances will always
installations at other key surge entry carry on this same legacy. Every TPS3 occur, but they don’t have to cause
points. is infused with Siemens engineering surge protectors to fail in an unsafe
safety and performance “know-how” manner. Safer surge protection means
When Siemens first developed the culminating with surge protection uncompromised electrical system
Transient Protection System (TPS) family having the highest degree of safety protection, safety, and reliability.
of surge protectors, we knew early on while delivering the industry’s best
that hard-wired surge protectors needed performance ratings – some of The following pages provide additional
fully coordinated safety controls. This lowest Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs), technical and ordering information
led to the adoption of a number of SPD Type 1 or 2, and 20kA I-nominal ratings concerning our entire offering of Surge
industry safety control firsts including (for most models) with surge current Protective Devices (SPDs).
the patented Ceramgard and TranSafe ratings from 50 to 1000 kA.
Surge Protector Per Phase Surge Current Capacities

Wall Mounted Standard Mode
Per Phase TPS3 01 TPS3 02 TPS3 03 TPS3 03 DC TPS3 05 TPS3 06 TPS3 09 TPS3 11 TPS3 12 TPS3 15
Surge
Current
50 kA
100 kA
150 kA
200 kA
250 kA
300 kA
400 kA
500 kA
600 kA
800 kA
1000 kA
9
10 Mode SPDs
Per Phase TSP3 L1 TPS3 L2 TPS3 L5 TPS3 L6 TPS3L 12 TPS3L 15
SPD
Surge
Current
100 kA
150 kA
300 kA
450 kA
500 kA
600 kA
900 kA

Recommending Surge Protection
SOLID Protection
Either at home or in the work place, The reasoning is based upon anecdotal The illustration to the right shows
nearly every electrical load is electronic understating that surge protected “SOLID” locations for a school’s electrical
infused. With electrical infrastructure systems are more reliable. Supported by system. Under each ‘SOLID’ location is a
being the same as it was 50 years ago, government studies, the most efficient Siemens TPS3 model number with surge
equipment is more susceptible to surge way to protect electrical systems from current capacities matching those to what
damage and/or disruption generated by surges is through the installation of are typically specified by consultants
normal electrical distribution interactions. hardwired SPDs at key points throughout across North America.
Places where lightning activity is minimal the distribution system. These locations
are now experiencing more electronic can easily be remembered by memorizing
failures due to surges generated by the the locations of the acrostic found within
day to day operations of equipment like the following phrase, “The best surge
washers and dryers, copiers, chillers, etc. protected system is a SOLID one,” where
each letter of the word SOLID stand for
In response to this susceptibility, code the locations on the electrical system
authorities have mandated emergency where SPDs should be installed.
power distribution equipment now
must be protected by a listed SPD.
Service Outside loads Lower voltage Individual Data,

Entrance like Parking distribution critical telephone,
Lot Lighting panels equipment and coaxial
powered from powering like servers cables
distribution computers
panels and other
electronics
Surge Arrestor Replacement Discrete, True, or L-L Enhanced 10 Mode Style SPDs
For mission critical or high profile
Low-voltage surge and lightning applications, a growing number of end
arrestors became obsolete when users prefer the assurance discrete or
UL 1449 3rd edition went into true 10-mode SPDs provide.
effect in 2009.
When surges traverse the electrical
system via phase to phase conductors,
9
They were replaced with Type 1 SPDs standard SPDs indirectly protect via
having an I-nominal (In) rating equal the line to neutral or line to ground
to 20kA. Most all Siemens TPS3’s modes of protection. Siemens integral
SPD
or wall mounted “Discrete,” “True,” or

are rated as Type 1, In = 20kA SPDs.
L-L Enhanced 10-mode SPDs address
However, the style and form factor L-L surges by incorporating directly
TPS3 03 of traditional surge arrestors is best connected line to line surge protection
Type 1 SPD replaced using our TPS3 03. elements. This style of SPD provides
with In = 20kA the “Just in Case” assurance mission
critical or high pro-file projects require.

BoltShield™ Surge Protective Devices
BSPD – Commercial Surge Protection for Panel Boards Catalogue Logic
BSPD series for panelboards
Catalog # BSPD – 2 – A – 100
Series Poles Voltage Code Surge Current Rating

BSPD 2 = 2 Pole A= 120/240V, 1Ø 3W (Fig.1) 100 = 100kA per Mode/Phase
3 = 3 Pole B= 240/120V, 3Ø 4W (Fig.3)
C= 208Y/120V, 3Ø 4W (Fig.2)
D= 240V, 3Ø 3W (Fig.4)
E= 480Y/277V, 3Ø, 4W (Fig.1)
F = 480V, 3Ø, 3W (Fig.4)
G= 600V, 3Ø, 3W (Fig.4)
K= 380Y/220V, 3Ø, 4W (Fig.1)
L = 600Y/347V, 3Ø, 4W (Fig.1)
S= 400Y/230V, 3Ø, 4W (Fig.1)
T= 415Y/240V, 3Ø, 4W (Fig.1)
BSPD Series
Product specifications
General specifications Diagnostic monitoring specifications Design specifications
Maximum surge current rating range 100 kA per phase Green/red visual mechanical flag Monolithic distribution grade MOV
failure indicators
UL Type designation SPD Type 1b
Flashing dual color LED (green/red) Integrated optimized thermal protection
UL 1449 I-nominal rating 20kA status indicator
UL 1449 short circuit current rating 200kA Audible alarm with Fits in footprint of BL/BQD, or xGB/3VA41c
silence switch/button
Repetitive impulse 5,000 hits
Form C dry contact, 240V AC,
Response time <1 ns 1A max, 48V DC, 0.5A max Modes of protection (L-N or L-G, L-L)
BSPD Catalog Numbers and UL 1449 performance data

Catalog numbers System voltage L-N (L-G) L-L In SCCR MCOV Siemens breaker form factor
BSPD2A100 120/240V, 1Ø, 3W 600V 900 20kA 200kA 150V 2-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3B100 240/120V, 3Ø, 4W 600V/800V 1200 20kA 200kA 150V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3C100 208Y/120V, 3Ø, 4W 600V 900 20kA 200kA 150V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3D100 240V, 3Ø, 3W 800V 1500 20kA 200kA 280V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3E100 480Y/277V, 3Ø, 4W 1000V 1800 20kA 200kA 320V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3F100 480V, 3Ø, 3W 1800V 3000 20kA 200kA 550V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3G100 600V, 3Ø, 3W 2000V 4000 20kA 200kA 700V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3K100 380Y/220V, 3Ø, 4W 900V 1800 20kA 200kA 320V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3L100 600Y/347V, 3Ø, 4W 1200V 2500 20kA 200kA 400V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3S100 400Y/230V, 3Ø, 4W 900V 1800 20kA 200kA 320V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3VA41
BSPD3T100 415Y/240V, 3Ø, 4W 900V 1800 20kA 200kA 320V 3-P, BL/BQD or xGB/3V
Benefits of installing multiple BSPDs

Adding multiple BSPDs in a single panelboard can increase modes of protection
9
and a surge capacity. See the BoltShield brochure for more details and review an
example chart below:
SPD
Number of Modes of Surge current Surge current

BSPDs Connection protection capacity per mode capacity per phase
1 Neutral 3 100kA 100kA
2 Neutral + Ground 6 100kA 200kA
2 Neutral(2) 3 200kA 200kA
3 Neutral(2) + Ground(1) 6 200kA(L-N) + 100kA (L-G) 300kA
3 Ground(3) 3 300kA 300kA
4 Neutral(2) + Ground(2) 6 200kA 400kA
 Can also be used on 208Y/120V, 1Ø, 3W system. c Each SPD comes with an adapter for xGB/3VA41
b Type 1 SPDs suitable for use in Type 2 applications. applications. Replacement adapter kit BSPDXGB1 is
available, containing 2 and 3 pole adapters (1 each).

BoltShield™ Surge Protective Devices
QSPD – Residential Surge Protection for Load Centers Catalogue Logic
QSPD series for load centers
QSPD catalog number logic
QSPD – 2 – A – 065

QSPD 2 = 2 Pole A= 120/240V, 1Ø 3W (Fig.1) 065P = 65kA per Mode/Phase
3 = 3 Pole B= 240/120V, 3Ø 4W (Fig.3) in retail blister pack packaging
C= 208Y/120V, 3Ø 4W (Fig.2)
D= 240V, 3Ø 3W (Fig.4)
QSPD-Base catalog number logic
QSPD – 2 – A – 035B

QSPD 2 = 2 Pole A = 120/240V, 1Ø 3W (Fig.1) 035B = 35kA per Mode/Phase QSPD Series QSPD-Base
Product specifications
General specifications QSPD QSPD-Base Diagnostic monitoring specifications QSPD QSPD-Base
Maximum surge Green/red visual mechanical flag failure indicators u u
65kA per phase 35kA per phase
current rating range
Flashing dual color LED (green/red) status indicator u —
UL Type designation SPD Type 1b
Audible alarm with silence switch/button u —
UL 1449 I-nominal rating 20kA Design specifications QSPD QSPD-Base
UL 1449 short circuit Monolithic distribution grade MOV
200kA 22kA u u
current rating
Integrated optimized thermal protection u u
Repetitive impulse 5,000 hits
Fits in footprint of Siemens QP breaker u u
Response time <1 ns
Modes of protection (L-N or L-G, L-L) u u
QSPD Catalog Numbers and UL 1449 performance data

Catalog numbers System voltage L-N (L-G) L-L In SCCR MCOV Siemens breaker form factor
QSPD
QSPD2A065Pc 120/240V, 1Ø, 3W 600V 1000 20kA 200kA 150V 2-P, QP
QSPD3B065 240/120V, 3Ø, 4W 600V/900V 1200 20kA 200kA 150V 3-P, QP
QSPD3C065 208Y/120V, 3Ø, 4W 600V 1000 20kA 200kA 150V 3-P, QP
QSPD3D065 240V, 3Ø, 3W 900V 1500 20kA 200kA 280V 3-P, QP
QSPD-Base
QSPD2A035B 120/240V, 1Ø, 3W 700V 1200 20kA 22kA 150V 2-P, QP
9
Benefits of installing multiple QSPDs
Adding multiple QSPDs in a single load center can See the Boltshield brochure for more details and
SPD
increase the modes of protection and the surge capacity. review the example chart below:
Multiple QSPD Multiple QSPD-Base
No. of QSPDs or Modes of Surge current Surge current Surge current Surge current
QSPD-Bases Connection protection capacity per mode capacity per phase capacity per mode capacity per phase
1 Neutral 3 65kA 65kA 35kA 355kA
2 Neutral + Ground 6 65kA 130kA 35kA 700kA
2 Neutral 3 130kA 130kA 70kA 70kA
3 Neutral(2) + Ground(1) 6 130kA(L-N) + 65kA (L-G) 195kA 70kA(L-N) + 35kA (L-G) 105kA
3 Ground 3 195kA 195kA 105kA 105kA
4 Neutral(2) + Ground(2) 6 130kA 260kA 70kA 140kA
 Can also be used on 208Y/120V, 1Ø, 3W system. c QSPD2A065P comes in retail style blister pack
b Type 1 SPDs suitable for use in Type 2 applications. packaging.

Power Service Entrance Surge Protection
FirstSurge™
Total Home Protection
Siemens believes today’s residential surge protectors come
up short when protecting today’s modern home filled with
smart appliances and electronics.
This is why we developed our FirstSurge™ commercial class

total home surge protectors. These electrical system surge
protectors are sized for where you live. They will let you know
when there is something wrong or when they are worn out.
Based upon thunderstorm frequency, geographic location, and Features & Benefits
home size, we developed a surge exposure map correlating
b UL 1449 Listed, Type 2, Surge Protective Device (SPD)
with FirstSurge™ current capacities known to provide years of
b Rated for 120/240 split phase panels up to 400A
protective service for each shaded area.
b Surge Current Capacities:
Sized For Where You Live - 60,000 A
Model Surge Capacity - 100,000 A
FirstSurge™ Power (FS060) 60,000 A - 140,000 A
FirstSurge™ Plus (FS100) 100,000 A b 3 Stage Commercial Grade Notification
FirstSurge™ Pro (FS140) 140,000 A b Ground Reference Monitoring (GRM)
b Installs onto any brand loadcentre
b Type 4 rated outdoor enclosure
b 10 year product and connected equipment warranty*
Power
Plus
Pro Technical Specifications
Surge Spike Capacity FirstSurge™ Power (FS060) 60,000 A
FirstSurge™ Plus (FS100) 100,000 A
FirstSurge™ Pro (FS140) 140,000 A
Line Voltage 120/240 Split Phase, 50/60 Hz
UL 1449 3rd Ed VPR L-N: 600 V
L-G: 600 V
N-G: 600 V
L-L: 900 V
Rated Voltage (MCOV) 150V – L-N, L-G, and N-G; 300V – L-L
Know You’re Protected: Response Time <1 nanosecond
3 Stage Commerical Grade Notification Enclosure NEMA 4X Indoor and Outdoor Rated
When there is a problem, Siemens FirstSurge™ takes the Selection Information
guesswork out of knowing when it is time to be replaced. FirstSurge™ Power FS060
What will you see and hear when this occurs? FirstSurge™ Plus FS100
FirstSurge™ Pro FS140
Audible Alarm: Beeps FirstSurge™ Flush Mount Kit XMFMKIT
Green LED(s): Extinguish
Ground Reference Monitoring (GRM)

FirstSurge™ is GRM-equipped notifying you a rare safety haz-
ard exists due to a compromised electrical system neutral
to ground bond. What will you see and hear when this occurs?
9

Green LED(s): Remains Lit
SPD

Telephone Service Entrance Surge Protection
Siemens FSPHONE is a 2 pair, hardwired surge protector for
telephone, DSL or modem connected electronics in residen-
tial and light commercial applications. The FSPHONE protects
against electrical power surges that can enter through the
main telephone connection and is equipped with a failshort
device to permanently ground the telephone line in the event
of a power cross.
The FSPHONE is designed for indoor applications or can be

mounted inside another weatherproof enclosure for outdoor
mounting applications.
The FSPHONE4X consists of the FSPHONE plus a weather- Catastrophic Surge Circuit Yes
proof enclosure to facilitate indoor or outdoor applications. The Spike Capacity 200 Amps
enclosure is molded of temperature and humidity resistant Let Through Voltage <270 V
thermoplastic to resist cracking and discoloration. The cover Overcurrent Protection Yes
can be secured with a tie wrap or similar locking device. Response Time <1 nanosecond
Enclosure Yes
For total home protection please use FirstSurge™ to protect
your incoming AC Power lines and FSPHONE to protect your Meets Telcordia (formally Bellcore) GR-974-CORE Yes
incoming telephone line. Requirements for Telecommunications Line
Protectors
Features & Benefits Product Warranty FS140
b UL listed Catalogue Number
FSPHONE 2 pair protection module
b Hardwired Modem/Fax/DSL protection
FSPHONE4X 2 pair protection module & 1 Weatherproof Enclosure
b Easy to install UL Model No. - SATH2
b Exceptionally fast response time
b Low insertion loss
b Available with or without enclosure
b 5-Year product warranty*
Coaxial Service Entrance Surge Protection

Siemens FSCATV shields coaxial connected electronics in
residential and light commercial applications against electrical
transient damage, including lightning, from entering through
the main cable connection.
FSCATV includes a section of coaxial cable with female to

female splice for line side application. The Siemens warranty
covers product defects for 5 years. To have complete protec-
tion for your equipment, home, or business, it is important
to protect AC power lines and all data lines the equipment is
connected through.
Features & Benefits

b UL Listed
9
b Rated for CATV, DSS, TV, VCR, and Cable Modem Frequency Range DC thru 1.5 GHz
b Easy to install
SPD
Catastrophic Surge Circuit Yes

b Standard Female to Female F connector Spike Capacity 5000 Amps, 8/20 μSec
b Low insertion loss Impedance 75 Ohms
Overcurrent Protection Yes
b Automatic recovery
Return Loss 30dB @ 1 GHz
b 5 Year product warranty* Insertion Loss <0.1dB
Meets IEEE C62.41.1 Requirements Yes
Product Warranty FS140
Catalogue Number
FSCATV F-Type Inline Coax Protector
UL Model No. - SurgeassureTM SAVFFF

SPD - Surge Protective Devices
TPS3 Integral or Internally Mounted SPDs Selection
TPS3 01 and TPS3 L1

(True or Discrete 10-Mode)
Siemens TPS3 01 and L1 surge protective devices
are designed for integration within our P1, P2,
and P3 power distribution panel boards, as well
as TIASTAR motor control centers and busway
systems. The TPS3 01 and L1 SPDs feature Ground
Integrity Monitoring (GIM) diagnostics
TPS3 01 and TPS3 L1 Key Features

n UL 1449-4 Type 2 SPD and UL 1283 Listed TPS3 01
– Optional UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1
n Type 1 / Type 2 SPD
n 100 - 300 kA Per Phase Surge Current
n 20 kA I (Most models) TPS3 01
n Catalog #
n 200 kA SCCR (Most models)
n UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Labeling
Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Options
compliant (@ 20 kA) A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 10 = 100 kA per phase X = Surge counter 2 = Type 2 SPD
n Large block, individually fused, thermally B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 15 = 150 kA per phase (Standard) (Default)
C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 20 = 200 kA per phase Includes UL
protected, 50kA MOVs D= 240 V, 3Ø, 3W 25 = 250 kA per phase W= Terminal lug 1283 EMI/
n Every MOV is monitored, including N-G E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase B = Busway application RFI Filters
F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3W M = MCC application 0 = Type 1 SPD
n Mounts internal to: G= 600 V, 3Ø, 3W (Consult Factory Prior
– P1, P2, and P3 panels K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W to Ordering)
L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W
– TIASTAR motor control centers – S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W
Example: TPS3C0120X002 = Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V panelboard
with a surge current capacity of 200 kA per phase and a surge counter.
standard 6”bucket When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in the field.
– STP series busplug on SX series busway
Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
n Consult factory for field retrofit in P1 panels
RMSIE = Remote monitor
n Modes of Protection: L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L  Available in 100 kA & 150 kA only
n All UL required OCP & safety coordination

included
– Type 1 SPDs intended for Line or Load side of
Main Disconnect
– Type 2 SPDs intended for Load side of
Main Disconnect
n Standard Monitoring: LED Indicators, Surge
Counter, Dry Contacts, Audible Alarm w/ silence
switch & test button
n Dimensions: 11.5” x 7.2” x 4.5”
(292.1 mm x 182.9 mm x 114.3 mm)
n Weight: 4.55 lb. (2.06 kg)
n Designed, manufactured & tested consistent with:
– ANSI / IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2-2002, TPS3 L1
C62.45-2002, C62.62-1010, C62.72-2007 and
9
CSA C22.2 No. 269.1 and 269.2 Ordering Information

– 1992/2000 NEMA LS-1
TPS3 L1
SPD
– NEC Article 285 Catalog #

– IEC 61643, CE
n 10 Year Product Warranty Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Options
A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 15 = 150 kA per phase X = Surge counter 2 = Type 2 SPD
B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase (Standard) (Default)
Available Options: C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W
W= Terminal lug
Includes UL
1283 EMI/
E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W
Direct bus connected or can be wired to a circuit
n K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W B = Busway application RFI Filters
S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W 0 = Type 1 SPD
breaker (include W option) M = MCC application
Example: TPS3CL130X002 = 10 Mode Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V panel-
board with a surge current capacity of 300 kA per phase and a surge counter.
When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in the field.


TPS3 02 and TPS3 L2

are designed for integration within our Revised P1
power distribution panel boards.The TPS3 01 and
L1 SPDs feature Ground Integrity Monitoring (GIM)
diagnostics.

n UL 1449-4 Type 2 SPD and UL 1283 Listed
– Optional UL 1449 4th Edition Recognized Type 1 TPS3 02
n Large block, individually fused, thermally Ordering Information
protected, 50kA MOVs Catalog # TPS3 02
n 20 kA I (Most models)
n
Voltage Code Surge Current (kA)
n UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Labeling Options
A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 10 = 100 kA per phase
compliant (@ 20 kA) B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 15 = 150 kA per phase X = Surge counter (Standard)
n Large block, individually fused, thermally C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 20 = 200 kA per phase 2 = Type 2 SPD (Default)
D= 240 V, 3Ø, 3W 25 = 250 kA per phase Includes UL 1283 EMI/RFI Filters
protected, 50kA MOVs E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase 0 = Type 1 SPD
n Every MOV is monitored, including N-G F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3W (Consult Factory Prior to Ordering)
G= 600 V, 3Ø, 3W
n Mounts internal to: K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W Example: TPS3C0220X2 = Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V panelboard with a
L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W
– Revised P1 Lighting Panelboards S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W
surge current capacity of 200 kA per phase and a surge counter.
n Consult factory for field retrofit in P1 panels When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in the field.
n Modes of Protection: L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
n All UL required OCP & safety coordination RMSIE = Remote monitor
 Available in 100kA & 150 kA only
included
Main Disconnect
Main Disconnect
Counter, Dry Contacts, Audible Alarm w/ silence
switch & test button
n Dimensions: 11.6” x 5.7” x 4.9”
(294.6 mm x 144.8 mm x 124.5 mm)
n Weight: 4.55 lb. (2.06 kg)
n 10 Year Product Warranty
Available Options: TPS3 L2

Direct bus connected
n
Can be wired to a circuit breaker (consult
9
factory at time of order or see installation manual Ordering Information
for retrofit)
TPS3 L2
SPD
Catalog #

Options
A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 15 = 150 kA per phase
B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase X = Surge counter (Standard)
C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 2 = Type 2 SPD (Default)
E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W Includes UL 1283 EMI/RFI Filters
K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W 0 = Type 1 SPD
S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W (Consult Factory Prior to Ordering)
Example: TPS3CL230X2 = 10 Mode Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120 V panel-



TPS3 External or Wall Mounted SPDs Selection
TPS3 03
TPS3 03 is a UL 1449 4th Edition 50 kA Type 1 compact surge
protective device that can be used as a replacement second-
ary surge or lighting arrestors. Having a Type 1 designation
allows for flexible electrical system connection location (line or
load side) as well as UL 96A compliance (@ 20 kA In).
TPS3 03 Key Features
n UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1
n Type 1 Rated SPD
n 50 kA Per Phase Surge Current
n
TPS3 03 TPS3 01 DIN RAIL Mounting
n UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Labeling compliant
(@ 20 kA))
n Every MOV is monitored Ordering Information
n Mounts external to electrical distribution equipment
Catalog # TPS3 03
– Recommend for Line Side or Load Side Applications
n Standard compact NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure Options
n Modes of Protection: L-N or L-G and L-L 05 = 50 kA per phase D = Dry contact
A = 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W
n Standard Monitoring: LED Indicator B = 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W & audible alarm
C = 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W
n Dimensions: 3.25” x 3.25” x 3.3” N = Adds N-G
D = 240 V, 3Ø, 3W
Protection
(82.6 mm x 82.6 mm x 83.8 mm) E = 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W
F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3W Example: TPS3C0305D0 = Type 1 SPD for a 208/120V application
n Weight: 2 lb. (0.9 kg)
G = 600 V, 3Ø, 3W with a surge current capacity of 50 kA per phase, in a standard
n 2 Year Product Warranty K = 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W NEMA 4X enclosure with dry contacts and audible alarm option.
L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W
Available Options: Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
Dry contacts & Audible Alarm (option “D”)
n RMSIE = Remote monitor
Neutral to Ground Protection (option “N”)
n
9
SPD

TPS3 03 DC
TPS3 03 DC is available in 300VDC, 600VDC and 1000VDC versions, which

are designed to protect photovoltaic electrical systems. Typical PV
installation would be on the DC solar panel side and also on the AC side of
the inverter/converter. AC voltage TPS3 03’s are also available. SPDs are
highly recommended when lightning activity is present to protect
sensitive electrical photovoltaic components.
TPS3 03 DC is designed as a stand alone device in a NEMA 4X
polycarbonate enclosure. Large block, thermally protected 50 kA MOVs
are utilized. A green LED illuminates for diagnostic monitoring. TPS3 03
DC comes standard with a Tri-Mount installation kit which allows it to be
Nipple, DIN-rail or Bracket mounted.
TPS3 09
Diagram Dimensions Catalog # TPS3 0305
Voltage Code
M = 300 VDC P = 1000 VDC R = 600 VDC
Tri-Mount Installation
Mounting Kit Included
Performance Data
Siemens Part Number TPS3M0305 TPS3R0305 TPS3P0305
Modes of Protection DC+ – DC- , DC+ – Ground, DC- – Ground
Nominal Network Voltage Un 300VDC 600VDC 1000VDC
Technology Large Block, Thermally Protected 50kA MOVs
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage DC Uc 425VDC 760VDC 1180VDC
Maximum Surge Current (8/20 μs) Imax 50kA 50kA 50kA
Nominal Discharge Current (8/20 μs) In 20kA 20kA 10kA 9
Voltage Protection Level (3kA 8/20μs) Up <600V <1800V <2500V
Operating Temperature -40oC + 65oC
SPD
Response Time tA <1ns

Installation mounting method DIN Rail, Nipple or Bracket
Enclosure Material NEMA 4X Polycarbonate
Wiring (red = + , black = - , green / yellow = gnd) Pre-wired w/3’(~1m) of 8AWG + 6AWG Ground Conductor
Diagnostic circuit Low Consumption LED Indicator
Safety Disconnectors Thermal/Overcurrent Protection; Arc-Breaking Slide Gate
UL Listing UL 1449 Listed as Type 1 SPD as a DC SPD for PV and other types of DC applications
Warranty 5 Years

TPS3 05 and TPS3 L5

are designed for integration within our P4 and P5
panelboards as well as distribution switchboards.
The TPS3 01 and L1 SPDs feature Ground Integrity
Monitoring (GIM) diagnostics.

n UL 1449-4 Type 2 SPD and UL 1283 Listed TPS3 05
– Optional UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1
n 100 - 300 kA Per Phase Surge Current Ordering Information
n Catalog # TPS3 05
n UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Labeling
compliant (@ 20 kA) A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 10 = 100 kA per phase
Options
n Large block, individually fused, thermally B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 15 = 150 kA per phase X = Surge counter (Standard)
C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 20 = 200 kA per phase
protected, 50kA MOVs D= 240 V, 3Ø, 3W 25 = 250 kA per phase
2 = Type 2 SPD (Default)
Includes UL 1283 EMI/RFI Filters
n Every MOV is monitored, including N-G E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase 0 = Type 1 SPD
n Mounts internal to: F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3W (Consult Factory Prior to Ordering)
G= 600 V, 3Ø, 3W
– P4 & P5 panelboards and distribution K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W Example: TPS3C0530X2 = Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V power panel
L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W with a surge current capacity of 300 kA per phase and a surge counter.
switchboards S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in the field.
n Modes of Protection: L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
n All UL required OCP & safety coordination Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
included  Available in 100 kA & 150 kA only

Main Disconnect
Main Disconnect
Counter, Dry Contacts, Audible Alarm w/ silence A B C N G
switch & test button MOVs MOVs MOVs MOVs
n Dimensions: 10” x 17” x 6” MOVs
(254 mm x 431.8 mm x 152.4 mm) MOVs
n Weight: 9.4 lb. (4.2 kg) MOVs
n Designed, manufactured & tested consistent with: MOVs
– ANSI / IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2-2002, MOVs
C62.45-2002, C62.62-1010, C62.72-2007 and MOVs
CSA C22.2 No. 269.1 and 269.2

– 1992/2000 NEMA LS-1 MOVs = Parallel MOVs
– NEC Article 285 “True” or “Discrete”

– IEC 61643, CE TPS3 L5 10-Mode SPD
9
SPD
Panelboard Features:
Copper or aluminum bus
n Catalog # TPS3 L5
MB or MLO
Options
A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 15 = 150 kA per phase
Switchboard Features: B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase X = Surge counter (Standard)
C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 2 = Type 2 SPD (Default)
Copper or aluminum bus
n E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W Includes UL 1283 EMI/RFI Filters
200% rated neutral bus for harmonic-rich K=
S=
380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W
400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W
0 = Type 1 SPD
(Consult Factory Prior to Ordering)
applications
CSA, UL 891, UL 67 and NEMA PB-2 Example: TPS3C0530X2 = Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V power panel
with a surge current capacity of 300 kA per phase and a surge counter.

TPS3 06 and TPS3 L6

are designed for integration within our SB1,
SB2, SB3, Type RCS Switchboards, Low-voltage
Switchgear, Motor Control Centers, and Busway
Systems. The TPS3 01 and L1 SPDs feature Ground
Integrity Monitoring (GIM) diagnostics.
TPS3 06
n UL 1449-4 Type 2 SPD and UL 1283 Listed
– Optional UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1 Ordering Information
Catalog # TPS3 06
n Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Options
A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 10 = 100 kA per phase X = Surge counter 2 = Type 2 SPD
n UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Labeling B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 15 = 150 kA per phase (Standard) (Default)
compliant (@ 20 kA) D= 240 V, 3Ø, 3Wb 25 = 250 kA per phase B = Busway application 1283 EMI/
n Large block, individually fused, thermally E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase M = MCC application RFI Filters
protected, 50kA MOVs F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3Wb 40 = 400 kA per phase 0 = Type 1 SPD
G= 600 V, 3Ø, 3W 50 = 500 kA per phase (Consult Factory
n Every MOV is monitored, including N-G K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W Prior to Ordering)
n Mounts internal to: L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W Example: TPS3C0120X002 = Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V panelboard
S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W with a surge current capacity of 200 kA per phase and a surge counter.
– SB1, SB2, SB3 and Type RCS Switchboards
– Type WL low-voltage switchgear
– TIASTAR motor control centers - Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
standard 12” bucket  G voltage code only available in 200 & 250 kA
– STP series busplug on SX series busway b Not available in 500 kA

n All UL required OCP & safety coordination
included
Main Disconnect A B C N G
– Type 2 SPDs intended for Load side of MOVs MOVs MOVs MOVs
Main Disconnect MOVs
n Standard Monitoring: LED Indicators, Surge MOVs
Counter, Dry Contacts, Audible Alarm w/ silence MOVs
switch & test button, Rotary disconnect switch MOVs
n Dimensions: 10.7” x 11.5” x 4.5” MOVs
(271.8 mm x 292.1 mm x 114.3 mm) MOVs
n Weight: 6.8 lb. (3.0 kg)

MOVs = Parallel MOVs
– ANSI / IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2-2002, “True” or “Discrete”

C62.45-2002, C62.62-1010, C62.72-2007 and TPS3 L6 10-Mode SPD
9
CSA C22.2 No. 269.1 and 269.2
– 1992/2000 NEMA LS-1 Ordering Information
SPD
– NEC Article 285

– IEC 61643, CE Catalog # TPS3 L6
– ANSI / IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2-2002, Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Options
C62.45-2002, C62.62-1010, C62.72-2007 & CSA A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 15 = 150 kA per phase X = Surge counter 2 = Type 2 SPD
C22.2 No. 269.1 and .2 B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase (Standard) (Default)
– 1992/2000 NEMA LS-1 E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W B = Busway application 1283 EMI/
M = MCC application
– NEC Article 285 K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W RFI Filters
0 = Type 1 SPD
S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W
– IEC 61643, CE (Consult Factory
Example: TPS3CL645X2 = 10 mode Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V switch-
n 10 Year Product Warranty Prior to Ordering)

TPS3 09
TPS3 09 is a UL 1449 4th Edition 100 kA Type 1 compact
multi-mode surge protective device that can be installed on
either the line or load side of the electrical service. When
installed at the electrical service entrance, it can be used for
UL 96A compliance (@ 20 kA In).
TPS3 09 Key Features
n UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1
n Type 1 Rated SPD
n 100 kA Per Phase Surge Current
n
TPS3 09
(@ 20 kA)
n Every MOV is monitored, including N-G
– Weatherproof hub included Catalog # TPS3 09
n Mounts internal to P1 panelboards & busway
– P1 - Field retrofit or factory install Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Options
– P2 and P3 - factory install only A = 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W
B = 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W
10 = 100 kA per phase E = Extended
indicator light
n Standard compact NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure C = 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W Example: TPS3C0910D000
I = Internal
n Modes of Protection: L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L D = 240 V, 3Ø, 3W = Type 1 SPD for a 208/120V
E = 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W panelboard with a surge current mounting in
n Standard Monitoring: LED Indicators F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3W capacity of 100 kA per phase with P1, P2 panels
n Wire Size: Prewired with 3’ (91.4 cm) of #10 AWG G = 600 V, 3Ø, 3W standard NEMA 4X enclosure, D = Dry
K = 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W dry contacts and audible alarm option. Contact &
n Dimensions: 8.3” x 3.6” x 3.0” (211 mm x 91 mm x 77 mm) L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W audible alarm
n Weight: 3 lb. (1.4 kg) S = 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W Available for field retrofit in P1 panels.
n 10 Year Product Warranty When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in the field.

n Dry contacts & Audible Alarm (option “D”) XMFMKIT = Flush mount plate
n Extended indicator light (option “E”) TPS9IKITP1 = Mounting bracket for installation in P1 panels
TPS9IKITP2 = Mounting bracket for installation in P2 panels (factory install only)
n Internal mounting in P1, P2 Panels (option “I”), requires
TPS9IKITP1 or TPS9IKITP2 mounting bracket accessory.  Requires TPS9IKITP1 or TPS9IKITP2 mounting bracket accessory, see available
Accessories. Prewired cables are extended from 3 to 6 feet.
9
SPD

TPS3 11
TPS3 11 is a UL 1449 3rd Edition Listed multi-mode Type 1
surge protective device with a per phase surge current capacity
that can be increased to 200 kA. In addition, this unit provides
UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI or Sine Wave tracking filtering that will
condition low energy L-N coupled noise. When installed at the
electrical service entrance, it can be used for UL 96A compli-
ance (@ 20 kA In).
Standard monitoring includes protection status indication LEDs.

Complete protection is intact when the status indicators are
illuminated. When protection is lost, the status indicator will
extinguish and the red service light will illuminate. An audible
alarm and dry contacts are available monitoring options.
A new diagnostic feature integrated within the TPS3 11 is TPS3 11

Ground Integrity Monitoring or (GIM) diagnostic indication cir-
cuit. Ground Integrity Monitoring or (GIM) diagnostics monitors
the health of the electrical system’s neutral to ground bond. If Ordering Information
voltage is seen across neutral and ground, the phase indicators
will remain illuminated, while the red service light begins to Catalog # TPS3 11
flash alerting the end user that the electrical system grounding
needs to be checked and serviced. This feature can be remotely Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Options
monitored when the optional dry contacts are included. A = 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 10 = 100 kA per phase 2 = Type 2 SPD
B = 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 15 = 150 kA per phase (Default)
Siemens TPS3s are one of the first in the industry to offer this C = 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 20 = 200 kA per phase Includes UL
power quality safety and performance indication. D = 240 V, 3Ø, 3W 1283 EMI/RFI
E = 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W Example: TPS3C1110D2 = Filters
F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3W Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 0 = Type 1 SPD
TPS3 11 Key Features G = 600 V, 3Ø, 3W
K = 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W
208/120V application with a
surge current capacity of 100 kA
(Consult Factory
Prior to Ordering)
n UL 1449-4 Type 2 SPD and UL 1283 Listed L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W per phase, in a standard NEMA
D = Dry Contacts
S = 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W 4X enclosure with dry contacts
– Optional UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1 and audible alarm option. & audible
alarm
When option D is NOT selected,
n 100, 150, 200 kA Per Phase Surge Current include a zero (0) in the field.
n Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
n UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Labeling compliant KITFMXF = Flush mount plate
(@ 20 kA)  Available in 100 kA per phase only
n Standard NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure (UL 746C (f1),
UL 94-5VA)
n Standard Monitoring: LED Indicators and Ground Integrity
Monitoring diagnostics
n Wire size: #8 AWG to #10 AWG
n Dimensions: 6” x 6” x 4” (152 mm x 152 mm x 102 mm)
n Weight: 5 lb. (2.27 kg)
9
Available Options:
SPD
n Dry contacts & Audible Alarm (option “D”)

TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 (True or Discrete 10-Mode)
TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 are UL 1449-4 Type 2 and Optional
UL 1449 4th Edition surge protective device with a per
phase surge current capacity that can be increased to 500
kA (TPS3 L12 up to 450 kA). For mission critical or high
profile applications, the TPS3 L12 is our “True” or “Discrete”
10-mode style SPD providing the “Just in Case” assurance
of directly connected L-L MOVs.
Both TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 are UL 1283 Listed
incorporating EMI/RFI or Sine Wave tracking filtering
designed to condition low energy L-N coupled noise. When TPS3 12
installed at the electrical service entrance, it can be used
for UL 96A compliance (@ 20 kA In). Ordering Information
Standard monitoring includes protection status indication Catalog # TPS3 12
LEDs, audible alarm, and dry contacts. Complete protection
is intact when the status indicators are illuminated. When Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Enclosure Options
protection is lost, the status indicator will extinguish, the A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 10 = 100 kA per phase 0 = Standard NEMA 2 = Type 2 SPD
red service light will illuminate, and the dry contacts will B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 15 = 150 kA per phase 1/12/3R/4 Steel (Default)
C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 20 = 200 kA per phase V = NEMA 4X non- Includes
change state. An optional surge counter is available. D= 240 V, 3Ø, 3W 25 = 250 kA per phase metallic UL 1283 EMI/
E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase S = NEMA 4X stainless steel RFI Filters
A new diagnostic feature integrated within the TPS3 12 and F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3W 40 = 400 kA per phase F = NEMA 1 flush mount 0 = Type 1 SD
TPS3 L12 is Ground Integrity Monitoring or (GIM) diagnostic G= 600 V, 3Ø, 3Wb 50 = 500 kA per phase P = NEMA 1 screwcover pullbox (Consult Factory
K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W with extended display on 6ft Prior to Ordering)
indication circuit. Ground Integrity Monitoring or (GIM) L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W cable for line side mounting
diagnostics monitors the health of the electrical system’s S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W in SWBD/SWGR D = Internal rotary
disconnect
neutral to ground bond. If voltage is seen across neutral and Example: TPS3C12100XD2 = Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V application T = Thru-door
with a surge current capacity of 100kA per phase, in a standard NEMA 1/12/3R/4 disconnect
ground, the phase indicators will remain illuminated, while enclosure with a surge counter and internal rotary disconnect option.
the red service light begins to flash alerting the end user When option X, T, or D are NOT selected, include a zero (0) in the field.
X = Surge
Counter
that the electrical system grounding needs to be checked (Standard)
and serviced. This feature can be remotely monitored via RMSIE = Remote monitor
the dry contact outputs. Siemens TPS3s are one of the  Not available in 500 kA
first in the industry to offer this power quality safety and b Available in 100 kA, 150 kA, 200 kA & 250 kA only
performance indication.
A B C N G
TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 Key Features MOVs MOVs MOVs MOVs
n UL 1449-4 Type 2 SPD and UL 1283 Listed MOVs
– Optional UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1 MOVs
n Type 1 / Type 2 SPD MOVs
n TPS3 12: 100 – 500 kA Per Phase Surge Current

MOVs
MOVs
n TPS3 L12: 150, 300, 450 kA Phase Surge Current
MOVs
n
n 200 kA SCCR (Most models) MOVs = Parallel MOVs

“True” or “Discrete”
(@ 20 kA) TPS3 L12
10-Mode SPD
– Recommended for line side or load side applications
n Standard NEMA 1/12/3R/04 ANSI 61 steel enclosure Catalog # TPS3 L12
n TPS3 12 Modes of Protection – L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
9
n TPS3 L12 Modes of Protection – L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Enclosure Options
(directly connected L-L elements) A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 15 = 150 kA per phase 0 = Standard NEMA 2 = Type 2 SPD
SPD
B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 30 = 300 kA per phase 1/12/3R/4 Steel (Default)

n Standard Monitoring:
C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W 45 = 450 kA per phase V = NEMA 4X non- Includes
– LED Indicators E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W metallic UL 1283 EMI/
K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W S = NEMA 4X stainless steel RFI Filters
– Ground Integrity Monitoring diagnostics S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W F = NEMA 1 flush mount 0 = Type 1 SD
– Dry Contacts P = NEMA 1 screwcover pullbox (Consult Factory
with extended display on 6ft Prior to Ordering)
– Audible alarm with silence switch and test button cable for line side mounting
n Wire size: #8 AWG to 1/0 in SWBD/SWGR D = Internal rotary
n Dimensions: 12” x 12” x 7” (305 mm x 305 mm x 178 mm)c
disconnect
Example: TPS3CL12150XD2 = 10 Mode, Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V T = Thru-door
n Weight: 20 lb. (9.07 kg)c application with a surge current capacity of 150kA per phase, in a standard NEMA disconnect
1/12/3R/4 enclosure with a surge counter and internal rotary disconnect option.
X = Surge
When an option is NOT selected, include a zero (0) in the field. Counter
Available Options: (Standard)
n Internal rotary disconnect RMSIE = Remote monitor
n Thru-door disconnect
c Internal disconnect options and other NEMA ratings may increase enclosure size and weight

TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 (True or Discrete 10-Mode)
TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 are UL 1449-4 Type 2 and Optional
UL 1449 4th Edition surge protective device with a per
phase surge current capacity that can be increased to 1000
kA (TPS3 L15 up to 900 kA). For mission critical or high
profile applications, the TPS3 L15 is our “True” or “Discrete”
10-mode style SPD providing the “Just in Case” assurance of
directly connected L-L MOVs.
Both TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 are UL 1283 Listed incorporating
EMI/RFI or Sine Wave tracking filtering designed to TPS3 15
condition low energy L-N coupled noise. When installed at
the electrical service entrance, it can be used for UL 96A Ordering Information
compliance (@ 20 kA In).
Catalog # TPS3 15
Standard monitoring includes protection status indication
LEDs, audible alarm, and dry contacts. Complete protection Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Enclosure Options
is intact when the status indicators are illuminated. When A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 40 = 400 kA per phase 0 = Standard NEMA 2 = Type 2 SPD
protection is lost, the status indicator will extinguish, the red B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 50 = 500 kA per phase 1/12/3R/4 Steel
60 = 600 kA per phase V = NEMA 4X non-
(Default)
C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W Includes
service light will illuminate, and the dry contacts will change D= 240 V, 3Ø, 3Wb 80 = 800 kA per phase metallic UL 1283 EMI/
E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W 1K = 1000 kA per phase S = NEMA 4X stainless steel RFI Filters
state. An optional surge counter is available. F = 480 V, 3Ø, 3Wb F = NEMA 1 flush mount 0 = Type 1 SD
A new diagnostic feature integrated within the TPS3 15 and G= 600 V, 3Ø, 3Wc P = NEMA 1 screwcover pullbox (Consult Factory
K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W with extended display on 5ft Prior to Ordering)
TPS3 L15 is Ground Integrity Monitoring or (GIM) diagnostic L = 600/347 V, 3Ø, 4W cable for line side mounting
S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W in SWBD/SWGR T = Thru-door
indication circuit. Ground Integrity Monitoring or (GIM) disconnect
diagnostics monitors the health of the electrical system’s Example: TPS3C1560SX02 = Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V application
with a surge current capacity of 600 kA per phase, in a NEMA 4X stainless steel X = Surge
neutral to ground bond. If voltage is seen across neutral and enclosure with a surge counter and standard disconnect switch. Counter
ground, the phase indicators will remain illuminated, while the (Standard)
When an option is NOT selected, include a zero (0) in the field.
red service light begins to flash alerting the end user that the Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
electrical system grounding needs to be checked and serviced. RMSIE = Remote monitor
This feature can be remotely monitored via the dry contact  Available in G voltage code only
b Available in 600 kA & 800 kA only
outputs. Siemens TPS3s are one of the first in the industry to c Available in 400 kA & 500 kA only
offer this power quality safety and performance indication.
TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 Key Features A

MOVs
B
MOVs
C
MOVs
N
MOVs
G
n UL 1449-4 and UL 1283 Listed MOVs
– Optional UL 1449 4th Edition Listed Type 1 MOVs
n Type 1 / Type 2 SPD MOVs
n TPS3 15: 400 – 1000 kA Per Phase Surge Current MOVs
n TPS3 L15: 600 and 900 kA Phase Surge Current

MOVs
MOVs
n
n 200 kA SCCR (Most models) MOVs = Parallel MOVs

(@ 20 kA) “True” or “Discrete”
TPS3 L15
n Every MOV is monitored, including N-G 10-Mode SPD
– Recommended for line side or load side applications Ordering Information
n Standard NEMA 1/12/3R/04 ANSI 61 steel enclosure
Catalog # TPS3 L15
n TPS3 15 Modes of Protection – L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
n TPS3 L15 Modes of Protection – L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
9
Voltage Code Surge Current (kA) Enclosure Options
(directly connected L-L elements)
A= 120/240 V, 1Ø, 3W 60 = 600 kA per phase 0 = Standard NEMA 2 = Type 2 SPD
n Internal rotary disconnect switch included
SPD
B= 120/240 V, 3Ø, 4W 90 = 900 kA per phase 1/12/3R/4 Steel (Default)

n Standard Monitoring: C= 120/208 V, 3Ø, 4W V = NEMA 4X non- Includes
E= 277/480 V, 3Ø, 4W metallic UL 1283 EMI/
– LED Indicators K= 380/220 V, 3Ø, 4W S = NEMA 4X stainless steel RFI Filters
– Ground Integrity Monitoring diagnostics S= 400/230 V, 3Ø, 4W F = NEMA 1 flush mount 0 = Type 1 SD
P = NEMA 1 screwcover pullbox (Consult Factory
– Dry Contacts with extended display on 5ft Prior to Ordering)
– Audible alarm with silence switch and test button cable for line side mounting
in SWBD/SWGR T = Thru-door
n Wire size: #8 AWG to 1/0 disconnect
n Dimensions: 20” x 20” x 7” (508 mm x 508 mm x 178 mm) Example: TPS3CL15600X02 = 10 Mode, Type 2 SPD (Default) for a 208/120V
application with a surge current capacity of 600 kA per phase, in a standard X = Surge
n Weight: 64 lb. (29 kg) NEMA 1/12/3R/4 enclosure with a surge counter. Counter
n 10 Year Product Warranty (Standard)
When an option is NOT selected, include a zero (0) in the field.

Thru-door disconnect
n

Surge Protective Devices FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions

What is a surge protective device or SPD? What types of components make up a SPD?
A Surge Protective Device is a device that attenuates The device most commonly used in AC voltage surge
(reduces in magnitude) random, high energy, short duration suppressors are MOVs, a solid-state device made of zinc oxide
overvoltages caused by lightning, utilities, switching, etc. Such materials. MOVs are voltage sensitive semiconductors, which
anomalies occur in the form of voltage and current spikes change from high impedance to low impedance when sensing
with a duration of less than half an ac voltage cycle. These an overvoltage condition. MOVs are packaged for specific
high energy power spikes can damage sensitive electronic voltages and current handling capacities. Other devices (more
equipment, such as computers, instrumentation, and process typically found in DC applications) include single junction
controllers. diodes and gas tubes that ionize at preset voltages.
How do SPDs work? What features should be considered when

Surge Suppressors divert high energy power away from a load selecting SPDs?
by providing a lower impedance path to common point earth Two important areas to consider during the selection of a
ground. This is similar in concept to pressure relief valves that surge suppressor are performance and safety, and include
protect water heaters from overpressure. Surge suppressors the following criteria: Performance: 1) surge current capacity;
used most often for protection of AC Power have metal oxide and 2) clamping voltage. Safety: 1) the individual suppression
varistors (MOVs) connected in parallel. circuit should be fused to clear an inoperative MOV during an
extreme transient event, and 2) provide overcurrent protection
Where are SPDs installed? for the surge suppressor during a fault condition.
AC voltage surge suppressors are typically installed in these
three areas: at a utility service entrance for protection of an What surge current capacity is required?
entire facility, in distribution panelboards and switchboards Surge current capacity is dependent on the application and
for protection of sensitive downstream loads; connected to the amount of required protection. The selection of the proper
a wall outlet for individual protection of a specific piece of surge suppressor is not an exact science and cannot be
equipment, such as a computer or solid-state controller. scientifically calculated from a standard algorithm.
Questions to consider when specifying the proper surge
What is clamping voltage? current capacity for a surge suppressor include:
Clamping voltage, also referred to as peak let through or
suppressed voltage rating, is the amount of voltage a surge n What is the geographic location of the facility and it’s
suppressor permits to pass through it to the attached load susceptibility to lightning? (For example, Florida is a high-
during a transient event. Clamping voltage is a performance lightning area; California is a low lightning area.)
measurement of a surge suppressor’s ability to attenuate n Is the facility in a rural or urban setting?
a transient. For example, a surge suppressor might limit a n Is the facility the tallest building around?
6,000V surge so that only 700V is ‘visible’ to the load. The
Voltage Protection Rating is 700V, commonly called Clamping n Is the facility at the end of the utility grid?
Voltage. This performance value is confirmed by Underwriters n If it is an existing facility, what is its power quality history?
Laboratories during tests conducted while evaluating a surge
suppressor for listing. Based on the above information, and taking into account the
cost of protection, the following is a good rule of thumb: a
What is surge current capacity? surge suppressor with a surge current capacity in the range of
100kA to 300kA would be used in conjunction with a service
Surge current capacity is the maximum amount of surge entrance panelboard or switchboard. A surge suppressor with
current that a surge suppressor can pass for a single a surge current capacity in the range of 100kA to 200kA would
transient event. This level is used to indicate the protection be used in conjunction with a downstream panelboard
capacity of a particular surge suppressor design, and when
9
specifying surge suppressors. For example, in a high exposure

application with very large transients present from lightning,
SPD
a higher level surge current capacity might be desired. Be

aware that surges have natural limitations and that larger
surge current capacity tends to add redundancy rather than
the implied ability to handle an extremely large surge. For
example, an entire lightning strike cannot go through wire; it
is much like trying to put the output from a fire hose through
a soda straw. Consequently, suppressors do not need to be
sized for entire lightning strikes. There are valid reasons for
adding excess surge current capacity for redundancy reasons.

REVISED
07/2020
POWER PRODUCT Panelboards
Contents
Features, Reference Guide & General Specifications 10-2 – 10-9
Distributor Stock - Type P1 Panelboards 10-10 – 10-11
Warehouse Stock/Unassembled – Type P1 Panelboards 10-12 – 10-14
Circuit Panelboard Replacement, Modification, and Additions 10-15
Breaker
Factory Assembled Panelboard Coding System 10-16
Lighting
Panel Type P1
Type P1 Specifications 10-17
Main Breaker 10-18
Main Lug and Branch Circuit Breakers 10-19
Kits and Accessories 10-20 – 10-21
Panel Options & Modifications 10-22 – 10-23
Enclosure Dimensions 10-24
Type P2
Specifications 10-25
Distributor Stock/Unassembled - Type P2 Main Lug Only 10-26 – 10-27
Main Breaker and Subfeed Breakers 10-28 – 10-30
Branch Breakers 10-31
Modifications and Additions 10-32
SEM3 Embedded Micro Metering Module 10-33 – 10-34
Standard Modifications and Additions 10-35
Enclosure Modifications 10-36
Kits and Accessories 10-37
Circuit Type P3
Breaker
Lighting or Specifications 10-39
Distribution Enclosure Selection/ Dimensions 10-40
Panel Types Alternate Main, Branch and Subfeed Breakers 10-41 – 10-42
P2/P3 Modifications and Additions 10-43 – 10-45
Kits and Accessories 10-46
Lighting Panel Filler Plates 10-48 – 10-49
Lighting Panel Kits 10-50 – 10-51
B74FLR Enclosures & Related Bottom Covers 10-52 – 10-53
Type S5
Main Lug and Main Breaker Selection 10-55
Branch Breakers 10-56
Modifications, Additions, Replacements for Circuit Breakers 10-58
Type F2
Specifications and Fuse Types 10-59
Main Lug and Main Fusible 10-60
Circuit
Breaker Modifications, Additions, Replacements for Fusible Switches 10-62
Distribution SEM3 Embedded Micro Metering Module 10-63
Panel Type Panel Skirt/System Types, AC & DC Voltages 10-64
S5 Type HCP Switchboard Units
10
Selection and accessories 10-65

Dimensions 10-66
Type C1/C2
PANELBOARDS
Main, Branch and Subfeed Breakers 10-68
Circuit Breaker / Column Type, Modifications and Additions 10-69
Conduit Enclosing Shield (Panel Skirts) 10-70
Enclosure/System Types, AC & DC Voltages 10-71
Dimensions and Panelboard Configurations 10-72 – 10-73
Fuse Curves 10-74
Panelboards
Introduction General
This generation of panelboards from Siemens offers the b The powerful S5 and F2 are distribution power panels that
high level of engineering and innovation you’ve come to allow circuit breakers as branch and main devices.
expect from the leader in power distribution technology. Siemens also offers a number of specialty panels, like column
The “P Series” line of panelboards offers a stepped approach panels, SEM3 (Embedded Micro Metering Module ) and TM
to power distribution. others. Don’t see a panel to meet your requirements? Ask
your Siemens representative about our custom capabilities.
Additional strength has been added to an already rugged and
durable panelboard family. Engineered specifically to provide Features Overview
maximum flexibility, the new designs simplify wiring and
P Series lighting panel features include Fas-Latch trim, which
reduce material requirements making them easier to install
is popular among installers; the jacking screw system, that
and less costly than competitive products. At the heart of the
permits adjustments even after wiring has been installed; our
product line is the extensive research and technology found
exclusive split neutral, and more. Many panelboards have the
among Siemens circuit protection devices – both fusible
capability of mixing and matching breakers of different sizes
switches and molded case circuit breakers.
and ratings – or changing from main lug to main breaker, or
adding subfeed breakers without changing the box size. Other
The line is anchored by the innovative P1. Featuring the indus-
models accept a wide range of fuse types, including Siemens
try’s most flexible designs, the P1 virtually eliminates com-
exclusive Vacu-Break technology.
®
mon errors, such as feed direction, and main lug versus main
breaker. Increasing distribution is simplified by the ability to add
feed-thru lugs. The Revised P1 design introduced in June 2015
has added Extended Circuits up to 66 and has available smaller
Enclosures with no Subfeed option for added flexibility.
Subsequent steps in the P Series offer increased capacity and

more design options:
b The highly flexible P2 provides options to fit the most
demanding specifications.
b Sized more like a lighting panel, the P3 packs the power of a
distribution panel in a space-saving, highly flexible design.
Key Panelboard Features

P1 P2 P3 S5 F2
Lighting And Appliance Applications ● ● ● ● ●
Power Panelboard Applications — ● ● ● ●
Convertible From Top Feed To Bottom Feed

● — — — —
Or Vice Versa
Change From Main Lug To Main Breaker Or Add
● — — — —
Subfeed Without Changing Enclosure Sizeb
Space-Saving, Horizontally Mounted Main Breaker Up To 250 Amps Up To 250 Amps — ● ●
Short-Circuit Rating Label Giving Performance Level ● ● ● ● ●
Standard Aluminum Ground Assembly ● ● ● ● ●
Blank End-Walls Standard ● ● ● ● ●
Bolted Current-Carrying Parts ● ● ● ● ●

Split Neutral ● — ● ● ●
Connection Accessible From Front ● ● ● ● ●
Screw-Type Mechanical Lugs ● ● ● ● ●
Time-Reducing Wing Nuts To Secure Interior
● ● ● ● ●
Without Tools
Main and Branch Devices Connected With Case-
● ● ● ● ●
Hardened Hardware
Flush Lock, Concealed Door Hinges/Trim Screws ● ● ● — —
Symmetrical Interior Mounting Studs To Eliminate
● ● ● ● ●
Upside-Down Mounting of Box
Interior Height Adjustment For Flush Applications ● ● ● — —
Shallow Depth 5.75" 5.75" 7.75" 12.75" 12.75"
Accepts A Wide Range Of Fuse Types — — — — ●
10
Accepts Vacu-Break Fusible Switch — — — — ●

Accepts A Wide Range Of Circuit Breakers ● ● ● ● ●
Optional Compression Lugs ● ● ● ● ●
PANELBOARDS
• Standard b For Revised P1, only when Subfeed Space is selected,

 KO’s available on P1 and P2 – 5.75" Deep x 20" Wide Interior Part Number ends with "T". When "N" is at end
boxes and P3 7.75" deep X 24" wide boxes. there is no Subfeed Space available

Panelboards
General Specifications General
Service Entrance Equipment
When a panelboard is used as service entrance equipment, it Lug Data
must be located as close as practicable to the point of entrance Feed-Thru Lugs Subfeed Lugs or Double Lug
of building supply conductors. Panelboards must be identified
Fig. G-1 Fig. G-2
as "Service Entrance" at the time of order entry in order to be
supplied with the appropriate CSA certification and labelling.
Panels must include a connector for bonding and grounding
neutral conductor. Please consult CSA, CEC and local
inspection authorities for specification and installation guidelines.
Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating

The term “Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating” refers
to the application of series connected circuit breakers in a
combination that allows some breakers to have lower individual
interrupting ratings than the available fault current. This is
permitted as long as the series combination has been tested Feed-thru lugs are mounted at the opposite end of the main
and certified by CSA. "Series Rated" must be identified at the bus from the main lugs or main breaker and are used to
time of order entry. connect two or more panelboards to the incoming feeder. The
feeder cables are brought into Panelboard 1 and connected
Standards to the main lugs or main breaker. Cables interconnecting
CSA: C22.2 No.29. Certified under files # 93833 the two panelboards are connected to the feed-thru lugs in
UL: 67 and 50. Listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., Panelboard1 and are carried over the main lugs in Panelboard 2.
under “Panelboards” File #E2269 and #E4016. This arrangement could be reversed with the main lugs located
NEMA: PB1.1 at the top and the feed-thru lugs at the bottom of the panel.
Wire Connectors Subfeed lugs are mounted directly beside the main incoming
lugs and are used to connect two or more panelboards to
Standard wire connectors in Siemens panels are suitable for the incoming feeder. The feeder cables are brought into
copper or aluminum cables rated 60/75 degree. Copper main Panelboard 1 and connected to the main lugs. Another set of
lugs are a price-added option for most panel types and some cables that are the same size are connected to the subfeed
Circuit Breakers (check with Siemens sales for availability). It lugs of Panelboard 1 and are carried over the main lugs of
should be noted that most copper lugs will only accept copper Panelboard 2.
cables. Some applications, 100% rated devices in particular,
require that the cable and connectors be rated 90 degree but
Note: P1 panelboards do not have subfeed lugs available. If this
are sized to the 75 degree tables.
configuration is needed, move to a P2 or P3 panelboard.
Standard ground connectors are also suitable for copper or
aluminum wire. Ground connector assemblies (EGK, IGK) have
(6) 1/0 max. and (15) #6 max. connections. The 1/0 holes are
capable of connecting up (3) #10 max. wires. Copper ground
assemblies (ECGK, ICGK) are rated for copper wire only and
have the same wiring capacity as the Al/Cu connectors.
Standard neutrals, like standard main lugs, are also rated for
copper or aluminum wire. The neutral cross bar material
follows the selection bus. Copper neutral lugs are rated for
copper cable only and available as a price added option.
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Bussing Sequence
Interiors are designed to accommodate The panel design provides bracing up
top or bottom feed. to 200,000A IR CSA short circuit rating.
Case-hardened, high performance, thread
All breakers have bolted connections. rolling screws are used on branch bus.
Circuit Breaker Lighting Circuit Breaker Lighting or Circuit Breaker Distribution Fusible Switch Distribution
Panel Type P1 Distribution Panel Types P2/P3 Panel Type S5 Panel Type F2
Panelboard Ratings
Description Revised P1 P2 P3 S5 F2
Max. Voltage 600Y/347V AC Max. 600V AC Max. 600V AC Max. 600V AC Max. 600V AC Max.
250V DC Max. 250V DC Max. 250V DC Max. 250V DC Max.
System 1-Phase, 2-wire 1-Phase, 2-wire 1-Phase, 2-wire 1-Phase, 3-wire 1-Phase, 3-wire
1-Phase, 3-wire 1-Phase, 3-wire 1-Phase, 3-wire 3-Phase, 4-wire 3-Phase, 4-wire
3-Phase, 3-wire 3-Phase, 3-wire 3-Phase, 4-wire 3-Phase, 3-wire 3-Phase, 3-wire
3-Phase, 4-wire 3-Phase, 4-wire 3-Phase, 3-wire
Mains
Main Lugs 125A-400A 125A-600A 400A-800A 225A-1200A 225A-1200A
Main Breaker 100A-400A 100A-600A 200A-600A 400A-1200A —
Main Switch — — — — 200A-600A
Circuits 18, 30, 42, 54, 66 (250A) 18, 30, 42, 54, 66 18, 30, 42, 54, 66, 78, 90 — —
30, 42, 54, 66 (400A) 78, 90
Branch Ratings 15-125A (Interior) 15-225A (Interior) 15-225A (Interior) 15-1200A MCCB 30-1200A Fusible
250A Max. (Subfeed breaker) 250A Max. (Subfeed breaker) 400A Max. (Subfeed breaker)
Branch BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, BQD6, BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, BQD6, All 15-1200A All 30-600A VB
Disconnect BQD6, BLE, BLEH, QR2, QRH2, HQR2, QR2, QRH2, HQR2, MCCBs, and VL switches, 30-200A
Devices BLF2, BLHF2, HBLF2, BLFB, HQR2H, ED2, ED4, HED4, HQR2H, ED2, DG, FG, JG VK switches, and
BLHFB, BAF2, BAFH2, ED6, CED6, BLE, BLEH, BLF2, ED4, HED4, ED6, BLE, BLHF, 800-1200A HCP
HBAF2, BFGA2, BFGAH2, BLHF2, HBLF2, BLFB, BLHFB, BLEH, BLF2, BLHF2, HBLF2, switches
HBFGA2, NGB/3VA41 BAF2, BAFH2, HBAF2, BLFB, BAF2, BAFH2, HBAF2,
BFGA2, BFGAH2, HBFGA2, BFGA2, BFGAH2, HBFGA2,
NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 NGB2, HGB2, LGB2
Subfeed ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, QR2, JD6, HJD6, JD6, HJD6, — —
Circuit QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H, FD6, JXD6, HJXD6, JXD6,
Breakers b
HFD6, FXD6, HFXD6 FD6, HFD6, FD6, HFD6,
FXD6, HFXD6 FXD6, HFXD6
Enclosure 26, 32, 38, 44, 50, 56 @250A 26, 32, 38, 44, 50, 56, 56, 62, 68, 74, 80 60, 75, 90 60, 75, 90
Heights (660, 813, 965, 1118, 1270, 62, 68, 74 (1422-2032) (1524, 1905, 2286) (1524, 1905, 2286)
10
Inches – (mm) 1422) (660-1880)

56, 62, 68, 74 @400A (1422,
1575, 1727, 1880)
PANELBOARDS
Standard Fas-Latch – 1 Piece Fas-Latch – 1 Piece Fas-Latch – 1 Piece

— —
Trims Surface or Flush Surface or Flush Surface or Flush
 P1 panels with NGB/3VA41 breakers are limited to NGB/3VA41  A maximum of (3) QR breakers may be mounted in
branch devices only. BL and BQD frames may not be mixed in a P2 Panel and are single mounted.
this panel type.  A maximum of (4) QR breakers may be mounted in
b P1 can have max. 1 subfeed breaker when Subfeed Space is a P3 panel and are twin mounted.
available. P2 and P3 can have up to (2) FD subfeed breakers.
 JD and FD breakers are mounted vertical. Limitations apply.

Panelboards
Typical Panelboard Modifications
Lighting and Distribution Panelboards Distribution Panelboards
Description P1 P2 P3 S5 F2
Box
Standard Standard Standard
Type 1 Standard Standard
(20" W) (20" W) (24" W)
Type 1 Enclosure with Hood (available from distributor stock) ● ● ● ● ●
Type 1 w/Gasket between box and front ● ● ● ● ●
Type 2 Enclosure - Drip Tight ● ● ● ● ●
Type 3R/12 ● ● ● ● ●
Type 4, 4X (size varies by type/material) ● ● ● — —

● (24'', 30'' or
Wider Box (check w/factory for custom options) ● (24”W) ● (30'' or 36''W) ● (custom) ● (custom)
36''W)
Deeper Box (check w/factory for custom options) (7.75"D) ● (7.75”D) ● (custom) ● (custom) ● (custom)
Front
Front with Door Standard Standard Standard ● ●
4-piece Front — — — Standard Standard

4-piece Front w/Hinged Gutter Covers — — — ● ●
Hinged-to-Box Front/Skew-to-Box Front ● ● ● (see Door-in-Door) (see Door-in-Door)

Door-in-Door Front ● ● ● ● ●
Door with padlock ● ● ● — —

Special Locks ● ● ● ● ●
Nameplate ● ● ● ● ●
Interior
Aluminum Equipment Ground Bar Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Copper Equipment Ground Bar ● ● ● ● ●
Insulated Equipment Ground (CU or AL) ● ● ● ● ●
Subfeed Lugs — ● ● ● ●
Feed-Thru Lugs ● ● ● ● ●
Compression Lugs ● ● ● ● ●
Copper Lugs ● ● ● ● ●
200% Neutral ● ● ● 400 - 600A 400 - 600A

Tin Plated Aluminum Bussing Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Tin Plated Copper Bussing ● ● ● ● ●
Silver Plated Copper Bussing — ● ● ● ●
R, J and T Fuse Clips — — — — ●
● Available as an option. — Not Available
10
PANELBOARDS
 To meet sprinkler proof requirements (CEC Rule 26-008):

- P1/P2/P3 Panels:
- Select Type 2 enclosure for non-service entrance applications.
- Select Type 3R enclosure for service entrance applications.
- S5/F2 Panels:
- Select Type 3R enclosure.

Panelboards
Factory Assembled Selection
Catalogue Numbering System P 1 C 4 2 F X 2 5 0 A T S T - NGB
Type of Panel P1, P2, P3, S5, F2

Voltage and System*
C = 208Y/120 3Ø 4 W Wye AC - All R = 415/240 3Ø 4 W Wye AC - All
E = 480Y/277 3Ø 4 W Wye AC - All S = 440/250 3Ø 4 W Wye AC - All
D = 240 3Ø 3 W Delta AC - All L = 600/347 3Ø 4 W Wye AC - All
F = 480 3Ø 3 W Delta AC - All T = 230 3Ø 3 W Delta AC - All
G = 600 3Ø 3 W Delta AC - P2, P3, P4, P5 W = 380 3Ø 3 W Delta AC - P2, P3, P4, P5
I = 347 3Ø 3 W Delta AC P2, P3, P4, P5 1 = 24V DC 1-Pole Branch Only - P2, P3, P4, P5
B = 240/120 3Ø 4 W Delta BØ High Leg AC - P2, P3, P4, P5 2 = 24V DC 2-Pole Branch Only - P2, P3, P4, P5
Q = 240/120 3Ø 4 W Delta CØ High Leg AC - P2, P3, P4, P5 3 = 48V DC 1-Pole Branch Only - P2, P3, P4, P5
A = 120/240 1Ø 3 W Grounded Neutral AC - All 4 = 48V DC 2-Pole Branch Only - P2, P3, P4, P5
H = 120 1Ø 2 W Grounded Neutral AC - P2, P3, P4, P5 5 = 125V DC 1-Pole Branch Only - P2, P3, P4, P5
J = 240 1Ø 2 W No Neutral AC - All N = 125V DC 2-Pole Branch Only - P2, P3, P4, P5
Y = 125 1Ø 2 W Grounded Neutral AC - P2, P3, P4, P5 O = 125/250V DC 2-Pole Branch Only - P2, P3, P4, P5
Z = No Longer Available P = 125/250V DC 2 & 3-Pole Branch - All
K = 220/127 3Ø 4 W Wye AC - All U = 120V AC 3Ø3W - All
M = 380/220 3Ø 4 W Wye AC - All V = 240V 3Ø3W Grounded B Phase - P2, P3, P4, P5
*For any voltage system not listed, check with sales for availability.
Circuits or Enclosure Height
P1 – 18, 30, 42, 54, 66 S5, F2 - 60, 75, 90
P2 – 18, 30, 42, 54, 66, 78, 90
P3 – 18, 30, 42, 54, 66, 78, 90
Main Lug (ML), Main Breaker
(See Main Breaker Table coding below)
Amperage
100–400A = P1 400– 800A = P3
100–600A = P2 400 –1200A = S5, F2
Bus Bus Bus
Code Material Plating P1 P2 P3 S5 F2
A Aluminum Tin-Plated • • • • • • Indicates default
C Copper Tin-Plated optional optional optional n/a n/a for this bus type.
E Copper Silver-Plated optional optional optional • •
Feed Location T = Top B = Bottom

Mounting
S = Surface
F = Flush. Flush trims extend 1 1/2" beyond the base box dimensions on P1, P2 and P3.

Subfeed Space Indicator (for P1 only) T = Subfeed Space Included N = No Subfeed Space
Branch Breaker Type
NONE = BL/BQD type
NGB = NGB/3VA41 type onlyd
Main Breaker Coding
Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker
Code Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code Type
BL BL H2 HFXD6 J6 JD6 L6 LD6 MD MD6 ND ND6 L3 LLK N8 HNG
BH BLH H1 HHFD6 JD JXD2 LX LXD6 MX MXD6 NX NXD6 J2 NJG N2 HNX
BR BLR H3 HHFXD6 JX JXD6 LH LXD6H MH MXD6H NT NXD6H J1 NJX N5 HNY
HB HBL G2 HGB JH JXD6H S1 SCLD6 SO SCMD6 SR SCND6 J4 NJY N9 LNG
BQ BQD G3 LGB SC SCJD6 S2 SHLD6 SQ SCMD6H ST SCND6H L2 HLK N3 LNX
B6 BQD6 NB NGB SX SHJD6 SL SLD6 S5 SHMD6 AD SHND6 L7 NLK N6 LNY
CE CED6 G4 NGB2 SY SHJD6H QJ QJ2 S6 SHMD6H SD SHND6H M5 HMG N7 NNG
10
E4 ED4 G5 HGB2 SJ SJD6 Q2 QJ2H SM SMD6 SN SND6 M2 HMX N1 NNX

E6 ED6 G6 LGB2 SH SJD6H QH QJH2 AX SMD6H AY SND6H M8 HMY N4 NNY
PANELBOARDS
H4 HED4 CJ CJD6 CL CLD6 C9 CMD6 CN CND6 J6 HJG M6 LMG QR QR2

HA HHED6 6H HHJD6 HH HHLD6 CH CMD6H C6 CND6H J7 HJX M3 LMX Q4 QRH2
CF CFD6 H9 HHJXD6 XH HHLXD6 HM HMD6 HN HND6 J5 HJY M9 LMY Q5 HQR2
FD FD6 H6 HJD6 HL HLD6 HR HMXD6 HT HNXD6 J9 LJG M4 NMG Q6 HQR2H
FX FXD6 H5 HJXD6 HO HLXD6 HS HMXD6H HX HNXD6H J3 LJX M1 NMX Q7 QR2-MCS
HF HFD6 H7 HJXD6H HP HLXD6H — — — — J8 LJY M7 NMY — —
 Standard bussing in P1, P2 and P3 panels is tin-plated for aluminum and copper. d 3VA41 breakers can only be used in interiors manufactured after October 2020 and marked
b Not available for Revised P1 NGB/3VA41 interiors. with the NGB suffix..
 P1 Bus is either 250A max or 400A max.

Panelboards
Distributor stock - Type P1 Ready To Assemble Panelboards Reference
Type P1 ready to assemble panelboards 1. Compute total number of poles to Note: Main/Subfeed Breaker
are completely convertible from main determine interior catalog number. mounting kits may be ordered with
lug to main breaker and vice-versa. (Note: BL / BQD (or) or NGB Main or without breakers included, see
Additionally, feed-thru lugs or subfeed Breaker will use unit space. The total page 10-12 and 10-13 for selection.
circuit breakers up to 400 amperes can number of poles should include 2 or 4. List required branch circuit
be added without increasing the box 3 poles for 1-phase or 3-phase mains. breakers and filler plates to cover
height for Revised P1 with “T” suffix, 2. List catalog number of interior, box any unused positions.
see the chart. and front. 5. Select any modifications
3. Select main lug kit or main breaker or accessories.
kit from appropriate tables.
Note: Revised P1 was introduced in June 2015. All original P1

devices do not include the "Subfeed Space" Indicator. P 1 C 1 8 M L 2 5 0 A T - NGB
All original P1 included the Subfeed Space as standard.
Type of Panel
P1
Voltage and System

C = 208Y/120, 3-Phase 4-Wire
A = 120/240V, 1-Phase 3-Wire
L = 600Y/347V, 3-Phase 4-Wire
Circuits
18, 30, 42, 54* (*Revised P1 only)
Mains
ML = Main lugs
MC = Main convertible
Select Main Lug Kit or Breaker Mounting Kit from pages 10-12 or 10-13
Amperage
250A max or 400A max only (typically 250A max Bus (or) 400A max Bus
Main Bus Material

A = Aluminum
C = Copper
Subfeed Space Indicator (for Nex Gen P1 only) T = Subfeed Space Included
Note: Standard bussing in P1 panels is tin plated for aluminum and copper.
Standard bus is rated to the maximum amperage in the panel.
Branch B reaker Type
NONE = BL/BQD type NGB = NGB/3VA41 type onlyb
Branch Breakers
Revised P1 Branch Breaker Referece
Breaker Frame (kA Range)
Panel Type Voltage Reference
BL BQD BQD6 NGB 3VA41
120/240V 10-65kA 65kA 65kA 100kA 65-150kA
240V 10-65kA 65kA 65kA 100kA 65-150kA
Revised P1 480/277V — 14kA 10kA 25kA 25-65kA
480V — — — — 25-65kA
600/347V — — 10kA 14kA 14-25kA
10
Revised P1 Interior Type

P1C 208Y/120, 3-Phase 4-Wire ü ü ü ü ü
P1A 120/240V, 1-Phase 3-Wire ü ü
PANELBOARDS
P1L 600Y/347V, 3-Phase 4-Wire ü

P1L (NGB)
600Y/347V, 3-Phase 4-Wire ü
Manufactured prior to October 2020
P1L (NGB)
600Y/347V, 3-Phase 4-Wire ü ü
Manufactured after October 2020
 P1 panels use either 250A rated bus or 400A rated bus, regardless of the Main Breaker installed (or) MLO Amp rating chosen. Panels with 250A bus can have up to 250A
Main Breaker or Main Lugs. Panels with 400A bus can have up to 400A Main Breaker or Main Lugs.
b 3VA41 breakers can only be used in interiors manufactured after October 2020 and marked with the NGB suffix.

Panelboards
Features / Benefits Reference
The standard Siemens P1 panelboard has some unique features that make it easier to design for an engineer, easier to
reconfigure in the field for a contractor, and easier to upgrade and maintain for the Owner. The P1 is the smallest panel in
the Siemens lineup, with bus sizes up to 400A. What makes it different is the split neutral design and the open ended bus. In
the Siemens panel, instead of the common single neutral bus on one end, we have a neutral bus on both sides that is cross-
bussed. This makes branch wiring simpler and cleaner – the lead lengths for line and neutral can now be made nearly the same,
creating more room and a neater installation. It also allows access to both ends of the bus as a standard feature – this provides
the flexibility to make changes in the field, even if it wasn’t part of the original configuration. Revised P1 introduced in 2015 has
extended circuits up to 66 available and also non-feed thru versions are available, without the Subfeed Space, in a 6'' smaller
enclosure.
MAIN BREAKER or SUB-FEED BREAKER
MAIN LUGS or FEED-THROUGH LUGS
INTEGRAL BUS MOUNTED SPD
The following can be done to a standard P1 panelboard in the field with no modifications:
b Change from top fed to bottom fed
b Add feed-through lugs
10
b Add an Integral bus-mounted SPD

b Add a sub feed breaker up to 250 amps
PANELBOARDS
b Change from Main Lugs to Main Breaker

b Change from Main Breaker to Main Lugs
b Panel may have up to two ground assemblies. Options are: (a) standard aluminum, (b) optional copper, or (c) optional insulated/
isolated aluminum or copper. Mounting provisions in opposing corners of the box are standard. Any of these options may be
added after installation.
 Only when Subfeed Space is selected/available.

Panelboards
Distributor stock - Type P1 Ready To Assemble Panelboards
To better serve the needs of customers, Ready to Assemble Panelboards offer product flexibility, quicker job turn-
around, and affordable pricing. All Siemens ready to assemble panelboards are fully backed for high quality, and
trouble-free operation.
Flexibility and ease of assembly:

Customer oriented design creates installation conve- To further speed wiring, as well as reduce clutter, the
nience. For all of its one-of-a-kind features, the P1 panel- P1 panel also features a split neutral design and branch
board is also designed to be extremely user friendly. For neutral connections which are closer to the breakers than
instance, field convertible main breaker and main lug kits, competitors. Additionally, field addable sub-fed break-
(through 400 amps), will allow you to switch from main ers (up to 250 amps) or feed through lug kits can be field
lug to main breaker, and vice versa with no change in box installed without utilizing any of your feeder breaker posi-
size or additional cabling. Plus, lay-in construction (for 250 tions or increasing your box height. Furthermore, the
A CU) and/or removable lugs make wiring the main and unique design allows the panel to be inverted in the field
neutral lugs easier and faster. and keep its labeling legible.
1) Completely symmetrical Type 1 boxes may be mounted Main Breaker Kits are interchangeable and can be changed/
with either end up. There are two pre-punched equipment added in the field without making changes to the enclosure
ground connector locations for contractor friendly or interior.
installation. 5) Branch neutral connections are near the breaker connections
2) Box comes pre-punched for optional, field installable to speed wiring and reduce clutter. The standard P1 neutral
door-in-door or hinged style trims. There are also two pre- is rated for 100% of the panel’s ampacity and will accept
punched ground connector locations. The panel box will copper or aluminum wire. Optional 200% and 2/0 neutral
accept both standard ground connector (EGK and ECGK) kits are also available. (2/0 max. Neutral strips are now
assemblies and insulated ground connector kits (IGK and standard on all NGB/3VA41 Interiors.)
ICGK). 6) The panel includes space to add (1) sub-feed breaker (max
3) Interior mounting is completely symmetrical allowing it to 250 amps), feed-thru lugs or one TPS3 (SPD) kit.
be changed from top to bottom feed by simply rotating the 7) Siemens standard trim has hidden hinges and mounting
interior. hardware for added safety. The rounded door corners
4) Choose either a Main Breaker kit or Main Lug kit with not only enhance the panel’s appearance but also help to
which to terminate your incoming cables. Main lug kits are eliminate injuries caused from sharp corners.
contractor friendly lugs through 350 kcmil (250 amp panel), 8) Semi-flush lock comes standard. Easily identified locked
(1) 600 kcmil or (2) 250 kcmil connectors for 400 amp position denoted by keyway being horizontal when door
panels. No line connectors in the P1 panel require multiple has been locked.
wires under one screw. Main Breaker kits (250 amps and
below) are horizontally mounted allowing field convertible
top or bottom feeds to be performed easily. MLO kits and
3
4
7
2 5
1
10
6 8
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Revised P1 Panelboard 250 & 400A Reference
Invertablity and Flexability!
All FT and NFT are invertable in field – Top-feed or Bottom-feed
Feed-Thru Style Panel

FT (Catalog Number ends with "T") $ 0 /2 0 %
µ : LG H
$ 0 /2 0 %
µ : LG H
0/ R U 0%
Box & LU FX LW V
6L] H V Box
18 & LU FX LW
V
µ 6L] H V
30 30
µ µ
42 42
µ µ
54 54
µ µ
66
µ
6X EI H H G
FT Lugs
Subfeed Breakers
(250A max)
TVSS/SPD Devices
Non-Feed-Thru Style Panel

NFT (Catalog Number ends with "N")b $ 0 /2 0 %
$ 0 /2 0 % µ : LG H
µ : LG H
0/ R U 0%
Box
6L] H V & LU FX LW
V
µ 18 Box
µ 30 & LU FX LW
V 6L] H V
µ 42 30 µ
µ 54 42 µ
10
µ 66 54 µ
66 µ
PANELBOARDS
 66 circuits only for Factory Assembly. b Not available for stock or Ready to Assemble Panelboards

Panelboards
Revised P1 Panelboard 250A and 400A Reference
Revised P1 Panelboard 250A and 400A
250A Configurations 400A Configurations

FT Feed-Thru Style Panel FT Feed-Thru Style Panel
FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7 FLU FX LW) 7
1R W
$ Y D LOD EOH
% ( Q FOR V X U H
% ( Q FOR V X U H
% ( Q FOR V X U H
% ( Q FOR V X U H
% ( Q FOR V X U H
1 ) 7 FR Q I LJ X U D W
LR Q V EH OR Z D U H
% ( Q FOR V X U H
V K R UWH U W
K D Q ) 7 Z LW K V D P H FLU FX LWFR X Q W
% ( Q FOR V X U H
% ( Q FOR V X U H
250A Configurations 400A Configurations

NFT Feed-Thru Style Panel NFT Feed-Thru Style Panel
FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7 FLU FX LW1 ) 7
% ( Q FOR V X U H
µ V K R UW
H U W
K D Q )7 % ( Q FOR V X U H
µ V K R UW
H U W
µ V K R UW
H U W
µ V K R UW
H U W
µ V K R UW
H U W
K D Q )7
10
% ( Q FOR V X U H
µ V K R UW
H U W
PANELBOARDS
µ V K R UW
H U W
K D Q )7
% ( Q FOR V X U H
µ V K R UW
H U W

Panelboards
Distributor Stock - Type P1 Ready To Assemble Panelboards Reference
400A Max. — 20" Wide x 5.75" Deep
1. Choose the appropriate Interior from the table below. 3. Choose Branch Breakers. BL, BQD and
2. Choose the Main Device: Main Lugs from NGB/3VA41 breakers from pages 10-13 - 10-14.
page 10-12, Main Breaker Kit from pages 4. Choose Feed-Thru Lugs or Subfeed
10-12 - 10-13. Breaker Kit from page 10-12.
Type P1 Into Stock Panelboards (Revised P1 introduced in June 2015)
Original Main Revised P1 Main
Max. Original Revised P1 Convertible Convertible Type Type 1 Type1
#of Main Lugs Interior Main Lug Interior Interior Interior Box Type 1 3R/12 Front Front
Amps Poles Cat. Number Cat. Number Cat. Number Cat. Number Size Encl. Encl. Surface Flush
1-Phase, 3-Wire 120/240V (BL/BQD Branch Breakers only)
18 P1A18ML250A P1A18ML250AT P1A18MC250A P1A18MC250AT 32 B32 WP32 S32B F32B
250 P1A42ML250A P1A42ML250AT P1A42MC250A P1A42MC250AT
42 44 B44 WP44 S44B F44B
54 — P1A54ML250AT — P1A54MC250AT 50 B50 WP50 S50B F50B
18 P1A18ML400A — P1A18MC400A — — — — — —
400 P1A42ML400A P1A42ML400AT P1A42MC400A P1A42MC400AT
42 68 B68 WP68 S68B F68B
54 — P1A54ML400AT — P1A54MC400AT 74 B74 WP74 S74B F74B
18 P1A18ML250C P1A18ML250CT P1A18MC250C P1A18MC250CT 32 B32 WP32 S32B F32B
250 P1A42ML250C P1A42ML250CT P1A42MC250C P1A42MC250CT
42 44 B44 WP44 S44B F44B
54 — P1A54ML250CT — P1A54MC250CT 50 B50 WP50 S50B F50B
18 P1A18ML400C — P1A18MC400C — — — — — —
400 P1A42ML400C P1A42ML400CT P1A42MC400C P1A42MC400CT
42 68 B68 WP68 S68B F68B
54 — P1A54ML400CT — P1A54MC400CT 74 B74 WP74 S74B F74B
3-Phase, 4-Wire 208Y/120V (BL/BQD Branch Breakers only)
18 P1C18ML250A P1C18ML250AT P1C18MC250A P1C18MC250AT 32 B32 WP32 S32B F32B
250 P1C42ML250A P1C42ML250AT P1C42MC250A P1C42MC250AT
42 44 B44 WP44 S44B F44B
54 — P1C54ML250AT — P1C54MC250AT 50 B50 WP50 S50B F50B
18 P1C18ML400A — P1C18MC400A — — — — — —
400 P1C42ML400A P1C42ML400AT P1C42MC400A P1C42MC400AT
42 68 B68 WP68 S68B F68B
54 — P1C54ML400AT — P1C54MC400AT 74 B74 WP74 S74B F74B
18 P1C18ML250C P1C18ML250CT P1C18MC250C P1C18MC250CT 32 B32 WP32 S32B F32B
250 P1C42ML250C P1C42ML250CT P1C42MC250C P1C42MC250CT
42 44 B44 WP44 S44B F44B
54 — P1C54ML250CT — P1C54MC250CT 50 B50 WP50 S50B F50B
18 P1C18ML400C — P1C18MC400C — — — — — —
400 P1C42ML400C P1C42ML400CT P1C42MC400C P1C42MC400CT
42 68 B68 WP68 S68B F68B
54 — P1C54ML400CT — P1C54MC400CT 74 B74 WP74 S74B F74B
3-Phase, 4-Wire 600Y/347V (BQD6 Branch Breakers only)
18 P1L18ML250A P1L18ML250AT P1L18MC250A P1L18MC250AT 32 B32 WP32 S32B F32B
250 P1L42ML250A P1L42ML250AT P1L42MC250A P1L42MC250AT
42 44 B44 WP44 S44B F44B
54 — P1L54ML250AT — P1L54MC250AT 50 B50 WP50 S50B F50B
18 P1L18ML400A — P1L18MC400A — — — — — —
400 P1L42ML400A P1L42ML400AT P1L42MC400A P1L42MC400AT
42 68 B68 WP68 S68B F68B
54 — P1L54ML400AT — P1L54MC400AT 74 B74 WP74 S74B F74B
18 P1L18ML250C P1L18ML250CT P1L18MC250C P1L18MC250CT 32 B32 WP32 S32B F32B 42 circuit with
250
30 P1L30ML250C P1L30ML250CT P1L30MC250C P1L30MC250CT 38 B38 WP38 S38B F38B Back-fed Main
42 P1L42ML250C P1L42ML250CT P1L42MC250C P1L42MC250CT 44 B44 WP44 S44B F44B
54 — P1L54ML250CT — P1L54MC250CT 50 B50 WP50 S50B F50B
18 P1L18ML400C — P1L18MC400C — — — — — —
30 P1L30ML400C P1L30ML400CT P1L30MC400C P1L30MC400CT 62 B62 WP62 S62B F62B
400 P1L42ML400C P1L42ML400CT P1L42MC400C P1L42MC400CT
42 68 B68 WP68 S68B F68B
54 — P1L54ML400CT — P1L54MC400CT 74 B74 WP74 S74B F74B
Interiors for NGB/3VA41 Breakers — 3-Phase, 4-Wire 600Y/347V (NGB/3VA41 Branch Breakers onlyb
18 — P1L18ML250AT-NGB — P1L18MC250AT-NGB 32 B32 WP32 S32H F32H
250 30 — P1L30ML250AT-NGB — P1L30MC250AT-NGB 38 B38 WP38 S38H F38H
18 — — — — — — — — —
400 30 — P1L30ML400AT-NGB — P1L30MC400AT-NGB 62 B62 WP62 S62H F62H
10

18 — P1L18ML250CT-NGB — P1L18MC250CT-NGB 32 B32 WP32 S32H F32H
250 30 — P1L30ML250CT-NGB — P1L30MC250CT-NGB 38 B38 WP38 S38H F38H
PANELBOARDS
18 — — — — — — — — —
400 30 — P1L30ML400CT-NGB — P1L30MC400CT-NGB 62 B62 WP62 S62H F62H
 Front included in type 3R/12 Box. 54 circuit 400A

b 3VA41 breakers can only be used in interiors manufactured after October 2020 and marked with the NGB suffix.

Panelboards
Warehouse Stock – Type P1 Panelboards Selection
Lug Kits — Main or Feed Thru
Amp Wire Range Original P1 Revised P1
Rating Matl. (includes Neutral) Service Cat. No. Cat. No.
(1) #6 AWG- 350 kcmil 1 Phase MLKA1 MLKA1A
AL
(CU or AL) 3 Phase MLKA3 MLKA3A
250
(1) #6 AWG- 350 kcmil 1 Phase MLKC1 MLKC1A
CU
(CU or AL) 3 Phase MLKC3 MLKC3A
(2) 1/0 - 250 kcmil or 1 Phase 4MLKA1 4MLKA1A
AL
(1) #2 AWG-600 kcmil 3 Phase 4MLKA3 4MLKA3A
400
(2) 1/0 - 4/0 1 Phase 4MLKC1 4MLKC1A
CU
or (1) 1/0 - 600 kcmil 3 Phase 4MLKC3 4MLKC3A
(1) AL 1/0-750 kcmil 1 Phase — 4MLKA1B
(2) AL/CU 250 kcmil max.
400 AL
[max.(1) 600 kcmil CU
wire] 3 Phase — 4MLKA3B
Breaker Mounting Kits 250A Max. — Main or Subfeed w/o Breaker MBKFD3A
Amp Original P1 Revised P1
Rating Breaker Types Service Cat. No. Cat. No.
1-Phase MBKBL1
100A BL, BLH, HBL
3-Phase MBKBL3
1-Phase — Use Back-fed
100A BQD Main Label Kit
3-Phase — # MBKBFAb
1-Phase MBKNB1
125A NGB
3-Phase MBKNB3
1-Phase MBKED1 MBKED1A
125A ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6
3-Phase MBKED3 MBKED3A
1-Phase MBKQR1 MBKQR1A
225A QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H
3-Phase MBKQR3 MBKQR3A
1-Phase MBKFD1 MBKFD1A
250A FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HFXD6
3-Phase MBKFD3 MBKFD3A
JXD2, JD6, JXD6, 1-Phase MBKJD1
400A MBKJD3B
HJD6, HJXD6 3-Phase MBKJD3
Neutral Kits for Revised P1

Revised P1
Group Amp Circuits Cat. No. Description
RP1 1/0 NEUTRAL LUG KIT [(5x)1/0 + (12x) #6]
1/0 250A 2 Strips LNLK5X12A
short 1/0 replacement neutral strip (17POS) (5.80 long)
Neutral & per
Kits 400A pack RP1 1/0 NEUTRAL LUG KIT [(7x)1/0 + (18x) #6]
LNLK7X18A
long 1/0 replacement neutral strip (25POS) (8.14 Long)
RP1 & P3 2/0 NEUTRAL LUG KIT (15POS)
LNLK4X11B
[(4x)2/0 + (11x) #6] - 2/0 max neutral strips (6.17 Long)
2/0 250A 2 Strips
Neutral & per LNLK6X17B
Kits 400A pack
LNLK7X20B
RP1 CU NEUTRAL LUG KIT, 42B - 2 short & 2 long strips (17 & 25 pos) contains: CU neutral strips and CU
250A 18, 30, 42 CNLK42B
Copper riser extension, plus all hardware to replace standard neutrals. CU strips are 1/0 max. and require CU cable.
Neutral
Kits 250A
RP1 CU NEUTRAL LUG KIT, 54B - 4 long strips (25 pos) contains: CU neutral strips and CU riser exten-
& 54, 66 CNLK54B
sion, plus all hardware to replace standard neutrals. CU strips are 1/0 max. and require CU cable.
400A
RP1 250A 200% NEUTRAL LUG KITS - Contains: CU neutral strips (2 short & 2 long strips (17 & 25 pos)),
18, 30, 42 2NLK42B CU neutral extensions and an additional AL Line Lug (350kcmil), plus all hardware to replace standard
neutrals. CU strips are 1/0 max. and require CU cable. (200% neutral kits require CU neutrals)
250A
RP1 250A 200% NEUTRAL LUG KITS. Contains: CU neutral strips (4 long strips (25 pos)), CU neutral
200%
54, 66 2NLK54B extensions and an additional AL Line Lug (350kcmil), plus all hardware to replace standard neutrals.
10
Neutral
CU strips are 1/0 max. and require CU cable. (200% neutral kits require CU neutrals)
Kits
RP1 400A 200% NEUTRAL LUG KIT - Contains: CU neutral strips (4 long strips (25 pos)), CU neutral
extensions and an additional AL Line Lugs (600kcmil and 300kcmil), plus all hardware to replace
PANELBOARDS
400A 30, 54, 66 42NLK54B

standard neutrals. CU strips are 1/0 max. and require CU cable. (200% neutral kits
require CU neutrals)
 400 amp kit is for main only — not allowed for subfeed breaker. d Original P1 kits will not work with Next Gen P1 interiors if the chart shows different part numbers for each.
b MBKBFA kit is available to mount BL/BQD/NGB 2-pole or 3-pole in unit space as a "Back-  Next Gen P1 kits will not work with Original P1 interiors if the chart shows different part
Fed Main". This occupies branch space and reduces circuit count by 2 or 3 positions. numbers for each.
(includes Neutral Lug, "MAIN" label and instructions)".  Replacement parts only.
 Although QR is rated 250A, it is limited to 225A in panelboard.

Panelboards
Warehouse Stock – Type P1 Panelboards Selection
Main Breaker Mounting Kits with Breakers for P1 Panels (250A and
lower can be used as subfeed kits also)
Nex Gen P1 Ratings
Catalogue No. Description 240V 600V
MBKED33100A Kit w/3-pole ED6 100A breaker 65kA 18kA
MBKED33125A Kit w/3-pole ED6 125A breaker 65kA 18kA
MBKQR12225A Kit w/2-pole QR2 225A breaker 10kA —
MBKFD33200A Kit w/3-pole FXD6 200A breaker 65kA 22kA
MBKHF33250A Kit with 3-Pole HFD6 250A Breaker 100kA 25kA
MBKJD33400A Kit w/3-pole JXD6 400A breaker 65kA 25kA
NOTE: "Next Gen P1" Kits above only work for interior numbers ending in "T" or "N". Use "Original
P1" main connector kits and loose breaker for all others.
Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories

Catalogue no. Description
BK1A Bonding Kit for 250A max. Next Gen P1 panels
EGK Al Ground Bus 44 Connections
ECGK Cu Ground Bus 44 Connections
IGK Insulated Al Ground Bus
ICGK Insulated Cu Ground Bus
DFFP1A 1” Branch circuit blank filler plate - BL/BQD/xGB/3VA41 provisions
P1 Main & Sub-feed Blank Filler (Small Main & Sub-feed opening)
DFFP01B *Replaces DFFP01ACAN
RP1 Main/Sub-feed Breaker Filler 125A Max. - 3VA4/BL/BQD/ED/xGB
DFFPVA41A *Replaces DFFPED01CAN (Ref. 12-A-1802-01)
MBKQRFK P1/RP1 Main Breaker Filler for 1PH/3PH QR - Horizontal Mount only
DFFPFD01CAN P1 Main Breaker, FD Filler, 250A Frame
DFFPJD01CAN P1 Main Breaker, JD Filler, 400A Frame (Small opening - prior to 3VA)
DFFP01C RP1 400A Main Blank Filler Plate - 1 Piece for large opening
DFFPJD02 RP1 400A w/JD Main Breaker - 1 Piece for large opening
MCHK 1 Metallic directory card holder
EWK1 End Wall Kit with KO’s (20”W x 5.75”D)
IMK1 Interior Adjusting Kit
LPDC01 Panelboard Directory Card 5.5” x 5” (Pack of 10; Ref. 12-1110-01)
LPDC01CAN Panelboard Directory Card 9" x 4" (Pack of 8; Ref. 9270-1/3/8/9)
LPDC02 Directory Card Holder for 5.5" x 5"(Pack of 10; Ref. 11-1824-01)
9271-1 Directory Card Holder for 9" x 4"
NBK01A STICK-ON NUMBERS 1 THRU 60 (includes BT - 1/2” size)
P1SCRWS Breaker Mounting Screws for P1 (Pack of 42)
P1CONBPHCU Connector kit – 6 pcs. B-phase Copper 300A Main installed.
P1CONBPHAL Connector kit – 6 pcs. B-phase Aluminum
These Next Gen P1 kits can now be
used as top or bottom feed.
P1CONACPHCU Connector kit – 6 pcs. A or C-phase Copper
P1CONACPHAL Connector kit – 6 pcs. A or C-phase Aluminum
JCK24 J-type Speed Nut Lighting Panel Fronts (Pack of 24)
LPKEY01ACAN Key for FAS-Latch lock (Pack of 4; Ref. B363A)
FPLK2 2 Spare Fas-latch trim locks with 2 keys
SDKN Dripshield kit for Standard Enclsoure (20“W × 5.75“D)
TPS9IKITP1 P1 mounting bracket for SPD TPS3 09
10
PANELBOARDS
 Kits are for Main only. New “Next Gen P1” kits can be used for either top feed or bottom feed.

Panelboards
Panelboard Replacement, Modification, and Additions Selection
S1/S2 Panels—All the original P1 panel kits for 250 amp and
below panels will work for 250 amp maximum S1/S2 panels.
Note: Revised P1 kits will not work with S1/S2
400/600 Amp S1/S2 and All SE Panels For CDP-7 and S3

Lug Kits — Main or Feed Thru Breaker Mounting Kits
Ampere Catalogue Ampere
Rating Material Wire Range Service Number Rating Breaker Types Material Catalogue Number
125A/250A Al/Cu (2) 1/0–250 kcmil 1-Phase MLKA1 70A BQD6 Aluminum 7BQD6-2
125A/250A Al/Cu (2) 1/0–250 kcmil 3-Phase MLKA3 70A BQD6 Copper 7BQD6-2C
(2) #3/40––250 kcmil or 100A BL Aluminum 7BL-2
400A/600A Al/Cu 1-Phase SMLKA1
(1) 3/0-500 kcmil 100A BL Copper 7BL-2C
(2) #3/40––250 kcmil or 100A BQD Aluminum 7BQ-2
400A/600A Al/Cu 3-Phase SMLKA3
(1) 3/0-500 kcmil
100A BQD Copper 7BQ-2C
125A ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 Aluminum 7E6-2
Breaker Mounting Kits
125A ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 Copper 7E6-2C
Ampere Catalogue
Rating Breaker Types Service Number
125A ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6, HHED6 1-Phase SMBKED1
For CDP-6, VB-6, SPP-6 and FPP6:
125A ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6, HHED6 3-Phase SMBKED3
Breaker Mounting Kits
250A FXD6, FD6, HFXD6, HFD6 1-Phase SMBKFD1
Ampere
250A FXD6, FD6, HFXD6, HFD6 3-Phase SMBKFD3 Rating Breaker Types Material Catalogue Number
400A JD6, JXD6, HJD6, HJXD6 1-Phase SMBKJD1 100A BL Copper 6BL2C
400A JD6, JXD6, HJD6, HJXD6 3-Phase SMBKJD3 125A ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 Copper 6E62C
600A LD6, LXD6, HLD6, HLXD6 1-Phase SMBKLD1 125A CED6 Copper 6CLE2C
600A LD6, LXD6, HLD6, HLXD6 3-Phase SMBKLD3 250A FD6, FXD6, HFD6 Copper 6F62C
400A JXD6, JD6, HJD6, SJD6 Copper 6JJ62C
Neutral Kits
Ampere Catalogue
Rating Description Number
250A max. 30/42 circuit 200% neutral kit 2NLK2
400/600A max. 42 circuit 200% neutral kit 2NLK1
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Warehouse Stock/Unassembled Selection
Branch Breakers Selection for P1
BL Family Circuit Breakers BQD & GB Family Circuit Breakers
Amp 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Amp Ratings 277V 480Y/277V 480Y/277V
Ratings 120V 240/120V 240V 240V Type BQDb – 14,000A IR @ 480/277V | 65,000A IR @ 240V
Type BL - 10,000A IR
15 BQD115 BQD215 BQD315
15 B115 B215 B215R B315 20 BQD120 BQD220 BQD320
20 B120 B220 B220R B320 25 BQD125 BQD225 BQD325
25 B125 B225 B225R B325 30 BQD130 BQD230 BQD330
30 B130 B230 B230R B330 35 BQD135 BQD235 BQD335
35 B135 B235 B235R B335 40 BQD140 BQD240 BQD340
40 B140 B240 B240R B340 45 BQD145 BQD245 BQD345
45 B145 B245 B245R B345 50 BQD150 BQD250 BQD350
50 B150 B250 B250R B350 60 BQD160 BQD260 BQD360
60 B160 B260 — B360 70 BQD170 BQD270 BQD370
70 B170 B270 — B370 80 BQD180 BQD280 BQD380
80 — B280 — B380 90 BQD190 BQD290 BQD390
90 — B290 — B390 100 BQD1100 BQD2100 BQD3100
100 — B2100 — B3100 Type NGB - 14,000A IR @ 600/347V | 100,000A IR @ 240V
Type BLH — 22,000 IR Amp
15 B115H B215H — B315H Ratings 347V 600/347V 600/347V
20 B120H B220H — B320H 15 NGB1B015B NGB2B015B NGB3B015B
80 — B280H — B380H 70 NGB1B070B NGB2B070B NGB3B070B
Type HBL — 65,000A IR 100 NGB1B100B NGB2B100B NGB3B100B
15 B115HH B215HH — B315HH 110 NGB1B110B NGB2B110B NGB3B110B
20 B120HH B220HH — B320HH 125 NGB1B125B NGB2B125B NGB3B125B
30 B130HH B230HH — B330HH
40 B140HH B240HH — B340HH
Typical Cable Ranges by Breaker Type
UL Breaker Connector Range Connector Range
50 B150HH B250HH — B350HH
Type Amps for AL cable for CU cable
60 — B260HH — B360HH
15-20A #12-#10 AWG #14-#10 AWG
70 — B270HH — B370HH
25-35A #8-#6 AWG #8-#6 AWG
80 — B280HH — B380HH BL 10-50A #8-#4 AWG #8-#6 AWG
90 — B290HH — B390HH 55-70A #8-#2 AWG #8-#4 AWG
100 — B2100HH — B3100HH 80-100A #2-#1/0 AWG #4-#1/0 AWG
15-40A #12-#6 AWG #14-#6 AWG
BQD6 Family Circuit Breakers BQD
45-100A #6-1/0 AWG #8 - #1 AWG
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 15-30A #12-#6 AWG #14-#6 AWG
Amp xGB
35-125A #4-2/0 AWG #6-1/0 AWG
Ratings 347V 600/347V 600/347V
3VA41 15-125A #14 AWG - 3/0 #14 AWG - 2/0
Type BQD6 - 10,000A IR @ 600/347V
15 BQD6115 BQD6215 BQD6315 BT Twin Family Circuit Breakers
20 BQD6120 BQD6220 BQD6320 The Space saver duplex breakers
LINE
25 BQD6125 BQD6225 BQD6325 combine two independent 1/2"
30 BQD6130 BQD6230 BQD6330 breaker poles in a common unit. This
unit bolts into any location that would
10
35 BQD6135 BQD6235 BQD6335

40 BQD6140 BQD6240 BQD6340
typically fit a 1-pole BL breaker and
LOAD
requires only 1" of panel space. 1 SPACE
45 BQD6145 BQD6245 BQD6345
PANELBOARDS
50 BQD6150 BQD6250 BQD6350

60 BQD6160 BQD6260 BQD6360 Replacement for 1-pole BL series (15A & 20A only)
70 BQD6170 BQD6270 BQD6370 Amp BT BTH
Ratings Width Circuits (10k AIC) (22k AIC) Details
Type BT and BTH
 To add shunt trip to BL breakers, see Breaker Accessories. 15-15 1" pole 2 B1515 B1515H Two 15A circuits
b To add Shunt trip or other accessories to BQD and NGB family breakers, See
Breaker accessories. 20-20 1" pole 2 B2020 B2020H Two 20A circuits

Panelboards
AFCI/GFCI
Electronic
Circuit Breakers 1-Pole 2-Pole
Max IR Amp Max IR Amp
Trip Breaker (kA) at Ratings (kA) at Ratings Catalog
Type Type 120V Available 120/240 Available Number
Combination BAF2 10 15 — — BA115AFC
AFCI 10 20 — — BA120AFC
BAFH2 22 15 — — BA115AFCH
22 20 — — BA120AFCH
HBAF2 65 15 — — BA115AFCHH
65 20 — — BA120AFCHH
BAF — — 10 15 B215AFC
— — 10 20 B220AFC
BAFH — — 22 15 B215AFCH
— — 22 20 B220AFCH
Dual Function BFGA2 10 15 — — B115DF
AFCI/GFCI 10 20 — — B120DF
BFGAH2 22 15 — — B115DFH
22 20 — — B120DFH
HBFGA2 65 15 — — B115DFHH
65 20 — — B120DFHH
GFCI BLF2 10 15 — — BF115A
Personnel 10 20 — — BF120A
Protection
10 30 — — BF130A
(5mA)
BLF — — 10 15 BF215A
— — 10 20 BF220A
— — 10 30 BF230A
— — 10 40 BF240A
— — 10 50 BF250A
— — 10 60 BF260A
BLHF2 22 15 — — BF115AH
22 20 — — BF120AH
22 30 — — BF130AH
BLHF — — 22 15 BF215AH
— — 22 20 BF220AH
— — 22 30 BF230AH
— — 22 40 BF240AH
— — 22 50 BF250AH
— — 22 60 BF260AH
HBLF2 65 15 — — BF115AHH
65 20 — — BF120AHH
65 30 — — BF130AHH
GFCI BLE 10 15 — — BE1153
Ground 10 20 — — BE1203
Fault
10 30 — — BE130
Equipment
Protection — — 10 15 BE215
(30mA) — — 10 20 BE220
— — 10 30 BE230
— — 10 40 BE240
— — 10 50 BE250
— — 10 60 BE260
BLEH 22 15 — — BE115H2
22 20 — — BE120H2
22 30 — — BE130H2
10
— — 22 15 BE215H2
— — 22 20 BE220H2
— — 22 30 BE230H2
PANELBOARDS
— — 22 40 BE240H2
— — 22 50 BE250H2
— — 22 60 BE260H2
 Built to order. Additional "circuit" is included for neutral b Allow 8-10 weeks for delivery
(via pigtail) and is NOT connected to bus. 2-pole is one  UL Listed as SWD (Switching Duty) Rated, suitable for 120V AC
phase and one neutral pigtail. 3-pole is two phase fluorescent lighting
connections and one neutral pigtail.

Panelboards
3VA41 TMTU 125A max. - breakers w/AL lugs included

3VA41 1-Pole (1" wide)
UL Type Code ==> SEAB MEAB HEAB
Panelboard MB codes ==> V1 V2 V3
1-pole 1-pole 1-pole
120 VAC kAIC rating ==> 65 85 150
277 VAC kAIC rating ==> 25 35 65
347 VAC kAIC rating ==> 14 18 25
125 VDC kAIC rating ==> 14b 25b 30b
IC family @ 277VAC ==> 25kA 35kA 65kA
amps code FTFM Trip included ==> TM230 TM230 TM230
15 95 3VA41 1P breaker w/TM230 3VA4195-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
20 20 3VA4120-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
25 25 1 Pole 3VA41 with AL connectors 3VA4125-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
30 30 3VA4130-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
included for CU order one
35 35 3VA4135-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
3VA9133-0JD11 connector kit
40 40 3VA4140-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
45 45 3VA4145-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
50 50 Note: No accessory pockets available 3VA4150-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
60 60 3VA4160-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
70 70 3VA4170-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
80 80 3VA4180-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
90 90 3VA4190-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
100 10 3VA4110-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
110 11 3VA4111-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
125 12 3VA4112-4ED11-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
3VA41 1-Pole in 2-Pole Frame (2" wide)

amps code FTFM Trip included ==> TM230 TM230 TM230
15 95 3VA41 1P in 2-P 3VA4195-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
20 20 Frame breaker w/TM230 3VA4120-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
25 25 3VA4125-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
30 30 3VA4130-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
1 Pole in 2-pole Frame
35 35 3VA4135-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
3VA41 with AL connectors
40 40 3VA4140-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
45 45
included for CU order one 3VA4145-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
50 50 3VA9133-0JD11 connector kit 3VA4150-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
60 60 Note: Only 3 Left side Accessory 3VA4160-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
70 70 pockets available 3VA4170-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
80 80 3VA4180-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
90 90 3VA4190-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
100 10 3VA4110-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
110 11 3VA4111-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
125 12 3VA4112-4ED51-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
10
PANELBOARDS
 Although some breakers have a kAIC rating above 100 b DC Voltage panels are limited by various factors.
kAIC – many panels are limited to 100 kAIC or less. These DC ratings apply to the Breaker only.

Panelboards
3VA41 TMTU 125A max. - breakers w/AL lugs included

3VA41 2-Pole & 3-Pole (2" & 3" wide)
UL Type Code ==> SEAB MEAB HEAB
Panelboard MB codes ==> V1 V2 V3
3-pole | 2-pole 3-p | 2-p 3-p | 2-p
240 VAC kAIC rating ==> 65 | 65 85 | 85 150|150
480Y/277VAC kAIC rating ==> 25 | 25 35 | 35 65 | 65
480 VAC kAIC rating ==> 25 | 25 35 | 35 65 | 65
600Y/347VAC kAIC rating ==> 14 | 14 18 | 18 25 | 25
600 VAC kAIC rating ==> na | na na | na na | na
250 VDC kAIC rating ==> na | 50b na | 85b na | 100b
amps code FTAM Trip included ==> TM230 TM230 TM230
20 20 3VA4120-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
30 30 3VA4130-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
35 35 3VA4135-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
40 40 3VA4140-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
45 45 Note: Only 3 Left side Accessory 3VA4145-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
50 50 pockets available 3VA4150-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
60 60 3VA4160-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
70 70 3VA4170-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
80 80 3VA4180-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
90 90 3VA4190-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
100 10 3VA4110-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
110 11 3VA4111-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
125 12 3VA4112-4ED21-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
amps code FTAM Trip included ==> TM230 TM230 TM230
20 20 3VA4120-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
30 30 3VA4130-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
35 35 3VA4135-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
40 40 3VA4140-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
45 45 Note: 3 Left side and 3 right side 3VA4145-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
50 50 Accessory pockets available 3VA4150-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
60 60 3VA4160-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
70 70 3VA4170-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
80 80 3VA4180-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
90 90 3VA4190-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
100 10 3VA4110-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
110 11 3VA4111-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
125 12 3VA4112-4ED31-0AA0 …-5ED… …-6ED…
amps code Molded Case Switch
100 10 3VA41 3P MCS 65 kA HEAB only 65ka ==> 3VA4110-1BB31-0AA0
10
PANELBOARDS
 Although some breakers have a kAIC rating above 100 b DC Voltage panels are limited by various factors.
kAIC – many panels are limited to 100 kAIC or less. These DC ratings apply to the Breaker only.

Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Lighting and Distribution General
Revised Type P1 Main Breaker Panel Connectors Side Gutter Wiring Space - Inches
Ampere Panel
600Y/ 347 Vac Maximum Rating Connectors Suitable for Cu or AI Reference Panel Width 24”
400 Ampere Mains Letter Width 20” (Optional)
100 (1)—#14 1/0 AWG
400 Ampere Maximum Branch A 6.375 7.375
125 (1)—#4 1/0 AWG
Short Circuit Rating — B 5.500 7.5
225 (1)—#4 AWG–300 kcmil
200,000 A. @ 240 Vac / 100,000 A. @ C 6.125 8.125
600Y/347 Vac. IR Maximum 250 (1)—#4/0 AWG–350 kcmil Al
(1)—#6/0 AWG–350 kcmil Cu D 6.500 8.5
Branch Breaker Symmetrical 400 (2)—#3/0 AWG–250 kcmil Al or Ed 5.250 7.25
Interrupting Capacity (1)—#3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al F 5.000 7
Based on CSA’s Test Procedure
Connector ranges indicated do not apply Branch Breaker Side Gutters
Feed thru and subfeed lugs may result in
to all main breaker types. Refer to molded
lower interrupting ratings if not protected
case circuit breaker standard pressure
by a main device. Consult sales office.
wire connector chart (Section 5) for the
Panelboards connector range of a specific frame.
Certified by CSA under file #165172 and
listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., Main Lug Connectors
under ”Panelboards” File #E2269 for 125 (1)—#6 AWG–350 kcmil
interiors and #E4016 for boxes and fronts. 250 (1)—#6 AWG–350 kcmil
AL (2) 110-250 kcmil or
Service 400 std.
(1) #2 AWG–600 kcmil
1-phase 2-wire - 120 Vac, 240 Vac, CU (2) 1/0–4/0 or Weight — Approximate
400 opt.
(1) 110–600 kcmil
1-phase 3-wire - 120/240 Vac, Total panelboard weight when filled with
AL (1) AL 1/0–750 kcmil
3-phase 3-wire - 480Y/277 (when derived 400 opt. (2) AL/CU 250 kcmil max.
a normal quantity of breakers and
from 3-phase 4-wire system), 240 Vac, [max. (1) 600 kcmil (1) wire] accessories is:
120 Vac b About 3 lbs. per inch of box height
Boxes
3-phase 4-wire - 208Y/120 Vac,
480Y/277 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac, 20" wide, 5.75" deep Gauge Steel Boxes (Type 1)
Width Height Gauge Steel
380/220 Vac. b End walls are blank as standard.
20" All #14
Panelboard Fronts and Doors b End walls with knockouts will be
supplied at no charge on 5.75" deep Fronts — Surface, Flush (Type 1)
Standard panelboards are furnished
panels if requested at time of order. 20" All #14
with trim featuring concealed fasteners
and hinges with a flush door lock.
All are factory-assembled for ease of Main Breaker Series Connected Short Circuit Ratings
installation. Fronts are fabricated from Gutter Dimensions - Inches The term “Series Connected Short
code gauge steel and finished ANSI-61. Side Neutral Circuit Rating” refers to the application
See page <?> for optional fronts. Gutter Location
of series connected circuit breakers in a
20” 24” 20”
Main Breakers Main Breaker w/box w/box w/box
combination that allows some breakers
to have lower individual interrupting
BL, BLH, HBL, NGB, BQD, BQD6, ED4, BL, BLH, HBL,
BQD, BQD6
8.500 10.5 11.5 ratings than the available fault current.
ED6, HED4, QR2, QRH2,HQR2, HQR2H,
NGB 8.000 10 11.5 This is permitted as long as the series
FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HFXD6, JXD6, JD6,
combination has been tested and certified
HJXD6, HJD6. (All main breakers except ED4, ED6, HED4 6.125 8.125 11.5
by CSA.
400 amp frame are mounted horizontal.) QR2, QRH2,
6.500 8.5 11.5
Note: All Next Gen P1 interiors with HQR2,HQR2H The table below lists specific main
BL, BQD or GB Type Mains are FD6, FXD6,
5.250 7.25 11.5
and branch breaker series combinations
HFD6, HFDX6 that are marked on all P1 panels.
Back-fed in unit space (GB Type =
NGB).BQD, BQD6 JD6b, JXD6b 15.000 15 26.75 All combinations shown have been tested
for use in P1 panelboards and
are CSA listed. Other combinations are
Main Lug End Gutter available. See Circuit Breaker Section,
Dimensions - Inches of this book.
10
Amp End Neutral These series ratings must be specified on

Rating Gutter Location
order at time of entry.
125 10.500 11.5
PANELBOARDS
250 10.500 11.5

400 25.500 26.75
 P1 400 amp main breaker panels have wire bending  Feed-thru lug wire bending space is 15.000’’ (381mm) d P1panel limited to (1) subfeed 250 amperes max.
space available for 600 kcmil. and neutral wire bending space is 15.880’’ (413mm) on  SeeBranch Breaker Side Gutter Chart for
b 400A main breaker is vertical mounted. 400A panel. Nex Gen P1 Backfed Options.
For inches / millimeters conversion, see Application Data section.

Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Lighting and Distribution Selection
Table P1-3 – Main Breaker Panel Size Selector – Revised P1
RP1 Est. size/weights for AL MLO panels. Dimensions in inches
- Add Main Breaker weights as needed. Max # of Max # of (mm)
MLO
- Add 20% for CU Bus. 1" Poles Poles w/BTb
Estimated
BL/BQD or Weight in
Type of RP1 interior ==> xGB/3VA41 BL/BQD only Unit Space Box Lbs. (kg)
Main Breaker Amp Rating Main Lug FT NFT FT NFT FT NFT Height with
/ Type Amp Rating # # w/BT w/BT A" A" B"(mm) Breakers
250A max. Main Bus rating — 18 - 18 + 10 — 9 26 (661) 95 (43)
125A
100A max BL or BQD/BQD6 18 30 18 + 10 30 + 20 9 15 32 (813) 110 (50)
or
series 30 42 30 + 20 42 + 30 15 21 38 (965) 125 (57)
250A
125A max NGB
42 54 42 + 30 54 + 30 21 27 44 (1118) 140 (64)
or
(all bus is 54 66 54 + 30 66 + 30 27 33 50 (1270) 155 (71)
225A max QR Series
250A max.) 66 — 66 + 30 — 33 — 56 (1423) 170 (78)
250A max FD
400A — 30 — 30 + 20 — 15 56 (1423) 172 (78)
400A max. Main Bus rating 30 42 30 + 20 42 + 30 15 21 62 (1575) 190 (86)
400A max JD Series
(all bus is 42 54 42 + 30 54 + 30 21 27 68 (1728) 208 (95)
400A max.) 54 66 54 + 30 66 + 30 27 33 74 (1880) 226 (104)
 Estimated weights are for Aluminum bus MLO panels and vary by MB and installed Branches
b BT - twin style breakers are available in 15A and 20A only and provide two 1-pole circuits in 1" of unit space.
The maximum Qty. of BT twins allowed in a panel is restricted to the max. number of neutral positions and/or physical space available,
whichever is lower. Values shown are recommended maximums.
 BT twins can only be used in BL/BQD RP1 panels. The NGB series of interiors do not accept BL/BQD or BT style of breakers.
Table P1-4 – Main Breaker Selection

2-Pole and 3-Pole
P1 Main Circuit Breakers & Subfeed Max IR (kA) at d Available
Main Amp for Sub-feed
/277V
/347V
240V
480V
600V
480Y
600Y
Amp Trip Breaker Breaker Breaker Ratings Horizontal
Rating Type Family Code Type Available mount only
70 BQD6 B6 BQD6 65 — — 10 — 15-70 Single
BL BL 10 — — — — 15-100 Single
BL BH BLH 22 — — — — 15-100 Single
100
HB HBL 65 — — — — 15-100 Single
BQD BQ BQD5 65 14 — 10 — 15-100 Single
Sentron GB NB NGB 100 25 — 14 — 15-125 Single
E4 ED4 65 — 18 — — 15-125 Single
125
Sentron ED E6 ED66 65 — 25 — 18 20-125 Single
H4 HED4 100 — 42 — — 15-125 Single
"Thermal QR QR2 10 — — — — 100-225 Single
Magnetic" Q4 QRH2 25 — — — — 100-225 Single
225 Sentron QR
Q5 HQR2 65 — — — — 100-225 Single
Q6 HQR2H 100 — — — — 100-225 Single
FX, FD FXD6-A, FD6-A 65 — 35 — 22 70-250 Single
250 Sentron FD HF HFD6 100 — 65 — 25 70-250 Single
H2 HFXD6 100 — 65 — — 70-250 Single
JX, J6 JXD6-A, JD6-A 65 — 35 — 25 200-400 N/A
H5, H6 HJXD6-A, HJD6-A 100 — 65 — 35 200-400 N/A
400 Sentron JD
JD JXD2 65 — — — — 300-400 N/A
H2 HFXD6 100 — 65 — — 70-250 Single
VA MFAS 85 — 35 — 18 100-250 Single
Thermal 3VA52
VB HFAS 100 — 65 — 25 100-250 Single
Magnetic (W/TM230 trip)
VC CFAS 200 — 100 — 35 100-250 Single
250 WA MFAE 100 — 35 — 18 100-250 Single
3VA62
Electronic WB HFAE 100 — 65 — 22 100-250 Single
(ETU350 LSI
(Solid state) WC CFAE 200 — 100 — 35 100-250 Single
standard)
WD LFAE 200 — 150 — 50 100-250 Single
JX, J6 JXD6-A, JD6-A 65 — 35 — 25 200-400 N/A
Thermal Sentron
400 H5, H6 HJXD6-A, HJD6-A 100 — 65 — 35 200-400 N/A
Magnetic JD
JD JXD2 65 — — — — 300-400 N/A
VE MJAS 85 — 35 — 18 200-400 N/A
Thermal 3VA53
VF HJAS 100 — 65 — 25 200-400 N/A
10
Magnetic (W/TM230 trip)

VG CJAS 200 — 100 — 35 300-400 N/A
400 WE MJAE 100 — 35 — 18 100-400 N/A
3VA63
Electronic WF HJAE 100 — 65 — 22 100-400 N/A
PANELBOARDS
(ETU350 LSI
(Solid state) WG CJAE 200 — 100 — 35 100-400 N/A
standard)
WH LJAE 200 — 150 — 50 100-400 N/A
d DC System Voltages are not available for RP1 series.

 Approved for CSA and UL Listed.
 ED6 2-pole only available in 20A, 25A and 30A.

Panelboards
Table P1-5 - Main Lug Panel Size Selector - Revised P1
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Max # Max # Unit Space
Maximum Poles Poles FT NFT Box Height Weight in MLO Connectors
Ampere rating FT NFT A A B" Lbs. (kg) Suitable for
18 – 9 26 (661) 90 (41)
18 30 9 15 32 (813) 105 (48)
125 30 42 15 21 38 (965) 120 (55) (1) #6 AWG - 350 kcmil
(or)
42 54 21 27 44 (1118) 135 (61) (CU or AL)
250
54 66 27 33 50 (1270) 150 (67)
66 – 33 – 56 (1423) 165 (73)
– 30 – 15 56 (1423) 120 (55)
AL (2) 1/0 - 250 kcmil or
30 42 15 21 62 (1575) 135 (61) (1) #2 AWG - 600 kcmil
400
42 54 21 27 68 (1728) 150 (68) CU (2) 1/0 - 4/0 or
(1) #2 AWG - 600 kcmil
54 66 27 33 74 (1880) 165 (75)
Table P1-6 – Branch Circuit Breakers

Max. No. Max. Interrupting Rating (kA)
Amp Breaker of 120/ 480/ 600Y/ Connections Suitable
Rating Type Poles 120V 240V 240V 277V 277V 347V 347V Available Trip Values for Cu or AI
15-40A #14-#6 AWG Cu
1 – 65 – – – 10 – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70
#12-#6 AWG Al
70 BQD6 2 – 65 – – – – 10 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70
45-70A #8-#1 AWG Cu
3 – – 65 – – – 10 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70
#6-#1/0 AWG Al
1 10 – – – – – – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70
BL 2 – 10 – – – – – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
3 – – 10 – – – – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BLR 2 – – 10 – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100
1 10 – – – – – – 15, 20, 30
BL
2 – 10 – – – – – 15, 20, 30
1 – 22 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 70
BLH 2 – 22 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100 15-20A #14-#10 AWG Cu
3 – – 22 – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 #12-#10 AWG Al
1 – 65 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 25-35A #8-#6 AWG Cu
HBL 2 – 65 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 #8-#6 AWG Al
3 – – 65 – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 40-50A #8-#6 AWG Cu
#8-#4 AWG Al
BLF2 1 10 – – – – – – 15, 20, 30
55-70A #8-#4 AWG Cu
100 BLFB 2 – 10 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
#8-#2 AWG Al
BLHF2 1 22 – – – – – – 15, 20, 30 80-100A #4-#1/0 AWG Cu
BLHFB 2 – 22 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 #2-#1/0 AWG Al
HBLF2 1 65 – – – – – – 15, 20, 30
1 10 – – – – – – 15, 20, 30
BLE
2 – 10 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
1 22 – – – – – – 15, 20, 30
BLEH
2 – 22 – – – – – 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
BAF 1 10 – – – – – – 15, 20
BAFH 1 22 – – – – – – 15, 20
15-40A #14-#6 AWG Cu
1 – 65 – 14 – – – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
#12-#6 AWG Al
BQD 2 – 65 – – 14 – – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
45-100A #8-#1 AWG Cu
3 – – 65 – 14 – – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
#6-#1/0 AWG Al
15-30A #14-#6 Cu
1 100 – – 25 – 14 – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125
#12-#6 Al
NGB b 2 – 100 100 – 25 – 14 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125
35-125 #6-1/0 Cu
3 – 100 100 – 25 – 14 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125
#4-2/0 Al
1 65 – – 25 – 14 – 15-125
3VA41 - SEAB 2 – 65 65 – 25 – 14 15-125
125 3 – 65 65 – 25 – 14 15-125
10
1 85 – – 35 – 18 – 15-125
15-125A #14 AWG - 3/0 Cu
3VA41 - MEAB 2 – 85 85 – 35 – 18 15-125
#14 AWG - 3/0 Al
3 – 85 85 – 35 – 18 15-125
PANELBOARDS
1 150 – – 65 – 25 – 15-125
3VA41 - HEAB 2 – 150 150 – 65 – 25 15-125
3 – 150 150 – 65 – 25 15-125
 Two-pole breaker is one phase and neutral. Three-pole is two phases and neutral.
b P1 panel with NGB/3VA41 branch devices will not accept BL or BQD frames in the same panel as branch devices.
 The Revised P1 (18 circuit 250A only) is limited to 100A per connection (200A per pair) when installing Branch Breakers across from one another.
All other configurations allow 125A per connection max. (250A per pair max.)
NOTE: BL, HBL and BQD breakers are mounted in common mountings in 3” or (6) pole increments.

Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Lighting and Distribution Dimensions
Table P1-7 – Subfeed Breakers
Breaker Number Max. Interrupting Rating (kA)
Type of Poles 240V 480Y/277V 600Y/347V Available Trip Values
QR2 2, 3 10 – – 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
QRH2 2, 3 25 – – 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
HQR2 2, 3 65 – – 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
HQR2H 2, 3 100 – – 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
ED6 2, 3 65 18 18 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
HED4 2, 3 100 42 - 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
FXD6 2, 3 65 35 22 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
FD6 2, 3 65 35 22 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
HFD6 2, 3 100 65 22 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
HFXD6 2, 3 100 65 25 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Table P1-13 – Main Breaker Gutter Dimensions Inches (mm)
Gutter Space Neutral Location
Main inches (mm) to Endwall
Breaker 20” wide box 24” wide box 20” wide box
BL, BLH, HBLb 8.500 (215) 10.500 (267) 10.000 (254)
BQD, BQD6b 7.750 (196) 9.750 (248) 10.000 (254)
NGBb 7.500 (190) 9.500 (241) 10.000 (254)
ED4, ED6, HED4 6.125 (156) 8.125 (206) 10.000 (254)
QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H 6.500 (165) 8.500 (216) 10.000 (254)
FD6, FXD6, HFD6, HFXD6 5.250 (133) 7.250 (184) 10.500 (267)
JD6, JXD6 15.000 (381) 15.000 (381) 26.500 (674)
 JD frame mounted vertically.
b For Revised P1 with Back-fed Main option, use Side Gutter
Wiring Spec Table P1-15.
 These dimensions are for Revised P1 only. See Original P1 cut sheets for valid
dimensions if needed (P1 production prior to January 2015).
Table P1-14 – Main Lug End Gutter Dimensions Inches (mm)

Amp End Gutter Neutral Location - to Endwall
Rating 20” wide box 24” wide box 20” wide box 24” wide box Feed-Thru (FT)
125 9.500 (242) 9.500 (242) 10.500 (267) 10.500 (267)
250 9.500 (242) 9.500 (242) 10.500 (267) 10.500 (267)
400 25.500 (648) 25.500 (648) 26.750 (680) 26.750 (680)
NOTE: Feed-thru lug and neutral wire bending space is 15.000” and 16.250” respectively on 400A panel.
Table P1-15 – Side Gutter Wiring

Space Inches (mm) (Fig P1-1) Fig P1-1
Reference Panel Panel Width 24”
Letter Width 20” Optional
Ab 6.375 (167) 8.375 (213)
BQD, BQD6 BQD, BQD6
Bb 5.500 (140) 7.500 (191)
Cb 5.000 (127) 7.000 (178)
D 6.125 (156) 8.125 (206)
E 6.500 (165) 8.500 (216)
F 5.250 (133) 7.250 (184)
 Subfeed mounting limit 1 per panel. Panel Width
20 in. (508 mm)
b For all Revised P1 panels using
BL/BQD or xGB breakers as mains Non-Feed-Thru (NFT)
in back-fed position, use this chart
for wiring space.
10
PANELBOARDS
Example of Back-fed xGB Main breaker installed

Panelboards
Trim / Front Dimensions
Standard Trim (FAS-Latch) Typical Dimensions
(Hinges available as shown on right side only)
(Typical 14 Gage Steel construction or approved equivalent)
Surface Flush # of
Box Size A A Hinges
26 26 27.5 2
32 32 33.5 2
Standard Trim (FAS-Latch)
38 38 39.5 2
(14 Gage Standard)
44 44 45.5 3
(Into stock includes surface or flush ver- Surface Flush # of
50 50 51.5 3
sions of this style in chart on page 11. Box Size A A Hinges
56 56 57.5 3
62 62 63.5 3
68 68 69.5 3
74 74 75.5 3
Also available
b Screw to Box Trim
(14 Gauge Std.)
b Piano Hinge Trim
(14 Gauge Std.)
a) Screw to box with
Piano Hinge Door
b) Hinge to Box with Piano Hinge
and Piano Hinge Door
c) Door-in-Door with Piano Hinge,
10
Both Doors
PANELBOARDS
Door in Door Front Hinged to Box Front

(14 Gage Standard) (14 Gage Standard)

Panelboards
Distribution Connector Kits (Circuit Breakers) Reference
Max
Amp Breaker Family Branch Breaker Type Revised P1 P2 P3 S5 F2
Rating
100 General BL, BLH, HBL, BQD6 No kit required BBKB32 BBKB32 6BL2C —
General NGB No kit required BBKNB32 BBKNB32 SNBD —
General NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 — BBKGB32 BBKGB32 SGB2DCAN —
125 General HEB — — BBKEB32 SEBD —
Sentron ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 — BBKED32 BBKED32 6E62b —
Sentron CED6 — BBKCED32 — 6CLE2b —
150 VL NDG, LDG — — — SDGD —
3VA 3VA61 — — — S3VA52TDCAN —
225 General Purpose QR2, QR2H, HQR2, HQR2H — BBKQR1 BBKQR2 6QR2CANd —
Sentron FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HHFD6 — — — 6F62b —
250 VL NFG, LFG — — — SFGD —
Sentron CFD6 — — — 6CLF1C —
3VA 3VA52, 3VA62 — — — S3VA52TDCAN —
Sentron JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HHJD6 — — — 6JJ62b —
VL (Single) NJG, LJG — — — SJG1D —
400
VL (Twin) NJG, LJG — — — SJG2D —
Sentron CJD6 — — — 6CLJ1C —
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HHLD6, SLD6,
Sentron — — — 6LL61C —
SHLD6, SJD6, SHJD6
600
Sentron CLD6 — — — 6CLL1C —
Sentron SCJD6, SCLD6 — — — 6SCL61C —
MXD6, MD6, HMD6, CMD6,
800 Sentron — — — 6M61C —
SHMD6, SCMD6
NXD6, ND6, HND6, CND6,
1200 Sentron — — — 6N61C —
SHND6, SCND6
10
PANELBOARDS
 NGB branch breakers can be installed in P1 interior ending with  3.75" plate accommodates six 1-pole breakers.  To field install a single 3VA52, 3VA61 or 3VA62 breaker
suffix "-NGB" only. d For QR filler plate only, use p/n: 6QR2FKCAN. For cop- to an existing strap, provision kit p/n: S3VA52PRCAN is
b These are aluminum connectors. If copper is required please per QR kit, use p/n: 6QR2CCAN. required.
add suffix C.

Panelboards
Type P1 Panelboard Modifications and Additions Selection
Panel Options
Enclosures Surge Protection Devices
b Extra gutter to sides or ends of the can b TPS3 02
b 24” wide boxes - Bus connected
b Hinged trims - Internally mounted (30A breaker required to feed SPD)
b Door-in-door trims - Externally mounted in a 15” high aux.
b Screw to the box trims enclosure (30A breaker required to feed SPD)
b Piano hinge trims b TPS3 09
b Painted boxes - Internally mounted (20A breaker required to feed SPD)
b Custom colors - Externally mounted (20A breaker required to feed SPD)
b Stainless steel trims and boxes b TPS3 12
b Type 1 enclosures (Std 16 Gage) - Externally mounted (40A breaker required to feed SPD)
b Type 3R/12 enclosures 16 Gauge Can w/ 14 Gauge front)
b Type 4 enclosures (14 Gauge only)
b Type 4X enclosures (14 Gauge only - 304SS Std, 316SS
Optional)
b Panel skirts
b Gaskets between trim and box
Panel Modifications
Enclosures
b Main Bus b Copper lugs, mechanical line and branch neutral

Standard main bus is tin-plated aluminum. For copper main b Bus mounted SPD/TVSS 
bus, add from the table for each panel. Includes copper
b Grounding of Panelboards
neutral cross bar. For copper neutral branch lugs, see Ground Bars except for brazed to box are shipped with
miscellaneous. the panel interior factory mounted.
b Compression lug for MLO
b
– Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bar – Standard
b Contactor mains - Mount in 23” enclosure ahead of panel. – Copper Non-Insulated Ground Bar
– Asco 920 through 225 amps – AL Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
– Asco 911 through 150 amps – CU Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
– Siemens LEN through 30 amps
b Shunt Trip on Main or Branch
b Branch and main breaker accessories
– Handle blocks BLb, BLH b, HBLb, BQD b, NGB b as branch use
– Handle locks 1” unit space for shunt trip.
b Feed-thru lugs

QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H, ED2, ED4, ED6,
Cannot be used in conjunction with SPD/TVSS or subfeed HED4, FD6, FXD6, HFD6
breakers. Do not add height to the panel.
HFXD6, JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HJXD6
Feed-thru Lugs Connector
Amp Rating Type CU/AL Range
AL/CU (1)–#6 AWG-
Mechanical 350 kcmil
CU (1)–#6 AWG-
250
Mechanical 350 kcmil
AL/CU (1)–#6 AWG-
Compression 350 kcmil
(2)–#1/0 -
AL/CU 250 kcmil or
AWG Mechanical (1)–#2 AWG-
600 kcmil
400
(1)–1/0-600 kcmil
CU
(2)-1/0-4/0
10
AL/CU (1) 400-600 kcmil AL

Compression (1) 400-500 kcmil CU
PANELBOARDS
b 200% neutral

NOTE: Specify copper or aluminum cable.

 Do not increase panel or enclosure size.
b Accessories on 1” pole breakers (BL, BQD, xGB, ED) will take 1” unit space.
 External to the panel, supplied in a separate enclosure.

Panelboards
Type P1 Panelboard Modifications and Additions Reference
Compression Lugs
Table P1-19 – Lugs
Amp Breaker Compression Box Height
Style Rating Type Connectors Addition
125
N/A (1) #6 AWG - 350 kcmil None
250
MLO
(1) 400 - 600 kcmil AL
400 N/A None
(1) 400 - 500 kcmil CU
125 ED4, ED6, HED4 (1) #14 AWG - 2/0 Box must go to 24” wide
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kcmil
225 QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H Box must go to 24” wide for All breakers
Main Breaker CU or AL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kcmil
250 FXD6, HFD6 Box must go to 24” wide for All breakers
CU or AL
NOTE: Standard compression lugs used for P1 panels are range taking lugs and require a particular crimping tool (tool is Hubbell/Anderson Versa
Crimp VC6 -for 250A) to accommodate the range. Consult factory for information. 200% neutral not available with compression lugs. xGB breakers
cannot accommodate compression lugs. (For 400A tool use Hubbell/Anderson Versa Crimp VC6FT/VC7FT - see instruction sheet for details.)
Enclosure Modifications
Type-4–Water Tight, Dust Tight, Type-4X For Type P1
Steel Enclosure Water Tight, Dust Tight and Corrosion Resistant
(Actual Type-4 enclosure is larger than (consult plant to verify actual enclosure size)
standard Type 1 enclosure. See chart
below for reference to approximate Table P1-21
actual size.) Enclosure – Stainless Steel
Catalogue Size (inches) (304SS is standard)
Number H W D
Table P1-20
B4X26 26 20 5.75
Standard Actual NEMA 4
B4X32 32 20 5.75
Box Height Enclosure Size
B4X38 38 20 5.75
(in inches) H W D
B4X44 44 20 5.75
32 32 20 8 B4X50 50 20 5.75
38 42 30 8 B4X56 56 20 5.75
44 48 36 8 B4X62 62 20 5.75
56 60 36 10 B4X68 68 20 5.75
B4X74 74 20 5.75
NOTE: Larger Type 4 enclosures are not
available. NOTE: 316SS is available as an option – must be specified.
Remote Switch Modifications

Table P1-22 – Control Power
Transformer Table P1-23 – Applications for a Remote Switch
Size VA Relay Switch Type Modification
0, 1 50 920 Mounts in 23” relay cabinet as a main only
2 75 LEN 30A mounts in 23” relay cabinet as a main only
3 150
4 250
Gauge Steel of Boxes/Fronts, Surface and Flush
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Gauge Steel
Table P1-24 – Remote Control H W Box Front/Door Type
Switch Modification 26-74 (660-1880) 20 (508) 16 14 Type 1
Description 26-74 (660-1880) 20 (508) 16b 16/14b Type 3R/12
Auxiliary Contacts (mounted, not wired) 32-60 (813-1524) 20-36 (508-914) 14 14 Type 4
26-74 (660-1879) 20 (508) 14d 14d Type 4X
2-Wire Control
36-60 (914-1524) 30-36 (762-914) N/A N/A Type 4X Non-Metallic
10
PANELBOARDS
 16 Gauge is Standard (14 Gauge & 12 Gauge are optional)

b 15 Gauge Steel Can with 14 Gauge Door or Similar Approved Construction
 No Optional Gauge available
d 304SS 14 Gauge Std., 316SS 14 Gauge optional
 Sizes do not match Standard Enclosure Sizes - See Table P1-21 - material is non-metallic - No Gauge Specified.

Panelboards
Type P1 Enclosure Details Dimensions
Type 1 Box
Box is symmetrical
³⁄₄ in. 20 in. ³⁄₄ in.

[19 ] [ 508 ] [19 ]
5.75 in.
[ 146 ]
Flush Mounting
Type 3R and
3R/12 Box
10
PANELBOARDS
 Dimensions are interior of the box. Add 5/8” to width for absolute dimension.
Add 1/8” to height for absolute dimension.
Dimensions shown in inches and millimeters [ ].

Panelboards
NEMA Enclosures Introduction
Enclosures
NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 3R

Primarily indoor use: Box and front needed for Outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of
complete enclosure. protection against rain, sleet, and damage from
external ice formation.
NEMA Type 12 (Siemens 3R/12) NEMA Type 4 or 4X

These enclosures for Lighting Panels are useable Indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree
as Type 12 or Type 3R by adding the gasket shown of protection against splashing water, corrosion,
around the door. windblown dust and rain, hose-directed water, and
damage from external ice formation.
(Siemens 3R/12
panelboard products
meet this requirement)
10
Note: NEMA Type 4

is painted steel.
PANELBOARDS
NEMA Type 4X is
typically stainless
or non-metallic.

Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboards General
Features
Flexibility is the hallmark of the P2 panel. without any extra provisions or space Short circuit rating – 200 KAIC max.
This panel offers a wide array of factory- required. FD 250 amp and JD 400 amp symmetrical or equal to the lowest rated
assembled options to meet almost all breakers are mounted as subfeed device installed unless a series rating
lighting panel applications. With this breakers outside of unit space. is indicated. Panels with subfeed or
design, the ability to mix breaker frames feed-thru lugs without a main device,
in unit space up to 250 amps will also Another unique feature of the P2 panel is circuit breaker or fusible unit, are limited
meet many distribution panel requirements that blank unit space can be added to to a three-cycle rating. The three-cycle
in a much smaller package. Bussing allow for future expansions or rating for the P2 panel is limited to 22
options for the P2 vary from aluminum modifications. Any expansions or KAIC. Note that the main device may
to copper. Standard bussing in the P2 modifications must be in 3" increments. be mounted remote from the panel.
panel is tin-plated. Silver-plated copper is BL, BQD, and ED frame breakers have 3"
also offered as an option. Subfeed lugs or 6" pole kits, and can be mixed in unit Bussing – The P2 panel has more
(up to 400 amp) are just a few of the space by these increments. Breakers of options to meet market requirements.
options of this unique panel. the same frame can cross from one The standard bussing is temperature
mounting to another if contiguous. QR rated aluminum. The rating is per the
Like a lighting panel, P2 is set up around frame breakers are mounted in 6" requirements of CSA C22.2 No.29 – the
18, 30, 42, 54, 66, 78, and 90 circuit increments for two- and three pole, single standard for panelboards. All aluminum
configurations. It will also allow the user mounted units. Changes in the unit space bussing is tin-plated. Optional bussing
to configure the panel to the smallest length for BL, BQD, or ED frame breakers for the P2 panel is copper.
possible size. The P2 panel starts with require an addition deadfront, center strip The copper bus option for this panel is
9" of unit space (18 circuits of 1" pole kit. Check with sales or the factory for tin-plated as standard or silver.
breakers). Breakers mounted in unit additional unit space kits.
space can be mixed and matched to Weight – Approximate
meet customer requirements. All 1" pole Main Lug / Main Breaker Total panelboard weight when filled
breakers (BL, BQD, ED frames) are Enclosure – Standard Type 1 enclosure with a normal quantity of breakers and
mounted in 3" or 6" pole increments. is 20" wide x 5.75" deep. Box Height is accessories is about 3 lbs. (1 kg) per
Breaker frames, above 125 amps, are determined by main device and unit inch (54g per mm) of box height.
mounted in 6" single breaker mountings. space. See charts for box height.
As an example of a minimum panel, (6)
20 amp 1-pole BL breakers (3" of unit Voltage – 600V AC max.
space) and a 3-pole 225 amp QR breaker 250V DC max.
(6" of unit space) equaling 9" of unit Amperage – 600 amp max.
space can be configured in a P2 panel

Width Height Box Front/Door Type
20 (508) 26-74 (660-1880) 14 14 Type 1
20 (508) 26-74 (660-1880) 16b 16/14b Type 3R/12
20-36 (508-914) 32-60 (813-1524) 14 14 Type 4
20 (508) 26-74 (660-1879) 14 14 Type 4X
10
PANELBOARDS
 16 Gauge is Standard (14 Gauge & 12 Gauge are optional)

 304SS 14 Gauge Std., 316SS 14 Gauge optional

Panelboards
Distributor Stock - Type P2 Main Lug Only Reference
Interior Numbering System
Type P2 unassembled panelboards are
available as main lug only and come with
provisions for the branch breaker type
selected.
I 2 C 4 2 M L 2 5 0 A - BL
� � � � � � � � � � � �
1. P2 Interior (I2)
2. Voltage and System

A = 120/240V, 1-Phase 3-Wire
C = 208Y/120V, 3-Phase 4-Wire
L = 600Y/347V, 3-Phase 4-Wire
3, 4. Circuit – 30, 42, 66, 78, 90
5, 6. Mains ML = Main Lug
7, 8, 9. Amperage – 600A max
10. Main Bus Material A = Aluminum

C = Copper
11. Branch connector (provision) Type - BL, BQD, ED
Branch Breakers
Panel Type Voltage (Max.) Breaker Type Power Product Catalogue Page
240 BL, BLH, HBL, BQD
P2 See section 5
600/347 BQD6, ED6
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Distributor Stock - Type P2 Main Lug Only Selection
Interior, Box and Trim Selection
600A Max. — 20" Wide x 5.75" Deep
1. Determine voltage, system, amperage 2. Select the type of box and trim 3. List required branch circuit breakers:
and type of branch breaker needed. Type BL, BQD or ED breakers.
connectors to select the appropriate
Interior from the table below.
Type P2 Unassembled Panelboards

Interiors Only - Less Branch Breakers Boxes Trim
Amperes
Max. No. Provision Height -
Rating Main Lug + provisions Type 1 Type 3R/12 Surface Flushb
of Circuits Type Inches (mm)
Mains
1-Phase, 3-Wire 120/240V

66 I2A66ML250A-BL 56 (1422) B56 WP56 S56B F56B
250 BL/BQD
78 I2A78ML250A-BL 62 (1575) B62 WP62 S62B F62B
42 I2A42ML400A-BL 50 (1270) B50 WP50 S50B F50B

400 BL/BQD
66 I2A66ML400A-BL 62 (1575) B62 WP62 S62B F62B
3-Phase, 4-Wire 208Y/120V

42 I2C42ML250A-BL 44 (1118) B44 WP44 S44B F44B
250 66 BL/BQD I2C66ML250A-BL 56 (1422) B56 WP56 S56B F56B
78 I2C78ML250A-BL 62 (1575) B62 WP62 S62B F62B
42 I2C42ML400A-BL 50 (1270) B50 WP50 S50B F50B

66 I2C66ML400A-BL 62 (1575) B62 WP62 S62B F62B
400 BL/BQD
78 I2C78ML400A-BL 68 (1727) B68 WP68 S68B F68B
90 I2C90ML400A-BL 74 (1880) B74 WP74 S74B F74B
600 66 BL/BQD I2C66ML600A-BL 62 (1575) B62 WP62 S62B F62B
3-Phase, 4-Wire 600Y/347V

30 ED I2L30ML250A-ED 38 (965) B38 WP38 S38B F38B
42 ED I2L42ML250A-ED 44 (1118) B44 WP44 S44B F44B
250 BQD6 I2L66ML250A-BQD 56 (1422) B56 WP56 S56B F56B

66
ED I2L66ML250A-ED 56 (1422) B56 WP56 S56B F56B
BQD6 I2L78ML250A-BQD 62 (1575) B62 WP62 S62B F62B

78

42

66
400
78

90

600 66
10
PANELBOARDS
 Hinged door included with type 3R/12 enclosures.

b Flush trims extend 3/4" beyond each side of the base
box dimensions.
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboards Selection/Dimensions
Standard Circuit P2 Panels
Base Box Size Requirements for P2 Panels with Standard Line Lugs. Unit Spaces range from 9" to 45" (in 6" increments).
Boxes range from 26" to 74" high (in 6" increments). Inclusion of optional modifications may require size increases that must
be added to these base values to calculate the final box size for the panel (see pages 6-28, 10-37). Values in brackets [ ], at
the bottom of each column, indicate the maximum allowable 1" module branch poles for each main type.
P2 Panels with Standard Line Lugs. Unit Space (starting with 9" and adding 6" increments) “A” Dimension
“B” Main Lugs Main Breakers
Dimen- 125A 125A 225A 225A 250A 250A
sion Box 400A 125A Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. 250A 400A 400A 600A 600A
Height 125A 250A 600A BL, BQD, ED ED CED QR QR FD FD CFD JD CJD LD CLD
26 9 — — 9 — — — — — — — — — — —
32 15 9 — 15 9 9 9 — — — — — — — —
38 21 15 9 21 15 15 15 9 9 — — — — — —
44 27 21 15 27 21 21 21 15 15 9 — — — — —
50 27 27 21 33 27 27 27 21 21 15 9 9 — — —
56 39 27 27 39 33 33 33 27 27 21 15 15 — 9 —
62 45 39 33 45 39 39 39 33 33 27 21 21 9 15 9
68 51 45 39 51 45 45 45 39 39 33 27 27 15 21 15
74 57 51 45 57 54 54 54 45 45 39 33 33 21 27 21
[114p] [102p] [90p] [114p] [102p] [102p] [102p] [90p] [90p] [78p] [66p] [66p] [42p] [54p] [42p]
Main breaker wire Main lug wire bending

bending space diagram space diagram
Box depth = 5.75 in. (146 mm) Box depth = 5.75 in. (146 mm)
Box width – 20 in. (508 mm) Box width – 20 in. (508 mm)
for 100-600A for 100-600A
10
PANELBOARDS
 NOTE: The vertical main breaker application for ED, QR, and FD adds 6" of box height.

Panelboards
Standard Circuit P2 Panels
Main Breaker Wire Bending Branch Breaker Side Gutters Inches (mm)
Standard Circuits (up to 54 1" module branch poles) Reference
Letter Panel Width 20" (508)
Panel Amps Breaker Frames C D
A 5.750 (146)
BL 5.75 8.00
100 B 5.125 (130)
BQD 5.13 8.00
C 4.000 (102)
ED (horiz.) 4.00 8.00
125 Db 5.000 (127)
ED (vert.) 6.56 11.13
E 4.625 (117)
QR (horiz.) 5.00 7.00
225
QR (vert.) 10.06 16.69
FD (horiz.) 5.00 7.00
250
FD (vert.) 13.25 22.72
400 JD 15.38 25.00
600 LD 15.38 23.00
Main Lug Connectors

Standard Circuits (up to 54 1" module branch poles)
Panel Amps Standard Connectors C D
125 (1) #14-2/0 6.62 8.19
250 (1) #6 AWG - 350 MCM 11.75 10.72
(1) #4 AWG - 600 MCM 14.00 13.09
400
or (2) #6 - 250 MCM
600 (2) #4 AWG - 500 MCM 14.00 11.00
BL, BLH, HBL BL, BLH, HBL,

A A
HBLF2, BLFB, BLHFB HBLF2, BLFB, BLHFB
B BQD, BQD6 BQD, BQD6 B
C ED, ED4, ED6, HED4 ED, ED4, ED6, HED4 C
D QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H D

(Single Mounted)
Panel Width
20 in. (508 mm)
10
PANELBOARDS
 Refer to diagrams at the bottom of page 10-26.

b Single branch mounting construction.

Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboards Selection
Main Breaker Selection 
Max. Interrupting Rating (kA)
Ampere Breaker Ref.
Rating Type 240V 480V 600V Catalogue No. Available Trip Values
70 BQD6 65 — 10 B6 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
BL 10 — — BL 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
HBL 65 — — HB 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
100
BQD 65 14 — BQ 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BLH 22 — — BH 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
ED4 65 18 — E4 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
125 ED6 100 25 14 E6 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
HED4 100 42 — H4 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
QR2 10 — — QR 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
QRH2 25 — — Q4 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
HQR2 65 — — Q5 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
HQR2H 100 — — Q6 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
225 FD6 65 35 18 FD 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
FXD6 65 35 18 FX 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
HFD6 100 65 25 HF 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
HFXD6 100 65 25 H2 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
CFD6b 200 200 100 CF 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
FD6 65 35 18 FD 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
FXD6 65 35 18 FX 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
250
HFD6 100 65 35 HF 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
HFXD6 65 35 25 H2 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
JXD6b 65 35 25 JX 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
JD6b 65 35 35 J6 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
HJXD6b 100 65 35 H6 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
HJD6b 100 65 35 H5 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
400
SJD6b 65 35 25 SJ 200, 300, 400
SHJD6b 100 65 35 S2 200, 300, 400
CJD6b 200 200 100 CJ 200, 300, 400
SCJD6b 200 200 100 SC 200, 300, 400
LXD6b 65 35 25 LX 450, 500, 600
LD6b 65 35 25 L6 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
HLXD6b 100 65 35 HL 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
HLD6b 100 65 35 HO 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
600
SLD6b 65 35 25 SL 300, 400, 500, 600
SHLD6b 100 65 35 S6 300, 400, 500, 600
CLD6b 200 150 100 CL 300, 400, 500, 600
SCLD6 200 150 100 C6 300, 400, 500, 600
Vertically Mounted Main Breaker (available in 2-pole or 3-pole)

Ampere Rating Breaker Type(s) Unit Space (in.)
100 ED4, ED6, HED4 6
FXD6, FD6, HFD6
225 6
QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H
Subfeed Breakers (available in 2-pole or 3-pole)

Mounting Position When Ampere Maximum Interrupting Rating
Breaker Used as Subfeed Breaker Ratings (kA) Symmetrical
Type Vertical For Load 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC
FD6 , FXD6 Twin 70–250 65 35 22
HFD6 , HFXD6 Twin 70–250 100 65 25
JD6 d, JXD6 Single 200–250 65 35 25
HJD6 d, HJXD6 Single 200–250 100 65 35
10
PANELBOARDS
 Interchangeable trip main breakers are mounted at top

Twin
mounted subfeed breakers are mounted at the dSubfeed breaker is mounted at bottom of panelboard
of panel only. bottom of panelboard only and adds 24" to the panel only. 250 amp subfeed breaker adds 24" to the panel
b Vertically mounted.

height. height. (Only for use with MLO)

Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Standard Modifications and Additions Selection
Branch Circuit Breakers
Max. Bolt-On Availability Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA)
Amp Breaker
Rating Type Amps 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 120V AC 120/240V AC 240V AC 277V AC 480V AC 600V AC 250V DC
70 BQD6 15-70 u u u 65 65 65 — — 10 —
15–60 u u u 10 — — — — — —
BL 70 u u u — 10 — — — — —
80–100 — u u — — 10 — — — —
15–60 u u u — 22 — — — — —
BLH 70 u u u — 22 — — — — —
80–100 — u u — — 22 — — — —
15–55 u u u — 65 — — — — —
HBL 60–100 — u u — 65 — — — — —
BLR (240V) 15–60 — u — — — 10 — — — —
70–100 — u — — — 10 — — — —
15–30 u u — 10 — — — — — —
BLE (GFCI)
100 40–60 — u — — 10 — — — — —
20–30 u — — 22 — — — — — —
BLEH
15–60 u u — — 22 — — — — —
15–30 u u — 10 — — — — — —
BLF (GFCI)
40–60 u u — — 10 — — — — —
15–30 u u — 22 — — — — — —
BLHF (GFCI)
40–60 u u — — 22 — — — — —
HBLF2 (GFCI) 15–30 u — — 65 — — — — — —
BAF 15–20 u u — 10 — — — — — —
BAFH 15–20 u u — 22 — — — — — —
15–60 u u u — 65 — 14 — — 14
BQD
70–100 u u u — 65 — — 14 — 14
15–60 u u u 100 100 100 25 25 14 14d
NGB2 70–100 u u u 100 100 100 25 25 14 14d
110–125 — u u 100 100 100 25 25 14 14d
15–60 u u u 100 100 100 35 35 22 14d
HGB2 70–100 u u u 100 100 100 35 35 22 14d
110–125 — u u 100 100 100 35 35 22 14d
15–60 u u u 100 100 100 65 65 25 14d
LGB2 70–100 u u u 100 100 100 65 65 25 14
110–125 — u u 100 100 100 65 65 25 14
15–60 u u u 65 — — 22 — — —
125
ED4 70–100 u u u — — 65 — 18 — 30
110–125 — u u — — 65 — 18 — —
15–60 — u u — — 65 — 25 18 30
ED6 70–100 — u u — — 65 — 25 18 —
110–125 — u u — — 65 — 25 18 —
15–60 u u u — — 65 — 42 18 30
HED4 70–100 u u u — — 65 — 42 18 —
110–125 — u u — — 65 — 42 18 —
15 — — u — — 200 — — 100 —
CED6d
20-125 — u u — — 200 — — 100 —
QR2 100–225 — u u — — 10 — — — —
QRH2 100–225 — u u — — 25 — — — —
225
HQR2 100–225 — u u — — 65 — — — —
HQR2H 100–225 — u u — — 100 — — — —
Branch Neutral Connections

Wire Range Max. Number of Connections Max. Ampb
#14-#6 26 65
#14-1/0 28 125
#6-350 kcmil 3 250
(1) #4-600 kcmil
10
1 400
or (2) #6-250 kcmil
PANELBOARDS
 1-PoleHED 4 15–30A Rated 65kA 35 through 100A Rated 25kA. NOTE: QR Breakers are single mounted in unit space and take 6" of unit space.
b Based on 75 degree copper. Limited to (4) per panel max. BL, HBL, BLH and BQD breakers are mounted in
 2-pole only (or) two outer poles of 3-pole breaker. common mountings in 3" or (6) pole increments. ED4, ED6 and HED4 breakers are
d CED6 breaker can be used in 400A panel with copper bussing only.
mounted in common mountings in 3" or (6) pole increments.
Panel enclosure required is 24'' (610mm) wide.

Panelboards
Enclosure Modifications Subfeed and Feed-Thru (for Bus mounted SPD See Section 9
2-pole or 3-pole)
Description b TPS3 01
Unit - Bus connected
Type 1 with gasket
Ampere Connector Space - Internally mounted (30A breaker required
Type 1 with dripshield
Rating Cu/Al Wire Range (inches) to feed SPD)
Type 3R - Waterproof and silicone free
Type 3R/12 - Dustproof - Externally mounted in a 15" high aux.
Type 4/4X - Standard type 304 Stainless Steel Subfeed (Double) Lugs for Main Lug enclosure (30A breaker required to feed SPD)
Type 4/4X - Type 316 Stainless Steel Panelboards Only b TPS3 09
Wider enclosure - 24”, 30'' or 36'' wide - Internally mounted (20A breaker required
100/125 (2)—#12 AWG - 2/0 AWG 6
Hinged trim (2)—#6 AWG-350 to feed SPD)
Piano hinged trim 225/250 6
kcmil - Externally mounted (20A breaker required
Trim with padlock (4)—250 kcmil to feed SPD)
Door-in-door trim 400 6
(2)—600 kcmil TPS3 12
Screw to the box trim b
- Externally mounted (40A breaker required
Trim with gasketed door Feed-Thru Lugs — Cannot be used to feed SPD)
Stainless steel trim
in conjonction with SPD or Subfeed
Trim mounted devices Breakers (200% Neutral not available)
(Devices mounted into a 10" minimum box Service Entrance Label
extension) Amp Connector
Rating Type Wire Range Type P2 Panelboards are factory labeled
• Pilot lights
• Toggle switches (1) #6 AWG - “SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERVICE
Al Mechanical ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT” when identified
• Push buttons 2/0 AWG Al/Cu
(1) #6 AWG - as "Service Entrance" at the time of order
Painted boxes 125 Cu Mechanical
350 kcmil Cu entry. For regulations governing this
Custom colors
(1) #6 AWG - feature, please consult CEC, CSA or local
Increase gauge trims Compression
350 kcmil Al/Cu electrical authorities.
and boxes
(1) #6 AWG -
Stainless steel trims Al Mechanical
350 kcmil Al/Cu
and boxes, Type 1 Grounding of Panelboards
(1) #6 AWG -
250 Cu Mechanical
350 kcmil Cu Ground Bars except for brazed to box are
Meters (1) #6 AWG - shipped with the panel interior factory
(Contact sales for pricing and application Compression
350 kcmil Al/Cu mounted.
engineering for space requirements)
(1) #2 AWG -
600 kcmil Al/Cu and
b Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
Panel Skirts See page 10-64 Al Mechanical
(1) 1/0 AWG - b Copper Non-Insulated Ground Bar
250 kcmil Al/Cu b Al Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
(1) 1/0 AWG - b Cu Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
Panel Bus Modifications 600 kcmil or
400 Cu Mechanical
(2) 1/0 AWG -
Bus Material 4/0 AWG Shunt Trip on Main or Branch
Represented by “A”, “C” or “E” in the (1) 250 kcmil - BL, BLH, HBL, NGB, xGB2, ED6,
600 kcmil Cu or HED4, uses 1" unit space for shunt trip.
11th digit of the catalogue number. Compression
(2) #6 AWG -
350 kcmil Al/Cu All others may be used on mains or
Standard bussing is tin plated Al, alternate bus
bar material can be selected: (2) #2 AWG - subfeeds.
Al Mechanical
Tin plated copper 600 kcmil Al/Cu
b (2) #2 AWG -
Contactor Mains or Submain*
b Silver plated copper - optional Cu Mechanical
600 kcmil Cu b Asco 920 through 225 amps – adds
(2) #6 AWG - 12" unit space as main, 15" unit
600 space as submain
350 kcmil Al/Cu
Compression (2) 400 kcmil - b External with manufacture supplied enclosure
600 kcmil Al or Siemens LEN through 30 amps - adds 6" as
(2) 400 kcmil - b
main; 18" for up to 100A submain and 21"
500 kcmil Cu for 200A. 7.75" depth cans for up to 100A
and 10" depth cans for 200A.
Increase Capacity Neutral up to 200%
(N/A on Feed Thru Lugs & Subfeed Lugs)
Main Bus Amps Branch and Main Breaker Accessories
125 See breaker section of this catalog.
250 • Handle blocks
400 • Handle locks
600 • Aux. Contacts1
10
• UVR
See page 10-37 for unit space adders and
compatibility with other options.
PANELBOARDS
(Devices mounted and wired to the trim

should also have hinged trim specified)
 Accessories on 1" pole breakers (BL, BQD, ED) will take unit space.

Panelboards
Embedded Micro Metering Module™ (Type P2 Panelboard) Selection
SEM3 System configured in Panelboards
The Siemens SEM3 system can be configured for factory The SEM3 system can be factory installed in unit space in
installation in branch circuit monitoring applications. This type P2 & S5 Siemens panel boards and in Siemens switch-
option can lower the installation time of the system for the boards. Please note P1 and P3 configurations are not avail-
installer while providing a factory warrantied solution. able at this time and the amount of unit space needed varies
depending upon the application. Please note that lead time
adders will apply and may vary depending upon the configura-
tion of the system.
SEM3 for use in Siemens Panelboards
Type P2: Enclosure

b Available in a Type 1 rated enclosure.
b Minimum width & depth: 30” width x 7.75'' depth
b Height: Up to 74" depending on branch breaker selection
– Addition of monitoring on some mains (primary and subfeed) may require additional box
length. In these cases the box will be increased to the next size available as a standard
design. The option of monitoring on mains is not available for equipment rated for service
entrance.
– In cases where enclosure size is increased all multi-section panels will be increased to
match the largest section.
Controller
SEM3 controller is mounted in a separate enclosure (relay cabinet) opposite of the feed loca-
tion (i.e., bottom mount for top feed) with a height of 24''. Each controller will be powered by
direct tap connection to the panel section or through a 150VA potential transformer for sys-
tems above 480V. the direct tap connection will use 2 circuits from the distribution section
(i.e., 42 circuits panel will have 40 circuits usable for distribution. Each controller can monitor
up to 45 circuits. Applications that require monitoring more than 45 circuits will require addi-
tional P2 panel complete with SEM3.
Current Transformers (CTs)

Five sizes of CTs are available for use in the P2 panel: 50, 125, 250, 400 & 600 amp. All CTs
are pre-mounted to a support bracket that attaches to the base rail of the interior of the panel
board. Each bracket supports a maximum of 3 CTs and is designed for the breaker selected
(brackets are not interchangeable between breaker frames). Each CT will be attached to a data
module that is placed in the meter racks.
Meter Racks
10
All meter racks will be installed next to the SEM3 controller in the relay cabinet.
NOTE: Monitoring of 45 circuits will require: two 21 position racks and one 3 position rack
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Embedded Micro Metering Module™ (Type P2 Panelboard) Selection
Example P2 Panel with SEM3 Type 1 Enclosure (36" Wide x 7.75'' Deep)
P2 Devices Enclosure heights are in 6" increments from 26" thru 74".
Enclosure sizes Enclosure heights: 26", 32", 38", 44", 50", 56", 62", 68", 74"
Example below is largest standard P2 enclosure for factory assembled panel
with all small (1") branch breakers installed.
36" std. width
Relay Cabinet which includes SEM3 components:

b Meter rack
b 3 Phase PT 150VA
b Controller:
- 21 circuits monitored: one controller and one
21-pos rack
- 42 circuits monitored: one controller and
two 21-pos racks
- 45 circuits monitored: one controller and
two 21-pos racks plus one 3-pos rack
Main Breaker / Main Lug space

varies based on selected options
Unit space varies

based on selected options
Note: All circuits do not have to be monitored

by SEM3 - user can select any circuits in this
space to be monitored.
Based on smallest branch breakers and a

3-phase main being monitored.
There is a maximum of 42 circuits that can be
monitored with the configuration shown.
Some selections of main breakers and
other subfeed options could limit this further.
In this situation there is 27" of unit space

available - so 54 branch circuits could be
monitored. If monitoring the main three
additional circuits could be monitored with a
total of 57 circuits.
This requires two controllers and three 21

position racks using 15" of unit space.
10
- see below -
Note: If subfeed space is needed - it will take

PANELBOARDS
away from available unit space.

Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Standard Modifications and Additions Selection
Box Size Additions for Optional Features
Main Lugs Main Breakers
125A
Horiz. BL, 125A 125A 225A 225A 225A 250A 250A
BQD,ED, Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Vert. 400A 400A 600A 600A
Options 125A 250A 400A 600A xGB CED ED QR QR FD FD CFD JD CJD LD CLD
*Min. Box Size 26" 32" 38" 38" 26" 32" 32" 32" 38" 38" 44" 50" 50" 62" 56" 62"
200% Neutral
0 0 6 (all) 6 (all) 0 0 0 N/A 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0
(lug type)
Std. Lugs
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(100% Neut. PNL)
CU Lugs
6 6 6 0 N/A N/A 0 N/A 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0
(100% Neut. PNL)
Comp Lugs
6 6 6 6 N/A N/A 0 N/A 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0
(100% Neut. PNL)
Feed-thru
6 6 12 12 6 6 6 N/A 6 N/A 6 6 12 12 12 12
Standard Lugs
Feed-thru Cu Lugs
6 6 12 N/A N/A N/A 6 N/A 6 N/A 6 6 12 12 N/A N/A
Feed-thru
Comp Lugs 6 12 12 N/A N/A N/A 6 N/A 6 N/A 12 12 12 12 N/A N/A
Subfeed
0 6 6 N/A — — — — — — — — N/A — — —
Standard Lugs
(1) FD Subfeed
N/A 12 12 12 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
(Horizontal Mtg.)
(2) FD Subfeed
N/A 24 24 24 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 24 24 24 24 N/A N/A N/A
(Vertical Mtg.)
SPD 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
NOTE: N/A = OPTION NOT AVAILABLE

*Min. Box Size, corresponding to 9" of Unit Space.
Compression Lugs
Style Rating Type Connectors Addition - Inches (mm)
125 N/A (1)#6 - 350 kcmil Al/Cu 6 (152)
250 N/A (1)#6 - 350 kcmil Al/Cu 6 (152)
MLO (1) 400 - 600 kcmil Cu or
400 N/A 6 (152)
(2)#6 - 350 kcmil Al/Cu
(2)#6 - 350 kcmil Cu or Cu/Al or
600 N/A 6 (152)
400 - 600 kcmil Al/Cu
Box must go to 24" wide on CED6 breaker only
100 ED4, ED6, HED4, CED6 (1)#14-2/0 AWG Cu or Al
Add 6" to box height for NØ
225 QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H (1)#6 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu or Al Box must go to 24" wide
Box must go to 24" wide for all breakers
250 FXD6, HFD6, CFD6 (1)#6 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu or Al
Requires an additional 6.0" box height
Main
Breaker JD6, JXD6, HJD6,
400 CJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, (2)#1/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Cu or Al 9 (229)
SCJD6
LD6, LXD6, HLD6,
600 CJD6, SLD6, SHLD6, (2)#2/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Cu or Al 6 (152)
SCLD6
Alternate Lugs
Amp Breaker Standard AL Box Height
Style Rating Type Connectors Addition - Inches (mm)
10
(1) 250 - 750 kcmil or

MLO 400 N/A 6 (152)
(2)#3/0 AWG - 250 kcmil Cu or Al
PANELBOARDS
JD6, JXD6, HJD6,

Main
400 CJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, (1)#4/0 AWG - 750 kcmil Cu or Al 6 (152)
Breaker
SCJD6
 Not availabe for feed thru lug.

Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Connector Modifications Selection
Description
Wider enclosure - 24'' wide
Type 1 with gasket
Type 1 with dripshield
Type 2 enclosures
Type 3R enclosures
Type 3R/12 enclosures
Type 4—Water Tight, Dust Tight,

Steel Enclosure (Actual NEMA-4
b
enclosure is larger than standard

Type 1 enclosure. See chart below for
reference to approximate actual size.)
Standard Actual NEMA 4

Enclosure Size
b
Box Height
(in inches) H W D
32 32 20 8
38 42 30 8
44 48 36 8
56 60 36 10
NOTE: Larger Type 4 enclosures are
not available.
Type 4X—Water Tight, Dust Tight and Corrosion Resistant 
(consult plant for actual enclosure size)

Enclosure – Stainless Steel
Catalogue Size (inches) (304SS is standard)
Number H W D
B4X26 26 20 5.75
B4X32 32 20 5.75
B4X38 38 20 5.75
B4X44 44 20 5.75
B4X50 50 20 5.75
B4X56 56 20 5.75
B4X62 62 20 5.75
B4X68 68 20 5.75
B4X74 74 20 5.75
NOTE: 316SS is available as an option - must be specified.
 16 Gauge Cans w/ 14 Gauge Front)
b 14 Gauge only
 14 Gauge only - 304SS Std, 316SS Optional)

Width Height Box Front/Door Type
20 (508) 26-74 (660-1880) 14 14 Type 1
20 (508) 26-74 (660-1880) 16b 16/14b Type 3R/12
20-36 (508-914) 32-60 (813-1524) 14 14 Type 4
20 (508) 26-74 (660-1879) 14d 14d Type 4X
30-36 (762-914) 36-60 (914-1524) N/A N/A Type 4X Non-Metallic
10
PANELBOARDS

 No Optional Gauge available
d 304SS 14 Gauge Std., 316SS 14 Gauge optional
 Sizes do not match Standard Enclosure Sizes - See Table P1-21 - material is non-metallic - No Gauge Specified.

Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Kits and Accessories Selection
Standard Enclosures
Catalogue Number Options For Type 1 Trims
Box
Type 1 Standard Trim Items must be ordered as manual line item on Spartanburg
Height
Inches Box Surface Flush Type 3R Type 3R/12  Hinged trim – Replace “B” suffix with “H”
26 B26 S26B F26B NR26 WP26 Door-in-door – Replace “B” suffix with “D”
32 B32 S32B F32B NR32 WP32 Screw to Box - Replace "B" suffix with "C"
38 B38 S38B F38B NR38 WP38 Metal card holder - Add "M" suffix on all trims
44 B44 S44B F44B NR44 WP44 Option For 24" Wide Enclosures with Equal Gutter on Both
50 B50 S50B F50B NR50 WP50 Sides (Excludes Type 3R)
56 B56 S56B F56B NR56 WP56 24" wide with equal gutter on both sides - Add “24” as prefix
62 B62 S62B F62B NR62 WP62
68 B68 S68B F68B NR68 WP68
74 B74 S74B F74B NR74 WP74
 Same as Type 3R with Gasket added for Type 12 Spec.
Breaker Kits and Accessories

Kit Number Description Contents
BBKB32 BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKB32AT BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Al/Tin Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
BBKB32CS BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Silver
BBKCED32 CED branch breacker kit Cu/Tin
Kit contains connector kit for P2 400A, 24" wide only
BBKCED32CS CED branch breacker kit Cu/Silver
BBKED32 ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
Kit contains breaker support, inter-phase barrier, (3) A/C connectors,
BBKED32AT ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Al/Tin
(1) B connector, hardware
BBKED32CS ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Silver
BBKNB32 (P2/P3) NGB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
BBKGB32 NGB2/HGB2/LGB2 6-pole Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
Kit to contain all connectors and cover plates necessary to mount both 2
BBKQR1  QR branch breaker kit for 2 and 3-pole single mount in P2 panel
and 3-pole breakers
DFK1 BL, BQD, ED deadfront kit for 1" pole breakers Center strips 3", 6", 9", 15", 21" plus mounting hardware
DFFP3 Deadfront filler 3" 3" empty space filler and hardware
BNK2 Branch neutral (P2) Three tier lug with mounting hardware to increase neutral capacity
P2BK1 P2 250A max. Bonding Kit Bonding strap and hardware
P2 Filler for QR. Horizontal or vertical mount. 1-phase/3- Kit contains all cover plates necessary to change from QJ to QR both
BBKQRP1FK
phase. 2 and 3-pole breakers.
 Although QR is rated 250A, it is limited to 225A in panelboard.
Type P2 Panelboards
Catalogue Catalogue
Number Description Number Description
EGK Al Ground Bus 44 Connections NBK6 Number Strips 86-168 (snap-in type, P2/P3 panels)
P2BK1 P2 250A Bonding Kit NBK7 Number Strips 169-210 (snap-in type, P2/P3 panels)
P2BK2 P2 400A Bonding Kit NBK8 Number Strips 211-252 (snap-in type, P2/P3 panels)
P2BK3 P2 600A Bonding Kit ECGK Cu Ground Bus 44 Connections
10
IMK1 Interior Adjusting Kit IGK Insulated Al Ground Bus

9271-1 Plastic directory card holder ICGK Insulated Cu Ground Bus
PANELBOARDS
SDKN Drip shield 20''W x 5.75''D EWK2 End Wall Kit with Knockouts (24" W x 7.75" DP)
1" Filler Plate – (suitable for replacing QF3-UL in P1 thru S5
NBK3 Number Strips 1-42 (snap-in type, P2/P3 panels) DFFP1A
Panelboards and Switchboards)
NBK4 Number Strips 43-84 (snap-in type, P2/P3 panels) MCHK Metallic directory card holder
NBK5 Number Strips 85-126 (snap-in type, P2/P3 panels) EBF1 NEB/HEB Filler Plate

Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboards Dimensions
Type 1 Box
Box is symmetrical
³⁄₄ in. 20 in. ³⁄₄ in.

[19 ] [ 508 ] [19 ]
5.75 in.
[ 146 ]
Flush Mounting
Type 3R and
3R/12 Box
10
PANELBOARDS
 Dimensions are interior of the box. Add 5/8” to width for absolute dimension.
Add 1/8” to height for absolute dimension.

Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboards General
Features Main Lug/Main Breaker
Enclosure – Standard Type 1 enclosure
Another innovation from Siemens is
is 24" wide x 7.75" deep. X Box Height
the P3 panel. It is a smaller, footprint
is determined by main device and unit
distribution panel to fit a large number
space. See charts for box height.
of applications that require more (or
larger) branch devices than the lighting Voltage – 600V AC max.
panel class offer. This panel offers a 250V DC max.
wide array of factory-assembled Amperage – 800 amp max.
options, and has the ability to mix Short Circuit Rating –
breaker frames in unit space up to 200,000 A @ 480 Vac
250 amps. Bussing options for the P3
vary from the standard aluminum to 100,000 A @ 600 Vac IR max.
copper designs. All bussing in the P3 symmetrical or equal to the lowest
panel is tin-plated as a standard. rated device installed unless a series
Silver-plated copper is offered as an rating is indicated. Panels with subfeed
option on a copper bus. Subfeed lugs or feed-thru lugs without a main device,
(up to 400 amp) are just a few of the circuit breaker or fusible unit, are limited
options of this unique panel. to a three-cycle rating. The three-cycle
rating for the P3 panel is limited to 22
The P3 panel configurations, defined by Kaic. Note that the main device may be
the unit space, allow for a given mounted remote from the panel.
amperage, main device, and box height.
The P3 panel starts with a 56" high box. Bussing – The P3 panel has more
Breaker unit space can be mixed and options to meet market requirements.
matched to meet customer The standard bussing is aluminum.
requirements. All 1" pole breakers (BL, The rating is per the requirements of
BQD, ED, xGB frames) are mounted CSA C22.2 No.29 – the standard for
in 3" or 6" pole increments. Breakers panelboards. All aluminum bussing is
frames, above 125 amps, are mounted tin-plated. Optional bussing for the P3
in 6" single or twin breaker mountings. panel is copper. The copper bus option
As an example panel, FD 250 amp and for this panel is tin-plated.
JD 400 amp breakers are mounted as Weight – Approximate
subfeed breakers outside of unit space. Total panelboard weight when filled
Like other distribution panels, the P3 with a normal quantity of breakers and
panel can have blank space added into accessories is about 5 lbs. (1 kg) per
the panel to allow for future expansions inch (54g per mm) of box height.
or modifications. Any expansions or Gauge Steel of Boxes Fronts,
modifications must be in 3" increments. Surface & Flush
BL, BQD and ED frame breakers have
Dimensions in inches (mm) Gauge Steel
3" or 6-pole kits and can be mixed in Width Height Box Front
unit space by these increments. 24" 56 - 80" #14 #14
Breakers of the same frame can cross (610) (1422, 2032)
from one mounting to another if
contiguous. xGB frame breakers cannot
be mixed with other frame types. Any
expansion or modification must be in
3" increments also. QR frame breakers
are mounted in 6" increments for two
and three pole single and twin mounted
units. Changes in the unit space
length for BL, BQD, xGB, or ED frame
breakers require an additional deadfront
center strip kit. Check with sales or the
factory for additional unit space kits.
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Panel Unit Space To Box Height Requirements
P3 Panels With Standard Line Lugs. Unit Space (starting with 9" and adding 6" increments) “A” Dimension
“B” Main Lugs Main Breakers
Dimension 400A 600A
Box Height 400A 600A 800A JD LD
56 21 21 21 9 9
62 27 27 27 15 15
68 33 33 33 21 21
74 39 39 39 27 27
80 45 45 45 33 33
Main Lug Wire Bending Main Breaker Wire Bending - Inches (mm)
Panel Amps Standard Connectors C D
Panel Amps C E F
400 (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kcmil 16.00 17.88
or (1) 600 kcmil JD — 15.63 (397) 29.38 (746)
600 (2) #3/0 AWG - 500 kcmil 16.00 17.88 LD — 14.75 (375) 29.38 (746)
800 (2) 600 kcmil 16.00 17.88
 This lug is removable.
Main Breaker Wire Bending Diagram Main Lug Wire Bending Diagram
Box depth = 7.75 in. (197 mm) Box depth = 7.75 in. (197 mm)
Box width = 24 in. (610 mm) Box width = 24 in. (610 mm)
Main Breaker Wire Bending Main Lug Wire Bending
Branch Breaker Branch Breaker Wire Bending Diagram

Side Gutters Inches (mm)
A BL, BLH, HBL BL, BLH, HBL A
Reference Panel
Letter Width 24" (609) BLF2, BLHF2 BLF2, BLHF2
A 7.750 (197) HBLF2, BLFB, BLHFB HBLF2, BLFB, BLHFB
B 7.125 (181) B BQD, BQD6 BQD, BQD6 B
C 6.000 (152) ED, ED4, ED6 ED, ED4, ED6
D1 7.000 (178) C C
HED4 HED4
E 5.000 (127)
10
F 6.625 (168) QR2, QRH2 QR2, QRH2

 Single branch mounting construction.
D/E HQR2, HQR2H HQR2, HQR2H D/E
PANELBOARDS
F NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 F
Panel Width
24 in. (610 mm)
Branch Breaker Side Gutters

Panelboards
Alternate Main Breakers
Maximum Interrupting Ref.
Ampere Breaker Rating (kA) Catalogue Available Configurationsb
Rating Type 240V 480V 600V Number 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC Available Trip Values
JXD6 65 35 25 JX STD STD STD 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
JD6 65 35 25 J6 STD STD STD 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
HJXD6 100 65 35 H6 ADD ADD ADD 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
400
HJD6 100 65 35 H5 ADD ADD ADD 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
SJD6 65 35 25 SJ ADD ADD ADD 200, 300, 400
SHJD6 100 65 35 S2 ADD ADD ADD 200, 300, 400
LXD6 65 35 25 LX STD STD STD 450, 500, 600
LD6 65 35 25 L6 STD STD STD 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
HLXD6 100 65 35 HL ADD ADD ADD 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
600
HLD6 100 65 35 HO ADD ADD ADD 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
SLD6 65 35 25 SL ADD ADD ADD 300, 400, 500, 600
SHLD6 100 65 35 S6 ADD ADD ADD 300, 400, 500, 600
10
PANELBOARDS
 Verticallymounted
bSTD = Standard configuration. ADD = Additional cost.

Panelboards
Max. Amp Bolt-On Provisions for Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA)
Rating Breaker Type Amps 120V AC 120/240V AC 240V AC 277V AC 480V AC 600V AC 250V DC
70 BQD6 15-70 — 65 65 — — 10 14
15–60 10 — — — — — —
BL 70 — 10 — — — — —
80–100 — — 10 — — — —
15–60 — 22 — — — — —
BLH 70 — 22 — — — — —
80–100 — — 22 — — — —
15–55 — 65 — — — — —
HBL
60–100 — — 65 — — — —
15–60 — — 10 — — — —
BLR (240V)
70–100 — — 10 — — — —
15–30 10 — — — — — —
BLE (GFCI)
100 40–60 — 10 — — — — —
15–30 22 — — — — — —
BLEH (GFCI)
15–60 — 22 — — — — —
15–30 10 — — — — — —
BLF (GFCI)
40–60 — 10 — — — — —
15–30 22 — — — — — —
BLHF (GFCI)
40–60 — 22 — — — — —
HBLF2 (GFCI) 15–30 65 — — — — — —
BAF 15–20 10 — — — — — —
BAFH 15–20 22 — — — — — —
15–60 — 65 — — 14 — 14
BQD
70–100 — — 65 — 14 — 14
NGB2 15-125 100 100 100 25 25 14 14d
HGB2 15-125 100 100 100 35 35 22 14d
LGB2 15-125 100 100 100 65 65 25 14d
15–60 65 — — 22 — — —
ED4 70–100 — — 65 — 18 — 30
125 110–125 — — 65 — 18 — —
15–60 — — 65 — 25 18 30
ED6 70–100 — — 65 — 25 18 —
110–125 100 — — — — — —
15–60 100 — — — — — —
HED4 70–100 — — — 65 — — —
110–125 — — — 65 — — —
QR2 100–225 — — 10 — — — —
QRH2 100–225 — — 25 — — — —
225
HQR2 100–225 — — 65 — — — —
HQR2H 100–225 — — 100 — — — —
Subfeed Breakers (available in 2-pole or 3-pole) Neutral Connectors

Mounting Position When Ampere Maximum Interrupting Rating Max.
Breaker Used as Subfeed Breaker Ratings (kA) Symmetrical Number of Max.
Type Vertical For Load 240V AC 480V AC 600V AC Wire Range Connections Amps
FD6 , FXD6 Twin 70–250 65 35 18 #14-#1/0 44 125
HFD6 , HFXD6 Twin 70–250 100 65 25 #4 - 350 kcmil 6 250
JD6 b, JXD6 Single 200–400 65 35 25 (1)#4 - 600 kcmil or
1 400
HJD6 b, HJXD6 Single 200–400 100 65 35 (2)#6 - 250 kcmil
10
PANELBOARDS
NOTE: QR Breakers are twin mounted in unit space and d 2-pole only (or) two outer poles of 3-pole breaker.
 Twin mounted subfeed breakers are mounted at
take 6" of unit space. Limited to (6) per panel max. BL, bottom of panelboard only and adds 24" to the
HBL, BLH and BQD breakers are mounted in common panel height.
mountings in 3" or 4) pole increments. ED2, ED4, b Subfeed breaker is mounted at bottom of panelboard only.
ED6 and HED4 breakers are mounted in common 400 amp subfeed breaker adds 30" to the panel height.
mountings in 3" or (6) pole increments.

Panelboards
Enclosures Subfeed and Feed-Thru Surge Protection Device
Extra Gutter to Sides or Ends (for 2-pole or 3-pole) See Section 10
of the Can (Type 1 Only) Service Entrance Label
Unit
Ampere Connector Space Type P3 Panelboards are factory labeled
Description Rating Cu/Al Wire Range (innches) “SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERVICE
6" end gutter ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT” when identified as
2" side gutter Subfeed (Double) Lugs for Main Lug “Service Entrance” at the time of order entry.
Barrier in gutter (add to extra
gutter price – min 4" required)
Panelboards Only For regulations governing this feature, please
consult CEC, CSA or local electrical authorities.
Hinged trims 225/250 (2)—#6 AWG-350 kcmil 6
Piano hinged trims (2)—250 kcmil P3 service entrance panels are available
400 6
Door-in-door trims (1)—600 kcmil in type 1 enclosure only (indoor application)
Screw to the box trims and come standard with plated copper.
Trim mounted devices Feed-Thru Lugs — Cannot Be Used
• Pilot lights in Conjunction with SPD or Subfeed Grounding of Panelboards
• Toggle switches
• Push buttons Breakers Ground Bars are shipped with the panel
Painted boxes
See page <?> for unit space adders and interior factory mounted.
Custom colours compatibility with other options. • Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
Increase gauge trims • Copper Non-Insulated Ground Bar
225/250 (1)—#6 AWG-350 kcmil 6
and boxes • Al Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
(2)—250 kcmil • Cu Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
Stainless steel trims, 400 6
(1)—600 kcmil
Type 1
600 (2)—250-500 kcmil 9
800 (2)—600 kcmil 12 Shunt Trip on Main or Branch
Meters BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, ED4, HED4, ED6,
(Contact sales for pricing and application Branch and Main Breaker Accessories HED6, QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H
engineering for space requirements) as branch only. BL, BLH, HBL, NGB2,
See page 10-44 and Breaker Section
Panel Skirts See page 10-64
• Handle blocks HGB2, LGB2, ED2, ED4, HED4, ED6,
• Handle locks uses 1" unit space for shunt trip. All
• Aux. Contacts
• UVR
others may be used on mains or
Panel Bus Modifications subfeeds.
Represented by “A”, “C” or “E” in the Increase capacity neutral up to 200%
11th digit of the catalogue number
Main Bus Amps
Standard bussing is tin plated Al, alternate bus 125
bar material can be selected: 250
b Tin plated copper 400
600
b Silver plated copper - optional
See page 10-44 for unit space adders and
compatibility with other options.
Copper MLO Only

Main Bus Amps
125
250
400
600
(Devices mounted and wired to the trim should
also have hinged trim specified)
10
PANELBOARDS
 Accessories on 1" pole breakers (BL, BQD, ED) will take

unit space.

Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboard Standard Modifications Selection
Option Combinations
Subfeed Feed-thru FDa JD FDb 200% Min. Box Unit Space
Amps Incoming Lugs Lugs Subfeed Subfeed Subfeed Neutral Size (in.) (in)
• — — — — • 56 21
— • — — — • 56 15
Main Lug Only — — • — — • 56 9
— — — • — • 56 9
— — — — • • 62 9
400b
— — — — • 56 9
• — — — • 62 9
Main Breaker (JD) None Std. — • — — • 68 9
— — • — • 68 9
— — — • • 74 9
— — — — • 56 21
• — — — • 56 15
Main Lug Only — — • — — • 56 9
— — • — — 56 9
— — — • • 62 9
600b
— — — — • 56 9
• — — — • 62 9
Main Breaker LD — — • — — • 68 9
— — • — — 68 9
— — — • • 74 9
— — — — • 56 21
• — — — • 56 9
800b Main Lug Only — — • — — • 56 9
— — • — — 56 9
— — — • • 62 9
10
PANELBOARDS
 Subfed lugs are currently not offered as standard with

main circuit breakers.
b Subfed lugs on panels above 400A are not standard.
 200% neutral cannot be provided along with a 400A
subfeed breaker because the breaker blocks the 4th
lug site.

Panelboards
Compression Lugs
(1) 250 - 500 kcmil or —
400 N/A
(2)# 1/0 AWG - 250 kcmil —
MLO
600 N/A (2)#3/0 AWG - 500 kcmil —
800 N/A (2) 400-750 kcmil Cu only —
JD6, JXD6, HJD6,
400 (2)#1/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Cu or Al —
Main SJD6, SHJD6
Breaker LD6, LXD6, HLD6,
600 (2)#2/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Cu or Al —
SLD6, SHLD6
Alternate Lugs
Amp Breaker Standard AL Box Height
(1) 250 - 750 kcmil or
400 N/A 6
(2)#3/0 AWG - 250 kcmil Cu or Al
MLO
800 N/A (3) 500 kcmil 6
800 N/A (4) 1/0-750 kcmil Cu or Al 6
Main JD6, JXD6, HJD6,
400 (1)#4/0 AWG - 750 kcmil Cu or Al 6
Breaker SJD6, SHJD6
24" Panel Width
Description
Type 3R enclosures
Type 3R/12 enclosures
Gasket between trim
and box (Type 1)
Type 4X For Type P3

Water Tight, Dust Tight and Corrosion Resistant
(consult plant for actual enclosure size and for
Type 4b enclosures)
Box Height Enclosure – Stainless Steel
Inches H W D
56 56 24 7.75
62 62 24 7.75
68 68 24 7.75
74 74 24 7.75
80 80 24 7.75
10
PANELBOARDS
 16 Gauge Cans w/ 14 Gauge Front)

b 14 Gauge only
 14 Gauge only - 304SS Std, 316SS Optional)

Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboard Kits and Accessories Selection
Standard Enclosures
Catalog Number Options For Type 1 Trims
Box
Height Type 1 Standard Trim Items must be ordered as manual line item on factory
(in.) Box Surface Flush Type 3R Type 3R/12 Hinged trim – Add “H” suffix
56 24WD56 P3S56 P3F56 24NRD56 24WPD56 Door-in-door – Add “D” suffix
62 24WD62 P3S62 P3F62 24NRD62 24WPD62 Metal card holder - Add "M" suffix
68 24WD68 P3S68 P3F68 24NRD68 24WPD68 Provision for padlock - Add "-PL" suffix
74 24WD74 P3S74 P3F74 24NRD74 24WPD74 Service entrance application - Add "SE" suffix
80 24WD80 P3S80 P3F80 24NRD80 24WPD80

BBKGB32 (P2/P3) NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 3'' branch breaker kit Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
BBKB32 (P2/P3) BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
BBKNB32 (P2/P3) NGB, 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
BBKEB32 (P3) HEB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
Kit contains breaker support, inter-phase barriers, (3) A/C connectors,
BBKED32 (P2/P3) ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit
(1) B connector, hardware
Kit contains all connectors and cover plates necessary to mount both 2 and
BBKQR2 P3 twin BKR mounting kit for 1-phase/3-phase.
3-pole breakers
DFK1 BL, BQD, ED deadfront kit for 1" pole breakers Center strips 3", 6", 9", 15", 21" plus mounting hardware
P3BK1 P3 bonding kit Bonding strap and hardware
EBF1 HEB/NEB Filler Plate Filler Plate
Kit contains all cover plates necessary to change from QJ to QR both 2 and
P3 Filler for QR. Dual mount horizontal.
BBKQRP2FK 3-pole breakers. For 1-phase panel, both breakers must change from QJ to QR,
1-phase/3-phase.
cannot have one of each installed.
 Although QR is rated 250A, it is limited to 225A in panelboard.
Type P3 Panelboards
EGK Al Ground Bus 44 Connections
BK1 Bonding kit for 250A max. and all P1 panels
IMK1 Interior Adjusting Kit
9271-1 Directory Card Holder
NBK3 1 Numbering Button Kit “Snap-in” type 1 @ 42
NBK6 Number Strips 127-168.
ECGK Cu Ground Bus 44 Connections
IGK Insulated Al Ground Bus
ICGK Insulated Cu Ground Bus
EWK2 End Wall Kit with Knockouts (24" W x 7.75" D)
DFFP1A 1" Filler Plate (Suitable for replacing QF3 in P1 thru S5 Panelboards and Switchboards)
P3BK1 P3 Bonding Kit
JCK24 24 trim screws and 24 trim clips
DFK1 BL, BQD, ED deadfront kit for 1" (include 7 different length centre strips)
12-1110-01 1 Directory card for 1-42 circuits
MCHK 1 Metallic directory card holder
FPLK2 2 Spare Fas-latch trim locks with 2 keys
DSK724 1 Dripshield 24''W x 7.75''D
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboards Dimensions
Type 1 Box
Box is symmetrical
Type 3R and 3R/12 Box
10
PANELBOARDS
 Dimensions are interior of the box. Add 5/8" to width for absolute
dimension. Add 1/8" to height for absolute dimension.

Panelboards
Miscellaneous accessories Selection
Spare Parts Kits for Revised P1 Panels

Current Product Old Product is no longer Manufactured, some kits are available
P1 Original
P1 Revised
S1, S2, SE
Product Description
qty/
C1
C2
P2
P3
Kit Number kit Note: Some kits apply to only specific enclosures used or configurations of the product listed
Deadfront Parts
Panelboard Directory Card. 5.5X5, for 1-90 circuits.
LPDC01 X X X X X X X 10
LPDC02 X X X X X X X 10 Panelboard Directory Vinyl Pouch, 6.3x6.1.
9271-1 X X X X X X X 10 Directory Card Holder for 9 x 4
RP1 A/C-Phase Replacement Copper Connectors, Kit of 6 pcs plus mounting
P1CONACPHCU X 6
hardware. Also can be used to replaced AL A/C-Phase Connectors.
P1CONBPHAL X 6 RP1 B-Phase Replacement Aluminum Connectors, Kit of 6 pcs plus mounting hardware
P1CONBPHCU X 6 RP1 B-Phase Replacement Copper Connectors, Kit of 6 pcs plus mounting hardware
P1 Branch breaker mounting screws - pack of 42 screws, part #11-A-1505-03, 10-32 x 0.312 Hex
P1SCRWS X X 42
Washer Head Screw - Do Not Substitute
MCHK X X X X X X X 1 Metal Card Holder Kit - Field Installable
SDKN X X X 1 Dripshield kit for Standard Enclsoure (20W × 5.75D)
SDKN X 1 Dripshield 24''W x 7.75''D
Bonding Kits
BK1A X 1 Revised P1 Bonding Kit including Service Disconnect Label
P2BK1 X 1 P2 250A Max Horiz. MB Bonding Strap Kit
P2BK2 X 1 P2 125A max. Main Lug Bonding Strap Assembly
P2BK3 X 1 P2 250-600A MLO and all Vert MB Bonding Kit
P3BK1 X 1 P3 Bonding Kit for all MLO and MB selections
JD Main Filler Plate for 1-Ph and 3-Ph P1 Panels – Small MB opening
DFFPJD01 X X 1
(use for Original or Revised P1 & other applications)(P2/P3 & S1/S2)
DFFPJD02 X X 1 JD Main Filler Plate for 1-Ph and 3-Ph – for P1 Panels with Large MB Opening only.
QJ Main Filler Plate for 3-Phase (3-pole) P1 Panels
DFFPQJ01 X X 1
(use for Original or Revised P1 and other applications)
QJ Main Filler Plate for 1-Phase (2-pole) P1 Panels
DFFPQJ02 X X 1
(use for Original or Revised P1 and other applications)
MBKQRFK X X 1 P1/Revised P1 Filler for 1PH/3PH QR. Horizontal Mount only.
Bonding Kits
BK1A X 1 Revised P1 Bonding Kit including Service Disconnect Label
P2BK1 X 1 P2 250A Max Horiz. MB Bonding Strap Kit
P2BK2 X 1 P2 125A max. Main Lug Bonding Strap Assembly
P2BK3 X 1 P2 250-600A MLO and all Vert MB Bonding Kit
P3BK1 X 1 P3 Bonding Kit for all MLO and MB selections
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
B74FLR Enclosures & Related Bottom Covers
Quick & Easy Installation Features Enclosure Part Number: B74FLR
This "universal fit" enclosure is capable of sitting on the floor
or over the conduit, eliminating the need to extend conduit
or cut knockouts. If installed correctly, there will be no need
for a panel skirt.
This enclosure includes two bottom endwalls: a standard and

a special endwall with a cutout. The standard endwall is
mounted at the bottom as usual, and the special endwall is
mounted above it with two screws. By removing the
standard endwall and moving the special endwall to the
lower position, the enclosure can be mounted around
conduit stubbed up from the floor.*
Any size P1 or P2 interior from 26” to 74” can fit in this 20”
wide enclosure with the proper lower cover installed. See
chart below for part numbers (See back for details).
The bottom section of the enclosure left open by all fronts

(except the 74” front) will require a special lower cover
installation. These are available in both surface and flush
variations in six-inch increments from 6”- 48” height, to
match the front "void" sizes. The chart to the right shows
which lower covers are available for the interior selected.
Required Lower Cover
Standard Standard
Box Size Front Size Flush Mounted Surface Mounted
Contractor Labor Savings 26” x 20” 26” 48” BXXCVR48F 48” BXXCVR48S
When installed to code, the labor to cut knockouts and 32” x 20” 32” 42” BXXCVR42F 42” BXXCVR42S
extend conduit to the bottom endwall is eliminated.
38” x 20” 38” 36” BXXCVR36F 36” BXXCVR36S
Instruction Sheets:
Enclosure: B74FLR Instructions
Lower Cover: BXXCVR Instructions
Endwall Kit: EWK3 Instructions
None None
74” x 20” 74” 0” 0”
Required Required
10
PANELBOARDS
*Contractor is required to seal and install as required per local/national codes.

Panelboards
B74FLR Enclosures & Related Bottom Covers
The enclosure to the right shows two mounting studs at the Enclosure Part Number: B74FLR
top which are used for all sizes of P1/P2 panels that fit 20”
wide x 5.75” deep enclosures. There are two studs at the
bottom for mounting a 74” interior (Note: Interior sizes
reference the standard enclosure size needed for the interior
and front). The 74” can fits the 74” interior and front without
any additional covers.
As interiors get shorter in six-inch increments, lower covers
are needed to fill the space below the interior and standard
front. Mounting holes and hardware are provided for
attaching the bottom of the base rails.
Example: A 44” interior is 30” shorter than a 74” enclosure
so it will need a 30” lower cover. Pick Surface or Flush to
match the front.
Fronts available to use

b Standard FasLatch Front
• Screw-to-box front (standard & piano hinge)
b Hinge-to-box front (standard & piano hinge)
b Door-to-door front (standard & piano hinge)
Note: Although stainless steel piano hinge fronts are
available, stainless steel lower covers are NOT available at
this time.
Special endwall retrofit kit: EWK3

This kit includes the "open" endwall that can be used to
replace a standard endwall in any 20” wide x 5.75” deep
enclosure if needed for special mounting situations.
Contractor is responsible to seal and secure per local/
national codes.
Note: This B74FLR Enclosure is cULus Listed as a Electric
Cabinet Box and when additional gutter space is available
(beyond the required minimum Enclosure size required by
the Panel Interior), this additional Gutter space is considered
part of the Enclosure and does not require special wiring
rules that apply to a "wire way". It is not a Panel Skirt,
although in some cases it can be used in place of an
Enclosure plus a panel skirt when installed per local and
National codes.
Think of this as you would a "Switchboard Enclosure" resting
on the floor, similar wiring rules should apply to the open
bottom.
10
PANELBOARDS
Example of Label provided on each

enclosure with UL/cULus marking

Panelboards
Accessories Enclosures Selection
Miscellaneous parts and accessories-enclosures
Catalog Number Description Comments
EWK1 End Wall Kit with Knockouts (20”W x 5.75” DP) Type 1 Only
EWK2 End Wall Kit with Knockouts (24”W x 7.75” DP) Type 1 Only
End Wall Kit - open center space - ref B74FLR
EWK3 Type 1 Only
(20" W x 5.75" DP)
EWK1 End Wall w/KOs (20"W X 5.75"D) EWK2 End Wall w/KOs (20"W X 5.75"D)
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Lighting panel ground bus information: P1, P2, P3 Selection
Lighting panel ground bus information: P1-P2-P3

Wire size range of the
Catalog
Number Description Comments EGK/ECGK/IGK/ICGK lug connections/holes:
EGK Al Ground Bus 44 Connections Type 1, 3R, 3R/12 (Note: The multiple combinations typically only apply when
ECGK Cu Ground Bus 44 Connections Type 1, 3R, 3R/12 used as an equipment ground. If similar bar is used as a
IGK Insulated Al Ground Bus Type 1, 3R, 3R/12 neutral bar, only one wire can be used in each hole.)
ICGK Insulated Cu Ground Bus Type 1, 3R, 3R/12
1. Connection count: (6) of #14-1/0 and (15) of #14-6
Connections (21 Holes total). (note: one Connection
EGK / ECGK / IGK / ICGK Installation Instructions: may be needed for incoming Ground Connection)
Ground bus to be mounted in either left or right gutter with 2. The Maximum wire size the standard ground accepts
hardware provided. Applied torque ratings shall be 45-lbs-inch is:
for three No. 10 AWG solid copper conductors in the large 1/0 in the Large Holes and #6 in the Smaller Holes.
holes. For all other combinations of conductors, refer to the 3. Small Hole can accept:
torque rating label on the panelboard. (1-2 wires) #14-12; (1 wire) #10; (1 wire) #8-#6.
4. The Large Hole can accept:
Note: For IGK / ICGK, insure ground bar is attached to Glastic (1-3 wires) #14-#10; (1 wire) #8; (1 wire) #6 - #4; (1 wire)
insulator with two screws before mounting insulator to enclo- #3-1/0.
sure. Ground Bar mounts thru side holes oriented as shown 5. Max. connections if largest wire size is used:
on picture below. (6 x 1) + (15 x 1) = 21
6. Max. connections if smallest wire size is used:
(6 x 3) + (15 x 2) = 48
7. Request for Ground Lug greater than 1/0 in Size
requires a Special Modification in COMPAS when Line
Item is entered (specify number of connections needed
greater than 1/0) or Manual Line for Custom Ground
(specify number of connections needed greater than
This chart is on labels for P1, P2 and P3 enclosures.
USE SIEMENS EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS Grd. bus location

TYPES EGK, IGK, ECGK, ICGK
Torque required to secure wire sizes listed below:
Small Terminal Large Terminal

(1-2 Wires)-#14-#12 20 lb-in (1-3 Wires)-#14-#10 35 lb-in
(1 Wire)-#10 20 lb-in (1 Wire)-#8 40 lb-in
(1 Wire)-#8-#6 30 lb-in (1 Wire)-#6-#16 45 lb-in
(1 Wire)-#3-1/0 50 lb-in Type 1, 3R and
3R/12 Enclosure
10
EGK / ECGK kit parts

PANELBOARDS
IGK / ICGK kit parts

Panelboards
Power and Disribution Selection
Type S5 (SPP6) Main Lug Connectors Integrated Equipment Short
Circuit Ratings
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC Maximum Ampere
1200 Ampere Mains Rating Connectors Range/Phase The term “Integrated Equipment Short
1200 Ampere Maximum Branch 225A - 400A (1) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or Circuit Rating” refers to the application
UL & CSA Short Circuit Rating — (2) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL of series connected circuit breakers in a
200,000A IR Maximum 600A (2) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or
combination that allows some breakers
(4) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL to have lower individual interrupting
Branch Breaker Symmetrical ratings than the available fault current.
Interrupting Capacity 800A (3) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or
This is permitted as long as the series
(6) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL
Based on Underwriters’ Test combination has been tested and
1200A (4) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or certified by UL & CSA.
Procedure (8) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL
Meets 1996 NEC wire bending Series ratings must be specified on
requirement, section 373-6. End Gutters order at time of entry.
CSA - C22.2 No. 0.12 Ampere Main Lug Main Breaker
Rating (inches) (inches)
Panelboards 400/600 15.967 13.0
Listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, 800/1200 15.967 13.0
Inc., under “Panelboards” File #E2269
for interiors and #E4016 for boxes and Boxes
fronts. Meet Federal Specification 38” wide, 12.75” deep (Type 1, 2)
W-C375B/Gen. & CSA Certificate No. 38” wide, 14.25” deep (Type 3R/12)
1518681.
Service Panelboard Specifications
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC, Maximum.
1 Phase, 3 Wire; 3 Phase, 3 Wire; or Maximum Unit Box
Panel Space Height
or 3 Phase, 4 Wire. Ampere (MLO)
Panelboard Fronts and Doors 400A 30” 60” 120/240Volts 120/208 Volts 600 Volts 347/600 Volts
600A 45” 75” 1 Phase, 3 Wire 3 Phase, 4 Wire 3 Phase, 3 Wire 3 Phase, 4 Wire
Standard panelboards are furnished 800A 60” 90”
with 4 piece trim with ventilation. 1200A 60” 90”
Fronts are fabricated from code gauge
steel and finished ASA61.
Main Breakers
All 400A and 1200A frame main break-
ers are mounted horizontally.
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Main Breaker Selection
Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA)
Amperage
Rating Breaker Type Trip Type 240V 480V 600V Available Trip Values
JXD6 65 35 25 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
JD6 65 35 25 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Thermal
HJD6 100 65 35 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Magnetic
HHJD6 200 100 50 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
400
CJD6 200 150 100 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
SJD6 65 35 25 200, 300, 400
Electronic
SHJD6 100 65 35 200, 300, 400
(Solid State)
SCJD6 200 150 100 200, 300, 400
LXD6 65 35 25 450, 500, 600
LD6 65 35 25 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
Thermal
HLD6 100 65 35 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
Magnetic
HHLD6 200 100 50 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
600
CLD6 200 150 100 450, 500, 600
SLD6 65 35 25 300, 400, 500, 600
Electronic
SHLD6 100 65 35 300, 400, 500, 600
(Solid State)
SCLD6 200 150 100 300, 400, 500, 600
MXD6 65 50 25 500, 600, 700, 800
MD6 Thermal 65 50 25 500, 600, 700, 800
HMD6 Magnetic 100 65 50 500, 600, 700, 800
800 CMD6 200 100 65 500, 600, 700, 800
SMD6 65 50 25 600, 700, 800
SHMD6 Electronic 100 65 50 600, 700, 800
(Solid State)
SCMD6 200 100 65 600, 700, 800
NXD6 65 50 25 800, 900, 1000, 1200
ND6 Thermal 65 50 25 800, 900, 1000, 1200
HND6 Magnetic 100 65 50 800, 900, 1000, 1200
1200 CND6 200 100 65 800, 900, 1000, 1200
SND6 65 50 25 800, 1000, 1200
Electronic
SHND6 100 65 50 800, 1000, 1200
(Solid State)
SCND6 200 100 65 800, 1000, 1200
Branch Breaker Side Gutter Inches (mm)

Reference Panel Width 38 Inches A BL, BLH, HBL, BQD BL, BLH, HBL, BQD A
Letter Dimensions in inches (mm)
B NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 B
A 14.00 (356)
D ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6 ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6 D
B 13.98 (355)
C 11.62 (295) E CED6 CED6 E
D 10.00 (254) F QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H F
E 7.61 (193) G FD6, FXD6, HFD6, HHFD6 FD6, FXD6, HFD6, HHFD6 G
F 8.75 (222)
3VA52 3VA52
G 8.25 (210) AA AA
(MFAS, HFAS, CFAS) (MFAS, HFAS, CFAS)
J 11.76 (299)
3VA61 3VA61
K 7.92 (201) AB AB
(MDAE, HDAE, CDAE, LDAE) (MDAE, HDAE, CDAE, LDAE)
M 13.42 (341) 3VA62 3VA62
AC AC
N 12.00 (305) (MFAE, HFAE, CFAE, LFAE) (MFAE, HFAE, CFAE, LFAE)
P 14.25 (362)
10
J CFD J
Q 13.42 (341)
K JD6, JXD6, HJD6, HHJD6 JD6, JXD6, HJD6, HHJD6 K
PANELBOARDS
SJD6, SHJD6,
M M
LD6, LXD6, HLD6, HHLD6, SLD6, SHLD6
N CJD6, SCJD6, CLD6, SCLD6 N
MXD6, MD6, HMD6, CMD6,
P P
NXD6, ND6, HND6, CND6
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6,
Q Q
SND6, SHND6, SCND6

Panelboards

Branch Circuit Breaker Selection
Breaker
Frame Trip Mounting Height Inches (mm) Max IC Rating (kA)
Rating Type Breaker Type Poles Trip Amperage Single Twin Gutter 240V 480V 600V
BL 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 10 — —
Thermal BLH 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 22 — —
Magnetic HBL 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 65 — —
BQD6d 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 65 — 10
100 BLE (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 10 — —
Ground Fault
Circuit Interrupter
BLF (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 10 — —
BLHF (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 22 — —
Arc Fault Circuit BAF (AFCI) 1 15, 20 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 10 — —
Interrupter BAFH (AFCI) 1 15, 20 — 3.75 (95)b 14 (356) 22 — —
ED2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 3.75 (95)b 3.75 (95)b 10 (254) 10 — —
ED4 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95)b 3.75 (95)b 10 (254) 65 18 —
ED6 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95)b 3.75 (95)b 10 (254) 100 18 18
Thermal HED4 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95)b 3.75 (95)b 10 (254) 100 65 30
125
Magnetic CED6 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 7.61 (193) 200 200 100
NGB2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95)b 3.75 (95)b 13.98 (355) 100 25 14
HGB2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95)b 3.75 (95)b 13.98 (355) 100 35 22
LGB2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95)b 3.75 (95)b 13.98 (355) 100 65 25
3VA61 (MDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 35 18
Electronic 3VA61 (HDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 65 22
150
(Solid State) 3VA61 (CDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 100 35
3VA61 (LDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 150 50
QR2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 10 — —
Thermal QRH2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 25 — —
225
Magnetic HQR2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 65 — —
HQR2H 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 100 — —
FXD6, FD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.25 (210) 65 35 22
HFD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.25 (210) 100 65 25
Thermal CFD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 — 5 (127) 11.76 (299) 200 200 100
Magnetic 3VA52 (MFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 85 35 18
250 3VA52 (HFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 100 65 25
3VA52 (CFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 200 100 35
3VA62 (MFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 35 18
Electronic 3VA62 (HFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 65 22
(Solid State) 3VA62 (CFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 100 35
3VA62 (LFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 150 50
JXD6, JD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 65 35 25
Thermal HJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 100 65 35
Magnetic HHJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 200 100 50
CJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
400 SJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Electronic SHJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
(Solid State) SCJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
NJG 3 250, 400 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8 (203) 65 35 25
LJG 3 250, 400 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8 (203) 200 100 25
LXD6 2, 3 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Thermal LD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Magnetic HLD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
HHLD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 200 100 50
600 CLD6 2, 3 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
Electronic SLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
(Solid State) SHLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
SCLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
MXD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Thermal MD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Magnetic HMD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 100 65 50
800 CMD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 200 100 65
SMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 65 50 25
Electronic
(Solid State) SHMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 100 65 50
SCMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 200 100 65
NXD6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Thermal ND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Magnetic HND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 100 65 50
1200 CND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 200 100 65
Electronic SND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 65 50 25
(Solid State) SHND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 100 65 50
SCND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 200 100 65
10
PANELBOARDS
 Space includes housing frame plate with blank cover b 1 to 6 poles may be mounted in 3.75” (95) of unit space  Refer to Table 5 for layout dimensions.
plate. Provision includes all necessary mounting hard-  Accessories such as shunt trips on three pole breakers
ware, less circuit breaker, and includes housing frame require 6.25” (159) of unit space.
cover plate with breaker handle opening. d Also 10kA at 600Y/347 Volts.

Panelboards
Modifications and Additions Selection
Type S5 6. MLO Compression Lugs — Padlocking Device — Padlocks in
Available as main lugs and neutral lug. “OFF” position. Available for:
When required, special constructions
or additions to standard panelboards Deduct Breaker Type Cat. Number
may be specified for all factory- From BQ, BQH, BL, BLH, HBL ECQLD3
assembled Power and Distribution Available One Pole BL, BLF, BE, BAF ECPLD1
Unit
Panelboards. Below and on the next Ampere Aluminum Copper Space Two-Pole BL, BLF, BE ECPLD2
page are listed many of those available Rating (Specify Size ) (Specify Size) (inches) All QR HPLQR
for Type S5 panelboards. In no case do 400 5
Consult Consult All BQD, NGB, NGB2, HGB2,
these apply to Narrow (Column) Width 600 5 LGB2
BQDPLD
Sales Sales
Lighting Panelboards or Unassembled 800
Office Office
5
All ED ED2HPL
Panelboards. 1200 5
All FD FD6PL1
1. Miscellaneous All JD, LD JD6HPL
7. Grounding of Panelboards b
All MD, ND, PD MN6PLD
ENCLOSURE TYPE Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bus 3VA52/61/62 3VA91380LB11
Type1
Including Ground Lug
Type 2 (Drip-proof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulated Equipment Ground Bus 11. Ground Fault Sensing Relay Kit j
Type 3R Including Ground Lug Equipment Protection (30 mA)
Type 12
8. Remote Control Switches d For Use with Number of
Breaker Types Poles Description
2. Painted Finish ED4, ED6, Basic kit
ASCO 920 Siemens CLH HED4 1, 2, 3 Basic kit with
Touch-Up Paint (ASA61, Light Gray) 600V AC Mechanically Electrically
12 oz. aerosol can, bell alarm
Ampere Held Held 
d
Catalog Number TUP61
Rating 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
30 12. Main Bus
3. Miscellaneous Accessories
60 Standard main bus and ground bus are
Nameplate — laminated, engraved 75
Tamper-Resistant Screws 100
Unit space 20” Unit space 20” tin plated aluminum. For copper main
150d bus, neutral bus and ground bus change
4. Devices Mounted on Gutter Cover 200d prefix ‘A’ to ‘C’ on catalog number and
— Includes Device, Mounting —
225 contact your sales office for pricing.
Wired or Unwired
Toggle Switch — SPST or 3-way; 9. Increased Capacity Neutral 13. Copper Lugs —
15A For Main Lug Only Panels
Unit
Ampere Rating Space Standard main lugs and neutral lugs are
Pilot Light — General Purpose, Phase Neutral (inches) tin plated aluminum, UL & CSA listed
Neon or Incandescent
400 600 None for use with aluminum/copper cables.
400 800 None For copper lugs in the mains and neutral
Pushbutton 600 1200 None for use with copper cables only, contact
800 1200 None
sales.
5. Feed-Thru Lugs 
(One Set Per Panel) 10. Circuit Breaker Accessories 14. Shunt Trip on Mainghi
Unit Space Handle Blocking Device and Branches
Ampere (Additional inches) Blocks handle in either the “ON” or
Description Cat. Number
Rating 3-Pole 2-Pole MLO “OFF” position. Available for:
400 10 "BL, BQD6 (branch only)
See breaker
600 Consult Consult 10 Breaker Type Cat. Number QR2, QRH2, HQR2, HQR2H,
portion of this
800 Sales Sales 17.5 ED2, ED4, HED4 (branch only)
BL, BLH, HBL, BQ, catalogue
1200 17.5 ECQL1 All others through 1200A"
BQH, HBQ
All BQD, GB BQDHBD
All QR HPLQR 15. Sentron TPS (TVSS Modules)
All BQD, NGB, NGB2, 100kA, 150kA, 200kA, 250kA, 300kA
BQDPLD
HGB2, LGB2
Options
All ED E2HBL Surge Counter
All FD FD6HB1 Remote Indicator
All JD, LD JD6HBL
16. Customer Metering
10
All MD, ND, PD MN6BL

Siemens Digital Metering with Remote Display
3VA52/61/62 3VA93780LB10
SEM3 Embedded Metering
PANELBOARDS
 Foruse on main lug, main breaker or main switch  Not available on Sensitrip IV. j Not CSA approved.
panels without subfeed breakers.  For required unit space — consult local sales office.
b Ground bar not installed in box. g Price does not include control power transformer.
 For short circuit ratings with remote control switches, h Price 600 Volt 71⁄2” high units.
consult sales office. Mounting height increases to 6.25” when shunt trip
d Available in 90” high enclosure only. Unit space is is required.
42 1/2” with Test and Monitor Panel; 45” without Test i Shunt Trip on 100A frame breakers increases mounting
and Monitor Panel. height to 6.25” for twin mounting.

Panelboards
Modifications and Additions Replacements for Circuit Breakers Selection
Replacement Connecting Strap Guide Blank Filler Plates
(No Breaker Cutout)
The following table may be used to obtain the proper connector kit by
measuring the exterior dimensions of the panel. Every attempt has been For use with Series 6 CDP Panelboards, S5, F2,
SMP, FCI and FCII Switchboards.
made to make this table complete and accurate. The table is based on pan-
els produced by ITE, Bulldog and Siemens from 1958 to present. Should any SPP/FPP/CDP/VB
Height 6
questions arise please contact your Siemens sales office for replacements.
1.25” 6FPB01
Panelboard 2.50” 6FPB02
Tub Panel Replacement 3.75” 6FPB03
Width Depth Type Max Amps Note
5.00” 6FPB05
30” - 36” - 42” 9” OLD CDP 400 MCCB only.
10.00” 6FPB10
9.75” OLD CDP 600 MCCB only. 15.00” 6FPB15
32” - 38” 1200A MCCB series 6 connectors
13.75” CDP/VB6
600A “VB” style units only (*) Connecting Strap Kits and Front-
38” 12.75” SPP/FPP6 1200A MCCB series 6 connectors Filler Plates
600A “VK” or “VB” style (*) For use with NDP-CDP-7, S3
* If switch unit width is 17” it is a vacubreak. If switch unit width is 23” or 28” it is a “VK” switch. Catalogue
Breakers Number
Connecting Strap For Use With SPP/FPP, S5 BQD6 (S3 only) 7 BQD6-2
BL, BLH, HBL, 7 BL-2
Max Amp Breaker Catalogue Unit
Rating Family Breaker Type Number Height Mounting ED2, ED4, ED6,HED4 7 E6-2
BQ, BQH, HB Filler 1 Pole DFFP1A
100 General 6BL2Cb 3.75" (95) Twin
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD6
General NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 SGB2DCAN 3.75" (95)
125 ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 6E62b 3.75" (95) Twin
Sentron
CED6 6CLE2 3.75" (95)
150 3VA 3VA61 S3VA52TDCAN 5" (127) Twin
General
225 QR2, QR2H, HQR2, HQR2H 6QR2CAN d
5" (127) Twin
Purpose
Sentron FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HHFD6 6F62 5" (127)
Twin
VL NFG, LFG SFGD 5" (127)
250
Sentron CFD6 6CLF1C 5" (127) Single
3VA 3VA52, 3VA62 S3VA52TDCAN 5" (127) Twin
Sentron JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HHJD6 6JJ62 8.75" (222) Twin
400
Sentron CJD6 6CLJ1C 8.75" (222) Single
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HHLD6,
6LL61C 8.75" (222)
SLD6, SHLD6, SJD6, SHJD6
600 Sentron Single
CLD6 6CLL1C 8.75" (222)
SCJD6, SCLD6 6SCL61C 8.75" (222)
MXD6, MD6, HMD6,
CMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6,
800 Sentron 6M61C 10" (254) Single
SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6,
SCLD6
NXD6, ND6, HND6, CND6,
1200 Sentron 6N61C 10" (254) Single
SHND6, SCND6
3VA Breaker Provision Kits

Breaker Type Cat. Number Description
3VA52, 3VA61 or Contains the necessary hardware to land
S3VA52PRCAN
3VA62 Breaker breaker on an existing scrap kit
10
PANELBOARDS
 These are aluminum connectors. If copper is required d QR filler plate only, use p/n: 6QR2FKCAN.
please add suffix C. For copper QR kit, use p/n: 6QR2CCAN.
b 3.75” (95) plate accommodates six 1-pole breakers.  To field install a single 3VA52, 3VA61 or 3VA62 breaker
 Connecting strap kits include connecting straps, hard- to an existing strap, provision kit p/n: S3VA52PRCAN is
wares, and cover plates for switchboards and power required.
panels. Breakers to be ordered separately.

Panelboards
Fusible/Power and Distribution Selection
Type F2
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC Maximum Main Switch Panel Connectors Main Lug Panels
600 Ampere Main Switch, Ampere Ampere
1200 Ampere Main Lugs Only Rating Connectors Range/Phase Rating Connectors Range/Phase
600 Ampere Maximum Branch
400A-600A (1, 2) #3/0-500MCM CU or 225A - 400A (1) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or
UL & CSA Short Circuit Rating — (1) #4/0-500MCM AL (2) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL
200,000A IR Maximum
800A (1-3) #1/0-500MCM CU/AL 600A (2) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or
Meets 1996 NEC wire bending (4) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL
requirement, section 373-6. 1200A (1-3) #1/0-500MCM CU/AL
800A (3) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or
CSA - C22.2 No. 0.12 (6) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL
Panelboards 1200A (4) #1/0-750MCM CU/AL or
Branch Switch Connectors (8) #1/0-250MCM CU/AL
Listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories,
Inc., under “Panelboards” File #E2269 Switch
Ampere Gutters
for interiors and #E4016 for boxes and Rating Wire and Cable Range End Gutters Side Gutters
fronts & CSA Certificate No. 1518681. 30 (1)—#14–#2 AWG (Cu or Al) Ampere (Minimum (Minimum
60 (1)—#14–#2 AWG (Cu or Al) Rating inches) inches)
Service 100 (1)—#14–#1/0 AWG (Cu or Al) 400 12 7.9
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC, Maximum. 200 (1)—#6 AWG–350 kcmil (Cu or Al) 600 12 7.9
1 Phase, 3 Wire; 3 Phase, 3 Wire; or 3 (1) - 750 kcmil OR
400 800 12 7.9
Phase, 4 Wire. (2) - 250 kcmil (Cu or Al)
1200 12 7.9
600 (2) - 750 kcmil OR
Boxes (4) - 250 kcmil (Cu or Al)
38” wide, 12.75” deep, Type 1
Panelboard Fronts and Doors Maximum VB HP Ratings
Standard panelboards are furnished with 3 Phase Single Phase DC
4 piece trim. Fronts are fabricated from Amp Volts Volts Volts
code gauge steel and finished ASA61. Rating 240 480 600 240 250
30 7.5 15 20 3 5
Fuses
60 15 30 50 10 10
The Proper Fuse Type for the Application 100 30 60 50 15 20
is Selected Using the Following 200 60 125 50 – 40
Parameters: 400 50 50 50 – 50
b Voltage Requirements 600 50 50 – – –
b Conductor Ampacity
Maximum VK HP Ratings
b Horsepower Requirements
3 Phase Single Phase DC
b Maximum Available RMS
Fault Current Amp Volts Volts Volts
Rating 240 480 600 240 250
b CSA Fuse Class
30 7.5 15 20 3 5
60 1.5 30 50 10 10
100 30 50 75 15 20
200 60 125 150 15 40
CSA Fuse Classes

Class Amperes Volts Interrupting Ratings I2t, Ip Circuits
250 and 600V — Less than
H (code) 1-600A 10,000A
or less AC — 10,000A available
250 and 600V
K
b
1-600A 50,000A — Feeder circuits
or less AC
I2t-Low Feeder circuits
J 1-600A 600V or less To 200,000A
Ip-Low (motor load small %)
600V or less I2t-Slightly > J Feeder circuits
10
RK1 1/10-600A To 200,000A

250V or less Ip-Slightly > J (motor load small %)
600V or less I2t- > RK-1 Motor starting
RK5 1/10-600A To 200,000A
PANELBOARDS
250V or less Ip- > RK-1 currents a factor

300 and 600V I2t-Low
T 1-600A To 200,000A Non-motor loads
or less AC Ip-Low
I2t-Low Feeder circuits
L 601-5000A 600V or less To 200,000A Ip-Low motor loads

Panelboards
Type F2
Maximum Unit Box
Panel Space Height
Ampere (MLO)
400A 30” 60” 120/240Volts 120/208 Volts 600 Volts 347/600 Volts
600A 45” 75” 1 Phase, 3 Wire 3 Phase, 4 Wire 3 Phase, 3 Wire 3 Phase, 4 Wire
800A 60” 90”
1200A 60” 90”
Branch Switches 600V Maximum

Mounting Height
Rating Maximum Fusing F2
Ampere Voltage (1) 38” W
30/30A (VK) 6.25(159)
60/60A (VK) 6.25(159)
100/100A (VK) 7.5(190)
200/200A (VK) 600V J 10(254)
30/30A, 60/60A, 7.5(190)
100/100A (VB)
200A (VB) 10(254)
400A (VB) 15(381)
600A (VB) 15(381)
10
PANELBOARDS
1 Single or twin units as listed and are valid for class  Use of auxiliary switch kit will require the use of a 7.5”  Ratings are based on UL test procedure. CSA will not
C or J fuses. If class R or T fuse provisions are (190) high unit for 30 and 60 Amp. switches. recognize ratings above 100Hp.
required add per table above. d Refer to Siemens for single phase and DC horsepower
b Not applicable to VB style units 400A and 600A. requirements.

Panelboards
Modifications and Additions Selection
Type F2 5. Grounding of Panelboards 10. Feed-Through Lugs 
Non-Insulated Equipment Ground (One Set Per Panel)
When required, special constructions or Bus Including Ground Lug Unit Space
additions to standard panelboards may Insulated Equipment Ground Bus (Additional inches)
be specified for all factory-assembled Ampere
Including Ground Lug Rating 3-Pole 2-Pole MLO
Power and Distribution Panelboards.
400 10
Below and on the next page are listed 6. Remote Control Switchesd 600 Consult Consult 10
many of those available, for Type F2 600V AC 800 Sales Sales 17.5
Office Office
panelboards. In no case do these apply 1200 17.5
to Narrow (Column) Width Lighting ASCO 920 Siemens CLH 11. MLO Compression Lugs
Panelboards. 600V AC Mechanically Electrically
1. Miscellaneous Ampere Held

Held g Available as main lugs and neutral lug.
Rating 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Deduct
ENCLOSURE TYPE 30 From
60 Available
Type 1 75 Unit
Type 2 (Drip-proof) 100 Unit space 20” Unit space 20” Ampere Aluminum Copper Space
Type 3R 150 Rating (Specify Size ) (Specify Size) (inches)
Type 12 200
225 400 5
2. Painted Finish 600 5
7. Increased Capacity Neutral 800 5
Description 1200 5
Touch-Up Paint (ASA61, Light Gray) Unit
12 oz. aerosol can, Ampere Rating Space
Catalog Number TUP-61 Phase Neutral (inches) 12. VK Switch Accessories
400 600 None Item Cat. No.
3. Miscellaneous Accessories 400 800 None
600 1200 None Fuse Pullers (2) 30/60 mp FP2
Nameplate — laminated, engraved
Tamper-Proof Screws 800 1200 None 100 amp FP3
200 amp FP4
4. Devices Mounted on Gutter Cover
Includes Device, Mounting — 8. Main Bus
Wired or Unwired Standard main bus and ground bus is 13. Sentron TPS (SPD Modules)
tin plated aluminum. For copper main 100 KA 200 KA 300 KA
Description bus, neutral bus and ground bus change 150 KA 250 KA
Toggle Switch — SPST or 3-way; 15A prefix ‘A’ to ‘C’ on catalog number and Options
contact your sales office for pricing. Surge Counter
Pilot Light — General Purpose, Neon or
Incandescent Remote Indicator
Pushbutton 9. Copper Lugs —

For Main Lug Only Panels 14. Customer Metering
Siemens Digital Metering with Remote Display
Standard main lugs and neutral lugs are SEM3 Embedded Metering
tin plated aluminum, UL & CSA listed for
use with aluminum/copper cables. For
copper Lugs in the mains and neutral
for use with copper cables only, contact
sales.
10
PANELBOARDS
 For d For required unit space — consult local sales office.  For
short circuit ratings with remote control switches
use on main lug, main breaker or main switch
panels without subfeed breakers. Price includes increased enclosure height if required. consult sales office.
b For increase in panelboard height — Consult local  Devices listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. g Panelboardshort circuit rating is limited to 5,000 RMS
sales office. When 2 wire control is required. Relay and Terminal symmetrical.
 Ground bar is not installed in box. Block (9” of unit space required).

Panelboards
Modifications, Additions Replacements for Fusible Switches Selection
Type F2 Replacement Unitsb
600 Volts Panelboard
Amperes J Fuses Height Tub Panel Replacement
Rating Cat. No. in (mm) Width Depth Type Max Amps Note
9” OLD CDP 400 MCCB only.
VK Switch For Use With FPP6 Panelboarddi 30” - 36” - 42”
30/30 VK23611JP 6.25 (159) 9.75” OLD CDP 600 MCCB only.
60/60 VK23622JP 6.25 (159)
32” - 38” 13.75” CDP6/VB6 1200A MCCB series 6 connectors
100/100 VK33633JP 7.5 (90)
200/200 VK73644JP 10 (254) 600A “VB” style units only (*)
1200A MCCB series 6 connectors

VB Switch For Use With VB6 Panelboardsi 38” 12.75” SPP6/FPP6
600A “VK” or “VB” style (*)
30/30 V7E3611JP 7.5(190)
60/60 V7E3622JP 7.5(190)
100/100 V7E3633JP 7.5(190)
200 V7F3604JP 10(254)
400 V7H3605JP 15(381)
600 V7H3606JP 15(381)
Connecting Strap Kitsj

Rating VB Switch VK Switch HCP Switch
Amperes Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
30/30
VK6-57
60/60
VB6-71
100/100 VK6-58
N/A
200 N/A
200/200 N/A VK6-72
400-600 VB6-150
N/A
800-1200 N/A F6162DCAN
Blank Filler Plates

For use with Series 6 CDP Panelboards, S5, F2,
FCI and FCII Switchboards.
SPP/FPP/CDP/VB
Height 6
1.25” 6FPB01
2.50” 6FPB02
3.75” 6FPB03
5.00” 6FPB05
10.00” 6FPB10
15.00” 6FPB15
10
PANELBOARDS
 For Series 6 Main Devices above 200A, add suffix MS to  Price is for two brackets – to be included with filler plates. i Fusible switch kits include fusible switches and cover
Catalog Number when ordering.  To be used in tubs with 30-200A, VB units or fillers in plates for switchboards and power panels. Connecting
b When 2-Pole units are required, use 3-Pole. 125/8” deep tub. strap kits to be ordered separately.
 Series 6 (VB6, CDP6) replacement units and connector kits g Can be used as fillers or in place of circuit breakers, VK or j Connecting strap kits include connecting straps and
also accommodates FCI and FCII distributions interiors. VB Switches. hardware. See Note 9 for cover plates.
Units installed after October 1991 will be FPP6 type. h Special order
d Refer to Siemens for units equipped with auxiliary switches.

Panelboards
Embedded Micro Metering Module™ Selection
SEM3 System Configured in Panelboards
The Siemens SEM3 system can be configured for factory The SEM3 system can be factory installed in unit space in
installation in branch circuit monitoring application. This option type P2 & S5 Siemens panel boards. Please note P1 and P3
can lower the installation time of the system for the installer configurations are not available at this time and the amount
while providing a factory warrantied solution. of unit space needed varies depending upon the application.
Please note that lead time adders will apply and may vary
depending upon the configuration of the system.
SEM3 for use in Siemens Panelboards
Available in a Type 1 and 2 rated enclosure
Controller
Each SEM3 Controller can monitor up to 45 circuits. Applications that require monitoring more
than 45 circuits will require additional controllers.

Five sizes of CTs are available for use in the S5 panel: 50, 125, 250, 400, 600, 800 & 1200
amp. Each bracket supports a maximum of 3 CTs and is designed for the breaker selected
(brackets are not interchangeable between breaker frames). Each CT will be attached to a
data module that is placed in the meter racks.
Meter Racks
All meter racks will be installed next to the SEM3 controller unit space. The 21 space
meter rack is used as a default option where possible.
NOTE: Monitoring of 45 circuits will require: two 21 position racks and one 3
position rack
Other Considerations
Configuration: Data modules from CTs monitoring a circuit breaker must be mounted
adjacent to one another in the meter rack. Any field changes to the factory configuration
must take this into account.
Start-up & Commissioning: Siemens can provide these services. Contact your local
Siemens sales office for more details.
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Panel Skirts/System Types, AC & DC Voltages
Conduit Enclosing Shield (Panel Skirts) AC Voltages
Sheet metal to cover conduits above or below a standard 1 phase, 2 wire
panelboard box. b 120V 1 phase, 2 wire
b 240V 1 phase, 2 wire
Skirt Length Width Depth
8, 9, 11, 12 20.00 5.75
14, 17, 18, 23, 25 20.00 5.75
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31,
1 phase, 3 wire
32, 33, 34, 35, 36
20.00 5.75 b 120/240V 1 phase, 3 wire
37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 20.00 5.75
8, 9, 11, 12 24.00 7.75
14, 17, 18, 23, 25 24.00 7.75
A B
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31,
24.00 7.75 1 phase, 2 wire, Wye
32, 33, 34, 35, 36
37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 24.00 7.75 b 277V 1 phase, 2 wire N
Panel Skirts Standard Length C
1 phase, 2 wire, Delta A

4 Sides Screw Front
C B
8, 9, 10,11, 12, 14, 17, 18, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34,
35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 1 phase, 3 wire, Delta
A
b 240/480V 1 phase, 3 wire
C B
Busing 3 phase, 4 wire, Wye
A
b 208Y/120V 3 phase, 4 wire B
b 480Y/277V 3 phase, 4 wire
b 600Y/347V 3 phase, 4 wire N
C
3 phase, 4 wire, Delta A
b 240/120V 3 phase, 4 wire
b 480/240V 3 phase, 4 wire B
N
C
3 phase, 3 wire, Delta
b 240V, 3 phase, 3 wire
b 480V, 3 phase, 3 wire A
Single-phase Three-phase b 600V, 3 phase, 3 wire
b 240V, 3 phase, 3 wire,
grounded B B
b 480V, 3 phase, 3 wire, C
grounded B
b 600V, 3 phase, 3 wire, A B
grounded B
N
1 phase, 3 wire, Wye
b 480Y/277V 1 phase, 3 wire C
10
DC voltage
PANELBOARDS
N +125Vdc
1 phase, 2 wire
b 125Vdc, 2 wire
(Up to 125Vdc,
MLO option only.)

Panelboards
Type HCP Switchboard and Power Panel Units, Accessories Selection
Features b Group mounts with other 30A through
CSA certified under file #24563 and UL 600A switches, and 100 through 1200
b amp frame breakers
Listed under file #E6849 Vol 1, Sect. 8
b 400-1200A ratings b Allows 800A and 1200A switches in
standard 38" wide distribution sections
b Visible contacts
in either main or branch configurations
b Field installable shunt trip and auxiliary
b 16 ⁄4" mounting height is the smallest
1
switch accessory kits
1200A design in the industry, allowing
b Installs in existing Siemens up to 4 units in one vertical section
switchboards
b Field reversible horizontal mounting
b Suitable for use on systems with up to design for left or right hand cabling
RMS symmetrical when equipped with b Handle can be padlocked in the OFF
position with up to three padlocks with
Class J or Class L fuses
5/16" hasps. A cover padlocking
provision is also supplied
3-Pole, Horizontal Mount 
Horsepower Rating
Maximum Maximum
Catalogue Ampere AC Voltage Fuse Dimensions (inches*) 240V 480V 600V 250V
Number Rating Ratingb Class H W D Std Max Std Max Std Max DC
HCP367HJ400 1400 600 J 16.25 17.22 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
HCP367HJ600 1600 600 J 16.25 17.22 7.38 175 200 150 400 200 400 40
HCP327HT 800 240 T 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP367H 1800 600 L 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328HT 1200 240 T 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP368H 1200 600 L 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50

HCP367VJ400 1400 600 J 17.00 16.25 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
HCP367VJ600s 1600 600 J 17.00 16.25 7.38 175 200 150 400 200 400 40
HCP327VT 800 240 T 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP367V 1800 600 L 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328VT 1200 240 T 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP368V 1200 600 L 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
Accessories T Fuse Adapter Kits (one per pole)

Terminal Connectors (one lug per kit) Catalogue
Number Description
Ampere Rating Catalogue Number Connector Wire Range TFAK72 1800A, 300V AC
400–600A TC2K500 (2) #1 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu only) TFAK82 1200A, 300V AC
400–800A TA3K500 (3) #1 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu or AI)
400–800A TC3K350 (3) #1 AWG–350 kcmil (Cu only)
800-1200A TA4H500 (4) #2 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu or AI) HCP Replacement Handle Kit
800-1200A TA3H750 (3) 500–750 kcmil (Cu or AI) (For use on all HCP switches)
SW Ampere Rating Catalogue Number
Auxiliary Switch Kits 400–1200A HCPHK
Contact Maximum Voltage Switch Catalogue

Ampere Rating AC DC Mounting Contacts Number
15A 480 125 Left Pole 1NO/1NC A01HCPL4s Compression Lug Adapter Kit
15A 480 125 Right Pole 1NO/1NC A01HCPR4 The use of this kit provides for the
mounting of up to four lugs per phase.
Shunt Trip Kit Switchboard Connection Strap Kit  Each kit accepts lugs with (2) 3/8" diam-
10
eter mounting holes on 1" centers. One

Control Voltage Switch
Ampere Rating Catalogue Number kit per pole line or load is required. Lugs
PANELBOARDS
Catalogue are not provided.

AC DC Number 400–1200A F6162DCAN
120 — HCPST120 Ampere Rating Catalog Number
240 — HCPST240s 400–1200A HCPCLP
277 — HCPST277
480 — HCPST480s
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by s Built to order. Allow 6–8 weeks for delivery. b Both 240 and 600V AC switches are also rated 250V DC
25.4.  For horizontal mounting only in either 38" wide min max.
switchboards or F2 power panelboards.

Panelboards
10
PANELBOARDS

Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Column Type General
Type C1
240 Volts AC Maximum Boxes
250 Ampere Mains C1 — 75⁄8" wide, 53⁄4" deep.
250 Ampere Maximum Branch C2 — 81⁄2" wide, 53⁄4" deep.
UL Short Circuit Rating —
200,000 IR Maximum Branch Breaker Side Gutters
Circuit Side Gutter
Branch Breaker Symmetrical Type Breaker (inches)
Interrupting Rating
C1 BL, BLH, HBL 3.505
Based on Underwriters’ Test Procedure C2 BQD 3.5
Type C2
Weight–Approximate
480Y/277 Volts AC Maximum
250 Ampere Mains Total panelboard weight when filled with
250 Ampere Maximum Branch a normal quantity of breakers and
UL Short Circuit Rating — accessories is:
100,000 IR Maximum *About 3 lbs. per inch of box height.
Meets NEC wire bending requirement, Gauge Steel Boxes
section 312–6. Type Width Height Gauge Steel
C1 75⁄8" 48", 73", 85" #14
Panelboards
C2 81⁄2" 48", 73", 85" #14
Listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories,
Inc., under “Panelboards” File #E2269. Fronts
Meets Federal Specification C1 75⁄8" 48", 73", 85"* #14
W–C375B/Gen. C2 81⁄2" 48", 73", 85"* #14
Service *Note: Feed thru lugs and subfeed breaker not available
for this height.
240 Volts Maximum. 1-Phase, 3-Wire, or
3-Phase, 4-Wire.
Panelboards Fronts and Doors Main Breaker Connectors
Standard panelboards are furnished with Ampere
Rating Connectors suitable for Cu or Al
trim with a flush door lock. All are factory
assembled for ease of installation. Fronts 100 (1) #14–1/0 AWG
are fabricated from code gauge steel and 125 (1) #4–1/0 AWG
finished ANSI-61. 225 (1) #6 AWG–300 kcmil
250 (1) #4 AWG–350 kcmil Al
Main Breakers C1 (1) #6 AWG–350 kcmil Cu
BL, BLH and HBL frame breakers are
mounted horizontally. All other frames
are mounted vertically. Main Lugs
125 (1) #6 AWG–350 kcmil
Main Breakers C2 250 (1) #6 AWG–350 kcmil
BQD frame breakers are mounted
horizontally. All other frames are
mounted vertically.
10
PANELBOARDS
For inches / millimeters conversion,  Connector ranges indicated do not apply to all main breaker types. Refer to

see Application Data section. molded case circuit breaker standard pressure wire connectors in the breaker
section of this catalog for the wire ranges for a specific breaker frame.

Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Column Type Selection
Branch Breaker Selection C1
Available Maximum Interrupting
Breaker Ampere Availability Rating (kA)
Type Rating 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 120V 120/240V 240V
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 u u u — 10 —
BL (120V) 70 u u u — 10 —
70, 80, 90, 100 — u u — 10 —
15, 20, 30 u u — 10 — —
BLF (GFCI)
40, 50, 60 — u — 10 — —
BLE (EQGFI) 15, 20, 30 u u — 10 — —
BGL (SWN) 15, 20, 30 — u u 10 — —
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — u — — — 10
BLR (240V)
70, 80, 90, 100 — u — — — 10
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 u u u — 22 —
BLH (120V) 70 u u u — 22 —
70, 80, 90, 100 — u u — 22 —
15, 20, 30 u u — — 22 —
BLHF (GFCI)
40, 50, 60 — u — — 22 —
15, 20, 30, 40, 50 u u u — 65 65
HBL
60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — u u — 65 65
Subfeed Breakers — Limit One Per Panel C1 (Not available for 42 circuit panels)
b
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 —– u u — — 65
ED4
110, 125 —– u u — — 65
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 —– u u — — 65
HED4
110, 125 —– u u — — 100
QR2 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 —– u u — — 10
FXD6 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 —– u u — — 65
HFD6 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 —– u u — — 100
Alternate Main Breaker Selection b

C2
Ampere Breaker Catalogue
Rating Type IR Number Available Trip Values
BQD 14 BD 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
ED4 18 E4 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
100 ED6 25 E6 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
HED4 42 H4 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
HHED6 65 H6 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
ED4 18 E4 110, 125
125 ED6 25 E6 110, 125
HED4 42 H4 110, 125
HHED6 65 H6 110, 125
FXD6 35 FX 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
225 HFD6 65 HF 170, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
FXD6 35 FX 250
250 HFD6 65 HF 250
Branch Circuit Breakers C2

Available Maximum Interrupting
Breaker Ampere Availability Rating (kA)
Type Rating 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 277V 480/277V 480V
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 u u u 14 14 —
BQD
70, 80, 90, 100 u u u 14 14 —
Subfeed Breakers — Limit One Per Panel b

C2 (Not available for 42 circuit panels)
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 —– u u — 18 18
10
ED4
110, 125 —– u u — 18 18
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 —– u u — — 25
ED6
110, 125 —– u u — — 25
PANELBOARDS
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 —– u u — — 42
HED4
110, 125 —– u u — — 42
FXD6 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 —– u u — — 35
HFD6 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 —– u u — — 65
 No increase in box height. Space is already built into
 Interchangeabletrip breakers such as FD6 and HFD6
C1 panel. cannot be back fed. Must be top feed only.
b BL, BLH, HBL and BQD are horizontally mounted.
All others vertically mounted.

Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Column Type, Modifications and Additions Selection
Type C1/C2
Column Extension
When required, special constructions or additions to standard
panelboards may be specified for factory-assembled column Available in various standard lengths,
panelboards. extensions are 51⁄4 inches deep and
7 inches wide.
Box Modifications Interior Modifications Height (inches) Catalogue Number
14 LXX-14
Description 20 LXX-20
Description
26 LXX-26
Gasketed Feed-Thru Lugs 32 LXX-32
Metal Card Holder Cu Neutral Lugs 38 LXX-38
Welded Metal Card Holder Cu main Lugs 125A 41 LXX-41
Nameplate Cu main Lugs 250A 44 LXX-44
Al Ground Bar 53 LXX-53
Cu Ground Bar 56 LXX-56
Insulated Al Ground Bar 62 LXX-62
Insulated Cu Ground Bar 65 LXX-65
68 LXX-68
74 LXX-74
80 LXX-80
Box Sizing Chart 86 LXX-86
Certain modifications such as subfeed breakers and feed-thru
lugs require additional unit space. Use this chart to determine
proper enclosure size.
Pull Boxes
Box Height
Panel Configuration (inches) Two styles of pull boxes are available,
All MLO 18 Circuit 48 top and front mounted. When the panel
All MLO 30 Circuit 73 and its extensions are mounted in a
All MLO 42 Circuit 85 structural WF beam a front mounted pull
All MLO 18 Circuit with feed-thru lugs 73 box is required. When the panels are
All MLO 30 Circuit with feed-thru lugs 85 surface mounted, a top mounted pull box
All MLO 18 Circuit with subfeed breaker 73 may be used. Provisions are made so
All MLO 30 Circuit with subfeed breaker 85
that the neutral bar may be mounted in
All Main Breaker 18 Circuit 48 the pull box when required.
All Main Breaker 30 Circuit 73
All Main Breaker 42 Circuit 85 (Front mounted pull box dimensions are
All Main Breaker 18 Circuit with feed-thru lugs 73
14" H. X 20" W.)
All Main Breaker 30 Circuit with feed-thru lugs 85 Description Catalogue Number
All Main Breaker 18 Circuit with subfeed breaker 73 Top Mount LXXP-T
All Main Breaker 30 Circuit with subfeed breaker 85 Front Mount b LXX50-F

C1 Filler for QR in Main position Kit contains all cover plates necessary to change from
MBKQRC1FK
1PH or 3PH QJ to QR both 2 and 3-pole breakers.
10
PANELBOARDS
For inches / millimeters conversion,  Must be ordered as a manual line.

see Application Data section. b Includes 50" extension.

Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Column Type Selection
Conduit Enclosing Shield (Panel Skirts)
Sheet metal to cover conduits above or below a standard
panelboard box.
Skirt Length Width Depth

8, 9, 11, 12 20.00 5.75
14, 17, 18, 23, 25 20.00 5.75
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31,
20.00 5.75
32, 33, 34, 35, 36
37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 20.00 5.75
8, 9, 11, 12 24.00 7.75
14, 17, 18, 23, 25 24.00 7.75
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31,
24.00 7.75
32, 33, 34, 35, 36
37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 24.00 7.75
Panel Skirts Standard Length
3 Sides Open Back

4 Sides Screw Front
8, 9, 10,11, 12, 14, 17, 18, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34,
35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44
10
PANELBOARDS
 Available only as a main switch for non-service

equipment applications. Not available for branch
devices.

Panelboards
Enclosure/System Types, AC & DC Voltages Selection
Type 1 AC Voltages
b Flush or surface mount. 1 phase, 2 wire
b Galvanized steel with removable end b 120V 1 phase, 2 wire
walls –blank or with knockouts to order.
b Box sizes: 20” W x 5.75” D x 33”, 50”,
59” or 69” H (510 W x 145 D x 838,
1270, 1500 or 1753mm H). Box can be
rotated 180° to accommodate conduit 1 phase, 3 wire
feed. b 120/240V 1 phase, 3 wire
b Enclosure and chassis mounting instruc-
tions are found in supplied literature.
b Chassis mounts directly onto studs in
the enclosure. A B
b Trim finished with gray powder coat 1 phase, 2 wire, Wye
paint over phosphatized steel (ANSI 61). b 277V 1 phase, 2 wire N
b Door and door-in-door configurations
with locks. C
b Door locks use key #2A1910-2.
b Circuit directory card is located on the
inside of the door. 1 phase, 2 wire, Delta A
b Trim screws are concealed. b 480V 1 phase, 2 wire
Type 3R C B
b Surface mount only.
b Finished with gray powder coat paint 1 phase, 3 wire, Delta
over phosphatized steel (ANSI 61). A
b Bottom feed only, no knockouts b 240/480V 1 phase, 3 wire
b Box sizes: 20” W x 7.7” D x 34.5”,
51.5”, 60.5” or 70.5 H (510 W x 195 D C B
x 876, 1310, 1535 or 1791mm H).
b Enclosure and chassis mounting instruc- A
tions are found in supplied literature b 208Y/120V 3 phase, 4 wire B
b Chassis mounts directly onto studs in b 480Y/277V 3 phase, 4 wire

the enclosure. b 600Y/347V 3 phase, 4 wire N
b Gasketed door has vault handle with

lock. C
b Door locks use key #2A1910-1. 3 phase, 4 wire, Delta A
b Circuit directory card is located on the b 240/120V 3 phase, 4 wire
inside of the door. b 480/240V 3 phase, 4 wire B
N
C
Busing
3 phase, 3 wire, Delta
b 480V, 3 phase, 3 wire A
b 240V, 3 phase, 3 wire,
grounded B B
b 480V, 3 phase, 3 wire, C
grounded B
b 600V, 3 phase, 3 wire, A B
grounded B
N
b 480Y/277V 1 phase, 3 wire C
10
Single-phase Three-phase
DC voltage
PANELBOARDS
N +125Vdc
1 phase, 2 wire
b 125Vdc, 2 wire
(Up to 125Vdc, MLO option
only, SCCPB 40A or less.)

Panelboards
Dimensions and Panelboard Configurations Selection
NEMA 1 and 3R Enclosure Dimensions
Dimensions (inches)
Encl. Type Encl. Height H HC MH CH DH RH SH DW D
33 33.0 N/A 29.0 26.0 28.9 25.0 2.0 20.0 5.7
50 50.0 N/A 43.0 40.0 37.9 39.0 3.5 20.0 5.7

NEMA 1
59 59.0 N/A 52.0 49.0 46.9 48.0 3.5 20.0 5.7
69 69.0 N/A 62.0 59.0 56.9 58.0 3.5 20.0 5.7
33 33.0 34.5 35.5 26.0 28.9 25.0 2.0 20.0 6.3
50 50.0 51.5 52.5 40.0 37.9 39.0 2.0 20.0 6.3

NEMA 3R
59 59.0 60.5 61.5 49.0 46.9 48.0 2.0 20.0 6.3
69 69.0 70.5 71.5 59.0 56.9 58.0 2.0 20.0 6.3
Available panelboard configurations

Based on enclosure height, panel amp rating and number of branch circuit positions
Encl. height Branch
(inches) Panel amp rating positions Available configurations
· Main lug only, with or without feed-through lugs
18
· Non-fused disconnect, no loadside options
33” 30–200
30 · Main lug only, no loadside options
18 · 30 through 60A fused main disconnect with or without feed-through lugs or TVSS device
30–60 30 · 30 through 60A fused main disconnect with or without feed-through lugs or TVSS device
70–200
30 · 70 through 200A fused disconnect with or without feed-through lugs
· Main lug only with TVSS device
50” 18
· Non-fused disconnect, with feed-through lugs or TVSS device
· Main lugs only, with feed-through lugs or TVSS device
30–200 30
· Non-fused disconnect, with or without feed through lugs
· Main lug only, with or without feed-through lugs or TVSS device
42
· Non-fused disconnect, with or without feed-through lugs
· Main lug only, with ot without feed through lugs or TVSS device
18
225–400A · Non-fused disconnect, with or without feed-through lugs
30 · Main lug only, with or without feed-through lugs
30 · 70 through 200A fused main disconnect, with TVSS device

70–200
30–200 42 · Non-fused disconnect with TVSS device

· Main lug only with loadside disconnect
59” 18 · Non-fused disconnect, with TVSS device
· 225 through 400A fused disconnect with or without feed-through lugs or TVSS device
225–400A · Main lug only, with TVSS device
30
· 225 through 400A fused disconnect, with no loadside options
· Main lug only, with or without feed-through lugs or TVSS device
42
· Non-fused disconnect, with no loadside options
10
18 · Non-fused disconnect, with loadside disconnect
· Main lug only with loadside disconnect

30
· 225 through 400A fused disconnect with feed-through lugs or TVSS device
PANELBOARDS
69” 225–400A
· Non-fused disconnect, with or without feed through lugs or TVSS device

42
· 225 through 400A fused main disconnect, with or without feed-through lugs or TVSS device

Panelboards
NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R Dimensions
NEMA 1 Enclosures 0.3 21 (7/8, 1-1/8)

Concentric KO 3.1
2.9
1.5
(1-3/4, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 3-5/8, 4-1/8)
Concentric KO
and Interior 1.1 2.2
7.4
0.5
Blank Endwall Knockout Endwall
Enclosures Available with 2 Blank, 2 Knockout, or 1 Each Endwall

DETAIL A
Flush Mount Flush Mount
DW + 3.0 DW + 3.0
Surface Mount Surface Mount
11.3 DW DW
SH
Ground Flush Mount

Door Lock H + 3.0
Neutral
CH Surface Mount
MH RH H H
DH
Spare Fuse
Compartment
16.0 2.0 0.25 Mounting

Hole Emboss Front View
20.0 D (Door in Door Option Shown on Right)
Box with Interior Side View of Box
0.2 0.5
NEMA 3R Enclosures
Interior same as NEMA 1 DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 4 Top End Wall (No Knockouts)
7.68
D
B
0.65
SH 2.0
0.6
2X
MH HC
H
10
Box Interior Same as NEMA 1

PANELBOARDS
13.0
Side View
DW
Front View
Bottom End Wall (No Knockouts)

Panelboards
Fuse Curves Selection
Time-Current Characteristic Curves–

Average Melt
Current Limitation Curves
10
PANELBOARDS

Notes
10
PANELBOARDS

11POWER PRODUCT Switchboards
REVISED
04/2021
Contents
11
SWITCHBOARDS
Sentron SMP, FCI, FCII Switchboards
Type SMP
Construction Details Features 11-2
Features 11-3
Specification 11-8
Type FCI, FCII 11-10
Construction Details Features 11-11
Features 11-12
Modifications and Additions Replacements for Circuit Breakers and 11-17
Fusible Switches Selection
Protective Devices
SentronTM Molded Case Circuit Breakers 11-18
Solid State SensitripTM Molded Case Circuit Breakers 11-19
Fusible Switches 11-20
HCP Disconnect Switches 11-21
Metering Data 11-23
Type IPS - Integrated Power Systems Switchboard
Features 11-24
Embedded Micro Metering Module (SEM3) 11-26
Sentron® SMP Switchboards
Construction Details Construction
Simplified system design. Distribution Sections have ample Bus-Link Connections are accessible
A typical SMP switchboard consist of wiring room and front accessibility. from the front.
11
a floor mounted, wall supported ser- Generous top or bottom gutters have The Bus-Link can be bolted from the
vice section, and a distribution section. been created by locating the bus-link in front of the switchboard. Each bus-link
SWITCHBOARDS
The wireway can also be added where the top or bottom of the distribution is attached by grade five bolts to assure
required by the local utility or if addition- section, so there’s ample room to run solid joints between sections, and to
al cable termination space is required. cables into the distribution section and maintain full bus ampacity through the
make connections. joint.
Wireways are modular to allow Standard bolted covers allow complete To make installation and servicing of the
flexibility. access to load conductors. Future bus-link easier, all phase and neutral
The wireway is available in 2 depths to flexibility comes standard in the busses are stacked one above the other.
suit customer needs. Wireway has split Siemens SMP switchboard. The
front doors as standard with optional distribution section can accommodate
hinged doors. The lug pads are standard any combination of panel mounted Cable Terminals
NEMA hole pattern and accept up to 5 devices, including MCCBs and fusible Screw mechanical connectors (lugs) are
mechanical lugs or 6 compression lugs. disconnect switches. provided as standard equipment.
90oC rated wireway. Operating temperatures are in

The termination temperature for main accordance with CSA Standards
incoming cables can be sized at 90oC Bus bars are available in standard
for bussed pull sections. tin-finished aluminum or optional
silver-finished copper. Standard bus is
Service Entrance Sections house a sized on the basis of heat rise criteria,
variety of equipment. in accordance with CSA C22.2 #31. All
bus bars are sized to limit heat rise to
b Service Entrance Sections.
65°C above an ambient temperature of
Service sections can be fed directly from
40°C.
overhead by cable.
Service entrance sections equipped
for bottom feed will accept cable from
underground directly into the service
section.
b Utility Metering
In addition to the main device, the
service section contains utility metering
provisions. “Cold” metering provisions
(CT’s on the load side of the main
device) are furnished. The CT’s are
provided by the utility company. The
compartment will be built to utility
company standards, with hinged doors
and provisions for utility metering
equipment.
b User Metering
The service section provides space for
the Siemens Digital Meter with remote
display, and it’s associated components.
b Main protective device

The MCCB is mounted individually
so that it can be located quickly in an
emergency. SMP switchboards will
accommodate different types of main
circuit breakers. Selection depends on
the characteristics of your individual
electrical system.

Power and Distribution General
SMP Switchboard Introduction SMP Specifications (Table 1)
11
Whether the design is for a 240V AC, 400 ampere SMP Switchboard
system; a 600V AC, 1200 A ampere system; or
Type 1
something in between, Siemens Sentron Switchboards
SWITCHBOARDS
Enclosure Type Type 2 (dripproof & sprinklerproof)
should be considered. Every aspect of design has Optional: Dripshield
been aimed at improving layout convenience, reducing
Dimensions
installation costs, and minimizing the impact and Main or Distribution
38” W x 90” H x 12.75” Dp
24” W x 90” H x 12.75” Dp or 25.5” Dp
cost of system changes. These switchboards provide Wireway
the space saving construction and service flexibility Volts 600V Max
necessary in systems for light industrial plants, retail
Amperes 400-1200A
strip malls, and commercial buildings.
Aluminum (tin plated)
Service entrance sections of the SMP accepts a wide Bus Type
Copper (silver finished) optional
range of Sentron Molded Case Circuit Breakers as
50 KA
main disconnect devices. Bus Bracing
65 KA (optional)
The SMP switchboard is designed for special 50 KA
Interrupting Capacity
configurations. It can be equipped with incoming and 65 KA (optional)
outgoing cable/conduit connections, supplied with Entry Cable only (top or bottom)
metering and other special features.
MCCB 400-1200A
The distribution sections of all Sentron Switchboards Main Device b 80% Rated
are designed with improved wiring space and b 100% Rated (option)
greater accessibility. They’re also designed for easier 52.5” in Main with Distribution Section, or
Branch Devices
installation and maintenance. Conveniently located (Unit Space)
22.5” in MUD Section, or
bus-link without compromising useful wiring gutter 60” in Distribution Section
space, and standard bolted gutter covers offer Siemens Digital Metering with Remote Display
Metering Devices
complete access to load conductors. Front accessibility SEM3 Embedded Metering
to bus and protective devices makes adding or SPD Units
replacing circuit breakers or switches quick and easy. Other Options Sill Channels (1.5”)
Lifting Hooks
SMP Switchboard Features and Ratings
b Main bus rated up to 1200 ampere.
b Rear of all sections aligned so that Main and Distribution Section Dimensions (Table 2)
switchboard can be floor mounted and Dimensions - Inches (mm)
Switchboard Type Access
secured against the wall. H W D
b Front connected and front accessible.
SMP Front 90” (2286) 38” (965) 12.75” (324)
b Main devices – individually mounted.
Molded Case Breaker: 400-1200 amps.
b Branch Devices – panel mounted.
Molded Case Breaker: 15–1200 amps fixed.
Quick-Make Quick-Break Fusible Switch: 30 - 600A
600 Volts AC Maximum

1200 Ampere Mains
1200 Ampere Maximum Branch
CSA Short Circuit Rating —
65,000A IR Maximum
CSA Certified To: CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 31-18

CSA Certificate No. 70172996
a Only available as a Wireway.

Power and Distribution Selection
Protective Devices - Molded Case Circuit Breakers Branch Breaker Gutter Dimensions
For 38”W Distribution Section (Table 5)
11
Standard
Breakers are designed for commercial, industrial, institutional and other
heavy duty applications. They are rated up to 600V AC and 250V DC. Their
SWITCHBOARDS
interrupting ratings are higher than normal duty breakers. 14.0” (356)
A A 3.75” (95)
High Interrupting B B 3.75” (95)

13.98” (355)
Breakers are designed for heavy duty applications where the interrupting
requirements exceed the ratings of heavy duty breakers. They are rated up to 11.62” (295)
C C 3.75” (95)
600V AC.
10” (254) D D 3.75” (95)
Current Limiting
3.75”
Molded case breakers incorporate the exclusive I-T-E blow-apart interruption E E (95)
principle. They meet the CSA requirements for current-limiting breakers. 7.61”(193)
Current-limiting circuit breakers can limit the let-through I2t to a value less than F F 5” (127)
the I2t of one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current without 8.75” (222)
any fusible elements when operating within their current-limiting range. 5”

G G (127)
8.25” (210)
Main Breaker Selection (Table 3) H H 5” (127)

10.90” (276)
Maximum
Interrupting Rating 11.76” (299)
J 5” (127)
(kA)
Amperage Breaker 240V 480V 600V

Rating Type Trip Type Available Trip Values K K 8.75”
(222)
JXD6 65 35 25 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 7.92” (201)
JD6 65 35 25 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

Thermal 6.25”
HJD6 100 65 35 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Magnetic L L (159)
HHJD6 200 100 50 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8” (203)
400
CJD6 200 150 100 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
SJD6 Electronic 65 35 25 200, 300, 400
SHJD6 (Solid 100 65 35 200, 300, 400 13.42” (341)
M 8.75” (222)
SCJD6 State) 200 150 100 200, 300, 400

LXD6 65 35 25 450, 500, 600
LD6 65 35 25 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
Thermal N 8.75” (222)
HLD6 100 65 35 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 12” (305)
Magnetic
HHLD6 200 100 50 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
600
CLD6 200 150 100 450, 500, 600
SLD6 Electronic 65 35 25 300, 400, 500, 600
15.5” (393)
O 6.25” (159)
SHLD6 (Solid 100 65 35 300, 400, 500, 600
SCLD6 State) 200 150 100 300, 400, 500, 600
MXD6 65 50 25 500, 600, 700, 800
MD6 Thermal 65 50 25 500, 600, 700, 800
13” (330)
P 10" (254)
HMD6 Magnetic 100 65 50 500, 600, 700, 800
800 CMD6 200 100 65 500, 600, 700, 800
SMD6 65 50 25 600, 700, 800
Electronic
SHMD6 (Solid 100 65 50 600, 700, 800
SCMD6 State) 200 100 65 600, 700, 800 Q 12” (305)
12” (305)
NXD6 65 50 25 800, 900, 1000, 1200
ND6 Thermal 65 50 25 800, 900, 1000, 1200
HND6 Magnetic 100 65 50 800, 900, 1000, 1200
1200 CND6 200 100 65 800, 900, 1000, 1200
13” (330)
R 8.75" (222)
SND6 65 50 25 800, 1000, 1200

Electronic
SHND6 (Solid 100 65 50 800, 1000, 1200
State)
SCND6 200 100 65 800, 1000, 1200

Branch Circuit Breaker Selectiona (Table 4)
11
Breaker
Frame Trip Mounting Height Inches (mm) Max IC Rating (kA)
Rating Type Breaker Type Poles Trip Amperage Single Twin Guttere 240V 480V 600V
SWITCHBOARDS
BL 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
Thermal BLH 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 22 — —
Magnetic HBL 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 65 — —
BQD6 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 65 — 10
100 BLE (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
Ground Fault
Circuit Interrupter
BLF (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
BLHF (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 22 — —
Arc Fault Circuit BAF (AFCI) 1 15, 20 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
Interrupter BAFH (AFCI) 1 15, 20 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 22 — —
ED2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 10 — —
ED4 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 65 18 —
ED6 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 100 18 18
HED4 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 100 65 30
CED6 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 7.61 (193) 200 200 100
Thermal
125 NGB2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 100 25 14
Magnetic
HGB2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 100 35 22
LGB2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 100 65 25
3VA41 (SEAB) 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 65 25 14
3VA41 (MEAB) 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 85 35 18
3VA41 (HEAB) 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 150 65 25
3VA61 (MDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 35 18
150
3VA61 (LDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 150 50
QR2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 10 — —
Thermal QRH2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 25 — —
225
Magnetic HQR2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 65 — —
HQR2H 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 100 — —
FXD6, FD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.25 (210) 65 35 22
HFD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.25 (210) 100 65 25
Thermal CFD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 — 5 (127) 11.76 (299) 200 200 100
Magnetic 3VA52 (MFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 85 35 18
250 3VA52 (HFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 100 65 25
3VA52 (CFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 200 100 35
3VA62 (MFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 35 18
3VA62 (LFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 150 50
JXD6, JD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 65 35 25
Thermal HJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 100 65 35
Magnetic HHJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 200 100 50
CJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
400 SJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Electronic SHJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
(Solid State) SCJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
NJG 3 250, 400 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8 (203) 65 35 25
LJG 3 250, 400 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8 (203) 200 100 25
LXD6 2, 3 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Thermal LD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Magnetic HLD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
HHLD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 200 100 50
600 CLD6 2, 3 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
Electronic SLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
(Solid State) SHLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
SCLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
MXD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Thermal MD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Magnetic HMD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 100 65 50
800 CMD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 200 100 65
SMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 65 50 25
Electronic
(Solid State) SHMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 100 65 50
SCMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 200 100 65
NXD6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Thermal ND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Magnetic HND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 100 65 50
1200 CND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 200 100 65
Electronic SND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 65 50 25
(Solid State) SHND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 100 65 50
SCND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 200 100 65
a Space includes housing frame plate with blank cover  1to 6 poles may be mounted in 3.75” (95) of unit space eRefer to Table 5 for layout dimensions.
cover plate with breaker handle opening.  Also 10kA at 600Y/347 Volts.

Protective Devices - Fusible Disconnects
11
Fuse Selection Maximum VB HP Ratings (Table 6) Branch Switch Connectors (Table 10)
The Proper Fuse Type for the Application Volts Switch
SWITCHBOARDS
is Selected Using the Following Amp 3 Phase Single Phase Ampere

Parameters: Rating Wire and Cable Range
Rating 240 480 600 240
30 (1)—#14–#4 AWG (Cu or Al)
b Voltage Requirements 30 7.5 15 20 3 60 (1)—#14–#4 AWG (Cu or Al)
b Conductor Ampacity 60 15 30 50 10 100 (1)—#10–#1/0 AWG (Cu or Al)
100 30 60 50 15 200 (1)—#6 AWG-350kcmil (Cu or Al)
b Horsepower Requirements 200 60 125 50 – 400 (1)—#1/0 AWG-750 MCM OR
b Maximum Available RMS Fault Current 400 50 50 50 – (2)—#1/0 AWG-250 MCM (Cu or Al)
600 (1)—#1/0 AWG-750 MCM OR
b CSA Fuse Class 600 50 50 50 –
(2)—#1/0 AWG-250 MCM (Cu or Al)
Branch Switch Gutter Dimensions

1/1 7/28/2004 2:54 PM GRID MATRIX Switches REV2 DIMENSIONS SMP SWITCHES Maximum VK HP Ratings (Table 9) Switch Interrupting Ratings
For 38W Distribution Section (Table 8) Volts
Interrupting Rating
Amp 3 Phase Single Phase (kA)
Switch
7.5" (191) 30/30A VK Switch 6.25" (159) Rating 240 480 600 240
Type 240V 480V 600V
30 7.5 15 20 3
VB 200 100 100
7.5" (191) 60/60A VK Switch 6.25" (159)
60 1.5 30 50 10
100 30 50 75 15 VK 200 200 200
7.5" (191) 100/100A VK Switch 7.5" (191)
200 60 125 150 15
5.0" (127) 200/200A VK Switch 10.0" (254)
Branch Switches 600V Maximum(Table 11) Gutters (Table 12)

10.0" (254) 30/30A VB Switch 7.5" (191)
End Gutters Side Gutters
Rating Max Fusing Mounting Ampere Minimum - Minimum -
7.5" (191)
10.0" (254)
Rating Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
60/60A VB Switch
Ampere Voltage Height 38”W
400 12” (305) 7.9” (201)
10.0" (254) 100/100A VB Switch 7.5" (191) 30/30A & 60/60A (VK)e 600V Class J 6.25” (159)
100/100A (VK)e 600V Class J 7.5” (190) 600 12” (305) 7.9” (201)
8.0" (203) 200/200A VB Switch 10.0" (254)

200/200A (VK)e 600V Class J 10.0” (254)
30/30A & 60/60A (VB) 600V Class J 7.5” (190) Switch Accessories (Table 13)
100/100A (VB) 600V Class J 7.5” (190)
Fuse Pullers (VK) Cat. No.
200A (VB) 600V Class J 10.0” (254)
400A thru 600A
30 or 60 Amp FP2
9.25" (235) VB Switch 15.0" (381)
400A & 600A (VB) 600V Class J 15.0” (381)
100 Amp FP3
200 Amp FP4
800A
CSA Fuse Classes (Table 14)

10.25" (260) HCP Switch 16.25" (413)
Class Amperes Volts (AC) I2t, Ip (Let-Thru) Circuits

H Standard Code 1-600A 250 and 600V — Less than
or less — 10,000A available
Ka Fast Acting 1-600A 250 and 600V — Feeder circuits
(One time) or less
J Fast Acting 1-600A 600V or less Ip and I2t-Low Feeder circuits
and Time Delay (motor load small %) Motor circuits
RK1 Fast Acting 1/10-600A 600V or less I2t-Slightly > J Feeder circuits
and Time Delay 250V or less Ip-Slightly > J Motor circuits
RK5 Fast Acting 1/10-600A 600V or less I2t- > RK-1 Feeder circuits
and Time Delay 250V or less Ip- > RK-1 Motor circuits
C Moderate 2-600A 600V or less I2t- < RK-5 Motor circuits
(FORM II) Delay Ip- < RK-5
T Fast Acting 1-600A 300 and 600V I2t-Low Non-motor loads
or less Ip-Low
L Fast Acting 601-5000A 600V or less I2t-Low Feeder circuits
and Time Delay motor loads Motor circuits
a Fuse clips do not prohibit the use of Class H type fuse Ratings are based on UL test procedure.
in switch. Connector
 range applies to VB Switches only.
 Refer to Siemens for single phase and DC horsepower 5Not suitable for use in distribution space in main section.
requirements.

Special Construction, Additions and Accessories
11
When required, special constructions 10. Circuit Breaker Accessories
or additions to standard Switchboards Handle Blocking Device
SWITCHBOARDS
may be specified for all factory- Blocks handle in either the “ON” or VK Switch For Use With FPP6
assembled Power and Distribution “OFF” position. Available for: Panelboards (for 38"W sections)
Switchboards. Listed below are those 30/30 VK23611JP 6.25 (159)
available for Type SMP Switchboards. Breaker Type Cat. Number
60/60 VK23622JP 6.25 (159)
BL, BLH, HBL, BQ, 100/100 VK33633JP 7.5 (90)
1. Enclosure Type ECQL1
BQH, HBQ
200/200 VK73644JP 10 (254)
38” Enclosure Types All BQD, GB BQDHBD
Type 1 All QR HPLQR VB Switch For Use With VB6

All BQD, NGB, NGB2,
Panelboards (for 38"W sections)
Type 2 (dripproof & sprinklerproof) BQDHBD
HGB2, LGB2 30/30 V7E3611JP 7.5(190)
Optional: Dripshield 60/60 V7E3622JP 75(190)
All ED E2HBL
100/100 V7E3633JP 7.5(190)
2. Wireway Options All FD FD6HB1
200 V7F3604JP 10(254)
Hinged Door All JD, LD JD6HBL 400 V7H3605JP 15(381)
24”W x 90”H x 12.75” Dp
Door Covers All MD, ND, PD MN6BL 600 V7H3606JP 15(381)
Hinged Door
24”W x 90”H x 25.5” Dp 3VA52/61/62 3VA93780LB10
Door Covers
3. Painted Finish Padlocking Device — Padlocks in

Touch-Up Paint (ASA61, Light Grey) “OFF” position. Available for:
12 oz. aerosol can, Cat. # TUP-61
Breaker Type Cat. Number
4. Miscellaneous Accessories
BQ, BQH, BL, BLH, HBL ECQLD3
Nameplate - laminated and engraved
One Pole BL, BLF, BE,
ECPLD1
5. Bus-Link(One Set Per Panel) BAF
Ampere Unit Space Occupied in MUD - Two-Pole BL, BLF, BE ECPLD2
Rating Inches (mm)
All QR HPLQR
400-1200 Consult Factory
All BQD, NGB, NGB2,
BQDPLD
6. Grounding of SMP Switchboard HGB2, LGB2
Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bus All ED ED2HPL

Including Ground Lug All FD FD6PL1
Continuous Solid Copper Ground All JD, LD JD6HPL
(optional)
All MD, ND, PD, RD MN6PLD
7. Main Bus 3VA41 3VA90380LB11
Standard Main bus and Neutral bus are 3VA52/61/62 3VA91380LB11
tin plated aluminum or silver finished
copper (option). Handle Extensions - For replacement
8. Lugs (one extension shipped with breaker)
For Main Device and Neutral Breaker Type Cat. Number
For Main Breakers please see SpeedFax All MD, ND, PD EX11
section #6
Ground Fault Sensing Relay Kit
Neutral - please consult factory
Equipment Protection (30 mA)
9.SPD Modules For Use with Number Catalogue Number
Breaker Types of Poles Description
Sentron TPS3 05 ED4, ED6, See breaker section
HED4 1, 2, 3 of this catalogue.
100KA
150KA
200KA Shunt Trip on Main or Branch
250KA Description Cat. Number
300KA BL, BQD6 (branch only) See breaker
Options: Surge Counter ED2, ED4, HED4 (branch only) portion of this
Remote Monitor All others through 1200A catalogue

Specification
A. Scope  User metering as indicated below and of not less than _______ amperes RMS
Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, as shown on plans. symmetrical at the system voltage.
11
a secondary distribution switchboard, as Main (service) section: The following accessory options are to be
specified herein, for the system indicated Siemens Digital metering with included:
SWITCHBOARDS
below: remote display  Shunt trip

 120/208V  3-phase  3-wire  _______ current transformer(s)  Ground fault relay
 347/600V  4-wire  _______ /5 or suitable rating  Long time (Sensitrip III only)
 600V SEM3 Embedded Metering  Long time delay (Sensitrip III only)
B. Configuration Ground fault Protection (3-Phase, 4-Wire):  Short time (Sensitrip III only)
The switchboard enclosure shall be of Furnish and install on the service  Short time delay (Sensitrip III only)
bolted construction: equipment and/or switchboard a Ground  Integral ground fault (Sensitrip III only)
 Type 1 indoor. Fault protection system and indication  Other_______ (list)
 Type 1 with dripshield (optional). equipment as specified herein and as H. Branch Protective Devices
 Type 2. shown on drawings in accordance with (Select as necessary)
Switchboard shall be bolted together to CEC Section 14-102. All molded case circuit breakers, and
form one metal enclosed rigid switchboard. All new Ground Fault Protection and fusible disconnect units used as a
Switchboard shall include all protective Indication equipment shall be factory protective device in a branch circuit will
devices and equipment as listed on installed, wired and tested by the meet the requirements of the appropriate
drawings with necessary interconnections, switchboard manufacturer. paragraph below
instrumentation and control wiring. F. Switchboard SMP Guide Specification H1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker
All groups of control wires leaving the The complete switchboard shall be finished Molded case circuit breakers shall be
switchboard shall be provided with terminal with light grey, ASA-61 paint. of quick-make, quick-break, trip-free 
blocks with suitable numbering strips. Each switchboard main section shall have a (thermal magnetic type)  (current limiting)
The switchboard shall have space or metal nameplate permanently affixed to it, (solid state) with frame, trip and voltage
provisions for future expansion as noted on listing the following information: rating, either 2-pole or 3-pole, as
the plans. Switchboard shall be constructed b Name of manufacturer indicated on the plans. All breakers shall
and certified in accordance with CSA b System voltage have an interrupting capacity of not less
22.2.31 standards and shall be Siemens b Ampacity than _______ amperes RMS symmetrical
type (SMP) or approved equal. Individual b Type at the system voltage. All breakers shall
sections shall be front accessible, not less b Manufacturer’s shop order number and be removable from the front of the
than 12.75” (324) deep, and the rear of all date switchboard without distributing adjacent
sections shall align. b Each section of switchboard shall bear a units. The switchboard shall have space or
Distribution sections shall be designed to CSA certification mark and a short circuit provisions for future units shown on the
accommodate the intermixing of Molded rating label. plans.
Case Breakers and Fusible Disconnects in The switchboard shall be per the H2. Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
the same distribution interior. arrangement below. Current limiting circuit breakers shall
C. Bus Requirements F1. Switchboard Type Panel-Mounted, provide inverse time delay, instantaneous
The bus shall be  tin-finished aluminum Front Accessible. circuit protection, and also limit the let-
 silver-finished copper (option) of Switchboard shall be of Siemens SMP through I2t to a value less than I2t of
sufficient size to limit the temperature type, or approved equal. Individual sections one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical
rise to 65°C. The bus shall be braced for shall be front accessible, floor mounted prospective current without any fusible
 50,000 or  65,000 (option) amperes rear supported, not less than 12.75” (324) elements. Breakers shall have an
symmetrical and supported to withstand deep, and rear, of all sections shall align. interrupting capacity of not less than
mechanical forces exerted during short Incoming line termination, main device _______ ampere RMS symmetrical at the
circuit conditions when directly connected connection and all bolts used to join system voltage.
to a power source having the indicated current-carrying parts shall be installed so H3. Fusible Disconnect
available short circuit current. as to permit servicing from the front only Fusible disconnects shall be quick-make,
D. Incoming Service so that no rear access is required. The quick-break units utilizing the double-break
Overhead or Underground Service: branch devices shall be front removable principle of circuit rupturing to minimize
Cable Entry and panel mounted with line and load side arcing and pitting and shall conform to the
This section shall be bussed and  connections front accessible. ratings shown on the plans.
sealable per local utility requirements. G. Main Protective Devices Each disconnect shall have an individual
Screw-type mechanical lugs,  The main protective device, to be installed door over the front, equipped with a
compression lugs to terminate,  in the main device section, shall be as voidable interlock that prevents the door
aluminum, copper cable, shall be indicated below: from being opened when the switch is
__________ kcmil, and ___ cables per G1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker in the ON position unless the interlock
phase.  Main breaker standard aluminum Molded case circuit breaker shall be of the is purposely defeated by activation of
mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or quick-make, quick-break, trip-free, the voiding mechanism. All disconnects
copper. (No wireway)  (standard)  (High Interrupting) shall have externally operated handles.
E. Metering Service Section  (Current Limiting) (solid state Disconnects shall be equipped with 
The service section shall be designed Sensitrip III) type. Class J (standard), Class R rejection
for the system parameters indicated in It shall be _______ frame (3-pole) type, Class L (standard), Class T fuse
section “A” above. The metering service  (240V) (600V) breaker with a trip holders as indicated on the plans suitable
section shall have a Utility Metering current rating of: for application on system with _______
compartment per utility requirements.  400A,  600A,  800A,  1000Aa, amperes symmetrical available fault
 1200 Aa of an interrupting capacity current.
a Ground fault protection required, per CEC section 14-102 when “the current is O 1000A at 600 volts.”

Application
Fault-Current Calculation on Low- Voltage AC Systems Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Ratings
11
In order to determine the maximum interrupting rate of the The term “Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating” refers
circuit breakers in a distribution system it is necessary to to the application of series connected circuit breakers in a
calculate the current which could flow under a three-phase
SWITCHBOARDS
combination that allows some breakers to have lower individual
bolted short circuit condition. For a three-phase system the interrupting ratings than the available fault current. This is
maximum available fault current at the secondary side of the
permitted as long as the series combination has been tested
transformer can be obtained by use of the formula:
SquareRootSymb.pdf 7/13/04 5:30:22 PM
and certified by UL & CSA.
lsc = kVA x 100 Series ratings must be specified on order at time of entry. For
KV x 3 x % Z
C
CM
MY
CY
more information on series ratings please consult your local
Siemens sales representative.
CMY
lsc = Symmetrical RMS amperes of fault current.

kVA = Kilovolt-ampere rating of transformers.
KV = Secondary voltage in kilovolts.
%Z = Percent impedance of primary line and transformer.
Normal load and Fault Currents of Three Phase Transformers(Table 18)

Trans- Maximum 208 Volts, 3 Phase 240 Volts, 3 Phase 480 Volts, 3 phase 600 Volts, 3 Phase
former Short-Circuit Rated Short-Circuit Current Rated Short-Circuit Current Rated Short-Circuit Current Rated Short-Circuit Current
Rating Kva Load RMS Symmetrical Amps. Load RMS Symmetrical Amps. Load RMS Symmetrical Amps. Load RMS Symmetrical Amps.
3 Phase Available Contin- Trans- 50% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com-
Kva and from uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined
imped- Primary Current, Alone Load Current, Alone Load Current, Alone Load Current, Alone Load
ence %a System Amps  Amps  Amps  Amps 
300 50000 834 14900 1700 16600 722 12900 2900 15800 361 6400 1400 7800 289 5200 1200 6400
5% 100000 15700 17400 13600 16500 6800 8200 5500 6700
150000 16000 17700 13900 16800 6900 8300 5600 6800
250000 16300 18000 14100 17000 7000 8400 5600 6800
500000 16500 18200 14300 17200 7100 8500 5700 6900
Unlimited 16700 18400 14400 17300 7200 8600 5800 7000
500 50000 1388 21300 2800 25900 1203 20000 4800 24800 601 10000 2400 12400 481 8000 1900 9900
5% 100000 25200 28000 21900 26700 10900 13300 8700 10600
150000 26000 28800 22500 27300 11300 13700 9000 10900
250000 26700 29500 23100 27900 11600 14000 9300 11200
500000 27200 30000 23600 28400 11800 14200 9400 11300
Unlimited 27800 30600 24100 28900 12000 14400 9600 11500
750 50000 2080 28700 4200 32900 1804 24900 7200 32100 902 12400 3600 16000 722 10000 1900 12900
5.75% 100000 32000 36200 27800 35000 13900 17500 11100 14000
150000 33300 37500 28900 36100 14400 18000 11600 14500
250000 34400 38600 29800 37000 14900 18500 11900 14800
500000 35200 39400 30600 37800 15300 18900 12200 15100
Unlimited 36200 40400 31400 38600 15700 19300 12600 15500
1000 50000 2780 35900 5600 41500 2406 31000 9600 40600 1203 15500 4800 20300 962 12400 3900 16300
5.75% 100000 41200 46800 35600 45200 17800 22600 14300 18200
150000 43300 48900 37500 47100 18700 23500 15000 18900
250000 45200 50800 39100 48700 19600 24400 15600 19500
500000 46700 52300 40400 50000 20200 25000 16200 20100
Unlimited 48300 53900 41800 51400 20900 25700 16700 20600
a Short circuit currents are calculated with impedences

and kVA shown in this table.
 Short circuit current contributions are calculated on the
basis of motor characteristics that will produce four
times normal current. 50% motor load contribution is
assumed for 208V and 100% motor load contribution is
assumed for 240V, 480V and 600V.
 This Table has been prepared to list the symmetrical
RMS fault current which is available at the secondary
terminals of the transformer.

Sentron® FCI, FCII Switchboards
General
Whether the design is for a 240V
AC, 400 ampere system; a 600V AC,
11
6000 ampere system; or something

in between, Siemens Sentron
SWITCHBOARDS
Switchboards should be considered.

Every aspect of design has been
aimed at improving layout convenience,
reducing installation costs, and
minimizing the impact and cost of
system changes. These switchboards
provide the rugged construction and
service flexibility necessary in systems
for industrial plants, hi-rise complexes,
hospitals, and commercial buildings,
and are built to NEMA and CSA, C22.2
#31 and EEMAC, G8.2 standards (up to
4000A).
90oC rated wireway.
The termination temperature for main
incoming cables can be sized at 90oC
for bussed pull sections.
CSA Certified to: CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 31-18
CSA Certificate No. 70172994
FCI Switchboard FCII Switchboard

b Main bus rated up to 2000 ampere. b Main bus rated up to 6000A ampere.
b Branch Devices–panel mounted. b Branch Devices rear connected
b Rear of all sections aligned so that individually mounted.
switchboard can be installed against b Front and rear of all sections align.
wall. Design for mounting away from wall.
b Front connected and front accessible. b Free Standing
b Main devices–individually mounted or b Rear connected and rear accessible.
panel mounted. Molded Case Breaker: b Main Devices–individually mounted.
400-1200 amps fixed. Molded Case Breaker: 400-1200
b Quick-Make Quick-Break Fusible amps., fixed.
Switch: 800-1200 amps., fixed. b Quick-Make Quick-Break Vacu-Break
b Bolted Pressure Fusible Switch: Fusible Switch: 400-1200 amps., fixed.
800–2000 amps., fixed. Bolted Pressure Fusible Switch:
b Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker: 800–4000 amps., fixed.
400-2000 amps fixed. b Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker:
b Branch Devices: panel mounted only. 800-5000 amps., fixed or drawout.
Molded Case Breaker: 15–1200 amp., b Branch Devices: individually mounted
fixed. Molded Case Breaker: 100–2000
b Quick-Make Quick-Break Fusible amp., fixed (or plug in).
Switch: 30–1200 amps., fixed. b Quick-Make Quick-Break Fusible
Switch: 100–1200 amp., fixed.
Bolted Pressure Switch: 800–4000
amp., fixed.
b Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker:
800–5000 amps., fixed, or drawout.
* 6000 amps - Consult Sales Office

Construction Details General
Versatility simplifies system design. Main protective devices can be To make additional distribution
11
Service Sections mounted individually so that they can sections easier to install when they
Typical switchboards consist of a be located quickly in an emergency. are necessary the through-bus in each
service section, and one or more FC switchboards will accommodate distribution section is extended, and the
SWITCHBOARDS
distribution sections. Service sections different types of main protective end is pre-drilled to accept splice plate
can be fed directly from overhead by devices. Selection depends on the bolts. To add a section to an existing
either cable or bus duct. characteristics of your individual FCI or FCII switchboard, set the new
electrical system. section flush against the side of the
When fed from underground, a
existing distribution section, and bolt
separate pull section is usually added.
together the bus bar splice plates.
The service section is then fed from the Distribution Sections have expanded
adjacent pull section. wiring room and exceptional
Low Voltage Power circuit breakers accessibility. Operating temperatures are in
and Vacu-Break Switches equipped for Generous top and bottom gutters have accordance with CSA Standard C22.2
bottom feed will accept cable directly been created by locating through-bus in #31 and UL Standard 891.
from underground into the service the rear centre of the distribution Bus cars are available in standard
section section. No obstructions are less than tin-finished aluminum or optional
8” (203) above the floor, and no live bus tin-finished copper. Standard bus is
bars are located less than 10” (254 off sized on the basis of heat rise criteria,
Choose bussed or non-bussed the floor. So there’s plenty of room to in accordance with CSA C22.2 #31 and
pull sections. run cables into the distribution section UL891. All bus bars are sized to limit
With FCI and FCII switchboards, a non- to make connections. heat rise to 65°C above an ambient
bussed pull section, or a cross-bussed Standard bolted gutter covers give temperature of 40°C.
pull section for underground feed can complete access to load conductors.
be selected. The unique cross-bussed As an option, hinged doors can be Modular, bolted frame construction
section permits cable to be run straight furnished where quick access to load saves labour.
from underground to the bus bars at connectors is desired. Modular construction of all service
the top of the section.
Heavy channels form a rigid ring at the and distribution sections allows the
Non-bussed pull sections have openings base and top of each section and heavy switchboard to be designed into the
for carrying the underground feed gauge structural members are used for building, rather than designing the
cables to the service section bus. the vertical corner posts so there’s no building around the switchboard.
encroachment of additional bracing into FCI and FCII switchboards can even
Main Section house a variety of the top and bottom gutter areas. be continued around corners where
equipment. To provide additional room for load cable necessary. Rigid, bolted frames can
routing where needed, pull box be shipped individually and moved into
Utility Metering the building in sections that are easy to
In addition to the main disconnect, the extensions are available in heights of
10 (254), 15 (381), 20 (508), 25 (635) maneuver without special equipment,
main section usually contains utility then quickly assembled in place.
metering provisions. “Cold” metering and 30 (762) inches to mount on any
provisions (CT’s on the load side of standard distribution section.
the main disconnect) are normally Top plates on all sections are easily
furnished. When utility metering is removed in the field for drilling,
required, the CT’s provided by the punching, and cutting conduit entry
utility company will be mounted in a holes.
completely separate compartment.
The compartment will be built to
Distribution sections are designed
utility company standards, with hinged
with the future in mind.
doors and provision for utility metering
equipment. Because all distribution sections
can accommodate any combination
User Metering
of panel-mounted branch devices,
The main section often provides space
including molded case circuit breakers,
for many user instrument requirements.
Vacu-Break® fusible switches, future
Ammeters, voltmeters, and their
system modifications are easier to
associated selector switches can be
handle without adding switchboard
mounted in the main section along with
sections.
the main disconnect. Only if a very
large instrument or an unusual number
of instruments are required, would a
separate section be required.

FCI, FCII Switchboards General
Service sections of the FCI and FCII accept a wide range of
Sentron Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Vacu-Break® Fusible
11
FCI FCII
Switches, or WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers as main Enclosure Type Type 1 Type 1
disconnect devices. Type 2 (dripproof Type 2 (dripproof
SWITCHBOARDS
& sprinklerproof) & sprinklerproof)

Optional: Dripshield, Optional: Dripshield,
The FCII switchboard is designed for special configurations.
Gaskets Gaskets
It can be equipped with incoming and outgoing busway
connections, automatic transfer schemes and many other Section 38” W x 90” H x 28” Dp 20”, 25”, 32”, 46”, 54”
Dimensions 20”, 24”, 32”, 38” W Pull Box W x 70”, 90” H x
custom engineered applications. The FCII can also be supplied
28”, 38”, 48”, 58”, Dp.
with special metering provisions, current transformers, 20”, 24”, 32”, 38” W Pull Box
potential transformers, panelboards and many other special
Volts 600V Max 600V Max
features.
Amperes 400-2000A 400-6000A
Entry Cable only Cable, Duct
The distribution sections of all Sentron Switchboards are Hydro Trough
designed with improved wiring space and greater accessibility.
Main Devices MCCB 400-1200A MCCB 400-1200A
They’re also designed for easier installation and maintenance. VB 800-1200A VB 400-1200A
Conveniently located through-bus creates useful wiring gutter Pringle 800-2000A Pringle 800-4000A
space, and standard bolted gutter covers offer complete WL ICCB 800-2000A WL ACB 800-5000A (option)
access to load conductors. WL ICCB 800-5000A
Branch Devices S5-22.5”, 45”, 65” S5-22.5”, 30”, 45”, 65”, 75”
CDP-7, P2 2-21” (MUD)
Metering Devices Siemens Digital Metering Siemens Digital Metering

with Remote Display with Remote Display
SEM3 Embedded Metering SEM3 Embedded Metering
other manufactures
Analog
VB Meter centres
Relays Single Phase, All Types
GFR3, MGFR, GFR
Other Options Transfer switch provisions,
Power Transformer
Connections, Dist.
Transformer Provisions
Bus Duct Connections
Distribution Sections
Switch-
Height Width Depth
board
Type Access Std. Opt. Std. Opt. Std. Opt.
FCI Front 90 — 38 — 28a —
FCII Rear 90 70 38 32 or 46 38a 28, 48, or 58 a
aDistribution section with two high 800 or 1200A Vacu- Distribution section with two high bolted pressure
Break is 28 in. deep. switch is 38 in. deep minimum.

General/Guide
Even the front, back and side covers of the FCI and FCII are To make installation and servicing of the splice plates easier, all
light, easy-to-handle, formed steel pieces that fit flush to the phase and neutral through-busses are stacked one above the
11
cabinet sides. No heavy, unwieldy flat plate must be removed other, eliminating the need to stuff bolts in between bus bars
to gain interior access. that are stacked one behind the other in the same horizontal
SWITCHBOARDS
plane.
Bus location saves wiring time.
All through-bus to adjoining sections are located in the rear Two types of cable terminals are available.
centre of distribution section. This design provides large, Screw mechanical connectors (lugs) are provided as standard
unobstructed wiring gutters at the top and bottom of each equipment on all devices. However, compression connectors
section. Wiring takes less time, and costs less to install. are available as an option on all main lugs, main bolted pressure
switches, main power circuit breakers, and main insulated case
Splice plates are accessible from the front. circuit breakers.
All splice plates can be bolted and unbolted from the front of
the switchboard to make connection of adjacent sections easy.
Each splice plate is attached by grade 5 bolts to assure solid
joints between sections, and to maintain full bus ampacity
through the splice joint.

Specifications General/Guide
A. Scope C. Bus Requirements E. Metering Service Section
11
Furnish and install, as shown on The bus shall be (tin-finished aluminum) The service section shall be designed for
the plans, a secondary distribution (silver-flash copper) of sufficient size the system parameters indicated in
switchboard, as specified herein, for the to limit the temperature rise to 65°C. section “A”. The metering service
SWITCHBOARDS
system indicated below: The bus shall be braced for (50,000) section shall have a  metering
 120/208V  3-phase  3-wire (75,000) (100,000) (200,000) amperes compartment per utility requirements,
 277/480V  4-wire symmetrical and supported to withstand  user metering as indicated below and
 480V mechanical forces exerted during as shown on plans.
 347/600V short circuit conditions when directly Main bus:
 600V connected to a power source having the  Voltmeter with _______ -phase
indicated available short circuit current. transfer switch
B. Configuration The through-bus on the end section shall  Ammeter, with _______ -phase
be extended and pre-drilled to allow the transfer switch
The switchboard enclosure shall be: addition of future sections with standard  Digital metering
 Type 1 indoor of a bolted splice plates.  _______ current transformer(s)
construction design.  _______ /5 or suitable rating
 Sprinkler Proof  Gasketted Grade 5 bolts will be used at bus joints.
 _______ potential transformer(s), of
 Type 2  Dripshield suitable rating.
D. Incoming Service
 SEM3 Embedded Metering (Main
Switchboard shall be of the required 1. Underground Service: Breaker/Main Incoming)
number of vertical sections bolted To isolate incoming underground
service conductors, an underground Branch circuits:
together to form one metal enclosed Ammeter(s), with _______ -phase
rigid switchboard. The sides, top and rear cable pull or auxiliary section shall be
used. This section shall be of the transfer switch
shall be covered with removable bolted  SEM3 Embedded Metering
code gauge steel plates. Switchboard  non-bussed,  bussed type and
shall include all protective devices shall be sealable per local utility
and equipment as listed on drawings requirements,  screw-type Ground fault Protection:
with necessary interconnections, mechanical lugs,  compression lugs Furnish and install on the service
intrumentation and control wiring. All to terminate,  aluminum,  copper equipment and/or switchboard a Ground
groups of control wires leaving the cable, shall be furnished as detailed Fault protection system and indication
switchboard shall be provided with on the plans. equipment as specified herein and as
terminal blocks with suitable numbering 2. Overhead Service: shown on drawings in accordance with
strips. A. Cable Entry The Canadian Electrical Code Section
The switchboard shall have space or  screw-type mechanical lugs 14-102.
provisions for future expansion as noted  compression lugs to terminate All new Ground Fault Protection and
on the plans.  aluminum  copper cable shall Indication equipment shall be factory
Switchboard shall be constructed in be furnished as detailed on the installed, wired and tested by the
accordance with the latest EEMAC G8.2 plans. Where necessary provide switchboard manufacturer.
and CSA 22.2 #31 standards and shall top cable pull box which shall be
be Siemens type (FCI) (FCII) or approved sealable per local utility
equal. Individual sections shall be front requirements.
and rear accessible, not less than 28” B. Busway Entry
deep, and the rear of all sections shall Switchboard to be fed by Siemens
align. Bus duct  copper,  aluminum,
Distribution sections shall be designed ____ ampere as detailed on plans,
to accommodate the intermixing of and other sections of the
Molded Case Breakers and fusible specification. The switchboard
devices in the same distribution interior. manufacturer shall be responsible
for coordination, proper phasing
and internal bussing to the
incoming busway.
C. Transformer Coupling 
The switchboard shall be directly
connected to the adjacent
transformer section, including all
necessary bus bars and flexible
connectors.

Guide Specifications
F. Switchboards FCI, FCII F3. Switchboard Type Individually primary and secondary disconnects are
11
Guide Specification Mounted, Rear Accessible engaged. In the “test” position, the
The complete switchboard shall be (Fixed mounted devices). primary disconnect terminals are
phosphatized and finished with light grey, Switchboard shall be of Siemens FCII disengaged; however, the secondary
SWITCHBOARDS
ASA-61 paint. type, or approved equal. All sections disconnects are maintained to permit the
shall align front and rear. All disconnect operation of the circuit breaker. In the
Each switchboard section shall have a
devices, main and feeders, shall be “disconnect” position, the primary and
metal nameplate permanently affixed to
mounted individually at the front of the secondary disconnects are disengaged
it, listing the following information:
switchboard and shall be rear accessible. and separated a safe distance from the
b Name of manufacturer corresponding stationary terminals. In the
The load terminals of each feeder device
b System voltage “fully withdrawn” position, both primary
shall be extended by means of insulated
b Ampacity and secondary contacts are disconnected
bus bars through the bus compartment in
b Type and the circuit breaker may be inspected
to the rear cable compartment.
b Manufacturer’s shop order number as it can be removed for more
and date Optional
complete accessibility.
b Each section of switchboard shall  barriers shall be provided between bus
The load side of each feeder breaker shall
bear a CSA listing mark and a short and cable compartment.
have bus bars extending from the rear
circuit rating label. barriers shall be provided between of the primary disconnect through the
b The switchboard shall be per the vertical sections. bus compartment in to the rear cable
arrangement below (Select 1 of ITEM F) barriers shall be provided between compartment.
devices and bus compartment. Optional
F1. Switchboard Type Panel-Mounted,  barriers shall be provided between  barriers shall be provided between bus
Front Accessible. individual devices. and cable compartment.
Switchboard shall be of Siemens FCI F4. Switchboard Type Individually  barriers shall be provided between
type, or approved equal. Individual Mounted Rear Accessible vertical sections.
sections shall be front accessible, not (Drawout Power Circuit Breaker).
 barriers shall be provided between
less than 28” deep, and rear of all Switchboard shall be of Siemens FCII devices and bus compartment.
sections shall align. Incoming line type or approved equal. All sections shall
termination, main device connection  barriers shall be provided between
be aligned front and rear. Each vertical
and all bolts used to join current-carrying individual devices.
section forming part of switchboard
parts shall be installed so as to permit lineup shall have one or more individual
servicing from the front only so that breakers or instrument compartments, a
no rear access is required. The branch centralized main bus compartment and
devices shall be front removable and a rear cabling compartment. Drawout
panel mounted with line and load side power circuit breakers shall be individually
connections front accessible. mounted in their own compartments.
F2. Switchboard Type Panel-Mounted Metal barriers shall be provided at the
Rear Accessible sides and rear of each compartment
Switchboard shall be of Siemens FCII and a horizontal metal barrier between
type, or approved equal. Individual breakers in the same vertical section.
sections shall be front and rear The breaker shall be accessible through
accessible, not less than 38” deep, and a hinged metal door on each breaker
both the front and rear of all sections compartment.
shall align. The branch devices shall be The drawout mechanism of power circuit
front removable and panel mounted breaker shall be such that it can be
with line and load side connections front moved from connect through test to
accessible. The bus and main device disconnect position without opening the
connections shall be rear accessible. door. In the “connect” position, both the

Guide
G. Main Protective Devices G4. Insulated Case Circuit Breaker switchboard without distributing adjacent
(Select one of Item G) Insulated case circuit breaker with a units. The switchboard shall have space
11
The main protective device, to be stationary frame. Frame size to be or provisions for future units shown on
installed in the main device section, shall _______ ampere 3-pole, 600-volt with a the plans.
SWITCHBOARDS
be as indicated below: trip current rating of:

 400 A  2000 A H2. Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
G1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker  600 A  2500 A Current limiting circuit breakers shall provide
Molded case circuit breaker shall be of  800 A  3000 A inverse time delay, instantaneous circuit
the quick-make, quick-break, trip-free,  1000 A  _____ A
protection, and also limit the let-through
(standard) (High Interrupting) (Current  1200 A
 1600 A I2t to a value less than I2t of one-half cycle
Limiting) (solid state Sensitrip III) type. It
wave of the symmetrical prospective
shall be _______ frame (2-pole) (3-pole) It shall be a manually operated breaker
600-volt breaker with a trip current rating with a solid state trip device, and an current without any fusible elements.
of: interrupting capacity of not less than Breakers shall have an interrupting capacity
 400 A  1600 A _______ amperes RMS symmetrical at of not less than _______ ampere RMS
 600 A  2000 A the system voltage. symmetrical at the system voltage.
 800 A The following accessory features are to
 1000 A H3. Fusible Switch
be included:
 1200 A Fusible switches shall be quick-make,
 Short time delay quick-break units utilizing the double-break
of an interrupting capacity of not less  Integral ground fault trip principle of circuit rupturing to minimize
than _______ amperes RMS symmetrical  Fault trip indicator arcing and pitting and shall conform to the
at the system voltage.  Other _______ (list) ratings shown on the plans.
The following accessory features are to Each switch shall have an individual door over
be included: G5. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Low voltage power circuit breaker with a the front, equipped with a voidable interlock
 Shunt trip (stationary) (drawout) frame and a current that prevents the door from being opened
 Electrical Operator rating of: when the switch is in the ON position
 Ground fault relay  800 A  3200 A unless the interlock is purposely defeated
 Long time (Sensitrip III only)  1600 A  4000 A by activation of the voiding mechanism.
 Long time delay (Sensitrip III only)  2000 A  _____ A All switches shall have externally operated
 Short time (Sensitrip III only) handles. Switches shall be equipped with
 Short time delay (Sensitrip III only) It shall be (manually) (electrically) (Class R rejection type) fuse holders and
 Integral ground fault (Sensitrip III only) operated power circuit breaker with a Class (J) (R) or (L) fuses of ampere rating and
 Other_______ (list) Electronic Trip Unit and an interrupting type as indicated on the plans suitable for
capacity of _______ amperes RMS application on system with _______ amperes
G2. Fusible Switch symmetrical at the system voltage. symmetrical available fault current.
Fusible switch of the quick-make, quick- The following accessory features are to
break type. It shall be a (2-pole) (3-pole) be included: H4. Bolted Pressure Switch
(240V) (600V) Vacu-Break unit with a  Short time delay Each bolted pressure switch shall be the
continuous current rating of (400) (600)  Integral ground fault trip quick-make, quick-break type, equipped
(800) (1200) amperes and with _______  Fault trip indicator with Class L fuses suitable for application
ampere Class _______ fuses, suitable  Other _______ (list) on a system with _______ amperes
for application on a system with _______ symmetrical available fault current. Ampere
amperes symmetrical available fault H. Branch Protective Devices rating to be as shown on the plans.
current. (Select as necessary)
All molded case circuit breakers, H5. Insulated Case Circuit Breaker
G3. Bolted Pressure Switch fusible switches, insulated case circuit FCII Switchboards only
Bolted pressure switch of the quick- breakers, bolted pressure switches, low Each insulated case circuit breaker shall
make, quick-break type. It shall be a voltage power circuit breaker, and/or be manually operated with solid state trip
(2-pole) (3-pole) (240V) (600V) unit with a motor starter units used as a protective device. Frame sizes and trip ratings to be
continuous current rating of: device in a branch circuit will meet as shown on the plans. All breakers to
 800 A  2500 A the requirements of the appropriate have an interrupting capacity of not less
 1200 A  3000 A paragraph below. than _______ amperes symmetrical at the
 1600 A  4000 A rated voltage.
 2000 A  _______ A H1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker
and with _______ ampere Class L fuses Molded case circuit breakers shall be of H6. Low Voltage Power Air Circuit Breaker
suitable for application on a system with quick-make, quick-break, trip-free FCII Switchboards only
_______ amperes symmetrical available (thermal magnetic type) (current limiting) Each low voltage power air circuit breaker
fault current. (solid state) with frame, trip and voltage shall be (stationary mounted) (drawout
The following accessory features are to rating, either 2-pole or 3-pole, as indicated mounted) stored energy type, trip free,
be included: on the plans. All breakers shall have an (manually operated) (electrically operated)
interrupting capacity of not less than with solid-state trip device. Frame sizes
 Shunt trip and trip ratings to be as shown on the
 Ground fault relay _______ amperes RMS symmetrical at
the system voltage. All breakers shall plans. All breakers to have an interrupting
 Other _______ (list) capacity of no less than_______amperes
be removable from the front of the
symmetrical at the rated voltage.

Sentron® SMP, FCI, FCII Switchboards
Modifications and Additions Replacements for Circuit Breakers and Fusible Switchesg Selection
Connecting Strap Kits for use with Circuit Breakers in Circuit Breaker Accessories
Handle Blocking Device Blocks handle
11
Distribution Sectionshj(Table 15)
in either the “ON” or “OFF” position.
Breaker Type Catalogue Number Unit Height Mounting Available for:
SWITCHBOARDS
BQ, BQH, HB, BL, BLH, HBL 6BL2Ce 3.75" (95) Twin
Breaker Type Cat. Number
NGB2, HGB2, LGB2 SGB2DCAN 3.75" (95) Twin
BL, BLH, HBL, BQ, BQH,
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4 6E62a 3.75" (95) Twin ECQL1
HBQ
CED6 6CLE2a 3.75" (95) Twin
All BQD, GB BQDHBD
S3VA41TDCAN 3.75" (95) Twin
3VA41 All QR HPLQR
S3A41TDHDCANo 7.50" (191) Twin, High Density
All BQD, NGB, NGB2,
3VA61 S3VA52TDCANm 5" (127) Twin BQDHBD
HGB2, LGB2
QR2, QR2H, HQR2, HQR2H 6QR2CANl 5" (127) Twin
All ED E2HBL
FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HHFD6 6F62a 5" (127) Twin
All FD FD6HB1
CFD6 6CLF1Ce 5" (127) Single
All JD, LD JD6HBL
3VA52, 3VA62 S3VA52TDCANm 5" (127) Twin
JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HHJD6 6JJ62a 8.75" (222) Twin All MD, ND, PD MN6BL
SJD6, SHJD6 6SJL1Ce 8.75" (222) Single 3VA52/61/62 3VA93780LB10

CJD6 6CLJ1Ce 8.75" (222) Single Padlocking Device — Padlocks in
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HHLD6, SLD6, SHLD6 6LL61Ce 8.75" (222) Single “OFF” position. Available for:
CLD6, SCJD6 6CLL1Ce 8.75" (222) Single Breaker Type Cat. Number
SCJD6, SCLD6 6SCL61Ce 8.75" (222) Single
BQ, BQH, BL, BLH, HBL ECQLD3
MXD6, MD6, HMD6, CMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6 6M61Ce 10" (254) Single
One Pole BL, BLF, BE, BAF ECPLD1
NXD6, ND6, HND6, CND6, SHND6, SCND6 6N61Ce 10" (254) Single
Connecting Strap Kits for use with Two-Pole BL, BLF, BE ECPLD2
Blank Filler Plates for
VB, VK or HCP Switches in Distribution Distribution Switch or Circuit All QR HPLQR
Sectionshjn(Table 16) Breakerf (Table 17) All BQD, NGB, NGB2,
BQDPLD
Rating VB Switch VB Switch HCP Switch For use with SMP Switchboards. HGB2, LGB2
Amperes Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
Height - Catalogue All ED ED2HPL
30/30 Inches (mm) Number
VK6-57 All FD FD6PL1
60/60 1.25” (32) 6FPB01
VB6-71
100/100 VK6-58 2.50” (64) 6FPB02 All JD, LD JD6HPL
N/A 3.75” (95) 6FPB03
200 N/A All MD, ND, PD, RD MN6PLD
5.00” (127) 6FPB05
200/200 N/A VK6-72
10.00” (254) 6FPB10 3VA41 3VA90380LB11
400-600 VB6-150 15.00” (381) 6FPB15
N/A 3VA52/61/62 3VA91380LB11
800-1200 N/A F6162DCAN
Metering Switch for Handle Extensions - For replacement

FCI Metering Switchboardsk(46"W) Shunt Trip on Main or Branch (one extension shipped with breaker)
Breaker Types Cat. Number
Ampere 600V Metering Switch Height- Description Cat. Number
Rating (c/w Meter Socket) Inches (mm) All MD, ND, PD EX11
BL, BQD6 (branch only) See breaker
30/30 V7E3611JMC7 10" (254) ED2, ED4, HED4 (branch only) portion of this Ground Fault Sensing Relay Kit
60/60 V7E3622JMC7 10" (254) All others through 1200A catalogue Equipment Protection (30 mA)
100/100 V7E3633JMC7 10" (254) For Use with Number Cat. Number
200 V7F3604JMC7 17.5" (444.5) Breaker Types of Poles Description
ED4, ED6, See breaker portion
1, 2, 3
3VA Breaker Provision Kits HED4 of this catalogue
Breaker Type Cat. Number Description
VK Switch For Use With FPP6 Panelboardsn
3VA52, 3VA61 or Only required when installing a 3VA52, 3VA61, or 3VA62 breaker to an
S3VA52PRCAN 30/30 VK23611JP 6.25 (159)
3VA62 Breaker existing provision in the field. Parts are included with kit S3VA52TDCAN.
60/60 VK23622JP 6.25 (159)
a These are aluminum connectors. If copper is required iRefer to Siemens for units equipped with auxiliary switches.
100/100 VK33633JP 7.5 (90)
please add suffix C. jConnecting strap kits include connecting straps,
 3.75” (95) plate accommodates six 1-pole breakers. hardwares, and cover plates for switchboards and power 200/200 VK73644JP 10 (254)
 10” (254) plate accommodates eighteen 1-pole breakers. panels. Breakers and switches to be ordered separately.
Connector kits also accommodate S5, F2, CDP6 kMetering switch kits include metering switches, VB Switch For Use With VB6 Panelboardsn
Panelboards, FCRS, FCI and FCII distribution interiors or cover plates, connecting straps, and hardware.
CDP6/SPP6 Series Panels. lQR filler plates only: 6QR2FKCAN. For copper QR kit, 30/30 V7E3611JP 7.5(190)
eThese connectors are available in copper only. use p/n: 6QR2CCAN.
fBlank (Circuit Breaker or Switch) Cover Plates can also be mTo field install a single 3VA52, 3VA61 or 3VA62 breaker to an
60/60 V7E3622JP 75(190)
used in FCI and FCII distribution interiors or CDP6/SPP6 existing strap, provision kit p/n: S3VA52PRCAN is required. 100/100 V7E3633JP 7.5(190)
Series Panels. nThe fusible switches and connecting strap kits are designed for
gPlease refer to the respective section in the catalogue for
200 V7F3604JP 10(254)
standard 38"W sections. Additional covers are required for
detailed circuit breaker or switch information. wider sections. Please consult your local sales contact. 400 V7H3605JP 15(381)
hMounting kits include connector straps and covers oHigh Density Kit, requires 7.50" Unit Space to fit QTY (6) 2
600 V7H3606JP 15(381)
(breakers or switches are not included). Pole breakers.

Protective Devices - Sentron™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers General
Standard Current Limiting
Breakers are designed for commercial, industrial, institutional Breakers are molded case breakers that incorporate the
11
and other heavy duty applications. They are rated up to 600V ac exclusive I-T-E blow-apart interruption principle. They meet the
and 250V DC. Their interrupting ratings are higher than normal US-NEC requirements for current-limiting breakers. Current-
SWITCHBOARDS
duty breakers. limiting circuit breakers can limit the let-through I2t to a value
High Interrupting less than the I2t of one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical
Breakers are designed for heavy duty applications where the prospective current without any fusible elements when
interrupting requirements exceed the ratings of heavy duty operating within their current-limiting range.
breakers. They are rated up to 600V ac and 250V DC.
Breaker Trip Breaker Mounting Height Inches (mm) Max IC Rating (kA)
Poles Trip Amperage
Frame Rating Type Type Single Twin Guttere 240V 480V 600V
BL 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
Thermal BLH 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 22 — —
Magnetic HBL 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 65 — —
BQD6 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 65 — 10
100 BLE (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
Ground Fault
BLF (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
Circuit Interrupter
BLHF (GFCI) 1, 2 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 22 — —
Arc Fault Circuit BAF (AFCI) 1 15, 20 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 10 — —
Interrupter BAFH (AFCI) 1 15, 20 — 3.75 (95) 14 (356) 22 — —
ED2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 10 — —
ED4 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 65 18 —
ED6 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 100 18 18
HED4 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 10 (254) 100 65 30
CED6 2, 3 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 7.61 (193) 200 200 100
Thermal 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
125 NGB2 1, 2, 3 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 100 25 14
Magnetic 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
HGB2 1, 2, 3 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 100 35 22
LGB2 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 100 65 25
3VA41 (SEAB) 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 65 25 14
3VA41 (MEAB) 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 85 35 18
3VA41 (HEAB) 1, 2, 3 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) 13.98 (355) 150 65 25
3VA61 (MDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 35 18
150
3VA61 (LDAE) 3 40, 100, 150 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 150 50
QR2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 10 — —
Thermal QRH2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 25 — —
225
Magnetic HQR2 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 65 — —
HQR2H 2, 3 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.75 (222) 100 — —
FXD6, FD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.25 (210) 65 35 22
HFD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 8.25 (210) 100 65 25
Thermal CFD6 2, 3 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 — 5 (127) 11.76 (299) 200 200 100
Magnetic 3VA52 (MFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 85 35 18
3VA52 (HFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 100 65 25
250 3VA52 (CFAS) 2, 3 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 10.10 (257) 200 100 35
3VA62 (MFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 100 35 18
3VA62 (LFAE) 3 100, 250 5 (127) 5 (127) 9.59 (244) 200 150 50
JXD6, JD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 65 35 25
Thermal HJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 100 65 35
Magnetic HHJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 7.92 (201) 200 100 50
CJD6 2, 3 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
400 SJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
SHJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
Electronic
SCJD6 3 200, 300, 400 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
(Solid State)
NJG 3 250, 400 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8 (203) 65 35 25
LJG 3 250, 400 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8 (203) 200 100 25
LXD6 2, 3 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
LD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Thermal
HLD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
Magnetic
HHLD6 2, 3 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 200 100 50
600 CLD6 2, 3 450, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
SLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 65 35 25
Electronic
SHLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 13.42 (341) 100 65 35
(Solid State)
SCLD6 3 300, 400, 500, 600 8.75 (222) — 12 (305) 200 150 100
MXD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Thermal MD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Magnetic HMD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 100 65 50
800 CMD6 2, 3 500, 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 13 (330) 200 100 65
SMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 65 50 25
Electronic
SHMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 100 65 50
(Solid State)
SCMD6 3 600, 700, 800 10 (254) — 12 (305) 200 100 65
NXD6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Thermal ND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 65 50 25
Magnetic HND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 100 65 50
1200 CND6 2, 3 800, 900, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 13 (330) 200 100 65
SND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 65 50 25
Electronic
SHND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 100 65 50
(Solid State)
SCND6 3 800, 1000, 1200 10 (254) — 12 (305) 200 100 65
a Space includes housing frame plate with blank cover  1 to 6 poles may be mounted in 3.75” (95) of unit space eRefer to Table 5 for layout dimensions.
cover plate with breaker handle opening.  Also 10kA at 600Y/347 Volts.

Protective Devices - Solid State Sensitrip™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers General
The Sentron Sensitrip IV Functions available in Sentron Sensitrip circuit breakers
circuit breaker is a true RMS
11
Short Short
current sensing device. Digital Catalogue Cont Long Instan- Short Time Time Ground Ground
microprocessor circuitry within the Number Trip Current Time taneous Time Fixed I2t Fault Fault
SWITCHBOARDS
Suffix Type Setting Delay Pickup Pickup Delay Delay Pickup Delay
electronic trip unit provides more
precise control over the circuit LI LI u u u
breaker functions. This control LIG LIG u u u u u
allows circuit coordination flexibility LSI LSI u u u u u u
not available with thermal magnetic
circuit breakers.
Typical Trip Unit Labeling and Adjustment Positions for the Sentron Sensitrip Circuit Breaker.
LI Trip Unitsa Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
LIG Trip Unitsa Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
LSI Trip Unitsa Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
LSIG Trip Unitsa

Active
Push
Overload
To Trip
Maintenance
Mode
ln = Maximum circuit breaker ampere rating Ig = Ground fault pickup expressed in amperes
lr = Continuous current rating expressed in amperes tsd = Short time delay - either fixed or I2t time delay function
Ii = Instantaneous pickup expressed in amperes tld = Long time delay - I2t time delay function
Isd = Short time pickup expressed in multiples of Ir tg = Ground fault delay - I2t time delay function
NOTE: Frame rating (In) of 600A shown as an example. a Schematic of advanced trip unit shown. Basic trip units
Trip unit settings will vary based on the specific frame are identical but do not include DAS / Maintenance
rating (In) of the device. Mode functionality.

Protective Devices - Fusible Switches General
VK and VB (Vacu-Break) Fusible CSA Fuse Classes
11
Switches Class Amperes Volts (AC) Interrupting I2t, Ip Circuits

Ratings (Let-Thru)
All VK and Vacu-Break fusible switches
250 and 600V — Less than
SWITCHBOARDS
include voidable cover interlock; H Standard Code 1-600A

or less
10,000A
— 10,000A available
quick-make, quick-break operation;
Fast Acting 250 and 600V
positive ON-OFF action; padlockable Ka
(One time)
1-600A
or less
50,000A — Feeder circuits
(at ON or OFF) handle design; Vacu-
Ip and I2t-Low
Break arc control (i.e., enclosed arc J
Fast Acting
1-600A 600V or less To 200,000A (motor load
Feeder circuits
chamber, double-break magnetic arc and Time Delay Motor circuits
small %)
blowout); clampmatic pressure spring Fast Acting 600V or less I2t-Slightly > J Feeder circuits
force on closed contacts; spring- RK1 1/10-600A To 200,000A
and Time Delay 250V or less Ip-Slightly > J Motor circuits
reinforced fuse holders. The VK switch Fast Acting 600V or less I2t- > RK-1 Feeder circuits
is a true visible contact design. RK5 1/10-600A To 200,000A
and Time Delay 250V or less Ip- > RK-1 Motor circuits
Accessory devices and modifications C Moderate I2t- < RK-5
2-600A 600V or less To 200,000A Motor circuits
available for 250-volt switches (30 (FORM II) Delay Ip- < RK-5
amps to 600 amps): Class R and 300 and 600V I2t-Low Non-motor
T Fast Acting 1-600A To 200,000A
class J rejection type fuse holders or less Ip-Low loads
are available for all units. For 600-volt Fast Acting To 200,000A I2t-Low Feeder circuits
L 601-5000A 600V or less
switches (30 amps to 600 amps): Class and Time Delay Ip-Low motor loads Motor circuits
R rejection type fuse holders, Class J
fuse holders; (100 amps to 600 amps) Branch Switches 600V Maximum
Class T fuse holders. Switch Type Ampere Maximum Fusing
Rating Voltage
VB/VK 30 / 30A
Bolted Pressure Switches
VB/VK 60 / 60A
These switches are suitable for use on
VB/VK 100 / 100A
systems capable of delivering fault 600V Class J
current up to 200,000 amps VB 200A
symmetrical RMS when equipped VK 200 / 200A
with Class L fuses. All bolted pressure
VB 400A, 600A
switches include fuse door interlock;
aRefer to Siemens for Form II Class C applications.
quick-make, quick-break operation;
bolted pressure force on closed Interrupting Ratings of Bolted Pressure Switches
contact; padlockable (in the “open”
Max. Class L Fuse Interrupting
position only) handle. System Ampere Fuse Rating Rating
Voltage Rating (Amps) (Sym. RMS Amps)
Accessories and modifications
800 601, 700, 800
available: shunt trip (electrical open–
manual close). 120V ac standard 240 1200 1000, 1200
1600 1500, 1600 200,000
control voltage: electrical operator to
600 2000 1800, 2000
(electrical open and close), specify 2500 2500
system voltage; ground fault relay 3000 3000
(requires shunt trip); blown fuse trip 4000 3500, 4000
(switch opens when any one fuse Application Note: Lower rated fuses may be installed within any switch rating i.e.: 2000-amp fuse in 4000-amp switch.
blows–requires shunt trip); blown fuse
indicating lights; phase failure relay
with capacitor trip (detects failure of
any one phase and opens switch–
requires shunt trip) specify system
voltage; auxiliary contacts.

Protective Devices - HCP Switchboard Unit Disconnect Switches General
Features
11
b CSA Certified / UL Listed under file . . b Mixes with other 30A through 600A .
number E6849 switches, and 100 through 1200 amp
frame breakers.
SWITCHBOARDS
b 800A-1200A switch design.
b Visible contacts. b Allows 800A and 1200A switches in .
standard 38” wide distribution sections
b Field installable shunt trip and auxiliary
in either main or branch configurations.
switch accessory kits.
b Installs in existing Siemens ....
b 16 1⁄4” mounting height is the smallest
1200A design in the industry, allowing
switchboards and power panelboards.
up to 4 units in one vertical section.
b Suitable for use on systems with up to
b Field reversible horizontal mounting . .
design for left or right hand cabling.
RMS symmetrical when equipped with
Class J or Class L fuses.
3-Pole, Horizontal Mount a

Horsepower Rating
Maximum Maximum
Catalogue Ampere Voltage Fuse Dimensions (inches) 240V 480V 600V 250V
Number Rating Rating Class H L D Std Max Std Max Std Max DC
HCP327HT 1800 240 T 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP367H 1800 600 L 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328HT 1200 240 T 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP368H 1200 600 L 16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50

HCP327VT 1800 240 T 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP367V 1800 600 L 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328VT 1200 240 T 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 — — — — 50
HCP368V 1200 600 L 17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
Accessories
Terminal Connectors (one lug per kit) T Fuse Adapter Kits
Ampere Catalogue Connector Catalogue
Rating Number Wire Range Number Description
800A TA3K500 (3) #1 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu or AI) TFAK72 1800A, 300V AC
800A TC3K350 (3) #1 AWG–350 kcmil (Cu only) TFAK75 1800A, 600V AC
800-1200A TA4H500 (4) #1 AWG–500 kcmil (Cu or AI) TFAK82 1200A, 300V AC
800-1200A TA3H750 (3) 250–750 kcmil (Cu or AI)

Contact
Maximum Compression Lug Adapter Kit
Voltage
Ampere Switch Catalogue The use of this kit provides for the
Rating AC DC Mounting Contacts Number
mounting of up to four lugs per
15A 480 125 Left Pole 1NO/1NC A01HCPL4 phase. Each kit accepts lugs with (2)
15A 480 125 Right Pole 1NO/1NC A01HCPR4 3/8” diameter mounting holes on 1”
10A 240 125 Left Pole 2NO/2NC A01HCPL2 centres. One kit per pole line or load is
required. Lugs are not provided.
Shunt Trip K it Switchboard Connection
Control Voltage Strap Kit a Ampere Catalogue
Catalogue
Rating Number
AC DC Number Switch Catalogue
Ampere Rating Number 800–1200A HCPCLP
120 — HCPST120
240 — HCPST240 800–1200A F6162DCAN
277 — HCPST277
480 — HCPST480
— 148 HCPST48
— 125 HCPST125
For inches / millimeters conversion, a For horizontal mounting only in either 38” wide min
see Technical Section. switchboards or S5/F2 power panelboards.
 3 kits required for 3 phase switch

Panelboards
11
SWITCHBOARDS

Metering Data Selection
User Metering Ammeters and Voltmeters (Analog)
11
A full complement of switchboard instruments with appropriate Ammeters are switchboard type with ± 1% accuracy, 0 to
current transformers, potential transformers and selector 6000 amperes maximum. The included instrument switch
switches are available in all Siemens switchboards. will provide positions to read each phase and will include an
SWITCHBOARDS
The meters and instrument switches are mounted on hinged OFF position. Panel type ammeters with ± 3% accuracy, 800
panels with potential transformers and fuses located behind ampere maximum, can be furnished for branch feeder metering
the door. Current transformers are mounted on the main bus to conserve panel space.
or, in the case of branch feeder metering, at the load terminals Voltmeters are switchboard type with± 1% accuracy, 0 to 600V
of the branch protective device and normally do not require AC. The included instrument switch provides positions to read
additional unit space. each phase-to-phase voltage and each phase-to-neutral voltage
and has an OFF position.
Siemens Digital Power Meters
The Siemens Digital Power Meters are provided as an option Current Transformers / Potential Transformers
for FCI & FCII switchboards. Please refer to the Power Potential transformers are recommended wherever the system
Monitoring Section in this catalogue for more information. voltage exceeds 150 volts AC phase-to-neutral to lower voltage
levels for instrument switches and meters mounted on the
switchboard front panel.
Available CT Ratios — Ampere Rating

100:5 600:5 2500:5
150:5 800:5 3000:5
200:5 1000:5 4000:5
300:5 1200:5 5000:5
400:5 1500:5 6000:5
500:5 2000:5
Number of CT’s and or PT’s required for Typical Meters Applied on Selected System Voltages
Watthour Meter Power
Factor Frequency Synchro-
Ammeter Voltometer 2 Element 2.5 Element 3 Element Wattmeter Varmeter Meter Meter scope
System Volts AC C/T P/T Scale C/T P/T C/T P/T C/T P/T C/T P/T C/T P/T C/T P/T PT P/T
1Ø3W 120/240 2 – 0-300 2 – – – – – 2 – 2 – 1 – – –
3Ø3W 240 2 – 0-300 2 – – – – – 2 2 2 2 1 2 – 2
600 2 2 0-750 2 2 – – – – 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2
3Ø4W 120/240 3 – 0-300 – – 3 – – – 3 2 3 2 1 2 – –
120/208 3 – 0-300 – – 3 – 3 – 3 – 3 – 1 2 – –
347/600 3 3 0-750 – – 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 1 2

Integrated Power Systems Switchboards
Type IPS General
Product Description Features & Benefits
11
Siemens integrated power systems (IPS) switchboards Features

integrate multiple pieces of electrical distribution equipment b All standard FCI, FCII & SMP Switchboard features
SWITCHBOARDS
into a single assembly. The design results in reduced b Lighting panelboards

installation time, a reduced footprint and reduced labour risk b Distribution transformers
for installation. b Half high distribution switchboard chassis
b Individually mounted breakers (cable in & cable out)
The modular design of the IPS switchboard allows it to be b Auxiliary sections for surge devices, ACCESS power
combined with standard service entrance or distribution monitoring, contactors, relays, time clocks
switchboards if needed. Also, the IPS switchboard can be b Customer equipment, etc.
added to an existing switchboard lineup.
IPS switchboards have a wide range of applications and are

commonly used in retail stores, offices, health care facilities
and retrofits.
Integrated Power Systems Switchboard

Commonly Mounted Equipment
Distribution sections
b Up to 2000A (full height)
b Up to 1200A (half height)
Transformers
b Up to 300kVA (full height)
b Up to 112.5kVA (half height)
Panelboards
b P1 up to 250A
b P2 up to 600A
23

Integrated Power Systems Switchboards
Type IPS General
Features & Benefits (continued) Standards and Certifications
11
Reduced Installation Time b CSA C22.2 No.31
IPS switchboards arrive at a jobsite with the components b Mounted panelboards built to UL67, NEMA PB-1 and
SWITCHBOARDS
factory installed and wired. The result is significantly reduced CSA C22.2 No. 29
installation time. The realized savings on installation result in b Other equipment is CSA listed as applicable
lower labour costs which drops directly to the bottom line.
Reduced Space Requirements

Additional Information
By integrating components that are typically individually For complete application and pricing information contact
mounted, the IPS switchboard can reduce the space your local Siemens sales office.
requirements for typical electrical equipment installation
by up to 40%. This smaller footprint frees up valuable square
footage that can be utilized by the building owner for other
profitable uses.
Reduced Installation Risk.
IPS switchboards are assembled at Siemens manufacturing

plants with meticulous attention to details reinforced with
strict testing procedures. This focus on quality ensures that
problems encountered with traditional installations such as
misinterpretation of drawings or field installation errors are
eliminated. Utilizing IPS switchboards eliminates risks, enabling
projects to come in on time and on budget.
Integrated Power Systems Switchboard

Optimized Electrical Room Layout

General
SEM3 System configured in Distribution Panels and Switchboards
11
The information below pertains to panelboard types S5 and

switchboard types SMP, FCI, and FCII. SEM3 specifics to S5,
SWITCHBOARDS
SMP, FCI, and FCII are:
SEM3 for use in Siemens Switchboards
Controller
SEM3 controller is mounted in a low voltage compartment. Each
controller can monitor up to 45 circuits. Applications that require
monitoring more than 45 circuits will require additional controllers.

Six sizes of CTs are available for use in S5, SMP, FCI and FCII
applications: 50, 125, 250, 400, 600, and 1200 amp. All CTs are pre-
mounted to a support bracket that attaches to the interior. Each bracket
supports a maximum of 3 CTs and is designed for the breaker selected
(brackets are not interchangeable between breaker frames). Each CT will
be attached to a data module that is placed in the meter racks.
Meter Racks
All meter racks will be installed next to the SEM3 controller in unit
space. The 21 space meter rack is used as a default option where
possible.
NOTE: Monitoring of 45 circuits will require two 21 position racks and
one 3 position rack
Other Considerations
Configuration: Data modules from CTs monitoring a circuit breaker
must be mounted adjacent to one another in the meter rack. Any field
changes to the factory configuration must take this into account.
Start-up & Commissioning: Siemens can provide these services.

Contact your local SIEMENS Sales office for more details.

12POWER PRODUCT Switchgear
Contents
Low-voltage Switchgear 12-2 – 12-46
Standard WL Low-voltage Switchgear 12-2 – 12-3
Construction Details 12-3 – 12-5
WL Circuit Breakers 12-6 – 12-8
12
Electronic Tripping Units 12-7 – 12-9
Technical Information 12-10 – 12-21
SWITCHGEAR
Section Configuration/Dimensions 12-23 – 12-30
Sm@rtGear WL Low-voltage Switchgear 12-31 – 12-32
Marine WL Low-voltage Switchgear 12-33
Arc Resistant WL Low-voltage Switchgear 12-34 – 12-36
Arc Flash Solutions 12-37 – 12-42
Secondary Unit Substations 12-43 – 12-45
Type WL Low voltage

Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Low-voltage Switchgear
Type WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear General
Type WL Low-voltage Metal-
Enclosed Switchgear
Siemens Type WL low-voltage metal-
enclosed switchgear is designed,
constructed and tested to provide
superior power distribution, power
monitoring and control. At the heart of
12
the Type WL low-voltage switchgear is

the World Class Siemens WL breaker.
SWITCHGEAR
Siemens Type WL low-voltage

switchgear can be utilized in the
following applications:
b Industrial
Semiconductor
Petrochemical
Automotive
Biotech
Pharmaceutical
b Institutional
Water treatment
Airports
Universities Type WL Low-voltage Metal-
Medical facilities Enclosed Switchgear
Correctional facilities
b Critical power
Data Processing
Continuous industrial process
Hospitals b CSA C22.2 No. 31 - Switchgear Features and modifications required
Assemblies by NEC are incorporated when the
b Utility and co-generation assembly is designated as “Service
b ANSI C37.20.1 — Metal-Enclosed
b Commercial Low-voltage Power Circuit Breaker Equipment.”
Large office buildings Switchgear
Distribution centres UL Listing
Large warehouses b ANSI C37.50 — Test Procedure Underwriters’ Laboratories listing mark
for Low-voltage AC Power Circuit (UL) is supplied for each vertical section
Breakers Used in Enclosures provided all devices within a vertical
Product Scope: b ANSI C37.51 — Conformance Testing section are UL Listed or UL Recognized
b Equipment ratings of Metal-Enclosed Low-voltage AC and suitable for the intended use. All
635VAC Maximum Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear circuit breaker drawout elements are UL
3 Phase 3 Wire, Assemblies Listed.
3 Phase 4 Wire Optional CSA compliance with cUL
b NEMA SG5 - Power Switchgear
50/60 Hz labeling is available.
Assemblies
6000 amp maximum horizontal bus
6000 amp maximum vertical bus b Applicable requirements of the Arc Resistant
National Electric Code (NEC) Optional Type WL arc resistant low-
b Enclosure options
NEMA 1 Indoor WL drawout circuit breakers are in voltage switchgear is available and is
NEMA 3R Outdoor Walk-In accordance with: UL listed to ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7. Type
NEMA 3R Outdoor Non Walk-in b UL 1066 — Low-voltage AC and 2B arc resistant accessibility rating with
DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in maximum internal acring short-circuit
Siemens WL breakers can be manually
Enclosures current rating of 100kA @508V and
or electrically operated, fused or
85kA @ 635V.
unfused and are available in the b ANSI C37.13 — Low-voltage AC Power
following rating designations – N, S, H, Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures Seismic Qualification
L, M and F. Refer to tables on Page 13 b ANSI C37.16 — Preferred Ratings, Seismic qualification to all major seismic
for interrupt and withstand ratings for Related Requirements, and construction standards (IBC, UBC, CBC,
each rating designation. Application for Low-voltage Power SBC, BOCA and IEEE 693) is available.
Industry Standards Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit
Type WL switchgear with power circuit Protectors
breakers are designed, tested and b ANSI C37.17 — Trip Devices for AC
constructed in accordance with: and General Purpose DC Low-voltage
b UL 1558 — Metal-Enclosed Low- Power Circuit Breakers
voltage Power Circuit Breaker b NEMA SG3 - Low-voltage Power
Switchgear Circuit Breakers

Type WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Construction Details
General Standard finish colour is light gray ANSI Each complete vertical section contains
The Siemens Type WL switchgear 61. The standard painting process is a three compartments.
assembly consists of one or more UL approved electrostatic powder coat (1) Front compartment containing
metal-enclosed vertical sections. The paint system utilizing a polyester breakers and/or auxiliary equipment
end sections are designed to allow powder coat paint. The completed finish (2) Bus compartment containing
installation of future sections. has a nominal 2 mils dry film thickness. horizontal and vertical bus
(3) Rear cable compartment containing
Assembly Construction the load side runbacks connecting
12
Each vertical section consists of up to
four individually enclosed breaker or Siemens Type WL metal-enclosed low the load side of the breaker to the
auxiliary compartments which are sized voltage switchgear is constructed of load cable terminals
SWITCHGEAR
to provide uniform height. a rigid internal frame structure that
minimizes the possibility of damage Within the front compartment, each
Included in each assembly are various during shipment and supports multiple breaker is barriered and compartmented
components such as circuit breakers, installation methods – rolling or lifting. from all other breakers in the front
instrumentation and control equipment, Lifting eyes are integrated into the compartment. This design also isolates
transformers, relays, three-phase bus internal frame design and ensure the breakers in the front compartment
work, and all internal wiring, connectors, the structural integrity of the lifting from the bus compartment.
and other supporting equipment. assembly is always adequate for the
weight of the total structure. Optional barriers can be supplied to
In accordance with ANSI C37.20.1, the isolate the bus compartment from the
maximum temperature for parts that If requested in advance, the switchgear rear cable compartment. Other optional
are handled is 50°C. The main bus structure can be shipped so that the barriers include: (1) Full depth section
maximum temperature rise is 65°C unit can be tilted onto its back during barriers to isolate one section from the
above 40°C ambient. The temperature installation. This is an option that must adjacent section(s). (2) Barriers to isolate
rise of the air surrounding the cable be specified at order entry. the incoming line side connections to
connection points is limited to 45°C the main breaker(s) from the load side
above 40°C ambient. bus and connections in the switchgear
section. (Line/load barriers are provided
Finish as a standard feature for service
During construction, the structural steel equipment main breakers.)
parts, panels, and compartments are all
prepared for painting by a five-stage
wash system.
1
1 Breaker Hoist and Track 2
2 Ventilation and Lifting Structure
3 Quarter Turn Door Latch
4 Secondary Disconnect Access Door
3
5 Channel Sill Base (Optional)
6 Breaker Compartment 7
7 Auxiliary Instrument Compartment 4
8 Secondary Disconnect
9 Breaker Cradle (Guide Frame)
 Breaker Drawout Rail
6
 TOC Switch Operator

9

5

Main and Ground Bus Control and Communication Wiring Circuit Breaker Compartments
The standard main bus is silver-plated Standard control and communication Typical circuit breaker compartments
copper. Tin-plated copper bus is wiring is #14 AWG extra-flexible, include primary disconnects, drawout
optionally available. Vertical and stranded copper type SIS. Control rails, secondary disconnects, vertical
horizontal bus bar utilize a channel and communication wiring is installed wireway, horizontal wireway and,
shape design to maximize short circuit and accessed from the front of the if applicable, TOC switch operator,
withstand capability and minimize heat switchgear structure. Each breaker MOC switch operator and associated
12
rise. All bus joints include Grade 5 bolts compartment has a dedicated horizontal interlocks. Draw-out rails allow the
and conical spring washers. Provisions and vertical wireway. breaker to be withdrawn from the
for future extension of the main bus compartment without additional
SWITCHGEAR
include plated joints and high tensile For devices not having screw-type extensions or adapters. Up to six (2
strength steel hardware. terminals, pressure terminals are used. sets of three) current transformers for
metering or relaying can be mounted
The main three-phase horizontal bus Insulation in each compartment.
is arranged vertically one phase above The insulation used is a UL recognized
the other with edge-to-edge alignment thermoset material that has excellent heat A variety of auxiliary devices such as
to provide high, short circuit strength. resistance, flame retardance, dimensional breaker control switches, indicating
Insulated main bus with isolated vertical stability and low moisture absorption. lights and pushbuttons can be mounted
bus is optional. on the breaker compartment door.
Vertical bus ratings available are 1600,

2000, 3200, 4000, 5000 and 6000
amperes continuous current. Horizontal 1 2 3 4
bus ratings available are 1600, 2000,
3200, 4000, 5000 and 6000 amperes.
A neutral bus is furnished when
specified, and can be rated 1600,
2000, 3200, 4000, 5000 or 6000
amperes continuous current.
A 1/4” X 3” standard copper ground bus

extends through all sections. Cable lugs
are mounted to the ground bus in
each section.
Standard short-circuit withstand (4 cycle)

and short-time withstand (60 cycle) bus
bracing is 100,000 amperes. Higher
shortcircuit withstand bus bracings
(150kA and 200kA) are available.
Load side runbacks for feeder circuits
are copper construction, are insulated
with sleeve tubing in the main bus area,
and are supported by high-strength
bus bracing.
5 6 7 8
1 TOC Switch Operator 5 Interference Interlock

2 Breaker Compartment Rear Barrier 6 Drawout Rails
3 Secondary Disconnect 7 Primary Disconnect
4 Vertical Wireway 8 Cradle Mounted Current
Transformer
Circuit Breaker Cell Interior

Options Miscellaneous The following features are standard
Switchgear Mounted Hoist b Each switchgear lineup includes a with walk-in outdoor enclosures.
The integrally mounted hoist, standard breaker lifting device that is adjustable (1) Space heaters in breaker
on walk-in outdoor and optional on for use with Size II and Size III compartment and bus compartment.
indoor switchgear enclosures, travels breakers. (2) Screens and filters for exterior door
along rails on top of the switchgear to b An optional portable breaker hoist ventilation louvers.
assist in breaker handling. is available if the integrated breaker (3) Incandescent lighting receptacle
with three-way switch at each aisle
12
hoist and track is not specified.
TOC and MOC Switches access door.
b A test cabinet is also available as (4) Duplex receptacle with ground fault
The Truck Operated Cell (TOC) Switch
SWITCHGEAR
an option. The test cabinet is wall protection at each aisle access door.
provides interlocking control or remote mounted necessary equipment for
indication of the breaker racking (5) Loadcentre for power distribution
testing electrically-operated breakers to lights, receptacles, switches and
position. The cubicle mounted auxiliary that have been removed from the
switch or Mechanism Operated Cell heaters.
breaker compartment. The test
(MOC) switch provides interlocking cabinet doesn’t include or replace a For non walk-in outdoor enclosures,
control or remote indication based on breaker trip unit tester. space heaters and screens/filters for
the main contact position (open or ventilation louvering are standard with
closed). b A WL remote breaker racking device
lighting, receptacles, switches and
(RBRD) is available as an optional
loadcentres offered as options.
Shutters accessory that allows maintenance
These provide protection against personnel to safely rack Siemens
accidental contact with primary Type WL breakers into the Connect,
disconnects in a compartment when Test and Disconnect positions from
the breaker is removed. Shutters up to 30 feet away from the breaker.
automatically close when the breaker This allows the operator to be outside
is withdrawn and are pad-lockable and the arc flash hazard boundary and
field installable. thereby providing additional personnel
protection.
Key Interlock b 4” high formed steel channel sills
This provides a mechanical means for are available for indoor switchgear
operating circuit breakers and other enclosures.
devices only when predescribed
conditions are met. Outdoor Switchgear
Type WL switchgear is available in two
Test Set outdoor (NEMA 3R) enclosures. Walk-in
A portable breaker test set is available and non walk-in versions are available
as an option and supports testing the to meet your particular application.
full range of functions and protective
For protection from snow, rain and other
settings supplied with the breaker trip
foreign matter, both outdoor enclosures Side View
unit.
rest on a six-inch high, formed steel
Metering and Auxiliary Compartments base which provides rigid support
Compartments are available to house and a tight bottom seal. A heavy duty
devices such as voltage transformers, protective under-coating is applied to
metering, control power transformers, the underside of all outdoor enclosures
and supervisory devices. to protect against moisture and
corrosion. Shielded ventilation housings
Instrument and Control Transformers permit proper air circulation while
Voltage transformers and control power excluding dirt and foreign matter.
transformers are mounted in auxiliary
In the walk-in outdoor enclosure a
compartments. These transformers
lighted, unobstructed service aisle is
are protected by primary pull-out type
provided at the front of the switchgear
current-limiting fuses and secondary
allowing inspection and maintenance
fuses. Current transformers are
without exposure to the elements.
normally mounted on the compartment
An access door equipped with an
primary disconnect studs where they
emergency bar release is located at
are readily accessible.
each end of the aisle.
Rear View

Type WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear—WL CIrcuit Breakers Overview
WL Circuit Breaker
Superior individual products for low-voltage power distribution systems
12
SWITCHGEAR
2 6 7
5
3
4 8
9
1
21
25  

22

23

24

 



1 Guide Frame (for drawout version only) 9 Multiple Secondary Connections  Complete Trip Unit Family
2 Vertical to Horizontal BUS Connector  Auxiliary Switch Block  Remote Reset
3 Position Signaling Switch (TOC)  Door Sealing Frame  Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) for
4 Breaker / Guide Frame Grounding  Interlocking Set Base Plate Internet Connection
Contact  Protective Cover for 21 Multi Angle LCD Module
5 Shutter (locking) OPEN/CLOSE Buttons 22 Ground Fault Protection Module
6 MODBUS or PROFIBUS  Multiple Key Locking Accessories 23 Rating Plug

Communications  Single Bolt Motor Operator Installation 24 Metering Function (+ wave forms
7 External CubicleBUS I/O Module  Operations Counter and harmonics)
8 Plug-In Open and Closed Solenoids  Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) 25 Circuit Breaker

Type WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear—Electronic Trip Units Overview
During development of our electronic It allows the WL breaker, as a family, This is where the Extended
trip units we have consistently striven across the entire range of ampacities Instantaneous Protection feature of
to ensure modularity. The following to be applied at the withstand rating of the WL can offer the next level of
are just some of the modules that are the breaker with minus 0% tolerance; coordination and protection functionality.
simple to retrofit at any time: that means no instantaneous override. Unlike an instantaneous override,
12
b Ground fault protection EIP further enables the circuit breaker Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP)
b Communication to be applied up to the full interrupting allows the full withstand rating — in
SWITCHGEAR
rating of the breaker on systems where fact up to the tolerance of plus 20%
b Metering function the available fault current exceeds the higher. Of course, EIP still provides the
b Displays withstand rating, even with LS-only trip ability of the breaker to be applied at the
b Rating plugs units. Why is this feature important? The interrupting level, as high as 150kA in a
answer is reliable power. Frame Size III, non-fused breaker. This
This enables fast local adaptation to
unique combination enables the system
new system conditions. At the same
The coordination of the main breaker designer to achieve the highest possible
time, the ETUs are provided with
and the first level of feeder breakers level of coordination in the industry and
new, innovative functions, and all trip
is especially important because of the also allows application of the WL on
units are completely interchangeable
wide spread outage that will occur if modern power systems with extremely
independent of breaker ratings.
one of these breakers trips high levels of available fault current.
unnecessarily.
Rating Plug
A further benefit offered by EIP, over a
The Rating Plug is a replaceable module Conventional practice is to specify standard LS trip unit equipped breaker,
that enables users to reduce the rated electronic trip beakers with “LS” type is that it provides an extra measure of
device current for optimum adaptation trip units in critical power systems. protection in the event that the available
to the system; e.g. during startup of a These ‘Long-Time’ and ‘Short-Time’ fault current increases at some time
plant section. The Rating Plug should be only trip units forgo the fast tripping during the life of the system beyond
selected so that it corresponds to the times given by an ‘Instantaneous’ the withstand level. This would typically
rated current of the system. function. The justification for this delay be due to a utility transformer change
is the benefit of allowing a downstream but could also be due to the addition
Switch-selectable I2t or I4t breaker to open first to clear a high of generators or large motors that
Characteristic Curve Improved magnitude fault. The main or feeder contribute fault current. EIP provides
Overload Protection stays closed to keep the remainder of the breaker the ability to react in an
The best possible protection is assured the loads operating. instantaneous fashion to a high level
when all protective devices in the fault instead of having to rely on the
system are optimally coordinated. However, a circuit breaker with an slower reaction time of the short-time
To achieve optimum selectivity LS-only trip unit may never be applied function.
and coordination, the long-time on a system capable of delivering
characteristic can be switched between fault current higher than the breaker’s
l2t and l4t. withstand rating, commonly 85kA or
less. Where the available fault current
Switchable Parameter Sets is above this level, a breaker with
To allow the protection to adapt to an additional function must be used
changes in system needs such as — an instantaneous override. This
switching between utility and generator instantaneous override function trips the
feeds, WL Circuit Breakers support breaker instantly when the fault current
ETUs with two independent parameter reaches a pre-determined level below
sets. Switching between the parameter the withstand rating, usually around
sets occurs in less than 100 ms and can 20% lower. The benefit of this override
be done remotely or via a contact input is to allow application of the breaker up
to an optional CubicleBUS module. to the interrupting rating, which may be
as high as 150kA. The disadvantage is
Extended Instantaneous Protection that it compromises the coordination
The electronic trip units designed benefit because the main will probably
for use with the WL circuit breaker trip at the same time as a downstream
provide a feature we call “Extended branch breaker in that 20% lower
Instantaneous Protection” (Patent override window.
Pending).

Type WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear—WL CIrcuit Breakers Selection
Selection Criteria for WL Circuit Breakers
12
SWITCHGEAR
The basic criteria for selecting circuit Ambient Temperature of the circuit Dynamic Arc-Flash Sentry (DAS)
breakers is: breaker. employs the unique dual protective
setting capability of the 776 trip units,
Maximum Available Short Circuit Design of the circuit breaker. coupled with the ability to easily toggle
at the installation point. This value to a lower arc flash parameter set. A
determines the short circuit current Protective Functions of the circuit normal operation parameter set can be
interrupting rating or short circuit breaker.These are determined by the optimized for selective trip coordination,
current withstand rating of the circuit selection of the appropriate trip unit. while the second set is optimized
breaker. for lower arc flash energy levels. The
Dynamic Arc-Flash Sentry (Patent dynamic action comes from the ability
Rated Current In which is to flow Pending) A unique feature of the WL to switch from the normal operation
through the respective circuit breaker trip unit allows the system designer to set to the arc flash limiting set based
continuously. This value may not be achieve lower levels of arc flash energy on the presence of personnel as they
greater than the maximum rated current and delayed tripping for selective trip approach the flash protection boundary.
of the circuit breaker. The rated current coordination purposes. A wide variety of switching methods
for the WL is determined by the rating may used based on the needs of a
plug, up to the maximum frame rating. particular facility. The capabilities range
from fully automatic switching using
appropriate occupancy sensors to
manual switching via a key operation.

Type WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear—Electronic Trip Units Selection
12
SWITCHGEAR
Basic Protective Functions ETU745 ETU776
Long-time overcurrent protection L V V
Short-time delayed overcurrent protection S V V
Instantaneous overcurrent protection I V V
Neutral protection N V V
Ground fault protection G  
Additional Functions
Selectable neutral protection V V
Defeatable short-time delay V V
Defeatable instantaneous protection V V
Selectable thermal memory V V
Zone selective interlocking  
Selectable I2t or fixed short-time delay V V
Adjustable instantaneous pick-up V V
Selectable I2t or I4t long-time delay V V
Adjustable short-time delay and pick-up V V
Selectable and adjustable neutral protection V V
Dual protective setting capability — V
Extended instantaneous protection V V
Parameterization and Displays
Parameterization by rotary switches (10 steps) V —
Parameterization by communication (absolute values) V V
Parameterization by menu/keypad (absolute values) — V
Remote parameterization of the basic functions V
Remote parameterization of the additional functions — V
Alphanumeric LCD  —
Graphical LCD — V
Metering Function
Metering function Plus  
Communication
CubicleBUS V V
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP  
Communication via the MODBUS  
Communication via the Ethernet (BDA)  
V standard — not available  optional

WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Technical Information
Tripping Characteristics
Every trip unit and every trip function To obtain a complete release before tripping. If the overcurrent
has its own characteristic. You will find characteristic, the appropriate trip takes place immediately after
just a small section of these illustrated characteristic functions must be closing and the overcurrent release is
below. The characteristics show the determined. therefore not yet activated, the opening
respective greatest and smallest setting time is prolonged by about 3 to 10
range of WL Circuit Breakers. The characteristics show the behavior ms, depending on the value of the
12
of the overcurrent release when it is overcurrent.

activated by a current already flowing
SWITCHGEAR

Tripping Characteristics
12
SWITCHGEAR

WL Circuit Breakers ANSI / UL 1066
Breaker Ratings
Frame Size II
12
800 1600 2000 3200

Frame Rating
Rating Class N S H L F N S H L F S H L F S H L
SWITCHGEAR
Instantaneous Short-circuit 254VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
Currenta 508VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz 635VAC 50 65 65 85 200 50 65 65 85 200 65 65 85 200 65 65 85
Short-time Withstand Current Icw
0.5s 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 — 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
Extended Instantaneous Protection
50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 — 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
(kA RMS -0% to +20%)
Close and Latch Ratings
50 65 65 85 65 50 65 65 85 65 65 65 85 65 65 65 85
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
200, 225, 250,
300, 315, 350,
200, 225, 250, 300,
200, 225, 250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 450, 500,
200, 225, 250, 300, 315, 350, 315, 350, 400, 450,
400, 450, 500, 600, 630, 700, 600, 630, 700,
Rating Plug Range 400, 450, 500, 600, 630, 700, 500, 600, 630, 700,
800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 800, 1000, 1200,
800 amps 800, 1000, 1200, 1250,
1600 amps 1250, 1600, 2000,
1600, 2000 amps
2500, 3000,
3200 amps
Endurance Rating
(switching operations with Mechanical 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
maintenance)b Electrical 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
Frame Size III

3200 4000 5000 6000
Frame Rating
Rating Class M F H L M F H L M F H L M
Instantaneous Short-circuit 254V AC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150
Currenta 508V AC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz 635V AC 85 200 85 85 85 200 85 85 85 200 85 85 85
Short-time Withstand Current Icw
0.5 s 100b — 85 100c 100b — 85 100 100c – 85 100 100c
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
Extended Instantaneous 254V AC
Protection 508V AC 150 150 150 150
(kA RMS -0% to +20%) 635V AC 85 — 85 100 85 — 85 100 85 – 85 100 85
Close and Latch Ratings
100b 85 85 85 100b 85 85 85 100b 85 85 85 100b
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
800, 1000,
800,1000, 1200, 1250,
1200,1250, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 800,1000, 1200, 1250,
Rating Plug Range 1600, 2000 2500,
1600, 2000, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 1600, 2000 2500, 3000,
3000, 3200, 4000,
2500, 3000, 3200, 4000 amps 3200, 4000, 5000 amps
5000, 6000 amps
3200 amps
Endurance Rating
(switching operations Mechanical 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
with maintenance)b Electrical 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
a Maximum rated voltage for fused breakers is 600VAC.

b Maintenance means: replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions).
c Short-time withstand rating is 85kA RMS at 635VAC.

WL Non-Automatic Switches ANSI / UL 1066
Ratings
Frame Size II Frame Size III
12
800 1600 2000 3200 3200 4000 5000 6000
Frame Rating
Rating Class L Fa L Fa L Fa L Fa L Fa L Fa L
SWITCHGEAR
Short-time Withstand Current
0.5 s 85 20 85 20 85 20 85 40 100 40 100 40 100
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
Breaking Capacity with External
Relay (kA RMS) 635Vac , 50/60 Hz, 0.5 s 85 20 85 20 85 20 85 40 100 40 100 40 100
max time delay
WL Circuit Breakers

Frame Rating 800 1600 2000 3200 3200 4000 5000 6000
Rated current In
at 40°C, at 50/60Hz A 800 1600 2000 3200 3200 4000 5000 6000
Rated operational
VAC 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
(nominal) voltage
Rated maximum voltage VAC 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635
Permissible ambient temperature
operation (for operation with °C -25 / +70 -25 / +70 -25 / +70 -25 / +70 -25 / +70 -25 / +70 -25 / +70 -25 / +70
LCD max. 55°C)
Storage
°C -40 / +70 -40 / +70 -40 / +70 -40 / +70 -40 / +70 -40 / +70 -40 / +70 -40 / +70
(observe special conditions for LCD)
85 320 500
Power loss at Rated Current
W 130 520 850 1150 700 1100 1650 2475
with 3-phaseb symmetrical load
(fused) (fused) (fused)
Operating times
ms 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
Make-time
Break-time (with active ETU3 ) ms 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
Break-time
ms 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
(without active ETU4)
Total clearing time
ms 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
(with active ETU3)
Total clearing time
ms 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
(without active ETU4)
Make-time, electrical
ms 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
(via closing solenoid)
Break-time, electrical
ms 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
(via shunt trip)
(via instantaneous UVR) ms 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73
a Interrupting rating is equal to 200kA based on the rating of the f.use

b Consult factory for fuse carriage power l.o ss

WL Circuit Breakers

Frame Rating 800 1600 2000 3200 3200 4000 5000 6000
Endurance
12
Mechanical operating
12,500 12,500 10,000 10,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000
(without aintenance) cycles
Mechanical operating
15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
SWITCHGEAR
(with maintenance)a cycles

Electrical
operating
(without 7,500 7,500 4,000 4,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
cycles
maintenance)
Electrical operating
15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
(with maintenance)a cycles
Switching frequency 1/h 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Minimum interval
between breaker trip
and next closing of
the circuit breaker
(when used with the
automatic mechanical
reset of the
bell alarm) ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mounting position
Auxiliary secondary Bare

1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
wire size (Cu) max wire
or or or or or or or or
# of aux. connecting pressure
leads x cross section terminal
(solid or stranded) Tension
spring 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14
terminal
2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14
Ring tongue 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14
1 x AWG 1 x AWG 1 x AWG 1 x AWG 1 x AWG
terminal 1 x AWG 102 1 x AWG 102 1 x AWG 102
102 102 102 102 102
(standard)
TOC wire connection
Bare
size (Cu) max # of
wire
aux. connecting leads 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
pressure
x cross section (solid
terminal
or stranded)
Weightc
Circuit Breaker kg/lb 72/159 72/159 75/165 95/209 155/341 155/341 155/341 155/341
Guide Frame kg/lb 51/112 51/112 60/132 69/152 139/306 139/306 139/306 139/306
MOC wire connection
Bare
size (Cu) max # of
wire
aux. connecting leads 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
pressure
x cross section (solid
terminal
or stranded)
a Maintenance consists of replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions).
b Foruse only with Siemens supplied ring terminals (WL1.0RL).
c Fused Breaker Weights Frame Size II (fused ) Frame Size III (fused)
Breaker (kg/lb) 103/227 same as table above
Guide Frame 68/150 130/275
Fuse Carriage – 102/225

WL Circuit Breaker Accessory Ratings
Manual Operating Mechanism with Mechanical Closing
Closing/charging stored energy mechanism

Maximum actuating force required on hand lever 52 lb
Number of hand lever strokes required 9
12
Manual Operating Mechanism with Mechanical and Electrical Closing
Charging stored-energy mechanism
SWITCHGEAR
Closing Coil voltage tolerance 24V DC 14 - 28V DC
solenoid and 48V DC 28 - 56V DC
Shunt Trip 120V AC / 125V DC 70 - 140V DC
240V AC / 250V DC 104 - 127V AC
140 - 280V DC
08 - 254V c.a.
180Y / 104V AC
220Y / 127V AC
Power consumption (5 % duty cycle) 120 W
Minimum closing solenoid actuation signal required 50 ms
Motor Operating Mechanism with Mechanical and Electrical Closing

Spring charging motor
Motor voltage tolerance at 120V AC, 240V AC 85 - 110%
Extended tolerance for battery operation at 24V DC, 48V DC, 125V DC, 250V DC 70 - 126%
Power consumption of the motor 110 W
Time required for charging the stored-energy mechanism ≤ 10 s
Closing solenoid
For motor and closing solenoid short-circuit protection
Short-circuit protection 24 - 60 V 6A
Standard slow-blow cartridge fuse 110 - 250 V 3A
Auxiliary Release
Undervoltage Operating values ≥ 85% (circuit breaker can be closed)
release (UVR)
35 - 70% (circuit breaker opens)
AC Coil voltage tolerance at 120V AC, 240V AC 85 - 110%

DC Extended tolerance for battery operation at 24V DC, 48V DC, 125V DC, 250V DC 85 - 126%
Rated control supply voltage AC 50/60Hz V 120, 240
DC V 24, 48, 125, 250
Power consumption (inrush / continuous) AC VA 200 / 5

DC W 200 / 5
Opening time of the circuit breaker for AC / DC ms 200
UVR (no time delay), 2 settings

Setting 1 ms 80
Setting 2 ms 200
UVR (with time delay)
Adjustable delay s 0,2 to 3,2
Reset by additional NC direct opening ms ≤ 100

WL Circuit Breaker Accessory Ratings
Auxiliary Contacts and Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC)
Contact rating Alternating current

50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 240V
Rated operational current, continuous 10A
Rated operational current, making 30A
12
Rated operational current, breaking 3A

Direct current Rated operational voltage 24V, 125V, 250V
SWITCHGEAR
Rated operational current, making 1.1A at 24V, 1.1A at 125V, 0.55A at 250V
Rated operational current, breaking 1.1A at 24V, 1.1A at 125V, 0.55A at 250V
Bell Alarm Switch and Ready-to-Close Signal Contact
50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 240V
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24V, 48V, 125V 250V DC
Rated operational current, continuous 0.4A 0.2 A
Rated operational current, making 0.4A 0.2 A
Rated operational current, breaking 0.4A 0.2 A
Shunt Trip, UVR and Blown Fuse Signaling Contacts
50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 127V, 240V
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24V, 48V, 125V 125V DC (IEC Rating Only)
Rated operational current, making 1.0A 0.5A
Rated operational current, breaking 1.0A 0.5A
Position Signal Contact on the Guide Frame (TOC)
Breaker position: Connected position 3 form C 1 form C 6 form C

Test position 2 form C or 1 form C or 0 form C
Disconnected position 1 form C 1 form C 0 form C
50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 120V 240V
Rated operational current, continuous 10A 10A
Rated operational current, making 6A 3A
Rated operational current, breaking 6A 3A
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24V 48V, 125V 250V
Rated operational current, continuous 6A 1A 1A
Rated operational current, making 6A 0.22A 0.11A
Rated operational current, breaking 6A 0.22A 0.11A

Function Overview of the Electronic Trip Units
Fonctions de base ETU745
In Long-time overcurrent protection 

Function can be switched ON/OFF
Setting range IR = In x … —
12
0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55,
0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.8,
0.9, 1
Switch-selectable overload protection
SWITCHGEAR
(I2t or I4t dependent function) 
L Setting range of time delay class tR at I2t
(seconds) 2, 3.5, 5.5, 8, 10,
14, 17, 21, 25, 30
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Setting range of time delay tR at I4t (via slide switch)
(seconds)
Thermal memory
at tsd=20ms (M)
Phase loss sensitivity

Neutral protection
N Function can be switched ON/OFF (via slide switch)
N-conductor setting range IN = In x …
0.5 … 1
Short-time delayed overcurrent protection 

Setting range Isd = In x … (via rotary switch)
1.25, 1.5, 2, 2.5,
Setting range of time delay tsd, fixed 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
(seconds)
S 0.02 (M), 0.1, 0.2,
Switch-selectable short-time delay
short-circuit protection 0.3, 0.4, OFF
(I2t dependent function)
(via rotary switch)
Setting range of time delay tsd at I2t
(seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) function per CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous overcurrent protection 

Function can be switched on/off,
(via rotary switch)
I Extended Instantaneous Protection
is enabled when OFF 1.5, 2.2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
Setting range Ii = In x … 0.8 x Icw = max, OFF=Icw=EIP
a
Ground fault protectionb (field installable module)

Trip and alarm function 
Detection of the ground fault current
by residual summing method 
Detection of the ground fault current 
by direct summing method
Setting range of the Ig for trip A, B, C, D, E
G
Setting range of the Ig for alarm
Setting range of the time delay A, B, C, D, E
(seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
Switch-selectable
ground fault protection (I2t / fixed) 
Setting range time delay tg at I2t
ZSI ground function 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
En fonction du module CubicleBUS
a Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP) allows the WL breaker to be applied at the withstand  available
rating of the breaker with minus 0% tolerance; that means no instantaneous override whatso- — not available
ever. EIP further enables the circuit breaker tobe applied up to the full instantaneous rating of  optional
the breaker on systems where the available fault current exceeds the withstand rating.

Basic Functions ETU745

Parameter sets Selectable between
parameter set A and B —
LCD LCD, alphanumeric (4-line) 
12
LCD, graphic —
Communication CubicleBUS integrated
SWITCHGEAR

Communication capability via
MODBUS or PROFIBUS 
Metering function Metering function capability with
Metering Function PLUS 
Display by LED Trip unit active 
Alarm 
ETU error 
L trip 

S trip 
I trip 

N trip 
G trip (only with ground fault module)
G alarm (only with ground fault module)
Tripped by extended protection or
protective relay function 
Communication 
Signal contacts with external CubicleBUS modules
(Opto or relay)
Overcurrent warning 
Load shedding OFF/ON 
Early signal of long time trip (200ms) 
Temperature alarm 
Phase unbalance 

Instantaneous trip 
Short-time trip 
Long-time trip 
Neutral conductor trip 
Ground fault protection trip (only with ground fault module)
Ground fault alarm (only with ground fault module)
Auxiliary relay 
ETU error 
Step for Settings via Communications or ETU Key Pad Setting range of the Ig
from … to step from … to step Frame Size II Frame Size III
0…1 0.1 1000 … 1600 50 A 100A 400A
1 … 100 1 1600 … 10000 100 B 300A 600A
 available
100 … 500 5 10000 … max. 1 000 C 600A 800A — not available
 optional
500 … 1000 10 D 900A 1000A
E 1200A 1200A

Fonctions de base ETU776

In Protection contre les surcharges à long délai 
Function can be switched ON/OFF —
12
Setting range IR = In x … 0.4 … 1 (step: 1 A)
Switch-selectable overload protection
SWITCHGEAR

(I2t or I4t dependent function)
L Setting range of time delay class t}R at I2t 2 … 30 (step: 0.1 s)
(seconds)
1 … 5 (step: 0.1 s)
Setting range of time delay tR at I4t
(seconds)
(on/off via key pad or communications)
Thermal memory
(on/off via key pad or communications)
Phase loss sensitivity

Neutral protection
N Function can be switched ON/OFF (via slide switch)
N-conductor setting range IN = In x …
0.5 … 1
Short-time delayed overcurrent protection 
Setting range Isd = In x … (via key pad or communications)
1,25 … 0.8 x Icw = max
Setting range of time delay tsd, fixed (step: 10 A)
(seconds)
S
Switch-selectable short -time delay M, 0.08 … 0.4, OFF (step: 0.001s)
short-circuit protection
(I2t dependent function) (via key pad or communications)
Setting range of time delay tsd at I2t
(seconds) 0.1 … 0.4 (step: 0.001 s)
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) function Per CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous overcurrent protection 
Function can be switched ON/OFF,
I Extended Instantaneous Protection (via key pad or communications)
is enabled when OFF
Setting range Ii = In x … 1.5 x In … 0.8 x Ics = max, OFF=Icw=EIPa
Ground fault protectionb (field installable module)
(via key pad or communications)
by residual summing method 
by direct summing method 
Setting range of the Ig for trip
A … E (step: 1 A)
G Setting range of the Ig for alarm
Setting range of the time delay tg A … E (step: 1 A)
(seconds)
Switch-selectable 0.1 … 0.5 (step: 0.001 s)
ground fault protection
(I2t / fixed) 
Setting range time delay tg at I2t 0.1 … 0.5 (step: 0.001 s)
ZSI ground function Per CubicleBUS module
a Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP) allows the WL breaker to be applied at the withstand rating of the breaker with minus 0% tolerance; that means no instantaneous override whatso-
ever. EIP further enables the circuit breaker to be applied up to the full instantaneous rating of the breaker on systems where the available fault current exceeds the withstand rating.
Notes: M = Motor protection setting (20 ms)

Communications = Setting the parameters of the trip unit via the Breaker Data Adapter, MODBUS, or PROFIBUS
Key pad = Direct input at the trip unit
 available
— not available
 optional

Basic Functions ETU745 ETU776

Parameter sets Selectable between
parameter set A and B — 
LCD LCD, alphanumeric (4-line)  —
12
LCD, graphic — 
Communication CubicleBUS integrated 
SWITCHGEAR

Communication capability via
MODBUS or PROFIBUS  
Metering function Metering function capability with
Metering Function PLUS  
Display by LED Trip unit active  
Alarm  
ETU error  
L trip  

S trip  

I trip  
N trip  
G trip (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
G alarm (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Tripped by extended protection or
protective relay function  
Communication  
Signal contacts with external CubicleBUS modules
(Opto or relay)
Overcurrent warning  
Load shedding OFF/ON  
Early signal of long time trip (200ms)  
Temperature alarm  
Phase unbalance  

Instantaneous trip  
Short-time trip  
Long-time trip  
Neutral conductor trip  
Ground fault protection trip (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Ground fault alarm (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Auxiliary relay  
ETU error  
Metering and Protective Relaying Accuracies Metering Values Accuracy
Protective Relaying Pick-up Accuracy (I) at 1 x In +/- 1%
Phase Unbalance (I) 2% (5…50% In) (V) at 1 x Vn +/- 0.5%

Phase Unbalance (V) 2% (5…50% Vn) (P) at 1 x In +/- 3%
THD (I) (up to 29th) +/- 3% (80…120% Vn) (S) at 1 x In +/- 2%
THD (V) (up to 29th) +/- 3% (80…120% Vn) (Q) at 1 x In +/- 3%
Overvoltage +/- 2% (80…120% Vn)
Undervoltage +/- 2% (80…120% Vn)
Under/Over Frequency +/- 0.1 Hz
 available
— not available
 optional

Type WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
12
SWITCHGEAR
22

Type WL Circuit Breakers General
WL Communication Overview
Connection Diagram
1 Breaker Data Adapter 13 13
(BDA)
2 Browser-capable input
12
WinPM.Net WinPM.Net
Ethernet / Internet / Intranet
and output device Server Web Client
(e.g. notebook)
SWITCHGEAR
3 WL Circuit Breaker
4 COM 16 MODBUS
Ethernet
module or COM 15
PROFIBUS module
5 Breaker Status Sensor 9510 Meter*
(BSS) MODBUS Master (Ethernet
PLC or Supervisory Gateway)
6 Electronic Trip Unit Software
MODBUS 12
7 Metering function PLUS Optional 8 9 10 11 15
8 Zone Selective 14
BDA Plus*
Interlocking (ZSI) module
9 Digital output module 4
with relay or optocoupler 5
outputs 2 1 3
6
10 Digital output module BDA 7 WL Circuit Breaker
with relay or optocoupler with COM 16
outputs, remotely
configurable
* The Siemens BDA Plus or meters, 9330, 9350, 95/9610 can
11 Analog output module be used as a gateway to enable Ethernet communication
to the WL Circuit Breaker.
12 Digital input module
13 WinPM.Net on PC
14 PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7)
15 BDA Plus
Features
b Industry standard MODBUS or b The ability to connect additional input b Innovative software products for local
PROFIBUS communication available on and output modules to the breaker configuration, operation, monitoring and
all WL breakers from 200A to 6000A. internal CubicleBUS of the WL opens diagnostics of WL Circuit Breakers using
b The high modularity of the WL Circuit up a range of opportunities to reduce MODBUS, PROFIBUS or via Ethernet/
Breakers and accessories allows secondary device count and wiring and Intranet/Internet.
simple retrofitting of all communication to increase functionality implemented in b Complete integration of WL Circuit
components. switchgear. Breakers in all Totally Integrated Power
and Totally Integrated Automation
Solutions.

2
(552
Typ (55
6H FW
L
WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Section Configurations
General Notes: 6H FW
LR Q & R P SDU W
P H Q W$ U U DQ J H P H Q W Genera
b A blank/instrument compartment can
always be substituted for a breaker • A bl
alwa
compartment.
A com
b Any 22” wide section can be 32” wide • $ Q \
Compartment
if more conduit working room is needed. if mo

• ) R UE
B
b For bus duct connections – if incoming
12
Compartment
is top, Compartment A must be blank/ is to

instrument, if incoming is bottom, C instr
SWITCHGEAR
Compartment D must be blank
Compartment
Com
instrument. • % X VV
b Bussed transition section is 22” wide
D
Compartment • For c
Com
b For close coupled transformer • Utili
connections, Compartment A must be sect
blank/instrument. on u
b Utility metering is always in a separate 0 DLQ 6H FW
LR Q V ² 1 R Q ) X V H G % U H DNH U V
section. Section width is dependent on 6Z LW FK
utility. ' LP H Q
Blank or Feeder Breaker Blank or Blank or Blank or not tot
Instrument Instrument Instrument Instrument
• 1R Q
800, 1600, Auxiliary
Compartment 2000 Compartment Compartment Compartment
Switchgear Depth Dimensional Compartment
µ
Information
(Dimensions below are for internal frames
Main Breaker
800, 1600,
Feeder Breaker Blank or
Instrument Main Breaker
Blank or
Instrument • )X V H
µ
800, 1600,
2000, 3200 4000, 5000 Compartment
2000, 3200 Compartment
– not total structure depth) Main Breaker
b Non-fused indoor – 60” standard, 70”

6000 • 1R 22 in. Q
Feeder Breaker Main Breaker Main Breaker
Feeder Breaker
800, 1600, 2000,
Main Breaker V W
(559 DQm
m
and 80” optional 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 4000, 5000
• )X V H
3200, 4000
2000, 3200 2000, 3200 2000, 3200 Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note3
b Fused indoor – 65” standard, 75” and DQ G

Auxiliary 22 in.
80” optional
Feeder Breaker
800, 1600,
Blank or
Instrument
Feeder Breaker
800, 1600,
Feeder Breaker
800, 1600, 2000
Feeder Breaker Compartment
•(559 1R m Q)
22min.
(559DQm mG )
Refer to Note1 800, 1600, 2000
2000 Compartment 2000
b Non-fused non-walk-in outdoor – 60” 22 in.
(559 mm)
22 in. 22 in. 32 in. 32 in. 32 in. • )X V H
standard and 75” optional (559 mm) (559 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm) µ
b Fused non-walk-in outdoor – 65” • : DON
standard and 75” optional • Sect
DQ G
b Non-fused walk-in outdoor – 60” 0 DLQ 6H FW
LR Q V ² ) X V H G % U H DNH U V or g
standard and 75” optional µ
b Fused walk-in outdoor – 65” standard fuse
and 75” optional Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument 1R WH ²
Compartment Compartment Compartment Compartment Compartm
b Walk-in outdoor aisle is 42” deep Instrume
b Sections with cable connected main, Main Breaker
800, 1600,
Blank or
Instrument 1R WH ²
tie and/or feeder breakers that are 3200 2000 Compartment
Compartm
Main Breaker
amp or greater must be minimum depth 3200, 4000 Instrume
of 70” for unfused breakers and 75” for Feeder Breaker
800, 1600,
Main Breaker
800, 1600,
Main Breaker
5000 1R W
H ²
fused breakers. 2000 2000 mount in
Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker

1R W
H ²
800, 1600, 800, 1600, Feeder Breaker
800, 1600, 2000 Compartm
2000 2000
available
22 in 22 in 32 in 32 in 1R WH ²
(559 mm) (559 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm)
Compartm
available
1R W H ²
can be m
is at the t
feeder br
instrume
compartm
of the se
Note 1 – SIf a 4000 amp feeder breaker is installed in Compartment C, Compartment D must be a Blank or Instrument Compartment. can go in
Note 2 – If a 4000 amp breaker is installed in Compartment B, Compartment A must be a Blank or Instrument Compartment.
compartm
Note 3 – If incoming is bottom, feeder breakers can mount in compartments A and/or B.
Note 4 – If a 3200 amp breaker is installed in Compartment B, the middle level through bus is not available. 1R W H ²
Note 5 – If a 3200 amp breaker is installed in Compartment D, the lower level through bus is not available. Z LW
K
Note 6 – Only one 800, 1600, 2000 amp feeder breaker can be mounted per section. If the horizontal main bus is at the top of the section, the 800, 1600, 2000 amp feeder breaker can go in the
A compartment and a blank/instrument compartment must go in the D compartment. If the horizontal main bus is a the bottom of the section, the 800, 1600, 2000 amp feeder breaker can go in 24
the D compartment and a blank/instrument compartment must go in the A compartment.
Note 7 – Any feeder section (or bus transition section) with 6000 amp vertical bus must be 32” wide.

Section Configurations
WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Section Configurations
Tie Sections – Non-Fused Breakers Tie Sections – Fused Breakers
Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker

22 in. 22 in. Feeder Breaker
22 in. Feeder Breaker Blank or
800, Blank or Auxiliary Instrument
800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 2000 (5591m600, 2000
m) (559 m m )
Compartment (559800, 1600,
mm) 800, 1600,
2000 2000 Refer to Note 2 2000 2000 Compartment
Feeder Breaker
Tie Breaker Feeder Breaker Tie Breaker Tie Breaker
800, 1600, 2000,
22 in. 22 in. 22 in.
12
800, 1600, 800, 1600, 4000, 800, 1600,

3200, 4000
(559
2000, 3200 2000 5000 22 m
in.m )
Refer to Note 2
22 in.(559
22 min.m )
Main Breaker 22 in.(559
22 in.m
m )
2000 22 in.
(559 m m ) (559 m(559
m ) 6000
mm) (559 m m ) mm)
(559 (559 m m ) Tie Breaker
Feeder Breaker 3200, 4000
Feeder Breaker Tie Breaker Tie Breaker Feeder Breaker Tie Breaker
SWITCHGEAR
800, 1600, 2000,
800, 1600, 800, 1600, 3200, 4000 4000, 5000 800, 1600, 5000
2000, 3200 2000, 3200 Refer to Note 1 2000
Feeder Breaker Blank or Auxiliary
Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Compartment Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker
800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 2000 800, 1600, 800, 1600,
Refer to Note 1
800, 1600, 2000
2000 2000 2000 2000
22 in. 22 in. 32 in. 32 in. 22 in. 32 in. 32 in.
32 in.
(559 mm) (559 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm) (559 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm)
(813 mm)
Main and Tie Sections – Non-Fused Breakers Main and Tie Sections – Fused Breakers
Blank or Feeder Breaker Blank or Blank or Blank or Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker

Instrument Feeder Breaker
Instrument 800, 1600, Instrument 800, 1600, 2000 Instrument 800, 1600, 800, 1600,
Compartment 2000 Compartment Compartment Compartment 2000 2000
Main Breaker Tie Breaker Main Breaker Main Breaker Tie Breaker Main Breaker Main Breaker Tie Breaker

800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 4000, 5000 4000 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600,
2000, 3200 2000, 3200 2000, 3200 2000 2000 2000
Feeder Breaker
Tie Breaker Main Breaker Tie Breaker Main Breaker Tie Breaker Tie Breaker Main Breaker
800, 1600, 2000,
800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 4000 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600,
3200, 4000 2000 2000 2000
2000, 3200 2000, 3200 2000, 3200
Refer to Note 1
Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker

800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 2000 800, 1600, 2000 800, 1600, 800, 1600, 800, 1600,
Refer to Note 1
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
22 in. 22 in. 22 in. 32 in. 32 in. 22 in. 22 in. 22 in.

(559 mm) (559 mm) (559 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm) (559 mm) (559 mm) (559 mm)
Feeder Sections – Non-Fused Breakers Feeder Sections – Fused Breakers
Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Blank or Feeder Breaker Blank or

800, 1600, Instrument 800, 1600, Instrument
800, 1600,
2000 Compartment 2000 Compartment
2000 Refer to Note 6
Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker

800, 1600, 800, 1600, 4000, 5000
2000, 3200 2000
Feeder Breaker
3200, 4000
Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker Feeder Breaker
800, 1600, 4000, 5000 4000, 5000 Feeder Breaker
2000, 3200 5000
Refer to Note 4
Feeder Breaker Blank or Blank or Feeder Breaker

800, 1600, Instrument Instrument 800, 1600,
2000, 3200 Compartment Compartment 2000
Refer to Note 6
Refer to Note 5
22 in. 32 in. 32 in. 32 in. 32 in.

(559 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm) (813 mm)
25

6K LSSLQ J : H LJ K W
V DQ G ' LP H Q V LR Q DO, Q IR UP DW
LR Q
WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Shipping Weights and Dimensional Information
Siemens Type
Siemens Type WLWLLow LowVoltage
VoltageSwitchgear assembly with
assembly withaa60 in.(1524
60in . (1524 mm)mm) internal
can be configured
Switchgear can be in many ways
configured by
in many structurestructure
internal is 82 .3 in .
is (2090
82.3 in.mm) andmm)
(2090 the
combining
ways different different
by combining section types .
section Up depth
and theofdepth
a walk-in
of a outdoor assembly with
walk-in outdoor
to five Up
types. vertical sections
to five verticalplus a transition
sections plus a 60 in . (1524
assembly withmm)
a 60 internal
in. (1524 structure
mm) is
asection can section
transition be shipped cantogether
be shipped as a unit . 110 .7 in .structure
internal (2812 mm) . Maximum
is 110.7 shipping
in. (2812
Maximumasshipping
together a unit. split length for indoor split length
mm). Maximum for outdoor
shipping structures is 66forin .
split length
12
structures isshipping
Maximum 110 in . (2794 mm) . for
split length If all (1676 mm) .
outdoor structures is 66 in. (1676 mm).
verticalstructures
indoor sections are is not
110 toin.be shipped as
(2794
a unit,Ifspecifications
mm). need to are
all vertical sections be provided
not to The major
major assembly
assembly sections
sectionsinclude:
SWITCHGEAR
The include:
b•Transition Sections — used as
thatshipped
be describeasthe limiting
a unit, factors (e .g .,
specifications 7UDQ VLW LRQ 6H FW LRQ V³ X VH G DV
low door
need to be orprovided
narrow hallway) .
that describe the transition to liquid filled transformer
transition to liquid filled transformer or
limiting factors (e.g., low door or narrow or to outdoor dry type transformers .
to outdoor dry type transformers.
b•Auxiliary
Normal indoor vertical sections are 96 in .
hallway). $ X [ LOLDU\ 6H FW LRQ V³ X VH G DVLQ FRP LQ J
(2438 mm) high and a minimum 60 in . bus ductSections — used as
or cable entrance incoming
when a
(1524 mm)
Normal indoordeep for non-fused
vertical sectionsbreakers
are 96 bus duct or cable
main breaker is not used .entrance when a
and(2438
in. 65 in .mm)
(1651highmm) anddeep for fused
a minimum main breaker is not used.
breakers .
60 in. (1524 A top-mounted
mm) deep for hoist, which
non-fused • 0 DLQ Sections
b Main
6H FW LRQ V³ X VH G W
— used
R FRQ W DLQ P DLQ
breaker and may housetometering
contain and main
is shippedand
breakers as an
65accessory
in. (1651 in mm)a separate
deep for breaker and may house metering and
feeder breakers .
container,
fused adds 6 .2
breakers. in . (157 mm)hoist,
A top-mounted for a feeder breakers.
total installed
which is shippedheight of 102 .2
as an accessoryin . in a • ) H H G H USections
b Feeder
6H FWLRQ V³ X VH G W
— used
R FRQ W DLQ
(2596 mm) .
separate container, adds 6.2 in. (157 feeder breakers and othertoequipment
contain
feeder
such as breakers and other equipment
instrumentation .
mm) for a total installed height of 102.2
The(2596
in. outdoor mm).switchgear assembly • 7LH Sections
such as
6H FW instrumentation.
LRQ V³ X VH G W R FRQ W DLQ W LH Transition Section For Liquid Filled and
Transition Section For Liquid Filled
Outdoor Dry Type Transformers
contains the indoor assembly in an breaker and —
b Tie other
usedequipment
to containsuch tie and Outdoor Dry Type Transformers
outdoor
The housing .
outdoor The overall
switchgear height is
assembly as feeder
breaker and breakers .
other equipment such as
112 .8 in .the
contains (2865 mm)assembly
indoor for non walk-in
in an feeder breakers. ' LP H Q V LR Q $ Weight
designs and
outdoor 114 in .
housing. The(2896 mm)
overall for is
height LQ Dimension
LQ FK H V P P A LQ OEWeight
V NJ
walk-in
112.8 in.designs .
(2865 mm)The depth
for non ofwalk-in
a Indoor in55inches
(1397)(mm) 500in (227)
lbs. (kg)
non walk-in
designs andoutdoor
114 in. (2896 mm) for Outdoor
Intérieur 61(1397)
55 (1549) 550 (250)
500 (227)
walk-in designs. The depth of a Extérieur 61 (1549) 550 (250)
non walk-in outdoor
$ SSUR [ LP DW
H : H LJ K W² / E V
Approximate Weight – Lbs.
Section Type µ µ µ µ µ µ µ µ
Indoor Outdoor
22 in. Indoor
22 in. Outdoor
32 in. 32 in. Indoor 38 in. Outdoor
38 in. Indoor48 in. Outdoor
48 in.
Section Type
Indoor Outdoor Indoor Outdoor Indoor Outdoor Indoor Outdoor
1000 2000 1300 1300 2500 2500 1800 3200 3200 N/A N/A
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
1000 2000 1800
N/A N/A
(450) (900)
(450) (585)
(900) (585)(1125) (1125) (810) (810) (1440)(1440)
2 100 3 500 2 600 4 500
Utility Metering
Utility N/A N/A
N/A N/AN/A N/A N/A N/A 2100 3500 (1 575) 2600 4500
(945) (1 170) (2 025)
Metering (945) (1575) (1170) (2025)
1400 2400 2000 3300
Breaker N/A N/A N/A N/A
(630) (1080) (900) (1485)
1400 2400 2000 3300 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Breaker
Weights shown in(630)
pounds and (1080)
( ) kilograms. (900)
(1485)
Weights shown do not include weight of circuit breaker removeable element (but does include cradle).
Add 400 shown
Weights lbs forinhoist andand
pounds track.
( ) kilograms .
On outdoor
Weights shownswitchgear, add 500
do not include lbs of
weight forcircuit
end walls (weight
breaker is for both
removeable ends).
element (butRefer to shipping
does include documents for actual
cradle) .
weights.
Add 400 lbs for hoist and track .
On outdoor switchgear, add 500 lbs for end walls (weight is for both ends) . Refer to shipping documents for actual weights .
26

Dimensional Information
WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Dimensions
Indoor Floor Plan and Cable Space Details
Indoor Floor Plan and Cable Space Details
1.25 .75 (19) typ.
(32) 4.42 (112)
typ.
.86
(22) .75 (19) typ.
12
1.50 5.86
(38) (149) 7.88 1
SWITCHGEAR
.86 (200)
(22)
Note 4.82
3 B
(122)
4.00
(102)
Transformer
Throat
Liquid filled &
outdoor dry type Maximum available 4.00 2
transformers only space in top or bottom (102)
of unit for customer's
power cables
1.00 End Trim Panel (typ.)
A CL (25) Required on left and
(4) Holes for
.50 (12mm) right end of switchboard
Grade 5 lineup — adds 2”
anchor bolts to total lineup width
5.00
Space for (127)
secondary 2.12
leads from (54)
above
14.9 3.00 (76)
(378)
2.00 (51)
D Space for
secondary 7.00 C
leads from (179)
below
4.40 (112)
2.37 (60)
1.00 (25)
Note 4
2.00 (51)
1.00 (25) W
W = 22 (559) or 32 (813)
A Equipment Depth Direction of Cables B C D

µ 1RQ ) X VHG Z LW h
A
1 6 + RU/ &O
25
DVV% UHDNHUVDepth
Equipment
Direction % of
HORZCables
$ ERY H
21 .
21 .
B 13 .
C
18 .
32 .
37 .
D
60” µ Non-Fused
) X VHG Z LW K with) &ODVV% UHDNHUV Below 21.50 (546)ab 13.88 (353) 32.59 (828)
(N, S, H or L-Class Breakers) OR
µ 1RQ IX VHG Z LW K Above
% HORZ 21.25 (540)a
31 . 18.88
13 . (480) 37.59 (955)
32 .
65” Fused with (F-Class Breakers)
1 6 + RU/ &ODVV% UHDNHUV
70” Non-fused 25 with Below 31.50 (800)ab 13.88 (353) 32.59 (828)
(N, S, µ )H X VHG Z LW
or L-Class K ) &O DVV% UHDNHU
Breakers) V
OR $ ERY H 31 . 18 . 37 .
75” Fused with (F-Class Breakers) Above 31.25 (794)a 18.88 (480) 37.59 (955)
µ 1RQ IX VHG Z LW K % HORZ .
41.50 13 . 32 .
1 Non-fused
6 + RU/ &ODVV% withUHDNHUV Below . (1 054) 1
ab
80” $ ERY H
13.88 (353) 32.59 (828)
(N, S, µ ) X HVHGor Z L-Class
LWK Breakers) Above% HORZ 36 . (1 048)a
41.25
18 . 37 .
) &ODVV% UHDNHUV $ ERY H 36 . (927)ab
80” Fused with Below 36.50
18.88 (480) 37.59 (955)
1 RW H ' LPBreakers)
(F-Class HQ VLRQ V VK RZ Q LQ LQ FK HV DQ G P P . Above 36.25 (921)a
1 5HG X FH E\ . µ LI X SSHUQ HX W UDOLVSUHVHQ WZ LW K FDEOH V DERY H RULI D ORZ HUQ HX W UDOLVSUHVHQ WZ LW K FDEOH
V EHORZ .
Note:5HG X FH E\ .shown µ LI DQin inches and $ (mm).
EUHDNHULVORFDW HG LQ WK H ERW WRP FRP SDUW P HQ W .
2
Dimensions
5HG X FW LRQ V SHUQ RW HV DUH DG G LW LY H . ( [ DP SOHFDEOH V EHORZ ORZ HUQ HX W UDO $ EUHDNHULQ ERWWRP FRP SDUW P HQ W % .88 .
3 5HG X by
a Reduce FH FDEOHVSDFH E\ . µ [ . µ LI 1 HX W
7.88” if upper neutral is present with UDO5LVHULVSUHVHQ W
cables above or if a . &RQ VX OW
lower neutral ) DFW
is RU\ . with cables below.
present
. LI : . LI : .
b Reduce by 4.00” if an 800-3200A breaker is located in the bottom compartment.
Reductions per notes 1 & 2 are additive. Example: cables below + lower neutral + 2000A breaker in bottom compartment = B-11.88.
c Reduce
27
cable space by 4.00” x 4.82” if Neutral Riser is present. (Consult Factory).
d 4.10
(104) if W=22; 4.60 (117) if W=32.

WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Dimension
Indoor
Indoor Side View
Side View
Optional Hoist
Lifting Holes (3) Vent stack
12
4.0 (102)
24 .9
SWITCHGEAR
(632)
hoist
Extension
102.2 Front Bus Cable

(2596) Compartment Compartment Compartment
top of E 17 .8 F
Hoist (452)
92 .0
(2337)
42.0 (1067)
Minimum
Aisle Space
Recommended
Floor Line
2 .37 G
(60)
A
A E F G
A Depth
Equipment
Equipment Depth
E
Breaker Compartment Depth
Breaker Compartment Depth
F
Rear Compartment Depth
Rear Compartment Depth
G
Anchor Bolt Spacing
Anchor Bolt Spacing
60 (1524) Non-fused breakers 19 .8 (503) 22 .4 (569) 59 .13 (1502)
60 (1524)65
Non-fused breakers 19.8 (503) 22.4
(1651) Fused breakers 24 .8 (630) 22 .4 (569)
(569) 59.13 (1629)
64 .13 (1502)
65 (1651) Fused breakers 24.8 (630) 22.4 (569) 64.13 (1629)
70 (1778) Non-fused breakers 19 .8 (503)
19.8 (503) 32 .4 (823) 69 .13 (1756)
70 (1778) Non-fused breakers 32.4 (823) 69.13 (1756)
75 (1905)75 (1905)
Fused Fused breakers
breakers 24 .8(630)
24.8 (630) 32 .4 (823)
32.4 (823) 74 .13
74.13 (1883)
(1883)
80 (2032)80 (2032) Non-fused
Non-fused breakers
breakers
19.8
19 .8(503)
(503) 42 .4(1077)
42.4 (1077) 79 .13
79.13 (2010)
(2010)
80 (2032)80
Fused breakers 24.8 (630) 37.4
(2032) Fused breakers 24 .8 (630) 37 .4 (950)
(950) 79.13 (2010)
79 .13 (2010)
Note: Dimensions
Note: shown
Dimensions in inches
shown and (mm).
in inches and (mm) .
28

Outdoor Non-Walk-in Floor Plan

12

SWITCHGEAR
1 3 Refer to appropriate indoor plan view for available customer conduit informa-
µ is representative for a µ deep switchgear internal structure . For other
internal structure depths tion .
a 60” is representative for a 60”(65 or 75)
deep add extra
switchgear depth
internal to µ that
structure. For is shown .
other internal c Refer to appropriate indoor plan view for available customer conduit information.
2 75 .37 is representative for a µ deep internal
structure depths (65 or 75) add extra depth to 60” that isstructure .
shown. For other internal
structure
b 75.37 depths (65forora75)
is representative 60”add
deepextra depth
internal to 75 .37
structure. Forthat is shown .
other internal structure 3 Refer to appropriate indoor plan view for available customer conduit informa-
1 µ is(65
representative for depth
a µ todeep switchgear internal structure . For other
depths or 75) add extra 75.37 that is shown.
internal structure depths (65 or 75) add extra depth to µ that is shown . tion .
2 75 .37 is representative for a µ deep internal structure . For other internal
structure depths (65 or 75) add extra depth to 75 .37 that is shown .
Outdoor Non Walk-in Side View

Dimensions shown in inches (mm)
1 82 .27 dimension is based on µ internal frame structure and if a deeper 3 60 .43 dimension is based on µ internal frame structure and if a deeper
internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added
to the 82 .27 dimension . to the 60 .43 dimension .
2 Dimensions
Dimensions shownshown
75 .37 dimension is in
in inches inches
based
(mm).on (mm)µ internal frame structure and if a deeper 4 73 .77 dimension is based on µ internal frame structure and if a deeper
1 82 .27
a 82.27 dimension
internal
dimension is based
frameis structure
based is on
on 60” used µ internal
(65
internal frame frame structure
or 75)structure
the extra depth
and and if internal
should
if a deeper a deeper
be added
frame
3 60 .43 dimension
internal
c 60.43 frame
dimension is based
is structure
based is on
on 60” used µ internal
(65
internal frame structure
or 75)structure
frame the extra
anddepth and if internal
should
if a deeper a deeper
be added
frame
internal frame
to the 75 .37
structure (65 or 75) the extra depthorshould
structure
is used dimension . is used (65 75) the extra depth
be added should
to the 82.27 be added
dimension. internal frame structure
to the 73 .77 dimension .
structure is used (65 or 75) is
the used
extra (65
depth orshould
75) the extra depth
be added should
dimension.
to the
b 75.37 82 .27 dimension .
dimension is based on 60” internal frame structure and if a deeper internal frame to the
d 73.77 60 .43 is
dimension dimension .
based on 60” internal frame structure and if a deeper internal frame 29
2 75 .37 dimension
structure is used (65 or is 75)
based on depth
the extra µ internal frame
should structure
be added to theand if dimension.
75.37 a deeper 4 73 .77 is
structure dimension
used (65 oris 75)
based on depth
the extra µ internal
shouldframe structure
be added to theand if dimension.
73.77 a deeper
internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added
to the 75 .37 dimension . to the 73 .77 dimension .
29

Outdoor Walk-in Floor Plan
12

SWITCHGEAR

1 µ is representative for a µ deep switchgear internal structure . For other 3 Refer to appropriate indoor plan view for available customer conduit informa-
a 60”internal structurefor
is representative depths
a 60”(65
deeporswitchgear
75) add extra depth
internal to µ For
structure. thatother
is shown .
internal c tion .
Refer to appropriate indoor plan view for available customer conduit information.
2 103 . µ depths
structure is representative
(65 or 75) addfor a depth
extra µ deepto internal
60” that isstructure .
shown. For other internal
structure depths (65 or 75) add extra depth to 103 . µ that is shown .
b 103.8” is representative for a 60” deep internal structure. For other internal structure
depths (65 or 75) add extra depth to 103.8” that is shown.
1 µ is representative for a µ deep switchgear internal structure . For other 3 Refer to appropriate indoor plan view for available customer conduit informa-
internal structure depths (65 or 75) add extra depth to µ that is shown . tion .
2 103 . µ is representative for a µ deep internal structure . For other internal
structure depths (65 or 75) add extra depth to 103 . µ that is shown .
Outdoor Walk-in Side View
Dimensions shown in inches (mm) 3 60 .43 dimension is based on µ internal frame structure and if a deeper
1 110 .7 dimension is based on µ internal frame structure and if a deeper internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added
internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added to the 60 .43 dimension .
to the 110 .7 dimension . 4 102 .2 dimension is based on µ internal frame structure and if a deeper
2 103 .8 dimension is based on µ internal frame structure and if a deeper internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added
Dimensions shown
internalshown
Dimensions frame in inches
instructure
inches is(mm)
(mm). used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added 3 60 .43
to the
c 60.43 dimension is
102 .2 dimension
dimension .
based on
is based on 60” internal µ internal frame structure
frame structure and if ainternal
and if a deeper deeperframe
1 110 .7 dimension
to dimension
a 110.7 is based
the 103 .8isdimension . on
based on 60” internal µ internal frame structure
frame structure and ifinternal
and if a deeper a deeper
frame internalisframe
structure structure
used (65 is extra
or 75) the used depth
(65 orshould
75) thebe extra
addeddepth
to the should be added
60.43 dimension.
internal
structure frame(65structure
is used or 75) theisextra
useddepth
(65 or 75) the
should extra depth
be added should
dimension. to the
d 102.2 60 .43 dimension .
dimension is based on 60” internal frame structure and if a deeper
b 30 to dimension
103.8 the 110 .7 isdimension .
based on 60” internal frame structure and if a deeper internal frame 102 .2 frame
4internal dimension is based
structure is usedon(65 orµ 75)internal frame
the extra structure
depth andadded
should be if a deeper
2 103 .8 is
structure dimension
used (65 oris75)
based on depth
the extra µ internal frame
should structure
be added to the and
103.8ifdimension.
a deeper tointernal
the 102.2frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added
dimension.
internal frame structure is used (65 or 75) the extra depth should be added to the 102 .2 dimension .
to the 103 .8 dimension .
30
WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear VT, CPT, CT Data
Voltage Transformers – External Metering and Relaying
Accuracy Class at 60 Hz
Burden
Ratio W X Y Volt-Amp Rating Thermal Rating VA Hertz
12
600:120 0.6 1.2 1.2 100 150 50/60

480:120 0.6 1.2 1.2 100 150 50/60
SWITCHGEAR
288:120 0.6 1.2 1.2 100 150 50/60
Control Power Transformers – 115ºC Rise
kVA Phase Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage

3
5
Single 240/480 120/240
10a
15a
Current Transformers for FSII WL Breaker Applications - External Metering and Relayingb
Accuracy at 60 Hz Metering Burden (ohms)

Ratio B-0.1 B-0.2 B-0.5 B-0.9 B-1.8 Class
100.5 1.2 — — — — C5
150.5 1.2 — — — — C7
200.5 1.2 — — — — C9
250.5 1.2 — — — — C12
300.5 0.6 0.6 — — — C15
400.5 0.6 0.6 1.2 — — C20
500.5 0.6 0.6 1.2 — — C25
600.5 0.3 0.3 0.6 1.2 1.2 C21
800.5 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 1.2 C29
1000.5 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 1.2 C35
1200.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 C20
1500.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 C25
1600.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 C27
2000.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C34
2500.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
3000.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C21
3200.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
Current Transformers for FSIII WL Breaker Applications – External Metering and Relayingb
Accuracy at 60 Hz Metering Burden (ohms)

Ratio B-0.1 B-0.2 B-0.5 B-0.9 B-1.8 Class
2000.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
2500.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
3000.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
3200.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
4000.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
5000.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
6000.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C20
a Requires complete compartment.

b Breaker compartment will accept 1 set of CT’s each on top and bottom primary disconnects.

Siemens Sm@rtGear™ Low-voltage Switchgear Introduction
Sm@rtGear™ LVS System Architecture
12
SWITCHGEAR
The future
The past
Why settle for partial control when you can have total control All of the Sm@rtGear™ LVS communication backbone is
and pay less? Traditional hard wired remote control panels installed and tested at the Siemens factory and the user only
provide additional safety for your personnel but Siemens has to physically connect the three communication cables that
Sm@rtGear™ LVS can provide the same breaker remote connect the low-voltage switchgear to the remotely mounted
control plus remote monitoring and configuration of all touch screen interface panel (HMI).
embedded intelligent devices.
The remote HMI allows the user to access the intelligent
Siemens Sm@rtGear™ LVS is pre-configured and pre- devices embedded in the low-voltage switchgear. Using
programmed low-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear that the HMI, the user can monitor, configure and control the
provides out-of-the-box remote monitoring, configuration and intelligent devices. The Sm@rtGear™ LVS CPU acts as the
control of embedded intelligent devices. local master and can also be a remote slave tied into an
upstream supervisory system.

Siemens Sm@rtGear™ Low-voltage Switchgear Features
12
SWITCHGEAR
Sm@rtGear™ LVS standard Sm@rtGear™ LVS standard

features functionality includes:
b PC with pre-programmed software b LVS one-line view
to remotely monitor, configure and
b LVS elevation view
control embedded intelligent devices
and structural monitoring devices. b User Administrator
b 22” touch screen HMI pre-configured b Cell Blocking
and programmed with application b WL breaker control (Password or
specific graphical user interface hardware enabled/disabled)
(application specific elevation and
one-line drawings) that act as user b WL breaker monitoring
home page. b WL breaker configuration
b Communication backbone linking Documentation
embedded intelligent devices, CPU
and HMI.
Sm@rtGear™ LVS optional
b ETU776 trip units in all breakers with
Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry (DAS) that functionality includes:
supports arc flash incident energy b WL breaker monitoring
reduction. b Digital meter monitoring (provided at
b Electrically operated breakers with no additional cost if digital meter is
spring charge motor, shunt trip and supplied)
remote closing coil. b TPS 6 SPD monitoring
b Metering and protective relaying (provided at no additional cost if SPD
functionality in all breakers. is supplied)
b High Resistance Grounding (HRG)
(provided at no additional cost if HRG
is supplied)
b LVS structural monitoring
b Custom Maintenance Reports

Siemens Sm@rtGear™ Low-voltage Switchgear General
Siemens Type WL Low-voltage Switchgear for
Marine and Offshore Applications
Siemens offers low-voltage switchgear Additional Industry Standards WL Drawout Circuit Breakers are in
for marine and offshore applications. Compliance accordance with:
Siemens Type WL Low-voltage Type WL switchgear with power circuit b UL 1066 — Low-voltage AC and
12
Switchgear can be manufactured to breakers are designed, tested and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
meet ABS, USCG, DNV and Lloyd’s constructed in accordance with: Enclosures
of London standards. Additionally
SWITCHGEAR
b UL 1558 — Metal-Enclosed Low- b ANSI C37.13 — Low-voltage AC
all Siemens Type WL Low-voltage
voltage Power Circuit Breaker Power Circuit Breakers Used in
Switchgear is built to the applicable UL,
Switchgear Enclosures
ANSI and IEEE standards.
b ANSI C37.20.1 — Metal-Enclosed b ANSI C37.16 — Preferred Ratings,
Low-voltage Power Circuit Breaker Related Requirements, and
Equipment Ratings Switchgear Application for Low-voltage Power
b ANSI C37.50 — Test Procedure Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit
b 635V AC maximum
for Low-voltage AC Power Circuit Protectors
b 3 phase 3 wire, 3 phase 4 wire
Breakers Used in Enclosures b ANSI C37.17 — Trip Devices for AC
b 50/60 Hz
b ANSI C37.51 — Conformance Testing and General Purpose DC Low-voltage
b 6000 amp maximum horizontal bus
of Metal-Enclosed Low-voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers
b 6000 amp maximum vertical bus
Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear b NEMA SG3 — Low-voltage Power
b Silver plated copper bus standard – tin
Assemblies Circuit Breakers
plated copper optional
b Standard bus bracing 100kA –optional b NEMA SG5 — Power Switchgear
up to 200kA Assemblies
b NEC — Applicable requirements of
the National Electric Code (NEC)
Seismic Qualification
b CSA — CSA compliance with cUL
Seismic qualification to all major seismic labeling is available.
construction standards (IBC, UBC, CBC, b ANSI C37.20.7 — Type WL arc
SBC, BOCA and IEEE 693) is available. resistant low-voltage switchgear is
available and is UL listed to ANSI/
For additional Type WL low-voltage IEEE C37.20.7. Type 2B arc resistant
switchgear product information, accessibility rating with maximum
including configuration information, refer internal arcing short-circuit current
to the WL Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed rating of 100kA @508V and 85kA @
Switchgear Selection and Application 635V
Guide – Siemens USA Document No.
LVSA-LVMES-0313.

Type WL Arc Resistant Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear General
WL Arc Resistant Low-voltage Switchgear
Features, Benefits and Ratings
Standard Features
b ANSI/IEEE Type 2B Arc Resistant to
protect personnel at the front, back
and sides of the equipment.
12
b UL Listed, performance tested

and classified as arc resistant in
accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7.
SWITCHGEAR
b Reinforced enclosure to withstand

pressure from internal arcing faults.
b Internal venting system with pressure
dams and pressure vents to channel
the flow of arc fault gases and vent
these gases out the top of the gear
and away from personnel.
b Reinforced and gasketed front doors
with additional hinges and latching
means.
b One piece circuit breaker
compartment doors with insert panels
for control devices such as fuses,
indicating lights and circuit breaker
control switches when required.
b Reinforced bolted rear covers.
Enhanced Safety b Insulated/Isolated bus bar system.
Siemens now offers arc resistant, gassing of arc byproducts from the arc b Integrally designed circuit breaker
metal-enclosed, low-voltage switchgear chutes is contained by the switchgear door sealing frame that allows the
designed to provide an additional as verified by interruption tests. user to rack a circuit breaker to
degree of protection for personnel connect, test or disconnect position
performing normal operating duties in Siemens arc resistant low-voltage
without having to install additional
proximity to the energized equipment. switchgear provides an added degree
hardware (bellows, shrouds, etc) and
Such duties include opening or closing of protection over standard metal-
still maintain arc resistant rating of
circuit breakers, closed door circuit enclosed switchgear. In addition to
the apparatus.
breaker racking, reading instruments, bolted faults, Siemens WL arc resistant
low-voltage switchgear is designed b Shutters in circuit breaker
or other activities that do not require compartments.
cover removal or opening doors (other and performance tested to ANSI/IEEE
than auxiliary/ instrument compartment C37.20.7 to provide protection from b Riser Base with integrated arc
doors). the hazards of internal arcing faults. plenum.
An internal arcing fault can be caused b Four high power circuit breaker
Why Arc Resistant Switchgear by insulation degradation, insulation stacking capability. No additional
contamination, entrance of vermin, stacking/configuration restrictions.
Standard metal-enclosed switchgear is
foreign objects coming into contact
designed to withstand the mechanical b All section configurations available.
with the energized bus, or any other
forces generated by bolted faults on Available in solidly grounded or
unplanned condition that creates an
the load terminals until a power circuit resistance grounded configurations.
electrical discharge path through air.
breaker or other protective device can
During an arcing fault, the voltage at b Non-fused non current-limiting
interrupt the flow of fault current. This
the fault location is essentially the circuit breakers allow full power
capability is verified by short-circuit
system voltage and the fault energy coordination.
and short-time withstand tests on the
is focused within the switchgear
equipment and interruption tests on the Recommended Optional Features
enclosure. Arc temperatures can
power circuit breakers. During a bolted
exceed 20,000 degrees Kelvin, rapidly Overhead plenum with exhaust duct.
fault, the voltage at the fault location
heating the air and vaporizing metal The system is designed to transfer
is essentially zero and the fault energy
parts. The expanding plasma creates the byproducts of the arcing event
is dissipated throughout the power
severe mechanical and thermal stress (smoke, particulate matter, heat, etc.)
system. The arc generated within the
in the equipment which can blow open away from the immediate vicinity of
power circuit breaker during interruption
doors and covers and burn through or the low-voltage switchgear when an
is cooled and extinguished by the circuit
fragment the enclosure. internal arcing fault occurs. Typically, the
breaker arc chutes. The minimal out

Siemens Sm@rtGear™ Low-voltage Switchgear Dimensions
exhaust duct will vent the byproducts to Ratings Enclosure Type
a location usually outside of the room b ANSI/IEEE Type 2B accessibility b NEMA 1 indoor
in which the low-voltage switchgear
b Maximum internal arcing short-circuit current:
is located. The overhead plenum is
100kA @ 508V and 85kA @ 635V Industry Standards
attached to the roof of the low-voltage
switchgear, and can be exhausted b WL power circuit breaker frames range from 800A b UL-1558
in any direction ((left, right, forward, to 6000A
b ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1
12
backward) away from the switchgear b 3 and 4 pole WL power circuit breakers
assembly or unit substation. b ANSI C37.51
b Maximum arcing duration: 500 msec
b ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7
SWITCHGEAR
Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry (DAS). b Vertical bus continuous current ratings to 6000A b CSA C22.2 No. 31
DAS employs the unique dual parameter b Horizontal bus continuous current ratings to 6000A
setting capability of the ETU776 trip b Maximum voltage: 635V
unit, coupled with the ability to easily
toggle to a lower arc flash parameter b 3 Phase 3 Wire, 3 Phase 4 Wire
set. A normal operation parameter b 50/60 Hz
set can be optimized for selective trip
coordination, while the second set is
optimized for lower arc flash energy Dimensional Data
levels. The dynamic action comes from
the ability to switch from the normal 1.25 (32)
(Typ.)
Rear
operation set to the arc flash limiting 5.11 (130)

4.59
118.0 (2997) Minimum Ceiling Height Required (See Note 4)
Lifting Holes (3)
set based on the presence of personnel (Typ.) Optional Hoist

(116) Vent Stack
3.27 (83) 5.20 (132) (Note 1)
as they approach the flash protection B Maximum Space

11.40
(289)
4.0
boundary.
For Cables Below
2.28
4.00 (101) (Note 2)
(Typ.)
(57) 24.9 (632)
Hoist Extension
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI). Transformer

Maximum Space
For Cables Above
B1
If WL circuit breakers are arranged in A

Throat
CL
several levels and minimum delays G

transformers only
1.25 (51) (Typ.)
are desired, it is advisable to use the

106.5 (2705) 96.0
End Trim Panel (Typ.) Top of Hoist
Required on left and (2438)
right end of switchgear
ZSI module. The circuit breakers are 14.9

Space for
secondary
leads from 5.00
lineup - adds 2"
to total lineup width
interconnected by these modules. In

(378) above (Note 6) (127)
2.12 (54)
Non-fused 32.59 (828)
the event of a short-circuit, all circuit Fused 37.59 (955) 3.00 (76)
2.00 39.0 (991) Minimum

(4) Holes for
breakers communicate to determine

(51) Aisle Space Required
.50(12mm)
Grade 5 7.00 Non-Fused 13.88 (353) 42.0 (1067) Minimum
Space for 36.0 (914) Minimum
anchor bolts (179)
and isolate the exact short-circuit

secondary Fused 18.88 (480) Aisle Space Recommended Aisle Space Required
leads from
below
location. Thus, only the closest

4.40 (179)
2.37(60)
Floor or Pad Surface Riser Base 4.0 (102)
upstream circuit breaker will be opened. Note 3 1.00 (25)

2.00 (51) 2.37(60) G
The ZSI module provides the complete

1.00(25) W
A
Front
range of selectivity with the short delay Plan View (WL Arc Resistant Switchgear Side View
time of tzsi = 50 ms. By shortening the without Optional Overhead Plenum)
delay time, the ZSI module significantly

reduces arc duration, stress and A = Equipment Depth +2.6 (66)
damage in the event of a short-circuit in
the switchgear. Anchor Bolt Spacing
G = Equipment Depth – 0.88 (22)
High resistance grounding.
Reduces available fault current during Equipment Cable Direction Cable Direction
ground faults thereby reducing arc Minimum Width Equipment Below Above
W Depth B B1
energy.
3 Pole FS2 22 (559) 60 (1524) Non-fused 20.00 (508)a 13.68 (347)
3 Pole FS3 32 (813) 65 (1651) Fused 20.00 (508)a 13.68 (347)
4 Pole FS2 32 (813) 70 (1778) Non-fused 30.00 (762)a 23.68 (601)
4 Pole FS3 40 (1016) 75 (1905) Fused 30.00 (889)a 23.68 (728)
80 (2032) Non-fused 40.00 (1016)a 33.68 (855)
80 (2032) Fused 35.00 (889) a 28.68 (728)
a Space available for cables below is reduced by 5.20 inches when a
lower neutral bus is present.

Type WL Arc Resistant Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Dimensions
Dimensional Data Note: Dimensions shown in inches and (mm).
Drawings are not to scale.
1. Space available for cables below is reduced by 5.20 inches when a lower
35.0 (889) neutral bus is present.
13 Overhead Exhaust Duct Exhaust Duct 2. Space available for cables below is reduced by 4.00 inches if an 800-3200A
Overhead Plenum Width = 21.36 (542)
(330) Plenum circuit breaker is located in the bottom compartment. Reductions per notes
10
1 & 2 are additive. Example: cables below + lower neutral + 2000A circuit
Vents Vents 14.50
breaker in bottom compartment = B – 9.20
12
(254) (368)
External Duct
Support Holes 3. 4.10 (104) if W = 22; 4.60 (117) if W = 32, W = 40
Aux/Bkr Aux/Bkr 4. 118 (2997) minimum room ceiling height is required for ventilation of arc
SWITCHGEAR
Comp Comp
products for LV Arc resistant switchgear without overhead plenum.
To Exterior Wall
5. 120 (3048) minimum room ceiling height is required for LV Arc resistant
23.0 (584) x
15.0 (381) switchgear with overhead plenum.
Aux/Bkr Aux/Bkr Wall space required
119
6. Not applicable for Overhead plenum application. Consult Factory for
Comp Comp at 104.0 (2641)
from floor (3022) guidelines for secondary leads from above solutions.
7. Custom designed exhaust duct is provided when the exit is towards the front
to clear the overhead hoist. Cross-sectional area of the exhaust duct remains
104.60
(2656) same as shown in figure. Wall cutout required is same at 104 (2641) from
Aux/Bkr Aux/Bkr
Comp Comp floor.
8. Siemens to provide weatherproof box to be installed outside the exterior wall
over the exhaust duct exit.
9. The area outside the exhaust duct vent needs to be kept clear of personnel
Aux/Bkr Aux/Bkr and equipment due to the potential for pressurized exhaust gases being
Comp Comp
expelled in the area as a result of arc fault in the switchgear. An area of 4
Floor or Pad Surface feet X 4 feet centered on exhaust duct vent needs to be clear at all times.
Riser Base Riser Base 10. Exhaust duct is not self supporting, recommended support every 6 linear
Front View: WL Arc Resistant Switchgear with Overhead Plenum feet minimum. The duct supports are not supplied by Siemens and must be
supplied by the purchaser or the installing contractor.
11. LV Arc Resistant switchgear with and without overhead plenum should be
installed on a solid surface to maintain the arc ratings.
Guide Form Specifications

A. This section supplements Section 16435 – Low-voltage 5. Devices connected to the primary bus such as: surge
Switch gear unless otherwise noted. arresters, potential transformers, control power
B. Comply with requirements of latest revision of ANSI/IEEE transformers and their associated current limiting fuses
C37.20.7 – Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear must be locatedin the rear of the switchgear in the bus/
Rated up to 38kV for Internal Arcing Faults. cable compartment and not in auxiliary compartments.
C. Arc Resistant Electrical Ratings: 6. Shutters in power circuit breaker compartments.
1. Nominal System Voltage: [600 V] [480 V] [240 V] [208 V] 7. One piece circuit breaker compartment doors with insert
2. Maximum Design Voltage: [635 V] [508 V] [254 V] panels for fuses, indicating lights and control switches
3. Accessibility Type: 2B when required.
4. Internal Arcing Short-Circuit Current: [85kA @ 635V] WARNING: This equipment contains hazardous voltages.
[100 kA@ 508V] Death, serious personal injury, or property damage may result
5. Arcing Duration: 100 msec, 500 msec if safety instructions are not followed. Only qualified personnel
D. Arc Resistant General Construction: should work on or around this equipment after becoming
1. Indoor NEMA 1 enclosure thoroughly familiar with all warnings, safety notices, and
2. Riser Base with arc plenum maintenance procedures provided with the equipment. The
3. Insulated/Isolated bus bar system successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent
4. [Removable rear panels with captive screws.] [Hinged upon proper handling, installation, operation and maintenance.
rear doors with captive hardware.]

Arc Flash Solutions General
Arc Resistant Switchgear
n Insulated and isolated bus
n Separation barriers and top venting
n Breaker shutters
Arc resistant metal-enclosed low-voltage switchgear is an
12
optional product offering that contains and channels internal
arcing fault energy. This new switchgear construction provides
SWITCHGEAR
an additional degree of protection to the personnel performing
normal operating duties in close proximity to the equipment
while the equipment is operating under normal conditions. In
each of the descriptions below, additional design features are
indicated, all of which aid in directing faults upward away from
personnel or reduce the chances of a fault by insulating and
isolating live parts.
Front view
Type 2B accessibility rating
allows auxiliary/control
compartment door to be open
and still maintain arc resistant
Door gaskets and sealing trims rating
Extra hinges
Thumb screw latches added Breaker sealing frame

maintains arc resistant rating
One piece breaker door with breaker in Connect, Test
or Disconnect position.
Enhanced sill channel with
internal plenum for arc venting
Rear view
Pressure release vent in rear top cover
Extra bolts and pressure dams in rear

covers/doors
Rear vent covers extended for vent flaps
Extra bolts on
end trim sheets

Arc Flash Solutions
GRID
GRID
BUS 1
BUS 1
General
TX-4
Dynamic Arc Sentry TX-4
One of the trip units available for the Siemens WL Family of equipment is an effective way to minimize arc flash dangers.
GEN 1
GEN 1
BUS 3
breakers is the ETU 776. It offers dual parameter sets that If one is concerned about the effects of temporarily inhibiting
BUS 2
Vs:480 V
BUS 2 BUS 3
Vs:480 V
enable the trip unit to automatically lower the instantaneous selectivity, then rest assured that with the ETU 776 single
setting and thereby lower the available energy in a fault step changes are possible giving engineers the ability to clear
condition. Commonly referred to as “maintenance mode”, faults faster with minimum effect on coordination. In the
making a breaker trip faster while engaged in any form example below the effects of the DAS system may be seen.
12
of maintenance or just by being in proximity to energized

SWITCHGEAR
Example 1
SWGR 1
SWGR 1
PPE: 3 PPE: 0
AHE: 10.6 cal/cm^2(100%) AHE: 0.74 cal/cm^2(100%) 1600
AFB: 105.68 in
1600 AFB: 17.38 in WL 1600
WL 1600
WD: 24 in WD: 24 in
800 800 800 800 800 800

WL 600 WL 600 WL 800 WL 800 WL 800 WL 600 WL 600 WL 600 WL 800 WL 800 WL 800
WL 600
1000
1000
SWGR 1 Main SWGR 1 Main

SIEMENS WLL ETU 776 LSIG SIEMENS WLL ETU 776 LSIG
WLL 1600A 1600 Amp WLL 1600A 1600 Amp
PANEL 1 PANEL 2 PANEL 3 POWER PANEL 1 POWER PANEL 2 POWER PANEL 3
PANEL 1 PANEL 2 PANEL 3 POWER PANEL 1 POWER PANEL 2 POWER PANEL 3
SWGR 1 800A FEEDER SWGR 1 800A FEEDER

SIEMENS WLL ETU 776 LSIG SIEMENS WLL ETU 776 LSIG
WLL 800A 800 Amp WLL 800A 800 Amp
100
100
10
10
Time in Seconds
Time in Seconds
DLA: 1600
1
DLA: 1600 Man.: SIEMENS

Man.: SIEMENS Type: WLL
Type: WLL Size: WLL 1600A
Size: WLL 1600A Trip: ETU 776 LSIG
Trip: ETU 776 LSIG Max A/Plug/Setting: 1600 / 1600
Max A/Plug/Setting: 1600 / 1600
SWGR 1
SWGR 1
DLA: 1600
DLA: 1600 Man.: SIEMENS
Man.: SIEMENS Type: WLL
Type: WLL Size: WLL 800A
Size: WLL 800A Trip: ETU 776 LSIG
Trip: ETU 776 LSIG Max A/Plug/Setting: 800 / 800
Max A/Plug/Setting: 800 / 800
.1
.1
PANEL 1
PANEL 1
.01
.01
.5 1 10 100 1000 10000 .5 1 10 100 1000 10000

Current in Amperes X 100 Current in Amperes X 100
480 Volt Phase Time-Current Characteristic Curves 02-15-2010
TCC 2 13:48:48
TCC 1 14:00:27
Parameter Set B
Parameter Set A
C:\EDSA2005\Projects\DAS SWGR whitepaper.PDC
C:\EDSA2005\Projects\DAS SWGR whitepaper.PDC
Parameter set "A" Parameter set "B"
Dual Parameter
sets enable
“maintenance
mode” - can be
set remotely via
software or
automatically via
WL Breaker with ETU 776 digital input.

Under normal conditions, the switchgear’s calculated arc flash Below is another example of the benefit of the DAS, or even
energy will require PPE level 3 protection for anyone within manual switching, of breaker parameter set. The reduced
the arc flash boundary. Incorporating the features built into settings set available in the ETU 776 can also be used to
the DAS system, and using the ETU776 trip unit, the system reduce the arc flash energy at downstream equipment. In the
changes to parameter set B. In the second figure the first figure on the left with normal settings the arc energy at
instantaneous has been changed to a lower setting and the panel 1 requires PPE level 2. After switching to the parameter
calculation shows a reduction of arc flash energy. The B settings, the PPE level at Panel 1 is reduced to 0.
12
resultant PPE level has been reduced to 0.
SWITCHGEAR
Example 2
SWGR 1 WL 1600
1600
WL 800
800
PANEL 1
PPE: 2
AHE: 5.9 cal/cm^2(85%)
AFB: 47.36 in
WD: 17.9 in
Arc Flash in parameter A

Arc Flash in parameter A Arc Flash in parameter B
1000
1000
SWGR 1 Main
SWGR 1 Main
SIEMENS WLL ETU 776 LSIG
WLL 1600A 1600 Amp
WLL 1600A 1600 Amp
800A FEEDER
800A FEEDER
WLL 800A 800 Amp
WLL 800A 800 Amp
100
100
10
10
Time in Seconds
Time in Seconds
DLA: 1600 DLA: 1600

Man.: SIEMENS Man.: SIEMENS
1
Type: WLL Type: WLL

1
Size: WLL 1600A Size: WLL 1600A

Trip: ETU 776 LSIG Trip: ETU 776 LSIG
Max A/Plug/Setting: 1600 / 1600 Max A/Plug/Setting: 1600 / 1600
SWGR 1 SWGR 1
DLA: 1600 DLA: 1600

Man.: SIEMENS Man.: SIEMENS
Type: WLL Type: WLL
Size: WLL 800A Size: WLL 800A
Trip: ETU 776 LSIG Trip: ETU 776 LSIG
Max A/Plug/Setting: 800 / 800 Max A/Plug/Setting: 800 / 800
.1
.1
PANEL 1 PANEL 1
.01
.01
.5 1 10 100 1000 10000

Current in Amperes X 100 .5 1 10 100 1000 10000
Current in Amperes X 100
TCC 1 11:42:04
TCC 2 09:34:42
C:\EDSA2005\Projects\SAFETYSWITCHGEARWHITEPAPER.PDC
C:\EDSA2005\Projects\SAFETYSWITCHGEARWHITEPAPER.PDC

Remote operation and monitoring
n Remote Monitoring for temperature, metering and breaker and number of operations), and open and close
maintenance data. breakers remotely. The WinPM.Net software with its Web
Enabled interface allows multiple users to access only the
n Remote Control via communications with or without information they are interested in from the convenience
interposing relays. of their desks. Accountants can access cost allocation
n Remote Racking feature. and utility billing information to enforce accountability for
12
n Remote Operation for opening and closing via local hand electrical resources and verify utility bills. Trip settings and
held pendant station. other parameters for the LV power breakers can be modified
SWITCHGEAR
and monitored remotely as well.

Remote Monitoring is an effective way to maintain separation
between personnel and energized electrical equipment. In addition, WL breakers with appropriate electrical controls
With the latest equipment from Siemens, this is now and communication components, can be opened and
easier and more cost effective than ever. Maintenance closed through communications directly or with the use of
personnel and engineers can now view real-time electrical interposing relays.
parameters, operating conditions (like temperature in the
Unit sub #5 elevation
Real-time data from WL

breakers with remote
open/close capability

Remote Racking Device
Although it is always preferable to work on equipment that
has been de-energized, in some cases it may not be practical.
Siemens now offers the Remote Breaker Racking Device. This
product uses an integral torque overload sensing mechanism
and allows users to safely rack our WL breakers into the
Connect, Test and Disconnect position from up to 30 feet
12
away.
SWITCHGEAR
This allows the operator to be outside the arc flash boundary
thereby providing additional personnel protection and reducing
the PPE requirements. This system can be retrofitted to
existing Siemens WL switchgear lineups.
Remote Racking Device
Remote Operator Pendant

This hand held pendant allows a user to remotely operate
(open/close) a WL breaker without being in front of the
switchgear. Standard cable lengths are 30 feet with other
lengths available. This pendant, along with the Remote
Racking device, can be used to improve personnel safety by
putting operators outside the arc flash boundary. Maintenance
personnel can remotely open breakers and close breakers,
without being in front of the equipment. The Remote Operator
Pendant can be used in combination with the Remote Racking
Device for added personnel safety.
Remote Operator Pendant Control port on WL Switchgear

Other protection options
b Infrared Viewing ports
b Zone Selective Interlocking
b High Resistance Grounding
12
SWITCHGEAR
Infrared Viewing Ports

Infrared viewing ports allow maintenance personnel to
monitor temperatures of the cable and bus connection points
in the rear of the gear while it is energized and under load.
Excessive temperatures can be an indication of a problem
with a connection.
Infrared viewing ports
Zone Selective Interlocking

Zone Selective Interlocking eliminates any intentional time
delay in the event a fault occurs between two breakers in
adjacent zones. In the schematic to the right, representative
time delay values are shown for the breakers in each zone.
If a fault occurs on the load side of the downstream breaker,
the ZSI system enables the upstream breaker’s delay and
allows the downstream device more time to independently
clear the fault. If the fault occurs on the line side of the
downstream breaker (between two zones), the delay in the
upstream breaker will not occur. This allows the fastest
tripping time for faults and will reduce the amount of arc
energy which may be released. The ZSI function is available for
short time delays and ground fault delays.
High Resistance Grounding

Research has shown that a high percentage of arc faults
start as a phase to ground fault. High resistance grounding Zone Selective Interlocking
systems minimize the available phase to ground arcing
current.
A high resistance grounding system reduces the magnitude of

phase to ground faults. This will reduce the mechanical stress
on equipment for the most common of faults and will reduce
the magnitude of energy released.
PH1 PH2 PH3 PH1 PH2 NEUT
3-CLF 2-CLF ROD
TEST PULSE
RELAY RELAY
RES RES
TEST METER
RES RELAY RES
TEST RESISTOR
PULSE
RELAY RELAY
SYSTEM
SWITCH SYSTEM AM
RES RES
SWITCH
TEST METER WIRE LOOP FOR

RES RELAY RES PORTABLE DETECTOR
RESISTOR
W NORMAL
W NORMAL
R FAULT
AM
R FAULT
G PULSE
WIRE LOOP FOR PORTABLE DETECTOR G PULSE
PULSE SW
CONTROL PULSE SW
CIRCUIT CONTROL
CIRCUIT

Secondary Unit Substations
Overview General
Siemens offers a wide variety of unit
substation designs to meet customer
requirements. A unit substation
consists of one or more transformers
mechanically and electrically
connected to and coordinated in
design with one or more switchgear or
switchboard assemblies. A secondary
12
unit substation is defined as a unit
substation whose outgoing section is
SWITCHGEAR
rated below 1000 volts.
A typical secondary unit substation
consists of three sections:
n Primary: an incoming section that
accepts incoming high voltage (2400 to

13,800 volts) line
n Transformer: section that transforms
Switchboard with WL Encased
incoming voltage down to utilization
Systems Breakers
voltage (600 volts or less) Liquid Filled Transformer
n Secondary: an outgoing section that Primary Switch
distributes power to outgoing feeders
and provides protection for these
feeders (600 volts and less)
Standard secondary unit substations
consist of:
n Medium Voltage Primary
n Transformer
n Low Voltage Secondary
Siemens also offers low voltage unit

substations with:
n Low Voltage Primary
n Transformer
n Low Voltage Secondary
The primary reason for using a secondary

unit substation is to bring power as close Type FC2 Switchboard with
as possible to the center of the loads. Fusible Switches
Another reason is that it provides a Dry Type Transformer
system design concept incorporating a
wide variety of components that permits Primary Switch
tailoring equipment to the needs of the
application. A secondary unit substation
provides
n Reduced power losses
n Better voltage regulation
n Improved service continuity
n Increased functional flexibility
n Lower installation cost
n Efficient space utilization
Every component and assembly of

secondary unit substations are designed
and engineered as an integral part of a
complete system.
Liquid Filled Transformer Type WL Low Voltage

Switchgear
Primary Switch
For more information, please contact your local sales office.

Siemens Unit Substation Solutions
Indoor Dry Type Transformer Sketch Page
Plan view
38.0 38.0
12
SWITCHGEAR
D Top and bottom

Transformer conduit 58.0
48.4
Restricted
Area
19.7 W
Front view
19.7"
(500 mm)
38" 38"
(965 mm) (965 mm)
Type FC2
switchboard
digital meter Unit space
type SPD module
100.4"
(2,550 mm)
90"
(2,286 mm)
Section #1 Section #2
Primary Switch requires front access for top cable entry terminations.
Transformer requires access from the front and 12” (305 mm) on the back side for ventilation space.

Siemens Unit Substation Solutions
Indoor Liquid Filled Transformer Sketch Page
Plan view
32.0” 22.0” 22.0”
(813 mm) (559 mm) (559 mm)
12
SWITCHGEAR
space in top or bottom
for customer's cables.

Maximum available
Maximum available
Maximum available
31.5” 31.5” 31.5”
(800 mm) (800 mm) (800 mm)
H3 X0 70.0”
Transformer (1,778 mm)
X3
48.4”
D H2
(1,229 mm)
X2
Space for secondary Space for secondary Space for secondary

H1 X1 leads from above. leads from above. leads from above.
Space for secondary Space for secondary Space for secondary

leads from below. leads from below. leads from below.
19.7”
(500 mm)
Front view
32.0” 22.0” 22.0”
(813 mm) (559 mm) (559 mm)
Metering/SPD
Main breaker
Liquid filled
100.4” transformer 102.2”
(2,550 mm) (2,596 mm)
Section #1 Section #2 Section #3
Primary Switch Primary

requiresSwitch
frontrequires
access front access
for top for entry
cable top cable entry terminations. Transformer requires access from the front and 12" (305 mm)
terminations.
on the back side for ventilation space.
Transformer requires access from the front and 12” (305 mm) on the back side for ventilation space.

Notes
12
SWITCHGEAR

POWER PRODUCT Busway Systems
Contents
Busway System Overview
Pricing Notes 13-3
Busway Selector Chart 13-4
Sentron® Busway
Sentron Busway Overview 13-5 – 13-6
Technical Data 13-8 – 13-9
Sentron connection
Straight Sections – Plug-In, One-Sided Plug-In, and Feeder 13-10 – 13-12
13
Elbows 13-13 – 13-14
Offsets 13-15
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Combinations 13-16
Tees 13-17
End Tap Boxes 13-18
Center Tap Boxes 13-19
Joint Mounted Tap Boxes 13-20
TBNK Fittings for Joint Mounted Tap Boxes 13-21 – 13-22
Expansion Fittings 13-23
Reducers and Phase Rotation Fittings 13-24
Service Heads 13-25
Hangers 13-26 – 13-27
Hangers and End Closers 13-28
XJ-L Roof, Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Flanges 13-29
Busway Accessories 13-30
Flanges Ends 13-31 – 13-32
Combination Flange/Elbow 13-33
Cubicle Options 13-34
Panelboards and Meter Center Modules 13-35 – 13-36
Installation and Application Information 13-37- 13-39
Power II Fit Program 13-40
Quick Reference 13-41
Sentron® Busway Systems

Sentron Bus Plug Overview 13-43
Sentron Bus Plugs – Circuit Breaker (Installed) –
Sentron Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs 13-45
Bus Plugs with Standard Circuit Breakers 13-46
Bus Plugs with Current Limiting Circuit Breakers 13-47
Sentron Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-48
Wall Clearance and Circuit Breaker Bus Plug Dimensions 13-49
Sentron Bus Plugs – SLVB Fusible - Catalogue Numbering System 13-50
Bus plugs
Sentron SLVB Fusible Bus Plugs 13-51 –13-52
Sentron Fusible Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-53 –13-54
Wall Clearance and Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions 13-55
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs 13-56
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs – Catalogue Numbering System 13-57
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-58
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs 13-59
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs – Circuit Breaker (Installed) -
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs – Product Configurations 13-61
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-62 –13-63
POWER PRODUCT Busway Systems
Contents
XJ-L™ HD Busway System
Introduction and Overview 13-64 – 13-65
Busway Specifications 13-66
Straight Sections 13-67 – 13-68
Elbows 13-69
Tees and Crosses 13-70
Tap Boxes 13-671 – 13-72
Flanged Ends 13-73
Accessories – Hangers, End Closers, and Outlet Covers 13-74
13
XJ-L™ HD Bus Plugs

BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Selection Guide and Catalogue Numbering System 13-75

XQ and XQR Series 13-76
XPM Series 13-77
XEC and XLEC Series 13-78
XLVB Series and Plug-InTap Box 13-79
Busway Power Distribution

BD® Plug-In (225 — 1600 Ampere) Copper 13-80
XL-U® Aluminum (225–5000 Ampere) 13-81
XL-U® Copper (225–6500 Amperes) 13-82
XL-X®, XL-U®, BD® Plug-In Units 13-83 – 13-84

Busway Systems Overview
Pricing Notes General
A. Footage Pricing F. Service Heads are specially L. For Silver Finishing of Copper Bus
constructed tap boxes suitable for Bars, add 10%.
1. Sentron and XL-U base pricing is
outdoor use and are equipped to M. Roof Flanges are specially constructed
listed on a per foot charge. When
accept service cables through a collars and plates built onto a section of
calculating the footage charge,
removable insulated bottom plate. 3R busway which passes through a flat
fractions are rounded to the larger
The busway should be priced or angled roof. Roof pitch must be
whole number (i.e., a linear run
through the end of the run. given for angled roof.
totaling 66'3" would be priced at
67 feet. G. Phase Transpositions can be built N. Circuit Breaker Type Bus Plugs
into a busway section to provide for Sentron Busways are priced as
2. BD and XJ-L HD base pricing is
better voltage balance on long runs. “complete devices” with circuit
listed on a per section charge.
To price, use the “Expansion Section” breakers factory installed.
B. Accessories accessory charge for the appropriate
13
Circuit Breaker plugs for BD, XL-U
Some busway accessories are ampere rating. and XL-X busways are priced
listed as complete device prices H. Hangers “enclosure only”. XJ-L HD may or
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
while others are listed under Sentron and XL-U busway are UL may not have a circuit breaker and
accessory charges. listed for standard hanger spacing receptacle installed, depending upon
1. Complete device price includes all of ten feet (on center). Purchasing the bus plug type.
material and accessory charges busway hangers for horizontal O. Fusible Type Bus Plugs do not
for a standard device. (Busway installations is optional. Unistrut/ include fuses. Adapter kits for Class
footage included if applicable). Kindorf is commonly used by R, T & J fuses are available for field
contractors as an approved installation.
2. Accessory Charge includes alternative.
fabrication and any miscellaneous P. Cubicle list prices include labor and
fittings for the standard device. Two hangers are furnished free of material for a single frame device
(No busway footage included). charge with every straight section of with enclosure including line side
BD and XJ-L HD. Self compensating internal bussing for connection to
C. End Cable Tap Boxes are designed “Spring” hangers required for
to be installed at the beginning or busway and protective device.
vertical installations are designed to Fuses and load side bussing are
end of a busway run. The busway be field installed by the installer and
rating determines the tap box list not included in the base price.
are shipped separately. These are
price. Mechanical lugs are standard. also used as intermediate supports Q. Sentron Busway has been tested in
For compression lugs add 30% to where floor-to-floor height is greater accordance with UL1479 and offers
tap box list price. than 16 feet. a certified two hour fire rating for
D. Elbows with an angle other than 90 gypsum wall board construction,
I. Ceiling, Floor And Wall Flanges are and a three hour fire rating for
degrees, the accessory charge is to used when busway passes through a
be doubled. concrete slab or block penetrations.
floor or wall and are intended to These ratings were achieved using
E. Flange Ends (Switchboard cover that portion of the opening standard busway installed with
Connections / Stubs) accessory around the outside of the busway. SpecSeal® sealant from
prices are for connection to Siemens They are not to be used to
Specified Technologies Inc.
equipment. For connection to other support the busway.
This material is available through
manufacturer’s equipment, multiply J. Reducers price is determined by the Electrical Distribution.
the flange end list price by 2.5. rating of the larger busway. Fused
Standard list price includes eight R. Expansion Section
reducers do not include fuses.
inches of bus extension into Qty (1) Expansion Section should be
equipment from mounting flange, K. Special Paint — Busway Sections,
used for every 200ft of continuous
if more than 8 inches are required, Accessories And Bus Plugs
Busway run length, at every
consult factory for pricing. Sentron Standard finish is ASA #61 light gray.
transition to a vertical run, and for
Switchboards can be assembled For other than standard color, add
each building expansion joint. The
with the Busway Flanged End 20% and consult factory for
Busway run must be positioned
pre-installed, eliminating the labor availability. XJL HD Busway is
accordingly to accommodate the
to connect the Busway to the offered in ASA#61 Gray and Graphite
Expansion Section(s).
switchboard at the job site. Gray.

Busway Systems Overview
Busway Selector Chart (100-6500 Ampere) General
I-T-E (previously known as Bulldog Electric) was the ever changing needs of the electrical industry.
the first manufacturer to make a Busway System. The Busway Selection Chart below will help you in
Since its introduction in 1932, Busway Systems have selecting the proper product to fit your requirements.
improved and expanded into several designs to meet
Busway Selector Chart

100-6500 Ampere 600 Volts or Less
Product
Plug-in and Feeder Busway
Sentron XL-U XJ-L HD BD
Feature Plug-in/Feeder Plug-in/Feeder Plug-in Plug-in
13
100 – – u –
150 – – – –
200 – – – –
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
225 u u u u
400 u u u u
600 u u – u
800 u u – u
1000 u u – u
Ampere 1200 u u – u
Rating 1350 u u – u
1600 u u – u
2000 u u – –
2500 u u – –
3000 u u – –
3200 u – –
4000 u u – –
5000 u u – –
6000, 6500 – u – –
Copper u u u u
Conductor
Aluminum u u u
Indoor u u u u
Use
Outdoor u u – –
2W – – – –
AC Service 1Ø3W – – u –
50-60 Hz 3Ø3W u u u u
400Hza 3Ø4W 100% N u u u u
3Ø4W 200% N u u
Voltage 600 volts or less u u u u
Ventilated – u – –
Construction
Non-Ventilated u u u u
UL 857 u u u u
Meets
NEMA BU1 u u u u
Electrical
CSA/CUL C22.2 NO 27 u u u u
Standard
ANCE NMX-J-148ANCE u u u u
a Consult factory for information.

Sentron® Busway Systems – Reference Information
Sentron Busway Overview Overview
Sentron Busway for Global Power Distribution Applications
Building on a solid foundation of Siemens Busway Business uses Ground
advanced products for the construction industry leading technology in all its Sentron Busway offers ground options
industry, the Siemens Sentron name is manufacturing processes. From bus bar to meet your specifications: standard
recognized worldwide as synonymous fabrication to Electrostatic Spray Epoxy integral aluminum housing ground and
with quality and consistent performance. insulation, all the processes used in optional internal grounding bars. An
Sentron Busway delivers impressive the manufacturing of Siemens Sentron optional isolated ground is also available
features and benefits that make it Busway are electronically controlled which is especially useful in applications
ideal for many types of industrial and to provide for consistent, high quality where a clean ground is needed (such as
construction implementations. results, making Sentron Busway hospitals or high tech).
Engineered to ensure the safe and products best in its class.
Plating
efficient distribution of power in Housing
All bus bars are electroplated with tin.
13
industrial, commercial and institutional Sentron Busway incorporates an all
environments world-wide, Sentron This unique tin plating provides excellent
aluminum housing. This lightweight conductivity and prevents impurities
ampacities range from 225A to 5000A
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
totally enclosed, non-ventilated housing from attaching to the bars. Optional silver
UL. Thanks to an innovative design, you resists rust and other elements,
benefit from labor-saving installation and plating is also available.
distributes heat away from the
a flexible, compact bus system that is Insulation
conductors, and provides an excellent
an ideal fit for most applications. In fact, ground path. The totally enclosed Sentron Busway is insulated with an
Sentron Busway is one of the industry’s design also eliminates the need for Epoxy Powder Coating system designed
least labor-intensive systems. derating of the system regardless of by Siemens Engineers, Epoxy System
Sentron Busway installs with minimal installation orientation. The housing is Engineers and Epoxy Powder Specialists,
hardware and often costs less than covered with an electrostatically applied specifically for Siemens Busway products.
cable and conduit installations. The light gray ANSI 61 polyester urethane
lightweight aluminum housing acts as an powder paint that is scratch resistant The Siemens exclusive Electrostatic Spray
integral ground, joint stacks connect with and has a 1,000-hour salt spray insulation process produces uniform
splice plates featuring a single-bolt resistance rating. application of Epoxy powder over the
design, and bus plugs and cable tap entire conductor bar. This is further
boxes offer the industry’s largest wire Conductors
enhanced by the inline filter process and
bending space. An optional 200% Sentron Busway conductors have
a compact construction and can be magnetic separator that helps to eliminate
neutral within the bus bar housing
accommodates harmonics common in configured as 3-phase 3-wire, 3-phase contaminants common to fluidized bed
today’s power systems. 4-wire or 3-phase 4-wire with 200% systems. The electrostatic application also
neutral. The conductors may be ordered provides a better coating consistency than
Sentron Busway conductors are
in copper (98% conductivity), 1000A/in2 that of the older fluidized bed process.
insulated with a state-of-the-art epoxy
M-Rated Copper, Aluminum (58% The combination of electrostatic spray
insulation system, which is applied using
conductivity) and 750A/in2 L-Rated and lower oven temperatures produces a
an electrostatic spray process for optimal
Aluminum. The optional 200% neutral consistent coverage with fewer impurities
insulation integrity.
helps to handle harmonic conditions and pinholes in the insulation. The lower
Exemplifying the spirit of continuing that may exist. This system is
innovation, Sentron Busway is now oven temperatures reduce the risk of bar
especially useful with discharge lighting
available with economical and convenient (fluorescent) and computer installations. annealing, which affects the overall quality
elbow stacks for changing left, right, up This will help to minimize overheating of the system.
or down directions at 90 degrees. and prolong the life cycle of your power Sentron Busway insulation is Class B,
And, of course, Sentron Busway is distribution equipment. 130°C Rated. Every bus bar and completed
certified to design standards worldwide, assembly is dielectric tested to ensure the
including UL, NEMA, IEC, CSA, VDE insulation is free of defects.
and BS.

Sentron Busway Overview Overview
Joint Stack Plug-in Opening Standards
Each Sentron Busway piece is shipped Sentron Busway offers plug-in style All Sentron Busway products meet the
with a joint stack and joint covers busway which feature plug-in openings following standards:
installed at one end of the busway and a rated for finger safety to IP2X in UL 857
shipping end protector at the other end. accordance with IEC 529 and BS EN NEMA BU1
The joint stacks feature a single bolt 60439-1, -2 and BS EN 60529.
design and a special, torque indicating, CSA C22.2
Each plug-in opening has a reversible IEC 60529 (2004)
double headed break-off bolt. This hinged dead front designed to protect
eliminates the need for torque wrenches the contact surfaces from dirt, dust or BS EN 60529
and assures proper torque at installation moisture. Gasketing is used where BS EN 60439-1, 60439-2
of 50 ft.-lbs.(68 N-m). applications require a splash proof UL 1479
When the proper torque value is (IP55) rating. DIN 4102 Parts 9&12
achieved, the top bolt head will shear IP Ratings BS 6387 Parts 11.1 and 11.2
13
off. Each joint stack allows for +/- .625 Labor Savings
inches (15.8mm) adjustability at each Sentron Busway is available in a variety
of IP ratings. Use the chart below to Using Sentron Busway instead of cable
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
joint. Over adjustment is prevented by

the joint covers, which will only allow a determine the IP rating that best fits and conduit can create savings of up to
.625 inch (15.8mm) adjustment when your application needs. 20 - 30% on total installed costs. Sentron
the knockouts on the joint cover are Testing busway is lightweight, compact and
removed. takes half the time to install as cable and
Each piece of Sentron Busway is factory
conduit. Siemens Busway Systems Cable
It is possible to remove any joint tested before shipping. Tests performed
Conversion Program will show you side
connection assembly to allow electrical include dielectric tests, which are used
by side comparisons of busway vs. cable/
isolation or removal of a busway length to ensure integrity of insulation. In
conduit. For more information, visit our
without disturbing adjacent busway addition, Sentron Busway is tested in
web site at www.sea.siemens.com.
lengths. Isolation joint stacks are accordance with both UL and IEC
available and used to electrically isolate standards. All Sentron Busway is
a busway section(s) within a busway manufactured and inspected in an ISO
run. For easy visual identification, 9001:2000 registered facility.
isolation joint stack assemblies are
painted white.
Joint Assembly Plug-In Opening

and Cover
Levels of Protection Description

Sentron Busway
Code Description Feeder Plug-In Sentron Bus Plugs
IP 2X Plug-In outlet protects against access to live parts by .472 in. (12 mm) test probe, even with cover • • •
opened. Finger Safe
IP 40 Enclosure protects against entry of .039 in. (1.0 mm) test probe. Indoor (Typical UL Designation) • • •
IP 55 Enclosure protects against entry of dust and water jets. Splash Proof • • •
IP 66 Enclosure is dust tight and protects against powerful water jets. Outdoor (International Only) •
NEMA 3R Enclosure protects against rain, sleet and damage from ice formation. Outdoor •

Catalogue Numbering System Selection
Suffix part of Catalogue Numbers
S X 4 0 2 C 1 0
P L 0 6
Sentron
SX = US Lengths Feeder Length in Inches, ex.: 2'3" = 027
Feeder lengths available from 2'0"
(024 Inches) up to 10'0" (120 inches)
Configuration
Plug-in L Length 04 = 4'0"
3 = 3Ø, 3W
06 = 6'0"
4 = 3Ø, 4W 100% Neutral 08 = 8'0"
5 = 3Ø, 4W 200% Neutral 10 = 10'0"
One-sided I Length 04 = 4'0"
Ampere Rating
13
plug-in (Riser) 06 = 6'0"
02 = 225A 32 = 3200A 08 = 8'0"
04 = 400A 40 = 4000A 10 = 10'0"
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
06 = 600A 50 = 5000Aa Elbows S = Stackh
08 = 800A L = 90° Edge Up
10 = 1000A O = Odd Down
12 = 1200A degree anglee
Flat Right
13 = 1350A Left
16 = 1600A
20 = 2000A Tees E Edge Up
25 = 2500A Down
30 = 3000A Flat Right
Left
Bus Bar Material Offsets F Edge Up
C = Copper Down
M = 1000 Amps/In2 Copper Flat Right
A = Aluminum Left
L = 750 Amps/In2 Aluminum
Combinations O Edge Up Flat Left
Edge Down Flat Left
Ground Edge Up Flat Right
1 = Integral (Housing) Edge Down Flat Right
2 = Internal Bus Bar b Flat Left Edge Up
3 = Isolated Ground b Flat Left Edge Down
Flat Right Edge Up
IP Rating Flat Right Edge Down
0 = IP40f EXpansion P F T
4 = IP55f Fittings
6 = IP66cgh Center Cable T B Standard
9 = NEMA 3Rdgh Tap Boxes EXpanded
End Cable T Vertical Standard
a Copper only Tap Boxes Horizontal EXpanded
b Copper or aluminum ground bar
c IEC Markets End Closers C L S
d NEMA Markets
e For odd degree angle (other than 90°) specify the degree angle of the turn. FlanGe Roof F L
f Indoor only (Plug-in and Feeder) Wall
g Outdoor use (Feeder only)
h Elbow Stack (IP40 and IP55 only) Joint Stacks Standard S T
Isolation
• Catalog Numbers for Hangers can be found on page 13-43.
SerVice Heads 1 = 1-Phase Tranformer H
3 = 3-Phase
T = Throat Utility Florida Pwr/Light
Houston Pwr/Light
Commonwealth ED
Pacific Gas/Electric
Detroit Edison
San Diego
Seattle
Other
Reducers Fused R F
Non-fused R N
Flanged End E = Int’l Standard N D
R = U.S. Standard N D
O = Other
Transposition R PG = Phase & Ground
PO = Phase only
GO = Ground only

Technical Data Technical
Temperature Rise Curves Temperature Rise Curves
Aluminum Bus Bar Sentron Busway Copper Bus Bar Sentron Busway
Amperage
Amperage
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Temperature Rise ˚C Temperature Rise ˚C
R, X, Z and Ohms, Voltage Drop

Voltage Drop - Concentrated Loads, Line-to-Line per 100 feet at 100%
Bus Bar Width Ohms x 10-3 per 100 feet Rated Load, 35°C Ambient acg
x 0.25 in. Line to Neutral Power Factor
Ampere Rating (6.4mm) Thick R X Z 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
AL L-Rated c
225 — 1.75 (44.5) 3.94 1.13 4.10 0.88 1.02 1.15 1.27 1.39 1.49 1.57 1.54
400 — 1.75 (44.5) 4.08 1.23 4.26 1.66 1.91 2.15 2.38 2.58 2.77 2.91 2.83
600 — 1.75 (44.5) 4.26 1.32 4.46 2.64 3.03 3.40 3.75 4.08 4.37 4.58 4.43
800 400 2.38 (60.5) 3.42 1.06 3.58 2.82 3.24 3.64 4.02 4.36 4.67 4.90 4.74
1000 600 3.25 (82.6) 2.45 0.74 2.56 2.50 2.88 3.24 3.57 3.89 4.17 4.38 4.24
1200 800 4.38 (111.3) 1.86 0.59 1.95 2.32 2.66 2.99 3.29 3.58 3.82 4.01 3.87
1350 1000 5.38 (138.7) 1.39 0.24 1.41 1.50 1.81 2.10 2.39 2.67 2.93 3.17 3.25
1600 1200 6.50 (165.1) 1.21 0.48 1.29 2.19 2.48 2.75 3.00 3.23 3.43 3.56 3.35
2000 1350,1600 8.75 (222.3) 0.91 0.35 0.98 2.11 2.38 2.64 2.87 3.08 3.26 3.37 3.16
2500 2000 (2) 5.63 (143.0) 0.68 0.29 0.74 2.09 2.34 2.57 2.78 2.97 3.12 3.21 2.95
3000 2500 (2) 6.75 (171.5) 0.54 0.28 0.61 2.24 2.47 2.67 2.85 3.01 3.12 3.16 2.80
3200 2000 (2) 7.50 (190.5) 0.48 0.33 0.58 2.53 2.73 2.91 3.06 3.17 3.23 3.20 2.68
4000 3000,3200 (2) 9.00 (228.6) 0.62 0.21 0.51 2.34 2.61 2.85 3.08 3.27 3.43 3.51 3.20
CU M-Rated c
225 — 1.75 (44.5) 2.34 1.13 2.60 0.69 0.77 0.84 0.90 0.95 0.99 1.01 0.91
400 — 1.75 (44.5) 2.44 1.13 2.69 1.26 1.40 1.52 1.64 1.74 1.82 1.86 1.69
600 — 1.75 (44.5) 2.58 1.16 2.83 1.96 2.18 2.39 2.58 2.74 2.87 2.94 2.68
800 400 1.75 (44.5) 2.71 1.17 2.95 2.67 2.98 3.28 3.55 3.78 3.97 4.08 3.76
1000 — 2.25 (67.2) 2.12 0.98 2.30 2.58 2.88 3.17 3.44 3.67 3.86 3.98 3.67
1200 600 2.88 (73.2) 1.66 0.77 1.83 2.56 2.85 3.11 3.35 3.56 3.72 3.80 3.45
1350 800 3.50 (88.9) 1.30 0.64 1.45 2.34 2.59 2.82 3.03 3.20 3.33 3.39 3.04
1600 1000 4.50 (114.3) 1.06 0.56 1.20 2.37 2.60 2.66 3.01 3.17 3.29 3.32 2.94
2000 1200,1350 6.00 (152.4) 0.77 0.44 0.89 2.27 2.48 2.50 2.83 2.96 3.05 3.07 2.66
— 1600 — — — — — — — — — — — —
2500 2000 8.50 (215.9) 0.55 0.35 0.65 2.15 2.34 2.50 2.64 2.75 2.82 2.81 2.39
3000 — (2) 4.75 (120.7) 0.49 0.27 0.56 2.07 2.28 2.46 2.62 2.76 2.86 2.89 2.54
3200 — (2) 5.50 (139.7) 0.44 0.30 0.53 2.33 2.51 2.67 2.80 2.90 2.96 2.93 2.44
4000 2500,3000,3200 (2) 6.50 (165.1) 0.36 0.15 0.39 1.76 1.97 2.17 2.35 2.51 2.63 2.71 2.49
5000 4000 (2) 8.50 (215.9) 0.30 0.21 0.37 2.49 2.69 2.86 3.00 3.11 3.17 3.15 2.63
Notes:
a For plug-in distributed loads, divide voltage drop d For 50 Hz, multiply reactance (X) by 0.85 and resistance f For metric conversion ”Line to Line per meter at 25° C
values by 2. values do not change. For 400 Hz, multiply reactance ambient in mV/A/m” (Vd 32.8) / A. Divide Vd by 2 for
b To determine voltage drop line-to-neutral, multiply line- by 3.75 and multiply resistance by 1.4. Calculate new distributed loads.
to-line values by 0.577. voltage drop: g Voltage Drop will decrease in lower ambient
c Actual voltage drop for different lengths and at Vd = amps load x 3(Rcos θ + X sin θ) per 100 ft, temperature. Contact Siemens for Voltage Drop in
loadings less than full rated current can be calculated where cos θ = Power Factor. other ambient conditions.
using the formula: e For metric conversion R, X, Z values ”in Ohms per
Vd (actual) = Vd (table) x actual load x actual length (ft) meters Line to Neutral”
rated load 100 feet R x .0328
X x .0328
Z x .0328

Technical Data Technical
Ground Capacity
Effective Current
Min. CSA Carrying Capacity Grd. Circuit Characterisitics under Fault
for Sectional of Housing Conditions Ohms x 10-3 per 100 ft
Bus Bar Ground Bus Area 50% Integral
Width Bars per UL 857 Internal (Hsg.) % of % of Internal Ground Housing Ground
Inches per Table 14 Ground Bar Ground UL Phase
Ampere Rating (mm) Pole In2 (mm2) In2 (mm2) In2 (mm2) Req Bar R X Z R X Z
A L-Rated
225 — 1.75 (44.5) 1 0.08 (53.5) 0.22 (141.1) 2.30 (1485.1) 1333 253 4.872 9.037 10.267 5.797 12.963 14.200
400 — 1.75 (44.5) 1 0.17 (107.1) 0.22 (141.1) 2.30 (1485.1) 667 253 4.872 9.037 10.267 5.797 12.963 14.200
600 — 1.75 (44.5) 1 0.17 (107.1) 0.22 (141.1) 2.30 (1485.1) 667 253 4.872 9.037 10.267 5.797 12.963 14.200
800 400 2.38 (60.5) 1 0.17 (107.1) 0.30 (191.9) 2.40 (1550.1) 688 192 3.351 7.333 8.063 4.932 10.000 11.150
1000 600 3.25 (82.6) 1 0.20 (126.5) 0.41 (262.1) 2.54 (1639.9) 607 147 2.833 6.628 7.208 3.662 8.442 9.202
1200 800 4.38 (111.1) 1 0.23 (146.5) 0.55 (352.8) 2.72 (1756.6) 552 115 2.487 5.852 6.358 3.189 6.926 7.625
13
1350 1000 5.38 (136.5) 1 0.29 (189.7) 0.67 (433.5) 2.88 (1859.8) 446 94 2.182 5.115 5.561 2.713 5.883 6.478
1600 1200 6.50 (165.1) 1 0.29 (189.7) 0.81 (524.2) 3.06 (1975.4) 467 84 1.801 4.489 4.837 2.289 5.206 5.687
2000 1350,1600 8.75 (222.3) 1 0.35 (227.7) 1.09 (705.6) 3.42 (2207.7) 425 69 1.390 3.467 3.735 1.623 4.267 4.565
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
2500 2000 5.63 (142.9) 2 0.52 (332.3) 1.41 (907.3) 3.85 (2480.7) 320 59 1.145 2.955 3.169 1.526 3.837 4.129
3000 2500 6.75 (171.5) 2 0.59 (380.0) 1.69 (1088.7) 4.20 (2711.9) 301 53 0.954 2.683 2.848 1.221 3.635 3.835
3200 2000 7.50 (190.5) 2 0.81 (522.6) 1.88 (1209.7) 4.44 (2866.8) 229 51 0.894 2.493 2.648 1.144 3.428 3.614
4000 3000,3200 9.00 (228.6) 2 0.81 (522.6) 2.25 (1451.6) 4.92 (3176.5) 250 50 0.715 2.339 2.446 0.916 3.378 3.500
CU M-Rated
225 — 1.75 (44.5) 1 0.05 (33.5) 0.22 (141.1) 2.30 (1485.1) 2128 261 3.803 6.330 7.380 5.183 10.083 11.338
400 — 1.75 (44.5) 1 0.11 (67.7) 0.22 (141.1) 2.30 (1485.1) 1054 261 3.803 6.330 7.380 5.183 10.083 11.338
600 — 1.75 (44.5) 1 0.11 (67.7) 0.22 (141.1) 2.30 (1485.1) 1054 261 3.803 6.330 7.380 5.183 10.083 11.338
800 400 1.75 (44.5) 1 0.11 (67.7) 0.22 (141.1) 2.30 (1485.1) 1054 261 3.803 6.330 7.380 5.183 10.083 11.338
1000 — 2.25 (57.2) 1 0.13 (85.2) 0.28 (181.5) 2.38 (1536.7) 860 207 3.029 5.993 6.715 4.409 9.191 10.194
1200 600 2.88 (73.0) 1 0.18 (114.2) 0.36 (231.9) 2.48 (1601.8) 661 166 2.460 5.676 6.186 3.674 8.212 8.996
1350 800 3.50 (88.9) 1 0.24 (152.3) 0.44 (282.3) 2.58 (1665.8) 510 140 2.188 5.267 5.704 2.807 7.492 8.000
1600 1000 4.50 (114.3) 1 0.24 (152.3) 0.56 (362.9) 2.74 (1769.0) 534 113 1.893 4.323 4.719 2.756 6.880 7.411
2000 1200,1350 6.00 (152.4) 1 0.29 (189.7) 0.75 (483.9) 2.98 (1923.8) 457 90 1.476 3.181 3.507 2.205 6.032 6.422
— 1600 6.50 (165.1) 1 0.29 (189.7) 0.81 (524.2) 3.06 (1975.4) 467 84 1.801 4.489 4.837 2.289 5.206 5.687
2500 2000 8.50 (215.9) 1 0.35 (227.7) 1.06 (685.5) 3.38 (2181.9) 421 70 1.087 2.020 2.294 1.764 5.419 3.072
3000 — 4.75 (120.7) 2 0.41 (265.8) 1.19 (766.1) 3.56 (2290.0) 376 66 0.984 1.874 2.117 1.470 4.631 4.859
3200 — 5.50 (139.7) 2 0.59 (380.0) 1.38 (887.1) 3.80 (2453.9) 277 60 0.947 1.691 1.938 1.378 4.129 4.353
4000 2500,3000,3200 6.50 (165.1) 2 0.59 (380.0) 1.63 (1048.4) 4.12 (2660.3) 296 54 0.773 1.500 1.688 1.323 3.060 3.334
5000 4000 8.50 (215.9) 2 0.71 (456.1) 2.13 (1371.0) 4.76 (3073.2) 278 50 0.606 1.218 1.360 0.882 1.783 1.989
Note: Bus bar thickness = .25 in. (6.4mm), Ground bar thickness = .125 in.(3.18mm)
UL Short Circuit Ratings UL Series Connected with Fuse Sentron Busway has UL
Maximum Fuse Size for 200kA approved Series Ratings. By
RMS Symmetrical (kA) RMS Symmetrical Rating using the appropriate line side
Ampere Rating 6 cycle 1 sec. 3 sec. Class R Class J & T Class L fuse, short circuit ratings can be
AL L-Rated enhanced to 200kA for lower
225 — 85 28 16 600 600 J&T —
400 — 85 28 16 600 600 J&T — amperage busway.
600 — 85 28 16 600 600 J&T —
800 400 100 47 27 — 800 T 1200
1000 600 100 50 29 — — 3000
1200 800 125 60 35 — — 3000
1350 1000 150 75 43 — — 3000
1600 1200 150 90 52 — — 3000
2000 1350,1600 150 110 64 — — 5000
2500 2000 200 130 75 — — 5000
3000 2500 200 160 92 — — —
3200 2000 200 160 92 — — —
4000 3000,3200 200 200 115 — — —
CU M-Rated
225 — 85 40 23 600 600 J&T —
400 — 85 40 23 600 600 J&T —
600 — 85 40 23 600 600 J&T —
800 400 85 40 23 — 800 T 1600
1000 — 100 50 29 — — 3000
1200 600 100 65 38 — — 3000
1350 800 100 80 46 — — 3000
1600 1000 125 95 55 — — 4000
2000 1200,1350 150 115 66 — — 5000
— 1600 150 90 52 — — 3000
2500 2000 150 130 75 — — 5000
3000 — 200 175 101 — — —
3200 — 200 175 101 — — —
4000 2500,3000,3200 200 200 115 — — —
5000 4000 200 200 115 — — —

Straight Sections – Plug-In, One-Sided Plug-In and Feeder Selection
Straight Sections (indoor) and IP55 (splash proof) are IP 2X rated (with the outlet cover
Sentron Busway can be ordered with requirements. One joint stack assembly open) which means a .472 in. (12mm) or
Aluminum or Copper bus bars. is provided with each plug-in section. larger probe is unable to enter a plug-in
Aluminum bars are available in 225-4000 One-Sided Plug-In Sections outlet. The outlet is IP40 Rated with the
ampere sections. Copper bars are cover closed and IP55 Rated when
Sentron one-sided plug-in sections are
available in 225-5000 ampere sections. configured with gaskets.
designed with plug-in openings centered
Sentron Busway includes an integral on 24 in. (610mm) intervals on one side Feeder Sections
housing ground, and is available with an of the busway only. This eliminates Feeder busway carries the current of the
internal ground bar or an isolated ground unusable plug-in outlets in vertical busway system from the supply source.
bar in all ampere ratings. Sentron applications. Riser busway is available Feeder busway does not have plug-in
Busway housing is a four-piece in standard lengths of 4 ft. (1.22m), 6 ft. outlets. Sentron Feeder busway is
aluminum design. (1.83m), 8 ft. (2.44m) and 10 ft. (3.05m). available in custom lengths from 2 ft.
13
Plug-In Sections Sentron Riser Busway is available in (.61m) to 10 ft. (3.05m). Feeder sections
Sentron plug-in sections are designed IP40 (indoor) and IP55 (splash proof). are rated as IP40 (Indoor), IP55 (Splash
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
with plug-in openings centered on 24 in. One joint stack assembly is provided Proof), NEMA 3R (Outdoor), and IP66
(610mm) intervals, and are located on with each riser section. (International Outdoor). One joint stack
both sides of the busway for optimum Plug-In Outlet Features assembly is provided with each feeder
utilization. Plug-in sections are available section.
The plug-in outlet molded guard design
in standard lengths of 4 ft. (1.22m), 6 ft. prevents incidental finger contact with
(1.83m), 8 ft. (2.44m) and 10 ft. (3.05m). live conductors. Sentron plug-in outlets
Sentron plug-in sections meet IP40
Standard Plug-In Section (Standard plug-in outlets on both sides on 24 in. centers)
Suffix PL04 (4 ft.), PL06 (6 ft.), PL08 (8 ft.), PL10 (10 ft.)
Standard One-Sided Plug-In Section (Standard Plug-In outlets on one side on 24 in. centers)
Suffix RI04 (4 ft.), RI06 (6 ft.), RI08 (8 ft.), RI10 (10 ft.)
Standard Feeder Section

Suffix F024 - 120 (last 3 digits = length in Inches, 024=24 in., 120=120 in.)

Selection
Sentron Busway, Widths and Weights
Approximate Weight - lbs per ft. (kg per meter)
3Ø, 4-Wire
3Ø, 3-Wire 3Ø, 4-Wire 3Ø, 4-Wire 200% Neutral
Dimension with Internal with Internal 200% with Internal
Ampere Rating Inches (mm) 3Ø, 3-Wire Ground 3Ø, 4-Wire Ground Neutral Ground
AL L-Rated
225 — “W1” 3.9 (99) 5 (8) 5 (8) 6 (9) 6 (9) 7 (10) 7 (10)
400 — “W1” 3.9 (99) 5 (8) 5 (8) 6 (9) 6 (9) 7 (10) 7 (10)
600 — “W1” 3.9 (99) 5 (8) 5 (8) 6 (9) 6 (9) 7 (10) 7 (10)
800 400 “W1” 4.6 (117) 6 (9) 6 (9) 7 (10) 7 (10) 7 (11) 8 (11)
1000 600 “W1” 5.4 (137) 7 (10) 7 (11) 8 (12) 8 (12) 9 (13) 9 (14)
1200 800 “W1” 6.6 (168) 8 (12) 9 (13) 9 (14) 10 (15) 11 (16) 11 (17)
1350 1000 “W1” 7.6 (193) 9 (13) 10 (15) 11 (16) 11 (17) 12 (18) 13 (19)
1600 1200 “W1” 8.7 (221) 10 (15) 11 (17) 12 (18) 13 (19) 14 (21) 15 (22)
13
2000 1250,1600 “W1” 10.9 (277) 13 (19) 14 (21) 15 (23) 16 (24) 18 (26) 19 (28)
2500 2000 “W2” 13.7 (348) 15 (22) 17 (25) 18 (27) 20 (30) 22 (33) 23 (34)
3000 2500 “W2” 15.8 (402) 17 (25) 19 (28) 21 (31) 23 (34) 25 (37) 27 (40)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
3200 2000 “W2” 17.3 (439) 18 (27) 20 (30) 23 (34) 25 (37) 27 (40) 29 (43)
4000 3000,3200 “W2” 20.3 (516) 22 (33) 25 (37) 27 (40) 30 (44) 32 (48) 35 (52)
CU M-Rated
225 — “W1” 3.9 (99) 9 (13) 10 (14) 10 (16) 11 (17) 12 (18) 13 (19)
400 — “W1” 3.9 (99) 9 (13) 10 (14) 10 (16) 11 (17) 12 (18) 13 (19)
600 — “W1” 3.9 (99) 9 (13) 10 (14) 10 (16) 11 (17) 12 (18) 13 (19)
800 400 “W1” 3.9 (99) 9 (13) 10 (14) 10 (16) 11 (17) 12 (18) 13 (19)
1000 — “W1” 4.4 (112) 10 (15) 11 (17) 12 (19) 14 (20) 15 (22) 16 (23)
1200 600 “W1” 5.1 (130) 12 (18) 14 (20) 15 (23) 16 (24) 18 (26) 19 (29)
1350 800 “W1” 5.7 (145) 14 (21) 16 (24) 17 (26) 19 (29) 21 (31) 23 (34)
1600 1000 “W1” 6.7 (170) 17 (26) 19 (29) 22 (32) 24 (35) 26 (38) 28 (42)
2000 1200,1350 “W1” 8.2 (208) 22 (32) 25 (37) 28 (41) 30 (45) 33 (50) 36 (54)
— 1600 “W1” 8.7 (277) 13 (19) 14 (21) 15 (23) 16 (24) 18 (26) 19 (28)
2500 2000 “W1” 10.7 (272) 30 (44) 34 (50) 38 (56) 42 (62) 46 (68) 50 (74)
3000 — “W2” 11.8 (300) 33 (49) 37 (55) 42 (63) 47 (70) 51 (76) 56 (83)
3200 — “W2” 13.3 (335) 37 (55) 2 (63) 48 (72) 53 (79) 58 (86) 64 (95)
4000 2500,3000,3200 “W2” 15.3 (389) 43 (64) 50 (75) 56 (83) 62 (92) 68 (101) 75 (112)
5000 4000 “W2” 19.3 (491) 56 (83) 64 (95) 72 (107) 80 (119) 89 (132) 97 (145)

Sentron® Straight Section Busway
Copper (225-5000 Ampere) and Aluminum (225-4000 Ampere) Selection
Copper (225 - 5000Ampere)
Base Catalog Number Guide
4-Pole 200% 4-Pole 200%
3-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole Neutral 4-Pole Neutral
Internal Isolated 4-Pole 200% Internal Internal Isolated Isolated
Ampere 3-Pole Ground Ground 4- Pole Neutral Ground Ground Ground Ground
225 SX302C1 SX302C2 SX302C3 SX402C1 SX502C1 SX402C2 SX502C2 SX402C3 SX502C3
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Aluminum (225 - 4000Ampere)

Base Catalog Number Guide
4-Pole 200% 4-Pole 200%
3-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole Neutral 4-Pole Neutral
Internal Isolated 4-Pole 200% Internal Internal Isolated Isolated
Ampere 3-Pole Ground Ground 4- Pole Neutral Ground Ground Ground Ground
225 SX302A1 SX302A2 SX302A3 SX402A1 SX502A1 SX402A2 SX502A2 SX402A3 SX502A3
Suffix Numbers
Base Catalog Number Suffix
Busway Type IP40 IP55 IP66 Nema 3R
Feeder 0F 4F 6F 9F
Plug-in 0P 4P — —
One-sided Plug-in 0R 4R — —

Elbows Selection
Sentron Busway elbows provide a simple and
convenient method of changing the direction (left,
right, up or down) of a busway run. Two elbow styles
are offered: elbow stack and elbow section.
Flatwise Elbow Stacks, Dimensions (standard/min.) Flatwise Elbow Stacks

Dimensions Inches (mm)
Ampere Rating “A”
Flatwise elbow stacks are used for left and right directional
AL L-Rated changes. When the busway system is mounted flatwise in the
225 — 1.00 (25) horizontal plane (bus bars run parallel to the floor).
400 — 1.00 (25)
600 — 1.00 (25) Flat
800 400 1.12 (28
1000 600 2.00 (51) Suffix ESFR/ESFL
1200 800 2.50 (64)
13
1350 1000 3.00 (76)
1600 1200 3.50 (89)
2000 1350,1600 4.62 (117)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
2500 2000 5.75 (146)
3000 2500 7.00 (178)
3200 2000 7.75 (197)
4000 3000,3200 9.35 (237)
CU M-Rated
225 — 1.00 (25)
400 — 1.00 (25)
600 — 1.00 (25)
800 400 1.00 (25)
1000 — 1.12 (28)
1200 600 1.25 (33)
1350 800 2.00 (50)
1600 1000 2.50 (64)
2000 1200,1350 3.25 (83)
— 1600 4.62 (117)
2500 2000 4.50 (114)
3000 — 5.00 (127)
3200 — 5.75 (146)
4000 2500,3000,3200 6.75 (171)
5000 4000 8.87 (225)
Note: Flatwise elbow stacks can be ordered as either right-hand (ESFR)
or left-hand (ESFL) to follow the same nomenclature as an elbow section.
The construction is identical and interchangeable.
Edgewise Elbow Stacks, Dimensions (standard/min.) Edgewise Elbow Stacks

Edgewise elbow stacks create up and down directional changes.
AL L-Rated The “A” phase is on the inside of the bend for edge up elbow
225 — 4.25 (108) stacks. The “A” phase is on the outside of the bend for edge down
400 — 4.25 (108) elbow stacks.
600 — 4.25 (108)
800 400 4.25 (108)
1000 600 4.25 (108)
1200 800 4.25 (108)
1350 1000 4.25 (108)
1600 1200 4.25 (108)
2000 1350,1600 4.25 (108)
2500 2000 4.25 (108)
3000 2500 4.25 (108)
3200 2000 4.25 (108)
CU M-Rated
225 — 4.25 (108)
400 — 4.25 (108)
600 — 4.25 (108)
800 400 4.25 (108)
1000 — 4.25 (108) Edge Down Edge Up
1200 600 4.25 (108) Suffix ESED Suffix ESEU
1350 800 4.25 (108)
1600 1000 4.25 (108)
2000 1200,1350 4.25 (108)
— 1600 4.25 (108)
2500 2000 4.25 (108)
3000 — 4.25 (108)
3200 — 4.25 (108)
4000 2500,3000,3200 4.25 (108)
5000 4000 4.25 (108)
Note: Edge up and edge down elbow stacks are not interchangeable.

Elbows Selection
Flatwise Elbow Sections, Dimensions (standard/min.) Flatwise Elbow Sections
Ampere Rating “A” ”B”
Flatwise elbow sections are used for left and right directional
AL L-Rated changes when the busway system is mounted in the horizontal plane
225 — 12 (305) 12 (305) (bus bars run parallel to the floor). The joint stack assembly may be
400 — 12 (305) 12 (305) moved to the opposite leg to change the orientation from left to
600 — 12 (305) 12 (305)
800 400 12 (305) 12 (305) right/right to left.
1000 600 12(305) 12 (305)
1200 800 12 (305) 12 (305)
Flat Left
1350 1000 12 (305) 12 (305) Suffix ELEF
1600 1200 18 (457) 18 (457)
2000 1350,1600 18 (457) 18 (457)
2500 2000 18 (457) 18 (457)
3000 2500 18 (457) 18 (457)
3200 2000 18 (457) 18 (457)
13
4000 3000,3200 24 (610) 24 (610)

CU M-Rated
225 — 12 (305) 12 (305)
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
400 — 12 (305) 12 (305)

600 — 12 (305) 12 (305)
800 400 12 (305) 12 (305)
1000 — 12 (305) 12 (305)
Flat Right
1200 600 12 (305) 12 (305)
1350 800 12 (305) 12 (305) Suffix ELFR
1600 1000 12 (305) 12 (305)
2000 1200,1350 12 (305) 12 (305)
— 1600 18 (457) 18 (457)
2500 2000 18 (457) 18 (457)
3000 — 18 (457) 18 (457)
3200 — 18 (457) 18 (457)
4000 2500,3000,3200 18 (457) 18 (457)
5000 4000 24 (610) 24 (610)
Edgewise Elbow Sections, Dimensions (standard/min.) Edgewise Elbow Sections

Edgewise elbow sections create up and down directional changes.
AL L-Rated The “A”phase bus bar lies on the inside of the bend for edge up
225 — 10 (254) 10 (254) elbows. The “A” phase bus bar lies on the outside of the bend for
400 — 10 (254) 10 (254) edge down elbows. The joint stack assembly on edgewise elbows
600 — 10 (254) 10 (254)
800 400 10 (254) 10 (254) can not be moved in order to change orientation from up to
1000 600 10 (254) 10 (254) down/down to up. Sentron Busway elbow sections are shipped with
1200 800 10 (254) 10 (254) a joint stack assembly on one end for direct connection to the
1350 1000 10 (254) 10 (254)
1600 1200 10 (254) 10 (254) busway system.
2000 1350,1600 10 (254) 10 (254)
2500 2000 10 (254) 10 (254) Edge Up Edge Down
3000 2500 10 (254) 10 (254) Suffix ELEU Suffix ELED
3200 2000 10 (254) 10 (254)
4000 3000,3200 10 (254) 10 (254)
CU M-Rated
225 — 10 (254) 10 (254)
400 — 10 (254) 10 (254)
600 — 10 (254) 10 (254)
800 400 10 (254) 10 (254)
1000 — 10 (254) 10 (254)
1200 600 10 (254) 10 (254)
1350 800 10 (254) 10 (254)
1600 1000 10 (254) 10 (254)
2000 1200,1350 10 (254) 10 (254)
— 1600 10 (254) 10 (254)
2500 2000 10 (254) 10 (254)
3000 — 10 (254) 10 (254)
3200 — 10 (254) 10 (254)
4000 2500,3000,3200 10 (254) 10 (254)
5000 4000 10 (254) 10 (254)
Note : Odd angle elbow flatwise and edgewise elbow sections are available
for angles 95° - 175° in 5° increments.

Offsets Selection
Offsets can be utilized to solve difficult contour
problems and save space. In applications where space
does not allow for two connected elbows, a single
offset can bypass an obstruction. All offsets are
supplied with one joint stack assembly.
Flatwise Offsets, Dimensions (standard/min.) Flat Right

Suffix OFFR
Ampere Rating *“A” ”B” ”C”
AL L-Rated
225 — 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
400 — 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
600 — 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
800 400 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
13
1000 600 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
1200 800 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
1350 1000 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
1600 1200 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
2000 1350,1600 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
2500 2000 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
3000 2500 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
3200 2000 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
4000 3000,3200 24 (610) 8 (203) 24 (610)
Flat Left
CU M-Rated
225 — 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305) Suffix OFFL
400 — 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
600 — 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
800 400 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
1000 — 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
1200 600 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
1350 800 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
1600 1000 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
2000 1200,1350 12 (305) 5 (127) 12 (305)
— 1600
2500 2000 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
3000 — 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
3200 — 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
4000 2500,3000,3200 18 (457) 5 (127) 18 (457)
5000 4000 24 (610) 8 (203) 24 (610)
Edgewise Offsets, Dimensions (standard/min.) Edge Up

Dimensions Inches (mm) Suffix OFEU
AL L-Rated
225 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
400 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
600 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
800 400 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1000 600 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1200 800 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1350 1000 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1600 1200 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
2000 1350,1600 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
2500 2000 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
3000 2500 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
3200 2000 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
4000 3000,3200 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
CU M-Rated
225 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254) Edge Down
400 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
600 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254) Suffix OFED
800 400 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1000 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1200 600 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1350 800 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
1600 1000 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
2000 1200,1350 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
— 1600 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
2500 2000 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
3000 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
3200 — 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
4000 2500,3000,3200 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
5000 4000 10 (254) 6 (152) 10 (254)
*Note: Leg Dimensions A and C have been reversed from prior publications.

Combinations Selection
Combinations are used to create edge to flat and flat Flat Right - Edge Up Flat Left - Edge Up
to edge changes in the busway run. One joint stack Suffix CORU Suffix COLU
assembly is shipped with combination.
See drawings for minimum dimensions. Consult
Busway Order Service for information on custom
lengths.
Combinations, Dimensions (standard/min.)

AL L-Rated
225 — 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
400 — 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
13
600 — 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)

800 400 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
1000 600 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
1200 800 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)

1350 1000 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305) Edge Up - Flat Left Edge Up - Flat Right
1600 1200 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457) Suffix COUL Suffix COUR
2000 1350,1600 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457)
2500 2000 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457)
3000 2500 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457)
3200 2000 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457)
4000 3000,3200 10 (254) 16 (406) 24 (610)
CU M-Rated
225 — 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
400 — 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
600 — 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
800 400 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
1000 — 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
1200 600 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
1350 800 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
1600 1000 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
2000 1200,1350 10 (254) 8 (203) 12 (305)
— 1600 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457)
2500 2000 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457)
3000 — 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457) Flat Right - Edge Down Flat Left - Edge Down
3200 — 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457)
4000 2500,3000,3200 10 (254) 12 (305) 18 (457) Suffix CORD Suffix COLD
5000 4000 10 (254) 16 (406) 24 (610)
*Note: Leg Dimensions A and C have been reversed from prior publications.
Edge Down - Flat Left Edge Down - Flat Right

Suffix CODL Suffix CODR

Tees Selection
Tees are used to simplify directional and plane
orientation changes in a busway system. Tees can
make 90° bends left or right, and up and down along
the busway run. All tees are supplied with two joint
stack assemblies.
Flatwise Tees, Dimensions (standard/min.) Flatwise Tees

Dimensions Inches (mm) Flatwise tees are used to create left and right branches.
Ampere Rating “A”, ”B”, ”C”
AL L-Rated Flat Right
225 — 12 (305)
400 — 12 (305) Suffix TEFR
600 — 12 (305)
800 400 12 (305)
13
1000 600 12 (305)
1200 800 12 (305)
1350 1000 12 (305)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
1600 1200 18 (457)
2000 1350,1600 18 (457)
2500 2000 18 (457)
3000 2500 18 (457)
3200 2000 18 (457)
4000 3000,3200 24 (610)
CU M-Rated
225 — 12 (305) Flat Left
400 — 12 (305)
600 — 12 (305) Suffix TEFL
800 400 12 (305)
1000 — 12 (305)
1200 600 12 (305)
1350 800 12 (305)
1600 1000 12 (305)
2000 1200,1350 12 (305)
— 1600 18 (457)
2500 2000 18 (457)
3000 — 18 (457)
3200 — 18 (457)
4000 2500,3000,3200 18 (457)
5000 4000 24 (610)
Edgewise Tees, Dimensions (standard/min.) Edgewise Tees

Dimensions Inches (mm) Edgewise tees are used to create branches that stem up or down
Ampere Rating “D”
AL L-Rated
from the busway run.
225 — 13 (330)
Edge Up Edge Down
400 — 13 (330)
600 — 13 (330) Suffix TEEU Suffix TEED
800 400 13 (330)
1000 600 13 (330)
1200 800 18 (457)
1350 1000 18 (457)
1600 1200 18 (457)
2000 1350,1600 18 (457)
2500 2000 27 (686)
3000 2500 27 (686)
3200 2000 27 (686)
4000 3000,3200 29 (737)
a
CU M-Rated
225 — 13 (330)
400 — 13 (330)
600 — 13 (330)
800 400 13 (330)
1000 — 13 (330)
1200 600 13 (330)
1350 800 13 (330)
1600 1000 18 (457)
2000 1200,1350 18 (457)
— 1600 18 (457)
2500 2000 18 (457)
3000 — 27 (686)
3200 — 27 (686)
4000 2500,3000,3200 27 (686)
5000 4000 29 (737)
a 12.0" (305mm) For Isolated Ground.

End Tap Boxes Selection
End tap boxes are non-fusible devices used to connect cable and conduit to the end of a
busway run or where busway runs connect without the need for over-current protection. End
tap boxes may be installed at the end or beginning of a run. Vertical end tap boxes and
horizontal end tap boxes can be installed in both horizontal and vertical applications. Extended
end tap boxes are available if the application requires additional wire bending space. One joint
stack assembly is shipped with each end tap box.
Standard and Extended Horizontal End Tap Boxes, Dimensions Horizontal End Tap Box
Cable Lugs Suffix ETHS (Standard)
Dimensions Inches (mm) Wire Bend Space Per Phase & Neutral Ground
Suffix ETHX (Extended)
Ampere Rating “A” “B” Std. “B” Ext. “C” Std. “C” Ext. Qty. Size Lugsa
AL L-Rated
225 — 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 a 1
400 — 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
13
600 — 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 2 b 1

800 400 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 3 b 1
1000 600 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 4 b 1
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
1200 800 18 (457) 32 (813) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1

1350 1000 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1600 1200 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
2000 1350,1600 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
2500 2000 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 8 b 2
3000 2500 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
3200 2000 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
4000 3000,3200 29 (737) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 12 b 3
CU M-Rated
225 — 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 a 1
400 — 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
600 — 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 2 b 1
800 400 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 3 b 1
1000 — 13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863) 17 (432) 21 (533) 4 b 1
1200 600 13 (330) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1350 800 13 (330) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1600 1000 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 5 b 1
2000 1200,1350 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
— 1600 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 5 b 1
2500 2000 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 8 b 2
3000 — 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
3200 — 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
4000 2500,3000,3200 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 12 b 3
5000 4000 29 (737) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 15 b 4
Standard and Extended Vertical End Tap Boxes, Dimensions Vertical End Tap Box
Cable Lugs
Suffix ETVS (Standard)
Dimensions Inches (mm) Wire Bend Space Per Phase & Neutral Ground
Ampere Rating “A” “B” Std. “B” Ext. “C” Std. “C” Ext. Qty. Size Lugsa Suffix ETVX (Extended)
AL L-Rated
225 — 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 a 1
400 — 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
600 — 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 2 b 1
800 400 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 3 b 1
1000 600 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 4 b 1
1200 800 18 (457) 32 (813) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1350 1000 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1600 1200 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
2000 1350,1600 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
2500 2000 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 8 b 2
3000 2500 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
3200 2000 29 (737) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
4000 3000,3200 29 (737) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 12 b 3
CU M-Rated
225 — 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 a 1
400 — 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
600 — 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 2 b 1
800 400 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 3 b 1
1000 — 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 4 b 1
1200 600 13 (330) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1350 800 13 (330) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1600 1000 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 5 b 1
2000 1200,1350 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
— 1600 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 5 b 1
2500 2000 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 8 b 2
3000 — 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
3200 — 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
4000 2500,3000,3200 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 12 b 3
5000 4000 29 (737) 28 (711) 32 (813) 20 (508) 24 (610) 15 b 4
a #6 AWG -350 kcmil, Cu/AI. b #4 AWG -600 kcmil, Cu/AI. c 24.0" (610mm) for isolated ground.

Center Tap Boxes Selection
Center tap boxes are non-fusible devices utilized to feed to or take off power from the busway
run. When loads served by the busway run do not require over-current protection, center tap
boxes may be used. If the application requires additional wiring bending space, extended
center tap boxes are available. One joint stack assembly is provided with each center tap box.
Standard and Extended Center End Tap Boxes, Dimensions

Cable Lugs
Per Phase &
Dimensions Inches (mm) Wire Bend Space Neutral Ground
Ampere Rating “A”Std. “B” “D” “A” Ext.. “C” Std. “C” Ext. Qty. Size Lugsa
AL L-Rated
225 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 a 1
225 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
400 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
13
600 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 2 b 1
800 400 25 (635) 16 (406) 4.2 (107) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 3 b 1
1000 600 25 (635) 16 (406) 4.6 (117) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 4 b 1
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
1200 800 29 (737) 16 (406) 5.2 (132) 33 (838) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1350 1000 29 (737) 16 (406) 5.7 (145) 33 (838) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4 b 1
1600 1200 33 (838) 20 (508) 6.3 (160) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 5 b 1
2000 1350,1600 33 (838) 20 (508) 7.4 (188) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
2500 2000 37 (940) 24 (610) 8.7 (221) 41 (1041) 20 (508) 24 (610) 8 b 2
3000 2500 37 (940) 24 (610) 9.7 (246) 41 (1041) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
3200 2000 37 (940) 24 (610) 9.7 (246) 41 (1041) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
4000 3000,3200 45 (1143) 28 (711) 11.9 (302) 49 (1245) 20 (508) 24 (610) 12 b 3
CU M-Rated
225 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
400 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1 b 1
600 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 2 b 1
800 400 25 (635) 16 (406) 4.2 (107) 29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 3 b 1
1000 — 25 (635) 16 (406) 4.2 (107) 29 (737) 18 (457) 22 (559) 4 b 1
1200 600 29 (737) 16 (406) 4.5 (114) 33 (838) 22 (559) 26 (660) 4 b 1
1350 800 29 (737) 16 (406) 4.8 (122) 33 (838) 21 (533) 25 (635) 4 b 1
1600 1000 29 (737) 20 (508) 5.3 (135) 33 (838) 21 (533) 25 (635) 5 b 1
2000 1200,1350 29 (737) 20 (508) 6.1 (155) 33 (838) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6 b 2
— 1600 33 (838) 20 (508) 6.3 (160) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 5 b 1
2500 2000 33 (838) 24 (610) 7.3 (185) 37 (940) 23 (584) 17 (432) 8 b 2
3000 — 33 (838) 24 (610) 7.9 (201) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
3200 — 33 (838) 24 (610) 7.9 (201) 37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9 b 2
4000 2500,3000,
3200 37 (940) 28 (711) 9.4 (239) 41 (1041) 20 (508) 24 (610) 12 b 3
5000 4000 40(1016) 34 (863) 11.7(297) 44 (1118) 19 (483) 23 (584) 15 b 4
Center Tap Box

Suffix CTBS (Standard)
Suffix CTBX (Extended)
a #6 AWG -350 kcmil, Cu/AI.

b #4 AWG -600 kcmil, Cu/AI.
c 24.0" (610mm) for isolated ground.

Joint Mounted Tap Boxes Selection
The joint mounted tap box (JMTB) is NEC 240.21(B)a. The small footprint is
used to tap off power via the busway ideal for space limited applications. The
joint. This device does not provide JMTB is compatible with Power Mod,
over-current protection and therefore, Lighting Panels, Power Panels, and
must be installed in compliance with Switchboards 1200A and lower.
Horizontal Orientation JMTB

Product Features
5.00"
BUSWAY "W"
b Lug Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal
b Maximum Voltage: 600V
DEPTH BUSWAY WIDTH
5.3" 5.0"
EXIT BUSWAY DEPTH
16.5"
b Maximum UL Short Circuit Rating:

OVERALL DEPTH
5.3"
EXIT
150kAb
13
b Amperage Range: 100- 1200A

ACCESS PANEL
LOCKING PROVISION
b Lug Type: Compression Only

BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
ON 18.0" 18.0"
I
CT CENTERED CENTERED
RE
DI ON JOINT ON JOINT
G
LU
"A" LENGTH
JOINT -
36" MINIMUM
120" MAXIMUM ACCESS PANEL
25.0" 25.0"
BUSWAY TO END OF COVER BUSWAY TO END OF COVER
"B" LENGTH
JOINT -
18" MINIMUM "W"
BUSWAY WIDTH STD 4.0"
FLUSH 2.5"
BUSWAY
TO REAR
OF JMTB
NC
BA
Vertical Orientation JMTB
Configuration Types Compression Lugs

Given a vertical bus run, the JMTB can The JMTB requires compression lugs,
5.0" "W"
BUSWAY BUSWAY
DEPTH WIDTH
16.5"
OVERALL DEPTH be configured such that it is on the which aid in minimizing product size.
15.3"
BOX DEPTH
Left, Right, or Both sides. The JMTB The JMTB is shipped with UL listed
BUSWAY is shipped from the factory installed on crimp type compression lugs, which are
the busway. sized to the amperage of the load side
SECTION 2
ACCESS PANEL
When installed on vertical busway, the device.
LUG "A" LENGTH
lug orientation matches the orientation Should additional lugs be required,

DIRECTION (OVERALL)
24.0" 44" MINIMUM
HEIGHT 120" MAXIMUM
18.3"
of the tap box. If using the horizontal please reference the table below.
JMTB the lug orientation will be left/ The JMTB utilizes general purpose
OF JOINT
TO EDGE OF COVER
"B" LENGTH
JOINT -
right, if vertical JMTB it will be up/down. aluminum 2 hole NEMA lugs,
20.0"
BUSWAY SECTION 1
(INCLUDES STD JOINT)
18" MINIMUM The standard JMTB extends 4" beyond compatible with Aluminum and Copper
wire. Homac AL-N series or equivalent
BUSWAY TO
the rear plane of the busway however

EDGE OF COVER
STD 4.0"
OF EXIT OPENINGS IS
5.3 INCHES FROM REAR
FLUSH 2.5"
TO REAT
OF JMTB a flush mount variation is available are recommended.c
OF JMTB
extending 2.5" from the rear of the If housing ground is selected the JMTB
busway. will contain a standard 4-hole NEMA
pattern on a dedicated ground bar. If
Compression Lugs
internal/isolated ground is selected, two
Wire Straight Lug Stacking Lug ground bars will be included, each with
size Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
1/0 AL1/0-NTN ASL1/0-NTN
the standard NEMA 4-hole pattern.
250 AL250-NTN ASL250-NTN
a This device requires compliance with NEC 240.21(B), without overcurrent protection. Main circuit protection b For series ratings reference the short circuit table in the
see 2017 NEC, commonly referred to as the 10ft feeder device is required downsteam. Please reference the Technical Data section.
tap rule. Feeder tap conductors cannot be over 10ft NEC before using this device. c Replacement lugs to be supplied by others.

TBNK Fittings for Joint Mounted Tap Boxes Selection
Horizontal JMTB with TBNK

TBNK flexible fittings
TBNK flexible fittings are a factory installed series of
wireway couplings for use with Sentron Joint Mounted Tap
Boxes (JMTB’s). TBNK fittings provide a nominal 4.25” long
flexible wireway for coupling the JMTB and rigidly mounted
downstream equipment. TBNK fittings allow for expansion
and contraction of the Busway absorbing up to an inch of
movement. Available in 4, 6, and 8-inch sizes, TBNK fittings
are suitable for a wide range of equipment amperages and
13
cabling requirements. TBNK fittings if desired should be
selected when ordering Sentron JMTB’s.
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Installation and Grounding
TBNK flexible fittings must be field installed onto downstream Vertical JMTB with TBNK
equipment. JMTB’s ordered with TBNK fittings include
Installation Instructions and a template for making the
required cut-out in the downstream equipment enclosure.
Location of equipment, cut out and cabling must comply with
applicable standards including NEC, Local Building Codes
and any other authorities having jurisdiction. Consult codes
in advance to assure compliance. The JMTB is shipped from
the factory with a braided copper ground cable riveted onto
the TBNK. During installation, the opposite end of the ground
cable must be connected to the enclosure of the downstream
equipment. The Installation Instructions provide details of the
ground cable installation procedure.
TBNK flexible fittings
Catalogue Maximum
Number Cutout Size Wireway Size Cable Size
TBNK4 3.8”x 3.8” 4”x 4” (16 sq. inch) 900MCM
TBNK6 5.8”x 5.8” 6”x 6” (36 sq. inch) 500MCM
TBNK8 7.8”x 7.8” 8”x 8” (64 sq. inch) 4/0

TBNK Fittings for Joint Mounted Tap Boxes Selection
TBNK4, TBNK6 and TBNK8
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
TBNK cut out pattern

Expansion Fittings Selection
Expansion Fittings, Dimensions (standard/min.) Expansion Fittings
Dimensions Inches (mm) Expansion fittings accommodate for expansion and contraction of a
busway run and building movement. Expansion fittings typically are
AL L-Rated
225 — 13 (330) installed in the center of long busway runs, and at the beginning of
400 — 13 (330) riser runs (within the first 20ft of vertical busway when total vertical
600 — 13 (330) run length is equal to or greater then 40ft) to minimize stress on the
800 400 13 (330)
1000 600 13 (330) lower most device or where a busway run crosses an expansion joint
1200 800 18 (457) of a building.
1350 1000 18 (457)
1600 1200 18 (457) Qty (1) Expansion Section should be used for every 200ft of
2000 1350,1600 18 (457) continuous Busway run length, at every transition to a vertical run, and
2500 2000 23 (584) at each building expansion joint. The Busway run must be positioned
3000 2500 23 (584)
3200 2000 25 (635) accordingly to accommodate the Expansion Section(s).
13
4000 3000,3200 25 (635)
CU M-Rated Expansion Fitting
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
225 — 13 (330) Suffix XPFT
400 — 13 (330)
600 — 13 (330)
800 400 13 (330)
1000 — 13 (330)
1200 600 13 (330)
1350 800 13 (330)
1600 1000 18 (457)
2000 1200,1350 18 (457)
— 1600 18 (457)
2500 2000 18 (457)
3000 — 23 (584)
3200 — 23 (584)
4000 2500,3000,3200 23 (584)
5000 4000 25 (635)
Flush Mount Expansion Fitting

Often useful in riser application, flush mount expansion fittings allow
for the busway to be positioned closer to building walls (reference
page <?> for minimum required clearances). The flush mount design
shifts the centerline of the busway up or down by 5 in. on the 20 in.
height axis shown above.
a 24.0" (610mm) for isolated ground.

Reducers and Phase Rotation Fittings Selection
Fused Reducers, Dimensions (standard/min.) Fused Reducers
Dimensions Inches (mm) The National Electric Code requires over current protection when
busway systems are reduced in ampacity. A fused reducer is used to
AL L-Rated
225 — 11.4 (289) reduce the allowable ampere rating in those sections of the busway
400 — 11.4 (289) that do not require a higher rating (i.e. at branch circuit junctures).
600 — 11.4 (289) Fused Reducer
800 400 11.4 (289)
1000 600 11.4 (289) Suffix RFRF
1200 800 12.5 (318)
1350 1000 13.5 (343)
1600 1200 14.6 (372)
2000 1350,1600 16.9 (429)
2500 2000 19.6 (498)
3000 2500 21.3 (541)
3200 2000 22.9 (582)
13
4000 3000,3200 31.5 (800)

CU M-Rated
225 — 10.4 (264)
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
400 — 10.4 (264)

600 — 10.4 (264)
800 400 10.4 (264)
1000 — 10.4 (264) Non-Fused Reducers
1200 600 11.0 (280)
1350 800 11.6 (296) Non-fused reducers are used in conjunction with the following
1600 1000 12.6 (321) exception to the Fused Reducer in the National Electric Code: “For
2000 1200,1350 14.1 (359)
— 1600 14.6 (372)
industrial establishments only, omission of over current protection
2500 2000 16.6 (423) shall be permitted at points where busways are reduced in ampacity,
3000 — 17.9 (455) provided that the length of the busway having the smaller ampacity
3200 — 18.9 (480) does not exceed 50 ft. and has an ampacity of at least equal to one-
4000 2500,3000,3200 20.9 (531)
5000 4000 31.5 (800)
third the rating or setting of the over current device next back on the
line, and provided that such busway is free from contact with
combustible material.” Special joint stack connections are provided
for non-fused reducer connections. Consult factory for specific design
guidelines.
Phase Rotation Fittings, Dimensions (standard/min.) Phase-Rotation Fittings

Phase-rotation fittings can be used when the application requires a
phase rotation in the power supply. Phase rotation fittings can be
AL L-Rated
225 — 7.9 (200) ordered for “phase and ground”, “phase only” and “ground only”
400 — 7.9 (200) rotations.
600 — 7.9 (200)
800 400 8.5 (216) Phase Rotation Fitting
1000 600 9.4 (239) Suffix TRPG, Phase and Ground
1200 800 10.5 (267) TRPO, Phase Only
1350 1000 11.5 (293)
1600 1200 12.6 (321) TRGO, Ground Only
2000 1350,1600 14.9 (376)
2500 2000 17.6 (447) Phase Rotation Examples
3000 2500 19.8 (503)
3200 2000 21.3 (541)
4000 3000,3200 24.3 (617)
CU M-Rated
225 — 7.9 (200)
400 — 7.9 (200)
600 — 7.9 (200)
800 400 7.9 (200)
1000 — 8.4 (213)
1200 600 9.0 (229)
1350 800 9.6 (245)
1600 1000 10.6 (270)
2000 1200,1350 12.1 (372)
— 1600 12.6 (321)
2500 2000 14.6 (200)
3000 — 15.8 (402)
3200 — 17.3 (439)
4000 2500,3000,3200 19.3 (490)
5000 4000 23.3 (592)

Service Heads Selection
Service Heads are used to connect busway to a service entrance. In the Sentron Busway line, 3 single-phase service heads and
3-phase service head connections are available. The standard service entrance connection is the 3-phase service head which
consists of one service head for all three phases. 3 single-phase service heads consist of three heads – one for each phase and
may be used to meet the requirements of certain applications. To ensure ease of installation of incoming cables, both types of
Sentron service heads are constructed so that the lugs face the Glastic bottom of the box. The Glastic bottom provides
insulation and protection to the incoming cables.
Single-Phase Service Heads, Dimensions (standard/min.) Three Single-Phase Service Heads

Cable Lugs per Suffix V1TX
Dimensions Inches (mm) Phase and Neutral Ground
Ampere Rating Single-Phase “A” Qty. Size Lugsa
AL L-Rated
225 13 (330) 1 a 1
400 225 13 (330) 1 b 1
13
600 — 13 (330) 2 b 1
800 400 13 (330) 3 b 1
1000 600 13 (330) 4 b 1
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
1200 800 18 (457) 4 b 1
1350 1000 18 (457) 4 b 1
1600 1200 18 (457) 5 b 1
2000 1350,1600 20 (508) 6 b 2
2500 2000 27 (686) 8 b 2
3000 2500 29 (737) 9 b 2
3200 2000 29 (737) 9 b 2
4000 3000,3200 29 (737) 12 b 3
CU M-Rated
225 13 (330) 1 a 1
400 13 (330) 1 b 1
600 13 (330) 2 b 1
800 400 13 (330) 3 b 1
1000 — 13 (330) 4 b 1
1200 600 13 (330) 4 b 1
1350 800 13 (330) 4 b 1
1600 1000 18 (457) 5 b 1
2000 1200,1350 20 (508) 6 b 2
— 1600 18 (457) 5 b 1
2500 2000 20 (508) 8 b 2
3000 — 27 (686) 9 b 2
3200 — 27 (686) 9 b 2
4000 2500,3000,3200 27 (686) 12 b 3
5000 4000 29 (737) 15 b 4
Three-Phase Service Heads, Dimensions (standard/min.) Three-Phase Service Head

Cable Lugs per Suffix V3TX
Dimensions Inches (mm) Phase and Neutral Ground
Ampere Rating Three-Phase “B” Qty. Size Lugsa
AL L-Rated
225 13 (330) 1 a 1
400 225 13 (330) 1 b 1
600 — 13 (330) 2 b 1
800 400 13 (330) 3 b 1
1000 600 13 (330) 4 b 1
1200 800 18 (457) 4 b 1
1350 1000 18 (457) 4 b 1
1600 1200 18 (457) 5 b 1
2000 1350,1600 18 (457) 6 b 2
2500 2000 27 (686) 8 b 2
3000 2500 27 (686) 9 b 2
3200 2000 27 (686) 9 b 2
4000 3000,3200 29 (737) 12 b 3
CU M-Rated
225 13 (330) 1 a 1
400 13 (330) 1 b 1
600 13 (330) 2 b 1
800 400 13 (330) 3 b 1
1000 — 13 (330) 4 b 1
1200 600 13 (330) 4 b 1
1350 800 13 (330) 4 b 1
1600 1000 18 (457) 5 b 1
2000 1200,1350 18 (457) 6 b 2
— 1600 18 (457) 5 b 1
2500 2000 18 (457) 8 b 2
3000 — 27 (686) 9 b 2
3200 — 27 (686) 9 b 2
4000 2500,3000,3200 27 (686) 12 b 3
5000 4000 29 (737) 15 b 4
a #6 AWG - 350 kcmil, Cu / Al. b #4 AWG - 600 kcmil, Cu / Al.

Hangers Selection
Trapeze Hanger—Aluminum (AL) and Copper (CU) Trapeze Hanger
“A” Dimensions Flat Mounted A complete offering of hangers is available to support Sentron
Ampere Rating Inches (mm) Catalogue Numbera Busway in both vertical and horizontal applications. Standard
AL L-Rated trapeze hangers support Sentron Busway in horizontal applications
225 — 10.0 (254) SXTH1 on 10 ft. (3.05m) centers. Additional hangers may be used if
400 — 10.0 (254) SXTH1 structural requirements mandate their use. The contractor must
600 — 10.0 (254) SXTH1
800 400 10.0 (254) SXTH1 supply drop rods to complete assembly for trapeze hangers.
1000 600 10.0 (254) SXTH1
1200 800 10.0 (254) SXTH1
1350 1000 13.5 (343) SXTH2
1600 1200 13.5 (343) SXTH2
2000 1350,1600 13.5 (343) SXTH2
2500 2000 13.5 (343) SXTH3
3000 2500 13.5 (343) SXTH3
3200 2000 13.5 (343) SXTH3
13
4000 3000,3200 23.0 (584) SXTH4

CU M-Rated
225 — 10.0 (254) SXTH1
400 — 10.0 (254) SXTH1
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
600 — 10.0 (254) SXTH1

800 400 10.0 (254) SXTH1
1000 — 10.0 (254) SXTH1
1200 600 10.0 (254) SXTH1 Flat Mounted
1350 800 10.0 (254) SXTH1
1600 1000 10.0 (254) SXTH1
2000 1200,1350 13.5 (343) SXTH2
— 1600 13.5 (343) SXTH2
2500 2000 13.5 (343) SXTH2
3000 — 18.5 (470) SXTH3
3200 — 18.5 (470) SXTH3
4000 2500,3000,3200 18.5 (470) SXTH3
5000 4000 23.0 (584) SXTH4
a Use SXTH1 for Edge Mounted.
Spring Hanger—Aluminum (AL) and Copper (CU)b

Floor to Ceiling Height (ft.) Edge Mounted
Ampere Rating 10 12 14 16 18
AL L-Rated Spring Hanger
225 — SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4
Spring hangers and floor support hangers must
600 — SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 be used to provide secure mounting of the
800 400 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH6 SXSH6 busway run in vertical applications. Spring
1000 600 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH6 SXSH6 hangers support the weight of the busway on
1200 800 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH6 SXSH6 each floor and also compensate for minimal
1350 1000 SXSH4 SXSH4 SXSH6 SXSH6 SXSH6 building movement and thermal expansion.
1600 1200 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH8
1350,1600
Maximum distance between spring hangers
2000 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH8
2500 2000 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH10 SXSH10 may not exceed 16 ft. (4.88m). When ordering
3000 2500 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH10 SXSH10 SXSH10 18 ft. (5.49m) floor to ceiling height assemblies,
3200 2000 SXSH8 SXSH8 SXSH10 SXSH10 SXSH10 intermediate support hangers are necessary.
4000 3000,3200 SXSH8 SXSH10 SXSH10 SXSH10 SXSH12
CU M-Rated
2000 1200,1350 SXSH8 SXSH10 SXSH10 SXSH10 SXSH12
3000 — SXSH10 SXSH12 SXSH12 SXSH14 SXSH14 *
3200 — SXSH12 SXSH12 SXSH14 SXSH14 SXSH12 +
1.25" Preloadb
4000 2500, SXSH12 SXSH14 SXSH14 SXSH16b SXSH14 +
3000, 3200 1.25" Preloadb
5000 4000 SXSH14 SXSH12 + SXSH14 + SXSH16 + SXSH16 +
1.25" Preloadb 1.25" Preloadb 1.25" Preloadb 1.5" Preloadb
Assuming 3P4W busway with no additional busway-supported weight per floor. This information is confirmed
during the quotation process, for additional information please contact your local Siemens Sales representative.
*Note: Flanges do not offer support to the busway. Flanges provide
a means of covering the hole created in the existing structure.

Hangers Selection
Structural Steel Hanger
Structural Steel Hanger, Dimensions and Catalog Numbers
“A” Dimensions Catalogue A complete offering of hangers is available to support Sentron Busway in
Ampere Rating Inches (mm) Number both vertical and horizontal applications. Structural Steel hangers support
AL L-Rated Sentron Busway in horizontal applications on 10 ft. (3.05m) centers.
225 — 10.0 (254) SXSS1
400 — 10.0 (254) SXSS1
Additional hangers may be used if structural requirements mandate their
600 — 10.0 (254) SXSS1 use.
800 400 10.0 (254) SXSS1
1000 600 10.0 (254) SXSS1
1200 800 10.0 (254) SXSS1
1350 1000 13.5 (343) SXSS2
1600 1200 13.5 (343) SXSS2
2000 1350,1600 13.5 (343) SXSS2
2500 2000 18.5 (470) SXSS3
3000 2500 18.5 (470) SXSS3
3200 2000 18.5 (470) SXSS3
13
4000 3000,3200 23.0 (584) SXSS4
CU M-Rated
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
225 — 10.0 (254) SXSS1
400 — 10.0 (254) SXSS1
600 — 10.0 (254) SXSS1
800 400 10.0 (254) SXSS1
1000 — 10.0 (254) SXSS1
1200 600 10.0 (254) SXSS1
1350 800 10.0 (254) SXSS1
1600 1000 10.0 (254) SXSS1
2000 1200,1350 13.5 (343) SXSS2
— 1600 13.5 (343) SXSS2
2500 2000 13.5 (343) SXSS2
3000 — 13.5 (343) SXSS2
3200 — 13.5 (343) SXSS2
4000 2500,3000,3200 13.5 (343) SXSS2
5000 4000 23.0 (584) SXSS4
Single Drop Rod Hanger, Catalog Numbers Single Drop Rod Hanger
Ampere Rating Catalog Number A complete offering of hangers is available to support Sentron Busway in
AL L-Rated both vertical and horizontal applications. Single drop rod hangers support
225 — SXDRA1
400 — SXDRA1 Sentron Busway in horizontal applications on 10 ft. (3.05m) centers.
600 — SXDRA1 Additional hangers may be used if structural requirements mandate their
800 400 SXDRA2 use. The contractor must supply drop rods to complete assembly for single
1000 600 SXDRA3 drop rod hangers.
1200 800 SXDRA4
1350 1000 SXDRA5
1600 1200 SXDRA6
2000 1350,1600 SXDRA7
2500 2000 —
3000 2500 —
3200 2000 —
4000 3000,3200 —
CU M-Rated
225 — SXDRC1
400 — SXDRC1
600 — SXDRC1
800 400 SXDRC1
1000 — SXDRC2
1200 600 SXDRC3
1350 800 SXDRC4
1600 1000 SXDRC5
2000 1200,1350 SXDRC6
— 1600 SXDRC6
2500 2000 SXDRC7
3000 — —
3200 — — Note: Drop rod hangers can only be used when
4000 2500,3000,3200 —
5000 4000 — phase arrows are pointing up.

Hangers and End Closers Selection
Wall Mounted Hanger, Dimensions and Catalog Numbers Wall Mounted Hanger
Dimensions Inches (mm) Catalogue Wall Mounted Hangers are used for horizontal
Ampere Rating “A” ”B” ”C” Number
applications close to a wall. The busway can be mounted
AL L-Rated
225 — 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1 either edgewise or flatwise to the wall.
400 — 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1
600 — 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1 Wall Mounted Hanger ensures the minimum clearance
800 400 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 3.8 (97) SXWH1 between the wall and the busway run.
1000 600 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 3.8 (97) SXWH1
1200 800 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 2.8 (72) SXWH1
1350 1000 16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 4.4 (111) SXWH2
1600 1200 16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 3.9 (98) SXWH2
2000 1350,1600 16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 2.8 (70) SXWH2
2500 2000 20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 3.6 (92) SXWH3
3000 2500 20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 2.5 (64) SXWH3
3200 2000 20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 1.8 (46) SXWH3
13
4000 3000,3200 25.3 (641) 12.6 (321) 2.5 (64) SXWH4

CU M-Rated
225 — 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
400 — 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1

600 — 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1
800 400 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 3.8 (97) SXWH1
1000 — 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 3.8 (97) SXWH1
1200 600 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 2.8 (72) SXWH1
1350 800 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 2.8 (72) SXWH1
1600 1000 12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 2.8 (72) SXWH1
2000 1200,1350 16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 4.4 (111) SXWH2
— 1600 16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 3.9 (98) SXWH2
2500 2000 16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 2.8 (70) SXWH2
3000 — 20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 3.6 (92) SXWH3
3200 — 20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 2.5 (64) SXWH3
4000 2500,3000,3200 20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 1.8 (46) SXWH3
5000 4000 25.3 (641) 12.6 (321) 2.5 (64) SXWH4
End Closers
End closers safely terminate a busway run and protect the
bus bar ends. End closers may be removed easily in order
to extend a busway run. End closers are shipped with
Glastic insulation pieces, however, joint stacks and
inspection covers are not included.
End Closers
(Joint stack and covers not included)
Suffix ECLS

Roof, Wall, Ceiling and Floor Flanges Selection
Roof, wall, ceiling and floor flanges are available for Sentron created in the existing structure. Additional sealant may be
Busway. When the busway run passes thorough a roof, wall or required to meet fire codes and all other local requirements. No
ceiling, a flange should be used. Flanges do not offer support caulking or gasketing is provided with Sentron flanges.
to the busway. Flanges provide a means of covering the hole
Roof Flanges, Dimensions Roof Flanges

Roof flanges are available for Sentron Busway. When the busway run passes
AL L-Rated
through a roof, a flange should be used. Flanges do not offer support to the
225 — 12 (305) 18 (457) busway. Flanges provide a means of covering the hole created in the existing
400 — 12 (305) 18 (457) structure. Additional sealant may be required to meet fire codes and all other
600 — 12 (305) 18 (457) local requirements. No caulking or gasketing is provided with Sentron flanges.
800 400 12 (305) 18 (457)
1000 600 12 (305) 18 (457)
Roof flanges provide a watertight seal for use with NEMA 3R and IP66 rated
1200 800 12 (305) 18 (457) busway. Roof pitch must be indicated on drawings when ordering roof flanges.
13
1350 1000 16 (406) 22 (559)
1600 1200 16 (406) 22 (559)
2000 1350,1600 16 (406) 22 (559) Roof Flanges
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
2500 2000 20.5 (521) 22 (559) Suffix GRFL
3000 2500 20.5 (521) 26.5 (673)
3200 2000 20.5 (521) 26.5 (673)
4000 3000,3200 25 (635) 31 (787)
CU M-Rated
225 — 12 (305) 18 (457)
400 — 12 (305) 18 (457)
600 — 12 (305) 18 (457)
800 400 12 (305) 18 (457)
1000 — 12 (305) 18 (457))
1200 600 12 (305) 18 (457)
1350 800 12 (305) 18 (457)
1600 1000 12 (305) 18 (457)
2000 1200,1350 16 (406) 22 (559)
— 1600 16 (406) 22 (559)
2500 2000 16 (406) 22 (559)
3000 — 20.5 (521) 26.5 (673)
3200 — 20.5 (521) 26.5 (673)
4000 2500,3000,3200 20.5 (521) 26.5 (673)
5000 4000 25 (635) 31 (787)
Wall, Ceiling and Floor Flanges, Dimensions Wall, Ceiling and Floor Flanges
Dimensions Inches (mm) Wall/Floor flanges are available for Sentron Busway. When the busway run
passes through a wall, ceiling or floor, a flange should be used. Flanges do not
AL L-Rated
225 — 11 (279) 7 (178) offer support to the busway. Flanges provide a means of covering the hole
400 — 11 (279) 7 (178) created in the existing structure. Additional sealant may be required to meet
600 — 11 (279) 7 (178) fire codes and all other local requirements. No caulking or gasketing is
800 400 11 (279) 7 (178) provided with Sentron flanges.
1000 600 12 (305) 8 (203)
1200 800 13 (330) 9 (229)
1350 1000 14 (356) 10 (254) Wall, Ceiling and Floor Flanges
1600 1200 15 (381) 11 (279)
2000 1350,1600 17 (432) 13 (330) Suffix GWFL
2500 2000 20 (508) 16 (406)
3000 2500 22 (559) 18 (457)
3200 2000 24 (610) 20 (508)
4000 3000,3200 26 (660) 22 (559)
CU M-Rated
225 — 10 (254) 6 (152)
400 — 10 (254) 6 (152)
600 — 10 (254) 6 (152)
800 400 10 (254) 6 (152)
1000 — 11 (279) 7 (178)
1200 600 12 (305) 8 (203)
1350 800 12 (305) 8 (203)
1600 1000 13 (330) 9 (229)
2000 1200,1350 15 (381) 11 (279)
— 1600 15 (381) 11 (279)
2500 2000 17 (432) 13 (330)
3000 — 18 (457) 14 (356)
3200 — 19 (483) 15 (381)
4000 2500,3000,3200 21 (533) 17 (432)
5000 4000 26 (660) 22 (559)

Busway Accessories Selection
The following table identifies the feeder footage that is included in busway fittings.
Flanged
End
Ampere Elbow Tap Box Tap Box Swbd. XFMR Expansion Reducer Reducer
Rating Stack Elbow Tee Cross End Center Conn. Throat Section Fusible Unfused
225–1350 Al
1' 2' 3' 4' 1' 4' 1' 4' 4' 4' 4'
225–1600 Cu
1600–3200 Al
2' 3' 5' 6' 1' 4' 1' 4' 4' 4' 4'
2000–4000 Cu
4000 Al
3' 4' 6' 8' 1' 4' 1' 4' 4' 4' 4'
5000 Cu
13
“M” Rating / Standard “L" Rating / Standard

Rating Conversion Table Rating Conversion Table
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
1000/A Square Inch Standard Rating Equivalent Standard Rating Equivalent

750/A Square Inch
“M” Rating Sentron “L” Rating Sentron
225 600 225 600
400 800 400 800
600 1200 600 1000
800 1350 800 1200
1000 1600 1000 1350
1200 2000 1200 1600
1350 2000 1350 2000
1600 — 1600 2000
2000 2500 2000 2500
2500 4000 2500 3000
3000 4000 3000 4000
3200 4000 3200 4000
4000 5000
Sway Brace Bracket Lifting Kit

Catalogue Number SXSB Catalogue Number SXLK
Busway Assembly Tool

Catalogue Number SXBAT

Flanged Ends Selection
Flanged ends provide a direct connection to low-voltage Flanged ends are shipped with one joint stack assembly. The
switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, large switchgear manufacturer supplies lugs and mounting hardware.
power panels, and other electrical distribution equipment. See illustration for flanged end drilling patterns.
Flanged End, Dimensions Flanged End

Dimensions Inches (mm) Suffix FRND
Fig.
Ampere Rating “W” No.
AL L-Rated
225 — 1.75 (44.4) 1
400 — 1.75 (44.4) 1
600 — 1.75 (44.4) 1
800 400 2.38 (60.5) 1
13
1000 600 3.25 (82.6) 1
1200 800 4.38 (111.3) 1
1350 1000 5.38 (136.7) 1
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
1600 1200 6.50 (165.1) 1 Figure 1 Figure 2
2000 1350,1600 8.75 (222.3) 1
2500 2000 5.63 (143.0) 2
3000 2500 6.75 (171.5) 2
3200 2000 6.75 (171.5) 2
4000 3000,3200 9.00 (228.6) 2
CU M-Rated
225 — 1.75 (44.4) 1
400 — 1.75 (44.4) 1
600 — 1.75 (44.4) 1
800 400 1.75 (44.4) 1
1000 — 2.25 (57.2) 1
1200 600 2.88 (73.2) 1
1350 800 3.50 (88.9) 1
1600 1000 4.50 (114.3) 1
2000 1200,1350 6.00 (152.4) 1
— 1600 6.50 (165.1) 1
2500 2000 8.50 (215.9) 1
3000 — 4.75 (120.7) 2
3200 — 5.50 (139.7) 2
4000 2500,3000,3200 6.50 (165.1) 2
5000 4000 8.50 (215.9) 2
Flanged End Bus Bar Drilling Pattern (NEMA)a

(Same pattern for 2 bus bars per pole, see figure 2 above.)
a Other drilling patterns are available and must be specified at order entry.
b See Figures 4, 5 and 6 on page 13-32.

Flanged Ends Selection
Flanged End, Dimensions (standard/min.)
Ampere Rating Ref. Bar Width Fig. No. “A” ”B” ”C” ”D” ”E” ”F” ”G” Fig. No.
AL L-Rated
225 — 2.38 (60.5) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.94 (49) 3.88 (99) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
400 — 2.38 (60.5) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.94 (49) 3.88 (99) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
600 — 2.38 (60.5) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.94 (49) 3.88 (99) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
800 400 2.38 (60.5) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.94 (49) 3.88 (99) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
1000 600 3.25 (82.6) 2 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.94 (49) 2.06 (52) — 6.00 (152) 4, 6
1200 800 4.38 (111.3) 2 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 1.60 (41) 3.19 (81) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
1350 1000 5.38 (136.7) 2 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 2.10 (53) 4.19 (106) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
1600 1200 6.50 (165.1) 2 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 2.66 (67) 5.31 (135) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
2000 1350,1600 8.75 (222.3) 2 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 3.78 (96) 7.56 (192) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
2500 2000 5.63 (143.0) 3 20.0 (508) 18.00 (457) 4.50 (114) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 4.44 (113) 13.25 (337) 4, 6
3000 2500 6.75 (171.5) 3 20.0 (508) 18.00 (457) 4.50 (114) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 5.56 (141) 13.25 (337) 4, 6
3200 2000 7.50 (190.5) 3 24.0 (610) 22.0 (569) 5.50 (140) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 6.32 (161) 13.25 (337) 4, 6
13
4000 3000,3200 9.00 (228.6) 3 24.0 (610) 22.0 (569) 5.50 (140) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 7.81 (198) 14.25 (362) 4, 6
CU M-Rated
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
225 — 1.75 (44.4) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.63 (41) 3.25 (83) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
400 — 1.75 (44.4) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.63 (41) 3.25 (83) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
600 — 1.75 (44.4) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.63 (41) 3.25 (83) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
800 400 1.75 (44.4) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.63 (41) 3.25 (83) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
1000 — 2.25 (57.2) 1 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.88 (48) 3.75 (95) — 6.00 (152) 4, 5
1200 600 2.88 (73.2) 2 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 0.85 (21) 1.69 (43) — 6.00 (152) 4, 6
1350 800 3.50 (88.9) 2 10.0 (254) 8.00 (203) 4.38 (111) 1.16 (29) 2.31 (59) — 6.00 (152) 4, 6
1600 1000 4.50 (114.3) 2 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 1.66 (42) 3.31 (84) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
2000 1200,1350 6.00 (152.4) 2 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 2.41 (42) 4.81 (122) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
— 1600 6.50 (165.1) 2 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 2.66 (67) 5.31 (135) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
2500 2000 8.50 (215.9) 1 15.50 (395) 13.50 (343) 7.13 (181) 3.66 (93) 7.31 (186) — 8.50 (216) 4, 6
3000 — 4.75 (120.7) 3 20.0 (508) 18.00 (457) 4.50 (114) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 3.56 (90) 13.25 (337) 4, 6
3200 — 5.50 (139.7) 3 20.0 (508) 18.00 (457) 4.50 (114) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 4.32 (110) 13.25 (337) 4, 6
4000 2500,3000,3200 6.50 (165.1) 3 20.0 (508) 18.00 (457) 4.50 (114) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 5.31 (135) 13.25 (337) 4, 6
5000 4000 8.50 (215.9) 3 24.0 (610) 22.00 (569) 5.50 (140) 0.68 (17) 1.37 (36) 7.31 (186) 14.25 (362) 4, 6
Integral and Internal Ground Strap Drilling Detail


Combination Flange/Elbows Selection
Combination Flange/Elbow
A combination Flange/Elbow may be used in space
constrained applications. Flatwise and edgewise combination
flange/elbows require a minimum clearance of 5 in. (127mm)
from the top of the connecting equipment to the centerline of
the busway.
Flat Elbow with Flanged End, Dimensions

Dimensions inches (mm)
13
Ampere Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Rating "A" "B" "A" "B" "A" "B" "A" "B"
800 4.75 (121) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219) 4.50 (121) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
1000 5.20 (132) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219) 4.70 (121) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219)
1200 5.75 (146) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219) 5.00 (121) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219)
1350 6.25 (159) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219) 5.30 (121) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219)
1600 6.80 (173) 18 (457) 22 (559) 48 (1219) 5.80 (121) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219)
2000 8.00 (203) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219) 6.60 (121) 12 (305) 22 (559) 48 (1219)
2500 9.30 (236) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219) 7.80 (121) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219)
3000 10.40 (264) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219) 8.40 (121) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219)
3200 11.15 (283) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219) 9.20 (234) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219)
4000 12.70 (323) 24 (607) 34 (864) 48 (1219) 10.20 (121) 18 (457) 28 (711) 48 (1219)
5000 12.20 (121) 24 (607) 34 (864) 48 (1219)
Edge Elbow with Flanged End, Dimensions

Minimum Maximum
"A" "B" "A" "B"
5.00 (127) 10 (254) 18 (457) 48 (1219)
Edge Elbow with Flanged End Flat Elbow with Flanged End

Cubicle Options Selection
In-Line Disconnect Cubicle, Dimensions b In-Line Disconnect Cubicles
Description Cubicles provide a means of mounting switches or circuit breakers where power
of Unit Type of Disconnect
feeds to or pulls from the busway system. When bolted connections are preferred,
Fusible Switch 800-1200A Vacu-Break cubicles may be used in place of plug-in units. Cubicles can also be used at ampere
Molded Case JD6, LD6, MD6, ND6
Circuit Breaker PD6, RD6
ratings that exceed standard plug-in unit ratings. Modifications to cubicles can be
Digital Sentron SJD6, SLD6, SMD6, SND6 made in order to accommodate key inter-locks, ground fault detector systems and
Series MCCB’s SPD6 1600A Frame power monitoring systems.
Power a
In-Line Disconnect Cubicle
200-5000A WL
Circuit Breaker
Bolted Pressure 800A
Switch 1200-2500A
3000A
4000A
13
ACCESS-
compatible
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
a Consult your local Siemens sales office for details on

WL breakers.
b Consult factory for dimensions.
Fusible Cubiclesac
3-Pole, 600V/4-Pole, 480/277V Horizontal Vertical
Ampere Ratings:
800 Current-Limiting
1200
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Cubicles
3-Pole, 600V or 4-Pole 480/277V 3-Phase, 600V AC or
Breaker Type Ampere Rating 120/280V AC, 277/480V AC
FD6 70–250A Breaker Type Ampere Rating
Bolted Pressure Switchesc JD6 200–400A CFD6 70–250A
3-Pole 480V, 4-Pole 480V, LD6 450–600A CJD6 200–400A
MD6 500–800A CLD6 450–600A
3-Pole 600V or 4-Pole 600V
ND6 900–1200A CMD6 600–800A
Ampere Ratings: PD6 1200–1600A CND6 900–1200A
800 RD6 1600–2000A CPD6 1200–1600A
1200
1600 Power Circuit Breakerbc
2000 3-Pole or 3-Phase, 4-Wire
2500
3000 Breaker Max. Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz
Frame Amp.
4000 Type Rating 240 Volt 480 Volt 600 Volt
Type WL
Frame Size 1
2000A 65k 85k 100k 65k 85k 100k 65k 65k 65k
Solid State Molded Case Circuit (S, H, L Rating Class)
Frame Size 2
Breaker Cubiclesc (S, L, C Rating Class)
3000A 65k 100k 150k 65k 100k 150k 65k 85k 100k
3-Pole, 600V or 4-Pole 480/277V Frame Size 3
5000A — 100k 150k — 100k 150k — 85k 100k
Breaker Frame Ampere Rating (L and C Rating Class)
SJD6-A, SHJD6-A,
200–400
SCJD6-A In-Line Disconnect Cubicle, Approximate Dimensions
SLD6-A, SHLD6-A, Dimensions in Inches
300–600
SCLD6-A
Description of Unit Type of Disconnect A B C
SMD6, SHMD6,
600–800 Fusible Switch 800-1200A Vacu-Break 36 (914) 36 (914) 32 (813)
SCMD6-A
SND6, SHND6, Molded Case JD6, LD6, MD6, ND6 36 (914) 28 (711) 28 (711)
800–1200 Circuit Breaker
SCND6-A PD6, RD6 36 (914) 36 (914) 32 (813)
SPD6, SHPD6 1400–1600 Digital Sentron SJD6, SLD6, SMD6, SND6 36 (914) 28 (711) 28 (711)
Series MCCB's SPD6, 1600A Frame 36 (914) 36 (914) 32 (813)
Power Circuit WL Frame Size 1 48 (1219) 36 (914) 32 (813)
Breaker WL Frame Size 2 48 (1219) 36 (914) 32 (813)
WL Frame Size 3 48 (1219) 36 (914) 32 (813)
Bolted Pressure 800A 33 (838) 36 (914) 32 (813)
Switch 1200-2500A 37 (940) 40 (1016) 32 (813)
3000A 37 (940) 40 (1016) 48 (1219)
a Fuses not included.
b For electrically operated, specify control voltage. 4000A 41 (1041) 40 (1016) 48 (1219)
c IP40 and IP55

Panelboards and Meter Center Modules Selection
Meter center modules provide a quick and
convenient method of connecting to metering
devices for both commercial and industrial
applications.
Meter center modules connect at the side of a
busway run to special joint stacks; these special
joints can be added to existing busway to
accommodate meter center module
connections. When using multiple metering
stacks, main disconnects are available if the
system reaches the 6 circuit rule (see metering
bulletin for further information).
13
Dimensional Data Required
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
“A” Distance between floor and bottom
of meter center as required by the
customer.
“B” Dimension from bottom of meter
center to centerline of meter center
joint connection stack:
100-125A Panel, B = 16.5 (419)
200A Panel, B = 22.0 (559)
“C” Equals “A” plus “B”, Minimum 16.0 (406)
“D” Individual meter center height.
Consult Modular Metering application
information.

Selection
Meter Center Cubicles
Meter center cubicles provide a quick and convenient method of connecting to metering devices for both commercial and
industrial applications and have the main disconnect circuit breaker factory installed.
Having the main disconnect built into the device reduces the required space on the right and left side of the busway. Meter
center modules connect at the side of the cubicle frame box using an QC4 stack. Meter center cubicles are available for
600 – 1200 Amp (L, M and N Frames). They are available with flexible meter center connections, left side, right side or both.
(When ordering a meter center cubicle a QC4 stack must be ordered separately.)
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Cubicles with Meter Tap Stack Provisions Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Busway L Frame Breaker (250-600A) M Frame Breaker (250-800A) N Frame Breaker (800-1200A)
Ampere Rating Width W A B C A B C A B C
AL L-Rated
225 — 3.9 (99) 32 (813) 24 (620) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
13
400 — 3.9 (99) 32 (813) 24 (620) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
600 — 3.9 (99) 32 (813) 24 (620) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
800 400 4.6 (117) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
1000 600 5.4 (137) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
1200 800 6.6 (168) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
1350 1000 7.6 (193) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
1600 1200 8.7 (221) 32 (813) 24 (610) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490)
2000 1350,1600 10.9 (277) 32 (813) 24 (610) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490)
2500 2000 13.7 (348) 32 (813) 24 (610) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597)
3000 2500 15.8 (401) 32 (813) 24 (610) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597)
3200 2000 17.3 (439) 32 (813) 24 (610) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711)
4000 3000,3200 20.3 (516) 32 (813) 24 (610) 28 (711) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711)
4000 3000,3200 20.3 (516) 32 (813) 24 (610) 28 (711) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711)
CU M-Rated
225 — 3.9 (99) 32 (813) 24 (620) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
400 — 3.9 (99) 32 (813) 24 (620) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
600 — 3.9 (99) 32 (813) 24 (620) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
800 400 3.9 (99) 32 (813) 24 (620) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
1000 — 4.4 (112) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
1200 600 5.1 (130) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
1350 800 5.7 (145) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
1600 1000 6.7 (170) 32 (813) 24 (610) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406) 37 (940) 26 (660) 16 (406)
2000 1200,1350 8.2 (208) 32 (813) 24 (610) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490)
— 1600 8.7 (221) 32 (813) 24 (610) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490)
2500 2000 10.7 (272) 32 (813) 24 (610) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490)
3000 — 11.8 (300) 32 (813) 24 (610) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 20 (490)
3200 — 13.3 (335) 32 (813) 24 (610) 20 (490) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597)
4000 2500,3000,3200 15.3 (389) 32 (813) 24 (610) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597) 37 (940) 26 (660) 23.5 (597)
5000 4000 19.3 (491) 32 (813) 24 (610) 28 (711) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711) 37 (940) 26 (660) 28 (711)
Side Mount
Meter Center Module Panelboard Main Disconnect Meter Module Meter Center Cubicle
For this panelboard

configuration, please
contact Spartanburg
plant for mounting
information.
Configuration only
available for P2 and
P3 panels in 240V or
below applications.

Installation and Application Information Selection
Installation All equipment should be inspected upon The SpecSeal fire stop system provides
®
In preparation for installation of your delivery. If the busway is not installed superior performance at the industry’s
busway systems, it is important to immediately, it should be stored in a lowest installed cost.
familiarize yourself with the following clean, dry location. Factory supplied
installation publications: record drawings as well as installation
tools should be accessible in preparation
b General Instructions For Handling,
Installation, Operation and for installation.
Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 UL 1479 Fire Rated Installations
volts or less (NEMA Standards Sentron Busway has been tested in
Publication BU1) accordance with UL 1479 and offers a
b Storage, Installation and certified two hour fire rating for gypsum
Maintainance Instructions for Sentron wallboard construction and a three hour
13
Busway fire rating for concrete slab or block
These publications should be read penetrations. These ratings were
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
through thoroughly and used as achieved using standard busway installed
Measuring
reference during installation to ensure with SpecSeal® sealant from Specified
Technologies Inc. Critical to the success of any busway
proper installation procedures.
installation is the layout and the accurate
measuring of the busway. First and
foremost:
Select a route for your busway that will
require the fewest fittings and the
maximum number of 10' (3.05m) sections.
It is important that the busway system be
designed to meet the requirements of the
National Electric Code for Busway. There
are a number of techniques that may be
used to ensure an accurate measurement
before purchasing and installing the
busway. The following tools will be
required during layout and masuring:
b 100' (30.48m) tape measure
b Measuring Stick
b Chalkline
b Plumb Bob
b Marker
(A laser distance measuring device may
be used to speed up the measuring
process).
Minimal Clearances
Minimum clearances for installing feeder
busway are shown. Additional clearance
may be required for plug-in devices
larger than 100A fusible and 250A circuit
breaker.

General Information Selection
Recommended Measurement Steps Maintenance Low Current Density Busway Sentron

1. Using systems requirements for In order to maintain system Busway may be ordered as 1000 A/in2
amperage, voltage, and conductors, performance, it is necessary to perform Copper or 750 A/in2 Aluminum.
determine the physical size of the regular maintenance on your busway
busway. This is important when system. Siemens Storage, Installation Conversion is as follows:
setting minimum clearances from Required M or L Rating
and Maintenance Instructions, and
walls, columns, ceilings and other AL L-Rated
obstructions. See page 33 for NEMA Publication BU1.1 should be
225 —
minimal clearances. used as a guide to proper maintenance
400 —
procedures. Routine maintenance of
2. Prior to any layout, review the 600 —
complete area to determine the best your busway system will increase its 800 400
location for the run. Special attention life and performance. 1000 600
13
needs to be given to existing 1200 800

equipment such as plumbing, HVAC, Custom Product 1350 1000
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
1600 1200
steel columns, beams and permanent With a 60 year history in designing 2000 1350,1600
structures. and manufacturing Busway Systems, 2500 2000
3. Measure all dimensions from fixed Siemens can develop custom solutions 3000 2500
points such as columns, walls, floors to meet specific job requirements. 3200 2000
and ceilings. Siemens specializes in custom 4000 3000,3200
4. Make a preliminary sketch showing engineered busway sections,
proposed busway routing, elevations connections, and bus plugs. Consult Required M or L Rating
and obstructions. Be sure to show your local Siemens sales office for AL L-Rated
all floor and wall locations including details on custom pricing and ordering 225 —
thickness.
400 —
5. Where plug-in devices are Connecting to Existing Equipment 600 —
being used, be sure to allow for 800 400
proper operation clearances. See Do you have existing power distribution
1000 —
dimensional requirements shown equipment (non-Sentron) that you 1200 600
in the bus plug section of this would like to run Sentron Busway to 1350 800
publication. or from? Siemens can engineer special 1600 1000
connection pieces that allow you to 2000 1200, 1350
connect Sentron Busway quickly and — 1600
Reference the following documents 2500 2000
online at www.usa.siemens.com/ efficiently. 3000 —
busway. 3200 —
Transformer Connections 4000 2500, 3000
• Sentron Quick Reference
Siemens can connect Sentron Busway 5000 4000
• Busway Order Entry Checklist to almost any transformer. All you need
• Sentron Busway Installation and to do is provide complete drawings of
Instruction Guide transformer secondary connections with “L” Rating = 750 A/in2 Aluminum
detailed drilling pattern and phasing “M” Rating = 1000 A/in2 Copper
information to your local Siemens sales 1600 “M” rated is dedicated offering.
engineer and they can order you a
custom designed connection piece.
Paint
Sentron Busway products have a
protective finish of ANSI 61 gray
(standard) polyester urethane powder
paint. The paint is electrostatically
applied to all housing surfaces. Colors
other than ANSI 61 gray may be special
ordered.

Cubicle Options Selection
Applications – 200% Neutral Option Services – Power II Fit Final Measuring and Layout
Power system harmonics are created Connection Program For large jobs, Siemens Busway
by numerous types of non-linear loads A “Final Connection” section is a length Systems offer assistance with
which are often very high in harmonic of busway inserted into a run of busway measuring and layout of the busway.
content. The harmonics generated after the major portion of the busway This service is negotiated on a job by
create problems in electrical systems run has been installed. This allows the job basis.
and equipment. The presence of release of the majority of the busway
nonlinear loads can result in overheated run long before the final dimensions are Technical Support
neutrals and lead to deterioration of known. The Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
equipment performance and a reduced provides 24/7 bilingual support for our
equipment life cycle. In order to prevent Final Connection pieces must be customers.
13
such problems from occurring, the identified at the time of the original
Computer and Business Equipment order release with approximate date The CIC provides both telephone and
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Manufacturers Association (CBEMA) of Final Connection order. The Final online support. You can send in your
recommends that the neutral be Connection order form should be request via email or by giving the CIC a
oversized to at least 173% of the emailed to Busway Customer Service. call.
ampacity of the phase conductors to For program details visit our website:
prevent problems. Sentron Busway www.usa.siemens.com/busway or Email us: cic.ca@siemens.com
offers two fully rated bus bars, contact your local Siemens sales office. Toll-Free Support: 1-888-303-3353
therefore providing twice the current
carrying surface as the phase bars.
Each neutral bar is plated with the same
tin plating and insulated with the same
electrostatically applied epoxy insulation
as the phase bars. This 200% neutral
capacity helps prevent overheating
caused by non-linear loads.
Isolated Ground
Sentron Busway is available with an
optional isolated ground. This isolated
ground provides a clean ground path for
high frequency signals coming through
the ground. This option is very useful in
applications where there are computers
or diagnostic equipment. The isolated
ground option is often used in hospitals
and higher technology industry
applications.

Power II Fit Program Selection
What is the Power II Fit Program? What is the Power II Measure service?
Siemens Power II Fit (P II F) Program compensates for Siemens Power II Measure (P II M) service provides professional
dimensional deviations that may result in busway layouts. With busway routing and measurement by a factory representative.
the P II F Program, specific dimensions on straight sections and/ The Siemens representative will meet with the designated
or elbows may be left out of factory released drawings. After site contact to review project details and discuss routing
the busway run has been installed (minus P II F pieces), final options. Using a laser measuring device, all pertinent site
measurements are taken and sent to the factory. The P II F measurements will be recorded and then transferred to CAD
Program guarantees shipment of straight sections and/or 90 approval drawing(s). The P II M service guarantees correct
degree angle elbows within 5 business days for IP40 (indoor) and alignment and routing of the busway. If there are any errors in
8 business days for NEMA 3R (outdoor), upon receipt of the PIIF the busway routing that resulted from Siemens, replacement
Order Form. The P II F Program may be used with SENTRON. busway items will be provided at no charge.
13
Why use the Power II Fit Program?

Why use the Power II Measure service?
The P II F Program can save you both time and money by
The P II M service can save you both time and money by:
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
eliminating uncertainty in busway measurements. When you take

advantage of the P II F Program, your busway runs fit exactly the b Ensuring the most cost effective busway routing
first time, eliminating incorrect pieces and costly reordering time. b Ensuring accurate measurements
b Reducing order engineering lead-time
When should the Power II Fit Program be used?
The P II F Program will benefit you when you are uncertain of When should the Power II Measure service be used?
exact dimensions on long busway runs and when difficult
The P II M service can be beneficial for all projects (new
contour situations require special attention.
or existing, large or small). The P II M service is especially
Program Details beneficial for large and/or complex projects.
b Product Line: SENTRON. Program details
b Pricing: Included with original order entry. b Product Line: Sentron, XJL, XLU, BD
b Quantity: A maximum of 5 pieces per order. b Pricing: Fixed daily rate includes travel expenses,
(Straight feeder sections and/or 90 degree elbows.) site review, measurement service and approval drawings
b Shipment: 5 business days for IP40 (indoor) and 8 business b Deliverable: An electronic CAD approval package will be
days for NEMA 3R (outdoor), after receipt of PIIF Order submitted within 3 weeks of the site visit. The drawing
Form. All orders ship via standard carrier originating from package will include isometric busway routing with gear
Spartanburg, SC. Optional air freight shipments available orientation, and any special application notes/details.
when the customer bears the shipping cost.
Ordering details
Ordering Details
b The P II M service should be ordered at the same time as
b Identify Siemens Busway PIIF Pieces at time of original the busway
order. Busway Customer Service approves PIIF Pieces.
b The P II M service may be ordered for project cost estimation
b Send PIIF Order Form to Busway Customer Service b Allow 2 weeks notice to schedule the P II M service
when exact measurements are known.
b Busway Customer Service acknowledges PIIF Order and
PIIF pieces ship within 5 business days for IP40 (indoor) and
8 business days for NEMA 3R (outdoor).

Siemens Sentron Busway Quick Reference General
Siemens Sentron Busway Quick Reference
Critical Dimensions:
Busway that passes through a wall, ceiling or floor:
b Centerline of a joint to the wall, ceiling or floor = 7 in. min.
b Centerline of a joint (above a floor support) to a floor = 16 in. min.
b Joints cannot be positioned inside a wall, ceiling or floor (joints must be accessible
for maintenance)
Feeder Busway clearances:
b From the top of the busway to a ceiling/floor/wall or other busway = 6 in. min.
b From the side of the busway to a ceiling/floor/wall or other busway = 4 in. min
Plug-in Busway clearances:
13
b Plug-In busway clearances depend on the configuration of bus plugs (see bus plug Feeder Busway minimal clearances
clearance charts in the Sentron Selection and Application Guide)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
b Otherwise, clearances for feeder busway apply
b Note orientation of the operating handle and provide clearance for access & operation
Feeder Busway length:
b Minimum length = 14.38 in.
b Maximum length = 10 ft.
Plug-In & Riser length:
b Available only in 4, 6, 8 and 10 ft. lengths
Flat Elbow section:
b Maximum leg length = 4 ft.
b Minimum leg length: Varies according to amperage and bus bar material
Edge Elbow section:
b Maximum length = 4 ft.
b Minimum leg length = 10 in.
Combination and Offset Elbows:
b Maximum leg lengths = 4 ft.
b Minimum leg lengths: varies according to amperage and bus bar material
Elbow - Stub Combinations:
b Maximum leg length = 4 ft.
b Minimum leg length = 2.50 in. + (case size x .5)
Critical Details:
b Busway DRAWINGs must include all relevant dimensions
b CENTERLINE dimensions are expected (please note any dimensions that are not center line dimensions)
b WALLs and FLOORs must be located (wall & floor thickness must be included)
b Locate the FRONT of all switchboards and provide the phasing of any existing boards (advise if any PADs are
located under boards)
b When using ONE-SIDED plug-in busway please note the desired direction of the load side of bus plugs (G,A,B,C,N
from left to right will position the load side to the bottom and “UP is On” handle operation)
b TRANSFORMER THROAT connections require complete details.
b Horizontal plug-in busway must be oriented with the A phase on top (bolt head on top).
b In-Line Disconnect CUBICLEs are engineered to order. The FRONT of the cubicle and Breaker information must be specified.
b Panels - panel type and size / if a certain panel or breaker height is required (those dimensions)
b Curb height
Intermediate Hangers
b Add qty (1) Intermediate Hanger for floor to ceiling height greater than 16ft. Consult factory if greater than 32 ft.
Expansion Sections:
b Qty (1) Expansion Section should be used for every 200ft of continuous Busway run length, at every transition to a
vertical run, and at each building expansion joint.
Outdoor Busway:
b Route busway to minimize outdoor busway run length
b Call factory before quoting outdoor busway runs over 50 ft.
b Avoid installing busway near exhaust pipes that may generate steam or caustic vapors

Sentron Bus Plugs
Table of Contents
Contents
Sentron Busway Systems
Sentron Bus Plug Overview 13-43
Sentron Bus Plugs – Circuit Breaker (Installed) –
Sentron Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs 13-45
Bus Plugs with Standard Circuit Breakers 13-46
Bus Plugs with Current Limiting Circuit Breakers 13-47
Sentron Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-48
Wall Clearance and Circuit Breaker Bus Plug Dimensions 13-49
13
Sentron Bus Plugs – SLVB Fusible - Catalogue Numbering System 13-50

Non-Metered Sentron 3/6 Bus Plug
Sentron SLVB Fusible Bus Plugs 13-51 –13-52
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Sentron Fusible Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-53 –13-54

Wall Clearance and Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions 13-55
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs 13-56
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs – Catalogue Numbering System 13-57
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-58
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs 13-59
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs – Circuit Breaker (Installed) –
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs – Product Configurations 13-61
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights 13-62 –13-63
Sentron SLVB Bus Plug

Sentron Bus Plug Overview Overview
SENTRON Bus Plugs are engineered prevent installing the bus plug 180 Enclosure Ratings:
with the installer and end user in mind. degrees out of rotation. In addition, the
b IP40
The installer will benefit from the stabs provide vertical support for vertical
numerous features, such as factory applications. The bus plug ground stabs b IP55
installed circuit breakers, compact are designed to ensure positive contact Conductors:
footprint, generous wirebend space, and with both the integral and optional b 3-phase, 3-wire
dual interlocks. The end user will internal busway grounds before the bus
appreciate the visible position indicator, plug fingers contact the phase and b 3-phase, 4-wire
as well as the spring loaded pad lockable neutral bars. Sentron Bus Plugs also b 3-phase, 4-wire 200% neutral (400A
latch which prevents access to feature bolt-on mounting to the busway and below)
unauthorized personel. housing for secure attachment. Grounding:
SENTRON Bus Plugs are designed with Sentron Bus Plugs can be configured for b Integral (Housing)
an interlock device to prevent the door horizontal or vertical applications. The
b Internal
13
from being opened when the disconnect following Bus Plugs can be mounted
is on. This also prevents the disconnect (side by side) five (5) per busway side b Isolated
from being turned on while the door is channel (Total 10 per 10’ Section).
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
open. The interlock ensures that the a
b 30-600 SLVBH Fusible (Horizontal)
protective device is “OFF” prior to a
installation or removal of the bus plug. b 30-200 SLVBR Fusible (Riser)

a
Once the bus plug is properly installed, b 30-400 Circuit Breaker
a spring - loaded, padlock latch provides b 10-100A 3/6 Bus Plug (Horizontal)
b
additional security by preventing

Sentron SLVB Fusible Bus Plugs feature
unauthorized access to the unit.
a direct drive mechanism. The operating
Alignment and interlock stabs are handle mounts directly to the switch
features of the Sentron Bus Plugs mechanism for fewer moving parts.
engineered to prevent improper
installation of the unit. Guide stabs
PLUG-IN OUTLET
COVER
BUS PLUG
TWIN ALIGNMENT
MOUNTING SCREWS
SLOTS BUSWAY INTERLOCK
LEVER
STOP FEATURE
COVER INTERLOCK
SCREW
SUPPORT RAIL
TWIN
ALIGNMENT / INTERLOCK
TABS
COVER INTERLOCK
SCREW
BUS PLUG
HANDLE STOP
FEATURE
SUPPORT RAIL
VERIFICATION
WINDOW
Note: SLVBH Horizontal Application Shown.
a Contact Siemens for 200% Neutral Applications.

b IP55 enclosure not available.

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Catalogue Numbering System Selection / Application
Sentron Bus Plugs—Circuit Breaker (Installed)
a
S L E C S 3 2 0 1 5 0 G b
E D 2
Plug Type
SL = Sentron II
Circuit Breaker Frame
E =15–125A
F =70–250A
J =200–400A
L =250–600A
M =500–800A
Enclosure Type
13
C = Circuit Breaker Enclosure

L = Current Limiting Enclosure
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Cradle Designation
S = 3Ø3W, 3Ø4W>400A
200%N>200A only
Configuration
3 = 3Ø, 3W
4 = 3Ø, 4W
5 = 3Ø, 4W 200% neutralcd
Breaker Voltage
2 = 240V e
4 = 480V f
6 = 600V
Ampere Trip Rating
IP Rating
0 = IP40
4 = IP55
Ground Designation
G = Internal Ground
IG = Isolated Ground
Circuit Breaker Frame Identification
a The S digit is only used on 3- and 4-wire (100%N) plugs that are greater c Available through 250A only.
than 400A and 200%N plugs greater than 200A. Lower amperage plugs d Available with E and F Frame breakers only.
do not require this digit. (Ex. SLID3610, SLEC32060ED2) e Available with ED2 breakers only.
b The G and IG digits are used to specify internal and isolated ground f Available with ED4 and HHED6 breakers only.
respectively. Integral (housing) ground plugs do not require this digit.
(Ex. SLID3610, SLEC360150ED6)

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs Overview
Standard Circuit Breakers, Bus Plug Ratingsa Sentron Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs feature an easy to read
Plug-In Circuit Max. Short “position indicator” label, designed to be visible from the
Units Breaker Frame Circuit floor, that clearly marks whether the bus plug is in the
Series Max. Rating Size Current Rating “Off,” “On,” or “Tripped” position. Circuit breaker bus plugs
SLEC 125A, 600V E Frame 100kA, 240V, 3 ph are available in frame sizes from 125 amps to 800 amps with
65kA, 480V, 3 pha
25kA, 600V, 3 ph interrupting ratings of standard, high or current limiting.
SLFC 250A, 600V F Frame 200kA, 240V, 3 ph
100kA, 480V, 3 ph Circuit breaker bus plugs will be shipped complete with
25kA, 600V, 3 ph
SLJC 400A, 600V J Frame 200kA, 240V, 3 ph factory installed circuit breakers. The following Siemens
100kA, 480V, 3 ph molded case circuit breaker frames may be ordered with
50kA, 600V, 3 ph Sentron Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs: ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4,
13
SLLCS 600A, 600V L Frame 200kA, 240V, 3 ph
100kA, 480V, 3 ph
HHED6, CED6, FXD6, FD6, HFD6, CFD6 JXD6, JD6, HJD6,
50kA, 600V, 3 ph CJD6, LXD6, HLD6, CLD6, MXD6, HMD6, CMD6.
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
SLMCS 800A, 600V M Frame 200kA, 240V, 3 ph
100kA, 480V, 3 ph
65kA, 600V, 3 ph
Refer to the diagram on page <?> for easy ordering
instructions.
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers, Bus Plug Ratingsa Sentron circuit breaker bus plugs can be custom configured to
meet application specific requirements.
Plug-In Circuit Max. Short
Units Breaker Frame Circuit
Series Max. Rating Size Current Rating
Consult your local Siemens sales office for details on custom
SLEL 125A, 600V CED Frame 200KA, 240V, 3 ph
200KA, 480V, 3 ph pricing and ordering.
100KA, 600V, 3 ph
SLFL 250A, 600V CFD Frame 200KA, 240V, 3 ph
200KA, 480V, 3 ph
100KA, 600V, 3 ph
SLJL 400A, 600V CJD Frame 200KA, 240V, 3 ph
150KA, 480V, 3 ph
100KA, 600V, 3 ph
SLLLS 600A, 600V CLD Frame 200KA, 240V, 3 ph
150KA, 480V, 3 ph
100KA, 600V, 3 ph
SLMLS 800A, 600V CMD Frame 200KA, 240V, 3 ph
100KA, 480V, 3 ph
65KA, 600V, 3 ph
a Available in IP40 or IP55 variant.

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Bus Plugs with Standard Circuit Breakersabcd Selection
Ampere Catalogue Ampere Catalogue Ampere Catalogue
Rating Number Rating Number Rating Number
E Frame 3-Pole, 240 Volt, ED2 Breaker E Frame 4-Pole, 240 Volt, ED2 Breaker E Frame 200% Neutral
SLEC32***0ED2 SLEC42***0ED2 SLEC52***0ED2
15-60A SLEC32***0GED2 15-60A SLEC42***0GED2 15-60A SLEC52***0GED2
SLEC32***0IGED2 SLEC42***0IGED2 SLEC52***0IGED2
SLEC34***0ED4 15-60A SLEC44***0ED4 SLEC54***0ED4
15-60A SLEC34***0GED4 SLEC44***0GED4 15-60A SLEC54***0GED4
13

BUSWAY
SYSTEMS

F Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, FXD6 Breaker F Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, FXD6 Breaker F Frame 200% Neutral
SLFC36***0FXD6 SLFC46***0FXD6 SLFC56***0FXD6
70-225A SLFC36***0GFXD6 70-225A SLFC46***0GFXD6 70-200A SLFC56***0GFXD6
SLFC36***0IGFXD6 SLFC46***0IGFXD6 SLFC56***0IGFXD6
SLFC362500FXD6 SLFC462500FXD6 SLFC56***0FXD6
250A SLFC362500GFXD6 250A SLFC462500GFXD6 225-250A SLFC56***0GFXD6
SLFC362500IGFXD6 SLFC462500IGFXD6 SLFC56***0IGFXD6
J Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, JXD6 Breaker J Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, JXD6 Breaker
SLJC36***0JXD6 SLJC46***0JXD6
200-400Ad SLJC36***0GJXD6 200-400Ad SLJC46***0GJXD6
SLJC36***0IGJXD6 SLJC46***0IGJXD6
L Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, LXD6 Breaker L Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, LXD6 Breaker
SLLCS36***0LXD6 SLLCS46***0LXD6 Catalogue
450-600Ad SLLCS36***0GLXD6 450-600Ad SLLCS46***0GLXD6 Description Number
SLLCS36***0IGLXD6 SLLCS46***0IGLXD6
Spring Kit SXSK
M Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, MXD6 Breaker M Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, MXD6 Breaker NOTE: Used on 400A and larger bus plugs that require
SLMCS36***0MXD6 SLMCS46***0MXD6 auxiliary support and that are mounted on vertical/
500-800Ad SLMCS36***0GMXD6 500-800Ad SLMCS46***0GMXD6 riser busway. Kit contains two springs (part number
SLMCS36***0IGMXD6 32-9909-04). One kit required per bus plug. Spring kits are
SLMCS46***0IGMXD6
automatically included when 400A and larger bus plug
is selected.
a Replace “***” with breaker trip rating. c Forthe following breaker substitutions, change the d 400Aand larger bus plugs that require auxiliary support.
Example: SLEC36060ED6, for 60A trip. catalogue number suffix: See also SXSK Spring Kit.
b Allplugs shown have an IP40 rating, if IP54/55 is desired 15-60A: HHED6 Ex. SLEC36***0HHED6
substitute ”4” for ”0” in position 10 (or 11 for cradle 70-100A: HHED6 Ex. SLEC36***0HHED6
plugs): 110-125A: HHED6 Ex. SLEC36***0HHED6
E Frame: Ex. SLEC360604ED6 F Frame: FD6 Ex. SLFC36***0FD6
F Frame: Ex. SLFC360704FXD6 F Frame: HFD6 Ex. SLFC36***0HFD6
J Frame: Ex. SLJC36100JXD6 J Frame: JD6 Ex. SLJC36***0JD6
L Frame: Ex. SLLCS365004LXD6 J Frame: HJD6 Ex. SLJC36***0HJD6
M Frame: Ex. SLMCS368004MXD6 L Frame: LD6 Ex. SLLCS36***0LD6
L Frame: HLD6 Ex. SLLCS36***0HLD6
M Frame: MD6 Ex. SLMCS36***0MD6
M Frame: HMD6 Ex. SLMCS36***0HMD6

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Bus Plugs with Current Limiting Circuit Breakersab Selection
Ampere Catalogue Ampere Catalogue Ampere Catalogue
Rating Number Rating Number Rating Number
E Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CED6 Breaker E Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CED6 Breaker E Frame 200% Neutral
SLEL36***0CED6 SLEL46***0CED6 SLEL56***0CED6
15-60A SLEL36***0GCED6 15-60A SLEL46***0GCED6 15-60A SLEL56***0GCED6
SLEL36***0IGCED6 SLEL46***0IGCED6 SLEL56***0IGCED6
F Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CFD6 Breaker F Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CFD6 Breaker F Frame 200% Neutral
SLFL36***0CFD6 SLFL46***0CFD6 SLFL56***0CFD6
13
100-225A SLFL36***0GCFD6 100-225A SLFL46***0GCFD6 70-200A SLFL56***0GCFD6
SLFL36***0IGCFD6 SLFL46***0IGCFD6 SLFL56***0IGCFD6
SLFL362500CFD6 SLFL462500CFD6 SLFL56***0CFD6
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
250A SLFL362500CGFD6 250A SLFL462500GCFD6 225-250A SLFL56***0GCFD6
SLFL362500ICGFD6 SLFL462500IGCFD6 SLFL56***0IGCFD6
J Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CJD6 Breaker J Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CJD6 Breaker J Frame 200% Neutral
SLJL36***0CJD6 SLJL46***0CJD6 — SLJL562000CJD6
200-400Ac SLJL36***0CGJD6 200-400Ac SLJL46***0GCJD6 — 200Ac SLJL562000GCJD6
SLJL36***0ICGJD6 SLJL46***0IGCJD6 — SLJL562000IGCJD6
SLJLS56***0CJD6
225-400Ac SLJLS56***0GCJD6
SLJLS56***0IGCJD6
L Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CLD6 Breaker L Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CLD6 Breaker
SLLLS36***0CLD6 SLLLS46***0CLD6
450-600Ac SLLLS36***0GCLD6 450-600Ac SLLLS46***0GCLD6
SLLLS36***0IGCLD6 SLLLS46***0IGCLD6
M Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CMD6 Breaker M Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CMD6 Breaker
SLLLS36***0CMD6 SLLLS46***0CMD6
500-800Ac SLLLS36***0GCMD6 500-800Ac SLLLS46***0GCMD6
SLLLS36***0IGCMD6 SLLLS46***0IGCMD6
a Replace “***” with breaker trip rating. c 400A and larger bus plugs that require auxiliary
Example: SLEC36060ED6, for 60A trip. support. See also SXSK Spring Kit.
b All plugs shown have an IP40 rating, if IP54/55 is
desired, substitute ”4” for ”0” in position 10
(or 11 for cradle plugs):
E Frame: Ex. SLEC360604ED6
F Frame: Ex. SLFC360704FXD6
J Frame: Ex. SLJC361004JXD6
L Frame: Ex. SLLCS365004LXD6
M Frame: Ex. SLMCS368004MXD6

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights Selection
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs, Dimensions and Weights (Enclosure only)
Ampere Dimensions Inches (mm) Weight
Rating “A”a “B” “C” “D” max. “E” “F” “J” “K” lbs (kg)
125 15.13 (384) 10.18 (259) 9.75 (248) 1.60 (41) 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 3.50 (89) 2.25 (57) 35 (15.87)
250 20.25 (514) 10.18 (259) 9.75 (248) 1.60 (41) 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 3.25 (83) 3.25 (83) 50 (22.68)
400 21.75 (552) 16.75 (425) 11.75 (298) 1.60 (41) 5.75 (146) 5.75 (146) 4.00 (102) 3.25 (83) 83 (37.64)
600 41.50 (1054) 19.75 (502) 15.75 (400) 2.31 (59) 7.00 (178) 7.75 (197) — — 130 (58.97)
800 41.50 (1054) 19.75 (502) 15.75 (400) 2.31 (59) 7.00 (178) 7.75 (197) — — 177 (80.29)
125 – 400A Bus Plugs

13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
600 – 800A Bus Plugs
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs, Load Lugs and Knockouts

Frame Ground Neutral Lug Phase Lug Knockout Sizes
Size Lug Cu/Al Cu/AI Cu/AI In. (mm)
E Frame #14-2 #14-2 #14-1/0 7/8 (22)
F Frame #14-2 #6-350 kcmil #6-350 kcmil 7/8 (22)
J Frame #14-2 (2) #4-500 kcmil (2) 3/0-500 kcmil 7/8 (22)
L Frame #6-350 kcmil (2) 3/0-500 kcmil (2) 3/0-500 kcmil No Knockouts
J Frame (2) #4-500 kcmil (3) #1-500 kcmil (3) #1-500 kcmil No Knockouts
a Current limiting breakers add 5-7 inches to

dimension A, depending upon breaker amperage.

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Wall Clearance and Circuit Breaker Bus Plug Dimensions Selection
600A and 800A Cradle Mounted
30A – 400A
13
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Circuit Breaker Plugs No Cradle Circuit Breaker Plugs w/Cradle
E Frame F Framea J Framea L Frame M Frame
Dim. Current Current Current Current Current
Legend Standard Limiting Standard Limiting Standard Limiting Standard Limiting Standard Limiting
A 17.00 (432) 22.00 (559) 22.00 (559) 27.00 (686) 23.50 (597) 30.50 (775) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054)
B 10.25 (260) 10.25 (260) 10.25 (260) 10.25 (260) 16.75 (425) 16.75 (425) 19.75 (502) 19.75 (502) 19.75 (502) 19.75 (502)
C 9.75 (248) 9.75 (248) 9.75 (248) 9.75 (248) 11.75 (298) 11.75 (298) 15.75 (400) 15.75 (400) 15.75 (400) 15.75 (400)
D 12.25 (311) 12.25 (311) 12.25 (311) 12.25 (311) 18.75 (476) 18.75 (476) 20.25 (514) 20.25 (514) 20.25 (514) 20.25 (514)
E 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 5.75 (146) 5.75 (146) 7.75 (197)a 7.75 (197) 7.75 (197) 7.75 (197)
F 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 2.50 (64) 5.75 (146) 5.75 (146) 7.00 (178) 7.00 (178) 7.00 (178) 7.00 (178)
G 24.00 (610) 29.00 (737) 29.00 (737) 29.00 (737) 32.50 (826) 39.50 (1003) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054)
H 11.25 (286) 11.25 (286) 11.25 (286) 11.25 (286) 13.50 (343) 13.50 (343) 18.00 (457) 18.00 (457) 18.00 (457) 18.00 (457)
J1 3.50 (89) 3.50 (89) 3.25 (83) 3.25 (83) 4.00 (102) 4.00 (102) — — — —
K1 2.25 (57) 2.25(57) 3.25 (83) 3.25 (83) 3.25 (83) 3.25 (83) — — — —
Legend: a 200%N Applications

A = Length of enclosure including handle - for F-Frame Rated <200A use L-Frame Dims.
B = Height of enclosure - for J-Frame Rated <400A use L-Frame Dims.
- for 400A Fusible switch use 600A Switch Dims.
C = Depth of enclosure
D = Height of enclosure including optional handle location
E = Extension of plug above top of busway
F = Extension of plug below bottom of busway
G = Cover (depth) clearance for enclosure
H = Depth of enclosure from handle to edge of busway
J = Knockout/ pilot hole location (horizontal)
K = Knockout/ pilot hole location (vertical)

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Sentron SLVB Bus Plugs—Fusible
S L V B R 3 2 1 0 G a
Plug Type
SL = Sentron II
Heavy Duty Fusible Switch
VB
Orientation
R = Vertical
H = Horizontal
Configuration (Poles/Wires)
3 = 3Ø3W
13
4 = 3Ø4W
5 = 3Ø4W 200% Neutral b
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Voltage
2 = 240V
6 = 600V
Max Ampere Rating
1 = 30A
2 = 60A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
5 = 400A
6 = 600A
IP Rating
0 = IP40
4 = IP55
Ground Designation
G = Internal Ground
IG = Isolated Ground
a The G and IG digits are used to specify internal and isolated ground
respectively. Integral (housing) ground plugs do not require this digit.
(Ex. SLID3610, SLEC360150ED6)
b Available through 400A only.

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Fusible Bus Plugs Selection
Fusible Bus Plugs

The Sentron SLVB Bus Plug meets
all UL and CSA standards to Sentron SLVB Fusible Bus Plugs are
assure reliable performance in all available in 30, 60, 100, 200, 400 and
environments. The installer and end 600 amp ratings (compatible with H, R,
user will appreciate new features like T, K and J fuses).
Highly Visible Position Indicator, Dual
Stab Busway Interlocks, Dual Cover
Interlocks, and Bolt-on Mounting.
13
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Standard Fusible, Bus Plug Ratings
Plug-In Max. Fuse Kits Max. Short Circuit
Units Series Rating Fused Switch Fuse Class R Fuse Kits T Fuse Kits Current Rating
SLVB_21 30A, 240V H, K, R SLR2030 — 200kA, 240V, 3ph
SLVB_61 30A, 600V H, K, R, J SLR6030 — 200kA, 600V, 3ph
SLVB_22 60A, 240V H, K, R SLR2060 — 200kA, 240V, 3ph
SLVB_62 60A, 600V H, K, R, J SLR6060 — 200kA, 600V, 3ph
SLVB_23 100A, 240V H, K, R, J, T SLR2100 SLT2100 200kA, 240V, 3ph
Standard Fusible, Bus Plug Horsepower Ratings

Plug-In Fused Switch 240V, 1 ph 240V, 3 ph 480V, 3 ph 600V, 3 ph
Units Series Max. Rating Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max.
SLVB_21 30A, 240V 1.5 3.0 3.0 7.5 — — — —
SLVB_61 30A, 600V — — — — 5.0 15.0 7.5 20.0
SLVB_22 60A, 240V 3.0 10.0 7.5 15.0 — — — —
SLVB_62 60A, 600V — — — — 15.0 30.0 15.0 50.0
SLVB_23 100A, 240V 7.5 15.0 15.0 30.0 — — — —
SLVB_63 100A, 600V — — — — 25.0 60.0 30.0 75.0
SLVB_24 200A, 240V 15.0 — 25.0 60.0 — — — —
SLVB_64 200A, 600V — — — — 50.0 125.0 60.0 150.0
SLVB_25 400A, 240V 15.0 — 50.0 125.0 — — — —
SLVB_65 400A, 600V — — — — 100.0 250.0 125.0 350.0
SLVB_26 600A, 240V 15.0 — 75.0 200.0 — — — —
SLVB_66 600A, 600V — — — — 150.0 400.0 200.0 500.0

Sentron® SLVB Bus Plugs
Bus Plugs / Fusible Plugs Selection
Ampere Catalogue Ampere Catalogue Catalogue
Rating Number Rating Number Number
3-Pole, 250 Volt a 4-Pole, 250 Volt,a 200% Neutrala
30A SLVB*3210 30A SLVB*4210 SLVB*5210
SLVB*3210G SLVB*4210G SLVB*5210G
SLVB*3210IG SLVB*4210IG SLVB*5210IG
60A SLVB*3220 60A SLVB*4220 SLVB*5220
100A SLVB*3230 100A SLVB*4230 SLVB*5230
200A SLVB*3240 200A SLVB*4240 SLVB*5240
13
400Ab SLVB*3250 400Ab SLVB*4250 SLVB*5250

BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
600Ab SLVB*3260 600Ab SLVB*4260

SLVB*3260G SLVB*4260G
SLVB*3260IG SLVB*4260IG
Ampere Catalogue Ampere Catalogue Catalogue

Rating Number Rating Number Number
3-Pole, 600 Volt a 4-Pole, 600 Volta 200% Neutrala
30A SLVB*3610 30A SLVB*4610 SLVB*5610
60A SLVB*3620 60A SLVB*4620 SLVB*5620
100A SLVB*3630 100A SLVB*4630 SLVB*5630
200A SLVB*3640 200A SLVB*4640 SLVB*5640
400Ab SLVB*3650 400Ab SLVB*4650 SLVB*5650
600Ab SLVB*3660 600Ab SLVB*4660
SLVB*3660G SLVB*4660G
SLVB*3660IG SLVB*4660IG
Note: Replace * in catalog number with “H” for horizontal applications and “R” for riser applications.
Ground Detector And

Potentializer Plug Fuse Adapter Kits
Catalogue Class R Class T Class J
Description Number Switch Std Fuse Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue
For 2 or 3-pole Rating Class Number Number Number
240 and 480 volt
service. SLPGR3140G
250V
30Ac H, K SLR2030
Note: Available in IP40 construction only. 60Ac H, K SLR2060
100Ac H, K SLR2100 SLT2100
Catalogue 200Ac H, K SLR2200 SLT2200
Description Number 400Ab H, K, J SLR2400 SLT2400
600Ab H, K, J SLR2600 SLT2600 SLJ2600
Spring Kit SXSK
Note: Used on 400A and larger bus plugs that
600V
require auxiliary support and that are mounted 30Ac H, K, J SLR6030
on vertical/riser busway. Kit contains two springs 60Ac H, K, J SLR6060
(part number 32-9909-04). One kit required per bus 100Ac H, K, J SLR6100 SLT6100
plug. Spring kits are automatically included when 200Ac H, K, J SLR6200 SLT6200
400A and larger bus plug is selected.
400Ab H, K, J SLR6400 SLT6400
600Ab H, K, J SLR6600 SLT6600 SLJ6600
a All plugs shown are rated IP40; if IP55 rating is desired, c Fuse kits per page 3-21, General and Heavy Duty Safety
substitute a “4” for “0” in position 8. Switch Accessories.
b 400A and larger bus plugs require auxiliary support. See
also SXSK Spring Kit.

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Fusible Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights Selection
Horizontal Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions and Weighs (Enclosure Only)

Ampere “D Weight
Rating “A” “B” “C” max.” “E” “F” “J” “K” “L” “M” “N” “P” lbs (kg)
13.13 13.86 7.96 2.60 6.18 2.66 2.65 2.06 9.81 6.22 5.30 8.63
30 23.5 (10.66)
(333) (352) (202) (66) (156) (67) (67) (52) (249) (157) (134) (219)
13.13 14.86 7.96 2.60 7.18 2.66 2.65 2.06 9.81 6.22 5.30 9.63
60 25.5 (11.56)
(333) (377) (202) (66) (182) (67) (67) (52) (249) (157) (134) (244)
13.13 15.86 7.96 2.60 8.18 2.66 2.65 2.06 9.81 6.22 5.30 10.53
100 28.0 (12.70)
(333) (402) (202) (66) (207) (67) (67) (52) (249) (157) (134) (267)
14.88 22.86 10.58 2.60 15.88 2.66 3.40 3.06 9.81 7.95 5.27 17.59
200 49.0 (22.22)
(377) (580) (268) (66) (403) (67) (86) (78) (249) (201) (134) (447)
13
18.63 25.48 15.67 5.50 12.67 7.67 12.15 3.06 11.80 9.43 11.91 15.14
400 100.0 (254)
(473) (647) (398) (140) (322) (195) (309) (78) (299) (239) (303) (385)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
18.63 25.48 15.67 5.50 12.67 7.67 12.15 3.06 11.80 9.43 11.91 15.14
600 100.0 (254)
(473) (647) (398) (140) (322) (195) (309) (78) (299) (239) (303) (385)

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Fusible Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights Selection
Riser Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions and Weighs (Enclosure Only)
Ampere “D Weight
Rating “A” “B” “C” max.” “E” “F” “J” “K” “L” “M” “N” “P” lbs (kg)
10.13 13.86 7.96 5.25 2.74 2.36 2.65 2.06 8.06 5.08 7.8 6.06
30 23.5 (10.66)
(257) (352) (202) (133) (69) (59) (67) (52) (204) (129) (198) (154)
10.13 14.86 7.96 5.25 2.74 2.36 2.65 2.06 8.06 2.08 7.8 7.06
60 25.5 (11.56)
(257) (377) (202) (133) (69) (59) (67) (52) (204) (52) (198) (179)
11.13 15.86 7.96 5.25 7.74 3.36 2.65 2.06 8.06 6.08 7.8 8.06
100 28.0 (12.70)
(282) (402) (202) (133) (196) (85) (67) (52) (204) (154) (198) (205)
14.88 22.86 10.58 5.90 5.11 4.74 3.40 3.06 10.42 7.35 9.05 13.81
200 49.0 (22.22)
(377) (580) (268) (149) (129) (120) (86) (78) (264) (186) (230) (351)
13
18.63 25.48 15.67 5.50 6.60 7.10 12.15 3.06 11.97 9.25 13.56 13.49
400 100.0 (2540)
(473) (647) (398) (140) (167) (180) (309) (78) (304) (234) (344) (342)
18.63 25.48 15.67 5.50 6.60 7.10 12.15 3.06 11.97 9.25 13.56 13.49
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
600 100.0 (2540)

(473) (647) (398) (140) (167) (180) (309) (78) (304) (234) (344) (342)
Fusible Switch Plug, Load Lugs, and Knockouts

Ampere Ground Lug Neutral Lug Phase Lug
Rating Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Knockout Sizes Inches (mm)
30 #14-1/0 #14-2 #14-2 7/8 (22)
60 #14-1/0 #14-1/0 #14-2 7/8 (22)
100 #14-1/0 #14-1/0 #14-1/0 7/8 (22)
200 #14-1/0 #6-300MCM #6-300MCM 7/8 (22)
400 (2)#6-350MCM (2) 1/0-250MCM or (1) 1/0-750MCM (2) 1/0-250MCM or (1) 1/0-750MCM 7/8 (22)
600 (2)#6-350MCM (4) 1/0-250MCM or (2) 1/0-750MCM (4) 1/0-250MCM or (2) 1/0-750MCM 7/8 (22)

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Wall Clearance and Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions Dimensions
Wall Clearance and Bus Plug Dimensions
Horizontal (Inches/mm)
No Cradle
Dim. 30 60 100 200 400 600
A 13.13 13.13 13.13 14.88 18.63 18.63
(333) (333) (333) (377) (473) (473)
B 13.86 14.86 15.86 22.86 27.00 27.00
(352) (377) (402) (580) (686) (686)
C 7.96 7.96 7.96 10.58 15.67 15.67
(202) (202) (202) (268) (398) (398)
D 15.89 16.68 17.68 24.66 20.00 20.00
(403) (423) (449) (626) (508) (508)
E 6.19 7.19 8.19 15.19 12.67 12.67
13
(157) (182) (208) (385) (322) (322)
F 2.67 2.67 2.67 2.67 7.67 7.67
(67) (67) (67) (67) (195) (195)
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
G 20.39 20.39 20.39 24.76 33.75 33.75
(517) (517) (517) (628) (857) (857)
H 13.09 13.09 13.09 16.55 21.17 21.17
(332) (332) (332) (420) (538) (538)
J 2.65 2.65 2.65 3.40 12.15 12.15
(67) (67) (67) (86) (309) (309)
K 2.06 2.06 2.06 3.06 3.06 3.06
(52) (52) (52) (78) (78) (78)
L 2.65 2.65 2.65 2.65 2.65 2.65
(67) (67) (67) (67) (67) (67)
M 15.07 15.07 15.07 16.82 21.00 21.00
(382) (382) (382) (427) (533) (533)
Wall Clearance and Bus Plug Dimensions

Riser (Inches/mm)
No Cradle
Dim. 30 60 100 200 400 600
A 10.13 10.13 11.13 14.68 18.63 18.63
(237) (257) (282) (372) (473) (473)
B 13.86 14.86 15.86 22.86 27.00 27.00
(352) (377) (402) (580) (686) (686)
C 7.96 7.96 7.96 10.58 15.67 15.67
(202) (202) (202) (268) (398) (398)
D 15.89 16.68 17.68 24.66 20.00 20.00
(403) (423) (449) (626) (508) (508)
E 2.74 2.74 7.74 5.11 6.60 6.60
(69) (69) (196) (129) (167) (167)
F 2.36 2.36 3.36 4.74 7.10 7.10
(59) (59) (85) (120) (180) (180)
G 17.39 17.39 18.39 24.76 33.75 33.75
(441) (441) (467) (628) (857) (857)
H 13.09 13.09 13.09 16.55 21.17 21.17
(332) (332) (332) (420) (538) (538)
J 2.65 2.65 2.65 3.40 12.15 12.15
(67) (67) (67) (86) (309) (309)
K 2.06 2.06 2.06 3.06 3.06 3.06
(52) (52) (52) (78) (78) (78)
L 3.55 3.55 3.55 3.55 2.65 2.65
(90) (90) (90) (90) (67) (67)
M 12.07 12.07 13.07 16.82 21.00 21.00
(306) (306) (331) (427) (533) (533)

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs Technical
The Siemens advantage...

Siemens history of innovation and Low Exposure Applications - TPS9
safety continues with our line of UL b 100kA per phase
1449 4th Edition SPD’s. The TPS Series
b 200kA SCCR
utilizes thermally protected MOV’s
specifically designed for safe operation b 20kA nominal discharge current
in high fault current or sustained b Indicator lights standard
overvoltage conditions that can cause b Individually fused, thermally protected MOV’s
other SPD’s to fail in an unsafe manner
and damage other equipment in the b Dry contacts and audible alarm optional
13
distribution system. Every MOV,

including N-G, is monitored. Indicator Medium Exposure Applications - TPS1
lights for each phase provide indication
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
b 100kA – 300kA per phase

of loss of protection and phase loss
protection. The direct bus, integral b 200kA SCCR
design reduces circuit impedance b 20kA nominal discharge current
resulting in the lowest possible let- b Indicator lights, audible alarm and dry contacts standard
through voltages providing maximum
b Individually fused, thermally protected MOV’s
protection to facility equipment and
systems. b EMI/RFI filtering
b Surge counter optional
All TPS Series SPD’s:
b UL 1449 4th Edition Listed, CUL, CE
Mark High Exposure Applications - TPS6
b 400kA – 500kA per phase
b Designed, tested, manufactured to
ANSI/IEEE C62.42.1 – 2002, C62.41.2 b 200kA SCCR
– 2002, C62.45 – 2002 b 20kA nominal discharge current
b Provide indication of loss of protection b Indicator lights, audible alarm and dry contacts standard
on each phase and phase loss
b Individually fused, thermally protected MOV’s
b Include all UL-required over current
protection and safety coordination inside b EMI/RFI filtering
b Prevent internally generated surges b Surge counter optional
from propagating throughout a facility
and externally generated surges from
reaching sensitive loads

Sentron® SLVB Bus Plugs
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs Catalog Number Logic
Sentron SPD Bus Plug Numbering System
S T P H 4 4 G E 0 6 2 4
Plug Type
STP = Sentron SPD VBII
Orientation
H = Horizontal
R = Riser
Configuration (Poles/Wires)
3 = 3Ø 3W
13
4 = 3Ø 4W
IP Rating
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
4 = IP55
Ground Designation
G = Internal Ground
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V 1Ø 3W
B = 240/120V 3Ø 4W
D = 240V 3Ø 3W
E = 480Y/277V 3Ø 4W
F = 480V 3Ø 3W
G = 600V 3Ø 3W
L = 600Y/347V 3Ø 4W
TPS Model Number
01 = TPS3 01c
1L = TPS3 L1 (10 Mode)ac
06 = TPS3 06c
6L = TPS3 L6 (10 Mode)ac
09 = TPS3 09b
Surge Current (kA)
10 = 100kA per Phase TPS3 01, TPS3 09
15 = 150kA per Phase TPS3 L1
20 = 200kA per Phase TPS3 01
25 = 250KA per phase TPS3 01
30 = 300kA per Phase TPS3 01, TPS3 L1
45 = 450kA per Phase TPS3 L6
Options
TPS3 01 and TPS3 06:
R = Remote Monitor
X = Surge Counter
TPS 9:
D = Dry Contact & Audible Alarm
Notes:
a The 10 mode devices provide additional circuit protection for Line to Neutral and Neutral to Ground. The 10 modes of protection are:
L1-G, L2-G, L3-G, L1-L2, L2-L3, L1-L3, L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, N-G.
b Standard features: indicator lights.
c Standard features: indicator lights, dry contacts, audible alarm with silence switch, test button.

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs Technical
Horizontal SPD bus plugs dimensions and weights
Plug type “A” “B” “C” “D” max. “E” “F” Weight lbs. (kgs)
TPS 9 13.25 (336) 13.86 (352) 7.96 (202) 2.60 (66) 6.18 (156) 2.66 (67) 30 (13.63)
TPS 1 13.25 (336) 15.86 (402) 7.96 (202) 2.60 (66) 8.18 (207) 2.66 (67) 35 (15.90)
TPS 6 13.25 (336) 19.86 (504) 7.96 (202) 2.60 (66) 12.18 (372) 2.66 (67) 38 (17.27)
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Riser SPD bus plugs dimensions and weights

Plug type “A” “B” “C” “D” max. “E” “F” Weight lbs. (kgs)
TPS 9 10.25 (260) 13.86 (352) 7.96 (202) 5.25 (133) 2.74 (69) 2.36 (59) 25 (11.36)
TPS 1 11.25 (286) 19.36 (492) 7.96 (202) 5.25 (133) 7.74 (196) 3.36 (85) 35 (15.90)
TPS 6 15.00 (381) 22.86 (580) 10.58 (268) 5.25 (133) 5.11 (129) 4.74 (120) 45 (20.45)

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs Technical
Product Overview
The Sentron 3/6 bus plug is designed for light industrial, Product Application
commercial, and data center applications. Factory installed Building your metered network of Sentron 3/6 bus plugs is
receptacles range from 10 to 100A per pole, and the bus plug easy. There are two variations of metered bus plugs, simple
allows for anywhere between 1 and 6 poles of distribution meter plugs (child) and controller plugs (parent). Each SEM3™
(i.e. two 3Ø receptacles per plug). This product combines controller can monitor 42 bus plug poles. Depending on the
plug-and-play capabilities, minimizing installation time and number of metered poles per bus plug in the network, one
cost, with the option for preconfigured embedded branch parent controller plug can monitor between 6 to 41 bus plugs.
circuit metering utilizing SEM3™. An example showing a network of seven 6-pole bus plugs
is shown below (in this case there is one controller and six
metered plugs). Upstream of the controller, outputs from
13
multiple controller plugs may be consolidated at an Ethernet
switch (shown below) or integrated directly into a building or
site management system.
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Metered Bus Plug 1 Metered Bus Plug 2 Metered Bus Plug 3 Controller Bus Plug 1 Metered Bus Plug 4 Metered Bus Plug 5 Metered Bus Plug 6
600V Isolated 600V Isolated 600V Isolated 600V Isolated 600V Isolated 600V Isolated
Siemens Cable Siemens Cable Siemens Cable Siemens Cable Siemens Cable Siemens Cable
8 Port Ethernet Switch
Controller Bus Plug 2
CAT6 Cable
CAT6 Cable
CAT6 Cable
The function of the Ethernet switch is to aggregate signals being

generated by each SEM3 controller. Each SEM3 controller bus plug may
Controller Bus Plug 3 monitor up to 42 poles. Metered bus plugs may have between 1 and 6
metered poles. SEM3 may also be embedded in other electrical
equipment such as switchboards or panels, providing a comprehensive
power monitoring solution.
Power Monitoring System/Building

CAT6 Cable
Management System/SCADA

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Sentron 3/6 Bus Plugs—Circuit Breaker (Installed)
B P S A 1 A 0 A 1 A 0 0 N N
Prefix
BP = Bus Plug
Type
S = Sentron
Enclosure
A =13 x 10in (60A max branch, corded receptacle)
C = 13 x 14in (60A max branch, flush mount receptacle)
D = 13 x 14in (100A max branch, any receptacle)
13
System Configuration
1 = 3Ø
2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd
5 = 3Ø + Neutral
6 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd
7 = 3Ø + Neutral + Isolated Grd
9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
0 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral + Internal Grd
Z = 3Ø + 200%
Color
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
Connection Type
0 = Enclosure Only
1 = Breaker Only
2 = Flush Mount Receptacle
3 = 3ft Corded Connector
7 = Custom
Number of Circuits and Phasing
A1-D4
Breaker Frame
A = BL
B = BLH
C = HBL
D = BQD
E = NGB
Device Amps
00 = No Breaker
9A = 10A 9H = 45A
9B = 15A 9J = 50A
9C = 20A 9K = 60A
9D = 25A 9L = 70A
9E = 30A 9M = 80A
9F = 35A 9N = 90A
9G = 40A 9P = 100A
Metering System
N = None
C = SEM3 Controller
M = SEM3 Meter Only
Meter Type
N = None
G = 3 Meter Rack, Low Accuracy Meters
H = 3 Meter Rack, High Accuracy Meters
X = 6 Meter Rack, Low Accuracy Meters
Y = 6 Meter Rack, High Accuracy Meters

Third
Angle
Proj
Sentron® Bus Plugs
0
Rev
Sht
1
421799
Product Configurations
Field Wire-able Bus Plug
Field Wire-able Bus Plug
Dwg. No.
b Enclosure height of 14.20" E C
A F
b Customer supplied receptacle or corded connector
421799
b Stocking program for specific variants Third
Angle
Proj
Non-Metered Bus Plug
0
Rev
b Standard enclosure height of 10.18" at 60A (per pole) and below
Filename:
3
B
Sht
b Enclosure height of 14.20" for all surface mounted receptacle variants
421799
b Factory installed corded or surface mount receptacles/connectors
D
13
Metered Bus Plug
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Dwg. No.
b Standard enclosure height of 10.18" at 60A (per pole) and below

b Enclosure height of 14.20" for all surface mounted receptacle variants
421799
Non-Metered Bus Plug

b Factory installed corded or surface mount receptacles/connectors Unless otherwise specified
5/9/2016
dimensions are in inches
Date
E C A .
Tolerances are non-cumulative F
H
421750
- Denotes latest changes

b Preconfigured SEM3 meter rack (slave) REPRESENTATIVE OF SENTRON BPSC & BPSD W/O CONTROLLER and are as follows unless
- Critical Dimension
specified otherwise.
.XX 0.02
3B-542T
ECN
.XXX 0.005
Angular 2
Do not scale drawing
Model Name:
Dwg
Dwn S. PEVER Date 05/09/16
Controller Bus Plug
Rev
Chk SEP Date 05/09/16
Filename:
Q
0
Scal
Apvd SEP Date 05/09/16
b Standard enclosure height of 10.18" at 60A (per pole) and below B

b Enclosure height of 14.20" for all surface mounted receptacle variants I
b Factory installed corded or surface mount receptacles/connectors
D
b Preconfigured SEM3 meter rack and controller (master)
Product Configurations
Circuit • 1-6 poles of distribution Unless otherwise speci
• 10-100A per pole Metered Bus Plug
5/9/2016
dimensions are in inche
Date
.
Tolerances are non-cum
• 100 and 200% neutral options

421750

and are as follows unle
REPRESENTATIVE OF SENTRON BPSA W/O CONTROLLER
A .XX
Siemens Breaker Frames BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, NGB
3B-542T
ECN
.XXX
Angular
Do not scale d
Model Name:
Load Connection • Field wired (with KO's), no receptacles Dwn S. PEVER D
Rev
SEP
• Surface or flush mount receptacles
Chk D
Q
0
Apvd SEP D
• Corded Connector(s) or receptacle(s) at 3, 5, 7, or 10 ft

Branch Circuit Metering • Meter only lug or meter and controller plug
(SEM3™) • 3 and 6 meter racks available B
• Low (1%) and high (.2%) accuracy meters available
Controller Bus Plug

E F
C A
10.18 I
D
6.61

REPRESENTATIVE OF BPSA W/CONTROLLER
Sentron® Bus Plugs
Corded Bus Plug (Non-Metered and Metered) Dimensions and Weights
Ampere Weight lbs.
Rating “A” “B” “C” “D”. “E” “F” “G” “H” “I” (kgs)*
10-60A 13.21 (336) 10.18 (259) 7.64 (194) 4.12 (105) 1.03 (26) 6.93 (176) 6.29 (160) 3.55 (90) 6.64 (169) 21 (9.52)
70-100A 13.21 (336) 14.20 (361) 7.64 (194) 8.12 (206) 1.03 (26) 6.93 (176) 6.29 (160) 3.55 (90) 10.64 (270) 23 (10.43)
*Approximate weight without cord of heaviest plug in amperage range.
Third
Angle
Proj
0
Rev
3
Sht
421799
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Dwg. No.
421799
OF PLUG IN BASE
E C A F G
H
Filename:
I
D
Unless otherwise specified

5/9/2016
dimensions are in inches Confidential Property of

Date
.
Tolerances are non-cumulative
421750
and are as follows unless

REPRESENTATIVE OF SENTRON BPSA W/O CONTROLLER .XX .02
DIMENSION DRAWING
3B-542T
SENTRON 3/6 BUS PLUGS

ECN
.XXX .005
Angular 2
Corded Bus Plug (Controller) Dimensions and Weights Do not scale drawing
SENTRON BUSWAY
Model Name:
Dwg No Rev
421799 0
Rev

Q
1.000
0
Scale Sheet 3 of 4
Ampere Weight lbs.

Rating “A” “B” “C” “D”. “E” “F” “G” “H” “I” (kgs)*
10-60A 17.64 (448) 10.20 (259) 7.64 (194) 4.12 (105) 1.03 (26) 6.93 (176) 10.71 (272) 3.55 (90) 6.64 (169) 29 (13.15)
70-100A 17.64 (448) 14.20 (361) 7.64 (194) 8.12 (206) 1.03 (26) 6.93 (176) 10.71 (272) 3.55 (90) 10.64 (270) 31 (14.06)

Sentron® Bus Plugs
Surface Mount Receptacle Bus Plug (Non-Metered and Metered) Dimensions and Weights
Ampere Weight
Rating “A” “B” “C” “D”. “E” “F” “G” “H” “I” lbs. (kgs)*
10-100A 13.21 (336) 14.20 (361) 7.64 (194) 8.12 (206) 1.03 (26) 6.93 (176) 6.29 (160) 3.55 (90) 10.64 (270) 23 (10.43)
Third
Angle
Proj
0
Rev
Sht
1
421799
13
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
OF PLUG IN BASE
Dwg. No.
E C
A F G
421799
H
Filename:
I
D

5/9/2016

Date
.
Surface Mount Receptacle Bus Plug (Controller) Dimensions and Weights

421750
REPRESENTATIVE OF SENTRON BPSC & BPSD W/O CONTROLLER and are as follows unless
.XX 0.02
DIMENSION DRAWING
3B-542T

ECN
.XXX 0.005
Dimensions inches (mm) Angular 2

SENTRON BUSWAY
Model Name:
Dwg No Rev
Ampere 421799 Weight
0
Rev

Q
1.000
0
Scale Sheet 1 of 4
SEP 05/09/16
Rating “A” “B” “C” “D”. “E” “F” “G” “H” “I” lbs. (kgs)*
Apvd Date
10-100A 17.64 (448) 14.20 (361) 7.64 (194) 8.12 (206) 1.03 (26) 6.93 (176) 10.71 (272) 3.55 (90) 10.64 (270) 33 (14.97)
Third
Angle
Proj
0
Rev
2
Sht
421799
Dwg. No.
OF PLUG IN BASE
E C A F G
421799
10.20
Filename:
I
D
4.00

5/9/2016

Date
.
13-63
421750
and are as follows unless
Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue

DIMENSION DRAWING .XX .02
3B-542T

ECN
.XXX .005
REPRESENTATIVE OF BPSC & BPSD W/CONTROLLER Angular 2
SENTRON BUSWAY
Model Name:
Dwg No Rev
421799 0
Rev

Q
1.000
0
Scale Sheet 2 of 4
XJ-L HD Busway Introduction
Competitive Advantages
XJ-L HD Busway is available up to 400A. XJ-L Busway is the
leading power distribution solution for demanding applications
that require reliable, high quality power. XJ-L HD Busway is
the optimal choice for both contractors and users concerned
with designing superior electrical systems that require a high
plug density and optimal space utilization.
Competitive advantages:
b Compact size – small cross section for applications where
13
busway routing is constrained

b Joint Connection – dual spring clamp assemblies ensure
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
reliable, maintenance-free joints

b Safety – plug-in outlets are IP2X finger safe
b Reliability – fundamental design has a 60 year history of
reliability
b Service – simple snap together installation, maintenance
free joints, factory stock of critical components and large Key features:
distribution inventory of bus plugs ensure quick and easy
serviceability b Up to twelve 100A bus plugs can be installed per 10’ of
plug-in busway. Plug-in busway can be configured with six
b Fittings – elbow, tee, crosses, flanged end, and tap boxes plug-in openings per side (standard) or twelve on one side
are offered in standard and custom configurations (high density).
b Compatibility – the full range of XJ-L HD bus plugs are b Bus plugs are readily installed on energized busway and
interchangeable between 100A, 225A and 400A busway are fully interchangeable between 100, 225 and 400A
configurations.
b Bus plugs are available with fusible or circuit breaker
disconnects, configured with a wide variety of optional
receptacles, branch circuit breakers, drop cords, etc.
b Bus bars are solid copper (98% conductivity) and tin plated
for superior electrical performance and corrosion resistance
(optional silver plating is also available). The solid bus bar
design provides superior short circuit strength (up to 35 kA)
compared to channel style conductors and cable.
b Totally enclosed steel housing is robust, guarding against
incidental contact and contamination of live parts. Enclosed
box design will not twist or distort during bus plug
installation.
b Installation is fast and easy. Joint connections simply snap
together without special tools, housing couplers, or bus
connectors.
b Suitable for horizontal and vertical mounting and under-the
floor applications.

XJ-L HD Busway Overview
XJ-L HD Busway system to application-specific
XJ-L HD Busway is well known for its are held securely in place by spring customer requirements. Bus Plugs
outstanding performance, providing pressure clips located in the joint can be installed, then relocated as
convenient, cost-effective power insulator. The joint is secured when required without de-energizing the
distribution for high-tech environments, the external housing plate is attached busway. All XJ-L HD Bus Plugs are
data centers, laboratories, and other with captive screws. Thanks to built-in fully interchangeable with all XJ-L HD
applications requiring consistent, flexibility and a low initial cost, you also Busway configurations.
quality power distribution. Key XJ-L benefit from future savings when you
HD design features include optional need new equipment. Cost
isolated ground or 200% neutral across Siemens XJ-L HD Busway offers a
the entire product range. Time to add on busway for new or lower cost solution, compared to cable
expanded facilities? The XJ-L Busway and conduit, sandwich style busway
13
As a result, XJ-L HD Busway is an you installed years ago matches the or even light duty track busway. Snap
intelligent choice for contractors XJ-L HD Busway you specify today together installation requires no special
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
and users concerned with designing and years from now the new busway tools and is fast, easy and maintenance
superior electrical distribution systems. sections, components or system- free. Solid, highly conductive bus bars
The compact design is ideal for compatible bus plugs will still fit. minimize electrical losses and ensure
limited working areas in critical power, long-term energy savings.
manufacturing, laboratory test facilities, Dependability
schools, hospitals, and machine shops. With over one million feet in service, Equipment protection
XJ-L HD Busway has a proven track Critical equipment is protected via
With XJ-L HD Busway, you get an record. The busway joints are easy fuse or circuit breaker plugs. Due to
exclusive, optional isolated ground to install and maintenance free. Solid their proximity, the plugs provide a
design that ensures clean power. copper bus bars and totally enclosed localized method of protection and
Unlike bonded ground designs that steel housings are designed for isolated disconnection.
may convey surges from one electrical decades of dependable service.
device to another, the XJ-L HD optional Space
isolated ground system is well suited Flexibility Space in critical power/data center
for critical power environments. The Siemens XJ-L HD Busway is available facilities is at a premium. XJ-L HD
ground bar is the same size as the in a wide variety of straight lengths, Busway requires less space than
phase bars, with the same ampere elbows, tees, crosses, and tap boxes conventional power distribution
rating. Installation is easy, joining one that can be installed and then readily methods such as cable and conduit.
XJ-L HD Busway section to another expanded or reconfigured to meet
is as simple as matching ends and changing requirements. Custom Availability
snapping them together. Bus bars fittings and straight lengths can be XJ-L HD plugs are stocked to meet
engineered to tailor the busway your quick-ship requirements. Once
you factor in all the advantages, XJ-L
HD is clearly the best choice for
reliable, flexible, and economical power
distribution for data centers, light
industrial, and high tech applications.

XJ-L HD Busway Specifications
XJ-L HD Busway is available in 100A, Note: The 200% neutral bar can be the joint insulator. The housings are
225A and 400A ratings making it the utilized as Isolated Ground. connected via external housing plates
right choice for light industrial and and captive screws.
commercial applications where low The internal ground bus is 100% rated
initial startup and maintenance costs for 100A, 60% rated for 225A, and 50% Bus plugs
are prerequisites. XJ-L HD Busway is for 400A busway. Isolated ground is There are twleve plug-in outlets on
the most logical choice for high tech, rated at 100% for both amperages. each 10 foot (3.048 m) section, six
data intensive environments, especially openings on 5 foot (1.524 m) sections
when isolated ground is required. Plating and two outlets on 2 foot (.616 m)
The entire length of the bus bar is tin sections. Bus plugs are available with
Housing plated to ensure good electrical amperages ranging from 15A to 200A.
XJ-L HD Busway features a totally contact at all joint and plug tap-off Bus plugs feature circuit breakers or
13
enclosed, non-ventilated, steel points. The plating also serves to fusible switch disconnects.
housing. The housing is covered with protect the bars from corrosion.
Testing
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
an electrostatically applied polyester Optional silver plating is available.

urethane powder paint. Choice of Each piece of XJ-L HD Busway is
colors: ASA#61 Gray or Graphite Gray. Plug-in base factory tested prior to shipment. A
The paint is scratch resistant and has a XJ-L HD Busway features multiple plug- dielectric test is performed to ensure
500 hour salt spray rating. in locatons. The plastic, non-tracking product integrity. XJ-L HD Busway
outlets are located on 20 or 9.75 inch is manufactured and inspected in
Conductors centers and support the bus bars accordance to an ISO 9001 registered
The conductors are fabricated from providing bracing during short circuit Quality Management System.
98% conductivity copper. The bars conditions. The plug-in outlets are IP2X
are “spaced-in-air” and held securely (finger safe). Standards
in the housing by the plug-in outlets XJ-L HD Busway products meet the
and joints. Joint connection following standards:
Busway sections are connected via a UL 857
Neutral maintenance-free, spring pressure joint. NEMA BU1
100% neutral is available for standard 4 The busway ends are easily aligned and CSA C22.2
wire applications. A second neutral bar bus bar ends are held securely in place
can be added for 200% neutral capacity. by spring pressure clips located in Ratings
Amperage: 100A, 225A and 400A
Voltage: 600 VAC maxa
Short circuit: 100A – 10kAIC
225A – 22kAIC
400A – 35kAIC
R,X,Z and voltage drop

Bus bar width Ohm x 10-3 per 100 ft. Voltage drop – concentrated loads, line-to-line per 100 ft.
Ampere x .125 in. (3.2 mm) Line to neutral at 100% rated load, 35°C ambient power factor
rating thick R X Z 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
100 0.50 (13.0) 1.67 8.71 1.88 2.30 2.54 2.75 2.94 3.10 3.21 3.25 2.89
225 1.00 (25.4) 8.20 4.08 9.16 2.48 2.74 2.98 3.19 3.37 3.51 3.57 3.20
400 2.13 (54.1) 4.27 3.01 5.23 2.88 3.10 3.29 3.44 3.56 3.62 3.57 2.96
a 225A three phase four or five wire has 277/480V max

Straight Sections
Plug-in section Plug-in Busway Only
Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Configuration Color Plug-In Location Plug-In Spacing
BW J P 1 2 0 1 6 G L 2
Length: 1 = 100 1 = 3Ø A = Graphite L = Left Side Only 1 = 20” Dual Sidea
024 = 24 inches 2 = 225 2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd G = ANSI 61 R = Right Side Only 2 = 9.75” Single
060 = 60 inches 4 = 400 3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd X = Other S = Dual Side Sideb
XJ-L HD 120 = 120 inches 4 = 3Ø + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
5 = 3Ø + Neutral
Plug-in 7 = 3Ø + Neutral + Isolated Grd
8 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd Notes:
9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral a Use for Plug-in Length = “S”
0 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral + Internal Ground b Use for Plug-in Length = “L” or “R”
13
Plug-in sections
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Available in 10 foot (3.048 m), 5 foot (1.524 m) or 2 foot (.616 m) standard plug-in lengths, XJ-L HD
Busway offers layout flexibility to meet custom requirements. Plug-in busway can be configured with
six plug-in openings per side or twelve on one side.
Feeder Section
Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Configuration Color
BW J F 1 2 0 1 6 G
Length in inches, 1 = 100 1 = 3Ø A = Graphite
Ex. 2’ 3” = 024 2 = 225 2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd G = ANSI 61
XJ-L HD Feeder lengths 4 = 400 3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd X = Other
available from 4 = 3Ø + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
16” (016) up to 5 = 3Ø + Neutral
Feeder 10’ 0” (120) 6 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd
8 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
0 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral + Internal Ground
Feeder Sections
Feeder busway carries the current of the busway system from the supply source. Feeder busway does
not have plug-in outlets. Feeder busway is available in custom lengths from 16.00 in (406mm) to 120.00
in (3048mm). Feeder sections are available as Indoor.
XJ-L HD Busway also features an exclusive rotating cover plate to facilitate inspection of the joints. The light
weight design of the busway and plugs makes the installation of XJ-L HD Busway quick and trouble-free.

Straight Sections
Plug-in Section (Dual Side)
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Plug-in Section (Single Side–Right hand configuration shown)
9.75 in 9.75 in 9.75 in Top

(248 mm) (248 mm) (248 mm)
10.0 ft
(3.05 m)
4.0 in 9.75 in 9.75 in 7.0 in
(102 mm) (248 mm) (248 mm) (178 mm)
Insulator Inspection
End window
Plug-in Section
Short 3 Pole 4 Pole
Ampere Bus Bar Bar Bar Housing Housing Max Circuit Length Wgt. Wgt.
Rating Material Thickness Width Width Height Voltage Rating Ft (M) Model Numbera (lb) Model Numbera (lb)
100 Copper .125 (3.2) .5 (13) 2.0 (51) 6.13 (156) 600V 10kA 10.0 (3.05) BWJP12011GS1 42 BWJP12015GS1 45
100 Copper .125 (3.2) .5 (13) 2.0 (51) 6.13 (156) 600V 10kA 5.0 (1.52) BWJP06011GS1 21 BWJP06015GS1 23
100 Copper .125 (3.2) .5 (13) 2.0 (51) 6.13 (156) 600V 10kA 2.0 (.61) BWJP02411GS1 8 BWJP02415GS1 9
225 Copper .125 (3.2) 1.0 (25) 2.5 (64) 6.13 (156) 600V 22kA 10.0 (3.05) BWJP12021GS1 56 BWJP12025GS1 62
225 Copper .125 (3.2) 1.0 (25) 2.5 (64) 6.13 (156) 600V 22kA 2.0 (.61) BWJP02421GS1 10 BWJP02425GS1 12
400 Copper .125 (3.2) 2.12 (54) 3.6 (92) 6.13 (156) 600V 35kA 2.0 (.61) BWJP02441GS1 15 BWJP02445GS1 17
a Model Numbers Effective Aug 2011
Feeder Section
Short 3 Pole 4 Pole
Ampere Bus Bar Bar Bar Housing Housing Max Circuit Length 10' Model Wgt. 10' Model Wgt.
Rating Material Thickness Width Width Height Voltage Rating In. (mm) Numbera (lb/ft) Numbera (lb/ft)
100 Copper .125 (3.2) .5 (13) 2.0 (51) 6.13 (156) 600V 10kA BWJF12011GS1 4.2 BWJP12015GS1 4.5
16.0-120.0
225 Copper .125 (3.2) 1.0 (26) 2.5 (64) 6.13 (156) 600V 22kA BWJF12021GS1 5.6 BWJP12025GS1 6.2
(406 - 3048)
400 Copper .125 (3.2) 2.12 (54) 3.6 (92) 6.13 (156) 600V 35kA BWJF12041GS1 6.9 BWJP12045GS1 7.9

Elbows
Fittings
BW J E L E L 1 7 A
E = Edge L = Left 1 = 3Ø A = Graphite
XJ-L HD E L 1 = 100 2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd G = ANSI 61
F = Flat R = Right 2 = 225 3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd X = Other
4 = 400 4 = 3Ø + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
Elbow 5 = 3Ø + Neutral
9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
13
Flat elbows Edge elbows
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Right hand or left hand XJ-L HD Busway system 90 Right hand or left hand XJ-L HD Busway system 90
degree flat elbows are available. When specifying be degree edge elbows are available. When specifying, be
sure to use the proper catalog number suffix to identify sure to use the proper catalog number suffix to identify
the required fitting. the required fitting.
Flat Elbow Edge Elbow

Ampere Ampere
Rating Poles Model Number Right Model Number Left Rating Poles Model Number Right Model Number Left
100 3 BWJELFR11G BWJELFL11G 100 3 BWJELER11G BWJELEL11G
Edge right
Flat right elbow shown elbow shown
Insulator
end
IG
A
B
C
N
G Insulator end
IG A B C N G IG A B C N G

Tees and Crosses
Fittings
BW J C R E 2 1 7 A
1 = 3Ø A = Graphite
XJ-L HD C R E = Edge 2 1 = 100 2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd G = ANSI 61
2 = 225 3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd X = Other
Cross 5 = 3Ø + Neutral
Cross 9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
13
Crosses are fittings used to interconnect

two busway runs which are located at
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
right angle to each other.

Cross
Ampere
Rating Poles Model Number
100 3 BWJCRE211G
100 4 BWJCRE215G
225 3 BWJCRE221G
225 4 BWJCRE225G 22.0”
(559 mm)
400 3 BWJCRE241G
400 4 BWJCRE245G
Cross – Type 2
Fittings
BW J T E E 2 1 7 A
1 = 3Ø A = Graphite
XJ-L HD T E E = Edge 2,4 1 = 100 2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd G = ANSI 61
2 = 225 3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd X = Other
Tee 5 = 3Ø + Neutral
Tee 9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
Tees permit a second run of busway to extend
at right angles to a straight busway run. 4.0" 18.0" 22.0"
(102 mm) (457 mm) (559 mm)
Tees CL
Top
Ampere Insulator End
Rating Poles Model Number Model Number

Insulator End
18.0"
100 3 BWJTEE211G BWJTEE411G Tee – Type 2 (457 mm)
100 4 BWJTEE215G BWJTEE415G

225 4 BWJTEE225G BWJTEE425G 4.0"
(102 mm)
400 4 BWJTEE245G BWJTEE445G 4.0"
(102 mm)
22.0" 18.0"
(559 mm) (457 mm)
CL
Insulator End Top

Insulator End
18.0"
(457 mm)
Right Hand Shown Tee – Type 4
4.0"
(102 mm)

Tap Boxes
Center Tap Boxes Tap Box Onlyb
Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Config. Color Tap Box Steel Lug opt. Meter Meter Surface
BW J C T L N 2 4 A S A 1 N
L = Left A = Graphite S = Standard N = None N = None / NA
(rear) 1 = 100 G = ANSI 61 X = Custom / 1 = PAC3200 L = Left
XJ-L HD C T N 2 = 225 X = Other Other 2 = PAC3100 R = Right (Inspection
R = Right 4 = 400 X = Other Cover Side)
(front)
X = Other
Center Tap B ox
1 = 3Ø
2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd A = Std Mech Lug
3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd B = 1.75 Dual Hole (No Lug)
13
Notes: 4 = 3Ø + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd X = Custom / Othera
a Use X for Tap Box Steel 5 = 3Ø + Neutral D = Extended Box with 500MCM Mechanical
b Not required for Flanged End. Leave fields blank 6 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
Center Cable Tap Box 3.5” 4.0”

(89 mm) (102 mm)
Center tap boxes are non-fusible devices utilized to feed to or Figure 1
Right
take off power from the busway run. When loads served by
the busway run do not require over-current protection, center
tap boxes may be used. If the application requires additional
wiring bending space, extended center tap boxes are
available. Center tap boxes are an actual part of the busway
run and require a space of 32 in. (810 mm) for installation.
4.0” 13.0” 12.0”

3.5”
(102 mm) (330 mm) (305 mm)
(89 mm)
Figure 2
Left
3.5” 4.0”
(89 mm) (102 mm)
Right Hand Shown
6.13”
(156 mm)
Center Tap Box

Model Number Model Number Teminals Provided
Ampere Right Connected Left Connected Qty/Pole and Size
Rating Poles Fig 1 Fig 2 Cu/Al wire
225 3 BWJCTRN21GSANN BWJCTLN21GSANN (1) 350MCM - #6

Tap Boxes
End Tap Boxes Tap Box Onlyb
Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Config. Color Tap Box Steel Lug opt. Meter Meter Surface
BW J E T B R 2 4 A S A 1 R
L= A = Graphite S = Standard N = None N = None / NA
Left 1 = 100 G = ANSI 61 X = Custom / 1 = PAC3200 L = Left
XJ-L HD E T B 2 = 225 X = Other Other 2 = PAC3100 R = Right (Inspection
R= 4 = 400 X = Other Cover Side)
Right
X = Other
End Tap B ox
1 = 3Ø
2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd A = Std Mech Lug
3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd B = 1.75 Dual Hole (No Lug)
13
Notes: 4 = 3Ø + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd X = Custom / Othera

a Use X for Tap Box Steel 5 = 3Ø + Neutral D = Extended Box with 500MCM Mechanical
b Not required for Flanged End. Leave fields blank 6 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS

9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
End Tap Box

End tap boxes are devices used to connect cable and conduit
to the end of a busway run or where busway runs connect
without the need for over-current protection. End tap boxes
may be installed at the end or beginning of a run.
Tap boxes can be configured with surge protection and

current monitoring devices.
End Tap Box

Teminals Provided
Ampere Qty/Pole and Size Cu/Al
Rating Poles Model Number wire
100 3 BWJETBR11GS (1) 1/0 - #14
100 4 BWJETBR15GS (1) 1/0 - #14
225 3 BWJETBR21GS (1) 350MCM - #6
225 4 BWJETBR25GS (1) 350MCM - #6
400 3 BWJETBR41GS (2) 350MCM - #6
400 4 BWJETBR45GS (2) 350MCM - #6
16.5" 26.0"
5.2" (419.1 mm) 5.2" (660.4 mm)
16.0"
(132.1 mm) (132.1 mm) (406.4 mm)
2.8"
(71.1 mm) Right Hand Shown
9.2"
(233.7 mm)

Flanged Ends
Flanged End
Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Config. Color
BW J F R N N 2 4 A
E = Std. 1 = 100 1 = 3Ø A = Graphite
XJ-L HD 2 = 225 2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd G = ANSI 61
R = Nema 4 = 400 3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd X = Other
F N N 4 = 3Ø + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
X = Other 5 = 3Ø + Neutral
Flanged
End
9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
13
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
Flanged end
Flanged ends are used to connect busway to
switchboards. Flanged ends come complete with bus
bar extensions to facilitate the making of electrical
connections.
Flanged end
Ampere
100 3 BWJFENN11GS
100 4 BWJFENN15GS
225 3 BWJFENN21GS
225 4 BWJFENN25GS
400 3 BWJFENN41GS
400 4 BWJFENN45GS

Accessories
Busway hanger Hangers
XH2 and XH3 hangers are used to support XJ-L HD Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Color
Busway and can be used with customer supplied
rods up to 3/8 inch in diameter. Hangers are BW J H 0 0 1 1 G
adaptable for wall mounting or ceiling suspension 001 = Singe Drop Rod (XH style) 1 = 100 A = Graphite
arrangements, either edge or flat. Custom 002 = Side Mount for strut channela 2 = 225 G = ANSI 61
XJ-L HD 003 = Saddle Mount for strut channela 4 = 400 X = Other
mounting solutions available upon request. H 004 = Pole Mounta
Hanger
005 = Dual Drop Rod Saddlea
Busway Hanger 006 = Dual/Single Drop Rod Frame
Ampere Dimn A XXX = Othera
Rating Model Number in. (mm)
Notes:
100 BWJH0011G 2.25 (57) a MTO-E Custom Product
13
225 BWJH0012G 2.75 (69)

400 BWJH0014G 4 (101)
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Tip: Bus plug access may be restricted by hangers or drop

rods. This should be considered in the system layout.
End Closer
End closer Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Color
An end closer is used to
terminate busway runs. To
BW J X E N N 1 G
extend the run, simply remove X E N N 1 = 100 A = Graphite
XJ-L HD 2 = 225 G = ANSI 61
the end closer and add new
End Closer 4 = 400 X = Other
sections as needed.
End Closer
Ampere Dimn. A Dimn. B
Rating Model Number in (mm) in (mm)
100 BWJXENN1G 2.06 (52) 0.94 (24)
225 BWJXENN2G 2.31 (59) 1.44 (37)
400 BWJXENN4G 3.44 (87) 2.5 (64)
Tip: Utilization of the busway plug-in opening adjacent to the End

Closer may be limited to XQ45 bus plugs. This applies only if the End
Closer is located to the Right-hand of the bus plug.
XOC outlet covers Outlet Cover

Replacement outlet covers are Prefix Type Fitting Type Amp Color
available for closing off the plug-
in outlets when desired. BW J X O C N 1 G
Outlet Cover
X O C N 1 = 100 A = Graphite
Ampere
XJ-L HD 2 = 225 G = ANSI 61
Rating Model Numbera
4 = 400 X = Other
100 BWJXOCN1G Plug-in Cover
225 BWJXOCN2G
400 BWJXOCN4G

Bus Plugs
Bus plugs for XJ-L Busway are available
from 15A to 100A, with molded case
circuit breakers or Vacu-Break fusible XJ-L HD Bus Plugs are available
switches. All XJ-L bus plugs are fully with 3 or 6 branch circuit
interchangeable with all XJ-L Busway protection in both single and
configurations. 3-phase configurations, ranging
from 15A – 100A for maximum
power density and flexibility.
Lightweight and portable, plugs can
be installed or relocated as required A wide variety of NEMA and IEC
without de-energizing the busway. receptacles or cord connections
Pre-engineered plug-in opening locations are available for the XJ-L Bus
ensure no interference for greater Plugs.
13
density and maximum flexibility. This is
especially important in high tech areas
requiring frequent movement
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
of equipment.
Selection Guide
Enclosure Type Plug-in Spacing Breaker Type Application
A = 3 Circuit - XQ Series 20.00 & 9.75 XQ style - No receptacle
XQR style — with duplex recep-
tacle provision. May be used for
B = 3 Circuit - XQR Series 20.00 & 9.75j BQ, BQH, HBQ
custom receptacles or when addi-
tional wiring space is required
C = 3 Circuit HD XPM 20.00 & 9.75 Use for applications that require
BL, BLH, HBL, factory installed breakers and
D = 3-6 Circuit HD XPM 20.00 & 9.75 receptacles
BQD, NGB
Cover operable handle. Uses
G = XLEC 20.00 & 9.75j ED2,ED4,ED6, heavy duty E-Frame Breakers
HED4
H = XEC 20.00 & 9.75j Uses heavy duty E-Frame breakers
J = Plug-in Tap Box 20.00 na Plug-in tap off device - lugs only
K = XLVB Fusible 20.00 & 9.75j na Cover operable Vacu-Break Switch
Siemens XJ-L™ HD Bus Plugs and Power Modules Use For Breaker Group = A, B, Xi
Prefix Type Enclosure System Config. Color Breaker Group Ampere Rating or Custom
Breaker/Receptacle Features
Arrangementefgh
BP J H 6 A A E D 4 6 0 N N
A = 3 Circuit A = Graphite A = Non-Mixed Factory
XQ Series G = ANSI 61 Installed Breakersa See Notes below NN = None / NA
B = 3 Circuit – X = Other E = Enclosure Only for information
XQ Series (no Breaker)ai
Bus Receptacle X = Other / Fusibled
Plug Provision 1 = 3Ø
C = 3 Circuit HD XPM 2 = 3Ø + Internal Grd
XJ-L HD D = 3-6 Circuit HD XPM 3 = 3Ø + Isolated Grd
G = XLECbfj 4 = 3Ø + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
H = XECcfj 5 = 3Ø + Neutral
J = Plug-in Tap 6 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd
Boxbdh 7 = 3Ø + Neutral + Isolated Grd
K = XLVB 8 = 3Ø + Neutral + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
Fusiblebdgj 9 = 3Ø + 200% Neutral
Notes: d For non-breaker style plug use “X” for Breaker Grouping field. (Fusible & Plug-in Tap Box)
a Use “A” or “E” for XLEC and XEC e For Enclosure = C,E,F see Breaker / Receptacle Arrangement Schedule for Details
b Available in System Configs: 1,2,5,6 f For XEC and XLEC Ampere Rating field use ED2xx, ED4xx,ED6xx where xx = 15 to 00 trip rating (100A max).
c Available in System Configs: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 g For XLVB Ampere Rating field use 02xxx for 240V & 06xxx for 600V where xxx = 030, 060, 100 ampere
h For Plug-in Tap Box Ampere Rating field use PBxxx where xxx = 100, 200 ampere
i Ampere Rating and Customer Features fields not required for Breaker Group = “E” . Leave fields blank.
j Requires two plug-in openings for 9.75 spacing.
 200A Tap Box installs on 20.0 dual side plug-in spacing only. Requires two plug-in openings.

Bus Plugs
XQ and XQR Series
XQ and XQR bus plugs accept BQ (bolt-on) circuit breakers.
The plugs feature knockouts to facilitate quick installation.
The XQR has added wiring space to allow receptacle installation.
XQ Series Bus plug (60A max)

No. of Model Model
Breaker Type Volts Spaces Number Number
BQ, BQH and HBQ 120/240 3 BPJA1GE BPJA5GE
Enclosure Only
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
XQR Series Bus plug (60A max)

No. of Model Model
Breaker Type Volts Spaces Number Number
BQ, BQH and HBQ 120/240 3 BPJB1GE BPJB5GE
Enclosure Only
Accessories for XQ and XQR Series

XEQH Floor Operating Handle (not for 1 pole or 2 pole breakers)
W62890 Bonded Ground Kit
W68101 Isolated Ground Kit
XEQH W62890 W68101

Bus Plugs
XPM Series
Use for applications that require factory installed breakers and receptacles.
XPM Series HD Bus plug 3/6 XPM Series HD Bus plug 3 Circuit
Interrupt Interrupt
Breaker Rating No. of Model Breaker Rating No. of Model
Type (RMS kA) Config. Spaces Number Type (RMS kA) Config. Spaces Number
BL 10 1-pole 120V 10 1-pole 120V
10 1-pole 120V 10 2-pole 240 V
22 1-pole 120V BQ 10 3-pole 240 V
22 3-pole 240V 10 2-pole 120/240 V
BLH 10 2-pole 120/240V 10 3-pole 120/240 V
10 3-pole 120/240V 10 1-pole 120V
22 2-pole 120/240V 22 1-pole 120V
22 3-pole 120/240V 22 3-pole 240 V
10 1-pole 120V BQH 10 2-pole 120/240 V
13
22 1-pole 120V 10 3-pole 120/240 V
65 1-pole 120V 22 2-pole 120/240 V
22 3-pole 240V 22 3-pole 120/240 V 6 BPJC…
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
65 3-pole 240V 10 1-pole 120V
HBL 10 2-pole 120/240V 22 1-pole 120V
10 3-pole 120/240V 65 1-pole 120V
22 2-pole 120/240V 22 3-pole 240 V
22 3-pole 120/240V 65 3-pole 240 V
65 2-pole 120/240V HBQ 10 2-pole 120/240 V
65 3-pole 120/240V 10 3-pole 120/240 V
10 1-pole 120V 22 2-pole 120/240 V
22 1-pole 120V 22 3-pole 120/240 V
65 1-pole 120V 65 2-pole 120/240 V
10 2-pole 240V 65 3-pole 120/240 V
10 3-pole 240V
22 2-pole 240V
22 3-pole 240V
65 2-pole 240V
65 3-pole 240V
BQD
10 2-pole 120/240V
10 3-pole 120/240V 3 Circuit XPM - STANDARD 3 Circuit XPM - EXTENDED
22 2-pole 120/240V 6 BPJE… 1.88 C
L Plug-In Outlet
1.88 C
L Plug-In Outlet
22 3-pole 120/240V
65 2-pole 120/240V
65 3-pole 120/240V
14 1-pole 227V 4.00
4.00
5.75
14 2-pole 227/480V
14 3-pole 227/480V
10 1-pole 120V 8.35
9.35
22 1-pole 120V
65 1-pole 120V
10 2-pole 240V 6.70
6.63
10 3-pole 240V
22 2-pole 240V
22 3-pole 240V
65 2-pole 240V
65 3-pole 240V
10 2-pole 120/240V
10 3-pole 120/240V
22 2-pole 120/240V
NGB
22 3-pole 120/240V
65 2-pole 120/240V
65 3-pole 120/240V
14 1-pole 227V
25 1-pole 227V
14 2-pole 227/480V
14 3-pole 227/480V
25 2-pole 227/480V
25 3-pole 227/480V
14 1-pole 347V
14 2-pole 347/600V
14 3-pole 347/600V
3-6 Circuit XPM 3 Circuit XPM

Bus Plugs
XEC Series
(Cover operable, 100A max)
XEC bus plugs accept ED2, ED4, ED6 and HED6 circuit breakers. The plugs feature
a spacious chassis which allows room for wire bending and knockout provisions.
Isolated ground plugs are available from the factory.
XEC Series bus plug

Breaker Ampere
Type Volts Rating Model Number Model Number
ED2 240 100 BPJH1GAED200NN BPJH5GAED200NN
13
Enclosure
600 Max 15-100 BPJH1GE BPJH5GE
Only
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
W62890
bonded
ground kit
XLEC Series
(Floor operable, 100A max)
XLEC bus plugs accept ED2, ED4, ED6 and HED4 circuit breakers. The plugs feature
a spacious chassis which allows room for wire bending and knockout provisions.
These plugs may be operated from the floor with a pull chain or hookstick.
XLEC Series bus plug

Breaker Ampere Additional add-on features,
Type Volts Rating Model Number Model Number such as shunt trips, alarm
ED2 240 100 BPJG1GAED200NN BPJG5GAED200NN switches, and auxillary
ED4 480 30 BPJG1GAED430NN BPJG5GAED430NN
contacts are also available
ED6 600 60 BPJG1GAED660NN BPJG5GAED660NN
Enclosure for XEC and XLEC bus
600 Max 15-100 BPJG1GE BPJG5GE
Only plugs.

Bus Plugs
XLVB Series
(Floor operable, 100A max)
XLVB fusible bus plugs utilize the Vacu-Break switching principle, which
minimizes arcing and reduces maintenance costs. The Vacu-Break bus plugs
are quick-make and quick-break, cover interlocked, horsepower rated, and may
be operated from the floor with a pull chain or hookstick.
XLVB Series bus plug

Ampere
Volts Rating Model Number Model Number
240 30 BPJK1GX02030NN BPJK5GX02030NN
13
SYSTEMS
BUSWAY
W47185
ON/OFF labels
100A Plug-in tap box

Plug-in cable tap boxes are non-fusible
devices used for end or center feed.
The 100A tap boxes can be attached at
any plug-in opening.
100A Plug-in Tap Box

Ampere
100 3 BWJJ1GXPB100NN
Note: Add suffix letter “G” to catalog number for ground bus.
200A Plug-in tap box

Plug-in cable tap boxes are non-fusible devices
used for end or center feed. The 200A tap box
requires two adjacent openings on 20" centers.
200A plug-in tap boxes are not suitable for use
with XJ-L HD Busway.
200A Plug-in Tap Box

Ampere
Note: Add suffix letter “G” to catalog number for ground bus.
W62892
Grd Finger Kit

Busway Power Distribution
BD® Plug-In (225 — 1600 Ampere) Copper Selection
Plug In
10’–0” Building
Straight 90° Elbow Expansion Cable Tap Box
Length Case Shipping Prefix cd Switch-Board Fitting End f Center g End Closure Hangers h
Ampere Catalog Dimensions Weight Catalog Connectione Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number (inches) Lb./Ft. Number Prefix Number Number Number Number Number
3-Phase, 3-Wire 600V or Less
225 BDP302 41⁄16 x 87⁄8 09 LDP302 FEP302 EJP302 ETB302 CTB302 ECP6
400 BDP304 41⁄16 x 87⁄8 121⁄2 LDP304 FEP304 EJP304 ETB304 CTB304 ECP6
600 BDP306 41⁄16 x 87⁄8 131⁄2 LDP306 FEP306 EJP306 ETB306 CTB306 ECP6 BDH10
800 BDP308 61⁄16 x 87⁄8 181⁄2 LDP308 FEP308 EJP308 ETB308 CTB308 ECP10
1350 BDP313 121⁄8 x 87⁄8 28 LDP313 FEP313 EJP313 ETB313 CTB313 ECA10
BDH12
1600 BDP316 121⁄8 x 87⁄8 29 LDP316 FEP316 EJP316 ETB316 CTB316 ECA10
13
3-Phase, 4-Wire — Full Capacity Neutral 480V or Less

BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
400 BDP4044 41⁄16 x 87⁄8 141⁄2 LDP4044 FEP4044 EJP4044 ETB4044 CTB4044 ECP6 BDH10

Power Product Catalogue Complete May 2021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Product Catalogue Complete May 2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 – Canadian Edition

Power Product Catalogue

5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

7 Dry Type Transformers

9 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs)

14 Motor Control Centres

15 Low Voltage Motor Starters

16 Electric Vehicle Charging

Detailed Table of Contents

POWER PRODUCT Loadcentres

3  uplex Units, Small Apartment Building,

4 Office Building/Condo/Apartment Building a) Switchboards

5  mall Industrial/Commercial Building

A loadcentre is a metal enclosed distribution

All Siemens loadcentres can be classified into

A complete line of breakers and accessories which

1-2 Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue

Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 1-3

Made in Canada, for Canada: Indoor loadcentres (type 1) can

Straight in wiring design:

Both aluminum and copper bus Patented INSTA-WIRE™ neutrals

Extended capacity fully

A flexible extruded plastic base

Features and Benefits

1-4 Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue

Main breaker mounting position for SEQ loadcentres only

Type of Bus Bar

*Only available for EQL and SEQ loadcentres.

EQ442225 EQG860NSND SNC2448L1125W SEQ24100SMDW SEQ40200DW

a The Catalogue numbering system applies only to EQL,

Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 1-5

Skid Main Lug Mounting Factory

16/32 SNC1632L1125c 28 125 21 141/4 37/8 2/0 comb. RPCT1632L1125 N/A

24/48 SNC2448L1125c 28 125 24 141/4 37/8 2/0 comb. RPCT2448L1125 N/A

SEQ40200 SEQ24150b 150 27 141/4 4 6-250

1-6 Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue

EQL White door and trim add suffix...W EQL24125DW

SNC White door and trim add suffix...W SNC1224L1112SW

Grey door installed add suffix...D SEQ24125SMD 2 weeks

Door Kit White Door kit add suffix...W DK24SM-1W

EQL Copper Bus add suffix...CR EQL24125DCR 4 weeks

215/8 139/16 surface

Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 1-7

Dual Listed/cULus Loadcentres 120/240V 1 phase 3 Wire

Dimensions - Inches (mm) Door Kit

1-8 Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue

Type Description Catalogue Number Example Delivery

EQ4 Copper Bus add suffix...C EQ430225C 4 Weeks

Lug Kits For EQ Loadcentres

Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 1-9

SPA panel package, 3R enclosure 120/240V 1 Phase 3 Wire

Enclosure Dimensions - Inches (mm) Hubs (sold seperately)

Circuit Breaker Enclosures for Service Entrance and Commercial Use

EEMAC 1 Enclosure (Indoor) 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.

Breaker Catalogue Main Number Dimensions - Inches (mm)

EEMAC 3R Weatherproof Enclosure, 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.

Full Module Main Dimensions - Inches (mm) Weight Hubb

101/4 91/2 55/8

ECHR125 1 1/4 ECHS250 2.5

1-10 Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue

Generator Panel, 2 Pole 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.

Note: The EQG panels are stocked complete with doors

Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 1-11

3 uplex Units, Small Apartment Building,

4 Office Building/Condo/Apartment Building a) Switchboards

5 mall Industrial/Commercial Building

a Theselug kits simply plug on to the bus of any SEQ

a Branch Breaker Cover part covers the main breaker